《Summoned with an SSS-Rank Portal Skill》


 Chapter 1 Transmigrated, and SSS Portal Skill

    William tugged his worn backpack higher on his shoulder, his gaze fixed on the cracked pavement beneath his feet. The usual jeers and snickers followed him like a shadow. "Hey, Willy, did you remember to bring your blankie today?" Kevin, the school''s star quarterback and resident bully, sneered, his cronies erupting in laughter.William ignored them, his jaw clenched tight. He was used to it. Being the skinny, quiet kid with a scholarship to a prestigious academy made him a prime target. William just had to keep his head down, get through the day, and lose himself in the world of online RPGs and fantasy novels back in his tiny apartment.


    He slipped into his usual seat at the back of the classroom, the worn copy of "The Chronicles of Aethel" already open on his desk. Aethel ¨C a world of magic, mythical creatures, and ancient legends. It was William''s escape, a world where he could imagine himself as a powerful hero, not the invisible nobody he was here.


    Mr. Thompson, their hulking gym teacher with a booming voice and a permanent whistle around his neck, slammed the classroom door open, effectively silencing the pre-class chatter. "Alright, listen up, you bunch of slackers!" he roared. "Pop quiz on the history of basketball! And no cheating!"


    A collective groan rippled through the room. Even Kevin looked dismayed. William, however, felt a flicker of hope. This was one quiz he could actually ace.


    But fate, it seemed, had other plans.


    A low hum, like a thousand bees buzzing in unison, suddenly filled the air. The fluorescent lights flickered ominously, casting long, dancing shadows across the room. A tremor ran through the floor, sending textbooks tumbling from desks.


    "What the¡­?" Mr. Thompson''s voice was cut short as a gaping rift, swirling with iridescent colors, tore open in the middle of the classroom. It pulsed with an otherworldly energy, drawing all eyes towards its mesmerizing depths.


    Panic erupted. Screams filled the air as students scrambled away from the growing rift, desks and chairs clattering to the floor. Even Kevin, his face pale with fear, was frozen in place, his usual bravado forgotten.


    William, however, felt a strange pull towards the rift, a sense of anticipation he couldn''t explain. It was as if something deep within him recognized this strange phenomenon, beckoning him closer. He took a hesitant step forward, curiosity overcoming his fear.


    Before anyone could react, a surge of energy erupted from the rift, engulfing the entire classroom in a blinding light. William felt a tugging sensation, a feeling of weightlessness, and then¡­ nothing.


    He awoke to the scent of pine needles and damp earth. Groaning, William sat up, his head pounding. The classroom, the rift, the panicked screams ¨C it all felt like a distant, fever dream.


    He was in a forest, sunlight filtering through the dense canopy of leaves above. Towering trees, unlike any William had ever seen, stretched towards the sky. The air was crisp and clean, with a faint, sweet fragrance that he couldn''t place.


    William wasn''t alone. Scattered around him were his classmates, groaning and disoriented. Even Mr. Thompson was there, his whistle dangling limply from his neck, his usually booming voice reduced to a bewildered mumble.


    "Where¡­ where are we?" A girl''s voice trembled with fear.


    "What just happened?" another student cried.


    William scrambled to his feet, his gaze sweeping across the unfamiliar surroundings. A sense of wonder mixed with apprehension filled him. This wasn''t Earth. This was¡­ different. S§×ar?h the n?velFire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    As William took in the alien landscape, a strange sensation tingled through his body. It started as a warmth in his chest, spreading outwards like a wave, until it settled in his mind, leaving behind a sense of clarity and¡­ knowledge.


    He closed his eyes, focusing on the sensation. Images flashed through his mind ¨C a swirling vortex of colors, a sense of immense power, and then¡­ words.


    "SSS-Rank Skill: Portal ¨C Activated."


    A gasp escaped William''s lips. The words echoed in his mind, their meaning slowly sinking in. He had a skill. An SSS-Rank skill. A portal skill.


    A wave of dizziness washed over William, and he stumbled back against a tree trunk, his hand instinctively reaching for support. He closed his eyes, willing the nausea to subside. When he opened them again, a translucent blue screen hovered in front of him, filled with familiar RPG-like stats.


    Name: William Velmont


    Level: 1


    Class: None


    Attributes:


    Strength: 10


    Agility: 12


    Stamina: 9


    Intelligence: 15


    Mana: 10


    Skills:


    Chrono Shift (SSS-Rank): Allows the user to open a portal to a specific point in the past. (Details Locked)


    William stared at the screen, his heart pounding. It was real. This wasn''t a game. He actually had a system, just like in those webnovels he devoured. But what did "Details Locked" mean? And how was he supposed to use this Chrono Shift ability?


    "Whoa, check this out!" a voice exclaimed.


    William turned to see Sarah, usually one of the quieter students, staring at a similar blue screen in front of her with wide eyes. "I have a system too! It says I''m a ''Celestial Archer'' and I have an ''A-Rank Arrow of Light'' skill!"


    Others around them gasped, their initial fear giving way to a mixture of awe and excitement. It seemed everyone had a system, and they were impressive. Kevin, his arrogance somewhat restored, was boasting about his "S-Rank Iron Skin" skill, while Mr. Thompson, looking utterly bewildered, kept muttering about "divine intervention" and "the end times."


    "I''ve got ''B-Rank Sonic Boom''! " shouted a student William vaguely recognized from his history class.


    "Mine''s ''A-Rank Elemental Control''! I wonder if I can shoot fireballs," another student exclaimed, his eyes gleaming with excitement.


    William, however, couldn''t shake the feeling that his SSS-Rank skill was something unique, something far more powerful than anything his classmates possessed. He just needed to figure out how to unlock its full potential.


    As the students were busy comparing their newfound abilities, a rustling in the undergrowth caught their attention. A group of men emerged from the trees, clad in gleaming plate armor, their swords glinting in the sunlight. Behind them walked an elderly man in a flowing grey robe, his eyes glowing with an ethereal light.


    "Greetings," the old man said, his voice surprisingly strong despite his age. "I am Maester Elric, and these are the Royal Guards of Aerilon. We have been expecting you."


    A wave of murmurs rippled through the students. Expecting them? What did that mean?


    Mr. Thompson, ever the protector (and perhaps seeking a sense of control in this chaotic situation), stepped forward. "Expecting us? Where are we? And why were we brought here?" he boomed, his voice regaining some of its usual authority.


    Maester Elric smiled, his eyes twinkling. "You are in Aethel, brave souls. And you have been summoned here for a purpose. A great and noble purpose. You are the heroes destined to save our world."


    He gestured towards the towering trees, beyond which a majestic stone temple could be seen, its steps leading towards the heavens. "Come with me to the Temple of Ascendancy. There, I will explain everything."

 Chapter 2 Weak-willed, Cowardly

    The Temple of Ascendancy was even more impressive up close. Towering pillars of white marble reached towards the sky, intricate carvings depicting mythical creatures and ancient battles adorning their surfaces. A sense of age and power emanated from the weathered stone, whispering tales of a time long past.As William and his classmates ascended the seemingly endless staircase, whispers followed him.


    "Hey, Willy, what kind of lame skill did you get? Probably something like ''F-Rank Enhanced Pencil Sharpening''," Kevin sneered, his cronies snickering behind him.


    "Yeah, William, let''s hear it," another student chimed in. "Don''t be shy. We''re all friends here, right?"


    William clenched his fists, his gaze fixed on the steps ahead. He wasn''t about to reveal his SSS-Rank skill to these people, not after years of their relentless mockery.


    "Leave him alone," Sarah said, her voice surprisingly firm. "It''s none of your business."


    Kevin rolled his eyes. "Oh, look, Willy''s got himself a girlfriend. How cute."


    William ignored them, his jaw set. He would show them. He would prove them all wrong.


    The temple doors swung open, revealing a vast circular chamber bathed in soft light. Intricate mosaics adorned the walls, depicting scenes of heroes battling monstrous creatures and wielding incredible powers. In the center of the chamber stood a raised platform, where Maester Elric awaited them.


    "Welcome, heroes," he said, his voice echoing through the chamber. "This is the Temple of Ascendancy, a place of ancient power and knowledge. Here, you will learn your true purpose."


    He gestured towards the mosaics. "For centuries, our world has been at peace. But that peace is now threatened. The barriers between realms are weakening, allowing creatures of darkness to seep into our world. We call them the Corrupted ¨C beings twisted by a malevolent force, driven by an insatiable hunger for destruction."


    A chill ran down William''s spine. He remembered the swirling rift in his classroom, the otherworldly energy that had pulled them into this world. Was that a portal opened by these Corrupted?


    "We believe," Maester Elric continued, "that a powerful entity, known only as the Shadow Lord, is behind this growing darkness. He seeks to plunge Aethel into chaos and claim it for his own."


    "And we''re supposed to stop him?" Kevin scoffed. "With our measly skills? You''ve got to be kidding me."


    Maester Elric smiled. "Your skills are far from measly, young man. They are a gift, a potential for greatness. You have been chosen for a reason. Each of you possesses unique abilities that, when honed and mastered, can turn the tide of this war."


    He stepped closer, his eyes filled with a fiery intensity. "You are the heroes of prophecy, destined to rise against the darkness and restore balance to our world. But you are not yet ready. You must train, you must grow stronger, you must learn to harness the full potential of your powers."


    "And how are we supposed to do that?" a student asked.


    "We will guide you," Maester Elric said. "We will provide you with the knowledge, the resources, and the training you need to fulfill your destiny. But the journey will be arduous. You will face challenges, you will encounter dangers, and you will be tested in ways you cannot imagine."


    He looked at each of them, his gaze lingering on William. "But I have faith in you. I believe that you have the strength, the courage, and the determination to overcome any obstacle. The fate of Aethel rests in your hands."


    A heavy silence filled the chamber. The weight of responsibility settled upon William''s shoulders, a stark contrast to the insignificance he felt back on Earth. He was no longer just William, the skinny kid with his nose in a book. He was William, the hero, the wielder of an SSS-Rank skill, the one who could change the course of history.


    *


    The Temple of Ascendancy was more than just a place of worship; it was a sprawling complex with chambers dedicated to healing, meditation, and rest. Maester Elric led the exhausted students to a wing filled with simple but comfortable rooms, each equipped with a bed, a washbasin, and a small window overlooking the surrounding forest.


    William settled onto the surprisingly soft mattress, his mind racing. The weight of Elric''s words pressed down on him. Heroes of prophecy? Destined to fight a Shadow Lord? It all felt like a story ripped from the pages of his favorite novels, yet here he was, living it.


    He glanced at the translucent blue screen that still hovered in his vision. Chrono Shift... what secrets did it hold? Could he even learn to control such a powerful ability? And was it truly the right decision to join this fight? He had always been more comfortable in the world of books and games, not on a real battlefield facing actual monsters.


    Doubt gnawed at him. Maybe he wasn''t cut out for this hero business. Maybe he should just find a way back to Earth, back to his quiet, ordinary life.


    The next morning, as the other students buzzed with excitement, eager to begin their training, William sought out Maester Elric. He found the old mage in a small garden behind the temple, tending to a patch of glowing herbs.


    "Maester Elric," William began, his voice hesitant, "I need to speak with you."


    Elric turned, his brow furrowed. "What is it, young man? We haven''t much time. Your training begins shortly."


    William took a deep breath. "I... I don''t think I can do this. I''m not a hero. I''m not strong like the others." Sear?h the N?velFire(.)net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Elric''s expression hardened. "What nonsense is this? You were summoned here for a purpose. You cannot simply shirk your responsibilities."


    "But I''m not¡ª"


    "Silence!" Elric thundered. "I''ve seen your kind before. Weak-willed, cowardly. You think yourself above this fight? You think yourself better than those who risk their lives to protect this world?"


    William flinched, his face burning with shame. "No, I just¡ª"


    "Enough!" Elric cut him off. "We have more heroes than we anticipated. We don''t need another burden. You are hereby expelled from the Hero Squad. Begone!"


    He thrust a small purse into William''s hand. "This should be enough to get you started. Now leave, and don''t let the door hit you on the way out."


    Before William could protest, Elric raised his hand, and a surge of energy enveloped him. The world spun, the temple garden blurring into a kaleidoscope of colors. Then, everything went black.


    When William regained consciousness, he was lying in a muddy ditch beside a dirt road. The purse, thankfully, was still clutched in his hand. He opened it and peered inside. A few gold coins glinted in the dim light.


    He had been discarded, banished, deemed unworthy. Elric''s words echoed in his mind, sharp and cruel. Weak-willed. Cowardly.


    Anger mixed with a bitter sense of betrayal. He had been summoned to this world, given this incredible power, only to be cast aside like a broken tool.


    He looked around at the unfamiliar landscape, a sense of loneliness washing over him. He was alone, adrift in a strange world, with nothing but a few coins and an SSS-Rank skill he didn''t understand.

 Chapter 3 Finding Solace

    The dirt road wound through the dense forest, the muddy tracks offering little comfort to William''s already battered spirit. He trudged onward, the weight of his expulsion and Elric''s harsh words a heavy burden on his shoulders. The forest around him was alive with the sounds of rustling leaves and chirping insects, a symphony of nature that did little to soothe his troubled mind.He had no destination, no plan. Just a desperate need to put distance between himself and the Temple of Ascendancy, the place that had promised him a destiny only to snatch it away. He didn''t even have his backpack anymore, lost somewhere during the chaotic teleportation.


    The sun began to dip below the horizon, casting long shadows that danced ominously among the trees. A chill wind whipped through the branches, sending a shiver down William''s spine. He needed to find shelter, and soon.


    A low growl echoed through the trees, sending a jolt of fear through him. He stopped, his senses on high alert. The growl came again, closer this time, followed by the sound of rustling leaves.


    Three pairs of glowing eyes pierced the gathering darkness. Wolves. Their lean bodies emerged from the undergrowth, their fangs bared in a silent snarl.


    William''s heart pounded in his chest. He had never faced a wild animal before, let alone a pack of wolves. Panic seized him, his mind flashing back to the Corrupted creatures Elric had described. Were these wolves corrupted too?


    The wolves lunged. William stumbled backward, narrowly dodging their snapping jaws. He raised his arms in a feeble attempt to shield himself, fear making his limbs heavy and uncoordinated.


    He turned to run, but it was too late. Sharp teeth sank into his right forearm, tearing through his flesh. He cried out in pain, stumbling and falling to the muddy ground.


    Just as he braced himself for another attack, a blur of motion cut through the air. A figure emerged from the trees, a sword flashing in the fading light. With a series of swift, precise strikes, the figure dispatched the wolves, their lifeless bodies slumping to the ground.


    William looked up at his savior. It was a man, tall and powerfully built, with a thick black beard that reached his chest and tanned skin that spoke of a life spent outdoors. He wore a leather jerkin and carried a long sword strapped to his back, its hilt intricately carved with images of snarling beasts.


    "Are you alright, lad?" the man asked, his voice gruff but kind.


    William nodded, cradling his bleeding arm. "Thank you," he managed to say, his voice trembling.


    The man knelt beside him, examining the wound. "Nasty bite. We need to get you back to the village."


    He helped William to his feet, supporting him as they walked. "I''m Gorn, a hunter from Willow Creek," the man said. "What''s your name?"


    "William," he replied, grateful for the man''s assistance.


    They walked in silence for a while, the only sound the crunching of leaves beneath their feet. As they approached the village, William saw flickering lights through the trees. A sense of relief washed over him. He was safe, for now.


    Willow Creek was a small village, a cluster of wooden houses nestled amongst the trees. As they entered the village square, curious eyes followed them.


    "Who''s that with Gorn?" a woman whispered, her hand shielding her mouth.


    "Never seen him before," an old man muttered, leaning on his staff.


    "He looks hurt," a young girl said, her eyes wide with concern.


    Gorn led William to his home, a cozy cottage with a thatched roof and a small garden. A woman with kind eyes and a warm smile greeted them at the door.


    "This is my wife, Elara," Gorn said. "And this is our daughter, Maya."


    Maya was a young woman, about William''s age, with long, flowing black hair and bright, curious eyes. She blushed slightly as she met William''s gaze.


    Elara quickly took charge, leading William to a chair by the fireplace. She gently cleaned his wound, her touch surprisingly gentle despite her calloused hands. Maya fetched bandages and herbs, her movements quick and efficient.


    As they tended to his wound, William felt a warmth spread through him, a sense of belonging he hadn''t felt in a long time. These people, these strangers, had welcomed him into their home without hesitation, offering him kindness and care.


    He may have been rejected by the Hero Squad, but he had found a new kind of acceptance here in Willow Creek.


    Once Elara had finished bandaging William''s arm, she placed a steaming bowl of stew in front of him. "Eat, child," she insisted. "You need your strength."


    William gratefully accepted the food, his stomach growling in protest. He hadn''t realized how hungry he was until the aroma of the hearty stew filled his senses.


    Gorn settled into a chair opposite him, his gaze curious. "So, William," he began, "where are you from? We don''t get many travelers this far out." Sear?h the n??el Fire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    William hesitated, unsure how much to reveal. He couldn''t tell them the truth about being summoned from another world. He needed a believable story, something that would explain his presence without raising suspicion.


    "I... I''m from a noble family," he said, choosing his words carefully. "But I was... expelled."


    He saw a flicker of surprise in Gorn''s eyes, then a hint of understanding. Perhaps William''s refined features and clean-cut appearance lent credence to his story.


    "Expelled?" Maya asked, her voice soft. "What did you do?"


    William forced a wry smile. "Let''s just say I wasn''t living up to their expectations."


    He didn''t elaborate, and thankfully, they didn''t press him for details. Gorn nodded slowly, his expression thoughtful.


    "Well, you''re welcome to stay here as long as you need," he said. "Willow Creek is a peaceful village, and we always have room for those in need."


    William''s heart swelled with gratitude. "Thank you," he said sincerely. "I appreciate your kindness more than you know."


    Elara smiled warmly. "You''re safe here, William. Rest and recover."

 Chapter 4 Caught in a Lie

    The days that followed were a blur of healing and hesitant introductions. William''s wound, thanks to Elara''s expert care and the potent herbs Maya gathered, healed quickly. He spent his time exploring the small village of Willow Creek, learning the rhythms of their daily life.He helped Gorn chop firewood, his initial clumsiness with the axe slowly giving way to a newfound strength. He assisted Elara in the garden, marveling at the strange and vibrant plants that grew in Aethel''s fertile soil. He even tried his hand at fishing in the nearby stream, though his attempts were met with more amusement than success.


    Maya, true to her shy nature, mostly kept her distance. She would offer him a fleeting smile or a quick hello, but then disappear into the forest to tend to her own tasks, leaving William with a lingering sense of curiosity and a touch of disappointment.


    Gorn, on the other hand, seemed to take a liking to William. He saw a spark of determination in the young man''s eyes, a resilience that reminded him of himself. One afternoon, as they were sparring with wooden practice swords, Gorn turned to William with a proposition.


    "You''re surprisingly quick, William," he said, wiping sweat from his brow. "Have you had any real sword training before?"


    William, eager to impress and perhaps a bit too proud, blurted out, "My father taught me a little." It was a complete fabrication, of course. His father, a mild-mannered accountant, wouldn''t know the sharp end of a sword from a butter knife.


    Gorn''s eyes lit up. "A nobleman''s training, eh? It shows. But there''s a difference between parlor tricks and true combat." He gestured towards a clearing behind the cottage. "Come, I''ll show you a few things."


    William''s heart sank. He had painted himself into a corner. As they entered the clearing, Gorn tossed him a wooden sword. William fumbled with it, his grip awkward and unsure.


    "Show me your stance," Gorn instructed.


    William tried to remember the sword-fighting scenes from his favorite movies, striking a pose that he hoped looked somewhat convincing. Gorn, however, saw right through him.


    "That''s... interesting," Gorn said, his voice laced with amusement. "But it wouldn''t last a second against a real opponent."


    He stepped closer, adjusting William''s grip and posture. "Hold it like this. Feet shoulder-width apart, knees slightly bent. Always be ready to move, to react."


    William tried to follow Gorn''s instructions, but his movements were stiff and clumsy. He felt like a scarecrow trying to dance.


    Gorn sighed. "William," he said, his voice gentle but firm, "there''s no shame in not knowing something. But there is shame in lying about it."


    William''s face flushed with embarrassment. "I... I''m sorry, Gorn," he stammered. "I just wanted to..."


    "Impress me?" Gorn finished his sentence. "There''s no need for that, lad. I respect honesty more than any feigned skill."


    He clapped William on the shoulder. "Now, let''s start from the beginning. Forget what you think you know, and I''ll teach you the true way of the sword."


    Relieved and humbled, William nodded eagerly. He had been caught in his lie, but it had opened the door to genuine learning. And as Gorn patiently guided him through the basic stances and strikes, William felt a newfound respect for the art of swordsmanship, and for the man who was willing to teach him.


    *


    The afternoon sun beat down on the clearing as Gorn put William through his paces. "Again!" he barked, as William stumbled through a clumsy lunge. "Footwork! You''re moving like an ox with two left feet!"


    William gritted his teeth, sweat stinging his eyes. His muscles burned, his lungs screamed for air, and his pride was taking a serious beating. "How am I supposed to learn this in one afternoon?" he gasped, barely managing to parry Gorn''s next strike.


    "By doing it again, and again, and again!" Gorn roared back. "A warrior doesn''t give up after the first stumble!"


    He continued to press William, correcting his grip, his stance, his every move. William, though exhausted and frustrated, found a stubborn determination rising within him. He wouldn''t quit. He wouldn''t let Gorn down.


    As the hours passed, something remarkable began to happen. William''s movements, though still rough, became more fluid, more precise. His reflexes sharpened, his strikes gained power. He started anticipating Gorn''s attacks, even managing to land a few blows of his own.


    Gorn''s eyes widened in surprise. "Where did that come from?" he exclaimed, barely parrying a surprisingly swift strike from William. "You''re a natural, lad!"


    William grinned, a surge of exhilaration coursing through him. He hadn''t realized how much his attributes had been enhanced by the summoning. His agility, once only useful for climbing trees and escaping bullies, was now a real asset in combat.


    "Again!" William shouted, his voice filled with newfound confidence.


    They continued to spar, their movements a blur of wood and sweat. By the time the sun began to set, William was exhausted but triumphant. He had faced a challenge, pushed himself beyond his limits, and discovered a hidden talent.


    Gorn clapped him on the back, a broad smile on his face. "Well done, lad! You''ve got the makings of a fine warrior." He paused, his expression turning serious. "William, I have a proposition for you."


    William looked at him expectantly.


    "Willow Creek needs a new hunter," Gorn said. "Someone to protect the village from the dangers of the forest. Someone with courage and skill." He met William''s gaze. "Would you be interested?"


    A wave of warmth washed over William. He had been cast out, rejected, deemed unworthy. But here, in this small village, he had found acceptance, a purpose, a chance to prove himself.


    "Yes, Gorn," he said, his voice filled with gratitude and determination. "I would be honored."


    The walk back to the cottage was filled with a comfortable silence. William, exhausted but invigorated, felt a newfound respect for Gorn, not just as a warrior but as a mentor. He had been harsh but fair, pushing William to his limits while offering guidance and encouragement.


    As they approached the village, the scent of woodsmoke and roasting meat filled the air, a comforting welcome after the long afternoon. William''s stomach rumbled in anticipation of Elara''s hearty cooking. S§×ar?h the N?velFire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Unbeknownst to them, a pair of eyes watched them from the shadows of the forest. A figure, cloaked in darkness, stood silently among the trees, its gaze fixed on William. A low whisper, like the rustling of leaves, escaped its lips.


    "A hero is here..."


    The figure melted back into the darkness, leaving no trace of its presence. William and Gorn, oblivious to the unseen observer, continued their journey home, unaware of the shadows that were gathering around them.

 Chapter 5 First Hunt with Gorn

    The next morning, William woke to the sound of roosters crowing and the smell of sizzling bacon. He felt a thrill of anticipation. Today was his first day as a hunter. He quickly dressed and joined Gorn and Elara for a hearty breakfast of eggs, bacon, and freshly baked bread."Ready for your first hunt, lad?" Gorn asked, a twinkle in his eye.


    William nodded eagerly, trying to mask his nervousness. He had practiced with the bow and arrow, but he had never actually hunted a live animal before.


    "Don''t worry," Elara said, sensing his apprehension. "Gorn will guide you. You''ll do fine."


    After breakfast, they gathered their gear. Gorn handed William a sturdy bow and a quiver filled with arrows. He also gave him a hunting knife, its blade gleaming sharply in the morning light.


    "Remember what I taught you," Gorn said. "Stay alert, be patient, and respect the creatures of the forest."


    William followed Gorn out of the cottage, the crisp morning air invigorating his senses. A few villagers, already busy with their daily chores, waved to them as they passed. A young boy, no older than ten, looked at William with wide eyes, a hint of hero-worship in his gaze. William couldn''t help but smile.


    The forest welcomed them with its familiar embrace. Sunlight filtered through the canopy of leaves, dappling the forest floor in shades of green and gold. Gorn led the way, his senses alert, his eyes scanning the ground for any sign of their prey.


    "Look here," Gorn said, pointing to a set of tracks in the soft earth. "See how these prints are heart-shaped, with two toes? That''s a deer. And judging by the depth of the tracks, it''s a buck, and a large one at that."


    He pointed to another set of prints, smaller and more rounded. "These are rabbit tracks. Plenty of them around, but we''re after bigger game today."


    William followed closely, trying to absorb every detail. He had always been a quick learner, and he was determined to prove himself worthy of Gorn''s trust.


    "The deer are plentiful this time of year," Gorn explained. "They come to the valley to graze on the tender grasses. But they''re also wary, with keen senses. We''ll need to be stealthy if we want to get close."


    He led William deeper into the forest, following the deer tracks with the practiced ease of a seasoned hunter. William felt a thrill of excitement mixed with a healthy dose of apprehension.


    As they walked, William''s curiosity bubbled to the surface. "Gorn," he began, trying to sound casual, "I''ve heard stories about people gaining incredible powers in this world. Is it true that everyone has a... a system, like the one you showed me?"


    Gorn nodded, his eyes twinkling with amusement. "Ah, so you''ve heard of the System. Aye, lad, it''s as real as the air we breathe. Everyone in Aethel has one, though its secrets are not fully understood." S~ea??h the N?vel(F)ire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    William pressed on, "And people gain levels by doing... different things? Like fighting monsters, or even just practicing skills?"


    "That''s right," Gorn confirmed. "The more you push yourself, the stronger you become. It''s the way of our world."


    William paused, feigning a thoughtful expression. "So, someone who spends all their time reading books... could they gain levels that way too?"


    Gorn chuckled. "Indeed they could. Though they might not be much use in a fight." He winked at William. "Not everyone is cut out to be a warrior, eh?"


    William felt a surge of excitement. His SSS-Rank skill, Chrono Shift... could he use it to travel to the past, learn from ancient masters, and gain levels that way? The possibilities seemed endless.


    He continued to pepper Gorn with questions, carefully gauging his reactions. He learned about the different classes people could acquire, the varying levels of skills, and the dangers of the Corrupted creatures that roamed the land.


    Gorn, sensing William''s thirst for knowledge, patiently answered his questions, though he occasionally shot him a curious glance. William knew he had to be careful not to reveal too much, not to arouse suspicion. He was still an outsider, a stranger in this world, and he couldn''t afford to jeopardize the trust he had earned.


    They walked for what seemed like hours, the sun climbing higher in the sky. Finally, Gorn stopped, his hand raised in a signal for William to remain silent. He pointed towards a clearing ahead, where a small stream meandered through the trees. A deer, its coat the color of autumn leaves, grazed peacefully by the water''s edge.


    "Remember what I taught you," Gorn whispered, handing William an arrow. "Draw back slowly, aim for the heart, and release with a steady hand."


    William''s heart pounded in his chest. This was it. His first hunt. He nocked the arrow, his fingers trembling slightly. He took a deep breath, trying to steady his nerves. He drew back the bowstring, his muscles straining with the effort. He focused on the deer, its movements, its vulnerability.


    Gorn placed a steadying hand on William''s shoulder. "Easy now, lad. Focus. You can do this."


    William held his breath, his gaze fixed on the deer. He released the arrow. It flew through the air, a silent whisper of death. The deer startled, but it was too late. The arrow found its mark, piercing the animal''s heart. The deer stumbled, its legs collapsing beneath it. It let out a soft cry, then lay still.


    William lowered the bow, his body trembling with a mixture of adrenaline and awe. He had done it. He had taken a life.


    Gorn clapped him on the back. "Well done, lad! A clean shot. You''ve got a hunter''s eye."


    They approached the deer, its body still warm. Gorn showed William how to field dress the animal, his movements quick and efficient. William felt a pang of sadness for the creature, but he knew this was the way of life in Aethel. He had taken a life to sustain his own.


    As they worked, a sudden scream pierced the peaceful silence of the forest. It was a high-pitched wail, filled with terror and desperation.


    "HELP! SOMEONE, PLEASE!"


    Gorn froze, his eyes widening in alarm. "That came from the north," he said, his voice grim. "Something''s wrong."


    William felt a chill run down his spine. The scream had been filled with a raw fear. Was it a villager in trouble? Or something far more sinister?

 Chapter 6 Two Levels, and Strange Movements Around the Village

    Gorn and William exchanged a look, a silent understanding passing between them. They left the deer carcass behind, a minor concern compared to the potential danger. With weapons drawn, they sprinted towards the source of the scream, their footsteps pounding a frantic rhythm on the forest floor.They burst into a small clearing, the scene before them instantly raising their hackles. A middle-aged woman, Elara''s friend Martha, was cowering by the riverbank, her clothes basket overturned, tears streaming down her face. Surrounding her were four grotesque goblins, their leathery green skin stretched taut over bony frames, their yellowed fangs bared in vicious grins.


    One of the goblins lunged at Martha, its rusty dagger raised high. Gorn roared, charging forward with the force of a raging bear. His sword flashed, a blur of steel that cleaved through the goblin''s arm, sending the creature reeling back with a shriek of pain.


    William, adrenaline surging through him, drew his own sword. He had never faced a real opponent before, but the sight of the woman in danger ignited a fierce protectiveness within him. He charged into the fray, his sword a clumsy but determined extension of his will.


    He swung at the closest goblin, his blade connecting with a sickening thud. The creature staggered back, surprised by the unexpected attack. William pressed his advantage, his movements fueled by a desperate urgency. He thrust, parried, and dodged, his sword a whirlwind of steel.


    He felt a sharp pain in his side as a goblin''s claw raked across his ribs, but he ignored it, his focus solely on protecting Martha. He lunged again, his sword finding its mark, plunging deep into the goblin''s chest. The creature let out a guttural gasp, its eyes widening in disbelief before collapsing to the ground.


    A surge of power coursed through William, a warm sensation spreading through his limbs. A translucent blue screen flashed in his vision.


    [You have slain a Goblin!]


    [You have gained 100 EXP!]


    [Level Up!]


    [Level Up!] Sear?h the n?vel_Fire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    He had gained two levels! The realization fueled his determination. He spun around, his sword finding another goblin, its blade slicing through its neck. The creature crumpled to the ground, its life extinguished.


    Gorn, meanwhile, had dispatched the remaining two goblins with brutal efficiency. The clearing fell silent.


    Martha, trembling but unharmed, rushed towards Gorn and William, her eyes filled with gratitude. "Thank you, thank you both!" she cried, clutching their arms. "I thought I was done for!"


    She explained, her voice still shaky, that she had come to the river to wash clothes when the goblins ambushed her. "They came out of nowhere," she shuddered. "I never even saw them until they were upon me."


    Gorn reassured her, his voice calm and steady. "It''s alright, Martha. You''re safe now. We''ll make sure you get back to the village unharmed."


    They returned to the deer carcass, hoisting it onto Gorn''s broad shoulders. With Martha safely between them, they made their way back to Willow Creek, the forest no longer seeming so peaceful and welcoming.


    As they made their way back through the forest, William paused, a frown creasing his brow. "Gorn," he said, "can I check my status?"


    Gorn nodded, understanding the young man''s curiosity. William closed his eyes, focusing on the familiar blue screen.


    Name: William Velmont


    Level: 3


    Class: None


    Attributes:


    Strength: 12


    Agility: 14


    Stamina: 10


    Intelligence: 16


    Mana: 11


    Skills:


    Chrono Shift (SSS-Rank): Allows the user to open a portal to a specific point in the past. (Details Unlocked)


    He had gained two levels from defeating the goblins, and his attributes had increased significantly. Strength and agility had each gone up by two points, while stamina, intelligence, and mana had increased by one. He felt a surge of satisfaction. He was growing stronger, becoming more capable.


    Once they reached Willow Creek and ensured Martha was safely back in her home, Gorn pulled William aside, his expression serious. "William," he said, "goblins this close to the village... it''s not right. They usually keep to the deeper parts of the forest."


    He paused, his gaze intense. "Something''s happening, lad. Something we don''t understand."


    "What do you mean, Gorn?" William asked, a knot of worry tightening in his stomach. "Is Willow Creek in danger?"


    Gorn nodded grimly. "This area has always been relatively safe. We have our share of wild beasts, but nothing like goblins. They''re cunning, vicious creatures, and they rarely venture this close to human settlements unless..." He trailed off, his eyes filled with a troubled look.


    "Unless what?" William pressed, his anxiety growing.


    "Unless something is driving them," Gorn finished, his voice low. "Something dark and dangerous." He clapped William on the shoulder. "I need to speak with the other hunters, see if anyone else has noticed anything unusual." He handed William the deer carcass. "Take this back to Elara. She''ll know what to do with it."


    William nodded, his mind awhirl with worry. He watched as Gorn strode purposefully towards the village square, his broad shoulders radiating a sense of urgency.


    He hefted the deer onto his shoulders and headed back to Gorn''s cottage, the weight of the carcass a physical manifestation of the burden settling on his heart.


    Elara greeted him with a warm smile, but her expression quickly turned to concern when she saw the blood staining his tunic and the worry etched on his face. "William, what happened? Where''s Gorn?"


    He recounted the events of the morning, the goblin attack, Gorn''s grim pronouncements, and the unsettling feeling that something was amiss in the usually peaceful forest. Elara listened intently, her brow furrowed in thought.


    "Goblins..." she murmured, shaking her head. "That''s troubling indeed."


    But she quickly composed herself, her inherent practicality taking over.


    "Come now, William," she said with a reassuring smile. "Let''s get this deer cleaned and put away. Worrying won''t solve anything, and you need to eat."


    She bustled around the kitchen, her movements efficient and practiced as she helped William skin and butcher the deer. The aroma of roasting meat soon filled the cottage, a comforting scent that helped to ease the tension that had settled over them.


    After a hearty meal, William felt his weariness creeping in. The adrenaline of the hunt and the goblin encounter had faded, leaving him drained and emotionally spent. He bid Elara goodnight and retreated to his small room, the soft bed beckoning him with promises of restful sleep.


    Hours later, he was awakened by the creak of the front door and the murmur of hushed voices. He lay still, his senses alert, as Gorn and Elara spoke in the main room.


    "The others are worried, Elara," Gorn said, his voice heavy with concern. "Old Man Hemlock swore he saw strange tracks near the west field, and young Elspeth claims to have heard growls in the night. Even Torak, who lives on the edge of the Darkwood, says his dogs have been acting strangely."


    "What does it mean, Gorn?" Elara whispered, her voice filled with apprehension.


    "I don''t know," Gorn admitted. "But it''s not natural. Something is stirring in the forest, something dark and dangerous."


    "We''ll organize a search party at first light," Gorn continued, his voice firming with resolve. "We need to find out what we''re dealing with before it''s too late."


    William listened, his heart pounding. Something was definitely wrong in Willow Creek. But what could he do? He was just an outcast, a discarded hero with a mysterious power he barely understood.

 Chapter 7 Activating the SSS Skill

    Sleep offered no escape.Instead of oblivion, William''s mind was plunged into a vortex of images and sensations. A blood-soaked battlefield. The stench of death and decay. Towering figures, more beast than man, clashed in brutal melee. Their roars echoed across the ravaged landscape.


    Claws ripped through flesh, fangs tore at throats. Raw, untamed magic crackled in the air, warping the very fabric of reality. A hulking brute with the head of a wolf tore through a line of defenders, its every attack a symphony of violence.


    William watched in horror, unable to move, unable to scream. He was trapped in a nightmare he couldn''t escape.


    Then, the scene shifted. The battlefield dissolved, replaced by a towering city, its spires piercing the heavens. Shimmering crystals and obsidian formed its impossible structures. Ethereal beings, their forms fluid and ever-changing, flitted through the streets.


    Awe and dread warred within him. Aethel held secrets beyond his comprehension. He was caught in its web.


    He woke with a gasp, his heart pounding. The dream clung to him, vivid and disturbing.


    "William? Are you alright?" Elara''s concerned voice broke through the lingering darkness of the dream. He hadn''t realized he was crying out in his sleep.


    He blinked, his eyes adjusting to the dim light filtering through the window. Elara stood beside his bed, a worried frown creasing her brow. "You were tossing and turning," she said softly. "And you were sweating. Bad dreams?"


    William nodded, pushing himself up to a sitting position. "Just a strange dream," he murmured, trying to downplay the lingering fear that gripped him.


    "Well, it''s a new day," Elara said with a reassuring smile. "Come, breakfast is ready."


    The smell of freshly baked bread and sizzling bacon pulled William from the unsettling remnants of his dream. He joined Gorn and Elara at the table, forcing a smile as Elara placed a steaming plate of breakfast in front of him.


    "I spoke with the others this morning," Gorn announced, a grim edge to his voice. "There have been more sightings. Strange tracks, unsettling noises... something''s definitely not right."


    William''s heart pounded. "Are you going to investigate?" sea??h th§× NovelFire.net* website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "We have to," Gorn said, his jaw set with determination. "We''re forming a search party to scout the surrounding forest."


    "Can I come?" William blurted out, surprising even himself.


    Gorn looked at him, his expression softening slightly. "I appreciate the offer, lad, but this is dangerous work. You''re still recovering."


    "But I want to help," William insisted. "I might be able to..." He trailed off, realizing he couldn''t reveal the true extent of his abilities.


    Gorn shook his head. "You''ve done enough already, William. You saved Martha''s life. That''s more than most would have done."


    William fell silent, disappointment gnawing at him. He watched as Gorn and a group of seasoned hunters gathered their weapons and ventured into the depths of the forest, leaving him behind with a growing sense of helplessness.


    He spent the rest of the morning lost in thought, wandering through the village with a heavy heart. He exchanged a few words with some of the villagers, their faces etched with worry.


    "Heading out, William?" Old Man Hemlock asked, leaning heavily on his gnarled staff. His voice was a low croak, a stark contrast to Gorn''s booming tones.


    "Just for a walk," William replied, forcing a smile.


    "Be careful, young man," Hemlock warned, his eyes narrowed. "The forest is not safe these days. I saw those strange tracks near the west field, something I''ve never seen before. Unnatural, they were."


    "I heard about that, Hemlock," William said, keeping his voice calm. "Don''t worry, I''ll be careful. I''m just going to the hill near the village."


    Hemlock seemed reassured by William''s words and the mention of the familiar hill. He gave a slow nod, his gaze lingering on William for a moment longer than necessary.


    William made his way to the hill overlooking Willow Creek, a place where he often sought solace. He sat on a moss-covered rock, his gaze drifting towards the distant treeline, where Gorn and the others had disappeared.


    His thoughts drifted back to Earth, to his family, to his old life... He wondered if they missed him, if they worried about his whereabouts. A pang of guilt pierced his heart. He had been so eager to escape his ordinary life, to find adventure in a fantasy world. But now, faced with real danger and uncertainty, he longed for the comfort and familiarity of home.


    He closed his eyes, the image of his mother''s kind face and his father''s gentle smile flashing through his mind. He missed them dearly, missed the warmth of their love, missed the feeling of belonging.


    A tear escaped his eye, tracing a path down his cheek. He was alone, adrift in a strange world, with a power he barely understood and a destiny he didn''t want.


    He clenched his fists, a surge of anger rising within him. He had been cast aside, deemed unworthy, but he wouldn''t let that define him. He would prove them wrong. He would master his power, uncover the secrets of Aethel, and find his own place in this world.


    He focused on the translucent blue screen that hovered in his vision. Chrono Shift... what secrets did it hold? Could he really travel to the past? Could he witness the events of his dream, the brutal battlefield, the ethereal city?


    William concentrated on the skill, picturing the swirling vortex of his dream, the feeling of being pulled through time and space. A surge of energy pulsed through him, and the air in front of him shimmered and distorted. A swirling portal, a gateway to the unknown, opened before his eyes.


    William stared in awe, his heart pounding with a mixture of fear and excitement. He had done it. He had activated his SSS-Rank skill.


    The portal probably possessed dangers that William might not be able to survive against, but he wanted to get stronger, and deep down, there was something in his mind.


    ''Could this portal lead me back home?'' he thought.


    Maybe it was his eagerness for power, or the thoughts about his family made him want to go through the portal, but he did.

 Chapter 8 Exploring the Ancient World, More Levels

    Stepping through the swirling portal, anticipation and trepidation warred within William. The world twisted and contorted, a dizzying kaleidoscope of colors and sensations. Then, just as suddenly, the disorientation vanished.Solid ground. The portal shimmered behind him like a mirage. William found himself in a dense, primeval forest, the air thick with the scent of damp earth and unfamiliar vegetation. Towering trees, their trunks thicker than any he had seen before, stretched towards the sky, their branches forming a dense canopy that filtered the sunlight into an emerald twilight.


    The same hill overlooking the future site of Willow Creek, yet utterly different. No village, no sign of human habitation. Only the untamed wilderness stretching as far as the eye could see. This was Aethel in its raw, primordial state, a land untouched by civilization.


    Wonder mixed with apprehension. A stranger in a strange land, a visitor from a future that hadn''t yet been written. William quickly checked his system status, a new sense of urgency gripping him.


    Name: William Velmont


    Level: 3


    Class: None


    Attributes:


    Strength: 12


    Agility: 14


    Stamina: 10


    Intelligence: 16


    Mana: 11


    Skills:


    Chrono Shift (SSS-Rank): Allows the user to open a portal to a specific point in the past. (Details Unlocked)


    [Time Remaining: 5 hours, 57 minutes] [You are still learning how to use your SSS skill, so you cannot remain in this realm forever. You have 6 hours before being pulled back to the initial location of the portal.]


    Six hours. Not much time. He had to make the most of it.


    Sword drawn, the familiar weight reassuring in his grip, William ventured into the dense undergrowth, senses on high alert. The forest was alive with the sounds of unseen creatures, their calls a strange chorus of chirps, growls, and hisses.


    A low growl rumbled through the undergrowth, and a pair of glowing eyes fixed on him from the shadows. A large wolf, its fur the color of twilight, emerged from the thicket, its fangs bared in a silent snarl.


    William''s grip tightened on his sword, his heart pounding. He circled the wolf, trying to gauge its intentions. The wolf mirrored his movements, muscles coiled, ready to spring. S~ea??h the N?vel(F)ire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    With a sudden burst of speed, the wolf lunged. William reacted instinctively, raising his sword to parry the attack. But the wolf was faster than he anticipated. Sharp fangs grazed his arm, tearing through his tunic and drawing a thin line of blood. Pain flared, but William gritted his teeth and countered with a swift thrust, his blade finding its mark, sinking deep into the wolf''s flank.


    The wolf yelped, its attack faltering. William pressed his advantage, his sword a whirlwind of steel. He ducked a desperate snap of the wolf''s jaws, then lunged again, his blade finding its mark, piercing the creature''s heart.


    The wolf collapsed with a final whimper. William stood over his fallen foe, his breath coming in ragged gasps, blood dripping from his wounded arm. He had faced a predator in its own domain and emerged victorious, but not unscathed.


    A surge of power coursed through him, and the familiar blue screen flashed in his vision.


    [You have slain a Twilight Wolf!]


    [You have gained 150 EXP!]


    [Level Up!]


    Adrenaline pumping, William pressed on, his confidence bolstered by his victory. He wasn''t just a skinny kid anymore. He was a survivor.


    A pack of wild dogs burst from the undergrowth, their snarls echoing through the trees. They were lean and hungry, their eyes burning with a feral intensity. William fought with a ferocity he hadn''t known he possessed, his sword a blur of motion, his movements a dance of death. He parried snapping jaws, dodged lunging bodies, and countered with swift, precise strikes.


    One of the dogs managed to sink its teeth into his leg, tearing through his trousers and drawing blood. Pain shot through him, but he refused to falter. He kicked the dog off, sending it sprawling, then finished it with a swift thrust of his sword.


    [You have slain a Wild Dog!]


    [You have gained 100 EXP!]


    [Level Up!]


    He pressed on, his movements growing more fluid, his strikes more powerful. He was adapting, learning, becoming a true warrior.


    A monstrous boar, its tusks gleaming like ivory daggers, emerged from the thick undergrowth, its enraged snorts shaking the very ground. William dodged its charges, his agility proving invaluable as he weaved through the trees, narrowly avoiding the creature''s deadly tusks. He drew his bow, his arrows finding their mark in the beast''s thick hide.


    The boar roared in pain, its attacks becoming more frenzied. William felt a searing pain as one of its tusks grazed his leg, tearing through his flesh. He gritted his teeth, ignoring the pain, and loosed another arrow. This one found its mark, piercing the boar''s eye and sinking deep into its brain.


    The boar stumbled, its massive body crashing to the ground with a thunderous thud.


    [You have slain a Forest Behemoth!]


    You have gained 300 EXP!]


    [Level Up!]


    [Level Up!]


    He battled a giant spider, its venomous fangs dripping with a deadly concoction. He danced around its silken webs, his sword flashing, severing limbs and finally ending the creature''s reign of terror. But not before its fangs grazed his shoulder, sending a jolt of burning poison through his veins.


    He staggered, his vision blurring, but he managed to stay on his feet, finishing the spider with a desperate thrust of his sword.


    [You have slain a Venomous Webspinner!]


    [You have gained 200 EXP!]


    [Level Up!]


    [Level Up!]


    William collapsed against a tree trunk, his body battered and bruised, his breath coming in ragged gasps. He had faced the dangers of this ancient world and emerged victorious, but the battles had taken their toll.


    He was exhausted, wounded, and his body throbbed with pain. But he had also gained seven levels, his strength and agility soaring, his stamina and mana reserves significantly increased. But William felt a surge of power he had never experienced before, a newfound confidence in his abilities.

 Chapter 9 Newfound Strength, and Bad News

    William slumped against the gnarled trunk of the ancient tree, the rough bark digging into his sore back. He closed his eyes and focused on the familiar blue screen, a wave of weary satisfaction washing over him as he reviewed his updated status.Name: William Velmont


    Level: 10


    Class: None


    Attributes:


    Strength: 19


    Agility: 21


    Stamina: 17


    Intelligence: 18


    Mana: 13


    Skills:


    Chrono Shift (SSS-Rank): Allows the user to open a portal to a specific point in the past. (Details Unlocked)


    Seven levels. In a handful of brutal hours, he had made more progress than he could have ever imagined. He felt the transformation in every fiber of his being - the newfound strength in his limbs, the lightning-fast reflexes, the surge of energy thrumming through his veins. He was no longer the weak, unassuming boy who had stumbled through the portal. He was stronger, faster, more capable. He was a survivor.


    A grim smile tugged at his lips. Cast aside, deemed unworthy by the arrogant Elric. Yet here, in the untamed wilds of Aethel''s past, he was proving them all wrong. He was forging his own path, seizing control of his destiny.


    William remained by the tree, allowing his battered body to recover. The aches and pains from his battles with the primeval beasts slowly subsided, replaced by a growing sense of strength and vitality. He felt a strange connection to this ancient land, a primal energy thrumming beneath his feet.


    As his strength returned, he ventured deeper into the primeval forest. The towering trees, their leaves painted in hues of twilight, cast long shadows that danced and writhed like phantoms. Unfamiliar scents filled his nostrils - the pungent aroma of damp earth, the cloying sweetness of exotic blooms, the sharp tang of something wild and untamed.


    He stumbled upon a hidden cave, its entrance veiled by a curtain of emerald moss and twisting vines. Sword drawn, senses heightened, he cautiously peered into the darkness. The air within was cool and damp, carrying the faint scent of something ancient and forgotten. It offered shelter, a sanctuary from the untamed wilderness.


    William slipped inside, his footsteps echoing in the cavernous space. He settled down on a bed of soft moss, the cool stone wall pressing against his back.


    As he drifted into a light sleep, a glint of light caught his eye. A small, shimmering object lay nestled amongst the rocks, its surface reflecting the dim light filtering through the cave entrance. Curiosity piqued, William rose and cautiously approached, his footsteps muffled by the soft earth.


    It was a stone, unlike any he had ever seen. It pulsed with a soft, inner light, its surface smooth and cool to the touch. He picked it up, turning it over in his hands, mesmerized by its otherworldly glow. Instinctively, he slipped it into his pocket, a strange sense of connection drawing him to the mysterious stone. S§×ar?h the NovelFire.net* website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Hours melted away in the quiet solitude of the cave. William rested, his body slowly recovering from the trials of the day. He drifted in and out of sleep, haunted by fragmented images of snarling beasts and flashing claws.


    Then, with a sudden jolt, he was back. The familiar hillside, the portal shimmering faintly like a fading memory. He checked his system clock. The same hour, the same minute as when he left. Time, it seemed, had stood still in his absence.


    But his Chrono Shift skill was grayed out, a message flashing beneath it:


    [Skill in Cooldown. Time Until Reactivation: Unknown.]


    Disappointment pricked him, but it was quickly overshadowed by the thrill of his newfound strength and the mystery of the glowing stone tucked safely in his pocket.


    He made his way back to the village, his steps lighter despite his wounds. As he approached Gorn''s cottage, Elara rushed out, her eyes widening in alarm at the sight of his battered and bloodied form.


    "William!" she gasped, her voice laced with concern. "What happened to you?"


    He offered a sheepish grin, trying to downplay the severity of his injuries. "I... uh... went into the forest to train," he stammered. "I wanted to get stronger, so I could go with Gorn next time. I guess I got a little carried away."


    Elara''s eyes narrowed, but she didn''t press him further. She quickly ushered him inside, her hands hovering over his wounds with a practiced touch. "You''re lucky those weren''t worse," she scolded gently, applying a soothing balm to the angry red marks. "And you''ve been poisoned! That spider venom could have been deadly."


    William winced as she applied a poultice to the bite on his shoulder.


    "There," Elara said, stepping back to survey her handiwork. "That should help with the pain and the poison. But you need to be more careful, William. The forest is a dangerous place, even for experienced hunters."


    "I know," William mumbled, shamefaced. He hated lying to Elara, but he couldn''t exactly tell her the truth about his time-traveling escapades.


    Just then, the cottage door burst open and Gorn stumbled in, his face pale, his breath coming in ragged gasps. Behind him, the other hunters crowded into the small space, their expressions mirroring Gorn''s fear.


    "What is it, Gorn?" Elara cried, rushing to his side. "What happened?"


    Gorn leaned heavily on his spear, his eyes wide with a terror William had never seen before. "We found it," he choked out, his voice hoarse. "Or rather, it found us."


    He recounted a harrowing tale of their expedition. They had ventured deep into the forest, following the trail of strange tracks and unsettling sounds. But what they discovered was far worse than anything they could have imagined.


    "It wasn''t just goblins," Gorn explained, his voice trembling. "There were other creatures, things out of nightmares. Twisted, monstrous things, with claws like daggers and eyes that burned with an unholy fire."


    He paused, his gaze falling on William. "They were... Corrupted. But unlike any I''ve ever seen before. Stronger, faster, more vicious."


    "And that''s not the worst of it," Gorn continued, his voice barely a whisper. "We found... a cave. A lair. And inside..." He swallowed hard, his eyes filled with fear. "Inside, we saw it. The source of the corruption. A creature of immense power, its very presence radiating darkness and despair."


    And then, a bloodcurdling scream pierced the tense silence, echoing through the village, sending a wave of panic through the small gathering.

 Chapter 10 Difficult Fight

    The scream ripped through the tense silence like a shard of glass, its echoes bouncing off the wooden walls of the cottage. Gorn''s eyes widened in horror, his grip tightening on his spear. "Elara, Maya, stay here!" he barked, his voice laced with urgency. "William, protect them!"And with that, Gorn was gone, bursting out of the cottage, his spear held high, his movements a blur of determined purpose. William felt a surge of responsibility, his hand instinctively gripping the hilt of his sword. He met Elara and Maya''s terrified gazes, offering a reassuring nod, though his own heart hammered against his ribs.


    Minutes stretched into an eternity, each second filled with a gnawing anxiety. William paced the small cottage, his senses on high alert. He strained to hear any sound from outside, any indication of what horrors might be unfolding in the village.


    Then, a crash. The front door splintered inwards, and a creature unlike any William had ever seen lunged into the room. It was a grotesque parody of a wolf, its fur matted and stained with blood, its eyes glowing with an eerie green light. Its limbs were elongated and twisted, its claws razor-sharp, and its jaws gaped open, revealing rows of jagged teeth. S§×ar?h the N?vel(F)ire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    A wave of fear washed over William, but he didn''t hesitate. He charged forward, his sword raised, his movements fueled by a desperate need to protect Elara and Maya.


    He swung his sword, the blade slicing through the creature''s flesh, drawing a hiss of pain. The creature retaliated with a swipe of its claws, raking across William''s chest, tearing through his tunic and drawing blood.


    William gritted his teeth, ignoring the pain. He parried another attack, his movements surprisingly fluid despite the fear that clawed at his throat. He lunged, his sword finding its mark, sinking deep into the creature''s flank.


    The creature roared in pain, its attack faltering. William pressed his advantage, his sword a whirlwind of steel. He dodged a snap of its jaws, then lunged again, his blade finding its mark, piercing the creature''s heart.


    But the creature was stronger than he anticipated. It lashed out with a powerful blow, sending William sprawling to the ground. He cried out as its claws raked across his back, tearing through his flesh. He tried to rise, but his body wouldn''t obey. He was pinned beneath the creature''s weight, its fetid breath hot on his face.


    "William!" Maya''s scream pierced the chaos, her voice filled with a terror that mirrored his own.


    He closed his eyes, bracing for the final blow. But instead of pain, he felt a surge of power, a burning energy coursing through his veins. A translucent blue screen flashed in his vision.


    [New Ability Unlocked: Hero''s Limit (S-Rank)]


    [Temporarily enhances all attributes by 50% for 1 minute. Significant physical strain will follow.]


    He opened his eyes, a newfound strength surging through him. He roared, pushing the creature off him with a force he hadn''t known he possessed. He scrambled to his feet, his sword a blur of motion. He attacked with a ferocity born of desperation and newfound power.


    The creature, caught off guard, stumbled backward. William pressed his advantage, his strikes relentless, his movements fueled by the adrenaline coursing through him. He felt the strain of his enhanced abilities, his muscles burning, his vision blurring. But he couldn''t stop. He had to protect Elara and Maya.


    He lunged one final time, his sword finding its mark, slicing through the creature''s neck. The creature''s head rolled across the floor, its body collapsing in a heap.


    William staggered back, his vision swimming, his body trembling with exhaustion. His enhanced abilities faded, leaving him weak and vulnerable. He collapsed to the ground, his consciousness slipping away.


    The cottage door burst open again, and Gorn rushed in, his face etched with worry. He surveyed the scene ¨C his home in disarray, his family cowering in fear, and William lying on the floor, battered and bloodied. His eyes then fell on the monstrous creature lying lifeless on the floor.


    Gorn rushed to William''s side, his voice filled with concern. "William! What in Aethel happened here?"


    William managed a weak smile. "I... protected them," he whispered, his voice barely audible.


    Gorn looked back at William, his eyes filled with gratitude and respect. "You saved my family," he said, his voice thick with emotion. "You are a true hero, lad."


    But William couldn''t hear him. Exhaustion finally claimed him, dragging William down into a darkness deeper than any he had known. The echoes of battle faded into a distant hum as unconsciousness took hold.


    He awoke to the scent of herbs and the soft touch of bandages against his skin. Blinking, his vision blurred, his body heavy and aching. A wave of dizziness forced him back onto the bed as he tried to sit up.


    "Easy there, William," Elara''s gentle voice soothed him. "You''ve been through quite an ordeal."


    William''s gaze settled on Elara and Maya, their faces etched with concern. "How long was I out?" he croaked, his voice raspy.


    "Almost a full day," Elara replied, her worry evident. "We were worried sick."


    "Maya and I tended to your wounds," she explained, a hint of pride in her voice. "We used the strongest healing herbs we could find. You''ll be right as rain in no time."


    A smile tugged at William''s lips, but the effort sent a jolt of pain through his battered body. "I feel like I''ve been trampled by a herd of wild boar," he groaned.


    Maya giggled, a welcome sound in the otherwise somber atmosphere. "You look like it too," she teased gently.


    A weak chuckle escaped William, followed by a wince as the movement sent another wave of pain through his ribs. Still weak, his body protested every attempt to move. He lay back against the pillows, his gaze drifting towards the window, where the afternoon sun cast long shadows across the floor.


    "What happened to the creature?" he asked, his voice barely a whisper.


    "Gorn took care of it," Elara replied. "Dragged it out of the village and burned it. He didn''t want to risk any further contamination."


    "Gorn is a brave man," he murmured, a wave of respect washing over him.


    "He is," Elara agreed. "But so are you, William. You saved us. You saved our home."

 Chapter 11 Recover, and Seeking Help

    The following day, William focused on his recovery, eager to regain his strength and assess the full extent of his newfound power. He reviewed his updated status, a wave of satisfaction washing over him.Name: William Velmont


    Level: 11


    Class: None


    Attributes:


    Strength: 19


    Agility: 21


    Stamina: 17


    Intelligence: 18


    Mana: 13


    Skills:


    Chrono Shift (SSS-Rank): Allows the user to open a portal to a specific point in the past. (Details Unlocked) sea??h th§× NovelFire.net* website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Hero''s Limit (S-Rank): Temporarily enhances all attributes by 50% for 1 minute. Significant physical strain will follow.


    Level 11, and a new skill, a hidden power unlocked in the heat of battle. He recalled the surge of strength, the desperate fight against the corrupted beast, the feeling of his limits being shattered. It had come at a cost, leaving him drained and battered, but it had also saved his life, and the lives of Elara and Maya.


    For the next few days, William focused on recovery. He devoured Elara''s hearty meals, savoring the warmth and nourishment that helped mend his battered body. He rested, allowing his wounds to heal, the aches and pains slowly subsiding.


    When he finally ventured outside, leaning heavily on a makeshift cane fashioned from a sturdy branch, he found Willow Creek shrouded in an unsettling quiet. The usual bustle of village life had been replaced by a hushed stillness. Fear hung heavy in the air, a palpable tension that mirrored the grim expressions on the villagers'' faces.


    The attack, the corrupted creature, had shaken them to their core. This wasn''t just a stray goblin or a rogue wolf. This was something different, something sinister. The villagers whispered of a growing darkness, a creeping corruption that threatened their peaceful existence.


    William encountered Gorn by the village well, his usually jovial face etched with worry lines. "You''re looking better, lad," Gorn said, his voice gruff but laced with concern.


    "Thanks to Elara''s care," William replied with a weak smile.


    Gorn leaned against the well, his gaze distant. "I''m heading to the city, William. In two weeks'' time."


    William''s heart skipped a beat. The city. William was eager to explore the vast world, so visiting a city was something he wanted. "Why?" he asked, his voice barely a whisper.


    "To seek help," Gorn replied, his voice heavy. "We can''t face this alone. Not anymore."


    A surge of determination coursed through William. "I want to go with you," he declared, his voice firm despite his lingering weakness.


    Gorn looked at him, surprise flickering in his eyes. "William, you''re still recovering¡ª"


    "I''m strong enough," William insisted, his gaze unwavering. "And I can help. I need to help."


    Gorn studied him for a moment, his eyes searching William''s. He saw the determination, the newfound strength, the unwavering resolve in the young man''s gaze. He saw a hero in the making.


    "Alright, lad," Gorn said, a hint of a smile tugging at his lips. "You can come."


    A wave of relief washed over William, a grin spreading across his face. "Thank you, Gorn," he said, gratitude filling his voice. "I won''t let you down."


    The city. Just the word conjured images of bustling markets, towering structures, and perhaps, most importantly, skilled healers who could mend his battered body. William still had no idea where this city was, what dangers or wonders it might hold, but the prospect of leaving the confines of Willow Creek, of venturing into the wider world of Aethel, filled him with anticipation.


    And there was coin. A hefty purse of it, courtesy of the arrogant Maester Elric. William had almost forgotten about the purse, tucked away in his belongings. Now, the weight of the coins seemed to promise possibilities ¨C new weapons, armor, perhaps even information about that mysterious SSS-Rank skill.


    Two weeks. It felt like an eternity, and yet, no time at all. William needed every moment to recover, to rebuild his strength after the brutal encounter with the corrupted wolf. Full healing seemed unlikely, but even eighty percent would be a vast improvement. He was determined to be an asset to Gorn, not a burden.


    The days that followed blurred into a monotonous routine of rest and recuperation. William devoured the few books Gorn had ¨C mostly tales of hunting and folklore, a far cry from the epic sagas and intricate world-building he craved. Still, they offered a glimpse into the culture and history of Aethel, a welcome distraction from the aches and pains that lingered.


    Hours were spent practicing swordsmanship, the movements slowly regaining their fluidity, strength returning with each swing. William even ventured into the forest surrounding the village, careful to stay within sight of the familiar landmarks, testing his newfound agility and stamina.


    Finally, the day of departure arrived. William woke with a jolt, his heart pounding with anticipation. He could barely contain his excitement as he packed his meager belongings, the weight of the mysterious stone a comforting presence in his pocket. He joined Gorn and Elara for a hearty breakfast, the aroma of freshly baked bread and sizzling bacon filling the small cottage.


    After breakfast, though, it was time to say goodbyes.


    "Take care, Elara," Gorn said, his voice gruff but filled with tenderness. He pulled his wife into a tight embrace, his calloused hands gently stroking her hair. "We''ll be back as soon as we can."


    Elara clung to him, her eyes brimming with tears. "Be careful, Gorn," she whispered. "And William, you too. Look after each other."


    "We will, Elara," William replied, offering a reassuring smile. He gave Maya a quick hug, her cheeks flushing under his touch. "See you soon, Maya."


    Gorn mounted his steed, his gaze lingering on his wife and daughter. "We''ll be back before you know it," he promised, his voice strong despite the worry etched on his face.


    With a final wave, they rode out of Willow Creek. William was both scared of leaving the village, riding into the unknown, but he was also excited!


    His strength had improved quickly, and he wanted to test it out in the world!


    ''Stupid Elric and stupid classmates, you''ll see who the loser is!'' thought William. He would prove them wrong.

 Chapter 12 Journey to the City

    Gorn urged the horse forward, its hooves drumming a steady rhythm against the packed earth. William clung to his back, the rough weave of Gorn''s tunic scratching at his cheek. It wasn''t the most comfortable mode of transport, but it was infinitely better than trudging through the mud on foot. S§×arch* The Novel?ire(.)ne*t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality."Apologies for the cramped quarters, lad," Gorn rumbled, glancing back over his shoulder. "This old mare''s all we''ve got."


    "No worries," William replied, grinning. He was just glad to be off his feet.


    For hours, they followed a narrow track that wound through dense woodland. The air hung heavy with the scent of damp earth and decaying leaves, and branches whipped at their faces as they passed.


    Finally, the trees thinned, giving way to a wide cobblestone road that stretched towards the horizon. Relief washed over William; this must be the main road Gorn had mentioned, the one that linked the scattered villages and towns of the region.


    "What''s the city like?" William asked, curiosity piqued. "How big is it? And how much farther?"


    "The city is called Alderanth," Gorn declared, his gaze fixed on the road ahead. "It''s a few days'' ride, but it''s where we need to go."


    William nodded, the terrifying image of the corrupted wolf still vivid in his mind. He''d read about all sorts of fantastical creatures ¨C griffins with their sharp talons and piercing cries, sprites that danced in moonlit glades, even dragons that breathed fire and terrorized kingdoms.


    But none of those tales had prepared him for the horrifying reality of the wolf. Its fur was the color of a moonless night, its eyes burned with an unnatural crimson fire, and a foul stench clung to it like a shroud.


    Even the goblins he''d encountered in the forest paled in comparison to this abomination.


    "How big is Alderanth?" William asked, forcing himself to focus on their destination.


    "It''s no capital," Gorn replied, "but it''s a sizable city. We''ll find someone who can help us there."


    They pressed onward, the well-worn cobblestone road leading them through a changing landscape. The dense woodland gradually gave way to rolling hills, where farmers tended their fields and shepherds watched over their flocks. They passed a group of merchants leading packhorses laden with goods, their bells jingling softly in the afternoon breeze.


    As twilight cast long shadows across the land, Gorn guided the horse off the road and into a hidden clearing. It was time to make camp.


    "Traveling at night is a foolish risk," Gorn warned, his voice thick with the weariness of a long day. "We need rest, and there''s no telling what creatures might roam these woods after dark."


    William nodded in agreement. Even though he was used to camping in the wilds of Earth, the thought of encountering something unknown in this magical world sent shivers down his spine.


    "Are there any inns along this road?" he asked, longing for the comfort of a warm bed and a hearty meal. "A place where we can rest properly?"


    "Don''t worry," Gorn reassured him, "there are taverns ahead. We won''t have to rough it for more than a night or two."


    Gorn, with the efficiency of a seasoned hunter, quickly gathered dry leaves and branches, coaxing a small fire to life in a matter of minutes. The flames crackled and danced, casting a warm glow against the encroaching twilight.


    He then unfurled a simple tent, securing it with sturdy stakes driven deep into the soft earth. It wasn''t much, but it offered a welcome respite from the elements and a sense of security in the heart of the wild.


    "I''ll be back shortly," Gorn announced, grabbing his bow and quiver. "There should be some game nearby."


    William nodded, watching as Gorn melted into the shadows of the forest. He felt a pang of apprehension as he was left alone, the silence of the woods amplifying every rustle and snap.


    Less than an hour later, Gorn returned, two plump rabbits dangling from his belt. He quickly skinned and cleaned them, the practiced movements of his hands betraying years of experience. Soon, the enticing aroma of roasting meat filled the air, mingling with the scent of pine needles and damp earth.


    William watched Gorn work, a mixture of admiration and guilt swirling within him. Gorn moved with the fluid grace of someone intimately familiar with the wilderness, his every action precise and efficient. William, on the other hand, felt utterly useless.


    "I feel bad just sitting here," William confessed, picking at the roasted rabbit. "You''re doing everything to set up camp."


    Gorn chuckled, a deep rumble that echoed through the trees. "Lad, you''re still mending. Besides, someone needed to keep watch over our belongings. That''s a vital task in itself." He paused, tearing off a chunk of rabbit with his teeth. "You''ve got a good heart, wanting to help. But sometimes, knowing when to rest is just as important."


    "You''re right, Gorn," William conceded, a hint of resignation in his voice. "I''ll try to rest." He knew pushing himself wouldn''t help anyone, and he trusted Gorn''s judgment.


    The night was filled with the symphony of the forest ¨C the rustling of leaves, the hooting of owls, the distant howls of unseen creatures.


    William tossed and turned, his sleep punctuated by vivid dreams of the corrupted wolf and the looming threat to his village. Gorn, however, seemed to slumber peacefully, the sounds of the wild lulling him into a deep sleep.


    Dawn broke, painting the sky with hues of gold and crimson. Gorn was the first to stir, rising with the effortless grace of a seasoned hunter. He rekindled the campfire, its warmth chasing away the lingering chill of the night.


    Soon, they were packed and ready to continue their journey.


    As they journeyed further along the cobblestone road, the landscape around them steadily transformed, again. The dense forests thinned, giving way to rolling hills dotted with farms and pastures. They began to encounter more travelers ¨C merchants with their laden wagons, pilgrims on foot, even a knight clad in shining armor, his sword gleaming in the sunlight.


    The once quiet road became a bustling thoroughfare, evidence of Alderanth''s growing influence. William, accustomed to the solitude of the forest, found himself both fascinated and unnerved by the increasing activity.


    He observed the people they passed with a keen eye, noting their attire, their mannerisms, and the subtle ways in which this world differed from his own.


    Suddenly, Gorn reined in the horse, his gaze fixed on a figure lying crumpled in the middle of the road. "Someone''s hurt," he muttered, dismounting quickly.

 Chapter 13 Gorns Showcase of Power, and Tavern

    Gorn, ever alert, noticed the subtle shift in the woman''s posture, the unnatural stillness that betrayed her feigned injury. His years of experience navigating the treacherous roads had honed his instincts, and he knew a trap when he saw one."William," Gorn''s voice was low, a warning in its tone, "bandits. Prepare for a fight."


    "Bandits!" William echoed, surprise coloring his voice.


    Unlike the thrill of encountering a rare magical beast, the threat of bandits was a mundane reality, a constant shadow lurking on the edges of civilization.


    William dismounted, drawing his sword with a practiced flourish. The woman, her act exposed, sprang to her feet, her eyes glinting with malice.


    "You''re quick," she sneered, "but not quick enough. Run while you can! Maybe your horse will carry you far enough to escape."


    William had entertained the same thought. Why not simply flee? But Gorn had a different plan.


    "Running is an option," Gorn admitted, his gaze fixed on the woman, "but we''ve been traveling for quite some time with only one horse between us. It''s time for an upgrade. And I believe you can help with that."


    As if on cue, a band of rough-looking men emerged from the surrounding woods, their leader astride a magnificent stallion. Gorn''s eyes glinted with a predatory light.


    The bandit leader bristled, his face reddening with fury. "Who do you think you are?" he bellowed, his voice echoing through the trees. "You think you can take us all on?"


    Eight against two. The odds were undeniably stacked against them. Yet, an air of confidence clung to Gorn, unwavering and absolute.


    He surveyed the bandits with a chilling disdain. "Please," he scoffed, "your strongest barely scrapes level 25. You''re no match for me."


    A palpable tension rippled through the bandit ranks. Gorn''s casual assessment of their strength was unsettling. Accurately gauging an opponent''s level was a difficult skill, one that spoke volumes about his own power.


    "Don''t try to scare us with your tricks!" the leader blustered, though a flicker of doubt betrayed his bravado. "Numbers win battles, and we have you outnumbered!"


    Silence. Gorn didn''t waste another breath on threats or boasts. He simply moved. One moment he was standing beside William, the next he was a blur, a phantom of speed that vanished into the space between one blink and the next.


    Before any of the bandits could react, their leader''s head flew from his shoulders, a crimson geyser erupting from his neck. The stallion reared, its riderless form crashing to the ground. Gorn reappeared as if from thin air, his sword dripping with blood, his expression a mask of cold fury.


    The bandits, their bravado shattered, stumbled back in terror. They had never seen such speed, such power. This wasn''t a simple hunter; this was a force of nature unleashed.


    Gorn moved like a whirlwind, his sword a blur of deadly precision. He cut through their ranks, his every strike finding its mark. Cries of pain and terror filled the air as the bandits fell, their bodies littering the forest floor.


    The remaining bandits, their courage completely evaporated, turned and fled, their cries echoing through the trees. Even the woman who had orchestrated the ambush scrambled away, her limp forgotten in her desperate bid for survival.


    Gorn watched them go, his chest heaving, his eyes burning with a cold fire. He didn''t pursue them. He had made his point.


    William stared in awe, his mouth agape. He had witnessed Gorn''s strength in the village, but this... this was something else entirely. The sheer speed, the effortless power, the chilling precision ¨C it was like watching a predator toying with its prey.


    "Gorn," William breathed, his voice filled with a newfound respect, "that was incredible."


    Gorn grunted, wiping his sword clean on the fallen leader''s tunic. "They were weak," he said dismissively. "Undisciplined. A pack of wolves would have put up a better fight."


    But William knew better. He had seen the fear in the bandits'' eyes, the terror that had driven them to flee. He had witnessed the power that lay dormant within Gorn, a power that could shatter bones and extinguish life with terrifying ease.


    ''How strong is he?'' William wondered, a shiver running down his spine. He had much to learn, much to achieve, if he ever hoped to reach that level of mastery.


    Gorn approached the fallen stallion, its eyes wide with fear, its muscles trembling. He calmed the creature with a gentle touch, then turned to William. "Looks like you have a new mount, lad," he said, a rare smile gracing his lips.


    William grinned, his heart filled with gratitude. He approached the stallion, its fear quickly subsiding under his gentle touch. He mounted the magnificent creature, its powerful muscles rippling beneath him as he took the reins.


    With a newfound sense of purpose, they continued their journey.


    The journey proved surprisingly uneventful after the bandit attack. News of Gorn''s brutal efficiency seemed to have spread like wildfire, a silent deterrent to any would-be highwaymen.


    Had the surviving bandits relayed tales of his impossible speed and devastating power? William wouldn''t be surprised. Among those who lived by preying on the weak, Gorn''s reputation was clearly one to be feared.


    The next night, however, offered a welcome change from their previous roadside encampments.


    Gorn had mentioned taverns along the way, and he wasn''t exaggerating. As dusk settled, a two-story wooden building emerged from the twilight, its windows glowing invitingly. A weathered sign swung above the doorway, depicting a frothy tankard and the words "The Drunken Boar." Sear?h the N??eFire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    A sturdy-looking fellow with a bushy beard stood near the entrance, his eyes assessing the approaching riders. "Welcome, travelers!" he boomed, his voice surprisingly cheerful. "I can tend to your horses for the night. Feed ''em, water ''em, and keep ''em safe from any sticky fingers."


    "How much?" Gorn asked, his tone blunt and to the point.


    The stableman blinked, momentarily thrown by Gorn''s directness. "Twenty copper coins," he replied, recovering quickly. "A fair price, wouldn''t you say?"


    Gorn, without a word, tossed the coins to the man and strode towards the tavern entrance, William close behind.


    Inside, the common room was sparsely populated. A few lone figures hunched over their drinks at scattered tables, their conversations hushed. The tavern keeper, a plump woman with tired eyes, dozed behind the counter, her head resting on a stack of worn ledgers. The door creaked open, startling her awake.


    "Good evening, travelers!" she chirped, her voice regaining a semblance of enthusiasm. "Welcome to the Drunken Boar! We have plenty of rooms available, all at a reasonable price."


    "How much?" Gorn''s voice boomed through the quiet room.


    "Eighty copper coins per person," the woman replied, her eyes widening slightly.


    Gorn, true to his efficient nature, simply placed the coins on the counter. "Two rooms," he declared.


    The woman''s smile widened, her weariness momentarily forgotten. "Excellent! Right this way, gentlemen. I''ll show you to your accommodations."

 Chapter 14 Posting a Request

    The room was small and sparsely furnished, with two narrow beds, a rickety table, and a single chair. A lone window offered a glimpse of the moonlit forest, the rustling leaves casting dancing shadows on the rough-hewn walls.William, exhausted from the day''s journey and the adrenaline surge of the bandit encounter, collapsed onto one of the beds, the straw mattress crackling beneath his weight. He closed his eyes, the events of the past few weeks swirling in his mind. He had faced death, traveled through time, and discovered hidden powers he was only beginning to understand.


    Sleep came quickly, a welcome respite from the constant turmoil of his new reality.


    The next morning, they were back on the road, the rising sun painting the sky in hues of gold and crimson. The Drunken Boar, with its weary tavern keeper and lumpy beds, faded into a distant memory.


    Two more days of travel brought them to the outskirts of the city. Even from a distance, it was an impressive sight. Towering walls of grey stone rose from the surrounding plains, their imposing presence a testament to the city''s strength and prosperity. A bustling crowd gathered at the main gate, a throng of merchants, travelers, and adventurers seeking entry.


    Gorn guided their horses towards the back of the queue, his gaze sweeping across the crowd, his hand instinctively resting on the hilt of his sword. William, despite his excitement, couldn''t shake a feeling of unease. The city, for all its grandeur, seemed to hum with an undercurrent of tension.


    As they reached the gate, two guards, clad in gleaming armor, stepped forward. They scrutinized the approaching travelers, their eyes sharp and alert. One of them, a burly man with a thick mustache, gestured towards a nearby table. "Weapons and belongings," he barked, his voice gruff. "Inspection."


    Gorn frowned, his brow furrowed in confusion. "Inspection?" he echoed, his voice laced with surprise. "Since when does Alderanth1 require an inspection?"


    The guard leaned closer, his voice lowering to a conspiratorial whisper. "Bandits, sir," he explained. "Sneaking in with stolen goods, causing trouble. Orders from the Captain. Just a precaution."


    Gorn grunted, a flicker of understanding in his eyes. He and William dismounted, placing their weapons and packs on the table for inspection. The guards, their eyes sharp, examined every item, their movements efficient and thorough.


    William felt a surge of anxiety as the guard''s hands hovered over the mysterious stone tucked in his pocket. He held his breath, hoping the stone''s unusual properties wouldn''t attract unwanted attention. But the guard, seemingly unfazed, moved on, his focus shifting to the next item.


    With a final nod of approval, the guards stepped aside, granting them entry into the city. William, his heart pounding with anticipation, followed Gorn through the imposing gates, eager to explore the wonders and secrets that awaited them within Alderanth''s walls.


    The city gates swung open, and William stepped into a whirlwind of sights and sounds. The streets teemed with a vibrant crowd - merchants hawking their wares, children chasing stray dogs, and adventurers swaggering with weapons strapped to their backs. The air buzzed with a cacophony of voices, the clatter of horse-drawn carts, and the enticing aromas of street food stalls.


    "Potions! Elixirs! Get your potent brews here!" a wizened old woman cackled, her stall overflowing with vials of colorful liquids. "Guaranteed to cure any ailment, from a common cold to a broken heart!"


    "Weapons! Armor! Finest craftsmanship in all of Alderanth!" a burly blacksmith bellowed, his hammer ringing against steel. "Swords that can cleave a man in two, shields that can withstand a dragon''s breath!"


    "Exotic delicacies! Rare ingredients! Tantalize your taste buds with the finest fare from across the realms!" a portly merchant proclaimed, his stall laden with strange and wondrous fruits, vegetables, and meats. "Try our roasted griffin wings, guaranteed to make your mouth water!"


    William''s eyes widened, taking in the bizarre and fascinating sights. He had never seen such a diverse and vibrant marketplace. He nudged Gorn, his voice filled with curiosity. "Where do we go to find help?"


    Gorn, his gaze scanning the crowd with a practiced eye, pointed towards a imposing building with a sign depicting a crossed sword and shield. "The Adventurer''s Guild," he said. "That''s our best bet."


    "Why not the army?" William questioned. "Shouldn''t they be dealing with this corrupted threat?"


    Gorn shook his head. "Alderanth is a merchant city, lad. No major military presence here. We''d have to travel to the capital to petition the king, and that would take weeks, maybe months." He paused, his expression grim. "We don''t have that kind of time."


    He steered their horses towards the Adventurer''s Guild, the imposing building looming closer with every step. "We''ll post a quest, offer a reward. Hopefully, we can find some skilled adventurers willing to investigate the corruption and deal with the threat before it spreads."


    William nodded. He was finally starting to understand how things were. Gorn looked quite knowledgeable.


    ''He is certainly more than a hunter,'' thought William as they moved toward the Adventurer''s Guild building.


    The Adventurer''s Guild was a hive of activity. The vast hall buzzed with the chatter of adventurers, the clatter of mugs on tables, and the occasional boisterous laugh. A massive board dominated one wall, covered in parchments detailing various quests ¨C from retrieving lost cats to slaying fearsome beasts.


    Gorn approached a counter manned by a stern-looking woman with a scarred cheek and a bored expression. "We need to post a quest," he announced, his voice carrying over the din.


    The woman, without looking up from her ledger, gestured towards a stack of parchments and a pot of ink. "Fill this out. Be specific. And be prepared to pay the posting fee."


    Gorn grunted, grabbing a parchment and quill. He scribbled down the details of their predicament ¨C the strange occurrences in the forest, the corrupted creatures, the growing fear in Willow Creek. He hesitated for a moment, then added a hefty reward, a sum that made William''s eyes widen.


    "Will that be enough?" William whispered, concerned that they might be overspending.


    Gorn shrugged. "We need to attract the right kind of adventurers, lad. Ones who aren''t afraid of a little risk."


    He slammed the completed form onto the counter, the woman''s head snapping up with a glare. She scanned the parchment, her eyebrows rising at the offered reward. "This is quite a sum," she said, her voice laced with a hint of surprise.


    "It''s a dangerous job," Gorn replied, his tone firm. "We need someone with experience dealing with the Corrupted."


    The woman nodded, her expression turning serious. "Very well. I''ll post your quest. But I can''t guarantee you''ll find anyone willing to take it. The Corrupted are no laughing matter."


    Gorn grunted in agreement. "We know that better than anyone," he said grimly.


    I changed the name of the city. Already edited in the previous chapters Sear?h the novel(F~)ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.

 Chapter 15 Hiring Adventurers, and Rumors

    As they stepped back from the counter, William''s curiosity bubbled to the surface. "Gorn," he began, his voice hushed, "where did you get that much money? That reward... it''s a fortune!"Gorn''s expression turned cagey. "A hunter has his secrets, lad," he replied, deflecting the question with a gruff chuckle. "Let''s just say I''ve had a few successful hunts in my time."


    William, sensing Gorn''s reluctance to elaborate, decided not to press the issue. He had learned that the hunter, despite his open and friendly demeanor, held a part of himself close, shrouded in mystery.


    Instead, William shifted his focus to the more pressing concern. "Those Corrupted..." he began, his voice laced with worry, "what exactly are they?"


    Gorn''s jovial facade vanished, replaced by a grim seriousness. "Sometimes, lad," he explained, "the magical beasts in our world... they change. Something twists them, makes them stronger, more vicious. It''s a rare occurrence, but when it happens..." He trailed off, shaking his head. "It''s never good."


    "And you think that''s what''s happening in the forest near Willow Creek?" William asked, his heart sinking.


    Gorn nodded. "Aye. And it''s usually not an isolated incident. Something triggers these mutations, some kind of... imbalance. Until we find the source, the corruption will likely spread."


    William felt a chill run down his spine. He recalled the monstrous creature he had faced in Gorn''s cottage, the corrupted wolf with its unnatural strength and ferocity. And Gorn had said these creatures were even stronger...


    He glanced around the bustling hall of the Adventurer''s Guild, his gaze falling on the various groups gathered around tables, their laughter and boasts echoing through the space. Were any of these adventurers strong enough to face this threat? Was he?


    He looked back at Gorn, his expression determined. "We need to find someone capable, Gorn," he said, his voice firm. "Someone who can stop this before it''s too late."


    Gorn nodded, a flicker of hope igniting in his eyes. "Aye, lad. We just need to find the right people for the job."


    They settled at a sturdy oak table, their gazes scanning the bustling hall. The minutes ticked by, each one a hammer blow against William''s growing anxiety. He watched as adventurers came and went, some pausing to glance at the quest board, others dismissing it with a scoff or a shake of the head.


    Just as William was about to lose hope, a group of three figures approached their table. Two men and a woman, their bearing radiating an air of confidence and experience that set them apart from the boisterous crowd.


    "You the ones offering a king''s ransom for some pest control?" one of the men asked, a grin spreading across his rugged face. He had a thick, braided beard and a mischievous glint in his eyes.


    Gorn, ever alert, assessed the newcomers with a practiced eye. "We need more than pest control," he replied, his voice grave. "We need experienced adventurers, those who aren''t afraid to face the Corrupted."


    The woman, her arms crossed over her leather breastplate, stepped forward. "We saw the posting," she said, her voice sharp and alert. "Tell us more about these ''Corrupted''."


    Gorn recounted the events of the past few weeks ¨C the strange occurrences in the forest, the mutated creatures, the attack on his home, the fear that gripped Willow Creek. He emphasized the unusual strength and ferocity of the Corrupted, the growing concern that something sinister was afoot.


    "We need someone to investigate," Gorn concluded, his gaze unwavering. "To find the source of this corruption before it spreads and consumes everything in its path."


    The three adventurers exchanged glances, a silent conversation passing between them. The second man, a tall, lanky figure with a longbow slung across his back, spoke up. "We''ve dealt with the Corrupted before," he said, his voice calm and measured. "It''s not a task we take lightly."


    The woman nodded in agreement. "But the reward is generous," she added, her eyes gleaming with a hint of determination. "And the villagers seem desperate."


    The bearded man grinned. "Sounds like an adventure to me!" he declared, clapping Gorn on the shoulder. "We''re in."


    Relief washed over William, a smile spreading across his face. He studied the three adventurers, taking in their confident stances and the subtle aura of power that surrounded them. He felt a surge of hope. Perhaps, with their help, Willow Creek could be saved.


    Gorn, his expression softening slightly, extended his hand. "Thank you," he said, his voice filled with gratitude. "You have our thanks, and the gratitude of our village."


    The adventurers shook Gorn''s hand, their grips firm and reassuring. "Don''t worry yourselves," the woman said, her voice carrying a quiet strength. "We''ll get to the bottom of this."


    "But," the archer added, "we have a few loose ends to tie up here in Alderanth. Give us four days to prepare, and we''ll meet you back here, ready to ride."


    Gorn nodded, understanding in his eyes. "Four days it is," he agreed. "We''ll be waiting."


    With a final exchange of farewells, the adventurers departed, leaving William and Gorn alone in the bustling hall.


    "Four days?" William echoed, a hint of impatience in his voice. "Can''t we leave sooner?"


    Gorn clapped a hand on his shoulder. "Patience, lad. Those three look capable, but even the best adventurers need time to prepare for a journey into the unknown." He paused, his eyes twinkling. "Besides, you''ve never seen Alderanth before. It''s time for a little exploration."


    And so, they ventured into the city, leaving the clamor of the Adventurer''s Guild behind. Gorn, like a seasoned guide, led William through the labyrinthine streets, pointing out notable landmarks and sharing snippets of local lore.


    They marveled at the towering spires of the Grand Cathedral, its stained glass windows casting kaleidoscopic patterns on the cobbled streets. They strolled through the bustling marketplace, where merchants hawked exotic wares and the air hummed with a symphony of bartering voices.


    As they passed a group huddled around a street performer juggling flaming torches, William caught snippets of their conversation.


    "...heard those summoned heroes are causing quite a stir up north..."


    "...powerful mages, they say, with incredible abilities..." S~ea??h the ¦Çov§×lFire .net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "...saving villages, slaying beasts... even the king is impressed..."


    William''s heart skipped a beat. Summoned heroes. Up north. He knew exactly who they were talking about. His former classmates, the ones who had mocked and belittled him, were now celebrated heroes, their powers lauded throughout the land.

 Chapter 16 Place to Learn New Skills (1)

    Intrigued, William approached the group, a curious glint in his eyes. "Excuse me for interrupting," he interjected politely, "but who are these heroes you''re discussing?"One of the men, momentarily startled by William''s sudden appearance, quickly recovered his composure. "They''re a group of heroes who emerged recently," he explained. "From what I''ve heard, they were summoned from another world. They''re currently in a distant kingdom, but news travels fast, especially when it involves individuals with extraordinary abilities."


    "Just how far away is this kingdom?" William pressed, his curiosity piqued.


    "Quite a distance, young man," the man replied, shaking his head. "And the journey is fraught with peril. Don''t even think about trying to meet these heroes, alright?"


    He clearly assumed William was captivated by tales of heroism and yearned to meet these figures. The truth, however, was far more complex. William sought information. Elric''s spell had flung him far and wide, and now his former classmates were far away from him. Not that he wanted to chat with them, anyway.


    "Alright, thank you for the information," William replied respectfully, then rejoined Gorn.


    Gorn eyed him with a curious expression. "What was that about, lad? Why so interested in these heroes?"


    He wasn''t oblivious. Gorn sensed something unusual about William''s intense curiosity but chose not to pry further.


    "Just curious," William responded casually, "The whole hero talk was rather intriguing."


    "Right, right," Gorn said, a hint of skepticism in his voice.


    They continued their tour of Alderanth, Gorn pointing out various landmarks and bustling markets. Eventually, they settled into a restaurant to satisfy their hunger.


    The restaurant, located on the third floor of an imposing building, exuded an air of luxury. William once again marveled at how Gorn, a hunter from a small village, could afford such extravagance, but he kept his questions to himself. They both harbored secrets, and the answers would reveal themselves in due time.


    William relished the delicious meal, savoring each bite with gusto.


    "Enjoying yourself?" Gorn chuckled, watching William devour the food with undisguised enthusiasm.


    "Absolutely," William mumbled through a mouthful of chicken leg. "This is incredible!"


    They chatted and savored their meal, the earlier tension momentarily forgotten. With their hunger satiated, it was time to find lodging for the night.


    Alderanth boasted a variety of taverns, each catering to different budgets. Despite his apparent wealth, Gorn wasn''t about to squander his coins on unnecessary luxury.


    Especially since they had a four-day wait ahead of them before receiving a response from the adventurers'' guild. Four nights in a high-end establishment would put a significant dent in their funds.


    They opted for a more modest tavern called "Hod''s Tavern and Bar," a two-story wooden structure with a slightly worn but welcoming facade. The sign hanging above the entrance might have seen better days, but the lively atmosphere spilling onto the street promised a comfortable haven.


    Stepping inside, William and Gorn were greeted by a boisterous scene. The tavern was packed with patrons enjoying their ale, confirming its popularity among locals.


    Having just finished a hearty meal, neither of them desired food or drink. Their primary need was rest.


    Gorn approached the barkeep. "Got a couple of rooms available?" he inquired.


    The man, busy polishing a tankard, glanced at a nearby ledger. "Indeed," he confirmed. "Rooms eight and thirteen are free. They''re a bit apart, hope that''s alright."


    "No problem," Gorn replied. "We''ll take ''em both for four nights."


    After a brief exchange, William was directed to room thirteen at the end of a dimly lit corridor, while Gorn settled into room eight closer to the entrance.


    "If you need anything, lad, just come find me," Gorn said, his voice gruff but laced with concern. "Even though we''re safe within the city walls, you never know what might happen."


    A wave of warmth washed over William. Gorn and his family had practically adopted him after he''d materialized in their village, a bewildered stranger displaced by Elric''s magic. He had never imagined receiving such kindness from a stranger.


    "Will do," William replied, a genuine smile gracing his lips. "Rest well, Gorn."


    "You too, William," Gorn replied with a tired grin.William entered his assigned room, finding it simple yet cozy. The highlight was a small, inviting fireplace! The chill of autumn was creeping in, making the prospect of warmth especially welcome. A thick, woolen blanket lay folded on the modest bed, promising a comfortable night''s sleep. The window offered a view of the bustling street, which, while not typically scenic, was rather pleasant with the warm glow of the evening lights.William felt a surge of contentment. He had gained a solid understanding of his SSS-rank ability, which had allowed him to rapidly level up and boost his attributes.Name: William VelmontLevel: 11Class: NoneAttributes:


    Strength: 19


    Agility: 21


    Stamina: 17


    Intelligence: 18


    Mana: 13


    Skills:


    Chrono Shift (SSS-Rank): Allows the user to open a portal to a specific point in the past. (Details Unlocked)


    Hero''s Limit (S-Rank): Temporarily enhances all attributes by 50% for 1 minute. Significant physical strain will follow.


    He now possessed another powerful skill, a valuable asset for emergencies despite its harsh aftereffects.


    ''Where can I learn more skills?'' William pondered. ''Should I venture into the past again and seek out a mentor? Perhaps I need to explore other avenues, since I haven''t fully mastered Chrono Shift yet...''


    With these thoughts swirling in his mind, he settled into the bed and drifted off to sleep, eager to face whatever challenges the new day would bring.


    The night passed uneventfully, providing William with a much-needed restful sleep. In the morning, he and Gorn decided to have breakfast at the tavern. The food was decent, and the prices were reasonable, making it a convenient option.


    The tavern was significantly less crowded in the morning. Most patrons came in the evenings to unwind with drinks and conversation after a long day''s work. It seemed the majority of the people they had seen the previous night hadn''t stayed the night. S§×arch* The Novel?ire(.)ne*t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    William''s mind was still preoccupied with ways to increase his strength. Gorn, with his apparent experience and high level, seemed like the perfect person to ask for guidance.


    "Gorn," William inquired during breakfast, "where can I learn more skills? Is there a place where I can find manuals or something?"


    Gorn seemed surprised by the question, but also pleased. "Yes, there is," he replied. "The Alderanth library has manuals on all sorts of magic. But you should take an aptitude test first. Not that you can''t learn any type of magic, but it''s best to focus on your strengths, especially when starting out."


    William''s excitement grew. The prospect of learning new skills and delving into the world of magic filled him with anticipation.

 Chapter 17 Place to Learn New Skills (2)

    "An aptitude test?" William echoed, curiosity piqued. "Where can I find one of those?""The Mages'' Guild," Gorn replied, taking a hearty swig of his ale. "It''s not far from here. We can head over after breakfast."


    William nodded eagerly, his mind already racing with possibilities. What kind of magic would he be suited for? He imagined himself conjuring fireballs, summoning lightning bolts, or perhaps even manipulating the very fabric of time with his newfound magical prowess.


    They finished their breakfast, the tavern slowly filling with the morning rush of patrons seeking a quick bite before starting their day. Gorn settled the tab, his movements practiced and efficient, and they stepped back out into the bustling streets of Alderanth.


    The Mages'' Guild was an imposing structure, its tall spires reaching towards the sky, its walls adorned with intricate carvings depicting arcane symbols and mythical creatures. William felt a sense of awe as they approached the grand entrance, its heavy oak doors adorned with gleaming brass handles shaped like intertwined serpents.


    Inside, the atmosphere was hushed and reverent. Mages clad in flowing robes of various colors glided through the spacious halls, their voices low, their expressions serious. Shelves lined the walls, overflowing with ancient tomes and scrolls, their pages filled with arcane knowledge.


    Gorn approached a young mage seated at a polished mahogany desk. "We''re here for an aptitude test," he announced, his voice carrying a hint of respect.


    The mage, his eyes sparkling with intelligence, gestured towards a nearby chamber. "Please enter," he said, his voice smooth and melodic. "The test will assess your natural affinities and guide you towards the path best suited to your talents."


    William, his heart pounding with anticipation, followed Gorn into the chamber. It was a circular room, its walls lined with mirrors that reflected his image a thousand times over. A strange energy thrummed through the air, a tingling sensation that sent shivers down his spine. sea??h th§× Nov§×l?ire.n(e)t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    He took a deep breath, his gaze settling on a crystal orb resting on a pedestal in the center of the room. The orb pulsed with a soft, inner light, its surface swirling with a kaleidoscope of colors.


    "Place your hand on the orb," the mage instructed from beyond the door. "And focus your mind. Let your magic flow."


    William stepped forward, his hand trembling slightly as he reached for the orb. He closed his eyes, his thoughts swirling with anticipation. What secrets would the orb reveal? What path would his magical journey take him on?


    William extended his hand, his fingers brushing against the cool, smooth surface of the crystal orb. A jolt of energy surged through him, causing him to gasp. The orb, which had been a tranquil swirl of colors, erupted in a blinding flash of crimson light, the intensity momentarily blinding him.


    He stumbled back, shielding his eyes. When he could see again, the orb was no longer glowing serenely; it was pulsating rapidly, the crimson light deepening to an almost bloody hue. Cracks spiderwebbed across its surface, and a faint humming sound emanated from within, growing louder with each passing second.


    Suddenly, the orb shattered, exploding in a shower of crimson sparks that dissipated as quickly as they appeared. William stared at the fragments scattered across the pedestal, his heart pounding in his chest. What did it mean? Had he failed the test?


    The mage, who had been observing through a hidden window, rushed into the chamber, his face a mixture of shock and awe. "Incredible!" he exclaimed, his eyes wide with disbelief. "I''ve never witnessed such raw power, such potential..." He knelt down, carefully examining the shattered remnants of the orb. "This is... unprecedented. The orb reacted to your touch with an intensity that nearly overloaded its capacity. It seems you possess an extraordinary affinity for Body Enhancing magic."


    He looked at William, his expression turning serious. "But this level of talent comes with a price. Unlocking it will require a rare and costly catalyst." He turned to Gorn, his voice softening. "I''m afraid the fee for this procedure will be substantial."


    Gorn, who had been watching the proceedings with a mixture of concern and excitement, simply nodded. "Whatever it takes," he said, his voice firm. "This lad has a gift, and we won''t let it go to waste."


    The mage smiled. "Very well. I will begin the preparations immediately." He led them to a smaller chamber, where he instructed William to sit in a meditative pose. He then produced a small, intricately carved wooden box from his robes. Inside, nestled on a bed of velvet, lay a shimmering, emerald-green gem.


    "This," the mage explained, "is a Viridian Shard, a crystal imbued with the essence of life force. It will serve as the catalyst to unlock your latent potential." He placed the shard on William''s forehead, where it adhered gently, emitting a soft, green glow.


    William closed his eyes, feeling a warm sensation spreading through his body, invigorating his muscles and sharpening his senses. He could feel his power surging, his connection to his own physicality deepening. When he opened his eyes, the Viridian Shard had vanished, its energy absorbed into his being.


    The mage smiled. "Congratulations, William. You have successfully unlocked your Body Enhancing talent. You will find that your skills in this domain will be far more potent and efficient than those of an average mage."


    A notification appeared before William''s eyes, confirming the mage''s words:


    [Body Enhancing Talent I (B Rank): All Body Enhancing skill cost 20% less, are 20% more effective, and last 20% longer.]


    Stepping out of the Mages'' Guild and back into the bustling streets of Alderanth, William felt a newfound confidence surging through him. He practically bounced down the cobblestone streets, his eyes wide with excitement. He couldn''t wait to put his new talent to the test.


    Gorn, ever observant, chuckled at William''s barely contained enthusiasm. "Seems like someone''s eager to start their magical journey," he remarked, a hint of amusement in his voice. "So, tell me, lad, what grade did that passive skill of yours come at?"


    "It''s a B rank!" William announced, beaming with pride.


    Gorn''s eyebrows shot up in surprise. "A B rank? That''s impressive for a starting skill! Most beginners are lucky to get a C or even a D. You''ve got a good foundation to build on, lad. It''s possible to improve those skills further, you know, so starting with a B rank is among the best."


    William''s grin widened. "Really? How do I do that?"


    "Practice and training, mostly," Gorn explained. "But also by finding higher-ranked skills to replace or enhance your existing ones. Which is why our next stop is the Alderanth Library. They have a decent collection of magic scrolls, and we''ll see if we can find some body enhancing techniques for you to learn."


    The Alderanth Library was a haven of tranquility amidst the city''s hustle and bustle. Its high-ceilinged reading rooms were filled with rows upon rows of bookshelves, the air thick with the scent of aged paper and leather. Gorn, with his familiarity with the library''s layout, led William through the labyrinthine aisles towards the section dedicated to magic.


    "Here we are," Gorn announced, gesturing towards a shelf laden with scrolls of varying sizes and colors. "Now, let''s see what we can find..."

 Chapter 18 New Skills, and Weapon

    While Gorn began sifting through the scrolls, William''s attention was drawn to a massive, leather-bound tome tucked away on a lower shelf. Its title, embossed in faded gold leaf, read "Chronicles of Primal Magic." Intrigued, he pulled the heavy book off the shelf and carefully opened it.The pages were filled with intricate diagrams and archaic script, depicting strange rituals and even stranger creatures. As he flipped through the brittle pages, a particular illustration caught his eye. It showed a mage, surrounded by swirling energy, mimicking the movements of a ferocious beast ¨C a hulking, bear-like creature with glowing runes etched across its fur.


    "What''s that, lad?" Gorn asked, noticing William''s fascination with the ancient tome.


    William showed him the illustration. "It looks like some kind of ancient magic," he said, tracing the runes with his finger. "The mage seems to be copying the beast''s movements."


    Gorn peered at the image, his brow furrowed in thought. "Ah, yes. This book describes the practices of the Primal Mages," he explained. "They believed that true power came from understanding and harnessing the natural world, particularly the strength and abilities of magical beasts."


    He pointed to the bear-like creature in the illustration. "This is a Runebear, a creature known for its immense physical strength and resilience. The Primal Mages would study these beasts, learning their movements and channeling their power to enhance their own bodies."


    "That''s incredible!" William exclaimed, his mind racing with possibilities. He imagined himself learning from these powerful creatures, mastering their techniques, and becoming an unstoppable force.


    Gorn chuckled. "It''s a fascinating piece of history, lad, but don''t get too carried away. This magic is ancient, long forgotten. The techniques described here are likely lost to time." sea??h th§× N?vel(F)ire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    William nodded, but inwardly, he was buzzing with excitement. Lost to time? Perhaps for others, but not for him. He had Chrono Shift, his SSS-ranked skill, a secret weapon that allowed him to manipulate time itself.


    ''I can go back to the past, to the era of the Primal Mages,'' he thought, a thrill running through him, ''I can learn those lost techniques, master their secrets...''


    He carefully closed the book, a determined glint in his eyes. He wouldn''t reveal his Chrono Shift ability to Gorn, not yet. But he knew that this discovery had opened up a whole new world of possibilities for him.


    "Alright, lad," Gorn said, interrupting William''s thoughts. "Let''s get back to finding you some suitable scrolls."


    After careful consideration, Gorn selected four scrolls for William. Three of them were C-rank Body Enhancing skills: Iron Skin, which increased the user''s physical defense; Enhanced Strength, which amplified raw power; and Swiftfoot, which granted increased speed and agility. The fourth scroll contained a B-rank skill called Kinetic Burst, which allowed the user to release a burst of concentrated energy, propelling them forward with incredible force.


    "These should keep you busy for a while," Gorn said, handing the scrolls to William. "I chose these specifically because they form a solid foundation for any aspiring body enhancing mage. Master these, and you''ll be well on your way to becoming a formidable force."


    William carefully tucked the scrolls away, eager to start practicing. He was already imagining the possibilities, the incredible feats of strength and speed he would be capable of.


    "Now," Gorn continued, "we need to get you a decent weapon. You know that body enhancing mages often become Battlemages, fighting in close combat. A good sword is essential."


    William''s eyes lit up. The idea of wielding a sword and channeling his newfound magical abilities in battle thrilled him. He had always admired the strength and skill of warriors, and now he had the opportunity to become one himself.


    They left the library and headed towards the weapon district, a maze of narrow alleyways lined with shops displaying an array of gleaming blades, sturdy armor, and other combat gear. Gorn, with his experienced eye, led William to a reputable-looking establishment called "The Steel Serpent."


    Inside, the shop was filled with the clang of hammers on metal and the scent of oil and leather. Weapons of all shapes and sizes adorned the walls, from daggers and short swords to massive two-handed greatswords.


    A gruff-looking blacksmith with a thick beard and arms like tree trunks emerged from the back of the shop, wiping his brow with a rag. "Looking for something specific, gentlemen?" he asked, his voice booming.


    "We need a good sword for this young lad," Gorn replied, gesturing towards William. "He''s just starting his training as a Battlemage."


    The blacksmith''s eyes twinkled. "Ah, a Battlemage, eh? A fine choice. Requires strength, skill, and a touch of magic. Well, you''ve come to the right place." He led them to a display case filled with an assortment of swords, each one gleaming with a sharp edge.


    "Now, for a beginner," the blacksmith explained, "I recommend something balanced and versatile. Not too heavy, not too light. Something that allows for both quick strikes and powerful blows." He pulled out a sword with a sleek, double-edged blade and a simple, leather-wrapped hilt. "This one is forged from high-quality steel, with a good balance and a sharp edge. Perfect for a young warrior learning the ropes."


    William took the sword in his hand, feeling its weight and testing its balance. It felt comfortable, an extension of his own arm. He could already envision himself wielding it in battle, channeling his magic through the blade to unleash devastating attacks.


    "I''ll take it," he said, a confident grin spreading across his face.


    Gorn nodded in approval. "A good choice, lad. Now, let''s get you back to the inn. You have a lot of training ahead of you."


    As they left the shop, William clutched his new sword tightly, his heart filled with anticipation. He was ready to embark on this new path, to hone his skills, and to become powerful.


    They had nothing else to do but wait until the adventurers were ready to go with them back to Willow Creek village to take care of the corruption problem. So, William had some time to spend inside the tavern, trying to learn his new skills.

 Chapter 19 Leaving the City

    Back in the quiet solitude of his room at the inn, William unfurled the scroll containing the Swiftfoot technique. He was eager to dive into his magical training, and this skill seemed like the perfect starting point.As Gorn had said, speed and agility were crucial assets for any aspiring Battlemage, useful for both offense and defense. ''If I can master this,'' William thought, ''I''ll be able to dodge attacks, close the distance on my enemies, and even escape dangerous situations.''


    He carefully read through the instructions, his brow furrowed in concentration. The scroll detailed a complex process involving a specific breathing pattern, precise mana manipulation, and the drawing of intricate runes in the air. It wasn''t as simple as just willing himself to move faster; it required a delicate interplay of mind and body, a harmonious flow of magical energy.


    William took a deep breath and began to practice. He sat cross-legged on the floor, his back straight, and closed his eyes, focusing on his breathing. He inhaled slowly, counting each second, then exhaled just as deliberately, following the rhythm described in the scroll.


    Once he felt his breathing was steady and controlled, he moved on to the next step: mana manipulation. He visualized his mana channels, the pathways through which his magical energy flowed, and tried to direct the flow to his legs and feet, as instructed.


    It was like trying to guide a wild river, the energy surging and ebbing unpredictably. He gritted his teeth in concentration, trying to maintain focus.


    Finally, he attempted to draw the runes. With a trembling finger, he traced the intricate symbols in the air, his movements slow and clumsy. The runes flickered into existence, faint and unstable, before dissipating into nothingness. He tried again and again, his frustration growing with each failed attempt.


    Hours passed, and William remained stubbornly dedicated to his practice. He repeated the breathing exercises, the mana manipulation techniques, and the rune drawings, tirelessly striving for even the slightest hint of progress.


    But the skill remained elusive. His runes were still weak and unstable, his mana control erratic, and his movements felt no faster than usual.


    By nightfall, exhaustion was creeping in, and discouragement began to weigh on him. He slumped against the wall, his head in his hands. ''Why is this so difficult?'' he thought, a wave of self-doubt washing over him. ''Am I not cut out for this after all?''


    Just as his spirits were sinking, a knock came at the door. "William, you in there, lad?" Gorn''s familiar voice called out.


    "Come in," William replied, his voice muffled.


    Gorn entered the room, carrying a tray with a steaming mug and a plate of bread and cheese. He took one look at William''s dejected expression and chuckled. "Having a bit of trouble, are we?"


    William sighed. "It''s this Swiftfoot skill. I''ve been practicing all day, and I''m not making any progress."


    Gorn placed the tray on the table and sat down beside William. "Ah, that''s perfectly normal, lad. Learning new skills takes time and patience. Don''t get discouraged just because you haven''t mastered it in a day."


    He took a sip from his mug. "Let me see you try it."


    William hesitated, feeling self-conscious, but he performed the sequence of breathing, mana manipulation, and rune drawing.


    Gorn watched intently, his eyes narrowed in concentration. When William finished, he nodded slowly. "Not bad, lad. Your breathing is decent, and your mana control is showing some promise. But your runes are still a bit shaky."


    He pointed to the air where William had drawn the runes. "See how they flicker and fade? That''s because your mana flow isn''t consistent. You need to focus on maintaining a steady stream of energy as you draw."


    Gorn then demonstrated the rune drawing, his finger moving with fluid grace. The runes he created glowed brightly, pulsating with power. "Try to visualize the flow of mana as you draw," he explained. "Imagine it like ink flowing from your fingertip, forming the runes in the air."


    William nodded, absorbing Gorn''s advice. He tried again, focusing on maintaining a steady mana flow as he drew the runes. This time, they were more stable, lasting a few seconds longer before fading.


    "That''s better," Gorn encouraged. "Keep practicing, lad. You''ll get there."


    The next morning, William woke with a renewed sense of purpose. Despite the challenges he faced with the Swiftfoot skill, he was determined to master it. He spent the early hours practicing the breathing techniques and mana manipulation, his focus sharpened by the prospect of the journey ahead.


    After a quick breakfast, he met Gorn in the common room of the inn. "Ready for the day, lad?" Gorn asked, a twinkle in his eye.


    "As I''ll ever be," William replied, trying to project an air of confidence.


    They left the inn and headed towards the Adventurers'' Guild. The guild hall was a hive of activity, with adventurers of all sorts coming and going. William, still somewhat intimidated by the seasoned mercenaries and mages, stuck close to Gorn as they navigated through the bustling crowd.


    Gorn led him to a table where Aella, Borin, and Kael were already seated, their gear laid out on the table before them. They were checking their weapons and supplies, ensuring they were fully prepared for the journey ahead.


    "Ah, there you are," Aella said, nodding to William and Gorn. "Ready to head out?"


    "Just about," Gorn replied. "We just need to confirm a few details with the Guild Master."


    They approached the Guild Master''s desk, where a stern-looking woman with a sharp gaze was reviewing a stack of parchments. Gorn presented her with the contract for the Willow Creek mission, and she quickly verified the details. S§×arch* The N?vel?ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "Everything seems to be in order," she said, stamping the contract with the guild''s seal. "I wish you all the best in your endeavor. The corruption in Willow Creek is a serious matter, and the villagers will be grateful for your assistance."


    "We''ll do our best, Guild Master," Gorn assured her.


    With the formalities completed, they returned to their table to gather their belongings. William felt a flutter of nerves as he realized that they were about to depart.

 Chapter 20 Something is not right

    "Right then," Gorn clapped his hands together, a grin splitting his weathered face. "Time to head home!"William felt a surge of anticipation. Home. It had been strange being away from Willow Creek, even for just a few days. He missed the familiar creak of the floorboards in Gorn''s cabin, the smell of Elara''s baking bread, and the playful banter with Maya.


    They gathered their gear and left the guild hall, the midday sun glinting off the cobblestones. William, sword secure at his hip and scrolls tucked safely in his pack, felt a thrill course through him. This was it ¨C his first real adventure beyond the village.


    At the stables, William''s horse, a spirited bay mare, nickered a greeting. He swung into the saddle, feeling a familiar sense of freedom as he settled in.


    Gorn, Aella, Borin, and Kael mounted their own steeds. With a final nod to each other, they rode out of Alderanth, the city gates closing behind them like a final farewell. The road to Willow Creek beckoned, a familiar path winding through rolling hills and whispering forests.


    The journey was a welcome change. William spent hours practicing his mana manipulation, striving for a steady flow of energy despite the horse''s rhythmic gait. He watched the adventurers, their practiced movements and easy confidence a testament to their years of experience.


    Aella, the mage, conjured flames with a flick of her wrist, her spells illuminating the twilight forest with bursts of fiery brilliance. Borin, a giant of a man, wielded his axe with a power that made William''s own sword feel like a feather. Kael, ever the rogue, seemed to melt into the shadows, his movements fluid and silent.


    Evenings were spent under the vast expanse of the night sky. William, Gorn, and the adventurers shared stories and laughter around the campfire. Gorn, a seasoned warrior and a patient teacher, offered William guidance on his training, emphasizing the importance of discipline and focus. William, in turn, found himself captivated by Gorn''s tales of daring battles and narrow escapes.


    One night, as the embers glowed and the stars twinkled overhead, William found himself thinking of Elara and Maya. He missed Elara''s warm smile and Maya''s teasing laughter. He wondered how they were faring, if they were worried about Gorn and him.


    After days of travel, they finally crested the last hill and saw Willow Creek nestled in the valley below. But as they rode into the village, a sense of unease settled over William. The usual bustle was absent, replaced by an unsettling quiet. The villagers they passed seemed withdrawn and fearful.


    "Gorn," William''s voice was tight with worry. "Something''s not right."


    Gorn nodded grimly. He stopped a passing villager, his voice rough with concern. "Friend, has something happened while we were away?"


    The villager''s face crumpled. "Old Man Hemlock... he''s gone. Taken by a corrupted beast."


    Gorn''s expression hardened. "A corrupted beast? Here?"


    The villager nodded miserably. "It happened so fast. No one could stop it."


    A wave of dread washed over William. The corruption was worse than they feared, reaching into the heart of their home.


    Gorn, his face pale, spurred his horse forward. "Come on, lad! To the cabin!"


    They raced through the silent village, anxiety gnawing at them. William felt a surge of protectiveness for Elara and Maya. He had to make sure they were safe.


    They reached the cabin, and Gorn burst through the door, his voice echoing through the small space. "Elara! Maya!"


    A moment of breathless silence, then a cry of relief. "Gorn!" Sear?h the N??eFire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Elara rushed out, her face etched with worry, but her eyes shining with relief at the sight of her husband. Behind her, Maya appeared, her expression a mixture of joy and concern.


    Gorn pulled them into a tight embrace. William stood back, a wave of warmth washing over him. Elara and Maya were safe. For now.


    But the danger wasn''t over. The corruption lurked, a shadow hanging over their village.


    The weight of Hemlock''s death settled over the small cabin. Gorn, his arm still protectively around Elara and Maya, turned to the adventurers, his expression grim. "It seems we have a serious problem," he said, his voice heavy. "The corruption has struck the village itself."


    Aella, her silver eyes blazing with determination, nodded sharply. "We need to act quickly. This cannot be allowed to spread."


    Borin, his imposing figure radiating strength, gripped his axe tightly. "Where was this creature last sighted?"


    "Near the old oak grove," a villager called from the doorway, where a small crowd had gathered, drawn by the commotion. "At the edges of the Blackwood."


    "Then that''s where we''re headed," Kael declared, already moving towards the door, his daggers glinting ominously.


    William, his heart pounding with a mix of fear and excitement, stepped forward. "I''m going with you!"


    Aella turned to him, a flicker of concern in her eyes. "William, it''s best you stay here. The Blackwood is dangerous, especially now."


    "But I can help!" William insisted, his hand instinctively reaching for his sword. "I''ve begun my magic training."


    Borin let out a gruff chuckle. "Lad, fighting a corrupted beast isn''t a child''s game. You need more than a few magic tricks for that."


    Gorn placed a reassuring hand on William''s shoulder. "He''s right, William. It''s too dangerous. Stay here with Elara and Maya. They need you here."


    Gorn turned to the adventurers, his gaze resolute. "I''ll go with you. The village needs to see that we will not cower in fear." He looked at William, his eyes filled with a fatherly concern. "Keep them safe, lad."


    As Gorn and the adventurers disappeared into the twilight, William felt a pang of frustration. He longed to be by Gorn''s side, fighting alongside him, proving his worth.


    But he knew that his duty lay here, protecting Elara and Maya. He clenched his fists, a new resolve hardening his gaze. ''I will become stronger,'' he vowed silently. ''Strong enough to face any danger, strong enough to protect those I care about.''

 Chapter 21 SSS Skill is Back

    He turned towards the cabin, and found Maya watching him, her brow furrowed with concern. "Will they be alright?" she asked, her voice barely above a whisper.William forced a reassuring smile. "Of course they will. Your father is one of the strongest warriors I know, and the adventurers are skilled as well. They''ll handle it."


    Maya nodded slowly, but the worry in her eyes didn''t completely disappear. "It''s just... it''s scary, you know? This corruption... it feels like it''s closing in on us."


    William understood her fear. He felt it too. But he also knew that giving in to fear wouldn''t help anyone. "We can''t let fear control us, Maya," he said, his voice firm. "We have to be strong, for your parents, for the village."


    Maya''s expression shifted, a spark of determination replacing the fear. "You''re right," she said, her voice gaining strength. "We won''t let it win." She paused, then a curious glint entered her eyes. "So, tell me about Alderanth. What was it like?"


    William''s spirits lifted. He was glad for the change in subject, for the chance to focus on something other than the looming threat of the corruption. "Alderanth is... incredible," he began, his eyes lighting up as he recalled the bustling city. "It''s huge, with towering buildings and streets filled with people from all over the kingdom. There are shops selling all sorts of things you can''t even imagine, and the Mages'' Guild..." He trailed off, remembering his experience at the guild.


    "What about the Mages'' Guild?" Maya prompted, her curiosity piqued.


    William hesitated for a moment, unsure how much to reveal about his magical training. He didn''t want to worry Maya, but he also didn''t want to keep secrets from her. "It was amazing," he finally said. "I even took an aptitude test, and it turns out I have a talent for body enhancing magic."


    Maya''s eyes widened. "Really? That''s incredible! So you''re learning magic now?"


    William nodded, a shy grin spreading across his face. "I am. It''s not easy, but I''m determined to master it." He pulled out the scroll containing the Swiftfoot technique. "I''m practicing this skill now. It''s supposed to make me faster and more agile."


    Maya leaned closer, examining the scroll with interest. "Wow, that sounds amazing! Can you show me?"


    William hesitated. He wasn''t very good at the skill yet, and he didn''t want to embarrass himself in front of Maya. But seeing the genuine excitement in her eyes, he couldn''t refuse.


    "Alright," he said, taking a deep breath. "But don''t laugh if I mess it up."


    He closed his eyes, focusing on his breathing and mana control. Then, with a concentrated effort, he attempted to draw the runes in the air. The runes flickered into existence, faint and unstable, but they held for a moment longer than before.


    Maya gasped. "That''s incredible, William! You''re amazing!"


    William blushed, pleased by her enthusiastic response. "It''s not much yet," he admitted. "But I''ll get better. I promise."


    The night settled over Willow Creek, casting long shadows across the village. A sense of apprehension lingered in the air, the villagers huddled in their homes, fear keeping them company.


    Inside the cabin, William sat beside Elara and Maya, the flickering candlelight casting a warm glow on their faces. They spoke in hushed tones, sharing stories and memories, trying to keep the fear at bay.


    Suddenly, the sound of approaching footsteps broke the silence. The cabin door swung open, revealing Gorn and the adventurers, their faces etched with exhaustion and grim determination.


    "We found them," Gorn announced, his voice weary but firm. "Three corrupted beasts, lurking near the old oak grove. We dealt with them."


    A wave of relief washed over William, Elara, and Maya. At least for now, the immediate threat was gone.


    Aella, her usually vibrant face pale with fatigue, sank into a chair. "Those creatures... they were stronger than we anticipated. The corruption seems to be growing more potent."


    Borin grunted in agreement, rubbing a sore shoulder. "Aye, they were fierce. But we''ll keep hunting them down, one by one, until this village is safe." S~ea??h the N?vel(F)ire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Kael, ever restless, paced the small cabin. "But we still haven''t found the source of this corruption. Until we do, this is just a temporary fix."


    Gorn nodded grimly. "We''ll continue the search tomorrow. For tonight, we rest."


    With no room to spare in the small cabin, the adventurers set up camp outside, their bedrolls spread beneath the star-dusted sky. William, exhausted from the day''s events and his own magical practice, fell into a deep sleep.


    Dawn broke, painting the sky with hues of orange and pink. William woke with a start, a strange sensation tingling through his body. A notification blinked before his eyes, its words sending a jolt of excitement through him:


    [Chrono Shift (SSS Rank) has finished cooling down. You can now travel through time once again.]


    William''s heart leaped as he read the notification. Chrono Shift was ready! He couldn''t wait to use it again. He quickly finished his breakfast, a surge of energy propelling him out of the cabin.


    "I''m going to train!" he called to Elara and Maya, already halfway out the door.


    He made his way to his favorite spot ¨C a secluded hill overlooking Willow Creek. The morning air was crisp, and a light mist clung to the ground, painting the landscape with an ethereal beauty.


    William reached the top of the hill, his breath misting in the cool air, and took a moment to appreciate the view. From here, he could see the entire village spread out before him, peaceful and quiet in the morning light.


    He turned his attention to the task at hand. Chrono Shift. He closed his eyes, focusing on the swirling energy within him, the power to manipulate time. He pictured his destination ¨C the era of the Primal Mages, a time when magic was wild and untamed.


    With a surge of will, he activated his skill. The air around him shimmered and distorted, forming a swirling vortex of colors. A portal opened, a gateway to the past. He took a deep breath, a mix of excitement and trepidation swirling within him, and stepped through.

 Chapter 22 Returning, and Looking for Civilization

    The portal shimmered with an enticing glow, and William stepped through, eager to explore the primitive world of Aethel. He hoped this time he''d find the mentor he desperately sought.He materialized on a familiar hilltop, the same spot as his previous visit, though who knew how much time had passed in this world? ''So, the destination isn''t random,'' he mused, ''it''s linked to the portal''s location. At least that''s something!''


    Checking his timer, William saw he had 16 hours ¨C longer than his last trip. His mastery over the portal skill was clearly growing. He descended into the dense forest, his senses alert for any sign of life. It wasn''t long before the local fauna took an interest in him.


    A seemingly harmless frog hopped onto the path, but William knew better than to be fooled by appearances. In a flash, the creature bristled with poisonous spikes and launched them like darts.


    William reacted instantly, diving behind a thick tree trunk just in time. As the frog paused, its spike reserves depleted, William seized his chance. He dashed forward, his sword a blur of motion, and cleaved the creature in two.


    [+30 EXP]


    ''Is that a lot?'' he wondered. His system didn''t reveal how much experience he needed to level up, but every bit counted.


    Pressing onward, William hacked through the dense undergrowth. He noticed something curious ¨C the path he''d cleared on his last visit was still visible, the severed branches and vines unchanged. Time in Aethel clearly flowed differently; his past actions remained in the past.


    This realization was both exhilarating and unsettling. It confirmed that his journeys were real, not mere dreams, but it also meant he had to be mindful of the consequences of his actions.


    For now, though, his thirst for power outweighed his caution. He continued his trek, battling any beast that crossed his path, determined to find civilization in this untamed wilderness.


    William''s objective was to find any vestige of civilization in that place. At first glance, all he could see was dense vegetation.


    ''Maybe I should climb a tree and take a look around,'' William thought. Sear?h the N?vel(F)ire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Most of the trees were difficult to climb, but he found one that was perfect. It had branches that made climbing easier, and the top of the tree had a less dense canopy, allowing for a clear view of the surroundings.


    William climbed the tree, holding onto the branches and jumping with phenomenal agility. He was getting stronger, quite different from when he first appeared in that world.


    His attributes were higher, and his growth was certainly greater than that of ''normal people'' since he was one of the heroes summoned to that world.


    Anyway, as soon as he climbed up, William looked around and saw a vast green field. The sky was beautiful, clear, blue, and the view of the entire valley filled with forest was simply breathtaking.


    For a moment, William forgot why he had climbed that tree. He stayed there, enjoying the view, looking at the surroundings, listening to the birds singing and the sound of a river flowing.


    It was a very beautiful place. Not that it wasn''t beautiful back in the village ¨C in the present time of Aethel ¨C but it was indeed more beautiful in that more primitive, more natural way.


    After returning to reality, William decided to specifically look for traces of civilization. He didn''t expect to find a city there, but maybe a village would suffice.


    He looked in every direction, and that''s when he noticed a small plume of smoke in the sky. William wasn''t foolish.


    ''That looks like a chimney or a bonfire,'' he thought.


    The smoke was coming from a less dense part of the forest and seemed to be near the river as well, but it wasn''t that close. William would have to walk for a long time to get there, especially considering how difficult it was to walk through the forest.


    But he had a question. Would the language spoken in this era be the same? He hadn''t read many books about Aethel''s past. From what he understood, all the kingdoms spoke the same language since they were once a single kingdom but had been divided.


    However, the time William was in seemed very primitive. Perhaps no kingdom even existed at that point.


    Even with those doubts in mind, William decided to venture out and go to the place where the smoke was. He needed to explore and use his skill in the best possible way. It didn''t make sense to use his SSS-rank skill just to stand still.


    Therefore, William descended from the tree and headed towards his destination. He decided to stay close to the river and use it to walk through the forest, thus having a point of reference.


    Not only that, but the vegetation was less dense near the river, allowing him to walk without having to cut through the forest all the time.


    However, William soon found the downside of his strategy. The river was a place where various kinds of magical beasts went to drink water, and he was attacked.


    The first creature that attacked him looked like a rabbit the size of a dog, its eyes were red, and its mouth had sharp teeth, like a shark''s.


    Its fur was brown, making it camouflage very well in the muddy parts of the forest. This magical mutant rabbit jumped towards William with its mouth open, wanting to bite his neck!


    The animal was fast, very fast. But of all William''s qualities, speed was his best. So much so that it was his highest attribute: 21 points in agility.


    He was able to dodge the creature''s attack in time, moving to the side with an agile and precise roll.


    As soon as he finished the roll, William drew his sword and decided to charge towards the rabbit, not giving it a chance to escape or attempt another attack.


    Again, his high agility helped him reach the rabbit swiftly, and with a slash of his sword, William struck the creature''s legs!


    After that, he jumped back, dodging the claw attack that the rabbit tried to land on him.


    "I already expected you to do that," William said out loud.


    The rabbit''s legs were injured from the sword strike. A lot of blood was flowing from the wounds, and William noticed that the creature''s movements were impaired.


    That was precisely the reason for the attack. William wasn''t stupid. He knew that for someone like him, who had speed as his best factor, this kind of hit-and-run combat was ideal until his opponent died.


    Some might call him a coward, but William wasn''t worried about that. In the end, he just wanted the EXP. He just wanted to get stronger.

 Chapter 23 Level Up, and Meeting Someone

    The rabbit even tried to attack William again, but was unable to. The bleeding was too intense, and with a few more sword strikes from William, the creature died.[+120 EXP]


    [Level UP]


    A smile spread across William''s face as he saw the level-up notification. Leveling up was the key to his survival and, more importantly, to his revenge. He remembered the humiliation he had suffered at the hands of the other heroes, and a wave of anger washed over him. ''I''ll show them what I''m capable of,'' he thought, clenching his fists. ''They''ll regret underestimating me.''


    After defeating the creature, William continued to follow the river, heading towards the smoke he had seen in the distance.


    He walked for a long time, making his way through the dense forest. The sound of his footsteps echoed through the woods, mingling with the birdsong and the buzzing of insects. Along the way, he fought some creatures ¡ª small goblins and giant spiders ¡ª but luckily, they were all weak.


    ''That smoke is even farther than I thought,'' William thought, wiping the sweat from his forehead.


    Finally, he reached the place where the smoke was coming from. Near the river, on a small hill, he saw a wooden house. It was a simple building, just one story, with log walls and a thatched roof. Around it, there were crops of corn, wheat, and pumpkins, and some animals ¡ª chickens pecking at the ground and cows grazing ¡ª completed the bucolic landscape.


    It was a cozy place, but William had no idea who lived there. What if it was a dangerous person? Above all, he needed to communicate. Would whoever lived there speak the same language?


    William walked slowly towards the house. As he approached, he noticed the curtain moving and a face staring curiously at him.


    It was an old man, with a long white beard and gray hair that fell over his shoulders. His clothes were simple and worn with time.


    The man seemed surprised to see William. He opened the door, but hesitantly said, "Stay a little further away for now. I don''t know you."


    William sighed with relief. He understood what the man said. ''Could it be some kind of summoned hero power?'' he wondered. ''Maybe my System is translating his language.''


    "Young man, what brings you to such an isolated place?" the old man asked, his voice raspy. "I''m surprised to see you alive. Walking through the forest is dangerous."


    "I''m lost," William replied, trying to appear as harmless as possible. "I''ve been attacked several times. Luckily, I have this," he said, showing the scabbard of his sword.


    The old man narrowed his eyes, looking at William suspiciously. "You don''t look like someone who''s lost in the woods," he said, frowning. "Your hair is neat, and your clothes are barely dirty."


    "I... I was careful," William stammered, disconcerted.


    "I see," the old man said after a pause. "How can I help you?"


    William, still a little awkward, asked, "I wanted to know if there is any civilization around here... Maybe a village or a city?"


    The old man shook his head. "Unfortunately not. You''ll have to walk for quite a while before you find a civilization. As far as I know, if you follow the river, you''ll eventually reach one. But as I said, traveling at night is not a good idea."


    The news was not good. A shadow of frustration crossed William''s face. ''That far? How will I get there?'' he thought, discouraged. He still didn''t know if he would be able to keep the progress he made within that dimension.


    The place where he appeared was the same place where he opened the portal in Aethel''s current time. This meant that he would have to travel the entire way again if he continued to open the portal in the same place.


    ''I need to find a way to save my progress. That''s the only way I''ll be able to reach civilization since it''s so far away...'' he thought, worried.


    William, curious, asked, "And what are you doing here, so far away from everyone?"


    The old man, with his tired look, said, "I was a powerful adventurer during my life. Now I just want to relax and be at peace. I''m tired of always being in trouble."


    "I understand...", said William, still unsure of what to do. "Well, thank you anyway. See you later, then."


    William turned to leave, but the old man called him: "Wait! Are you crazy, young man? You can''t go at night. Spend the night here, at least. I can offer you a bed in the barn."


    William hesitated for a moment. '' Should I trust him? He seems harmless, but...'' he thought cautiously. But the prospect of spending the night alone in the forest was even more frightening.


    "Thank you," said William with a grateful smile. "I accept your offer."


    The old man smiled back and led William to the barn. It was a rustic building, with wooden walls and the smell of hay. In the corner, there was a makeshift bed with a straw mattress and some blankets. "I hope it''s comfortable enough," said the old man.


    "It''s perfect," replied William, feeling relieved and grateful for the unexpected hospitality.


    William was a little tired; this was the first negative thing about his ability. While time passed normally in that dimension, it would remain static in Aethel''s current time.


    In other words, extended stays in this dimension could disrupt his sleep patterns and lead to exhaustion. But the rewards far outweighed the risks, in William''s mind.


    As he lay down on the makeshift bed, a notification surprised him.


    [Resting place detected. Would you like to set this location as your respawn point?]


    Excited by the prospect of a reliable haven, William eagerly accepted. At least one of his problems had been solved.


    As soon as night came, William decided to sleep and woke up back on that hill near Willow Creek. The morning sun was shining brightly, and the air was fresh and invigorating.


    William got up, feeling rested after a good night''s sleep.


    ''It''s good that I managed to save my progress,'' he thought, observing the surrounding landscape. The dense forest stretched to the horizon, and the sound of the river flowing in the distance broke the silence of the morning.


    After spending the time limit in the dimension, William had to return. Finding the first person in that dimension made him feel great, even if he hadn''t gained that many levels.


    It was normal for evolution to slow down as the level increased. But William was determined to get stronger.


    ''I need to be prepared for any challenge,'' he thought as he descended the hill towards Gorn''s house. S§×ar?h the N?velFire(.)net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.

 Chapter 24 Three Days

    William returned to the village. The narrow dirt streets were practically deserted. Most of the villagers remained in their homes, with doors and windows locked. The fear of the corrupted beasts still hung in the air, creating a somber and oppressive atmosphere.But the presence of the adventurers brought some relief. They patrolled the streets, with gleaming armor and weapons in hand, ready to defend the village from any threat. If any villager needed to go out into the forest, one of the adventurers would accompany them, ensuring their safety.


    Their mission was not only to protect the villagers but also to investigate the cause of the corruption affecting the magical beasts. They were experienced warriors, sent from the capital to solve the mystery that plagued the region.


    As soon as William arrived at Gorn''s house, he heard him talking to Aella, one of the adventurers. She was a tall and imposing woman, with a serious expression and piercing eyes. Her leather armor was impeccably polished, and a long sword hung from her belt.


    "Are you sure the corruption is coming from that place? From that cave?" Gorn asked, his voice full of concern.


    Aella nodded firmly. "Yes. It''s coming from a cave near the river. We found traces that confirm our discovery, but we haven''t been there to check yet."


    The most impressive thing was that the cave in question was close to where William had been summoned by Elric''s magic.


    ''Could Elric be the reason for this corruption?'' William wondered, intrigued. Elric had summoned the heroes and sent him away with powerful magic.


    Gorn noticed William''s arrival and interrupted his conversation with Aella.


    "William! How are you? I heard you went to get some air on the hill."


    "Actually, I went to train," William replied. "I have a lot of magic to learn now."


    "Yes, indeed," Gorn agreed. "Well, I believe you heard our conversation. Remember not to go there, okay? Leave this dangerous mission to us."


    Gorn didn''t want William to get involved in the mission. It was too dangerous for a young man still as weak as he was.


    But William thought differently. He was getting stronger quickly and wanted to test his progress.


    "I understand, Gorn," William said. "I won''t go there. But... do you have any idea when you''re going to explore the cave?"


    "Well..." Gorn began as he searched for a drink in the kitchen. "I think in about three days? We still want to clear the area well to ensure there aren''t too many monsters while we''re away."


    William smiled. "And what if I happen to master my first skill, Swiftfoot, in three days? Would you let me go?"


    Gorn seemed surprised. "Master that skill in three days? Even though it''s a beginner level skill, it''s impossible to master in three days. Well, that skill would give you a better chance of escaping if something happened, so yes, I''d let you go without a problem if you mastered it in three days." Sear?h the N?velFire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    He didn''t believe William could master the skill in three days. Not that William lacked talent, but mastering a skill took time.


    ''I can work hard and use my SSS skill to train in that place without losing time. That will increase my chances! '' William thought, a determined glint in his eyes.


    Determined, William went to his room in Gorn''s house and resumed his training. He focused on drawing the runes for the Swiftfoot skill. With each attempt, the runes glowed brighter and lingered longer in the air. It was a sign that he was improving, albeit slowly.


    He was so engrossed in his practice that he didn''t notice Maya enter the room. She stood silently in the doorway, her eyes wide with fascination as she watched him manipulate the magical energy. To her, magic was mysterious, powerful, and beautiful¡ªsomething she yearned to learn one day.


    "Why don''t you ask your father if you can try it? You might have a talent for magic," William suggested, noticing her presence.


    Maya shook her head. "I don''t know if he''ll approve. But I''ll try, okay? Imagine if we could both learn magic at the academy!"


    Realizing she was getting carried away, Maya excused herself. "I''ll go see if Elara needs help in the kitchen. See you later."


    Maya rushed out the door, her face flushed. She desperately searched for a place to hide her embarrassment.


    William, oblivious to her distress, was preoccupied with his newfound skill. The progress he was making thrilled him.


    He devoted the remainder of the day to honing his Swiftfoot technique. He paused occasionally for meals and, at one point, showered to avoid his room becoming unbearable.


    By nightfall, exhaustion had taken hold. After a day of intense rune drawing and mana control, William craved rest.


    He slept soundly through the night. Like a stoic rock beside the ocean, he remained undisturbed by any waves of noise or movement. Nothing could rouse him from his slumber.


    The following morning began with breakfast and farewells.


    "Heading to the hill for training, alright?" William called out as he departed.


    William was intensely focused on improving. He was determined to master that skill within three days, and with the dedication he displayed, it just might be possible.


    One of his greatest assets was his SSS-rank special ability, which he activated immediately upon reaching the hill.


    The cooldown period had ended. A portal materialized before William, and he stepped through.


    He found himself in the familiar barn the old man had offered him for shelter. It was early morning.


    William emerged from the barn, his movements catching the old man''s attention. "Awake, are you? How about some breakfast?" he inquired.


    Although he had just eaten, William wouldn''t refuse the offer.


    "That would be great!" William replied, entering the old man''s house.


    The interior of the house was tidy and clean. The furniture was simple, made of wood, but everything was spotless. William noted the old man''s care for his home.


    "My name is Jinra, by the way. And yours?" the old man said.


    "William. It''s a pleasure to meet you."


    "William... an unusual name. Well, no matter. Please, have a seat," Jinra said, gesturing towards a chair.


    Breakfast was already prepared, consisting of eggs from the chickens he raised. William ate lightly, not wanting to appear impolite in Jinra''s home.


    "Any plans for today, young man?" Jinra inquired.


    William considered for a moment before replying, "Actually, I''m hoping to learn this skill."


    He produced the Swiftfoot manual, and to his surprise, the man seemed familiar with it!


    "Ah, a body enhancement magic. Yes, I know how to use this skill, and many others. Would you like some help?"


    William couldn''t contain his happiness. ''Did I just find a mentor?''

 Chapter 25 Learning from an Old Master

    Jinra was impressive. William watched him utilize Swiftfoot, the very skill he was struggling to learn.But Jinra executed the ability with far greater speed and mastery. The runes appeared in the air in less than a second, then flew towards his body. William could sense the difference in Jinra.


    "The runes attach to the body, providing the benefits of the magic in question," Jinra explained, pulling back his sleeve to reveal the runes inscribed on his skin.


    They resembled tattoos.


    "You make it look so easy," William said, staring at the ground. "I''m trying to learn, but I can barely keep the runes in the air."


    "Let me see you do it," Jinra said.


    William nodded, then mirrored the old mage''s actions. He visualized the specific runes for the Swiftfoot spell, and attempted to form them.


    To do this, he needed to manipulate his mana precisely, or the runes wouldn''t appear at all. He was already good enough to form the runes without a problem, the difficulty lay in sustaining them with enough energy to stabilize the spell.


    Jinra watched him form the runes¡ªmuch slower than he himself could¡ªand hold them in the air. But after about five seconds, they flickered and dissolved.


    "Tell me," Jinra said, his gaze intent, "why didn''t you complete the spell? Cast the runes onto your body."


    The request caught William off guard. He hadn''t expected that at all. His reasoning was simple: according to his studies, one needed to maintain the runes intact for a full minute. Only then would a mage be ready to cast the spell itself.


    But Jinra clearly disagreed. Was this common knowledge among more ancient mages? Or was it unique to him?


    "What do you mean? I thought I had to hold the runes for a full minute before I could cast the spell," William said, confusion evident in his voice.


    Jinra chuckled, a deep rumble in his chest. "Where did you learn that, young one? That theory was refuted long ago by the elves. They are the most skilled magic users we know."


    "What?" William exclaimed, shocked. Sear?h the Nov§×l?ire.n(e)t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "Their studies showed that it''s best to cast the spell directly. This allows you to master the skill much faster," Jinra explained.


    William had been using his SSS-Class skill recently, and it was already paying dividends. Of course, he still needed to test Jinra''s claims, but the prospect was exciting.


    ''There must be something to this,'' William thought. ''Surely other mages must have tried casting the spell before mastering the runes...''


    He couldn''t fathom a world where no other mage had attempted this. In fact, if this method was superior according to elven research, why wasn''t anyone in Aethel currently using it?


    "But there''s a secret, of course," Jinra continued, his voice drawing William back to the present. "You know how you''re channeling mana into the runes to sustain them? You must stop channeling and then cast them onto your body. The feeling is similar to when you''re absorbing mana."


    William listened intently. "But is there any danger in using magic this way?" he asked. It seemed far superior to the method he was accustomed to, so William was wary. There had to be a catch.


    Jinra nodded. "Yes. Forcing the runes onto your body before you have complete control, like holding them for a full minute as you mentioned, can damage your body. That''s why the secret lies in physical training. Most mages neglect this completely, assuming it''s only for warriors."


    He was beginning to understand the key difference between ancient and modern mages. In present-day Aethel, mages rarely focused on physical conditioning. The only exceptions were battle mages like William.


    Scholarship and research had become paramount, leading to a predominantly academic environment. This explained the widespread adherence to the method of sustaining runes for a full minute before attempting to cast a spell.


    William theorized that because Aethel was a far more dangerous place in ancient times¡ªwith fewer safe havens and beasts lurking everywhere¡ªpeople needed to master magic quickly, and their bodies were naturally more resilient due to the harsh conditions.


    It seemed to him that mages of the past were inherently stronger. Everything he had read and heard supported this: the most powerful mages and warriors in human history all hailed from bygone eras.


    "I understand," William said, a thoughtful frown creasing his brow. "Do you think my body is prepared to handle this skill?"


    Jinra stepped closer, placing a hand on William''s shoulder. He closed his eyes, concentrating. After a moment, he opened them and declared, "Yes, you are ready. In fact, your body is quite strong for someone who doesn''t specifically train for it. Are you already at level 12?"


    "Yes, exactly. How did you know?" William asked, surprised. He could sense the aura of his opponents to get a general idea of their power, but discerning their exact level was impossible.


    "I can tell because I''m touching you and concentrating," Jinra explained. "It''s usually difficult to determine someone''s level during combat. And honestly, levels shouldn''t be your primary focus. Attributes can be increased in other ways, and it''s quite common for people with lower levels to be incredibly strong."


    William was absorbing a wealth of new information. Eager to put it into practice, he decided to attempt the spell. Just as before, he formed the runes. Once they were stable, he stopped channeling mana and focused on absorbing them into his body.


    It worked on the first try! The runes flowed into him, and he could feel the difference instantly.


    "It worked! I feel so much faster," William exclaimed, a grin spreading across his face.


    [+20 Agility points]


    [+10% movement speed]


    Jinra was impressed. "You learn quickly. Congratulations. Now your focus should be on using the skill and maximizing its potential. In the case of Swiftfoot, that means running and jumping around to take advantage of the extra speed."


    He was subtly encouraging William to practice diligently, but this was already a fantastic start.


    William, brimming with excitement, left Jinra''s house and ventured outside. He began running and climbing trees, just as Jinra had suggested. Everything felt easier, more fluid. He couldn''t wait to show Gorn his progress.


    ''He''ll be shocked!'' he thought, a surge of anticipation coursing through him.

 Chapter 26 Sincere Talk with Jinra

    Running and climbing were excellent ways to utilize the benefits of Swiftfoot, but Jinra had more in mind. He challenged William to a sparring session¡ªwith wooden swords, of course.From the first clash, William realized Jinra was incredibly skilled, far surpassing even Gorn, who was already a formidable warrior.


    "Forgive my curiosity," William asked, panting between parries, "were you part of the army or something similar?"


    Although the kingdom was much smaller back then, it still had a standing army.


    "Indeed, you are correct," Jinra replied, a grin flashing across his face as he effortlessly deflected a blow. "I was the commander of the army, though I am now retired."


    "That explains a lot! You''re incredibly strong. I don''t stand a chance against you," William admitted, breathless from the exertion. sea??h th§× N?vel?ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "Relax, William," Jinra said with a chuckle, his movements still fluid despite his age. "I reckon the number of people who could best me in combat is quite small, even in my old age. You are a bit behind others your age, but you possess greater potential."


    Once again, the differences between eras were stark. William knew he was decent in combat¡ªnot exceptional, but better than most mages and battle mages his age who focused solely on research while studying at the magic academies. Yet, he was still far behind the mages and battle mages of the past.


    "What do I need to reach their level?" William asked, gritting his teeth as he parried a swift strike.


    "Experience," Jinra replied, his wooden sword a blur of motion. "It''s common for Acolytes to embark on practical missions, hunting beasts and the like. With time, you''ll improve as well."


    From time to time, William''s Swiftfoot spell would wear off, and he''d need to recast it. Even with his passive skill enhancing the duration of his body-enhancement magic, it didn''t last forever.


    Furthermore, he was still learning, so the duration was even shorter. But Jinra patiently waited for him, seemingly content with the breaks. In fact, he appeared genuinely happy to have the company.


    "It''s wonderful to have someone to talk to and practice with," Jinra admitted, leaning against a weathered oak tree. "Despite enjoying the solitude here, I''ve been feeling a bit lonely lately. It''s been two years since I moved here."


    "Why did you move?" William asked, curious. The two were sitting on the grass, taking a break from their sparring session.


    "My son is in the army, so I don''t have much time to see him," Jinra explained, a hint of sadness in his voice. "And my grandson is studying at a magic school. I came here to have some time alone after my wife passed away, but I think I''ll return to the city soon to be closer to them."


    An idea sparked in William''s mind. He could travel to the city with Jinra! That would make his journey far easier and safer.


    Jinra seemed to read his thoughts, or perhaps he anticipated them after William''s earlier inquiries about the nearest city. "Soon for me means at least a year," Jinra said, a knowing smile playing on his lips. "And I imagine you won''t be staying here that long. After all, if you want to enroll in a magic school, you need to be in the city in six months."


    A magic school in this era... The prospect intrigued William. He had already considered enrolling in one back in present-day Aethel. If he could attend one in the past as well, he could gain an even deeper understanding of magic!


    "But wouldn''t it be dangerous for me to travel alone?" William asked, a hint of worry in his voice.


    "Not particularly," Jinra reassured him. "The journey to the city takes two months, so we have roughly three months to train. Considering your progress, I''m confident I can make you capable enough to survive on your own in that time."


    "And there''s more," Jinra added, his eyes twinkling. "You can travel with others who are also seeking entry into the school. I believe a caravan departs from a village not too far from here. I can guide you there when the time comes."


    Things seemed to be falling into place for William. He had found a powerful mentor¡ªwho, unfortunately, could only teach him for three months¡ªbut he already had a plan to enroll in a magic school and further his magical education!


    "I understand," William said, a renewed determination burning in his eyes. "Well then, let''s get back to training. I can''t afford to relax just yet." He rose and retrieved his wooden sword.


    Jinra smiled, his eyes crinkling at the corners. "Eager to take another beating from me, are you?"


    They resumed their sparring, training for hours. The constant use of Swiftfoot drained William''s mana, and he eventually needed to rest. Sustaining the spell for hours on end was impossible for him at this stage. In fact, Jinra was surprised he had lasted as long as he did.


    "Unfortunately, you''ll have to sleep in the barn again," Jinra said as the sun began to dip below the horizon. "And it''s not because I''m suspicious of you. It''s just that I only have the one bedroom. Is that alright with you?"


    Of all the challenges William faced, sleeping in a less-than-comfortable bed was hardly a concern.


    "No problem at all," William replied gratefully. "Thank you for the training."


    "Think nothing of it. I appreciate the company. I''m going to make us some dinner, so go take a bath. You reek," Jinra said, wrinkling his nose in mock disgust. He headed back to the house and tossed William a towel.


    While William had been pushed to his limits during the training, Jinra seemed as fresh as a daisy. It was truly remarkable.


    William made his way to the river to bathe. Perhaps it was Jinra''s presence in the area, but no creatures dared to disturb him as he washed off the sweat and grime.


    By the time he returned, dinner was almost ready. Jinra had prepared a venison stew from a deer he had hunted and some potatoes he had grown near his house. The aroma was intoxicating, and William''s stomach rumbled in anticipation.


    He checked his System; it indicated he still had two hours remaining in this dimension. Plenty of time to eat and settle down for the night before returning.

 Chapter 27 Impressing Gorn

    William took the opportunity to engage in further conversation with Jinra during dinner. They had grown closer, and William was always eager to learn from those with more experience."You''re doing very well," Jinra praised him, a warm smile gracing his weathered features. "But remember, this is just the beginning. The training will become progressively more challenging."


    It wasn''t as if William hadn''t expected that. Or rather, hadn''t wanted that. He was eager to push himself.


    "Thank you," William replied, "and yes, I know. Well, I think I''ll get some rest, Jinra. We can talk more tomorrow, right?"


    "Of course," Jinra assured him.


    William''s time in the past was dwindling. He returned to the barn where he was sleeping and lay down, feigning sleep. He wasn''t particularly tired yet, but he wanted to be ready to return to the present when the time came.


    And then, just like that, he found himself back on the hill where he had opened the portal. The time was exactly the same as when he had used the skill ¨C early morning.


    ''It seems time freezes in the past while I''m gone, too'' William mused. ''I suppose that''s how my skill works at least...''


    It seemed to make the most sense, but he couldn''t be sure. One thing was certain: time in the present didn''t progress while he was in the past.


    After spending a couple of hours enjoying the view, William decided to return to Gorn''s cabin. He pretended to have been out training, as returning immediately after leaving would seem strange.


    Gorn was waiting for him. "How was the training?" he asked, his eyes filled with curiosity.


    William was tempted to reveal that he had already learned Swiftfoot. If it were anyone else, he might have hesitated. But Gorn was someone he trusted.


    "If I tell you," William began, leaning in conspiratorially, "do you promise to keep it a secret? Especially from those adventurers I don''t trust."


    Gorn frowned, a bit confused. "Of course, but what do you mean? I don''t understand."


    With a grin, William declared, thumping his chest, "I can already use Swiftfoot! Just don''t tell anyone that I learned it so quickly. That''s what I want to keep secret."


    "What?!" Gorn exclaimed, his voice booming through the cabin.


    "Stop joking around," Gorn scoffed, though a hint of wonder flickered in his eyes. "I know you''re talented, but that''s just impossible." S~ea??h the ¦Çov§×lFire .net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    William wasn''t offended. In fact, exceeding Gorn''s expectations by such a wide margin felt exhilarating.


    Without a word, he channeled his mana, constructing the runes for Swiftfoot. Then, he seamlessly imbued them into his body, activating the spell''s effects.


    Gorn watched intently, his jaw slack with disbelief. He was speechless, utterly stunned by the display.


    After a long moment, he finally managed to stammer, "Th-that''s... incredible. Truly incredible. It seems like a waste for you to stay here in this village. Have you ever considered formally studying magic at a school?"


    Just as Jinra had encouraged William to pursue formal magical education, Gorn seemed to share the sentiment.


    "I''ve never really considered it," William admitted, pondering the idea. "Is it truly worth it?"


    "Of course!" Gorn exclaimed, his enthusiasm bubbling over. "Not only will you learn a great deal, but upon graduating, you''ll have numerous paths to choose from. You could become a researcher, a professor at a magic school, or even join the army at a much higher rank. People with average talent do very well in life with formal training, so imagine what you could achieve!"


    Jinra hadn''t emphasized these benefits, which was understandable. Times were different then. There were fewer cities, fewer schools, and everything was far more primitive. But in present-day Aethel, things were different.


    "Now that you mention it," William said, his interest piqued, "studying does sound very appealing. Am I even the right age to enroll?" He wondered if there were younger students or if he would be at a disadvantage compared to those who had started earlier.


    "Most students enroll earlier," Gorn explained, "but it''s not uncommon to have older students. However, you would likely be placed in an advanced class, which means you''ll need to study diligently. I believe recruitment begins in six months..."


    Remarkably, it was the same recruitment period Jinra had mentioned. Had the recruitment window remained unchanged throughout history, or was it merely a coincidence?


    Regardless, William now had a goal to strive for in the next six months, and the prospect filled him with excitement.


    "And Gorn," William began, a slight hesitation in his voice, "regarding Maya..."


    Gorn immediately interjected, "If you''re smitten with her, I''ll consent to your marriage, but only after you graduate and make something of yourself."


    William blushed, slightly embarrassed. "Actually, I just wanted to talk about possibly sending her to study magic as well... She''s very curious to learn."


    "Oh," Gorn mumbled, rubbing the back of his neck sheepishly. "That''s what you meant..."


    "Well, I''ll talk to her, and maybe start some training as well," Gorn replied, stroking his beard thoughtfully. "But I think she''ll likely enter the school in a year''s time. I want her to have a solid foundation before she goes."


    "Alright, I understand," William said. "Well, I''m going to my room to read for a bit..."


    "Of course, go ahead," Gorn said with a wave of his hand.


    William headed to his room, intending to take a nap. He was feeling the effects of his disrupted sleep from traveling between the past and present.


    Now that he had practically mastered Swiftfoot, William decided to start learning the other skill he had purchased: Kinetic Burst. This skill would grant him a short-range teleportation ability, like a dash or blink. It would undoubtedly prove useful in combat and exploration.


    He still had two days until their expedition to the cave to investigate the corruption plaguing Willow Creek, and William was determined to learn this new skill before then.


    With his newfound approach to mastering skills, he was confident he could do it. The only problem was that his SSS-ranked skill was still on cooldown, meaning he couldn''t visit Jinra for guidance.


    ''When will it be off cooldown?'' William wondered, frustrated. The information wasn''t displayed in his System interface. He pushed the thought aside and focused on learning Kinetic Burst.


    Two days passed, and things in the village took a turn for the worse...

 Chapter 28 Unexpected Sight at the Caves Depths

    Despite the adventurers'' constant patrols, the situation in the village remained tense. The unsettling aura of corruption still clung to the air, a constant reminder of the looming threat. The villagers knew true relief would only come once the source was destroyed.The plan was to explore the cave ¨C the suspected origin point ¨C in three days. However, a day earlier than anticipated, a pillar of black light erupted from the earth, a beacon of darkness rising towards the sky.


    The adventurers, alerted to the ominous phenomenon, gathered in front of Gorn''s house.


    "It''s coming from the direction of the cave," Kael announced, his brow furrowed with concern. "We''ll have to go there and put an end to this."


    Borin and Aella nodded in agreement. Gorn, his expression grim, concurred. And William, despite the obvious danger, felt a surge of determination. He needed to push himself, to face challenges head-on if he wanted to grow stronger.


    Gorn, as the one financing the adventurers and a formidable warrior in his own right, naturally assumed leadership. He commanded the respect of the group.


    "Let''s head there," he declared, his voice ringing with authority. "Today, this situation ends!" He turned towards the house. "Elara, Maya, stay inside and keep everything locked," he instructed. "William will be coming with me this time."


    "What?" everyone exclaimed in unison.


    Elara and Maya were shocked. In their eyes, William was still too inexperienced to face such a threat. The adventurers, too, were taken aback.


    "Are you sure?" Aella questioned, her voice laced with worry. "This will be dangerous, and he''s just a young, untested Acolyte."


    Gorn, a man of his word, wouldn''t go back on his promise to William. "Yes, I''m sure," he stated firmly. "Let''s go."


    They sped through the forest, their pace brisk. William struggled to keep up; the adventurers and Gorn were undeniably powerful, their strides eating up the terrain with ease. But he pushed himself, his agility, his greatest strength, propelling him forward. He refused to fall behind.


    Soon, they arrived at the source of the ominous pillar of black energy. As they had suspected, it emanated from within the cave, its entrance shrouded in an unnatural darkness.


    "This is the place," Kael said, his voice low and serious, "the source of the energy corrupting the magical creatures. We need to proceed with caution."


    "Indeed," Borin added, his hand resting on the hilt of his sword. "With this much energy pouring out, if a creature has been corrupted here, it will be incredibly powerful."


    They advanced slowly into the cave, weapons at the ready. Kael notched an arrow in his bow, Aella clutched her wooden staff, and Borin hefted his greatsword. Gorn and William mirrored his stance, swords drawn, their senses alert for any sign of danger.


    It was nighttime, and William realized this area was where he had materialized after being teleported by Elric''s magic. He remembered it vividly because of the wolf attack and Gorn''s timely rescue. Of course, it wasn''t the exact same spot, and he had no recollection of the cave itself, but the familiarity of the surroundings offered a strange sense of d¨¦j¨¤ vu.


    Aella, a mage specializing in long-range magic, conjured an orb of light, illuminating the cavern with an ethereal glow.


    ''Incredible!'' William thought, impressed. It was like a floating torch, providing illumination without occupying either of her hands. Aella summoned several more, expertly directing them to reveal hidden corners and crevices.


    "It''s eerily quiet," Gorn commented, his voice echoing in the cavern. "But we need to reach the end. The source of the dark energy must be there."


    Everyone agreed. William felt a knot of anxiety tighten in his stomach, his heart pounding, and a thin sheen of sweat forming on his brow. Gorn, noticing his apprehension, placed a reassuring hand on his shoulder. "Relax, lad. I''m here to protect you."


    His words calmed William somewhat, but he remained vigilant. Thankfully, no beasts attacked them on their journey deeper into the cave. And then, they reached the end.


    What they found there was completely unexpected. A lone man stood before an altar, clad in leather garments, resembling a hunter from the surrounding woods. He grasped a sword plunged into the stone, a blade as black as obsidian, radiating the malevolent energy that had plagued the village.


    The hunter, startled by their arrival, erupted in manic laughter. "You''re too late!" he cackled. "I will be the one to claim this treasure! This power will be mine!"


    He wrenched the sword free, and the pillar of dark energy surged into his body. Black veins spider-webbed across his skin as his mana spiked dramatically. It was a different kind of mana, chaotic and sinister.


    "Damn it," Gorn cursed, his eyes narrowing. "That''s a demonic artifact. Prepare for battle! This man is about to become a serious threat!"


    A dark aura crackled around the hunter''s transformed body, his former weakness replaced by an ominous power. The black veins pulsed with an alien energy, and his eyes burned with malevolent intent.


    William''s mind reeled. ''A demonic artifact? This is bad! This wasn''t part of the plan!'' He knew little about such artifacts, but the name alone spoke volumes.


    The hunter, now a vessel for demonic power, swung the obsidian sword in a horizontal arc. A crescent of dark energy materialized, hurtling towards William and the others.


    Evasion was impossible. But Aella reacted with impressive speed, conjuring a shimmering blue barrier just in time. The dark energy slammed against it, the contrasting colors painting the cavern in an eerie light. S§×ar?h the Nov§×l?ire.n(e)t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "I can''t hold this for long if he attacks like that again!" Aella shouted, her voice strained with effort. "Please, attack!"


    Kael was the first to strike. With practiced precision, he etched runes onto his arrow, imbuing it with an icy aura. Then, with a smooth draw and release, he loosed the projectile.


    The force behind the arrow was incredible. It struck the hunter squarely in the chest, the impact echoing through the cavern. For a fleeting moment, hope surged through the group. The attack had landed cleanly, and the wound appeared grievous. But then, the hunter simply ripped the arrow from his chest, the injury closing with unnatural speed.


    A chilling laughter echoed through the cavern. "You will all die here today!" he roared, his voice infused with demonic power.

 Chapter 29 A Fierce Battle

    The demonic hunter lunged at Kael, obsidian sword poised to strike. He wasn''t foolish; Kael, with his bow, was a priority target.His speed was startling. In a blink, he was upon Kael, the deadly blade a hair''s breadth away. "Die!" he rasped, his voice a guttural growl.


    But Gorn reacted instantly, intercepting the attack with his own sword. The clash of steel resonated through the cavern, forcing Gorn back a few steps. He held his ground, though, his expression unwavering.


    Meanwhile, Aella was already weaving her magic. The cave floor beneath the demon''s feet turned to quicksand, trapping his legs in its grasp. Gorn, thankfully, was outside the spell''s area of effect.


    "Now! Long-range attacks!" Aella commanded.


    She and Kael began casting more powerful spells, their incantations echoing off the cavern walls. These were clearly not simple, instant spells.


    William watched intently, assessing the flow of the battle. He judged the demonically empowered hunter to be strong, but likely still weaker than Gorn and the seasoned adventurers.


    ''He might have the upper hand in a one-on-one fight,'' William thought, ''but we have the advantage of numbers...''


    And indeed, that advantage was proving decisive. While the hunter struggled to free himself from the magical quicksand, more attacks were incoming.


    Kael invoked runes, enchanting three arrows simultaneously, each imbued with the power of fire. Aella, in a synchronized assault, conjured a blazing fireball.


    The temperature in the cave spiked dramatically. Gorn pulled William back, his grip firm. "The impact will be nasty. Let''s give them some space."


    William readily agreed, retreating to a safer distance. Just then, the three fiery arrows and the searing fireball found their mark. S§×ar?h the nov§×lF~ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    The resulting explosion was deafening. The cavern shook violently, and small rocks rained down from the ceiling. William''s heart leaped into his throat. ''This damn cave is going to collapse¡­''


    But thankfully, it held. Flames engulfed the area around the trapped hunter.


    "Did we get him?" Aella wondered aloud, her voice a mix of hope and uncertainty.


    The smoke gradually dissipated, revealing the hunter''s charred and broken form. His clothes were reduced to tattered remnants, and the obsidian sword lay abandoned on the ground beside him.


    "Seems our fire attacks were effective," Kael said, a triumphant grin spreading across his face. "Our team always prevails, doesn''t it? We''re one of the best!"


    Overconfident, he strode towards the fallen figure. The others exchanged uneasy glances.


    "Don''t get too close, Kael," Borin cautioned. "We need to be sure he''s dead."


    But it was too late. With a sudden burst of energy, the demon snatched up the sword and lunged, plunging the blade deep into Kael''s heart. It was a fatal blow.


    "Gah..." Kael gasped, his eyes widening in shock and pain.


    The demon''s laughter echoed cruelly through the cavern. "I told you, you will all die here today! Foolish humans!"


    The adventurers faltered. Borin and Aella froze, unsure how to react to the sudden turn of events.


    Gorn, however, remained calm. And so did William. He had been observing the fight closely, and a crucial detail had caught his attention.


    "Aella," William said urgently, "the demonic energy is fading fast! If we can keep him contained, we can win this!"


    His words snapped Aella back into focus. She concentrated, and indeed, the demon''s aura was diminishing.


    With renewed determination, she attempted to ensnare the demon''s feet once more with her quicksand spell. But this time, he was ready. With a powerful leap, he evaded the attack and charged towards Aella.


    Borin intercepted the demon, his sword meeting the obsidian blade with a resounding clang. But unlike Gorn, he couldn''t withstand the demonic power. The black sword sliced through his shoulder, drawing a cry of pain.


    Blood gushed from the wound, the severity of the injury evident. It was clear that Gorn was the only one with the strength to face the demon now.


    With a roar, Gorn charged, his sword raised high. "I am your opponent now!" he bellowed, meeting the demon''s furious assault head-on.


    The demon seemed genuinely surprised by Gorn''s display of skill. "Not bad, old man," he sneered, "but you''re past your prime. You know you can''t win."


    The dark energy surging through the hunter''s body intensified, exceeding even its initial levels. It wasn''t just the quantity of demonic power, but its potency. It was as if he was unleashing its full force all at once.


    The demon became a blur of motion, his strength amplified. He and Gorn clashed in a whirlwind of steel, their swords meeting in a furious exchange of blows.


    "Steel Skin!" Gorn roared, his voice echoing through the cavern.


    "Featherweight!"


    "Sharpened Senses!"


    He activated a series of body-enhancement skills, each far exceeding William''s in both level and mastery. Gorn''s power surged, matching the demon''s increased ferocity.


    The sounds of their battle reverberated through the cave, the clang of steel and guttural roars filling the air. Aella desperately wanted to help, but the two combatants were moving with such blinding speed that she couldn''t risk a mistimed spell.


    William, too, could only watch, his heart pounding in his chest.


    Despite the boost from his magic, Gorn was still outmatched. The demon, seizing an opportunity, landed a vicious kick to Gorn''s stomach, momentarily throwing him off balance. In that instant, the obsidian blade flashed, slicing deep into Gorn''s arm.


    A cry of pain escaped Gorn''s lips. The Steel Skin skill had prevented him from losing the limb entirely, but the wound was severe, hindering his movements.


    The situation was deteriorating rapidly. William felt a surge of adrenaline, the pressure to act overwhelming. He couldn''t just stand by and watch.


    But before he could step forward, Borin''s hand clamped down on his shoulder, holding him back. "Leave this to me, lad," he rumbled, his voice surprisingly steady despite the grim situation.


    Borin, a mountain of a man with a gentle heart, charged towards the demon, his roar shaking the very foundations of the cave.


    "Die, you monster!"


    He swung his greatsword, but the demon, empowered by the dark artifact, was far too strong. The attack was effortlessly parried, and in a swift, brutal counter, Borin''s head was severed from his body. He crumpled to the ground, lifeless.

 Chapter 30 By Someone Like You

    William''s mind raced. Two adventurers, who seemed like decent people, were dead. Aella was the only one left from their group. Gorn, despite his wounded arm, appeared ready to fight, but his power had clearly waned.''Damn it... I don''t know if I can face that thing,'' William thought, fear gnawing at his resolve. Even with his recent progress, he was nowhere near the demon''s level.


    Gorn, ever perceptive, addressed them, "I''ll use a technique to weaken him, but after that, it''s the two of you against him. Understood?"


    Before William or Aella could respond, Gorn began casting his spell. Twenty intricate runes materialized around him, shimmering with potent energy.


    Aella, a mage with extensive knowledge, gasped. "Th-that''s a high-level spell!" she exclaimed. "Just who is this man?"


    The runes converged on Gorn, sinking into his flesh. His eyes blazed with an intense blue light, and the mana in the atmosphere surged towards him, drawn to his form like moths to a flame. He became a conduit for raw magical power. The runes enhanced his mana absorption and granted him the capacity to withstand the immense influx of energy.


    His muscles bulged, his entire body growing in size. He reached a towering height of three meters, his clothes tearing under the strain of his newfound power.


    William stared in awe. ''G-Gorn is incredible!''


    Fear flickered in the demon''s eyes, but it was too late. Gorn charged, his fist cocked back. The blow landed with earth-shattering force, caving in the demon''s chest and sending him flying through the cavern wall, crashing into the forest outside.


    After the devastating attack, Gorn reverted to his normal size, collapsing to one knee. He was visibly weakened.


    "F-finish the job," he gasped, his voice hoarse. "I can''t fight anymore. I need to rest..."


    That devastating blow was the last act Gorn could muster in the fight.


    Aella and William emerged from the cave through the gaping hole created by Gorn''s attack. Near a towering oak, they found the demon, his body ravaged, a gaping wound in his chest, blood staining the forest floor.


    Yet, impossibly, he rose to his feet. William felt a wave of terror wash over him. The sheer power granted by the demonic artifact was horrifying.


    "D-do you think you can kill me?" the demon rasped, his voice laced with malice. "That old man is out of the fight, leaving just the two of you. A mage and a weakling who can barely cast a spell. This will be easy."


    Aella, though shaken by the loss of her companions, steeled herself. "I''m still standing," she declared, her voice firm. "Don''t underestimate me."


    The demon laughed, a chilling sound that echoed through the trees. "Oh, I don''t underestimate you, mage. You''re probably only weaker than that brute back in the cave. But a mage is only strong if they can use their magic, wouldn''t you agree?"


    Aella frowned, confused, but then she understood. The demon had one more trick up his sleeve.


    With the last vestiges of his demonic energy, he conjured a cage of dark energy around Aella, trapping her within its confines. This wasn''t just a physical barrier; it was a magic-suppressing prison. Aella was completely incapacitated, unable to cast even a single spell.


    William and the demon were alone.


    "Sorry, kid, but I have to do this," the demon said, a cruel smile twisting his lips. "This power I''ve gained from the demon lord is just the beginning. We will dominate this world. And even if you humans try to summon your heroes, we won''t lose!"


    ''Summon heroes? So my classmates and I were brought to this world to fight the demon lord?'' William thought, his mind reeling.


    He recalled Elric mentioning the Shadow Lord and his impending return to Aethel. Could the demon lord and the Shadow Lord be the same entity? It seemed plausible, considering the corruption was linked to this demonic energy.


    "I can fight too," William declared, drawing his sword. He activated Swiftfoot, enhancing his agility and speed.


    [+20 Agility points]


    [+10% movement speed]


    He felt the familiar surge of power. The demon clapped slowly, a mocking smile on his lips. "My, my, you can use magic after all. I underestimated you. But is it enough?"


    Despite his wounds, the demon''s speed was still formidable. He lunged at William, the obsidian sword aimed at his head.


    William reacted instantly, parrying the blow. Swiftfoot allowed him to match the demon''s movements, but only because the creature was severely weakened. At his full strength, William wouldn''t have lasted a second.


    ''Damn it, I''m still so weak... I need to train harder!'' he thought, frustration mixing with fear. Even in this life-or-death struggle, he couldn''t help but critique himself. He was still new to this world, and he had much to learn. But he was improving rapidly, and that was a good sign.


    However, even his enhanced abilities weren''t enough. The demon''s attacks landed with increasing frequency, drawing blood. William grew pale, his movements sluggish. The blood loss was taking its toll.


    Just then, a small notification appeared, visible only to him.


    [You can use the skill Hero''s Limit. Do you wish to activate it?]


    It was the special skill he had gained during the fight at Gorn''s cabin. Despite the risks, he had no choice. sea??h th§× nov§×lF~ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    ''Activate!''


    [All attributes increased by 50% for 1 minute.]


    The effect was immediate. Combined with Swiftfoot, the boost in power was overwhelming. William felt invigorated, his strength and speed surging. The fatigue from blood loss vanished, replaced by a rush of adrenaline.


    He became a whirlwind of steel, his attacks relentless. The demon, caught off guard, staggered back.


    "Impossible! What did you do? How did you become so strong?" he sputtered, fear creeping into his voice.


    Aella watched with a mixture of awe and curiosity. She remained silent, her hopes pinned on William''s victory.


    William pressed his advantage, forcing the demon to his knees. With a well-aimed kick, he sent the obsidian sword skittering away, leaving his opponent disarmed and vulnerable.


    "Any last words?" William asked, his voice cold.


    The demon leaned against William''s arm, his fear seemingly replaced by a strange sense of acceptance. "H-haha," he chuckled, "to be killed by someone like you... it''s an honor, I suppose. Not such a bad way to go."


    William frowned, unable to comprehend the man''s words. "I see. Well then, die."


    With a swift, clean stroke, he ended the demon''s life. The battle was over.


    And then, darkness consumed him. William collapsed, unconscious.

 Chapter 31 Gorn is unwell

    William awoke in Gorn''s cabin, his eyes fluttering open. "Wh-what happened?" he mumbled, his voice raspy.Memories flickered through his mind, hazy and fragmented. He couldn''t quite piece together the events that had led him here.


    A familiar face leaned over him, concern etched in her features. "I brought you and Gorn back," Aella explained softly. "He''s resting as well. I was worried, but I''m so glad you woke up."


    Initially, she and William had maintained a polite distance, their differences in age and experience creating a natural barrier. But Aella couldn''t deny William''s courage, his pivotal role in their survival.


    "And the demon?" William asked, his brow furrowed. "Is he truly dead?"


    "Yes," Aella assured him, "you can rest easy. I''ll stay here with you both until you recover."


    Her presence would be a welcome comfort to the villagers. Even with the corruption vanquished, the people of Willow Creek needed time to heal, to rebuild their lives after the harrowing ordeal.


    William reached out and gently took Aella''s hand, his gaze sincere. "Thank you for your help," he said softly, "and I''m so sorry for the loss of your friends."


    Aella blinked back tears, the pain of losing her comrades still fresh. She nodded, appreciating his words. "Thank you, William... I made some soup. Would you like some?"


    William''s stomach rumbled in response. "Definitely," he said with a weak smile. "Bring it on. I''m starving."


    Aella smiled and left the room, heading towards the kitchen. As he waited, William''s memories of the battle sharpened, the details becoming clearer.


    ''What did that demon mean by ''killed by someone like you''...?'' The words echoed in his mind, their meaning elusive. Perhaps they meant nothing at all. The demon had been delirious, grasping at straws.


    Aella returned with a steaming bowl of rabbit stew. William ate slowly, savoring the flavors as he regained his strength.


    "This is delicious," he complimented.


    "I''m glad you like it," Aella replied. "But William, now that you''re feeling better, there''s something I need to tell you..." Her voice held a note of concern.


    William paused, his spoon halfway to his mouth. He met her gaze, a sense of foreboding settling over him. "What is it?" he asked.


    "The wound Gorn suffered from that obsidian sword," she explained, her voice heavy, "it seems to have poisoned him. He''s recovering, but he won''t be back to his full strength. We''ll need to return to the city to seek a cure."


    "Honestly, I thought it would be worse," William said, relieved. "I''m sure Gorn can survive this poisoning."


    But his words didn''t seem to reassure Aella. Her brow remained furrowed, her expression troubled.


    "As you know, I''m a mage, and I also study alchemy," she explained, her voice laced with worry. "I''ve never encountered a poison like the one afflicting Gorn, and I''ve been studying for many years. This could be very serious..."


    William''s momentary relief evaporated. If Aella was this concerned, then the situation was indeed dire.


    "I understand," he said, his voice grave. "Do you think he''ll be able to make it to the city?"


    "I believe so," Aella replied. "The toxin seems to be slow-acting, which gives us time. Focus on recovering as quickly as possible. I want to leave in two or three days, maximum."


    William nodded, accepting her assessment. Rest was his only option for now.


    After Aella left, Maya came to check on him, her face etched with worry for both him and her father.


    "I''m so glad you woke up!" she exclaimed, her voice filled with relief. "I knew you would. It must have been like last time!"


    Maya wasn''t wrong. The last time he''d collapsed, it was due to exhaustion from the battle and the strain of using Hero''s Limit.


    "Of course I''d wake up," William said, a playful grin spreading across his face. "Did you think I''d leave you alone?"


    He cringed internally as soon as the words left his mouth. That sounded a bit too cheesy, even for him.


    "I''m worried about my father..." Maya admitted, her voice barely above a whisper.


    William''s heart went out to her. "Aella said he''ll be alright," he reassured her, "and we''ll go to the city to find a cure. Everything will be fine."


    "She said that?" Maya''s expression brightened. "Oh, that eases my mind a bit. Well, I''ll let you rest. I just wanted to see how you were doing." She rose from the bedside, turning to leave.


    Before she could go, William called out, "Wait! Could you bring me a book to read?" Sear?h the N??elFir§×.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "Sure," Maya replied with a smile. "I''ll be right back."


    Two days passed in a blur of rest and recuperation. William devoured books and meals, his body healing rapidly.


    The fatigue he felt stemmed primarily from using Hero''s Limit, not from any significant physical injuries.


    By the end of the second day, he was walking and even sparring lightly, his strength nearly at eighty percent.


    Aella, eager to seek help for Gorn in the city, announced their departure. Gorn, though still weak, was able to walk with assistance.


    "Elara, my love," Gorn said to his wife, his voice thick with emotion, "I''m so sorry to leave you like this, worried and alone. But don''t fret. I''ll be fine."


    He shared a tender moment with Elara and Maya, exchanging heartfelt words and embraces before turning towards William and Aella. William offered a reassuring nod, and they mounted their horses, leaving Willow Creek behind.


    Their destination was Alderanth ¨C again. It was the closest city with the resources they needed.


    As they rode, William noticed a long, cloth-wrapped bundle strapped to Aella''s back. "What''s that you''re carrying, Aella?" he asked, curiosity piqued.


    "Oh, this?" she replied casually. "It''s the demon''s sword."


    William''s blood ran cold. Aella, sensing his alarm, quickly added, "It''s been depleted of demonic energy. In theory, it''s just a broken artifact now. That''s what my System indicates, anyway."


    William glanced at Gorn, who confirmed Aella''s statement with a nod.


    "Wait, your System tells you that?" William asked, intrigued.


    "Any weapon or armor you use has different properties that you can see through the System," Aella explained. "You''ve probably never noticed because you haven''t focused on analyzing your weapons and items."


    Intrigued, William concentrated on his sword, trying to discern its properties. After a few moments, a window appeared before his eyes.


    [Steel Sword (Normal Quality)]


    [Damage: 10-10]


    [A steel sword crafted by a skilled blacksmith.]


    [Condition: Durability is excellent, with some signs of use.]


    William felt a pang of frustration. He could have been doing this all along?


    "I see it!" he exclaimed. "This is incredibly useful! But I don''t understand. Why is it so easy to see information about items, but more difficult with people?" He was referring to discerning levels, attributes, and other such details, both for other people and creatures.


    Aella, ever the scholar, explained, "That''s because living beings have a natural energy field that acts as a protective shield. Items, even magical ones, aren''t alive and don''t possess this field."


    The workings of this world were starting to make more sense to William. Unlike the other heroes, he hadn''t received a comprehensive introduction. Elric had practically kicked him out before he could even ask a proper question.


    "I understand," William said, nodding slowly. "But what do you plan to do with that sword?" He eyed the bundle on Aella''s back, a shiver running down his spine.


    Aella shrugged. "Honestly, nothing for now. I know if I hand it over to the authorities, they''ll simply lock it away and forget about it. No one seems interested in studying these things." She sighed. "And I don''t have the time to research it myself."


    She fell silent for a moment, then, to William''s surprise, unstrapped the bundle and tossed it to him. "You can have it if you want," she said. "You decide what to do with it. After all, you were the one who delivered the final blow."


    The sword remained tightly wrapped, concealing its obsidian darkness. William wasn''t ready to look at it yet. The weapon was a stark reminder of the bloody battle, the deaths of Kael and Borin still fresh in his mind.


    "I understand," William said, his voice somber. "I''ll keep it wrapped for now."


    The trio continued their journey towards Alderanth, their hopes pinned on finding a cure for Gorn''s affliction. But a nagging doubt lingered in William''s mind. Was this something that could truly be healed?

 Chapter 32 Looking for the Churchs Help

    The journey seemed longer than usual, each passing day marked by Gorn''s deteriorating condition. William and Aella rode with a growing sense of urgency, their anxiety mounting with every labored breath Gorn took.While Gorn had been able to manage during the first few days, his strength waned as they neared Alderanth. By the time they reached the city gates, he was unable to walk without assistance. William supported him, their progress slow and unsteady.


    The guard at the gate eyed Gorn with suspicion, inquiring about his condition. Aella, with her relatively high rank in the Adventurers'' Guild, managed to deflect his questions and gain entry without much hassle.


    "Why was he looking at us like that?" William asked, his brow furrowed.


    "He''s probably wondering if I''m infected with something contagious," Gorn rasped, his voice weak.


    William understood. He''d harbored similar concerns at first, unsure if Gorn''s affliction could spread. But no one in Willow Creek had shown any signs of illness, so he assumed it wasn''t transmissible, at least not through casual contact.


    They navigated the bustling city streets, William acting as a crutch for Gorn. The usual vibrancy of Alderanth, with its throngs of people and boisterous vendors, provided an odd contrast to their somber procession. The crowd seemed oblivious to Gorn''s alarming state.


    "Where should we go first?" William asked, deferring to Aella''s greater familiarity with the city.


    "I think we should head to the church," she replied.


    William blinked, surprised. He hadn''t noticed a church during his previous visit.


    "Why the church?"


    "They often have priests skilled in healing magic," Aella explained. "It''s the best place to understand what''s happening to him."


    William realized her logic was sound, especially considering the demonic nature of Gorn''s affliction.


    They made their way to the church, a grand structure with towering spires. As they approached the entrance, a man in flowing robes greeted them, a friendly smile on his face and thinning gray hair framing his kind eyes.


    "Good morning, my young friends," he said warmly. "What brings you here today?"


    "We need help," William said, his voice carrying a note of urgency.


    "Help with what, exactly?" the priest inquired, his kind eyes searching their faces.


    "Our friend seems to have been poisoned by something we don''t recognize," William explained, gesturing towards Gorn. "Would you be able to assist us?"


    The priest had already noticed Gorn''s pale complexion and labored breathing. "Of course," he said, his voice soothing. "Bring him inside, and I''ll take a look."


    They followed the priest into the church, bypassing the main hall where other priests and townsfolk were engaged in prayer. It wouldn''t be appropriate to conduct a medical examination in such a public space. The priest led them to a small, private room.


    "Now, let me see," the priest said, gently guiding Gorn to a chair. He carefully peeled back Gorn''s sleeve, revealing the network of black veins that snaked across his skin. A look of concern crossed his face.


    William''s mind flashed back to the demon, his body similarly marked by the dark energy. ''What''s going on?'' he wondered, anxiety gnawing at him.


    Aella, too, was worried, especially after witnessing the priest''s reaction.


    "I don''t want to alarm you," the priest began, his voice grave, "but this seems quite serious. I''ve never seen anything like it."


    William and Aella exchanged a worried look. Gorn, however, remained surprisingly calm. "Relax, you two," he said, attempting to soothe their fears. "I''m sure the priest will know what to do."


    "May I have a moment alone with him?" the priest requested.


    "Of course," Aella replied. "Let us know if you need anything."


    They left the room and returned to the main hall, taking a seat on one of the wooden pews. William, not particularly religious, simply waited patiently.


    Aella, too, seemed content to observe the quiet reverence of the space. They kept their voices low, mindful of the others who had come to pray and reflect.


    "Will everything be alright?" William asked, seeking Aella''s reassurance. Her opinion always seemed to bring him a sense of calm.


    "To be honest," Aella said, her voice low, "I don''t think it looks good." Despite wanting to offer comfort, she believed in being realistic. Sometimes things didn''t go as planned, and that was okay.


    "I understand..." William said, a wave of sadness washing over him.


    Just then, another priest approached them, his face etched with concern. "You seem troubled, young man," he said to William.


    William looked up and met the priest''s kind gaze. "Yes," he admitted, "I am."


    "Whatever it is," the priest said gently, "it will pass. Everything will be alright if you have faith in the powers greater than us mere mortals." sea??h th§× Novel?ire(.)ne*t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    He didn''t press further, sensing William''s need for solitude. With a warm smile and a reassuring pat on the shoulder, he moved on, leaving William and Aella to their quiet contemplation.


    William, though not a religious man, found himself pondering the reason for his summons to this world.


    Could some divine force have orchestrated their arrival? He knew it was Elric and other powerful mages who had performed the ritual, but why him and his classmates?


    Was it random chance, or was there a deeper purpose behind their selection? He had no answers, but the solemn atmosphere of the church stirred these existential questions within him.


    After about ten minutes, the priest who had initially greeted them beckoned them back to the private room where Gorn awaited.


    "Well," the priest began, his expression a mixture of hope and concern, "I have good news and bad news."


    "Bad news first," William said, steeling himself. "Let''s get it over with."


    The priest nodded. "Alright... The bad news is that I don''t know how to cure him, and it''s possible no one in this city does either. However, the good news is that I know how to slow the progression of the toxin, and a priest far more skilled in healing magic than myself is arriving in a week. Perhaps he''ll know what to do."

 Chapter 33 Things are Getting Worse

    The situation was far from ideal, the news a heavy blow to their hopes. William desperately wished for a miracle cure, a swift return to normalcy for Gorn and his family, but reality proved harsher."Alright..." William said, his voice heavy with disappointment. "Then please, do what you can to slow the toxin."


    "Of course," the priest replied. "I''ll prepare the medicine."


    He disappeared into a back room, closing the door behind him. William and Aella could only wait, their anxiety growing with each passing moment. They turned to Gorn, offering words of comfort.


    "You''ll be fine, Gorn," William said, forcing a confident tone. "I know it."


    But Gorn''s condition had worsened. He looked at William, his eyes brimming with tears. "I''ll be honest with you, William," he rasped, his voice weak. "If I don''t make it, know that you quickly became the son I never had. You''re a good lad. Thank you for everything."


    William''s heart ached. He cherished Gorn''s words, but the underlying message filled him with dread. This wasn''t the time for farewells.


    "I appreciate your kind words, Gorn," William said, his voice firm. "I also see you as a father figure who cared for me in difficult times. But cut the crap about goodbyes. You''re going to pull through this. Do you hear me?"


    William''s forceful words seemed to have an effect. Gorn nodded, a glimmer of determination returning to his eyes. "Yes," he said, his voice stronger. "I''ll pull through. How can I leave my family alone? This damn toxin won''t win."


    Though William disliked the defeatist tone, he couldn''t blame Gorn for his despair. The man was clearly suffering, his weakened state driving him to speak words of surrender.


    Aella, however, seethed with a mixture of grief and fury. That damned demon had not only murdered her two companions but was now, even in death, trying to claim Gorn''s life as well. It was infuriating!


    She clenched her fists, resisting the urge to unleash a torrent of curses and punch the nearest solid object. Perhaps the sanctity of the church gave her pause, preventing her from succumbing to her rage.


    They waited anxiously as the priest returned, a vial of shimmering yellow liquid in his hand. Neither William nor Aella could identify its contents, but the priest had assured them it would help Gorn recover and slow the spread of the toxin. They placed their trust in his expertise.


    "Here you go," the priest announced, a gentle smile gracing his lips. "This concoction is crafted from various medicinal herbs, enhanced by my divine magic."


    Priests and members of the various churches scattered throughout the land often referred to healing magic as "divine magic." It was a matter of semantics, as the magic itself functioned no differently than other forms.


    However, many religious figures channeled a unique energy source, often attributed to divine powers.


    Gorn accepted the vial and drank the contents in a single gulp. The effect was immediate. A wave of relief washed over him, and color returned to his face. "I already feel better," he remarked, surprised. "How is that possible?"


    "You''ll continue to improve over the next few hours," the priest explained, "but the effects are temporary. This should stabilize you until the arrival of the church member I mentioned."


    Despite the momentary relief of seeing Gorn''s condition improve, William knew it was a temporary reprieve.


    The uncertainty of the future gnawed at him.


    ''What if this other priest can''t cure Gorn? What then?''


    The thought of losing Gorn, who had become a true friend and mentor, was unbearable. But all they could do now was wait and hope.


    The trio left the church, stepping back into the bustling city.


    "I have some errands to run," Aella announced. "You two will have to manage on your own for a bit."


    "No problem," Gorn said with a reassuring smile. "We''ll find a tavern to rest in."


    "See you later, Aella. Take care," William added.


    They bid farewell and watched as Aella disappeared into the crowd.


    "What a situation, eh?" Gorn remarked, clapping William on the shoulder. "Let''s head to that tavern."


    They decided to return to the same tavern they had visited before ¨C a decent establishment with reasonable prices. They needed to wait seven days for the other priest to arrive, and a luxurious inn was out of the question.


    This time, they opted for a single room. William wanted to stay close to Gorn, to keep an eye on him and ensure his condition didn''t worsen.


    "That medicine has made me drowsy," Gorn confessed as they entered their room. "I''m going to rest for a bit, alright?"


    Before William could even reply, Gorn collapsed onto the bed, snoring loudly.


    "What kind of special skill is that, falling asleep so quickly?" William murmured, a wry smile touching his lips.


    He had little to do but wait. Chrono Shift was still on cooldown, and even if it wasn''t, he wouldn''t have used it. His focus was solely on Gorn''s recovery. Sear?h the n??el Fire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    He settled at the small table in the room, pulling out the manual for Kinetic Burst.


    As he flipped through the pages, his gaze fell upon the demon sword, still wrapped in cloth and resting in the corner of the table.


    A strange sensation washed over him, a mix of unease and morbid curiosity.


    ''Must be my trauma,'' he thought, quickly averting his gaze.


    He returned to his reading, immersing himself in the intricacies of Kinetic Burst. After an hour or so, William decided to seek out a restaurant and procure some food.


    Gorn was still sound asleep, but he would undoubtedly wake up hungry. Nourishment was crucial for his recovery, or at the very least, it would prevent his condition from deteriorating further.


    Alderanth boasted a wide array of culinary options, from humble street vendors to lavish establishments.


    Mindful of Gorn''s funds, William opted for a more affordable eatery. Even the cheaper restaurants in Alderanth offered surprisingly good quality.


    He settled on a place called Robert''s Delights, the name bringing a smile to his face. The interior was cozy, with ample seating and warm lighting.


    A steady flow of customers provided a vote of confidence. After perusing the menu, William decided on two seafood platters.


    Seafood was a rare treat in Willow Creek. Although a river flowed nearby, he lacked the time for fishing, and the variety of fish was limited.


    Alderanth, however, benefited from numerous surrounding rivers and lakes, teeming with diverse aquatic life.


    "Would it be possible to have these packed to go?" William asked.


    The man who took his order was tall and stout, with a jovial demeanor. He wore a chef''s uniform, and William assumed he was Robert, the owner.


    Robert seemed surprised by the request. William remembered that takeout and delivery were not common practices in this world. Will he refuse? he wondered.


    But Robert''s reaction was quite the opposite. A broad smile spread across his face. "Young man," he declared, "you''ve just given me a brilliant idea to expand my business! Thank you!"


    With that, he bustled back to the kitchen.


    William couldn''t help but feel a pang of regret. He had missed the opportunity to introduce the concept of food delivery to this world.


    ''Ah well,'' he thought, ''being an adventurer is far more lucrative anyway, especially if I become strong.''


    After a short wait, William received his order, carefully packaged in sturdy containers. The chef, still beaming, likely continued to envision his future delivery empire.


    Back in the tavern room, Gorn remained blissfully asleep. William decided to wake him. Gorn startled awake, momentarily disoriented, but quickly regained his composure.


    "I thought something was wrong," he grumbled, rubbing his eyes. "Hmm, what''s that delicious smell?"


    "I brought us dinner," William announced, revealing the seafood platters. "Want to try some?"


    Gorn''s eyes lit up at the sight of the food. He was clearly famished. They ate while chatting about life. Robert''s Delights did not disappoint. The seafood was fresh and expertly prepared.


    However, as they ate, Gorn''s condition took a turn for the worse. This wasn''t supposed to happen. The priest had been confident the medicine would halt the toxin''s progress, but it seemed to be failing.


    "What''s wrong, Gorn?" William asked, his voice laced with concern.


    The black veins beneath Gorn''s skin grew more prominent, creeping up his neck and onto his face. His eyes took on an unnatural reddish hue.


    Panic swelled within William. Should he seek help? But who? The priest had said no one in the city could help at this point.


    Suddenly, a strange sensation washed over William, a tingling awareness of something amiss. He felt a presence, a shift in the very air around them.


    A chill ran down William''s spine. The presence emanated from the demonic sword, still wrapped in cloth on the table. An inexplicable urge to uncover it, to see the obsidian blade once more, compelled him forward.


    With trembling hands, he peeled back the fabric. The sword lay bare, its dark surface marred with scratches and chips, a shadow of its former menacing glory. No power pulsed from it, no demonic energy thrummed in its depths. It seemed inert, lifeless.


    Yet, as William reached out and touched the cold surface of the blade, a voice echoed in his mind, raspy and chilling, sending shivers down his spine.


    "Finally," it rasped, "a true heir..."


    A System notification flashed before his eyes.

 Chapter 34 Demonic Sword Master

    [The Demonic Sword has acknowledged you as its master.] [You have acquired the skill ''Demonic Absorption''.][Demonic Absorption (Passive): Allows the user to absorb demonic energy, converting it into mana.]


    William stared at the sword, a whirlwind of thoughts and emotions swirling within him. What was happening? Was this voice truly coming from the sword? And what did it mean, calling him a "true heir"? The idea of being associated with demonic forces filled him with unease.


    He cautiously picked up the sword again, turning it over in his hands. It felt cold and strangely inert, yet he couldn''t shake the feeling that it was somehow...alive.


    "Stupid lad, get the sword. You can use it to absorb the toxin from your friend. Damn it, why is my master so stupid?"


    William blinked a few times, unsure how to respond. Could he talk back to the sword? He tried to answer it mentally, but nothing happened.


    "Now you are trying to speak with me mentally, so funny. You have to speak normally with me. Yes, it might make you look like a crazy person talking alone, but who cares?"


    "Damn it," William muttered, glancing at Gorn. "Do you think it will work? Will I get sick if I absorb the toxin?"


    "No, everything should be fine. The toxin is demonic energy, so you will just convert it into power. Go ahead before your friend dies. Also, don''t say you are a demonic heir to anyone, or that I speak. This will make the church kill you."


    William hesitated for a moment, weighing his options. He didn''t fully trust the sword, but Gorn''s deteriorating condition spurred him to action. He approached Gorn, who was now gasping for air, his face contorted in pain.


    With a deep breath, William touched the tip of the obsidian blade to Gorn''s forehead. The black veins pulsing beneath Gorn''s skin seemed to recoil, retracting as a dark mist flowed into the sword.


    William felt a surge of power coursing through him, a strange warmth spreading through his limbs.


    Gorn''s eyes fluttered open, his breathing becoming more regular. The black veins faded completely, and the unnatural redness in his eyes disappeared.


    "What...what happened?" Gorn mumbled, his voice weak but clear.


    "I think the toxin made a final push to overwhelm you, but your strong will resisted," William improvised, hoping the explanation would suffice.


    Gorn frowned, his brow furrowed in confusion. He seemed to have a hazy recollection of the events. "But why do you have the sword with you, then?" he asked, suspicion creeping into his voice.


    William''s mind raced. "We were just examining it together while eating dinner," he explained, "and then you suddenly got worse."


    The story wasn''t airtight, but Gorn''s hazy memory worked in William''s favor. He didn''t even recall eating dinner, let alone handling a demonic sword!


    Relief washed over William. Seeing Gorn healthy again filled him with joy. A wave of excitement coursed through him as he considered the possibilities his newfound skill presented.


    "I''m feeling great now, hell yeah!" Gorn boomed, his voice regaining its usual strength. "I mean, it was probably the priest''s medicine that helped me, so I won''t question it..."


    William quickly wrapped the demonic sword, concealing it once more. He still had much to learn about this unexpected power, and the idea of being a demonic heir remained unsettling.


    ''Maybe they''re not truly demonic forces,'' he mused, grasping for a more palatable explanation. ''Perhaps they''re just misunderstood?''


    Regardless, both William and Gorn were overjoyed at the turn of events. Gorn slept soundly that night, and the following day, they returned to the church to speak with the priest.


    "Your medicine worked wonders," Gorn declared, beaming. "In fact, I think you completely healed me!"


    The priest''s eyes widened in surprise. He stepped forward, examining Gorn with a practiced eye.


    "You are indeed healed!" he exclaimed, astonishment coloring his voice. "That''s incredible! I... I didn''t expect it to be so effective. May the Gods watch over you, my friend."


    They chatted with the priest for a while longer, expressing their gratitude, before taking their leave. Gorn was eager to find Aella, pay her for the mission, and share the good news of his recovery.


    They entered the bustling Adventurers'' Guild, hoping to inquire about Aella''s whereabouts. The same receptionist from their previous visit sat behind the counter. Her face fell when she saw Gorn.


    "We''re looking for Aella," Gorn announced. "Do you know where she is?"


    "Uh, hello," she stammered, her gaze flickering towards the bar. "She''s...right over there."


    They turned to see Aella nursing a drink, her expression downcast. Gorn and William approached and sat beside her.


    "Why are you drinking so much?" Gorn asked, concern lacing his voice.


    Aella sighed. "Well, two of my friends died, and you are in pretty bad shape, so..."


    Gorn smiled, relief radiating from him. "That''s why we came to talk to you. I''m healed! The priest''s medicine worked."


    Aella nearly choked on her drink. "What? Are you serious?" She scrutinized Gorn, searching for any sign of the black veins. He looked healthy, his energy restored. S§×ar?h the N?velFire(.)net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "Yes," Gorn confirmed. "The toxin made a final attempt last night, but I pulled through. It''s amazing, right? Anyway, I''m also here to pay you for your services."


    He handed her the full payment for the mission, including the shares meant for her fallen comrades. Despite receiving more than expected, Aella couldn''t shake the bittersweet feeling. Still, the news of Gorn''s recovery lifted her spirits.


    "Well, thanks," she said, managing a weak smile. "I''m glad I could help your village. I hope we meet again sometime."


    It was goodbye, at least for now. Aella had other missions calling her, while Gorn and William prepared to return to Willow Creek.


    William was eager to resume his training, his sights set on the magic school entrance exams in six months. But now, a new thirst for knowledge burned within him ¨C a desire to learn more about demons and the powers they wielded.


    He briefly considered asking Gorn for money to visit the library and research the topic, but quickly dismissed the idea. It would raise too many questions.


    ''The magic school will have plenty of books about demons,'' he reasoned. ''I''ll have to wait until then.''


    They decided to depart that very day. William welcomed the idea, eager to return to his training regimen.


    He had noticed the sword had fallen silent; he had mentally blocked its attempts at communication. He was the master, after all, and such control seemed to be within his grasp.


    ''This new skill was certainly helpful back there,'' William mused, ''but it doesn''t seem all that useful now. Where am I going to find demonic energy to absorb, for starters?''


    His lack of knowledge about Demonic Absorption frustrated him. He had no idea what its full potential might be, or what he might learn in the future.


    The sword remained wrapped in cloth, strapped securely to his back. Aella hadn''t wanted to keep it, and even if she had, William wouldn''t have relinquished it. There was a connection between him and the obsidian blade, a link he couldn''t ignore.


    During their journey back to Willow Creek, William noticed a change in his status. His level remained the same, but after absorbing the demonic energy, all his attributes had increased!


    Name: William Velmont


    Level: 12


    Class: None


    Attributes:


    Strength: 22


    Agility: 25


    Stamina: 21


    Intelligence: 23


    Mana: 18


    This unexpected development further fueled his curiosity about Demonic Absorption. What other hidden powers did this skill hold?


    He earned around 2 to 3 points in each attribute by just absorbing that small amount of demonic energy from Gorn''s body, so what would happen if he found more?


    Suddenly, William wasn''t that scared of finding more demons...

 Chapter 35 Festival, and More Training

    Their return to Willow Creek sparked jubilation. Worried faces transformed into beaming smiles as news of Gorn''s recovery spread like wildfire."Gorn is back! He''s been saved!"


    "I knew he would pull through!"


    Villagers swarmed Gorn, offering congratulations and heartfelt embraces. He basked in their warmth, his laughter echoing through the streets. William, content to observe, allowed Gorn his moment of triumph.


    That night, a joyous festival erupted. Music filled the air, villagers danced with abandon, and the aroma of roasted meats and sweet treats mingled with the crackling of a bonfire. It was a celebration of Gorn''s return and a way to honor those lost to the corrupted beasts.


    Elara and Maya, their faces etched with relief, joined the festivities. The worry that had plagued them for days melted away, replaced by a shared sense of joy and gratitude.


    Later, William and Maya found themselves sitting beneath a tree, sharing stories and laughter.


    "I''m so glad everything worked out," Maya said, her eyes sparkling in the firelight. "And how is your magic practice going?"


    "Pretty well, I think," William replied, taking a sip of his drink. "I''ve mastered that spell I showed you, and I''m planning to try for the magic school entrance exams in six months."


    Maya''s eyes widened. "That''s wonderful!" she exclaimed, then her expression turned wistful. "But that means you''ll be leaving..."


    William turned to her, a mischievous glint in his eyes. "Don''t tell anyone," he whispered, "but your father is going to start your magic training soon. He believes you can enter a magic school in a year."


    "He did?" Maya gasped, her face lighting up. "I''ll try for the same school as you... But even if I don''t get in, we''ll still see each other, right?"


    "Of course," William assured her.


    He truly valued Maya''s kindness and unwavering support, both for him and her family.


    The revelry continued late into the night. William, though eager to resume his training, recognized the value of such communal celebrations. He knew a balance of exertion and rest was essential, both for his physical development and mental well-being.


    As the festivities wound down, William, pleasantly full of food and drink, retired to his room. It remained unchanged, save for the addition of the demonic sword tucked away in a corner.


    ''I''m not ready to use that thing yet'', William thought, eyeing the wrapped blade with a mix of apprehension and curiosity. I need to learn more about it first.


    The boost to his attributes from absorbing the demonic energy had been thrilling, but the lingering presence of that energy within him was unsettling.


    Could he become like the possessed hunter, losing control to the demonic influence? His ignorance about demons and their artifacts made him cautious.


    He would stick to his SSS-ranked skill for now; at least he knew it wouldn''t have any adverse side effects, as long as he didn''t meet an untimely end in the past.


    William sank into his pillow, falling into a deep, dreamless sleep.


    The following morning, a peaceful quiet settled over Willow Creek. The revelry of the previous night had taken its toll, and the village slumbered, recovering from the festivities. Even William felt a bit sluggish, but the lingering warmth of the celebration made it worthwhile.


    When he finally emerged from his room, he found Gorn and Elara already awake, enjoying a quiet cup of tea at the table.


    "I made some tea for you," Elara said, her smile as radiant as the morning sun. "It will help you feel better after all that celebrating."


    William joined them, accepting the steaming cup with gratitude. "Thank you," he said, taking a sip. "And Gorn, how are you feeling?"


    "Never better," Gorn declared, his voice booming with renewed vigor. "In fact, this is the best I''ve felt in ages!"


    William beamed. It seemed absorbing the demonic energy had indeed cured Gorn completely.


    "That''s fantastic," William said, savoring the soothing warmth of the tea. "And this tea is delicious."


    Gorn chuckled. "Enjoy it while you can," he said. "Soon, your training will begin. You''ll be sparring with me every morning."


    While William was eager to begin training immediately, Gorn, wise in the ways of both combat and hangovers, decreed they would start the following day. The festivities had taken their toll, and even the strongest warrior needed time to recover.


    William, too, welcomed a day of respite. Though his Chrono Shift ability had refreshed, he opted for a true day off, a chance to clear his mind and recharge.


    After a hearty breakfast with Gorn and his family, he set out with a fishing rod and bucket in hand. "Don''t wander too far," Gorn had cautioned, "the forest is still dangerous."


    The river near the village wasn''t ideal for fishing. The commotion and activity kept most fish at bay.


    However, a short walk upstream led him to a tranquil spot, perfect for his purpose. He gathered some worms for bait and settled on the grassy riverbank, savoring the peace and quiet.


    The soft grass cushioned him, a gentle breeze rustled the leaves, and the symphony of nature filled his ears.


    "Ah," William sighed contentedly, "how wonderful it is to have a carefree day with nothing to do. Better enjoy it while it lasts, because tomorrow things get serious..."


    Time flowed by like the river itself, carrying William along in its current. After the first catch, more fish filled his bucket. The simplicity of the task, the repetitive motion, and the quietude allowed his mind to wander.


    ''First, I''ll train with Gorn and Jinra,'' he thought, ''master as many spells as I can, and then it''s off to magic school! There, I''ll learn everything I can about demons and these new abilities...'' A solid plan was forming in his mind.


    As dusk approached, William returned to the village, his bucket overflowing with his catch. He expertly cleaned the fish, and Elara worked her culinary magic, transforming them into a mouthwatering feast. Famished from his day by the river, William devoured his share with gusto.


    "Goodnight, Gorn, Elara, Maya," he said, already feeling the pull of sleep.


    He knew Gorn would be eager to start their training, but he hadn''t anticipated being roused from slumber at the ungodly hour of five in the morning.


    "Wake up, William!" Gorn''s booming voice shattered the predawn stillness. "Didn''t I say we were training?" He ripped the covers off William''s bed with a flourish.


    "B-but what?" William sputtered, his mind still foggy with sleep. "Isn''t it too early?"


    Though tempted to grumble about the early hour, William knew better than to question Gorn''s training methods. He rose like a zombie, stumbling out of bed and into the crisp morning air, a wooden sword clutched in his hand.


    "Today, we advance your skills," Gorn declared, his voice ringing with energy. "Stay sharp, lad!"


    Before William could even blink the sleep from his eyes, Gorn charged, his wooden sword whistling through the air. The blow connected squarely with William''s head, jolting him awake with a resounding thwack.


    "Ow, my head!" William groaned, clutching his throbbing skull.


    Gorn roared with laughter. "That''s one way to wake you up!" he boomed. "Now get up and prepare yourself!"


    Their training session was intense, far exceeding their previous sparring matches.


    In addition to swordplay, Gorn had William running, performing push-ups, squats, and sit-ups, with barely any time to rest between exercises.


    William silently thanked the heavens when he spotted Elara approaching.


    "Lunch is ready!" she announced, a welcome respite from Gorn''s relentless drills. S§×arch* The N?velFire(.)net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    William''s stomach rumbled in response. ''Finally, a break from this madman...'' he thought gratefully.

 Chapter 36 Wooden Sword Where the Sun Dont Shine...

    Over lunch, Maya peppered William with questions about his training. "How was it?" she asked, her eyes bright with curiosity. "Did you learn a lot?""Tons," William replied with a confident grin. "Your father didn''t stand a chance against me. I knocked him down so many times, I think he learned more from me."


    Gorn, mid-bite of a particularly juicy piece of meat, nearly choked. "You''re kidding, right?" he sputtered, wiping his mouth with a napkin. "I practically had to hold back to keep from shoving that wooden sword where the sun don''t shine..."


    Elara laughed, shaking her head. "Boys, please, mind your language. The dinner table is no place for such talk."


    Even William couldn''t help but chuckle at Gorn''s indignant expression. After lunch, he retired to his room for an hour''s rest before heading towards the hill.


    Gorn, as the village''s strongest warrior and one of its primary hunters, had a busy schedule. Their training was limited to the mornings, but William had Chrono Shift at his disposal, and he intended to make the most of it.


    He activated the skill, stepping through the shimmering portal. He materialized in the familiar barn at Jinra''s house. It was still nighttime, the same time he had left days ago. Wide awake and eager to hone his skills, William began practicing Kinetic Burst.


    His first task was to master the intricate runes required for Kinetic Burst. This particular spell demanded eight distinct runes, each a complex pattern of lines and curves, unlike anything William had encountered before.


    While his previous skills were C-rank, Kinetic Burst was a B-rank spell, making it significantly more challenging to learn. But William was determined.


    He spent hours meticulously practicing the runes, stopping only when it neared the time Jinra usually woke. He needed to maintain a pretense of normalcy, lest Jinra grow suspicious of his rapid progress.


    Feigning tiredness, William lay down on his makeshift bed and napped, awakening only when Jinra called him for breakfast.


    "How did you sleep?" Jinra inquired, setting a plate of bread and cheese before him. S§×ar?h the N??elFir§×.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "Great," William replied, taking a bite of the crusty bread. "I''m getting used to the barn. It''s actually more peaceful than I expected. I guess no beasts dare come near your house."


    Jinra chuckled. "Aye, this area is quite safe thanks to my presence. But tell me, you seem...different. Stronger. How is that possible?"


    To Jinra, it felt like they had just seen each other, but for William, time had passed, filled with training and adventures in present-day Aethel.


    "You think so?" William said with a shrug, feigning nonchalance. "Maybe it''s just my natural talent."


    "Indeed," Jinra agreed, his eyes twinkling. "You do seem to possess a remarkable talent. I have a feeling your name will be etched in history, kid. Of course, that''s only if you dedicate yourself to training for the rest of your life."


    That was certainly William''s intention. He had to surpass those summoned heroes with their extraordinary abilities, and he wouldn''t let anything stand in his way.


    After breakfast, they moved to the training grounds. William showed Jinra the Kinetic Burst skill, hoping for some guidance, but Jinra seemed perplexed.


    "To be honest, I''ve never seen this skill before," Jinra admitted, stroking his beard. "Where did you acquire it?"


    William recounted the fabricated tale of his family troubles and his departure from home. "It was in my family''s library," he explained.


    "Perhaps it''s unique to your lineage," Jinra said respectfully. "I apologize for prying. I meant no disrespect."


    "It''s alright," William assured him. "But can you still help me learn it?"


    Jinra nodded. "Of course. I''ll try to master the skill myself and then guide you."


    "And how long will that take?" William asked, curious.


    Jinra''s response was astonishing. "Five minutes, tops. Give me a moment."


    William watched in awe as Jinra effortlessly formed the unfamiliar runes, activated the skill, and blinked across the training grounds in a matter of seconds.


    "Don''t look so surprised," Jinra chuckled. "I can learn it quickly because I know higher-ranked skills, much higher. A B-rank skill is child''s play in comparison. It will be the same for you one day."


    William couldn''t help but find the statement ironic. He already possessed an SSS-rank skill, yet this B-rank ability was proving quite challenging. ''It must be because I didn''t actually learn my SSS-rank skill,'' he reasoned. ''I was granted it when I came to this world.''


    With the skill firmly within his grasp, Jinra turned his attention to guiding William. He observed William''s attempts, patiently correcting each misstep and demonstrating the proper flow of mana.


    Despite Jinra''s expert tutelage, William struggled to control his mana with the precision required to form and sustain the runes.


    They trained tirelessly throughout the day, yet William made little progress. Frustration gnawed at him, but Jinra offered encouragement and a dose of reality.


    "Even prodigies take months to learn a skill like this," Jinra reassured him. "But once you master it, lower-ranked skills will become much easier. We can expand your arsenal of C-rank spells before you take the magic school entrance exam."


    "Speaking of which," William asked, curiosity piqued, "where exactly is this magic school? Is it large? Are there many students? Is the exam difficult?"


    "Yes, it''s quite large, and the exam is challenging," Jinra confirmed. "But I believe you''ll pass with flying colors. The city where the school is located is quite a distance from here, so we''ll need to depart two months in advance. But let''s focus on your training for now."


    "Right, that makes sense," William agreed.


    He ate, rested when he could, and as night fell, he activated Chrono Shift, returning to his own time. It was still afternoon, the exact moment he had left. He was essentially gaining two days of training for every one that passed in the present.


    Of course, the cooldown on Chrono Shift limited his usage, but even so, he held a significant advantage over others.


    As he emerged from the portal, he was surprised to see Maya approaching. He was relieved he had activated the skill discreetly, without being observed. ''I''ll have to be more careful now that Maya is coming here,'' he thought.


    "William, what do you do up here on the hill?" Maya asked, her eyes sparkling with curiosity. "I''ve always wondered."


    "I come here to practice magic," William replied, his gaze sweeping across the vista, "and to enjoy the view. Have you ever noticed how beautiful it is from here?"


    Maya stepped beside him, following his gaze. From the hilltop, they could see the entire village spread out below: the villagers going about their daily routines, tending to their farms and livestock, the water wheel churning by the river, children chasing each other through the fields. The lush greenery and the peaceful quiet created a sense of tranquility.


    "It really is beautiful from up here," Maya admitted. "I''ve never been here before. Father always said it was too dangerous."


    "And he let you come now?" William asked, raising an eyebrow.


    "Yes," Maya replied with a playful smile, "because he knew you were here."


    "That makes sense," William chuckled, shaking his head.


    "Can I stay and watch you train?" Maya asked, her eyes shining with anticipation. She was eager to begin her own magical journey and didn''t want to miss the opportunity to observe William.


    Since he wouldn''t be using Chrono Shift ¨C his closely guarded secret ¨C William saw no harm in Maya''s presence. "Of course," he replied with a smile. "You''re welcome to stay."

 Chapter 37 Four Months of Training

    William focused intently on mastering the runes for Kinetic Burst. Each intricate pattern proved a challenge, demanding precise control over his mana flow. He struggled to maintain their form and potency, but with each attempt, he felt a flicker of progress.Jinra''s unorthodox method of casting spells ¨C bypassing the traditional one-minute rune sustainment ¨C echoed in his mind. The elven approach, Jinra claimed, was the key to rapid mastery.


    But even this technique required a degree of control William hadn''t yet attained. He couldn''t hold the runes for the suggested five seconds, let alone the full minute. Still, he was determined. He would conquer these runes, no matter how long it took.


    Maya''s enthusiastic cheers punctuated his efforts. "You can do it, William!" she''d exclaim with unwavering support.


    While William typically preferred solitude for his practice, he found Maya''s presence surprisingly comforting.


    During breaks, they would sit side-by-side, sharing stories and laughter as they gazed down at the peaceful village nestled in the valley below.


    "Do you think my father is truly alright?" Maya asked, her brow furrowed with a lingering worry.


    Her question caught William off guard. Gorn seemed to have made a full recovery, a fact evident to everyone in the village. But was there more to it?


    "Yes, he is," William assured her, hoping to dispel her doubts. "The priests at the church took good care of him with their powerful healing magic. Don''t worry, everything is fine."


    After hours of training, William returned to the village, seeking respite for his weary mind. As always, Elara had prepared a delicious meal, her warm smile a comforting welcome.


    Four months passed just like that. William sparred with Gorn every morning and honed his skills with Jinra whenever Chrono Shift was available.


    While he hadn''t faced any monsters during this time, his level remained unchanged, but his progress was undeniable.


    He mastered Kinetic Burst, and with that accomplishment, other skills seemed to fall into place more easily. He learned Iron Skin and Enhanced Strength, bolstering his defenses and offensive capabilities.


    Jinra''s rigorous physical conditioning had transformed William''s physique. While he remained lean to maintain his speed and agility, his muscles were now well-defined, his body honed for combat. These physical gains translated into increased strength and agility:


    Name: William Velmont


    Level: 12


    Class: None


    Attributes:


    Strength: 26


    Agility: 29


    Stamina: 21 sea??h th§× N??eFire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Intelligence: 23


    Mana: 18


    ''Imagine what I can achieve when I start gaining experience again, William mused, or learn more about Demonic Absorption...'' He was excited about his future and the possibilities that lay ahead.


    The most significant milestone on the horizon was his journey to the magic school. Both Gorn and Jinra had prepared him for this moment, each in their own way, across different eras.


    "I still can''t believe you learned all those spells in such a short time," Gorn remarked as they packed their belongings for the journey.


    "I''m amazing, aren''t I?" William said, brimming with confidence. "And just wait until I get some formal instruction at the school. I''ll be unstoppable."


    Gorn chuckled. "Don''t get ahead of yourself, lad."


    They bid farewell to the villagers, not just Elara and Maya, but the entire community. Everyone gathered to see them off, offering words of encouragement and well wishes.


    "You''ll do great, William!"


    "Make Willow Creek proud!"


    "After putting up with grumpy Gorn for months, you can overcome anything!" one of the hunters shouted, drawing laughter from the crowd.


    William basked in their support, a stark contrast to the teasing and mockery he had often endured from his peers back on Earth. This small village had become his home, and these people, his family. He would make them proud.


    They set off on horseback, the most efficient way to traverse the considerable distance. "Are you sure you''re comfortable leaving your family for so long?" William asked, concern lacing his voice.


    The journey to the magic school would take nearly two months, and Gorn would have to make the return trip alone, effectively doubling his time away from home.


    Gorn nodded, his expression resolute. "We''ll stop in Alderanth and speak with Aella," he explained. "I''ll hire her to stay in Willow Creek and ensure their safety."


    Despite the prevailing peace in the village, Gorn couldn''t shake the feeling of vulnerability, leaving his loved ones unprotected.


    But William, who had become like a son to him, needed his guidance and protection on this journey. He knew he was making the right decision, fulfilling his duties as both a father and a mentor.


    "Great idea," William agreed. "But what if she''s busy with another mission?"


    Gorn, ever prepared, had already considered that possibility. "I spoke with her about this the last time we were in Alderanth," he explained. "So unless something urgent has come up, it should be fine."


    They set off for Alderanth once more. The city, once a source of wonder for William, now held a familiar charm. He longed to explore new horizons, his anticipation for the magic school growing with each passing day. Their journey was punctuated by nights spent camping along the road or, when their funds allowed, indulging in the comforts of a roadside tavern.


    They arrived in Alderanth after nightfall. The usually bustling city gates were quiet, the line of travelers nearly nonexistent. Guards inspected their belongings for contraband before waving them through.


    At the Adventurers'' Guild, they inquired about Aella.


    "She''s in the city at the moment," the receptionist confirmed. "You''re Gorn, right? She said I could give you her address. Just a moment..." She scribbled something on a piece of parchment and handed it to Gorn.


    "Thank you," Gorn said, taking the paper.


    They navigated the maze of streets, eventually finding Aella''s residence in a pleasant middle-class neighborhood. It was a charming house, a testament to her success as an adventurer.


    Aella answered their knock, her face creased with sleep. "Who dares disturb my slumber at this late hour?" she grumbled, then her expression softened upon recognizing her visitors. "Oh, it''s you two! Come in, come in."


    William noticed a hint of a smile playing on her lips as she ushered them inside.


    The house was a cozy haven. Whitewashed walls, large windows, and a crackling fireplace gave it a welcoming atmosphere. Four bedrooms and an impressive library spoke of comfort and a love for knowledge.


    "This place is amazing," William remarked, impressed. "After graduating from magic school, I want to become an adventurer. Seems like the pay is pretty good."


    Aella laughed. "You don''t even need to graduate," she said. "After the first year, you''ll be eligible for missions, maybe even sooner. But with your talent, I think you can do whatever you set your mind to."


    "You really think so?" William asked, a wide grin spreading across his face. "Thanks for the vote of confidence!"


    The trio moved to the living room, settling onto a plush leather sofa. William sank into its softness, enjoying the comfort as Aella and Gorn discussed the details of their arrangement.


    "I''m taking this young lad to the magic academy," Gorn announced, gesturing towards William with a proud grin. He nudged William''s foot, prompting him to sit up properly. "I''d like you to head to Willow Creek and keep an eye on things while we''re gone. Four months, to be precise."


    Aella listened intently, then nodded in agreement. "Certainly, no problem. I was planning a vacation around this time anyway. I hear there''s excellent fishing near Willow Creek, and even some hot springs?"


    "Indeed," Gorn confirmed. "Thank you for looking after the village in my absence."


    William, who had been on the verge of dozing off, snapped to attention. "Wait, what?" he exclaimed. "Hot springs? How come I never knew about this?"


    Gorn chuckled. "You were supposed to be focused on your training, lad. No hot springs for you."


    "But that''s bull¡ª" William began to protest, but Gorn cut him off with a stern look.


    "Enough complaining," Gorn said, his voice firm. "Your training has prepared you well. Now it''s time to put your skills to the test."

 Chapter 38 Unpleasant Stay

    William and Gorn enjoyed a comfortable night''s rest at Aella''s house, a welcome respite after their journey. But with the dawn came the time to depart. Aella, too, packed her belongings, ready to fulfill her end of the bargain. As William and Gorn headed north, Aella would journey south to Willow Creek."Take care on your travels," Aella said, a warm smile gracing her features. "And behave yourself, William."


    William rolled his eyes playfully. "I''m not a child," he retorted. "You take care too, Aella."


    With farewells exchanged, they left Alderanth behind. From this point onward, everything would be new territory for William. A nervous flutter danced in his stomach.


    "Is this region dangerous?" he asked, scanning the unfamiliar landscape.


    "Travel always carries some risk," Gorn replied, his gaze steady. "But sticking to the main roads will minimize it. Security is much tighter along these routes. Most travelers get into trouble when they try to take shortcuts."


    They had departed early precisely to avoid rushing. Gorn, a seasoned traveler, preferred the well-trodden paths to risky shortcuts. The main roads, paved with stone and dotted with taverns, offered a comfortable and secure journey, patrolled regularly by kingdom soldiers.


    "Why does everyone travel by horse?" William asked, curious. "Is it the fastest way?"


    "Certainly not," Gorn replied, amusement in his voice. "We have magic-powered airships, mages who can fly independently, and, most commonly, flying magical beasts."


    "Horses are simply more affordable and accessible," he added. "And certainly better than walking."


    "Wow, that''s amazing," William exclaimed, his imagination ignited. "One day, I want a flying beast of my own. Imagine riding a dragon!"


    Gorn chuckled. "The only problem is dragons don''t exist anymore. But it would be quite a sight, wouldn''t it? Tell me, how would you go about taming a dragon?"


    William, caught off guard, blurted out the first thing that came to mind. "With my incredible sense of humor?"


    "Idiot..." Gorn muttered, shaking his head.


    Their journey progressed smoothly for a while. But during a routine stop at a tavern, things took an unexpected, and sinister, turn.


    The tavern was located in a tiny settlement, barely a village, with no more than eight houses huddled together. It was smaller than Willow Creek, its only distinguishing feature a protective wall.


    Night had fallen when they arrived, cloaking the town in an eerie darkness. A thick fog rolled in, adding to the unsettling atmosphere. A lone villager stood at the gate, his expression grim.


    "What brings you here?" he asked gruffly.


    "Travelers seeking shelter for the night," Gorn replied. "May we enter?"


    "Of course," the villager said, stepping aside. "Please, come in."


    They rode through the gate, the rhythmic clip-clop of their horses'' hooves echoing through the deserted streets. They dismounted in front of the town''s sole tavern, its windows dark and uninviting.


    "This place gives me the creeps," William muttered, eyeing the dilapidated buildings and fog-shrouded streets. "Honestly, I''d rather camp in the woods."


    Gorn shared his sentiment. "Indeed," he grumbled, "but we need supplies and rest for the horses. Hunting in this fog would be a fool''s errand. We''ll have to make do with this tavern. Perhaps the interior is more inviting."


    They left their horses in the care of a sullen stable boy and stepped into the tavern. The interior was dimly lit, the air thick with the musty scent of neglect. Cobwebs clung to the corners, insects crawled along the walls, and the wooden floorboards creaked ominously beneath their feet.


    "Well, so much for a more inviting interior," William quipped, wrinkling his nose. S§×ar?h the N?velFire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    They approached the bar, where a man with a scraggly beard, missing teeth, and a disconcertingly cheerful grin sat polishing a tankard. He looked like he had stepped straight out of a horror film.


    "Do you have any rooms available?" Gorn inquired.


    The man''s smile widened. "Indeed we do," he chirped. "Will two rooms suffice?"


    "Yes, that will be fine," Gorn replied.


    The innkeeper handed them keys, informing them he would settle the payment in the morning. "I''m feeling quite weary," he explained, stifling a yawn. "I''ll be closing up for the night."


    This struck William as odd. Taverns usually operated around the clock, with staff working in shifts. Perhaps this establishment didn''t receive enough traffic to justify such hours. The place felt so deserted that William wondered if he and Gorn were the first customers in months.


    They climbed the creaking stairs to the second floor. The rooms were spartan, each containing a single bed with a rock-hard mattress and little else. No windows, no amenities, not even a washbasin.


    ''This feels more like a prison cell than a tavern room,'' William thought grimly. Sleeping in the woods suddenly seemed far more appealing.


    A few minutes later, Gorn arrived with a steaming bowl of soup for each of them. Despite the dismal surroundings, the soup was surprisingly delicious.


    Perhaps it was their hunger amplifying the flavors, but the warm meal brought a much-needed sense of comfort.


    "We''ll resume our journey in the morning," Gorn said, his voice low as he savored the soup. "I don''t want to stay in this forsaken place any longer than necessary."


    "Agreed," William replied, sharing his sentiment.


    After their meal, Gorn retired to his room, leaving William alone with his thoughts. He lay down on the lumpy bed, the unsettling atmosphere making it difficult to relax. Sleep finally came, but it was a restless slumber, punctuated by strange noises in the dead of night.


    William''s eyes snapped open. He reached for his sword, his heart pounding. Footsteps echoed in the hallway outside his room. At first, he dismissed it as a normal occurrence in a tavern, but then he remembered ¨C the tavern was closed. There shouldn''t be anyone else here.


    ''It''s just me and Gorn,'' he thought, his grip tightening on the sword hilt. ''Who''s out there?''


    He hesitated, fear battling with curiosity. Just as he mustered the courage to investigate, the footsteps ceased. Unease prickled his skin, but exhaustion eventually won over, and he drifted back to sleep.


    Morning arrived with a rude awakening. Gorn pounded on his door, his voice filled with urgency.


    "Lad, we have a problem," Gorn announced as William opened the door. "Someone stole our horses!"


    He punctuated his statement with a furious punch that nearly sent the flimsy wall crumbling.


    The news was a blow. This desolate town was in the middle of nowhere. There was no telling where they could find replacements.


    "What do we do now?" William asked, his stomach churning with anxiety.


    "We track down those horses," Gorn declared, his jaw clenched. "And if we can''t find them, we pray someone here has some to sell. Worst case scenario, we walk to the next town, but that will delay our journey significantly."


    Their first lead was the stable boy, but he had vanished without a trace. They questioned the other townsfolk, but were met with indifference, even a hint of malicious glee at their misfortune. Gorn, a man of action, felt a growing sense of dread.


    He couldn''t bear the thought of William missing the magic school entrance exam after months of dedicated training.


    "We''ll stay one more day to search for the horses," Gorn declared, his voice tight with frustration. "If we have no luck, we''ll continue on foot."


    William nodded, trusting Gorn''s judgment. They spent the day scouring the town, questioning every resident, but their efforts proved futile.


    No one had seen the horses, nor did anyone have any to sell. Resigned, they returned to the dilapidated tavern for another miserable night. And that''s when the true horror began.

 Chapter 39 Boost in Power

    The same chilling sounds from the previous night echoed through the tavern hallway. But this time, the disturbance escalated. A figure cloaked in shadow, their face obscured by a mask, slipped silently into William''s room."Wh-what the...?" William mumbled, startled awake.


    He scrambled to his feet, reaching for his sword, but a wave of dizziness washed over him. An unseen force had filled the room, a soporific smoke that sapped his strength and clouded his mind. He slumped back onto the bed, unconscious.


    The intruder effortlessly hoisted William over their shoulder and slipped out of the tavern, unnoticed. A few townsfolk witnessed the abduction, but remained silent, their faces betraying a disturbing complicity.


    "Best stay hidden," the innkeeper had warned one of them. "That other one, the older fellow, he seems strong. Causing him trouble could be...unpleasant."


    It was clear that everyone in this forsaken town was involved in some dark conspiracy.


    William awoke to the chilling realization that his arms were bound tightly, and a gag stifled any cry for help. He found himself in a dank, cold cell, the air heavy with the stench of mildew and decay.


    A sturdy iron door stood between him and freedom, far beyond his reach. The thick stone walls offered no hope of escape through brute force. He was trapped, a prisoner in this silent, subterranean tomb.


    Panic clawed at William''s throat. Gorn was nowhere to be seen. He was alone, trapped in this forsaken cell, with no obvious means of escape.


    ''Damn it, how am I going to get out of here?'' he thought, his mind racing.


    He strained against the ropes binding his wrists, but they held firm, mocking his efforts. Then, a spark of hope ignited within him.


    Enhanced Strength! He contorted his fingers, painstakingly forming the runes with his mana, and cast the spell. Power surged through his muscles, his body thrumming with newfound strength.


    [+30 Strength]


    With a guttural cry, he pulled against the ropes. They snapped, the frayed ends falling away like broken spiderwebs.


    He ripped the gag from his mouth, his heart pounding. The iron door, however, proved an insurmountable obstacle.


    Even with his enhanced strength, it remained stubbornly shut. He slammed his fists against the cold metal, each blow echoing through the silent dungeon, but to no avail.


    ''Damn it!''


    The commotion drew attention. Footsteps approached, stopping just outside the cell. William recognized the villager who had greeted them at the gate two days prior.


    "Keep it down," the man hissed through the bars. "You may have freed yourself from those ropes, but you''ll never break that door. Just stay put and wait your turn."


    "What does that mean?" he asked, confused.


    But the man said nothing more and simply walked away.


    "Hey, come back here! Hey!" William shouted after him.


    But the man left without another word. William was frustrated. He still had no idea where he was, who had kidnapped him, or why.


    He was sure that everyone in this creepy town was involved! The guard at the town gate was also watching his cell, so who else was in on it?


    ''That tavern was a dump, I wouldn''t be surprised if the owner was part of this too. But what do they want with me?'' William wondered.


    The only thing he could do was wait, and hope that Gorn would find him.


    He knew it was a long shot, but it was better than giving up and accepting whatever horrors awaited him.


    William sat in the cold, dark corner of his cell, and waited. He listened to the rats scurrying in the darkness.


    Eventually, someone appeared at his door. Again, they threw some kind of gas in to weaken him.


    He tried to hold his breath, but he couldn''t hold it forever.


    He had to breathe, and the gas filled his lungs, making him weak.


    [All attributes reduced by 90%]


    The message appeared before him. The gas was potent, and he felt incredibly weak.


    A figure in a black robe and mask entered the cell to retrieve him.


    They led William to a room with several figures in similar robes, and an altar in the middle with a chalice on it.


    William realized he was surrounded by fanatics, and this situation could very well be his end.


    They tied him to the stone altar with iron chains, making sure he couldn''t escape.


    One of the robed figures, this one in red, like a leader, began to speak.


    "Good evening, my dear friends. We are all gathered here today to perform the invocation of our god. This is a momentous occasion."


    "We have found a healthy young man to serve as a vessel for our god!"


    The others murmured excitedly.


    "Silence, please. I will now begin the ritual."


    William was tied up and weak, but he could still see and hear everything. It was all so bizarre.


    One by one, they went to the chalice and placed some of their blood in it. Even the leader.


    Then, they poured the blood onto William''s body. Thankfully, they avoided his face.


    After that, they began chanting in a language William didn''t recognize.


    The chanting intensified, a chorus of voices echoing through the cavernous space. William, bound and helpless upon the cold stone altar, watched the cultists sway in their dark robes, their faces obscured by grotesque masks.


    The scene was unsettling, a nightmare come to life. He felt a growing sense of dread, a primal fear he couldn''t quite explain. Escape seemed impossible.


    The chains bit into his wrists, and the chanting grew louder, a hypnotic drone that threatened to overwhelm him.


    The ritual reached a fever pitch. The air crackled with energy, a palpable tension that raised the hairs on William''s neck. It was a sensation he had experienced before, a whisper of something dark and powerful, but he couldn''t place it.


    "Our god is coming!" the leader proclaimed, his voice booming through the chamber. "Let us praise it together!"


    Suddenly, a torrent of energy surged towards William, enveloping him in its power. It was supposed to be the cult''s deity manifesting, but something had gone terribly, terribly wrong.


    [Demonic Energy entering your body]


    [Demonic Absorption Activating]


    The energy flooding his senses was not divine, but demonic. And his body was absorbing it, drinking it in like a parched sponge. The cultists, oblivious to the error in their summoning, continued their fervent chanting.


    William felt the power coursing through him, strengthening his muscles, sharpening his senses. The lingering effects of the paralyzing gas vanished, replaced by an exhilarating surge of energy.


    [+20 Strength]


    [+20 Agility]


    [+20 Stamina]


    [+20 Intelligence]


    [New Attribute Earned, Demonic Energy]


    [Demonic Energy: 10]


    Notifications blinked before his eyes, a testament to his rapidly transforming abilities. He was becoming something more, something beyond human.


    A dangerous glint entered his eyes. These cultists had unwittingly unleashed a power they couldn''t control. And William, fueled by their misguided ritual, was ready to make them pay.


    William felt stronger than ever, and all those cultists who were waiting to see their deity coming to that world would get a reality check.


    The leader, the one in red, said while kneeling, "Our lord, welcome."


    William pulled the chains and destroyed them using his strength. Then, he looked at all the cultists that were trying to use him as a sacrifice.


    "You will regret this," he said, coldly.


    Sear?h the n?velFire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.

 Chapter 40 Massacre, Reaching the City

    The cultists, their faces contorted in a mix of fear and reverence, struggled to comprehend the sight before them. Their god, their dark savior, had returned...but something was amiss."Oh great lord," the cult leader stammered, his voice trembling, "we know you are displeased by these restraints, but they were necessary to prepare the vessel."


    William''s eyes, now burning with an unnatural intensity, scanned the assembled figures. They were weak, their power paltry compared to the demonic energy coursing through his veins. Only the leader posed a potential threat, but even he would be no match for a surprise attack.


    A cruel smile twisted William''s lips. "Ah, is that so?" he purred, his voice dripping with false reassurance. "Forgive my... outburst."


    The leader, momentarily relieved, gasped as a searing pain pierced his chest. He looked down to see the obsidian blade protruding from his heart, its dark surface slick with blood.


    "B-but why...?" he choked out, his eyes wide with disbelief.


    Those were his last words. He crumpled to the ground, lifeless. A notification flashed before William''s eyes, confirming the kill and the experience points gained. It was the first time he had taken a human life.


    He had slain the demon, of course, but that felt different, less...real. He should have felt remorse, guilt, but those emotions were strangely absent. Instead, a dark satisfaction bloomed within him, a thirst for vengeance against those who had sought to sacrifice him.


    With a roar, William lunged at the nearest cultist, his sword a blur of deadly motion. He cleaved through flesh and bone, severing limbs, heads, and torsos.


    Blood splattered across the altar, staining the stone floor crimson. The enhanced strength and agility granted by the demonic energy made each attack effortless, each strike precise and devastating.


    The cultists'' screams echoed through the chamber, their desperate pleas for mercy falling on deaf ears. William, consumed by a terrifying rage, cut them down without hesitation.


    Some attempted to fight back, one even managing to plunge a dagger deep into William''s shoulder. The pain was intense, but in that moment of adrenaline-fueled fury, he barely registered it.


    The carnage ended. Silence descended, heavy and oppressive. William fell to his knees, the reality of his actions crashing down upon him.


    He had just slaughtered a room full of people. Blood stained his hands, his clothes, the very air he breathed. He buried his face in his hands, overwhelmed by the enormity of what he had done. He tried to convince himself it was self-defense, that they had intended to kill him first.


    But a nagging voice whispered doubts in his ear. Was this truly him? Or was the demonic energy influencing his actions, pushing him towards violence?


    He rose, his legs shaky, and stumbled out of the chamber. Following a set of wooden stairs, he emerged into a grand mansion, nestled deep within the forest.


    This was the cult''s headquarters, a place of dark rituals and sinister secrets. He briefly searched for valuables, hoping to find something useful, but found nothing of interest.


    Outside, he washed the blood from his body in the cool water of a nearby well, scrubbing at his skin until it was free of the crimson stain.


    He changed into a simple peasant''s outfit he found within the mansion, the rough fabric a stark contrast to his usual attire. Two horses grazed peacefully nearby. Recognition sparked in William''s eyes. These were the horses stolen from him and Gorn.


    ''Those bastards,'' he thought, his anger rekindled.


    He returned to the deserted town, the tavern looming like a specter in the eerie silence. Most of the townsfolk had been present at the ritual, leaving the streets deserted. He found Gorn pacing anxiously in front of the tavern, his face etched with worry.


    "Lad!" Gorn exclaimed, rushing towards William and pulling him into a tight embrace. "What in the world happened?"


    "I can explain on the way," William replied grimly. "Let''s get out of here!"


    Gorn nodded, mounting one of the horses. William followed suit, and they rode out of the cursed town, leaving the horrors behind them.


    William recounted his harrowing experience, carefully omitting the details of the demonic energy absorption and the ensuing massacre.


    He claimed to have been captured, but concocted a believable escape, attributing his freedom to a combination of luck and resourcefulness. Gorn, though sensing some gaps in the story, trusted William implicitly.


    "I''m glad you managed to escape that dreadful situation," Gorn said, relief washing over him. "And they were the ones who stole our horses? Mother fuckers!"


    "Yes," William confirmed, eager to put the ordeal behind him. "I found them outside that mansion. Honestly, the whole experience was rather traumatic. I''d prefer to focus on our journey now." sea??h th§× ¦Çov§×lFire .net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "Agreed," Gorn said, steering their conversation towards safer topics.


    They resumed their travels, the magic school drawing ever closer. The remaining journey was uneventful, a welcome respite after their harrowing encounter. While William appreciated the peace, a part of him craved excitement, a yearning for adventure that simmered beneath the surface.


    That excitement arrived in the form of two magnificent griffins. Gorn, ever resourceful, had arranged for these majestic creatures to carry them over the treacherous mountain range that lay ahead.


    "Gods above!" William exclaimed, his eyes wide with awe. "Why are we riding griffins?"


    "We''re entering a mountainous region," Gorn explained, "and traveling by horse would take far too long. These magnificent beasts will carry us to the city where your magic school awaits. It should take no more than seven days."


    The final leg of their journey had begun, and with it, a sense of anticipation and wonder filled William''s heart. He was ready to embrace the challenges and opportunities that awaited him at the academy.


    A nervous thrill coursed through William as he clambered onto the griffin, tentatively stroking its beak as the handler had instructed. The creature, surprisingly docile, responded with a soft chirp. With a powerful leap, they took to the sky.


    William gasped, the wind whipping through his hair, the world stretching out beneath him like an endless tapestry. He had never experienced flight like this, the freedom and exhilaration unlike anything he could have imagined.


    Gorn soared beside him, a wide grin splitting his weathered face. "Magnificent, isn''t it?" he shouted over the wind.


    The towering mountains, their snow-capped peaks gleaming in the sunlight, painted a breathtaking panorama. William, mesmerized by the sheer beauty of it all, took a moment to respond.


    "It''s incredible!" he yelled back, his voice filled with awe. "This is the best part of the journey!"


    "You bet it is!" Gorn roared, guiding his griffin into a graceful arc.


    And so, seven days passed. William savored every moment of the journey, and then, from a mountaintop, he beheld the city that would be his home for a considerable time!


    It was enormous, with towering stone walls and even taller buildings. A short distance from the city, on an even higher part of the mountain, stood a colossal structure, encircled by a rampart and a blue barrier, like some magical shield.


    "That''s the magic school you''ll be attending," Gorn said, pointing towards it. "But first, we''ll take a break in the city. You still have a few days before your exam, I believe."


    "Understood," William replied.


    Excitement thrummed through him. He had finally reached his destination.

 Chapter 41 Two Days Before the Exam

    They dismounted their griffins at the city''s edge, the majestic creatures folding their wings as they settled onto the ground. While the griffins could have easily soared over the towering walls, the city had strict regulations against aerial entry.The path leading up to the gate was sparsely populated, not due to any lack of appeal, but because of the treacherous mountain trails that served as the only access point. The Snowpeak Mount, as it was known, stood in stark contrast to the gentler landscapes William was accustomed to.


    "This is The Snowpeak Mount. What do you think?" Gorn asked, a hint of pride in his voice.


    Even having traversed through worlds thus seeing great things back on Earth, William found himself captivated by the city''s grandeur. Its ancient stone architecture, accented by the subtle shimmer of ambient magic, exuded an aura of timeless wonder.


    "Looking pretty magical," William admitted, his gaze sweeping over the cityscape. "But how long do we have to wait until the exam?"


    "A few days. Let''s get inside, shall we?" Gorn gestured towards the imposing front gate.


    The guards, clad in gleaming armor, conducted a thorough search, their practiced hands expertly checking for any contraband.


    "Why are you two coming to the city?" one guard inquired, his voice sharp and alert.


    "I am taking him to the exam to enter the magic school," Gorn explained patiently. "After everything is done, I''ll be leaving."


    The guard''s stern expression softened slightly. "Oh, another student coming for the exam," he remarked with a hint of amusement. "Many of them arrived last month. I think this year''s exam might be exciting. Anyway, go in, and enjoy your stay."


    The gate swung open, revealing a bustling city with cobblestone streets teeming with people. The air hummed with activity, a stark contrast to the serene mountain path they had just traversed.


    But beyond the bustling markets and impressive displays of magic, what struck William most was the pervasive sense of security.


    The city guard, a mix of seasoned warriors and powerful mages, some even graduates of Snowpeak Mount''s esteemed academy, patrolled the streets with an air of confident authority.


    "This is incredible," William breathed, his eyes wide with wonder. "There are alchemy shops, enchantment shops, magic tomes shops¡­ This is a paradise for anyone seeking knowledge!"


    He was captivated by the sheer variety of magical wares on display, and this wasn''t even the school itself! He knew that within the academy''s walls lay even greater treasures ¨C ancient texts and rare spellbooks, accessible to students who proved their worth. The prospect ignited a fire of ambition within him.


    "Hungry?" Gorn asked, interrupting William''s awestruck musings. "First, let''s find a safe place for the griffins."


    Though their arrival on griffin-back had initially drawn some curious glances, it was hardly an uncommon sight. Griffins were a favored mode of transport for those journeying to Snowpeak Mount, offering both speed and safety in equal measure.


    The city boasted a well-equipped care center specifically for flying mounts. They led their griffins through a grand archway into a spacious stable, where attendants bustled about, tending to a variety of winged creatures. Sear?h the Novel?ire(.)ne*t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "Alright, it''s 50 silver coins a day. Understood?" the gruff owner declared, eyeing them with a practiced gaze.


    Gorn nodded, handing over the payment without hesitation, and then steered William back towards the city center, his familiarity with the winding streets evident.


    He moved with the assurance of someone who had walked these paths many times before, a fact that did not escape William''s notice.


    "This isn''t your first time here, is it?" he asked, curiosity piqued.


    Gorn chuckled. "You''re quite perceptive, lad. And no, it isn''t. I''ve been here many times throughout my life."


    The more Gorn revealed, the more enigmatic he became. He possessed the skills of a seasoned warrior, yet presented himself as a simple hunter from the remote village of Willow Creek.


    How could a hunter afford such frequent trips to Snowpeak Mount? Where did he acquire his wealth and his combat prowess?


    Despite his growing curiosity, William held onto his trust in Gorn. He sensed that the man had his reasons for keeping secrets, and that in time, those secrets would be revealed.


    They went to a tavern to get some food and rest after their difficult journey.


    The place was called Dale Ale. When they pushed the door open, many eyes went straight to them.


    William wasn''t scared of being stared at anymore. He looked back and noticed a few young faces in the bar, each accompanied by someone older.


    He didn''t need much knowledge to understand who those people were ¨C people wanting to take the same exam as he was. Judging by the scanning eyes the young folks gave William, they were thinking the same thing.


    Gorn went to the counter to speak with the attendant, ordering some food and a room for later. They chose a table in the corner of the tavern, ate their food, and went to their rooms afterward.


    As William was going up the staircase, before he could even take the first step, a young man stopped in front of him. The young man was blond, not that tall, and slim. "Hey, nice to meet you. I am Altair."


    "William," William said, shaking the man''s hand. He didn''t understand why that person came to speak with him, but there was no need to act rude when the other party wasn''t.


    "I can tell you are taking the exam in a few days. You know there are a few spots, right? So, good luck. I hope you and I can get our spots," Altair said with a smile, and then he left, returning to his table.


    "Good luck to you too," William said while Altair was moving away. The youth heard it, as he turned his head to see William and give him a thumbs up.


    As they were going up the staircase, William muttered, "That was strange."


    Gorn was right beside him. "It could be one of two things: either this Altair is targeting you, which means you''ll have some problems in the future, or he''s just someone who wants to be friends if both of you get into the magic academy."


    William was hoping it was the latter. He wasn''t looking to make enemies before even stepping foot inside the magic academy. That would be horrendous.


    They went all the way up to the tavern''s third floor where their room was. Yes, their room. The city had so many people coming for the exams that they didn''t have any more rooms left. The good part was that the room itself was pretty big, and it had two beds inside.


    "The tavern owner certainly knows his customers, or maybe he prepared it especially for the exam period," William said as he jumped on the single bed.


    "Yep. They often change the rooms when the city gets more visitors, like during the exam period. They know the aspiring acolytes always come with a guard or a mentor, so that''s why they design the rooms like this."


    William gave an acknowledging nod. "These owners are pretty smart."


    "That''s how they keep their profit."


    The two decided to rest after the long journey. William slept like a rock on the single bed, while Gorn slept on the king-size bed.


    It was around 5 pm when they slept, only waking up the next day at around 5 am... That was a lot of sleep. William woke up feeling like he had been hit by a truck.


    ''Not sleeping sucks, sleeping too much sucks too,'' he complained internally.


    According to their calculations, they still had two free days before the exam, and Gorn wanted to make sure William was prepared.

 Chapter 42 Learning About the Exams

    Two days before the exam. It wasn''t a decent time to train for anything. No one would be training during this period. But it was important for William to understand how the exam worked and what he should expect. Gorn and William were sitting on the bed, talking about it."Before anything, I''ve never participated in these exams," Gorn said.


    William was expecting to hear something similar to that, but what he heard next shook him to his core.


    "But I have participated in the examination boards, so I know how the process works and the best things to do to get a good score," Gorn said.


    The whole thing about Gorn''s identity was just too much for William to handle. It seemed like every time, Gorn became even more mysterious.


    A ''normal'' person could never participate in the examination board of such a great magic academy. Hell, a ''normal'' person would never participate in any board.


    So how was Gorn there? A simple hunter with some good skills? William didn''t believe any of that.


    "I won''t even ask you how you are on this board," William said, rolling his eyes at the statement.


    Gorn, on the other hand, said, "I was once a teacher in that school. To become one, you don''t have to go through the same exam the students go through. It was another one."


    That, at least, was some explanation. William didn''t push him for more answers. It was good enough for him.


    "So the first part of the exam is in fact the talent thing you did. They admit people with various talents, as this is something that can be improved, and it doesn''t mean you are smart or will become someone powerful. After that, those who passed the talent test will go to the second test, which is basically a field thing. They change the area every time so I don''t know for certain, but expect to use your body to endure harsh conditions."


    The first two tests weren''t concerning to William. He knew he had a good talent, so the first test was already a win. And his body was his strongest asset, so the second test was in the bag too. But the rest of the exam was another story.


    "The third exam is comprised of fights between those who have passed the other tests. Remember this clearly," Gorn said, calling for William''s attention. "This test is not looking for the one who wins the fight. You get points based on your usage of the runes, the spells, how many spells you show during combat, and how well you fight. Don''t go there trying to just win without showing what you are capable of."


    Well, that certainly was a good piece of information; some people taking the exams would know it, and some wouldn''t.


    "The last part of the exam is the hardest. You''ll be staying in the magic academy as if you were already a student, but you won''t be before passing this test," Gorn said.


    William paid close attention to what Gorn was saying. He didn''t want to mess up his chance of becoming a student in that prestigious school! He wanted access to the books, the resources, the teachers that could guide him! William wanted to become stronger.


    "You''ll be staying for one month in the school. Not taking classes or anything, but you can use the library. Anyway, the test is essentially this: the more spells you learn during this time, the more points you get," Gorn explained.


    This part worked with a points system. The lower-ranked spells earned fewer points, but they were easier to learn, so you could learn more than one during the one-month period. The higher the spell rank, the higher the points acquired.


    But Gorn warned William, "You need to learn at least one spell during this time. I have seen so many students trying to learn high-ranking spells to get the highest points, and in the end, they learn nothing and lose their chances. Play it smart during this part."


    "Understood."


    William now knew how all the parts of the exam worked, which was huge for him.


    "This won''t give you a major advantage, though. The nobles already know all of this, maybe even more. But at least you are on equal terms with them," Gorn explained.


    The people trying to enter the magic academy ranged from poor to rich, influential to not influential. Everyone knew the nobles had access to information the commoners couldn''t get, but that didn''t mean the commoners couldn''t enter the magic academy. In fact, there were more commoners than nobles, and the number was steadily increasing.


    Anyway, William spent the remainder of the time after that conversation resting. He rested for the entirety of the two days, only going out to eat and explore some parts of the city. He didn''t train a single day. He wanted to keep his mind fresh and sharp for the upcoming tests, so it wasn''t a good idea to overexert himself.


    It had been a while since the last time he used his SSS skill, but he didn''t have the chance during the journey¡ªGorn would see him use it, and that couldn''t happen. But William sensed that he would be using it soon. Sear?h the N??elFir§×.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    The morning of the first day of exams arrived, and they set off, heading all the way toward the highest part of the mountain where the magic academy was located. Could they use their griffins to get there faster? In theory, yes, but there was a barrier close to the magic academy that made flying impossible.


    William noticed other students who were also heading toward the academy, just like them. In fact, he even spotted Altair, who came to talk with him. The blond lad looked as happy as ever.


    "Hey, William. Excited for the tests?" Altair said; then he leaned closer to William, whispering, "Want to know how the tests work?"


    That was pretty nice of Altair, being willing to share how the tests worked with William.


    "Thank you, but I already know," William said, smiling. "But thank you. Not everyone seems to be willing to help."


    Altair looked at the other students around them with scorn. "Yeah, you can expect these students to be mostly pricks, especially the nobles." He then added, "I know the nobles can be jerks because I am a noble myself, but I am not a jerk, obviously."


    The two decided to chat during their journey to the academy. It took them around an hour of walking to get there. Altair looked somewhat exhausted.


    ''He certainly is not a mage who focuses on the body, like me,'' thought William.


    They all stopped in front of an imposing gate. The walls surrounding the school were massive, entirely made of stone. Towers stood at each corner of the school with guards stationed above, staffs in hand, ready to protect the school if anything happened.


    But even before that, the school had a magical barrier protecting it. It was one of the safest places in the entire kingdom.


    All the students were gathered in front of the gate, waiting for the exam supervisor to show up. They couldn''t just enter; there were rules for them to follow.


    William waited there, his heart beating fast and his fingers fidgeting without a break.


    "Relax," Gorn said.


    That wasn''t enough to relax him. But he wasn''t nervous because he believed he wouldn''t pass the test. He was just excited to start it as soon as possible!

 Chapter 43 Magic Academy Exam (1)

    The school''s front gate buzzed with nervous energy. William, though outwardly calm, felt a flutter of anticipation in his stomach. He observed the crowd, noting the varied ages and backgrounds of the applicants. Some were barely older than Maya, while others appeared to be in their late twenties."Gorn," he whispered, "what''s the age range at this academy?"


    "There''s a minimum age to enroll, but no maximum," Gorn explained. "It''s common to see students of all ages in the same class, though most are between sixteen and twenty-four. Older students are rarer."


    William recalled that the minimum age was sixteen, but that didn''t mean aspiring mages only began their training then. Nobles, with their privileged access to resources and tutors, often started much younger, giving them a significant head start. William had only begun his magical journey recently, but his experiences in the past and his unique skillset gave him a distinct advantage.


    "You might be slightly behind some of these nobles," Gorn said, his voice filled with confidence, "but with your talent, you''ll surpass them in no time."


    William knew his talent was above average, but not extraordinary. It was his Chrono Shift ability that truly set him apart. He couldn''t help but feel a twinge of guilt, knowing he possessed an unfair advantage.


    Thirty minutes crawled by, the tension in the hall thickening. A young noble, his impatience evident, voiced his frustration. "Our families practically fund this school!" he complained loudly. "Why are they treating us like this?"


    Just then, an elderly man in flowing gray robes materialized at the top of the grand gate. His long white beard and hair framed a face remarkably devoid of wrinkles. He floated effortlessly to the ground, his eyes twinkling with an ageless wisdom.


    "The school is free," the man boomed, his voice amplified by magic, "and everyone receives the same treatment. Our esteemed researchers and professors serve the kingdom, not your coin purses, young man."


    William glanced at Gorn, whose face had drained of color. "What''s wrong?" William whispered.


    "Th-that''s the headmaster!" Gorn stammered, his voice barely above a whisper. "I don''t know why he''s here!"


    The young noble, his arrogance deflated, opened his mouth to retort, but an older man beside him intervened. "I apologize for my son''s impudence, Headmaster," the man said, bowing respectfully.


    The headmaster smiled. "It''s understandable. Youngsters have much to learn." He surveyed the crowd, his gaze piercing. "For those who don''t know me, I am Tholfnir, Headmaster of this academy." Sear?h the N?vel(F)ire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    A hush fell over the hall. The earlier commotion evaporated, replaced by a respectful silence. No one dared to anger the man who held their future in his hands.


    "The supervisor for today''s entrance exam is usually a professor," Tholfnir continued, "but due to unforeseen circumstances, I will be overseeing the proceedings myself. Consider yourselves fortunate to have this opportunity to impress me directly."


    William felt a surge of anxiety. He looked at Gorn, his voice barely a whisper. "Is this good or bad?"


    "Good if you have something impressive to show him," Gorn replied, his voice low, "and bad if you...don''t. I think you''ll be just fine."


    "First," Tholfnir announced, his voice resonating with authority, "we shall enter the academy grounds. The initial tests will be conducted within."


    With a groan of ancient hinges, the massive gates swung open, revealing a glimpse of the wonders within. The sight drew gasps from the assembled crowd.


    William felt dwarfed by the sheer scale of the entrance, its grandeur a testament to the prestige of the institution. Headmaster Tholfnir led the way, pausing to address the applicants.


    "Only those participating in the entrance exam may proceed," he declared. "All others are to return to the city."


    Gorn, along with the other guardians, bid their farewells. "We''ll speak later," Gorn said, squeezing William''s shoulder. "You''ll likely have two stages of testing today."


    "Alright," William replied, his confidence unwavering. He knew exactly what to expect, thanks to the information Gorn gave him. "Thank you for accompanying me this far."


    Gorn ruffled William''s hair with a grin. "It was my pleasure, lad. Good luck."


    Similar scenes unfolded amongst the other applicants, a mix of encouragement and nervous anticipation hanging in the air. Once the farewells were complete, Tholfnir turned and led the way through the gates.


    As the last student entered, the gates swung shut with a resounding boom, sealing them within the academy grounds.


    A reverent silence fell over the group as they followed the headmaster. Perhaps if a regular professor had been leading them, their demeanor would have been more relaxed, but Tholfnir commanded respect.


    He was a legendary figure, a mage of immense power, capable of devastating force. Rumors circulated about his abilities, some claiming he could single-handedly defeat thirty thousand mages, a staggering thought.


    They arrived at a courtyard, a tranquil oasis of lush greenery interwoven with winding stone paths. Benches nestled beneath ancient trees offered a place for contemplation and study. Tholfnir stopped before a large crystal, its surface shimmering with an inner light.


    "This crystal will assess your magical aptitude," he explained. "While I believe everyone present possesses the potential to pass, this serves as a formality before the true test."


    William recognized the crystal from his previous experience. While it was true that everyone seemed to pass this stage, he suspected there was more to it than met the eye. As he observed the other applicants step forward, he noticed Tholfnir''s keen interest in those who displayed exceptional talent.


    The headmaster was clearly identifying promising candidates, those who might warrant greater attention and resources should they gain admission.


    William''s turn arrived. He placed his hand on the cool crystal surface. A vibrant light erupted, its intensity exceeding that of the previous applicants.


    But this time, there was a difference. A subtle darkness swirled within the brilliance, a shadow that caught Tholfnir''s attention. The headmaster''s eyes narrowed, a flicker of curiosity in their depths, but he remained silent.


    Once all the applicants had been assessed, they proceeded to the next stage of the exam, held in the sprawling forest behind the academy.


    "Your talent seems quite strong, William," Altair remarked as they followed Tholfnir along a wooded path. "Let''s focus on passing the remaining tests."


    "Yes, of course," William replied, a confident grin spreading across his face. "I believe we can do it."


    They exited through a smaller gate at the rear of the academy, the throng of hopefuls numbering somewhere between one hundred and one hundred and twenty. Tholfnir''s voice, amplified by magic, cut through the air.


    "This test is eliminatory," he declared, his gaze sweeping across the anxious faces. "Our aim is to reduce your numbers by at least half. For those unaware, there are a maximum of thirty-five places available in this year''s intake."


    The news brought a wave of tension. Thirty-five places... the competition was fierce. The forest behind the academy, though seemingly devoid of major threats, pressed in on them, its silence broken only by the rustling of leaves and the occasional bird call.


    "Each of you will be given a ring," Tholfnir explained, holding up a simple silver band. "For every beast you eliminate, a portion of its mana will be transferred to the ring, accumulating points."


    A ripple of excitement passed through the crowd. The test sounded straightforward enough. But then Tholfnir added, "You may also absorb a portion of the mana from the rings of other students. This will grant you more points than slaying beasts and, of course, eliminate your competition."


    The atmosphere instantly shifted. A palpable sense of unease settled over the group. The rules had just changed the game, turning a test of skill into a ruthless battle for survival. Every smile vanished, replaced by wary glances and calculating stares. Alliances were out of the question; in this forest, there were no friends, only rivals.

 Chapter 44 Magic Academy Exam (2)

    "Maybe we can start an alliance?" Altair whispered to William.Tension crackled through the air, thick and suffocating. Altair, despite his friendly demeanor, was undeniably a competitor. William, though tempted by the offer, hesitated. Trusting anyone in this cutthroat exam felt like a recipe for disaster.


    "We can discuss that near the end of the trial," Altair proposed, sensing William''s hesitation, "if either of us needs a boost."


    "Alright," William agreed, a flicker of caution still lingering in his eyes.


    The silver rings they had been given pulsed with a faint light, their purpose more sinister than their plain appearance suggested.


    Tholfnir explained their function, revealing their connection to one another and their ability to shift color based on the wearer''s ranking.


    Those in the top half, with sufficient mana accumulated, would see their rings glow green, a beacon of safety. Those lagging behind would be marked with a glaring red, a target for those desperate to climb the ranks.


    As Tholfnir distributed the rings, they remained colorless, dormant until the start of the trial.


    "The exam will last twelve hours," Tholfnir announced, his voice booming through the forest. "Severely injuring your fellow participants is strictly prohibited. If you find yourself outmatched, surrender. I will be observing you all closely."


    His words held a chilling weight, a reminder that while ruthless ambition was encouraged, crossing the line would have severe consequences.


    After explaining everything to them, it was time to start the actual test. The first hour was for the participants to scatter through the forest and find a place to hide or find beasts to kill to earn points. Fights between them were prohibited at the start, only allowed after one hour had passed.


    Everyone went to a different part of the forest. William observed some of the participants, and apparently, almost no one was forming teams, only a few were.


    The chilling wind of the forest hit William like razor blades as he walked through the snowy terrain. The school was on top of a mountain, after all.


    ''Where should I hide?'' William pondered, looking at his surroundings.


    One of the first things he realized was how the forest had barely any beasts. While most of the students didn''t know how to hunt¡ªespecially the nobles¡ªhe did, and there were almost no tracks.


    It was as if that whole part of the exam was focused on the fights between the students and not the actual fight against beasts.


    ''But if I want to absorb the mana from someone else''s ring, it must have mana, right? So they need to kill beasts to get it?''


    Considering everyone started at 0 points, they needed to kill beasts first before even trying to steal the points from someone else. So if that was the case, then where were the beasts? William had that doubt in his mind.


    After walking for 20 minutes, always looking around him, making sure no one was following him, he saw it: a cave in the middle of the forest. William walked toward it and went inside.


    A cave in the forest was not uncommon. It was actually pretty common to find them. William walked toward it slowly. If beasts were in the area, a cave like that one was the perfect spot for them to live.


    Once inside, he realized how dark it was. Having no source of light made it very hard to see. William''s caution increased tenfold. He didn''t want to step on the wrong place or get attacked by a beast pouncing at his neck from the pitch-black darkness.


    But things changed after he walked a little bit further. He saw a few torches on the wall, glowing with a green light.


    ''Magical torches,'' William murmured.


    The torches made it possible for him to see clearly, and the deeper he went, the more torches he saw. At one point, he came to a stone door marked with the symbol of a skull. William noticed a letter written next to it and picked it up to read.


    "This is a special area for the test. Inside, you will find many skeletons and undead beasts. There are entrances scattered all over the forest, and this is where you will encounter the monsters to earn points." - Tholfnir.


    It was a letter written by the school''s headmaster, the person responsible for watching over the exams. They had built a type of dungeon with the beasts inside, and all the students would go to that underground area to find the monsters.


    ''This will make hiding much harder once all the students are down there,'' William thought.


    That would force the students into fighting against each other to get the points and secure a spot for the next test!


    Anyway, William had no choice but to enter, so he pushed the door open and continued forward.


    The first thing he saw was a hallway completely made of stone, with the same torches on the walls. It was easy to see inside¡ªnot all participants knew a spell that could light up the area, so they had to use the torches so that everyone had a fair chance.


    William had been in this new area for only 10 seconds when a monster came his way. It was a skeleton with a curved sword and a wooden shield. The skeleton wasn''t that strong. William tried to focus to see if he could at least determine what level the creature was, and it worked.


    [Skeleton]


    [Level: 3]


    That was the approximate level of the monster, and the name suggested by the system was basic too.


    William couldn''t see the attributes of the monster or anything else related to it. The level itself was not a good thing to focus on too much!


    Gorn had warned him that things may have the same level, but their attributes could be vastly different.


    So the level 3 skeleton could have similar attributes to another creature that was level 10!


    William himself was a testament to that. His level had stayed the same, but his attributes had increased dramatically with the absorption of demonic energy.


    He still had his sword¡ªin fact, he had two of them, the ''normal'' one and the demonic one. William used the ''normal'' one to fight against the skeleton.


    He didn''t wait for the monster to come to him but instead moved toward it with tremendous speed. He was in front of it in seconds.


    The recent boosts in his attributes were certainly making a huge difference. S~ea??h the N?vel?ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    With a clean slash, William cut off the monster''s head, or rather, its skull. The skeleton didn''t resist and died instantly, falling to the ground and shattering into pieces.


    [+50 EXP]


    William then noticed a blue energy emanating from the skeleton''s bones and flowing straight to his ring, making it shine with a green light.


    ''A green light! So I might be among the first ones to actually find this place,'' William realized.


    He couldn''t just stand there after killing just one monster. William moved forward, looking for more creatures to kill to earn more points!


    Then he saw more skeletons coming his way. It was a group of ten this time, far more than the previous encounter! But that wasn''t scaring him.


    ''Let''s kill these bald skeletons!'' William thought as he gripped his sword tightly and charged toward the group.

 Chapter 45 Magic Academy Exam (3)

    The skeletons had varied weapons. Some used swords while others used spears or even bows. That made the fight much harder for William. While fighting in close range with the skeletons, he had to keep his attention on the ones with bows.A hit by an arrow would hurt a lot. It wasn''t a good thing to get hurt during the first hours of the exam, as it would lower his chances of passing the first part.


    However, even with the numerical advantage, the skeletons were still too weak compared to William. All of his sword slashes had tremendous force behind them, and the skeletons couldn''t withstand it.


    One even tried to block with its shield, but it was destroyed instantly, and the skeleton met the same fate. As for the arrows coming his way, William''s reflexes were so great that he dodged or deflected them using his sword.


    Every single one of the skeletons perished against him. He didn''t receive a single blow. William smiled when he saw the EXP notifications and looked at the ring shining with a green light on his finger.


    Things were going in the right direction for him, at least during the first part of the exam.


    ''There are like 11 hours until it ends, so I cannot get lazy!'' William reminded himself.


    The worst part for him was traversing that place. It consisted mostly of hallways with no room for a proper fight, and it had many different paths to follow, meaning it was easy to get lost.


    Eventually, William arrived at an open area. It was a large room with a high ceiling and enough space for a proper fight. In fact, it was quite big. It reminded William of an arena, like the ones gladiators used¡ªthough gladiators didn''t fight in creepy dungeons, or did they?


    William stepped into the open area, and that''s when he saw a coffin in the middle of the room. That was not a great sign.


    "I''ve played enough RPGs to know that this is shaping up to be a boss fight," William said.


    One didn''t need to be particularly clever to realize the room held a more powerful creature than the skeletons he had faced before.


    Then, as William got close enough, the coffin lid creaked open. From within, an undead creature emerged.


    Unlike the skeletons, this one had skin! It looked like a mummy with a long robe and a golden staff in its hands.


    William tried to discern some information about the creature, like its level, but it didn''t work. He could only see the levels of very weak creatures like the skeletons. His proficiency wasn''t high enough yet to see higher levels.


    But William could sense its power! Gorn had said the most accurate way of gauging an enemy''s strength was through its aura. The aura this undead creature emanated was decent, but it was still weaker compared to William''s.


    His recent boosts in attributes, with a total of 20 points added to all of them, had turned him into a completely different beast.


    That essentially doubled his attributes, so his actual power was far beyond what those creatures possessed. He wasn''t scared of them. William jumped into the arena, sword in hand.


    One of the things he considered was using his skills to boost his attributes even further, but it was wise to conserve mana and only use them if strictly necessary. William believed his power without the skills was enough to fight against that creature.


    With that in mind, he dashed toward the creature, his image a blur. The undead creature wasn''t as simple as the skeletons from before. It waved its staff and created runes that cast dark energy toward William.


    He jumped to the side to avoid the attack. The ground where the dark energy hit started to melt. William was glad he had managed to avoid such a devastating attack.


    But now it was his turn to fight back. William didn''t have any actual combat skills, only self-buffs, but with his high attributes, even normal slashes from his sword caused tremendous damage. He swung his sword right at the undead''s arm, trying to cut off the arm holding the staff.


    The undead floated away from the attack, avoiding it completely. Then, it cast yet another spell. This time, the dark energy shapeshifted into ropes, binding William in place.


    "Damn!" he cursed.


    With his movements restrained like that, he would become an easy target for the undead''s other spells. That was not ideal.


    However, William was not the kind of person to give up easily. He didn''t want to use any skills, but he had to in this situation.


    He drew a few runes in the air and then activated them! The runic symbols appeared on his body, and he shone with a blue light.


    "Kinetic Burst!"


    William''s body surged forward like a battering ram! The force behind the advance was so great that the magical ropes binding his body snapped. The undead was not expecting that! William, with his sword in hand, took advantage of the propulsion from Kinetic Burst and cut the undead creature in half!


    [+400 EXP]


    It was dead. William wiped a drop of sweat from his forehead with his hand. "That was dangerous."


    Without a spell to break free from those ropes, William''s situation would have been much different, and he likely would have lost that fight.


    But thankfully, that wasn''t the case. He looked around to see if he spotted more enemies or even one of the other participants, but there was nothing around him. So, he continued his exploration.


    ---


    While all of that was happening, Tholfnir was floating above the forest with a crystal orb in hand. With it, he could see everything that was happening in the test. Tholfnir saw the fight between William and the undead creature.


    "This young man is quite impressive... His body is far stronger than anyone else... And his aptitude test had that strange color too..."


    After witnessing such a display of skill, Tholfnir made a mental note to pay close attention to William and what he would accomplish in the future. S~ea??h the Nov§×l?ire.n(e)t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    ---


    William encountered the first participant in one of the hallways right after fighting the undead creature. It was a noble, judging by his attire. The young man saw William and how his ring had a green light.


    "Hey," the noble said, scorn in his voice, "you can just give me the mana in your ring without a fight, so let''s get this over with."


    The noble was confident in his skills and wasn''t scared of William. One reason was that William didn''t look like a noble.


    To him, commoners had far less magical training and therefore couldn''t win against him in a fight. William also saw the green light emanating from the noble''s ring, but he wasn''t the type¡ªor rather, stupid enough¡ªto waste time talking with his adversary.


    He dashed forward and attacked the noble. The speed at which his body moved shocked the noble, whose eyes went wide with despair.


    It was impossible to dodge. William cut the noble on the arm, making sure the wound wasn''t deep enough to cause permanent damage or disqualify him from the exam.


    "Stop it!" the noble screamed, begging for his life. "I''ll just give you my points, don''t hurt me!"


    The noble transferred all of his points to William and walked away. It was wiser that way. At least his wounds weren''t so bad that he wouldn''t be able to earn back his points. What he didn''t want was to be beaten up so badly by William that he couldn''t fight anymore.


    William now had a lot of points, but that was just the beginning of the exam!

 Chapter 46 Magic Academy Exam (4)

    The exam soon turned into a fierce battle. It wasn''t the undead creatures inside the dungeon that were the real enemies. Once most of the participants had some points in their rings, the number of creatures down there diminished greatly.So, how could they get more points? Fighting against other participants was the answer. Some didn''t even have any points, but they had the chance of winning against someone who did and climbing back into the green rankings.


    William walked through one of the dark hallways, and that''s where he found a familiar face: Altair. The first thing William checked was the youth''s ring, which had a red light.


    "Altair," William said with a smile, "do you want some help getting points?"


    Altair had always treated William well and, up to that point, had never given him a reason not to trust him.


    "William," Altair said, checking William''s ring, "so you are in the green zone. Ay, I''m in trouble here."


    "There''s no need to panic. We still have three hours, more than enough time for us to get you some points," William said.


    After facing that noble, William had spent most of his time just walking around and avoiding others. He didn''t want to lose his points and didn''t need to earn more. But now he wanted to make sure he would have enough when the exam ended, so it was a good idea to get some more.


    Altair stepped forward and put a hand on William''s shoulder. "Would you really help me with this? I wouldn''t know how to repay you..." he said with a deep sigh.


    "We can talk about that later if we both get into the school. Come on," William said, gesturing with his hand, "let''s find someone to take some points from."


    Altair was at a loss for words but followed William nonetheless. He wanted to get into the school. It was his dream, and getting some help wouldn''t make it any less important to him.


    They soon found another one of those open areas that looked like arenas, and that''s where they found a few people fighting each other.


    There were a total of five people there, making it a messy and destructive scene. William and Altair crouched behind a stone pillar, watching the scene ahead with caution and care, trying not to make any noises that might attract unnecessary attention.


    "That''s our chance to sneak in and knock someone down," William whispered. "They won''t even see it coming."


    Altair nodded. "Understood. But who will we get first?"


    With five different targets, it was difficult to single out the best one. William decided to wait and watch for a while before acting. He also formulated a plan in his mind. "I''ll go behind someone, bear hug them, and you''ll knock them down somehow."


    Altair was the one who desperately needed points, so they wanted to get him the ''last hit.''


    "Are you sure this will work?" Altair asked, doubt lingering in his voice. "Can you really hold them down like that?"


    The plan was daring, relying on William''s physical prowess, a stark contrast to the magic-focused strategies of the other applicants. But William had no doubts. Subduing these pampered nobles would be child''s play.


    "My part is no problem," William assured Altair, a confident grin spreading across his face. "But what about you? Can you knock them out without causing serious injury? Remember, we can''t risk disqualification."


    Altair nodded, his expression determined. "I can handle it."


    The plan was set, but the timing was crucial. They had to wait for the perfect opportunity to strike.


    The five participants in the arena were locked in a chaotic struggle, spells flying in all directions. One unleashed a torrent of fire, creating a blazing inferno that forced the others to scramble for safety. Their movements were restricted, their focus consumed by evading the flames.


    Suddenly, another youth countered with water magic, dousing the flames and creating a thick cloud of steam. In that moment of confusion, the fire mage stumbled towards William and Altair''s hiding spot, separated from the others.


    "Now''s our chance!" William hissed. "Let''s go!"


    He activated Swiftfoot, his body surging with enhanced agility. He shot out from behind the rock, a blur of motion. Before the fire mage could react, William had him pinned to the ground, his superior strength undeniable.


    "Let me go!" the fire mage yelled, his voice laced with panic. His struggles were futile against William''s superior strength.


    The other participants in the arena paused their duel, their eyes widening in surprise at William''s sudden appearance and the sheer speed he had displayed. Even Altair, despite their plan, seemed taken aback. He arrived moments later, panting slightly from the exertion.


    "You can give all your points to him," William said to the captive mage, nodding towards Altair. "Or he''ll have to...persuade you. The choice is yours."


    The young mage remained silent, his focus consumed by futile attempts to break free. William''s patience wore thin. They couldn''t afford to linger; other participants might arrive at any moment.


    "Do your thing, Altair," William said, hoisting the struggling mage higher.


    Altair''s hands glowed with a soft light as he swiftly formed the runes for a spell. Two shimmering gauntlets materialized around his fists, their magical energy crackling. William, though intrigued, kept his focus on their captive.


    With a swift punch to the gut, Altair rendered the fire mage unconscious. A portion of mana flowed from the unconscious mage''s ring to Altair''s, its color shifting from a dull red to a vibrant green.


    "Let''s get out of here and find another target," William said, adrenaline coursing through him.


    "Agreed," Altair replied, his eyes gleaming with excitement.


    They vanished back into the maze of corridors, leaving the remaining four participants to their chaotic duel.


    "Why didn''t we take on the other four back there?" Altair asked, a hint of disappointment in his voice.


    "We need to use our numbers to our advantage," William explained. "Facing four opponents at once would have been reckless." The purpose of their alliance was to help Altair secure enough points to advance. Risking their progress for unnecessary battles went against their strategy.


    Both their rings now glowed a reassuring green, but with two to three hours remaining, accumulating extra points was a wise precaution. However, their search for more targets proved fruitless. The corridors remained eerily empty.


    They even returned to the arena where they had left the four participants, but it was deserted.


    "Where is everyone?" Altair wondered aloud, his brow furrowed in confusion.


    William quickly grasped the situation. "They''ve retreated to the forest," he said. "It''s safer to hide there, and no one wants to risk losing their points so close to the end."


    With renewed purpose, they navigated the maze-like corridors, emerging from the dungeon into the snowy forest. It was time to flush out those who sought refuge in the shadows. The hunt was far from over.


    William, his senses honed from months of training in the wilds, led the way. But the steadily falling snow blanketed the forest floor, obscuring any trace of their quarry.


    "The snow is covering their tracks," William muttered, frustration edging his voice. "This is going to be difficult."


    Altair, though reassured by his green-glowing ring, couldn''t shake a nagging worry. What if someone surpassed them in these final hours? The thought of being eliminated so close to the finish line was unsettling. sea??h th§× N?vel(F)ire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "Let''s keep searching," he urged. "We still have time."


    They pressed on, their eyes scanning the snow-laden branches and dense undergrowth. Suddenly, William froze, a faint sound reaching his keen ears.


    "Shh," he whispered, silencing Altair. His enhanced senses confirmed his suspicions; someone was nearby.


    He scanned the trees, his gaze drawn upwards. There, perched precariously on a high branch, a lone figure huddled amongst the leaves. Their eyes met, a silent exchange of surprise and apprehension.


    "Get down here," William called out, his voice firm, "or I''ll come up and get you."

 Chapter 47 Magic Academy Exam (5)

    William was expecting the youth to be quiet and ignore what he said, but the man actually answered him."Please, find someone else," the youth pleaded, his voice trembling. "I-I need these points to get into the school and give my family a better life, please!"


    With a quick analysis, William noticed that the youth had simple clothes. He even spotted a hole in the shirt the young man was using it. It was evident that the boy was one of the commoners.


    "Are you speaking the truth?" William asked, "I don''t want to get the spot of a commoner who really needs it."


    "Yes, of course I am! Look, I know where a noble is hiding, so you can get his points!" the commoner blurted out, desperation clinging to his voice.


    William exchanged glances with Altair. "I think it''s better to target the nobles," Altair said, echoing William''s own thoughts. "They have other options, other magic schools, private tutors... For commoners like them, this is their only chance."


    "Fine," William agreed. "Where is this noble?"


    The commoner''s expression brightened slightly. "Actually, there are two of them," he revealed. "I saw them heading towards the waterfall." He gave them detailed directions.


    Following the commoner''s instructions, William and Altair located the river and the cascading waterfall. Behind the torrent of water, a hidden cave beckoned. They plunged through the icy spray, their hopes high, but the cave was empty. Either the commoner had lied, or the nobles had moved on.


    "What do you think?" William asked, his voice laced with disappointment.


    "He seemed honest," Altair replied, frowning. "I think they must have left."


    Just as they were about to leave the cave, a figure materialized before them. It wasn''t another student, but Headmaster Tholfnir himself. His long robes billowed around him, his presence radiating an aura of immense power.


    "You two," he boomed, his voice echoing through the cave, "you have accumulated enough points to advance. Remain here. I do not wish for others who are also passing to be unduly disadvantaged. Remember, I require at least half of the participants to succeed. You cannot simply hoard all the points for yourselves."


    William''s heart sank. He had hoped to impress the headmaster, but it seemed he had done the opposite.


    "Do not be discouraged," Tholfnir said, sensing their dismay. "I am issuing the same warning to all those with high scores. I shall see you in a few hours." With a subtle gesture, he cast a teleportation spell, vanishing in a shimmer of light.


    "That was scary," Altair admitted, letting out a shaky breath. "I thought we were in trouble."


    "Me too," William agreed, his heart still pounding.


    Relieved of the pressure to hunt down more students, William and Altair settled into an uneasy truce with the forest. They had secured their place in the next phase, and now all that remained was to wait.


    "It''s nice to finally relax," Altair sighed, sinking onto a moss-covered rock.


    "Definitely," William agreed, stretching out his legs. "Do you know what the next part of the exam will be like?" Though Gorn had briefed him, he wanted to confirm the details.


    "I believe it''s a tournament," Altair replied. "A series of one-on-one duels. But honestly, I think everyone who made it this far will pass."


    "Really?" William asked, surprised.


    "Yes," Altair explained. "Considering the number of participants left, they won''t cut many more."


    Altair estimated that perhaps five more applicants might be eliminated in the next round, but no more than that. The final stage of the exam, the true test of their abilities, loomed on the horizon. That was the challenge William needed to prepare for now.


    The remaining hours of the trial passed in a blur of conversation and nervous anticipation. William and Altair discussed their hopes for the future, their dreams of mastering magic within the academy walls.


    The trial''s end came abruptly, heralded by Tholfnir''s booming voice echoing through the forest.


    "Return to the academy courtyard, now!"


    The remaining participants, along with those who had failed, assembled before the headmaster. As predicted, roughly half had been eliminated. Tholfnir addressed the dejected group, offering words of encouragement before guards escorted them from the grounds.


    Those who remained, their rings glowing green, faced the headmaster.


    "Congratulations," Tholfnir said, his gaze sweeping across their faces. "You have proven yourselves worthy of continuing. You will stay at the academy tonight, and the next stage of the exam will commence tomorrow morning. I shall show you to your accommodations."


    Tholfnir guided them through the sprawling academy grounds, finally arriving at a secluded building tucked away in the northwest corner. It appeared deserted, not due to neglect, but simply because it lacked the bustle of student life.


    "These are the dormitories reserved for entrance exam participants," Tholfnir explained. "The regular students reside in other accommodations."


    That explained the eerie quiet. Tholfnir assigned rooms at random, William receiving number eleven.


    "I''m all the way in room thirty-eight," Altair grumbled. "Damn it, that''s miles away."


    Separated from his newfound ally, William offered a reassuring smile. "We can talk more tomorrow. See you then."


    He entered his assigned room, surprised by its comfortable furnishings. A large bed with a plush mattress dominated the space, accompanied by a sturdy desk, a bookshelf stocked with intriguing titles, a small balcony overlooking the grounds, and a private bathroom.


    It exceeded his expectations, and he imagined the rooms for regular students would be even more luxurious. But that was a concern for another day, assuming he passed the remaining trials.


    Exhausted from the day''s challenges, William simply closed the door, kicked off his boots, and collapsed onto the bed, falling into a deep slumber without bothering with dinner or a shower. Those were concerns for the morning.


    He awoke hours before the designated wake-up time, a habit ingrained from his training with Gorn. With time to spare, he indulged in a hot shower and set out in search of sustenance. Unfamiliar with the academy layout, he wandered the grounds until he encountered a young girl with round glasses and vibrant green hair, sitting on a bench amidst the gardens.


    "Why are you awake so early?" she asked, her voice laced with curiosity. The morning air was frigid, but she seemed unfazed by the cold.


    "I''m hungry," William admitted with a sheepish grin. "The exams are tiring."


    "Ah, you''re one of the applicants," she realized, her eyes widening slightly. She seemed eager to engage in conversation, but William pressed for the information he needed.


    "Do you know where I can find some food?"


    "Of course," she replied, pointing towards a grand building in the distance. "Head to the main building, turn left, and keep going straight. You''ll find the dining hall there."


    "Thank you," William said, offering a grateful nod.


    He followed her directions, arriving at a spacious hall filled with long tables and bustling cooks preparing breakfast. At this early hour, only a few other students were present, their voices hushed in the quiet morning air. S~ea??h the n?vel_Fire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    William approached one of the cooks, an elderly man with a kind smile. "Excuse me," he asked, "but may I eat here? I''m participating in the entrance exam."


    The cook''s smile widened. "Of course, young man," he replied. "Grab a plate and help yourself."

 Chapter 48 Magic Academy Exam (6)

    The dining hall offered a staggering variety of breakfast options, from simple fare like bread, eggs, and bacon to more elaborate dishes typically reserved for lunch. William, however, gravitated towards the familiar comforts of his Earthly breakfast routine.As the morning progressed, more and more exam participants trickled into the hall, their faces betraying a mix of anticipation and exhaustion. Altair joined William just as he finished his meal.


    "How are you up so early?" Altair asked, settling into the seat beside him.


    "I''m used to it," William replied with a shrug. "Early mornings were the norm back in the village."


    "I see," Altair said, nodding in understanding. "Well, even though you''ve already eaten, stick around and chat for a bit, if you''d like."


    William, with no pressing engagements before the exam, readily agreed. Altair returned from the buffet with a plate piled high with an assortment of breakfast delicacies.


    "Are you really going to eat all that?" William asked, raising an eyebrow. "No way a skinny guy like you can handle that much food."


    "Oh, come on!" Altair scoffed playfully. "Respect the skinny bros." He winked, a mischievous glint in his eye.


    William observed the growing crowd, noting a distinct lack of fear compared to the tension that had permeated the previous exam. Could it be, as Altair had suggested, that they knew this stage was merely a formality?


    "I think so," Altair confirmed, his gaze sweeping across the room. "Notice how the nobles are the most relaxed, while the commoners still seem anxious? That''s because the nobles are privy to information the rest of us aren''t."


    His words resonated with William''s own observations. Just then, Tholfnir entered the hall, his presence silencing the chatter.


    "You have five minutes to finish your breakfast," he announced, his voice carrying through the room. "Then meet me in the courtyard." With that, he turned and departed.


    Most had already finished their meals, but the five-minute warning spurred the remaining few to hasten their consumption. William and Altair joined the procession of exam participants following Tholfnir to the courtyard, and from there, to the academy gymnasium.


    The gymnasium was a vast, impressive structure, its interior housing numerous dueling platforms and training dummies. Rows of bleachers lined the walls, providing ample space for spectators. Tholfnir stood in the center of the arena, addressing them.


    "This stage of the exam consists of duels," he explained, his voice echoing through the spacious hall. "One-on-one combat. The only difference this time is that you will have an audience. Several professors have graciously offered their time to observe your performance, as well as some students."


    The presence of an audience added a thrilling new dimension to the exam. While this stage might not be eliminatory, the opportunity to impress the professors and establish dominance amongst their peers was a powerful motivator. No one wanted to appear weak or incompetent in front of those who might become their mentors and classmates.


    Tholfnir explained the rules: the duels would be randomly assigned, and each participant would fight only once. As he spoke, professors and senior students began to fill the bleachers, their expectant gazes adding to the pressure.


    William, his competitive spirit ignited, hoped for a challenging opponent. He wasn''t afraid of facing a strong adversary; in fact, he relished the opportunity to showcase his skills. He only hoped he wouldn''t be pitted against Altair.


    The air crackled with anticipation as Tholfnir began announcing the pairings.


    Tholfnir, unfamiliar with the applicants, assigned each a number. William received token number twenty-two.


    "I shall now call out pairs of numbers," Tholfnir announced. "Those called will step into the dueling ring."


    The first duel pitted a young nobleman against a girl who appeared to be a commoner. William, along with the other participants, watched with keen interest.


    "Who do you think will win?" Altair asked, leaning towards William.


    William assessed the two combatants, his senses attuned to their magical auras. "I believe the girl will win," he replied. "Her mana is stronger, and the noble will likely underestimate her."


    Altair disagreed, favoring the noble''s presumed training and experience. The duel commenced, and within moments, William''s prediction proved accurate. The girl unleashed a series of lightning spells, her control and precision impressive. Whispers rippled through the bleachers.


    "Lightning affinity is rare," one professor remarked to another. "She could be a valuable addition to the academy."


    "Indeed," another agreed. "Let''s hope she performs well in the final exam."


    The girl''s victory and her rare affinity had clearly caught the attention of the faculty. But as William knew, this was just one hurdle in a series of challenges.


    More duels followed, but none held William''s interest. After facing the demonically empowered hunter, these sparring matches seemed tame, the participants lacking in both power and finesse. Their spells were rudimentary, their movements predictable.


    William, though not the most experienced mage, couldn''t help but feel a sense of superiority. He knew these were merely apprentices, their skills still developing, but he couldn''t deny the confidence blooming within him.


    "Number twenty-two!" Tholfnir''s voice boomed through the gymnasium. "Step into the ring."


    William felt a surge of adrenaline as he strode towards the dueling platform. His opponent, a young man with an air of arrogance, awaited him. It wasn''t Altair, thankfully, but this was no ordinary noble.


    "Good luck, bro," Altair whispered as William passed. "After seeing you in action in the dungeon, I know you won''t lose."


    William cracked a grin. "Thanks for the vote of confidence." He stepped into the ring, facing his opponent.


    "So, I''m up against a commoner," the young man sneered. "How... predictable."


    "And you are?" William inquired, raising an eyebrow.


    "You may address me as Prince Lance," the youth declared, puffing out his chest. Sear?h the ¦Çov§×lFire .net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "A prince, huh?" William mused, a hint of mischief in his voice. "I just hope your father doesn''t disown you after you lose to a commoner."


    The prince''s face flushed with anger. Murmurs rippled through the audience.


    "Why is he provoking the prince?" one of the professors whispered. "It will only make his defeat more humiliating."


    While a noble losing to a commoner wasn''t unheard of, the prince was a different story. He had access to the kingdom''s best resources, tutors, and training. The king would have spared no expense to ensure his son''s strength. Of all the applicants, Lance was undoubtedly the most formidable.


    Tholfnir silenced the whispers with a raised hand. "Silence, please," he commanded. "The duel is about to commence."


    A hush fell over the gymnasium, the tension palpable. All eyes were on William and the prince, the stage set for a clash of both magic and social standing.


    William weighed his options. He could hold back, relying on his physical prowess alone, or unleash his full arsenal of skills, demonstrating his true potential. The choice was clear. There was no benefit in hiding his power, especially against an opponent as formidable as the prince.


    With a surge of mana, he activated a series of body-enhancing spells, transforming himself into a force to be reckoned with.


    "Swiftfoot!"


    "Iron Skin!"


    "Enhanced Strength!"


    His body responded instantly. Swiftfoot granted him increased agility and speed, Enhanced Strength bolstered his physical power, and Iron Skin hardened his flesh into an almost impenetrable armor. The rapid-fire casting, three spells activated in quick succession, drew gasps from the audience. Such seamless execution was rare, especially for someone with limited formal training.


    But he wasn''t finished.


    "Kinetic Burst!" he roared, his voice echoing through the gymnasium.

 Chapter 49 Magic Academy Exam (7) - Shocking Everyone

    With the combined might of his enhancements, Kinetic Burst propelling him forward like a phantom, and his naturally high attributes, William became an unstoppable force. The prince, despite his royal lineage and privileged training, was utterly outmatched.William''s speed drew gasps from the audience. He moved with a blurring swiftness that defied expectations, appearing before the prince in the blink of an eye, his sword a hair''s breadth from the royal throat.


    "Yield," William commanded, his voice devoid of emotion.


    The prince, his pride wounded, refused to surrender. He gripped his staff, his fingers dancing as he attempted to weave a counterattack.


    "I apologize for this," William said, a hint of regret in his voice. But his actions were swift and decisive.


    With 52 points in Strength, amplified by Enhanced Strength, his power was monstrous. He unleashed a precisely targeted punch to the prince''s gut, the impact echoing through the silent gymnasium. Even holding back, the blow was devastating.


    The prince crumpled, his staff clattering to the ground. He lay unconscious in the dust of the arena. A concerned professor rushed forward to examine him.


    "He''s fine," the professor announced after a brief examination. "Just needs some rest."


    William exited the ring, deactivating his spells with a flick of his wrist. The runes faded from his skin, his muscles returning to their normal size. He approached Altair, a subtle smirk playing on his lips.


    "What did you think?" he asked, his voice laced with amusement.


    Altair, overwhelmed by the sheer dominance of William''s victory, could only gape in response.


    The atmosphere in the gymnasium crackled with a newfound respect for William. Whispers followed him as he moved through the crowd, the other participants and onlookers casting awed glances in his direction.


    His victory over the prince had shattered their preconceived notions, proving that strength and skill could emerge from unexpected places.


    "I told you he was strong!" the noble William had defeated in last exam boasted to his companions. "That''s why he beat me!"


    The remaining duels proceeded, but the excitement had waned. William''s stunning performance had set a high bar, leaving the other participants struggling to capture the attention of the audience.


    Word of William''s feat spread like wildfire throughout the academy. He had become a legend in the making, his name on everyone''s lips.


    As predicted, no one was disqualified from this stage of the exam. Even the prince, despite his lackluster performance, retained his place. William couldn''t help but feel a twinge of cynicism.


    ''Of course he wouldn''t be disqualified,'' William thought, rolling his eyes. ''He''s royalty.''


    The final stage of the exam loomed, the one that would shatter the dreams of many and pave the path to glory for a select few.


    With only thirty spots available and sixty hopefuls remaining, the competition was fierce. But a sudden announcement from Headmaster Tholfnir threw the applicants into disarray.


    "Regarding the available places," Tholfnir began, his voice resonating with an unexpected gravity, "a change has become necessary. Instead of thirty, we now have only fifteen spots available for this year''s intake."


    A collective gasp arose from the crowd. Anxiety etched itself onto every face, the weight of the announcement pressing down on their hopes.


    "Headmaster," a young woman''s voice called out, trembling slightly, "why were the spots reduced so drastically? Could you please explain?"


    Tholfnir''s smile held a hint of apology, but his eyes remained guarded. "I had a rather...urgent meeting yesterday," he revealed, "and the decision was made to limit enrollment. This is not unique to our academy; other institutions are facing similar restrictions." He paused, his gaze sweeping across the sea of anxious faces. "As for the reasons behind this sudden change...that, I''m afraid, I cannot divulge at this time."


    The weight of Tholfnir''s words settled upon the applicants, a stark reminder of the fierce competition they faced. William''s determination burned brighter than ever. He would not be denied his chance to enter the academy.


    Tholfnir gathered the participants in the courtyard, his presence commanding their attention. "One by one, step forward," he instructed. "I shall assess your magical repertoire."


    The final exam, the ultimate hurdle, was designed to gauge their ability to learn and master spells. Each spell, categorized by rank and complexity, would be assigned a point value.


    Only the top fifteen scorers would earn a coveted place at the academy. This trial was a true measure of their potential, a glimpse into their future as mages.


    William watched with a mix of awe and apprehension as Tholfnir effortlessly assessed each applicant, a mere touch revealing their magical knowledge. The headmaster''s power was undeniable, a testament to decades of mastery. When it was William''s turn, a flicker of surprise crossed Tholfnir''s face, but he remained silent.


    "Next," Tholfnir said, his voice betraying no hint of his thoughts.


    William waited patiently as the remaining students underwent the assessment. Finally, Tholfnir addressed the group, outlining the rules of the final trial.


    "You have one month to learn as many spells as possible," he explained. "An A-rank spell is worth fifty points, a B-rank spell is worth five points, and a C-rank spell earns a single point. Lower-ranked spells do not count."


    The vast difference in point values reflected the difficulty of mastering higher-ranked spells. William knew firsthand the challenge of learning a B-rank skill like Kinetic Burst.


    His other spells were all C-rank, mere stepping stones compared to the complexity of A-rank magic.


    He had never even attempted such a feat; those spells were typically reserved for advanced students in their second or third year.


    "You will remain in the dormitories I assigned yesterday," Tholfnir continued. "Meals are provided in the dining hall three times a day, and you have full access to the library. That is where you will find the spells you seek."


    The challenge was set. One month to prove their worth, to delve into the depths of magical knowledge and emerge victorious.


    "However," Tholfnir added, his voice taking on a sterner edge, "you are forbidden from seeking assistance from the academy''s students or professors. Should I discover any such collaboration...well, you know the consequences."


    The warning hung heavy in the air. They were guests within the academy walls, not yet students entitled to guidance. William, however, had anticipated this restriction. He was confident in his ability to learn independently. S§×arch* The N?vel?ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    With the rules laid bare, the applicants surged towards the library, eager to begin their month-long quest for magical knowledge. Altair, his admiration evident, kept pace with William.


    "You''re a legend, you know," Altair said, his voice hushed. "Everyone''s talking about how you stood up to the prince."


    "That won''t mean much if I don''t secure a spot in the academy," William replied, his focus unwavering. "Let''s concentrate on the task at hand."


    "Right, right..." Altair agreed, his gaze already darting towards the towering bookshelves.


    The library was a sight to behold. Its vastness dwarfed any William had encountered on Earth, rows upon rows of books stretching towards the vaulted ceiling.


    He estimated there were at least fifty thousand volumes within its walls, perhaps even more. A treasure trove of magical knowledge awaited, and William, his thirst for power insatiable, was ready to delve into its depths.

 Chapter 50 Magic Academy Exam (8) - Hardest Spell

    Most applicants gravitated towards the shelves containing B and C rank spells, their choices driven by practicality and the ticking clock. William, however, craved a challenge. He wasn''t interested in simply passing; he wanted to excel, to push his limits and prove his worth. A-rank spells, the domain of seasoned mages, beckoned him."What spells are you planning to learn?" Altair asked, his brow furrowed as he scanned the titles.


    "Not sure yet," William replied, his eyes gleaming with determination, "but I do know I''m going to master an A-rank spell."


    Altair''s jaw dropped. "Bro, I know you''re talented, maybe even a genius, but are you sure?" he sputtered. "It''s not that I doubt your ability, but we only have a month! Time is our enemy."


    Altair''s concern was valid. Mastering high-ranking spells was a time-consuming endeavor. But William had a secret weapon: his SSS-rank Chrono Shift ability. With its time-bending power, he could accelerate his learning beyond the constraints of a normal month.


    "Relax," William said with a confident grin. "Trust me. But I''ll also pick up a few B-rank spells, just in case my A-rank plan goes sideways."


    Altair, though still apprehensive, seemed reassured. "Alright, alright," he conceded.


    The library, despite its vastness, held restricted sections. Only a designated area was accessible to the exam participants, the remaining tomes and grimoires reserved for enrolled students and faculty. Even with this limitation, the sheer volume of available spells was overwhelming.


    William''s fingers traced the intricate runes detailed in the [Magic Mind] tome. This A-rank spell, notorious for its difficulty, promised to elevate his mental capabilities to extraordinary levels.


    A boost of 100 points in Intelligence, coupled with a 40% increase in learning speed and memory retention, was a temptation he couldn''t resist. It was the perfect foundation for mastering even more complex magic.


    Altair peered over his shoulder, his expression a mix of awe and apprehension. "Bro, that''s supposed to be the hardest A-rank spell out there," he cautioned. "Are you absolutely sure you want to attempt it?" S§×ar?h the N?velFire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    William nodded, his determination unwavering. "It seems like the ideal spell to learn first," he explained, "It will make learning everything else much easier."


    "I guess," Altair conceded, a hint of doubt still lingering in his voice. "I was thinking of trying for a flight spell. They look awesome, but I know it''s probably beyond my reach."


    Just then, Tholfnir materialized beside them, his presence casting a long shadow across the bookshelf. William''s heart skipped a beat.


    "Young man," Tholfnir began, his voice grave, "there are professors within this academy who have mastered numerous A-rank spells, even S-rank spells, yet this particular one eludes them. Are you certain you wish to pursue this path?" His eyes, filled with a genuine concern, met William''s. "You possess a rare talent, one I would be pleased to nurture within these walls. Choose wisely."


    Tholfnir''s departure left William wrestling with doubt. Professors who commanded S-rank magic couldn''t master this spell? How could he, a mere novice, hope to succeed where they had failed? But the potential rewards were too enticing to ignore.


    "If you want to risk it," Altair said, his voice firm, "then go for it. I trust you to make the right decision, and I''ll support you either way."


    "Thanks, bro," William replied, gratitude warming his chest.


    He clutched the [Magic Mind] tome, its worn leather cover a promise of untold power. It was the only spell he chose. Enjoy new tales from empire


    The librarian, a stern-faced woman with spectacles perched on her nose, gave him a pitying look as he checked out the book.


    He received similar reactions from other students and even a few professors, their expressions a mix of concern and disbelief. The spell''s notoriety was clearly widespread.


    Rumors swirled about its true nature. Some whispered it was an ancient, lost technique, far surpassing the limitations of a mere A-rank spell. William''s research confirmed its rarity. Only eight mages in the entire kingdom had managed to master it. Eight. And Tholfnir, the most powerful mage in the land, was one of them.


    The weight of the challenge settled upon William''s shoulders, a mix of apprehension and exhilaration. He held in his hands a key to unlocking extraordinary potential, a power that had eluded countless others. He would not be deterred. He would master this spell, or die trying.


    William''s reputation preceded him. Whispers followed him through the halls of the academy, his name echoing in hushed conversations.


    "Did you hear about the guy who beat the prince?"


    "Yeah, the one who chose that A-rank spell, Magic Mind? Is he insane?"


    "He''s going to fail for sure. Only eight mages in the entire kingdom have mastered that spell. What''s he thinking?"


    The prevailing sentiment was one of disbelief and mockery. William, the commoner who had dared to challenge royalty, was now seen as a foolhardy novice, destined to crumble under the weight of his ambition.


    Of all the people buzzing with gossip and doubt, only Altair offered a genuine word of encouragement. "I believe in you, William," he said, clapping a hand on his friend''s shoulder. "Don''t let those naysayers get to you. So what if only eight people have mastered this spell? You can be the ninth and prove them all wrong!"


    William, though disheartened by the negativity, felt a surge of gratitude for Altair''s unwavering support. "Thanks, Altair," he replied with a grateful smile. "I appreciate that."


    "Anytime," Altair said, returning the smile. "If you need anything, just let me know."


    William retreated to his room, the weight of the challenge settling upon him. He placed the [Magic Mind] tome inside his backpack and activated Chrono Shift. The familiar portal shimmered into existence, offering an escape from the whispers and doubts. He stepped through, materializing in the quiet solitude of Jinra''s barn.


    Dawn painted the horizon with streaks of purple and orange as he opened the tome. The complexities of the spell unfolded before him, revealing its unique nature. Unlike most spells, which required activation to trigger their effects, Magic Mind was a constant, its benefits woven into the very fabric of the caster''s being. This, William realized, was the source of its difficulty.


    He delved deeper into the text, his heart sinking with each page. One hundred and ninety-two runes. One hundred and ninety-two intricate patterns of mana manipulation, each demanding absolute precision. Even S-rank spells contained fewer runes.


    ''Did someone classify this as A-rank as a joke?'' William wondered, his frustration mounting. ''This must be far more advanced!''


    The urge to abandon the spell gnawed at him, but he sought Jinra''s wisdom before making a decision. As the old mage stirred, William approached, eager for guidance.


    "Good morning, young man," Jinra greeted him, his voice raspy with sleep. "Did you rest well?"


    "Jinra, I need your help with something," William confessed, his brow furrowed with worry.


    Jinra, ever the gracious host, invited him in for breakfast. As they ate, William explained his predicament, revealing the [Magic Mind] tome and detailing its daunting complexities.


    Jinra''s eyes widened in recognition. "I know this spell," he declared, "but the version I''m familiar with is quite different. This seems...overly complicated, as if someone attempted to recreate it from memory after losing the original."


    A wave of hope washed over William. Could Jinra, with his vast knowledge and experience, hold the key to mastering this elusive spell? The possibilities swirled in his mind, fueling his determination. He would conquer this challenge, with Jinra''s guidance, and prove those doubters wrong.

 Chapter 51 Magic Academy Exam (9) - Jinras Guidance

    "Are you sure you aren''t mistaking this for another spell?" William asked, excitement in his voice. He was hoping to get Jinra''s help to learn the spell faster, but if what Jinra said was true, things were going even better than he''d hoped.Jinra read the spell again. "Uh, yes, yes. I am old but not crazy. This is the spell I know."


    Many thoughts were racing through William''s mind at that moment, but he just asked one thing. "Can you help me learn it in one month?"


    Jinra got up from the dining chair and started pacing through the hall, both hands behind his back. "I can help you learn it, yes, but I think one month might be too short. This is not a simple spell. In fact, only a handful of people know this."


    In the current state of Aethel, only eight people knew it, and apparently, it wasn''t that different in ancient times. The only difference was that the spell tome was much better written. Jinra looked at William and saw his eyes fall.


    "Don''t look so sad, kiddo. Let''s do our best so that you can learn it in one month, alright?"


    It wouldn''t be an easy task, and for Jinra, it would be impossible if not for William''s talent for learning magic. But time was still short; therefore, they started the training right after breakfast.


    Jinra searched his entire house for something, and after about an hour of searching, he came back with an ancient scroll in hand. "This is the Magic Mind I know," he said, handing the scroll to William. "Take a look."


    The scroll had far less information about the spell, but most of the information there was not present in William''s Magic Mind tome. It still had the 192 runes, but they were better explained and not filled with useless words.


    William now agreed with Jinra. "My tome feels like someone tried to make it harder so that no one could learn it."


    Continue your adventure at empire


    Jinra nodded. "Yes, correct. This is not something new, you know," Jinra explained. "It''s normal for very good spells like this one to change throughout the years. Sometimes people lose track of how the spell was originally cast, or they try to fool you with an adulterated version."


    William knew that Tholfnir or the magic academy wouldn''t provide adulterated spell tomes for their students. The Magic Mind tome William had was the same one everyone else had, but if that was the case, then what happened to the original copy? Did something happen to humanity, and had they lost their knowledge?


    William was certain that something had changed throughout history simply because the greatest mages of all time were in the past. After meeting Jinra, someone incredibly powerful who knew many spells, William was sure that the ancient mages were far stronger.


    However, the reason for humanity''s decline was still a mystery to him, something unknown that he wished to uncover in the future.


    "Let''s start your training then," Jinra suggested. "This is not easy, and you might not succeed, but like I said, let''s try our best."


    They went outside the house, into the open area to feel the fresh morning breeze and hear the distant sounds of the river and the singing birds. That brought a sense of inner peace that helped with training, or at least it seemed to.


    "You know there are plenty of runes for you to master, right?" Jinra said. "192."


    "Yes, I know, and the effect is always on, right? So this must make the spell much harder to learn."


    Jinra confirmed, "You are right about that. Let''s start with the first 50 runes, shall we?"


    The spell was divided into four parts: 50 runes, 50 runes, 50 runes, and the remaining 42 runes. S§×arch* The ¦ÇovelFire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Whoever created the spell believed it was a way of making it easier to learn, as the student could first learn the first 50 runes, add them to their body, and experience minor effects of the Magic Mind spell without completing it entirely.


    Well, that was what the tome Jinra had explained. The one William had was not like that, and perhaps that was what made it so much harder.


    "The idea behind completing the first set of runes is to experience the minor effects of the spell," Jinra explained to him. "You know one of the effects is faster learning of other spells, right? So, you can learn the remaining parts more easily."


    When the training started, William regretted choosing that spell. The runes were overcomplicated, and the first set already contained 50 for him to master! It was incredibly difficult. Jinra demonstrated the runes, creating them effortlessly.


    Despite having someone to guide him, William had a hard time recreating them. That''s when Jinra decided to try something different.


    "Are you up to try something dangerous?" Jinra asked him.


    "Something dangerous?" William repeated, stopping his practice and staring at Jinra.


    Jinra nodded. "I can help you unlock the mana points inside your body, making it easier for the mana to flow. This will make it much easier for you to learn any spell. But the thing is, it''s dangerous. If it fails, you could be crippled."


    William wasn''t a particularly brave person¡ªmost of the time, at least¡ªand the idea of being crippled wasn''t appealing. What if things went wrong? Would he ever have the chance to get his revenge?


    "I''ll think about it. For now, let''s just keep practicing as we are."


    "Sure. No problem."


    They kept practicing the runes for hours. William managed to create the first five¡ªfor a short time¡ªbut that was already something. Jinra helped him in any way he could, whether by demonstrating how the spell was cast or helping him guide the mana. But he also seemed distracted, as if he was thinking of something else. He was trying to find a way to help William learn faster without the risk of crippling him, like his previous suggestion.


    At the end of the training day, William was covered in sweat. He was sitting on the grass outside, with Jinra right in front of him.


    "Kid," Jinra said, "do you think you can stay here alone for a few days?"


    "I guess. But why?" William asked him.


    "I need to go find something, something that might help you. But it will take me a few days..." Jinra said.


    Considering William''s situation, he was more than willing to stay alone for a few days if Jinra brought back something that might help him. The Magic Mind spell was incredibly difficult, and he only had one month to learn it if he wanted to pass the exam.


    "Sure."


    "Alright," Jinra gestured for him to follow him. "I''ll show you the house."


    William got up and followed him.


    Jinra showed him all parts of the house¡ªwith the exception of a few locked doors.


    "You can stay in this room; don''t sleep in the barn again," Jinra said. "Before you ask, the house and the surrounding area have magical formations to protect you. The only reason you got close to the house the day we met is because I deactivated them; otherwise, you would be dead."


    "...Right, that''s good to know," William said.


    After the house tour, Jinra packed a few things into a backpack and left, leaving William alone in the house. William, the disciplined student that he was, started practicing Magic Mind again. He couldn''t afford to lose any time.


    When night came, he went to the bedroom to sleep¡ªand then return to his present time in the magic academy¡ªand that''s when he heard a strange noise coming from one of the locked doors. It sounded like a voice.

 Chapter 52 Magic Academy Exam (10) - The Truth

    ''What the fuck is this?'' William thought as he got up from the bed.The sound was too strange. He did his best to remain quiet so that he could hear it better¡ªand not be heard. It came from one of the locked doors in Jinra''s house. William stopped in front of it and waited. He wanted to hear the sound again, just to be sure.


    Then, after a few minutes, the creepy sound came from the other side of the door once more. William heard scratching on the walls, followed by a muffled voice.


    It gave him the creeps, so much so that he decided to return to the barn and try to sleep there. William didn''t have the courage¡ªor the reason¡ªto open that door and see what was on the other side.


    ''I''ll just wait until Jinra returns and ask him...'' William thought.


    The barn wasn''t the best place to sleep, but it was better than being inside that house. He closed his eyes, and sleep came...


    William returned to the present in Aethel, inside his temporary dorm room in the magic academy. He looked at the clock on the wall, seeing it was around 3 am.


    With nothing better to do, he continued his training. The progress had been minimal, but that was expected with Magic Mind, an almost impossible spell to learn.


    He managed to create a few runes and keep them ''alive'' for a few seconds, not much different from what he had managed to do in Jinra''s house. The only difference was an increase of one second before the runes disappeared.


    When it was around 7 am, William left his dorm to meet the others, Altair included, to get breakfast in the same dining hall they had been in previously.


    Every single exam participant was there, as well as some students. The students kept glancing at William.


    He had become a kind of celebrity, but not in a good way. They all expected him to fail the test, to fail to learn the Magic Mind spell.


    Altair, who had a chicken leg in his mouth so early in the morning, said, his voice almost impossible to understand with the amount of food stuffed inside, "Don''t mind their looks, bro. You will succeed."


    William smiled. "It''s been how many days since you last ate?"


    "S-Shut up!" Altair said, a small piece of chicken flying from his mouth.


    Breakfast was one of the best parts of William''s day. All he did during the rest of the day was practice the spell and endure the anxiety of not knowing if he would pass the exam. He imagined that every exam taker felt the same way, but at least they had easier spells to learn.


    William returned to his room after breakfast and stayed there the entire day. He left his room two other times¡ªto get lunch and dinner. The rest of the day was spent practicing the Magic Mind spell. When his Chrono Shift spell was off cooldown, he would use it again and practice more in Jinra''s barn.


    Yes, Jinra''s barn. He didn''t feel like returning to the house. William was even hunting his own food in the surrounding area to avoid the food stocked inside the house. The voice was just too creepy for him.


    Following that routine, seven days passed. During the seventh day, as he was practicing inside the barn as always, Jinra returned. Jinra saw him in the barn and couldn''t help but ask, "I am back, William. Did something happen?"


    "We need to talk."


    "Sure. Let''s go inside and talk about it," Jinra said with a gentle smile.


    William didn''t want to go. "Look, I''ll be brief. I heard some creepy sounds coming from one of your locked doors. It was as if a person was scratching the walls and murmuring. Can you explain?" Enjoy new chapters from empire


    The first thing that came to William''s mind was that Jinra was some kind of maniac who locked people in his basement. With everything that William had witnessed in his previous world and this one, it was more than possible.


    Jinra, on the other hand, was relieved. "Oh, so that''s what you heard? I thought it was something bad. Do you want to come with me and see what''s behind the locked door?"


    William pictured the two of them opening the door, and then Jinra tossing him inside. But considering he had his portal skill to escape if needed, William went along with it. "Sure, let''s go."


    Jinra had been kind to him, and he wanted to believe the old man wasn''t a bad person. Once they were inside the house, Jinra placed his backpack on the table and went to the locked door where the noises came from.


    "Is this the door?" Jinra asked.


    William nodded, a shiver running down his spine as he recalled what happened that night.


    Jinra opened the door, and the first thing they saw was a staircase leading down to some sort of basement. Before either of them said a word, Jinra went down. William followed close behind. What he saw down there was unexpected: a room stacked with various items.


    "This is where I keep most of the stuff I got during my adventuring days, and even after that. What you heard came from this thing right here," Jinra said, stopping in front of a necklace locked behind glass panels. sea??h th§× novel(F~)ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "A necklace I got from a Lich. Its power is still a mystery to me, but I know it can cause those strange noises at night, trying to mess with your head. But it stopped for me after a week or so. Maybe it just gets tired, or my mental strength was too strong for it to influence," Jinra explained.


    William sighed in relief. "Never would I have thought it was something like this, damn it. That shit scared me."


    "I can imagine. I forgot to tell you about it since it''s been so long since the last time this necklace tried anything. Anyway, come with me; I need to show you something," Jinra said, moving away from the necklace and going back up the stairs.


    Before following him, William took a good look around to see the treasures hidden there, and then he followed Jinra, who locked the door again after they left.


    Jinra moved to the table where the backpack was, and from it, he pulled out a lot of potions.


    "I went to the city to speak with my friend, one of the best alchemists in the world. He made a few potions for me, and these potions should help you learn Magic Mind faster and more easily. It cost me a lot, but who cares? It''s not like I have anything else to spend my money on."


    The potions Jinra had varied in color, and when William looked at them, he could feel their power. They weren''t ordinary potions that most alchemists could make. The ones Jinra brought were exceptional.


    William was excited to try them. "So there aren''t side effects with this method?"


    "Uh, yes, but you can''t take them all at once. Let''s go gradually," Jinra warned him.


    William grabbed the first potion¡ªa reddish one¡ªand drank it. A notification from the System appeared right after.

 Chapter 53 Magic Academy Exam (11) - 1000% Learning Speed Bonus!??!

    [Learning speed increased by 1000% for 72 hours]The notification revealed a powerful effect from the potion William drank. With a 1000% bonus to his learning speed, learning Magic Mind would be much faster.


    "This potion is incredible," William said. "Who made it?"


    What Jinra said next surprised William. "It''s good but not that good. Like, a 100% increase in learning speed is decent but not exceptional, right?"


    "100%?"


    William didn''t know why he got a 1000% bonus and not 100% like Jinra had said. With a confused expression, he asked, "And do you know the ingredients for this potion?"


    Jinra grabbed the empty flask and placed it near the sink. "Are you sure you want to know about it?"


    "Yes."


    "Well, it''s made with blood, alright? According to my friend, he used blood from demonic creatures. I know it sounds bad, but the other ingredients nullify any side effects. A lot of people use his potions," Jinra said.


    Things were starting to make more sense to William. The demonic blood was once again giving him significant advantages.


    He still didn''t know how to feel about that.


    What if it had consequences in the future? But at that moment, he wanted to learn the Magic Mind spell; therefore, he would use all means necessary. Especially considering he needed to learn the spell to enter the magic academy. The weight on his shoulders increased because of that.


    William, his eyes alight with renewed determination, wasted no time. "Shall we get back to training, then?" he asked, eager to put his enhanced learning to the test.


    Jinra, accustomed to William''s enthusiasm, simply nodded. "Of course," he replied, leading the way outside. "Let''s see what you can do."


    The training resumed with renewed vigor. William focused his mind, channeling mana into the intricate runes of the Magic Mind spell. Jinra observed intently, offering guidance and corrections, his keen eyes detecting the slightest flaw in William''s technique.


    Jinra watched, impressed. William''s mana manipulation was flawless, his control over the ethereal energy remarkable. The difficulty lay not in his technique, but in the sheer complexity of the spell itself. Yet, even with this monumental challenge, the potion''s effects were undeniable.


    William, his mind sharpened and his learning accelerated, surpassed his previous limitations. He effortlessly formed twenty-five runes simultaneously, sustaining them for an impressive twelve seconds. The progress was extraordinary, even for someone of William''s talent.


    "I never expected such a dramatic improvement," Jinra admitted, his voice laced with surprise. "And you said this potion''s effects last for seventy-two hours?"


    "That''s what my System indicated," William confirmed, still catching his breath from the exertion of maintaining the complex spell structure.


    Jinra, unaware that the potion''s effects were ten times stronger than William had initially described, was astonished by his rapid progress. He had witnessed countless mages struggle with this spell, their efforts spanning months, even years. William, however, seemed poised to master it in a fraction of the time. Your journey continues with empire


    As dusk settled over the land, William prepared to rest in the barn.


    "Are you sure you want to sleep out here again?" Jinra asked, concern etched on his weathered face.


    "Yes," William replied, a wry smile tugging at his lips. "I need to focus all my energy on mastering this spell. Avoiding the...distractions of your Lich necklace will help with that."


    Jinra chuckled, understanding dawning in his eyes. "Very well, lad. I''ll see you in the morning."


    It didn''t take long for William to sleep. He didn''t know exactly when his body floated back to the current time of Aethel, but he felt rested when he woke up at around 5 am, so he got some good hours of sleep before returning on his own.


    He was once again back in the familiar dormitory every single one of the exam takers were sleeping at.


    When he went to the hallway, the place was vivid. Most people were starting to learn their first spells.


    "I''ve managed to complete 2 C rank spells by now, and almost a B rank too. What about you?" a girl asked her friends.


    "I have two B rank spells."


    "Wow! That''s impressive! We still have time so let''s work hard."


    Everyone who found some success in learning the spells was happy. There were still around 17 days to go, so the exam participants had plenty of time to learn more spells and accumulate more points.


    William, on the other hand, was not so focused on these low ranked spells. He wanted to master his A rank spell, and shock every single one of them. S§×ar?h the N??elFir§×.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    But for now, of course, he was the laughing stock of everyone.


    "William, right?" a young man approached William in the dorm hallway, "How is your spell learning going? Managed to get at least 5 runes going?"


    The people around them started laughing, leaving William in discomfort. But he was used to it. His classmates back on Earth made fun of him, and that wouldn''t get to him.


    William smiled. "Yeah, I am holding the runes well during the spell practice. Pretty sure I am at least holding better than your father did with his seed. Imagine having an intimate time of 15 seconds, and make someone like you come into this world. What a fucking shame."


    Those who were laughing stopped completely. What William said hurt the feelings of the young man who came to make fun of him.


    As nobles, their lineage and family were really important, and the noble didn''t want to get treated like that in front of the other nobles who were watching.


    "What did you say?" the young man said in anger.


    "I believe you heard me correctly," William reiterated, his voice laced with a cool confidence. "If you have a problem with it, you can schedule a duel with me once we''re both students." He paused, letting the challenge hang in the air. "Assuming, of course, that you have what it takes to actually pass the exams and earn your place here."


    With that parting shot, William exited the dormitory, leaving a trail of stunned silence in his wake. He had no time to waste on petty squabbles.


    His first stop was the dining hall, where he piled his plate high with a breakfast feast. Altair arrived shortly after, concerned.


    "I heard you had a bit of a...disagreement with a noble," Altair began tentatively. "Is everything alright?"


    "Everything''s perfectly fine," William assured him, spearing a generous portion of his omelet. "If he makes it into the academy, we''ll settle things with a duel. I''m confident I can handle him."


    After breakfast, William headed to the gymnasium. While he often practiced in his room, the talking among the exam takers and the small environment made it less than ideal for focused spellcasting. The gymnasium, with its vast training areas and high ceilings, offered the perfect environment to hone his skills.


    A few academy students were already practicing, their movements fluid and precise. William found a secluded corner, a simple task in the massive space, and resumed his training. Twenty-five intricate runes shimmered around him, their complexity drawing curious glances from the other students. William, however, remained oblivious, his concentration absolute.


    The next goal he had was to get the first set of 50 runes going, and reap the benefits of the Magic Mind spell.

 Chapter 54 Magic Academy Exam (12) - Secret Meeting, and First 50 Runes

    The students training in the gymnasium were visibly awestruck by William''s progress. Word of his attempt to master the infamous Magic Mind spell had spread like wildfire, and the sight of twenty-five intricate runes swirling around him solidified his reputation as a prodigy.He trained relentlessly, pushing his limits, and by day''s end, he had increased his count to twenty-seven. News of his accomplishment spread through the halls of Snowpeak Academy, fueling both admiration and disbelief.


    In the academy courtyard, a group of students huddled together, their conversation dominated by William''s feat. One of them, a red-haired youth, spoke with fervent admiration.


    "Did you hear?" he exclaimed, his eyes wide with excitement. "William has already mastered twenty-seven runes of the Magic Mind spell!"


    "You''re joking, right?" one of his companions scoffed. "That''s the best joke I''ve heard all year!"


    "I''m serious!" the red-haired student insisted. "He''s a genius! I want to learn from him someday."


    Their conversation was interrupted by the sudden appearance of Headmaster Tholfnir. "Are you certain he has mastered twenty-seven runes?" Tholfnir inquired, his voice a gentle rumble.


    Explore more stories at empire


    The students, startled by his unexpected presence, bowed respectfully. "Yes, Headmaster Tholfnir," the red-haired student confirmed. "I saw him practicing in the gymnasium. I wouldn''t lie."


    Tholfnir''s lips curled into a subtle smile. "I know you wouldn''t," he said, his eyes twinkling with an unspoken knowledge. "Thank you for informing me."


    With a subtle gesture, Tholfnir vanished, leaving the students to ponder the meaning behind his cryptic words.


    The students'' hushed whispers followed William like a shadow. His audacious choice of spell, his rapid progress, and his defiant stance against the prince had made him a legend within the academy walls. But admiration was often intertwined with mockery.


    "So what if he''s mastered a few dozen runes?" scoffed a noble student, his voice dripping with disdain. "There are, what, a hundred and eighty of them or something?"


    "Actually," one of his companions corrected, "there are one hundred and ninety-two runes in the Magic Mind spell."


    "Hah!" the noble exclaimed, his laughter echoing through the courtyard. "That makes it even worse! The idiot''s going to fail."


    The group erupted in laughter, their scorn for William evident. He was, once again, the subject of ridicule, his ambition dismissed as foolish arrogance.


    But not everyone shared this dismissive attitude. The professors, witnessing his relentless dedication and remarkable progress, recognized a rare talent. Even Headmaster Tholfnir, his wisdom honed by centuries of experience, saw something special in William.


    Under the cloak of night, while the academy slumbered, Tholfnir summoned the professors to a secret meeting. They gathered around a circular table in a hidden chamber, the air thick with anticipation.


    "I believe we must grant him a place, even if he doesn''t fully master the spell or achieve the required points," Tholfnir declared, his voice resonating with conviction. "His ability to learn so many runes of the Magic Mind spell in such a short time speaks volumes about his potential."


    A young professor with slicked-back hair raised an objection. "But Headmaster," he argued, "won''t this damage the academy''s reputation? The entrance process has remained unchanged for centuries. Making an exception for him could spark outrage." sea??h th§× ¦ÇovelFire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Tholfnir''s lips curled into a knowing smile. "I am well aware of the process," he replied, his eyes twinkling. "And I also recall that the last student granted such an exception was...myself, centuries ago." He paused, his gaze sweeping across the assembled professors. "I believe this young man is worth the risk. What are your thoughts?"


    The professors, their initial reservations overridden by Tholfnir''s conviction and William''s undeniable talent, agreed to grant him a place even if he fell short of the required points. A sense of excitement filled the room, and a wager was proposed. One professor, his beard as white as the snowcapped peaks surrounding the academy, declared he would craft a unique enchanted ring for William if he succeeded. Others chimed in with promises of favors and preferential treatment, though most remained skeptical of his chances.


    Tholfnir''s next words, however, shocked the room into silence. "If he masters Magic Mind," he declared, his voice resonating with an unwavering belief, "I shall take him as my personal disciple." He paused, letting the weight of his statement sink in. "If he fails, I shall grant each of you a favor. But if he succeeds, I expect you to provide him with every advantage and opportunity this academy has to offer."


    A favor from Tholfnir, the kingdom''s most powerful mage, was a prize beyond measure, especially with no limitations placed upon the request. The prospect of such a reward, coupled with the potential to mentor a student of William''s caliber, sparked a competitive fire in their hearts.


    "Don''t feel bad when I call in that favor, Tholfnir," James, the young professor with slicked-back hair, chuckled. "That kid is talented, no doubt, but he won''t master that spell in the remaining time. No way."


    "I agree with James," another professor chimed in. "It''s simply too much to ask."


    Tholfnir, his eyes twinkling with an ancient wisdom, simply smiled. He knew better than anyone the challenges William faced, but he also recognized the spark of greatness within the young man. Only time would tell if William could rise to the occasion and claim his destiny.


    William was blissfully unaware of the clandestine meeting transpiring elsewhere. He was dead to the world, lost in the depths of slumber after an exhausting day spent wrestling with the intricacies of the Magic Mind spell.


    Three days had flown by since he''d imbibed the potent elixir. The 1000% boost to his learning speed was no joke; he''d already managed to piece together the first 50 runes of the spell, an impressive feat by any measure.


    Of course, he wasn''t alone in this endeavor. Jinra, his ever-present guide, was there every step of the way, helping him weave those arcane symbols into his very being, coaxing forth the first faint whispers of the Magic Mind''s power.


    "Focus, William," Jinra instructed, his voice a calming presence amidst the chaotic storm of magic. "Guide the runes directly into your mind. They cannot take root elsewhere."


    Creating the runes had been an ordeal, a trial by fire that pushed William to his limits. But inscribing them onto his soul, weaving them into the fabric of his mind ¨C that was proving to be an entirely different beast.


    Despite Jinra''s guidance, it was like trying to thread a needle in a hurricane. Each attempt to absorb the runes sent them scattering through his body, a chaotic dance of energy that refused to be tamed.


    "You need to focus," Jinra repeated, his voice laced with concern.


    Hours blurred into a frustrating haze of failed attempts. Finally, William erupted, his frustration boiling over. "I am focusing!" he roared, slamming his fist against the floor. "I''m trying my best!"


    Jinra placed a calming hand on William''s shoulder. "Alright, alright, I know you are," he said softly, a hint of amusement in his voice. "Just relax for a moment. Let''s take a breather. I''ll go fetch us some water."


    He was, undeniably, a good mentor. He understood that berating William for his lack of focus would only exacerbate the issue. Sometimes, a gentle touch and a moment of respite were far more effective than relentless pressure.


    William watched him go, then slumped back against the rough bark of a nearby tree, the frustration gnawing at him. He was surrounded by the tranquil beauty of the forest clearing, the sun dappling through the leaves, birdsong filling the air. Yet, all he could feel was the burning impatience of his own shortcomings.


    ''Will I succeed in time?'' The thought echoed through his mind, a chilling whisper that threatened to consume him. The deadline loomed, a menacing shadow that stretched ever closer.

 Chapter 55 Magic Academy Exam (13) - Another HERO??

    Even mastering the first 50 runes¡ªa mere fraction of the 192 that formed the complete Magic Mind spell¡ªdid little to quell the doubt gnawing at William. Could he truly conquer this monumental task in time?He trained relentlessly, pushing himself to the brink of exhaustion. Every waking moment within Aethel''s past was consumed by the intricate dance of runes, their complex patterns swirling in his mind''s eye.


    He would practice until his body screamed for respite, then activate Chrono Shift, that potent SSS-rank skill, ripping open a portal to the past and stepping back into Aethel to relive those hours anew.


    With time frozen in the present¡ªin the academy where he truly belonged¡ªhe effectively doubled his training time. Yet, even with Jinra''s unwavering support, it felt like an insurmountable challenge.


    "Only eight individuals in history have ever mastered this spell," William muttered to himself, the weight of that knowledge pressing down on him. "Eight legendary mages, each a titan in their own right. Why did I even entertain the thought of joining their ranks?"


    The seed of this reckless ambition had been planted in a moment of youthful arrogance. He''d yearned to prove himself, to silence the whispers of doubt that followed him like a shadow.


    Summoned to this world as a hero, he carried the burden of expectation, the crushing weight of a destiny he hadn''t chosen. If a hero couldn''t master this spell, then who could?


    Jinra returned, a glass of cool water sloshing gently in his hand. "Here," he said, offering it to William. "Drink this. You''ll feel better."


    William gratefully accepted the water, the cool liquid soothing his parched throat. "Thanks," he mumbled, then hesitated. "Is it normal for this to be so...difficult? I mean, getting the runes to settle into my mind feels like wrestling a swarm of angry hornets."


    Jinra chuckled, a low rumble that echoed through the clearing. "You''re accustomed to the ease of lower-rank spells, William," he explained. "But the Magic Mind is in a league of its own, far more complex and demanding than anything you''ve encountered before. This struggle is to be expected." He clapped a reassuring hand on William''s shoulder. "But fret not, young one. We''ll get there. Persistence is key."


    William''s eyes lit up with a sudden thought. "What about potions? Could another draught give me the edge I need?" His mind flashed back to the potent concoction brewed from demonic blood¡ªits effects amplified tenfold within his unique physiology.


    Jinra, however, shook his head, a stern expression settling on his face. "I have a few potions remaining," he admitted, "but your body needs time to recover from the last dose. We cannot afford to rush this process, William. Impatience could lead to grave consequences, even crippling you. I won''t risk your well-being for the sake of a shortcut."


    No choice remained. After a brief respite, William steeled his resolve and plunged back into the maelstrom, wrestling with the unruly runes.


    Hours bled into one another as he grappled with the chaotic energies, his focus unwavering. Finally, with a surge of power that left him breathless, he triumphed. Fifty runes, glowing with an ethereal blue light, etched themselves onto his forehead, intertwining and converging until they formed a single, radiant symbol.


    The system''s notification chimed, a symphony of success: Experience more tales on empire


    [+30 Intelligence]


    [+15% Learning Speed]


    [+15% Memory Retention]


    [You can now achieve a clearer mind during meditation]


    The effects were staggering, and this was merely the first act in the grand play of Magic Mind. While the 15% learning speed boost paled in comparison to the potion''s explosive 1000%, the permanent nature of this enhancement, coupled with the amplified memory retention and the surge in raw intelligence, far outweighed any temporary gains.


    Each point of intelligence amplified his learning capacity exponentially, making this permanent upgrade far superior to any fleeting potion-induced boost.


    And the absence of debilitating side effects? Priceless. Potions were a crutch, a dangerous gamble with potentially devastating consequences. This, however, was pure, unadulterated power. sea??h th§× nov§×lF~ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "I did it!" William roared, his voice ringing with triumph.


    Jinra beamed, his pride radiating like the sun. He pulled William into a tight embrace, his gruff voice softening with affection. "Well done, lad! You possess a rare talent indeed."


    Their bond, forged in the crucible of magical pursuit, had deepened considerably in their short time together. To witness a student unlock the secrets of a spell as profound as Magic Mind was a reward in itself for any mentor.


    "Thanks," William replied, a grin splitting his face. "It''s just the beginning, I know, but it''s a damn good start. This definitely fuels the fire!"


    Twilight painted the sky in hues of orange and purple as William finally emerged from the depths of his magical struggle. His time within Aethel''s past was drawing to a close; Chrono Shift, for now, limited him to a single day in that bygone era.


    Exhausted but elated, he stumbled towards the barn, collapsing onto a bed of hay. Sleep claimed him instantly, and he awoke with the dawn, back in his familiar dormitory within the bustling magic academy.


    The hallway buzzed with the usual pre-exam chatter. Students boasted of their accomplishments, their voices laced with a mixture of confidence and anxiety. Some had already mastered a few low-level spells, earning them precious points towards passing the test.


    William, despite his monumental achievement, remained at zero. But the Magic Mind...ah, that was a game changer. If he could conquer that behemoth, the top spot in the rankings was all but assured.


    He was about to head towards the dining hall when a familiar figure materialized beside him. Altair, with his ever-present smile and helpful demeanor, was like a golden retriever in human form.


    "Heard about the lecture today?" Altair chirped, his eyes sparkling with enthusiasm. "Apparently, it''s supposed to be a real eye-opener, even for seasoned mages. Might give us an edge in our training." He paused, dropping his voice to a conspiratorial whisper. "And guess what? It''s being given by one of the summoned heroes! Right after breakfast!"


    William blinked, momentarily disoriented. Lost in his intense training within Aethel''s past, he''d been oblivious to any news or announcements.


    He even thought he had heard it wrong.


    "One of the summoned heroes?" William echoed, his voice tight with a mixture of apprehension and disbelief. He knew exactly who Altair was talking about ¨C it had to be one of his former classmates, another soul ripped from their world and thrust into this one. But while those heroes were celebrated and lauded, William had been cast aside, stripped of his title, and left to fend for himself.


    Altair, blissfully unaware of the turmoil brewing within William, continued his enthusiastic chatter. "Yep! Apparently, he''s some kind of prodigy. Already mastered a bunch of high-level spells and even helped some of the professors with their...uh...professor stuff. Everyone''s calling him a genius." He gave William a playful nudge. "Maybe you should try to snag a seat next to him. Some of that brilliance might rub off on you!"


    William forced a chuckle, his mind a whirlwind of conflicting emotions. This was a disaster. He couldn''t risk being seen by one of them. Who knew what kind of reaction they''d have? Would they expose him as a failure, a hero who had been discarded? Shame burned in his throat, a bitter taste that threatened to choke him.


    He had to find a way to attend the lecture without being noticed. Perhaps he could disguise himself, or slip in late and find a seat in the back...


    "Uh, yeah, that''s...great," William stammered, trying to maintain his composure. "Just remembered something I need to take care of first. How about we meet at the lecture hall? I''ll see you there."


    Altair, though clearly sensing William''s evasiveness, graciously let it slide. "Sure thing," he replied with a shrug. "See you later!"


    As Altair bounded off down the hallway, William leaned against the wall, his heart pounding. He needed a plan, and fast. This lecture had just become a high-stakes game.

 Chapter 56 A Hero Giving a Lecture

    a hero, lecturing at snowpeak magic academy? the very notion sent a shiver down william''s spine. as far as he knew, elric''s teleportation magic had flung him into an entirely different kingdom. what was one of his former comrades doing here? and why?''could they be looking for me?'' the thought burrowed into his mind like a persistent worm. it wasn''t entirely implausible. if that were the case, he was in serious danger.


    even if this hero''s presence was merely a coincidence, william couldn''t risk being recognized. the shame of his expulsion was a burden he wasn''t ready to share.


    his initial instinct was to avoid the lecture altogether. but as he hurried through the academy grounds, a stern-faced professor intercepted him.


    "william, is it?" the old mage rasped, his eyes peering down at william over the rim of his spectacles.


    "yes," william replied, his anxiety growing. "is something wrong?"


    "though you''re not yet officially a student," the professor declared, "attendance at this morning''s lecture is mandatory for all. it''s of vital importance, young man. do not miss it, or face the consequences."


    "okay," william mumbled, his stomach churning. consequences? what kind of consequences? he needed to find a way to camouflage himself, become invisible. even amidst a sea of faces, he was certain his former classmate would recognize him.


    there was only one person he could think of who might be able to help: headmaster tholfnir. with a renewed sense of urgency, william set off to find the elusive mage.


    tholfnir''s chambers were located within the academy''s main building, but he wasn''t known for his consistency in keeping office hours. rumors swirled about his frequent travels, whispers of a secret hideaway known only to a select few. still, william clung to the hope that the impending lecture would have drawn him back to the academy.


    a stoic guard barred his path as he approached tholfnir''s door.


    "state your business," the guard demanded, his voice devoid of any warmth.


    "i need to speak with headmaster tholfnir," william replied, trying to project an air of confidence he didn''t feel.


    the guard scoffed. "not even enrolled students can meet with him on a whim. and you think you can? there are professors and staff members more suited to address your concerns. headmaster tholfnir is a busy man."


    william knew the guard wasn''t wrong, but he had to try.


    suddenly, as if conjured from thin air, tholfnir appeared beside them. he placed a calming hand on the guard''s shoulder. "it''s alright," he said, his voice a low rumble. "let him pass." he turned to william, a glimmer of amusement in his eyes. "come, william. let''s talk in my office."


    william followed, his heart pounding with a mixture of relief and trepidation. he cast a glance back at the bewildered guard, who stood frozen in disbelief. how had he, a mere prospective student, gained such easy access to the headmaster? he didn''t have the answer, but he wasn''t about to question his good fortune.


    tholfnir''s office was a testament to his personality: meticulously organized, with towering bookshelves lining the walls and a massive window offering a panoramic view of the academy courtyard. william settled into a plush chair facing the headmaster''s imposing oak desk.


    "so, william," tholfnir began, a warm smile gracing his features. "how can i be of assistance?"


    william''s mind raced. what could he possibly say? confessing his true identity as a fallen hero was out of the question. he needed a plausible excuse to avoid the lecture or, at the very least, to attend incognito.


    "do you know how long this summoned hero will be at the academy?" william asked, feigning casual curiosity.


    tholfnir''s brow furrowed slightly. "just today. he''s passing through and offered to share some insights with the students. why do you ask?" sea??h th§× n?velfire(.)net website on google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "i was wondering if there might be a way for me to...skip the lecture?" william ventured. "i could use the extra time to focus on my training. as you know, the spell i''ve chosen is quite challenging."


    tholfnir shook his head gently. "while i understand your dedication, william, the lecture will be brief. it might even prove beneficial to your studies."


    william pressed on, desperation edging into his voice. "but i''m at a critical juncture in my training. if i must attend, could you perhaps provide me with a secluded spot to watch? a place where i can maintain my focus? i just completed the first 50 runes of magic mind, and i need to capitalize on this momentum." read latest stories on empire


    it was a flimsy excuse, but william was grasping at straws. he hoped that demonstrating his progress might sway the headmaster.


    and it worked. tholfnir''s eyes widened in disbelief. "what did you say? you''ve already mastered 50 runes? is this true, young man?"


    instead of answering, william summoned the runes, letting them swirl around him in a mesmerizing display of blue light. tholfnir, stunned, sank back into his chair.


    "t-this is incredible," he stammered, his voice laced with awe.


    tholfnir stroked his beard, a thoughtful expression settling on his face. "very well," he declared. "i can arrange for a secluded space where you can observe the lecture without interruption. but are you certain you can multitask effectively? simultaneously meditating and absorbing information is a difficult skill to master."


    william, however, had a secret weapon. the first set of magic mind runes, unbeknownst to tholfnir, granted him exceptional clarity during meditation. "yes, headmaster," he replied confidently. "i''m sure i can manage."


    "excellent," tholfnir said, a hint of pride in his voice. "i''m impressed by your dedication, william. now, let''s head to the lecture hall, shall we?"


    william followed, curiosity piqued. where exactly would he be observing from? tholfnir led him not to the crowded hall, but to the academy''s top floor¡ªan area typically off-limits to students. the ceiling had been enchanted to provide an open-air view of the entire grounds, including the stage where the lecture was to take place.


    "will i be watching from here?" william asked, surprised.


    "of course not," tholfnir chuckled. "you wouldn''t be able to hear a thing from this distance. observe and learn, young one."


    with a practiced flourish, tholfnir conjured a series of runes in the air. a shimmering, translucent sphere materialized before them, growing rapidly until it dwarfed both of them. with a snap of his fingers, the sphere opened, revealing a passageway into its depths.


    william gasped. the interior was astonishing¡ªa spacious, luxuriously furnished room, far grander than anything he could have imagined. even more remarkable was the sphere''s one-way transparency. he could see the outside world with perfect clarity, yet from the outside, the sphere remained opaque.


    "we''ll be watching from here," tholfnir announced, gesturing towards a plush sofa. "refreshments are available should you require them."


    with a subtle gesture, tholfnir guided the magical sphere through the walls of the academy, bypassing crowded corridors and bustling classrooms, arriving finally at the grand hall where the lecture was to commence.


    "won''t they notice us floating in here?" william asked, a hint of concern in his voice.


    tholfnir chuckled. "only if i allow it," he replied, a mischievous twinkle in his eye. "i''ll simply adjust the sphere''s size and opacity, rendering it practically invisible to the casual observer."


    the sheer versatility of the spell was astounding. william stared at tholfnir with newfound respect. ''he truly is the strongest mage in the kingdom,'' william thought, a flicker of ambition igniting within him. ''will i ever reach such heights?''


    the lecture hall was packed. students and exam-takers alike crammed into every available space, their anticipation palpable. as the appointed time drew near, the crowd hushed, their attention drawn to the elevated platform at the center of the hall.


    and then, he appeared.


    the summoned hero.


    william''s breath caught in his throat. it was him. a face etched in memory, a classmate from his former life on earth. but here, in this world, he was a beacon of power, a symbol of hope. a stark contrast to william, the summoned hero who no one knew about.

 Chapter 57 Critical Information, and Exam Ending

    the person giving the lecture was kevin...of all the summoned heroes, all those insufferable classmates from college, kevin was the absolute worst. the memories of his relentless bullying, the snide remarks, the shoves in the hallway, and the humiliating beatdown in the gym locker room ¨C they all came flooding back, a torrent of resentment and anger.


    and there he stood, basking in the adulation of the crowd, the savior of this world, the prodigy, the genius. william''s fists clenched, his nails digging into his palms. he''d give anything to wipe that smug grin off kevin''s face, to see him toppled from his pedestal.


    ''why him?'' william seethed, his frustration mounting. of all the people to be celebrated, why did it have to be the one who had made his life a living hell? it felt like a cruel cosmic joke.


    william fought to maintain a neutral expression, burying his resentment deep within. he couldn''t let tholfnir sense his turmoil. the invisibility sphere was a blessing in disguise. he could observe kevin without fear of being recognized, a voyeur in his own twisted reunion. s§×arch* the n??elfir§×.net website on google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    kevin''s power was immediately apparent, radiating from him in palpable waves. it was undeniable ¨C the man was leagues ahead of william.


    they were both summoned heroes, blessed with exceptional talent and innate skills, but while william had trained under the tutelage of gorn and jinra, kevin had clearly been molded by the best of the best. mages on par with tholfnir, or perhaps even stronger, had honed his abilities. resources flowed freely to him, the chosen savior destined to confront the demon lord.


    but instead of discouragement, a fierce determination ignited within william. he would work harder, push himself further, and surpass them all, even without their privileged access to resources and elite instructors. he would carve his own path to power.


    a hush fell over the hall as kevin began his lecture. he started with training tips, sharing insights gleaned from his diverse mentors across various kingdoms.


    these methods differed significantly from snowpeak''s traditional practices, making them particularly valuable to the eager audience. william, despite his animosity, found himself leaning forward, absorbing every word.


    despite his personal feelings, william wasn''t foolish enough to ignore potentially valuable information. he listened intently, gleaning whatever insights he could from kevin''s lecture. he maintained a meditative facade, more for tholfnir''s benefit than his own. he''d already made significant progress with the magic mind runes; his focus now was on staying under the radar.


    the second part of the lecture, however, took a sharp turn. kevin''s confident demeanor shifted, a gravity settling over his features as he addressed the audience.


    "the demon lord and his forces are not the only threat we face," he announced, his gaze sweeping across the room. "the kingdom of sartana is mobilizing against yours. and they have allies. my kingdom is prepared to offer assistance in this impending war."


    a ripple of unease spread through the hall. william glanced at tholfnir, who sat beside him with a grim expression.


    "did you know about this?" william whispered, his voice laced with concern.


    tholfnir nodded slowly. "we were aware of sartana''s aggression," he admitted, "but the involvement of allies...that is troubling news. it''s not a full-scale war yet, but they''ve been testing our defenses, sending troops across our borders, embedding spies within our ranks."


    william''s mind raced. "does this have anything to do with the reduced intake of students at the academy?" he asked, a sudden realization dawning on him.


    tholfnir met his gaze, a flicker of admiration in his eyes. "you''re a perceptive young man, william," he said. "indeed, you''re correct. we must conserve our resources. each student represents a significant investment."


    it all made sense now. the academy provided everything for free ¨C tuition, lodging, even meals. with war looming, they were tightening their belts, ensuring they had the financial means to weather the coming storm.


    the weight of the impending conflict settled heavily on william''s shoulders. the future seemed fraught with uncertainty, and his desire to join the academy intensified. it was his best chance to gain strength, to become a force to be reckoned with, and perhaps even to find a way to navigate the treacherous currents of the looming war.


    as the two-hour lecture concluded, kevin approached tholfnir, requesting a private conversation. tholfnir exited the sphere, leaving william concealed within its shimmering walls. from his hidden vantage point, william listened with bated breath as their hushed words reached him.


    "i''m also here seeking information about one of the summoned heroes," kevin murmured, his voice low and conspiratorial. "i have reliable intel suggesting he''s hiding somewhere in this kingdom."


    tholfnir''s brow furrowed. "one of your own? why isn''t he with you?"


    "let''s just say there were...complications," kevin replied evasively. "unfortunately, i don''t have a portrait, and his appearance may have changed. but i''ll return in a year to continue the search, and i hope to enlist your aid."


    "of course," tholfnir agreed readily. "we can work together to locate him." read latest stories on empire


    fear gripped william''s heart. he had one year. one year to either vanish from kevin''s radar or to become strong enough to face him head-on. the clock was ticking.


    the irony wasn''t lost on william. he hadn''t even set foot inside the academy as a student, and yet, his primary goal had already shifted to surpassing kevin, to proving himself not just worthy, but superior.


    a wave of relief washed over him as kevin finally departed, soaring through the sky with a display of high-level magic that underscored the chasm between their current abilities. he and tholfnir exited the now-invisible sphere, stepping back into the bustling hall.


    "i must attend to urgent matters in light of this new information," tholfnir declared, his brow furrowed with worry. "we''ll speak again soon, william."


    william simply nodded, understanding the gravity of the situation. he wouldn''t burden the headmaster with trivial concerns.


    as tholfnir hurried away, altair materialized beside william, his usual cheerfulness replaced with a frown.


    "where were you?" he demanded. "i looked everywhere! you know those who skipped the lecture will be punished, right?"


    william shrugged, a smirk playing on his lips. "i''m not officially a student yet, so what can they do? besides," he added casually, "i watched the lecture with headmaster tholfnir."


    altair''s jaw dropped. "w-what? with the headmaster? how?"


    "i just asked," william replied vaguely. he clapped a hand on altair''s shoulder, his expression turning serious. "we need to secure our places in this academy, altair. if war is coming, we need to be ready."


    the levity vanished from altair''s face. "you don''t need to tell me," he said, his voice tight with determination. "my family lives near the border. i have to get stronger, to protect them."


    the atmosphere within the academy crackled with a newfound intensity. kevin''s lecture, with its stark warnings of impending war, had cast a long shadow over the exam-takers. the carefree confidence of the previous days evaporated, replaced by a grim determination.


    the tension ratcheted up another notch when tholfnir announced a further reduction in available spots.


    only eight individuals would gain entry into the academy. panic rippled through the ranks, but william remained unfazed. his strategy was clear: master the magic mind spell. the sheer power of that spell would guarantee him a place, regardless of how many spots were up for grabs.


    time seemed to accelerate, the remaining days blurring into a frenzy of focused study and practice. finally, the moment of truth arrived. the exam. a chance to showcase their newfound abilities, to prove their worth, and to secure their future in a world teetering on the brink of war.

 Chapter 58 The Ninth Person, Officially a Student

    the final stage of the exam, lasting 30 days, was finally over. william had worked tirelessly to learn the magic mind spell. days and days of training, not just within the academy but also in the past with jinra''s guidance, had taken their toll.many times, he had thought of giving up. what gave him the strength to keep going was seeing kevin, his former classmate, there in the academy. it was a brief encounter, but william remembered all the things kevin had done to him.


    tholfnir summoned all the exam participants to the gymnasium, where he would test them to see if they had learned their chosen spells. many students were there to witness the event, as well as the professors. it took place during the morning, right after breakfast.


    altair had learned some spells during this month and shared his accomplishments with his friend william. "i''ve learned five b-rank spells, totaling 25 points. impressive, right?" altair said as they walked together toward the gymnasium. "i think i''m in the top three with the highest points!"


    the total number of spots had dwindled to just eight, and altair had done his research. with his current 25 points, he was confident he would secure a spot! william was happy for him. altair was a kind noble who had befriended him despite their different social standings.


    "that''s impressive. i''m glad you''re taking one of the spots. you deserve it." william hadn''t told altair or anyone that he had mastered the magic mind spell. he wanted to surprise them all.


    "i hope you got enough points to pass too. you know, everyone in the academy is talking about how you didn''t learn the spell and will be eliminated," altair said, sharing his concerns with his friend. sear?h the novel?ire(.)ne*t website on google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    william, looking mysterious, said, "you''ll see in time. no need to rush things."


    altair complained, "ahh, bro. just tell me. i can''t live with this anxiety." experience more content on empire


    "you''ll have to."


    "damn it!"


    no matter what altair said, he couldn''t convince william. the only way for him to know for sure if his friend had passed the exam was during the check-up done by tholfnir.


    speaking of tholfnir, he was standing in the middle of the gymnasium, with all the exam participants lined up in front of him. the bleachers around them were filled with students and professors watching the prestigious event.


    tholfnir, his voice grave and amplified by magic, said, "welcome, everyone. we are here today to see who the new students will be." he then gestured with his hands to a few professors who were seated behind tables. "we have a few professors writing down the points for us to check later."


    there was a buzz among the participants, but they quieted down after tholfnir told them to. "i''ll call you randomly. you''ll step forward, give me the manuals of the spells you learned, and then demonstrate them to me. don''t try to fool me by using a spell you already knew, as i checked all of you beforehand and have all your data," tholfnir reminded them.


    he had checked everyone 30 days prior and written down all the spells the exam takers knew to ensure no one would try to trick him.


    "bernard, step forward!"


    bernard managed to learn only two b-rank spells and three c-rank spells, totaling 13 points. that was quite low compared to altair, for example.


    tholfnir called the other participants. they went to the middle of the arena and demonstrated the spells they learned. the professors wrote down all the points.


    when it was altair''s turn, william tapped him on the back. "good luck, bro. show them what you got."


    "i will. watch!" altair said, confidently walking forward.


    everyone in the gymnasium paid close attention to altair for two reasons: first, his fame as a talented mage, and everyone wanted to see how he would perform. the other reason was that they knew he had befriended william, and william was currently the most talked-about person in the entire academy.


    altair demonstrated the b-rank spells he had learned¡ªall of them focusing on body enhancement. everyone looked surprised to see that he had learned five b-rank spells. even tholfnir had to give him credit. "congratulations, young man. not everyone can do this."


    altair bowed. "thank you, headmaster tholfnir. it''s a pleasure to receive a compliment from someone like you."


    as he made his way back to the other participants, everyone stared at him, shocked by his performance.


    the participants continued demonstrating the spells they had learned, and the professors diligently recorded their points.


    everyone was aware of the top eight contenders, as they had been closely monitoring each other''s scores. as a result, a few participants appeared relaxed and even distanced themselves from the rest of the group. this exclusive group of eight included altair.


    the only person who had yet to demonstrate his spells was william, but everyone assumed he hadn''t learned the magic mind spell.


    they even laughed at him when tholfnir called him to the arena.


    the person with the lowest points among the top eight said, "go quickly, william. i want the ceremony to start."


    he truly believed he would be among the top eight. william had some bad news for him.


    william stopped when he heard what the noble said. he stared at the young man and smirked, his voice loud enough for everyone to hear.


    "relax, little bro. you''re the one with the lowest points, meaning you''ll lose your spot to me. also, bow to your boss. i am the ninth person to learn the magic mind spell!"


    william was done with the mockery. why be humble with people who had been condescending to him?


    no one believed him, but the entire gymnasium fell silent as he approached the arena. william began casting his spell. 192 runes appeared around him, blue energy dancing around his body like ocean waves. the runes formed a unique rune that shone on his forehead. it was the symbol of an eye.


    tholfnir almost stumbled. he couldn''t believe his eyes. he moved next to william to examine him, and he knew william had truly mastered the magic mind spell. he knew it because he was one of the eight people who had accomplished this feat.


    "y-you did it, william! you mastered it! this is incredible. i can''t believe our school has the privilege of having a genius like yourself with us!"


    the professors, who had been observing, rose from their seats, blinking a few times, unsure if what they were seeing was real.


    it was a moment they thought they would never witness. the ninth person to ever learn the magic mind spell in the current time of aethel, and it was a young man who hadn''t even begun his formal magical studies!


    the most impressive fact was that william had learned it in just one month! they had never seen anything like it. tholfnir himself, the strongest mage in the kingdom, hadn''t learned the magic mind spell for years, let alone in a single month.


    tholfnir announced the top eight, with william ranked first. the noble who had prematurely claimed victory had a sour expression when he was cut from the top eight, losing his spot in the magic academy. he even considered threatening william, but then he realized how talented william was, and that in the future, a mage like william could wipe out his entire family, so he thought better of it...


    "congratulations to all of you. you are now officially students of snowpeak academy!" tholfnir proclaimed.

 Chapter 59 Farewell, and First Day as a Student

    everyone in snowpeak academy was utterly shocked after witnessing william''s display of skill. they were all gathered in the gymnasium, and tholfnir used the opportunity to warn them about spreading the news."don''t breathe a word of this to anyone outside the school yet," tholfnir instructed. "we need to ensure that the fact william knows this spell remains confidential for now. understood?" tholfnir was doing his best to keep william safe, trying to avoid any danger that might come his way due to his magical talent and achievement.


    he placed his hand on william''s shoulder and whispered, "don''t worry, kid. if anything happens, i''ll protect you, and i have some powerful friends to help me if i need it." william felt reassured knowing that someone like tholfnir was watching his back.


    ordinarily, the academy would hold a welcoming party for the new students, but there were only eight this time, so they didn''t feel it was necessary. not to mention, every single one of them was thinking about what kevin had said regarding the war, and none of them could relax because of that.


    altair couldn''t contain his happiness. he was jumping around and smiling like crazy. "you did it, bro! now i have my friend with me, so the classes won''t be so boring!"


    "don''t get too excited," william said. "remember that you''ll have to work hard to keep up with me. i want a strong ally."


    "oh, you can relax about that. i won''t stop until my power is close to yours."


    william smiled. "it''s nice to hear that, though there''s no way i''m letting you surpass me."


    eventually, the students and professors left the gymnasium. they had classes to attend. william and the other new students had a day off, meaning they didn''t have classes that day.


    "can i leave the academy, or can you let gorn come here?" william asked tholfnir.


    "it is up to you to decide," tholfnir said. "i would suggest you enjoy the city, as you''ll be staying in the academy for a while, focusing on your studies starting tomorrow."


    "thank you. i''ll be going out, then," he said.


    william descended the snow-covered slopes, his heart pounding with anticipation. it had been weeks since he last saw gorn, and he was eager to share the news of his success. the city was blanketed in a thick layer of snow, the winter chill biting at exposed skin. he navigated the snow-laden streets, heading straight for the familiar tavern where gorn awaited. discover more stories at empire


    he found gorn nursing a mug of ale, his brow furrowed in thought. the man''s face erupted in a broad smile as he spotted william.


    "lad!" he boomed, rising and pulling william into a bear hug. "how did it go?"


    "better than ever," william replied, a grin splitting his face. "sit down, i have news."


    gorn''s impatience was palpable. "just spit it out, lad! i know you secured a spot. i didn''t train you for nothing!"


    "you''re right," william said, his smile widening. "i earned one of the eight spots!"


    gorn''s eyebrows shot up. "eight spots? what happened? but damn it, lad, i knew you could do it!"


    william recounted his experience, including the overheard conversation during kevin''s lecture, sharing the crucial information about the impending war. he explained that as a student, he would be confined to the academy, unable to leave at will. gorn needed to prepare, to protect his family from the looming threat.


    "this is bad..." gorn muttered, taking a long pull from his mug. "if the neighboring kingdoms are uniting against us, a full-scale war could erupt at any moment. i''m glad you''ll be safe within the academy walls."


    "but what about you? elara? maya?" william asked, concern etched on his face.


    "i''ll try to get maya into snowpeak next year," gorn said, his voice firm. "it will take a few years for this war to truly escalate." he saw the worry in william''s eyes and added, "relax, lad. we''ll be fine. i''m not about to let my family suffer."


    william knew gorn meant every word. the man was a force to be reckoned with, a protector who would shield his loved ones at any cost.


    "alright," william said, nodding. "but you should return to willow creek as soon as possible. this is urgent."


    "agreed," gorn said. "but let''s enjoy today. you''ve earned it." sear?h the ¦Çov§×lfire .net website on google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    they spent the day reveling in william''s success, sharing stories, laughter, and good cheer. they even ventured out into the snow, engaging in a playful snowball fight, their laughter echoing through the frosty air. but the following day, the time to part ways arrived.


    the farewell was bittersweet. william, unsure when he would see gorn again, felt tears welling up in his eyes. for the first time since arriving in this world, he cried. gorn, his gruff exterior melting away, pulled william into a tight embrace.


    "damn it, lad," he choked out, "i always wanted a son, and you''re the kind of son any father would be proud of." he released william, wiping a tear from his cheek. "alright, enough of this blubbering. go on, now. make us proud."


    with a final farewell, they parted ways. gorn left going towards willow creek, while william ascended the snow-dusted path back to the academy, eager to embark on his magical education.


    the guards at the gate greeted him with unexpected warmth. their usual formality had been replaced by a friendly deference, their smiles genuine. william, though surprised by the preferential treatment, accepted it with a gracious nod.


    "have a nice day, you two," he said, a hint of amusement in his voice.


    "you too, william," one of the guards replied. "enjoy your first day of classes."


    within the academy walls, william''s newfound celebrity status was undeniable. whispers followed him down the halls, heads turned as he passed. he had become a legend in the making, his name synonymous with talent and ambition. while he appreciated the perks of his reputation, the constant attention was a double-edged sword.


    he pushed through the curious stares, heading towards his first class: combat magic. the classroom, located on the second floor, buzzed with anticipation. as william entered, all eyes fell upon him. a few empty seats remained, one conveniently beside altair.


    "over here!" altair called out, waving him over. "i saved you a spot."


    william settled into the chair, his gaze scanning the room. he had expected a grizzled veteran, scarred and hardened by battle, to lead the class. instead, a young man with slicked-back hair and a scholarly air stood at the lectern. he wore a long, dark red tunic and round spectacles, his appearance more befitting a researcher than a warrior.


    the students, their excitement palpable, chattered amongst themselves, oblivious to the professor''s growing impatience.


    "silence!" the professor boomed, his voice cutting through the din. "settle down before i lose my patience."


    the students, their youthful exuberance unchecked, continued their chatter, ignoring the professor''s warning.


    william, observing the room, noticed that while all eight new students were present, they were joined by a handful of unfamiliar faces.


    he initially assumed these were senior students, perhaps auditing the class or participating in some advanced training. but their expressions mirrored his own confusion, their eyes wide with uncertainty.


    ''this isn''t going to end well,'' william thought, bracing himself for the inevitable explosion.


    the professor, his face reddening with frustration, took a deep breath and raised his hand. a surge of mana crackled around him, and with a flick of his wrist, he unleashed a silencing spell. a wave of energy washed over the room, and the students'' voices abruptly cut off, leaving an eerie silence in its wake.

 Chapter 60 First Classes, and Shocking Information

    the silencing spell held them captive, a stark reminder of the professor''s authority. even william, an innocent bystander in the cacophony, found himself unable to utter a word."i am professor james," the young man announced, his voice resonating with a newfound firmness. "and i will be responsible for instructing you in the art of combat magic. now, please, refrain from excessive chatter during my class, or any other class for that matter."


    he released the spell, and the room erupted in a flurry of apologies. professor james nodded in approval. "conversation is not prohibited," he clarified, "but maintain a respectable volume, especially during my instruction."


    william raised his hand, catching james'' attention.


    "go on, william," james encouraged.


    "i understand this is a new class," william began, "but it seems there are more students present than those who participated in the entrance exams."


    tholfnir had explicitly stated that there were only eight spots available.


    "you are observant, william," james replied, a hint of grimness in his voice. "the additional students are from other academies facing...difficulties due to the impending war. we are offering them temporary refuge and continued instruction."


    william''s heart sank. if other schools were already feeling the pressure of a war that hadn''t even begun, the future seemed bleak indeed. he noticed a similar apprehension dawning on the faces of his fellow students.


    james continued with his introduction. at twenty-five, he was a remarkably young professor, renowned for his mastery of fire magic and his contributions to magical research and excavation. rumors circulated about his discoveries of ancient artifacts and lost spells, labeling him a rising star in the field.


    the introductory lecture concluded with a promise of practical application. "i''ve reviewed your files," james announced, "and i''m familiar with your strengths and weaknesses. while my primary expertise lies in fire magic, i am proficient in other elements and capable of guiding you all."


    he led them to the gymnasium, eager to move beyond theory and into the realm of action. "we''ll begin with a simple spell that everyone can learn," he declared. "it''s called candlelight."


    william recognized the spell instantly. aella had used it to illuminate the cave during their encounter with the demon. ''why is james teaching us such a basic spell?'' he wondered. ''it''s not exactly combat-oriented.''


    professor james offered no explanation, simply demonstrating the spell''s execution with practiced ease. five runes, their patterns simple yet elegant, shimmered around his fingertips.


    "now it''s your turn," james instructed. "show me what you can do."


    some students exuded confidence, eager to showcase their innate talent. others, less assured, fumbled with the unfamiliar patterns. william, however, mastered the spell in a matter of minutes. candlelight was a simple spell, but his speed was unnatural, even for a prodigy.


    the rune on his forehead, a delicate symbol resembling a magical eye, pulsed with a soft light as he practiced. the effects of the magic mind spell were undeniable. his mind felt sharper, his thoughts clearer, his grasp of the magical concepts effortless.


    he was a sponge, absorbing knowledge at an astonishing rate.


    james stood beside him, observing his technique. "you learned it quickly, william," he commented, a hint of approval in his voice.


    william, however, wasn''t one to get complacent. "using it and mastering it are two different things," he replied, his brow furrowed in concentration. "i''ll need to practice more to become truly proficient. but professor," he added, curiosity piqued, "if i may ask, why are we learning this spell? it seems rather basic for a combat magic class."


    experience more on empire sea??h th§× novelfire.net* website on google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    the question hung in the air, drawing the attention of the other students. they, too, had expected to delve into the intricacies of offensive and defensive spells, not a simple illumination cantrip.


    james smiled, sensing their curiosity. "indeed," he said, his voice taking on a conspiratorial tone, "there''s a reason we''re starting with this seemingly mundane spell. in a few days, we will be embarking on an expedition to explore an ancient excavation site, and reliable illumination will be essential in the depths of those ruins."


    the students erupted in a chorus of excited chatter, their imaginations ignited by the prospect of exploring ancient ruins. a girl with bright eyes and an eager smile raised her hand.


    "professor," she asked, her voice bubbling with curiosity, "what kind of ruins are we going to? can you tell us more?"


    james chuckled, his own excitement barely contained. "patience, my eager students," he replied. "i''ll reveal more details in our upcoming classes. for now, focus on mastering candlelight."


    he couldn''t help but smile at their enthusiasm. as a history aficionado and avid researcher, he shared their fascination with the mysteries of the past. their eagerness warmed his heart, reinforcing his belief in the power of knowledge and discovery.


    the revelation of the expedition seemed to galvanize the students. their efforts intensified, their focus sharpened. perhaps the allure of adventure had unlocked a hidden drive, or maybe the prospect of applying their newfound skills in a real-world scenario had ignited their determination.


    william, already proficient in candlelight, used the remaining class time to refine his technique, his mind drifting towards the upcoming expedition.


    the first class had left william feeling optimistic. professor james, with his youthful energy and obvious expertise, had set a high bar.


    the second class, however, promised a different kind of challenge. enchantment, a field steeped in mystery and intricate techniques, was taught by a venerable professor with a long, flowing beard and an air of ancient wisdom.


    william was particularly intrigued by this subject, his curiosity fueled by the enigmatic demonic sword he carried. he hoped to unravel its secrets, to understand how the demonic energy had become infused within its obsidian blade.


    the classroom was filled with a respectful silence, the students having learned their lesson from the earlier outburst in james'' class.


    "welcome, everyone," the professor began, his voice a warm rumble. "i shall be your guide through the fascinating world of enchantment. i hope you find it as captivating as i do."


    he stepped forward, a glint of mischief in his eyes, and presented william with a delicate silver ring. "this enchanted ring is for william," he announced, his voice carrying through the room. "not because of any personal favoritism," he added with a wink, "but because he has mastered the magic mind spell. here at snowpeak academy, we reward hard work and exceptional progress. let this serve as an example to you all."


    william''s eyes widened in surprise. "this is really for me?" he stammered, a wave of gratitude washing over him. "thank you, professor!"


    "indeed it is," professor sebastian confirmed with a warm smile. "a well-deserved reward for your dedication and remarkable achievement."


    william, still slightly bewildered, accepted the ring with gratitude. he couldn''t help but wonder about its enchantments, eager to discover its hidden properties.


    the grueling thirty days spent wrestling with the intricacies of magic mind had taken their toll, and this unexpected gift was a welcome acknowledgment of his efforts.


    professor sebastian launched into a captivating lecture on the history of enchantment, tracing its origins back to an ancient civilization.


    "the earliest enchantments were not applied to objects," he explained, his voice resonating with a passion for the subject, "but to the very walls of their cities, for protection and sustenance. they also used enchantments to manage their resources, ensuring a steady supply of water and other necessities."


    william, captivated by the professor''s words, found himself transported to a bygone era, imagining the ingenuity and power of those early enchanters. but it was the mention of a familiar name that truly shocked him.


    "one of the most skilled enchanters of that age," professor sebastian continued, "was a man named jinra."


    william''s heart skipped a beat. jinra. the name echoed in his mind, a link to the past, a connection to the enigmatic mentor who had guided him through the intricacies of magic. could it be the same jinra? the possibility sent a shiver down his spine, a reminder that the threads of destiny were often interwoven in unexpected ways.

 Chapter 61 Learning About Herbs, and Ancient Ruins

    william''s hand shot up, his curiosity burning. "professor," he asked, his voice eager, "what else can you tell us about this jinra? do you know anything about his life?" the possibility, however remote, that this legendary enchanter might be his mentor from the past ignited a spark of excitement within him.professor sebastian stroked his beard thoughtfully. "unfortunately, no," he admitted. "we have little information about him beyond his name and his contributions to the field of enchantment. records from that era are scarce, and details about individual enchanters are even rarer."


    "i see," william replied, a hint of disappointment flickering across his face. he would have to rely on jinra himself to unravel this mystery.


    the remainder of the class focused on the theoretical foundations of enchantment, exploring its principles and applications. the students, accustomed to the importance of theory in magical studies, listened attentively, their fascination with the subject evident.


    as the class concluded, william approached professor sebastian, eager to learn more about the ring.


    "what enchantments does it hold?" he asked, his eyes shining with anticipation.


    professor sebastian smiled, as if anticipating the question. "you are a promising student, william," he said, his voice warm. "in fact, you may well become one of the greatest mages this kingdom has ever seen." he paused, his eyes twinkling. "therefore, i crafted this ring to aid you on your journey. it will enhance your regenerative abilities and provide a protective barrier in times of need."


    "wow," william breathed, genuinely impressed. the ring sounded incredibly useful, especially for a mage specializing in body enhancement.


    "i believe it will complement your fighting style well," sebastian added. "now, if you''ll excuse me..."


    "of course, professor," william replied, a touch of awe in his voice. "thank you for this wonderful gift."


    professor sebastian, with a final nod, departed for his next class. william, clutching the ring, felt a surge of gratitude and a renewed determination to prove himself worthy of the professor''s confidence.


    his final class of the morning was herbology and alchemy, held in the courtyard near the greenhouse. the students gathered, their energy buzzing as they awaited their instructor. explore more at empire


    a woman with vibrant green hair and round spectacles approached, her smile radiating warmth and energy. "good morning, everyone!" she chirped. "i am professor martha, and i shall be your guide through the fascinating world of plants and potions." sea??h th§× n?velfire.net website on google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    unlike the reserved james and the aged sebastian, martha exuded a contagious enthusiasm.


    she gestured animatedly, her voice brimming with passion as she introduced herself and the course. william, intrigued by her vibrant personality and the promise of alchemical knowledge, settled in, ready to absorb the lessons of this new subject.


    "the foundation of alchemy lies in understanding the unique properties of magical herbs," martha explained, her voice brimming with enthusiasm. "each herb possesses distinct effects, and when combined correctly, they can create powerful potions with a wide range of applications."


    she paused, her gaze sweeping across the eager faces of her students. "but before you can even begin to concoct a potion, you must possess a deep knowledge of these magical ingredients. you must understand their individual properties, their interactions with other herbs, their resistance to various elements, and their potential reactions."


    to illustrate her point, she led them towards the academy''s greenhouse, a towering structure that housed a vast collection of botanical wonders.


    "come along, everyone," she chirped, ushering them forward. "it''s a bit chilly outside, so we''ll need to keep the greenhouse closed."


    a shimmering barrier enveloped the greenhouse, maintaining a carefully controlled climate within. the warm, humid air, thick with the scent of exotic flora, enveloped them as they stepped inside.


    william gasped, his eyes widening at the sheer variety of plants on display. some were familiar, while others were unlike anything he had ever seen, their leaves shimmering with iridescent colors and their flowers emitting a soft, ethereal glow.


    "whoa," altair breathed, his gaze drawn to a particularly vibrant specimen. "this is incredible!"


    william, recognizing the opportunity to trick altair, offered an impromptu explanation. "that''s a water lily," he said, pointing to the blueish leaves. "it''s commonly found in the southwest of the kingdom, growing near rivers. legend has it that if you eat its petals, you can breathe underwater."


    altair''s jaw dropped. "seriously?" he exclaimed, his eyes wide with wonder. "you''re so knowledgeable, william!"


    professor martha, overhearing their exchange, chuckled softly. "he''s pulling your leg, altair," she said, amusement twinkling in her eyes. "but it''s a good story, nonetheless."


    william, with a mischievous grin, wandered off, leaving altair sputtering in his wake. "you lied to me, william!" he called out, hurrying to catch up. "you lied!"


    martha, unable to cover the entire collection in a single lesson, focused on the essential herbs used in elementary potions. she explained their properties, their uses, and their potential dangers, her passion for the subject infectious.


    "this herb is called snowy eye leaf," martha explained, her voice filled with enthusiasm. "it gets its name from its distinctive shape. can you see how the veins resemble an eye?"


    the students leaned in for a closer look, their curiosity piqued.


    "and ''snowy'' because it thrives here on snowpeak mountain," she added with a smile.


    the snowy eye leaf, she explained, possessed a unique property: frost resistance. while consuming it raw offered some benefits, its true potential was unlocked through alchemical processes. martha recounted how the region''s native inhabitants used the leaf in teas and poultices to withstand the harsh winter conditions.


    william, fascinated by the interplay between nature and magic, listened intently, peppering martha with questions about the leaf''s properties and applications.


    "this next herb," martha continued, gesturing towards a vibrant red specimen, "is called crimsonfrost bloom. it also possesses frost resistance properties, but be warned, it''s highly poisonous if ingested directly."


    the lesson continued, a whirlwind of botanical knowledge and alchemical insights. william diligently recorded the key details in his notebook, his mind already churning with potential uses for these fascinating herbs.


    as the class concluded, william and altair headed to the dining hall for lunch.


    "what do you think of the classes so far?" altair asked, spearing a juicy piece of roast chicken.


    "they''re great," william replied, savoring a spoonful of hearty stew. "the professors are all incredibly knowledgeable. but do we only have three classes a day?"


    "that''s right," altair confirmed. "but remember, we have classes every day of the week. and our free time isn''t exactly free. we have spells to practice, books to read, and research to conduct."


    the life of a snowpeak student was one of constant learning and dedication, the pursuit of magical mastery demanding every ounce of their energy.


    ''i need to make the most of this "free time",'' william thought, his mind already strategizing. ''i can see how some students might fall behind if they don''t stay disciplined.''


    the academy''s schedule was designed to foster self-sufficiency and encourage independent learning. while professors were always available for guidance, the onus was on the students to hone their skills and expand their knowledge.


    snowpeak even boasted multiple professors for each subject, ensuring that students always had access to expert assistance.


    four days flew by in a whirlwind of classes, practice sessions, and late-night study sessions. william awoke on the fifth day with a surge of excitement.


    "today''s the day we explore the excavation site!" he exclaimed, a grin spreading across his face.


    he joined his classmates, their anticipation palpable, as they gathered to meet professor james.

 Chapter 62 Arriving at the Ancient Ruins

    william surveyed his classmates, their faces alight with anticipation. he adjusted the weight of his own pack, ensuring his essentials were secure: food, water, a tent, his trusty sword, a bow and quiver of arrows, and, of course, the enigmatic demonic sword wrapped in cloth.he had scoured the library for any mention of the obsidian blade, but his searches had yielded nothing. he suspected the information he sought lay hidden in restricted sections, inaccessible to a mere first-year student. for now, the sword remained a mystery, a source of both power and unease.


    "is everyone prepared?" professor james''s voice cut through the excited chatter. "it will be a rather lengthy journey."


    "yes, professor!" a chorus of voices responded.


    the ancient ruins lay nestled in a remote valley beyond the mountain range that housed the academy and the city of dale. reaching them would require a circuitous route, a journey best undertaken by carriage.


    while flying mounts offered a faster alternative, professor james had opted for the more practical approach. the expedition''s primary goal was to explore and document the ruins, bringing back artifacts and knowledge for further study. a carriage provided the necessary space for transporting their findings.


    four luxurious carriages awaited them at the academy gates, each drawn by a team of sturdy mountain drakes. their spacious interiors, complete with plush seating and ample storage, promised a comfortable journey. just as they were about to depart, a figure came rushing towards them, a massive backpack bouncing against her back.


    "wait!" professor martha cried, her round glasses nearly slipping from her nose as she skidded to a halt. "wait for me!"


    even james seemed surprised by her sudden appearance. "professor martha?" he questioned, raising an eyebrow. "what''s this about?"


    martha, breathless from her exertion, waved a hand dismissively. "i''m coming along," she declared, her voice firm.


    "but don''t you have classes to teach?" james asked, perplexed. "i arranged for a few days off specifically for this expedition."


    "as did i," martha replied with a mischievous grin. "headmaster tholfnir suggested it would be prudent to have more than one professor accompany the students."


    james''s eyes widened in understanding. "you mean, one more professor to keep a closer eye on william," he whispered conspiratorially.


    martha let out a nervous chuckle. james wasn''t wrong. william had become the academy''s prized possession, and tholfnir was clearly taking no chances.


    with martha joining the expedition, the carriages finally set off. william found himself sharing his ride with altair, a few other students, and professor martha. as the drakes pulled them away from the familiar academy grounds, william turned to his companions, his curiosity piqued.


    "do we even know what kind of ruins these are?" he asked, his gaze fixed on the winding mountain path ahead.


    the other students, their knowledge limited to the briefings provided by professor james, leaned in with interest. martha, however, possessed a deeper understanding of the site''s significance.


    "it''s believed to be an ancient elven ruin," she revealed, her voice hushed with reverence. "not just any elves, mind you, but snow elves. a rare and enigmatic kind."


    william''s curiosity piqued. jinra had spoken of the elves'' mastery of magic, their techniques far surpassing those of humans. but where were they now? in his time, only remnants of their civilization remained, scattered ruins whispering of a lost grandeur.


    "what happened to the elves?" william asked, voicing the question that had lingered in his mind.


    martha smiled, her eyes twinkling with a scholar''s passion. "that, william, is one of the enduring mysteries surrounding the elven civilization. they were far more advanced than us in many ways, yet their civilization faded, while ours endured."


    "perhaps a war?" william suggested, recalling the conflicts that had plagued human history.


    "it''s possible," martha conceded, "but the elves were a reclusive people, masters of stealth and camouflage, dwelling deep within forests and mountains. it''s difficult to imagine anyone successfully waging war against them in such terrain, or even finding them in the first place."


    william pondered her words, his fascination with the elves deepening. he recalled jinra''s teachings, the elven method of casting enhancement spells, and wondered what other secrets their lost civilization held.


    he thought of his own connection to the past, his chrono shift ability lying dormant, its recharge delayed after the intense training sessions with jinra. but for now, his focus was on the present, on the adventure that awaited them within the ancient elven ruins.


    he couldn''t shake the feeling that this expedition held more significance than a mere academic exercise. perhaps, within those crumbling walls, he would find answers to questions he hadn''t even known to ask.


    the journey to the ancient ruins stretched over two days, winding through a desolate landscape of towering peaks and shadowy valleys. the silence was profound, broken only by the occasional rustle of wind through the trees or the distant cry of a hawk.


    william, gazing out the carriage window, saw no signs of civilization, only the untamed beauty of the wilderness.


    while some of his classmates fidgeted with apprehension, william felt a sense of calm settle over him. he was no stranger to the wilds, and the solitude of the mountains held a strange allure.


    as twilight descended, casting long shadows across the valley, professor james called for a halt.


    "it''s not safe to travel through these mountains at night," he explained, his voice carrying a note of caution. "especially with so many carriages. we''ll rest here and resume our journey in the morning." sear?h the n?vel_fire.¦Çet website on google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    the students readily agreed, eager to stretch their legs and enjoy a proper meal. while the carriages were comfortable, the constant motion and the narrow, winding roads had taken their toll.


    they worked together to gather firewood and build campfires, their laughter and chatter echoing through the stillness of the valley. professor james and professor martha took charge of preparing dinner, their culinary skills surprisingly adept.


    "we''ve brought enough provisions to last us several days," james assured them with a reassuring smile.


    that night, they feasted on roasted meat, grilled vegetables, and baked potatoes cooked over the open flames. the simple meal, devoured eagerly, satisfied their hunger and lifted their spirits.


    the students then turned their attention to setting up camp. while the carriages were spacious, they couldn''t accommodate everyone comfortably for the night. professor james and professor martha, ever mindful of their students'' needs, opted to sleep outside, leaving the carriages for the students.


    william, despite the professors'' insistence that he take a bed inside, chose to join the few classmates who were pitching their tents.


    continue your saga on empire


    "i enjoy sleeping under the stars," he explained, a touch of nostalgia in his voice. "i''m quite used to it."


    james and martha exchanged a worried glance. tholfnir''s directive to prioritize william''s safety weighed heavily on their minds.


    "very well, william," james conceded, "but if you hear anything unusual, even the slightest rustle, you go straight to the carriage. understood?"


    "understood, professor," william replied with a reassuring grin.


    the night passed without incident, the silence broken only by the crackling of the campfire and the soft snores of sleeping students. dawn brought a renewed sense of purpose, and they packed their belongings, eager to resume their journey.


    after another day of travel, the valley opened up to reveal a breathtaking sight. nestled amongst the towering peaks, the ancient elven ruins emerged from the mist.

 Chapter 63 Ancient Ruins Expedition (1) - Loot

    the ancient elven ruins were unlike anything william had imagined. instead of towering structures and sprawling cities, he found a series of elegant arches and smooth, white marble edifices, all nestled within a surprisingly compact area.professor james, sensing their surprise, explained, "the most fascinating aspect of these snow elves is their preference for subterranean living."


    a chorus of "wows" erupted from the students. william, too, was intrigued. he had always pictured elves dwelling in treetop cities, their homes woven amongst the branches of ancient forests. this subterranean civilization challenged his preconceptions.


    professor martha added, "it''s important to remember that this was specific to the snow elves. different elven cultures had vastly different ways of life, and even within the same culture, there could be significant variations." s§×arch* the n??elfir§×.net website on google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "first, we''ll set up camp here, in front of the ruins," professor james instructed, his voice carrying a note of authority. "we''ve had a long journey, and these ruins could hold hidden dangers. it''s best to rest and prepare before venturing inside."


    the students, though eager to explore, readily agreed. altair, however, fidgeted with barely-contained excitement.


    "do you think it will be dangerous?" he asked william, his eyes sparkling with anticipation. "i''ve always wanted to explore ancient ruins, to learn more about the elves. my parents used to tell stories about their mysterious powers and hidden cities."


    william shared his enthusiasm. "it''s possible there''s danger lurking within," he admitted, securing his tent stakes, "but with two professors to guide us, we should be fine. as long as we''re careful."


    "i suppose," altair replied, a hint of nervous excitement still lingering in his voice.


    with their camp established, they enjoyed a hearty meal and prepared for their descent into the unknown. the students were divided into two groups, one led by professor james, the other by professor martha. william and altair found themselves under martha''s guidance.


    as they approached the ruins, professor james, his passion for history evident, began his lecture.


    "you might be wondering why there are structures here on the surface if these elves lived underground," he said, gesturing towards the marble arches. "the fascinating thing is that these structures were once invisible!"


    a wave of astonishment rippled through the students.


    "the only reason we can see them now," james continued, "is that the magical formation that cloaked them has degraded. this entire complex was once hidden from sight, a clever defense mechanism to ensure the true entrance remained undiscovered."


    william traced his fingers along the smooth marble, marveling at the ingenuity of the elven magic.


    "how long ago did this cloaking magic fail?" he asked, curiosity piqued. read exclusive content at empire


    "we estimate about a year, perhaps two," james replied. "it took us some time to locate these ruins, primarily because of their remote location."


    that region, nestled deep within the mountains, was largely unexplored, its treacherous terrain and harsh climate deterring most travelers. the presence of dangerous magical beasts and the lack of civilization made it a perilous destination. only the proximity of snowpeak academy had prompted professor james and his fellow researchers to venture into its depths, their curiosity outweighing the risks.


    after a brief overview of the site''s history and significance, they prepared to enter the ruins. at the heart of the surface structures, a hidden entrance beckoned, a doorway adorned with intricate elven script. professor james paused before it, his eyes gleaming with a scholar''s passion.


    "this is elven writing," he explained, tracing the elegant symbols with his fingers. "though an ancient language, we still possess some surviving texts, allowing us to decipher its meaning." he puffed out his chest slightly, pride evident in his voice. "i took the liberty of learning it myself, to aid in my research."


    the students stared at him with newfound admiration. james, despite his youth, had already proven himself a capable instructor and a dedicated scholar. he had mastered a complex language to further his understanding of the past, a testament to his dedication.


    ''he''s truly impressive,'' william thought, his respect for the young professor growing.


    james placed his hand on the inscription, murmuring words in the ancient elven tongue. the symbols glowed with a soft light, and the door slowly swung inward, revealing a descending staircase carved from the same white marble as the surrounding structures.


    "shall we?" james asked, a smile playing on his lips.


    he led the way, his excitement palpable. though this wasn''t his first foray into the ruins, the prospect of sharing its wonders with his students filled him with a sense of anticipation. prior expeditions had confirmed the relative safety of the site, ensuring that these first-year students wouldn''t face undue danger.


    the students, their faces illuminated by the soft glow of their candlelight spells, descended the staircase, their footsteps echoing in the cavernous space.


    the darkness was absolute, the silence broken only by their hushed whispers. william understood why james had prioritized the seemingly simple spell; without it, they would be stumbling blindly, their torches a meager defense against the encroaching shadows.


    "proceed with caution," james instructed, his voice echoing in the darkness, "but do not worry. our initial explorations suggest these ruins are safe."


    the initial descent was monotonous, a seemingly endless tunnel spiraling downwards. but after fifteen minutes of steady progress, the monotony gave way to a choice. three distinct paths diverged before them, each shrouded in shadow and mystery.


    "we''ve only explored one of these paths so far," james explained, his voice echoing in the confined space. "for now, we''ll stick to the familiar route."


    the expedition''s primary goals were twofold: to introduce the students to the wonders of the elven ruins and to collect artifacts and knowledge for further research. while james and his team had previously confirmed the safety of this particular path, they had yet to fully document its contents or retrieve any items for study.


    they chose the rightmost path, their candlelight spells illuminating the way. the tunnel opened into a vast cavern, its ceiling lost in the shadows. before them stood a magnificent temple, its grandeur defying the subterranean setting.


    massive columns supported the towering structure, a grand staircase leading towards its imposing entrance. william was reminded of the ancient greek temples he had studied back on earth, but this elven edifice dwarfed even those impressive constructions.


    as they ascended the stairs, a sense of awe washed over the students. the sheer scale of the temple, its intricate carvings and elegant design, filled them with a sense of wonder.


    "we believe this was a place of worship and ritual," james explained, his voice hushed with reverence. "during our previous exploration, we discovered numerous books, scrolls, and other artifacts within. those will be our primary focus today."


    upon entering the temple, the students were awestruck by the sheer volume of artifacts and relics within. numerous chambers branched off from the central hall, some empty, others furnished with elven craftsmanship: intricately carved furniture, shelves overflowing with books and scrolls, and even an armory displaying ancient elven weaponry.


    william''s eyes were drawn to a magnificent sword, its blade gleaming as if freshly forged. "this sword looks brand new," he remarked, tracing its intricate design. "it doesn''t make sense, considering how much time has passed."


    martha, observing his fascination, nodded. "indeed," she explained. "the elves used a unique material in their weaponsmithing. this blade is likely still incredibly sharp. we can certainly take it back for study, though i doubt you''ll be allowed to keep it for yourself." she knew william favored a blend of magic and swordsmanship, his combat style incorporating both physical and magical prowess.


    william, though momentarily disappointed, shrugged it off. he had his demonic sword, a weapon with untold potential. "of course," he replied. "it should be studied." he knew that even without claiming the elven blade for himself, the knowledge gained from its analysis would be invaluable.


    the students, their excitement palpable, dispersed throughout the temple, carefully collecting artifacts and documenting their findings. william, however, couldn''t shake a sense of unease. he caught fleeting glimpses of shadows flitting at the edge of his vision, a subtle whisper of movement that sent shivers down his spine. he dismissed it as fatigue or an overactive imagination, but the feeling lingered.


    they made repeated trips back to the carriages, their packs laden with elven relics. the process was slow and methodical, but no one was in a hurry. they had stumbled upon a treasure trove of knowledge, a window into a lost civilization. but on the second day, their peaceful exploration took a sinister turn.

 Chapter 64 Ancient Ruins Expedition (2) - Demonic Sword

    the second day of their expedition dawned bright and promising. they awoke to the crisp mountain air, the ruins looming silent and majestic against the backdrop of snow-capped peaks. after a quick breakfast and a brief respite to answer nature''s call, they delved back into the depths of the elven city.with the temple thoroughly explored, professor james felt a growing urge to venture further into the unknown. two paths remained, beckoning them with the promise of discovery. he yearned to explore both, but caution prevailed. these were, after all, first-year students, their skills untested.


    "i propose we divide into two teams again," he announced, his voice echoing through the cavern. "one team will continue collecting artifacts from the temple, while the other will explore one of the remaining paths."


    the students buzzed with excitement, their youthful curiosity outweighing any apprehension. professor martha, however, expressed her concern.


    "are you certain this is wise, james?" she asked, her brow furrowed.


    "of course," james replied, his confidence unwavering. "why wouldn''t it be?"


    "this place could be dangerous," martha argued, her voice laced with worry. "these students aren''t prepared to defend themselves if something goes wrong."


    william, listening intently, couldn''t help but agree. while he had proven himself capable in combat, his classmates were still novices, their skills untested in a real-world scenario.


    "how about this," james proposed, a thoughtful expression crossing his face. "martha and i will accompany the exploration team, while the remaining students focus on the temple. it''s been deemed safe, and there''s still plenty to document and collect."


    martha seemed to relax slightly. "that''s a good compromise," she conceded. "but let''s appoint a student leader to oversee the temple team."


    both professors immediately thought of william. he was disciplined, responsible, and had demonstrated remarkable leadership qualities during the entrance exams. william, however, longed to join the exploration team, eager to delve deeper into the elven ruins.


    "we can''t risk it, william," james explained, pulling him aside. "your talent is invaluable. we need to ensure your safety."


    once again, william found himself the recipient of preferential treatment. while he appreciated their concern, he couldn''t help but feel frustrated.


    "how about this," james offered, sensing his disappointment. "you remain here for one more day and oversee the temple team. tomorrow, i''ll return and you can join us in exploring the remaining path."


    william, recognizing the futility of arguing, reluctantly agreed. he wouldn''t disobey his professors or sneak off on his own. he would fulfill his assigned duty, and then claim his chance for adventure.


    "excellent," james said. "let''s gather everyone and explain the plan."


    find your next read at empire


    the students assembled, their excitement palpable. some, including altair, were thrilled to join the exploration team, while others were content to continue their work in the temple. william, appointed as their leader, felt a surge of responsibility. he would ensure the safety of his classmates and the successful completion of their task. sea??h th§× n??efire.¦Çet website on google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "take care, my friend," altair said, clasping william''s shoulder. "the temple seems safe, but you never know."


    "you too," william replied, returning the gesture. "if things get hairy, just get out of there and come back here."


    "don''t worry," altair assured him with a grin. "i will."


    with farewells exchanged and teams assigned, the expedition split once more, venturing deeper into the mysteries of the elven ruins.


    william addressed the remaining students, his voice carrying a newfound authority. he delegated tasks, assigning teams to specific areas of the temple, ensuring a systematic and efficient approach to their artifact retrieval.


    to his relief, his leadership was met with respect and cooperation. he had feared resistance, but his reputation as a prodigy and his recent triumph over the prince had earned him their admiration.


    with the teams organized, they resumed their exploration, william overseeing their progress while continuing his own investigation of the temple. the grandeur of the elven architecture never ceased to amaze him. he craned his neck, gazing up at the towering columns and vaulted ceilings, his own stature dwarfed by their immensity.


    "incredible..." he murmured, a sense of awe washing over him.


    he ventured into unexplored chambers, his candlelight spell illuminating the intricate carvings and murals that adorned the walls. detailed scenes depicted landscapes far different from the surrounding mountains, lush forests teeming with exotic creatures and vibrant cities bustling with elven life. it was as if the artists had sought to bring the outside world into their subterranean sanctuary.


    ''why did they choose to live this way?'' william wondered, his curiosity piqued.


    the elves had already sought refuge in a remote and isolated region. why retreat further underground? what secrets were they hiding from?


    he stumbled upon a library, its shelves cluttered with fallen books and scattered scrolls. it was as if the elves had abandoned their sanctuary in haste, leaving behind a treasure trove of knowledge.


    william''s fingers itched to delve into the texts, eager to uncover the mysteries of this lost civilization.


    despite his burning curiosity about the elves and their abandoned library, william couldn''t decipher their intricate script. he decided to explore the remaining chambers, his footsteps echoing in the cavernous silence.


    he stumbled upon another section of the library, this one in disarray. most of the bookshelves lay in ruins, their contents scattered across the floor, victims of time and neglect.


    but one bookshelf, tucked away in a shadowy corner, stood pristine, untouched by the ravages of time. its polished wood gleamed in the dim light, a stark contrast to the surrounding chaos. intrigued, william cautiously approached. as he drew closer, he sensed a faint hum of magical energy emanating from the bookshelf.


    ''a magical formation?'' he wondered, recalling professor james''s earlier explanation of the cloaking spell that had once hidden the ruins.


    could this be another hidden mechanism, a secret passage or a protective ward? a thrill of excitement, mixed with a healthy dose of apprehension, coursed through him.


    ''this could be dangerous,'' he thought, his hand hovering over the bookshelf.


    but the allure of the unknown, the chance to uncover a hidden secret, was too strong to resist. he began to carefully examine the bookshelf, tracing his fingers along its smooth surface, searching for any indication of its purpose.


    despite his meticulous examination, william couldn''t find any obvious trigger for the formation.


    he tried pushing the bookshelf, hoping to reveal a hidden mechanism or a secret passage, but it wouldn''t budge. his enhanced strength, usually more than sufficient for such tasks, seemed to have no effect. the bookshelf was immovable, as if rooted to the very foundation of the temple.


    ''there''s definitely something strange about this,'' william thought, his curiosity piqued.


    he tried to think like an elf, to imagine how they might conceal a secret passage within their library. a silent trigger would be essential in a place dedicated to quiet study. but what kind of trigger?


    suddenly, a voice echoed in his mind, a chillingly familiar voice he hadn''t heard in weeks.


    "what are you doing in this forsaken elven ruin, boy?" the demonic sword rasped, its tone laced with disdain.


    "exploring," william retorted mentally. "what''s it to you? and why have you decided to grace me with your presence again?"


    "you''ve been carrying me around," the sword replied, its voice a low growl. "i can see what you''re up to. and frankly, your bumbling attempts to open this pathetic excuse for a secret passage are infuriating. step aside and let me handle this."

 Chapter 65 Ancient Ruins Expedition (3) - Newfound Ability

    william drew the demonic sword, its obsidian blade gleaming menacingly in the dim light. it was a magnificent weapon, its power undeniable despite the unsettling voice that resided within.he stood motionless, the sword held aloft, until the voice echoed in his mind once more. "boy, i don''t have arms or legs, you know. put me closer to that bookshelf, and be quick about it."


    william, a blush creeping onto his cheeks, obeyed. he held the sword against the bookshelf, a strange warmth radiating from its surface. he waited, his heart pounding, unsure what would happen next.


    the sword remained an enigma, its origins and purpose shrouded in mystery. william, chosen as its wielder, felt a growing connection to the obsidian blade, yet he couldn''t shake the unease that lingered in its presence. he kept it hidden, its secrets tucked away beneath layers of cloth, a silent promise of power and a potential threat he couldn''t fully comprehend.


    as he held the sword against the bookshelf, a strange sensation washed over him. he felt a subtle drain of energy, a tingling sensation that flowed from the elven formation, through the sword, and into his own body.


    "just so you understand, boy," the sword''s voice rasped in his mind, "i''m absorbing the mana from this pathetic elven contraption and channeling it into you. i can only handle demonic energy on my own, but with you as a conduit, i can siphon other forms of magic as well. got it? now, tell me if you start feeling unwell. you won''t be able to handle this much mana for long."


    william''s eyes widened in surprise. this was a new ability, a hidden power he hadn''t known the sword possessed. the possibilities swirled in his mind. could he use this in combat, absorbing his opponent''s spells? the potential was exhilarating.


    after a minute, a wave of nausea washed over him. a throbbing headache pulsed behind his eyes, and his body felt heavy and sluggish. the sword, sensing his distress, ceased its absorption.


    "fortunately, the mana ran out," the sword remarked, its tone laced with amusement. "you were starting to look a bit green around the gills. anyway, you can move that bookshelf now and access your precious secret passage. now, if you''ll excuse me, i need a nap."


    the sword fell silent, its energy depleted. william carefully rewrapped it, concealing its dark gleam. a system notification flashed before his eyes.


    [pure mana absorbed. upon assimilation, you will gain benefits.]


    [until fully assimilated, you will experience decreased physical and mental capabilities.]


    william, still feeling the lingering effects of the mana overload, pushed against the bookshelf. it moved with surprising ease, sliding away from the wall to reveal a hidden passage. a thrill of excitement shot through him, the promise of discovery outweighing his discomfort. he stepped into the darkness, the unknown beckoning him forward.


    he found himself in a narrow passage, just wide enough for a single person to pass. where does this lead? he wondered, a thrill of excitement coursing through him. should he return and alert the others, or forge ahead on his own? he decided on the latter. the other students, while well-intentioned, were inexperienced. their presence might hinder more than help.


    with his steel sword drawn and his senses heightened, william ventured into the darkness. the tunnel was unremarkable, devoid of traps or dangers, save for the occasional scuttling insect or startled rodent. after ten minutes of walking, he heard voices echoing in the distance. his heart pounded with a mix of apprehension and anticipation. as he drew closer, he recognized the voice of professor james!


    he quickened his pace, arriving at the end of the tunnel. a lever protruded from the wall. with a hesitant pull, a hidden door swung open, revealing a chamber beyond.


    "what in the world...?" james''s startled voice reached him.


    the professor, his hand instinctively reaching for his spellcasting focus, relaxed upon seeing william. confusion replaced his initial alarm.


    "william?" he exclaimed. "what are you doing here? and what is this passage?"


    "i found a secret entrance in the temple library," william explained, gesturing back towards the hidden door. "i think it connects to other areas of the ruins."


    "that makes sense," james mused, stroking his chin thoughtfully. "but you should return and inform the others."


    seizing the opportunity, william pressed his case. "professor, couldn''t i join you? perhaps finding this passage means i''m meant to be part of the exploration team..."


    enjoy exclusive adventures from empire


    james hesitated, then, with a resigned sigh, agreed. "alright, william," he conceded. "i''ll return with you and inform the others."


    they retraced their steps, rejoining the remaining students in the temple. james explained the situation, appointed a new student leader, and then, with william in tow, ventured back into the tunnel.


    "find anything interesting?" william asked, eager to catch up.


    "just a long, straight passage so far," james replied, "but i suspect we''re close to something significant, considering this secret tunnel intersects with our path."


    he theorized that the tunnel likely led to a safe haven, a hidden escape route in case of danger within the temple.


    they rejoined the rest of the group, finding martha and the other students waiting patiently where the tunnel opened into the cavern. altair, his earlier bravado replaced by a hint of relief, greeted william with a grin.


    "glad you''re here," he admitted. "if things go south, at least we''ll go down together."


    william chuckled, slinging an arm around altair''s shoulders. "are you crazy? if things get dicey, i''m using you as a distraction while i make my escape."


    their laughter echoed through the cavern, easing the tension that had begun to build. professor james, his instincts proven correct, led them deeper into the ruins. within minutes, they emerged into a breathtaking sight.


    the subterranean city unfolded before them, a testament to elven ingenuity and artistry. even in its ruined state, its beauty was undeniable. gasps of wonder echoed through the cavern.


    "incredible!" one of the students exclaimed, his voice filled with awe.


    the centerpiece of the city was a crystal-clear lake, its waters sparkling in the light of their spells. buildings, crafted from the same white marble as the temple, lined the shores, their elegant arches and intricate carvings reflecting in the still water. in the center of the lake, a small island held a cluster of structures, their purpose a tantalizing mystery.


    "this is an extraordinary find," professor james declared, his voice hushed with reverence. "an elven city preserved in such pristine condition is incredibly rare. this will be invaluable for our research! we''ll need to establish a base here."


    he envisioned a permanent research outpost, a hub for scholars and mages to study the elven ruins and unlock their secrets.


    the students, however, would soon return to their classes. their time in the ruins was limited, a fleeting glimpse into a world lost to time.


    "we''ll explore a small section of the city today," james announced, his gaze sweeping across the eager faces, "and then return to camp. there''s much to see, and we must proceed with caution."


    unbeknownst to the students and professors venturing deeper into the elven city, a new group arrived at the surface. they emerged from the dense forest, their cloaked figures casting long shadows in the fading light. four hooded figures dismounted from their steeds, their faces obscured in the twilight.


    "they were here first?" one of them hissed, their voice a low growl.


    "it seems we''ve been delayed," another replied, their tone laced with annoyance. "but no matter. it simply means we''ll have to...adjust our plans."


    with a shared glance of grim determination, they tethered their mounts and approached the ruins. they descended the stone staircase, their footsteps echoing in the silence.


    s~ea??h the n??el fire.n§×t website on google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.

 Chapter 66 Ancient Ruins Expedition (4) - Tragedy

    after a lively discussion about which area to explore first, they decided to focus on a district where the houses appeared uniform in size and design."this section likely housed the common folk," professor james explained, his voice echoing in the spacious cavern. "much like human societies, elves also had social hierarchies. those with higher status typically resided in more desirable locations within the city."


    the concept of social stratification, though disheartening, wasn''t surprising to william. even the advanced elven civilization wasn''t immune to such divisions.


    the students dispersed, eager to explore the individual dwellings. working in pairs allowed them to cover more ground, and william naturally gravitated towards altair.


    "this house is amazing!" altair exclaimed, stepping through a doorway into a surprisingly well-preserved home. "look how it''s still standing after all these years!"


    the house, constructed from the same white marble as the other structures, was remarkably intact. only the wooden furnishings had succumbed to the ravages of time, while the stone elements remained pristine. the interior was simple, with a few sparsely furnished rooms and a single bedroom.


    at first glance, the house seemed disappointingly bare. aside from the well-preserved furniture, there were no bookshelves or scrolls, nothing of obvious value to the mages and researchers of snowpeak academy.


    "too bad we didn''t find anything," william sighed, turning to leave.


    but just as he stepped through the doorway, altair''s excited voice called him back. "wait!" altair exclaimed, holding up a small, folded piece of parchment. "i found this letter tucked away in a drawer. i can''t understand the writing, but it might be worth investigating."


    william hurried back inside, his curiosity piqued. the parchment, miraculously intact despite the passage of time, was covered in elegant elven script. they carefully placed it in altair''s pack, their excitement growing. perhaps this seemingly insignificant letter held valuable clues about the elven civilization and its mysterious disappearance.


    they continued their exploration, moving from house to house, their findings intriguing but not groundbreaking. professor james, his gaze drawn to the island at the center of the lake, announced their next objective.


    "i believe that''s where the elven royalty resided," he explained, his voice filled with anticipation. "we''ll head there next."


    but their plans were abruptly shattered. a figure emerged from the tunnel leading back to the temple, stumbling towards them with a look of sheer terror etched on their face. it was one of the students tasked with collecting artifacts from the temple. blood stained his clothes, and his left arm hung limp, the sleeve soaked crimson.


    "h-help!" he gasped, his voice raw with fear.


    professor james and professor martha rushed to his aid, their faces etched with concern. they worked quickly to staunch the bleeding, while simultaneously demanding an explanation.


    "a group...four of them..." the student stammered, his breath coming in ragged gasps. "they attacked the temple...killed everyone... i barely escaped..."


    the atmosphere in the elven city instantly shifted. the excitement and wonder that had filled the air evaporated, replaced by a chilling fear.


    panic rippled through the group. the students, their faces pale with fear, huddled together, their whispers echoing in the cavernous space. professor james and professor martha exchanged a horrified look, the weight of responsibility settling upon their shoulders. the expedition, intended as a learning experience, had turned into a nightmare.


    "we need to act quickly," james said, his voice firm despite the tremor in his hands. "martha, tend to the injured student. i''ll gather the others and assess the situation."


    martha, her medical expertise taking over, guided the wounded student towards a sheltered alcove. james addressed the remaining students, his voice laced with urgency.


    "everyone, remain calm," he instructed, his gaze sweeping across their anxious faces. "we need to return to the temple and assess the situation. stay close and be prepared for anything."


    william, his instincts honed from his encounters with danger, felt a surge of adrenaline. he gripped his sword, his senses alert, ready to face whatever threat lurked within the ruins.


    the professors exchanged a worried glance. the death of their students was a devastating blow, one they weren''t prepared to face. explaining this tragedy to tholfnir and the grieving families would be a heavy burden.


    "we could try to hide within the city," martha suggested, her voice laced with uncertainty, "but what if that proves even more dangerous?"


    the idea of confronting the mysterious attackers, or at the very least evading them, seemed like their only viable option.


    "what do we do, james?" william asked, his voice steady despite the tremor of fear that ran through him.


    "i don''t know their strength," james admitted, his brow furrowed in thought. "they killed our first-years, but that doesn''t tell us much. those students had barely begun their training."


    martha, tending to the injured student, interjected, "could we contact tholfnir from here?"


    they carried communication artifacts, as all professors did, capable of reaching the headmaster even at a distance. but there was a catch.


    "the signal can''t penetrate the barrier surrounding the ruins," james explained, frustration evident in his voice. "we''d need to return to the surface. but how can we get past those attackers without being detected?"


    william''s mind raced. "they''ll likely use the main tunnel," he said, an idea forming. "we can use the secret passage i found, bypass them completely, and then contact tholfnir from outside."


    "that''s...not a bad plan," james conceded. "in fact, it''s our best option given the circumstances. alright, let''s move." he turned towards martha. "how is he doing? will he survive?" continue your journey with empire


    but as he looked at the injured student, a wave of dread washed over him. the young man was trembling, his eyes wide with terror, his gaze fixed on the tunnel entrance. james followed his line of sight and saw them ¨C the four cloaked figures emerging from the passage.


    "damn it," james cursed under his breath. "they''re already here. we have to act fast. william, lead the students and get out of here. find a place to hide. martha and i will hold them off."


    william knew he couldn''t face those attackers. despite his own growing power, he was still a novice compared to the professors. his involvement would likely hinder more than help.


    "i understand," william said, his voice firm. "we''ll find a place to hide. please, be careful."


    james and martha nodded, their expressions grim as they drew their weapons.


    "follow me," william commanded, leading the students away from the confrontation. but where could they go? he was unfamiliar with the city layout, and the only known exit was blocked by their attackers.


    as they hurried through the deserted streets, the sounds of battle echoed through the cavern, the ground trembling beneath their feet.


    "this is a nightmare," one of the students whimpered.


    "we''re all going to die here," another wailed.


    fear threatened to consume them. william, his leadership instincts taking over, sought to rally their spirits.


    "remember what professor james said about the elven social structure?" he asked, his voice cutting through their panic.


    they looked at him, their faces etched with confusion.


    "he said the nobility likely resided on that island," william explained, pointing towards the center of the lake. "and if the nobles lived there, there must be a secret escape route. it''s how we do things in human society, and the elves likely followed a similar pattern."


    a spark of hope flickered in their eyes. william, fueled by a desperate need to survive, led them towards the lake, praying that his hunch was correct. sear?h the n?velfire.n§×t website on google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.

 Chapter 67 Ancient Ruins Expedition (5) - Fierce Battle for Survival

    reaching the island required a cautious approach. swimming was out of the question; the frigid water and the unknown depths posed too great a risk."we need to find a boat," william declared, scanning the shoreline. "there has to be a way for them to have reached the island."


    his words sparked a renewed sense of purpose. the students spread out, searching for any sign of a vessel. they soon discovered a hidden dock, several small boats bobbing gently in the water. relief washed over them; there were enough boats to accommodate all twelve survivors.


    "divide into groups and take a boat each," william instructed, his voice steady despite the urgency of their situation. the students, their fear momentarily forgotten, scrambled towards the vessels.


    as they rowed towards the island, they strained to hear any indication of the battle''s progress. the sounds of clashing magic still echoed through the cavern, offering a glimmer of hope that james and martha were holding their own.


    the island, dominated by a grand palace and surrounded by smaller, luxurious dwellings, confirmed their suspicions.


    "this must be where the elven nobility lived," one student whispered, a flicker of hope returning to their eyes. "we might find an escape route here."


    william, though relieved to have reached the island, remained cautious. he led the way towards the palace, his senses alert.


    "stay vigilant," he warned. "there could be traps or other dangers."


    they approached the palace cautiously, their footsteps echoing in the eerie silence. the grand structure, though weathered by time, exuded an aura of power and mystery. william couldn''t shake the feeling that they were stepping into the heart of the elven city.


    the palace was a labyrinth of corridors and chambers, its grandeur surpassing even the most opulent houses in the human cities william had visited. the students, their footsteps echoing in the vast silence, moved with trepidation, their eyes darting nervously, searching for any hint of danger.


    william, leading the way, felt a familiar tremor of apprehension. he couldn''t shake the feeling that they were treading on hallowed ground, a place where the echoes of elven royalty still lingered. yet, the fear of the unknown paled in comparison to the threat posed by the mysterious attackers. he pressed onward, his senses heightened, determined to find a safe haven within the palace walls.


    the interior was remarkably preserved, the elven craftsmanship evident in every detail. intricate carvings adorned the walls, depicting scenes of elven life, their forms fluid and graceful. william noticed a higher concentration of magical formations here, their subtle energy humming beneath the surface. he wondered if these enchantments were defensive measures or perhaps remnants of the elves'' advanced technology.


    suddenly, the demonic sword''s voice echoed in his mind, shattering the silence. "why are we in this place, boy?" it hissed. "i sense a potent concentration of magical energy. it''s...intoxicating."


    william, no longer startled by the sword''s intrusions, replied mentally, "don''t sneak up on me like that. it''s unnerving. and to answer your question, we don''t have much choice. a group of people attacked us. they killed some of the other students."


    "what?" the sword exclaimed, its tone laced with a surprising concern. "are you alright? if you die, i die."


    "i''m fine," william assured it, "but we need to find a way out of here. i''m hoping the elven royalty had a secret escape route."


    "a sound strategy," the sword replied, its voice approving. "especially considering the level of security in this place. but finding it won''t be easy. we may be in over our heads, boy."


    william, despite the sword''s ominous warning, pressed on. he had a knack for finding hidden things, and he wouldn''t let fear deter him.


    "let''s spread out and search for anything that might be helpful," william instructed, his voice echoing in the cavernous hall.


    the students dispersed, their footsteps muffled by the plush carpets that lined the palace floors. they carefully examined each room, their eyes scanning the walls for hidden levers, their fingers tracing the intricate carvings, hoping to uncover a secret passage.


    meanwhile, outside the palace walls, a fierce battle raged. martha, her staff held aloft, summoned a torrent of vines from the earth.


    "vine eruption!" she cried, her voice echoing through the cavern.


    the vines snaked across the ground, ensnaring the legs of the hooded figures. but one of the attackers countered with a powerful fire lotus spell, incinerating the vines in a fiery explosion.


    martha, her strength lying in support magic and healing, focused on keeping james alive. the true offensive power came from james himself.


    he stood amidst the chaos, his body enveloped in a blazing aura, his hair dancing in the heat. this was his signature spell, the one that had earned him the moniker "the fire serpent" and cemented his reputation as a magical prodigy.


    fire mantra.


    it granted him incredible resistance to flames, enhanced his fire magic, and turned his very touch into a searing weapon. the academy had classified it as an s-rank spell, a testament to its power and rarity.


    one of the hooded figures, their voice muffled by their cloak, recognized the fiery aura. "are you the fire serpent, james?" they asked, their tone a mix of surprise and disdain.


    james, though momentarily flattered by the recognition, felt a surge of anger. he despised these attackers, these killers who had disrupted their peaceful expedition and threatened the lives of his students.


    "and you are?" he retorted, his voice laced with a chilling calm. he needed information, a clue to their identity and their motives. sea??h th§× ¦Çovelfire.¦Çet website on google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "do you really think i''ll tell you that?" the attacker sneered, their voice dripping with malice. "just know that we didn''t intend to kill your students. they were simply...in the wrong place at the wrong time."


    fury surged through james. he drew his sword, its blade igniting with fiery energy. with a speed that belied his scholarly appearance, he lunged towards the attacker, his movements a blur.


    the attacker, caught off guard, couldn''t react in time. james''s blade sliced through the air, connecting with the attacker''s left arm, leaving a deep, cauterized wound.


    "agh!" the attacker screamed, their voice raw with pain. the smell of burning flesh filled the air. your next read awaits at empire


    james, momentarily distracted by his initial victory, felt a surge of heat at his back. he turned to see a blazing fireball hurtling towards him.


    "trying to hit me with fire?" he scoffed, his voice laced with arrogance. "foolish."


    the attacker grinned, a cruel glint in his eyes. "actually," he replied, his voice a chilling whisper, "i''m just distracting you."


    suddenly, a figure materialized from the shadows behind james. this attacker, cloaked in darkness, wielded the rare and deadly power of shadow magic. james, his senses attuned to fire, hadn''t even registered their presence. a dagger, tipped with a sinister black energy, plunged deep into his chest. blood blossomed, staining his pristine robes crimson.


    "james!" martha''s scream echoed through the cavern.


    the silence that followed the abrupt end of the battle was deafening. the students, huddled within the opulent walls of the elven palace, exchanged terrified glances. the echoes of magical combat had ceased, leaving a chilling void in their wake. a wave of despair washed over them. their protectors, their mentors, had fallen.


    "damn it!" one of the students cried, slamming his fist against the wall in frustration.


    the impact dislodged a painting, sending it crashing to the floor. behind it, they found something.

 Chapter 68 Ancient Ruins Expedition (6) - Mysterious Flute

    what they found behind the painting was a safe, locked with some sort of combination of numbers.the student''s frustration was palpable. "we don''t know the combination," he groaned, kicking at the ornate rug that lay before the safe. "this is useless!"


    william stepped forward, his curiosity piqued. "let me take a look."


    the safe, though ancient, appeared similar to those he had encountered in his own time. he examined the dial, the intricate carvings that adorned its surface, searching for any clue to its combination.


    "i can find the combination for you," the demonic sword''s voice whispered in his mind.


    william, though growing accustomed to the sword''s unexpected assistance, couldn''t help but feel a surge of skepticism.


    "are you sure?" he asked mentally. "and how, exactly, do you propose to do that?"


    "this safe requires more than just a numerical code," the sword explained. "it also requires the user to channel mana into each number as it''s selected. i can sense the residual mana from previous activations, like a ghostly imprint on the dial."


    "but that''s impossible," william argued. "the last person to open this safe was probably centuries ago. the mana couldn''t have lasted this long."


    "trust me, boy," the sword retorted, its tone confident. "i know what i''m doing."


    william, despite his reservations, decided to trust the sword. he needed to get that safe open, and quickly. but unwrapping the demonic blade in front of the other students was out of the question. he needed a distraction.


    "let''s split up and search for clues to the combination," he announced, his voice projecting an air of urgency. "don''t work in teams. time is of the essence, considering the fight outside seems to have ended."


    the students, their anxiety heightened by the silence from the battle, readily agreed. they scattered throughout the palace, their footsteps echoing in the vast hallways.


    william lingered for a few minutes, pretending to search, before returning to the safe. he unwrapped the demonic sword, its obsidian blade gleaming in the dim light. he held it close to the dial, waiting for the sword to work its magic. s~ea??h the n?vel(f)ire.¦Çet website on google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    the demonic sword hummed with a faint energy, its obsidian blade pulsing with a dim light. after a tense silence, the sword''s voice echoed in william''s mind, the numbers resonating with an eerie clarity.


    "3774269"


    william carefully inputted the code, his fingers trembling slightly. with a satisfying click, the safe swung open, revealing its hidden treasures. inside, nestled on a bed of velvet, lay two objects: a flute crafted from a dark, polished wood and a book bound in black leather, its cover embossed with a serpent devouring its own tail.


    "this is strange..." william murmured, his brow furrowed. he recognized the symbol, the ouroboros, from his past life, but its meaning in this world remained a mystery.


    "i''ve never seen anything like it," the demonic sword admitted, its voice laced with curiosity. "and i''ve been in this world for a long time. that flute...it radiates a peculiar energy."


    william reached for the book, his fingers tracing the serpent''s scales. it refused to open, its pages sealed by an unknown magic. he turned his attention to the flute. as his fingers brushed against its smooth surface, a torrent of images flooded his mind.


    the visions were vivid, immersive. william found himself transported to the elven city''s vibrant past. he saw snow elves, their faces etched with joy and contentment, going about their daily lives. the city pulsed with light, its streets and buildings illuminated by a radiant blue orb suspended high above the lake, a magical substitute for the sun. gardens flourished under its gentle glow, their exotic plants thriving in the artificial sunlight.


    then, a figure emerged from the crowd, an elf adorned in ornate robes, a flute clutched in their slender hands. as the elf raised the instrument to their lips, a haunting melody filled the air. the waters of the lake began to churn, rippling violently as if disturbed by an unseen force.


    suddenly, a colossal serpent erupted from the depths, its scales shimmering like polished obsidian. its eyes, twin orbs of molten gold, were the size of houses, its gaze filled with an ancient, terrifying power. the creature''s immense body, easily spanning a hundred and twenty meters, barely fit within the cavern, its tail thrashing wildly, sending tremors through the city.


    the vision abruptly ended, leaving william gasping for breath, his heart pounding in his chest. he stared at the flute in his hand, its smooth surface now chilling to the touch. he had just witnessed a glimpse of the elves'' power, a magic that could summon colossal creatures from the depths. fear mingled with awe, a potent cocktail of emotions that left him trembling.


    "what did you see?" the demonic sword pressed, its voice a low growl. "you reek of fear and awe. something powerful touched your mind."


    "you won''t believe me," william said, his voice barely above a whisper. "i saw an elf playing this flute, and then...a gigantic serpent emerged from the lake. it was colossal, at least a hundred and twenty meters long."


    "what?" the sword exclaimed, its tone incredulous. "if that''s true, then it could be a mythical creature. something beyond even my understanding."


    william, still reeling from the vision, gathered the other students. he recounted what he had seen, the details vivid in his mind. the students, though initially skeptical, listened with growing apprehension.


    "are you thinking of using that flute?" altair asked, his voice laced with worry. "we''re trying to escape, not summon a monstrous serpent."


    "we haven''t found an exit yet," william argued, "and those attackers are still out there. the serpent didn''t seem hostile towards the elf who played the flute. perhaps it will help us."


    "assuming it doesn''t attack humans," altair countered. "remember, the flute player was an elf, like everyone else in this city."


    william hesitated, weighing the risks. was it a good idea to use the flute, or was he doing something that would make things even worse for them?


    william, his resolve hardening, made a decision. he would use the flute. he gathered the students, his voice unwavering despite the tremor of fear that ran through him.


    "i''m going to summon the serpent," he announced, his gaze sweeping across their anxious faces. "but i need you all to remain inside the palace. i''ll ensure it''s safe before signaling you to come out."


    "william, no!" altair protested, his voice filled with concern. "that''s too dangerous! we can find another way."


    other students echoed his sentiment, their voices a chorus of dissent. but william, his leadership instincts taking over, held his ground.


    "i appreciate your concern," he said, his voice firm, "but this is our best chance. i won''t risk all our lives by summoning it without precautions. trust me."


    he met their gazes, his determination unwavering. reluctantly, they agreed. william, clutching the flute, stepped out of the palace and onto the shores of the lake. he closed his eyes, took a deep breath, and raised the instrument to his lips.


    "let''s do this," he whispered, a hint of fear battling with the resolve in his voice.


    the water around the island started to move, and william knew that was the sign the serpent was waking from its slumber. your next read is at empire

 Chapter 69 Ancient Ruins Expedition (7) - End

    the lake''s surface churned violently, waves crashing against the island''s shores. inside the palace, the students watched with a mixture of awe and terror, their faces pressed against the windows. continue reading at empire"the water''s movement is unnatural," one student whispered, his voice trembling. "there''s something down there... he was right about the serpent!"


    altair, his belief in william unwavering, felt a surge of both excitement and fear. the other students, their skepticism replaced by a chilling realization, exchanged panicked glances.


    william stood his ground, his heart pounding in his chest. should he flee? would the serpent attack? he steeled his nerves, gorn''s words of encouragement echoing in his mind. he would face this challenge head-on.


    the serpent''s colossal head emerged from the depths, its scales shimmering like polished obsidian, its eyes like molten gold. the four cloaked figures, who had been approaching the island, froze in their tracks, their faces a mixture of shock and disbelief.


    "it...it actually exists!" one of them stammered. "i thought it was just a legend!"


    the serpent''s gaze swept across the city, its ancient eyes taking in the ruined grandeur. it focused on william, its immense form dwarfing the young mage.


    "are you the one who summoned me?" the serpent''s voice boomed within william''s mind, its power resonating deep within his soul.


    "yes," william replied, his voice steady despite the tremor of fear that ran through him. "i played the flute."


    the serpent surveyed its surroundings, its confusion growing. "the city...it''s in ruins... how long has it been? how long have i slumbered?"


    "i don''t know exactly," william admitted. "i discovered these ruins with my classmates and professors. we''re here to study them. but i believe it''s been centuries since this city was abandoned."


    the serpent recoiled, its surprise palpable. "impossible... why didn''t they call for me? i would have defended them, protected our home... but now..." grief and anger resonated in its voice, a deep thrum of sadness that shook the cavern.


    william seized the opportunity. "there are intruders here," he explained, his voice urgent. "they attacked us, killed some of my friends. they''re here to cause harm, to desecrate this place. can you help us?"


    the serpent considered his plea, its massive head tilting slightly. ''i cannot fight them directly,'' it finally replied, its voice laced with regret. "there are rules that bind creatures of my power, ancient laws that prevent our interference in mortal affairs. but i can frighten them, drive them away. and i can offer you a gift, a token of my gratitude. would that suffice?"


    william, though disappointed that the serpent couldn''t eliminate the threat entirely, knew this was a valuable offer. he yearned for vengeance, but the safety of his classmates was his priority.


    "that would be appreciated," william agreed.


    the serpent turned its massive head, its gaze fixed on the four figures huddled on the distant shore. they, sensing the impending danger, unleashed a barrage of spells, their attacks striking the serpent''s impenetrable scales. the magic dissipated harmlessly, like raindrops against a mountain.


    the serpent unleashed a wave of pure magical pressure, an aura of immense power that crashed against the attackers, forcing them to their knees.


    "what are you doing here?" the serpent boomed, its voice echoing through the cavern. this time, the words were spoken aloud, a physical manifestation of its power that sent shivers down their spines.


    faced with the serpent''s overwhelming power and undeniable authority, the cloaked figures abandoned their pretense of scholarly curiosity.


    "we seek the secrets of this lost civilization," one of them admitted, their voice trembling. "our organization desires the knowledge and power the elves possessed."


    the serpent let out a low hiss, its displeasure echoing through the cavern. "i am awake now," it boomed, its voice laced with a chilling finality. "you will take nothing from this city for at least a thousand years, until i slumber once more. do you understand? or do you wish for me to unleash my wrath upon your lands?" s§×ar?h the n??efire.¦Çet website on google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    the threat was clear. the attackers, their faces pale with fear, wasted no time in making their retreat.


    "w-we will leave," they stammered, bowing their heads in submission. "we apologize for our intrusion."


    they turned and fled, their footsteps echoing through the silent city as they disappeared back into the tunnel. the serpent, satisfied with their hasty departure, turned its attention back to william.


    "it is done, young one," it said, its voice softer now. "now, about your gift... i sense a peculiar aura within you, a bloodline both familiar and...unexpected."


    william froze, his heart pounding. what did the serpent mean?


    "are you, perhaps, a descendant of the demon royalty?" the serpent inquired, its voice filled with curiosity. "it would explain the strange energy i sense, for i, too, am of the demon lineage."


    "what the...?" the demonic sword exclaimed, its voice a mix of surprise and disbelief. "this serpent is a demon, too?"


    the serpent, its senses attuned to the sword''s presence within william''s mind, chuckled. "ah, so you even possess a demonic artifact. impressive. i can offer you a drop of my divine blood, young one. it may prove beneficial on your journey."


    "divine blood?" william echoed, confused. "but you said you''re a demon."


    the serpent tilted its massive head, its golden eyes gleaming with amusement. "indeed i am. demons are a race, not inherently evil or opposed to divinity. are you suggesting only humans can possess divine qualities?"


    "no, of course not," william stammered, a blush creeping onto his cheeks. "i apologize for my ignorance."


    the serpent chuckled, a deep rumble that shook the cavern. "think nothing of it, young one. now, hold out your hand."


    william extended his hand, his heart pounding with a mix of anticipation and apprehension. a single drop of the serpent''s blood, shimmering with an emerald luminescence, materialized above his palm.


    it fell, surprisingly heavy, engulfing his hand entirely. then, with a tingling warmth, it vanished, absorbed into his very being.


    "the benefits will manifest in due time," the serpent assured him, its voice resonating with an ancient power. "sooner than you might expect."


    "thank you," william replied, gratitude filling his voice. "and is there a chance those attackers are waiting for us on the surface?"


    "none whatsoever," the serpent replied confidently. "i can sense their presence, and they have fled. you are safe."


    reassured, william attempted to inquire further about the demonic lineage the serpent had mentioned, but the creature had already turned its attention back to the depths. with a final ripple of the water, it vanished, leaving william alone on the island.


    the immediate threat neutralized, the students rejoiced. their escape route secured, they prepared to leave the elven city, their hearts lighter despite the lingering sadness for their fallen classmates. as they rowed back towards the mainland, a somber silence fell over them, their tears a tribute to those lost.


    but upon reaching the shore, a sight met their eyes that banished their grief. standing near the tunnel entrance, battered but alive, were professor james and professor martha.


    "professors!" the students cried out in unison, their voices filled with disbelief and relief.


    "we thought you were..." william began, his voice choked with emotion.


    james sighed, leaning heavily on his staff. "we managed to escape," he admitted, wincing as he adjusted his position. "they were too strong. but what in the world was that serpent? we saw it from across the city!"


    william, his mind still reeling from the encounter, knew he had much to explain. but first, they had to reach safety and alert tholfnir.


    the academy needed to be warned, the attackers brought to justice. the journey back, once filled with the excitement of discovery, was now heavy with the weight of loss and the looming threat of a hidden enemy.

 Chapter 70 Dark Times, and Back in the Past

    the return to the temple was a somber affair. the sight of their fallen classmates, their lifeless bodies scattered amongst the elven artifacts, brought a wave of grief and despair. professor james knelt beside them, his shoulders slumped, his face etched with sorrow."we''ll preserve their bodies," he said, his voice thick with emotion. "we''ll return for them later."


    martha, her eyes filled with tears, cast a preservation spell, encasing the bodies in a shimmering frost. the carriages, already laden with artifacts, couldn''t accommodate the fallen students. it was a grim reminder of the expedition''s tragic turn.


    the journey back to the academy was a somber procession. silence filled the carriages, the weight of loss pressing down on their spirits.


    william, though not close to those who had perished, couldn''t shake the feeling of sadness, the knowledge that their dreams had been cut short, their potential forever unrealized.


    he had gained much from the expedition ¨C a powerful gift from a mythical creature, a deeper understanding of the elven civilization ¨C but the cost felt unbearably high.


    upon their return to snowpeak, the professors were met by headmaster tholfnir. he had received their urgent message and stood waiting, his face etched with worry and grief.


    "tell me everything," he commanded, his voice heavy.


    james instructed the students to unload the carriages while he and martha accompanied tholfnir to his office. william, eager to distract himself from the grim task, joined the other students, their movements mechanical as they carried the elven artifacts into the academy. the weight of the tragedy settled over them.


    news of the tragedy spread like wildfire through the academy and the nearby city of snowpeak mount. the unexpected loss of young lives cast a pall over the community, their fears about the looming war amplified by the grim reality of death.


    altair, his usual cheerfulness replaced by a somber expression, worked alongside william, unloading the carriages. "i never imagined something like this would happen," he confessed, his voice heavy with sadness. "the expedition seemed so promising..."


    "sometimes," william replied, his gaze distant, "things don''t go as planned. and i have a feeling this is just the beginning. can you sense it too? a darkness hanging over us?"


    altair nodded, his eyes filled with a grim understanding. "yes," he agreed. "everyone is on edge, bracing for the war. dark times are coming, my friend."


    the magic academy suspended classes for several days following the tragic incident. the bodies of the fallen students were retrieved from the ruins, and a somber memorial service was held. grieving families traveled to the academy, their hearts heavy with loss. some chose to take their loved ones home for burial, while others decided to lay them to rest in the snowpeak mount cemetery, believing their children would find solace in being close to the dreams they had pursued.


    during this time of mourning, william sought refuge in his studies, immersing himself in books and practicing his spells. he attended the memorial service, paying his respects to the fallen, but the weight of the tragedy lingered.


    four days later, a surge of energy coursed through him, signaling the return of his chrono shift ability. he had eagerly awaited its return, the suspension of classes making its availability even more valuable.


    "i should visit jinra and continue my training," he mused, a plan forming in his mind. "in fact, it might be time for our journey to the magic school in the past."


    the prospect of enrolling in an ancient elven academy, of learning magic from a different era, filled him with anticipation. he envisioned gaining knowledge and skills that would set him apart from his peers, enhancing his already formidable abilities.


    with a newfound sense of purpose, william activated chrono shift within the privacy of his room. the familiar portal shimmered into existence, and he stepped through, returning to jinra''s humble abode.


    the morning sun cast long shadows across the dew-covered grass as william materialized in the barn. he waited patiently for jinra to awaken, his mind buzzing with anticipation.


    the old mage emerged, his weathered face creased with a welcoming smile. he carried several bulging packs, setting them carefully beside the barn door. s§×arch* the ¦Çovelfire.¦Çet website on google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "good morning, william," jinra greeted him, his voice warm.


    "good morning, master," william replied, his curiosity piqued. "what''s with the bags?"


    jinra chuckled. "don''t panic, lad, but those are our travel packs. i figured it was time to set off for the magic academy. ready for a new adventure?"


    "absolutely!" william exclaimed, his excitement bubbling over.


    jinra had spent the previous night packing their provisions, carefully selecting the essentials for their journey. he couldn''t carry too much, of course, but he had ensured they wouldn''t go hungry.


    "we might need to hunt along the way," he explained, securing the last of the bags, "and find lodging in roadside taverns. but that shouldn''t be a problem for a seasoned adventurer like you, eh?"


    william, who had faced far greater challenges in recent months, merely grinned. "no problem at all," he replied. "but tell me, master, which magic academy are we heading to?"


    he was curious. in this era, civilization was still in its infancy. he had no idea what kind of magical institution jinra had in mind.


    "it''s a newly established academy," jinra explained, "built atop a remote mountain. they seem to be accepting students with minimal requirements, likely because few are willing to endure the harsh conditions."


    william''s interest piqued. jinra''s description sounded eerily similar to snowpeak academy, his current school. could fate be leading him to the same institution, albeit in a different era?


    "does this place have a name?" william asked.


    jinra shook his head. "not yet, lad. it''s quite new, as i said. but i hear there are some interesting rumors surrounding it. something about sightings of snow elves in the area. whether those are just tales or the truth, i can''t say."


    william''s suspicions grew stronger. this was undoubtedly snowpeak academy, in its nascent form. he wondered if these rumored snow elves were the same ones whose ruins he had explored with professor james. the implications were intriguing, but also concerning.


    ''could my presence here disrupt the timeline?'' he worried. ''i don''t want to inadvertently cause some catastrophic paradox.''


    the thought troubled him, but he reasoned that the chances of causing significant damage were slim. he was deep in the past, likely thousands of years before his own time. as a mere student, his influence on the grand scheme of things would be minimal. he pushed aside his anxieties, his excitement for the journey outweighing his fears. read exclusive adventures at empire


    they set off after a hearty breakfast, their horses'' hooves kicking up puffs of snow as they left the familiar surroundings of jinra''s home. the old mage beamed with pride, his eyes twinkling.


    "you''ve mastered the magic mind spell, william," he said, his voice filled with admiration. "few your age could accomplish such a feat. in fact, few mages ever manage to learn that spell. i have a feeling you''ll thrive at this academy."


    "you think so?" william asked, a grin spreading across his face.


    "absolutely," jinra confirmed. "now, shall we be off?"


    they mounted their horses, the crisp mountain air invigorating their spirits. william, a mix of excitement and apprehension bubbling within him, couldn''t help but wonder what awaited them at this ancient iteration of snowpeak academy.

 Chapter 71 Prohibited Session in the Library

    "jinra," william asked, his curiosity piqued, "are you, by any chance, an enchanter?" he recalled professor sebastian''s mention of a master enchanter named jinra and couldn''t help but wonder if it was more than just a coincidence.jinra, his eyebrows raised in surprise, chuckled. "indeed i am," he admitted, "though i wouldn''t consider myself a master. how did you know?"


    william, ever quick with an explanation, gestured vaguely towards the bags strapped to their horses. "i noticed some of the items you packed," he said, hoping his excuse sounded plausible. "they seemed...enchantment-related."


    "keen eyes, young man," jinra said, a hint of pride in his voice. "but be warned, our journey will be arduous. the academy is in a remote location, and you must be prepared for the challenges that await."


    william, familiar with the harsh climate of snowpeak mountain, was intrigued. "what do you mean?" he asked.


    "the academy is still under construction," jinra explained, "and there are no settlements nearby. i hear students must rely on their own skills for survival, hunting for food and braving the elements."


    william''s excitement grew. this ancient version of snowpeak academy sounded like a true test of his abilities. he was eager to experience this primitive, untamed version of the institution he knew so well.


    the journey stretched on, the monotonous rhythm of their horses'' hooves lulling william into a meditative state. with his magic mind spell enhancing his focus, he found a deep tranquility within himself, his mind expanding, his mana reserves replenishing.


    he missed the thrill of battle, the surge of leveling up after defeating a powerful foe, but he knew that patience and preparation were essential for the challenges ahead.


    just as william was contemplating the need for some monster-slaying action, a band of kobolds emerged from the thick underbrush, their beady eyes glinting with malice.


    "i''ll conceal my power for now," jinra said, a mischievous twinkle in his eye. "this is a good opportunity for you to gain some experience. but if things get hairy, i''ll step in."


    william grinned, his pulse quickening. he couldn''t resist the chance to test his skills against these primitive creatures. travel in this era was far more perilous than in his own time, where roads were well-maintained and patrolled. here, danger lurked around every bend.


    he leaped from his horse, drawing his steel sword. the demonic blade remained wrapped, a secret he wasn''t ready to reveal to jinra. the kobolds brandished crude weapons, their guttural battle cries echoing through the forest. william, unfazed by their attempts at intimidation, activated his spells.


    "iron skin! enhanced strength! swiftfoot!"


    his body surged with power, his muscles coiling beneath his skin, his senses sharpening.


    the kobolds, sensing the sudden surge of power emanating from william, hesitated. fear flickered in their beady eyes, but it was too late to flee. they were committed to the attack.


    william, his movements a blur, became a whirlwind of steel and fury. he weaved through their clumsy attacks, his sword finding its mark with deadly precision.


    three kobolds fell, their crude weapons clattering to the ground, their lifeblood staining the snow crimson.


    the remaining kobold, armed with a bow, loosed a desperate arrow. william, his reflexes honed by countless hours of training, deflected it with ease. he closed the distance in a blink, his sword rising and falling in a swift arc.


    the kobold''s cry was cut short, its lifeless body slumping against a snow-laden tree.


    [+800 exp]


    [+800 exp]


    [+800 exp]


    [+800 exp]


    the accumulated experience points brought william closer to his next level, a satisfying reward for his efforts.


    "impressive moves," jinra commented, watching as william cleaned his blade. "our training has clearly paid off."


    their journey continued, the road ahead fraught with peril. goblins, wolves, and even massive bears emerged from the shadows, their hunger for blood evident. william faced each encounter with a mix of skill and ferocity, his sword a blur of motion, his spells amplifying his strength and agility. he suffered a few wounds, including a deep gash from a bear''s claws, but he refused jinra''s offer of healing potions.


    "i want to test my natural healing abilities," he explained, flexing his arm gingerly. sear?h the n?velfire(.)net website on google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "as you wish," jinra replied, a hint of pride in his voice. "but allow me to clean that wound, at least."


    they made camp beside a crystalline stream, the setting sun casting long shadows across the snow-covered landscape. jinra carefully cleansed the wound, the cool water and the sting of alcohol a stark contrast to the warmth of the campfire. william winced, but the pain was manageable. his body, honed by rigorous training, was resilient, his recovery swift.


    as the sun dipped below the horizon, william''s time in the past came to an end. he vanished from jinra''s side, reappearing in his dormitory room at snowpeak academy. the transition was seamless, the flow of time frozen in both realities, his secret ability leaving no trace.


    the academy was unusually quiet. classes had resumed, but the recent tragedy and the looming threat of war had cast a pall over the students'' enthusiasm. many longed for the end of the term, eager to return home and seek solace with their families.


    william, however, remained focused on his training. he understood that in these uncertain times, strength was their greatest defense. he sought refuge in the library, its towering shelves and countless volumes a welcome distraction from the somber atmosphere.


    he sought new spells to master, his ambition pushing him towards more advanced magic. while his current repertoire of body-enhancing spells served him well, he yearned for greater power, for the edge that would ensure his survival in the battles to come.


    the librarian, a bespectacled man with a perpetually worried expression, approached william with a hesitant apology.


    "i...i apologize for doubting your ability to master the magic mind spell," he stammered, his cheeks flushing. "i never imagined...well, you''re quite the prodigy."


    william smiled, his earlier annoyance forgotten. "it''s alright," he reassured the librarian. "you were just looking out for me. speaking of which, could you perhaps offer some assistance? i''m looking for some b-rank body enhancement spells." stay tuned for updates on empire


    the librarian, eager to make amends, readily agreed. "of course, william! i know just the tomes you need. follow me."


    he led william through the labyrinthine shelves, pointing out several promising volumes. other students, witnessing this preferential treatment, couldn''t help but feel a pang of envy. the librarian was notoriously unhelpful, yet here he was, practically fawning over william.


    "that william," one student muttered to his companion, "he''s certainly the golden boy around here, isn''t he?"


    "indeed," the other replied with a sneer. "and to think, he''s not even a noble. just some peasant who got lucky. this academy is going to the dogs."


    william, oblivious to their jealous whispers, eagerly collected the recommended tomes, his mind already buzzing with the possibilities of his enhanced magical arsenal.


    as the librarian guided william through the labyrinthine shelves, his eyes were drawn to a secluded section, cordoned off by a velvet rope and a sign that declared, "restricted access: authorized personnel only."


    "what kind of books are in there?" william asked, curiosity piqued.


    the librarian followed william''s gaze, a nervous chuckle escaping his lips. "ah, that''s where we keep the...more sensitive materials," he explained, his voice dropping to a conspiratorial whisper. "tomes that wouldn''t be suitable for the average student. quite a bit of it is related to...demons. nothing you need to worry about, of course."


    william''s interest intensified. he had to get into that restricted section. he pressed the librarian for more information, learning that access required becoming a certified researcher of ancient civilizations.


    "demons are remnants of an ancient civilization, long vanished," the librarian explained. "their ruins are scattered across the world, rare and often dangerous. becoming a researcher is a lengthy process, requiring years of study, rigorous examinations, and proven expertise. even with headmaster tholfnir''s favor, you''d still have to follow the standard procedures."


    despite the daunting requirements, a new ambition took root within william. he would become a researcher, unlock the secrets of that restricted section, and delve into the mysteries of the demonic civilization. he would uncover the truth about his sword, his heritage, and the destiny that seemed to be intertwined with these ancient powers.

 Chapter 72 Corruption, Again?

    the librarian, eager to assist, gathered a selection of tomes he deemed suitable for william''s needs."i understand your focus is on body enhancement," he said, his eyes twinkling behind his spectacles. "these should provide some significant boosts to your abilities."


    the first tome detailed a b-rank spell called raging torrent, which promised to amplify william''s strength to extraordinary levels. what intrigued william most was the spell''s potential for modification and enhancement.


    "once you reach b-rank and above," the librarian explained, "you can customize and refine your spells, creating unique variations tailored to your specific needs. think of them as the foundation for your magical repertoire."


    lower-ranked spells lacked this adaptability. this, william realized, was why mages were truly recognized for their mastery of b-rank and higher magic. those were the spells that defined their abilities and set them apart.


    william collected tomes for enhancing his strength, agility, and stamina, each a significant upgrade from his current spells. but he also sought to expand his repertoire, venturing beyond his comfort zone. he wanted to explore different elements and magical disciplines.


    just because his focus was on physical enhancement didn''t mean he couldn''t branch out and become a more versatile mage. with magic mind amplifying his learning capabilities, the possibilities seemed endless.


    the librarian, whom william now knew as roland, offered some sage advice.


    "since you''re venturing outside your area of expertise," roland suggested, "it''s wise to start with elements that align with your environment. here, in this frozen mountaintop, ice magic would be a natural choice."


    the logic was sound. ice magic thrived in frigid environments, just as fire magic flourished in warmer climates. it was common for mages to travel the world, seeking out locations that complemented their chosen disciplines.


    "thank you, roland," william said, his gratitude evident. "i''ll definitely explore some ice magic."


    roland smiled. "of course, william. feel free to ask if you need anything else."


    he returned to his post at the main desk, his watchful gaze ensuring order within the library. william, for the first time, ventured beyond the familiar shelves of body enhancement magic, his curiosity leading him towards the section dedicated to ice spells.


    there, amidst the towering stacks, he encountered a young woman with striking white hair and captivating blue eyes. her uniform, subtly different from his own, indicated she was a senior student, perhaps in her second or third year. she glanced up as he approached, her expression a mix of curiosity and recognition.


    "you''re william, aren''t you?" she asked, her voice laced with a hint of amusement. "the famous one."


    william, caught off guard, attempted a playful response. "the one and only," he replied with a grin. "don''t tell me you''ve fallen for my charms too?"


    he instantly regretted his words. his attempt at humor fell flat, the awkwardness hanging heavy in the air.


    the girl''s expression soured. "how absurd," she scoffed, rolling her eyes. "good luck finding your spells, then," she added, her tone dismissive. "idiot."


    she turned and stalked away, leaving william standing there, mortified. he wanted to kick himself.


    ''idiot! what have i done?'' he thought, his cheeks burning with embarrassment. ''of all the things to say to such a beautiful girl...''


    fortunately, the awkward encounter was quickly forgotten as william immersed himself in the pursuit of knowledge and power. he scanned the shelves of ice magic, his eyes drawn to spells that would complement his fighting style.


    he envisioned himself a master of both physical and magical combat, his enhanced strength and agility augmented by spells that could immobilize or hinder his opponents.


    ''imagine trapping an enemy in ice,'' he mused, ''then closing in for a decisive strike.'' the possibilities excited him.


    he selected a b-rank spell called ice tomb, which promised to encase an opponent''s legs in a solid block of ice, effectively immobilizing them. he also chose an a-rank spell, part of a two-part set, that imbued his weapon with icy power.


    the second part of the set, which conjured a formidable ice armor, would have to wait. mastering even one a-rank spell was a daunting challenge, and he didn''t want to overextend himself.


    with his chosen tomes in hand, william retreated to a quiet corner of the library, eager to delve into the intricacies of ice magic.


    the manuals were proving to be a fascinating challenge, their intricate runes and complex incantations demanding his full attention. as william sat immersed in his studies, a group of students approached, their presence disrupting his concentration. he recognized them as second-years, their uniforms bearing the markings of their advanced standing.


    "excuse me, william?" one of them began, a tentative smile on his face. "would you mind if we joined you for a moment?"


    william closed his tome, his curiosity piqued. "certainly," he replied, gesturing towards the empty seats across from him.


    the three students settled into the chairs, their expressions a mix of eagerness and apprehension.


    "we''re registered adventurers with the guild," the first student explained, "and we''re currently undertaking a mission that requires an additional member. we were hoping you might be interested in joining us."


    william was taken aback. while he knew it was common for second and third-year students to participate in guild missions, he was still a first-year, a novice in the world of magic.


    "may i ask why you''ve approached me?" he inquired, his brow furrowed. "wouldn''t a student from your own year, or perhaps a more experienced mage, be a better fit?"


    the students exchanged glances, a hint of admiration flickering in their eyes.


    "we know you might not enjoy discussing it," the first student began, "but you were the sole survivor of that tragic expedition to the elven ruins. word of your...resourcefulness and talent has spread throughout the academy. we believe you''d be an invaluable asset to our team."


    william, though flattered by their assessment, remained cautious. he sensed there was more to their request than met the eye. but the allure of adventure, the chance to test his skills in a real-world scenario, was difficult to resist.


    intrigued, william leaned in, eager to hear more.


    "we believe it has something to do with demons," the student whispered, his voice apprehensive. "there''s a village nearby that''s been overrun by...well, corruption. we need to investigate and, if necessary, eliminate the threat." sear?h the n?vel_fire.¦Çet website on google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "demons?" william echoed, his mind flashing back to the obsidian blade tucked away in his pack and the serpent''s cryptic words about his own demonic lineage.


    "yes," the student confirmed, "though it''s more accurate to say the corruption is caused by demonic energy. that doesn''t necessarily mean there are actual demons involved. they''re practically extinct, after all. but this village is suffering, and we need to help."


    stay tuned with empire


    the students explained that the village was plagued by a dark force, its inhabitants succumbing to a sinister influence, their livestock withering, their crops failing. it was a chilling echo of the events that had unfolded in willow creek.


    william, remembering the villagers who had perished, felt a surge of determination. he wouldn''t stand idly by while others suffered the same fate.


    "i''ll join you," he declared, his voice firm. "but i need to speak with headmaster tholfnir first, to ensure he approves."


    "of course," the student replied. "we understand. we plan to depart tomorrow, so you have time to speak with him today."


    with their agreement secured, the students departed, leaving william alone with his thoughts. he gathered the spell books he had selected, checked them out with roland, and headed towards tholfnir''s office. he needed to convince the headmaster to allow him to join this mission.

 Chapter 73 Teach me Bro

    william headed straight to tholfnir''s office, his heart pounding with a mix of anticipation and apprehension."what?" tholfnir exclaimed, his brow furrowed in concern. "you want to go on this mission? absolutely not. we''ve already lost too many students on that expedition."


    william had expected resistance, but he wouldn''t be deterred. "please, headmaster," he pleaded. "i believe it would be an invaluable learning experience. and besides," he added, holding up his hand, "i have this protective ring professor sebastian gave me."


    tholfnir examined the ring, his expression thoughtful. "indeed," he conceded, "this ring possesses a powerful barrier. but even so, don''t you think this is too dangerous? you''ve only just returned from those ruins..."


    william understood tholfnir''s reluctance to risk another student''s life, but he pressed his case. "just because tragedy struck during the expedition doesn''t mean it will happen again. the war could erupt at any moment, and i need practical experience to be prepared. don''t you agree?"


    tholfnir sighed, his shoulders slumping slightly. "you make a valid point, william," he admitted. "but i still believe it''s unwise for you to go now. you have classes to attend, studies to pursue. perhaps in a few months? what do you think?"


    despite his best efforts, william couldn''t sway tholfnir. the headmaster, though fond of william, remained firm in his decision.


    "i understand," william said, masking his disappointment. "it''s no problem. i''m sure they''ll find someone else for the mission."


    "indeed," tholfnir agreed. "but william, i have another proposition for you. what do you think about assisting the kingdom''s army?"


    william''s eyebrows shot up. "you won''t let me go on a simple mission, but you''re suggesting i join the war effort?"


    tholfnir chuckled. "it''s not quite like that, lad. in six months, i plan to send a few students to various military camps to provide training and magical instruction to the soldiers. many new recruits are joining the ranks, and they need to be prepared for the upcoming conflict."


    "so, i''d be like a... contracted instructor?" william clarified.


    "something like that," tholfnir confirmed. "the compensation would be generous, both financially and in terms of experience. you''d also have the opportunity to make valuable connections within the military. and you know, when things get tough, having allies in the army can be a lifesaver."


    the offer was tempting. while disappointed about the mission, william recognized the value of military training and the chance to contribute to the kingdom''s defense.


    "i''m interested," he said, "but let''s revisit this in six months. things might change."


    "of course," tholfnir agreed. "no pressure."


    as william left the headmaster''s office, he encountered altair, who was heading towards the gymnasium for some combat practice.


    "hey, william," altair greeted him. "mind helping me with some sparring? i want to test out some new spells i learned for my gauntlets." he clasped his hands together, a hopeful expression on his face. "pretty please?"


    with no pressing engagements, william readily agreed. they headed towards the gymnasium, their footsteps echoing in the quiet hallways. the prospect of a friendly duel, a chance to hone his skills and test his new magic, filled william with a sense of anticipation. he was eager to see how his abilities measured up against altair''s enhanced gauntlets.


    when william and altair arrived at the gymnasium, they saw students diligently practicing their spells, casting them on the training dummies. everyone appeared focused. the recent attack on the ruins had motivated them to seek more power, fearful that they might face a similar fate in the future. the looming war also proved to be a powerful motivator.


    altair led the way to a closed room he had reserved for their training. "there are a few locked rooms like this one," he explained. "we can use them for a few hours daily. after that, we need to leave so other students can use them."


    these rooms were used for more sensitive training and research. not every student utilized them, but some did. william hadn''t known about these rooms inside the gymnasium, and he appreciated this new information. explore new worlds at empire


    "that''s good to know," william said, "but what about your training? what can i do to help you, exactly?"


    altair smiled. "you''re the strongest physical combatant i''ve met, so i believe you have what it takes to fight against me one-on-one. it''s just for me to gauge my level."


    william knew altair was skilled, but could he compete against him? after absorbing the demonic energy and learning new spells, william felt their levels were quite different.


    "sure, why not?" william agreed. in the end, he decided to help his friend.


    it would be a good way for altair to understand his level compared to his peers. when fighting powerful enemies from outside the academy, it was hard for william to get a good grasp of his own power level, so it would be a good thing for william too. they had nothing to lose in that sparring match.


    altair utilized his signature spell, creating two magical gauntlets that covered his hands, increasing the power behind his attacks. "while you use weapons like swords, i use these gauntlets. they''re pretty effective," altair said.


    william liked the spell altair used. it was different from what he was used to, and altair had clearly worked hard to master it. but william didn''t move or grab his sword. he just stood there, puzzling altair.


    "why aren''t you getting your weapon ready? do you think you can win against me without your weapons?" altair asked. sea??h th§× nov§×lf~ire.net website on google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    that was exactly what william thought. he strongly believed that his power was on a different level compared to the other first-year students. he was simply too strong for them.


    altair, feeling a little disrespected by his friend, dashed toward william, aiming a punch at him.


    william, with his high stats, could easily see altair''s movements. they weren''t fast enough for him. he simply dodged to the side and even slapped the back of his friend''s head, teasing him.


    "you''ll have to be faster than that to get me, bro," william said.


    altair turned around and lunged toward william once again. this time, he activated another spell, one that enhanced his attributes, similar to the ones william used. with it, he was much faster than before, and he managed to land a punch on william, who blocked it using both hands. william slid back with the impact, but the damage wasn''t significant. his natural defenses were strong.


    "how are you undamaged?" altair asked, shock evident on his face. "are you made of steel?"


    "haha, no. i just train my body to handle these things. you know, that''s my focus, so of course i have a strong body," william said.


    altair, who had believed he was close in terms of power to his friend, now saw that the reality was the complete opposite. he had a lot to improve to get close to william. did that make him sad? no. altair was glad that he had a powerful friend who could help him.


    "teach me how you do it," altair pleaded.


    william looked at him and smiled. "of course."


    with the knowledge he had gained from jinra, william was confident that he had a lot to teach altair. that way, he could help his friend while also practicing for when he would have to teach the kingdom''s army in a few months.


    ---


    inside a secret room within the academy, tholfnir conversed with a cloaked figure.


    "let the boy go on this mission," the cloaked figure commanded.


    tholfnir was confused. "why? it''s dangerous."


    "do as we command."


    "understood," tholfnir replied, saluting the cloaked figure as it vanished.

 Chapter 74 Shit

    william taught altair a few things¡ªtips he had learned from jinra and some from gorn. altair was a good student. he listened carefully to what william had to say and tried his best to do as he was told. that was the best kind of person to teach. william liked it, and he was starting to believe that teaching the kingdom''s army, like tholfnir had asked him to, wouldn''t be that hard.their training session lasted for hours. the fights between the two were so intense that the students outside heard the impacts of their blows, some even wondering what was going on.


    "are they fighting gigantic gorillas or something?" one student wondered aloud.


    "nah, i think that''s just william. he''s a prodig¡ª"


    "shut up! stop praising him; he won''t take you as his disciple or befriend you."


    william and altair left and went to their dorm rooms. they lived in the same area, after all.


    "see you tomorrow, william," altair said as he waved. "great training today."


    "see ya!"


    the first thing william needed after a training session like that was a shower and a meal with plenty of protein to help his muscles recover. the next morning, however, started quite differently for him. he woke up to tholfnir knocking on his door. no one in the dorm could believe their eyes when they saw tholfnir there. it was rare for him to visit a student like that.


    william, too, was surprised. he almost freaked out when he saw tholfnir through the magical peephole.


    "headmaster tholfnir," he said, "what brings you to my room this early?" sear?h the n??elfir§×.net website on google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "can i come in?" tholfnir asked.


    the question wasn''t necessary, as tholfnir was the head of the academy, but william appreciated that he had the decency to ask.


    "of course. come in."


    tholfnir sat on the couch with william.


    "i know that yesterday i said no to that mission, but i''ve changed my mind. you can go with them," tholfnir said.


    william was surprised. "what? are you sure?"


    "yes, i am. you were right about needing some real-world practice, and honestly, you''re quite strong compared to your first-year peers."


    although he appreciated the opportunity, william still couldn''t understand tholfnir''s sudden change of heart. the headmaster wasn''t usually indecisive. but despite his lingering questions, william decided to let it go and simply enjoy the chance to participate in the mission with the other students.


    "well, thank you very much for this," william said, his smile beaming. "i''ll do my best to stay out of danger. and i have this, remember?" william showed the enchanted ring professor sebastian had given him.


    "right," tholfnir acknowledged. "i''ll take my leave, then. you cannot be gone for longer than 15 days before i send someone to retrieve you." he was just being cautious in case william disappeared.


    "no problem, headmaster."


    after that, tholfnir left, and william started to pack some things for the journey. he then met the other students who were waiting for his answer in the academy''s courtyard.


    "so, did they let you go with us?" the leader of the group asked when he saw william.


    "yes, they did," william confirmed. "are we going by horse?"


    the students exchanged glances and smiled. "no, of course not. we have flying mounts."


    william then realized the students were all nobles. money was no object for them, so obtaining flying mounts was easy. the good news was that the students had acquired a flying mount for william too, free of charge, which was great.


    they didn''t have many things to bring along for the mission, so flying mounts were ideal. it wasn''t as if they had a lot of luggage to carry in a carriage, for example.


    before leaving for the mission, william spoke with altair, since the two were training together.


    "another mission already? damn, you don''t stop, do you?" altair said, a little worried.


    "i''ll rest after this one," william reassured him. "don''t do anything stupid while i''m away. i won''t be here to save your ass."


    "oh, shut up. i can take care of myself, bro," altair said, playfully pushing william away.


    after their brief conversation, william left and joined the other students, who already had their griffins ready at the academy''s main gate. william mounted his griffin and flew off, following the other students who knew their destination.


    "we didn''t introduce ourselves yet," one student yelled from their griffin. "i am gilbert, this is my friend yang, and that''s bianca." discover exclusive content at empire


    the three students were all from the second year. william didn''t have much contact with students outside of the first year, so this was his first interaction with them.


    "it''s a pleasure to meet all of you," he said.


    "we all know your name, so there''s that. anyway, the village isn''t that far. with our griffins, i think we can get there in one day."


    one day was a short trip. william had traveled very far to get to the academy, so for him, one day was nothing. not only that, but he was flying this time! the view from atop the griffin was gorgeous. it wasn''t something he had the chance to see every day.


    the hours flew by, and when night came, they decided to make a quick stop. the spot they found for camping was on top of a mountain¡ªone of the perks of having a griffin.


    "this is the perfect spot to camp," bianca said. "no monsters to bother us, and a beautiful view."


    "are you experienced with camping?" william asked her.


    "sort of. my father loved hunting with his friends, so i went with them a few times," she said.


    hunting was a popular activity among nobles. but while gorn and the other hunters of willow creek hunted to eat and provide food for their families, the nobles usually hunted for fun. there was nothing wrong with that. it was just a different perspective on the same activity.


    they only had two tents, meaning william would have to share with one of the students. he expected to sleep with either gwen or yang, as bianca would certainly be scared of sharing a tent with a man she didn''t know. but that wasn''t the case. bianca actually wanted to share the tent with william, which caught him off guard.


    he didn''t say anything at the time, though. they prepared something to eat using the bonfire, and william only spoke with her about it once they were inside the tent.


    "why did you choose to sleep with me? i mean, aren''t they your friends?"


    bianca smiled. "i just think you are a promising mage and a pretty cool person. besides, we are sharing a tent, not sleeping together. there''s a difference, alright?"


    "yeah, i know," william said, preparing his place to sleep. "and thanks for the compliments."


    "you''re welcome."


    the two smiled at each other. the good news was that the tent was a decent size, so they weren''t too close. both of them had their privacy for the night. william preferred that. he didn''t know bianca that well yet, so it was nice to have some space.


    because of the journey, he slept soundly and woke up the next day feeling refreshed. nothing had happened during the night, which was good. but then, he realized something was off. he looked around and saw that no one else was there. the students were gone, as were the griffins. the only things he had were the tent and the campfire that had extinguished during the night.


    "shit!"

 Chapter 75 Lost, and Urgent Matter

    all william had was his steel sword, his demonic sword, and the clothes on his back. his backpack with his supplies was gone. not only that, but the magical tomes he had borrowed from the school''s library were gone too."damn it!"


    he had brought the tomes to study during his time away from the school, as he didn''t want to lose any practice time. what would he say to tholfnir when he got back? that he had lost the precious tomes? and that was assuming he even made it back... discover stories at empire


    william walked a few steps and looked around. he was on the peak of a mountain. it was very tall, and freezing cold. the mountain had no discernible path leading up to it. the only way william had managed to get there was by griffin.


    this meant it was essentially impossible for him to descend. what would he do in this situation?


    the first thing william did was try to find a way down. he looked everywhere, but it was impossible. even with his enhanced attributes, jumping from that location wasn''t a good idea.


    the demonic sword, wrapped in cloth and strapped to his back, woke up. "what happened, kid? did someone trick you?"


    william already had too many problems, and having that voice inside his head wasn''t helping. "yes, someone did. why? are you here to make fun of me?" william snapped.


    "of course not," the demonic sword replied, its hoarse voice shivering. "i just want to help you. if you die in this place without food, water, or from the cold, what will happen to me?" the demonic sword knew that william was the chosen one, so protecting him was exactly what it wanted to do.


    in that situation, william wanted to understand why those students had done this to him. was it envy? or was there something else behind it?


    there were so many questions that william didn''t have answers to, and his mind was a complete mess. the students seemed to be very sure that william wouldn''t return to the magic academy. the main reason for this was the fact that he was completely lost. he didn''t even know if they had actually gone towards the location where the mission was supposed to be.


    with the privileged view from above, william looked around and noticed only frozen forests and other mountains. he couldn''t see a house or any sign of civilization. where the hell was he?


    "what should i do first?" william asked.


    "first of all, explain to me what happened."


    william told the demonic sword about the students who had invited him on the mission, and how they had gone to that mountain to camp for the night. the demonic sword laughed.


    "this is strange. did they show you the scroll with the details of the mission? you know it works just like the guild, where someone has to make a request."


    "no, they didn''t."


    "so how do you know they are actually students?"


    "i mean, how would they enter the academy without anyone noticing them?"


    william was still young and naive, and the demonic sword had to explain things to him. "look, there are skilled mages who specialize in illusion magic and can disguise themselves. what if they kidnapped real students and assumed their appearances to lure you?" the demonic sword suggested.


    that possibility seemed more likely now that william thought about it, but what for? why would they kidnap a student like him? a first-year who was still weak compared to the more advanced students at the school?


    the demonic sword didn''t know the answer either. "did tholfnir say anything to you when you left? considering he was the one who allowed you to go."


    william tried to recall the conversation he had with tholfnir. "uh, yes. he said that if i don''t get back in 15 days, he would come after me."


    "this is not good, kid," the demonic sword said.


    william didn''t answer. he stood there, thinking about what it could mean. apparently, the sword already had a guess, but william wanted to figure it out for himself.


    "tholfnir said he would come after me, meaning he would leave the school... leaving the school?"


    things were starting to add up and make more sense to him. tholfnir was one of the strongest mages in the kingdom, if not the strongest. no one would dare attack the academy with him there, but what if he left to search for his prodigy student? if there was anyone who could make tholfnir leave the school unattended, it was william.


    "damn it!" william cursed, punching a nearby tree. "they want to lure tholfnir out to do something to the school. is it the kingdom that wants to go to war with us? or maybe it''s someone else?"


    this wasn''t good. william now had to find a way back to the magic academy in less than 15 days. s~ea??h the novelfire.net* website on google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    now that he understood the situation, william didn''t want to waste any time. he searched for a way down the mountain once again, and when he couldn''t find one, it was time to take a risk.


    "enhanced strength! swiftfoot! iron skin!"


    he cast all the body-enhancing magic he had, and then began climbing down the mountain. it was steep, tall, and dangerous. he had to jump a few times, and the impact on his body was devastating. at one point, he hit his left arm on a tree while descending, and the impact was so strong that it broke.


    "agggh, fuck!" william yelled in pain. his arm bent to the side, making it look grotesque. it was a severe injury, but one that could heal, and that was good enough for william.


    it took him around six hours to reach the base of the mountain, not because he was slow, but because the mountain was so high. and he couldn''t jump from just anywhere. william had to think carefully before each move, making sure he wouldn''t fall to his death.


    the first problem, descending the mountain, was solved. but what now? he had seen the surrounding area from the peak, and there was nothing there. no villages, no cities, nothing. william found himself in a snowy forest, surrounded by vegetation and animals. snowflakes fell from the sky, landing on his hair and almost changing its color.


    "kid, even if you don''t make it back to the academy in time, focus on surviving," the demonic sword advised. "if you can survive, then everything will be fine."


    william sighed. he wanted to get back in time to avoid any possible danger, but the demonic sword was right. the priority should be surviving. that was what william needed to do.


    with that thought in mind, william moved into the forest, looking for a source of water. he was thirsty after descending the mountain.


    his left arm was useless at that point, so if anything attacked him, the fight would be fierce and difficult. thankfully, because of the harsh winter, many animals and magical beasts were in caves and shelters, avoiding the weather.


    while that was good for them, it was tough for william, who didn''t have any shelter...


    after walking for a while, he did find a source of water, a river flowing through the forest. but with it, came danger.

 Chapter 76 Becoming a Beast Tamer?

    william slowly walked toward the river. he needed water to drink, and a place to think about what to do next. but things didn''t always go his way. he crouched near the water and drank. at first, nothing happened, and he felt safe, but then, a hand burst from the water and grabbed his arm."what the fuck?"


    startled by the sudden appearance of the hand, william used all his strength to break free. the hand had a powerful grip, and his forearm hurt, but william didn''t give up. he drew his sword with his other hand and slashed at the mysterious hand. it worked.


    the hand let go, and william was finally free. but what was that hand? he couldn''t understand what had tried to pull him into the water.


    "do you know what monster that could be?" william asked the demonic sword.


    "no idea, but it can''t be good. stay away from the water for now," the sword advised.


    "you don''t need to tell me that."


    william wasn''t stupid, so he backed away and stayed far from the river.


    but that encounter gave him some clues about his location. william knew that hands like that pulling people into the river weren''t common, at least not in areas frequented by humans. if it were common, he would have heard rumors about it, but he never had.


    therefore, the only explanation was that he was in an unexplored area, far from civilization. that made the most sense to him. william walked through the forest once again, finding a tall tree to climb to get a better view of the area.


    he did so with ease, thanks to his enhanced physical abilities, and reached the top quickly. he searched the surrounding area, but there was nothing but trees, rivers, and mountains. that wasn''t good.


    "we have a few options to get out of here," the demonic sword said, its voice a low growl that resonated within william''s mind. "we can try to find someone, which is unlikely, or we can tame a flying beast and leave this place."


    william pondered the options, the weight of their predicament settling upon him. finding someone in this desolate wasteland was a long shot.


    he had surveyed the area multiple times, his senses amplified by his magic, and there was no sign of civilization, no wisp of smoke, no distant call of human activity. taming a flying beast seemed like their only viable option, but doubts gnawed at him.


    "how can we even find a beast that''s not too powerful to tame?" he mused aloud, his voice barely a whisper in the vast emptiness. "and even if we do, i''m not a beast tamer. i wouldn''t know where to begin."


    the demonic sword, its obsidian blade humming with a faint energy, offered a solution. "i can help you tame a beast, but it won''t be permanent."


    "how?" william asked, a flicker of hope igniting within him.


    "you can use the demonic energy stored within your body," the sword explained. "it will allow you to temporarily dominate the beast, turning it into your demonic mount. but it won''t last forever. your reserves of demonic energy are...limited."


    "i can do that?" william exclaimed, surprised by the revelation.


    the demonic sword let out a dry, rasping chuckle. "you can do many things, my friend. you just haven''t discovered them all yet."


    with a plan in place, william turned his attention to the immediate challenges. survival was paramount.


    he wouldn''t be able to tame a flying beast if he succumbed to the harsh realities of this desolate land. shelter, fire, and food were his priorities. water, thankfully, was readily available from the nearby river, though the chilling memory of the hand made him wary of approaching its banks.


    he ventured into the forest, his senses alert, searching for a suitable shelter. a cave, nestled within the base of a rocky outcrop, soon presented itself. dark, damp, and undeniably creepy, it was far from ideal, but it would suffice.


    sword drawn, william cautiously entered, prepared to fight for his sanctuary. he wasn''t disappointed. a grotesque creature, a quadrupedal zombie with a grotesquely twisted neck, lunged from the shadows, its decaying limbs reaching for him. william, his heart pounding, activated his system''s analysis function.


    [zombie]


    [estimated level: 9]


    a wave of relief washed over him. the creature was weak, its level far below his own. he sidestepped the clumsy attack, his sword flashing through the air, severing the zombie''s head with a sickening crunch. he waited, wary of any further movement, but the creature remained still.


    he pressed deeper into the cave, encountering and dispatching several more zombies. but a nagging question lingered in his mind.


    "why are there zombies here?" he muttered to himself, his voice echoing in the cavernous space. "and that hand... these aren''t the typical creatures one would find in a normal forest."


    a sense of unease settled over him. this place was different, touched by a darkness that went beyond the natural dangers of the wilderness.


    he shared his concerns with the demonic sword, hoping for an explanation.


    "this is...unusual," the sword admitted, its voice a low growl. "the presence of undead creatures, especially in such numbers, suggests a powerful necromantic influence. perhaps a lich, or a skilled necromancer, resides nearby." explore stories at empire


    "a lich or a necromancer?" william echoed, his brow furrowing. "aren''t those incredibly powerful?"


    "indeed," the sword confirmed. "you''ll need to be cautious. now, if you''ll excuse me, i must return to my slumber to conserve energy for our taming endeavor. do not disturb me unless absolutely necessary."


    with that, the sword fell silent, its consciousness receding into the depths of the obsidian blade. william understood. taming a beast for him would require a significant expenditure of the sword''s power. he would have to face the challenges of this desolate land alone, at least for now.


    he cleared the cave of the remaining zombie debris, tossing the decaying limbs outside, reclaiming the space as his own. he gathered fallen branches and dry moss, building a small fire near the cave entrance. the flickering flames offered a welcome warmth against the biting cold, casting dancing shadows on the cave walls.


    as night fell, the weather took a turn for the worse. snow piled up outside, the wind howling through the trees.


    "a snowstorm," william muttered, watching the swirling flakes through the cave entrance.


    he retreated deeper into the cave, seeking shelter from the blizzard. hunger gnawed at his stomach, but venturing out in this weather was out of the question. he would have to endure, to wait for the storm to pass and hope for better conditions come morning. he curled up near the fire, its warmth a small comfort in the face of the unforgiving wilderness.


    but something happened during the night.


    william''s eyes snapped open, his senses alert. a guttural growl, low and menacing, echoed through the cave. he scrambled to his feet, his hand instinctively reaching for his sword. he moved with a practiced silence, slipping behind a large boulder that offered a sliver of concealment. he peered around the edge, his heart pounding in his chest.


    two figures, cloaked in dark robes, stood near the remnants of his campfire. their faces were obscured by deep hoods, their voices hushed whispers that barely carried in the wind.


    "do you think he''s still here?" the man''s voice rasped, a chilling sound that sent shivers down william''s spine.


    "judging by the state of this...campsite," the woman replied, her voice equally unsettling, "i doubt it. perhaps he heard us approaching and fled."


    "perhaps," the man conceded. "we''ll send out scouts in the morning. if he''s still in the area, we''ll find him."


    with a final, chilling glance around the cave, they vanished into the swirling snow, their presence leaving a lingering sense of dread. william remained hidden, his body tense, his mind racing. who were these people? what were they searching for? and why did they seek him? sear?h the n?velfire(.)net website on google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.

 Chapter 77 Necromancers in the Area

    william''s mind raced. he had no idea who those figures were or why they sought him, but their threat was clear. they were sending scouts to hunt him down. he considered his options, his heart pounding against his ribs like a trapped bird.''what kind of scouts?'' he wondered, his gaze sweeping the desolate landscape. the demonic sword''s words echoed in his mind. ''necromancers...''


    he recalled the grotesque forms of the zombies he had slain, their unnatural movements, their vacant eyes. a chilling realization dawned on him.


    ''could the zombies be their scouts?'' he thought, a shiver running down his spine. ''they were the only monsters i faced, and i didn''t see anyone else...''


    the best explanation he could find was that the scouts were the zombies, or the hand that had pulled him into the water, but zombies were more likely. he had to avoid them and any other creatures that might come his way. but how?


    still afraid that necromancers or other monsters might appear while he slept, william took a while to fall asleep again. he woke up early in the morning, hoping to avoid any scouts the necromancers might send.


    the first thing he did was destroy everything to cover his tracks, and then he left the cave and went into the forest. his priorities were finding food, avoiding undead monsters, and finding a flying beast to tame. continue your adventure at empire


    william knew that flying beasts often lived in the mountains, and there were many mountains around him.


    "i should get some food first, and then climb the mountains again," he murmured.


    the best source of food william could think of was fish. without a bow, and with the chance of encountering scouts in the forest, fishing seemed to be the safest option. but the hand that had pulled him into the water still worried him, so william decided to fish somewhere else.


    he followed the river, always looking around, trying to spot monsters before they got to him. eventually, he found a waterfall, where he saw fish jumping out of the water. it was the perfect spot to catch them without a fishing rod. all he had to do was wait until they jumped and grab them with his hand.


    william, with his enhanced strength and agility, made quick work of the fish. he expertly gutted and cleaned it, the sharp scales glinting in the morning light.


    the fish, though not the most appetizing meal, would sustain him. he grimaced as he tucked the slippery carcass into his pockets, the fishy odor clinging to his fingers. it was a small price to pay for survival.


    he would wash his clothes later, once he found a suitable water source. for now, food was his priority.


    william surveyed the landscape, his gaze sweeping across the jagged peaks and snow-dusted slopes. each mountain held the promise of a hidden lair, a potential sanctuary for a flying beast. he considered his options, his mind sharp despite the hunger gnawing at his stomach.


    ''trees for shade, a cave for shelter...'' he narrowed his eyes, focusing on a mountain that seemed to fit the criteria. its lower slopes were cloaked in a thick forest, while its upper reaches were a jagged expanse of rock and ice, riddled with potential caves.


    with a determined glint in his eyes, william set off, his footsteps crunching in the fresh snow. the climb was arduous, the wind whipping at his exposed skin, the cold seeping into his bones. but he pressed on.


    the aftermath of the snowstorm transformed the mountain into a treacherous labyrinth of ice and snow. each step was a battle against the elements, the biting wind stealing his breath, the treacherous footing threatening to send him tumbling into the abyss.


    even with his enhanced abilities, william felt his strength waning, his body shivering with exhaustion and hunger. he paused midway up the slope, leaning against a sturdy pine for support, his lungs burning, his muscles screaming for respite.


    from his vantage point, he spotted movement at the base of the mountain. a horde of undead creatures ¨C zombies, skeletons, and grotesque wolf-like figures ¨C scoured the area, their movements purposeful, their forms a chilling reminder of the necromancer''s presence.


    william''s heart pounded. ''they know i''m here,'' he realized, a wave of fear washing over him. ''but they can''t reach me'', he reassured himself, clinging to a sliver of hope. sea??h th§× n??elfir§×.net website on google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    the terrain was treacherous, the climb demanding even for someone with his enhanced abilities.


    those decaying creatures wouldn''t stand a chance. he was safe, for now. but the respite was temporary. he needed to reach the summit, find the flying beast, and escape this cursed land before the necromancers found a way to reach him.


    he stumbled towards the summit, his legs burning, his lungs aching. the world narrowed to a blur of snow and ice, his vision tunneling as exhaustion threatened to consume him. but he pushed on, driven by a desperate need to escape. finally, he crested the peak, collapsing onto the frozen ground, gasping for breath.


    he lay there for a moment, his chest heaving, his body trembling with fatigue. he needed food, rest, a moment to gather his strength. his gaze swept across the summit, taking in the jagged peaks and the vast expanse of snow-covered wilderness.


    a pristine lake, its surface shimmering like a sapphire mirror, nestled amongst the rocks. ''perfect,'' he thought. ''a source of water, a potential hunting ground... this must be where the flying beast makes its home.''


    but his hopes were dashed by a distant roar, a chilling sound that echoed through the mountains. he looked up to see a horrifying sight. a griffin, its feathers matted and decayed, its eyes glowing with an eerie green light, circled overhead. and upon its back, the cloaked figure of the necromancer, their skeletal face grinning triumphantly.


    "fuck!" william cursed, scrambling to his feet. he had underestimated his pursuers.


    they had aerial capabilities, their reach extending beyond the limitations of the ground. panic surged through him, but he quickly regained his composure.


    he needed to hide, to find a place to regroup and plan his next move. his eyes fell upon a cave, its dark maw gaping open like a hungry beast. he sprinted towards it, his heart pounding, the griffin''s shadow looming over him.


    the cave''s maw yawned before him, a dark abyss promising both refuge and potential danger. william hesitated for a fleeting moment, weighing the risks. remaining exposed on the mountaintop was a death sentence, the necromancer''s undead griffin circling overhead like a predator stalking its prey. the cave, despite its unknown depths, offered a sliver of hope, a chance to regroup and evade his pursuers.


    he plunged into the darkness, his senses heightened, his sword gripped tightly in his hand. the air grew heavy, the silence pressing down on him like a physical weight. the stench of decay and damp earth filled his nostrils, and his footsteps echoed in the cavernous space.


    the tunnel opened into a vast chamber, its ceiling lost in the shadows. a subterranean lake, its surface eerily still, shimmered in the faint light filtering through a crack in the ceiling. the sight was both beautiful and unsettling, a reminder of the unnatural forces at play in this desolate land.


    and then he saw it. a small cabin, nestled against the far wall, its wooden frame warped and weathered, its windows dark and lifeless.


    ''a cabin?'' william thought, his brow furrowing in confusion. who would build a dwelling in such a remote and inhospitable place?

 Chapter 78 Mysterious Girl

    the cabin''s presence in this desolate cave was an anomaly, a puzzle piece that didn''t fit the grim landscape. william, his senses heightened, approached with caution, his footsteps barely disturbing the dust that coated the warped floorboards. he circled the cabin, peering through the grimy windows, searching for any sign of life.inside, bathed in the faint light filtering through the cracks in the walls, lay a woman. she was asleep, her red hair fanned out across a threadbare pillow, her breathing slow and even. even william''s deliberate attempts to make noise failed to rouse her.


    he studied her closely, taking in her delicate features, her unblemished skin, and the archaic style of her clothing. she seemed out of place, a figure from a bygone era. he activated his system''s analysis function, hoping for a clue to her identity, but it remained stubbornly silent.


    despite the lack of information, one thing was clear: this woman was no ordinary being. a powerful aura emanated from her, a palpable energy that pressed against william, making it difficult to breathe.


    he scanned the cabin''s interior, his gaze sweeping across the meager furnishings, searching for anything that might shed light on this enigmatic woman and her connection to this strange, desolate land.


    scattered across a dusty table, he discovered a small hoard of gold coins, their gleam catching the faint light.


    a closer inspection revealed a collection of exquisite jewelry and several artifacts that pulsed with a subtle magical energy. temptation flickered in william''s eyes, but he quickly dismissed the thought of taking them.


    he had no place to store such treasures, and the risk of waking the slumbering woman, whose power he couldn''t fathom, was too great.


    ''focus, william,'' he chided himself. ''you need to deal with the necromancers and find a way to escape.''


    he continued his search, but the cabin yielded no further clues. frustrated, he turned his attention back to the sleeping woman.


    perhaps she could offer some answers, some guidance. he gently shook her shoulder, calling her, but she remained unresponsive. he tried again, his voice louder, but she didn''t stir. it was as if she were trapped in a deep slumber, her consciousness unreachable.


    the mystery deepened. who was this woman? why was she sleeping in this remote and dangerous place? and how could he wake her? the weight of these questions settled upon him, adding to the growing sense of unease.


    the cave entrance echoed with the screech of the undead griffin, its massive wings scraping against the stone. william''s heart pounded in his chest. he had no chance against the necromancer and their monstrous mount in a direct confrontation. he had to hide.


    with a desperate glance around the cavern, his eyes fell upon the subterranean lake. it was his only option. he plunged into the icy water, the shock stealing his breath. he dove deep, the darkness closing in around him. he could hold his breath for an extended period, thanks to his enhanced stamina, but time was not on his side.


    he watched from his watery sanctuary as the necromancers entered the cabin. their surprise at finding the sleeping woman was evident.


    "what is this place?" the male necromancer exclaimed, his voice echoing in the cavern. "who is she?"


    "i don''t know," the female necromancer replied, her voice laced with greed as she scooped up a handful of gold coins. "but look at all this treasure!"


    but as her fingers closed around the coins, the woman on the bed stirred. her eyes snapped open, revealing a fiery red that matched her hair. she glared at the intruders, her voice a chilling whisper.


    "who are you?" she demanded, her tone laced with a dangerous calm. "and what are you doing in my lair?"


    the necromancers scoffed, their arrogance evident. "your lair?" the male necromancer sneered. "this is just an abandoned cabin in the middle of nowhere. but you seem to have collected some valuable trinkets. we''ll be taking those." he pointed at the gold coins. "we didn''t find who we were looking for, but this will do nicely."


    william, his lungs burning, watched the scene unfold with a mixture of awe and terror. the red-haired woman exuded an aura of power that dwarfed even the necromancers. her calm demeanor and chilling threats sent shivers down his spine.


    the female necromancer, her greed outweighing her caution, sneered. "we won''t be leaving," she spat, "and you''ll be handing over all your valuables. understood?"


    that was the final straw. the red-haired woman moved with a speed that defied expectations, her form a blur as she crossed the room. she seized the necromancer by the neck, lifting her effortlessly, and hurled her through the cabin window.


    the impact sent the necromancer sprawling, but she quickly recovered, her anger fueling her power. "that''s all you''ve got?" she taunted.


    the red-haired woman''s response was swift and devastating. she opened her mouth, unleashing a torrent of fire that engulfed the necromancer in a blazing inferno. the screams were cut short as the flames consumed her, leaving only a pile of ash in her wake.


    the male necromancer, his eyes wide with terror, scrambled towards the griffin. he knew he was no match for this woman, her power far exceeding his own. he leaped onto the griffin''s back, urging it to take flight.


    but it was too late. another blast of fire erupted from the woman''s mouth, engulfing both the necromancer and the undead griffin in a fiery embrace. their screams echoed through the cavern as they were consumed, their ashes raining down upon the lake.


    william, his body trembling, watched the carnage unfold. he was trapped, his lungs screaming for air, his escape route blocked by a woman who could incinerate him with a breath. he braced himself for the inevitable attack, but instead, her voice, amplified by an unseen force, echoed through the cavern.


    "would you please emerge from the water?" she called out, her tone surprisingly calm. "i know you''re there."


    william, his body trembling from the cold and the lingering fear, emerged from the lake. he approached the cabin cautiously, his hands raised in a gesture of surrender. experience more tales on empire s~ea??h the n??efire.¦Çet website on google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    the woman studied him with a curious gaze, her fiery eyes softening slightly. "you should warm yourself," she said, her voice surprisingly gentle. "you''re freezing. come here."


    he obeyed, his heart pounding in his chest. he couldn''t afford to anger this woman, whose power dwarfed his own. she pulled him into an unexpected embrace, her warmth enveloping him. william''s cheeks flushed, his body stiff with surprise.


    with a subtle gesture, she channeled her fire magic, drying his clothes and warming him to the core. then, her nose wrinkled slightly.


    "you have a fish in your pocket," she observed, a hint of amusement in her voice. "it''s rather pungent."


    william, embarrassed, nodded sheepishly. "yes, i know," he admitted. "i apologize. i didn''t mean to intrude. i was fleeing from those necromancers and stumbled upon your cabin by accident."


    the woman leaned closer, inhaling deeply, her action both unexpected and strangely intimate. "it''s alright," she said, her voice softening. "you have a familiar scent. i''m not angry. you may stay here for a while if you need to, but not too long. i''m quite tired." she yawned, her fiery eyes flickering with a hint of exhaustion. "i''ll be returning to my slumber now."


    before she reached the bed, william asked, "can you help me get out of here? i don''t even know where i am..."


    she stopped her movements, staying there in a thoughtful state for a few seconds before turning around to face him.


    "maybe i can help. let''s talk."

 Chapter 79 Womans Identity Revealed

    they settled onto the edge of the bed, the rough-spun blanket scratching at william''s skin. the woman, though her eyelids drooped with weariness, listened attentively as he recounted his tale. he described the mission, the betrayal, the harrowing escape, and his desperate flight through the wilderness. he confessed his ignorance about his current location and his inability to find his way back to snowpeak academy.the woman''s brow furrowed as she absorbed his story. "something doesn''t add up," she mused, her voice thoughtful. "you mentioned traveling for a day on a griffin, yes?"


    "that''s correct," william confirmed. "at least, that''s how long it felt."


    "that''s the problem," the woman explained. "to the best of my knowledge, it would take at least three months to reach this location by griffin, even with favorable winds. are you certain that''s all the time that passed?"


    william''s eyes widened in disbelief. "no, that can''t be right," he insisted. "i know i didn''t travel for that long. it was just one day."


    "perhaps you were transported using some form of teleportation device," the woman suggested, her eyes gleaming with a sharp intelligence. "such devices are not uncommon, especially among those with...nefarious intentions. you mentioned a war and a possible connection to your kidnapping? if this is indeed war-related, they wouldn''t hesitate to utilize any means necessary to achieve their goals."


    the woman''s words echoed in william''s mind, each syllable a hammer blow against his understanding of the events. he racked his brain, trying to recall any detail, any sensation that might confirm or deny her theory. but his memories were hazy, fragmented.


    "we did stop on a mountain before nightfall," he conceded, his brow furrowed in thought. "it was... secluded. we couldn''t see much in the darkness." he paused, the realization dawning on him. "they could have used a teleportation device while we slept. sent us... here."


    "precisely," the woman affirmed, her voice calm and reassuring. "and no, you wouldn''t have noticed. these devices operate silently, leaving no trace. it''s the most logical explanation." she leaned closer, her gaze intense. "and i suspect those who attacked you followed you here. the undead griffin you encountered... its recent demise suggests it belonged to one of your kidnappers, or perhaps it was the very one you rode from the academy."


    william''s mind reeled. he had been a pawn in a game far more complex than he had imagined. but who were these people? and what was their purpose in bringing him to this desolate land? he looked at the woman, her knowledge and insight both impressive and unsettling. who was she? what was she doing in this remote and dangerous place?


    "where exactly are we?" he asked, his voice barely a whisper.


    "this," she replied, her gaze fixed on the dancing flames she cast in her fingers, "is known as the shadowlands. a haven for those who practice the darker arts, those who seek to avoid the scrutiny of the kingdom and its laws."


    "practitioners of the dark arts?" william echoed, his brow furrowing. "are you saying you''re one of them?"


    the woman threw back her head and laughed, a sound that echoed through the small cabin. "of course not, kid," she said, her voice light and amused. "i''m just here to relax, to get away from the hustle and bustle of civilization."


    "kid?" william retorted, a touch of indignation in his voice. "we''re practically the same age."


    "ah, but there you''re mistaken," she replied, her eyes twinkling with mischief. "i have a little secret, so please promise not to tell anyone, or i''ll be forced to incinerate you and turn your precious academy into a pile of ash. you see," she leaned closer, her voice dropping to a conspiratorial whisper, "i''m actually a dragon."


    william stared at her, speechless. dragons were practically extinct, mythical creatures relegated to legends and bedtime stories.


    "that''s absurd," he finally managed, his voice incredulous. "dragons don''t exist. no one has seen one in ages."


    the woman smiled, a knowing expression on her face. "that''s because," she explained, "we mastered a spell that allows us to assume human form. it''s been exactly two thousand four hundred and sixty-eight years and ninety-three days since we perfected the transformation. that''s why dragon sightings are so rare."


    find more to read at empire


    william hesitated, unsure whether to believe her outlandish claim. her power was undeniable, but her casual demeanor and playful tone made it difficult to accept her as the legendary creature she described.


    the woman, sensing his disbelief, let out an exasperated sigh. "you don''t believe me, do you?" she huffed. "of course not. fine! if i show you my true form, will you promise to keep it a secret?"


    "of course," william agreed, his curiosity piqued.


    he knew that dragons were immensely powerful, their strength rivaling even the most skilled mages. if this woman was truly a dragon, keeping her secret was a matter of self-preservation.


    she stepped out of the cabin, her gaze fixed on the night sky. "i wouldn''t want to accidentally demolish my humble abode," she explained with a wink. s§×arch* the n?vel(f)ire.¦Çet website on google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    then, with a surge of energy that crackled through the air, she transformed. william gasped, his eyes widening in disbelief. before him stood a magnificent dragon, its scales shimmering like amethysts, its wings outstretched like vast tapestries of emerald silk.


    the sheer power emanating from the creature was overwhelming, dwarfing even the aura of the mythical serpent he had encountered in the elven ruins.


    ''who would win in a fight?'' he wondered, comparing the two creatures in his mind. he instinctively felt that the serpent held a slight edge, its aura darker, more ancient.


    "satisfied?" the dragon rumbled, its voice a deep, resonating echo. "i told you i was a dragon, you fool."


    with another surge of energy, she transformed back into her human form, her nakedness momentarily forgotten. william, flustered, averted his gaze.


    "perhaps you could... put some clothes on?" he stammered, his cheeks burning.


    the woman blinked, her expression puzzled. "what? don''t humans do this sort of thing? oh, right..." she turned and disappeared into the cabin, returning moments later clad in a simple white dress.


    "so," she asked, settling back onto the bed, "what are you planning to do now? you mentioned wanting to return to your academy in fifteen days, but as i explained, that''s simply not possible."


    "i realize that now," william admitted, his shoulders slumping. "even with your help, it would take far too long."


    "indeed," she confirmed. "we''re quite a distance from your precious academy."


    the idea had been to get back to the academy before tholfnir left, as the people who kidnapped him clearly wanted to do something there, but that wasn''t going to work.


    "i can at least help you reach civilization, and from there, you can continue your journey," the woman offered. "unfortunately, i cannot reveal my identity. you know, humans are crazy enough to hunt down a dragon and tell everyone about it. i am taking a risk by even speaking to you."


    "would you really help me with that? it would mean a lot to me!" william said, his heart filled with gratitude.


    "of course," she said. "i am amber, by the way."


    "william velmont. it''s a pleasure to meet you."


    ---


    the flickering torchlight cast long, dancing shadows across the rough-hewn walls of the hidden chamber. a group of cloaked figures huddled around a stone table, their faces obscured by deep hoods, their voices hushed whispers that echoed in the oppressive silence.


    "report," a voice commanded, its tone sharp and demanding. "how progresses the plan?"


    "the prized mage is secured," one of the figures replied, their voice a low hiss. "i anticipate tholfnir will abandon his post to search for the boy within days. then, we proceed."


    a murmur of approval rippled through the group. their plan, years in the making, was nearing fruition.

 Chapter 80 Let me Handle This

    "we''ll depart tomorrow," amber announced, her voice a low rumble that echoed through the small cabin. "it''s getting late, and while i have no fear of the dark, it''s not exactly a safe environment for a human like you."william, his mind still reeling from the day''s revelations, realized he had lost track of time completely. the sun had already dipped below the horizon, casting long shadows across the snow-covered landscape. he sighed, accepting the delay.


    "alright," he agreed, a hint of worry creeping into his voice. "but what if you...fall asleep again?"


    "i won''t," amber assured him, her tone firm.


    "are you sure?" william pressed, his anxiety evident.


    "absolutely," amber replied, a hint of amusement in her voice.


    "but what if you do?" william persisted. "what should i do then?"


    "wake me up," amber said, rolling her eyes. "it''s not complicated."


    "but what if i can''t?" william argued. "what if¡ª"


    "enough with the ''what ifs''!" amber interrupted, her voice laced with a playful exasperation. "just get some sleep."


    william, exhausted from his ordeal, readily obeyed. he collapsed onto the bed, his body sinking into the surprisingly soft mattress. sleep claimed him almost instantly.


    amber, however, remained awake. she settled into a worn armchair by the fireplace, her dragon eyes gleaming in the firelight, a silent guardian watching over the slumbering mage.


    when william awoke, the smell of roasted fish filled the air. he emerged from the cabin to find amber tending a small campfire by the lake, a freshly caught fish sizzling over the flames.


    "good morning," he mumbled, rubbing the sleep from his eyes.


    amber glanced at him briefly, then returned her attention to the fish. "morning," she replied. "there''s food if you''re hungry."


    william, his stomach growling in agreement, grinned. "i definitely am."


    he settled on the grassy bank, savoring the warm, flaky fish.


    "how far is the civilization?" william asked.


    "far," amber replied, her voice a low rumble. "and i won''t be flying you there, if that''s what you''re hoping for. i can''t risk exposure."


    william understood. dragons had lived in hiding for centuries, their existence a secret known only to a select few. amber''s willingness to help him at all was a testament to her kindness, or perhaps her curiosity.


    "no problem," william assured her. "i appreciate your help regardless. but do you think those... ''students'' who kidnapped me are still in the area?" he remembered the stolen spell books, a valuable resource he couldn''t afford to lose.


    amber''s lips curled into a sly smile. "i can''t say for sure," she replied, "but i''ll keep my senses alert. dragons have an exceptional sense of smell, you know. i might be able to catch their scent."


    with a newfound determination, they set off, their footsteps crunching in the snow. the journey ahead was long and uncertain, but william, with amber by his side, felt a flicker of hope ignite within him. he would return to snowpeak academy, reclaim his stolen tomes, and warn his friends of the impending danger.


    they descended the mountain, the journey less arduous now that william''s strength had returned. the sun beat down upon them, the snow glistening under its rays.


    "do you think we could find those ''students'' and use their teleportation device to return to the academy?" william asked, a hopeful note in his voice. he still clung to the idea of reaching snowpeak before it was too late.


    "it''s possible," amber conceded, "but unlikely. if they were truly determined to bring you here, they wouldn''t risk leaving such a valuable tool behind. they''re probably long gone by now."


    william sighed, his shoulders slumping. he knew amber was right, but the thought of spending months traversing this vast wilderness was disheartening. he had to find a way to accelerate his journey, to reach the academy before the attackers could execute their plan. s~ea??h the novel?ire(.)ne*t website on google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    william''s gaze swept across the desolate landscape, a sea of white stretching to the horizon. he couldn''t deny the logic in amber''s words. even in this remote wilderness, danger lurked. he had already encountered necromancers and their undead minions. who knew what other threats might be hidden amongst the snow-covered peaks?


    amber, her senses attuned to the subtle shifts in the environment, led the way, her path winding through treacherous ravines and icy streams.


    "we should reach civilization in twelve to thirteen days," she estimated, her voice a low rumble. "this winter weather slows our progress."


    william, his impatience growing, pressed her again. "are you absolutely certain you can''t fly us there? even at a high altitude?"


    explore more stories at empire


    "it''s too risky," amber insisted. "even in this remote region, there''s always the chance of being spotted. and those who dwell in the shadowlands... they tend to possess keen eyes and powerful magic."


    resigned, william trudged onward, the monotony of the journey broken only by the occasional flurry of snow and the comforting warmth of amber''s fire magic. she conjured small flames to ward off the chill and ignited their campfires with a flick of her wrist. william, observing her effortless control over the element, added fire magic to his growing list of spells to master.


    three days passed in a blur of snow-covered landscapes and silent nights. they encountered no monsters, no other humans, only the vast emptiness of the shadowlands. then, as they crested a ridge, amber paused, her nostrils flaring.


    "i smell something," she announced, her voice low and alert. "it could be those ''students'' you mentioned."


    william''s heart leaped with a mix of hope and apprehension. "are you sure?"


    "ninety-nine percent," amber confirmed. "i detect the scent of three griffins. and you said your attackers had griffins, yes? wild griffins are solitary creatures. this is likely them."


    hope surged through william, a potent antidote to the weariness that had settled in his bones. the prospect of confronting his captors, of reclaiming his stolen possessions and potentially utilizing their teleportation device, ignited a fire within him. he yearned to understand their motives, to unravel the mystery behind their attack.


    amber, her senses guiding them, led the way through the snow-covered wilderness. the air was thick with the scent of pine and damp earth, making it challenging to isolate the specific trail she sought. she paused frequently, her nostrils flaring, her brow furrowed in concentration. william, patient and observant, followed closely behind, his hand resting on the hilt of his sword.


    two days passed, the monotony of the journey broken only by amber''s occasional updates.


    "they''re moving," she announced, her voice low and alert. "but they''re not using their griffins for long-distance travel. it seems they''re searching for something in this area."


    intrigue mingled with william''s determination. what were they seeking in this desolate land? could it be related to the reason they had kidnapped him? the questions fueled his resolve.


    finally, as they traversed a dense thicket of snow-laden pines, a sight emerged that quickened william''s pulse. a small encampment, nestled amongst the trees, its tents flapping gently in the wind. he recognized the distinctive blue canvas, the same tents they had used during the ill-fated expedition.


    "it''s them!" he hissed, his grip tightening on his sword. the moment of confrontation had arrived.


    the griffins were there, too. all three were tied to nearby trees close to the tents. but at first glance, they didn''t spot the people who had kidnapped william.


    "let''s go," amber said. "don''t be scared. i am here."


    with a powerful dragon by his side, william wasn''t afraid of the mysterious people who had done this to him. even if they were powerful mages, he doubted they would be anywhere near as strong as amber.


    they slowly walked over to the camp. when the griffins saw them, they started to make noises, but amber commanded them to be silent. all it took was a single word from her.


    they cautiously surveyed the campsite. william''s eyes lit up as he spotted his familiar backpack tucked inside one of the tents. he retrieved it, relief washing over him as he confirmed the presence of his precious spell books.


    "finally," he muttered, a grin spreading across his face.


    "they''re coming," amber warned, her voice low and alert. her keen sense of smell had detected their approach.


    moments later, three figures emerged from the trees. they were older than the ''students'' william remembered, their faces weathered, their attire more befitting seasoned adventurers. the disguises had been convincing, but their identities were undeniable.


    "william?" one of them exclaimed, their surprise evident. "what are you doing here? you were supposed to be..." he trailed off, unable to voice the word ''dead''.


    william''s lips curled into a smirk. "dead?" he echoed, his voice laced with a newfound confidence. "not before i get some answers."


    "answers?" the man scoffed. "you''re entitled to nothing. damn it!" he cursed, his frustration evident. "those necromancers were useless. they couldn''t even handle a single student."


    "oh, you mean the necromancers i killed?" william countered, a hint of amusement in his voice.


    amber leaned closer, her voice a barely audible whisper. "you mean the necromancers i killed, right?"


    "i know, i know," william whispered back. "but let me handle this." he stepped forward, his gaze fixed on the three figures.

 Chapter 81 Return

    "you pretended to be students," william accused, his voice laced with a mixture of anger and disdain, "just to kidnap me? you imbeciles!" the frustration and fear he had endured boiled over, fueling his defiance. he knew he was outmatched in a direct confrontation, but with amber at his side, he refused to cower.the apparent leader of the group sneered. "indeed we did," he admitted, his tone arrogant. "but don''t flatter yourself, boy. you''re not special."


    "what do you mean?" william pressed, his curiosity piqued.


    "we''re not telling you anything," the mage snapped. "in fact, we''ll finish what those incompetent necromancers failed to do. we''ll eliminate you."


    he began to cast a spell, his hands moving with practiced precision, arcane symbols forming in the air before him. a surge of mana gathered, the atmosphere crackling with energy. it was a high-level spell, its power palpable. william felt a wave of apprehension, but amber remained unfazed.


    with a casual flick of her wrist, she dispelled the gathering mana, the spell collapsing before it could take form. the three mages stumbled back, their faces contorted in shock and disbelief. they tried again, their combined efforts a desperate attempt to overcome this unseen force, but amber effortlessly neutralized their magic.


    "w-who are you?" one of them stammered, his voice trembling. "how are you doing this?"


    they had never encountered such power, such effortless control over magic. the realization that they were facing an adversary far beyond their comprehension dawned on them, their arrogance melting into fear.


    for a moment, they thought of trying to escape, but they realized their griffins were frozen in place. the presence of amber filled them with fear, paralyzing them.


    william sneered. "you''re going to tell me everything i want to know, or you''ll suffer."


    he expected the spies who had infiltrated the academy to crumble under his threat, but they remained defiant.


    one of them shouted, "destroy the teleportation device before he uses it!"


    they charged towards one of the tents, casting spells on the run, attempting to destroy the tent and the teleportation device within.


    "no!" william roared.


    amber swiftly neutralized their spells. with blinding speed, she appeared before them, seizing two of the spies by their necks. the last one she eliminated with a single, devastating kick, leaving a gaping hole in their chest.


    the remaining spies, realizing their desperate situation, resorted to a hidden poison concealed within one of their teeth.


    "you ain''t learning anything," they spat.


    these were their final words before the poison ended their lives. william stood speechless. he hadn''t obtained any answers, but at least the teleportation device remained intact.


    "that was close," he muttered. "imagine if they had destroyed the device."


    amber rolled her eyes. "and you said you were going to handle this yourself."


    "things got in the way, alright? anyway, let''s find this teleportation device. i don''t even know what it looks like," william grumbled.


    he and amber began searching the camp for the device. they focused on the tents, the spies'' intended target.


    the tents were a chaotic mess, filled with scattered belongings. finding anything in that disarray seemed impossible.


    after five minutes of searching, amber discovered the teleportation device. she was the only one who knew what it looked like¡ªa box with a shimmering gemstone on top.


    "this is it," she announced.


    "how does it work?" william asked. s§×ar?h the n?vel(f)ire.¦Çet website on google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "the user links two locations, creating a pathway between point a and point b. point a is likely that mountain stop where you camped," amber explained.


    "that''s incredible!" william exclaimed, seeing the teleportation device in amber''s hands. "let''s head back to the academy now."


    amber, however, shook her head. "i won''t be accompanying you," she stated, her voice firm. "this is my home, and you''re the one who needs to return, not me."


    william, though disappointed, understood. he had hoped to forge a friendship with this powerful dragon, but her reluctance to leave her sanctuary was understandable.


    "no problem," he said, a grateful smile spreading across his face. "just send me back to the academy, and i''ll be on my way."


    amber, her knowledge of ancient magic and technology vast, guided him through the activation process of the teleportation device.


    "simply stand still and prepare yourself," she instructed. "the sensation can be somewhat disorienting."


    william, remembering his previous experience with the device, braced himself. amber channeled her mana into the device, its surface glowing with an intense light. she placed it at william''s feet and stepped back.


    "it will activate in a few seconds," she explained. "you''ll materialize back on the mountain where you were initially captured. from there, you''ll have to continue on your own."


    before william could respond, the world around him dissolved into a blinding flash of light. a wave of nausea washed over him, his senses reeling.


    he blinked repeatedly, trying to regain his equilibrium. when his vision cleared, he found himself standing on the familiar mountaintop, the academy a distant silhouette against the horizon.


    "those bastards are good," he muttered, shaking his head in disbelief. he had been transported hundreds of miles without even realizing it.


    now it was time for him to descend the mountain.


    the descent was arduous, the treacherous slopes and loose scree testing his agility and endurance. he cursed his decision not to liberate one of the griffins, but the thought of riding a creature tainted by his enemies filled him with unease.


    "besides," he muttered to himself, "who''s to say they would even obey me?"


    he navigated the treacherous terrain, the sun serving as his guide.


    reaching the base of the mountain, he discovered a well-worn path, a welcome sight after days of navigating the pathless wilderness.


    he followed the road, his spirits lifting as he recognized signs of civilization: the occasional farmhouse, a distant plume of smoke rising from a village, and the comforting sound of human voices carried on the wind.


    william was leaving the shadowlands behind, its darkness and dangers fading with each step. the creatures he encountered now were mere nuisances compared to the horrors he had faced in the depths of that desolate land. he felt a renewed sense of purpose, his determination to reach snowpeak academy burning bright. enjoy new tales from empire


    the journey was a grueling test of endurance, the road stretching endlessly before him. william pushed himself to his limits, stopping only when exhaustion threatened to overwhelm him.


    he snatched what sleep he could in roadside taverns, his dreams haunted by visions of the shadowlands and the looming threat to the academy. guilt gnawed at him, a constant reminder of the danger his friends and mentors faced. he had to reach them in time.


    three days later, the familiar gates of snowpeak academy loomed before him. relief washed over him, a wave of exhaustion quickly following. as he stepped through the gate, a figure emerged from the shadows. headmaster tholfnir, his face etched with worry, approached with a brisk stride.


    "william!" he exclaimed, his voice a mixture of relief and concern. "where have you been? i was about to organize a search party."


    william met his gaze, his expression serious. "headmaster," he said, his voice low and urgent, "we need to talk. in private."


    tholfnir, sensing the gravity of the situation, nodded. "follow me," he instructed, leading william towards the academy''s inner sanctum.

 Chapter 82 Dark Revelation, and Trapped?

    william didn''t have much to tell tholfnir. despite knowing the spies had planned something at the academy, he remained unaware of their specific goal or identities.the two walked through the academy and went straight to tholfnir''s office. tholfnir used his magic to further seal the room, adding an extra layer of security to the existing magical formations.


    "so," tholfnir said, settling into his office chair. "tell me what happened."


    "the students who recruited me for their mission were actually spies!" william exclaimed.


    "wait, what?"


    tholfnir frowned. this wasn''t what he had expected. spies? in snowpeak academy? he couldn''t fathom their motives.


    "yes, i know, crazy, right?" william said. "they used a teleportation device and sent me to the shadowlands. i managed to find the device again and return to a mountain near the academy."


    "and what did they want with you? if you''re telling the truth, the real students might be missing!" tholfnir said, realizing the gravity of the situation.


    "they wanted me gone so you would search for me. with you away from the academy, they planned to do something here. i don''t know what, but they didn''t want you around," william explained.


    it was the most logical explanation he could come up with, considering everything that had happened.


    tholfnir fell into deep thought. "this isn''t the first time something like this has happened," he said. "in fact, spies have been trying to infiltrate this place for ages, but no one knows why."


    "what do you mean? aren''t they trying to steal books or artifacts?" william asked.


    he assumed snowpeak academy would be a prime target for thieves, with its valuable books and artifacts. but apparently, that wasn''t the case.


    "yes and no. we do have some valuable books, but most have multiple copies. we''re not the only academy with a library. there are countless libraries throughout the world."


    but a nagging doubt lingered in william''s mind.


    "headmaster," he said, "why would they need you out of the academy? you constantly leave for meetings and other urgent matters. they could have done something without kidnapping me!"


    william stared at tholfnir, awaiting an answer. the old headmaster was lost in thought.


    "are you sure they wanted to kidnap you just to get me out of here?" tholfnir asked.


    "sure is a strong word, but yes, i believe so. the kidnappers said i wasn''t special, just a pawn in their plan."


    tholfnir sighed. "i don''t have an answer for that, but i''ll investigate further. i''m glad you''re back and safe. i should have forbidden you to go."


    william shook his head. "don''t blame yourself, headmaster. it wasn''t your fault. let me know if you find the answer to my question. i want to know more about these people."


    he left tholfnir''s office.


    tholfnir waited a moment before casting a spell, vanishing from his office and reappearing inside a secret chamber within the academy grounds.


    a cloaked figure sat on a throne-like chair. the figure was grotesque, with a massive mana stone connected to its body, pulsing with life.


    "so, how did it go?" the cloaked figure asked. sear?h the n?velfire.net website on google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    tholfnir saluted. "the kid didn''t realize i''m not the real tholfnir. everything is proceeding according to plan."


    "good. you were right about tholfnir," the cloaked figure said. "he left to search for the boy, falling right into our trap."


    tholfnir laughed. "he did? how did you subdue that beast of a mage?"


    "preparation is key. tholfnir is sealed and being transported to one of our islands," the figure said. "but can you maintain the disguise? our operation will take time."


    "yes, of course."


    "good."


    the mysterious figure vanished, along with the throne and the pulsating mana stone. the image had been projected from elsewhere.


    the imposter tholfnir left the secret chamber and returned to his office.


    william walked through the academy and encountered professor james, who approached him with a warm greeting.


    "william, you''re back! tholfnir searched for you but couldn''t find you. i''m glad you''re safe," james said.


    this struck william as odd. tholfnir hadn''t mentioned searching for him.


    ''maybe he just looked around the academy and didn''t find me...'' he thought.


    it was strange, but william trusted that tholfnir wasn''t lying.


    "yes, i''m safe and sound. how''s your recovery coming along?" william asked.


    james still bore some injuries from their encounter in the elven ruins. "things are progressing well. i''m back to teaching, and we''re preparing to explore the ancient ruins further. i also wanted to speak with you about something."


    they went to the library for a private conversation. though not as secluded as william''s meeting with tholfnir, the library was mostly empty.


    "i need a research assistant," professor james began. "not just to study the artifacts we found in the ruins, but to..." he leaned closer to william. "...learn more about the people who killed the students."


    "but didn''t the academy higher-ups say they would handle this?" william whispered back. "i don''t think we should investigate on our own."


    professor james sighed. "i don''t know if they''ll find anything or are even trying. but i also know it''s dangerous to pursue this, so you can assist me with other things for now."


    james wouldn''t intentionally endanger a student, especially after what happened in the ruins.


    "what''s in it for me?" william asked. "you know i have a lot on my plate with my studies."


    life at snowpeak academy was demanding. william needed a good reason to take on more.


    "i can pay you and offer private combat lessons," professor james suggested.


    william didn''t hesitate. "deal."


    he wasn''t interested in the money, but the combat lessons were a valuable opportunity to grow stronger.


    "great," james said. "but private lessons are forbidden, so we must be careful not to get caught. don''t expect these lessons to start immediately."


    "no problem," william said, "but can we talk about it tomorrow? i need to rest."


    "of course."


    william left the library and returned to his dorm. tholfnir had informed the professors that william would have three days to recover.


    back in his room, william noticed his sss skill had recharged. he activated it, opening a portal to aethel''s ancient past.


    it was morning, and jinra was already urging him to return to their journey.


    "we can''t afford to lose time," jinra said. "the academy is still far away."


    william got up, then realized something was different. the timer that usually indicated his remaining time in the past¡ªtypically 24 to 48 hours¡ªnow displayed a much longer duration.


    he calculated that he would have to remain in the past for three months.


    ''three months? why the sudden change?'' william wondered.


    continue reading at empire


    he tried to recall any significant events from the past few days but couldn''t think of anything that might explain it.


    ''it seems i''ll be here for a while...'' william thought.


    not that it was a bad thing. william was excited to have more time to explore the past, especially with the prospect of visiting a past version of snowpeak academy¡ªat least, he believed that''s where they were headed.


    "i''m ready," william said.


    they mounted their horses and resumed their journey toward the academy.


    william still had a long way to reach the academy, but he believed time would fly past him in the following days.

 Chapter 83 Ancient Snowpeak Academy

    The journey proved challenging for William. Aethel''s primitive past was a dangerous place.The roads were unsafe, and Jinra, by concealing his aura, ensured that beasts would attack them. Find adventures on empire


    "This is part of your training," he said, observing William as he battled all manner of creatures.


    "Die, beast!" William roared, slashing his steel sword through a three-headed boar.


    [Level Up]


    [Level Up]


    [Level Up]


    That message flashed before William''s eyes repeatedly throughout his journey. He constantly battled beasts, gaining incredible amounts of experience.


    Jinra only intervened when William faced insurmountable odds, otherwise leaving him to fight independently.


    With each passing day, William felt his body grow stronger and his movements sharper. They traveled by horse, stopping only to fight creatures that crossed their path.


    At night, they camped. William used this time to read and practice spells from his academy manuals, but exhaustion from the day''s battles often overcame him, preventing him from studying for long.


    Thus, a month passed.


    After a month of travel with Jinra, they finally reached a familiar landmark: Snowpeak Mount.


    Unlike in present-day Aethel, there was no city here. It was just a mountain, with a few cabins and a stone building under construction at its peak.


    "That''s the academy you''ll be attending," Jinra said, pointing to the summit. "It will take us a few days to climb, but we''re close."


    The academy looked different from the one William knew, but he could see the foundational structure was the same.


    As they prepared to continue their climb, a young man passed by. He wore fine robes, his long hair framing a face adorned with round glasses. He had the distinct air of a scholar.


    "Are you two heading to the magic academy?" the man inquired.


    Jinra nodded. "Yes, we are. Why?"


    The man smiled. "I''m heading there as well. In fact, I''m one of the professors. Would you like a ride? I have a flying mount that will make the journey much faster."


    "What about our horses?" Jinra asked, though he was clearly interested in the offer. Reaching the academy quickly was appealing, as scaling the mountain with its precarious infrastructure would be arduous. There was no clear path, no shelter from the harsh weather, and no place to rest during the climb.


    "Don''t worry," the man assured him. "I can use my magic to lift them as well. So, what do you say?"


    Jinra accepted, especially since William was eager to fly. The professor cast two spells: one to lull the horses to sleep, and another to levitate them.


    The flying mount turned out to be a winged lizard, a creature unlike anything William had ever seen.


    They climbed onto the lizard''s back, which had ample space, and soared towards the academy. The horses floated beside them, enveloped in a protective blue barrier generated by the professor''s magic.


    "So, are you bringing your son or grandson to join the academy?" the professor asked, his eyes twinkling with curiosity as he glanced between the weathered old man and the young boy at his side.


    Jinra, his beard as white as the snow-capped peaks surrounding them, chuckled. "Indeed. I am Jinra, and this is William." He paused, a hint of amusement in his voice. "And you are?"


    "Oh, forgive my rudiness!" The professor extended a hand, his grip surprisingly strong. "Professor Lincoln. Welcome to Snowpeak Magic Academy."


    William, despite his youthful appearance, was already attuned to the subtle currents of magical energy. He could sense that Lincoln was a powerful mage, perhaps even stronger than Professor James. S~ea??h the n??el Fire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    ''Could he beat Professor James in a fight?'' The thought flickered through his mind.


    "We have around 80 students currently enrolled," Lincoln said, his voice carrying a hint of pride. "We''re glad you''ve chosen to join us, William. It''s tough to live in this harsh weather, but you''ll get used to it."


    "80 students?" William echoed, surprised. He was used to academies teeming with hundreds, even thousands of aspiring mages.


    Lincoln nodded, understanding the boy''s surprise. "It''s a modest number, I admit. We''re a relatively new academy, and our location isn''t exactly...favorable." He gestured towards the towering, snow-laden mountains that encircled them. "Most acolytes prefer to learn magic in the academies near the beaches. There''s one on a tropical island that''s quite famous."


    William understood. Snowpeak Magic Academy wasn''t renowned. It lacked the allure of sun-drenched beaches and bustling cities.


    "Is this place safe?" William asked, his young brow furrowed with concern. The imposing mountains and the starkness of the landscape seemed to whisper of hidden dangers.


    Professor Lincoln puffed out his chest, a touch of defiance in his voice. "Of course! We have a sturdy wall surrounding the academy grounds," he said, gesturing towards the stone barrier that snaked through the snowdrifts. "We''re even reinforcing it and exploring ways to add magical defenses in the future. Rest assured, the main building and the dormitories are perfectly secure. You won''t be disappointed."


    William, however, couldn''t help but compare this Snowpeak Academy to the one he knew. That academy boasted an infamous entry exam, a grueling trial that only the most talented could overcome. This Snowpeak Academy seemed...desperate. As if they''d accept anyone just to fill their classrooms.


    He observed the landscape as they ascended the mountain, his eyes taking in the unfamiliar sights. The main building, perched atop the peak, bore a striking resemblance to the one he remembered. But the surrounding walls were smaller, less imposing. And where were the shimmering barriers, the intricate magical formations that should have enveloped the academy in a protective embrace?


    The silence was unsettling. The bustling city that usually thrived near the academy was absent, replaced by an eerie stillness. With only 80 students scattered across this vast expanse, the place felt desolate, almost haunted.


    "Here we are," Professor Lincoln announced, his voice breaking the silence. "You''re welcome to stay in the dormitory for a few days before returning, Jinra. Just to help William settle in."


    "I''ll show you to your rooms for the night," Lincoln continued, "and then we can have a tour tomorrow."


    William knew the layout of the academy like the back of his hand. What could a tour possibly offer? Still, a flicker of curiosity lingered. Perhaps this Snowpeak Academy held surprises he hadn''t anticipated.


    Professor Lincoln led them towards the dormitory. It occupied the same location as William recalled, but the building itself was a pale imitation of its counterpart. Smaller, older, almost dilapidated.


    "All the rooms are the same," Lincoln said with a dismissive wave, "so you don''t even need to choose."


    William''s heart sank. No choices. No options. Just like this entire academy, it seemed ¨C a faded echo of the grandeur he knew.


    The night passed surprisingly well for William. The unfamiliar bed and the chilling mountain air did little to disturb his sleep. He awoke feeling refreshed, a flicker of anticipation rising within him as he remembered the promised tour.


    Stepping out of the dormitory, he was met with a barrage of curious stares. The other students, scattered across the courtyard, seemed to pause in their activities, their eyes drawn to the newcomer.


    William realized that in an academy this small, every new arrival would be an event. News must have traveled fast. He was a stranger in a tight-knit community, an outsider stepping into their world.


    Instead of Professor Lincoln, a tall, imposing figure awaited them. The headmaster. His muscular frame and the jagged scar that bisected his right eye spoke of battles fought and hardships endured.


    "You''re the new student?" the headmaster boomed, his voice resonating with authority. "Follow me."


    No pleasantries. No welcoming smiles. Just a curt command that echoed the starkness of the academy itself. William, despite his initial reservations, found himself intrigued. This Snowpeak Academy, with its rough edges and its air of mystery, was slowly drawing him in.

 Chapter 84 Bloodline?

    "This is the main building where most classes are held," Headmaster Grant declared, his voice echoing through the cavernous space. He gestured towards the imposing structure with a sweep of his hand. "There are a few outdoor lessons, of course, but those are primarily for specialized disciplines."Grant strode through the academy grounds with a brisk pace, pausing only for fleeting explanations. He seemed determined to rush through the tour, as if his time were a precious commodity.


    "We''re still developing this academy," he said, his tone leaving no room for argument. "Don''t expect luxuries. You''re here to study, am I right?"


    "Yes, Headmaster Grant," William replied, a hint of uncertainty in his voice.


    "Good. Now, head inside and find your first class. It''s in the third room on the right as you enter."


    "But what about the uniform?" William asked, remembering the mandatory attire at his previous academy.


    Grant let out a harsh laugh. "Uniform? Kid, we barely have a foundation here. Uniforms are the least of our concerns. Now, off you go."


    With that, Headmaster Grant turned and strode away, his attention clearly drawn elsewhere. The academy, with its ongoing construction and the looming task of establishing magical defenses, demanded his constant oversight.


    Following Grant''s directions, William navigated the main building with ease. The interior, while spacious, lacked the intricate details and ornate decorations he was accustomed to.


    He arrived at his classroom just as the lesson began. The instructor, a man named Kurt, was already addressing the assembled students. Sear?h the N??elFir§×.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "A new student!" Kurt exclaimed, his face breaking into a welcoming smile. "We''re always happy to have more eager minds. What''s your name?" Read exclusive adventures at empire


    "William," he replied.


    "Welcome, William. Please, take a seat. This is the introductory combat class."


    As William surveyed his classmates, he noticed a distinct lack of noble attire. These were commoners, their faces etched with a mixture of determination and apprehension.


    It dawned on him then. Snowpeak Academy, with its remote location and lack of an entry exam, presented a rare opportunity for these commoners. A chance to learn magic, to rise above their station.


    In this era, where information traveled slowly, the presence of these commoners spoke volumes. They likely had connections to merchants or influential families, allowing them to learn of this hidden academy. They weren''t simple farmers; they were driven individuals seeking to forge their own destinies.


    "The path to combat mastery lies in practice," Kurt declared, his voice ringing with conviction. "First, you''ll each learn a spell suited to your abilities. Then, we spar! That''s how you truly hone your skills."


    Professor Kurt moved with surprising agility, quickly assessing each student''s magical affinity. He assigned spells with a practiced eye, tailoring them to individual strengths.


    William received a C-rank body enhancement spell. It was child''s play. With his Magic Mind active, he absorbed the intricate workings of the spell in an instant. He''d already mastered far more complex incantations.


    "You''ve mastered it already?" Kurt exclaimed, astonishment etched on his face. "That''s incredible! Have you studied magic before?"


    "A bit," William replied casually. "There was a reclusive mage in my village who taught me the basics."


    "Even so, this is remarkable," Kurt said, shaking his head in disbelief. "You can use the remaining time to explore the library or practice. We''ll begin sparring once everyone has grasped their assigned spell."


    William frowned. "Are you certain? What about the other classes?"


    "Other classes?" Kurt chuckled. "Our focus here is combat. Other subjects are touched upon occasionally, but they''re secondary."


    This academy was drastically different from what William expected. He soon learned why. Fields like enchantment, alchemy, magical history, and artifact creation were in their infancy. Knowledge was scarce, research limited. Teaching these subjects was considered impractical, even frivolous.


    In this primitive era, survival was paramount. Aethel was a land riddled with magical beasts and hidden dangers. Families sent their children to learn magic not for scholarly pursuits, but to become weapons. To protect their homes, to vanquish threats. Brewing potions held little appeal compared to the raw power of combat magic.


    While this disappointed William, who thirsted for knowledge in all its forms, he quickly recognized the opportunity. ''I can use my advanced understanding to pioneer these neglected fields...''


    The idea sparked excitement within him. Becoming an expert in a burgeoning field could bring him wealth, resources, and connections. He could explore the world, uncover its secrets, and achieve a level of influence far beyond that of a mere student.


    With his first class effectively dismissed, William decided to explore the library. Though the main building''s exterior mirrored the one he knew, the interior was a labyrinth of unfamiliar corridors and misplaced rooms. Finding the library proved to be a challenge in itself.


    When he finally located it, a wave of disappointment washed over him. Gone were the towering shelves overflowing with ancient tomes. This library, while spacious, was a paltry shadow of its counterpart. The collection was meager, and most of the available books focused solely on combat.


    As William browsed the limited selection, a voice echoed in his mind ¨C the demonic sword, its presence a constant companion.


    "We''re in the past, aren''t we?" the sword mused, its tone a blend of curiosity and awe. "I still can''t fathom how you achieved this... Regardless, brat, I sense a book here that might hold valuable information about demons and demonic energy. You should seek it out."


    "Why don''t you just tell me what I want to know?" William retorted, a hint of frustration in his voice. "I''m wasting time searching while you could simply provide the answers."


    A brief silence followed. "The truth is... I don''t remember everything," the sword confessed. "I''m merely a sword infused with a demonic soul. I don''t possess the full memories of the being that was used to enchant me."


    The sword''s knowledge, while vast, was fragmented. If William truly wanted to understand the sword and the demonic energy he wielded, he needed to seek answers elsewhere.


    "Are you sure there''s even a relevant book here?" William asked, skepticism coloring his tone. "The present-day library has a restricted section with such texts, but I doubt this one does."


    "There is one," the sword insisted. "I can sense its power. It may not contain all the answers you seek, but it''s worth investigating."


    Guided by the sword''s subtle promptings, William embarked on a quest through the library''s shelves. Finding a specific book without knowing its title or appearance was like searching for a needle in a haystack.


    But the sword could feel the book''s energy, leading William with an almost instinctive certainty. After an hour of relentless searching, he found it.


    The book was bound in dark leather, its cover adorned with a strange symbol ¨C a serpent, coiled and menacing.


    ''A snake? Like the one I found in the ancient ruins?'' The thought struck him like a bolt of lightning.


    As William reached for the book, a jolt of energy surged through him. He felt an inexplicable connection, a sense of familiarity. Fleeting images flashed before his eyes ¨C fragmented memories, dark rituals, and a sense of overwhelming power.


    [Your bloodline is awakening...]


    [Time for completion: 3 months]


    William had no idea what that was, but he guessed it had something to do with the blood the mythical snake gave him...

 Chapter 85 New Friend, Test and Practice

    The System remained silent, leaving William to ponder the cryptic message. He glanced around the library, ensuring he was alone before carefully opening the book and delving into its contents.It was a chronicle of demonkind, detailing their history and diverse races. Contrary to popular belief, demons weren''t inherently evil. They were simply another race, like elves, that once walked the world.


    Of course, demons differed from the benevolent image of elves. They were often depicted as barbaric and ruthless. But how much of that was truth, and how much was propaganda? William had only encountered elven ruins, not the elves themselves. And his sole experience with a demon was a hunter driven mad by corrupted energy, not a true demon by birth.


    Intrigued, he tucked the book into his backpack, eager to devour its contents in private. ''What else can I find here?'' he wondered, scanning the shelves.


    Some spells mirrored those he knew from the present, albeit in cruder forms. The manuals were less organized, the techniques less refined. Yet, William sensed valuable insights within these archaic texts. They offered a different perspective, a glimpse into the magical practices of a bygone era.


    As he immersed himself in exploration, another student entered the library. S§×arch* The novel(F~)ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "You''re the new student, right?" he said, extending a hand. "Marcel Blackwood. Pleasure to meet you!"


    "William," he replied, returning the gesture. "The pleasure is mine. What brings you here?"


    Marcel, an affable young man with an easy smile, seemed eager to chat. "Trying to find a new spell to learn. There are so many options here, it can be overwhelming."


    "I understand completely," William agreed. "But I''m sure you''ll find something worthwhile in this collection."


    "Oh, definitely," Marcel said with a laugh. "Coming from a place with practically no books, having this many to choose from is a luxury! I''d rather have this problem than no spells to learn at all."


    Marcel''s comment piqued William''s curiosity. "You said you come from a place with few books?" he inquired, eager to learn more about this world and its inhabitants.


    "We had a handful," Marcel explained, "less than ten in the entire village. It''s a miracle I learned to read and write. I''m grateful my father hired a tutor."


    "And where is this village?" William asked.


    "The Shadowlands," Marcel replied. "The name might sound ominous, but it''s not that bad. I think it''s called that because of all the mountains casting shadows. Don''t get any ideas about me practicing dark arts, though!" he added with a grin.


    William''s mind raced. The Shadowlands, in his time, was a desolate place filled with treacherous forests, towering mountains, a dragon lurking in a cave, and necromancers seeking his life. Could this be the same place?


    "I''ve never heard of the Shadowlands," he said, feigning ignorance. "Are there any cities there?"


    "There''s one major city," Marcel explained, "but most people live in villages. I grew up in one, but my father was a merchant, so we were better off than most. What about you?"


    "Similar story," William replied. "I''m from a small village called Willow Creek. I learned what I know from a reclusive mage who lived nearby."


    "That''s amazing!" Marcel exclaimed. "No wonder you mastered that spell so quickly. You already had a mentor!"


    "He certainly did help me with it," William agreed, a genuine smile gracing his lips. He found himself enjoying Marcel''s company, a welcome respite from the unfamiliar surroundings.


    They chatted for a few more minutes before Marcel announced his departure. But as he turned to leave, he paused, a mischievous glint in his eyes. "I know you''re new here, but are you planning on participating in the upcoming mission?"


    "Mission?" William echoed, his curiosity piqued.


    "You know the academy has another branch, right?" Marcel explained. "It''s like a sister academy, with the same principles and goals. They''re facing some challenges, being newer than us, and they need students to help build it up. Some might even become tutors there. It''s located on one of the islands in an archipelago."


    "What? Really?" William exclaimed, surprised. He''d never heard of another Snowpeak Academy, let alone one on an island.


    ''This can only mean that the project ultimately failed...'' he thought, recalling the academy''s history. This island endeavor was clearly not recorded in the annals of the present-day Snowpeak Academy.


    "It''s true," Marcel confirmed. "They''re selecting the best students. But the actual test is in six months. If you prove yourself, we could go together! I like the idea of living on an island and becoming a tutor. It certainly beats this freezing weather."


    The prospect appealed to William as well. He yearned to explore new places, and six months at Snowpeak Academy would provide ample time to uncover the secrets of this era.


    "Thanks for telling me," William said, his enthusiasm growing. "I''ll definitely try my best to qualify. It sounds like an incredible opportunity."


    "That''s awesome!" Marcel beamed. He gave William a final wave. "See you later!"


    As Marcel disappeared amongst the bookshelves, William felt a surge of excitement.


    The prospect of exploring a new branch of the academy ignited William''s adventurous spirit. He left the library, his mind buzzing with possibilities. He briefly considered searching for more spells, but decided to focus on mastering the ones he already possessed ¨C a collection of ice spells and advanced body enhancement techniques acquired before his journey into the past.


    Back in his room, William reviewed his status:


    Name: William Velmont


    Level: 16


    Class: None


    Attributes:


    Strength: 48


    Agility: 47


    Stamina: 46


    Intelligence: 423


    Mana: 102


    Demonic Energy: 10


    Active Bonuses: +40% Learning Speed


    His level was impressive, and his attributes were significantly higher than average, thanks to the demonic energy coursing through his veins. But the absence of a class nagged at him. He knew classes typically manifested around level 30, though some rare individuals developed them earlier, around level 20. Continue reading on empire


    ''Still a long way to go,'' he mused.


    His room, while lacking the comforts of his previous life, provided adequate shelter from the biting cold. The crackling fireplace offered a welcome warmth, casting dancing shadows across the stone walls.


    He settled near the hearth, his attention drawn to the "Icy Weapon" spell tome. This A-rank spell promised to infuse his weapon with ice, amplifying its power and inflicting debilitating effects on his enemies. As a swordsman, this was a must-have in his arsenal.


    With the fire warming his body and a steaming cup of tea at his side, William immersed himself in the intricacies of the spell. He practiced the incantations, visualized the flow of mana, and honed his control over the icy energy. He took occasional breaks to replenish his tea and stretch his limbs, but his focus remained unwavering.


    As the day waned, the dormitory gradually filled with returning students, their chatter and laughter disrupting the peaceful atmosphere. Recognizing the need for rest, William set aside his practice, content with the progress he''d made.


    A knock echoed through the room, pulling William from his thoughts. He opened the door to find Marcel standing sheepishly in the hallway.


    "I asked around and found out which room you were in," Marcel admitted, "I was wondering...would you be interested in grabbing some dinner? They serve a free meal in the dining hall."


    William chuckled. Some traditions, it seemed, transcended time. "Sure, why not?"


    The dining hall bustled with activity as students gathered for the evening meal. Among the crowd, William spotted a familiar face ¨C Professor Lincoln, the man who had escorted them to the academy.


    Marcel, who had settled beside William, followed his gaze. "He''s one of the most enigmatic professors here," he commented, his voice dropping to a conspiratorial whisper. "Doesn''t actually teach any classes, though. I have no idea what he does."


    William shared Marcel''s curiosity. Was Lincoln involved in constructing the academy''s defenses? Or did he serve some other, more clandestine purpose?


    Across the hall, William noticed Professor Kurt, his combat instructor, engaged in a lively conversation with a group of students.


    The intimate atmosphere of the academy fostered a sense of camaraderie. Unlike the sprawling, competitive environment of his previous school, here, everyone knew each other, creating a more supportive and collaborative learning experience.


    William savored the hearty meal, primarily composed of game hunted from the surrounding wilderness. It was a welcome change from the more refined, yet somewhat bland, cuisine of his former academy.


    After dinner, William announced his intention to return to the library. Marcel, surprised by his dedication, raised an eyebrow.


    "Are you sure? The library at this hour? I don''t think anyone else studies this late," Marcel remarked, a hint of amusement in his voice.


    "I''d like to get some more reading in," William explained. "The dormitory is a bit too lively for serious study right now. Besides, I need to prepare for that test in six months, right?"


    The mention of the test reignited Marcel''s enthusiasm. "You''re absolutely right! Go for it, William! I know we''ll both pass with flying colors!" He clapped William on the back with a grin and headed towards the dormitory.


    William, with renewed determination, made his way back to the library. He settled into a quiet corner, the "Icy Weapon" tome open before him. Hours melted away as he immersed himself in the intricacies of the spell. Eventually, fatigue overcame him, and he drifted off to sleep amidst the towering shelves.


    He awoke with a start, the silence of the library shattered by a muffled sound echoing from the hallway. Someone was moving about in the darkness.

 Chapter 86 Marcel has a Secret

    William''s eyes snapped open, his heart pounding in his chest. The sharp echo of footsteps sliced through the silence of the library, jolting him awake. ''I fell asleep...'' He blinked rapidly, rubbing the sleep from his eyes.He pushed himself to his feet, the footsteps echoing once more, sending a surge of adrenaline through his veins. Who else would be in the academy at this hour? The library was shrouded in darkness, the rest of the building equally still and silent.


    Fear prickled his skin. He instinctively ducked behind a bookshelf, the inky blackness concealing him. Peering towards the entrance, he saw a figure emerge from the hallway. A figure cloaked in black, their face obscured by the shadows.


    Curiosity battled with caution. It was risky to follow, but William couldn''t resist the urge to uncover the mystery. He moved with practiced stealth, keeping close to the walls, his footsteps barely disturbing the quiet.


    The figure turned a corner. William followed, his heart pounding in his chest. But when he reached the turn, the hallway was empty. ''Where did they go?''


    A hand clamped down on his shoulder, freezing him in place. He whirled around, his breath catching in his throat.


    It was Professor Lincoln.


    "William? What are you doing here?" Lincoln asked, his brow furrowed in confusion.


    William''s eyes darted to Lincoln''s attire. It was different from the black robe he''d seen on the mysterious figure. "I fell asleep while studying," he explained, forcing a casual tone. "I woke up when I heard footsteps."


    Lincoln''s expression shifted. "Footsteps? It was probably just me. I forgot something in my office and came back to retrieve it."


    Doubt gnawed at William. Could it really have been Lincoln? Or was there something more to this encounter? He decided to keep his suspicions to himself. "Makes sense," he replied, feigning understanding. "Well, I should get back to my room."


    "Indeed you should," Lincoln said with a smile.


    As William turned to leave, Lincoln stopped him. "Hey, William," he said, his voice dropping to a conspiratorial whisper, "could you keep this a secret? Headmaster Grant doesn''t like professors wandering the halls at night. I don''t want to get in trouble. I''ll make it worth your while."


    The request, coupled with Lincoln''s earlier behavior, amplified William''s suspicions. Something wasn''t right.


    "Sure, no problem," he agreed, his mind racing. He needed to get to the bottom of this.


    William returned to his room, the silence of the academy pressing in around him. In this bygone era, Snowpeak lacked the security measures of the future. No guards patrolled the grounds, no protective enchantments shimmered in the darkness. The academy stood alone, a solitary beacon against the vast wilderness.


    The dormitory was shrouded in sleep, the students lost in dreams of magical prowess and future triumphs. William slipped into his room, his mind a whirlwind of unanswered questions. Sleep eluded him as he replayed the encounter in the library, analyzing every detail, every word.


    The next day dawned, and William found himself with another free day. While his classmates grappled with their newly assigned spells, he dedicated himself to mastering "Icy Weapon." He meticulously practiced the intricate runes, his focus unwavering despite the lingering unease from the previous night.


    Jinra, his loyal mentor, remained at the academy, providing a comforting presence. William, trusting his elder implicitly, recounted the mysterious encounter in the library.


    Jinra listened patiently, his expression a mix of concern and reassurance. "Worry not, William," he said calmly. "Headmaster Grant is a man of honor and justice. But if you discover more about this mysterious figure, you should inform him. He will know what to do."


    "I understand. Thank you for your guidance," William replied, feeling a wave of gratitude for Jinra''s unwavering support.


    "It was nothing," Jinra said warmly. "Remember, should you become a powerful mage, I can secure you a prestigious position in the army, if that is your desire."


    "I appreciate the offer, Jinra," William said, "but I yearn to explore the world, not be confined to a single place. Speaking of which," he continued, his curiosity piqued, "I heard that Snowpeak Academy has a branch on an island, and they''re seeking assistance in its development. What are your thoughts?"


    "That''s news to me," Jinra admitted, stroking his beard thoughtfully. "It could be a valuable experience, but if they''re actively recruiting help, it suggests the situation isn''t ideal."


    "I understand," William replied. "They need people to assist with construction and act as mentors. I have six months to consider it. If I decide to go, I''ll send you a letter."


    Jinra beamed, pleased that William kept him informed. "Thank you, William. I appreciate you confiding in me." He paused, then added with a chuckle, "Now, if you''ll excuse me, I believe I''ll return to my room. Headmaster Grant doesn''t take kindly to outsiders like myself wandering the halls."


    Jinra departed, leaving William alone in the courtyard. Moments later, Marcel appeared, his face etched with a mixture of excitement and apprehension.


    "William," he began, his voice hushed, "I have something important to tell you. Can we speak somewhere more private?"


    William, intrigued, readily agreed. He''d only known Marcel for a short time, but the young man''s earnest demeanor piqued his curiosity. What secrets could he possibly possess after only a few months at the academy?


    They ventured beyond the academy walls, seeking refuge within the dense forest. "Even the dormitories aren''t safe," Marcel explained, his eyes darting nervously towards the imposing structure. "They could be listening. I think this is the best place, though it''s a bit risky being out here."


    The surrounding woods were indeed treacherous, teeming with magical beasts. Venturing outside alone was a gamble, but Marcel''s urgency outweighed the danger.


    They walked until they reached a flowing river, its icy waters a testament to the harsh climate.


    "What is it you wanted to share?" William asked, his anticipation growing.


    Marcel scanned their surroundings before revealing his secret. "A few months ago, I discovered some hidden passages within the academy," he whispered. "I haven''t explored them extensively, but based on my observations, the professors seem unaware of their existence. Perhaps Grant knows, but there''s a chance he doesn''t."


    "Secret passages?" William echoed, intrigued.


    "Exactly! It''s like there''s an entire hidden academy beneath the one we see," Marcel explained, his voice laced with wonder. "What if this academy was built atop the ruins of another?"


    "But wouldn''t they have discovered it during construction?" William questioned. It seemed improbable that such a significant structure could remain hidden if they had excavated the area.


    "It''s very deep," Marcel insisted. "They would have to dig much deeper to find it."


    A mischievous grin spread across Marcel''s face. "What do you say we explore it together? It shouldn''t be too dangerous, right? If there were any threats down there, someone would have discovered them by now."


    William wasn''t entirely convinced, but the allure of the unknown was too strong to resist. He also pondered the possibility that these secret passages might still exist in the future. Could he return to the present-day Snowpeak Academy and uncover a hidden layer of history beneath his feet? The prospect was thrilling.


    "Let''s do it," he agreed, his voice firm despite the flutter of apprehension in his stomach. S§×arch* The ¦Çov§×lFire .net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "But we need to be cautious," Marcel cautioned. "We''ll have to go at night. I''m not sure we can leave the academy undetected during the day. That''s why I''ve been hesitant to explore on my own."


    "Perhaps we could learn an invisibility spell?" William suggested. "There''s no need to rush into this unprepared."


    "Good idea," Marcel agreed, his eyes gleaming with excitement.


    William''s anticipation grew with each passing day. What secrets lay hidden beneath Snowpeak Academy? What mysteries awaited them in the depths of the unknown? He was determined to find out.

 Chapter 87 First Mission

    William headed to the library, his gaze scanning the shelves for invisibility spells. He found one, but it was an A-rank spell, a formidable challenge even for seasoned mages. Furthermore, it was an illusion spell, a branch of magic William had little natural aptitude for.Learning it would be an uphill battle, even with his Magic Mind. But the potential rewards were too great to ignore. An invisibility spell would be invaluable for their clandestine exploration.


    Marcel, ever the optimist, offered encouragement. "Between the two of us, you definitely have the best chance of mastering this," he declared, his confidence in William unwavering. "You have a real talent for magic. Think you can learn it in a month?"


    William met his gaze, a determined glint in his eyes. "It''s hard to say for sure, but I''ll give it my all. I''ll let you know when I''ve got it down. And let''s keep this between us for now. We don''t want anyone else finding out about the passages or the spell."


    "Agreed," Marcel said.


    Two weeks flew by in a blur of focused practice. William diligently honed his skills with the invisibility spell and the combat spells assigned by Professor Kurt. He quickly surpassed the other new students, mastering Kurt''s lessons with ease. This allowed him to dedicate more time to the intricate workings of the invisibility spell and the formidable "Icy Weapon" incantation.


    Just as William settled into a routine, a call to action disrupted the tranquility of the academy. Headmaster Grant summoned the students, his imposing figure radiating an air of grave urgency.


    "I have gathered you all here today because a nearby village requires our assistance," he announced, his voice resonating with authority. "They are facing a dire threat from a magical beast. Your participation is not mandatory, but those who volunteer will be handsomely rewarded. However," he added, his tone turning somber, "this mission is fraught with peril. You could face serious injury, even death."


    A hush fell over the assembled students. The gravity of Grant''s words hung heavy in the air. These were, for the most part, commoners who had striven tirelessly to reach the academy. They had journeyed from distant lands, like Marcel, with dreams of mastering magic and improving their lives. Risking those hard-won futures was a daunting prospect.


    Unsurprisingly, most students recoiled from the challenge. Preserving their lives took precedence over potential rewards. In the end, only a handful of brave souls stepped forward.


    Marcel, cautious as ever, remained among the majority.


    But William, his thirst for adventure and self-improvement burning bright, joined the ranks of the volunteers. He never backed down from a challenge, and this was an opportunity to gain valuable experience, hone his skills, and further enhance his attributes.


    "Are you sure about this?" Marcel asked, his brow creased with worry. "It sounds incredibly dangerous."


    William''s resolve remained unshaken. "Absolutely. Practical experience is crucial for growth. But you should stay here and focus on... other matters," he said, subtly alluding to their planned exploration of the secret passages.


    Marcel caught his meaning instantly, a mischievous glint returning to his eyes. "Right. I''ll be doing that," he whispered conspiratorially. sea??h th§× n??el Fire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    In the end, a mere eight students volunteered for the mission, a paltry number compared to the academy''s total enrollment. Headmaster Grant, however, seemed satisfied.


    "This should be sufficient," he declared, addressing the small group. "The threat is not insurmountable."


    One of the volunteers spoke up, his voice tinged with apprehension. "Why can''t a professor accompany us? Perhaps Professor Lincoln, since he doesn''t teach any classes?"


    William''s ears perked up. He, too, was curious about Lincoln''s role at the academy. Perhaps Grant would shed some light on the matter.


    Grant, however, deftly evaded the question. "The professors have essential duties here, including Professor Lincoln. You will undertake this mission unaccompanied. Is everyone still certain they wish to proceed?"


    The pointed question caused one student to waver, reducing their number to seven. William remained undeterred. He had faced far greater perils in the ancient elven ruins. This mission, though undoubtedly challenging, held no fear for him.


    The mention of the ruins sparked a thought. He wondered if they still existed in this era. ''I should investigate when I have the opportunity,'' he mused, adding it to his growing list of explorations.


    The seven students, a motley crew of aspiring mages, prepared for their expedition. The journey to the village would take several days, and their task of subduing the troublesome magical beasts promised to be even more time-consuming. They anticipated an extended stay, their skills and courage put to the test.


    "Do not concern yourselves with missed lessons," Headmaster Grant assured them, his voice carrying a hint of paternal concern. "You will receive private instruction upon your return to compensate for any lost time. Furthermore, the villagers have pledged to provide food and lodging for those who come to their aid."


    William, ever prepared, had most of his necessities stowed within his trusty backpack. He required little additional preparation, his mind focused on the challenges ahead.


    The following morning, the group departed from the academy, their horses'' hooves kicking up plumes of snow as they ventured into the unforgiving wilderness. Xavier, a seasoned student with two years of training under his belt, assumed leadership. His map, weathered and creased, guided their path.


    "My word is law," Xavier declared, his tone brooking no argument. "I am Xavier, your leader. Follow my instructions without question."


    While William typically bristled at following orders, especially from another student, he recognized the wisdom in Xavier''s leadership. The group''s safety and success depended on unity and cooperation. William, though confident in his own abilities, understood that the other students were less experienced. Xavier''s guidance provided a sense of security and direction.


    As they descended the mountain, the biting wind whipped at their faces, and snow crunched beneath their horses'' hooves. But with each passing day, the temperature gradually rose, and the landscape transformed. The stark white of the mountain peak gave way to lush greenery, and the air filled with the sounds of life. Birdsong replaced the howling wind, butterflies flitted amongst vibrant wildflowers, and deer darted through the undergrowth.


    They followed the course of a winding river, Xavier consulting his map at regular intervals. "We''re almost there," he announced, a hint of relief in his voice. "The village lies just ahead, along the riverbank."


    The village was indeed small, a cluster of humble dwellings huddled together against the vast wilderness. One building, larger and more imposing than the rest, stood at the center. This, William surmised, belonged to the village chief who had requested their assistance.


    As the group approached, the chief emerged from his dwelling, his weathered face etched with worry. Upon seeing the young mages, a wave of relief washed over him.


    "Welcome, mages," he greeted them, his voice raspy with anticipation. "You have come in response to my plea?"


    Xavier stepped forward, assuming his role as spokesperson. "Indeed we have. Please, tell us more about the situation."


    "Of course, of course," the chief replied, ushering them towards his residence. He led them through a sturdy wooden door and into a spacious meeting room.


    "We face a grave threat," he began, his voice heavy with concern. "I fear it may be related to... corruption."


    William''s attention sharpened. Corruption. The very force that had amplified his powers. Perhaps this mission would present another opportunity to absorb its energy and further enhance his abilities.

 Chapter 88 New System Feature

    The chief''s meeting room, though modest in size, comfortably accommodated the seven students. They settled into wooden chairs surrounding a sturdy round table, their attention focused on the village leader as he recounted the unsettling events that had befallen their community."It began a month ago," the chief explained, his voice heavy with worry. "One of our hunters vanished without a trace. Then, more disappearances followed. We fear some intelligent creature is preying upon our people."


    William had expected to hear tales of monstrous beasts rampaging through the village, but the reality was more insidious. These were kidnappings, carefully orchestrated and shrouded in mystery.


    "We discovered some tracks in the woods," the chief continued, "footprints, but nothing conclusive." Sear?h the n?vel_Fire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    William raised his hand, a question forming in his mind. "Are you certain this is the work of a beast or related to corruption?" he inquired. "Could it be that someone within the village is responsible for these abductions?"


    Several other students nodded in agreement. Human depravity was, sadly, not unheard of. But the chief quickly dismissed the notion. "The people here are good folk," he insisted. "We are a tight-knit community. I trust them implicitly."


    Despite the chief''s assurances, William harbored doubts. He had witnessed the darkness lurking within seemingly ordinary individuals. Still, he wasn''t leading the investigation, and only time would reveal the truth.


    Xavier, ever the pragmatist, took charge. "Can you show us where the last disappearance occurred?" he asked. "And is there anyone who might have witnessed something?"


    The chief shook his head. "I can lead you to the location, but I''m afraid there were no witnesses. Follow me."


    They ventured into the woods, the chief guiding them along a well-worn path. He explained that all the missing villagers had been hunters, their disappearances occurring within the depths of the forest.


    They arrived at a picturesque waterfall cascading over moss-covered rocks. "This is where the last hunter was seen," the chief said, gesturing towards the tranquil scene. "Someone was bathing in the pool below and saw the hunter heading into the woods in this direction, but they thought nothing of it at the time. Hunters frequent these woods, you see."


    William admired the beauty of the waterfall, the refreshing spray a welcome contrast to the icy climate of the mountains. ''I''ll have to take a dip here when this is all over,'' he thought.


    The chief led them deeper into the forest, stopping at a patch of muddy ground. "We found some footprints here a few days ago," he said, pointing at the disturbed earth. "But the rain has washed away most of the evidence. They appeared to be humanoid in shape."


    Xavier, who had been observing the scene with a thoughtful expression, finally spoke. "We will do everything in our power to uncover the truth," he assured the chief.


    The village leader smiled gratefully. "I appreciate that, young man. And while you''re at it," he added, "perhaps you could help us with another problem. The forest is overrun with aggressive magical beasts. Thinning their numbers would earn you our eternal gratitude, and additional compensation."


    Two missions weighed upon their young shoulders: unraveling the mystery of the vanishing hunters and culling the overpopulated magical beasts. It was clear that their stay in the village would be an extended one, just as Headmaster Grant had forewarned.


    The village chief, though hospitable, lacked the resources to house them all comfortably. "I apologize, but we do not have sufficient space to accommodate everyone within our homes," he explained, a hint of regret in his voice. "However, we will provide you with tents and ensure you have ample food, water, and shelter from the elements."


    The pleasant weather made the prospect of camping less daunting, and William found himself appreciating the fresh air and the symphony of nature surrounding them. He hoped the favorable conditions would hold.


    Xavier, ever the strategist, decided to prioritize the beast extermination. "We need to venture into the forest to investigate the disappearances," he explained. "Clearing out the excess beasts will make our task safer and more efficient."


    He proposed dividing the group into pairs, a sensible approach that maximized their coverage while minimizing individual risk. However, with seven members in their party, an odd number presented a logistical challenge. Instead of forming a group of three, Xavier declared that William would work alone.


    "Unfortunately, William will have to go solo," Xavier announced, his eyes meeting William''s with an odd intensity. "But you''re more than capable, aren''t you?" He clapped William on the shoulder, a forced smile plastered on his face.


    William bristled at Xavier''s condescending tone and the unsettling glint in his eyes. He sensed an ulterior motive, a deliberate attempt to isolate him. But he kept his suspicions veiled, choosing his battles carefully.


    "I''ll be fine," he replied coolly.


    "Excellent," Xavier said, his smile widening.


    With that, the pairs dispersed into the dense undergrowth, leaving William to face the potentially perilous forest alone. If the chief''s assessment of the beast population was accurate, William was in for a challenging, and possibly dangerous, experience.


    The forest loomed, a dense tapestry of ancient trees and tangled undergrowth. Eerie sounds echoed through the shadowy depths, a constant reminder of the dangers lurking within. Soon, the crackle of spells and the clash of steel reached William''s ears. They''ve already engaged, he realized, his senses sharpening.


    Suddenly, a creature launched itself from the canopy, its sights set on William. It resembled a panther, but with wicked spikes protruding from its back and a sinuous, vine-like tail.


    [Forest Panther] [Estimated Level: 12]


    William assessed the creature''s level, thanks to the System''s handy information. A level 12 beast posed a minor threat, nothing he couldn''t handle.


    "Let''s dance, kitty," he taunted, drawing his steel sword.


    Without resorting to magic, he charged towards the panther, his speed surpassing the creature''s. He appeared beside it in a blur, his sword aimed at its neck with deadly precision.


    But the panther was agile. It twisted its body, causing William''s blade to strike one of its back spikes instead. The impact reverberated through his arm, the sword bouncing harmlessly off the sturdy protrusions.


    "What the¡ª?" William exclaimed, surprised by the creature''s resilience.


    Before he could recover, the panther''s vine-like tail whipped around him, constricting his movements. The beast lunged, its fangs sinking into his right arm.


    "Gah, damn it!" he cursed, pain shooting through his arm.


    But William was undeterred. He dropped his sword and seized the panther''s neck with both hands, his enhanced strength overpowering the creature''s struggles. He squeezed with relentless force, ignoring the pain in his arm, until the panther''s struggles ceased.


    [+900 EXP]


    [Forest Panther Fangs Dropped]


    An item! William stared in surprise as a set of sharp fangs materialized beside the fallen panther. A system message flashed before his eyes.


    [System Feature Unlocked]


    [Inventory Unlocked]


    [The inventory is not infinite, so be careful of what you store inside]


    William''s heart leaped. An inventory! A feature common in many games and stories, but not something he expected to encounter in this world. He pondered its sudden appearance. Was it triggered by obtaining an item? Was it a unique feature of this era? Did others possess this ability?


    He recalled that inventories were often associated with summoned heroes in this world. ''Perhaps that''s why I have one now...'' he mused.


    Regardless of the reason, William was thrilled. An inventory would prove invaluable for storing items and managing his resources.

 Chapter 90 You... You Tamed it?

    Trapped between two formidable foes, William felt a surge of despair. He couldn''t possibly subdue both lizards for the taming ritual. He needed to escape, regroup, and formulate a new plan.Just as he considered his options, two figures appeared at the cave entrance ¨C Xavier and another student.


    "William?" Xavier called out, feigning surprise. "What''s going on here? Look at those lizards!"


    Despite his misgivings about Xavier, William clung to a sliver of hope. "Can you handle one of them?" he shouted back. "I''m pinned down here!"


    Xavier reacted swiftly, but not in the way William expected. He raised his scepter, casting an Earth element spell that conjured a solid barrier, sealing the cave entrance shut.


    William''s heart sank. Xavier had betrayed him, deliberately trapping him with the enraged lizards. A wave of confusion and anger washed over him. What possible motive could Xavier have for such a treacherous act?


    But there was no time to dwell on Xavier''s betrayal. He was now faced with a desperate fight for survival. With his escape route blocked, he had no choice but to confront the two Infant Winged Lizards head-on.


    Uncertainty gnawed at William. Should he focus on the wounded lizard or attempt to break through Xavier''s barrier? Time was of the essence, as both lizards advanced, their roars echoing ominously through the cavern.


    It was a fight for his life. He lunged towards the wounded lizard, his sword raised.


    "Use me," the demonic sword urged. "I will amplify your power and aid in the taming."


    William obeyed, discarding his steel sword and unsheathing the demonic blade. He felt the familiar drain on his energy, but the surge of power was undeniable. A dark aura enveloped him, pulsating with malevolent energy.


    [Demonic Transformation Stage 1 Active]


    [Demonic Energy and Mana will diminish with time]


    A new transformation. Unlike the crazed hunter he had encountered, William retained his clarity and control. His senses sharpened, his attributes surged with demonic power. But like Hero''s Limit, this power came at a cost.


    He couldn''t afford to waste time. He attacked the wounded lizard with a ferocity fueled by desperation and demonic energy. The creature was overwhelmed, unable to defend against his relentless assault.


    William''s sword found its mark, tearing into the lizard''s flesh. The beast retaliated, its claws raking across William''s chest, leaving deep, bloody gashes.


    "You are gravely wounded," the sword warned. "Press the attack. Once I tame this one, the other will submit."


    William gritted his teeth, ignoring the searing pain. He moved with a speed and agility he had never experienced before, his attacks a blur of motion. He struck the lizard repeatedly, weakening it with each blow.


    Finally, he aimed for the kill. His demonic sword plunged into the creature''s right wing, initiating the taming process. Dark energy pulsed through the lizard''s body, its eyes turning an inky black. In seconds, it was subdued.


    The other lizard, sensing the shift in power, halted its advance. A silent communication passed between the two creatures, an acknowledgment of William''s dominance.


    "A fragment of my essence now resides within the tamed lizard," the demonic sword explained. "I control its actions."


    "Incredible!" William exclaimed, marveling at the power he now wielded. He had faced death and emerged victorious, gaining a formidable ally in the process.


    "I require rest to recuperate," the demonic sword said, its voice echoing in William''s mind.


    William, pleased with the successful taming, decided to bestow a name upon his demonic sword. "How about Asura?" he suggested. "Do you like it?"


    "Asura," the lizard repeated, the name resonating with a newfound sentience. "It is a good name." Sear?h the N??elFir§×.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Asura needed time to heal from the wounds sustained in battle. The other lizard, now docile, remained by their side. But the cave, with its oppressive stench and lingering tension, was no place to recover.


    They exited the cavern, working together to dismantle Xavier''s earthen barrier. There was no sign of Xavier or his companion.


    "What will you do about him?" Asura inquired, a hint of anger in his voice.


    "For now, nothing," William replied, his mind racing. "I need to understand his motives."


    He couldn''t allow his anger to distract him from the mission. Besides, confronting Xavier now would be unwise. He needed to regain his strength and assess the situation.


    With Asura at his side, William sought a safe haven for the night. Returning to the village with a tamed lizard in tow seemed imprudent, especially after Xavier''s betrayal. Fortunately, the wilderness offered ample refuge. Asura''s presence alone would deter most creatures.


    They found a clearing near a small cliff, a natural barrier providing an added layer of security.


    "This will do," William declared. "No monsters will approach from the cliff, and we can always jump if necessary."


    He lacked a tent, but the blankets in his backpack would suffice. He spread them on the ground and settled down to rest. The wounds on his chest were deep, but the bandages stemmed the bleeding. The pain had subsided, and the healing process was underway, but he knew it would take time to fully recover.


    William spent the day recuperating, his body slowly mending. He had ample food and water, and Asura''s presence provided a sense of security. Sleep came fitfully that night, the hard ground offering little comfort. But exhaustion eventually claimed him.


    The next morning, he ventured to the river to cleanse his wounds and change the bandages. The gash on his chest, though still unsightly, was healing steadily.


    Asura, his wounds also mending rapidly, followed close behind. "This lizard''s regenerative abilities are remarkable," he observed. "I find this form quite agreeable. Far preferable to being an inert blade."


    "I can imagine," William chuckled. "But what about that transformation I underwent?" he asked, curiosity piqued.


    "Ah, that was the demonic energy within you manifesting," Asura explained. "The more you accumulate, the more potent the transformation will become."


    A new power was always welcome, but William knew he needed to exercise caution. He had much to learn about this demonic energy and its potential consequences.


    Refreshed and reinvigorated, William and Asura set off towards the goblin encampment. As they approached, they noticed a figure lurking in the shadows, observing the goblins from behind a bush.


    It was Xavier. His eyes widened in disbelief when he saw William, accompanied by the tamed lizard. He had assumed William would perish in the cave.


    "William!" he exclaimed, feigning relief. "I knew you were alive!"


    William fought the urge to punch the conniving student. Instead, he played along, feigning ignorance. "Of course, I am. I know you were just trying to help and miscast the spell, right? You''d never intentionally trap me." He offered Xavier a disarming smile.


    Xavier, to William''s astonishment, readily accepted the charade. "Yes, yes, indeed. I''m still learning that spell. My apologies."


    William seethed inwardly. "Are you planning to attack the goblin camp?" he asked, his voice deceptively casual. "We could join forces."


    Xavier opened his mouth to reply, but his eyes fell upon the imposing lizard at William''s side. He froze, fear replacing his feigned concern. He instinctively reached for his scepter, but William quickly interjected. "I tamed it," he explained. "It''s my companion now."


    "You... tamed it?" Xavier stammered, his voice laced with disbelief.

 Chapter 91 Mysterious Cabin

    Xavier''s face paled. Taming a creature like the Infant Winged Lizard was an unheard-of feat, a testament to William''s extraordinary abilities. His plan had backfired spectacularly, leaving him vulnerable and exposed.William, sensing Xavier''s unease, pressed his advantage. "Let''s put this behind us," he said, his voice deceptively friendly. "We have a job to do. Any progress on the missing villagers?"


    "Nothing yet," Xavier mumbled, avoiding William''s gaze. "We''re focusing on clearing the forest first. We eliminated a significant number of beasts yesterday, but this goblin camp remains a threat."


    The student accompanying Xavier shifted uncomfortably, clearly disturbed by the events in the cave. But they were bound by their mission, forced to cooperate despite the underlying tension.


    "I understand," William said, his tone hardening. "Then let''s finish this." S§×arch* The N??eFire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    With a shared nod, they launched their assault on the goblin encampment. Xavier unleashed a barrage of earth spells, summoning massive stones that crushed the goblins with brutal efficiency.


    William and Asura plunged into the heart of the fray, their combined might a whirlwind of destruction. William''s sword danced through the air, slicing through goblin flesh with deadly precision. Asura''s claws and tail ripped through the enemy ranks, sending goblins flying or cleaving them in two.


    The goblins, despite their numbers and crude weaponry, were no match for the coordinated assault. Their camp, once a bustling hub of activity, was reduced to a scene of carnage in a matter of minutes.


    Even the Goblin Shaman, with its superior strength and mystical abilities, fell before their combined might. Xavier, wielding his earth magic with impressive control, and the other student, though less experienced, proved valuable assets in the battle.


    William, driven by his insatiable desire for growth, focused on eliminating as many goblins as possible, maximizing his experience gain. Each kill brought him closer to his next level, fueling his determination.


    With the goblin threat neutralized, they scoured the encampment for clues related to the missing villagers. The humanoid footprints had raised suspicions, but their search yielded nothing. The goblins were not the culprits.


    "What now?" William asked, turning to Xavier.


    "Let''s regroup with the others and assess the situation," Xavier replied, his earlier animosity seemingly forgotten.


    "Back to the village then," William agreed.


    As they entered the village, all eyes turned towards William, or rather, towards the imposing lizard at his side. He explained that he had tamed the creature, eliciting gasps of awe and admiration. Even the villagers were impressed, some expressing a desire to learn the art of beast taming themselves.


    Xavier gathered the group in the village square, seeking updates on their progress. Perhaps someone had stumbled upon a clue during their foray into the forest.


    To their surprise, one student stepped forward, his face etched with uncertainty. "I came across a cabin deep within the woods," he reported. "It looked inhabited, but I didn''t see anyone. Perhaps whoever lives there spotted me and hid."


    A cabin in such a remote location was undoubtedly suspicious. The village chief, who had joined their gathering, frowned. "No one from our village lives in a cabin," he confirmed. "This is troubling news."


    "William," Xavier said, his voice dripping with faux concern, "this cabin could be crucial to finding the missing villagers. You''re the most skilled among us. I think you should investigate."


    William saw through the charade. Xavier was trying to eliminate him, plain and simple. But he masked his anger, choosing his moment for confrontation carefully. I''ll have my revenge, he vowed silently.


    He agreed to investigate, his curiosity piqued by the mysterious cabin. He ventured into the depths of the forest, following the directions provided by the student who had made the discovery.


    The cabin was secluded, nestled deep within the woods. It took William nearly an hour to reach the location, even with prior knowledge of its whereabouts. The structure was well-hidden, shrouded by dense vegetation and positioned near a tranquil pond. Built from weathered wood, it exuded an air of rustic simplicity. A small garden flourished beside the cabin, filled with herbs commonly used in potion-making.


    "Stay here and keep watch," William instructed Asura, leaving the imposing lizard to guard the perimeter. He approached the cabin cautiously, his hand resting on the hilt of his sword. The door creaked open, revealing a sparsely furnished interior. A simple bed, a rough-hewn table, and a few shelves lined the walls. Books and papers lay scattered across the table, evidence of recent activity.


    William''s gaze fell upon the fireplace, where a pot simmered over the glowing embers. Someone had been here very recently. He turned to examine a peculiar marking on the wall, a strange symbol etched into the wood. As his fingers traced the intricate lines, a section of the wall swung inward, revealing a hidden passage.


    Before he could react, a figure emerged from the shadows, a gleaming dagger pressed against his throat. William froze, his eyes widening in surprise. His attacker was a woman, her face framed by raven hair and her eyes flashing with a mixture of fear and determination.


    "Who are you?" she demanded, her voice a low growl. "And what are you doing in my home?"


    William, careful not to provoke his captor, explained his mission, detailing the missing villagers and the discovery of the cabin. The woman listened intently, her expression softening as he spoke.


    "I''ve seen nothing," she admitted, her voice regaining its composure, "but perhaps I can offer some assistance." She stepped back, gesturing towards a steaming bowl on the table. "Would you care for some soup? It''s a simple recipe, but fortifying."


    William, his hunger piqued by the enticing aroma, gratefully accepted. He settled at the table, watching as the woman ladled a generous portion into a wooden bowl.


    "I know nothing of the missing villagers," she continued, her brow furrowed in thought, "but I did witness something unusual a few nights ago."


    "What did you see?" he asked.


    "I can''t be certain," she replied, her brow furrowed in concentration, "but I heard muffled sounds coming from the woods a few nights ago. The kind of sounds one might make if gagged."


    William nodded slowly, intrigued. He still wasn''t sure if he could trust this woman, but the absence of a dagger at his throat was a welcome improvement.


    "Why does no one in the village know you live here?" he asked, his eyes fixed on the untouched bowl of soup before him. He couldn''t shake the feeling that something wasn''t quite right.


    "They''ve never ventured this far into the forest," she explained. "It''s dangerous out here. I survive because I can protect myself."


    Her words held a ring of truth, but William remained cautious. He pressed for more details, asking her to pinpoint the direction from which she had heard the muffled sounds.


    "It came from this direction," she said, pointing towards a barely visible path leading deeper into the woods, "and then moved that way."


    William thanked her, his mind already piecing together a plan. He decided to pursue this lead alone, keeping his discovery a secret from the other students. ''They''ll only slow me down,'' he thought, his determination growing.


    He and Asura followed the path, going deeper into the forest. William hoped that the mystery would soon come to an end.

 Chapter 92 Conspiracy

    The narrow path wound through dense thickets and over gnarled roots, a challenging trek even for William. Asura, with his considerable size, struggled to navigate the overgrown trail. Sear?h the n?vel_Fire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality."Do you think she was being truthful?" William asked, glancing at his reptilian companion.


    Asura, who had listened intently to their conversation from outside the cabin, pondered the question. "She seemed sincere," he replied, "but her presence in this secluded location is unusual. It''s difficult to say for certain."


    William agreed. The woman''s isolation and the mysterious cabin raised suspicions. He resolved to inform the village chief upon his return.


    As they ventured deeper into the forest, the path grew fainter, disappearing altogether in some areas. William relied on his instincts and Asura''s keen senses to guide them forward.


    The forest floor was pristine, undisturbed by human presence. William was certain that no villager had ventured this deep into the woods. Then, a glint of brown beneath a leafy bush caught his eye. A footprint, partially obscured, preserved in the mud. The overhanging foliage had shielded it from the rain, leaving a clear impression.


    A footprint here was undeniably suspicious. William''s pulse quickened, his curiosity piqued. He pressed onward, eager to unravel the mystery. A prickling sensation crept up his spine, a feeling of being watched. He glanced over his shoulder, scanning the shadows, but saw nothing.


    "There''s no one there," Asura assured him, his keen senses detecting no other presence. "It''s just your imagination."


    William hesitated, torn between his instincts and Asura''s reassurance. He decided to trust his companion, pushing aside the unease. He continued forward, his eyes fixed on the path ahead.


    Explore more stories at empire


    A dark opening in the hillside materialized through the dense undergrowth. A cave, its entrance barely large enough for William to squeeze through. Asura, in his current form, would be unable to accompany him.


    "I''ll be with you as the sword" Asura said, his voice echoing in William''s mind. "We can still communicate if you need assistance. But this lizard form will have to remain outside."


    William crouched low, slipping through the narrow cave entrance. The interior was surprisingly spacious and well-lit, with torches casting a warm glow on the rough-hewn walls. Furniture was scattered about ¨C a bed, a desk, and even a strange oven emitting a foul odor. Someone lives here, William realized, his curiosity piqued.


    He was about to investigate further when a muffled sound reached his ears. He followed the noise to a corner of the cave, where he discovered a trapdoor concealed beneath a pile of furs. He lifted it cautiously, the creaking hinges echoing through the cavern. A ladder descended into darkness.


    Apprehension gnawed at him, but William knew he couldn''t ignore this potential lead. He gripped his sword tightly and descended the ladder, his senses alert.


    The ladder led to a damp, subterranean chamber. William''s eyes widened in surprise as he took in the scene before him. Several cells lined the walls, and within one, he recognized a missing villager, bound and unconscious. The other cells were empty.


    "Hey, wake up!" William called out, trying to rouse the captive. But the villager remained unresponsive. William broke the cell door, rushing to the villager''s aid. He tried shaking him awake, but to no avail.


    Frustrated, William hoisted the unconscious villager onto his shoulder and carried him back up the ladder and out of the cave. He laid the villager gently on the soft grass, then returned to the cave to search for clues. He discovered a stack of letters, their contents detailing a deep-seated resentment towards the village and its inhabitants.


    ''One of the villagers is behind this,'' William concluded, his mind reeling from the revelation.


    As he prepared to leave, Asura''s panicked voice echoed in his mind. "I''ve been immobilized! Someone is entering the cave!"


    Before William could make his escape, three figures emerged from the shadows, blocking his path. One was the woman from the cabin, her eyes now cold and calculating. Beside her stood the village chief, his face a mask of betrayal. And to William''s utter astonishment, the third person was Xavier, his supposed ally.


    "Well, well, William," Xavier sneered, a triumphant glint in his eyes. "It seems you''ve stumbled upon our little secret."


    William''s mind reeled. He had walked into a trap, a carefully orchestrated conspiracy involving the very people he had been sent to help. "Chief? You''re involved in this?" he stammered, taking a step back.


    "I still don''t know how you survived those lizards," Xavier continued, ignoring William''s question, "but your luck has run out."


    "Why?" William demanded, his voice laced with confusion and anger. "I thought we were in this together. Why are you doing this?"


    Xavier''s smile widened, revealing a chilling malice. "You see this lovely woman?" he gestured towards his accomplice. "She is my sister. She and the village chief are part of a... secret organization. They needed my help to conceal their activities. Soon, I will join their ranks."


    "What is this organization?" William pressed, his hand instinctively reaching for his sword. "What are you planning?"


    The village chief stepped forward, his face etched with a chilling fanaticism. "We serve a higher power, William," he proclaimed, his voice echoing through the cavern.


    William''s heart pounded. He was trapped, outnumbered, and facing a force he didn''t understand. But surrender was not an option.


    The gravity of the situation settled upon William like a crushing weight. These were not mere bandits or rogue mages; they were fanatics involved in something far more sinister. Kidnapping villagers for dark rituals... the thought chilled him to the bone. He had to escape, to expose their plot and bring them to justice.


    With his back against the wall, William unleashed his full power. He unsheathed the demonic sword, the dark energy surging through his veins, activating the first stage of his demonic transformation.


    [+30% to all attributes]


    The boost was substantial, but he didn''t stop there. He tapped into the depths of his heroic power, pushing his limits beyond their usual constraints, utilizing his S rank skill, Hero''s Limit.


    [+50% to all attributes for 2 minutes]


    His aura flared, an intimidating display of raw power that sent Xavier and his accomplices stumbling backward. They stared in disbelief, their eyes wide with fear and confusion.


    William wasn''t done. He layered his body enhancement spells, amplifying his strength, speed, and resilience. He was a force to be reckoned with, a whirlwind of magic and fury.


    His voice, amplified by the demonic transformation, resonated through the cavern. "I''ll show you true power. I''ll show you what a higher power is."


    William advanced, each step imbued with purpose and power. Two minutes. That''s all he had to dismantle this twisted conspiracy and deliver justice. He felt invincible, a vessel of pure energy ready to unleash its fury.


    Xavier, his bravado crumbling, attempted a desperate plea. "William, we can negotiate," he stammered, his voice trembling. "Our organization can offer you riches, artifacts, anything you desire!"


    William scoffed, his eyes blazing with contempt. "Silence, Xavier. You and your sister will pay for your crimes."


    He would not let them go, especially Xavier, who tried to kill him the other day. That bastard would suffer. William was sure of that.

 Chapter 93 Returning with the Traitor

    William wasted no time. With a burst of speed, he launched himself at the closest enemy - the woman from the cabin. Xavier reacted instantly, summoning a wall of earth to shield his sister, just as he had done in the cave.But this time, it was different. William didn''t slow down. His fist, imbued with incredible force, slammed into the earthen barrier. The wall shattered like glass, the fragments exploding outwards. William continued his relentless advance, closing in on the terrified woman.


    Xavier''s desperate cry, "Be careful!" echoed through the clearing.


    She tried to evade the attack, but it was futile. William''s fist connected with her chest in a devastating blow. A gaping hole appeared where her heart had been, her life extinguished in an instant. Experience new tales on empire


    Even William was stunned by the sheer power he wielded. It was beyond anything he could have imagined.


    Xavier stared in disbelief, his sister''s lifeless body sprawled on the ground. Rage and grief consumed him. "You bastard!" he roared. "I''ll kill you!"


    He raised his staff, arcane energy crackling around him, but William was too fast. A single, brutal punch sent Xavier flying, his ribs and shoulder shattered.


    The village chief, the weakest of the three, watched the carnage unfold, paralyzed with fear. He didn''t know whether to flee or beg for mercy.


    William''s voice, cold and menacing, cut through his panic. "Tell me everything, and I might grant you a swift death." Sear?h the Nov§×l?ire.n(e)t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Desperate to survive, the chief spilled everything he knew. "I''m part of an organization, just like she was, but we''re kept in the dark. We don''t know who leads it or their true faces. Everyone wears masks during the meetings. I swear, it''s the truth!"


    William listened intently, extracting every bit of information. When the chief had nothing left to offer, William delivered his final judgment. "I see. Then die."


    A swift slash of his sword, and the chief''s head rolled to the ground.


    Only Xavier remained, broken and helpless.


    "You''re coming with me," William declared, "to explain all this to Headmaster Grant."


    He found ropes in the cave and bound Xavier securely. Then, he returned to the village, carrying the unconscious villager and his captive. Asura followed close behind.


    The villagers were bewildered by the sight. Most assumed they had been attacked by some unknown force, which explained Xavier''s injuries.


    William, still radiating an aura of barely-contained power, addressed the gathered villagers. His voice, though firm, held a note of somber respect for the lives lost. "The village chief and the woman who attacked us are dead. They were part of a shadowy organization, and Xavier here was also with them." He explained how the chief had confessed his allegiance before meeting his end.


    A wave of murmurs and gasps rippled through the crowd. The villagers, simple folk who had always trusted their leader, were struggling to process this shocking revelation. William continued, "The missing villager is safe, though unconscious. We will learn more when he wakes."


    They brought the unconscious man to a small, tidy hut and laid him on a bed. A local healer, a kind woman with gentle hands and wise eyes, tended to him, assuring William that he would recover soon.


    As the villagers dispersed, whispering amongst themselves, William found a quiet corner to collect his thoughts. Asura, ever vigilant, sat beside him, his presence a comforting weight. He couldn''t shake the feeling that there was more to this story than met the eye. Who was behind this mysterious organization? And what were their true motives?


    The wait was agonizing. William paced restlessly, his mind replaying the events of the day. He thought of the woman he had killed, her face contorted in fear, and the village chief, pleading for his life. The weight of his actions pressed heavily upon him.


    Finally, after what seemed like an eternity, the missing villager stirred. He woke with a start, his eyes wide with terror. But when he saw William, a look of recognition and relief washed over him.


    "You...you saved me," he stammered, his voice weak.


    William nodded. "What happened? Who took you?"


    The villager''s gaze hardened with anger. "It was the chief! He lured me into the forest, then knocked me unconscious. When I woke up, I was tied up in that cave."


    The pieces of the puzzle were falling into place. The chief''s betrayal, the woman in the cabin, it was all connected to this shadowy organization. But who were they, and what did they want with the academy?


    With the truth revealed and the immediate danger contained, a sense of calm settled over the village. The villagers, though still shaken, were grateful for William''s intervention. They offered him and the other students their hospitality, insisting they stay the night before returning to the academy.


    The next morning, after a night of fitful sleep, the students bid farewell to the villagers. They carried a mix of emotions with them: relief at the rescue, sorrow for the lives lost, and a lingering unease about the unknown forces at play.


    The journey back to the academy was a somber one. The students, usually boisterous and full of energy, were subdued, lost in their own thoughts. William, burdened by the weight of his actions and the secrets he carried, walked in silence, his gaze fixed on the winding path ahead.


    Three days later, they reached the imposing gates of the academy, perched atop the mountain. Headmaster Grant, his face etched with concern, greeted them with a mixture of relief and apprehension.


    William recounted the events of the past few days, detailing the attack, the deaths of the village chief and the woman, and the chief''s confession about the organization. He also revealed Xavier''s involvement, explaining how he had been captured and brought back to the academy.


    Headmaster Grant listened intently, his expression growing graver with each revelation. When William finished, he sighed heavily. "This is troubling news indeed," he said. "It seems we have underestimated the reach of this organization."


    He turned to Xavier, who stood silently, his gaze fixed on the ground. "Xavier," Headmaster Grant said, his voice stern, "you will be confined to the academy dungeon while we investigate this matter further."


    Xavier offered no resistance. He allowed himself to be led away, his face a mask of defeat.


    Headmaster Grant then addressed the other students. "I commend you all for your bravery and resourcefulness in this difficult situation. I''ll prepare your rewards, but for now, rest."


    News of Xavier''s treachery and his connection to the shadowy organization spread through the academy like wildfire. Within hours, everyone knew about the attempted murder, the secret cult, and William''s extraordinary feat of taming the Infant Winged Lizard.


    Marcel, ever the loyal friend, visited William in his room, concern etched on his face.


    "You look awful," Marcel remarked, taking in William''s pale complexion and weary posture.


    William, still recovering from the aftereffects of the demonic transformation and Hero''s Limit, managed a weak grin. "Don''t I know it," he said, his voice raspy. "That was the worst mission ever. What did I miss while I was out of commission?"


    "Nothing important," Marcel assured him. "But I have to know... what''s the deal with that lizard outside? How did you tame it? Everyone''s talking about it."


    "Oh, you mean Asura?" William replied, a touch of pride in his voice. "It wasn''t that difficult, actually. He''s quite friendly, once you get to know him."


    "Asura, huh?" Marcel mused, scratching his chin. "That''s a pretty cool name. So, you just... what, walked up to it and said, ''Hey, wanna be friends?''" He chuckled, but his eyes held genuine curiosity.


    William grinned, enjoying the bewildered look on Marcel''s face. "Not quite," he replied, choosing to keep the details of the taming process to himself. "It involved a bit of... persuasion." He winked, leaving Marcel to ponder the cryptic response.


    "Well, whatever you did, it clearly worked," Marcel conceded, nodding towards the window where Asura could be seen basking in the afternoon sun. "That thing looks like it could take on a whole army."


    "He''s definitely a valuable ally," William agreed, a flicker of pride in his voice. "Especially with people like Xavier lurking about."


    Marcel''s expression turned serious. "Speaking of Xavier... what''s going to happen to him? And what about that organization he was involved with?"


    William sighed, the weight of the situation settling upon him once more. "I don''t know, Marcel. Headmaster Grant is investigating, trying to uncover the extent of their reach. As for Xavier... I suspect he''ll face severe consequences for his actions."


    "He deserves it," Marcel declared, his voice firm. "Trying to kill you like that... it''s unforgivable."


    William nodded, appreciating his friend''s support. "I''m just glad it''s over," he said, leaning back against the pillows. "For now, at least. I have a feeling this is just the beginning."

 Chapter 94 More Training, and Academy Secrets

    It took William nearly two weeks to fully recover from the combined strain of Hero''s Limit and the demonic transformation.He had anticipated a period of weakness, but the extent of his exhaustion surprised him. During this time, he was unable to practice magic, limited to attending classes for the theoretical instruction. Enjoy exclusive adventures from empire


    He spent his days conversing with Marcel and immersing himself in non-magical literature, giving his body time to mend.


    One afternoon, William and Marcel found themselves in the academy library, discussing the peculiarities of their surroundings.


    "Lincoln is such an oddity," Marcel remarked, leaning back in his chair. "I still can''t figure him out. While you were recovering, I tried to observe him, but he barely does anything all day. Just eats, reads some letters... that''s it."


    "Maybe he''s just a really dedicated reader?" William suggested, though the explanation felt flimsy even to him. Lincoln''s presence at the academy was a puzzle. He didn''t teach, he didn''t seem involved in research, and yet he held the title of Professor. What was his purpose?


    "I guess," Marcel said with a shrug. "But it''s still strange, don''t you think? He''s like a ghost, always lurking in the background."


    "He does seem to be constantly watching, observing," William agreed, a sense of unease settling over him. "As if he''s waiting for something."


    "Waiting for what?" Marcel wondered aloud.


    William''s mind flashed back to the encounter in the library, Lincoln''s late-night wanderings, and his suspicious request for secrecy. "I don''t know," he admitted, a shiver crawling down his spine. "But I have a feeling it''s not good."


    A thoughtful silence fell between them as they contemplated the enigma that was Professor Lincoln. William picked up a book on ancient Aethelian history, idly flipping through its pages.


    But his thoughts remained preoccupied with the enigmatic professor and the growing sense that something was amiss at Snowpeak Academy.


    A silver lining emerged from the turmoil of the past weeks. Asura had fully recovered, granting William access to a magnificent flying mount. Marcel, upon learning of this development, bombarded William with pleas to experience flight, his enthusiasm bordering on obsession. William, though tempted, knew he couldn''t simply abandon the academy. Their aerial adventures would have to wait.


    One day, Headmaster Grant summoned William to his office for a private meeting.


    "You deserve a reward for your service to the village," Grant declared, his expression a mix of gratitude and admiration. "What would you desire? I have several options at my disposal."


    "Options?" William echoed, his curiosity piqued. He hadn''t considered requesting a reward, but perhaps Grant had something unique to offer.


    "How about a rare spell tome?" Grant suggested. "We possess a unique body enhancement manual here at the academy."


    He described the tome, a compilation of various spells woven into a single cohesive technique. Its rank remained undefined, as no one had successfully mastered its intricacies.


    "It''s an ancient text," Grant admitted. "I know of no one who has successfully learned it, but it''s yours if you want it." He rose from his chair. "Wait here. I''ll retrieve it for you."


    William''s interest was piqued. A unique body enhancement tome, potentially more powerful than any he currently possessed? This was a reward worth having. He waited patiently as Grant retrieved the tome from a locked cabinet, its worn leather cover hinting at its age and the secrets it held within.


    "Here it is," Grant said, presenting the tome to William. "Handle it with care. It''s a powerful artifact."


    William carefully took the tome, his fingers tracing the faded inscription on the cover. He could sense the potent energy emanating from within, a chaotic blend of different magical disciplines. It was a challenge he couldn''t resist.


    "Thank you, Headmaster Grant," William said, his eyes gleaming with excitement. "I won''t disappoint you."


    Grant nodded, a hint of a smile playing on his lips. "I trust you, William. You have proven yourself to be a capable and resourceful mage. I believe you have the potential to unlock the secrets of this tome."


    William returned to his room, eager to delve into the mysteries of his newfound prize. He settled into a comfortable chair, the tome open before him. The script was archaic, the diagrams complex, and the instructions cryptic. It was a daunting challenge, even for someone with William''s advanced knowledge and magical aptitude.


    He spent hours deciphering the text, his mind working tirelessly to unravel the intricate web of spells and incantations. The tome was a puzzle, a labyrinth of interconnected magical theories and practices. It demanded not just rote memorization, but a deep understanding of the underlying principles.


    As he progressed, William realized that the tome wasn''t merely a collection of spells; it was a holistic approach to body enhancement, a way to harmonize the different aspects of his physical and magical being. It incorporated elements of strengthening, agility, resilience, and even subtle manipulations of internal energy flows. S~ea??h the nov§×lF~ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    He began practicing the techniques, starting with the most basic exercises. The movements were unfamiliar, the mana manipulation challenging, and the results initially underwhelming. But William was persistent, driven by an insatiable curiosity and a desire to master this unique form of magic.


    Days turned into weeks, and William''s dedication paid off. He gradually gained proficiency in the techniques, his body responding to the subtle manipulations of mana and energy. He felt stronger, more agile, and more resilient. The chaotic energy within the tome began to harmonize, aligning with his own magical signature.


    The tome''s power was enigmatic, its effects subtle and profound. The System remained silent, offering no notifications of new spells or attribute increases. It was as if the transformation was occurring on a deeper level, beyond the System''s current comprehension.


    In the meantime, William diligently practiced the invisibility spell, chipping away at its complexities. Mastery seemed an impossible feat, but he managed to achieve a rudimentary understanding, enough to cast a crude version of the spell. He and Marcel could now cloak themselves in invisibility for a brief period.


    "One minute?" Marcel questioned, his brow furrowed with concern. "Will that be enough time?"


    "That depends on you," William replied with a smirk. "You''re the one who knows the location of the secret passage."


    "True, true," Marcel conceded. "We can test it tonight. I hear the professors will be... indisposed."


    "Indisposed?"


    "There''s a festival tonight," Marcel explained. "A celebration of some sort. You and I will abstain from the festivities, of course. We need to be at our best for our exploration."


    William had been so engrossed in his training that he was unaware of the upcoming event. This was their chance, a window of opportunity to delve into the academy''s hidden depths.


    As the afternoon progressed, the academy grounds transformed into a festive scene. Students gathered around bonfires, their laughter and singing echoing through the courtyard. William and Marcel, however, remained vigilant, avoiding the merriment and conserving their energy.


    Nightfall brought a hush over the academy. The revelers, their spirits dampened by excessive indulgence, stumbled back to their dormitories.


    William and Marcel left the dorm, their eyes set on the main building of the academy.


    "That''s where the passage is," Marcel whispered, "Let''s circle around and enter through the back."

 Chapter 95 Exploration Underground

    The academy was unusually still, the silence amplified by the lingering fatigue of the previous night''s revelry. William learned that the annual festival commemorated the founding of Snowpeak Academy, a tradition seemingly absent in the future iteration he knew.They moved through the shadows, utilizing the foliage and the darkness as cover. When they reached an exposed section of the courtyard, Marcel turned to William, a sense of urgency in his eyes.


    "Now''s the time," he whispered.


    William nodded, summoning his limited mastery of the invisibility spell.


    [Minor Invisibility (A Rank): Turn you and anyone around you invisible for a maximum of 1 minute]


    [Cost: 40 Mana]


    One minute was all they had to cross the open ground undetected. He cast the spell, their forms shimmering and fading into the darkness. They hurried across the open space, their footsteps silent against the cobblestones.


    The academy now had guards patrolling the grounds, a security measure absent before. The invisibility spell, despite its limitations, was crucial for their infiltration.


    Once inside the main building, they breathed a sigh of relief. The halls were deserted, the silence broken only by the distant creak of floorboards.


    "This way," Marcel whispered, beckoning William to follow.


    William, however, held him back. "We need to be cautious," he warned, recalling his late-night encounter with Professor Lincoln. "What if there are other professors lurking about?"


    "You''re right," Marcel agreed, his excitement tempered by a newfound caution. "Let''s not ruin this now."


    They moved through the darkened corridors, their senses heightened. Every sound sent a jolt of apprehension through them. But the sounds were merely the whispers of the wind and the settling of the ancient structure.


    They reached a familiar door, the entrance to the academy''s lavatory.


    "Why are we here?" William asked, his brow furrowed in confusion.


    "This is where the secret passage is," Marcel explained, a mischievous grin spreading across his face. "Can you believe it? The architect was a genius. I stumbled upon it while taking a shit."


    "I don''t want to know that," William said, a disgusted expression on his face.


    The passage wasn''t inside a toilet, thankfully. It was located near the sink. Marcel revealed a button hidden underneath. When pressed, a panel on the wall slid open.


    "No way no one has found this yet," William said, surprised. S~ea??h the NovelFire.net* website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "There are multiple bathrooms in the school. No one uses this one," Marcel explained.


    That explained why it remained undiscovered, though William doubted it would stay that way for long.


    With the passage revealed, it was time to explore.


    "Have you ever been inside?" William asked, curious about the secret area.


    Marcel nodded. "Yes, but I didn''t venture far. It''s a little creepy."


    They entered the passage. William cast a candlelight spell to illuminate the space.


    A staircase descended¡ªa typical feature of secret passages. They proceeded cautiously, focused on their footing.


    Their initial fear of being discovered by guards or professors had faded. Now, a new fear arose: what if the place was dangerous? Could there be monsters lurking within?


    They descended for about five minutes before reaching a stone room of decent size. Cobwebs clung to the walls, and a few old crates lay scattered about.


    "This looks like a storage room," William observed.


    "Yep. That''s what I thought."


    They approached the only door in the room and pushed it open. Beyond lay a hallway with multiple rooms on either side. It resembled an academy. William, initially skeptical of Marcel''s claim, now believed him.


    "What the hell is this place?" William exclaimed. "This really does look like an academy. Did you ever talk to Grant? Maybe ask him about the school''s construction?"


    "I did. There was nothing here when construction first started. I know because I was here helping them."


    "You what?"


    Marcel smiled, slightly embarrassed. "You know the journey from where I live is long, right? I heard about the construction and came to help to earn some money. I didn''t want to use my family''s."


    William sensed underlying issues with Marcel''s family and refrained from further questions. He knew the academy was new but hadn''t realized how recent.


    "Did you explore any of the rooms here?" William asked, his gaze shifting between the many doors lining the hallway.


    There were many rooms within.


    Marcel, however, hadn''t explored them. "This is the farthest I came. When I saw this alone, it scared me, so I turned back."


    William didn''t blame him. He would have been scared too.


    "Let''s explore together then," William said. "No need to split up. We have plenty of time."


    Marcel liked the idea. He wouldn''t want to be alone down there.


    The first room on the right resembled a classroom, but the furniture was destroyed, except for the professor''s sturdy stone table near the board.


    Other similar rooms reinforced their theory of an old academy.


    "Do you think this academy was built on the surface where we are building now, or was it always underground?" Marcel asked.


    "Underground," William answered confidently.


    "Why?"


    He pointed at the room''s walls. "What''s missing?"


    Marcel thought for a moment, then realized. "Oh, right. There are no windows."


    The entire place lacked windows. It was an underground academy.


    But what academy was it? William had never read about anything like it. It looked abandoned.


    They had many questions but no answers. Eventually, they found the library.


    It contained few books. Most were gone.


    "They took the books and scrolls before leaving," William said. "Classic."


    But some remained. William opened one, finding the writing completely foreign.


    "I have no idea what this is," he said, tossing the book to Marcel. "Do you?"


    Marcel glanced at it. "Nope. Unlike any writing I''ve ever seen. But we can take it back and research it. It might give us some answers."


    William nodded. After collecting the remaining eight books, they continued exploring, discovering a strange room.


    It had an altar and a chalice, resembling a ritual chamber.


    "This could mean this academy practiced the dark arts," William said.


    That would explain the academy''s hidden location. No one condoned the practice of dark arts. Anyone aware of their existence would seek to eliminate them.


    But an entire academy underground, atop a mountain? William suspected they had survived for centuries, delving into forbidden knowledge.


    They explored the remaining rooms, finding most empty or uninteresting. That changed when William discovered an office.


    He searched for anything useful, finding a letter tucked away in a drawer.


    Written in a familiar language, it was addressed to someone within the academy, likely a high-ranking individual.


    "Look at this," he said.


    Marcel joined him, and they read the letter together.


    An unknown friend warned the recipient that their location had been discovered and urged them to leave. They suggested relocating to one of the archipelago islands, deeming it safer than the mainland.


    After reading the letter, William and Marcel shared a common desire: to visit the Snowpeak branch on that island and study there.


    "This is valuable information," Marcel said. "We should head back."


    As they prepared to leave, a chilling grunt echoed from the hallway outside. William and Marcel stood there, not knowing that to do.


    "This doesn''t sound human," William whispered, "let''s hide, and prepare for a fight."

 Chapter 96 Sharing Knowledge, and Return

    The only hiding spot was the office closet, surprisingly well-maintained. They wasted no time taking cover. Moments later, someone entered the office. S§×ar?h the nov§×lF~ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.A flesh golem, decaying parts spilling from an open wound in its belly. The creature was grotesque, its putrid smell filling the room. William nearly vomited but managed to restrain himself. The golem was powerful, level 30¡ªfar beyond anything William had encountered. Fighting it seemed like a terrible idea.


    The golem lumbered around the office before returning to the hallway and entering other rooms, seemingly searching for them.


    This was their chance. William and Marcel slipped out of the closet and made for the exit. They hastened their steps, no longer concerned about making noise. The passage was too narrow for the golem; if they reached it, they would be safe.


    The golem noticed them and gave chase! The sight of the massive flesh golem pursuing them was terrifying.


    "Let''s go, Marcel, quick!" William urged, not looking back.


    They didn''t stop. After reaching the storage room, they opened the passage, slipped through, and sealed it again.


    They were safe. The golem couldn''t enter, but they wouldn''t relax until they were back in the academy bathroom.


    Once there, they collapsed on the floor, gasping for breath. "That was close. What the hell was that thing?" Marcel exclaimed.


    William had a few theories. "Probably a guardian left behind. Maybe not the only one. If we go back, we need to be careful."


    The academy''s occupants were long gone, but that didn''t mean the place was safe. They were fortunate the golem couldn''t fit through the passage. What if it had been another type of creature? A powerful specter that could pass through walls? They would be dead.


    Marcel looked apprehensive. "No way I''m going back there. That place is dangerous, and I want to stay alive."


    They returned to the dorm, retracing their steps to the bathroom.


    Each retreated to their own room. William collapsed onto his bed and slept soundly through the night.


    The next day, before classes started, William went to the library. It was early morning, and the library was empty. Most students were still asleep. He hoped to find something that would help him decipher the language in the books he''d recovered.


    With one of the books in hand, William searched for texts on different civilizations and languages, focusing on ancient cultures, hoping for answers.


    He had two hours before anyone else arrived¡ªample time to browse the shelves and look for similar symbols.


    He found nothing. There were languages from ancient civilizations, but none resembled the writing in his books.


    ''How is this even possible?'' William wondered, feeling his research had been fruitless.


    Still, he focused on the positives: he knew the academy had relocated to one of the archipelago islands, and he planned to go there. Perhaps he would find answers there.


    Even Asura, a demon of unknown age, was unfamiliar with the language.


    "Remember when I said my memory is a mess? Maybe I knew about this before, but I don''t recall now," Asura admitted.


    "So basically, you don''t know? Why not just say that without making excuses?" William retorted.


    "Shut up, kid. Let me say this to feel less useless."


    "Alright, alright. Sorry."


    William left the library and headed to class. It was Professor Kurt''s class, and as usual, he had planned student duels.


    "William, you don''t have to participate. You''re still recovering," Professor Kurt said, then added, "Honestly, even with both arms tied behind your back, I think you could win against these students."


    The other students weren''t offended. They aspired to be as skilled as William, and some even asked for advice.


    William took the opportunity to teach them, helping them improve.


    Two students, sisters studying together, benefited greatly from his instruction. They were both mages specializing in body enhancement magic, just like William.


    He helped everyone, of course, but he had more to offer the sisters due to their shared magical affinity.


    "Focus on your breathing," he advised. "It might seem irrelevant, but your body should be connected to your mana flow. If you don''t breathe properly, the spell won''t be as effective."


    The students focused solely on using mana to enhance their bodies, but that was only part of the equation. Mana was essential, but their bodies needed to work in harmony with it.


    William also recommended adding exercises to their routine, stating it would make everything easier. He extended this advice to all the mages. Professor Kurt, intrigued, called William aside for a conversation.


    "Physical exercise, even for mages who don''t use body enhancement spells?" Kurt asked. "Are you sure this is beneficial? Not that I''m complaining, I''m just curious about the reasoning."


    Information traveled slowly in those times, a fact William used to his advantage. "A mentor of mine taught me this. He was a powerful mage. He believed a strong body strengthens the mind."


    The quote wasn''t accurate, but it served its purpose. Professor Kurt seemed impressed.


    "That makes a lot of sense," Kurt said. "I''ll add exercises to my routine. Thank you for your insights, William."


    Everyone viewed William favorably. He was happy to share his knowledge.


    But what impressed him most was Professor Kurt''s eagerness to learn. That, William thought, was the mark of a true mentor. He admired Kurt''s humility.


    Weeks passed. William attended classes daily and practiced magic in his free time.


    One day, Headmaster Grant summoned him, explaining that Xavier wished to speak with him.


    William headed towards the academy dungeon, curious about what Xavier wanted to discuss.


    Suddenly, the timer ran out. Three months had passed in the past, and William abruptly returned to the present.


    He materialized back in his familiar bedroom, a wave of relief washing over him. It was good to be back.


    But the situation at the academy deteriorated in the following days. The spy incident and the looming war had everyone on edge. However, William soon found a welcome distraction: his role as Professor James'' research assistant.

 Chapter 97 Strange Happenings in the Academy

    "This artifact is incredible," Professor James said, his eyes fixed on a vase displayed on a table. "It might look ordinary, but it can create an endless supply of water. Isn''t that amazing?"William, assisting Professor James in studying their findings from the elven ruins, was equally astonished when he learned about the artifact''s power.


    "Are you serious?" William asked. "How does it work?"


    "I don''t know yet, but what intrigues me most is that it doesn''t require mana to function. That''s a rare trait among artifacts," James explained.


    The artifacts recovered from the ruins were impressive, but James''s primary objective for William was to uncover the identities of the students'' killers.


    "How am I supposed to learn more about them?" William asked. "I can''t just leave the academy whenever I want."


    "I know," Professor James acknowledged, "but you''ll be leaving for the capital soon, remember? For that army conscription. The capital is the best place to seek answers. I want you to seize this opportunity."


    James retrieved a small notebook from his room.


    "This contains information about my contacts in the capital. Speak to them while you''re there."


    William accepted the notebook. Professor James couldn''t leave the academy, and neither could most students, especially with the war looming. But William had a chance that James didn''t.


    "I''ll do my best," William assured him.


    After leaving James''s office, William encountered Altair, who wore a serious expression.


    "Hey, bro," Altair said, "I think Tholfnir is acting a little strange."


    "What do you mean?" William asked.


    Altair was a creature of habit, always following the same routine. He woke up at the same time each day and often saw Tholfnir every morning.


    He explained that he used to see Tholfnir almost daily in a specific spot in the courtyard. Tholfnir would sit there and watch the sunrise in the early morning hours, admiring the flowers.


    But that had changed. Altair hadn''t seen Tholfnir there recently.


    "That doesn''t sound like a big deal," William said, dismissing the observation.


    However, Altair''s next words gave William pause.


    "Didn''t you tell me spies impersonated students using magic? What if someone is pretending to be Tholfnir?"


    William felt a chill crawl down his spine. The possibility, however remote, sent a shiver of unease through him. He had almost forgotten about the spies. "Did you notice anything else different about him?" he asked, his voice low.


    Altair shook his head. "Not really. He seems the same, but...it''s just that missing piece of his routine that feels off."


    William pondered this new information. Tholfnir, the stoic and predictable Headmaster, altering his routine? It was indeed strange. He decided to keep an eye on Tholfnir, observing him from a distance, trying to detect any inconsistencies in his behavior.


    The next few days were a blur of activity. William immersed himself in his studies, trying to push the unsettling thoughts about Tholfnir and the spies to the back of his mind. He spent his free time practicing his swordsmanship, honing his skills for the upcoming conscription. He also discreetly observed Tholfnir whenever possible, but the Headmaster seemed his usual self, conducting his duties with his customary efficiency and aloofness.


    One evening, as William was returning to his dormitory after a grueling training session, a messenger owl arrived, carrying a small, sealed letter. It was from Tholfnir, reminding him about their upcoming trip to the capital for the conscription.


    "Finally," William muttered to himself. This was his chance to investigate the murders and hopefully find some answers. He had assumed Tholfnir would accompany him, but the letter stated that someone else would be joining him instead.


    William''s heart sank as he read the name: Professor James.


    Why would Tholfnir send Professor James? Wasn''t the Headmaster the logical choice to accompany a student to such an important event? A wave of suspicion washed over William. Could Altair be right? Could someone be impersonating Tholfnir? Sear?h the Novel?ire(.)ne*t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    He needed to talk to Altair immediately. He rushed towards his friend''s dormitory, his mind racing with questions and doubts. This new development had just thrown everything into chaos.


    He burst into Altair''s room, startling his friend who was engrossed in a book about ancient runes. "Altair, you were right! Something''s definitely wrong with Tholfnir!"


    Altair looked up, his brow furrowed in concern. "What happened? Did you see something?"


    William relayed the contents of the letter, emphasizing the unexpected change in travel companions. "It makes no sense for Tholfnir to send Professor James with me. He''s the Headmaster, he should be the one to go!"


    Altair''s eyes widened. "This is strange indeed. But why would someone impersonate Tholfnir? What could they possibly gain from it?"


    "I don''t know," William admitted, pacing the room. "But I have a bad feeling about this. It''s like he wants to stay at the academy for some reason..." He stopped pacing and turned to Altair, his expression serious. "Altair, I need you to be extra vigilant. Keep an eye on Tholfnir, and write down anything, anything at all, that seems out of place. Even the smallest detail could be important."


    Altair nodded, his face grim. "I will. But be careful yourself, William. This whole situation seems dangerous."


    "I will," William assured him. "And try to be discreet. We don''t want to alert whoever this imposter might be."


    He left Altair''s room, his mind a whirlwind of thoughts. The trip to the capital, which had initially seemed like an opportunity to uncover the truth, now felt like a step into the unknown. He couldn''t shake the feeling that he was walking into a carefully laid trap, and that he was only beginning to unravel a much larger conspiracy.


    William sought out Professor James, who was also surprised about the assignment. He hadn''t expected to be chosen. While William felt apprehensive, James was elated.


    "This is a fantastic opportunity, William," James exclaimed. "We can work together to gather information about the students'' killers."


    ''Should I tell him about my suspicions?'' William wondered.


    He decided against sharing his theories with James. What if the professor was involved in the conspiracy?


    "Yes, it''s great!" William said, feigning enthusiasm. "We should prepare for the trip immediately!"

 Chapter 98 Going to Ignis

    William didn''t need to prepare anything for the journey. Professor James, brimming with excitement, took care of everything.They would travel to the kingdom''s capital on a fire salamander, a flying mount that James owned. The creature was massive, with four wings and, according to James, the ability to breathe fire and a poisonous tongue.


    "I found this little one near a volcano," he explained. "It''s quite rare."


    William sensed the creature''s immense power, though his system couldn''t discern its level or other details.


    They gathered their belongings, eager to depart. James, wanting to leave as soon as possible, scheduled their departure for that afternoon.


    A nagging worry plagued William. His mind kept returning to Altair''s words. What if Tholfnir was an imposter? What were they plotting at the academy? He couldn''t focus with those thoughts swirling in his mind.


    Their journey began, a long voyage ahead. The capital of the Black Flame Kingdom, known as Ignis, was the largest city in the realm. It was a hub for mages, a place to exchange knowledge and trade magical items.


    There were no magic academies in Ignis, except for a training ground for mages in the kingdom''s army.


    Discover stories with empire S§×arch* The N?velFire(.)net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    The fire salamander, with William and Professor James perched on its broad back, launched itself into the sky. The ground receded quickly, the familiar sights of the academy shrinking into miniature. William gripped the reins, a thrill coursing through him despite his anxieties. He had never flown before, and the sensation was exhilarating.


    "Hold on tight!" James shouted over the rushing wind, a wide grin splitting his face. "This is just the beginning!"


    The wind whipped at William''s hair and clothes, and the world stretched out beneath them like an unfurling map. Forests became patches of green, mountains transformed into wrinkles on the earth''s skin, and rivers snaked like silver ribbons through the landscape.


    As the sun began its descent, painting the sky in hues of orange and purple, James steered the salamander towards a plateau overlooking a vast lake.


    "We''ll camp here for the night," he announced, guiding the creature towards a smooth landing.


    William dismounted, his legs a bit wobbly from the unfamiliar sensation of flight. The air was crisp and cool, carrying the scent of pine and damp earth. He helped James unload their supplies ¨C tents, bedrolls, food, and a few essential tools.


    "It''s beautiful," William remarked, gazing at the serene landscape. The lake shimmered under the fading light, reflecting the fiery colors of the sky.


    "It is," James agreed, a hint of melancholy in his voice. "Reminds me of why we do what we do. To protect this beauty, this world."


    They set up camp, James expertly building a fire while William arranged their sleeping gear. As darkness enveloped them, the flames of the campfire danced, casting flickering shadows on their faces. They ate a simple meal of dried meat and fruit, discussing their plans for the journey and their hopes for finding answers in Ignis.


    "I have a few contacts in the city guard," James shared, poking at the embers with a stick. "They might be able to help us track down those responsible for the attack in the ruins."


    William nodded, intrigued. "Do you think they''ll have any leads?"


    James shrugged. "It''s worth a shot. They have access to information and resources we don''t. Hopefully, they can provide some clues about the attackers'' identities or whereabouts."


    "That would be a huge help," William said, feeling a flicker of hope. "I''m eager to learn more about those who attacked us."


    "Me too," James said, his expression grim. "Those responsible need to be brought to justice."


    The night deepened, the fire crackling softly as the two men settled into their bedrolls. William, despite his exhaustion, found sleep elusive. The image of the flesh golem haunted his thoughts, and Altair''s words about Tholfnir echoed in his mind. He tossed and turned, the anxieties gnawing at him.


    Just as he was finally drifting off, a guttural roar shattered the silence. William sat up, his heart pounding. James was already on his feet, his hand instinctively reaching for his staff.


    "What was that?" William whispered, his voice trembling slightly.


    "Sounds like a wyvern," James muttered, peering into the darkness. "Stay close."


    A pair of glowing eyes pierced the night, followed by the leathery wings of a large, reptilian creature circling overhead. The wyvern landed a short distance away, its clawed feet scraping against the rock. It let out another roar, its breath steaming in the cool air.


    William felt a surge of fear, but James remained calm. He raised his staff, a surge of mana crackling around him.


    "Luminos!" he incanted, and a blinding light erupted from the staff, illuminating the wyvern in stark detail.


    The creature snarled, its eyes narrowed in fury. It lunged at James, its jaws snapping. James sidestepped the attack, his staff glowing brighter.


    "Inferno!" he shouted, and a jet of fire erupted from the staff, striking the wyvern in the chest.


    The creature shrieked, its scales smoking from the intense heat. It retreated, flapping its wings in agitation. James pressed his attack, casting a series of spells that bombarded the wyvern with fire, ice, and lightning. "Glacies! Fulgur!"


    William watched in awe, the power of James''s magic both terrifying and exhilarating. He had never witnessed such a display of magical prowess.


    The wyvern, overwhelmed by the relentless assault, finally succumbed, crashing to the ground with a heavy thud. James, panting slightly, lowered his staff, the light fading.


    "That takes care of that," he said, a hint of satisfaction in his voice.


    William, still reeling from the encounter, could only nod in agreement. They returned to their campfire, the adrenaline slowly subsiding.


    "That was..." William began, struggling to find the right words.


    "Intense?" James offered, a wry smile playing on his lips.


    "Yeah, intense," William agreed. "I''ve never seen anything like it."


    "Just a taste of what''s out there," James said, his gaze fixed on the flickering flames. "This world is full of wonders and dangers, William. And sometimes, they''re one and the same."


    They spent the rest of the night alert, but no other creatures disturbed their rest. The next morning, they packed their belongings and resumed their journey, the encounter with the wyvern a stark reminder of the perils that awaited them.


    As they flew over a dense forest, William noticed something strange. The trees below seemed to be moving in an unnatural pattern, as if something large was pushing through them.


    "Professor," he said, pointing towards the forest. "Look."


    James followed his gaze, his brow furrowing. "What is that?"


    The trees parted, and a colossal creature emerged from the forest. It was unlike anything William had ever seen, a towering behemoth with thick, gnarled limbs and a head that resembled a grotesque fusion of animal and plant. Its skin was covered in moss and vines, and its eyes glowed with an eerie light.


    The creature let out a deafening roar, shaking the very ground beneath them. The fire salamander shrieked in fear, its wings faltering.


    "Hold on!" James yelled, struggling to control the panicked creature.


    The behemoth''s roar echoed through the air, a guttural sound that sent shivers down William''s spine. The fire salamander, sensing the immense danger, thrashed its wings, ready to take flight.


    "We need to get out of here!" James yelled, his voice strained. "This thing is far beyond our capabilities!"


    He urged the salamander upwards, and the creature, with powerful beats of its wings, ascended quickly, leaving the behemoth far below.


    "That was too close," William muttered, wiping the sweat from his brow.


    "Agreed," James said, his voice still shaky. "I''ve never encountered anything like that before. It was... monstrous."


    They continued their journey, the encounter with the behemoth casting a shadow over their spirits. The once exhilarating flight now felt fraught with danger, the vast landscape hiding unknown threats.


    As dusk approached, they spotted a small, isolated tavern nestled amidst a cluster of trees. Smoke curled from its chimney, promising warmth and respite.


    "Let''s stop there for the night," James suggested, guiding the salamander towards the tavern.


    They dismounted, stiff and weary from the day''s events. The tavern, a quaint, wooden structure with a thatched roof, welcomed them with the inviting aroma of roasted meat and ale.


    Inside, a handful of patrons occupied the rough-hewn tables, their conversations hushed and their faces etched with weariness. A buxom woman with fiery red hair and a warm smile greeted them from behind the bar.


    "Welcome, travelers," she said, her voice husky and inviting. "What can I get for you?"


    James ordered ale and stew, while William, his appetite diminished by anxiety, opted for a simple bowl of soup. As they waited for their meal, a young woman approached their table, her eyes filled with a mixture of hope and desperation.


    "Excuse me, sirs," she began, her voice trembling slightly. "I couldn''t help but overhear that you''re traveling to Ignis."


    James nodded, his gaze curious. "We are. Why do you ask?"


    "I... I need to get to the capital," she explained, her voice barely above a whisper. "My father is ill, and I need to reach him before it''s too late."


    She looked at them with pleading eyes. "I know this is a lot to ask, but I would be eternally grateful if you could grant me passage on your... magnificent creature."


    James, his heart touched by her plight, readily agreed. "Of course, you can join us. We have plenty of room."


    The young woman''s face lit up with relief. "Thank you, sir! You''re a lifesaver!"


    William, who had been silently observing the exchange, found himself captivated by the young woman''s beauty. Her long, flowing hair, her delicate features, and her expressive eyes held him spellbound. He remained silent, however, content to admire her from a distance.


    They spent the night at the tavern, enjoying the hearty food and the company of their fellow travelers. The young woman, whose name was Gwyneth, regaled them with stories of her life in the countryside, her laughter filling the room with warmth and cheer.


    William found himself drawn to her infectious energy and her genuine kindness. He learned that she was the only child of a renowned blacksmith in Ignis, and that she had been away visiting relatives when she received news of her father''s sudden illness.


    The next morning, they resumed their journey.

 Chapter 99 Invitation

    The salamander James rode was indeed large, easily accommodating the three of them with space to spare. William estimated it could comfortably carry at least five people.Gwyneth proved to be an engaging travel companion. She, too, was a mage, though her focus lay in different magical disciplines.


    "My father is renowned for his skill in smithing and enchanting," she explained. "I followed in his footsteps, learning his craft and enrolling in a magic academy. But then, this sudden news..." Her face clouded with worry.


    She had been away when her father fell ill. "I journeyed to the countryside to visit family and gather ores for my father. I never imagined something like this would happen. It''s baffling!"


    Her father, a healthy man and a mage, had fallen ill unexpectedly. Gwyneth suspected foul play but had no proof.


    "If I may ask," Gwyneth inquired, "what takes you two to Ignis?"


    William started to answer, but James spoke first. "Academy business," he stated simply.


    "Academy business?" she echoed.


    "Indeed. We hail from Snowpeak Academy."


    "Snowpeak!" Gwyneth exclaimed. "I''ve heard it''s one of the finest, and notoriously difficult to enter."


    William, though his chest swelled with pride at her words, remained silent.


    Their journey continued. Initially, William harbored a flicker of suspicion towards Gwyneth. However, after conversing with her for a while, he felt reassured that she posed no threat. Furthermore, James, with his keen magical senses, had readily accepted her company. He clearly sensed no danger from her.


    Gwyneth tried to learn more about William, James, Snowpeak, and their mission, but James remained tight-lipped. He made it clear that he wasn''t willing to share that information with outsiders.


    They talked about themselves, carefully avoiding anything related to Snowpeak Academy and their mission. William, seeing James''s reticence, followed suit. It wouldn''t be wise to anger one of his professors.


    Time flew by as they journeyed across the kingdom.


    "This is so much faster," Gwyneth remarked. "It would take me ages to return with a horse."


    Whenever someone praised his salamander, James beamed with pride. "Right? This salamander is incredible! It''s truly rare. And do you know where I found it? Well, I was on an island with a volcano, and then..."


    James clearly loved recounting the tale of how he found and tamed the salamander. William, having heard it before, patiently listened.


    Days passed, and finally, they reached the capital, Ignis.


    Nestled amidst a forest and surrounded by mountains, Ignis was a naturally fortified city. Its towering walls, exceeding 40 meters in height, provided an imposing defense. Yet, even with such formidable walls, it was still possible to see the numerous buildings within the city and the palace situated on the highest point. That was where the royal family resided, the most guarded and secure location in the entire kingdom.


    A river flowed through the city, a renowned waterway that stretched across a significant portion of the kingdom. Many other villages and cities had been built along its banks.


    "This is incredible!" William exclaimed. "Look at the architecture of these buildings, and the powerful barrier surrounding the city..."


    William was awestruck by Ignis. Not only were the buildings impressive, but the barrier encircling the city was far stronger than the one at Snowpeak Academy, which was already considered one of the best in the kingdom.


    He couldn''t imagine anyone possessing the power to conquer such a city, at least not easily.


    James controlled the salamander as they descended. "We can enter the city with it, but we cannot fly within or above it."


    They had to land before entering Ignis. A long queue stretched from the main gate, filled with people from all corners of the kingdom, and indeed, the world. Ignis might not have magic academies nearby, but it was renowned as a hub for mages to exchange knowledge and goods. Moreover, it was home to the finest smiths, enchanters, and alchemists.


    Ignis was a haven for crafters, a center of research and innovation.


    They joined the end of the queue. James frowned. "This might take us at least four hours to get inside..."


    The looming threat of war had made entering the city far more difficult.


    Gwyneth, however, had a solution. "I can enter through the VIP gate. Follow me, please."


    William gaped at her. "VIP area? You can access that?" He was astonished that Gwyneth had such privileges.


    "I told you my father is one of the best smiths in Ignis. I have a few perks. Follow me," Gwyneth said.


    They walked towards a side gate, slightly to the right of the main entrance. The people queuing looked at them with envy.


    "I wish I could enter the city so easily..." one murmured.


    Gwyneth led the way. Two imposing guards stood in front of the VIP gate. When they saw Gwyneth, they were shocked. "P-Princess? Why are you here? We thought you were away studying."


    Gwyneth, with a regal air, replied, "You know why I''m back. Please, let me enter. These two are my friends; grant them VIP access as well." Sear?h the n?vel_Fire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "Of course, princess," the guard said.


    He retrieved a token and handed it to William and James. This token would allow them to enter through the VIP gate even without Gwyneth.


    Once inside the city, James exclaimed, "Who are you? You said your father was a blacksmith, but he''s the king!"


    Gwyneth hushed him. "Don''t shout, please. I wasn''t lying. The king is one of the best blacksmiths in the kingdom. Just because he''s the king doesn''t mean he can''t practice his craft."


    William agreed with her logic. James tried to calm down, noticing the strange looks people on the streets were giving him.


    "You still need to explain why you lied to us," James insisted.


    Gwyneth sighed and explained everything, eager to appease them.


    "Everything I said was true to a certain extent," she clarified. "My father is one of the best blacksmiths in the kingdom, and I was indeed away looking for ores, but also studying independently. I had to return after he fell ill, but I couldn''t announce my identity as a princess. You know how bandits would react ¨C kidnapping me and demanding a ransom..."


    James and William listened, finding her explanation reasonable. She was far from the royal palace, so concealing her princess status made sense.


    "But how can you leave so freely?" James asked. "I thought you had to stay in the palace most of the time."


    "Well, my mother isn''t the queen," she revealed. "Some people don''t want me in the palace, so I have certain privileges."


    When they heard this, they noticed the sadness etched on Gwyneth''s face. They couldn''t fathom how difficult her situation in the palace must be.


    "But that''s why I had to return," she said, her voice firm. "My father was the one who loved me most. I need to be here for him."


    James offered a gentle smile. "We can accompany you to the palace if you wish."


    "That would be wonderful!"


    The three walked through the streets of Ignis together. Gwyneth pointed out significant landmarks.


    "That''s one of the most famous alchemy shops in the kingdom," she said, gesturing towards a grand building. "You can find anything you desire there, but it''s quite expensive."


    "And this is one of the many churches in the city," she added, indicating a tall, stone structure.


    As William passed the church, he felt a strange sensation, a subtle discomfort.


    ''Could it be because of my demonic powers?'' he wondered.


    The city was vast and bustling. It took them a while to reach the palace. Security was tight; no one could approach without permission. However, when the guards saw the princess approaching, they bowed and granted her passage.


    Gwyneth vouched for William and James, explaining their presence without any issues.


    They stopped in front of the palace gate. The building was constructed from white stone, and the gardens were expansive, filled with flowers and lush green grass. Experience tales at empire


    Numerous guards stood watch. William sensed their considerable strength, which made sense considering the palace was the most heavily guarded location in the kingdom.


    "This is as far as I can go with you. I appreciate your help," Gwyneth said. "I''ll seek you out if I need anything else. Thank you, William. Thank you, Professor James."


    "It was our pleasure, princess," they replied.


    As William and James turned to leave, the palace doors opened, and a man approached them. He wore fine clothing, with a neatly trimmed beard and spectacles perched on his nose.


    "Excuse me," the man said. "I heard there''s a professor from Snowpeak here? Is that you?" he asked, looking at James.


    Professor James was taken aback. How had news of his arrival spread so quickly? It highlighted the royal family''s extensive network and the speed at which information traveled.


    "Yes, I am," James confirmed. "Is there something I can do for you?"


    The man bowed slightly. "It''s an honor to have someone of your stature here. Would you care to come inside? We may require your services. And is this your assistant?" he asked, glancing at William. "He looks quite young. He''s welcome to join us as well."

 Chapter 100 Royal Request

    An invitation to enter the royal palace was an honor few received. Professor James, with his esteemed social standing, wasn''t entirely surprised by the invitation. But for William, it was a remarkable opportunity to witness the grandeur of the palace and meet influential figures."Of course," James accepted. "I would be glad to offer my services."


    "Excellent. Follow me, please."


    They entered the palace. William was awestruck by the pristine interior. The absence of even a speck of dust, the high ceilings, and the marble columns created an air of grandeur.


    The sheer number of staff was astounding. There were people dedicated to cleaning, preparing meals, tending the gardens, and guarding the palace. William couldn''t fathom the amount of gold required to maintain such a vast operation.


    They conversed with the man who had greeted them, Orgnar, who managed the royal library and oversaw some of the king''s financial affairs. He held a position of considerable authority, and William and James were careful not to offend him.


    Gwyneth bid them farewell. "I must go see my father."


    But Orgnar stopped her. "There''s no need to rush, princess. We''re going there now, together. I was hoping Professor James and his assistant could lend their expertise in finding a cure for the king."


    Professor James possessed neither medical nor alchemical expertise, and neither did William. Considering Ignis housed some of the best alchemists and healers, they were puzzled as to how they could contribute to finding a cure for the king.


    However, they kept their doubts to themselves and followed along, curious to see where this would lead.


    They were escorted to a private area at the back of the palace, the royal family''s living quarters. Only authorized personnel were permitted access.


    Orgnar, exercising his authority, explained William and James''s presence to the guards before entering. Even with his position, he had to state his purpose to gain entry.


    Inside the king''s bedchamber, they encountered several other individuals.


    "Princess?" one sneered. It was a man with a scornful expression. "I don''t believe you''re welcome here."


    "Silence, brother. You have no authority over me," Gwyneth retorted.


    The man was the prince, who clearly held no affection for Gwyneth.


    Orgnar, sensing a potential conflict, intervened. "This is not the time for disputes."


    The prince glared at him. "You have no right to speak to me in that manner. Remember, you are employed by us, and you must obey."


    The king, lying weakly in bed, spoke, his voice hoarse. "He is employed by me, and he obeys me, just as you do. Please, leave us. I wish to have a private moment with my daughter."


    The prince, lacking the audacity to defy the king, left the room, followed by the others, leaving Gwyneth and her father alone.


    Outside, the prince scrutinized William and James. "And who are you?"


    Orgnar interjected, "They are guests." Sear?h the novel(F~)ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    The prince scowled at them before departing.


    They all waited respectfully while the king spoke with Gwyneth. It was a private, familial moment that no one wished to intrude upon.


    After ten minutes, Gwyneth opened the door and invited them inside.


    The king, with effort, propped himself up in bed, his back against the wall. "I require your services, Professor," he rasped. "Are you willing to help me? I can offer compensation and assistance with any need you may have."


    Professor James had anticipated this request. He was prepared to help. The king was a symbol of the kingdom, and with the looming war, his leadership was crucial.


    "Of course," James agreed. "But I lack medical expertise. How can I be of assistance?"


    The king chuckled. "I''m aware of that, young man. I require a different kind of help."


    He explained the task. "I have a physician who knows how to cure me, but the ingredients for the potion are rare and difficult to acquire. I need a powerful mage like yourself to help me obtain them."


    "Why me?" James inquired. "Not that I''m unwilling, but surely there are other powerful mages available."


    "Indeed, but not with your combat prowess. Most mages here specialize in other fields of magic."


    James considered the proposition, weighing the potential rewards.


    "I have a request," he countered. "Someone murdered our students during an expedition. I seek to find those responsible. Can you assist me in locating them?"


    The king nodded. "Yes. We have extensive contacts and skilled investigators. I can find those individuals. Moreover, I''m willing to offer you gold and valuable items in exchange for your help in recovering my health."


    It was a matter of life and death. The king was desperate for a cure. He couldn''t bear the thought of dying and leaving his family, especially Gwyneth.


    "I can help," James agreed. "But how long will this endeavor take? I cannot be away from the academy for an extended period."


    "It may take some time," the king admitted, "but I can send a letter to Tholfnir. We are close allies."


    Even with his power, Tholfnir adhered to the king''s authority. The king himself might not be a powerful mage, but he had the backing of influential figures. Defying the king was unwise.


    Stay tuned to empire


    "Very well. We will help you," James declared. "But may my student and assistant accompany me?"


    The king saw no issue with this. "Of course. However, the journey might be perilous. Will he be safe?"


    James wasn''t sure whether bringing William was a good idea, but William was eager to go.


    "He will be fine. Can we discuss the details?" James requested.


    "Yes, tonight. The alchemist responsible for preparing the potion will join you. You can discuss the details then. For now, Orgnar will show you to your chambers."


    They followed Orgnar through the palace to their chambers for the night.


    "What a turn of events," James remarked as he settled onto the bed. "But if we help the king, it will benefit both the kingdom and us. They''ll assist us in finding those responsible for the students'' deaths."


    William nodded, excitement bubbling within him. The potential rewards for aiding the king were enticing.

 Chapter 101 Private Dinner, Rare Ingredients, and Sea Time

    The king''s invitation to a private dinner that evening was an unexpected honor. It wasn''t a grand banquet with numerous guests, but an intimate gathering. William, James, Gwyneth, and the alchemist were the only ones invited. This exclusivity fueled gossip throughout the palace."Those two young men arrived today and are already invited to a private dinner? What''s happening?" a kitchen worker whispered.


    The chef smacked the man with a wooden spoon. "Enough of that. Focus on preparing the best meal possible. These individuals must be influential; otherwise, the king wouldn''t invite them."


    The kitchen staff ceased their whispers and dedicated themselves to creating a culinary masterpiece.


    William and James received fine attire from the king.


    "These are new clothes purchased today from one of the finest shops in the kingdom," a lady explained to William. "Allow me to assist you in changing." S§×ar?h the Nov§×l?ire.n(e)t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    William, unaccustomed to such service, politely declined. "Thank you for your kindness, but I can change myself."


    "Of course, sir," the lady bowed and left.


    The clothes were of exquisite quality: a shirt, pants, a belt, and a long, fur-lined coat.


    "This fur is so soft and warm, perfect for this winter weather," William murmured, stroking the luxurious material.


    He recognized the fur as belonging to rare creatures, its quality undeniable.


    After changing, he made his way to the private dining room near the king''s chambers. Professor James, also dressed in the fine clothes provided, joined him.


    "Your clothes look better than mine," James grumbled, eyeing William with envy. "Not fair."


    William rolled his eyes. "Just accept it."


    As they traversed the palace halls, they encountered guards stationed near the entrance to the royal family''s private chambers. The guards, recognizing James and William, granted them entry.


    William scanned the area for the dining room, and that''s when he saw the prince, causing a commotion.


    "A private dinner without me? Is he mad?" the prince yelled at a guard.


    "I''m merely following orders, sir," the guard stated. "You are not invited."


    The prince, enraged, was on the verge of striking the guard but refrained, knowing the guard was his father''s appointee. His anger intensified when he saw James and William approach. His expression was murderous.


    "You two?" he seethed, clenching his fists. "Don''t tell me you''re part of this private dinner? I thought it was just my father and Gwyneth, but this is an outrage!"


    William was growing weary of the prince''s behavior but held his tongue. He lacked the authority to defy a prince, but Professor James was a different story. He fixed the prince with a stern glare. "Step aside and let us pass."


    The prince was about to retort when James seized him by the neck and lifted him off the ground.


    An aura of fire erupted around James, raising the temperature dramatically. The guard, drawn by the heat, approached cautiously. He nearly burned himself attempting to place a hand on James''s shoulder, stammering, "My apologies, Professor James. I''ll ensure this never happens again."


    James was not someone to be trifled with. He would never disrespect the king, but the prince was not as untouchable as he believed.


    James tossed the prince aside and strode towards the private dining room where the king, Gwyneth, and the alchemist awaited. William followed close behind.


    The king greeted them warmly. "Welcome. I apologize for my son''s outburst outside. He''s always been... difficult."


    James smiled graciously. "It''s no trouble, your Majesty. It was nothing."


    "Good, good," the king chuckled. "Now, allow me to introduce the alchemist I mentioned."


    The alchemist rose from his chair and extended a hand. "I am Fabian Castelos."


    James''s eyes widened in recognition. "The Fabian Castelos? The one who created over a hundred potions?"


    Fabian laughed. "Indeed. And you are the mage who created the Fire Mantra, one of the few to achieve a rank S spell."


    "You know of me?" James asked, surprised. "That''s not common knowledge."


    "Of course. Anyone with a respectable understanding of magic knows your name."


    William was stunned. James was even more impressive than he''d realized.


    ''James created a rank S spell? Incredible! And this Fabian has created over a hundred unique potions? What am I doing here?'' he thought, feeling a pang of inadequacy.


    Based purely on achievements, William was outmatched by everyone in the room. However, he was a summoned hero, a distinction that surpassed any other accomplishment.


    "And this is?" Fabian inquired, gesturing towards William.


    James introduced him. "This is my research assistant and a student at Snowpeak Academy."


    Fabian nodded approvingly. "A very talented young man, I presume? Enrolling in that academy is no easy feat, and serving as your assistant is even more challenging."


    "Indeed, he is," James confirmed.


    They took their seats at the dining table, and soon, the kitchen staff arrived with a procession of plates laden with food, drinks, and desserts.


    William''s mouth watered. ''This looks delicious.''


    After arranging the feast, the staff departed, leaving only the king, Gwyneth, James, William, and Fabian in the room.


    "Here is the list of ingredients," the king said, handing a paper to James. "You may be familiar with some of them."


    James scanned the list, his expression shifting into one of disbelief. The ingredients were exceptionally rare, explaining why the king couldn''t simply purchase them.


    "Mermaid''s Tear, blessed water by a priest of the Ninth Order, a fire blossom flower, and... a dragon scale" James read aloud, incredulous. "Are you serious?"


    William could indeed imagine the rarity of the ingredients based on their names alone. The mention of a dragon scale brought to mind Amber, the dragon he had encountered in the Shadowlands.


    ''I won''t reveal her location,'' William decided.


    King Memphis offered a weary smile. "Yes, I know it sounds absurd, but I was hoping you might have some knowledge of where to find these ingredients. It''s difficult for me to gather information discreetly. This must remain confidential."


    To their surprise, James knew where to find some of the ingredients. "I saw a fire blossom flower on the volcano where I found my salamander. We can retrieve it from there."


    "Mermaid''s Tear can be found in the sea. I know a few people who have encountered mermaids before. But the other two, I have no idea."


    William listened intently, then asked James, "I understand that finding a dragon scale is challenging, but what about the blessed water? Shouldn''t that be easier to obtain? That would leave us with only one unknown ingredient."


    James shook his head. "The blessed water is even harder to find. To obtain a dragon scale, we can follow rumors of dragon sightings. But the Ninth Order is extinct. They were last active around five thousand years ago. How can we possibly acquire that?"


    Memphis nodded. "I understand. Our plan is to gather the other ingredients first, leaving the blessed water for last. I can endure for another year before my condition deteriorates significantly."


    Fabian offered reassurance. "I can prepare a temporary antidote for the king, granting him a year of reasonable health before his illness worsens. This gives us approximately two years to gather all the ingredients."


    Two years seemed like ample time. William wondered if he and James would spend the entire period searching for these rare components.


    "We can prioritize the flower and the Mermaid''s Tear," James suggested. "The volcano where the flower grows is on an island, so we can obtain both ingredients during the same journey. We can then deliver them here for safekeeping and focus on the remaining items. I believe we can acquire those three ingredients in under five months. However, the blessed water remains problematic."


    Everyone agreed to focus on acquiring a portion of the ingredients first, then pursue the others.


    Gwyneth looked relieved. "Thank you, all of you," she expressed. "I feel more confident in obtaining the ingredients with your help. I was so scared before..."


    Memphis pulled his daughter into an embrace. "It will be alright."


    William raised a question. "Your Majesty, if I may inquire, what caused your affliction? Seeing how rare the ingredients are for the cure, I can only imagine..."


    James looked at the king, sharing the same curiosity.


    "A curse," Memphis revealed. "You know we possess many treasures, some passed down through generations. One of them carried a dormant curse, and unfortunately, I was the one to trigger it..."


    "When did you trigger it?" William pressed. "Was it long ago?"


    "Approximately eight months ago, I believe. I can''t recall precisely," Memphis admitted.


    William frowned. That coincided with the time he and his classmates had been summoned to this world. Could there be a connection, or was it merely a coincidence?


    They finished their dinner, discussing the details of their plan. Memphis assured them that he had already sent a letter to Tholfnir and that they shouldn''t worry.


    However, William couldn''t shake Altair''s words.


    ''Is Tholfnir truly who he seems?'' he pondered.


    Despite his burning curiosity, that question would have to wait. The following day, he would embark on a seafaring adventure with James and a crew provided by the king.


    It was time to gather the first ingredients for the antidote.

 Chapter 102 New Books, and Worried about James

    While William remained at the palace for the night, Professor James ventured into the city to contact his associates. He trusted the king''s promise of assistance but anticipated a lengthy process to gather all the necessary ingredients. Therefore, he decided to pursue alternative avenues for information gathering.His first stop was an unassuming bookshop nestled within the affluent district. Dwarfed by the surrounding grand structures, the shop was almost invisible. James navigated through a maze of alleys, eventually arriving at his destination. The streets were deserted in the late hours, and the shop was closed, as expected. Undeterred, James knocked on the door, following a distinct, rhythmic pattern. S§×ar?h the N?vel(F)ire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Silence greeted him initially, but after five minutes, the door creaked open. A middle-aged man with neatly trimmed hair but an unkempt beard stood in the doorway.


    "James? What are you doing here so late? Even as friends, you can''t just show up and wake me!" the man exclaimed.


    They exchanged serious glances for a few seconds, then broke into smiles and embraced.


    "I missed you too, buddy," James said warmly.


    "Can I come in?" James asked. "I have something important to discuss..."


    The man glanced around the alley, ensuring they were alone, before ushering James inside.


    Meanwhile, William explored the palace. It was a magnificent place, and he wasn''t sure when he might have such an opportunity again. The staff, now familiar with his identity, treated him with respect. As the assistant of a Snowpeak professor, he had a powerful ally.


    At one point, curiosity led him to the palace library. He envisioned a vast collection of volumes within, likely with restricted access. However, he had already infiltrated the palace; the most challenging part was behind him.


    Upon entering the library, he was greeted by magnificent, well-maintained bookshelves and a tranquil atmosphere. The scent of books and incense filled the air, and the sight of a familiar face brought him comfort.


    It was Orgnar, the man who had initially greeted them upon their arrival.


    "William?" Orgnar inquired, adjusting his spectacles for a better look. "What brings you here so late?"


    Orgnar was among the few who knew about their upcoming mission, a fact William intended to exploit.


    "I''ve come to borrow some books for the journey," William replied with a smile. "You know, it can get quite tedious."


    "Indeed, it can be quite dull at times. Are you looking for anything in particular?" Orgnar asked.


    William recognized an opportunity to leverage his charisma and persuasive skills.


    "You''re aware that Professor James and I study ancient history together at the academy, correct?" William began.


    "Indeed. James is quite the scholar."


    William nodded. "We''ve been focusing on elven history recently, but I have a particular interest in the ancient civilization we refer to as demons."


    Orgnar''s expression turned serious. "May I ask why you''re so interested in that?"


    The question caught William off guard, but his mind raced to find a plausible answer that wouldn''t arouse suspicion.


    "I''ve heard that corruption is linked to demons, and my village suffered from a corruption problem. Some of us perished, which fueled my desire to learn more about that civilization."


    It wasn''t a bad excuse, in William''s opinion. Orgnar scrutinized him for a moment before replying, "I do have some books about them here. Follow me."


    Orgnar seized the opportunity to showcase the library to William, seemingly eager to highlight his role in the palace.


    "It''s not every day that someone visits," Orgnar explained. "The staff typically cannot access the library, and those with permission are usually occupied with other matters."


    William offered compliments. "The library looks amazing. I can see you''ve dedicated yourself to keeping it clean and organized."


    "It takes a considerable amount of time, indeed. Maintaining cleanliness is quite challenging. You wouldn''t believe how much dust these books accumulate."


    The library was smaller than those William was accustomed to, but its collection was exceptional. It housed spell tomes and books he wouldn''t find elsewhere.


    "You may borrow some of the books related to the demon civilization, as they are primarily historical," Orgnar explained. "However, the spell books are off-limits for now. I''m confident that if you succeed in your task for the king, you''ll gain access to some of them. They contain only rank A and S spells, all of the highest quality."


    Orgnar leaned closer, lowering his voice. "There''s even one rank SS spell that we haven''t managed to decipher yet."


    ''A rank SS spell?'' William thought, unable to contain his surprise. Orgnar noticed his astonishment but remained silent.


    The library tour concluded in the history section. Orgnar selected three books from a shelf. "You''re welcome to browse the other books, but these three are the only ones concerning the demon civilization."


    William accepted the books eagerly.


    "I''ll lend these to you. You should have ample time to read them during your mission," Orgnar offered.


    The books were thick, but the journey would be long. William was confident he would have enough time to read them all.


    "Thank you for lending me these books," William expressed his gratitude. "I appreciate it."


    Orgnar smiled gently. "It''s my pleasure, young man. It would be remiss of me to deny a student like yourself access to knowledge. I simply hope you''ll return to chat and read with me sometime."


    The invitation was invaluable. Orgnar held a high position in the palace, his influence extending throughout the Black Flame Kingdom.


    "I absolutely will. We can do that after I return," William promised.


    "I look forward to it."


    After acquiring the books and conversing with Orgnar, William returned to his room. He expected to find Professor James there, but when he knocked on the adjacent door, there was no response.


    ''Why is he taking so long?'' William wondered, a sense of unease creeping in.


    Professor James had informed him of his estimated return time, implying that a delay meant something was amiss.


    William waited a few more minutes, but when James still hadn''t returned, he decided to act.


    He stored the three books in his inventory, a convenient feature he had unlocked, and left the palace.


    The guards eyed him curiously as he departed. It was unusual for people to wander around so late, especially palace guests. However, they couldn''t interfere. Professor James and William were guests of the king, and their actions were beyond reproach.


    William retrieved the note Professor James had given him, the list of contacts in Ignis. He decided to visit the first contact, hoping for information about James''s whereabouts.


    The first contact was a woman employed by a noble family as their private wizard. She served as an advisor, a teacher, and a combatant when needed. It was a demanding position, but the compensation was excellent, which is why she had agreed to a five-year contract. Afterward, she would be wealthy and free to pursue her own interests.


    William headed towards the noble house where she worked. The noble district was heavily guarded, and the guards frowned upon late-night wanderers like William.


    When they approached him, he presented his VIP token and declared himself a guest of the king. This tactic proved effective, allowing him to proceed deeper into the district until he reached the mansion where James''s contact resided.

 Chapter 103 Looking for James

    The house was indeed massive, like all the others in the district. Two guards stood watch at the main gate, both looking weary, their eyelids drooping. William guessed their shift change was imminent.He approached the guards, his presence jolting them from their lethargy.


    "Who are you?" one demanded.


    William''s fine attire, courtesy of the king, earned him a more respectful reception than he might have received otherwise. Had he been dressed as a commoner, the guards would likely have been more aggressive, assuming ill intent.


    "I''m here to speak with your resident wizard," William stated. "Inform her that James from Snowpeak Academy wishes to see her."


    The guards exchanged glances, and after a moment''s deliberation, one went to fetch the wizard. "Wait here," he instructed.


    William waited patiently. He could have given his real name, but he doubted the wizard would come out for a stranger. This way, she might.


    After a few minutes, the guard returned, accompanied by a blonde-haired woman who looked rather sleepy.


    Seeing that William wasn''t James, she remained silent for a moment, then addressed the guards. "May I have a word with this young man in private? Your shift is almost over, so you can rest. I''ll secure the entrance."


    "Thank you, ma''am," the guards replied gratefully, leaving William and the wizard alone in the deserted street.


    "Who are you? You''re not James," she stated, her voice laced with suspicion.


    "My apologies," William said, bowing his head. "I am a student at Snowpeak Academy and Professor James''s research assistant. We''re in the capital on academy business, and he mentioned speaking to a list of contacts. However, he hasn''t returned, so I''m here looking for him."


    The woman''s curiosity was piqued. "Can you explain why he''s seeking out his old contacts?"


    William, seeing no way around it, explained James''s motive: to gather information about the individuals who had murdered the students during the elven expedition.


    William was hesitant to share such sensitive information with a stranger, but he reasoned that if James trusted this woman enough to include her as a contact, she must be reliable.


    "I understand... Well, I can help you find him, if you wish," she offered. "It can be quite dangerous to wander alone at night, especially dressed in such fine attire."


    Every city had its share of dangers. Despite being the most heavily guarded city in the kingdom, Ignis attracted people from all walks of life, including those with ill intentions.


    "Would you really do that for me?" William asked, relieved. "Can you leave the mansion this late without repercussions? I wouldn''t want you to lose your job."


    Beatrice chuckled. "It''s alright, I won''t. My name is Beatrice, by the way."


    "I know," William replied. "It''s written here on the note. I''m William."


    Beatrice extended her hand. "May I see the note?"


    William handed it to her. It contained no sensitive information, just names and locations. Beatrice, one of the names on the list, recognized a few others. "We should speak with this person first," she suggested, pointing to a name. "He''s a close friend of James''s, and he was likely James''s first stop."


    They set off to find Leonard, the bookshop owner. Beatrice waited briefly for the next guard rotation before departing.


    "I''ll be leaving now," she informed the guards. "Ensure no one is concerned about my absence."


    "Yes, ma''am," they assured her.


    William and Beatrice left the noble district and headed towards a commercial area filled with shops. There, they hoped to find Leonard''s bookshop.


    "Why does he have his shop here?" William wondered aloud. "The competition is fierce."


    As they walked through the district, William couldn''t help but agree. Establishing a shop here seemed incredibly difficult. The larger shops had vast resources and connections, allowing them to acquire goods at lower prices for resale or crafting.


    William could only envision a scenario where someone exceptionally skilled, surpassing all others, could thrive here. But a bookshop? He doubted it would be successful.


    "Just wait until you see how small his bookshop is," Beatrice added with a chuckle. "The shop is just a facade. He''s already wealthy and offers other services, though I''m not privy to the specifics."


    William''s curiosity about Leonard''s services would have to wait. They navigated through dimly lit alleys, encountering shady individuals lurking or sleeping on the ground. However, none dared to approach; Beatrice''s aura was a powerful deterrent.


    "Why do they sleep here, and why don''t the guards intervene?" William inquired.


    "This area isn''t well-patrolled. There aren''t many shops here, so the guards focus on the larger establishments. Perhaps that''s why Leonard chose this location for his bookshop."


    Finally, they arrived at Leonard''s bookshop.


    "You were right," William remarked, staring at the small, dilapidated building. "This is even smaller than I expected."


    The building was grimy, with cracks marring its walls. It was far from appealing.


    "I told you," Beatrice said with a smug grin.


    She knocked several times, but no one answered. This was not a good sign.


    William watched as Beatrice cast a spell to unlock the door. The spell was swift and silent, unlocking the door in seconds.


    "That was the easy part," she warned. "Leonard likely has traps and other magical formations inside. Let''s hope they''re deactivated."


    Beatrice led the way, her magical prowess surpassing William''s. He wouldn''t be able to navigate the traps alone.


    "The traps are deactivated," she announced, examining the entrance. "Leonard likely disabled them for James, but would have reactivated them had they left."


    However, a thorough search of the bookshop, which also served as Leonard''s residence, revealed no sign of either man. Yet, there were indications that Leonard had indeed had a visitor ¨C two teacups instead of one. Beatrice recognized the aroma.


    "This is James''s favorite tea," she noted. "He was here. But where are they? And why are the traps deactivated if they left?"


    Neither of them could understand the situation. William wandered around the bookshop, observing the dusty, neglected books. It was evident that the shop received few visitors.


    ''She was right about this being a facade,'' William thought.


    They pondered the situation, but the bookshop offered no further clues.


    "If the traps aren''t activated, it could mean they haven''t left," William proposed. "And if they''re not here, there might be another exit. Perhaps Leonard and James used a hidden passage, and Leonard forgot to reactivate the traps in his excitement?"


    Beatrice''s eyes widened. "You might be right. Leonard is prone to forgetfulness when he''s enthusiastic, and reuniting with his best friend after years could certainly cause that. As for another passage, that''s also plausible. Leonard has connections to the sewers."


    "Sewers?" William echoed, surprised.


    "Yes, the Ignis underground. It''s where people conduct illicit business. You''ll find bandits, assassins, scammers, slave traders ¨C you name it. It''s the city''s black market."


    William couldn''t fathom how someone like Leonard had ties to such a place. Was he involved in something illegal?


    Their immediate challenge, however, was to locate the hidden passage. Where should they begin their search? S~ea??h the N?vel(F)ire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Beatrice and William rose and started their investigation. The bookshop itself was not big enough to pose a threat in finding the passage, but according to Beatrice, Leonard was a smart guy.


    "This won''t be easy," she said.


    "We will find it."

 Chapter 104 Getting Answers in the Sewers

    Though the bookshop was dusty, it was well-organized. In contrast, Leonard''s living quarters, located at the back, were clean and tidy. Clearly, he took pride in his personal space; the bookshop''s dustiness stemmed from a lack of customers."Leonard is an experimental mage," Beatrice commented as they searched his room. "We should assume he has a secret room for his work, which might also connect to the sewers."


    Most mages had a private space for research and experimentation, a sanctuary free from distractions. William himself appreciated such a space for his training. It fostered concentration.


    They began their search, focusing on potential hidden passages in the walls or a trapdoor leading downwards. There was no other logical possibility.


    They pulled on suspicious-looking books and examined every piece of furniture, but found nothing. Frustration mounted as their efforts proved fruitless.


    They considered the possibility of Leonard having a separate location for his experiments and the sewer access, but it seemed illogical. If that were true, he would have activated the traps in his shop and home.


    Just as they were about to give up, William''s demonic sword, Asura, offered a solution.


    "I sense mana in a specific location," Asura''s voice echoed in William''s mind. "It might be something."


    William was taken aback. Neither he nor Beatrice, a powerful mage, had sensed anything. How could the sword detect mana so easily? Was it because Asura was a magical artifact, or were demonic objects inherently better at sensing mana?


    William knew Asura could sense demonic energy from afar, but this sensitivity to ''normal'' mana was new.


    "Are you certain?" William asked mentally. "Can you tell me where it''s coming from?"


    Beatrice watched as William seemingly spaced out, unaware of his mental conversation with the sword. Asura provided directions.


    "There''s a trace of recent mana usage behind a bookshelf in Leonard''s room," the sword informed him.


    The bookshelf Asura mentioned was one they had already examined, pushing it aside to check for hidden mechanisms. They found nothing at the time. Could Asura be mistaken, or had they missed something?


    William decided to investigate. He crossed the room and pushed the bookshelf aside once more.


    "What is it?" Beatrice inquired, curiosity piqued. "Did you find something?"


    She was puzzled by William''s sudden shift in focus but chose to observe.


    The bookshelf scraped against the wooden floor, and as it moved, William''s eyes fixed on the wall behind it.


    As expected, the wall appeared bare. They had inspected it thoroughly just moments ago.


    "Place your hand on the wall and channel your mana," Asura instructed.


    William obeyed, while Beatrice observed with curiosity. She understood what he was attempting, but she hadn''t sensed anything unusual about the wall.


    Suddenly, a section of the wall shimmered and vanished, revealing a hidden passage. It had been concealed by an invisible barrier!


    ''I''ve seen this in some cool games back on Earth,'' William thought, amused.


    "How did you know?" Beatrice asked, astonished.


    Unable to reveal Asura''s involvement, William simply said, "I can sense mana quite well. I''m not sure why I couldn''t before."


    Beatrice accepted the explanation without further questioning, relieved that they had found the hidden passage. It was a descending corridor, not a straight path.


    "Will this be safe?" William asked, apprehensive. S§×ar?h the N?vel(F)ire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Beatrice took the lead. "Let me go first and check."


    As the stronger mage, she felt responsible for William''s safety.


    William nodded and followed. The corridor was well-lit by magical torches with blue flames, creating an eerie ambiance.


    They encountered several doors. "These must be Leonard''s research rooms," Beatrice deduced. "We shouldn''t intrude. He wouldn''t appreciate it. Let''s continue towards the sewers."


    Despite her words, Beatrice approached the doors to check for any sign of Leonard or James. "Leonard? James?" she called out.


    Silence met her calls. Satisfied that the rooms were empty, they continued onward.


    They eventually reached another door, this one reinforced with additional security measures.


    "This leads to the main sewer area," Beatrice explained. "The doors here are usually well-protected to prevent unwanted intrusions."


    Many people had similar passages within their homes, not just Leonard.


    Discover exclusive content at empire


    "Can you open it?" William inquired.


    Beatrice smiled confidently. "Yes, I''m quite skilled at unlocking things. And since we''re approaching from the inside, it''s much easier than attempting to unlock it from the sewers."


    "That makes sense," William agreed.


    Beatrice examined the door, her fingers tracing the intricate runes etched into its surface. She muttered a series of incantations, her hands glowing with a faint, ethereal light. The runes responded, their glow intensifying as they pulsed with magical energy. With a final flourish, Beatrice pushed the door open, revealing a dark, damp passage leading into the depths of the city.


    "After you," she gestured, a playful smile gracing her lips.


    William, steeling his nerves, stepped into the unknown. The air was thick with the stench of mildew and decay, and the only light came from the faint glow of Beatrice''s magic. The passage descended steeply, the rough-hewn steps slick with moisture.


    William observed several similar doors scattered throughout the sewer area. Two narrow walkways flanked a central channel filled with foul-smelling water. William was determined to avoid stepping in it.


    "Let''s move," Beatrice urged. "They must have gone to the main chamber."


    The sewers led to a spacious chamber where illicit trade flourished. Beatrice navigated the maze with ease, heading towards the building where transactions took place.


    "Do you come here often?" William inquired, impressed by her familiarity with the place.


    "Occasionally," she replied. "It''s a good source of information and valuable items. I come here on behalf of the noble house I work for, not for personal gain."


    They reached a double door guarded by two imposing thugs. Their strength was evident. Beatrice approached confidently, and when challenged with a secret phrase, she responded correctly, granting them passage.


    William entered a large, open room teeming with people from all walks of life, most cloaked to conceal their identities. He glanced at the various stalls, his eyes widening at the sight of potions, enchanted items, slaves, stolen artifacts ¨C all manner of illicit goods.


    "You can find bargains here," Beatrice explained. "Most items are stolen, so they''re sold cheaply to ensure a quick turnover. You can''t sell stolen goods to legitimate shops; they can identify them."


    "Wait, what? How?" William asked, intrigued.


    "When crafting an item, an imprint of your mana is left on it, including potions. If you''re the crafter, selling it is easy. If not, you must prove you obtained it legitimately," Beatrice clarified.


    William was unaware of this practice. The sewers provided an outlet for those who stole items they didn''t intend to use.


    "I presume such places exist in most large cities," William commented.


    "Absolutely. It''s a massive market. Now, follow me."


    Beatrice led him to a corner of the room and opened a small door. Inside, they found an old man with a wrinkled face and a long beard, emanating a foul odor.


    "Ah, it''s you," the man greeted. "What do you need?"


    He didn''t know Beatrice''s name, as anonymity was common in the sewers. People recognized each other by appearance or code names.


    "I''m looking for two men who arrived here today..."


    Beatrice described Leonard''s appearance, then asked William to describe James, in case he looked different since she last saw him.


    The man listened intently, his mind racing to recall the faces they described.


    "Can you wait a moment?" he requested. "I''ll check with my informants."


    This man had eyes and ears everywhere, a valuable source of information. However, his services were costly, but Beatrice was prepared to cover the expense for William.


    After a brief interval, the man returned with news. "They were here earlier tonight, but a group captured them."


    "Captured them?" Beatrice gasped, shocked.


    "Indeed. They used magic-suppressing handcuffs, it seems. No one knows their identities, but they left the sewers through a passage leading outside the city, towards the forest," the man explained.


    Beatrice, trusting the man''s information, was perplexed.


    "I''ll pay you next time I''m here," she promised.


    The old man nodded. Beatrice was a valued customer, and he wouldn''t risk losing her patronage.


    William hurried after Beatrice, who wasted no time heading towards the passage leading out of the city.


    "We need to follow them," she declared. "The kidnapping was recent, so we must search for them immediately."


    William agreed, and they hurried through a long tunnel resembling the one they had used to enter the sewers.


    "Why didn''t anyone intervene?" William questioned.


    "This is a lawless place," Beatrice explained, "or at least, law enforcement rarely ventures down here. The only explicit rule is against outright fighting and killing. But from what we''ve gathered, someone ambushed Leonard and James, quickly restraining them with magic-suppressing handcuffs."


    "Aren''t those handcuffs incredibly powerful?" William asked, concerned.


    The ability to completely nullify a mage''s powers was a significant threat. That random individuals could subdue James and Leonard so easily was alarming.


    Beatrice nodded. "Yes, they are rare and expensive. I''m baffled by how these people acquired such items."


    Questions swirled in their minds, unanswered. William clung to the hope that James was safe.

 Chapter 105 Coming for the Rescue

    Few people used the tunnel. William inquired about this, and Beatrice explained that its existence was a well-kept secret within the sewers."It''s one of the hidden passages," she said.


    Beatrice''s knowledge stemmed from her status as a powerful mage, her connection to an influential noble family, and her close relationship with the well-informed old man. These factors granted her access to information unavailable to most.


    They traversed the tunnel for about fifteen minutes before reaching its end, which opened into the forest surrounding Ignis. The exit was cleverly concealed, not only by vegetation but also by magic that rendered it invisible to outsiders.


    "Guards patrol this area frequently, so the magical formations here are quite potent," Beatrice explained. "This ensures the passage remains undiscovered."


    "Where should we begin our search?" William inquired.


    "They passed through here, so we need to find any marks indicating their direction. The lack of traffic here works in our favor," Beatrice replied.


    William nodded, and they split up to search the area for footprints or other clues. They were still in the dark about the number and identity of their adversaries.


    Within minutes, William discovered a cluster of footprints in the mud. Two sets were in the center, surrounded by various others. He called for Beatrice.


    "Doesn''t this look like two people were surrounded by others? It could be James and Leonard," William pointed out.


    Beatrice knelt beside the prints, illuminating the area with a magical orb of light. "Yes, it does. I haven''t found anything in other directions, so this must be the right way."


    The footprints appeared fresh. They decided to follow them.


    The possibility of following a false trail loomed over them, but it was a risk they had to take. Their best chance of finding James and Leonard was to follow these tracks and locate them quickly.


    Delay could prove disastrous. The tracks might vanish, and their captives could face unknown perils.


    William and Beatrice ventured deeper into the forest, away from the city. Beatrice''s worry was palpable, fueled by the knowledge of the magic-suppressing handcuffs.


    "We''re dealing with powerful adversaries, kid," she cautioned William. "Are you prepared to face them? This could have dire consequences if they decide to retaliate." sea??h th§× N?velFire(.)net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    William understood the risks but couldn''t abandon James. They shared a bond of mutual assistance and a crucial mission for the king.


    They pressed onward, the sounds of nocturnal creatures echoing through the stillness. A full moon illuminated the forest, casting an ethereal glow. William''s senses sharpened, attuned to every rustle and snap.


    At last, they stumbled upon their destination. Concealed amidst dense vegetation and towering rocks was a campsite, its presence betrayed by the telltale wisps of smoke rising from a campfire. A group of cloaked figures huddled around the flames, and near the blaze, they spotted James and Leonard, both bound with magic-suppressing handcuffs. Their captors had effectively neutralized their powers, rendering them vulnerable.


    "It''s them," William whispered, his voice barely audible.


    Beatrice frowned, her gaze fixed on the figures surrounding James and Leonard.


    "They''re competent, but not exceptionally strong," she assessed. "The handcuffs are their only advantage."


    "Isn''t that a good thing?" William asked, puzzled by her grim expression.


    "Yes, but there''s something else... Let''s focus on rescuing them first. Are you ready for a fight?" Beatrice asked, gripping her staff tightly.


    William gripped his steel sword, ready for battle. He was prepared to do whatever it took to save James, even if it meant risking his life or revealing his hidden powers.


    He had assessed the mana levels of their adversaries, and they weren''t overwhelmingly strong. William was confident in his ability to defeat at least three of them.


    Despite being outnumbered, he felt no fear. Beatrice was a formidable mage, more than capable of handling all of them single-handedly if necessary.


    But William wanted to contribute, to fight alongside her. The prospect of engaging in battle invigorated him.


    "Let''s go," Beatrice commanded, and they charged into the fray.


    While William excelled in close combat, Beatrice specialized in ranged magic. She wouldn''t miss the chance to exploit her advantage.


    "I''ll immobilize them, and you cut them down," she declared.


    Their strategy was simple yet effective. Beatrice conjured a series of runes, and the cloaked figures near the campfire found their senses disrupted.


    Blinded and deafened, they were easy targets. Beatrice was a master of illusion magic, and manipulating her opponents'' senses was one of her specialties.


    William seized the opportunity.


    "Enhanced Strength! Swiftfoot!"


    His strength, agility, and speed surged. He moved like a phantom, closing the distance in seconds.


    He slashed at the first cloaked figure, his sword cleaving through their chest. Blood splattered his face and clothes, but he didn''t falter.


    Another slash, and the figure crumpled to the ground, lifeless. With Beatrice''s spell still active, William pressed his advantage. He dashed towards the next opponent and attacked.


    The next target fell just as swiftly, unaware of the impending strike. However, after two of their number were eliminated, Beatrice''s spell dissipated.


    "We''re under attack!" one shouted as their senses returned.


    Despite only managing to eliminate two, it was a significant advantage. Fewer enemies to contend with when the real battle commenced.


    The cloaked figures spotted William first. Beatrice was still approaching.


    "There!" they yelled. "Attack him!"


    Faced with a barrage of spells, William knew evasion was crucial. A direct hit from that many spells could prove fatal.


    He preemptively cast Kinetic Burst, a spell that functioned as a rapid dash. As the enemy spells hurtled towards him ¨C poison, fire, water, and lightning ¨C he activated the spell, narrowly evading them.


    William''s evasive maneuver surprised them, but they remained undeterred. They had ample mana to continue their assault, and William couldn''t evade indefinitely.


    However, he wasn''t alone. Beatrice had arrived, and her presence triggered a panicked reaction.


    Read new chapters at empire


    "A-A behemoth!" one shrieked. "Why is it here? We must flee!"


    Beatrice had invoked another illusion, making them perceive her as a behemoth, a fearsome creature occasionally sighted near Ignis.


    Capitalizing on their terror, Beatrice unleashed a series of deadly attacks. Lotus flowers materialized, their petals sharp as blades, slicing through the air and severing the throats of her paralyzed adversaries.


    Beatrice spared only the apparent leader, who stood paralyzed with fear, barely able to speak.


    "Please, have mercy," he pleaded.


    William watched, his perception of Beatrice shifting. She was not someone he wanted to cross.


    ''She''s terrifying,'' he thought.


    Beatrice approached the captive and began her interrogation. "Why did you take them?" she demanded.


    Desperate to survive, the leader readily divulged information. "The prince hired us," he confessed. "Our target was James, but the other man was with him, so we took both."


    William''s mind raced. The prince''s involvement was puzzling.


    ''Is he trying to sabotage our mission to gather the antidote ingredients? But how did he find out? It''s a closely guarded secret...'' William pondered.


    Beatrice, meanwhile, was reeling from the revelation.


    "The prince? Are you serious? Why is he involved in this?" she questioned, her voice laced with disbelief.


    The prince was a formidable figure, and Beatrice was wary of incurring his wrath. Crossing the royal family was a dangerous game.


    "I don''t know," the man insisted. "I was merely following orders. I swear!"

 Chapter 106 Sealed?

    Beatrice, ever cautious, wouldn''t blindly trust the kidnapper''s words. She cast a powerful illusion spell, one that required the target to remain immobile, a condition the captive readily met. The spell''s intricate execution took time, but it would reveal the truthfulness of his claims and potentially yield more information.Meanwhile, William rushed to James and Leonard, removing the gags from their mouths.


    "William!" James exclaimed, relief washing over him. "You found me!"


    Leonard nudged James with his elbow. "This is the student you mentioned? He seems quite capable."


    A warmth spread through William''s chest. It was gratifying to know that Professor James had spoken highly of him to his friend.


    "What happened?" William asked, eager to free them. "How can I remove these cuffs?"


    "The leader likely has the keys. Check his pockets," Leonard advised.


    William swiftly searched the leader''s clothes and found the keys. James and Leonard, freed from their restraints, rotated their wrists with audible relief.


    "Much better," James declared, picking up the discarded cuffs. "We should keep these."


    Beatrice, her spell nearing completion, focused intently on the captive''s mind. Images flickered before her eyes, revealing the prince''s clandestine meeting with the kidnappers, his instructions clear and his demeanor menacing. The prince''s motive, however, remained shrouded in mystery.


    Suddenly, a sharp cry pierced the air. Beatrice whirled around, her eyes widening in alarm. One of the fallen kidnappers, seemingly lifeless, had sprung to his feet, a dagger clutched in his hand. He lunged towards William, his face contorted with rage. S§×arch* The Nov§×l?ire.n(e)t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    William, caught off guard, barely had time to react. The dagger plunged towards his chest, its point glinting ominously in the moonlight.


    Just as the dagger threatened to pierce William''s flesh, Leonard intervened. With astonishing speed, he moved in front of William, his hand intercepting the blade.


    The dagger shattered against Leonard''s palm, unable to penetrate his skin.


    "W-What?" the attacker stammered, disbelief etched on his face.


    Leonard''s expression remained cold as he delivered a swift kick to the man''s head, ending his life instantly. Experience tales at empire


    William, shaken, stared at the scene. Leonard''s speed was terrifying. It was unsettling to realize someone could end his life so easily.


    James, sensing William''s apprehension, explained, "Leonard specializes in body enhancement magic, like you. Between the two of us, he was the only one capable of reaching you in time."


    "That was incredible!" William exclaimed, admiration replacing his fear.


    He then noticed James''s troubled expression. James was repeatedly attempting to cast a simple spell, but nothing happened.


    "Damn it!" James cursed. "He was telling the truth?"


    Leonard, noticing his friend''s distress, rushed to his side. He pulled up James''s shirt, revealing a rune etched onto his torso.


    "Do you think that Runic Sealer was serious?" Leonard asked, concern in his voice.


    "It seems so..." James replied grimly.


    William, confused, sought an explanation. James''s words filled him with anxiety.


    "They hired the best Runic Sealer in the kingdom," James revealed, his voice trembling. "He sealed my mana. I can''t cast spells anymore." He paused, his gaze distant. "He claimed to be the only one who can remove the seal, and he''s long gone. I''ll have to find a way to break this seal..."


    Leonard, skilled in body enhancement magic, was also adept at creating magical formations, including those designed for sealing. He examined the rune on James''s torso, his expression growing grim.


    "I don''t believe anyone possesses the knowledge to remove this rune..." Leonard admitted. "You might have to endure it for some time."


    William''s apprehension grew. If the prince had orchestrated James''s incapacitation, he must be aware of their mission to gather the antidote ingredients. With James powerless, the responsibility now fell solely on William''s shoulders.


    "Let''s leave," Beatrice declared. "The captive has no further information to offer. We should hand him over to the authorities."


    They returned to the city, the kidnapper leader bound and secured. They informed the guards, and the man was promptly arrested.


    Beatrice bid them farewell. "I can''t stay away any longer, or the family I work for will become suspicious."


    She embraced James. "It''s been a while, James. I''ll do everything I can to help you remove that seal."


    William observed their interaction and sensed an underlying connection between them. He wasn''t oblivious, but he wisely chose to remain silent, saving his teasing for a more private moment.


    After Beatrice departed, Leonard followed suit. "I need to return to my house," he explained. "If your student and Beatrice were able to enter, it means the traps are deactivated."


    With Leonard gone, James and William were alone.


    "What should we do now?" William asked as they walked towards the palace.


    "The prince is behind this," James mused, "but I can''t confront him while my mana is sealed. I believe staying in the palace is the safest course of action for now. No one will attempt anything there."


    Within the palace walls, the prince wouldn''t dare to act against them. The king''s guards were numerous and vigilant; the prince wouldn''t risk such a brazen attack. That''s why he had seized the opportunity while James was outside.


    With his mana sealed, James was vulnerable and needed a safe haven.


    "I''ll speak with the king and see if he can help me with this seal," James decided. "Should I tell him about the prince''s involvement?"


    William considered this. "Yes, I think so. It''s better to inform him and avoid any surprises. If he knows his son is plotting something, he can monitor his actions."


    Whether it was the right decision remained to be seen, but they were willing to take the risk.


    However, another challenge arose. "How will I gather the ingredients alone?" William expressed his concern. "I''ll have the crew, but without you, I''m not sure I can succeed."


    James placed a reassuring hand on William''s shoulder. "I have faith in you," he said. "I believe the king will assign another powerful mage to assist you, someone he trusts. It won''t be the same, but it will have to suffice. We can''t afford to delay; the king''s life is at stake."


    The mission was indeed critical. With war looming, the king''s survival was paramount. He was a powerful figure and a symbol of the Black Flame Kingdom. His death would have dire consequences.


    They returned to the palace and retired to their chambers. It was too late to speak with the king that night. After a restless sleep, they scheduled a meeting with the king in his private chambers.


    When James informed the king of the events that had transpired, the old man was overcome with a mixture of anger and sorrow.


    "My son has always been troublesome, but to act against me..."


    King Memphis''s sadness was palpable. His strength seemed to drain away, his shoulders slumped, and his eyes held a vacant expression. The betrayal of his own son had dealt him a heavy blow.


    "I won''t reveal to my son that I know his intentions, but I''ll keep a close eye on him," Memphis assured them. "I''ll also find someone to examine this seal on you, James. If it cannot be removed, I''ll assign another mage to accompany William. We''ll need to wait a few days."


    James and William departed the king''s chambers. As they entered the main palace area, they spotted the prince strolling through the corridors. He smirked at them but remained silent. James felt a surge of anger, but he was powerless for now. Revenge would have to wait.

 Chapter 107 Aqualon

    King Memphis, with his vast network, summoned experts to the palace. They examined the rune on James''s torso for hours, each a specialist in magical formations and seals. However, despite their efforts, none could find a way to break the seal.One of the kingdom''s most renowned rune masters eventually examined James, but even he was baffled.


    "This might be the work of a rune master from another kingdom," he concluded. "If I cannot break it, you won''t find anyone in this kingdom who can."


    James was disheartened. He had hoped someone would recognize the seal, especially with the king summoning the kingdom''s best, but no one could overcome it.


    James would remain at the palace while William embarked on the quest for the ingredients.


    "Someone will arrive tomorrow," King Memphis informed them. "She is a powerful mage I trust, and she will accompany you on your journey, William."


    The weight of the mission now rested solely on William''s shoulders. Enjoy exclusive chapters from empire


    The weight of the responsibility settled heavily on William''s shoulders. He spent the rest of the day contemplating the task ahead, the gravity of the situation pressing down on him. He wandered the palace gardens, the vibrant colors and fragrant blooms doing little to ease his troubled thoughts.


    He joined James for a quiet dinner in a small dining hall, the usual chatter and laughter replaced by a somber silence. They discussed the mission, James offering advice and sharing his knowledge of the ingredients they sought.


    "The fire blossom is a delicate flower," James explained, "its petals as fragile as spun glass. You must handle it with care, or its essence will dissipate."


    William listened attentively, committing every detail to memory. He knew that without James''s expertise, he would have to rely on his own resourcefulness and the assistance of the unknown mage the king had promised.


    Later that evening, William found himself drawn to the palace library. He spent hours poring over ancient texts, seeking any information that might aid him in his quest. The library, with its hushed atmosphere and the comforting scent of old parchment, provided a welcome sanctuary from his anxieties.


    As the day drew to a close, William retired to his chambers, exhaustion finally claiming him. He slept fitfully, his dreams plagued by images of treacherous seas, fiery volcanoes, and elusive mermaids.


    The next morning, he awoke with a renewed sense of purpose. He dressed in the fine attire provided by the king, the soft fabrics and intricate embroidery a stark contrast to his usual student uniform. He joined James for a light breakfast, their conversation punctuated by nervous anticipation.


    A messenger arrived, announcing the arrival of the mage who would accompany William. He followed the messenger through the labyrinthine corridors of the palace, his heart pounding with a mixture of excitement and apprehension.


    He entered a grand reception hall, his eyes widening at the sight of the mage who awaited him. She was a vision of elegance and power, her pink hair cascading down her back like a silken waterfall. Her eyes, the color of amethyst, sparkled with intelligence and determination.


    "You must be William," she greeted him, her voice melodic and warm. "I am Seraphina, and I will be your companion on this quest."


    William bowed respectfully. "It''s an honor to meet you, Lady Seraphina."


    Seraphina smiled, her expression radiating confidence. "The honor is mine, William. I have heard much about your exploits, and I am eager to witness your skills firsthand." sea??h th§× novel(F~)ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    They exchanged pleasantries, discussing the journey ahead and the challenges they anticipated. Seraphina exuded an aura of calm competence that reassured William. He felt a surge of hope, believing that with her by his side, they might actually succeed.


    After a brief audience with the king, who offered words of encouragement and a promise of generous rewards, they departed the palace. A carriage awaited them, drawn by a pair of magnificent white horses. They settled into the plush interior, the carriage setting off at a brisk pace towards the coastal city of Aqualon, where their ship and crew awaited.


    The journey was uneventful, the rolling countryside a blur of green fields and quaint villages. William and Seraphina conversed, sharing stories and experiences. William learned that Seraphina was a renowned mage, specializing in water magic and possessing a deep knowledge of the sea and its creatures.


    "The Mermaid''s Tear is a rare and precious substance," she explained, her voice filled with reverence. "It is said to hold the essence of the mermaids'' sorrow, their tears crystallized into pearls of immense magical power."


    William listened, captivated by her tales of the underwater world, a realm he had only glimpsed in books and his dreams. He felt a growing sense of camaraderie with Seraphina, their shared purpose forging a bond between them.


    As dusk approached, they reached Aqualon, a bustling port city teeming with merchants, sailors, and adventurers. The salty tang of the sea filled the air, mingling with the exotic scents of spices and foreign goods.


    They decided to find lodging for the night before embarking on their seafaring adventure. Seraphina led William through the bustling streets, navigating the labyrinth of market stalls and crowded taverns with practiced ease.


    "Aqualon is a vibrant city," she commented, her eyes twinkling with amusement. "It attracts all sorts of interesting characters."


    They eventually found a cozy tavern tucked away in a quieter corner of the city. The tavern, with its low-beamed ceilings and roaring fireplace, offered a welcome respite from the day''s journey. They secured a private room and enjoyed a hearty meal of fresh seafood and local ale.


    "To a successful quest," Seraphina toasted, raising her tankard.


    "To success," William echoed, clinking his tankard against hers.


    The following morning, they made their way to the docks, the Sea Serpent looming large against the dawn sky. The crew, a mix of weathered sailors and sturdy mages, bustled about, preparing the ship for departure.


    "Captain Hemlock," Seraphina greeted the ship''s captain, a grizzled man with a booming voice. "It''s good to see you again."


    "Lady Seraphina," Captain Hemlock replied with a respectful nod. "It''s an honor to have you aboard. And you must be the young mage I''ve heard so much about." He turned his attention to William, his eyes assessing.


    "William, at your service, Captain," William responded, bowing slightly.


    "Well then, let''s get this show on the road," Captain Hemlock declared, clapping William on the shoulder. "We''ve got a long voyage ahead of us."


    The crew loaded the final supplies, securing barrels of fresh water, crates of provisions, and various magical implements. Seraphina supervised the loading of her personal belongings, which included an impressive array of scrolls, potions, and enchanted artifacts.


    "Prepared for anything, I see," William remarked, observing her meticulous arrangements.


    Seraphina winked. "One can never be too prepared, William. Especially when venturing into the unknown."


    With all preparations complete, the Sea Serpent set sail, its sails billowing in the morning breeze. William stood on the deck, watching as Aqualon receded into the distance. He felt a thrill of excitement mingled with a touch of trepidation. The vast expanse of the sea stretched before him, promising adventure and peril in equal measure.


    "Nervous?" Seraphina inquired, joining him at the railing.


    William shrugged, attempting to appear nonchalant. "A little. I''ve never been on a sea voyage before."


    Seraphina chuckled. "Don''t worry, William. You''re in good hands. Captain Hemlock and his crew are the best in Aqualon."


    She gestured towards the horizon. "Besides, think of the wonders that await us. Volcanic islands, hidden coves, and perhaps even a glimpse of the elusive mermaids."


    William''s spirits lifted. He gazed out at the endless blue, his heart filled with anticipation. He was ready to face whatever challenges lay ahead, with Seraphina by his side.


    The first few days of their journey were relatively uneventful. The Sea Serpent sailed smoothly across the calm waters, the sun shining brightly and the wind filling their sails. William spent his time learning the ropes from the seasoned sailors, practicing his swordsmanship, and studying the ancient texts he had borrowed from Orgnar.


    Seraphina proved to be a patient and knowledgeable teacher, guiding him through the intricacies of water magic and sharing her vast knowledge of the sea and its inhabitants. She taught him how to sense the currents, how to communicate with marine life, and how to harness the power of the ocean for both offense and defense.


    One evening, as the sun dipped below the horizon, painting the sky in a breathtaking array of colors, Seraphina approached William with a mischievous glint in her eyes.


    "Care for a little underwater exploration?" she asked, a playful smile curving her lips.


    William''s eyes widened with excitement. "Absolutely!"


    Seraphina led him to the ship''s lower deck, where a small, enchanted submersible awaited them. They climbed inside, the vessel sealing shut behind them. With a gentle hum, the submersible descended into the depths, the world above fading into a hazy blue.


    William gazed in wonder at the underwater realm, a kaleidoscope of vibrant colors and strange creatures. Schools of fish darted through coral reefs, luminescent jellyfish pulsed with ethereal light, and giant sea turtles glided gracefully through the water.


    Suddenly, Seraphina gripped his arm, her eyes wide with alarm. "Look!" she exclaimed, pointing towards a dark shape emerging from the shadows.

 Chapter 108 Island Treasure Map

    William felt a surge of fear. A creature approaching them underwater was indeed problematic; he was ill-equipped for underwater combat.Seraphina, however, calmly cast a water spell, creating a bubble around their heads, allowing them to breathe and communicate underwater.


    "Prepare for a fight," William declared, clenching his fists as the shadow loomed closer.


    Seraphina chuckled at his fearful expression.


    "What''s so funny?" he demanded.


    Then, the shadow resolved into a fish. It wasn''t the monstrous creature he had anticipated, nor did it pose any threat.


    "You knew all along, didn''t you?" William accused, recognizing the playful glint in her eyes.


    She nodded. "Indeed. Your fear was quite amusing."


    William disliked being tricked, but the voyage had been monotonous. The dive provided a welcome distraction.


    Seraphina''s expression turned serious. "But this is a good omen. That fish is called a Black Scale Lion, and it''s a favorite of mermaids. Their presence often indicates a mermaid habitat nearby."


    "Really?" William''s curiosity was piqued.


    "Indeed," she confirmed. "This seems like a good place to search for mermaids."


    Seraphina had sensed the Black Scale Lion, leading them to this specific location. Her mastery of water magic made her an invaluable asset on this quest. William suspected she was even more suited to the task than James. The king must have offered her a considerable sum to accompany him, given her skills.


    ''This is a crucial mission, so he''s likely sparing no expense to ensure its success,'' William mused.


    They returned to the Sea Serpent, and Seraphina instructed Captain Hemlock to find a suitable anchorage.


    "Understood, my lady," Hemlock acknowledged.


    A small, uninhabited island nearby provided the perfect spot to anchor for a few days. William admired the island''s unique vegetation and pristine beach as they approached.


    "Mermaids prefer secluded locations where they won''t be hunted," Seraphina explained, "but they also need access to shipping routes. This island is ideal."


    Captain Hemlock and the crew expertly maneuvered the Sea Serpent, anchoring it near the island''s shore.


    Enjoy exclusive chapters from empire


    William disembarked, savoring the feel of sand beneath his feet. He had missed the solidity of land after days at sea.


    While the crew established a beach camp, William ventured into the island''s interior, his sword at his side. He followed existing paths where possible, clearing new ones when necessary.


    Seraphina watched him disappear into the dense foliage. Though tempted to join him, she opted to assist the crew with the camp setup. Night was approaching, and they needed to prepare quickly.


    William discovered a cluster of coconut trees, effortlessly climbing one to retrieve a coconut. He savored the refreshing juice, draining it in seconds.


    However, his exploration proved disappointing. The island seemed to offer nothing but vegetation.


    "BORING!" he shouted in frustration, kicking a nearby rock.


    The rock sailed through the air, propelled by his considerable strength, revealing something beneath.


    "It looks like someone was digging here..." William murmured, noticing markings on the ground.


    He dug with his bare hands, unearthing a glass bottle containing a rolled-up note. Excitement surged through him. It reminded him of pirate stories he had enjoyed back on Earth.


    He retrieved the note and unfurled it, revealing a map.


    "Could this be a treasure map?" he wondered.


    William compared the island''s rock formations with those depicted on the map, but they didn''t match. It wasn''t a map of this island.


    Just as he was about to dismiss the map, his gaze fell upon a distant island on the horizon. With his enhanced vision, he spotted a rock formation that perfectly matched the one on the map.


    "That''s the island!" he exclaimed.


    The prospect of treasure hunting thrilled him. He returned to the beach camp, keeping the map a secret. He considered sharing it with Seraphina, but ultimately decided against it. He wanted the potential treasure for himself, and Seraphina''s presence would complicate matters. He would have to wait for the opportune moment to explore that island alone. S~ea??h the N?velFire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "How was your exploration?" Seraphina inquired when she saw him approach. "Did you find anything interesting?"


    "Nothing at all, just vegetation and coconuts..." William feigned disappointment.


    "That was rather predictable," she chuckled. "We are in the middle of nowhere. Anyway, tomorrow we can begin searching the surrounding waters for signs of mermaids. For now, let''s rest."


    As night fell, the crew gathered around a crackling campfire, the flames casting dancing shadows on their faces. They shared stories of past adventures, their laughter echoing across the deserted beach. William, however, remained preoccupied with the treasure map, his mind buzzing with possibilities.


    Seraphina, noticing his distraction, offered him a steaming mug of spiced cider. "Something on your mind, William?" she inquired, her amethyst eyes twinkling with concern.


    William hesitated, debating whether to confide in her. He decided against it, not wanting to jeopardize his potential treasure. "Just thinking about the mission," he replied vaguely.


    Seraphina nodded understandingly. "It''s a daunting task, but I have faith in us. We''ll find the Mermaid''s Tear."


    They shared a companionable silence, sipping their drinks and gazing at the star-studded sky. The gentle lapping of waves against the shore provided a soothing backdrop to their thoughts.


    After a satisfying meal of grilled fish and roasted vegetables, the crew retired to their tents, exhaustion claiming them after a long day. William, however, feigned sleep, his mind racing with plans to explore the distant island.


    As the moon reached its zenith, casting an ethereal glow over the sleeping camp, William slipped out of his tent. He retrieved the map from his inventory, his heart pounding with anticipation. He activated his Swiftfoot spell, his movements becoming a blur as he raced towards the island''s interior.


    He reached the shore, the cool water lapping at his feet. He hesitated for a moment, considering the risks. The journey to the distant island would be long and arduous, and the waters were unknown, potentially harboring dangerous creatures. But the lure of treasure outweighed his fears.


    He plunged into the water, his Swiftfoot spell propelling him forward with incredible speed. He swam with powerful strokes, his body cutting through the water like a dolphin. The moonlit sea stretched before him, an endless expanse of mystery and possibility.


    After what seemed like an eternity, the distant island loomed into view, its silhouette stark against the horizon. William''s heart quickened with excitement. He reached the shore, his breath coming in ragged gasps. He collapsed onto the sand, exhaustion washing over him.


    He allowed himself a brief respite, then, with renewed determination, he ventured into the island''s depths, the treasure map guiding his steps. The island was shrouded in an eerie silence, broken only by the rustling of leaves and the occasional cry of a nocturnal bird. William followed the map''s markings, his heart pounding with anticipation.


    The path led him through dense thickets, across rocky terrain, and over treacherous ravines. He navigated the obstacles with agility, his enhanced senses guiding him through the darkness. After what seemed like hours of trekking, he reached a clearing bathed in moonlight.


    Three towering stone pillars stood in the center of the clearing, their surfaces etched with intricate carvings. William recognized them from the map. This was the location of the treasure.


    He examined the pillars closely, searching for clues. The carvings depicted scenes of mythical creatures and celestial events, their meaning obscure. William traced the lines with his fingers, attempting to decipher their secrets.


    Suddenly, the ground beneath him trembled, and the pillars began to glow with an eerie light. The carvings animated, their figures swirling and dancing in a mesmerizing display. William watched in awe, his mind reeling from the spectacle.


    As the light subsided, a circular opening appeared in the ground between the pillars, revealing a pool of shimmering water. William peered into the depths, his curiosity piqued. He sensed a powerful magical aura emanating from the water, beckoning him closer.


    He took a deep breath and plunged into the pool, the cool water enveloping him. He sank deeper and deeper, the light from above fading into a distant glimmer. Just as he began to worry about his dwindling breath, he emerged into a vast underwater cavern.


    Before him lay a magnificent city, its structures crafted from coral, pearls, and shimmering crystals. Schools of fish darted through the streets, their scales reflecting the city''s ethereal glow. And then he saw them ¨C mermaids and tritons, their forms graceful and fluid, their eyes filled with an ancient wisdom.


    William gasped in astonishment. He had stumbled upon an underwater civilization, a hidden world beyond his wildest imagination. The water around him felt strangely light, allowing him to breathe and move as if he were on land. He wandered through the city, marveling at its beauty and the serenity of its inhabitants.


    Suddenly, a group of triton guards appeared, their expressions stern and their tridents raised. They surrounded William, their voices echoing through the cavern.


    "Who are you? What are you doing in our domain?" one of the triton guards said.


    Despite asking that, the guards didn''t wait for an answer. They tossed a magical net on William, and arrested him, dragging him into their prison cells.

 Chapter 109 One of the Summoned Heroes

    Triton and mermaid eyes followed William with a mixture of curiosity and fear as he was hauled through the city. His presence, a human in their midst, was an anomaly, a disruption of their secluded existence. It had been ages since a human had set foot within their walls, and his sudden appearance sparked anxiety. Was he a scout for a hostile force? Did he intend to exploit their hidden city?William, ensnared by the magical net, was rendered powerless. Though his mana remained unsealed, his physical abilities were nullified. As a practitioner of body enhancement magic, the net was his perfect counter. He could only watch helplessly as they dragged him towards a forbidding stone building at the city''s edge, isolated and imposing. It was their prison.


    The triton guard shoved him into a cell and departed. Other cells held prisoners, all tritons or mermaids. William was the only human.


    Curiosity rippled through the inmates as they noticed William.


    "Well, well," a gruff voice called out. "A human in our city. How did you find us?"


    William was surprised they spoke his language. Were they once surface dwellers? He refused to answer their questions, assuming they were imprisoned for a reason. Sharing information with criminals seemed unwise.


    "It''s none of your business," William retorted coldly.


    "Of course it''s my business," the triton pressed. "Aren''t you curious about this place? Answer a few of my questions, and I''ll answer a few of yours."


    William recognized the manipulative tactic. Had the triton been anyone else, he might have considered the deal. However, given his current circumstances, William refused.


    "Nice try," William scoffed. "I''ll wait for their interrogation. I''ll learn everything I need then."


    "You think they''ll answer your questions and treat you well? You''re a human, and we despise humans!"


    William ignored him, sitting patiently in his cell. He didn''t attempt to escape. If the other prisoners hadn''t broken free, the bars were likely made of a special material. Besides, an escape attempt would only worsen his situation.


    Five hours passed. William was hungry, thirsty, and his body ached from the hard stone floor. When a guard finally arrived, it was a welcome sight.


    "Come with me," the guard instructed.


    The triton guard approached, magical net at the ready, but William raised his hands in a gesture of surrender. "You can trust me. I won''t run. I wouldn''t get far anyway."


    The guard hesitated, then lowered the net. They traversed the city, arriving at a grand structure on an elevated plateau. It resembled a castle, constructed from coral and stone, an impressive sight that left William awestruck.


    He quickly deduced that this society had a ruling class, likely a king and queen, judging by the grandeur of the building and its resemblance to a palace. The presence of numerous guards further reinforced this notion.


    As they entered, a guard addressed William''s escort. "Is this the human who arrived earlier?"


    "Indeed. Is the king prepared?"


    "Yes. Bring him in."


    A meeting with the king had been arranged. William was apprehensive. Would the king be hostile? The triton prisoner had mentioned their dislike for humans. Things could turn ugly.


    William observed the diverse forms of the palace inhabitants¡ªsome gracefully navigating the halls with shimmering tails, while others strode on human legs, just like himself. This apparent ability to shift between forms intrigued him.


    ''Perhaps they live amongst us undetected,'' he mused, considering the implications. If they could conceal their tails, they could seamlessly integrate into human society.


    The guard led him through the grand corridors, finally arriving at the imposing doors of the throne room. A hush fell over the area as the doors swung open, revealing a vast chamber fit for royalty. William stepped inside, his heart pounding with a mix of anticipation and apprehension.


    The throne room was empty except for the king himself, who sat upon an ornate throne carved from coral and pearls. It was clear the king desired a private audience.


    And what a king he was. Towering over William at least four meters in height, the triton king was a figure of immense power and authority. His physique was imposing, muscles rippling beneath his shimmering scales. Explore hidden tales at empire


    He held a magnificent trident, its prongs glinting with an ethereal light. He dwarfed every other triton and mermaid William had seen in the city. William found himself wondering about the source of the king''s extraordinary stature. Was it a result of royal lineage, potent magic, or perhaps both?


    William bowed deeply, demonstrating the respect he felt the king deserved. "It''s an honor to meet you, your Majesty."


    The king nodded, a flicker of approval in his eyes. "I appreciate your manners," he rumbled, his voice deep and resonant. "But what brings you here? More importantly, how did you discover the entrance to our hidden city?"


    William, sensing honesty was the best policy, decided against concealing information. He explained his presence clearly, detailing his journey and his purpose.


    "The king of my kingdom suffers from an illness," William revealed. "One of the ingredients required for the cure is a Mermaid''s Tear. We found traces of mermaids in the nearby islands and anchored our ship to seek your aid." He paused, then continued, "However, I also discovered a map on the island that led me to the entrance of your city. I followed it alone, without my crew, and that''s how I ended up here."


    The triton king''s expression hardened. "I understand. However, the location of our city is a secret, so unfortunately, you cannot leave. In time, I may release you from your cell and allow you to earn your freedom through service."


    William''s heart sank. This was not the outcome he had hoped for. He needed to utilize every advantage to persuade the king to help him or at least let him go.


    "You can''t do this," William declared. "I am one of the summoned heroes. You would imprison me while the King of the Underworld roams free?"


    The triton king''s brow furrowed, and he rose from his throne. He towered over William, their size difference stark.


    "What did you say?" he boomed, his voice echoing through the hall.


    "Exactly as you heard," William affirmed. "That''s my secret, so now we''re even. What do you say?"


    The triton king laughed. "Are we? At least my claim is true. There''s no way you''re one of the summoned heroes."


    "I am," William insisted firmly.


    "Well then," the king countered, "what if my most esteemed mage uses her magic to verify your claim? Are you willing?"


    "And can I trust you?" William countered, suspicion coloring his tone. "How does this verification work? What if you declare me a fraud after a fabricated check and send me back to prison?"


    He was wary, unsure how anyone could possess the power to discern his true identity as a summoned hero.


    The king elucidated, a hint of amusement in his voice. "If you are truly one of the summoned heroes, which I highly doubt, but let''s assume you are, then you should know that all summoned heroes bear a unique mark linked to their powers. It''s one of the first things they learn about themselves. Your ignorance on this matter betrays your falsehood."


    William''s jaw dropped. This was news to him. Unlike the other summoned heroes, he hadn''t received any specialized training and was no longer in contact with them. He had been dismissed, deemed unnecessary due to the already abundant number of heroes.


    Consequently, he was unaware of many details regarding the other heroes, their training, their mission, and so on. The triton king''s knowledge on this subject surprised him.


    "And how do you know this?" William questioned, curiosity overriding his apprehension.


    "I have lived for far longer than you can fathom, young one," the king replied cryptically. "But enough with the questions. Are you willing to undergo this verification?" He leaned forward, his gaze piercing. "Consider this a favor. The proper course of action would be to return a liar like you to your cell."


    The king remained unconvinced by William''s claims, which was understandable. However, he was offering William a chance to prove himself. This presented both a potential opportunity and a significant risk. It could be his ticket to freedom or the confirmation of his deceit, potentially leading to further consequences.


    "Bring in your mage," William agreed, his voice steady despite the pounding of his heart.


    Before summoning his mage, the king proposed a wager. "Let''s make a bet. If you are truly a summoned hero, I''ll support you in any way I can. But if you''re not," his voice hardened, "you''ll spend the rest of your days in one of my cells, with no chance of freedom. You''ll work for us without reward, doing whatever we demand. Do we have an agreement?" S§×arch* The N??elFir§×.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    The king expected William to hesitate, to weigh the risks of such a gamble. Instead, William responded without missing a beat, "Deal."


    It shocked the triton king, who called for his court mage to do the test. William had no idea what to expect of that.

 Chapter 110 New Ally?

    The mage that the triton king called was a woman. A mermaid to be precise. But she didn''t look like one. She was walking on two legs, and there was not a single feature in her appearance that would make William link her to a mermaid.If she was disguising herself, then it was flawless. "This is my court wizard, Meridia. She is quite powerful, and the mage that I trust the most."


    William shook his head. "And how does this test works? I mean, will it change your view of me? I''ve heard that your race dislikes humans."


    The king laughed, "and where did you hear that? We don''t, and we had a lot more human visitors in the past. Was someone in the cells that told you that? That person is a liar and a thief."


    "So if you don''t dislike humans, why would you trap me without the chance of letting me go?" William said.


    "Well, if you had reached this place by some other means, that I wouldn''t. But now you know one of the secret entrances, and this means you cannot leave because people can''t know about it."


    William smirked, "You mean I can leave, right? Because your mage will do this test and it will see that I am one of the heroes."


    "We will see, young man, we will see."


    Meridia stepped forward, her amethyst eyes, mirroring the king''s, fixed on William. "The verification process is simple," she explained, her voice calm and measured. "I will cast a spell to reveal your true nature. If you are indeed a summoned hero, a mark will manifest, signifying your status and the nature of your powers."


    William nodded, his apprehension growing. He had no idea what to expect. Meridia raised her hand, her palm glowing with a soft, ethereal light. She chanted in an ancient tongue, the words washing over William like a gentle wave. He felt a tingling sensation throughout his body, a warmth spreading through his veins.


    As Meridia concluded the incantation, a gasp escaped her lips. Her eyes widened in shock, and she stumbled backward, collapsing onto the polished floor.


    "What is it, Meridia?" the king boomed, his voice laced with concern.


    Meridia, still reeling from the revelation, stammered, "Y-Your Majesty... he... he is indeed a summoned hero." She pointed a trembling finger towards William''s forearm, where a mark had materialized ¨C a black dragon, its scales intricately detailed, its eyes glowing with an inner fire.


    The king''s eyes widened in disbelief. He approached William, his gaze fixed on the mark. "This... this is unprecedented," he murmured, his voice hushed with awe. "Not only is he a summoned hero, but he bears the mark of the Black Dragon, the strongest among them. No hero has been summoned with this mark in over ten thousand years."


    A wave of realization washed over the king. He straightened, his eyes filled with newfound respect. "Forgive my earlier skepticism, Hero William," he declared, his voice resonating with sincerity. "I had no idea... We are honored by your presence."


    He turned towards the guards. "Release him immediately. And prepare a feast in his honor."


    William, still processing the events, felt a surge of relief. He had narrowly escaped imprisonment, and his identity as a summoned hero had been confirmed, even celebrated.


    The king, eager to make amends, offered William a tour of the palace, showcasing its grandeur and the intricate workings of their underwater society. He introduced William to his queen, a graceful and intelligent mermaid with a warm smile, and to other members of the court, each expressing their admiration and respect.


    "We are indebted to you, Hero William," the queen declared, her voice gentle and melodic. "Your presence here is a blessing."


    The king, eager to fulfill his end of the wager, offered William not only his freedom but also the Mermaid''s Tear he sought.


    "It is an honor to assist a hero, especially one bearing the mark of the Black Dragon," the king proclaimed, presenting William with a shimmering pearl, its surface iridescent with the colors of the sea. "May it aid you in your noble quest."


    William accepted the Tear with gratitude, his heart filled with a newfound respect for the triton king and his people.


    "Is this the mermaid tear that I needed?" he asked.


    The king confirmed, "Yes, it is."


    "Incredible," William breathed, turning the pearl over in his palm, mesmerized by its iridescent glow. "Thank you, your Majesty. This is..." He paused, searching for the right words to express his gratitude.


    "A small token of our appreciation for a hero," the king finished, a warm smile gracing his features. "Now, come, let us celebrate."


    The feast was a grand affair, held in a vast hall adorned with shimmering coral and luminous pearls. Long tables overflowed with platters of exotic delicacies ¨C roasted sea serpent, grilled kelp cakes, and platters of glistening seaweed salad. Triton musicians played haunting melodies on conch shell instruments, and mermaid dancers twirled gracefully, their movements fluid and mesmerizing.


    William, seated beside the king and queen, felt a warmth spread through him. He had been welcomed into this hidden world, not as an intruder, but as an honored guest. He savored the delicious food, marveling at the unique flavors and textures.


    "This is incredible," he remarked to the queen, who sat beside him. "I''ve never tasted anything like it."


    The queen smiled. "We are proud of our culinary traditions," she replied. "Our chefs are skilled in utilizing the bounty of the sea."


    As the festivities continued, the king leaned closer to William, his voice dropping to a conspiratorial whisper. "Hero William," he began, "I understand the importance of discretion. Your identity as a summoned hero will remain a secret within these walls. Only the royal family and Meridia will know the truth."


    William nodded gratefully. "Thank you, your Majesty. I appreciate your understanding."


    The king raised his goblet. "To Hero William," he announced, his voice booming through the hall. "May his journey be filled with success and his name remembered for generations to come."


    The hall erupted in cheers, the tritons and mermaids raising their goblets in unison. William, basking in the warmth of their acceptance, felt a surge of hope. He had found an unexpected ally in this underwater kingdom, a powerful force that could aid him in his quest. He knew that with their support, and the Mermaid''s Tear secured, he was one step closer to fulfilling his mission and saving King Memphis.


    Once the festivities concluded, the king and William retreated to a private chamber for a more intimate conversation. The king presented William with an azure ring, pulsing with a palpable magical aura.


    Explore hidden tales at empire


    "This is a unique artifact," the king explained. "We possess only three of its kind. It will allow you to open a portal to our city whenever you wish. You can also use it to return to the location where you first entered."


    William was astonished. He had never encountered such a powerful treasure.


    "We have remained hidden for far too long," the king confessed. "Perhaps this is an opportunity to re-establish communication with the humans and rekindle our friendship. Could you arrange a meeting between myself and King Memphis in the near future?"


    The triton king saw this as a chance to initiate contact with the human world. William was pleased; he had gained a valuable ally.


    "Certainly, your Majesty," William assured him. "I''ll arrange it."


    William didn''t know if the other heroes were getting powerful allies, but he knew he was, and that was only the start. He would reclaim his glory, and get his revenge.


    Sear?h the n??el Fire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.

 Chapter 111 Epic Ring, and Hamburger?

    Seraphina and the others were undoubtedly worried, given William''s sudden disappearance hours ago. After discussing future plans with the king, William decided to depart using the ring he had received.[Mermaid''s Tide (Epic)]


    [A unique ring belonging to the mermaid race. It allows the user to travel between the various entrances of the mermaid kingdom.]


    The Epic rank classification indicated it was one of the most powerful items available, and William was thrilled to possess it. He activated the ring, focusing on the entrance he had used to access the mermaid kingdom. A portal shimmered into existence, and he stepped through.


    He materialized on the island, but the entrance had deactivated, leaving only the stone pillars. It was already morning, and he soon heard the crew''s frantic calls. They had been searching for hours, diving underwater and scouring nearby islands.


    Seraphina led the search party, her water magic proving invaluable, enabling the crew to breathe underwater.


    "William! William!" their voices echoed across the water.


    Just as their hope dwindled, William appeared on a nearby island and shouted back, "I''m here!"


    Relief washed over them, especially Seraphina. She had been entrusted with William''s safety, and his disappearance had placed her in a precarious position.


    William prepared to swim back to the ship when Seraphina materialized beside him, using her magic to allow him to walk on water.


    "What happened?" she inquired as they approached the ship.


    "I found a mermaid and obtained the Tear!" he declared triumphantly.


    He showed her the shimmering pearl, and Seraphina gasped. "What? Truly? This is incredible! I anticipated at least a month''s search."


    The sight of the Mermaid''s Tear silenced Seraphina''s questions about William''s whereabouts and activities. This suited William perfectly, as he couldn''t divulge his encounter with the underwater kingdom. Establishing a relationship with the merfolk would require a formal meeting between the two kings.


    With William safely back on board and the crew celebrating his return, they set sail once more. Their next objective was the fire blossom flower, a rare specimen found only near volcanoes.


    "I''ll be in my quarters," William announced to Captain Hemlock and Seraphina, exhaustion finally catching up with him.


    He retreated to his cabin, eager for rest after a long and eventful night. He needed to sleep before his weary body gave way.


    The moment William''s head hit the pillow, he was asleep. Exhaustion had finally claimed him.


    He awoke hours later, his stomach growling. He climbed to the deck in search of food. Enjoy new chapters from empire


    "Look who''s finally awake," Captain Hemlock greeted him with a grin. "How was your rest?"


    "Excellent, and much needed. How is the voyage progressing?" William inquired.


    Hemlock''s expression turned serious. "So far, so good, but there are pirates in these waters. We''re proceeding cautiously and hoping for the best."


    "Are you concerned about pirates?" William asked.


    "Not particularly. With the mages we have on board, pirates stand little chance. However, they could still damage the ship, delay our journey, or even injure some of the crew. It wouldn''t be ideal," Hemlock explained.


    The king had anticipated potential problems, hence the powerful crew accompanying William. The antidote was his priority, and he spared no effort to obtain it.


    William fetched food from the galley and ate on deck while admiring the endless blue expanse. They were surrounded by water, no land in sight.


    "How long until the next major island?" William inquired.


    Hemlock, with his extensive nautical knowledge, replied, "About three days, assuming no unforeseen delays like storms. We''ll make a brief stop to replenish our supplies before continuing."


    The ship''s stores of food and water were still plentiful, but Captain Hemlock preferred caution. Resupplying at a large, inhabited island was wiser than risking a shortage.


    William understood and didn''t press the matter further. He found a quiet spot on deck to immerse himself in the books Orgnar had lent him ¨C the ones detailing the history of demons.


    He prioritized learning about demons and his own powers over studying new spells. Attempting to learn spells during the voyage would be impractical anyway, given the limited time.


    The books revealed fascinating insights into the demon race. Apparently, they were prominent seven to eight thousand years ago.


    Demons weren''t an entirely distinct race. They resembled humans but possessed a unique bloodline and their own kingdom. They were generally peaceful, focusing on magic and hunting, particularly skilled at hunting and taming powerful beasts. This explained the taming abilities of William''s demonic sword; ancient demons likely possessed similar powers.


    However, demons faced a significant challenge: low birth rates. They reproduced far less easily than humans or other races, resulting in a population even smaller than that of the elves, who also suffered from low fertility. S§×ar?h the N?velFire(.)net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Elves, however, were immortal, at least in terms of aging. Demons also had long lifespans, ranging from 600 to 1000 years, though some lived even longer.


    William felt enriched by the knowledge gleaned from the books, and he hadn''t even finished them yet. He was eager to uncover more secrets of the demon race.


    The remaining days of the journey passed swiftly and peacefully. Soon, they arrived at the island Captain Hemlock had mentioned.


    Hemlock anchored the ship near the port and instructed his crew. "You''re free for the day while I arrange our supplies. Tomorrow, I''ll need your help loading the ship."


    This granted everyone some free time, including William. He decided to explore the island alone, despite Seraphina''s offer to accompany him.


    His desire for solitude wasn''t a reflection on Seraphina; he simply craved some personal time. The constant company on board the ship had become a bit overwhelming. Seraphina, understanding his need for space, didn''t object.


    The island boasted a sizable, bustling city, a popular stop for merchant and other vessels navigating the area. Pirates, cleverly disguised, roamed the streets, but the city''s unique laws prevented their arrest simply for being pirates. It was a haven for all, though committing crimes within its boundaries still carried consequences.


    William strolled along the cobblestone streets, drawn to the lively music spilling from a nearby bar. He decided to indulge in a drink and enjoy the tunes.


    A man with a guitar sang with impressive skill, captivating the audience. William savored the moment, sipping an unfamiliar alcoholic beverage. It brought back memories of his college days, seeking solace in bars to escape the pressures of life. Though perhaps not the healthiest coping mechanism, it had brought him a sense of peace at the time.


    Several women approached William, drawn to his handsome features and fine attire. However, he politely declined their advances, his focus fixed on the mission.


    After a few drinks, he continued his exploration of the city. A particular establishment caught his eye, nearly bringing him to tears. It was a small restaurant with outdoor seating, and the food they served resembled hamburgers. They weren''t exactly like those from Earth, but the similarity was enough to stir a deep craving within him.


    He secured a table and eagerly awaited the waiter''s arrival, hoping the menu would offer the culinary comfort he sought.


    The waiter, a friendly young man with a cheerful grin, presented William with a menu handwritten on a weathered piece of parchment. William scanned the offerings, his eyes lighting up when he spotted the "Grizzly Burger."


    "I''ll take the Grizzly Burger," he declared, his stomach already growling in anticipation.


    "Excellent choice, sir," the waiter replied, scribbling the order onto a small pad. "And what would you like to drink?"


    William pondered for a moment, then decided on a local ale. He leaned back in his chair, enjoying the warm afternoon sun and the lively chatter from the nearby market.


    The burger arrived, its aroma making his mouth water. It was a hefty creation, a juicy patty nestled between two thick slices of crusty bread, topped with melted cheese, crisp lettuce, and a tangy sauce. William took a bite, savoring the explosion of flavors. It wasn''t exactly like the burgers back home, but it was a delicious and satisfying meal nonetheless.


    As he finished his meal, a commotion erupted from the nearby market. A group of rough-looking men, their faces obscured by scarves and their hands gripping weapons, barged through the crowd, shouting threats and demanding valuables.


    William watched with a mixture of curiosity and apprehension. He had heard tales of the city''s lax laws, but witnessing such brazen lawlessness firsthand was unsettling. He debated whether to intervene, but ultimately decided against it. He was a guest in this city, and involving himself in local disputes could jeopardize his mission.


    William, choosing to ignore the commotion, sought a tavern for the night. The scene in the market was unsettling, but he felt powerless to intervene.


    He selected a decent-looking tavern from the many available, secured a room, and went straight to bed.


    "I think I drank too much..." he mumbled, the effects of the alcohol catching up with him.


    The pleasant buzz had faded, leaving him feeling unwell. He lay down, attempting to sleep, but woke up several times throughout the night to vomit.


    The next morning, he awoke with a pounding headache and a churning stomach. He regretted his indulgence the night before. He needed to be sharp and focused for the journey ahead, and his current state was far from ideal.

 Chapter 112 Back to the Past

    The harsh morning sun assaulted William''s eyes as he emerged from the tavern, his head still pounding and his stomach churning from the previous night''s overindulgence. Thankfully, his mana-enhanced constitution allowed for faster recovery than ordinary people, so he wouldn''t suffer for long.He was frustrated by the lack of EXP gains. He needed to level up to unlock his class, but opportunities to gain EXP were scarce. With Seraphina and the experienced crew around, he wasn''t needed for fighting, denying him chances to gain experience. S§×arch* The nov§×lF~ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    ''My Chrono Shift will be ready soon. Should I use it?'' he pondered as he navigated the city streets.


    His last trip to the past had been eventful, filled with both opportunities and challenges. The situation at the academy, with its secret passages, undead creatures, and Professor Lincoln''s strange behavior, was concerning. Was it wise to return, potentially facing another extended stay?


    ''At least I can gain EXP there... Perhaps it''s worth the risk...''


    He still had a few days to decide. For now, he had to help load supplies onto the Sea Serpent. Arriving at the harbor, he found the captain and crew already at work, carrying crates onto the ship.


    "What happened to you, William?" one of the sailors remarked. "You look awful!"


    William couldn''t deny his disheveled appearance. "I had a bit too much to drink last night," he confessed.


    "That explains why you look so rough and why you''re late," the sailor chuckled. "Come on, we need your help getting these crates onto the ship."


    Everyone worked together to load the supplies. While magic could have sped things up, using it within the city was forbidden.


    It took them roughly forty minutes to finish the task, and then they were ready to depart. Their destination: a volcanic island, the only place where the Fire Blossom Flower could be found.


    "How long until we get there?" William asked.


    The captain, steering the ship back on course, replied, "About fifteen days. The journey should be calm, but the island itself is dangerous. We''ll need to be prepared."


    "Fifteen days? That''s not as long as I expected," William remarked.


    They were nearing the end of their journey. Obtaining the flower would be challenging, but they were close. William''s acquisition of the Mermaid''s Tear had significantly expedited the mission.


    "Yes, we''re close," the captain agreed, "but this is the most perilous part of the journey. We must be extra vigilant."


    "How so?" William inquired.


    He anticipated tales of pirates and bandits, but the captain''s explanation was different.


    "Many ships vanish in these waters," the captain revealed, his voice grave. "Magical beasts are abundant here. I don''t mean to alarm you, but if we encounter a rare, powerful beast, we could all perish. There are stories of a Kraken with a level exceeding 200 lurking in this sea."


    "What? Are you serious?" William exclaimed, incredulous. "That''s insane!"


    "Indeed it is," the captain acknowledged. "But those are just stories. The likelihood of encountering such a creature is slim."


    Despite the captain''s reassurances, the image of a colossal Kraken lingered in William''s mind. He retreated to his cabin, seeking solace in his books to distract himself from the unsettling prospect.


    Three days passed, and the sea transformed. An endless mist descended, obscuring their vision. Captain Hemlock, however, seemed unfazed.


    "This is a well-known phenomenon in these waters. The mist never dissipates," he explained.


    The mist''s persistence suggested a magical origin. William joined the crew on deck, observing the eerie spectacle. Seraphina, her expression apprehensive, stood beside him.


    Suddenly, a notification appeared in William''s mind.


    [Chrono Shift is Up]


    The System alerted him to the ability''s availability. Previously, he might have hesitated, but the captain''s warnings about the dangerous waters had swayed him.


    Activating Chrono Shift would allow him to level up in Aethel''s past, increasing his chances of survival should they encounter any threats.


    William retreated to his cabin, a private space where he could activate his Chrono Shift ability undisturbed. He opened a portal to the past and stepped through, finding himself back in the familiar halls of the ancient Snowpeak Academy. He had taken the precaution of bringing a change of clothes, ensuring his appearance remained consistent.


    The journey to the dungeon was brief. A guard escorted him to the dimly lit cells. Xavier, confined to a cold, damp cell, glared at William with unconcealed rage.


    "I''ll wait outside," the guard announced. "Call if you need anything."


    With the guard gone, William faced Xavier alone. "You know I''d kill you without hesitation if I had the chance," Xavier seethed.


    William smirked. "Did you summon me here just for that? What a waste of time."


    "It''s not just that," Xavier insisted. "I''m willing to help you learn more about the secret order I wanted to join. In exchange, I want out of this cell!"


    The offer was tempting, but William doubted Xavier''s sincerity. He suspected a trap. Your next read awaits at empire


    "Why should I trust you?" William countered. "With you imprisoned here, it''s only a matter of time before we can extract your knowledge magically, assuming you even know anything valuable."


    William turned to leave, but Xavier stopped him. "I can give you some information upfront as a gesture of good faith."


    "What could you possibly tell me? I doubt you know anything important," William scoffed.


    "I know about an underground area beneath the academy," Xavier revealed. "You can verify this yourself, proving my trustworthiness."


    William froze. He had recently explored that underground area, and it raised many questions. How did Xavier know about it? According to Marcel, it was a secret, and no one had ever mentioned it before.


    "What did you say?" William asked, needing to hear it again.


    "There''s an underground area beneath the academy," Xavier repeated. "It once belonged to the secret order I wanted to join. I don''t know if it holds anything valuable, but it proves I have information worth sharing."


    This was crucial information! The underground area William and Marcel had explored was connected to the secret organization practicing dark arts.


    "How can I be sure you''re telling the truth?" William pressed. "What if you''re simply pretending it''s related to this order? It could be a meaningless coincidence."


    "There should be evidence linking the area to the order," Xavier insisted. "And you can expect to encounter flesh creatures down there. The order creates them."


    William had encountered a flesh golem. Xavier''s claims were becoming increasingly credible. William, however, concealed his prior exploration. "I''ll investigate to verify your claims. How do I access this underground area?"


    Xavier explained, revealing a different secret entrance than the one Marcel knew. Apparently, multiple secret passages led to the same area. This one was located in the abandoned guard tower at the back of the academy. The tower predated the academy but remained unused, perhaps deemed too old by Headmaster Grant.


    William found the invisible wall Xavier described. A staircase descended, leading to the same underground area he had visited before. He saw no reason to venture back down. The place was dangerous, and he wasn''t confident in his ability to survive another exploration alone.


    He returned to Xavier.


    "Well? Did you find it?" Xavier asked, surprise evident in his expression.


    "Are you surprised I survived the flesh creatures?" William smirked. "I''m more capable than you think. Now, can you tell me what language this is?"


    William presented the books he had found during his previous exploration with Marcel.


    The books, a source of lingering mystery, were now in Xavier''s hands. Though unable to decipher them, he offered a glimmer of hope.


    "These books utilize a coded language created by the order," Xavier explained. "The base language originates from a distant kingdom. If you can find someone who speaks it, or learn it yourself, deciphering the books might be possible."


    "What kingdom?" William pressed, eager for any lead.


    Aethel''s past held kingdoms different from those William knew. His knowledge of ancient history was limited.


    "That''s the problem," Xavier admitted. "The kingdom no longer exists. It was conquered around 1200 years ago, and its language is practically lost. You could try searching the desert for more information."


    "Damn it!" William cursed, striking the stone wall in frustration.


    The information, though intriguing, was currently useless. He turned and left, ignoring Xavier''s pleas for reciprocation.


    Marcel intercepted him shortly after. "Well? What did you learn?"


    William, still harboring some distrust towards Marcel, nevertheless shared his newfound knowledge.


    "I see..." Marcel mused. "Venturing into the desert is impossible for us now, but perhaps in the future. At least we have a lead."


    "Before I forget," Marcel added, "the test for the island expedition is happening in a few days. It''s been moved up."


    This was the test to qualify for the journey to the island housing another Snowpeak Academy branch. William was determined to go.


    "What? Are you serious? Can we even pass it?" he asked, surprised.


    Marcel nodded. "I think so. Everyone''s had the same amount of preparation time, so we''re not at a disadvantage."


    William felt a surge of anxiety. Would he succeed?

 Chapter 113 Hunt and Storm

    The test determined who would journey to the other Snowpeak Academy branch and reside on the island for a time. Headmaster Grant had explained that they needed assistance with construction and teaching at the new location. William, initially unsure, now felt certain he wanted to go.The only thing keeping him at the current academy was the underground area, but the indecipherable language of the books hindered his progress. He decided it was better to risk a new experience than remain stagnant.


    The next few days flew by, and soon it was time for the test. William awoke with a mix of excitement and nerves. The other students shared his anticipation.


    Headmaster Grant summoned them to the gymnasium, a smaller version of the one William was accustomed to.


    "I''ve gathered you here for the upcoming test," he announced, his voice resonating through the space. "I seek talented individuals willing to relocate to another branch of our academy. It won''t be easy, so only the bravest should attempt this test!"


    William surveyed the room. Only fifteen students were present, including Marcel, who stood beside him, radiating enthusiasm. "We''ll pass this test! No more snow and cold ¨C we''re going to the beach!"


    Marcel clearly craved warmer weather. William was indifferent to the climate, but the prospect of a beach locale was appealing.


    "The test is simple," Grant explained. "Step forward and allow me to sense your aura. The strongest will be selected."


    The simplicity of the test surprised William, and he questioned the reasoning behind it. Grant had initially emphasized the need for builders and teachers, leading older students to believe their experience would be valued. However, the focus on aura strength suggested a different motive.


    ''Is there another reason why he wants the strongest to go?'' William pondered, suspicion creeping into his thoughts.


    Despite the potential for ulterior motives, William remained eager for the experience. It offered a chance to gain EXP and level up, something he had been unable to do recently. He was also curious about the academy branch''s absence in the present timeline. Could he influence the past and alter the future?


    The candidates approached Headmaster Grant one by one, undergoing the aura assessment. Grant selected several students, including William and Marcel.


    "You will depart tomorrow with one of our instructors," Grant announced. "Be prepared."


    William observed the other chosen students, mostly older and unfamiliar to him.


    After the test concluded, the students dispersed, each preparing for the journey in their own way.


    "This is exciting," Marcel exclaimed. "I can''t wait to get there."


    "Don''t you think it''s strange they only want the strongest?" William questioned. "What''s happening at that academy branch?"


    Marcel shrugged it off, unconcerned. William wondered if he was being overly cautious or if the others were naive to potential ulterior motives.


    William returned to his room and waited, passing the time with reading and magic practice.


    The next day, the students gathered at the academy gate, where Professor Lincoln awaited them. William felt uneasy about Lincoln''s presence. The professor was shrouded in mystery, his motives unclear, especially after William had spotted him lurking at night.


    Marcel shared his apprehension. "I wish someone else were accompanying us..." he murmured.


    However, they had no choice in the matter. Lincoln had brought a flying mount for the students to ride, but William had his own ¨C Asura, who had tamed a winged lizard.


    "William," Lincoln addressed him, "you can use your own mount. Marcel can accompany you, and I believe we''ll need one more student to join you as well."


    Lincoln''s mount couldn''t accommodate all eight students. William, Marcel, and one other would have to ride with Asura. Most preferred the perceived safety of traveling with the professor.


    Only one volunteered to join William: a timid girl with black hair and round glasses.


    "Can I go with you?" she asked softly.


    William saw no reason to refuse, especially with Marcel''s enthusiastic support. He suspected his friend had ulterior motives...


    With their arrangements settled, they departed. William possessed a map and a general sense of their destination, but he followed Lincoln for convenience. The aerial view was breathtaking, but William couldn''t shake a sense of foreboding. Something about Grant''s request felt off, but he would address that later.


    "How long will the journey take?" the timid girl inquired.


    William was about to answer when Marcel interjected, eager to impress her. "I believe it will take around ten days, if my estimations are correct."


    William played along, supporting his friend''s attempt to impress the girl. "You can trust Marcel," he affirmed. "He knows what he''s talking about."


    "Really?" the girl responded, her eyes shining with admiration. "That''s wonderful. It''s reassuring to have someone reliable."


    Marcel discreetly gave William a thumbs-up.


    Their journey was relatively peaceful. They encountered some beasts along the way, but Lincoln, with his formidable power, easily dispatched them. While this meant less work for William, it also meant fewer opportunities to gain EXP.


    William noticed they were heading towards a different sea than the one he had traversed with Hemlock and Seraphina. This time, they were venturing into an unfamiliar part of the kingdom, with unique vegetation and landscapes.


    The entire kingdom was indeed unfamiliar to William, its past vastly different from the present he knew. From his vantage point atop the flying lizard, he saw few signs of civilization. Occasional villages dotted the landscape, but wilderness dominated. Sear?h the N??elFir§×.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Lincoln slowed his mount, flying alongside William. "Let''s stop for today," he advised. "I sense a powerful storm approaching. Flying would be unwise."


    William nodded in agreement. They searched for a suitable shelter, the advantage of their flying mounts allowing them to reach normally inaccessible locations. A cavern atop a mountain caught their attention, promising protection from the impending storm.


    William and Lincoln landed their mounts, and Lincoln cautiously entered the cave to ensure its safety. Finding it clear, they led the students inside. Read the latest on empire


    "Professor Lincoln, what about our tents?" one student inquired. "We didn''t bring any."


    Headmaster Grant had told them tents were unnecessary, but no one understood why until now. Lincoln demonstrated his resourcefulness. He conjured tiny houses, creating stone structures out of thin air. Then, he magically generated vegetation to create comfortable bedding.


    Within minutes, he had constructed five cozy shelters, complete with windows to alleviate any sense of claustrophobia. William was impressed. This was a valuable skill for frequent travelers.


    "Decide amongst yourselves who sleeps where," Lincoln instructed. "The houses are identical, so don''t overthink it. I''ll start a fire."


    William, Marcel, and the timid girl, Denise, ended up sharing a house. Although the space was cramped for three, Denise preferred their company to that of the other students.


    "I don''t trust them," she confessed. "Sharing a room with you is preferable. If that''s alright?"


    "Sure, no problem," William agreed. "I''ll help with the fire. You and Marcel can stay here and chat."


    William left the tiny house and found Lincoln preparing a fire.


    "Professor," William began, "may I hunt something for us to eat?"


    Lincoln looked surprised. "We still have supplies. Are you sure you want to go out with the storm approaching?"


    "It will be a while before the storm reaches us, and it''s better to hunt than deplete our supplies, right?" William reasoned. "Asura and I can easily catch something."


    Lincoln considered this, then said, "Fine. But wait here. I have something for you."


    He rummaged through his bags and produced a wooden bow and arrows. "It''s simple, but effective for hunting. I don''t know if you''re familiar with mana infusion, but it''s a useful skill to learn if you have the time."


    William accepted the bow gratefully and thanked the professor before departing with Asura. From the air, they surveyed the landscape for potential prey. Asura''s keen senses aided in the search.


    He soon spotted a deer drinking from a small pond. It was the perfect prey, large enough to feed everyone. William dismounted, believing a stealthy approach on foot would be more effective than arriving on the noisy lizard.


    He crept closer, then drew the bow and loosed an arrow. With his enhanced strength, the arrow flew with tremendous force. Though not infused with mana, it was enough to kill the deer instantly.


    William retrieved the deer, hoisting it onto his shoulders, and waited for Asura. Back at the cave, the other students doubted his hunting prowess.


    "That guy''s going to get himself killed by some random beast," one scoffed. "I still don''t understand why the professors and Headmaster Grant think so highly of him."


    "Right? He seems like an average student."


    Their surprise was palpable when William returned just ten minutes later, a deer carcass slung over his shoulder. Even experienced mages often took longer, hindered by their lack of hunting skills. William, however, had easily tracked, killed, and retrieved his prey.


    He then proceeded to butcher the deer in front of them, unfazed by the blood and organs, a sight that unsettled some of the more squeamish students.


    William and Lincoln collaborated to prepare the meal. Everything proceeded smoothly until the storm hit. It was far fiercer than Lincoln had anticipated, the cave shaking under the onslaught of rain and thunder.


    "Is this a normal storm?" William asked, sensing something amiss. "This feels different."


    Lincoln''s expression was grave. Something unusual was happening, something William couldn''t comprehend.

 Chapter 114 Construction Workers?

    The storm''s unnatural intensity frightened everyone, even Lincoln."Everyone, go to the back of the cave," he instructed urgently. "This is not good."


    They obeyed, seeking safety in the cave''s depths. Lincoln cast a spell, creating a stone barrier to protect them.


    William remained near Lincoln, observing the professor''s worried expression. "What''s happening, Professor?" he asked.


    Lincoln, eyes fixed on the storm clouds, stammered, "L-Look! Just look!"


    He stared at the sky in awe. William followed his gaze and saw a magnificent creature soaring above them. It was a horse-like being with two wings, a horn, and crackling lightning surrounding its form. Its size was immense, like something out of a myth.


    "It''s a mythical creature," Lincoln whispered, his voice filled with wonder. "Few have ever witnessed such a sight... We are fortunate."


    "Then why are the students hiding?" William questioned.


    "Because it''s dangerous! We need to hide as well. If it finds us, we''re doomed."


    Lincoln and William retreated deeper into the cave, extinguishing the campfire. They joined the students, waiting anxiously for the creature to depart. The sound of its powerful wings echoed around them for hours until the storm subsided, and the creature vanished. S§×ar?h the ¦ÇovelFire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Everyone breathed a sigh of relief. The students, learning of the mythical horse, were incredulous. Some expressed disappointment at missing the sight, but the creature was gone.


    As they soared over a dense forest, a flock of monstrous ravens, their wingspans exceeding ten feet and their eyes burning with malevolent intent, descended upon them, their beaks sharp as daggers and talons outstretched.


    Lincoln, ever vigilant, reacted swiftly. "Hold tight!" he instructed the students, his voice unwavering.


    He raised his staff, channeling his mana. "Terra Spikes!" he boomed, and massive earthen spikes erupted from the ground below, narrowly missing the students but impaling several ravens, sending feathers and dark blood raining down.


    The remaining creatures screeched in fury, their feathers ruffled. They swooped and dived, attempting to flank the group, but Lincoln remained unfazed. "Vine Snare!" he incanted, and thick, thorny vines snaked out from the forest canopy, ensnaring the ravens, pulling them from the sky.


    William and the students watched in awe as Lincoln effortlessly controlled the earth and plants, manipulating the battlefield to his advantage. They had witnessed his strength before, but this aerial display was breathtaking.


    With the raven threat neutralized, they continued their journey, their confidence in Lincoln''s protection reinforced. They encountered other airborne creatures along the way ¨C giant, venomous wasps with stingers the size of swords, monstrous bats with razor-sharp claws, and even a colossal wyvern, its leathery wings eclipsing the sun as it swooped down, its jaws agape, revealing rows of jagged teeth.


    Each encounter tested Lincoln''s skills, but he remained undeterred, his magic a force to be reckoned with. He summoned earthen platforms to elevate them above attacks, conjured thorny vines to ensnare their airborne foes, and commanded the very air to buffet and disrupt their enemies'' flight.


    William, observing Lincoln''s mastery, felt a pang of envy. He yearned to possess such power, to command the elements with such ease. He knew he had a long way to go, but witnessing Lincoln''s abilities fueled his determination to grow stronger.


    After several days of travel, they reached the coast, the vast expanse of the sea stretching before them. A bustling port city, nestled amidst a crescent-shaped bay, marked their destination.


    "This is Port Azure," Lincoln announced, guiding his mount towards the city. "We''ll secure passage to the island from here." Find your next adventure on empire


    The city was a hive of activity, its streets teeming with merchants, sailors, and adventurers. The air was thick with the scent of salt, fish, and exotic spices. William, someone who had traveled a lot both in the past and the present of Aethel, felt adjusted to the place.


    As for the other students, most of them didn''t have the same experiences as he did, and they were in complete awe, looking around them with curious eyes.


    They landed in a designated area for flying mounts, drawing glances from the locals. Lincoln led them through the city, navigating the labyrinthine streets with practiced ease. They reached the docks, where a variety of ships bobbed gently in the harbor.


    Lincoln approached a sturdy-looking vessel with crimson sails. "Captain Valerius," he greeted the ship''s captain, a weathered man with a stern expression. "We require passage to the island."


    Captain Valerius eyed the group with a discerning gaze. "The island is a dangerous place," he warned, his voice gruff. "Are you sure you''re prepared?"


    Lincoln nodded confidently. "We are. We have urgent business there."


    Captain Valerius, seemingly satisfied with Lincoln''s assurance, gestured towards the ship. "Then welcome aboard. We set sail at dawn."


    After some discussion with Captain Valerius, they secured space for their flying mounts aboard the ship. William, Marcel, and Denise huddled together, their expressions reflecting shared concern.


    "Did you hear the captain? He called the island dangerous. What''s going on at that Snowpeak branch?" William voiced their worries.


    Marcel, initially skeptical of William''s suspicions, had become increasingly concerned. "I don''t know," he admitted, "but we shouldn''t be in any real danger. Though I don''t trust Lincoln, Headmaster Grant is a good man. He wouldn''t send us into harm''s way."


    William agreed. Lincoln was an enigma, but Headmaster Grant, despite his stern demeanor, was ultimately kind.


    They waited for the departure, passing the time with idle chatter and nervous anticipation. Captain Valerius''s experienced crew knew the surrounding waters and the safest route to the island.


    "Couldn''t we fly there directly?" William asked Lincoln, curious about their travel plans.


    "We will, eventually," Lincoln explained. "This ship will take us to another island, from which we''ll continue by air. There''s a particularly treacherous stretch of sea where flying is unsafe due to powerful aerial creatures and sea monsters. Once we pass that point, we can fly the rest of the way."


    William''s apprehension grew as he realized the complexity of reaching the Snowpeak branch. However, he kept his doubts to himself. The ship was well-stocked, and Lincoln had handled all the arrangements. The students simply boarded and prepared for the four-day voyage.


    William spent most of his time reading and conversing with Marcel and Denise, who shared his cabin. The first two days were uneventful, but then disaster struck. Sea monsters attacked the ship.


    A massive shark with multiple eyes and a single wing leaped from the water, attempting to devour a sailor. Lincoln, ever vigilant, reacted instantly. He conjured mud on the deck, from which a massive, animated tree sprouted, intercepting the shark''s attack and trapping it in a wooden embrace.


    This allowed the crew to counterattack, ultimately slaying the monstrous shark. William, observing from the upper deck, was stunned.


    "Were those the creatures you warned us about?" he asked Lincoln.


    Lincoln nodded. "Yes, and those are the weaker ones. The real danger lies above."


    William followed Lincoln''s gaze and noticed something unsettling about one of the clouds. It seemed to writhe and shift.


    "Did that cloud just move?" William wondered aloud.


    "You''re not mistaken," Lincoln confirmed. "There are creatures here called Cloud Eaters. They are essentially living clouds that devour anything that flies through them. They are formidable opponents, and I''m not confident we could defeat a group of them. As for the students, well, you would be no match for them."


    The existence of such creatures astonished William. They were unlike anything he had encountered before, and he recognized the danger they posed to unsuspecting travelers.


    Over the next few days, they faced several more sea creatures. William assisted where he could, gaining two levels in the process. The EXP gains were welcome, but he remained wary of the Cloud Eaters.


    They eventually reached a small, sparsely populated island inhabited mainly by fishers and farmers.


    "We''ll recruit students for our academy from this island," Lincoln explained. "They have talented individuals who lack opportunities elsewhere. We''re providing them with a chance!"


    It seemed like a noble cause. However, according to Lincoln, recruitment hadn''t begun yet. William questioned this.


    "We still need to construct the initial buildings and clear the area of magical beasts," Lincoln clarified. "The project is in its early stages."


    "So, we''re essentially construction workers?" William asked, incredulous. "That doesn''t make sense! The other Snowpeak Academy is still under construction. Why are we building another one?"


    Lincoln shrugged. "I''m just following orders, kid. Headmaster Grant wants this academy built, and we''re here to do it. I''ll be staying to teach you magic, so you won''t miss out on instruction."


    William still felt misled. There were plenty of tutors at the main academy, but on this island, he would only have Lincoln, whom he didn''t trust. He tried to reframe it as an adventure, a chance to learn magic in a more practical setting.


    ''Classroom learning isn''t the only path to strength,'' he reassured himself.


    The promise of substantial rewards motivated the other students, outweighing their concerns. They spent a day on the fishing island, then prepared to fly to the Snowpeak branch location.

 Chapter 115 Arrival

    The next day arrived, the day they would finally reach the island where the academy branch awaited. Excitement lingered among the students, but it was tempered with a growing sense of unease. The reality of their situation was sinking in; they wouldn''t be enjoying a leisurely island retreat.William, Marcel, and Denise mounted his winged lizard, while the others accompanied Professor Lincoln. The journey was smooth and relatively short, lasting roughly twenty-four hours of continuous flight. As they approached, William surveyed the island. It was larger than he had anticipated, blanketed in dense vegetation, with only the beaches offering a clear view.


    The academy itself consisted of a few meager wooden cabins. William couldn''t believe they were expected to build an entire academy from scratch, let alone clear the overgrown island. He envisioned himself wielding a scythe under the scorching sun, a far cry from the scholarly pursuits he had envisioned. It didn''t seem promising at all.


    "Let''s rest before we begin," Lincoln instructed. "Stay near the beach. It''s the safest area, hence our cabins are located there."


    They landed on the beach. Asura''s mental voice immediately filled William''s mind with foreboding.


    "This island is teeming with magical beasts," Asura warned. "They expect you and the students to do the dangerous work. No wonder this academy branch doesn''t exist in your time. With only these students, they''ll all perish here."


    William didn''t reply, already sensing the tense atmosphere, the feeling of being watched from the shadows of the dense vegetation. It was unsettling.


    The students, exhausted after 24 hours of flight, were eager to rest in the wooden cabins. But first, William strolled along the beach, enjoying the warm sand, the fresh air, and the vast ocean view. The location was undeniably beautiful, a welcome change from the constant snow.


    Marcel joined him, his expression troubled. "I expected at least one decent building, but there are only cabins... Headmaster Grant deceived us."


    "You think so?" William said, "This adventure of ours won''t be easy, it seems."


    "Yeah, don''t need to tell me that. What are you going to do now?" Marcel asked.


    "Sleep, of course. I am feeling like shit. Tomorrow we can enjoy the beach for a while, if Professor Lincoln allows us."


    Marcel liked what he heard. The beach was really nice. It was like a symbol of hope, a place they could go and enjoy, forgetting about the situation with the magical beast infestation and the thought of having to build the academy from scratch. Sear?h the n?velFire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    William said farewell to his friend and went to the cabin that he would be using from now on. When he got there, a commotion was happening in front of the cabin.


    It was Professor Lincoln and another student.


    "Why does William get the best cabin? His window even gets a view to the ocean!" the student complained, pointing at the window.


    William looked at it too, and he smiled. ''He''s right! The view must be incredible!''


    But when the student saw William standing there with a smile on his face, he got even more angry.


    "See? Look how happy he is," the student said.


    Professor Lincoln moved his head to look at William, and by that time, he didn''t have a smile on his face anymore. His face was serious as it could get.


    "What happened here?" William said, faking a surprised expression, "Are you alright, fellow student?"


    The student couldn''t hold his anger anymore. "You bastard. I don''t know why you are privileged when compared to us. Are you the son of one of the professors, or maybe the son of Headmaster Grant?"


    With the yelling of that student, everyone else was there, surrounding them. William knew that they would be inclined to be on that student''s side, so that was a moment he had to do something.


    It wouldn''t be a good idea to let the student say whatever he wanted without teaching him a lesson. William had to prove why he was getting the so-called privileges.


    So, basically, it was time to kick the student''s ass. He dashed toward the student and punched him in the gut. William''s movements were so fast that the student couldn''t respond to it.


    Then, William unsheathed his sword and placed it on the neck of that student. "This is why they favored me. While you are a weak bastard who can only yell and yap, I am actually training to get better."


    William then kicked the man again in the ribs. "A quick tip for you, and everyone watching this," he then looked around, staring at all the students, "stop complaining and go train. The mission we have here is important, and dangerous. If you keep this attitude, you will die here."


    After that, without waiting for any of their responses, William opened the door of his cabin and went inside. Professor Lincoln talked with the students. "Did you hear him? Go on."


    Everyone dispersed, including the student who got beat up.


    No one else disturbed William after what happened. When he was inside the cabin, William looked around to see what his new home looked like.


    The cabin itself was small. He already expected it to be, but the inside was comfy. He had a bed, a desk, a fireplace, and a big fur rug that was fluffy and warm.


    An empty bookshelf stood in the corner. William thought of placing his books there, but most of the books were not from that time. It wasn''t a good idea to put them there. Find adventures at empire


    Without the strength to keep himself awake for long, William hopped on the bed and slept like a rock.


    The weather was just perfect there. It was much better to sleep in that environment rather than outside in the cold. William slept for many hours ¡ª just like the other students ¡ª and he woke up in the late afternoon.


    His stomach growled. William got up from his bed and went outside to meet the others. Everyone looked at him differently after what had happened earlier.


    They didn''t want to question his position there. All of them were more concerned about themselves, which was great.


    Professor Lincoln was there too. He was the one who made a massive campfire to cook food for them. The students were sitting around the campfire, chatting and eating.


    William walked around and found a place to sit. He grabbed a piece of meat and ate. As he was eating, William looked around and realized Marcel was not there.


    Denise came to sit beside him, asking the same thing. "Where''s Marcel? I''ve heard he went to the forest for some reason, but he should be back by now. It''s getting dark."


    "Do you know why he went there in the first place?" William asked her, "and when?"


    "I think to shower and drink water? He heard from someone else that there''s a source of water in the forest. Like, water that we can actually drink, and went there to check."


    William had a bad feeling about that. He tried to calm Denise and said that he would be looking for Marcel.


    "Do you know what direction he went?" William asked her.


    Denise pointed at one of the few paths leading to the forest. William thanked her and left the camp.


    He didn''t warn anyone else about that. But of course, his winged lizard followed him wherever he went.


    The forest was quiet, dense, and dangerous. The sun was setting, meaning William had one hour at maximum to find Marcel. Would that be enough?


    William ordered Asura to fly above the island and look for anything that might help them. With an aerial view, Asura could find the water source Denise talked about, or maybe even see Marcel from up there.


    It was worth a shot. William, on the other hand, kept moving by ground, going deeper into the forest.


    It didn''t take long for him to find a few footprints on the ground. He crouched next to it. "These must belong to Marcel¡­"


    William kept following the footprints. The deeper he went into the forest, the tenser he got.


    Time was running short, and he had to find Marcel before nighttime. Then, he saw it, the water source Denise talked about.


    It was a river that also had a waterfall, and there, he saw Marcel bathing.


    "Yo, bro," Marcel yelled when he saw William, "nice place, right?"


    William sighed in relief, moving next to the border of the water pond. He saw a few wooden casks that Marcel brought with him.


    "It''s nice that you are here," Marcel said with a smirk, "now you can help me bring back the casks with water."


    "You know Denise is worried about you, right? She said you are late or something, and it''s getting dark."


    "I know, I know. She is always worried about me."


    Marcel left the water and asked William for help to bring back the casks with water. They returned to the beach where everyone else was.


    Unknown to them, a person was standing behind one of the trees near the place Marcel had been showering. Its eyes were red and filled with malice.

 Chapter 116 Finding a Suitable Spot

    Denise stared at the path that William and Marcel had taken. When she finally saw them returning, she sighed in relief. "You''re back," she said, her voice tight with worry.Marcel sat beside her, offering a reassuring smile. "Hey, no need to worry. I was just getting some water."


    She wasn''t buying it. "Getting water? In the middle of a forest, on an almost deserted island swarming with magical beasts?"


    Marcel chuckled. "Okay, maybe it wasn''t the smartest idea, but I went during the day when it''s safer."


    Denise knew he wasn''t entirely wrong. Someone had to fetch water, and daytime was indeed the safest time. But the risk still gnawed at her.


    Meanwhile, William sat nearby, chatting with his friends and listening to the distant chatter of other students. It was only the first day of their training camp, so most hadn''t done much besides sleep and eat after their exhausting journey. But tomorrow, their tasks would begin.


    The gathering near the beach lasted until around 10 pm. By then, everyone was tired, including William. Though he still had some energy, he decided to turn in.


    ''No point feeling sluggish tomorrow,'' he thought as he headed towards his cabin.


    He sat on the bed inside his cabin and took out some of his magical tomes stored in his backpack and his inventory.


    The last books he had been reading were about the history of demons. He''d been hoping to learn more about his own powers, but now he wanted to focus on acquiring new spells, particularly those that enhanced his attributes. But first, William opted to continue learning "Icy Weapon," a spell that would grant his sword a boost in power by imbuing it with the ice element.


    William practiced for an hour. He''d tried this magic before, but his progress was slow. It wasn''t clicking.


    Read exclusive chapters at My Virtual Library Empire S~ea??h the n?vel_Fire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Asura, his demonic sword, spoke to him mentally. "I don''t think you are good with ice magic."


    "Why is that?" William asked.


    "Well, you have connections with the demon race. Demons are generally adept with the fire element, black fire, and some with thunder and black thunder, though that''s rarer. You should focus on those."


    Asura, an artifact containing the soul of an ancient demon, still retained some of his memories, though they were fragmented.


    "Are you sure? So I was wrong to get these ice spells?"


    "Yes, you were."


    "Damn it¡­"


    William felt getting those icy spells had been a waste of time. He wished he could go back and choose something else.


    ''Well, I''m already in the past, so...''


    Frustrated by his lack of progress with the icy spells, William went to bed, hoping the next day would be better.


    The first thing he heard the following morning was Professor Lincoln ringing a bell, summoning everyone.


    Despite their reluctance to wake up, the students dragged themselves out of bed and met with the professor outside. The sun had barely risen, yet they were already assembled.


    Professor Lincoln addressed them once everyone was present. "Get used to this. We''re rising early to get to work as soon as possible."


    The students exchanged glances, but no one spoke.


    "As for the task, well, the first thing we need to do is find a good location for the academy. It can''t be close to the beach. So, our first priority is finding a suitable spot."


    William raised his hand. Professor Lincoln nodded, allowing him to ask his question.


    "And after that? Will we be clearing the area of vegetation and any beasts?" William asked.


    "That''s correct. We need to make sure this island is safe enough to start building, but clearing it of all the beasts is impossible. Look at how big it is," Professor Lincoln said, gesturing towards the dense forest. "We should focus on finding a suitable spot and then clearing the area around it."


    The ideal location, the Professor explained, couldn''t be too close to the beach due to the risk of rising tides, but it also couldn''t be too far inland. It had to be somewhere in between. The students divided themselves into groups and began searching for a decent location.


    William, however, decided to speak with the Professor privately.


    "Wouldn''t it be more efficient to search for a spot using our flying mounts?" William asked.


    Lincoln nodded. "Indeed. Shall we use your mount? It might be more discreet."


    They agreed to use William''s winged lizard, as it was smaller than Professor Lincoln''s. A smaller flying mount would attract less attention from any beasts inhabiting the island or the surrounding area.


    Marcel and Denise decided to search on foot instead of joining them on the flying mount. William didn''t know their reason but didn''t question them; it was their choice, after all.


    William and Professor Lincoln mounted the winged lizard and soared over the island, scanning for promising locations for their academy.


    "Ideally, it should be near that river," Lincoln said, pointing towards a flowing waterway. "This is the only source of drinkable water. We could use magic, but that''s something for the future. We need to focus on the present."


    The students weren''t skilled enough to create drinkable water¡ªa challenging spell to master. Water conjured through magic typically contained mana, which could harm the drinker. Creating pure, mana-free water was a difficult feat.


    The winged lizard circled the island, providing a bird''s-eye view of the diverse terrain. Dense forests gave way to rolling hills, rocky outcrops, and hidden valleys. Lincoln pointed out various potential locations, each with its own advantages and disadvantages. Some were close to the river but lacked defensible positions. Others offered natural barriers but were too isolated.


    After a thorough aerial survey, they spotted a promising location. Nestled between a curve in the river and a steep cliff face, it offered both access to fresh water and natural protection. A dense forest bordered the area, providing resources and potential camouflage.


    "That looks promising," William commented, peering down at the clearing.


    Lincoln nodded in agreement. "Let''s land and take a closer look."


    They guided the winged lizard down, landing gently in the clearing. As they dismounted, William felt a prickle of unease. The silence was unsettling, broken only by the rustling of leaves and the distant calls of unseen creatures.


    "Stay alert," Lincoln cautioned, drawing his staff. "We don''t know what might be lurking nearby."


    They cautiously explored the clearing, examining the terrain and vegetation. The soil was fertile, suitable for cultivation, and the forest offered a variety of useful plants and trees. However, signs of wildlife were abundant ¨C tracks in the soft earth, disturbed foliage, and the lingering scent of predators.


    "This place has potential," Lincoln said, "but it will need to be secured."


    William nodded, his hand resting on the hilt of his sword. He could sense the presence of unseen eyes, watching their every move. He activated his mana sense, trying to pinpoint the sources of his unease. Faint auras flickered at the edge of his perception, revealing the presence of several creatures lurking in the shadows.


    Suddenly, a low growl echoed through the trees, followed by the snapping of twigs. A large, wolf-like creature emerged from the undergrowth, its eyes glowing with predatory intent. More shapes materialized from the shadows, encircling them.


    "Looks like we have company," Lincoln said, his voice calm but alert. "William, stay close."


    The wolf-like creature lunged, its jaws snapping, but William was ready. He met its aggression with a surge of mana, activating Enhanced Strength and Swiftfoot. His muscles coiled with power, and his movements became a blur as he sidestepped the creature''s attack and countered with a swift slash of his sword. The blade, imbued with his mana, sliced through the creature''s flank, drawing a howl of pain.


    More creatures emerged from the shadows ¨C a hulking crab with razor-sharp pincers, a serpentine creature with scales that shimmered like oil, and a bird-like monstrosity with razor-sharp talons. William felt a thrill of adrenaline course through him. This was a true test of his skills.


    He engaged the crab, its massive claws snapping with frightening speed. William danced back, narrowly avoiding the attack, then used Kinetic Burst to close the distance in a flash. He unleashed a flurry of blows, his sword striking the creature''s vulnerable joints with pinpoint accuracy. The crab screeched, its legs buckling beneath its weight.


    Meanwhile, Lincoln was a whirlwind of arcane energy. He summoned thick vines from the earth, ensnaring the serpentine creature and constricting its movements. Thorns erupted from the ground, impaling the bird-like creature as it swooped low, forcing it to screech and retreat.


    William, feeling a surge of confidence, charged towards the wolf-like creature, which had recovered from its initial wound. He weaved through its snapping jaws, his sword a blur of motion. He aimed for its legs, hamstringing it with a precise strike. The creature collapsed, howling in frustration.


    But the battle was far from over. The crab, its shell cracked but its spirit unbroken, lunged at William with renewed ferocity. One of its pincers caught him off guard, tearing through his armor and leaving a deep gash on his arm. William gritted his teeth, ignoring the pain. He channeled his mana into his sword, unleashing a powerful wave of energy that sent the crab flying backwards.


    Lincoln, sensing William''s predicament, unleashed a torrent of earth spikes, impaling the crab and ending its threat. He then turned his attention to the remaining creatures, his spells weaving a tapestry of destruction and control. Giant roots erupted from the ground, ensnaring the serpentine creature and crushing its bones. The bird-like creature, riddled with thorns, finally succumbed to its wounds, crashing to the ground with a sickening thud.


    The clearing fell silent. William, panting and bleeding, surveyed the scene. The ground was littered with the bodies of their attackers. He felt a pang of regret for the creatures they had slain but knew it had been a necessary fight.


    Lincoln approached, his expression grim. "Are you alright, William?"


    William nodded, wincing as he examined his wound. "It''s just a scratch. Nothing I can''t handle."


    Lincoln smiled. "You fought bravely, William. I''m impressed."


    William grinned back, feeling a surge of pride. "Thanks, Professor."

 Chapter 117 Finding Ruins, and New Task for William

    The wave of beasts had been dealt with, and the surrounding area fell silent once more. While William felt tired after the fight, Professor Lincoln strolled around the area, assessing its suitability."This place seems ideal," he said, peering down the cliff. "Let''s just hope this thing doesn''t crumble when we build the academy."


    The only downside was the river''s distance. It wasn''t a major issue, though, as it was only about a five-minute walk away.


    Lincoln was already considering a solution. "I can use magic to divert the river closer."


    William nodded. With magic, almost anything was possible.


    After securing the spot ¨C for the time being ¨C they took flight once more to inform the other students. They weren''t expecting the students to have found a suitable location in such a short time, but when they spoke to one of the youths, they discovered a surprising find.


    It was the same student who had been envious of William''s privileged cabin. He called out to Professor Lincoln when he saw them flying near his location.


    "Professor! Professor!" he yelled, waving his arms frantically.


    William and Lincoln descended to see what the commotion was about. The student was clearly eager to show them something.


    "What is it?" Professor Lincoln asked, curiosity piqued.


    The student led them deeper into the forest, his excitement growing with each step. He then revealed an incredible sight: ancient stone buildings, partially hidden by overgrown vegetation. The structures were clearly old and dilapidated, with crumbling walls and collapsed roofs.


    Professor Lincoln was astonished. "This is impossible," he muttered. "This island was recently discovered. No one should have been living here before."


    William felt a mix of excitement and apprehension. He reached out and touched one of the weathered stone walls, and a strange sensation washed over him. It was like a faint echo, a whisper from the past.


    He frowned, closing his eyes and trying to decipher the feeling, but it remained elusive. S§×ar?h the N??elFir§×.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Asura didn''t react, which only deepened the mystery. Why was he the only one sensing something?


    Professor Lincoln broke the silence. "I''ll mark this location for future exploration. For now, let''s focus on establishing our camp." Explore more stories at My Virtual Library Empire


    They returned to the chosen location, picking up other students along the way and ferrying them to the clearing. Eventually, everyone was assembled, staring in awe at the scattered corpses of the magical beasts. The evidence of the fierce battle was undeniable.


    "Did the two of you kill all of these?" Ron, one of the students, asked, his eyes wide with disbelief.


    "Indeed we did," Lincoln replied with a hint of pride. "William is quite skilled in combat. Now, let''s discuss our next steps¡­ Gather around, everyone."


    Professor Lincoln outlined his plan. The first priority was to establish a temporary camp so they could rest and work near the construction site. He then demonstrated his mastery of magic by effortlessly transporting the cabins from the beach to their new location, much to the students'' amazement.


    With that settled, they had a place to sleep for the night. Now came the hard part.


    Professor Lincoln distributed tools to the students ¨C axes and scythes for clearing the vegetation.


    "We need to clear a sizable plot of land for the academy," Professor Lincoln explained, "and we can''t use magic, as there''s a risk of damaging the area."


    This task was far less appealing than fighting beasts. William dreaded the idea of cutting down the vegetation, but there was no avoiding it.


    At least his friends were there to support him¡ªand suffer alongside him. Marcel and Denise were responsible for cutting down the undergrowth with scythes, while William used an axe to fell the trees.


    With his enhanced strength, each swing of the axe bit deep into the wood, and the trees toppled quickly. The other students worked diligently as well, hacking away at the dense vegetation.


    The hours passed quickly, but as the afternoon drew to a close, Professor Lincoln called a halt.


    "If we make too much noise during the night, we''ll attract more beasts. Let''s rest for today," he said.


    When the students gathered at their cabins, a campfire awaited them, and Lincoln had already hunted game for their dinner. Everything was ready.


    All they had to do was relax and enjoy the meal. William did just that, savoring the moment with his friends.


    "How long do you think we''ll be stuck with this awful job?" Marcel asked, grimacing.


    William didn''t have good news. With a sigh, he said, "I don''t know, but that''s not the worst part. We''ll be the ones building the academy, remember? Clearing the vegetation might be the easiest job we get."


    It was the harsh truth none of them wanted to acknowledge. William was grateful they were done for the day, though. He had other things he wanted to focus on.


    He wanted to practice more spells and hunt more monsters to gain more experience.


    With that in mind, he went to speak with Professor Lincoln privately after dinner.


    "William," the Professor said when he saw William knocking on his door. "Is everything alright?"


    William nodded. "Yes, it is. May I come in?"


    "Sure," Lincoln replied, gesturing towards the empty chair.


    William stepped inside the cabin. It was identical to all the others, with a simple bed, a table, and a couple of chairs.


    He sat down, met Lincoln''s gaze, and said, "I came here to ask you something."


    Professor Lincoln took the opposite chair, placing both elbows on the wooden table and waiting for William to continue.


    "Could I... perhaps... be assigned the task of killing the beasts on the island? I''d prefer that kind of work," William said.


    It wasn''t that William disliked working with the other students, but he was eager to gain more experience and become stronger. The most efficient way to do that was by hunting monsters.


    "Why do you want this task?" Lincoln asked, studying William''s expression.


    William chose honesty. "I want to get stronger. To gain more experience, I need to kill beasts."


    The system was transparent and available to everyone. Lincoln nodded in understanding. "What level are you now?"


    William checked his status. "Level 22, sir."


    Professor Lincoln was surprised. "That''s quite high. The other students are between levels 10 and 15 at most. How did you gain so much experience? I don''t recall you killing many monsters or engaging in other activities that grant experience."


    He was referring to activities like potion crafting, enchanting, artifact creation, and studying, all of which had the potential to grant experience or bonuses.


    Faced with the question, William hesitated. He couldn''t reveal that he had gained experience in the present time of Aethel and had arrived in the past already stronger than his peers.


    "The place I lived before attending the academy was a cabin in the middle of the forest," William explained. "There were plenty of beasts there for me to fight and gain levels."


    "That explains your combat proficiency," Lincoln said, considering the information. "I''ll think about your request and let you know in the morning."


    William felt a surge of hope. "Thank you, Professor."


    As he turned to leave, Professor Lincoln stopped him. "There''s something else I''d like to discuss. Would you be willing to help me explore those ruins we found? Perhaps in the near future?"


    William was curious why Lincoln had chosen him, but he wouldn''t refuse. He felt a strange connection to the ruins and was eager to understand it.


    "Of course! It would be an honor," he replied.


    "Excellent. You may go now."


    William returned to his cabin. Inside, his friends were waiting, their expressions curious.


    "So? What did you talk about with the Professor?" Marcel asked, leaning forward expectantly.


    William saw no reason to lie. "I asked him about being assigned the task of killing beasts in the forest."


    "Why risk it?" Marcel asked, frowning. "It''s much safer to stay here with us, clear the area, and then build the academy."


    His logic was sound, but William had a different perspective. "If I stay in my comfort zone, I''ll never get stronger. Powerful mages are forged in combat, not construction."


    Their conversation continued for a while, and William noticed the thoughtful expressions on Marcel and Denise''s faces as they left his cabin. His words had clearly given them something to consider.


    William picked up some of his spell tomes¡ªthis time, the ones focused on body enhancement magic. He wasn''t going to waste any more time on "Icy Weapon."


    Asura, who was usually quiet, spoke up. "Don''t feel down. There''s a ''Fire Weapon'' spell you can learn, though I don''t know where you''ll find it. We are in the middle of nowhere."


    "Thanks for the reminder," William said, a flicker of excitement igniting within him.


    He spent a few hours studying, then went to bed. He woke the next morning eager to hear Lincoln''s decision.


    The news was good.


    "I believe you''re the most suitable student for this task," Lincoln said. "But you''ll start in the less dangerous parts of the forest and focus on the surrounding area. We need to secure the perimeter, all the way to the beach, where we''ll eventually build a port."


    "Understood," William replied, a grin spreading across his face. He was ready for the challenge.

 Chapter 118 EXP, EXP, EXP

    News of William''s new task spread like wildfire among the students. Some were relieved that the dangerous job had fallen to someone else, while others envied his opportunity.A few saw through his motives. "He''s just trying to level up and get even further ahead of us," one student grumbled. "What can we do about it?"


    They were still gossiping when Lincoln arrived with their tools, tossing axes and scythes towards them. "What you can do is clear this damned vegetation before I lose my patience," he said, his voice brooking no argument.


    The students nodded hastily. None of them dared to complain to Lincoln or disobey his orders. They grabbed their tools and got to work.


    William, meanwhile, had already left, following the path back towards the beach.


    Asura''s winged lizard form remained at the campsite. He was still with William, of course, in his sword form.


    "I need to rest for a while," Asura said, his voice carrying a hint of exhaustion. "Controlling that lizard is draining. Call me if you need anything."


    "Alright," William replied, understanding his companion''s need for recovery.


    William followed the familiar path, the only one on the island. But things weren''t as straightforward as before. The recent battle with the beasts ¨C his and Lincoln''s ¨C had agitated the island''s inhabitants. The balance had been disrupted, and venturing out in the open was no longer safe.


    Suddenly, a beast emerged from the forest, launching itself at William. This magical creature resembled a giant bug with four wings, two massive pincers, and rows of sharp teeth. A shiver ran down William''s spine at the sight.


    "I hate bugs!" he yelled, his voice filled with disgust.


    But William''s reflexes were sharp. He drew his demonic sword, Asura, and parried the incoming pincer attack. The clash of their weapons rang through the forest, and William stumbled back from the force of the impact. Continue reading at My Virtual Library Empire


    "Strong¡­" he muttered, assessing the creature''s power.


    The bug flew towards him again, but this time, it unleashed a different attack. It opened its maw and spewed a stream of green liquid.


    William tried to dodge, but the liquid was too fast. It struck his right shoulder.


    At first, nothing happened. William seized the opportunity, slashing at the creature with his sword.


    He wielded his demonic sword, Asura, which was far stronger than the standard steel sword he often used. He now had better control over it, preventing it from activating his demonic energy. It was essentially a normal sword crafted from superior materials, making it sharper and deadlier.


    The slash connected with the bug, carving a deep wound. Green liquid gushed from the injury, and the bug emitted a series of angry clicks and hisses.


    "Take that, bastard," William growled.


    The creature spewed another stream of green liquid, but this time, William dodged it with ease.


    He tightened his grip on Asura and delivered a final, decisive blow, ending the bug''s life.


    [+700 EXP]


    A smile spread across William''s face. He was thrilled to be gaining experience again. This was exactly what he had been hoping for.


    After dispatching the creature, William continued along the path. It wasn''t long before he felt an aching pain in his shoulder ¨C the same shoulder the bug had struck with its liquid.


    ''Am I poisoned?'' he wondered, concern creeping into his voice.


    Poison was the first thing that came to mind. He decided to stop and rest against a tree, then removed his shirt to examine the affected area. A wound caused by the liquid was visible, and the veins around it were an unsettling shade of green.


    William felt a wave of panic. He didn''t have an antidote. He would have to wait and see if his body could heal itself.


    Asura''s voice echoed in his mind. "Use your demonic energy to destroy the poison. It''s weak, so you should be fine." S§×ar?h the NovelFire.net* website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    William followed Asura''s instructions, focusing his demonic energy. A dark aura enveloped his body, then concentrated around the poisoned wound.


    The black energy pulsed as if it were alive, attacking the poison. William felt a surge of pain and gritted his teeth, enduring it. After a minute of intense discomfort, the poison was gone.


    Relief washed over him. This ability was incredible. Getting poisoned in a remote location like this island would be a serious problem for most, but William no longer had to fear poisons.


    He was increasingly grateful for the power of his demonic energy, even if it sounded ominous or might cause others to see him as a monster. He didn''t care.


    After hours of walking, William arrived at the beach ¨C the place where he had first set foot on the island. It was deserted, but he knew monsters lurked in the shadows, waiting for an opportunity to strike.


    Before starting his task, he sat on the beach, enjoying a moment of respite to recover from the previous fight and the lingering effects of the poison. The sound of the waves crashing against the shore was therapeutic, and the vast expanse of the blue ocean was mesmerizing. No other islands or ships were visible, reminding him of the world''s immensity and his own insignificance.


    He glanced at his hand, where the triton king''s ring rested. He briefly considered using it to travel to the triton kingdom, even in this past era.


    ''The king I know is probably dead,'' he mused, ''and who knows if the kingdom even exists yet...''


    The urge to try was strong, but he resisted. It was too risky. He needed to become stronger first.


    He rose to his feet and began his mission. Choosing a section of the forest, he ventured into its depths.


    The moment he crossed the threshold, monsters attacked. The first was a gigantic gorilla with six arms, each wielding a wooden club.


    The creature swung from the trees, launching itself at William with surprising speed. William had no time to react.


    The club connected with his chest, sending him flying through the undergrowth. He heard the sickening crack of his ribs and knew he was in trouble.


    "Agggh, damn it!" he cursed, clutching his right side.


    Several ribs were broken, but he couldn''t afford to lie there and wallow in pain. He had to get up and fight or die.


    Mustering his remaining strength, William rose and activated his body enhancement techniques.


    With the boost to his strength, agility, and speed, he felt better equipped to face the gorilla, though his ribs still throbbed with pain.


    William dashed towards the gorilla, Asura poised to strike.


    The creature seemed surprised. It was used to felling its prey with a single blow, yet William was still standing¡ªand even advancing!


    It tried to attack again, but William ducked under the club and slashed at the back of the gorilla''s legs, targeting its ankles.


    The attack landed with devastating precision. Asura sliced through flesh and tendon as easily as a knife through butter, and blood gushed from the wound.


    William knew this would severely hamper the gorilla''s movement, and the creature seemed to realize it too. It tried to flee, but William wouldn''t allow it.


    He severed the other ankle, and the gorilla crashed to the ground. Looking into the creature''s eyes, now filled with fear and a desperate plea for mercy, William felt a pang of guilt. But this was the law of the jungle: the strong ruled. He swiftly ended the gorilla''s suffering with a clean strike to the neck.


    [+1300 EXP]


    [Level up]


    ''One more level, nice!''


    William was getting close to level 25, the threshold for acquiring his first class. He was curious about the process. Would the system grant him a random class? Would he have multiple options to choose from? Would he receive a class at all, or would he have to seek one out?


    He had many questions, but only time would provide answers. For now, he was focused on reaching level 25. After that, he would seek more information.


    With each level, his attributes increased, just like everyone else. But unlike others, William was one of the summoned heroes, so his stats grew at a much faster rate than average. It was only a matter of time before his power far surpassed those at a similar level.


    After defeating the gorilla, William didn''t stop. His ribs ached, but he had many more beasts to kill before returning to camp. Time was experience, and experience was his priority.


    He faced mutated snakes, fish, and even creatures that seemed out of place on an island¡ªlike a fire-casting buffalo. It was one of the first monsters he encountered that could cast spells similar to those used by mages.


    When he returned to camp before sunset, he drew every eye. His hair was disheveled, his clothes were torn, and his body was covered in bruises. It was evident he had been through many battles. Once again, William had shocked them, and respect for him grew.


    He sat near the campfire, and one of the students brought him a meal.


    "Here, eat this, William," the student said.


    William gratefully accepted the food, then collapsed onto his bed, exhausted.

 Chapter 119 Not Alone?

    The following day, William woke up with aches all over his body. It was muscle strain from prolonged fighting, compounded by the lingering soreness of his wounds."I feel like shit..." he groaned.


    He stumbled out of bed in the early morning hours, along with the other students. Professor Lincoln didn''t allow them to sleep in.


    Speaking of Professor Lincoln, he had announced that their grueling routine would last for one month, after which things would become easier.


    "We''ll work hard to get the initial construction done within the first month," Lincoln had explained. "After that, I''ll be teaching you for a few hours each day, so the construction will slow down."


    Although William wasn''t performing the same tasks as the others, he appreciated the updates. Not that he needed Professor Lincoln for that; Marcel and Denise were always eager to fill him in.


    "You look awful," Marcel commented during breakfast. "Are you sure you want to keep doing this task? You could at least ask for help."


    "For now, no," William said, taking a large bite of bread. "I can''t give up after just one day. It would ruin my reputation."


    Marcel rolled his eyes. "Reputation? We''re in the middle of nowhere."


    "Still, you saw how a few students were looking for a fight with me," William said, recalling the student who had been jealous of his cabin.


    "Now that you mention it..." Marcel conceded.


    Breakfast and dinner were William''s only chances to speak with his friends before heading out to hunt magical beasts.


    "How''s the construction going?" William asked. "And how are you holding up, Denise?"


    "We''ve cleared the vegetation, as you can see," Marcel replied, gesturing towards the cleared area. "And we''re starting to lay the foundation. It''s faster than you''d think because Professor Lincoln is helping. He can use magic to create building materials."


    William had almost forgotten about Lincoln''s magic. Perhaps that was why he had been chosen to oversee the construction of the academy on this island.


    Denise was also contributing to the construction, but she was focused on other aspects, such as how to divert the river closer to their location. It was a crucial element of their future settlement, and someone had to figure it out. Otherwise, things would become more complicated down the line.


    After breakfast and a brief chat with his friends, William left the settlement and headed towards the coast.


    The students watched him go, some with admiration. They considered him brave for venturing out alone to fight beasts and make the island safer.


    William, however, wasn''t motivated by altruism. He was fighting to gain strength, experience, and levels.


    Upon reaching the coast, he entered the forest, returning to the area he had begun clearing the previous day. More beasts attacked, some familiar, others completely new.


    He fought bravely, wielding Asura and enhancing his abilities with magic. But the fights were far from easy. Despite his magic, William faced several near-death experiences.


    One such incident occurred near the river Denise was trying to divert. William was battling a group of giant crabs when he strayed too close to the water''s edge. Suddenly, something grabbed him.


    It wasn''t a creature but a plant. Its leaves wrapped around William, dragging him into the river.


    The sensation of being pulled underwater was terrifying. William struggled, but the plant''s grip was too strong.


    He knew he would drown if he didn''t escape. In a desperate attempt, he reached for Asura and tried to swing it underwater, hoping to cut the leaves. But his arm wouldn''t cooperate. He managed to sever one leaf, but more grew in its place, rendering his efforts futile.


    Panic swelled in William''s chest as the murky water enveloped him. He thrashed against the constricting leaves, but the plant''s grip only tightened. His lungs burned, desperate for air. Just as his vision began to blur, a surge of adrenaline ignited within him. He remembered his demonic energy, the dark power that had purged the poison from his body.


    Asura, sensing his desperation, whispered, "Use it, William! Channel it into the plant!"


    William focused his remaining strength, summoning the demonic energy. It flowed through him, coursing into the leaves that bound him. The plant shuddered violently, its grip loosening as the dark energy disrupted its life force. William wrenched himself free, kicking upwards towards the surface. He broke through the water, gasping for air, his heart pounding.


    Rage surged through him. He wouldn''t let this monstrous plant get away with this. He channeled his demonic energy into Asura, the blade glowing with an ominous black light. With a furious roar, he plunged back into the water, slashing at the plant''s thick stem. The demonic energy tore through the plant''s defenses, causing it to writhe and recoil. William hacked relentlessly, fueled by adrenaline and a thirst for revenge. Finally, with a decisive blow, he severed the stem. The plant released a cloud of noxious spores as it withered and sank into the depths.


    William emerged from the river, soaked and exhausted but alive. He collapsed onto the riverbank, coughing and catching his breath. He had narrowly escaped death, and the experience left him shaken. He vowed to be more cautious near the water''s edge.


    Despite the close call, William''s determination to gain experience remained unshaken. He pressed on, venturing deeper into the forest. He encountered more creatures ¨C giant spiders that spun webs of steel, venomous snakes that slithered through the undergrowth, and packs of wolf-like beasts with glowing red eyes. Each battle was a test of his skills and endurance, pushing him to his limits.


    He faced each challenge head-on, his sword a blur of motion, his body enhanced by magic. He learned to anticipate his enemies'' movements, exploit their weaknesses, and conserve his energy. With each victory, his confidence grew, and his skills sharpened.


    [+1200 EXP]


    [+850 EXP]


    [+1500 EXP]


    [Level Up]


    Find your next adventure on My Virtual Library Empire


    As the sun began to set, William decided to return to the settlement. He was battered and bruised, but his spirit was high. He had survived another day, gained valuable experience, and grown stronger.


    He arrived at the camp just as the other students were gathering for dinner. The aroma of roasted meat filled the air, and a sense of camaraderie pervaded the group. William joined them, accepting a plate piled high with food. He ate ravenously, savoring the simple meal and the company of his fellow students.


    As they ate, a hush fell over the group. Professor Lincoln, his brow furrowed, scanned the faces around him.


    "Where''s Ron?" he asked, his voice laced with concern.


    The students exchanged confused glances. No one had seen Ron since they returned from their tasks. A sense of unease settled over the camp.


    "He was with me earlier," one student offered, "but he said he was going to explore the area a bit more."


    "Alone?" Lincoln asked, his concern growing.


    The student nodded.


    A wave of anxiety swept through the group. Ron, a quiet and unassuming student, was known for his curiosity and tendency to wander off. But he had never been gone this long, especially not as night approached.


    "We need to find him," Lincoln declared, his voice firm.


    The students, their initial fatigue forgotten, sprang into action. Fear for their missing comrade fueled their movements as they dispersed into the growing darkness, their torches casting flickering shadows that danced among the trees.


    William joined the search party, his senses heightened. He ventured into the forest, his keen eyes scanning the undergrowth, his ears attuned to any sound that might betray Ron''s presence. The forest, usually teeming with life, seemed eerily silent, amplifying the growing dread. S~ea??h the ¦Çov§×lFire .net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    The search continued for hours, but there was no sign of Ron. As the night deepened, the dangers of the forest increased. The rustling of leaves could be the wind or a lurking predator. The snapping of twigs could be a small animal or a larger, more sinister creature. The students, exhausted and disheartened, began to return to the camp, their hopes dwindling with each passing moment.


    Professor Lincoln, his face etched with worry, made the difficult decision to call off the search for the night. "We''ll continue tomorrow," he announced, his voice heavy with disappointment. "It''s too dangerous to remain in the forest after dark."


    The students, their faces etched with worry and frustration, reluctantly agreed. They returned to the camp, their hearts heavy with the knowledge that Ron was still missing.


    The next morning, an air of tension hung over the camp. The students awoke with renewed determination to find their missing comrade, but their anxiety was palpable. Professor Lincoln, his face grim, summoned everyone to gather.


    "I have something to show you," he announced, his voice grave. He held up a piece of parchment, its edges slightly singed. "This letter appeared in my cabin this morning."


    A hush fell over the group as Lincoln read the letter aloud. It was a chilling message, stating that Ron had been taken and that if they didn''t leave the island immediately, others would suffer the same fate.


    Fear and confusion rippled through the students. Who would take Ron? Why? And what did they want? The questions hung heavy in the air, unanswered and ominous.

 Chapter 120 Trapped?

    Tension gripped the students. They had believed they were alone on the island, but clearly, they were not."Can we see it?" one student asked, curiosity overriding their fear.


    Professor Lincoln passed the letter around, and each student read it, including William. Someone had taken Ron as a warning and planned to abduct more of them¡ªperhaps all of them. The island was not empty; it belonged to someone else.


    Even Lincoln, the most experienced and powerful among them, wore a grave expression, his gaze darting around as he considered their options.


    "What do we do now, Professor?" William asked, voicing the question hanging heavy in the air.


    "We find him," Lincoln declared, his voice firm despite the uncertainty in his eyes. "And we don''t let fear dictate our actions. This island is ours now."


    Lincoln''s resolve was clear. He would not surrender their claim to the island without a fight. It was to be the home of their magic academy, and he would not let anyone jeopardize that. Stay tuned with My Virtual Library Empire


    William, though heartened by Lincoln''s determination to find Ron and uncover the truth, couldn''t help but feel a growing sense of dread. This branch of the Snowpeak Academy didn''t exist in his time, which meant something went terribly wrong.


    What if this mysterious enemy succeeded in killing everyone? The possibility was real, and the thought sent shivers down his spine. But William was here now, and he wouldn''t allow this person to harm any of the students.


    ''I''ll find out who''s behind this,'' he vowed silently, his grip tightening on Asura''s hilt.


    With the sun illuminating the island and the diminished threat of nocturnal beasts, the students united in their search for Ron. They dispersed individually, maximizing their search radius, and utilized every tool at their disposal to scour the island.


    William mounted his winged lizard and soared into the sky. The view was breathtaking, but his perception of the island had shifted. It was no longer the familiar, albeit dangerous, territory he had come to know. The presence of a human threat, someone capable of kidnapping a student, added a new layer of complexity and danger.


    From his vantage point, William addressed his companion. "Asura, can you use your powers to sense any disturbances? Perhaps traces of mana that might belong to this mysterious person who took Ron?"


    Asura''s mana perception was far superior to William''s, but the task was challenging.


    "We flew across the island before and I didn''t sense anything," Asura said, his voice laced with concern. "This person might be skilled at concealing their presence."


    They had indeed surveyed the island while searching for a suitable location for the academy. It was safe to assume this mysterious person had already been present then, yet neither of them had sensed anything. This indicated a considerable ability to mask their mana signature, suggesting he was both powerful and adept at concealment.


    "I understand," William replied, his thoughts focused. "Even if he can hide his mana traces, it will be difficult to conceal other signs, including any tracks Ron might have left."


    William scanned the landscape below, his eyes searching for any disruption in the natural order ¨C broken branches, disturbed foliage, or footprints. He focused on the areas where Ron had last been seen, hoping to find something, anything, that might lead them to him.


    As he circled the island, something caught his eye. In a secluded clearing on the far side of the island, a faint wisp of smoke curled upwards. It was subtle, almost invisible against the backdrop of the dense forest, but William''s sharp eyes didn''t miss it. He guided the winged lizard towards the source, his heart pounding with anticipation.


    Landing in the clearing, William dismounted and cautiously approached the area where he had seen the smoke. The remnants of a small campfire were evident ¨C a circle of charred earth and scattered ashes. It appeared to be a recently used campsite, but there was no sign of Ron or his captor. S§×arch* The N?vel?ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    William examined the area meticulously, searching for any clues. He found a few footprints, too faint to discern any details, and some broken branches that could have been caused by anything. Frustration gnawed at him. He was so close, yet so far from finding Ron.


    He returned to the winged lizard, his mind racing. Where had Ron been taken? Who was this mysterious individual capable of eluding detection and leaving so few traces? The questions lingered, unanswered, fueling his determination to uncover the truth.


    With a sense of urgency, William urged the winged lizard back into the air, his gaze sweeping across the island once more. He needed to find something, anything, that would lead him to Ron. As he soared above the treetops, a familiar figure came into view. Professor Lincoln, mounted on his own winged lizard, was also searching the island from the air.


    "Professor!" William called out, guiding his mount closer. "Have you found anything?"


    Lincoln shook his head, his expression grim. "Nothing concrete. Just a few disturbed areas, but nothing that points to Ron''s whereabouts." He paused, his eyes narrowing as he surveyed the landscape. "This is more troubling than I initially thought. This individual is skilled at covering their tracks."


    Suddenly, a streak of dark energy shot through the air, aimed directly at their mounts. The winged lizards screeched in pain, their bodies engulfed in the dark energy. They plummeted towards the ground, their riders thrown from their backs.


    William, his heart pounding, braced for impact. He hit the water with a bone-jarring thud, the cold water shocking his senses. He struggled to the surface, gasping for air, his body aching from the fall. He spotted Lincoln nearby, also struggling to stay afloat.


    "Professor!" William shouted, swimming towards him. "Are you alright?"


    Lincoln coughed, sputtering water. "I''m... fine," he gasped, his voice strained. "Just a few bruises."


    They swam towards the shore, their movements hampered by their injuries. Reaching the beach, they collapsed onto the sand, exhausted and shaken. The loss of their mounts was a devastating blow. They were stranded, their only means of transportation to and from the island gone.


    A wave of despair washed over William. They were trapped, cut off from the outside world, with a kidnapper lurking among them. The situation seemed dire, the future uncertain. He looked at Lincoln, his face etched with worry.


    "What do we do now, Professor?" he asked, his voice barely a whisper.


    Lincoln, his gaze fixed on the horizon, remained silent for a moment, absorbing the gravity of their situation. Then, with a newfound resolve in his eyes, he declared, "We survive. We adapt. And we find Ron."


    They rose, their bodies weary but their spirits unbroken. The journey back to the settlement was arduous, their progress slowed by their injuries and the absence of their winged lizards. As they trudged through the dense undergrowth, a strange sensation washed over William. The forest around him seemed to shimmer and distort, the familiar sounds of nature replaced by an unsettling silence.


    He blinked, trying to clear his vision, but the distortion only intensified. The trees around him twisted into grotesque shapes, their branches reaching out like skeletal claws. The ground beneath his feet felt unstable, as if it might crumble at any moment. He turned to Lincoln, his voice filled with alarm.


    "Professor, something''s not right¡ª"


    But Lincoln was gone. William was alone, enveloped in an eerie silence that pressed in on him like a suffocating blanket. He felt a growing sense of dread, a primal fear that chilled him to the bone. He spun around, searching for any sign of Lincoln or a way out of this disorienting illusion.


    Suddenly, a sharp pain exploded in the back of his head. He stumbled forward, his vision blurring, his knees buckling beneath him. He collapsed onto the forest floor, consciousness fading into a dark abyss.


    William awoke to the cold, damp sensation of stone against his cheek. He groaned, his head throbbing, his body aching. He sat up, his eyes struggling to adjust to the dim light. He found himself in a small, stone cell, devoid of any furniture or windows. The only source of light came from a flickering torch mounted on the wall, casting long, dancing shadows that played tricks on his eyes.


    He was trapped. Kidnapped.


    Panic clawed at his throat, but he forced it down. He needed to stay calm, assess his situation, and find a way out. He examined the cell, searching for any weaknesses or hidden passages. The walls were solid, the stone cold and unforgiving. The iron bars of the door were thick and sturdy, leaving no room for escape.


    He slumped against the wall, his mind racing. Who had taken him? Why? Was Ron here too? And what did they want with them? The questions swirled in his head, unanswered and unsettling.


    Then, William heard footsteps coming to his direction. The footsteps were slow, as if the person wanted to make William scared. It worked.


    When the cell door opened, he couldn''t believe who he saw there.

 Chapter 121 A Summoned Hero on the Island!

    William couldn''t believe his eyes. The person standing before him was a stranger, yet there was something undeniably familiar about him. The man bore a mark on his forehead, a mark characteristic of the heroes summoned to this world.How could this be? William had used his SSS-ranked ability to travel years into the past. He''d thought the summoned heroes only existed in his present timeline.


    "I... I don''t believe it," William stammered, his voice barely above a whisper.


    The man frowned, his expression a mixture of confusion and annoyance. "What are you talking about? Are you losing your mind?"


    William was unsure if he could trust this man. Despite appearances suggesting he was one of the summoned heroes of this era, he could also be an imposter. William needed to learn more about him, discern his motives for being on the island, and understand why he had kidnapped both Ron and himself.


    "Did you kidnap Ron?" William asked, his gaze locked with the man''s.


    Confronted so directly, the man replied, "No, I didn''t. I came to this island pursuing a dangerous fugitive. I couldn''t help but notice this deserted island is rather crowded. Perhaps you could explain what''s going on here?"


    That was an unexpected twist for William. He''d assumed this man was the one who had kidnapped Ron.


    ''Is he telling the truth?'' William wondered, unsure whether to believe the man''s seemingly convincing story. Despite his reservations, William decided to share what he knew.


    "We''re establishing a magic academy here," William explained. "This island was supposed to be deserted, but someone kidnapped one of our students, a young man named Ron. They even left a letter threatening to take more of us."


    The man''s fists clenched. "That''s the same person I''m after. This is typical of the fugitive I''m hunting. He''s involved with dark magic, a formidable foe."


    William had already suspected Ron''s kidnapper was a dark magic practitioner. He knew because a shadowy energy had attacked him and Professor Lincoln while they were flying on their mounts.


    "Tell me something," William began, pausing as he considered whether he should ask, "Are you one of the summoned heroes?"


    The question caught the man off guard. "How do you know about the summoned heroes?" he countered.


    "But everyone knows about the tattoos that heroes have, right?" William said. At least, that''s what he had learned in the present time of Aethel. However, it seemed things were different in the past.


    In Aethel''s past, information about the heroes was scarce, and people didn''t know about the tattoos. Therefore, the hero was very surprised and became aggressive with William.


    "How do you know that?" the hero growled, grabbing William by the neck. "That''s a secret that few people know!"


    At that moment, William had to make a choice. If he didn''t reveal that he was also a hero, this man could end him.


    "I know that because I''m a hero too!" William blurted out.


    The man burst into laughter. "Are you kidding me? There are only three heroes, and I know both of them. It''s impossible for you to be a hero."


    With no way out, William showed the summoned hero tattoo he had on his forearm.


    The man stared at the tattoo for a few seconds, then he released William and staggered back. "I-Impossible. How?"


    The man grasped William''s arm, his eyes fixed on the tattoo. A unique aura emanated from the marking, and as a hero himself, he knew William was telling the truth.


    "How is this possible?" he breathed, his voice filled with disbelief. "I was certain there were only three of us."


    William hesitated, reluctant to reveal too much information. "I was summoned a while ago," he said carefully. "This might sound like a strange question, but what world did you come from?"


    "Earth," the man replied. "Do you know it?"


    Astonishment washed over William. He and his friends had been summoned directly from Earth. He had assumed other heroes might originate from different, unknown planets, but apparently, this man was also from Earth.


    "Which year?" William pressed, his curiosity piqued.


    "1512," the man answered. "And you?"


    "2024."


    The kidnapping had taken a most unexpected turn, evolving into a surprising encounter. William was eager to learn more about this man, just as the man was curious about William.


    With a swift motion, the man shattered the shackles binding William''s wrists.


    "How did you end up here?" the man asked, his brow furrowed in thought. "I thought only a set number of heroes were summoned at the same time. By the way, I''m Ben."


    "William," he replied, returning the introduction. "To be honest, I have no idea how I got here. I appeared in a village far from here, completely disoriented."


    "That''s strange..." Ben mused. "Judging by your power level, I assume you were summoned recently?"


    Comparing William''s power to Ben''s was like comparing a candle to a bonfire. Ben was immensely powerful. Even Professor Lincoln, a formidable mage in his own right, had been helpless against Ben''s illusion magic and had no idea where William was being held.


    "Yes, quite recently," William confirmed. "And you? How long have you been here?"


    "About eight years now," Ben answered. "It was quite difficult at first, but things have gotten better. Well, not exactly better, considering the looming threat of the Underworld Lord, but I''m certainly better off than when I first arrived."


    This information was crucial for William. He knew that in Aethel''s present time, the heroes had been summoned to deal with the Underworld Lord, and it seemed that was the case in the past as well.


    ''Could this be a recurring problem?'' William wondered, pondering the possibility of the Underworld Lord being a cyclical threat. He couldn''t be sure, but it was certainly a disturbing thought.


    They talked for a while about the hero stuff, but eventually Ben started talking about the fugitive he was looking for on that island.


    "This fugitive I''m chasing," Ben continued, his expression hardening, "he''s a dangerous mage who''s been experimenting with forbidden magic. He calls himself Malkor, and he''s obsessed with gaining power, no matter the cost."


    Ben explained how Malkor had been a promising student at a renowned magic academy, but his thirst for forbidden knowledge led him down a dark path. He delved into the darkest corners of magic, experimenting with necromancy and demonic rituals, eventually becoming a rogue mage, a threat to the very fabric of Aethel.


    "He''s been terrorizing villages, kidnapping people for his twisted experiments," Ben said, his voice grim. "I''ve been tracking him for months, and this island seems to be his latest hideout."


    Discover exclusive content at My Virtual Library Empire


    Ben led William through a hidden passage, revealing an underground base concealed beneath the island. It was a network of tunnels and chambers, illuminated by glowing crystals embedded in the walls.


    "I''ve been using this as a base while I search for Malkor," Ben explained. "It''s well-hidden and provides a safe haven from the island''s creatures."


    William was impressed by the ingenuity of the base. It was a testament to Ben''s resourcefulness and his determination to apprehend Malkor.


    "So, what''s your plan now?" William asked, curious about Ben''s next move.


    "I''ll continue my search for Malkor," Ben replied, his eyes filled with resolve. "And I need your help."


    William was taken aback. "My help? But I''m still relatively weak compared to you."


    Ben smiled. "Strength isn''t everything, William. You have a unique perspective, coming from another time. You might notice things I''ve overlooked. Besides," he added, "we need to find Ron."


    William nodded, his determination solidifying. He would help Ben apprehend Malkor and rescue Ron. It was the least he could do, both as a fellow hero and as a member of the academy.


    "I''m in," William declared, his voice firm. "What''s the first step?"


    "First and foremost, we need to keep my presence here a secret," Ben stated, his voice low and serious. "The fugitive doesn''t know I''ve tracked him here, and I want to keep it that way. I only resorted to ''kidnapping'' you because I was certain it would go unnoticed."


    Ultimately, William had to return to the encampment. Ben helped ensure the fugitive remained unaware of William''s presence throughout their journey back.


    "I''ll be in touch in the next few days to update you on any developments," Ben assured William, placing a hand on his shoulder. "And this might sound strange, but your friend is definitely alive. Malkor usually kidnaps people for rituals, and he waits for a specific moon phase. I believe your friend still has a few good days left, so we''ll find him. Don''t worry."


    This information eased William''s anxiety. He didn''t know Ron well, but the other students were close to him, and William would never abandon them. Knowing Ron was likely safe would bring comfort to those searching for him.


    "Understood," William replied, feeling a surge of hope. "Take care, Ben." S§×ar?h the ¦ÇovelFire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    With that, William left and returned to the encampment. Everyone was worried, and he encountered Lincoln along the way, who still seemed bewildered by the events.


    "William! You''re alive!" Professor Lincoln exclaimed, rushing towards him. "I''ve been searching for you for hours."


    William returned to the encampment with Lincoln, deciding it was the safest place to share what he had learned.

 Chapter 122 The Dark Mage is Here

    William knew he had to tell Lincoln what had happened, but he decided to omit Ben''s identity as a summoned hero. It wasn''t something he felt comfortable revealing, as it could also expose his own secret.Instead, he simply said he had encountered a man pursuing a fugitive and explained what he knew about Malkor¡ªthat he was a dark mage planning to perform a ritual with Ron.


    Professor Lincoln listened intently, his concern for Ron evident. However, he felt a glimmer of hope knowing they had someone else on their side.


    "And you trust this... Ben?" Lincoln inquired, a hint of skepticism in his voice.


    William nodded firmly. "Yes, I do. For now, we need to continue searching for Malkor, but Ben said he would try to contact us in a few days."


    "Alright..." Lincoln said, pondering the situation. "And William, let''s keep this between us for now, shall we? I think the other students might panic if we tell them about another unknown person and...ritual sacrifices."


    Indeed, it wasn''t ideal to share this information with the other students. William felt many of them lacked the mental fortitude to handle such news, at least not in their current state.


    "Agreed," William confirmed. "We''ll keep this to ourselves for now." S~ea??h the N?velFire(.)net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Read latest chapters at My Virtual Library Empire


    After their conversation, they returned to the makeshift camp near the magic academy construction site. When the other students saw William, they were overjoyed, sighing in relief.


    "William! What in the world happened?" Marcel exclaimed, embracing his friend.


    "Lincoln and I were attacked," William explained, "and I ended up getting lost. But I''m back now!"


    No one pressed William or Lincoln for further details. They could see William was physically injured, lending credence to his story. Moreover, they were preoccupied with the search for Ron.


    William was relieved. It seemed none of the students were harboring suspicions or demanding a more detailed account of what had happened. Since they wanted to keep things secret, this was a welcome outcome.


    All the students, including Professor Lincoln, continued searching for Ron, while William retreated to his cabin to rest. He felt weak after the day''s events; falling from his flying mount and enduring a blow to the head had taken its toll. He needed time to recover.


    Asura, his demonic sword, spoke up, "Was that guy really one of the heroes? He certainly seemed like it, but I had no idea they summoned heroes here in the past too. Intriguing, isn''t it?"


    "Indeed," William agreed. "And it seems people aren''t that familiar with the heroes here. I wonder if the same person or group who summoned me also summoned him. Could it be the same order of mages that Elric was a part of?"


    The mere thought of Elric ignited a fury within William, causing him to clench his fists. Elric had banished him, treated him like dirt, and he would never forget it.


    "I don''t know," Asura replied, "but we can investigate in the future. I think searching for information about Elric''s order of mages might be easier here in the past than in the present. You might encounter less danger here."


    Asura''s suggestion made perfect sense, and William was determined to seek more information. However, that was a task for the future. At present, he had far more pressing matters to attend to.


    William remained in his cabin, resting and eating, but he couldn''t bear to stay idle for long. He yearned to rejoin the search and find Ron, and not just find him, but also put an end to the dark mage Malkor''s interference with their plans for the magic academy.


    Driven by this resolve, he emerged from his cabin, ready to seek out the others. But the moment he stepped outside, he froze. A figure cloaked in black stood staring at him from across the clearing, partially concealed by the shadows of a nearby tree.


    William blinked, unsure if his eyes were playing tricks on him. But the figure didn''t vanish.


    He initially thought it might be one of the students or even Professor Lincoln, but as the person approached, he realized it was a stranger.


    "Malkor?" he ventured, a hint of uncertainty in his voice.


    The man''s eyebrows shot up in surprise. He lowered his black hood, revealing the face of a middle-aged man with a long beard, tired eyes ringed with dark circles, and a scar across his left eye.


    "How do you know my name?" Malkor demanded, his voice laced with suspicion. "You shouldn''t..."


    According to Ben, he had followed Malkor to the island without the dark mage''s knowledge. Therefore, William shouldn''t know who he was.


    Thinking fast, William fabricated a plausible story. "I''ve heard of you before," he said, feigning familiarity. "You performed some gruesome rituals near the town where I lived."


    Judging by Malkor''s reaction, he bought the story.


    "Ah, I see," Malkor said with a smug grin. "You''ve heard of my art. Beautiful, isn''t it? I''m just waiting for the right moment to do the same with your friend... the one I recently acquired."


    He was referring to Ron. "Why are you here?" William asked, trying to maintain his composure. "I thought you were in hiding."


    Malkor let out a harsh laugh. "Hiding? Why would I hide? None of you stand a chance against me. That professor of yours... I doubt he could last five minutes in a serious fight."


    Malkor was indeed a powerful mage. Despite the widespread loathing for his dark practices, his strength was undeniable. William knew that if he tried to confront Malkor, he wouldn''t stand a chance.


    He discreetly checked the timer on his SSS-ranked skill. It still showed several days remained before he would be pulled back to the present. He couldn''t use that ability to escape this situation.


    "Professor Lincoln is quite skilled," William countered, attempting to sow doubt in Malkor''s mind. "I think you''d find him a formidable opponent, not the pushover you seem to believe. And don''t forget the other students; they would join the fight, too."


    Undeterred, Malkor continued his slow advance. William desperately sought a way to halt his approach or, at the very least, instill some fear in him, but his efforts proved futile.


    Without his flying mount, escape seemed impossible. There was one option left, but William was reluctant to resort to it.


    "Trying to scare me, young one?" Malkor sneered, his lips curling into a cruel smile. "Some unforeseen circumstances arose, and I find myself needing another participant for my ritual. Luckily, I stumbled upon another student here in the encampment."


    The situation was growing increasingly dire. William backed away, but there was nowhere to run.


    Asura''s voice echoed in his mind. "I can help you unleash the full demonic power within you. There''s a chance you might die or suffer permanent damage, but it''s better than the 100% chance of death if you face this guy alone!"


    It was a tempting offer, and William didn''t dismiss it. If he could hold out for a while, perhaps even injure Malkor slightly until Lincoln returned to the camp, it might just work.


    But before he could make a decision, a figure appeared to his rescue. Ben descended from the sky, landing between William and Malkor.


    For the first time, fear flickered across Malkor''s face. "You?" he sputtered, his voice laced with disbelief. "How did you find me here?"


    "Did you really think you could hide forever?" Ben chuckled, a confident glint in his eyes. "It was only a matter of time before I found you."


    The two knew each other well, and Malkor was acutely aware of Ben''s superior power. His confident demeanor evaporated, replaced by a desperate urge to flee. He backpedaled, frantically searching for an escape route.


    But Ben wasn''t about to let Malkor escape. He had been on the island for a while, lying in wait, hoping for the right moment to find Malkor and either kill him or bring him back as a prisoner.


    This was the opportunity he had been waiting for. He hadn''t expected Malkor to leave his hideout so soon and seek another student to sacrifice in his macabre dark magic ritual.


    Malkor acted quickly, conjuring a smokescreen of dark energy¡ªthe same energy he had used to knock Lincoln and William from their flying mounts.


    Under its cover, Malkor fled into the forest. William, seeing Ben standing motionless, exclaimed, "Are you going to let him get away?"


    Ben chuckled. "Don''t worry. He''s already trapped in my illusion magic. He''ll be back shortly."


    And as if on cue, Malkor reappeared from the forest after about thirty seconds.


    "What the devil?" Malkor exclaimed in confusion. "I was running in the opposite direction!"


    Why was he back where he started? Malkor quickly realized he had fallen victim to one of Ben''s many mysterious magic spells.


    "These blasted illusions!" Malkor roared, hurling a ball of black fire towards William and Ben. "Why don''t you fight fairly?"


    The ball of black fire flew over toward them. William thought of running, but Ben acted first. He would soon show Malkor the reason he was one of the summoned heroes.

 Chapter 123 Its time to leave

    Ben''s power was truly awe-inspiring. He effortlessly blocked Malkor''s spell with a shimmering magic shield."Damn it," Malkor cursed, his frustration evident.


    He made no further attempts to escape. The last time had been futile. He knew Ben''s illusions were formidable, and fleeing was likely not an option.


    Ben prepared to retaliate. His body underwent a startling transformation. His arms morphed into those of a fearsome beast, his height surged by at least six meters, and his frame bulged with muscle.


    He had become a creature, a behemoth resembling a giant tiger that walked on two legs.


    William gaped in astonishment. He had never imagined Ben possessed such an ability.


    Malkor, too, was taken aback. He braced himself to launch another black fire spell, but Ben was too fast.


    In the blink of an eye, Ben appeared before Malkor, slashing at him with his claws. The blow sliced deep into Malkor''s torso, sending him flying into a tree.


    Blood gushed from the wound. Malkor was grievously injured. At that moment, Lincoln arrived.


    Seeing the monstrous creature near William, Lincoln shouted, "William, look out!"


    "It''s alright, Lincoln," William assured him. "He''s a friend, a mage who''s helping us."


    "What?" Lincoln exclaimed in confusion.


    Ben transformed back into his human form and then used magic-inhibiting shackles to restrain Malkor, ensuring he couldn''t escape.


    "What was that transformation?" Lincoln asked, his curiosity piqued. "Are you one of those mages who can shapeshift into beasts?"


    Such magic was rare, practiced only by a select few known as druids who lived in a specific part of the kingdom.


    Lincoln assumed Ben was one of these druids. William had initially thought the same, but the truth was far more intriguing.


    "I didn''t actually transform into a beast," Ben explained. "It was merely another one of my illusions."


    "What?" William gasped, astounded. "But it seemed so real!"


    "Well, what can I say?" Ben remarked with a shrug. "I''m one of the most skilled illusionists in the kingdom. Now that Malkor is apprehended, I''ll return with him. He needs to be imprisoned as soon as possible."


    "And how do you plan to leave the island?" Lincoln inquired. "We arrived on flying mounts, but this villain destroyed them."


    "Ah, yes, I understand," Ben replied. "Well, I''ll simply fly on my own. Would you like me to arrange for some mounts to be sent here for you? I believe I can manage that."


    "That would be fantastic," Lincoln said, relieved.


    Before taking Malkor away, however, they needed to locate Ron. Ben skillfully extracted the information from Malkor''s mind using his mind control magic.


    These spells took time to cast, but with Malkor restrained and injured, they had all the time in the world.


    Once they knew where Ron was hidden, Ben led the way. They found him in a cave tucked away in a remote corner of the island. He was dirty and bruised but alive.


    Ron was overcome with relief when they rescued him, tears welling up in his eyes.


    "You''ll be alright, Ron," Lincoln comforted him. "Come with us back to the camp."


    He still couldn''t believe he was finally being rescued. Ron trembled the entire way back to the camp, only calming down once they arrived.


    There, he saw Malkor. Rage surged through Ron. Ben, noticing this, offered, "Want to punch him to vent some anger?"


    Of course, Ron accepted the offer. He strode towards Malkor, looked him in the eye, and delivered a powerful punch to his face. Not just one, but three solid blows.


    Malkor''s mana was restricted by the shackles, leaving his body fragile. Ron''s punches broke his nose and one of his teeth.


    Malkor didn''t utter a word after receiving those punches to the face. He was utterly defeated, lacking the strength to retaliate. Besides, in his current situation, cursing Ron would only lead to more blows, and who would want that?


    Ben then bid them farewell, promising to arrange for flying mounts. "I believe I can secure at least one large flying mount for you all," he said. "Either a friend of mine will bring it, or I will personally deliver it. It should arrive within fifteen days."


    "Thank you, my friend," Lincoln replied, shaking Ben''s hand.


    Waiting fifteen days was hardly an inconvenience. They had ample supplies to sustain them, and there was still much to build.


    With that, Ben demonstrated one of the reasons he was a summoned hero. His power was truly remarkable.


    He conjured a mana carpet, shimmering with a purplish hue, and stepped onto it. Malkor lay bound on the same carpet, and the two of them soared into the sky.


    Read new chapters at My Virtual Library Empire


    William and the others waved goodbye to Ben. He had undoubtedly saved them from the dark mage and helped rescue Ron.


    "Come, Ron," one of the students said. "I''ll prepare something for you to eat."


    Everyone worked together to help Ron, an act that strengthened the bonds between the students. They began to understand that on this island, if something went wrong, they only had each other to rely on.


    The best way to thrive was to work together, united by their common purpose. William had previously clashed with one particular student¡ªthe one who had insulted him and complained incessantly¡ªbut after this incident, the student ceased his disruptive behavior, and a sense of peace settled over the group.


    After two days at the camp, William resumed his mission to cull the island''s magical beasts. He had recovered physically and mentally, and a sense of calm had returned to the group, though the lingering fear of another attack remained.


    It was only after this period of relative peace that they truly realized the immediate danger had passed. They could finally relax without the constant dread of a dark mage lurking in the shadows.


    The magical beasts were now their sole concern, and William was determined to address the issue.


    He returned to the same hunting grounds as before. With his sword in hand, he faced a variety of creatures, from terrestrial and aquatic to those that soared through the air.


    William also grew more discerning, learning to avoid certain types of plants. He had once leaned against a tree to rest, only to discover it was a sentient, predatory species that attempted to ensnare him with its branches.


    Fortunately, the tree wasn''t powerful enough to hold him, and he managed to escape its grasp. But the experience served as a valuable lesson, teaching him to be more vigilant in the future.


    Despite facing numerous magical creatures and gaining experience, William couldn''t shake a growing sense of anxiety.


    He had finally reached level 25, the threshold that allowed him to acquire a class. But to do so, he needed to find a mentor.


    This was the source of his unease. Unlike the other heroes, who had access to the finest mentors capable of granting them special hero-exclusive classes, William was alone.


    How would he ever obtain a unique class?


    One day, while lost in contemplation on the beach, Asura''s voice echoed in his mind.


    "I believe I''ve recovered some memories now that you''ve grown stronger," Asura stated. "And I think there''s an island in this region where a demon civilization still exists."


    "What?" William exclaimed in surprise.


    Asura had previously mentioned that the best types of magic for William to learn were fire or dark fire¡ªhe had a natural affinity for them due to his demonic heritage¡ªbut in Aethel''s present time, the demon civilization had vanished.


    Perhaps it still existed somewhere in the world, but William didn''t know its location. However, in the past, it seemed things were different.


    "Are you sure?" William asked, his curiosity piqued.


    "Yes, I''m certain," Asura confirmed. "But you''ll have to abandon this construction project. They might even think you deserted the school and never allow you to return. Are you willing to take that risk?" S§×arch* The n?velFire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    The decision weighed heavily on William. He had hoped to leave without being expelled. Could he persuade Lincoln to let him go? Or perhaps speak to Headmaster Grant about it?


    Returning to the camp that day, William had a serious conversation with Lincoln.


    "I need to leave for a while," he began, "possibly even years. Do you think that would be grounds for expulsion?"


    Lincoln was taken aback. "Leave for years?" he echoed. "Where do you need to go?"


    Hesitation clouded the professor''s features.


    "There are some personal matters I need to attend to," William explained vaguely. "I''ve been trying to avoid them for as long as possible, but I can''t anymore."


    William braced himself for a harsh response, but Lincoln surprised him with his leniency. "Our school already has few students," he said, "and you''re one of our best. We can''t afford to lose you. I believe Grant will understand. But how will you leave? We still don''t have a flying mount."


    "I was thinking of using the mount to return to the nearest city and taking a boat from there," William explained. "That would be much faster for you. I don''t want to leave and steal your only means of transport."


    And so it was decided. A few days later, one of Ben''s friends arrived with an enormous flying mount¡ªa magnificent bird with six wings.


    The sheer size and power of the creature startled Lincoln.


    "My god," he breathed, "this beast is worth a fortune. It can fly so high that it can travel directly to the mainland without worrying about the perils of the ocean."


    William''s ears perked up at this information.


    ''Perhaps stealing this mount wouldn''t be such a bad idea after all,'' he mused, a mischievous glint in his eyes.

 Chapter 124 Another Hero

    The mount seemed like the perfect solution for William, who was already contemplating approaching Ben''s friend to see if he could borrow it. He didn''t want to steal it outright, as that would negatively impact his friends who were staying on the island. William wasn''t that kind of person.As soon as Ben''s friend landed the enormous bird on the beach, William went to speak with him.


    Up close, the bird was even larger than William had imagined, making him feel dwarfed by the majestic creature. It was truly a powerful flying mount.


    "You''re William, right?" the man said with a friendly smile. "I need to speak with you in private. Is that alright?"


    Lincoln and the other students were present to see the mount, and upon hearing the man''s request, they returned to the camp.


    Once William and the man were alone, he revealed, "I''m one of the summoned heroes, just like Ben. He told me about you."


    William hadn''t expected to encounter another hero here. "Really?" he said, surprised. "Well, it''s an honor to meet another one of us."


    "Likewise," the hero replied. "I''ve come to invite you to train with us. I believe you could progress much faster that way."


    They wanted William to join them, the heroes, but he knew it wasn''t a good idea. Things were likely the same in the past, meaning the heroes were affiliated with the order of mages that Elric belonged to.


    For some reason, William had a feeling he would suffer at their hands if he went, but it was still an opportunity to learn more about the heroes and Elric.


    "Could we perhaps consider that later?" William asked. "I have some things I need to do first. I believe it''s alright to wait a while, say a few years?"


    William wanted to find the island where the demon race lived and learn more from them. He needed to understand his powers better.


    The hero seemed to agree. "No problem, we have plenty of time. But try not to take longer than a decade. Remember, the threat of the demon lord is approaching."


    "Right, of course," William replied. "And one more thing, do you think you could give me this mount? Or at least lend it to me for a while? I need to travel the world, and I think it would be very useful."


    "Actually, I came here to give it to you," the hero said. "Your friends will receive another mount."


    "Excellent!" William exclaimed.


    In the end, he wouldn''t need to steal or beg for the mount, which was a relief. With this bird, he could travel the oceans with ease.


    The hero handed William a small whistle. "With this, you can control the bird," he explained. "It hunts for its own food, and it doesn''t require frequent feeding."


    He gave William a few more instructions before taking his leave. He, too, flew off, but unlike Ben, who used a mana carpet, this hero simply sprouted wings and soared into the sky.


    William returned to the camp to share the news. "Apparently, that flying mount is for me," he told Lincoln. "But he''ll be back soon with another one for you."


    Lincoln frowned, puzzled. He couldn''t understand why such a powerful man would gift such a valuable mount to William.


    What made William so special? Despite his questions, Lincoln knew William wouldn''t lie about it.


    "Alright, I understand," Lincoln conceded. "Well, at least we''ll have a way to leave the island when we need to. I think we''ll have to go buy supplies soon."


    Although the island provided water and creatures to hunt, they still needed other types of food. Lincoln wanted to start a farm, enabling them to stay on the island longer without relying on outside supplies.


    But everything in its own time. Lincoln still needed to organize the site before they could begin planting.


    William, however, had other plans. Though he enjoyed being with his friends and wanted to kill more monsters to gain experience, he knew he needed to venture out to become truly powerful.


    His goal was the demon island Asura had mentioned. During the night, William prepared to leave. But before he departed, he decided to speak with his friends, Marcel and Denise.


    "I''m leaving tonight," William announced.


    Marcel had invited him into his cabin, expecting a friendly chat with his friend, not this bombshell.


    "What?" he blurted out, stunned. "Is this a joke?"


    "No, it''s not," William replied, his voice firm. "There are places I need to go. It''s important. I haven''t told anyone else, just the two of you."


    "But it''s going to be dangerous. You know that," Marcel insisted, concern etched on his face.


    Despite his desire to keep his friend safe, Marcel could see that nothing would sway William''s decision. Accepting this, he offered his support and bid his friend farewell.


    "Will you come back?" he asked, a hint of sadness in his voice.


    "Yes, definitely," William assured him. "This is just a temporary adventure. In the meantime, please stay strong. I wish I could go on adventures with you both."


    Marcel and Denise embraced him, exchanging heartfelt goodbyes. Then, William slipped out of the cabin.


    He couldn''t linger. The longer he stayed, the greater the chance Lincoln would notice something was amiss.


    William''s goal was simple: reach his new mount and leave.


    Under the cover of darkness, he made his way to the beach where the bird awaited him.


    The path was relatively safe. William had spent several days clearing the area of magical creatures.


    The bird itself also contributed to the area''s safety. It was a powerful and intimidating beast, and no other magical creature on the island dared approach the beach.


    As William approached the bird, it became agitated, ready to attack at any moment. He quickly used the whistle given to him by the hero, calming the magnificent creature.


    He mounted the bird and soared into the night sky. Lincoln awoke to the sound, but it was too late. William was already gone.


    "Which direction is this island?" William asked Asura in his mind.


    "Southwest," Asura replied. "But it would be wise to return to the mainland and stock up on supplies first. Going straight there would be risky. It''s a long journey." Sear?h the novel(F~)ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Since William had left abruptly, he didn''t have many supplies with him. According to Asura, it was unlikely he would encounter any islands along the way.


    In that case, he would need to carry water and food. While fishing in the sea was possible, it was risky and time-consuming.


    Therefore, it was best to be prepared with provisions.


    William turned back and headed towards the nearest island. He lay down and took a nap, instructing Asura to wake him when they neared the island.


    A few hours passed, around four in total, and William reached the island. The bird was incredibly fast and flew at an impressive altitude.


    The cold at that height surprised William, and he decided to buy some new clothes in the city. Discover stories with My Virtual Library Empire


    He couldn''t land just anywhere with such an enormous bird. William chose a secluded area on the island with dense vegetation, a place where the inhabitants wouldn''t be alarmed by the sudden appearance of such a creature.


    In fact, William doubted anyone would even see the bird. He arrived under the cover of darkness, maintaining a low profile.


    William then made his way towards the city, where he had to wait a few hours for the shops to open.


    Once the shops opened, he began his shopping spree. William focused on purchasing barrels of water and food ¨C the essentials for his journey.


    Goods on the island were relatively inexpensive, and he had some savings from the school and Jinra. So, he easily acquired everything he needed.


    William also bought some fur-lined leather clothing. It was a bit more expensive since it wasn''t typical attire for the island''s hot climate.


    But William needed those clothes to withstand the frigid temperatures at the high altitudes the bird could reach.


    He managed to store most of his purchases in his inventory, which was a huge advantage. This allowed him to carry everything without cluttering the back of his mount.


    Securing items on the bird''s back would have been a challenge, so the inventory was a lifesaver.


    After completing his shopping, he returned to his mount, climbed aboard, and soared off into the vast expanse of the sky.


    His destination was set: the island Asura had revealed. According to the recovered memories, it was quite distant, located near another continent!


    "I''m almost certain no one has explored that continent yet," Asura commented. "Perhaps you''ll be the first to encounter people with a completely different culture."


    The prospect of exploring such a new and uncharted territory thrilled William, but it was a long way off, requiring many days of travel.


    Suddenly, his time in the past came to an end. Everything around him froze for a fleeting moment, and a portal materialized before him, pulling him inexorably inward.


    William found himself back in the present, thrust once more into his quest to find the ingredients for the king''s antidote.

 Chapter 125 Looking for the next ingredient

    William was back in the present, aboard the ship heading towards the island where they would supposedly find one of the ingredients for the king''s antidote: the fire blossom flower.Of course, the journey was still quite long - about 12 to 13 days. It could take longer depending on the conditions they encountered. There was also the chance of encountering a powerful magical beast and everyone perishing on this journey.


    The likelihood of encountering a creature strong enough to take on all the sailors, the captain, and Seraphina was quite low, but it still existed.


    ''Before I go out, I should change my clothes again...'' William thought as he glanced at his attire.


    He needed to maintain a low profile, so he had to wear the same clothes he was wearing before, or people would notice.


    He changed, left his quarters, and made his way to the upper deck of the ship. There, he encountered the fog that Captain Hemlock had mentioned earlier.


    It was a never-ending fog, a defining characteristic of this part of the ocean. Not only was it difficult to navigate, but it was also a place teeming with powerful magical beasts.


    "How are things going?" William inquired.


    "So far, so good," Hemlock replied, "but we''ve just entered the fog bank, and I know things could get dicey at any moment."


    William looked around and saw that all the crew members were focused and prepared for battle. No one was slacking off or enjoying the oceanic scenery.


    ''I need to focus too,'' William thought.


    He had gained a few levels during his time in the past, which gave him a bit more confidence when facing any powerful magical beasts that might appear.


    Seraphina, who was also on the upper deck, approached William for a brief conversation.


    "You seem different from how you were earlier today," she observed. "Your aura feels stronger."


    It was obvious. William was indeed stronger.


    "Well, what can I say? I''m someone who thrives in adversity," he replied with a slight smirk.


    Seraphina nodded in agreement. "We are certainly going through a lot on this mission... But once we obtain this fire blossom flower, we can finally return."


    "Yes. That''s good, isn''t it?"


    "Yes, very." S§×ar?h the n??el Fire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Their conversation was brief. Seraphina''s water magic was crucial. She could detect creatures in the water from a long distance, which was vital in their current foggy predicament.


    The first day in the fog-laden region passed without incident. It was eerily calm - too calm - and William spent most of his time resting and eating.


    But on the second day, William was jolted awake in the early morning hours by screams coming from the upper deck. He leaped out of bed, flung open his door, and rushed towards the commotion.


    He didn''t even bother closing his door. The situation seemed dire, and William didn''t want to waste a single second. His focus was on reaching the upper deck as quickly as possible.


    Bursting onto the deck, William was met with a shocking sight: Seraphina, covered in blood, was locked in a fierce battle with a magical beast that had boarded the ship!


    The creature was a bizarre species of shark that walked on two legs, wielded weapons, and could even speak.


    William was stunned. This was clearly a member of a more intelligent civilization, one that was perhaps unknown to humans.


    The captain fought alongside Seraphina. Despite her injuries, William could tell they were gaining the upper hand.


    The shark was in far worse shape. The fin on its back had been ripped off, and a deep gash marred its chest.


    "Even if you defeat me, you won''t win against my allies," the shark rasped, its voice filled with malice. "This area belongs to us, and we don''t want humans trespassing here."


    "But this is the only way to reach our destination," Hemlock insisted, trying to reason with the creature. "Are you certain we can''t find a peaceful resolution?"


    "No!" the shark spat. "There will be no truce."


    An idea sparked in William''s mind. He stepped closer to the shark, a risky move, and held out the ring he had received from the Triton King.


    "Hello, friend," he said, his voice calm and steady. "Do you recognize this ring?"


    It was a gamble. The mermaid and merman kingdoms could be either allies or enemies with these sharks.


    There was a chance William could make things worse by showing the ring.


    "I recognize that symbol!" the shark exclaimed, its eyes widening in surprise. "Are you a friend of theirs?"


    "Yes," William confirmed, holding the Triton King''s ring out for the shark to see more clearly.


    The shark fell silent for a few tense seconds, leaving William to wonder if he had just made a terrible mistake.


    Finally, the shark spoke, "I will inform the others that you are friends. And I will see if I can help you navigate this region as quickly as possible. It is very dangerous here."


    With that, the shark leaped back into the water and vanished from sight.


    Hemlock and Seraphina were bewildered.


    "What ring was that you showed him?" Seraphina asked, her curiosity piqued.


    "I''d rather keep that a secret," William replied, a hint of mystery in his voice.


    More and more secrets from William. Seraphina was starting to feel uneasy. She could tolerate him keeping some things private, as that was natural, but it seemed like William was nothing but secrets. Enjoy more content from My Virtual Library Empire


    Despite her growing apprehension, she didn''t press the matter and instead retreated to her quarters. "I need to recover," she said simply before departing.


    Hemlock, who had arrived later to the fight, was relatively unscathed.


    "Thanks for helping us, William," he said gratefully.


    "You''re welcome, Captain," William replied.


    William returned to his quarters and went back to sleep.


    The next morning, he was greeted by an unexpected sight. Inside the ship, he saw the same shark he had fought with the previous night, accompanied by another.


    Both were clad in armor and carried weapons, standing near the captain.


    The shark seemed surprised to see William. "So there you are," he said. "I told you we would come to help you navigate this region."


    "Thanks so much for the help. How long do you think it will take us to get out of here?" William asked.


    "I believe about three more days. But you''re in luck; the powerful magical beasts are hibernating this time of year. That''s one of the reasons we''re so active," the shark explained.


    Through their conversation, William learned that they were indeed a civilization similar to the mermaids and mermen he had met.


    However, their numbers were fewer, and they generally avoided contact with humans. They had never formed any alliances with humans.


    But they did have an alliance with the merfolk, so when they saw the ring William carried, they knew he was a close friend of the mermaid kingdom.


    Because of this, it was only natural for them to offer assistance. Helping William and the others wouldn''t cost them much and could potentially earn them favor with the merfolk, which might lead to benefits in the future.


    As the days passed, William noticed Seraphina growing more distant.


    ''She must be upset or angry about my secrets,'' he thought.


    It seemed the most likely explanation, but William couldn''t help it. He truly had to keep many things confidential, and she would have to understand, sooner or later.


    With the sharks'' guidance, William and his crew navigated the treacherous fog with surprising ease and speed.


    They encountered a few creatures along the way, but nothing too dangerous. It was all quite manageable.


    Hemlock was relieved when they finally emerged from the fog bank, knowing they had overcome one of the most perilous parts of the journey.


    "In the end, that Kraken you mentioned never showed up, Hemlock," William remarked, clapping the captain on the back.


    "Yeah, you''re right," Hemlock chuckled. "Maybe it''s just a legend after all. I mean, I''ve never seen the Kraken or met anyone who has."


    One of the sharks overheard their conversation and interjected, "The Kraken is real. Remember I told you the powerful creatures are hibernating? Well, that includes the Kraken."


    Hemlock''s laughter died in his throat, replaced by a nervous gulp. So, the chance of encountering the Kraken was real after all...


    The sharks bid them farewell as they left the fog, making sure to invite William to visit their kingdom when he had the chance.


    "I certainly will," William replied. "But how do I contact you?"


    "When you arrive in this region, we will know you are here," the shark assured him.


    "Understood."


    After their departure, William and the others were in the final leg of their journey.


    Now, only a few days remained before they would reach the volcanic island where the fire blossom flower was said to bloom.


    William was eager to find the last ingredient¡ªwhich was located on the high seas¡ªand finally be done with this quest.


    He was growing weary of islands and sea voyages, both in the present and the past.

 Chapter 126 William now has a disciple

    The days crawled by, each one feeling longer than the last. William''s eagerness to reach their destination made time seem to slow to a crawl.He passed the time by staying in his quarters, chatting with sailors on the upper deck, and gazing at the endless expanse of the ocean.


    The moment they reached their destination was unmistakable. The island they were to explore boasted an enormous volcano, visible from a great distance.


    The volcano''s sheer size was awe-inspiring, and William could see smoke billowing from its peak. Even from afar, he felt dwarfed by its natural grandeur.


    "Is it just me, or is there a village over there?" William wondered aloud, pointing towards a cluster of houses on the island. "How can they live so far out here?"


    He had assumed the island would be deserted, or perhaps inhabited by only a few hardy souls, but he was mistaken. There were numerous houses and a bustling community.


    Hemlock seemed to have anticipated this and offered an explanation. "We''re actually close to another continent," he revealed. "This island trades extensively with them. In fact, you could say they''re residents of that continent, not ours. From what I understand, most of them speak more than one language."


    William was surprised. The direction he had sailed in the past was different, so he had imagined this continent to be a separate one.


    Of course, it was possible it was the same continent, vast enough to stretch across different regions.


    The answer remained elusive without further exploration. Captain Hemlock skillfully docked the ship and went ashore to speak with the port authorities, ensuring they had a place to moor and wouldn''t encounter any trouble.


    This island didn''t receive many visitors from afar. It was more common to see ships from nearby islands or the larger continent, but a vessel arriving from as far as William''s was a rare occurrence.


    It took some time for Hemlock to explain their purpose and assure the authorities they wouldn''t cause any problems.


    Meanwhile, William took the opportunity to relax at a nearby restaurant and order a drink.


    "Give me your best drink," he requested.


    The waitress was taken aback by his unfamiliar accent and the language he spoke¡ªa secondary language for the islanders. She immediately recognized him as someone from a distant land.


    Intrigued by William''s unfamiliar demeanor, the waitress approached his table with a smile and a few questions after delivering his drink.


    "Are you from far away?" she inquired. "What brings you to our island?"


    Despite the girl''s seemingly harmless curiosity, William remained guarded. Sharing too much information with strangers could attract unwanted attention.


    "Yes, I come from afar," he replied vaguely. "But unfortunately, I can''t disclose the reasons for my presence here. Let''s just say it''s for tourism."


    A hint of disappointment flickered across the waitress''s face. "I understand," she sighed. "I wish I could leave this island more often and explore the world, but I only travel to the mainland a few times a year with my parents." Continue reading on My Virtual Library Empire


    Her response piqued William''s curiosity. "What''s the mainland like?" he asked. "If you don''t want to answer, that''s fine. I wouldn''t blame you, considering I haven''t been entirely forthcoming myself."


    "It''s alright," she assured him. "It''s a continent like any other, I suppose, though I haven''t seen any others myself. It has diverse biomes, but most of it is desert. The stories say it was transformed into a desert long ago due to a fight." S§×arch* The n?vel_Fire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "A fight?" William echoed, his brow furrowed in disbelief. "How could a fight transform an entire continent?"


    The idea seemed preposterous, but the waitress''s conviction made him reconsider. This wasn''t just a fantastical tale from a bygone era; it seemed to hold genuine historical significance.


    "Well, according to the legends," she explained, leaning in conspiratorially, "it was a battle between a powerful warrior and a fearsome beast. Some say he fought a giant, others a dragon, and some even claim it was against another man. The truth is shrouded in mystery."


    William, having witnessed firsthand the destructive potential of magic, found the idea of a single person altering an entire continent entirely plausible. Mages could indeed reach incredible heights of power.


    Eventually, the waitress excused herself. Though her parents owned the restaurant, she still had duties to attend to, and other customers awaited her service.


    William savored his drink and the solitude it afforded him. The concoction contained ingredients foreign to him, though he detected a hint of pineapple in its flavor.


    Captain Hemlock approached his table, a look of satisfaction on his face.


    "We''re all set," he announced. "The guards won''t bother us, and we have time to explore the island and retrieve the flower, though they say it''s dangerous to approach the volcano."


    William, already anticipating a challenging task, was unsurprised. "I see," he replied calmly. "Will we begin today or tomorrow?"


    "Tomorrow," Hemlock answered. "Come with me; we''re searching for a tavern together."


    "Let me just finish my drink," William said, gesturing to his nearly-empty glass.


    Finding a tavern proved to be a simple task. The island offered limited options, so they didn''t have much to choose from.


    The tavern they settled on had plenty of space available¡ªa consequence of its infrequent clientele¡ªallowing the entire crew to lodge comfortably under one roof.


    But it was still daytime, so no one was looking to sleep. The crew settled into the tavern to eat, drink, and mingle with the locals.


    William, however, felt restless. He wanted to explore, to see more of this unfamiliar island. He wandered through the village streets, and to his surprise, he encountered someone familiar.


    It was the waitress from the restaurant.


    "What are you doing here?" he asked, his curiosity piqued. "Didn''t you have a lot of customers to attend to?"


    William''s tone was genuinely inquisitive, not rude. He was simply surprised to see her outside of work.


    "My shift just ended," she explained with a smile. "My parents hired someone to help me a few years ago when I wanted more free time to study magic. Working full-time made it difficult to focus on my studies at the end of the day."


    "Study magic?" William echoed, intrigued.


    He couldn''t sense any mana emanating from her. How was she concealing it? Was she a powerful mage? Or was there something else at play?


    Asura''s voice materialized in William''s mind, offering an explanation. "She has an artifact on her wrist," Asura revealed. "I believe that''s what''s preventing you from sensing her mana."


    William''s gaze fell upon her wrist, where he noticed a delicate bracelet.


    ''How does she possess such a valuable item while living on this remote island?'' he wondered.


    "Yes, I''m studying magic," she confirmed, her eyes sparkling with determination. "It might be my ticket off this island. I want to earn enough money to allow my parents to retire comfortably so they no longer have to run the restaurant."


    "A noble cause," William acknowledged, "but you know that the life of a mage seeking fortune is not easy. You could die."


    The woman''s gaze fell to her feet. "I know," she admitted softly. "That''s one of the reasons my parents didn''t want me to start learning magic. But in the end, I convinced them."


    "How is your training going?" William inquired, his curiosity piqued. "What level are you now?"


    A blush crept onto her cheeks. "I''m only level nine," she confessed, embarrassed. "It''s hard to learn on this island. I don''t have any teachers."


    William was genuinely surprised. Reaching level nine without proper resources or guidance was impressive. Did she gain experience by slaying monsters or through dedicated study?


    "I see," he replied, offering a polite smile. "I wish you the best of luck in achieving your goals."


    He turned to leave, his thoughts already shifting back to his mission. He found the woman pleasant and admired her noble aspirations, but he wasn''t on the island to make friends or play the role of a charitable benefactor.


    Suddenly, she grasped his arm, her touch surprisingly firm. William turned back to face her, his expression guarded.


    "Please, hear me out," she pleaded, her eyes filled with a desperate hope. "Could you be my teacher? Can I go with you?"


    William was ready to refuse, to gently remind her that such sudden physical contact was inappropriate, but Asura''s voice boomed in his mind, laced with an uncharacteristic excitement.


    "Accept! Accept her as your disciple! Do it, kid!" Asura urged, his voice echoing through William''s thoughts.


    "Why should I?" William countered mentally. "She would be a burden."


    Asura''s pleas alone wouldn''t sway William. Ultimately, William was the master, and Asura was merely an artifact.


    "She has a demonic bloodline!" Asura exclaimed, his voice filled with urgency. "Hell, she might be one of the few descendants of the demons you can find in the present time of Aethel!"


    The lady already expected William to refuse after seeing how coldly he looked at her, but to her surprise, William said, "I accept you as my disciple."


    Her eyes widened in disbelief, and a radiant smile lit up her face. "Really?" she gasped, her voice barely above a whisper. "Thank you! Thank you so much!"


    She bowed deeply, her gratitude overflowing. "I won''t disappoint you, Master!" she declared, her voice filled with newfound determination. "I''ll work hard and become a mage worthy of your guidance!"

 Chapter 127 Seeking Flower

    William gestured towards a nearby bench, and they both sat down. He knew some things about Lucy, but now that she was his disciple, he felt it was important to learn more.Lucy, eager to delve into the world of magic and grow stronger, spoke rapidly, her words tumbling over each other in her excitement. She was still in a state of disbelief, unable to contain her joy. Never had she imagined William would actually accept her request.


    William, too, hadn''t planned on taking on a disciple anytime soon. But Asura''s revelation about Lucy''s demonic bloodline had piqued his interest.


    "And how are you going to tell your parents?" William inquired, a hint of concern in his voice. "Aren''t they going to be upset if you leave?"


    Lucy''s smile widened. "They already know I''m planning to leave to learn more about magic," she explained, "so it won''t be that hard, I think. But you''ll have to meet them, you know, so they can see you''re a good person."


    "Really?" William replied, considering her words. "Well, then it must be today, as I''ll be embarking on a task tomorrow." He paused, gauging her reaction. "Should we go there now?"


    He knew that the following day, he and the crew would venture towards the volcano in search of the fire blossom flower. It was a dangerous mission, one that would likely take some time to complete.


    William felt it best to speak with Lucy''s parents beforehand, eliminating one less worry from his mind.


    Lucy didn''t hesitate. "Sure, why not?" she chirped, a cheerful grin spreading across her face. "Come with me!"


    They navigated the quaint village streets, heading towards the restaurant where William had first encountered Lucy and enjoyed that peculiar drink.


    The restaurant bustled with activity¡ªit was, after all, one of the few dining establishments on the island.


    But with Lucy leading the way, they bypassed the crowded main area and entered the back of the restaurant, finding her parents hard at work in the kitchen. Her father, the restaurant''s cook, stood over a steaming pot, while her mother assisted with various tasks.


    They looked up in surprise as Lucy entered with an unfamiliar man in tow.


    "Lucy, my dear," her father boomed, setting down his cooking utensils. "What''s going on?"


    William remained silent, allowing Lucy to explain the situation. It was the safest course of action, ensuring he didn''t inadvertently say anything that might jeopardize his chances.


    Lucy recounted her encounter with William, explaining that he was on a mission but would soon be leaving the island. She expressed her desire to accompany him and further her magical studies.


    Initially, her parents were apprehensive. They didn''t know William. Who in their right mind would let their daughter go off with a complete stranger?


    "We''ll close the restaurant soon so we can talk properly and get to know this William," Lucy''s father declared, his tone firm but fair. "Is that acceptable to you?"


    "Yes, Dad," Lucy replied, glancing at William with a reassuring smile.


    William settled at one of the empty tables in the main dining area, patiently waiting for the restaurant to close. It didn''t take long; Lucy''s parents were clearly eager to have this conversation.


    Once the last customer had departed and the doors were closed, they gathered around a table, Lucy''s parents even bringing out a platter of freshly cooked food from the kitchen.


    "So, who are you, William?" her father began, his gaze fixed on the young mage. "And what are you doing here? You''ll have to be forthcoming with us, or I won''t allow our daughter to go with you. I need to know she''ll be safe."


    William, recognizing the need for transparency, shared some details with Lucy''s parents. He told them he was from a prestigious magic academy and was on a mission to obtain the fire blossom flower.


    He remained vague about the flower''s purpose, simply stating it was for a potion he intended to craft. Naturally, he omitted any mention of his unique abilities, such as his time-travel skill or his demonic energy, including Lucy''s demonic heritage. That would be revealing far too much.


    "You can speak with my captain after we complete the mission," William offered. "You can see the ship, meet the crew, and see where your daughter would be staying. But this is a temporary arrangement; we''re returning to the mainland once this task is done."


    William''s words seemed to ease Lucy''s father''s concerns. He was understandably worried about his daughter, but he also recognized how important this opportunity was for Lucy. She yearned to become a powerful mage, a dream that would never materialize if she remained on the island.


    "May I ask why you accepted her as your disciple?" her father inquired, his curiosity piqued.


    William smiled warmly. "She told me she wanted to become a powerful mage, earn money, and allow you two to retire comfortably so you wouldn''t have to work in the restaurant anymore," he explained. "I found that incredibly noble. If I still had my parents, I would do the same."


    William''s gaze drifted momentarily, the thought of his unknown origins surfacing. It was still a difficult reality to grapple with.


    Lucy''s parents were visibly touched by his words, tears welling up in their eyes. "Alright," her father said, his voice thick with emotion. "Take care of our daughter, you understand? And I''ll be inspecting the ship and crew. Come talk to me when you''re done."


    "Of course," William assured him. "But Lucy will be staying here for now. The task is dangerous, and I don''t want her to come with us."


    She didn''t complain about not going. In fact, Lucy wanted to play it safe now that she finally found someone to mentor her. She decided to stay in the restaurant to prepare her things for the journey ahead.


    William returned to the tavern after that, walking through the empty streets.


    Once there, he noticed how the tavern buzzed with the lively chatter of the crew, their voices mingling with the clinking of tankards and the boisterous laughter of locals. William found a quiet corner, nursing a drink and observing the scene unfold. He noticed Seraphina sitting with a few other crew members, but she remained unusually quiet, her gaze distant.


    He wondered if she was still upset about his evasiveness, about the secrets he kept hidden. Perhaps tomorrow, after they faced the dangers of the volcano together, he could find a moment to speak with her, to try and bridge the gap that had formed between them.


    But for now, he let his thoughts drift, contemplating the challenges that lay ahead and the unexpected turn his journey had taken with the addition of a new disciple. He couldn''t deny the flicker of excitement that sparked within him at the prospect of mentoring Lucy, of helping her unlock her potential and perhaps, uncovering the secrets of her demonic heritage.


    The tavern''s raucous atmosphere gradually faded as the night wore on, and William eventually retired to his room, seeking a restful night''s sleep before the daunting challenges of the following day.


    But sleep eluded him. He tossed and turned, his mind a whirlwind of thoughts and anxieties. The impending expedition to the volcano, the enigmatic Seraphina, and the surprising addition of Lucy as his disciple ¨C all these elements swirled in his mind, preventing him from finding peace.


    Dawn broke, casting a soft glow through the window, and William finally drifted into a restless slumber. When he awoke, the rest of the crew was already abuzz with activity, their preparations for the mission well underway.


    They had gathered the necessary supplies to sustain them for several days, and they had secured the services of a local guide who knew the safest routes through the treacherous volcanic terrain.


    William joined the group, his stomach churning with a mix of anticipation and apprehension. He knew the dangers they faced ¨C not just the molten lava and scorching heat, but also the formidable Fire Elementals that inhabited the area.


    These creatures, born of fire and possessing immense power, were not to be trifled with. William knew they would inevitably have to engage some of them in battle, but he hoped to minimize such encounters. Their guide, a grizzled veteran of the volcano''s slopes, assured them he would lead them along the safest path, avoiding as many Fire Elementals as possible.


    William strolled alongside Captain Hemlock, engaging him in conversation since Seraphina remained aloof. sea??h th§× n?vel_Fire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Stay connected with My Virtual Library Empire


    "How long do you think it will take us to obtain this flower?" William inquired, his gaze sweeping across the rugged volcanic landscape.


    The captain stroked his beard thoughtfully. "Well," he mused, "with a bit of luck, a few days. If not..." He shrugged, his expression turning grim. "It''s hard to say."


    There were many variables to consider in this mission. The flower itself was extremely rare. There were times when the volcano was abundant with blossoms, and other times when only a single flower bloomed.


    And searching for a single flower on that colossal volcano, while evading or battling Fire Elementals and enduring the scorching heat, was a herculean task indeed.

 Chapter 128 A Powerful Foe

    The guide proved invaluable. Though he possessed no magical abilities, his knowledge of the region was indispensable.He led them along the safest paths, expertly avoiding the Fire Elementals that commonly roamed the volcano''s slopes.


    But eventually, encounters became unavoidable. When the number of elementals was low, the guide continued with William and the others, confident in their ability to handle the threat.


    Seraphina, Hemlock, and the sailors dispatched the Fire Elementals with relative ease.


    The elementals were level 30 creatures, wielding fire magic such as Fireball, Magma Ball, and other formidable spells.


    William knew he was no match for these monsters. He might be able to defeat one or two, but any more than that would prove incredibly difficult.


    He was only level 25, after all, while these monsters were level 30 and considerably stronger than typical level 30 creatures.


    Eventually, the path became too perilous for the guide to accompany them further. The increasing number of Fire Elementals posed a significant threat to his safety.


    "I must return to the village," the guide announced, his voice laced with regret. "But here is a map that should assist you in your quest. Please, be careful."


    Hemlock accepted the map gratefully, thanking the guide for his service. Of course, the guide wasn''t there out of pure altruism; Hemlock had paid him a handsome sum of gold coins.


    "Now things start to get tricky," Hemlock declared, his brow furrowed as he studied the map. "According to this, the number of Fire Elementals from this point onward is incredibly high."


    They ventured closer and closer to the volcano''s base. William gazed ahead, the towering peak looming before them.


    The temperature steadily climbed, forcing William to shed some layers of clothing along the way. The other sailors followed suit, beads of sweat dripping from their brows.


    Seraphina, with her water magic, proved to be a vital asset. She conjured refreshing water for the group and unleashed powerful spells that inflicted significant damage on the Fire Elementals.


    She seemed to be the perfect mage for this mission.


    ''The king must have chosen her for this very reason,'' William mused.


    They pressed onward, Hemlock leading the way with the map in hand, carefully following the safest routes indicated by their guide. These paths boasted the fewest encounters with Fire Elementals, though the number was still substantial.


    After about five minutes of trekking, a group of Fire Elementals materialized out of thin air. Ten in total ¨C the largest group they had faced so far.


    The elementals unleashed their fire magic in unison. A barrage of fireballs hurtled towards William and the others, covering a wide area.


    Seraphina reacted swiftly, conjuring a water barrier to intercept the fiery onslaught.


    "Counterattack!" she commanded, her voice strained. "I need a moment to recover."


    Blocking that many fire spells simultaneously had taken a toll on her. Seraphina needed a few seconds to replenish her mana before she could cast another spell, especially an offensive one.


    The responsibility for the counterattack fell upon William, Hemlock, and the sailors.


    Hemlock, sword in hand, charged towards the elementals. With remarkable agility, he closed the distance and launched an assault.


    "Deep Tide Cut!" he roared.


    His sword shimmered with a blue aura, and as he struck an elemental, a wave of water surged from the blade, engulfing several elementals, not just the one he had initially targeted.


    ''Incredible!'' William thought, impressed by the captain''s skill.


    This type of magic was fascinating, and it suited William''s fighting style, which relied on close combat and physical enhancement spells.


    Of course, William wasn''t going to stand idly by. He also charged towards the elementals, this time wielding his demonic sword.


    He wasn''t channeling demonic energy, just using the sword itself. No one would suspect anything out of the ordinary, as the sword appeared to be nothing more than a well-crafted blade made of exceptional materials.


    Like Hemlock, William easily closed the distance and attacked. But his sword strikes were devoid of any magical enhancement, relying solely on the blade''s sharpness and William''s physical strength.


    Discover hidden content at My Virtual Library Empire


    Even without imbuing his sword with magic, William''s attack was devastating. He focused on the same Fire Elemental that Hemlock had initially struck, delivering the final blow.


    [1800 EXP]


    [Item drop, 1 Fire Essence]


    In addition to experience points, William also obtained an item from the fallen monster. It went straight into his inventory. He wasn''t sure what the item was for, but it was always a welcome bonus to receive loot after defeating monsters.


    Despite eliminating one of the elementals, nine remained. The other sailors, also skilled in combat, joined the fray.


    William did his best to inflict as much damage as possible to gain experience points, or at least a fraction of them. If he remained idle, he wouldn''t gain anything.


    In the end, he earned a total of 4,000 experience points, which was quite a haul. Everyone was exhausted after the battle, but thankfully, no one was injured.


    Once Seraphina unleashed her water magic, the fight concluded swiftly.


    They pressed onward without respite. Time was of the essence, and they had a clear objective: reach a designated point where they could rest and establish camp.


    Hemlock''s map indicated a spot on the volcano where a small, heated lake had formed, perfect for bathing and respite. The plan was to clear the area of Fire Elementals and spend the night there before continuing their ascent. It was the most suitable location they could find, and with some preparation, they could secure the area for a safe overnight stay.


    Reaching that haven, however, would take several hours. They continued their trek, encountering more Fire Elementals along the way. Fortunately, these encounters were mostly with smaller groups ¨C unlike the previous skirmish with ten elementals ¨C making the battles more manageable.


    Everything was going surprisingly smoothly. William actively participated in the battles, gaining experience points and collecting items.


    The fights themselves were relatively easy, which made William suspicious. The ascent shouldn''t be this straightforward.


    After about two hours of trekking, they arrived at the location of the heated lake. It was a stark contrast to the rest of the volcano''s barren landscape. Lush vegetation surrounded the lake, with trees, grass, and other plants flourishing in the fertile soil. It was an unexpected oasis amidst the fiery terrain.


    "How can plants grow here?" William wondered aloud, marveling at the sight.


    "I have no idea," Hemlock admitted, equally perplexed.


    Despite their exhaustion, they were relieved to have reached their goal. This would be their campsite.


    They began setting up camp, pitching tents and gathering wood for a fire. But their respite was short-lived.


    A monstrous elemental emerged from the depths of the lake! This one was different ¨C a hybrid of fire and water.


    William could sense its immense power. He estimated it to be twice the level of the other elementals, meaning this foe was level 60!


    That creature would be difficult, if not impossible, to confront. Seraphina and Hemlock also sensed the formidable power radiating from their opponent.


    Their first instinct was to flee, but escape seemed impossible in their current predicament. S§×ar?h the nov§×lF~ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "We''ll have to fight," Seraphina declared, her voice laced with determination. "If we work together, I believe we can defeat it."


    Despite her confident assertion, the others weren''t as optimistic.

 Chapter 129 Demonic Transformation, Bloodline Activation

    That creature was incredibly powerful; William was terrified to face it."Do you think we can win?" William asked Asura.


    Asura could sense the power of their adversaries far better than William himself. So, it was a good idea to ask for his opinion, which was quite valuable in such situations.


    "I think you can win, but William, some of you might die in this battle. Actually, I think many will die..."


    That wasn''t a good sign. But there was nothing they could do. It was impossible to run from that creature, and running blindly could attract even more elementals.


    The best option was to fight. This time, Seraphina took command of the battle, as she was the highest-level person there. The first thing she did was summon a water elemental using her magic!


    The elemental she summoned had a different appearance from those they had encountered near the volcano. It was a unique type that mages could summon.


    It wasn''t an easy spell to cast, which once again reinforced the fact that Seraphina was a powerful mage.


    The other sailors were somewhat reassured after seeing that powerful elemental fighting alongside them. Seraphina summoned that creature precisely to try and boost the group''s morale.


    "Let''s attack carefully," she said. "And let''s try to flank it and attack from behind."


    All the sailors nodded in agreement, and then something surprising happened. The elemental spoke!


    "Attacking from behind won''t work," the elemental declared. "Be careful with that idiotic plan of yours."


    Everyone was taken aback. Elementals didn''t typically have the ability to speak or understand languages, but this one seemed far more intelligent than most.


    This made things much more complicated. One of the biggest advantages humans had in battles like this was their ability to use their intelligence and strategize during combat to defeat magical beasts.


    But an intelligent elemental that could understand everything they were saying was incredibly dangerous. If their chances of winning were already low, well, now they were even lower.


    "Don''t you think we can resolve this another way?" Seraphina attempted to negotiate, speaking to the elemental. "We''re just here looking for something, and then we''ll leave and never bother you again."


    The elemental laughed. "Do you really think that will work? Why should I let you go? I have the advantage here."


    Seraphina had no compelling arguments to sway the creature. In the end, the only option was to fight, and that''s what she did.


    "Water Cannon!" Seraphina shouted, creating the runes with her magic scepter and launching a powerful water spell.


    While she did this, the other sailors advanced towards the elemental. Some used bows to attack from afar, while others closed in for melee combat. Captain Hemlock was among those who charged forward.


    As before, he used one of his sword techniques to attack the elemental. His movements were graceful, precise, and swift. It was indeed a powerful attack.


    William was about to act as well, considering the best way to engage the creature.


    ''Should I use my enhancement spells now or wait a bit?'' he wondered.


    He would undoubtedly need his spells to participate in this fight, given the elemental''s high level. But was it wise to use them right away? The spells didn''t last forever. If they wore off mid-battle, he would be in trouble.


    But before he could make a decision, the elemental acted.


    The elemental, instead of defending, opted to absorb the full brunt of their attacks, leaving itself vulnerable but ready to unleash a devastating counterstrike! S~ea??h the ¦Çov§×lFire .net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Seraphina''s magic, Hemlock''s sword technique, and the combined assault of the sailors struck the elemental, inflicting significant damage. The creature roared in pain, but it didn''t deter its retaliation.


    It unleashed an area-of-effect attack, targeting the sailors and Captain Hemlock at close range.


    "Magma Burst!" the elemental bellowed.


    Scalding magma erupted from its body, engulfing the sailors and the captain. The sailors, with their lower levels, bore the brunt of the attack. Their faces and bodies were horrifically burned and melted by the searing magma.


    "Agggr!" Their screams of agony echoed through the air.


    Their cries were abruptly cut short as they collapsed, lifeless, onto the ground.


    Hemlock was also caught in the blast but managed to partially evade it. The magma seared his left arm and shoulder, his flesh bubbling and melting.


    The pain was nearly unbearable, but Hemlock gritted his teeth, refusing to cry out. He remained focused on the battle, his resolve unwavering.


    "Captain!" William shouted in anguish.


    Witnessing the gruesome deaths of his crew was devastating, especially for Hemlock, who had sailed with them for years. His heart ached with grief and guilt.


    "Get back, William!" Hemlock roared, his voice strained. "We''ll buy you time to escape!"


    Seraphina, still reeling from the sight of the fallen sailors, echoed Hemlock''s command. "That''s right! We''ll hold it off. Flee, William, please!"


    Seraphina''s water elemental lunged at their foe, pummeling it with powerful blows. The elemental was still recovering from its Magma Burst, creating the perfect opportunity to attack.


    Seraphina also unleashed another spell, this time a massive wave of water that slammed into the elemental with tremendous force, sending it flying backward.


    Hemlock, though severely injured, pressed the attack, his sword flashing. His movements were slower and weaker than before, hampered by his burns, but his determination was unwavering.


    Of course, William wasn''t going to stand idly by and watch his companions die so he could escape. That wasn''t his style.


    "Enhanced Strength! Swiftfoot!"


    His body enhancement spells significantly boosted his strength, agility, and speed. He received 40 extra strength points, 35 agility points, and a 15% increase in movement speed!


    That was the limit of his spells'' power. William had mastered them completely. To improve further, he would need to seek higher-ranked abilities.


    "No!" Hemlock commanded. "I know what you''re thinking, but it''s futile! This creature is too powerful! We''ll die in vain while you escape!"


    William was fed up with the captain''s defeatist attitude. "No, Captain. You don''t know a damn thing! You don''t know me or what I''m capable of, and I won''t let you two die here today!"


    If William wanted to win this fight, he would have to use everything at his disposal. Asura already understood his intentions.


    "You''re going to use the Stage 1 Demonic Transformation and your special summoned hero ability?" he questioned.


    "Exactly," William confirmed.


    "You know you''ll have to finish the fight in a few minutes, or you''ll be screwed afterward."


    "Yes, I know."


    "And you''re going to try anyway?"


    "I am."


    Asura laughed, a hint of pride in his voice. "That''s the spirit! Let''s do this, damn it! I''ll help you channel all the demonic energy. The rest is up to you."


    This would be the first time William unleashed all his demonic energy at once. Asura helped him channel it, and after a few seconds, a dark energy began to emanate from William''s body.


    His hair whipped around as if caught in a fierce wind, and his eyes turned crimson. Black veins appeared across his body.


    [Stage 1 Demonic Transformation activated]


    [+80 to all attributes until the transformation ends]


    [+100% healing speed]


    [Special abilities unlocked]


    [Duration: 5 minutes]


    Multiple notifications appeared before William. He thought it was the end, but it was just the beginning.


    [Hero''s Limit (S-Rank): Temporarily enhances all attributes by 50% for 1 minute. Significant physical strain will follow.]


    He activated his other ability, further amplifying the attributes already boosted by the Demonic Transformation!


    Explore more stories at My Virtual Library Empire


    With all those buffs active, something even stranger occurred.


    [Your body has reached a high power level]


    [Demonic Serpent Bloodline activated]


    [+20 to all attributes permanently]


    [Enhanced regeneration, able to recreate lost limbs over time]


    [Enhanced vision]


    [More abilities will be unlocked over time]


    William felt an incredible surge of power. His pupils changed shape, becoming serpentine.


    The elemental was terrified. So were Hemlock and Seraphina.

 Chapter 130 Close Fight

    William was unrecognizable. He barely looked human, his transformed appearance striking fear into Seraphina and Hemlock. They exchanged bewildered glances, wondering what had come over the young man.The elemental recoiled slightly, betraying its fear. Though its expressionless face revealed nothing, William recognized the telltale sign of retreat.


    "What is this?" the elemental sputtered, its voice laced with apprehension. "How did you do that?"


    It couldn''t comprehend how a frail human like William could suddenly possess such immense power. But the elemental wasn''t foolish; it knew this transformation must be temporary. Its strategy shifted to evasion, hoping to outlast William''s newfound strength.


    William, however, had no intention of prolonging the fight. With his demonic sword gripped tightly, he charged towards the elemental, his speed amplified to an astonishing degree. He covered nearly 200 meters in mere seconds.


    As he closed in, the system interface flickered to life, displaying information about the new abilities unlocked by his Demonic Transformation and the activation of his Serpent Bloodline.


    "Darkness Cut, First Form!" William roared, his voice resonating with power.


    The dark energy enveloping his body surged into his sword, and William''s movements became fluid and precise, guided by the demonic power coursing through him. Sear?h the Nov§×l?ire.n(e)t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    He leaped into the air, twisting and turning with balletic grace. It was a dance of death, a mesmerizing display of deadly force.


    The dark energy surrounding the blade surged towards the elemental, striking first. The cut was deep, cleaving through its form, a swirling amalgamation of fire and water energies.


    But the attack didn''t end there. William''s sword followed through, inflicting even more damage. Though the elemental had no blood to spill, the devastating impact was evident.


    A gaping wound appeared on the elemental''s torso, revealing a glimpse of a pulsating stone nestled deep within. It was the elemental''s heart, its core, the source of its life force.


    Seraphina watched in stunned silence. She had always suspected William harbored secrets, but the sheer power he now displayed was beyond anything she could have imagined.


    "Who is he...?" she murmured, her voice barely above a whisper. "Or rather, what is he?"


    Hemlock, though equally astonished, remained focused on the battle. "Seraphina," he rasped, his voice strained with pain, "can you assist him? I can''t fight any longer. I''ll only hinder you."


    The captain''s condition was critical. His arm and shoulder were severely burned, the flesh almost melted. With such injuries, continuing the fight was impossible.


    Seraphina, in far better physical condition, was still capable of aiding William. "Of course!" she declared, her voice ringing with determination.


    Seraphina summoned a powerful water spell, channeling the might of the ocean itself! A tremendous surge of water erupted from the nearby lake, and she unleashed it upon the elemental.


    "You will perish here today!" Seraphina roared, her voice echoing across the volcanic landscape.


    The attack was devastating. The elemental''s form was shattered, its body dissolving into a torrent of water. But Seraphina knew it wasn''t over.


    "It will regenerate!" she warned. "We need to attack its core!"


    William heard her words and focused his assault on the elemental''s core. He could see it attempting to regenerate, but his relentless attacks were destroying it faster than it could recover.


    Victory seemed within reach, but William knew his time was running out.


    [Demonic Transformation ends in 1 minute]


    [Special ability ends in 30 seconds]


    He had only one minute to finish this fight!


    "Damn it!" William muttered under his breath.


    He had to intensify his attacks. The elemental was on the verge of defeat.


    [Demonic Transformation ends in 30 seconds]


    [Special ability ends in 10 seconds]


    Time was slipping away, but William was close to victory! He poured all his remaining strength into a single, decisive blow.


    "Darkness Cut, Second Form!"


    The attack was even more devastating than before. The elemental''s core shattered into countless fragments, and its form collapsed, defeated.


    William fell to his knees, gasping for air. The Demonic Transformation and his special ability had ended, leaving his body battered and exhausted.


    Seraphina rushed to his side. "Are you alright?"


    "Yes..." he wheezed, struggling to catch his breath.


    But then, the unthinkable happened. The elemental began to regenerate!


    "What?!" Seraphina exclaimed in disbelief.


    The elemental was almost fully recovered, its core fragments coalescing, ready to unleash another attack.


    "I will not be defeated!" it roared, launching a furious torrent of fire and water towards William and Seraphina.


    Seraphina tried to conjure a water barrier, but it was too late. The blast struck them head-on.


    William and Seraphina were thrown back, their bodies wracked with pain. The explosion also caught Hemlock, who lay unconscious on the ground.


    The elemental advanced on William, ready to deliver the final blow. But before it could strike, a figure materialized out of thin air, shielding William from the attack.


    It was Lucy!


    "I won''t let you hurt my master!" she cried, summoning a magic shield that deflected the elemental''s assault.


    The elemental was taken aback. "Who are you?" it demanded.


    "I''m William''s disciple!" she declared. "And I won''t allow you to harm him!"


    With surprising ferocity, Lucy engaged the elemental. Her movements were swift and precise, her magic potent.


    But despite her valiant efforts, Lucy was no match for the creature. A powerful water attack sent her crashing into a nearby rock.


    "Lucy!" William cried out, his heart filled with despair.


    The elemental loomed over Lucy, ready to finish her off. But before it could strike, William rose to his feet, his body swaying unsteadily.


    "I won''t let you do this!" he roared, his eyes blazing with fury.


    Despite his injuries, William lunged towards the elemental, ready to fight to the death.


    The elemental unleashed another torrent of water, striking Lucy and sending her hurtling towards William. She landed with a sickening thud, her blood splattering on the ground near him.


    The sight of Lucy''s blood, infused with the essence of her demonic lineage, triggered something within William. He felt a surge of power, his demonic energy reigniting.


    Driven by a primal instinct, he reached down and touched a drop of Lucy''s blood, absorbing it into his body. The demonic energy coursed through his veins, revitalizing him, granting him a temporary reprieve.


    With renewed strength, William unleashed a final, devastating attack. His sword shimmered with a dark aura, and he struck the elemental with the full force of his demonic power.


    The elemental''s core shattered completely, its form dissolving into nothingness. The battle was finally over.


    William collapsed once more, his body succumbing to exhaustion and his injuries. Seraphina rushed to his side, her face etched with worry.


    "William!" she cried, checking his pulse. "Are you alright?"


    He managed a weak smile. "I think so," he whispered.


    But as they surveyed the scene, their eyes fell upon Lucy, her form still and lifeless.


    "Lucy!" William cried out, his voice filled with anguish. He crawled towards her, his heart pounding with fear.


    He checked for a pulse, but it was faint, barely perceptible. Lucy was alive, but barely clinging to life.


    Panic surged through William. He had failed to protect her, his newfound disciple, the girl with the demonic bloodline who had bravely thrown herself into the fray.


    "We need to get her back to the village," Seraphina urged, her voice laced with urgency. "Perhaps there''s a healer who can¡ª"


    Her words were cut short by Asura''s voice, booming in William''s mind.


    Experience more tales on My Virtual Library Empire


    "Place the sword on her!" he commanded, his tone brooking no argument. "It will connect with her, help her heal. Trust me!"


    William hesitated for a fleeting moment, doubt clouding his thoughts. But the desperation in Asura''s voice convinced him. He gently lifted Lucy''s limp form and placed the demonic sword, Asura, upon her chest.


    A soft, ethereal glow emanated from the sword, enveloping Lucy''s body. The faint pulse beneath William''s fingers grew stronger, steadier.


    Lucy''s eyelids fluttered open, and she looked up at William with a dazed expression.


    "Master...?" she whispered, her voice hoarse.


    Relief washed over William, so intense it almost brought him to tears. "Lucy!" he exclaimed, his voice choked with emotion. "You''re alive!"


    Lucy blinked, her gaze shifting to the sword resting on her chest. "Asura...?" she murmured, a flicker of recognition in her eyes.


    Asura chuckled, his voice resonating from the sword. "Seems like we have a connection, little one," he said, his tone gentler than usual. "A bond forged in blood and battle."


    Lucy, still weak but recovering quickly, managed a weak smile. "Thank you, Asura," she whispered.


    William gently retrieved the sword, his heart filled with gratitude for the demonic artifact that had saved his disciple''s life. He looked at Lucy, his gaze filled with newfound respect and affection.


    "You were incredible, Lucy," he said, his voice thick with emotion.


    Lucy blushed, her cheeks flushed with a mixture of embarrassment and pride. "I just did what any disciple would do for their master," she replied softly.


    As they helped Lucy to her feet, the gravity of their situation settled upon them once more. Hemlock lay unconscious, his injuries severe, and the rest of the crew... William couldn''t bear to think about the fallen sailors.

 Chapter 131 Drinking to Forget

    Everyone was completely battered after that fight. William was exhausted to the extreme from having used all those spells, and this was reflecting in his physical state. He could barely stand. Experience new tales on My Virtual Library EmpireHemlock was passed out on the ground. Lucy and Seraphina were the people who were in the best condition.


    "What are we going to do now?" Lucy asked Seraphina, "the two of them can''t go on!"


    Seraphina also didn''t really know what to do. "I think we should go back to the village," she said, "if you managed to follow us here then the path must be clear. I think it''s the best thing we can do right now."


    William agreed with her. "Yes, you''re right. You still have the strength to fight so if any elemental shows up, we''ll be fine."


    With the objective decided in mind, they all did everything they could to get out of that place as quickly as possible. William walked over to the dead elemental, and picked up something that was on the ground.


    It was the elemental''s core. The System did not recognize the item and said that something had dropped, but William felt that it was a very important item.


    The elemental was special, and it was also level 60. After picking up the core and putting it inside his backpack, William left alongside Seraphina and Lucy.


    Lucy wouldn''t fight if anything appeared, so she was responsible for carrying Hemlock on her back. William really wanted to help, but he could barely walk. He was too tired.


    Lucy was struggling a bit to carry Hemlock, a large and heavy sailor. Seraphina helped a few times when she realized the surroundings were safe. She had to stay ready for combat, so Lucy had to manage.


    "I told you not to come," William said, a little frustrated, "your parents must be worried."


    She gave a laugh, "it''s a good thing I came, huh? If I hadn''t, you''d be dead."


    Deep down, William knew she was right. Although Lucy hadn''t been important in the fighting, she was the one who had given William that last drop of strength, especially when he had taken the drop of blood.


    That was still going through his memory. He had no idea that Lucy''s blood would be so precious as to give him so many benefits.


    Another thing that was worrying William was the fact that he would have to explain a lot to Seraphina, and to Hemlock too.


    Hemlock had still been unconscious for a large part of the fight, which meant that he hadn''t seen the same things that Seraphina had seen. Of course, William would have to explain a lot of things anyway.


    "Maybe you''re right," William said, "but even so. If your parents get too worried, they might decide not to let you come with me."


    When William said that, Lucy got a little worried, since her dream was exactly that: to go with him to learn magic.


    When William noticed Lucy''s worried face, he tried to comfort her. "They''ll let you go, I''m sure. But let''s try to avoid saying it was that dangerous. They don''t need to know you went as far as we did."


    Lucy looked down a little embarrassed, "thank you for helping me..."


    Seraphina, who was further ahead having to focus on the surroundings, said, "can you two lovebirds stop and hurry up? We have to get Hemlock to a doctor soon."


    William didn''t even reply to what Seraphina had said. He thought Lucy was a beautiful woman, but the two of them didn''t have anything going on. Seraphina was just making a joke.


    As for Lucy, well, she blushed, and her heart raced a little. No one noticed anything different because she was carrying Hemlock.


    The journey back to the village took a while. About halfway there was when Hemlock woke up. He was able to walk on his own, making the journey faster.


    The wounds on his body were serious, but he had a very high magical level, which meant he was much more resilient than a ''normal'' person and was also able to recover more quickly.


    But even with all that, they needed to take him to a doctor, and that''s exactly what they did as soon as they arrived in the village.


    The bad part about being in the middle of nowhere was that there were few doctors. In fact, there was only one person on that island who could help them.


    The doctor in question was an elderly gentleman who was quite surprised when he saw Hemlock''s condition. And worried too.


    "Lie down on the table please," the old man said, "and explain to me what happened."


    Seraphina then explained roughly what had happened, focusing more on the types of injuries that were on Hemlock''s body, as this would give the doctor more information to help him.


    William wasn''t very confident, as the doctor didn''t seem to be a mage, and the wounds were quite severe, which would take a while to heal ''normally'', but he was surprised when he saw that the gentleman had a collection of potions, which he had made himself!


    He gave him a potion to help with recovery and pain, and also crushed some herbs and made an ointment to put on the burn, and then bandaged it all up.


    "I think you''ll be able to make a full recovery, and at most you''ll be left with some scars on your arm, but I think a man like you will like that, won''t you?" the doctor said, smiling.


    Hemlock laughed, "Certainly. Scars are what inspire fear on the seas. Now I feel like I''m an even more badass captain."


    Seeing Hemlock recovered, William and Seraphina were calmer. The doctor noticed William''s state and said, "this young man, despite not having many visible injuries, seems to be barely able to stand. I''ll get something for you too."


    The doctor rummaged through his potions again and returned with one that had a purplish hue. "Take this, and rest for about two days. You''ll feel as good as new."


    William took the potion, thanked the man, and left. Hemlock was the one who paid for the treatment, as he had received a lot of money from the king to complete that mission.


    Lucy decided to return to her parents'' house to enjoy the last few days she would be on the island. She didn''t want to risk doing anything wrong that could cause her parents to change their minds.


    "Take care of yourself, Lucy," said William, "and don''t do anything foolish. Just wait."


    "I''ll try," she said, waving, "bye guys."


    When the three were alone ¨C Hemlock, Seraphina and William ¨C the events of the day replayed in their minds in flashes of memory. All those other sailors had died. People Hemlock knew very well.


    "I''m going to grab some drinks," Hemlock said, "want to come?"


    In unison, William and Seraphina replied, "definitely."


    They didn''t head for any of the restaurants that offered both food and drinks. The beverages in those places were generally more expensive, and not as strong. What they needed was that good old-fashioned bar, the kind that could offer the strongest concoctions in the region. Luckily, they found the place they were looking for.


    It was a small establishment on the corner of that little town. The number of people sitting at tables having drinks wasn''t what indicated the place was good. Actually, what showed the quality of that place were the drunks, some fallen on the ground, others sitting and talking loudly.


    In the time they spent looking at the door of the establishment ¨C about 30 seconds ¨C they already noticed a fight happening. Two drunkards came out swinging.


    "This is definitely the best place," William said.


    Hemlock agreed, "By far. Let''s go." Sear?h the Nov§×l?ire.n(e)t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    They entered, grabbed a table, and started drinking.


    The variety of drinks in that place was impressive, and the other patrons even gave William and the others ideas for drinks.


    "Mix this here, with this here, and it''ll be AMAZING," an old man said.


    The things he was suggesting they mix were drinks that didn''t even have labels. William had no idea what they were made of, but he drank them anyway.


    The concoction was strong. He closed his eyes as he took it all in one gulp. "Man, this is really strong."


    Hemlock was sitting next to him having a few beers, and decided to try the mixture William had tested. "Make me a shot of that."


    William did, handed it over, and Hemlock drank it with gusto. He liked the drink and made the mixture several more times.


    They spent the night drinking, until they reached the level of staggering drunk.


    When they got to that point, Seraphina helped them get back to the tavern where they were sleeping, as she had drunk considerably less.


    "Come on, it''s time to go back," she said.


    But as soon as they left the bar, a group of 3 guards from that small town appeared.


    "Stop right there," one of the guards said, "you are under investigation. Come with us."

 Chapter 132 Another Problem

    "What do you mean? I don''t understand," Seraphina asked."We''ll talk and explain more when we get to the cells. Please follow us," the guard said.


    If Seraphina wanted to, she could easily knock out those guards and escape from that place without any problems. But why do that? It was best to just see what they wanted, and if necessary, escape.


    She also took into account that Hemlock and William were not in the best condition, so it was best to avoid any kind of trouble.


    "Alright, we''ll follow you," she said.


    The guards led them to a small building that housed the cells. During the journey, several people saw the guards taking them as the town was very small.


    Everyone was wondering what had happened. Of course, rumors started circulating. Many people were saying that Hemlock and his crew were not sailors but pirates who were there to rob them.


    As soon as they arrived at that building, the guards put the three of them inside a cell. This cell was incredibly decent. It wasn''t dirty, and it even had a bed for each of them.


    Seraphina went in there thinking the worst, but that place was peaceful enough to spend the night.


    "I noticed your friends are a little intoxicated," the guard said, his gaze falling on William and Hemlock, "so I think it''s best to talk tomorrow when everyone is well. If you need anything, just say so."


    "Actually..." Seraphina said, a little awkwardly, "is there any way to get something to eat? We were going to eat at the tavern, but it didn''t happen..."


    "Of course, no problem."


    The guard left and returned after a while with a plate of food for each of them, and also a bottle of water. The treatment was nice.


    Hemlock was very drunk, so he wasn''t understanding much of what was going on. The only thing he was doing was following what Seraphina was saying.


    William was a little better, and he was reflecting on why the guards had called them to that cell. As much as he tried to think, he couldn''t understand.


    What had they done wrong?


    Read exclusive content at My Virtual Library Empire


    ''It seems I''ll have to wait to find out tomorrow,'' thought William.


    They ate and then went to bed. There was nothing to do inside the cell. It was best to just rest and see what the next day had in store for them.


    Hemlock slept like a rock, and it didn''t take him long to do so. The booze he had drunk had taken its toll, and he couldn''t hold his eyelids open for long.


    William''s thoughts kept him awake, but not for long. He was truly exhausted after the intense use of his spells and demonic transformation. A good night''s rest was exactly what he needed.


    "Good night, William, good night, Hemlock," Seraphina said, her voice echoing through the empty cell.


    "Good night," William replied.


    As for Hemlock, well, the sound of his snoring was all the answer Seraphina needed. She laughed at that ¡ª a laugh was what they were in desperate need of ¡ª and then tried to sleep too.


    On the following day, someone else came to talk with them. This person was a tall woman with some decent muscle ¡ª it was obvious that she worked out.


    She was the captain of the guards, and the strongest person on the entire island.


    "Well, how are you feeling?" she asked them.


    The guards had already given her some information about William and Hemlock, so the captain knew that the two had been drinking, and were also looking worse for wear physically.


    "We are doing fine," William said, glancing to the side and seeing Hemlock looking like shit, "I guess..."


    The captain smiled, "Good. We need to talk. This is serious, and I know you are wondering why you are here."


    No one said a word. They were waiting to hear what the captain of the guards had to say.


    "The guards said you were under investigation when he first got you, right? Well, the investigation is not actually about something you did but about your ship and crew."


    Hemlock was the first to say something after he heard that. "Ship and crew? What do you mean?"


    "First, you and your crew went to the volcano, but only you, the captain, returned, so we don''t know what happened to your crew yet."


    "They are all dead," Hemlock said, looking down at the ground.


    "I am sorry to hear that... Well, then that''s the answer to our first question. But what about your ship? Did you do anything with it without us knowing?" the captain asked.


    If a ship wanted to anchor or leave the port, they had to speak with someone responsible for it, which was usually a guard or someone who answered to the guards. That was their way of making sure things weren''t a mess, and that everyone was aware of their movements. Whenever a ship arrived at the island, they always did a search to see if the ship was a pirate vessel or not, or if the people arriving had the potential to be dangerous. S§×ar?h the novel(F~)ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Hemlock was surprised to hear the question. "What do you mean ''did something with the ship''? It''s in the port where we anchored it!"


    The captain of the guards shook her head. "You see, that''s the problem. Your ship was stolen, and we don''t know where it is now. I thought that you, as the captain, may have left without warning us, maybe during the night, but it seems that is not the case."


    Hemlock wanted to punch something. First, his crew got killed, and now his ship was stolen? Could things get any worse for him?


    "When was the last time you saw or were inside your ship?" the woman asked.


    Hemlock couldn''t focus, but he answered her as best he could. "We didn''t go inside since the day we got here. Look, aren''t you supposed to have someone in the port to take care of things? How did this happen?"


    "You''re right, but this person is also missing, so that''s another problem we have," she said.


    The captain of the guards looked truly concerned. "It''s not common for people to go missing here, is it?" William asked her.


    "It''s not," she said, "the most dangerous thing we have here is the volcano with the fire elementals, but no one goes there, and we have security checkpoints to make sure no one goes too far. But someone missing like this? In the middle of the city? That''s not common at all!"


    "What are you planning on doing?" William asked.


    "Maybe you can help me investigate what happened to your ship? I mean, if you can help me find out what happened to this missing person, it would be nice too, but I know the ship is your focus, right? After all, we don''t have decent ships here that can help you leave the island, so you are basically trapped here..."


    That was exactly what they feared. The ships on the island were decent enough to travel to other islands and all, but to return all the way to their continent? That required a proper ship with supplies and a crew, things that they didn''t have anymore.


    Things were looking grim for them.

 Chapter 133 Looking for Luke

    They were released from the cell and were now helping the captain of the guards with the investigation. Her name was Katia, and she was truly glad they were there to help her."I have few guards under my command, and they are always busy making sure the rest of the city is safe, so I actually don''t have that many people to help me with this," Katia said.


    They all sat at a table to discuss their next steps and what they should do to find out more about the stolen ship and the missing person.


    "Should we split up?" Seraphina suggested. "And also, Hemlock is not in good condition to get himself into danger, so it would be best if he avoided helping us until he got better."


    Hemlock complained, but it was not a lie. He was indeed in bad condition and wouldn''t be able to help much if a fight broke out.


    "He can stay with me," Katia said. "We can work for information together, and I can protect him if anything happens."


    "Thank you," Seraphina said.


    "What can you tell me about the guy who''s missing? Who was he anyway?" William asked.


    For him, the key piece of information was the missing person.


    "He was responsible for taking care of the ships, including yours. So, either he was the one who stole it, or the person who stole it is the same one who kidnapped him. And this must have happened during the night, as no one has seen a thing," Katia explained.


    What was truly bothering William was the fact that someone stole the ship and no one saw a thing. More importantly, a ship as big as the one Hemlock had certainly drew attention, and it required a large crew to sail it.


    How did a single person steal it? If it wasn''t a single person but another crew, how did no one see it?


    With that assumption in mind, William was certain that if the person was alone, then it was a mage. Someone with access to magic could get the ship moving.


    In the end, William was tasked with finding more information about the missing person. He went alone.


    What he knew¡ªwhich he learned from Katia¡ªwas that the man was called Luke, and he lived alone on the island. He didn''t have any family, and only had a few friends.


    So, William decided to look for these friends Katia mentioned. They should be the only ones who knew something about him, or who would miss him after he got kidnapped.


    One of Luke''s friends lived in a small cabin outside the city. He was a fisherman who had a small boat and made his living through fishing, and sometimes acting as a guide to people who wanted to visit the nearby islands.


    William arrived at the small cabin and saw Luke''s friend fishing on his boat right in front of his house. The boat wasn''t that far from the shore.


    "Hey," William yelled.


    The man had his eyes half-closed because of the sun, and he focused on trying to see William who was on the land screaming for him.


    "Who are you?" the man yelled back.


    "I am here to speak with you about Luke. Can you come over?"


    When he heard the name Luke, the man frowned, not knowing what had happened to his friend. He returned to the land with his small wooden boat, carrying his fishing supplies as well as a bucket with some fish in it.


    "Did you know that Luke is missing? There''s a chance he got kidnapped," William said.


    "Kidnapped? What do you mean? What exactly happened?" the man asked.


    William talked about the missing ship and the missing person, Luke. He asked the man if he knew anything about his friend or when he had last seen him. Any information was crucial, and William hoped the man knew something that could help him.


    "I saw him two days ago¡­" the man said, "We were planning a trip to a nearby island¡­"


    That instantly raised a question in William''s mind. ''A nearby island?''


    If Luke and his friend wanted to go there, it would be best to have a ship. So, the chance of Luke being the one who stole Hemlock''s ship looked more and more real.


    "A trip?" William pressed, "Why? What''s on this island?"


    The man shifted uncomfortably, avoiding William''s gaze. "Just... just a fishing trip," he mumbled, clearly hiding something.


    William wasn''t convinced. "A fishing trip that requires stealing a ship?" He narrowed his eyes, "There''s something you''re not telling me."


    The man hesitated, clearly torn between loyalty to his friend and the weight of the situation. Finally, he sighed, "Alright, alright. There have been rumors... rumors of mermaids."


    Mermaids? William was taken aback. "Mermaids?"


    "Yes," the man said, "Legends say they inhabit the waters around that island. Luke was... obsessed. He was convinced they were real."


    William considered this new information. It was a long shot, but it could be a lead. "This island... can you take me there?" Read new chapters at My Virtual Library Empire


    The man, relieved to have shared the burden, readily agreed. "Of course, I know the way."


    Before venturing to the island, William decided to return to Katia and Hemlock, to update them on his findings. He relayed the information about Luke''s possible motive and their planned destination. Katia, intrigued by the mermaid tale, agreed that it was worth investigating.


    However, when William returned to the fisherman''s cabin, he found it empty. The man, along with his small boat, was gone.


    He scoured the small cabin, his eyes scanning every corner, every shelf, every nook and cranny. He rifled through drawers, peered under the bed, and even checked the fireplace for hidden messages. But there was nothing. No maps, no notes, no indication of where the island might be.


    Why did the man run? Did he have something to do with the ship theft? Or was he just scared that William might do something to him? Frustration gnawed at William, but he refused to give up. He had to find that island, and he had to find Luke.


    Suddenly, the cabin door creaked open, and a figure stepped inside. William whirled around, his hand instinctively reaching for his sword. It was the fisherman.


    "You scared me!" William exclaimed, his voice laced with relief and annoyance. "Where were you? I thought you ran away."


    "Run away? Of course not," the man said, a hint of indignation in his voice. "I was just checking some other locations that I know Luke goes to sometimes, and I didn''t see him there."


    "Can you take me there too?" William asked, his eyes fixed on the man, searching for any sign of deception.


    "Sure," the man replied, his gaze steady.


    William wasn''t entirely convinced, but he decided to trust his gut. Even if the man was lying, William was confident that his heightened senses could pick up on any clues in these locations that Luke frequented. It was a chance he had to take.


    "Let''s get to the boat, then," William said, eager to start his exploration.


    They closed the cabin and went on the boat. The small boat cut through the calm waters, leaving a gentle wake behind. The fisherman, with a practiced hand, guided them towards their destination.


    "These islands are usually deserted," he explained, his voice carrying over the soft lapping of the waves. "Just a few fishermen like me venture out here sometimes." He pointed towards a cluster of rocky outcrops jutting out from the sea. "That''s one of them. Luke liked to go there, said it was peaceful." S~ea??h the Novel?ire(.)ne*t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    William observed the island with a keen eye. It was a barren, windswept place, with little vegetation and a rugged coastline. Not exactly a paradise, but William could see the appeal for someone seeking solitude. He focused his senses, trying to detect any trace of Luke''s presence, any lingering energy that might betray his recent visit.


    The boat gently bumped against the rocky shore, and William jumped out, eager to explore. He scoured the small island, his eyes scanning every rock, every crevice, every patch of sand. He searched for footprints, broken branches, any sign that Luke had been there.

 Chapter 134 The Real People Behind It

    William''s search of the initial island proved fruitless, a waste of precious time in his pursuit of Luke. Undeterred, he and Luke''s friend ventured towards the neighboring islands in their small boat. Luke had apparently frequented these islands, but even after a thorough search, they found no trace of him.On one of the smaller islands, they encountered another fisherman in a simple wooden boat, casting his line into the tranquil waters.


    "Here to fish as well?" the man greeted them with a friendly smile. "Didn''t know my favorite fishing spot had become so popular."


    William shook his head. "Perhaps another day," he replied. "Maybe we can fish together sometime."


    He hadn''t expected much from this encounter, but the fisherman''s next words caught his attention, offering a potential lead.


    "The best time to fish here is at night," the fisherman confided. "For some reason, the fish are plentiful then, and it''s peaceful too."


    "At night?" William pressed, intrigued.


    "Yes, precisely," the fisherman confirmed. "Strange, isn''t it?"


    "And were you fishing here last night? Or the night before? Did you happen to see a large ship passing by?" William asked, a hint of urgency in his voice.


    This could be a valuable lead in uncovering the whereabouts of Captain Hemlock''s ship. William couldn''t fathom how a vessel that size could navigate these waters undetected.


    The fisherman''s brow furrowed. "How do you know about this ship?" he asked, his curiosity piqued. "I did see one recently, but I thought I was the only one, and maybe I''m going a bit crazy..."


    "Crazy why?" William questioned. "And I know about the ship because it''s mine, and someone stole it."


    "What?" the fisherman exclaimed, his eyes widening in surprise. "Are you serious? Well, I don''t think you''ll believe me, but I could have sworn I saw some kind of fish-men walking on the deck, like they were the sailors, you know? But I must have been really tired," he admitted sheepishly.


    William, however, didn''t think the man was crazy. His mind raced with questions.


    ''Fish-men? Why? They seemed friendly when we encountered them...'' he pondered.


    Still unsure if it was the same ship, William pressed the fisherman for more details, describing specific features of his vessel.


    The fisherman, however, struggled to recall specifics, having only glimpsed the ship at night.


    "Did you see a symbol, like a seagull?" William asked, hoping to jog his memory.


    "Ah, yes, now I remember!" the fisherman exclaimed. "It did have that symbol. It must be your ship. And if you''re wondering, I saw it heading in that direction." He pointed towards a specific point on the horizon.


    This was a significant breakthrough for William. "Thank you so much for your help," he said gratefully. "I truly appreciate it."


    William and Luke''s friend returned to their small boat. "Let''s go back and tell the others," William declared, his determination renewed.


    "Understood," Luke''s friend replied, steering the boat back towards the main island.


    Upon reaching the harbor, William instructed Luke''s friend to wait for him while he hurried into town to find Hemlock, Katia, and Seraphina. He needed to share his findings with them immediately.


    He first located Hemlock, who was taking a less active role in the search due to his injuries. S§×arch* The novel(F~)ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "What happened? You''re back already?" Hemlock asked, his brow creased with concern.


    He feared the worst, assuming William''s return meant something terrible had occurred. The recent string of misfortunes had made him pessimistic.


    "I''ve discovered some things," William announced, a glimmer of hope in his eyes. "Some good news. Let''s find Katia and Seraphina first."


    "Right, right," Hemlock agreed, pushing himself up. "I''ll help you look for them."


    Though burning with curiosity, Hemlock refrained from questioning William further. It was best to gather everyone first.


    "Do you know where they went?" William asked, eager to relay his findings.


    "They''re around town, searching for more information. Shouldn''t be hard to find them."


    Hemlock was right. William simply asked a few guards, quickly locating Katia and, shortly after, Seraphina. The two women were diligently trying to uncover more about Luke and his acquaintances.


    "What happened? Is everything alright?" Katia asked, her brow furrowed with concern as she saw William and Hemlock approaching.


    Like Hemlock, she also feared the worst. William reassured her and suggested they move to a more private location for their discussion. They chose Katia''s office, a secure space accessible only to her and trusted guards.


    William recounted his discoveries. "I went with Luke''s friend to some islands he used to visit, hoping to find some clues," he began. "But I didn''t find anything. No sign of Luke."


    Hemlock, Seraphina, and Katia exchanged disappointed glances but remained silent. William had promised good news, and he wouldn''t have summoned them just to deliver bad news.


    "But then I met a fisherman on this island," William continued. "This fisherman goes there to fish at night, and he saw our ship passing by!" He paused, correcting himself. "I mean, your ship, Captain Hemlock."


    "What? Really? And did he see Luke on board?" Hemlock asked, his interest piqued.


    Their initial theory was that Luke, the person responsible for the ships, was the one who stole it, as both he and the vessel had vanished. He quickly became their prime suspect.


    "He didn''t see Luke," William explained, "but he said he saw fish-men sailing the ship. I think they must be the same ones we encountered before."


    Hemlock slammed his fist on the table. "I knew we couldn''t trust them!" he exclaimed. "I still don''t understand why they let us go after you showed them your ring."


    He glanced at the ring on William''s finger, the one given to him by the Triton King of the merfolk.


    "I think they tricked us," William said, frustration evident in his voice. "But now I also know the direction the ship sailed. We can go check it out if we can get a better boat. The small one Luke''s friend has won''t be suitable for that journey."


    "I have a slightly better ship," Katia offered, "but it''s not as large or sturdy as yours. If their destination is too far, we might run into trouble."


    William''s smile widened. "Don''t worry," he reassured her. "Luke''s friend mentioned that Luke was planning to visit an island in this region, and it seems to be in the same direction the fish-men took the ship. It must be the same place, and from what I gather, it should only take us a day at most to get there."


    It was a calculated guess, but the coincidence was too strong to ignore. William firmly believed that the fish-men were headed to the same island Luke had intended to visit.


    In fact, William suspected that Luke might be working with those fish-men, though the motive behind such an alliance remained a mystery.


    "But I still don''t understand why those fish-men took the ship," Hemlock grumbled, frustration evident in his voice. "They don''t even need a ship to travel."


    William nodded in agreement. "I think they took it just to spite us, not because they need it," he mused. "As for why they''re doing this to us, well, I still have no idea."


    Katia swiftly arranged for her ship, enlisting the help of several guards to load it with supplies for the impending voyage. Everyone worked with a sense of urgency, eager to utilize the remaining daylight for travel and catch up to Hemlock''s stolen vessel.


    "You''ll be in charge until I return," Katia instructed one of her most trusted guards, a seasoned veteran who had served her faithfully for years.


    The guard, though visibly nervous, beamed with pride at the responsibility bestowed upon him. "I''ll keep everything in order while you''re away, ma''am!" he declared, saluting with respect.


    With that, Katia and the others departed. Her ship, though smaller than Hemlock''s, was far superior to the tiny wooden boat belonging to Luke''s friend.


    Speaking of Luke''s friend, he accompanied them, serving as their guide to the island Luke had spoken of so fondly.


    As they sailed towards their destination, William pondered the curious connection between the fish-men and the merfolk. The fish-men had become amicable after William presented the ring bestowed upon him by the Triton King. Now, they were heading towards an island rumored to be frequented by mermaids.


    Were the fish-men not as friendly with the merfolk as they had initially appeared? What was their true agenda? Find more chapters on My Virtual Library Empire


    William''s mind buzzed with unanswered questions, questions he hoped to resolve soon.


    He gazed at the horizon, lost in thought, when Hemlock joined him, leaning against the railing. "It''s strange sailing without my crew..." Hemlock sighed, his voice heavy with grief. "Damn it!" He pulled a flask of alcohol from his pocket and took a swig, the loss of his crew weighing heavily on his soul.


    As night fell, they were forced to stop and rest. It was then, under the cloak of darkness, that something unexpected occurred, something that jolted William from his sleep.

 Chapter 135 Fish and Pirates

    They were sailing far beyond their usual routes, venturing into the uncharted depths of the high seas. Few dared to traverse these remote and treacherous waters.William awoke with a start, a sense of foreboding gripping his heart. As one of the summoned heroes, he knew the world was in a precarious state. If it weren''t, they wouldn''t have been summoned in the first place.


    And in that moment, he witnessed the first ominous sign that something was amiss.


    On the horizon, a pulsating purple light flickered, and a gaping fissure tore open the fabric of reality just above the surface of the sea. William peered through the rift, his breath catching in his throat. It offered a glimpse into a nightmarish dimension, teeming with grotesque and terrifying creatures.


    ''What in the world was that?'' William thought, his heart pounding in his chest.


    Instinctively, his hand gripped the hilt of his sword. But after a few tense seconds, the fissure sealed shut, and no monstrous entities emerged from its depths.


    Despite the immediate danger passing, the ominous implications were clear. Something was amiss, something potentially catastrophic.


    "Do you know anything about that, Asura?" William asked, seeking the wisdom of his demonic companion.


    Asura''s voice echoed in his mind. "I have no idea," he admitted. "We should investigate this further when we return. It would also be wise to mark the approximate location of that fissure; we may need this information in the future."


    William agreed and tried to return to sleep, but the unsettling image of the dimensional rift lingered in his mind. Was this a harbinger of the world''s end?


    The following morning, they awoke at dawn and resumed their journey towards the island where they believed Hemlock''s ship might be.


    "There''s the island!" Luke''s friend exclaimed, pointing towards the horizon.


    They spotted the island around 11 a.m. and reached its shores not long after. Unlike the other islands they had recently explored¡ªincluding the volcanic one¡ªthis island was vast. S§×ar?h the N?vel(F)ire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    But there was no sign of civilization, no indication that people had ever inhabited this land. It was a wild, untamed expanse.


    It wasn''t a place frequented by fishermen or merchant ships, hence the lack of any civilization. Furthermore, the tales of mermaids kept most people away, as they were perceived as dangerous creatures capable of enchanting and killing sailors. No one wanted to risk venturing into such perilous waters.


    William and his companions, however, were undeterred. Their determination to find Hemlock''s ship and uncover the truth outweighed any fear of mythical sirens.


    As they approached the island, their eyes fell upon Hemlock''s vessel, anchored near the shore.


    "How convenient," Hemlock remarked, a glimmer of hope returning to his eyes. "We can just reclaim the ship and be on our way."


    Indeed, it seemed almost too easy. But as they drew closer, anchoring Katia''s smaller ship alongside Hemlock''s, they encountered an unexpected obstacle.


    An invisible barrier shimmered around Hemlock''s ship, preventing them from boarding. The fish-men must have erected it for protection while they conducted their business on the island.


    "Can you break this barrier, Seraphina?" Hemlock asked, turning to the skilled mage.


    Hemlock favored brute force, while Seraphina possessed the magical finesse required to dismantle such enchantments.


    "I can try," Seraphina replied, studying the barrier with a discerning eye, "but it won''t be easy. It''s a barrier generated by a magical artifact, meaning its level of protection is far greater than that of a normal mage''s barrier. To be honest, I''m not sure if I can break through it."


    Seraphina''s honesty was appreciated. It was far better than her confidently claiming she could break through, only to fail later.


    Hemlock placed a reassuring hand on her shoulder. "I understand," he said. "Just do your best, and if you need any help, we''re all here to support you."


    Seraphina nodded, grateful for their support, and began to analyze the magical barrier, searching for a weakness.


    Meanwhile, William felt restless confined to the ship. He wanted to explore the island, confirm the presence of the fish-men, and uncover their motives.


    "I want to take a look around the island," William announced. "Anyone want to come with me?"


    "That could be dangerous," Hemlock cautioned, his gaze lingering on William''s still-healing wounds. "You''re still recovering."


    "Actually, I''m feeling much better now," William assured him. "I can go without any problems."


    Among those present, Hemlock was indeed the most injured after the battle with the elemental. William had mostly recovered; his exhaustion stemmed from using his abilities, not from physical wounds.


    "I''ll go with you," Katia volunteered. "Hemlock can stay here to assist Seraphina, and Luke''s friend can stay as well. I don''t think he would be much help in a fight anyway."


    In the end, everyone agreed to the plan. William and Katia disembarked, their feet sinking into the soft sand of the beach.


    "This island is truly beautiful," Katia remarked, taking in the lush surroundings. "But all this untouched nature surely comes with its own dangers."


    William nodded in agreement. "Indeed," he said, his gaze sweeping across the dense foliage. "But will the fish-men be on the island itself, or underwater somewhere nearby? And is Luke here or not?"


    Those were the two burning questions that consumed their thoughts. The fish-men remained an enigma to William. He didn''t know if they primarily resided underwater like the merfolk or if their lifestyle differed.


    "The only way to find out is to search," Katia declared, her voice filled with determination. "It won''t hurt to take a look around the island. A large group of fish-men would surely leave some traces."


    And so, they ventured into the island''s depths, their eyes peeled for any sign of the fish-men. This island was wild and untamed, so any creature passing through would inevitably leave its mark.


    They walked along the beach, searching for a break in the dense vegetation that would allow them to penetrate the island''s interior. Neither of them relished the idea of hacking through thick undergrowth; it would be time-consuming and exhausting.


    Fortunately, they soon stumbled upon a discernible path, a discovery that immediately piqued their interest. "Perhaps the fish-men created this path," Katia suggested.


    "Indeed," William agreed. "If this island is as isolated as they say, this path must be recent. The vegetation would have reclaimed it quickly without the presence of intelligent beings."


    "Exactly... We need to be more cautious now," Katia agreed, her eyes scanning their surroundings.


    As they followed the path, William noticed that it wasn''t as freshly trodden as they had initially assumed. Based on the information they had, the fish-men who stole Hemlock''s ship had arrived only a day or two ago, yet the path seemed older.


    This suggested two possibilities: either other creatures had created the path, or the fish-men had visited this island before.


    "I keep wondering why they stole the ship in the first place," William mused aloud. "The fish-men don''t need a ship to travel."


    "Well, even though they can move through the water," Katia pointed out, "there are still powerful predators that could pose a threat. Traveling by ship might be safer. But they could also have stolen it just to spite you. Didn''t you mention encountering them before? Perhaps they hold a grudge?"


    William pondered Katia''s words. Could they be targeting him because of his connection to the merfolk? The possibility was certainly unsettling.


    They continued along the path until they stumbled upon a sight that made their hearts pound. There, in a small clearing, were the fish-men!


    Katia and William quickly ducked into the undergrowth, concealing themselves among the dense foliage. Fortunately, the fish-men''s senses were dulled when out of the water; their sight, hearing, and smell were not as keen on land. They remained oblivious to the presence of the two observers.


    Besides the fish-men, there were other individuals with them. One of them was Luke ¨C Katia whispered the confirmation to William. Find more to read at My Virtual Library Empire


    The others appeared to be pirates, judging by their attire, demeanor, and the imposing figure who seemed to be their captain. He even sported an eye patch, completing the stereotypical pirate look.


    "And what''s the plan?" the pirate captain boomed, his voice rough and gravelly. "Will the treasure be split evenly amongst us?"


    The fish-man who appeared to be their leader nodded. "Indeed," he confirmed. "From what we''ve gathered, this treasure will be more than enough for everyone here. But the most important prize are the mermaids. We want them alive."


    "If I may ask, why the interest in these mermaids?" the pirate captain pressed, his one good eye glinting with curiosity.


    The fish-man let out a chilling chuckle. "Let''s just say they''ll suffer before they die," he replied cryptically. "Now, let''s move."


    With that, the group moved towards a large rock face, where an opening led into a subterranean cavern. The pirates and fish-men disappeared into the darkness, Luke following closely behind.


    Katia and William remained hidden, observing the scene unfold.


    "Should we follow them?" William whispered, his hand instinctively reaching for his sword.


    "Let''s alert the others first," Katia decided, her voice a barely audible murmur.


    It was crucial to inform Seraphina and Hemlock of their whereabouts and their discovery, just in case something went wrong. But before they could retreat, a voice startled them from behind.


    "Going somewhere?" a gruff male voice inquired.

 Chapter 136 Exploring the Tomb Together

    When they turned around, they saw a man standing there. William was honestly expecting to see one of the fish-men, ready to attack him and Katia, but the man was human, and it was someone they had never seen before."Who are you?" William asked, his hand reaching for his sword just in case. For the man to be able to sneak up on them like that meant he had decent skills. They had to be careful.


    "Relax," the man smiled. "I''m just a fisherman around these parts. But why are you here?"


    "A fisherman?" William didn''t believe the man. How could a mere fisherman survive on that island alone? In fact, it was already hard enough to get there in the first place. Now imagine enduring the wilderness *and* the newly arrived fish-men.


    "If you''re a fisherman, where''s your boat? Your fishing gear?" Katia asked, her gaze suspicious as it fell upon the man. Why on earth would he be in the middle of the forest if he were a fisherman? They usually stayed in their boats near the island, or even on the beach, but never this deep in the woods.


    "My boat is hidden," the man said. "You know, with these fish-men around, it''s better to keep it concealed. Just in case they try to steal it."


    "What do you know about the fish-men?" William asked.


    "Not much. Why? And what are you doing here?" the man asked.


    William knew the man was lying. The only doubt he still had was whether the man was dangerous or not. Was it worth the risk?


    "We''re walking through the forest. We love camping in unusual places," William responded.


    The fisherman then said, "How about we stop with the nonsense? Why were you watching the fish-men? What are you planning to do?"


    The man had seen William and Katia crouched behind the bush, watching the fish-men enter the cave. He wasn''t stupid enough to ignore what he''d seen.


    William also knew the man was just playing dumb.


    "We''re here looking for our boat that was stolen by the fish-men," William said. "But there''s a barrier around it, which means it''s impossible for us to get the boat and get out of here."


    Katia looked to the side, a little surprised that William had explained things that way, but she didn''t say anything. Her gaze returned to the mysterious man to ensure he wouldn''t try anything strange.


    "I could help break that barrier," the man said. "I have a lot of knowledge about these things. But in return, you would have to help me get the treasure they''re trying to retrieve. We can split it in half between the three of us. What do you think?"


    "And how can we trust you? We don''t even know who you are!" William said.


    "Well, that''s up to you, but I''m sure you won''t be able to break the barrier on your boat alone, even if you manage to catch the fish-men and demand answers. I''m your best bet," the man said, a smile plastered on his face.


    William paused to think before saying anything. In the end, if he wanted to remove that barrier from the boat, he would have to kill the fish-men and get the way to break the barrier from them.


    In other words, he would already have to go after them, so why not go with one more person who could end up helping him in the end? At least that''s how he thought.


    "If we agree, will you tell us everything you know?" William asked.


    "Of course," the man said.


    "Then all right. We''ll help you in exchange for you helping us later."


    "Perfect."


    The man then returned with them to the location where their ship was. They had to warn Hemlock and Seraphina about the things that had happened, and it was also safer to stay there and not in the middle of the forest where any danger could appear at any moment.


    As soon as he arrived at the ship, the man said, "I saw this ship and this barrier when I came to this island. How''s the progress on breaking the barrier?"


    Seraphina was surprised to see another person there. "I''ve made zero progress so far. And who the hell are you?"


    "Just a fisherman passing by the island," the man said.


    William rolled his eyes. "Don''t start with that crap."


    "Sorry, sorry¡­" the man said, scratching his head.


    Now that everyone was on the ship, it was time for the man to start talking about the things he knew regarding the fish-men and the treasure they were after.


    "Apparently, this treasure is something the fish-men have been seeking for a long time, but the point is not only to get the treasure for themselves, but to take it from the mermaids."


    "Take it from the mermaids?" William asked.


    The relationship between the mermaids and the fish-men was something he was trying to understand, and it seemed that this man knew more than he did.


    "Well, you know they came to this island because of the stories of the mermaids, right? The mermaids and the mermen are also after this treasure. Anyway, they came here to get the treasure, not giving the mermaids a chance, and at the same time they want to kill them. These two ''races'' have been at war for many years."


    This was something William wasn''t expecting to hear. Could this be why they had stolen their ship? Because of the connection William had with the mermaids and mermen?


    "Do you know what this treasure is?" William asked.


    "I don''t know for sure, but apparently it''s the tomb of a person who was buried with many valuable items. I think we''ll get a lot of good things if we work together," the man said, a slight smile stamped on his face.


    "Right, and who''s going after this treasure and the fish-men? You and Katia?" Hemlock asked.


    William had no idea what to expect when going after that treasure, and everyone leaving the boat defenseless wasn''t a good idea in his mind.


    Even if the ship had a barrier around it, what if the barrier suddenly disappeared? What if someone capable of removing the barrier showed up and stole their ship again?


    They couldn''t run the risk of leaving the ship with no one so that someone could come and take it.


    "I think I''ll go alone with him," William spoke. "We need people on the ship to ensure it stays here, and to protect those who are here too. I don''t think too many people going are a good idea." Explore hidden tales at My Virtual Library Empire


    The others didn''t quite agree with this because they were worried about William, and they would also feel useless not being able to help.


    But after thinking for a while, what William was proposing made sense. Leaving the ship without any protection was a terrible idea.


    If they lost the ship again, well, how would they get off that island? It would be much more complicated.


    "All right, but be careful," Seraphina said.


    "I will. You guys be careful too." S§×ar?h the N??elFir§×.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    William and that man left together, heading towards the entrance of the cave where the fish-men had entered.


    "Take this," the man said, handing William some seaweed.


    "Seaweed? What''s this?"


    "We''re going to have to dive to get in. This seaweed will allow you to breathe underwater. Without it, it''s impossible to get in there."


    "Oh, I see."


    As soon as they arrived in front of the cave entrance, they ate the seaweed and went in.

 Chapter 137 A Friends Tomb?

    The entrance to the cave was quite narrow, and it wasn''t long before their feet were covered with water."We''re going to have to dive in up ahead," the man said. "Luckily there are some plants that illuminate the place, so we won''t have any trouble finding the right spot."


    William had no idea how this man knew so much about that tomb and what it was like. He even knew he would have to dive, and who knows, maybe he even knew the right way.


    ''Has he been here before?'' William thought.


    Despite having that question in his mind, William said nothing. He just followed the man. The two of them dived in and swam inside that cave.


    The seaweed did indeed allow him to breathe underwater. William felt much more at ease because of that. If he didn''t have the seaweed to help him, surely the feeling of being underwater in that narrow cave would drive him crazy. It wasn''t something easy to endure.


    The man went ahead, and William just followed him. They had to swim for about 30 minutes, changing direction several times. But eventually, they got out of the water and arrived at a kind of stone structure.


    "I think the tomb starts here," the man said. "At least it seems to be because of these different stones."


    "And why did they create this tomb underwater? The access is crap," William said.


    "Well, I don''t know that. Maybe to protect the treasure? And another thing, from what I know, this person died a long time ago. What if this place wasn''t underwater before?" the man said.


    He had a point that made sense. The passage of time was capable of changing places, and William couldn''t be sure that place had always been that way.


    William, of all people, should know well what time was capable of causing.


    The two followed the stone structure, entering the tomb of the mysterious person who had died.


    The tomb was very large. William and the man walked slowly, trying their best to avoid stepping on traps or the like.


    "We''re lucky they''re going ahead," the man said. "This will make them step on the traps first, and explore the place for us. But we must be careful not to let them see us."


    Considering that the fish-men were having the greatest difficulty avoiding the traps and also exploring the place, William had to go slowly, otherwise they would meet quickly.


    They tried to focus on marks or the voices of the fish-men, as it would be easy to hear the voices in those corridors. It wasn''t long before they started to hear voices.


    "You said you knew how to get past all the traps. What the hell is this?" a gruff voice said. Sear?h the N?vel?ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "Yes, I know, but this one takes time," a man replied.


    "We don''t have time! The mermaids are already ahead. We have to catch up with them!"


    William could discern that the gruff voice belonged to some fish-man, and the other voice to a human. Could it be Luke, one of the pirates, or someone else?


    "It seems they have someone who understands the traps of this place," William whispered. "In that case, they have an advantage compared to us."


    "Yes¡­ But if we follow them, we won''t have a problem."


    They continued walking until they reached a more open area with several different corridors. In the middle of this room, they saw a statue, and around the statue were the fish-men and the pirates!


    William couldn''t just walk straight ahead and go there in the middle. They would easily notice his presence. Although the fish-men had terrible senses out of the water, it wasn''t the same for the pirates who were there with them.


    So the best thing to do was to stay away, and make sure no one noticed their presence. Experience more on My Virtual Library Empire


    The problem was that the room was open, meaning there weren''t many places to hide. Because of this, William and his partner decided to go back a little and wait.


    "Let''s wait for them to get past this trap or riddle, and then we''ll follow them," the man said.


    William agreed with him. That seemed like the most sensible thing to do.


    They waited for a good few minutes until they heard a noise coming from the room, and the celebration of everyone who was there.


    "Good, finally. Let''s continue."


    William waited a bit and then went to the room again, and there he noticed that the statue had moved, opening a staircase that led down.


    "They went that way," William pointed. "Let''s go."


    But before they could get there, the statue moved and returned to its initial position. In other words, the passage they were going to use was blocked again.


    William tried to run to the place, but he didn''t arrive in time. The statue returned to its initial position in less than a second.


    He tried to push the statue or even break it, but it was as if it were made of a different kind of material, and not stone. It seemed to be much more resistant, and no matter what William did, nothing happened.


    "It won''t be possible to break or force our way through this," the man said. "This statue has a strong aura of magic. They must have made a magical formation a long time ago, something that would transform this thing into something indestructible."


    The first thing William thought was that the man with him understood a lot about magical formations, and maybe he could somehow get past that riddle.


    "Do you think you can figure it out?" William asked. "I think between the two of us, you must be the person who has the most understanding about these things."


    "I can try¡­ But before that, let''s explore the place, maybe we can get some clues," the man said.


    Besides the statue in the middle of the room, there were other corridors that led to other places.


    If the fish-men and the pirates ignored these corridors and went straight for the passage under the statue, well, that meant they already knew a lot about that tomb.


    Maybe it was a waste of time to explore the other corridors, but they had to try. William and his partner chose a corridor and moved on.


    The corridor was different from the others that had nothing. That corridor had several paintings, and judging by the name written below the paintings, they were made by the same person.


    But that''s when William froze. The name written below the paintings was familiar to him.


    "Jinra¡­"


    The first name was Jinra, the same name as his master in the past, and the person who helped him.


    This wasn''t the first time he''d heard of the name Jinra in the present, and wondered if it was the same person he''d met in the past.


    "This Jinra, have you heard of him? Could it be the same guy famous for magical formations and his powerful enchantments?" William asked.


    The man seemed surprised to hear that. "So you know him? Yes, I believe it belongs to him."


    "So you knew who was buried here? Why did you lie?" William confronted the man.

 Chapter 138 Its Actually Him

    William still couldn''t be sure if it was the same Jinra he knew, but even so, he wanted to confront the man to find out why he was lying to him.If he hadn''t told him that, well, it was safe to say that there were other things he was hiding, and William didn''t like that at all.


    "Actually, I wasn''t sure if it was his," the man said. "I only became sure now after seeing the paintings. You know, without being here it''s impossible to know. Often people make things up, right?"


    The way the man spoke seemed to be true, but William couldn''t be sure.


    "Even so, you already had a hunch, so you should have told me," William said. "How do you expect me to trust you if you''re hiding things? Is there anything else I need to know?"


    The two were together on that quest to get the treasure. William wasn''t so fixated on the treasure itself. He wanted more of the man''s help to break the barrier around the ship.


    "Well, I don''t believe so," the man said. "Maybe there''s the fact that a famous creature might be hibernating here, and there''s the chance of us waking it up unintentionally¡­"


    "Famous creature?"


    "The Kraken."


    "You''re kidding¡­"


    William had heard the stories of the Kraken. It was a very high-level creature that usually hibernated and occasionally woke up and wreaked some havoc in the oceans, destroying several ships.


    "Well, but the chance of us waking up the creature is very low," the man said. "From what I know, it''s deep down. We''re not going that deep."


    As much as the man said that, William wasn''t comfortable knowing that the possibility was still there. What if the Kraken woke up after all? Their chances of dying were very high.


    "Let''s forget about that for now," William said. "The best thing is for us to look for a way to continue before they advance too far."


    As angry and apprehensive as William was, they had to keep going, as messing around there would only mean wasting time.


    The fish-men and the pirates were already advancing, and they had to do the same.


    William and his unknown partner split up to look for more places, both looking for any kind of clue that could help them continue moving forward.


    During the search, something caught William''s attention. In fact, what he saw made him a little emotional, and he had to hold back the tears.


    In the middle of the paintings, he saw one that was separate, as if it had greater importance. The painting in question was a painting of a small cabin, a barn, and on the grass near that cabin there was a man and a young man. It looked like the two were training.


    William knew very well what that painting represented. He had been someone important in Jinra''s life to have that painting.


    ''That old man taught me a lot¡­ But why am I sad? I can always go to the past and see him!'' William thought, wiping the tears with his shirt sleeve.


    But that painting made him think about something else: how his presence in the past was already altering some things in the future. Wouldn''t he have to be careful with his appearance?


    What if he saw some painting from the past showing his face? Wouldn''t people start asking who he was?


    The chance existed, but William felt that he didn''t need to worry about that yet, but the wisest thing to do was to plan ahead and not wait to do things at the last minute when everything was already going downhill.


    As important as that painting was, it wasn''t a clue to opening the statue''s secret passage. They still needed to search more.


    William searched for a long time, but found nothing that was useful. The other corridors only led to places with items from Jinra''s life that had some importance, such as the paintings and some items from his home.


    No valuable artifacts were there, obviously. The artifacts would certainly be inside the tomb''s location where the treasure was.


    Now, after being sure that it was the same Jinra that William knew, he wanted to get the treasure for himself. Yes, for himself. He didn''t even want to share it with the man who was helping him.


    Jinra''s things couldn''t end up in the hands of strangers. William would not allow that. Jinra''s memory and honor were at stake.


    Thoughtful about how to get past that part of the tomb, William went again to the statue that he had to move.


    ''The fish-men opened this somehow¡­ How can I do it?'' Discover stories at My Virtual Library Empire


    It was clear that they had more information about the tomb than the man who was with William. They already knew a lot about the traps, the items that could be inside, and of course, how to get past most of the puzzles.


    As for William, completely lost. He touched the statue, and sent his mana to it, trying to feel something. It was at that moment that a voice appeared in his mind.


    "If you are hearing this, it means that you are William, my disciple and also someone I welcomed as a son¡­ This tomb has some secrets, and I will reveal them to you now, listen carefully¡­"


    The voice was a little different from Jinra''s normal voice, which was to be expected considering he was much older when he made that message.


    William listened carefully, remembering all the details Jinra wanted to convey to him. Jinra told about the entire layout of the tomb, and explained how William could take shortcuts and go through various parts to get to the treasure as quickly as possible. S§×ar?h the N??eFire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    That information was precious. With that, William would be able to reach the treasure before everyone else, and more importantly, he was confident that he would be able to get there alone, shaking off the man who was with him.


    But was that a good idea? He needed the man''s help to remove the barrier from the ship, but at the same time, he wanted to ensure that no one touched Jinra''s treasure.


    ''I''ll take a chance¡­ I believe there will be something useful in the things Jinra left behind, maybe I can destroy the barrier alone!'' William thought.


    After the message ended, the statue moved to the side, opening the passage. The man was nearby and saw William open the passage.


    "How did you do that?" he asked, looking suspiciously at William.


    William obviously wasn''t going to tell him what he knew, "I think I''m lucky. Come on, before the passage closes."


    The man was very suspicious of William, as it was simply too unlikely that he could open the passage by luck, but he said nothing and went ahead with him.


    The two went down a spiral staircase, and went deeper into Jinra''s tomb. Now that William knew everything about the tomb, he was no longer afraid or anxious.


    He already knew almost all the passages and also the creatures they might encounter along the way.


    After going down the stairs, they met again in a kind of corridor. But this time the corridor only had one path. There were no other doors or adjacent corridors that would lead to other places.


    They moved on. William already knew what was coming: Jinra had built a small village down there.


    From what William knew, this village was where Jinra had lived. There was his cabin and also the barn where William slept many nights.


    Of course, the village wasn''t there when William was there with him. It was something that was built a few years later. The most amazing thing was that the village was built very close to Willow Creek, but in totally different times.


    The man who was with William, however, was very surprised when he saw that village.


    "Wow!" he said, his mouth half open. "This place is incredible. How did he build something like this down here? Look, the sky looks real!"


    Indeed, that place was incredible. Jinra used his vast knowledge of magical formations and enchantments to create a place that looked a lot like the ''real'' world.


    The starry sky was present, the vegetation, the forest, and even the river that passed near Jinra''s house. Everything was very real, almost as if they had been transported there after passing through the door of the last corridor they were in.


    "Where should we start?" the man asked. "There are several houses here."


    William already knew where to go, but he also knew that he would need to shake off the man who was with him, and he knew exactly what to do.


    "I think we can start with the smaller houses," he said. "The fish-men and the pirates certainly went to the main house, the biggest one, and we don''t want to meet them yet, right?"


    The man, despite being suspicious of William, agreed with that. It made sense to him.


    And indeed, the fish-men and the pirates went straight to the cabin where Jinra lived, as it was the main point of that village. William knew that the way to continue to his treasure was in that cabin, but he also knew that there were other ways, and some shortcuts that he could take.


    William would not let Jinra''s treasure fall into the hands of the catfish and pirates!

 Chapter 139 Web of Problems

    They went to another wooden house that was in the corner of the village."How do these houses stay standing to this day?" asked William.


    "Probably with the use of magical formations. It''s amazing how much can be preserved using magic."


    Jinra had created a false sky with stars, the moon, and even the sun during the day, all underground. Being able to keep a wooden house preserved for years was quite easy for him.


    They entered the house, the sound of their footsteps making the wooden floor creak. It was dark inside the house. The only lighting belonged to a few candles that were burning with magic, lasting for years and years.


    The interior of the house was like any house in a village of the time: simple but tidy furniture.


    "Let''s look and look for anything useful here," said the man who was with William.


    Until that moment, neither of them had asked each other''s name. They were there for a common goal, and there was no reason to know too much about each other''s lives.


    William knew exactly what he was looking for in that house: the secret passage inside the wooden closet.


    But despite knowing, he couldn''t just ignore everything and go straight to this closet. That would make things suspicious, and the man with him was already quite suspicious of him for managing to get past that statue.


    William was looking at other parts of the house, just like his partner was doing.


    "I don''t think we''ll find anything here," the man said.


    "Keep looking, and let''s look calmly."


    Little by little, William moved around the house and arrived where the closet was. He opened the closet, and there was nothing inside. It was completely empty.


    "See? I told you there was nothing," the man said again.


    William then touched the back of the closet, and feigned a surprised face. "Are you sure there''s nothing? Touch this here."


    The man moved to William''s side and touched the back of the closet. That''s when he felt with his hand that there was something on the other side.


    "I think this is a secret passage," he said. "Good job!"


    The way he reacted, it seems that William didn''t act so suspiciously, which was good. The two worked together to remove the false panel from the wall, taking the utmost care not to trigger any kind of trap.


    William knew very well that there were no traps there, but he couldn''t say that, obviously. After removing the panel, they saw a tunnel leading further down.


    "Should we go this way?" the man asked. "You said that you believe the right way is through the main house."


    "Yes, but a secret passage here must mean something, right? I think it''s worth exploring," William said.


    In the end, the man agreed and the two followed the tunnel.


    The tunnel was narrow, and the two of them barely fit inside. They had to walk in single file as side by side didn''t work.


    "I''m a little nervous in here," the man said.


    William then said, "I should be the nervous one. I''m the one going in front."


    "That''s true, that''s true..."


    When the two realized that one would have to go in front in the tunnel, William decided to volunteer, and of course the man accepted. The person who was going in front was much more likely to step on a trap.


    And that''s exactly what William wanted! He went to that place to trick the man, and step on a trap that would take him to another place, that is, he would be separated from that man! S~ea??h the N??elFir§×.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    William wanted to get to the treasure first than everyone else, and more importantly, he wanted the treasure just for himself. And for that, he needed to do some things and act smart.


    Anyway, they continued to follow the narrow tunnel, until they finally reached another part. It was a small room that had only a pedestal in the middle, and it looked very suspicious.


    "Let me go first to see if the room is safe," William said. "Can I?"


    The man agreed. "Yes, but be careful."


    William walked to the middle of the room. Besides the pedestal, there was also a door, which would lead to another place. He touched the pedestal, and the door opened.


    His partner who was inside the tunnel looked at that and was excited. "Easy, right? We managed to open the door to continue."


    But it was at that moment that the floor beneath William disappeared out of nowhere, and he fell. After that the floor returned, and the door was still open.


    The man stood there not understanding anything. He was completely confused...


    *


    William tumbled into the abyss. Darkness swallowed him whole, leaving him blind and disoriented. The only sensations were the rush of wind against his face and the sickening speed of his descent.


    Anyone else would have been paralyzed by terror, certain that a gruesome death awaited them at the bottom. But William knew better. Jinra''s message had warned him about this trap. Though years had passed and things might have changed, William held onto the belief that the trap remained the same.


    He landed with a soft thud, as if the ground were a bed of feathers. No pain, no injury, just a gentle stop to his plummet. He found himself in a deep fissure, water lapping at his feet. Plants clung to the damp walls, and insects skittered across the uneven floor. Time had clearly altered this place.


    ''This is a little different than I expected, but alright...'' William thought, a flicker of unease in his mind.


    He pressed on, senses heightened, every nerve alert. Jinra''s message had promised safety, but years had twisted the tomb. The possibility of dangerous magical creatures lurking in the shadows couldn''t be ignored. William would be ready.


    With each step, the sound of his boots splashing through the shallow water echoed through the fissure. It was a lonely, rhythmic sound, like walking through a rainy Friday night, heading to the market with only an umbrella for company.


    But he wasn''t going to the supermarket. He was going to where his old master''s treasure was. As much as William wanted some normalcy in his life, things would never be normal again.


    After a while walking in that fissure, William noticed some strange things down there. Well, not at the bottom of the fissure where he was, but on the walls of the fissure above his head.


    He looked up, his eyes already more adjusted to the darkness, amplified by the strange lineage he received from that snake, and that''s when he saw something disturbing.


    On the walls of the fissure, from up there, creatures were coming towards him. They were huge spiders, climbing the walls and going down. Read latest stories on My Virtual Library Empire


    William''s fall had alerted some creatures that lived in that place. Everyone was going to him.


    A sense of urgency washed over William. He needed to get out of there as quickly as possible, or he would suffer the consequences.


    There was only one path in that fissure, which was to go straight, and that''s what he did. But this time he ran as fast as he could. He had to get out of that place.


    His heart raced, as did his steps. William tried his best not to look up, as that would affect his running, but he did it unconsciously.


    ''Damn, they''re getting close...'' he thought, fear creeping into his mind.


    The fear of not reaching safety in time gnawed at William. His breath came in ragged gasps, his muscles screamed for rest, but the relentless scuttling of the spiders spurred him onward.


    Then, through the dim light, he saw it ¨C a stone door, choked with moss and the grime of ages. Salvation.


    A surge of adrenaline propelled him forward. It was as if the very sight of that door ignited a hidden fire within him, pushing him beyond his limits. But the spiders were fast too, their monstrous forms growing ever closer.


    Just as William reached the door, one of the spiders lunged. Unsure of its strength, and unwilling to risk a confrontation, William poured every ounce of power into his legs and leaped.


    His body slammed against the ancient door, the force of the impact shattering the weakened seals. He tumbled through, landing hard on the cold stone floor of a corridor. This was more like it ¨C the familiar confines of the tomb, not the terrifying openness of the fissure.


    ''I made it...'' he thought, relief flooding through him.


    The spiders battered against the stone door, their enraged screeches echoing through the corridor. But the ancient magic held firm, the portal sealed shut. How long it would last, William didn''t know, but escaping the fissure was a victory in itself.


    He scrambled to his feet, eager to press on towards the treasure. But then, voices drifted down the passage ¨C the gruff voices of the fish-men and the rough accents of the pirates.


    ''They''re close! Coming this way!''


    Panic flared in William''s chest. Trapped in a narrow corridor, with enemies approaching from behind, there was nowhere to run, nowhere to hide. He had no choice but to push forward, hoping against hope that he could outrun them, outsmart them, and somehow disappear into the labyrinthine depths of the tomb.

 Chapter 140 Last Part

    William pressed onward, the echoing shouts of his pursuers spurring him forward. He couldn''t risk a confrontation, not here, not now. He needed time, space, and a plan.As he navigated the twisting passages, Jinra''s words echoed in his mind.


    ''If I keep going, I should reach the labyrinth...''


    The final obstacle. A sprawling maze designed to confound and disorient any who dared seek Jinra''s treasure. Even with the cryptic clues from the message, William had no clear path, no map to guide him through the intricate network of corridors.


    Jinra had offered hints, whispers of what to expect, how to orient himself within the labyrinth. It was something, better than nothing, but still...


    Suddenly, figures appeared ahead, rounding a corner with surprising speed. The fish-men and pirates! They were closer than he thought.


    "Halt!" a pirate roared, his voice ragged and threatening.


    William''s heart pounded. He''d only just entered the labyrinth, still trying to decipher its secrets, but there was no time for deliberation. He chose a path at random and sprinted, plunging deeper into the maze.


    The pursuers skidded to a halt at the entrance, confronted by three diverging paths.


    "Who the hell was that?" one of them hissed, his voice laced with suspicion. "Could it be some illusion, a trick of the magical formations?"


    "Maybe," another pirate grunted. "Or it could be someone else who found this place. What do we do? Follow him, or try another path?"


    The man navigating the traps stepped forward, his brow furrowed. "This labyrinth... there''s no information about it, no maps, no clues. We''ll have to rely on our instincts, our wits."


    The leader of the fish-men, a hulking shark-man with a fearsome visage, loomed over the others. "So you know nothing of this part? Could that person we saw have some knowledge we don''t?"


    "Unlikely," the pirate shook his head. "Information about the other parts of the tomb, yes, that''s possible to find. I know, because I did. But this labyrinth... nothing. The only way he could know something is if he were a relative of Jinra, and we all know his kin died before him. So we''re safe."


    "I see..." the shark-man rumbled, his eyes fixed on the path William had taken.


    William, oblivious to the conversation at the labyrinth''s entrance, focused solely on escape. The maze stretched before him, its corridors wider than those he''d traversed before, dotted with eerie, moss-covered statues.


    Unlike the meticulously preserved sections of the tomb, this area seemed to have succumbed to the ravages of time. The pervasive dampness and creeping moss reminded him of the fissure, raising a chilling possibility.


    ''Is this place infested with creatures too?'' he wondered, anxiety tightening its grip.


    His hand instinctively rested on the hilt of Asura, his demonic sword, a silent promise of protection. He proceeded with caution, his eyes scanning the walls for any sign of the markings Jinra had mentioned.


    After twenty minutes of navigating the labyrinth''s twists and turns, he found nothing. Doubt gnawed at him, but he clung to the belief that Jinra wouldn''t mislead him. It was just a matter of time, he told himself, before the first marking revealed itself.


    But before the first marking appeared, something else caught William''s eye. The labyrinth had offered no diverging paths, yet William had changed direction several times as the corridor twisted and turned. It was during one of these turns that he spotted it. In the distance, lurking at the edge of the corridor where it bent out of sight, stood a creature.


    It was grotesque, its form defying description. But what truly chilled William was its smile - a wide, predatory grin that revealed rows of needle-sharp teeth. And its eyes... they were fixated on William, watching his every move with an unnerving intensity.


    A wave of dread washed over him.


    ''What the hell is that?'' he thought, his mind reeling.


    He''d never encountered anything like it. Fear gnawed at him, but he had to press on. There was no other path, no escape from this unsettling encounter.


    As William approached, the creature vanished. But its disappearance only amplified his unease.


    ''Is it waiting for me around the corner?''


    The thought haunted him. He gripped Asura tighter, the familiar weight of the demonic sword a comfort in this unsettling place. With his senses on high alert, he rounded the corner, ready to face whatever awaited him.


    But there was nothing. The corridor was empty.


    "I have no idea what that was," Asura''s voice echoed in his mind, a hint of unease in its tone. "I can''t sense any mana from it. We should be careful."


    "Don''t need to tell me that," William muttered, his grip on Asura unwavering. "That thing was bizarre..."


    After rounding the corner and encountering nothing but unsettling emptiness, William continued his cautious trek through the labyrinth. Five minutes passed, each step filled with anticipation, until finally, he spotted it ¨C the first symbol Jinra had described.


    A black triangle, stark against the pale stone wall. According to Jinra''s message, this meant he should take the next right turn.


    Moments later, he reached an intersection with three possible paths. Trusting his master''s guidance, William turned right. Sear?h the Nov§×l?ire.n(e)t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    ''These clues are a lifesaver,'' he thought, a surge of confidence replacing the lingering fear. ''Getting out of here will be a piece of cake.''


    But navigating the maze wasn''t the only challenge. As he pressed onward, a familiar, chilling sight emerged from the shadows.


    "A giant spider!" William exclaimed, his hand instinctively reaching for Asura.


    One of the monstrous arachnids from the fissure, its multiple eyes glinting menacingly in the dim light, had found him. With a low hiss, it scuttled towards William, its intent clear.


    But this time, the spider was alone. It wasn''t like the fissure, where William had fled in terror from that army of arachnids. Now, with Asura in hand, fear gave way to determination. He charged.


    His body, fully recovered from the battle with the elemental, moved with renewed vigor. In fact, he felt faster than ever. Perhaps it was the recent level ups, each one boosting his attributes significantly ¨C a perk of being one of the summoned heroes.


    The spider lunged, its fangs dripping venom, aiming for William''s arm. But with a practiced twist of his body, he evaded the attack. Then, gripping Asura tightly, he unleashed a precise strike, aiming for the spider''s hind legs.


    The movement was a blur, the air itself seeming to warp around the blade as it sliced through the air. With a sickening crunch, the spider''s leg was severed, spewing a geyser of green blood that splattered across the corridor floor and stained William''s clothes.


    The blow, though devastating, wasn''t enough to kill the spider. It writhed on the ground, its remaining legs scrabbling for purchase, green ichor oozing from the stump where its limb had been.


    William pressed his advantage, raising Asura for another strike. But the spider wasn''t finished. With a flick of its abdomen, it unleashed a volley of webbing. The sticky strands flew too fast for William to react, encasing him in a silken cocoon. The pressure was immense, immobilizing him completely.


    He struggled, but the webbing held firm. The spider, its fangs dripping venom, turned towards its helpless prey and advanced.

 Chapter 141 Jinras Lost Pet?

    Panic clawed at William, the sticky strands holding him fast. He strained against the webbing, his muscles burning, but it was no use. Trapped, helpless, with the venomous spider closing in...His mind raced, desperately searching for a solution. What magic could he use? What weapon could save him?


    Enhanced Strength! He channeled the spell, feeling the familiar surge of power coursing through his veins. With a renewed burst of strength, he ripped through the webbing, freeing himself just as the spider lunged.


    Asura flashed, severing one of the spider''s fangs in a shower of green sparks. But the creature retaliated, spewing a stream of venom that struck William squarely in the face.


    "Disgusting beast!" he roared, fury lending strength to his arm as he plunged Asura deep into the spider''s head.


    [+1700 EXP]


    The spider shuddered, its legs twitching, then lay still. William, though revolted by the venom coating his face, felt a surge of relief. He was uninjured, the venom hadn''t entered his bloodstream.


    But Asura''s voice shattered his complacency. "That venom... it will seep through your skin. These spiders are dangerous."


    "What?" William''s blood ran cold. S§×ar?h the ¦Çov§×lFire .net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    He watched in horror as the venom began to disappear, absorbed into his skin as if it were a sponge. It was a slow, insidious process, and there was nothing he could do to stop it. The poison entered his bloodstream.


    Fear gripped him. He had no idea how potent the venom was, and there was certainly no antidote to be found in this ancient tomb. His only option was to press on, to reach the treasure, and hope that the poison wasn''t lethal.


    With renewed urgency, he continued through the labyrinth, his eyes darting from the symbols on the walls to the shadows that seemed to writhe with unseen dangers. He was racing against time, against the poison coursing through his veins, and against the unknown creature that still lurked somewhere in the depths of the maze.


    William hadn''t seen that mysterious creature for a while, but it appeared again. It was in one of the corners, just like before, watching him with that ghastly grin. Asura still couldn''t sense any mana emanating from the creature, but William knew it was magical.


    He had no idea if it was a powerful monster or not, but he needed to move forward. William decided to dash towards the creature.


    "Swiftfoot!"


    Utilizing one of his spells, William enhanced his agility and speed. He started sprinting towards the creature.


    The creature seemed taken aback by William suddenly charging at it. William was almost upon it when it began to retreat, turning the corner of the corridor and disappearing from his sight.


    It only took William a few seconds to reach the same corner, certain he would see the creature there. It was impossible for it to have reached the end of the corridor so quickly.


    However, when he turned, he saw nothing. There was no creature in the hallway. It was as if the monster had teleported away.


    "How is this possible? This makes no sense at all!" William murmured.


    He couldn''t believe that creature could teleport. Teleportation was an extremely rare ability, achievable only by the most powerful creatures or mages. A creature like that certainly wouldn''t be in such a potent realm, or William would have been dead by now.


    While he pondered what could have happened, he looked down and saw an unusual type of rat scurrying along the corridor, slipping into the corners.


    The rat wasn''t normal. It had different fur, and its tail was distinct as well, not to mention it was emanating mana from its body - meaning it was a magical creature.


    William watched the rat for a few seconds and could swear it glanced back several times, as if it were looking at him.


    ''Could it be...''


    He thought of something and decided to pursue the rat. The rat noticed his movements and started running too, trying to find some hole to squeeze into and disappear.


    But there was no hole for it to hide in. The corridor walls were made of stone and were still in decent condition. Nothing was broken for the rat to hide behind.


    William grabbed the rat with his hand. He wasn''t afraid of getting hurt by catching it; it seemed harmless. Well, at least he hoped it was.


    Holding the rat, William looked at the small creature, wondering if this could be the bizarre creature he had seen. It didn''t make much sense, but he had that feeling. Then, something very strange happened. The rat spoke!


    "Let go of me, you bastard," the rat said, "I didn''t let you grab me like this."


    William was utterly surprised. According to the information he had, magical beasts capable of speech were rare. This ability was reserved for only the most powerful, legendary creatures, or rare beasts like this rat.


    "How can you talk? What is this?" William asked, looking into the rat''s eyes.


    "How can I talk? That''s the easiest thing. I wonder how the other creatures around here don''t know how. Bunch of idiots," the rat replied.


    "Start explaining, or I won''t let you go."


    William felt a bit bad about threatening and holding the defenseless rat like that, but he needed answers. And after seeing that the rat could speak, he became even more interested in the creature''s origin.


    The rat said nothing at first, trying to squirm and escape William''s grip, but after realizing it was futile, it spoke again.


    "I was Jinra''s pet," the rat said, "but he died a long time ago, and I''ve been hibernating here in a magical formation he created for me. For some reason, I woke up a few days ago."


    That didn''t seem like a coincidence. Could the rat have woken up because it knew someone would come to its master''s tomb?


    William was very surprised to learn that this small creature once belonged to Jinra.


    "So you know me?" William asked, "My name is William. I was your master''s disciple a long time ago when I used my magic to travel to the past."


    "What? What kind of crazy talk is that?" the rat said.


    But after a few seconds, he added, "Wait. William? You''re that William he even left a message about at the tomb''s entrance? How are you here now? You were my master''s!"


    The rat couldn''t understand. As a magical beast, this rat could live for a very long time. It was something special about its species. Plus, it had been frozen for many years, centuries, if not millennia.


    He knew William from the stories his master had told, but that was a long time in the past.


    "As I said, I can travel through time. Actually, I''m from this era, and I met your master when I traveled back in time."


    "So does that mean you can go back in time and see him? Can I go with you?" the rat asked.


    It was a tough decision. What would happen if the rat met Jinra before its time? Was it possible for the rat to encounter itself in the past?


    William had to be careful not to start mixing things up and cause problems that couldn''t be undone.

 Chapter 142 Youre Alive?

    "Can we talk about this later? And another thing, you can''t tell anyone about this.""Sure, sure, I get it. No one would believe this madness anyway¡­ Anyway, so can we say that you are my new master? Can we do the blood pact right here?" the rat said.


    He completely changed his attitude after learning that William was someone who knew his old master personally and had a certain connection to him.


    "Blood pact? How does it work?" William asked.


    "Well, I give you a contract and we sign it with our blood. It''s actually quite simple," the rat explained to William.


    "First make the contract and let me see it."


    The little magical beast used his mana to create a contract in a matter of seconds. The contract was a single sheet with several things written on it.


    It was as if they were rules that both should follow. William read carefully, and from what he saw things seemed reasonable. The part that gave him the most confidence that it was a good deal was the one that said he could terminate the contract at any time.


    The rat still added something else to the contract clause: he couldn''t tell anyone about William''s ability to go back in time.


    William seemed satisfied after reading the contract. "I liked what I saw. We can do it, yes. But tell me, was that bizarre creature watching me?"


    "Ah, yes, yes. That was just an illusion of mine. I was trying to scare you into going away from my master''s tomb."


    Now things were falling into place. That''s why William could never find that strange creature, nor feel its mana. It was just magic that that little talking rat was doing.


    This showed that this little creature had some talents and would certainly be useful for some things.


    ''Jinra wouldn''t have him as a pet if he wasn''t useful, right...'' William reflected.


    The two signed the contract using blood, and after it was complete, a mark appeared on William''s arm, like a tattoo. That indicated that he had a contracted magical beast.


    The little rat jumped and landed on William''s shoulder. "Want help getting to where my master''s treasure is?" he said.


    William smiled. "You can be sure of that."


    With Jinra''s clues and Stuart''s guidance, William was more than confident in reaching the treasure. They pressed on, the echoes of movement from other corridors reminding them that they weren''t alone.


    "Are there other people here?" Stuart squeaked, his tiny nose twitching.


    "Yes," William confirmed. "Fish-men and pirates. And apparently, some mermaids are involved too."


    "What? How did so many people suddenly find this place? It''s strange..."


    "Now that you mention it..." William paused, a frown creasing his brow.


    Indeed, it was odd. Jinra''s tomb had remained hidden for centuries, and now, out of the blue, it was swarming with treasure seekers. He''d been so focused on his own quest that he hadn''t stopped to consider the peculiarity of the situation.


    "We need to hurry then," Stuart urged. "All paths at the beginning of the labyrinth eventually lead to the treasure. If these other people have figured out how to navigate it, well..."


    The urgency in Stuart''s voice spurred William onward. He quickened his pace, relying on the symbols and Stuart''s guidance to navigate the maze. They made rapid progress, but maintaining that speed was impossible. Danger lurked around every corner.


    "This place is crawling with magical beasts," Stuart warned. "Some of them are quite powerful. But lucky for you, you have me!"


    William didn''t understand the significance of Stuart''s words until they encountered their first beast. Before the creature even noticed them, Stuart sensed its mana, giving them ample warning. S§×ar?h the Novel?ire(.)ne*t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    But that wasn''t the best part. With a flick of his tiny paw, Stuart cast a camouflage spell on William, blending him seamlessly with the labyrinth walls. It wasn''t invisibility, but it was close enough.


    The beast, oblivious to their presence, wandered off into the maze. With Stuart''s camouflage, William could bypass the labyrinth''s guardians undetected. This was a game-changer. Some of the creatures were weak, yes, but others radiated power that would require a lengthy battle to overcome. Time was of the essence, and every second counted.


    With renewed determination, William and Stuart pressed onward, their progress swift and silent. The labyrinth''s dangers were nullified, the path to Jinra''s treasure lay open.


    William felt a surge of triumph. Everything was going according to plan. He was rapidly approaching the treasure chamber, and no one had interfered. A few magical beasts had crossed their path, but Stuart''s camouflage had rendered them harmless.


    As he rounded another corner, however, he came face to face with someone he hadn''t expected. It wasn''t the pirates or the fish-men, but the man who had accompanied him from the start.


    "You''re alive?" the man exclaimed, his eyes wide with surprise.


    The last time he''d seen William, he was plummeting into a trap. He''d assumed William was dead.


    "Oh, it''s you," William said, his voice flat. "You made it this far."


    The man wasn''t a fool. He quickly realized that William had orchestrated the whole thing. "You knew that trap wouldn''t kill you. That''s why you wanted to go to that cabin first. But how did you know about the trap? Have you been here before?"


    It was a logical assumption. The man couldn''t possibly fathom the truth ¨C that Jinra himself had sent William a message.


    "I''ve never been here before," William said, his voice carefully neutral. "But you seem to know this place quite well to get here so quickly. What do you know?"


    The man''s lips curled into a sly smile. "Indeed, I know a few things. Let''s just say someone hired me to retrieve the treasure. I''ve been exploring this place for quite some time."


    This was turning into a real mess. First the pirates and fish-men, and now this guy too? William had hoped to ditch the man and claim Jinra''s treasure for himself, but fate, it seemed, had other plans.


    The air crackled with tension. A fight was inevitable, and William wasn''t sure he could win this one. Just as he was steeling himself for the confrontation, Stuart''s whisper broke through his thoughts.


    "More people are coming," the rat warned. "Back away slowly, and I''ll camouflage you. They''ll only see this guy and attack him."


    It was a brilliant plan. William just needed to keep the man occupied while subtly creating some distance.


    "Now that we''re so close to the treasure," he said, forcing a friendly smile, "we should work together to get it, right? There''s no need to fight. We''re practically there."


    "And how do you know we''re close?" the man countered, suspicion flashing in his eyes. "What do you know about this place that you''re not telling me?"


    William shrugged, feigning nonchalance. "I don''t know anything. It was just a figure of speech. We have to believe we''re close, right? Otherwise, we''ll go crazy."


    The man scoffed, his eyes narrowing. "Don''t play coy with me. You''ve been one step ahead this whole time. You knew about that trap, you knew about the symbols... What aren''t you telling me?"


    William felt a bead of sweat trickle down his temple. He needed to buy some time. "Look, I don''t know how I knew about the trap, alright? It was a lucky guess. As for the symbols," he gestured vaguely down the corridor, "I just happened to notice them. Maybe they''re just decorative."


    "Decorative?" The man''s voice dripped with disbelief. "In a tomb filled with traps and magical beasts? I don''t think so." He took a step closer, his hand instinctively hovering near the dagger at his belt. "I think it''s time you started telling me the truth. Or things might get unpleasant."


    William''s hand tightened around Asura''s hilt. He could feel the familiar thrum of the demonic blade, eager for battle. But fighting this man now, with more people approaching, would be suicide.


    Just then, Stuart''s voice whispered in his ear, "They''re almost here. Back away slowly, and I''ll cast the camouflage."


    William nodded, his mind racing. He needed to keep the man distracted for just a few more seconds.


    "Look," he said, his voice dropping to a conspiratorial whisper, "I know you don''t trust me. And frankly, I don''t blame you. But we both want the same thing. Let''s work together, get the treasure, and then we can go our separate ways. What do you say?"


    The man hesitated, suspicion still clouding his eyes. But greed, it seemed, was a powerful motivator.


    "Alright," he said slowly. "But if you try anything funny..."


    "I won''t," William assured him, backing away another step. "I give you my word."


    As the man took a tentative step forward, William felt Stuart''s magic wash over him. The world shimmered, the colors of the labyrinth blurring, and then he was one with the wall, invisible to the naked eye.


    The man, oblivious to William''s disappearance, continued his advance. Just as he reached the spot where William had been standing, a group of figures emerged from the shadows. The pirates and the fish-men.


    "There he is!" one of the pirates shouted, pointing at the man.


    The man froze, his eyes widening in alarm. He turned to run, but it was too late. The pirates and fish-men swarmed him, their weapons drawn.


    William watched from his hidden vantage point, a grim satisfaction settling in his chest. Stuart''s plan had worked perfectly. Now, with his pursuers occupied, he could continue his quest for Jinra''s treasure, alone.

 Chapter 143 Getting Closer

    William seized the opportunity, slipping away unnoticed while the others were distracted. With Stuart''s camouflage, he melted into the shadows, moving like a ghost through the labyrinth.The man, realizing William''s disappearance, tried to redirect the attention. "There''s someone else here!" he yelled, pointing towards William''s last known location. "We''ll all lose the treasure!"


    The pirates and fish-men turned, their eyes scanning the corridor, but saw nothing.


    "Stop lying," one of them snarled, his face contorted with rage. "You''re just trying to escape! Now tell us everything you know about this place!"


    William knew it was only a matter of time before they saw through the man''s ruse and used his knowledge to reach the treasure. He couldn''t afford to linger.


    Once out of sight, William dropped the camouflage and broke into a run, Stuart perched on his shoulder, guiding him through the maze.


    "We''re almost there," Stuart squeaked, his voice a mix of excitement and apprehension. "I think we''ll be able to claim it all for ourselves. But you do know that most of the treasure is locked away, right?"


    "What?" William skidded to a halt, confusion clouding his features. "What do you mean?"


    "Jinra intended the treasure for you," Stuart explained, "assuming you''re the same William he always spoke of. The treasure is stored within a magical artifact, a spatial bag that holds far more than it appears. Parts of the treasure will be unlocked as you level up."


    William''s heart sank. He''d been hoping for the entire treasure, imagining the wonders it held.


    "Why would he do that?" he asked, frustration creeping into his voice.


    "Because some of the items are too powerful," Stuart explained. "If you''re not strong enough to handle them, they could kill you. He wanted to make sure whoever claimed his treasure would benefit from it, not meet an untimely end."


    William grudgingly admitted that it made sense. Jinra had been a legendary figure in the world of magic, his power immense. The items he possessed were likely far beyond William''s current capabilities. Locking away the treasure was an act of caution, a testament to Jinra''s wisdom and kindness.


    With renewed determination, they pressed on, navigating the labyrinth''s twists and turns. Stuart''s camouflage kept them safe from the lurking beasts, and soon, they stood before a grand double door of stone, adorned with intricate gold carvings. It was remarkably well-preserved, even more so than the rest of the tomb.


    "This door is heavily protected by magical formations," Stuart said, his voice hushed with awe. "Beyond this lies the final path to Jinra''s treasure."


    "And what does that mean, practically speaking?" William asked, his brow furrowed.


    "It means it''s very difficult to get past this without knowing how," Stuart replied, a mischievous glint in his beady eyes.


    "Damn it," William muttered, frustration building. He''d pushed himself, relying on Stuart''s camouflage and Jinra''s clues to navigate the labyrinth quickly, only to be stopped at the final hurdle.


    Stuart let out a high-pitched chuckle. "I love seeing that defeated look on your face. It''s true, the door is tough to crack, but Jinra left an easier way in for you. He wanted to make sure you were the one who claimed his treasure."


    "What? Really?" A wave of warmth washed over William. Jinra had truly thought of him when creating this tomb. Not only had he left the message, but he''d also ensured William could access the final chamber.


    ''Did he think of me as a son?'' The thought brought a lump to William''s throat.


    He approached the door, placing his hand on its cool surface. As if recognizing him, the symbols etched into the stone began to glow, and the heavy doors swung open.


    "You were right," William said, a smile tugging at his lips. "He really did make it easy for me."


    Just then, a shout echoed from down the corridor. "I told you there was someone else! There he is!"


    William whirled around to see the pirates, the fish-men, and the treacherous man charging towards him.


    "Damn, they''re fast," he cursed.


    "Quick, get inside!" Stuart urged. "The door will lock once you''re through!"


    Without hesitation, William dashed into the chamber, slamming the heavy doors shut behind him. "I don''t know how long this will hold them," he said, catching his breath, "but it should buy us some time."


    He turned, expecting to find himself in the treasure chamber. Instead, he stood in a vast, dimly lit room. And within that room, he saw them ¨C the mermaids.


    The fish-men had mentioned mermaids seeking the treasure. William hadn''t been sure whether to believe them, but now, seeing these creatures with his own eyes, he had no doubt.


    But something was off about these mermaids. They lacked the beauty of the mermaids he''d encountered before. Their eyes burned crimson, their teeth were sharp and jagged, and their skin was as pale as death. One look was enough to tell that something was amiss.


    Were there different types of mermaids? William''s knowledge of these creatures was limited, leaving him with more questions than answers.


    "Who are you?" one of the mermaids hissed, her voice sharp and suspicious.


    "Just a guy," William replied, his hand instinctively resting on Asura''s hilt. "Who are you? And what are you doing here?"


    "We don''t need to explain ourselves to you," another mermaid snapped. "How did you get in here?"


    It had taken them considerable time and effort to bypass the magically sealed door. They couldn''t understand how a human had appeared so quickly. Find your next adventure on My Virtual Library Empire


    "You know there are a bunch of fish-men and pirates on the other side of that door, right?" William informed them, a hint of amusement in his voice. "They''re eager to get their hands on the treasure, and they''ll be just as happy to kill you."


    "Lies!" one of the mermaids shrieked. "You''re lying!"


    They grew increasingly agitated, their voices rising in pitch. But just then, the sounds of pounding and splintering wood echoed from beyond the door. The pirates and fish-men were trying to break through.


    "Told you," William said, a smirk playing on his lips.


    The mermaids exchanged panicked glances. They were trapped between a rock and a hard place. Either they accepted William''s help and secured the treasure before the door gave way, or they fought him and risked losing everything.


    "That might be our best option," one of the mermaids agreed, her gaze flickering towards the door, which was now shuddering under the repeated blows from the other side. "Better to share it with you than let those brutes have it all."


    William nodded, feigning agreement. He''d already assessed their strength, with Stuart''s whispered confirmations of their power levels. In a direct confrontation, he was confident he could defeat them. A wicked plan began to form in his mind.


    "Alright," he said, his voice carefully neutral. "It''s settled then. We''ll work together."


    The mermaids, relieved to have secured an ally, explained the final challenge. To reach the treasure, they needed to solve a literary riddle. The room was lined with ancient books, and within their pages lay the clues to unlock the treasure chamber.


    Each clue was accompanied by a cryptic riddle written by Jinra himself. The difficulty lay in the fact that the books were from Jinra''s time, their titles and contents unknown to anyone who might stumble upon the tomb.


    But William had an advantage. He recognized some of the books from his time in Jinra''s cabin. And Stuart, his knowledgeable companion, already knew the answers.


    "I know all the answers," the rat whispered into William''s ear, his voice too low for the mermaids to hear. "Pretend to figure out the first two clues to make them more eager, and then... well, you''ll have to eliminate them and solve the last one yourself."


    The plan was risky, but William was confident he could pull it off. He adopted an air of studious concentration, flipping through the ancient tomes, mirroring the mermaids'' actions.


    "I think I found the first answer!" he announced, a triumphant grin spreading across his face.


    William shared his answer, and as the words echoed through the chamber, one of the three symbols on the inner door shimmered to life. They had cleared the first hurdle.


    "Amazing! You did it!" one of the mermaids exclaimed, her voice laced with excitement. "Just two more to go!"


    William resumed his act, feigning intense concentration as he scanned the ancient texts. Meanwhile, on the other side of the door, the pirates and fish-men had abandoned their brute force approach and were now collaborating, pooling their knowledge to decipher the magical seals.


    Stuart estimated they had roughly two hours before the door gave way. The man who had accompanied William posed the biggest threat, his knowledge of the tomb surpassing that of the others. But two hours was ample time for William to execute his plan. Sear?h the N??elFir§×.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    After a while, he announced he''d found the second answer. As he spoke the words aloud, the second symbol on the door lit up. The mermaids were practically vibrating with anticipation, their eyes glued to the books, desperate for the final clue.


    This was precisely the state of frenzy William had hoped to induce. Their focus was solely on the riddle, their guard down. It was the perfect opportunity to strike.


    With a predatory gleam in his eyes, William subtly adjusted his grip on Asura. The demonic blade thrummed with anticipation, sensing the impending violence. He would make his move soon, ending this charade and claiming Jinra''s treasure for himself.

 Chapter 144 Sadness and Anger

    Now was the time to strike. William channeled his enhanced strength and agility, his movements fluid and silent. Asura hummed in his hand, infused with demonic energy, its blade glowing with a malevolent light.The mermaids sensed something amiss, but it was too late. William lunged, his attack a blur of motion. The demonic blade sliced through the air, cleaving one of the mermaids in two.


    "What are you doing?" the surviving mermaid shrieked, her eyes wide with terror. "I thought we were working together!"


    The mermaids had planned to betray William once they reached the treasure, confident in their ability to overpower him. But now, witnessing his brutal display of power, fear gripped their hearts.


    "Did you really think I''d share the treasure with you?" William sneered, a cruel smile twisting his lips. "Don''t be ridiculous."


    "But we have a better chance of finding the last answer together!" she pleaded, desperation edging into her voice. "There''s no need to kill me. What if you can''t find the answer, and the pirates and fish-men break through? You''ll be killed too!"


    Her logic was sound, but William had no need for her assistance. "Nice try," he said, his voice cold and merciless. "But I already know the answers. I knew them all along."


    "W-what?" Disbelief and fear mingled in her eyes. "How? Who are you?"


    William ignored her questions, his focus solely on ending this encounter. He lunged again, Asura flashing through the air. The mermaid''s head rolled across the floor, her lifeless eyes staring blankly at the ceiling.


    With both mermaids eliminated, William turned towards the final door.


    "Let''s get this over with," Stuart urged, his voice uncharacteristically serious. "I have a feeling they''ll be breaking through any minute."


    William nodded, stepping towards the imposing door. He recited the final answer, the words echoing through the chamber. The last symbol ignited, and the door swung open, revealing a small, dimly lit room. In the center, a stone tomb lay bathed in an ethereal glow.


    Jinra''s final resting place.


    William approached the tomb with reverence, gently pushing aside the heavy stone lid. There he lay, his body perfectly preserved, as if time had stood still. He looked exactly as William remembered him, only with a few more wrinkles and a long, flowing white beard.


    Stuart hopped off William''s shoulder and onto the edge of the tomb, his tiny eyes filled with sorrow. He had spent countless years with Jinra, and the loss clearly weighed heavily on him.


    "Master," he whispered, his voice thick with emotion. "I found William... I think he''s the only one I should follow now... I''ll take care of your adopted son, I promise."


    William''s vision blurred with tears. Even though he knew Jinra was still alive in the past, seeing his lifeless body here, in this ancient tomb, was a poignant reminder of the inevitable passage of time. He knelt beside the tomb, paying his respects to the man who had shaped his life. Experience more tales on My Virtual Library Empire


    Then, with a heavy heart, he turned his attention to the treasure. It was time to claim Jinra''s legacy.


    The treasure was a small pouch clutched in Jinra''s skeletal hand. It was made of plain brown fabric, tied with a simple cord, but the symbol emblazoned on its surface hinted at its magical nature.


    "That''s the spatial bag I mentioned," Stuart confirmed, his voice hushed with awe. "All the treasures are inside. You''ll be able to access them as you level up."


    William snatched the pouch, but before he could examine it, the heavy doors to the chamber burst open. The pirates and fish-men poured into the room, their eyes wild with greed.


    "There''s the bastard who stole the treasure!" one of the fish-men roared, pointing a gnarled finger at William. "Get him!"


    William cursed under his breath. His face had been spotted, and now they were all after him. But escape was his priority.


    "This way!" Stuart squeaked, pointing towards a seemingly ordinary section of wall.


    William followed, his heart pounding. As he approached, the wall shimmered, revealing a hidden passage. He plunged through, the stone closing seamlessly behind him.


    "Don''t stop running!" Stuart urged, his voice barely audible over the thundering footsteps of their pursuers.


    William sprinted down the narrow corridor, his enhanced agility propelling him forward. The passage sloped upwards, leading towards the surface, towards freedom. But the pirates and fish-men were hot on his heels, their enraged shouts echoing through the tunnel.


    Suddenly, the walls around them began to tremble violently.


    "This isn''t good," Stuart said, his voice tight with fear.


    "What is it?" William gasped, his lungs burning.


    "The Kraken has awakened!" Stuart cried. "We need to get out of here, now!"


    The name struck fear into William''s heart. The Kraken, a legendary beast of immense power, was awoken. Escape was no longer just about the treasure; it was about survival.


    He pushed himself harder, his speed increasing. Glancing back, he saw that he was gaining ground on his pursuers. "Looks like I''m faster than them," he said, a glimmer of hope flickering in his eyes. "We might actually make it."


    William didn''t know how long he ran, but he didn''t stop for a single second. He glanced back occasionally to confirm that the distance between him and his pursuers was increasing ¨C and it was. Relief washed over him as he saw the light at the end of the tunnel, the exit that would lead him out of the tomb. The treasure was in his hands, and all he needed to do was escape.


    But when he finally emerged from the tomb, there was no time for celebration. He had to get out of there, and fast. His body was exhausted, however, and his speed had diminished greatly. Running through the dense forest was different from sprinting through the smooth corridors of the tomb. He had to dodge obstacles, weave between trees, and leap over fallen branches, making his escape even more challenging.


    As he ran towards the hidden cove where he''d left the ship, the ground trembled beneath his feet. The entire island seemed to shake, as if something massive was stirring beneath its surface. William knew it was the Kraken, the mythical beast that had been awakened.


    Fear lent him a burst of adrenaline, pushing him onward. He thought of Seraphina and Hemlock, his friends who were counting on him. He had to survive, had to see them again.


    But what awaited him was a sight that tore at his heart. Where the ship should have been bobbing gently in the cove, only the tip of the mast protruded from the water. The ship had sunk.


    Hemlock and Seraphina lay sprawled on the shore, their bodies battered and broken. A faint flicker of life remained in their eyes, but it was fading fast. S§×arch* The N?velFire(.)net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    William rushed to their side, kneeling beside them. "Hold on," he pleaded, his voice choked with emotion. "You''ll be alright. I''ll take care of you..."


    Seraphina''s gaze locked with his, a faint smile gracing her lips. With a trembling hand, she reached out and placed the mermaid''s tear ¨C the first ingredient they had gathered for the king''s antidote ¨C into his palm. Tears streamed down her face as her smile widened, a final act of defiance against the cruel hand of fate. Then, her eyes fluttered closed, her body still.


    William turned to Hemlock, but it was too late. His friend had already breathed his last.


    "It seems the Kraken sank the ship and killed them," Stuart said, his voice somber. "It must have gone now, as the island has stopped shaking."


    A primal scream tore from William''s throat, a raw expression of grief and rage he''d never experienced before. The Kraken had taken his friends, had destroyed his hope. Staring out at the vast expanse of blue, he vowed revenge.


    "You will die, you monstrous beast!" he swore, his voice shaking with fury.


    Despite the overwhelming emotions threatening to consume him, William knew he had to escape before the pirates and fish-men caught up. But with no ship and no allies, his situation was dire.


    "Is there anything in Jinra''s treasure that can help me?" he asked Stuart, desperation clinging to his words.


    "There might be something," Stuart replied, rummaging through the spatial bag. "Ah, here it is! An item that grants aquatic attributes. It should allow you to swim away from here."


    William''s eyes widened with hope. He opened the bag, his consciousness momentarily transported to a vast chamber filled with countless treasures. Some were tantalizingly close, while others shimmered behind impenetrable barriers, inaccessible for now.


    He quickly located the item Stuart had mentioned ¨C a small, luminescent seaweed.


    "This will transform you into a fish-man for about two days," Stuart explained. "It should be enough time to escape."


    William didn''t hesitate. He popped the seaweed into his mouth, savoring the strange, salty taste. A tingling sensation spread through his body as he felt his form shifting. Gills sprouted on his neck, his feet morphed into fins, and his skin took on a slightly scaled texture. He wasn''t a true fish-man, but the transformation was enough.


    With a deep breath, he plunged into the ocean, the cool water a welcome relief against his overheated skin. He kicked off, his new fins propelling him through the water with surprising speed. The island shrunk behind him as he swam, the shouts of his pursuers fading into the distance.


    Freedom. For now, at least.

 Chapter 145 A New Continent

    Apprehension gnawed at William as he plunged into the depths. Despite the magical seaweed''s effects, the ocean held unknown dangers. Powerful beasts could lurk beneath the waves, unseen predators ready to strike. The Kraken''s presence loomed large in his mind, but thankfully, the monstrous creature was long gone, its immense speed carrying it far from the island.Stuart, ever resourceful, conjured a bubble of air around himself, clinging to William''s back as they sped through the water. "Where to now?" William asked, his voice heavy with grief.


    "There''s another continent nearby," Stuart squeaked. "That''s the closest safe haven. Returning to your own continent would take far too long, and it''s too risky."


    He was right. William had ventured far from home, and without a ship or crew, the journey back would be perilous. He needed a place to recover, to regroup, to plan his next move. James and the others would be worried, but he had no choice. Everything had spiraled out of control.


    "How long will this seaweed''s effect last?" William asked, concern creeping into his voice.


    "A few days, I believe," Stuart replied. "But you can activate and deactivate the transformation as needed."


    A few days wouldn''t be enough to reach the other continent. According to Stuart''s calculations, it would take at least thirty. William would need another mode of transport.


    ''I''ll figure that out when I need to,'' he thought, pushing the worry aside.


    Days turned into weeks. William swam tirelessly, only stopping to snatch the occasional fish from the teeming waters. The transformation had unexpected benefits ¨C he didn''t need to sleep, and he could consume raw fish without any ill effects. It was a far cry from his usual diet, but survival was paramount.


    As the effects of the seaweed began to wane, William knew he needed a new plan. Then, on the horizon, he spotted a small fishing boat. It was impossible to know if they were heading towards the continent, but it was a chance he had to take. He observed the crew, noting their lack of strength. He felt no threat from them.


    The boat was stationary, the fishermen casting their nets into the deep. William deactivated his transformation, allowing his body to bob to the surface, feigning the helplessness of a shipwrecked sailor.


    "Look!" one of the fishermen shouted, pointing towards William. "There''s someone in the water!"


    The fishermen, startled by the sight of a man adrift in the open sea, quickly hauled in their nets and set about rescuing William. They carefully maneuvered the boat closer, their weathered faces etched with concern.


    "He seems unconscious, but he hasn''t drowned," one of them observed, relief evident in his voice. "Let''s get him aboard and wait for him to wake up."


    With practiced ease, they hoisted William onto the deck, their strong arms gently carrying him to a small cabin below. He was laid on a bunk, left to rest and recover. William, however, was feigning unconsciousness, listening intently to their conversation. Stuart remained hidden, wisely avoiding any unnecessary attention.


    After a while, William "awoke," feigning disorientation and confusion. The fishermen crowded around, eager to hear his tale.


    "My ship... it sank," William stammered, his voice weak and raspy. "My crew... they''re all gone. Some might have survived, but I got separated from them. I must have fainted..."


    "Gods above!" the fishermen exclaimed, their faces etched with pity.


    "What sank your ship?" one of them asked, his brow furrowed with concern.


    "A powerful magical beast," William replied, his voice laced with fear. "These waters are treacherous..."


    He noticed, with a surge of relief, that he understood their language, despite it being completely foreign to him.


    ''Perhaps it''s a benefit of being a summoned hero,'' he mused. ''It would make sense, considering I''m supposed to be a global figure.''


    The summoned heroes possessed unique abilities, and it seemed multilingualism was one of them. This unexpected gift would prove invaluable in navigating this new land.


    With renewed confidence, William continued his fabricated tale, weaving a story of misfortune and survival, hoping to gain the fishermen''s trust and secure passage to the mainland.


    The fishermen, their faces pale after hearing about the monstrous creature that had sunk William''s ship, readily agreed to return to the mainland.


    "I think we''ve caught enough for now," the leader declared, his gaze sweeping over the ice-laden tanks filled to the brim with their frozen catch. "We''ve been out here for days, and it''s not worth risking our lives for a few extra fish."


    These fishermen, all hailing from the same coastal village, operated as a tight-knit collective, sharing the bounty of their expeditions.


    "Aye, you''re right," another fisherman chimed in. "No need to tempt fate. We can always return in a few months."


    William, sensing their eagerness to depart, seized the opportunity. "If you don''t mind my asking," he began tentatively, "where are you headed? And would you have room for one more passenger?"


    The fishermen exchanged smiles, their initial apprehension replaced with sympathy for the shipwrecked stranger. "We''re returning to the mainland," the leader replied. "And of course you can join us! Our accommodations are humble, mind you, but you''re welcome aboard."


    "Thank you," William said, gratitude filling his voice. "I''m in your debt."


    He spent the next few days recuperating on the fishing boat, sharing meals and stories with his rescuers. He learned their names ¨C Bran, the grizzled leader with a heart of gold; Kael, the young, eager apprentice; and Torin, the gruff, seasoned fisherman with a repertoire of salty tales.


    He discovered they were from a small coastal village called Saltwind, nestled amidst the cliffs and coves of the mainland. They spoke of their families, their lives, and the challenges of earning a living from the unforgiving sea. William, in turn, shared a carefully edited version of his own story, omitting any mention of magic, time travel, or demonic swords.


    He spoke of a merchant vessel lost to a storm, a crew scattered and a captain struggling to survive. The fishermen, captivated by his tale, offered words of comfort and encouragement. William found himself enjoying their company, their simple honesty a refreshing change from the deceit and danger he''d become accustomed to.


    Finally, after what felt like an eternity at sea, the rugged coastline of the mainland emerged from the horizon. A cheer erupted from the fishermen as they pointed towards a cluster of houses nestled amidst the cliffs.


    "Saltwind!" Bran announced, a broad smile splitting his weathered face. "Welcome home, lad."


    William''s heart swelled with a mixture of anticipation and trepidation. He was stepping into a new world, a world far removed from the dangers and complexities of his own. He was a stranger in a strange land, but for the first time since embarking on this perilous quest, he felt a glimmer of hope.


    As the fishing boat sailed into the sheltered harbor, William took a deep breath, savoring the salty air and the cries of gulls circling overhead.


    Saltwind bustled with activity as the fishermen returned. Children shrieked with delight, running towards their fathers with outstretched arms. Wives, their faces etched with relief, embraced their husbands, whispering words of welcome and gratitude.


    Amidst the joyous reunions, William stood out like a sore thumb. His pale skin, unfamiliar clothes, and the lingering air of exhaustion marked him as an outsider. Saltwind was a tight-knit community, where everyone knew everyone else. A stranger did not go unnoticed.


    "Who''s that?" a curious villager asked, her eyes fixed on William.


    A ripple of whispers spread through the crowd as Bran, the leader of the fishermen, recounted William''s tale of shipwreck and survival. But amidst the expressions of sympathy, a note of caution arose.


    A gruff, older man with a thick beard and a scar bisecting his cheek pushed his way through the throng. This was Madoc, the village warrior, their protector, their sheriff ¨C the strongest and most respected man in Saltwind.


    "Bran," Madoc said, his voice deep and gravelly, "perhaps we should have a word with this stranger."


    Bran nodded, understanding the need for caution. He led William and Madoc towards a small, stone building at the edge of the village square ¨C the makeshift headquarters of Saltwind''s sole guardian.


    Inside, the room was sparsely furnished, with a rough-hewn table, a couple of chairs, and a rack displaying an assortment of weapons. Madoc gestured for William to sit, his eyes assessing the young man with a mixture of curiosity and suspicion.


    "Tell me your story, lad," Madoc instructed, his voice firm but fair. "And tell it true."


    William, ever the actor, launched into his well-rehearsed tale of misfortune and survival, omitting any details that might raise suspicion. He spoke of a merchant vessel lost to a storm, a crew scattered and a captain left to the mercy of the sea. He described the harrowing days adrift, the fear and despair, and the eventual rescue by the fishermen. Sear?h the NovelFire.net* website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Madoc listened intently, his keen eyes studying William''s every move, every flicker of emotion. He asked questions, probing for inconsistencies, searching for any hint of deception. William, however, remained calm and composed, his answers carefully crafted to deflect suspicion.


    As the interrogation drew to a close, Madoc leaned back in his chair, stroking his beard thoughtfully. "Well, lad," he finally said, "your story seems plausible enough. But I must confess, something about you doesn''t quite add up."


    Your journey continues on My Virtual Library Empire


    William''s heart skipped a beat. Had he seen through the facade?


    "I can''t put my finger on it," Madoc continued, "but there''s a certain... aura about you. A strength that doesn''t seem to fit with the tale of a shipwrecked merchant."


    William forced a chuckle, hoping to mask his growing unease. "Perhaps it''s the resilience of a survivor, sir," he replied, hoping his words sounded convincing.


    Madoc''s eyes narrowed slightly. "Perhaps," he said, his voice laced with suspicion. "But I''ll be keeping an eye on you, lad. Just to be sure."

 Chapter 146 Many Places to Explore

    After that interrogation, William returned to the streets of that small village. One of the fishermen, Bran, went to talk to him."Is there anything we can help you with? Do you know the region?" Bran asked.


    He couldn''t even imagine what William had been through being on the high seas like that. Bran just wanted to give William a helping hand.


    "Actually, I lived on an island, and I don''t know this region very well¡­ To be honest, I don''t know anything," William answered.


    His story of how he ended up there was already basically a lie, so he wanted to avoid telling too many lies and ending up being discovered.


    ''I can''t say I came from another continent¡­ That will have to do.'' He thought.


    Bran didn''t seem to find anything strange about what William had said.


    "I understand," Bran said, placing his hand on William''s shoulder, "but don''t worry. I can help you. Come."


    Bran led the way to his house, where his wife and young son were waiting. They found it strange that Bran brought a stranger to their home, but after they realized who it was, they were no longer worried.


    Actually, Bran''s son was very curious. "I heard that you survived on the high seas for days, and won against several magical beasts? Is it true?"


    William looked at Bran, and saw him smiling. "Yes, little one. I had to fight for days, and when I needed help, your father showed up. He is a great man."


    Bran''s wife was making fried fish for them. William took the opportunity to eat something with them and chat. Bran was willing to tell William all the things he needed to know.


    "Saltwind is quite small and is on the edge of the continent, as you can see," Bran said, "but the central part is very developed, however it is not easy to walk there."


    "And why is that?" William asked.


    He had no idea what this new continent he was exploring was like. In his mind, it was supposed to be similar to what he was used to.


    Considering that he arrived by the beach, and saw a green forest around him, that''s what he thought, but things weren''t exactly like that.


    "Well, it''s a big desert. It is not easy to walk there," Bran said.


    "A desert? Quite different from what I''m seeing around here," William said.


    "The central part of the continent is more desert-like, and the rest of the continent is similar to what you see around here."


    William wasn''t expecting to find a desert continent. Asura, in his mind, told him, "This continent must be where the demonic race lived. From what I know, many battles took place here and the vegetation ended up being compromised."


    "Seriously?"


    That might be a good sign. Although the demonic race at that time was practically extinct, William might have a chance to find someone or some information about them.


    Who knows, even find some magic? He wanted to learn fire and black fire magic, since both were elements that he would certainly have a very high affinity for.


    "And is it very dangerous to travel across the continent, Bran? I mean, if I want to explore other regions? At the moment I don''t know where to go. I just wanted to start making some money and travel around¡­" William asked. Discover hidden stories at My Virtual Library Empire


    Bran was a fisherman who spent most of his time either in Saltwind or at sea, but he had a lot of information. During his travels, he ended up talking to many people, so he was someone who knew the continent.


    "Look, it''s a bit dangerous, yes," Bran said, "magical beasts are everywhere when you''re outside the protected cities. But with caution and traveling with help, you can go to various places. Now, about making money, well, it depends on what you know how to do."


    "Is there any job where I can gain levels by hunting monsters and money at the same time?" William asked.


    Bran was a little surprised to hear that. "It makes sense that you survived so long in the middle of the ocean. Of course you are strong¡­ Well, there is. There are many people hiring warriors to clear regions infested with magical beasts. You can join the army too, a personal guard, open a shop to sell the bodies of the beasts you hunted¡­ anyway, many possibilities."


    William had many possibilities. He knew that he wasn''t a super strong person, but he already considered himself minimally decent. What he wanted most at that moment was to increase his strength, get money, and with that leave the continent and return from where he came.


    He needed to warn the king about what had happened. William knew that he couldn''t stay on that continent for long, but would he be able to find a means of transportation to leave there in time?


    "I understand. Well, thank you very much for all the tips," William thanked Bran.


    "You can sleep here tonight, and continue your journey tomorrow. Or you can even stay longer if you want."


    Bran was indeed a very generous person, but William didn''t plan on staying there long.


    Were the pirates and mermen still after him? If so, it wasn''t a good idea to stay there in that village full of innocents, as that could bring trouble for them.


    Therefore, he just wanted to rest and leave that place as quickly as possible, and that''s exactly what he did. William spent the night at Bran''s house, eating various good things they prepared for him.


    The time he spent there was very well spent, but the next morning, it was time for William to leave that place and continue his journey.


    The village was quite simple so they didn''t have any kind of mount to offer William, like horses. He would have to walk.


    Bran at least gave him a map. It wasn''t a complete map, but it had at least the nearest towns.


    "In these towns you will be able to find better maps," Bran said, "be careful, friend."


    William said goodbye to Bran and his family, thanking them for all their help, and then set off on the only road near that village.


    "So, where are we going now?" asked Stuart.


    The little mouse had been hiding in William''s pocket all this time, only coming out when no one was around.


    "I have no idea," said William, "maybe one of these nearby towns to find a better map, I just don''t know how I''m going to pay for one. They probably use a different kind of currency here."


    "But in a bigger city you can certainly find some work to earn some money," Stuart reminded him, "especially someone with your strength, and with my intelligence."


    "Oh, stop it," William said, rolling his eyes, "you meant with my strength and my intelligence, right?"


    "Idiot."


    Traveling without any means of transportation was quite tedious, time-consuming and tiring. Because of this, William was already quite sure that it would take a long time to reach the nearest town.


    For hours and hours the only thing he saw was the stones of the road and the dense vegetation around him. The sound of some unknown creatures was also heard by him from time to time, but nothing came and tried to attack him.


    However, he also didn''t see any type of construction, like a tavern or a house in the middle of nowhere. There came a time, near the end of the day, when he had to stop.


    "We''re going to have to stop here," William told Stuart, "I still need to get food for us, and if it gets too late at night it will be difficult."


    "Right, makes sense. I can help you with my magic to make fire, and also track prey for us. But where are we going to sleep?"


    "On the ground." S§×arch* The N?velFire(.)net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "Mercy¡­"


    William went into the forest and looked for a better place to sleep. He knew very well that sleeping near the road was not a good idea. You never know when someone with bad intentions would pass by the road at night.


    But without a tent or anything like that, it was hard to find a good place to sleep. There was no cave nearby, which meant William would have to sleep in the open.


    "I can camouflage us during the night," Stuart said, "so we can sleep without fear."


    "Seriously?"


    Stuart was proving to be a very useful magical pet, and William was beginning to understand why someone as strong as Jinra had that little mouse as a pet.


    He didn''t seem to be strong in direct combat¡ªin fact he seemed to be quite weak¡ªbut he was very useful, and for William that was enough.


    "Let''s go after something to eat first," said William.


    William and his pet rat then began to track down some creature that could be hunted that night. They didn''t want something too big, but rather something ideal for everyone to eat and have nothing left over.

 Chapter 147 Night Surprise

    It was very easy to hunt with Stuart''s help. He could sense any creature with ease. It was better than Asura, who could also already sense mana from afar.With that, William hunted about 5 small rabbits. He believed that it would be more than enough to feed him, and of course, Stuart. S§×ar?h the n??el Fire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "You eat meat too? How different," he said, "you''re a strange rat."


    "Kid, I''m a magical rat. Stop calling me a rat like I''m a common rat," Stuart complained.


    William just laughed at him. After hunting the rabbits, they returned to the place they would use as a base to spend the night.


    "Let''s take this opportunity to collect things to make the fire," William said, "can you light the fire with your magic?"


    "Yes, I can."


    Stuart was very useful indeed. They walked through the forest and picked up wood, stones and also vegetation that would serve as fuel to make the fire.


    With everything in hand, they returned to the place where they would spend the night, and began to make the fire, which took a few minutes. With Stuart''s help, it was easy to light the fire without any problems, which made everything much easier.


    The part that took a little longer was removing the skin and inedible parts of the rabbits. William had to do this alone, since Stuart had no way to help anyway.


    He threw the remains away from the camp ¡ª afraid it might attract creatures ¡ª and then cooked the rabbits in the fire.


    The smell was delicious. Much of that was precisely because William was quite hungry. Hunger ended up being the best seasoning in situations like that.


    They tasted the rabbits around the campfire, and incredibly, Stuart ate an entire rabbit!


    It was simply frightening to see that harmless little rat eat a rabbit that was bigger than him.


    "I need energy to keep my magic powerful," Stuart said, "and meat is tastier so I prefer to eat."


    William shook his head, "relax, I didn''t even say anything."


    "For now¡­"


    After eating, they kept the fire burning to ward off any animals that might appear during the night, and also to warm their bodies.


    Stuart used his magic to camouflage William, that is, it was impossible to find him there. William was calm about this because he already knew very well how good Stuart''s camouflage magic was.


    ''I don''t think any beast will be able to find us,'' he thought.


    William lay down in a hidden and soft corner ¡ª the vegetation turned the place into a makeshift bed ¡ª and then he slept.


    During the night, however, something happened. It was around 3 am when William woke up to the sound of voices.


    When he looked around him, he saw 3 people around the fire he had made the other night. These 3 people didn''t seem to be bandits or anything, but adventurers who saw the fire there and decided to use it.


    "How strange to have a fire like this in the middle of nowhere but with no one here," one of them said.


    "On the other hand, I feel that there is someone here!" a blonde woman replied.


    William didn''t know whether to talk to them, or to stay there. Would they be scared if he appeared out of nowhere?


    Before acting, William listened to what they were saying, and also felt their power level. It was nothing special. The blonde woman who had spoken was quite strong, but William was still confident that he would win if he used all his strength.


    In the end, he heard something that made him sure that maybe it would be a good idea to talk to that group of adventurers.


    The reason for this was that they talked about the carriage they were using, which would certainly be much better than having to travel around on foot.


    ''Would they let me go with them? At least for a while...'' thought William.


    The possibility of getting a ride was something that excited him, so he decided to show himself. His body slowly materialized, and the 3 adventurers jumped in fright when they saw him.


    "Calm down, relax," William said, "I woke up with you 3 talking near my fire¡­"


    The 3 adventurers gradually recovered from the scare, and then one of them spoke, "We''re sorry. We''ll get out of here and leave. We didn''t know you were here."


    "Don''t go. You can use it. I promise I''m not a forest maniac... I can even help you with camouflage to get a good night''s sleep."


    William had no idea if they would accept or not. What kept them there was the cold of the night. It was simply impossible to stay away from a fire.


    "Well, we''ll stay here then¡­" a man with short hair said.


    After the 3 had calmed down a bit, William took the opportunity to talk to them and try to find out more about each one.


    He wasn''t so interested in knowing each person''s personal life ¡ª that didn''t matter much to him. What he really wanted to know was where they were going, and what their goal was.


    Knowing this, he could find a way to try to be useful and get a ride in their caravan.


    "I''m Louise, this is my brother Alfred, and my friend Karla. We are going towards the central region of the continent," Louise said, and then added with a smile, "my brother got a place in the army! Well, actually he''s going to try, but it''s almost certain that he will."


    That was great for William. He was also heading to the central part of the continent - the dreaded desert - so he could get a ride with them.


    Of course, before that, he introduced himself.


    "My story is a little strange," he said, "I lived on an island, and during one of my boat adventures I ended up shipwrecked. I was found by some fishermen who took me to Saltwind."


    "Saltwind, I''ve heard of that village," Karla said.


    "Yes, it''s not too far from here. Anyway, it''s my first time on dry land here on the continent, and I''m heading towards the central part too, as it''s the best place to find ways to make some money. I''m out of money, out of a ship and out of a crew. And honestly, maybe I''d rather build a life here, and not be stuck on the oceans again."


    William told the whole story ¡ª which was partly true ¡ª and tried to sound as truthful as possible. From the look of the adventurers, they seemed to have believed the things he said.


    "We can give you a ride," Louise said, "it''s better to travel as a team than alone. There are dangerous parts on these roads, and we can protect you!"


    "That would be great! I''m not very good at combat. But I have this magical friend of mine here who is very useful," William said.


    Stuart came out of his pocket, and the two girls loved him.


    "How cute! What''s his name?" Karla asked.


    Stuart then said, "Stuart."


    Everyone was silent when they heard that. It was very rare for a magical beast to speak. William was afraid that they would suspect him of having a beast like that, but the reaction was actually the opposite.


    Louise picked up Stuart and gave him a hug, "so cute! He talks!"


    William could only notice how Louise was squeezing Stuart to her chest.


    ''Lucky bastard rat...'' he thought.


    They talked for a bit, but everyone there wanted to rest. During the journey, it was common for one of them to act as a lookout while two slept, meaning there was always one person who was much more tired.


    However, with William and Stuart, things changed! Stuart used his camouflage magic on all of them, and with that, they could sleep peacefully.


    The 3 adventurers passed out. They slept for a long time, waking up only around noon. It was the first time in a long time that they had a good night''s sleep.


    William, on the other hand, woke up earlier and rekindled the fire, ensuring it would keep burning through the morning. He also hunted down another creature for them to eat.


    Not just meat. He also picked several fruits. Most he had never seen in his life, and was hoping the 3 adventurers could tell him if they were poisonous or not.


    Louise was the first to wake up. When she realized how late it was, she was startled.


    "My god, we slept for a long time!" she said.


    William laughed, "actually, you were the one who slept the least. Your brother and your friend are still snoring over there."


    "And good morning. Want something to eat?" William asked.


    "Yes, please."


    "Do you know which of these are edible?"


    Explore new worlds at My Virtual Library Empire


    Louise saw several scattered fruits that William had collected in the morning. Luckily for them, they were all edible, and quite good actually.


    "You picked all this up in the morning? You''re skilled," Louise praised him.


    William pointed to a creature that was dead, "not only that, but I hunted these animals too."


    She was genuinely impressed by William''s skills, and was wondering who he really was.

 Chapter 148 Last City before the Desert

    Alfred and Karla were also surprised when they woke up and saw all those things ready for them to eat. In fact, they even thought it was too much."All this for breakfast? I''m not used to eating so well," said Alfred.


    Despite having said that, he took the opportunity to eat a lot, taking the fruits and also the meat that William had prepared on the fire.


    William had already eaten before they woke up - he and Louise - so he just waited for them, and of course, chatted.


    "It seems like it''s been a while since you''ve slept well," he said.


    Alfred, in good spirits, said, "you bet. First time in days that the 3 of us have managed to sleep at the same time. Keeping watch sucks."


    Taking turns meant that one of them would always have to face the day sleepy, until it was time to stop again to sleep. But with William''s help, the 3 of them were able to rest, and because of that, they already trusted William much more.


    "What about your carriage? Isn''t there a danger of someone finding it and stealing it?" William asked.


    "I don''t think there''s a problem," said Alfred, "we hid it very well. But we couldn''t get here with it."


    After William said that, they started to worry a little and reflect on the matter. Could someone have stolen their carriage?


    Because of that thought, they decided to return to where the carriage was as quickly as possible, just to be sure. William wasn''t against it, as he wanted to continue his journey, but this time, sitting in the carriage.


    They put out the fire and went together to where they had hidden their carriage. It wasn''t very far from there.


    "We used the vegetation to hide it," Alfred said, "the creatures pulling the carriage are somewhere else." Continue your journey on My Virtual Library Empire


    William had no idea what kind of creatures Alfred was talking about. He was already getting used to seeing carriages being pulled by other creatures, not horses.


    And he was right. The creature pulling the carriage was a kind of huge dog, with a brown coat that appeared to be the color of sand.


    Alfred had tied them up in a more secluded spot that seemed safe. Both creatures were fine.


    William was impressed by the size of those dogs. They were bigger than wolves, much bigger. They were formidable magical beasts. S§×arch* The n?velFire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "These kinds of creatures are common around here," Alfred explained, "they are very strong, they hardly get tired, and they are the best for walking in the desert. I think there is no better land mount than them. I mean, there must be, but it''s a lot more expensive, right?"


    William was very happy to have found those three. In addition to being willing to travel with him - and give him a ride in the carriage - they still knew a lot of things, things he didn''t know about that continent.


    In other words, it was a great opportunity to learn from them, and not be completely lost during the trip.


    Alfred went to the dogs and started to untie them. "Can you help me here?" Alfred asked.


    Now that another man was there, Alfred wanted to take some of the heavy lifting off his sister Louise, and Karla too. William saw no problem in helping, especially considering that he was a guest there.


    The two worked together to remove those desert dogs and take them to the carriage. There, they tied them in front of the carriage, leaving everything ready to continue the journey.


    Louise was the one who decided to give a tour of the carriage, which was actually quite simple. It was only one compartment, but the space was enough for them. With William''s presence, the space became a little smaller, but nothing that would hinder it that much.


    William looked around, puzzled. "And where are your supplies?" he asked.


    Alfred pulled back a cloth that was hiding several crates. "We don''t have much," he said, "but it should last for a few days."


    He explained that supplies weren''t a problem. They were currently traveling through an area with few taverns or places to replenish their stores, but that would change in the coming days.


    They were the ones who knew the surrounding area, so William trusted them.


    "I''ll go," Alfred said, climbing into the driver''s seat of the carriage.


    Someone had to control the desert dogs, but it was much better to be up there guiding them than walking, as William had been doing before. He could finally rest his legs and talk to the others while Alfred drove.


    "What''s our first destination?" he asked.


    Louise was the one who answered. She seemed to be in charge, at least from William''s perspective.


    She grabbed a map ¨C which was far more detailed than William''s ¨C and showed him the locations they would visit first.


    "We''ll stop here first," Louise explained, pointing at a spot on the map with her finger. "It''s a good place to get supplies and also enjoy some lakes and beautiful views. After that, it''s all desert, and it will be harder going, so we want to enjoy ourselves first."


    William nodded. "Can I see the map?"


    "Of course."


    He took the map and studied it, eager to learn more about their destinations. It was just as the fisherman in Saltwind Village had told him: the main part of the continent was a desert. The rest, well, it had more forests the farther one went from the central region. But out of all the details, something else caught William''s attention.


    "What''s this area right here?" he asked, pointing at the northern part of the map.


    The area he was pointing to was darkened on the map, the name "Ancient Lost Valley" scrawled across it in faded ink.


    "Oh, that..." Louise trailed off, her voice a little shaky. "That''s one of the most dangerous places on the continent. Some say demons lived there, but I think that''s just stories to scare people away."


    William, of course, was immediately intrigued. It seemed that what Asura had said was true: demons had indeed lived on this continent. He already felt the pull of the Ancient Lost Valley, a desire to explore its depths despite the rumored dangers. He was starting to think that the risk was worth it.


    "Maybe later," he thought to himself. He had just arrived; there was much to see and do before venturing into such a perilous region.


    And what a region it was! The next few days were a blur of green. They traveled through dense forests, the sunlight filtering through the leaves like shimmering gold. The air was alive with the sounds of birdsong and the rustling of leaves. Sparkling streams crisscrossed their path, and the scent of wildflowers filled the air. It was all so different from the dry, rocky terrain he was used to.


    They followed a winding road, occasionally catching glimpses of clearings where deer grazed peacefully. Even the desert dogs seemed to enjoy the change of scenery, their hooves thudding softly on the damp earth.


    In the evenings, they camped beneath the stars, the crackling fire providing warmth and a sense of security. They shared stories and laughter, their voices blending with the nocturnal symphony of the forest. William learned about their lives ¨C Alfred, the gruff one, had a passion for carving intricate figures from wood, while Louise, with her sharp wit, secretly dreamed of becoming a scholar.


    He felt a growing connection with these people. They were becoming friends, bound by their shared journey and experiences.


    Finally, they emerged from the forest into a sun-drenched valley. Nestled amidst rolling hills and shimmering lakes, the city of Whisperwind beckoned. Excitement bubbled up inside William as they approached. The city walls, built from pale stone and draped with ivy, shimmered in the sunlight.


    Whisperwind was a haven of tranquility. Cobbled streets wound through colorful houses with flower-filled window boxes. The air was filled with the gentle murmur of conversation and the laughter of children playing in the squares. Fountains splashed in courtyards, and the scent of baking bread wafted from open doorways.


    They found a charming inn with climbing roses adorning its facade. After settling in and seeing to the desert dogs, they gathered in the cozy common room, eager to enjoy a hot meal and the company of others.


    "This city is packed with people," William commented, taking a sip of his tea.


    "Of course it is," Louise replied. "There are some beautiful lakes around here, so people come to relax. And it''s also the last city before the desert starts."


    Whisperwind was their final stop before venturing into the arid expanse. They planned to enjoy their time there for a few days, relaxing and restocking their supplies before continuing their journey.


    As they chatted and ate in the tavern, William noticed someone staring at him intently. The person wasn''t even trying to hide it, making William feel a bit uncomfortable.

 Chapter 149 Tempting Offer

    William ignored the intrusive stare and enjoyed the evening with his new friends. They ate, drank, and finally retired for the night to their rooms on the second floor of the tavern."Are we really going into the desert?" Stuart complained. "I don''t like the idea of being in the desert."


    "I don''t like the idea either," William admitted, "but we must go if we want to earn money. Plus, I want to go to that northern region of the continent."


    Stuart was confused. "You mean the most dangerous region that Louise said demons used to live in? Why do you want to go there?"


    The little rat didn''t know about William''s demonic powers yet. William pondered whether he should tell him or not, and decided to be truthful. They had a contract, and lying didn''t seem like a good way to start their partnership.


    "I have some sort of demonic bloodline," William revealed. "That''s why I want to go there."


    Stuart''s jaw dropped. "Demonic bloodline?! You''re kidding, right?" He scurried closer to William, his tiny nose twitching. "What kind? Can you, like, summon flames? Or maybe control shadows? Do you have horns? Wait, can I see your teeth?" He practically vibrated with excitement, his questions tumbling over each other.


    William chuckled at the barrage, finding Stuart''s enthusiasm endearing. "Whoa, slow down, Stuart. I don''t have all the answers myself. To be honest, I don''t know much about it at all. That''s actually why I want to go to that region ¨C to learn more about my heritage."


    Stuart, though still bursting with curiosity, seemed to accept this. He settled down, his eyes gleaming with a mix of awe and excitement. "Wow, this is incredible! A real-life demon! I mean, not a real demon, but you know what I mean..." He trailed off, muttering to himself about the potential for amazing stories.


    With a smile, William finally bid his companions goodnight and drifted off to sleep, his dreams filled with visions of the mysterious Ancient Lost Valley and the secrets it might hold.


    The next morning, William and Louise set out to explore Whisperwind, the city waking around them with the sounds of vendors setting up their stalls and children chasing pigeons through the cobbled streets. Their first stop was a clothing shop, a quaint little place tucked away on a side street. Inside, bolts of fabric in a rainbow of colors lined the walls, and the air was thick with the scent of fresh linen and dyes.


    Louise, with her keen eye for fashion and practicality, guided William through the racks, helping him choose clothes suitable for the upcoming desert journey. They settled on loose-fitting trousers made from a lightweight, breathable linen in a pale sand color, along with several long-sleeved shirts in shades of ochre and terracotta.


    These would protect him from the harsh sun while allowing air to circulate. He also acquired a wide-brimmed hat woven from dried reeds, its underside lined with a dark cloth to reduce glare. Finally, he chose a sturdy pair of leather boots with thick soles to insulate his feet from the scorching sand.


    Leaving the shop, they ventured into the bustling market square, a vibrant tapestry of sights, sounds, and smells. Stalls overflowed with exotic fruits in vibrant hues, fragrant spices piled high in woven baskets, and handcrafted goods of every imaginable kind. William marveled at the intricate silver jewelry, the beautifully painted pottery, and the colorful textiles woven with intricate patterns.


    Louise, who had visited Whisperwind several times before, led him through the maze of stalls, pointing out the best places to find durable travel gear. They replenished their supplies with sturdy waterskins made from tanned hide, sacks of dried fruits and nuts, and coils of rope. William also purchased a finely crafted knife with a bone handle, a tool that could prove useful in a variety of situations.


    As lunchtime approached, their stomachs rumbling, they made their way to a charming restaurant tucked away in a quiet corner of the city. The aroma of roasted meats and freshly baked bread wafted from the open windows, promising a delicious meal. They found Alfred and Karla already seated at a table by the window, engrossed in conversation.


    "Ah, there you are!" Alfred greeted them, a rare smile gracing his weathered face. "Karla and I have been gathering some information about the desert."


    Karla, who had been studying a map spread out on the table, looked up. "We''ve learned that the safest route is to follow the old trade roads, even though it''s a bit longer. Apparently, there are hidden oases along the way where we can replenish our water supply."


    "We also talked to a few merchants who recommended hiring a desert guide," Alfred added. "They say it''s worth the expense to have someone who knows the terrain and can navigate the dangers."


    "That''s a good idea," Louise agreed. "A guide could also help us avoid sandstorms and other hazards. Do you have any leads on finding one?" Discover hidden content at My Virtual Library Empire


    "Actually, yes," Karla replied, pulling a crumpled piece of parchment from her pocket. "The innkeeper mentioned a man named Kadir who''s supposed to be one of the best guides in the region. He''s often found at the Golden Oasis tavern, just outside the city gates."


    "Kadir, you say?" Louise pondered, tapping a finger on her chin. "Hmm, I''ve heard that name before. But is he trustworthy? We don''t want to end up with a guide who leads us astray or, worse, tries to rob us."


    Karla nodded in agreement. "That''s a valid concern. According to the innkeeper, Kadir has a solid reputation. He''s known for his knowledge of the desert, his tracking skills, and his honesty. Apparently, he''s guided many caravans safely across the sands."


    Alfred, ever the pragmatist, interjected, "But what about the cost? These experienced guides usually come with a hefty price tag."


    Karla sighed. "That''s true. The innkeeper warned us that Kadir''s fees are quite high. We may end up spending more than we anticipated."


    A shadow fell over their table, interrupting their conversation. They looked up to see a tall, imposing man with an air of wealth and authority standing before them. He was dressed in fine silks, adorned with glittering jewels, and a meticulously groomed beard framed his stern face. His attire, though luxurious, had a distinctly desert flair, with flowing robes and a turban adorned with a shimmering emerald.


    "Excuse me," the man began, his voice deep and resonant, "I couldn''t help but overhear your conversation. I am Lord Jabari, and I am in need of assistance. I seek individuals with¡­ certain skills¡­ to undertake a task for me. It is a matter of some urgency, and I am willing to pay handsomely for your services."


    Intrigued, and with their need for funds fresh in their minds, the group exchanged glances. William, sensing an opportunity, spoke up. "We are indeed skilled travelers, Lord Jabari. Perhaps you could tell us more about this task?"


    Lord Jabari''s eyes swept over them, assessing their potential. "It is a delicate matter," he explained, lowering his voice. "I require a group to venture into the desert and retrieve a valuable artifact that was stolen from me. It is being held by a band of dangerous outlaws who are hiding in a remote oasis. The journey will be perilous, but the reward will be substantial."


    He paused, letting his words sink in. "I understand that you are planning to hire a guide named Kadir. I know him well. He is indeed skilled, but as you mentioned, his fees are exorbitant. If you agree to undertake this task for me, I will cover the cost of hiring Kadir as your guide, in addition to a generous reward upon successful completion of the mission."


    The offer was tempting, especially considering their financial constraints. William, ever drawn to adventure and intrigued by the prospect of retrieving a stolen artifact, leaned forward. "Tell us more, Lord Jabari. What kind of artifact are we talking about?"


    Lord Jabari leaned closer, his voice barely a whisper. "The artifact is an ancient relic, passed down through my family for generations. Its loss is a grave matter, not only for its monetary value but also for its historical and¡­ spiritual significance. I cannot divulge its true nature just yet, but suffice it to say it is of great importance to me."


    He paused, his gaze fixed on William. "I sense a certain¡­ aura about you, young man. A strength that goes beyond the physical. I believe you possess the qualities necessary to succeed in this endeavor." Sear?h the N??elFir§×.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    William felt a surge of unease. He didn''t want to draw attention to himself, especially not to his combat abilities. He needed to maintain a low profile, at least for now.


    "You are mistaken, Lord Jabari," William replied, forcing a casual shrug. "I am just a simple traveler, seeking my fortune in these lands."


    Lord Jabari raised an eyebrow, a flicker of doubt in his eyes. "Are you sure, young man? I have a keen sense for these things. I rarely misjudge a person''s potential."


    William held his ground. "I appreciate your confidence, Lord Jabari, but I assure you, I am nothing special." He hoped his companions wouldn''t contradict him. He had been careful to conceal his true strength from them, and he wanted to keep it that way, at least for the time being.


    Lord Jabari studied him for a moment, then gave a slight nod. "Very well. Perhaps I was mistaken. Nevertheless, I still believe you and your companions are capable of completing this task for me."


    He continued, "I will provide you with a map to the outlaws'' hideout and a letter of introduction to Kadir. Meet me at the Golden Oasis tavern tomorrow at dawn, and we will finalize the details."

 Chapter 150 Reaching the Desert

    After Lord Jabari departed, the group huddled together, their conversation hushed and intense."Do we trust this man?" Alfred asked, his brow furrowed with suspicion. "I don''t know if it will be a good idea or not¡­"


    Despite the tempting offer, one must always be wary of easy money. Lord Jabari was not only willing to pay a lot for their services, but he would also secure them a letter to Kadir, a renowned and expensive guide they had been hoping to hire.


    Karla and Louise were also deep in thought. Karla, ever resourceful, had a suggestion. "If this Lord Jabari has money, then he is certainly known around here. We can try to get some information about him before going to bed. It won''t hurt, right?" S~ea??h the N?vel(F)ire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "I think she has a point," William agreed. "We can ask around about this Jabari guy. Certainly, people know about him here, or about this artifact that he lost."


    A consensus seemed to form around the table. The only one who remained silent was Louise. She was constantly staring at William, a thoughtful expression on her face. Louise knew, with a growing certainty, that William was hiding something, especially after witnessing Lord Jabari''s peculiar praise.


    "Let''s start with the obvious," William suggested, nodding towards the barkeep who was polishing glasses with a practiced hand. "Barkeeps always have their ears to the ground. He might know something about Lord Jabari."


    They approached the bar, and Karla, with her disarming smile, struck up a conversation. "Good sir," she began, "we were just discussing Lord Jabari, a most impressive gentleman. We were wondering if you could tell us anything about him."


    The barkeep, a stout man with a bushy mustache and a twinkle in his eye, leaned in conspiratorially. "Ah, Lord Jabari," he said, his voice a low rumble. "A wealthy and powerful man, that one. Owns a lot of land around these parts, and he''s got his fingers in many pies. But he''s fair, most folks would say. And generous, too. If he''s offering you work, you''ll be well compensated."


    "That''s good to hear," Alfred said, "but what about his character? Is he trustworthy?"


    The barkeep stroked his mustache thoughtfully. "As trustworthy as any lord, I suppose. He''s got a reputation for being a man of his word. But he''s also known to be¡­ demanding. If you take on a job for him, you''d best be sure you can deliver."


    They thanked the barkeep and moved on, venturing out into the bustling streets of Whisperwind. They questioned merchants, innkeepers, and even a few street performers, gathering snippets of information about Lord Jabari. The overall picture that emerged was of a man who was indeed wealthy and influential, with a reputation for fairness and generosity, but also for a certain ruthlessness in his dealings. No one mentioned anything about a stolen artifact, however.


    They returned to the inn, their heads buzzing with information. They gathered in their room, sharing what they had learned and debating the merits of accepting Lord Jabari''s offer.


    "It seems he''s not a bad sort," Karla summarized. "A bit stern, perhaps, and definitely powerful, but not inherently evil or anything."


    "But what about this artifact?" Louise mused. "Why all the secrecy? It must be something truly valuable, or dangerous, for him to be so tight-lipped about it."


    William, who had been unusually quiet throughout the discussion, finally spoke up. "I say we take the job," he declared. "It''s an opportunity to earn some much-needed coin, and it sounds like an adventure. What do you say?"


    His companions, sensing his eagerness, readily agreed. They would meet Lord Jabari at dawn and embark on this new and potentially perilous quest.


    Exhausted from their information-gathering expedition, the group decided to turn in for the night. Sleep came easily, filled with dreams of desert adventures and mysterious artifacts.


    The next morning, they rose before dawn, a sense of anticipation hanging thick in the air. After a quick breakfast of bread and fruit, they gathered their belongings and set out for the Golden Oasis Tavern, located just outside the city gates.


    The tavern was a low-slung building made of sun-baked mud bricks, its walls adorned with faded murals depicting scenes of desert life. A cluster of sturdy, exotic-looking camels were tethered outside, their saddles and packs laden with supplies. Lord Jabari was waiting for them, his expression stern but expectant. Beside him stood several figures clad in desert garb, their faces weathered and tanned from years spent under the scorching sun.


    "Ah, you have arrived," Lord Jabari greeted them, his voice a low rumble. "I see you are eager to begin. Excellent. Allow me to introduce you to your guides." He gestured towards the figures beside him. "These men are among the most experienced desert travelers in the region. They will ensure your safe passage across the sands."


    William noticed that the camels were unlike any he had seen before. They were larger and more muscular than ordinary camels, and their eyes seemed to shimmer with an unnatural light. He sensed a faint magical aura emanating from them.


    Lord Jabari, as if reading his thoughts, explained, "These are no ordinary camels. They are specially bred and trained for desert travel. They can withstand the harshest conditions and navigate the most treacherous terrain. With these magnificent creatures, you will reach your destination swiftly and safely."


    He then presented them with a rolled-up parchment. "This map," he said, "will guide you to the outlaws'' hideout. It is a remote oasis, well hidden and heavily guarded. Be warned, these outlaws are ruthless and dangerous. Do not underestimate them."


    Finally, Lord Jabari revealed the true nature of the stolen artifact. "The object you are to retrieve," he said, his voice dropping to a conspiratorial whisper, "is an ancient book. A book of immense power and knowledge. It must not fall into the wrong hands."


    "An ancient book?" William frowned, curiosity piqued. "What kind of book? What sort of knowledge does it hold?" He couldn''t help but press for more information. An ancient book of power sounded intriguing, and perhaps a little dangerous.


    Lord Jabari''s demeanor shifted. A flicker of annoyance crossed his face, and his voice took on a sharper edge. "That is not your concern," he stated firmly. "Your task is to retrieve the book, not to question its contents. Focus on your mission, and leave the rest to me."


    William, sensing the lord''s displeasure, backed down. He exchanged a quick glance with Louise, who gave him a subtle nod of agreement. It seemed Lord Jabari was not one to be trifled with. They would have to be content with the information he had provided, for now.


    With a final farewell and a stern reminder of the importance of their mission, Lord Jabari stepped aside. The group approached their waiting camels, their guides standing ready to assist. William, feeling a mix of excitement and apprehension, reached out to stroke the velvety nose of the camel he had been assigned. Its eyes, a deep amber color, seemed to hold an ancient wisdom.


    "This one''s called Raj," the lead guide said, noticing William''s interest. "He''s strong and sure-footed. He''ll take good care of you."


    William smiled, feeling a sense of connection with the majestic creature. He swung himself onto the saddle, surprised by the camel''s height and the unexpected sway as he settled into place. He looked out across the landscape, a mix of anticipation and curiosity stirring within him.


    The guides, with practiced ease, mounted their own camels and gathered the reins. With a series of guttural commands and gentle nudges, the camels lurched forward, their padded feet carrying them away from the bustling city. The journey had begun.


    As they left Whisperwind behind, William realized that the desert was not as close as he had imagined. They had several days of travel ahead of them before they even reached the edge of the vast sandy expanse. The landscape gradually shifted from lush greenery to rolling hills and dry grasslands. The air grew warmer, and the sun beat down with increasing intensity.


    He glanced at his companions. Louise, ever observant, seemed lost in thought, her gaze fixed on the horizon. Alfred, stoic as ever, focused on the journey ahead, his hands steady on the reins. Karla, however, seemed to be enjoying the adventure, her face alight with excitement as she peppered one of the guides with questions about the desert.


    "How much farther to the desert?" William asked the lead guide, whose name, he had learned, was Omar.


    Omar, a weathered man with eyes that seemed to hold the wisdom of the sands, pointed towards the horizon. "See that line of shimmering light in the distance? That is the beginning of the Great Sand Sea. We will reach it by nightfall."


    A ripple of excitement passed through the group. The desert, with all its mystery and allure, was finally within reach.


    As the sun began its descent, they approached the edge of the sandy expanse.


    Omar, with a practiced eye, chose a sheltered spot between two towering dunes where they would make camp for the night. The camels were tethered and relieved of their burdens, their saddles and packs carefully laid aside. The guides, with practiced efficiency, unloaded supplies and began setting up camp. Tents were erected, providing much-needed shade from the setting sun, and a fire was kindled, its flames casting a warm glow against the encroaching darkness.

 Chapter 151 Left Behind

    Seated around the crackling campfire, William''s gaze lingered on Omar, the most seasoned of their guides and the one who seemed to know more about the bandit hideout than anyone else. The firelight cast flickering shadows on Omar''s weathered face as he leaned back, his expression unreadable."Just how dangerous is it going to be to retrieve that artifact from the bandit hideout?" William asked, his voice steady but laced with an edge of unease.


    His companions froze mid-bite and lowered their drinks, their attention snapping to Omar. This wasn''t just another casual conversation around the fire¡ªit was a matter of life and death. The success of their mission, and perhaps their survival, hinged on the information Omar was about to share.


    Omar took a long, deliberate swig of his beer before answering, his eyes narrowing as if weighing his words. "Dangerous enough to make you rethink your life choices, boy. You''re looking at 30 to 40 bandits, maybe more. And their leader? He''s not the type you want to cross without a solid plan. Brute force won''t cut it this time."


    The unspoken warning hung heavy in the air: charging in through the front gate would be suicide. William clenched his jaw, trying to push down the rising knot of anxiety in his chest. Overthinking wouldn''t help¡ªnot yet, at least. He needed to see the hideout for himself, to study its layout, count the bandits, and figure out their patrol patterns. Only then could he start piecing together a plan that didn''t end with all of them dead.


    The night had been mentally draining for William. No matter how hard he tried to push thoughts of the bandits out of his mind, they kept creeping back in, relentless and unwelcome.


    The desert night was cold, and after everyone had retreated to their tents, Louise appeared. She stood in front of William''s tent, her silhouette framed by the faint glow of the dying campfire.


    "Can we talk for a moment?"


    Of all his companions, William knew Louise was the most suspicious of him. Yet, turning her away would only make him seem even more suspicious.


    "Of course, come in," William said, his voice calm but guarded.


    Louise ducked slightly and stepped into the leather tent that William and the others were using. She sat down beside him on the ground, her movements deliberate but uneasy.


    William remained silent, his eyes fixed on her. She was the one who had come to talk, after all, not the other way around.


    "Don''t you think this mission is too risky?" she asked, her voice low but urgent. "I know we need the money, and having the best guide to cross the desert is important, but there are other ways to earn money. And we could always hire a cheaper guide."


    Her words had merit, but unlike the others, William needed the money. He was stranded in an unfamiliar continent, and he had to find a way to leave. Sure, he had a few goals before he could go¡ªlike exploring that place where demons were said to have lived long ago¡ªbut again, for that, he needed money.


    "I do believe it''s risky, but that''s exactly why we''re here, right?" William said, his tone calm but firm.


    Louise, however, saw things differently. "Look, I''m going to be honest with you. Thank you for everything you''ve done for us, and we agreed to give you a ride to the central part of the desert, but this is too much. Remember, you''re not the one leading this group. You''re someone we found on the road and decided to help after you helped us."


    William knew exactly where this conversation was heading. He wasn''t angry about it¡ªshe was speaking the truth, after all. He didn''t have the authority to make decisions or dictate what the group should do.


    "I understand¡­" William said quietly.


    "Come back with us? It''ll be impossible for you to get the artifact alone," she insisted. "We can find other ways to earn money."


    Despite her suspicions that William might be more powerful than he let on, she had no proof. And according to William himself, he wasn''t particularly strong in combat.


    "I''m sorry, Louise, but I really need this money," William said. "I think it might be time for us to part ways."


    Louise was taken aback. She had been certain William would agree to return with them. Risking his life for money didn''t seem worth it.


    "I see¡­ Well, at least I came to warn you and try to convince you. I guess this will help me sleep a little better if something happens."


    She then moved closer and hugged William. "Take care, okay? Maybe we''ll meet again in the desert capital." S§×ar?h the N??eFire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "I will. You all take care too. This desert is dangerous."


    After that, Louise left. Stuart, William''s small magical rat, peeked out from his pocket and said, "Now that we''re alone, the reward money is all ours. Maybe this is for the best. Besides, this way they won''t be putting themselves in too much danger."


    "You have a point," William said, "but we can''t forget that they were decent in combat too. That means taking on that bandit hideout alone will be even harder."


    Stuart tried to reassure him. "Let''s think about that when we get there. Besides, I''m here to help you, so you''re not alone, my dear friend."


    "Thank you¡­"


    After a while, William lay down on his makeshift bed inside the tent and finally managed to fall asleep. By morning, he received the news that some of the guides who had been with them had returned, taking his former companions with them.


    Omar was still there. "Looks like your friends thought better of it and left. Are you still planning to stay?"


    He couldn''t believe that a young man like William was willing to risk his life to complete a mission proposed by some lord¡ªall for money.


    "I''m staying," William replied firmly.


    "Alright. Let''s get moving, then."


    Everyone who remained worked together to pack up the tents, put out the campfire, and prepare for the journey.


    Before leaving the site, they ate a quick meal and double-checked that everything was in order. Now, they had truly entered the desert.


    The situation had just gotten more complicated.


    The speed at which they were traveling had drastically decreased, not because of the terrain, but because they were navigating the treacherous sands of the desert.


    However, it wasn''t the sand itself that slowed them down. They were riding camels, but these were no ordinary beasts¡ªthey were magical creatures, perfectly suited for traversing such harsh environments. The real problem was the desert''s inhabitants: dangerous, unpredictable creatures that lurked beneath the surface or roamed the dunes.


    Omar and the others accompanying William were seasoned guides, tasked with ensuring a safe passage through the desert. They knew the land like the back of their hands, moving with an ease that left William in awe. He tried to understand their methods, knowing such knowledge could benefit him greatly, but they guarded their secrets closely.


    It was clear they were using some form of magic to navigate. Omar could read the desert like an open book, spotting tracks and signs invisible to the untrained eye. He effortlessly identified the safest paths, while William often saw nothing but endless sand.


    "We''ll head east for a while longer before returning to the main route," Omar announced, his voice calm and authoritative.


    With the guidance of these skilled navigators, William eventually arrived at a small, notorious town. This settlement was infamous for being a haven for criminals and outlaws.


    "The bandits'' hideout is near this town. We''ll leave you here," Omar said, his tone firm and final.


    William''s face twisted in confusion. "Wait, you''re not staying to help me get back? How am I supposed to return on my own?"


    Omar shrugged, unmoved. "Our lord only ordered us to bring you here. The return journey is your responsibility. I''m just following orders. Sorry, kid. You might find other guides in this town, but be careful¡ªmost of them are bandits."


    With that, Omar and his companions turned and left, leaving William standing alone at the edge of the town. He felt a pang of betrayal. The lord who had sent him on this mission had conveniently omitted the part about being stranded in the middle of nowhere. But William knew better than to take his frustration out on Omar and his men. They were just following orders.


    "Calm down, we''ll figure this out," Stuart, his ever-reliable companion, chimed in. "I''ve been observing Omar closely. I think I''ve picked up on some of the magic he was using to navigate the desert."


    "Really?" William asked, hope flickering in his voice.


    Stuart had proven himself invaluable time and time again, his mastery of support magic often saving them from dire situations. His words brought a sense of relief to William, who took a deep breath and steadied himself.


    Before entering the town, William donned a long brown cloak with a hood, concealing anything that might draw attention. His demonic sword, Asura, was hidden beneath the cloak, its ornate sheath replaced with a plain, unremarkable one. He couldn''t afford to stand out in a place like this.


    The town had no guards at its entrance, and it was clear that anyone could come and go as they pleased. The moment William stepped inside, he was met with the sight of shady characters lurking in every corner. The air was thick with tension, and the atmosphere was unmistakably hostile.


    ''This place is going to be trouble¡­'' William thought, his hand instinctively brushing against the hilt of his concealed sword. He would need to tread carefully if he wanted to survive long enough to find a way back.

 Chapter 152 Finding Information about the Bandits

    William stepped into the city, the oppressive weight of its darkness settling upon him like a shroud. Night had fallen, but the streets still teemed with a disconcerting number of figures, their faces obscured by deep hoods, just like his own. He felt a prickle of unease as several pairs of eyes flickered towards him from beneath those concealing shadows, marking him as an outsider, a potential target.With each step on the uneven cobblestones, a chilling sensation crept down his spine¡ªthe feeling of being watched, hunted. Perhaps it was just his paranoia, a natural consequence of venturing into this den of thieves and cutthroats. But William adhered to a strict philosophy: expect the worst, prepare for the worst. He wouldn''t allow himself to be caught off guard.


    The ramshackle buildings lining the streets, haphazardly stacked upon each other, spoke of a city born not from careful planning but from desperation and lawlessness. This was no civilized kingdom outpost; this was a haven built by bandits, for bandits.


    "Where to first?" William muttered under his breath, scanning the dimly lit alleys and shadowy doorways. No place seemed safe, and his instincts proved correct.


    A figure materialized from the gloom, a glint of steel flashing in their hand as they pressed a dagger against his back. "Hand over everything valuable," the voice hissed, rough and demanding.


    William could sense the meager trickle of magical power emanating from his assailant. This was no formidable foe. With a swift, fluid motion, he spun around, seizing the attacker''s wrist in an iron grip, rendering them immobile.


    Surprise flickered across the would-be thief''s face, quickly replaced by a nervous attempt at a placating smile. "Whoa there, friend," they stammered, "Just messing with you, haha!"


    Who would be foolish enough to believe such a blatant lie?


    While being accosted at knifepoint wasn''t ideal, William saw an opportunity. He fixed the bandit with an icy stare. "I think we need to have a little chat."


    Disarming the man, William dragged him into a nearby alley, its darkness swallowing them whole. The lack of security in this city, while disconcerting, was proving rather convenient.


    "You''re going to tell me everything I need to know," William''s voice cut through the silence, sharp and cold, "and I''ll know if you''re lying."


    Even in this precarious situation, the bandit''s bravado remained. "And why would I do that? Death is inevitable in my line of work. You can''t threaten me with what''s already a certainty."


    A chilling smile played on William''s lips. "Death? No, my friend. You''re far from dying by my hand. But that doesn''t mean you won''t suffer."


    The bandit scoffed, mistaking William''s words for empty threats. Surely, this young man wouldn''t have the stomach for true cruelty. He was wrong.


    William retrieved the fallen dagger and began to systematically carve into the bandit''s flesh. Each cut was precise, agonizing, yet carefully calculated to avoid any vital areas. The man''s screams echoed through the alley, pleas for help that went unanswered.


    Passersby glanced into the alley, their eyes widening at the gruesome scene, but none dared to intervene. In this city, minding your own business was the key to survival.


    After what felt like an eternity of pain, the bandit finally broke. "I''ll tell you anything! Just make it stop!"


    "Not so tough now, are you?" William said, retrieving a cloth and tossing it to the man.


    "Now, let''s start with a simple question. Anything I should be particularly worried about in this city?"


    This city was a viper''s nest of rogues and scoundrels. While most were weak compared to William, there were bound to be powerful figures lurking in the shadows. He needed to tread carefully.


    "There are some strong individuals here, but if you keep your head down, you should be fine. The hostility is usually reserved for the weak. If you project strength, you''ll be left alone, maybe even find some opportunities."


    "Good. And what do you know about the bandit hideout nearby? Northeast of here, I believe."


    The hideout was William''s ultimate objective, the place where he would face a gauntlet of bandits and retrieve the artifact his lord desired.


    "You mean the Desert Serpents'' lair? Bad idea, friend. Their leader is formidable, and most of their members are no slouches either," the bandit warned.


    William had anticipated as much, but confirmation was always valuable.


    "And how do you know this? Is information about this gang so readily available?"


    The bandit, sensing William''s interest in the Desert Serpents, gave him a wary look. "I might know someone who used to be part of that gang. They might have some useful information, for a price. But I can''t guarantee anything."


    "That''s enough for me."


    Leaving the whimpering bandit in the alley, William made his way to another, less secluded alleyway. He knocked on the wooden door of a small shop, its sign creaking ominously in the night wind. sea??h th§× Novel?ire(.)ne*t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Despite his repeated knocks, there was no answer. The shop was closed. William had hoped to find the former Serpent member tonight, but it seemed fate had other plans.


    He needed a place to rest. There were several taverns scattered throughout the city, and William chose one that seemed relatively calm, situated in a more well-lit area.


    But even this tavern was far from peaceful. The stench of ale and sweat hung heavy in the air, punctuated by the raucous shouts of patrons arguing, brawling, and engaging in other, more carnal activities. The sounds of women''s moans echoed through the dimly lit space.


    ''Are all the taverns like this?'' William wondered, grimacing.


    Though tempted to check out other establishments, he had a sinking feeling they would be no better, perhaps even worse.


    Approaching the barkeep, he inquired about a room for the night.


    "Got one in the back," the gruff man replied, "Five copper coins."


    William had money, but the currency used in this kingdom was different. Though made of similar materials, the symbols stamped on the coins were foreign.


    "I don''t have any local currency, but I have this dagger. Lifted it off some fool a while back. Interested?" William offered.


    The barkeep, who was also the tavern owner, snatched the dagger and appraised it with a practiced eye.


    "I can give you 120 silver for it," he declared. "Worth closer to 170, but I need to make a profit, you understand."


    "Quite a profit you''re making," William noted dryly.


    The barkeep hesitated, then said, "140. Take it or leave it."


    "Deal."


    William deposited the pouch of coins into his inventory as he entered his room. It was spartan, but thankfully clean, which was a small victory in this city.


    "Well, at least we have some spending money now," Stuart''s voice chirped from William''s pocket. "But the real payoff comes when we complete this mission."


    "Definitely. Hey, can you keep an eye out or use some magic to make this place a bit more secure? I have a bad feeling about this tavern."


    "What place in this city doesn''t give you a bad feeling?" Stuart chuckled. "But yeah, I can do that."


    Stuart cast a camouflage spell, concealing William from prying eyes. They moved the bed to the other side of the room and, with another spell, rendered it invisible. Then, Stuart conjured an illusionary bed to replace it.


    The night passed without incident, and William, reassured by Stuart''s precautions, managed to get some rest. In the morning, he headed straight for the shop owned by the former member of the Desert Serpents.


    A sign hung on the door, indicating it was open. William entered, the bell above the door jingling merrily.


    But despite announcing his presence, the shop seemed deserted. Shelves overflowed with a bizarre assortment of goods, from trinkets and baubles to an impressive collection of weaponry.


    ''This guy must be fencing stolen goods,'' William surmised.


    After a few moments, a figure emerged from the back room. It wasn''t who William expected.


    He had braced himself for a hardened brute, a man etched with scars and an intimidating aura. Instead, he found himself facing a woman of striking beauty, her smile both alluring and disarming.


    "How can I help you?" she purred, her voice like velvet.


    Uncertainty flickered in William''s mind. Was this the former Serpent he sought, or merely an employee? He chose his words carefully.


    "An acquaintance suggested I pay you a visit," William began, "He mentioned someone here used to be part of the Desert Serpents."


    The woman''s smile vanished, replaced by a guarded expression. "That part of my life is over. I have nothing to say about it. If that''s all you came for, you can leave."


    William, unsure how to navigate this unexpected encounter, decided to probe further. "First, tell me," he asked, "do you regret leaving the gang?" Your next journey awaits at My Virtual Library Empire


    The woman''s eyes hardened, a flicker of anger igniting within their depths. "Regret? Never! They''re a pack of ruthless bastards. I''m glad to be free of them. And honestly," her voice dropped to a venomous whisper, "if I had the chance, I''d go back and kill every last one of them for what they did to me."


    A spark of opportunity ignited in William''s mind. This woman''s resentment towards the Desert Serpents was a powerful tool, one he could potentially use to his advantage.

 Chapter 153 Its Almost Time

    "And what do you think about helping me with this? You''d get the chance to do what you want," William asked.The woman was slightly taken aback. "I might have the desire to do it, but that doesn''t mean I have the ability. It''s madness to go to that place."


    And indeed, it was. Storming a hideout full of powerful bandits wasn''t a sensible thing to do. Of course, William needed to go, and he was determined to convince her.


    "If we work together, we stand a real chance," William said. "What do you think?"


    She noticed the desperation in his voice. This woman wasn''t stupid. In fact, having been part of a gang, she was sharp and perceptive.


    "What do you want with them? Start talking, or I won''t even consider helping you."


    The woman moved to the shop''s door and flipped the sign. It now read Closed.


    "Sit here," she said, pointing to a small wooden table at the back of the shop.


    The table was simple¡ªround, made of wood, with only two chairs around it. The area was cluttered, clearly part of the woman''s living quarters.


    ''Must be her office or something,'' William thought.


    The place wasn''t much to look at, but William kept his thoughts to himself.


    "I don''t know what you''re talking about," he said. "Why would I be hiding anything from you? I just need your help to infiltrate that place, that''s all."


    "Cut the crap, kid. I know you want something. Do you really think anyone in their right mind would storm that place for nothing? Try again."


    "Alright, alright. But will you really help me?" William pressed. "Because it seems impossible to get into that place."


    Explore new worlds at My Virtual Library Empire


    Her tone was pessimistic, and William was starting to believe his mission was both stupid and impossible.


    "It''s doable. You''re after some treasure they have, right? Those bastards have a huge collection of rare items. Easy to get when you''ve been robbing the entire desert," she said.


    Deep down, William felt uneasy sharing this much with her, fearing betrayal, but he took the risk.


    "Actually, I''m after a book," he admitted. "I believe it''s quite old, maybe with a worn leather cover?"


    When the woman heard this, she shook her head and stood up. "No way."


    William frowned. "What do you mean?"


    "The gang leader has a book exactly like that. He carries it everywhere."


    That made the mission even harder. William had hoped to sneak into the bandits'' hideout and steal what he needed. After all, this woman had been part of the gang, so she surely knew the layout and secret passages that could help them. But if the book was always with the leader, well, that screwed everything up. A confrontation with the gang leader was almost inevitable, and from what William had heard, the leader was incredibly powerful.


    "Do you know what that book is?"


    "Wait a minute," she said, laughing. "You don''t even know what you''re trying to steal? What kind of thief are you?"


    "I''m not a thief. I''m just following orders."


    "Ah, I see. Well, that book is strange. Ever since the leader started reading it, he''s become even more ruthless and powerful. It''s like he''s lost, consumed by the pursuit of power. It was around the time he started reading it that I left the gang."


    William sat in silence, deep in thought. He didn''t know the nature of the book or what it contained, but the fact that it had altered the leader''s personality was intriguing.


    "Do you think we can get that book?" William asked.


    "Honestly, if we just try to storm the place head-on, no. Impossible. But maybe we can lure them out, leaving only the leader and a few key members behind."


    The idea of drawing most of the bandits away from the hideout was interesting, but how would they pull it off? William had no idea what could lure the bandits out.


    However, the woman, whose name was Lyfenea, knew exactly how to do it. In fact, it was surprisingly simple.


    Having been part of the gang for years, she knew a lot about them, including who owed them money or was at odds with them.


    "There''s a group that''s practically their sworn enemies, and I know where they''re hiding. I can drop some hints to the bandits, making them leave the hideout."


    "That sounds promising. Do you need help with anything?" William asked.


    "Yes, first we need to create the evidence. Come with me."


    The two worked together to feed information to the bandits without revealing their identities. They visited places frequented by associates of the Serpent Desert Gang and began spreading rumors.


    William and Lyfenea sat at a table in one of the bars, talking loudly. "Did you know the Silver Dagger Gang is hiding in an underground base in the White Dunes region?"


    "Really? What are they doing there?" William asked.


    "I think they''re running from the Serpent Desert Gang..."


    They repeated this conversation in several bars before returning to Lyfenea''s shop. William wasn''t sure if it would work.


    "Do you really think this will work? All we did was spread some rumors."


    "Of course it will," Lyfenea said confidently. "You have no idea how fast rumors like these spread. But we''ll need to prepare for the raid on the bandits'' hideout."


    Time was of the essence. They couldn''t afford to waste any, as they needed to be ready to strike. Lyfenea decided to call in a few people she knew and trusted to join them.


    She brought in two more individuals. William wasn''t sure how he felt about it¡ªhe didn''t trust these people¡ªbut he couldn''t deny that having more hands on deck would make the mission easier.


    With their help, they could handle the remaining bandits in the hideout more effectively. For William, all that mattered was the artifact¡ªthe book the leader carried. The rest didn''t concern him much. He''d be satisfied just getting the monetary reward the Lord promised him for the book.


    ''Even if I have to split the other valuables with them, I''ll still walk away with something. So, it''s worth it...'' he thought.


    "These two are my friends, and you can trust them. The four of us will raid the gang''s hideout and split whatever we find. Of course, the book is yours. What do you think?" Lyfenea said.


    "No problem. But can I trust them? It''s already hard enough trusting you," William replied, being as blunt and direct as possible. Sear?h the Novel?ire(.)ne*t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    The two people Lyfenea had called were both women. One of them spoke up, "I understand your concern, but you can trust us. We have no reason to betray you. All we want is the treasure. Of course, Lyfenea has her own vendetta, but that''s her business."


    Lyfenea''s friends were only in it for the chance to get their hands on valuable items. Unlike Lyfenea, who seemed to have a deeper grudge against the Serpent Desert Gang.


    "Alright then, let''s prepare to camp near the hideout so we can keep an eye on their movements," Lyfenea said.


    They worked together to gather the necessary supplies. Lyfenea already had most of what they needed in her shop¡ªtents and even camels for traversing the desert.


    The only things they needed to buy were food and water for a few days, but that wasn''t a problem. It was a small investment considering the potential rewards if the mission succeeded.


    Once everything was ready, they decided to leave the city. It was late afternoon when they set out.


    They didn''t have four camels, so it was two people per camel. William rode behind Lyfenea, holding onto her waist.


    The group drew some attention as they left the city, but nothing too serious. They headed straight for the gang''s hideout.


    William had a map that showed exactly where it was, and he pulled it out during the journey to take a look. Lyfenea smiled at him, "You can put that map away. I know exactly where it is."


    And indeed, she did. In fact, she knew better routes to get there, and by nightfall, they had a clear view of the gang''s camp.


    They were on higher ground, overlooking the bandit camp from above. It was a perfect vantage point to scout the entire base.


    "There are a lot of bandits down there," William remarked.


    "Don''t worry," Lyfenea replied, "soon enough, many of them will leave, and that''s when we''ll make our move."


    They camped for the night on the higher ground, careful not to let the smoke from their fire alert the bandits to their presence. The hideout remained quiet, with no suspicious movements. They set up their tents and slept there.


    However, the next morning, strange movements began to stir within the Serpent Desert Gang''s base. A large group of bandits emerged, all looking as if they were heading to war.


    William smiled. He knew the plan had worked. Now, all they had to do was infiltrate the hideout and take on the gang leader!

 Chapter 154 This wasnt in our Agreement

    "Let''s wait and infiltrate at night," Lyfenea said.The gang the Serpent Desert was targeting was located far away, meaning they had roughly three to four days before the bandits returned. Of course, no one wanted to wait around for days, but waiting until nightfall wasn''t a problem. The darkness would be their ally during the infiltration.


    Everyone was on board with the plan, including William. He wasn''t in a hurry. For him, it was better to take things slow and succeed than to rush and risk failure.


    They spent the day observing the hideout, taking breaks to eat and tend to their needs.


    "The hideout seems quiet," William remarked. "How many do you think are still inside?"


    "Probably around ten," Lyfenea said. "At least, that''s how it used to be. There were nine sub-leaders and the gang leader himself. Maybe it''s changed¡ªmore or fewer people. It''s hard to say for sure."


    It was difficult for Lyfenea to know the exact situation since she had left the gang a long time ago. However, one thing seemed unchanged: the layout of the hideout.


    During the hours they spent waiting, Lyfenea took the opportunity to sketch the hideout''s layout, pointing out the most important areas¡ªor at least the ones she remembered.


    The general layout of the gang''s base wasn''t too different, but the information Lyfenea had about secret passages was crucial.


    William, listening to all this, grew curious about her former role in the gang.


    ''How does she know about these secret passages? Did all members know, or was she in a high position?'' he wondered.


    Even though they were about to start the operation, it didn''t mean William trusted these people. He kept his guard up, ready for any suspicious moves.


    "And where do you think the leader will be?" William asked.


    Lyfenea was honest with him. "He''ll probably notice us quickly. We''ll need to use our time hidden to take out the sub-leaders first. There''s no way to enter without him noticing."


    William smiled. "I think I have something that might help us."


    *


    When night fell, they made their way down the small sand dune they had been camping on, heading straight for the bandits'' hideout.


    The entrance was unguarded. None of the sub-leaders were willing to act as mere guards at the hideout''s entrance. They were all inside.


    However, even though it seemed like security had lessened, that wasn''t the case. The sub-leaders were far stronger than the average bandits and were prepared for any invasion.


    Unfortunately for them, William''s infiltration was something they didn''t expect. With the help of his magical rat, Stuart, all four of them were camouflaged, and no one noticed their presence¡ªnot even the leader.


    And with Lyfenea''s knowledge of the secret passages, they would be able to enter the hideout without alerting anyone. At least, that''s what they hoped.


    "Let''s go this way," Lyfenea said. "There''s a passage at the back."


    They circled the base. The main building was surrounded by a small wall. The only apparent entrance was the front gate, but that wasn''t the case.


    Lyfenea knew of some secret entrances at the back and sides of the base. These passages were typically used as escape routes during an invasion.


    But in this case, those escape routes would become their entry points. Lyfenea led the way, stopping in front of a specific part of the wall.


    "This looks normal," William said.


    That part of the wall looked exactly like the rest. There was nothing unusual about it, and he didn''t sense any mana coming from it either.


    But it wasn''t normal. Lyfenea pulled up her sleeve, revealing a serpent tattoo. All gang members had this tattoo.


    In her case, she was a former member, but the tattoo was still there. She pressed her tattooed arm against the wall, and the section glowed, revealing a hidden tunnel.


    "This tunnel leads straight to the main building, so we''ll need to be careful. The bandits will be inside," Lyfenea warned.


    Everyone nodded and followed her in. Stuart''s magic was still camouflaging them, so no one had noticed their presence.


    "That magical pet of yours is really useful," one of Lyfenea''s friends said. "Where''d you get it?"


    William felt they were prying too much, and he even noticed a hint of envy¡ªor rather, greed¡ªin their eyes. He simply smiled and said, "I can''t reveal that, sorry."


    They didn''t press further and continued through the dark tunnel. After a few minutes, they emerged from behind a cabinet in one of the rooms of the main building.


    The room was filled with books.


    "Didn''t expect to find this here," William said.


    Lyfenea looked slightly offended. "Are you saying bandits can''t read? We can, you know."


    Her tone wasn''t hostile, so William took it as a joke.


    "Let''s try to avoid talking now. The camouflage doesn''t cancel out sound completely, so we need to be silent," William reminded them. Continue reading on My Virtual Library Empire


    As incredible as Stuart''s magic was, it still had its limitations.


    They moved through the building, communicating only through hand signals. Lyfenea led the way since she knew the layout best, but the others had studied the map she provided, so they had a general idea of where to go.


    Their destination was the treasure room, where all the stolen items were stored.


    Getting there wasn''t a problem, considering the place was mostly empty. They didn''t encounter anyone along the way. The real issue was getting inside. It was impossible to enter without a key.


    The vault had powerful magical protections. No one there could break through, even with all the time in the world.


    They looked around to ensure no one was nearby before speaking.


    "And where are we supposed to get a key?" William asked.


    "From one of the sub-leaders or the leader himself. But it''s better to focus on the sub-leaders¡ªthey''re weaker," Lyfenea said.


    William was starting to think Lyfenea and the other two were trying to avoid confronting the leader and wanted to break into the vault quietly.


    While that seemed like a good idea¡ªand it was¡ªit wasn''t what William wanted. He needed to face the gang leader because the artifact he was after, that ancient and mysterious book, was with the leader!


    In other words, confronting him was inevitable.


    "You know we have to face the leader, right?" William said. "The book is with him."


    Lyfenea smiled. "Our agreement was to help each other get in here and split the treasures, with you getting the book. The agreement didn''t say anything about us helping you fight."


    At that moment, William realized trusting these women had been a mistake. They were already twisting the agreement to suit their own interests.


    And the worst part was, William couldn''t do anything about it. They were strong in combat, around level 30 based on their mana fluctuations. If William tried, he might win, but what was the point?


    Fighting them would only tire him out and alert the other bandits in the hideout. In the end, he had been deceived...


    In the end, William decided to focus on helping them get the key. There wasn''t much else he could do.


    They searched together for one of the sub-leaders and soon began to locate them. In total, there were five sub-leaders and the leader himself, making six people.


    The leader''s location was still a mystery, but they found the sub-leaders. All of them were drinking beer and playing card games near a pool in the recreational area.


    The sub-leaders'' power was a bit weaker than William had imagined. However, the problem was that they were all together in the same place.


    They faced a dilemma: wait for one of them to leave or take them all on at once.


    In the end, they chose to wait and see what would happen.


    "Peaceful here without everyone around, huh?" one of the sub-leaders said. "Makes me want to ask the boss for some time off."


    "Look, if you cry enough, maybe you''ll get it. Especially since things are relatively calm with no conflicts," another replied.


    "You think so? I''ll try when he gets back... But hey, guys, I''m tired. I''m calling it a night."


    "Old man," one of them teased.


    Everyone laughed. The sub-leader who left was indeed older than the others, and his energy wasn''t what it used to be. He needed to rest after hours of drinking.


    This was the perfect opportunity they had been waiting for. They followed the man, thinking he would head to the dormitory, but instead, he left the main building and went to the back.


    There, he decided to relieve himself in a corner, on the ground. A bit strange, considering they had bathrooms. Maybe the guy just liked feeling the night breeze on his skin...


    Anyway, this was their chance. William thought about acting, but Lyfenea moved first. She pulled out a dagger hidden on her back and approached the man like a snake ready to strike.


    Her footsteps made no sound!


    ''She''s a skilled assassin,'' William thought.


    Lyfenea opened a vial containing a strange liquid and coated the tip of her dagger with it. Then, she crept up behind the man and stabbed him.


    "What the hell!" the man shouted.


    He reacted quickly, but when he tried to use his mana, he couldn''t. It was as if it was blocked.


    Lyfenea smiled. "This poison is very useful."


    Her two friends also drew their daggers and moved in. Their movements were equally agile, and they finished him off with little effort and almost no noise.


    William felt a bit tense being there. In the end, these three women were assassins, and he was working with them without fully realizing it... S~ea??h the ¦ÇovelFire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.

 Chapter 155 Inside the Treasure Room

    With the keys in hand, they could now access the vault where all the treasures were stored. Well, almost all¡ªsince the book William wanted wasn''t there.Before leaving, they dragged the bandit''s body and hid it in a corner outside the main building. It seemed like a good spot, somewhere no one would find it.


    Not that it mattered much in the end. If William wanted the artifact he had come for, he would have to confront the gang leader directly. Staying hidden no longer made much sense.


    They returned to the vault using the same route they had taken earlier. Stuart camouflaged them again, ensuring they could reach the vault without drawing unnecessary attention.


    The other sub-leaders were still drinking and chatting in the recreational area. The leader remained missing, and no one had any idea where he was.


    When they reached the vault door, Lyfenea used the key to open it. The large door creaked as it swung open, but the noise wasn''t enough to alert anyone.


    What they feared was triggering some kind of trap, but nothing happened. They exchanged glances, excited to finally be inside the vault. William, however, was the only one not thrilled about the situation.


    They stepped inside and found themselves in a massive room with no windows or dividing walls. The space was open, filled with all kinds of treasures.


    Most of the items were stolen, but there were also things the bandits had acquired during their expeditions. They explored places that might hold valuable items.


    But the majority of the loot was still the result of theft¡ªfrom caravans and other gangs.


    After entering and closing the vault door, William and the others felt more comfortable speaking, as no one would notice they were there.


    "Check this place out," Lyfenea said, picking up a few items as she walked around. "There''s so much stuff here."


    The three assassins were in awe. William tried to share their excitement, thinking that, at worst, he could still sell some of the treasures for a good amount of money.


    "Let''s start grabbing the valuables," one of the women said. "We need to focus on the most valuable items. We can''t take everything."


    They had brought sacks to carry the treasures. Unlike William, who had an inventory system like something out of an online game.


    He still couldn''t figure out why he had this inventory while others didn''t.


    Anyway, they began searching for the best items in the vault and storing them as best they could.


    However, after about five minutes inside, a voice echoed through the vault, sending chills down their spines.


    "Seems I have some intruders here."


    William quickly turned toward the voice and saw the person who had spoken. It was the leader of the Serpent Desert Gang.


    At least, it seemed to be. He had a much more imposing aura than any of the sub-leaders they had encountered, which was why William assumed he was the leader.


    When Lyfenea saw the man, she said, "Long time no see, little brother."


    William was surprised, but the pieces quickly fell into place. How did Lyfenea know about all those secret passages? How had she left the gang without facing retaliation? S§×arch* The NovelFire.net* website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    It was difficult¡ªalmost impossible¡ªto leave a gang like that, especially if you held a high position. The life of crime wasn''t easy.


    But being the sister of the gang''s leader? Well, that explained how Lyfenea had left that life without much trouble.


    "Mind telling me what the hell you''re doing?" the leader said. "I was lenient enough to let you leave without causing problems, and now you come to rob me? You know that even as my sister, you''ll face the consequences for this."


    Lyfenea laughed. "I know you won''t kill me. What''s a few more or fewer treasures? You should be helping me!"


    "You''re the one who wanted out of the gang because you were done with violence! I even helped you open that dump you call a shop. What the hell, sis. And who are these people you brought here?"


    William listened to their conversation, and he wasn''t feeling good about it. It seemed like they were arguing but still cared for each other. If that was the case, William might end up being the enemy here.


    Explore hidden tales at My Virtual Library Empire


    "They came with me to help me rob you," Lyfenea replied. "What do you think? Can you take on all of us?"


    The leader laughed, a dark, menacing laugh. He then pulled out an ancient book from his pocket, holding it in his hand. "You can be sure I''ll win easily. I''m far more powerful than before. You don''t stand a chance."


    When he took out the book, William felt something strange, though he couldn''t quite describe it.


    The leader turned his gaze to them. "I know these women. They''re your pathetic assassin friends. But who''s this guy? Are you dating, little sis?"


    "We''re not dating," William said. "Do you really think I''d date an assassin who was part of a gang? If I''d known she was your sister, I wouldn''t have come to this dump."


    "This dump?!" the leader shouted. "Don''t talk about the place I worked so hard to build."


    William found it hilarious. "Worked so hard to build? That''s a strong way to put it. You''re a bandit, man. You''ve never worked a day in your life."


    The tension was rising quickly, and Lyfenea wasn''t sure what to do. Should she stand against her brother or try to talk her way out of this situation more peacefully?


    When the leader grew angry and let more of his aura surge, William could feel just how powerful he was. His guess was somewhere around level 50, which was incredibly strong.


    ''Do I even stand a chance against him?'' William thought.


    Despite being at a lower level, William''s attributes were impressive, given that he was one of the summoned heroes. Additionally, some of his skills were high-ranked, at least a few of them.


    In other words, he felt he had a chance to win if he went all out¡ªbut that was assuming the leader didn''t have more tricks up his sleeve.


    "Both of you, relax," Lyfenea said. "You''re acting like children."


    How could William relax in a situation like this?


    "Tell me now, little sis. Are you going to fight me, or are you going to leave those treasures behind?" the leader asked.


    Lyfenea didn''t hesitate. "Sorry, but I hate your entire gang. I hope they all burn. You''re the least terrible of them, but you still deserve to lose some treasures."


    She was willing to stand up to her brother, and that was good for William. He might have some help during the fight.


    The leader wasn''t pleased with her response. He placed his hand on the book and began whispering strange words. It sounded like another language.


    Then, shadows emerged from the ground, wrapping around the legs of the two assassins who had come with William and Lyfenea. After that, the leader used the book to cast another spell, sending a horizontal shadow slash that cut the two assassins in half!


    Everything happened too fast. William hadn''t been caught by the first spell, but the shadow slash was heading straight for him. He had to dodge.


    Luckily, William managed to dodge, remaining completely unharmed, which caught the leader''s attention.


    "Nice moves," the leader said. "But do you think you could''ve escaped if I''d trapped your legs too?"


    "We''ll find out soon enough," William replied.


    Lyfenea watched the scene unfold before her eyes, unable to believe her friends had been killed so quickly. One moment they were there, and the next, they were gone.


    "Why did you do that, you bastard?" she screamed. "They didn''t deserve to die."


    "And why not? They invaded my home, my vault, and tried to rob me. Their fate would''ve been the same if you weren''t my sister."


    The leader had already planned to either imprison Lyfenea or force her back into the gang. He didn''t want to hurt her, but he couldn''t let her off easy after she tried to rob him like this.


    William seemed to be the one at the biggest disadvantage now. Without the two assassinas, he had essentially become the primary target.


    "Even so, they didn''t deserve that!" Lyfenea screamed.


    With her dagger in hand, she charged toward the gang leader. With every step, black flowers materialized in the air, and her movements seemed to grow faster.


    Her footsteps made no sound, and it was as if her body had become invisible, blending into the surroundings.


    Yet, despite her extraordinary movements, the gang leader remained completely calm.


    Lyfenea managed to circle around and attack him from behind without him noticing, but something very strange happened. The energy emanating from the book moved on its own, transforming into a magical shield that blocked Lyfenea''s attack.


    It was as if the energy had a will of its own, and the gang leader didn''t even need to lift a finger to activate it.


    "Nice try, but now you''re going to suffer. And you''re next, you bastard," the leader said, glaring at William.

 Chapter 156 Unexpected Friendship

    The gang leader made his first move against Lyfenea. He wanted to make her suffer, but he obviously wouldn''t kill her or cause any permanent damage.He wanted to teach her a lesson and force her to rejoin the gang¡ªor at least imprison her.


    The relationship between the two was strange. Despite being family, they didn''t get along well. It was painfully obvious.


    William wasn''t sure what to do. Should he jump into their fight right away or wait for the right moment to strike?


    ''I think I have to attack now,'' he thought. ''In the end, he''ll come for me after dealing with her, so there''s no escaping this.''


    This was his best chance, especially considering all the other sub-leaders were outside. William wanted to face the leader alone. It wouldn''t be easy as it was, let alone with the others helping him.


    He drew his demonic sword, Asura, which had been hidden. The black blade had an unusual glow that caught the gang leader''s attention. He looked at William''s sword with a different expression.


    William noticed the look but didn''t let it stop him. With the sword in hand, he activated his body-enhancement skills. Sear?h the NovelFire.net* website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "Swiftfoot, Enhanced Strength!"


    As much as he wanted to learn new skills, these were the ones he had at his disposal for now. His strength increased by about 30 points, and his agility and movement speed also received a boost.


    With his natural attributes already higher than those of "normal people," William felt incredibly powerful. He channeled strength into his legs and charged toward the gang leader, who was busy using his magic against Lyfenea.


    William''s movements were swift, and in less than three seconds, he was in front of the leader, who was caught off guard. Everything happened so fast that it was impossible for him to react.


    Well, impossible if he had to react. Once again, the energy around his body moved on its own, blocking the attack as if it had a mind of its own. The impact of William''s sword hitting the magical shield forced him to stumble back, losing his balance.


    The leader seized the moment, creating a shadowy hammer and slamming it into William''s ribs! The attack landed, sending William flying into one of the pillars in the room.


    The blow hurt, breaking a few ribs. At that moment, William realized just how strong the gang leader was and that defeating him wouldn''t be easy.


    Lyfenea tried once more to attack her brother with her dagger, but just like William''s attack, hers had no effect. No matter what she tried, it was impossible to land a hit.


    The gang leader pinned Lyfenea to one of the pillars in the room, just as he had done with the other two assassins.


    "I told you you didn''t stand a chance, but for now, you''ll stay there," he said. "I''ll deal with this one first."


    He turned to William, locking eyes with him. "Mind telling me what kind of sword that is?"


    "I don''t understand," William replied. "It''s just a normal sword. Why the interest?"


    The gang leader narrowed his eyes. "I think we should talk privately. What do you say?"


    He made a gesture with his hands, and Lyfenea''s head was encased in shadows, rendering her unable to see or hear what was happening.


    "Now she won''t know what we''re talking about," the leader said. "I''ll be direct with you. I know that sword of yours has demonic origins."


    That caught William off guard. How did the gang leader know that?


    "I think you''re mistaken," William said. "It''s just a normal sword."


    "Cut the crap. This book I have is also a demonic artifact, so I know what I''m talking about."


    The situation had completely changed. William had no idea the artifact he was after¡ªthe one he was trying to retrieve for the lord¡ªwas demonic. How was that possible?


    It was too much of a coincidence.


    "And why are we still talking?" William asked. "If you''re interested in this sword, fight me to the death."


    The gang leader had already demonstrated surprising strength in combat, and William wasn''t as confident he could win, even using everything in his arsenal. He was already looking for a way out, but it seemed impossible.


    The leader laughed. "I think we can work together, my friend. How about it? If you help me, I can guarantee you a copy of this book. It contains demonic magic¡ªat least some of it. This is Volume 1."


    William wasn''t sure what to do but decided to ask more about the help the leader needed and whether it would benefit him. "What do you want?"


    "I''ll be brief. This book is Volume 1, and I want the other volumes. But that''s not all¡ªI want to infuse myself with demonic lineage. I believe it''s possible because I have an affinity for elements similar to those of demons, but I''m not part of their lineage."


    "There''s a part of our continent where demons once lived, and there are places we can access with your lineage to find these things¡ªbooks, artifacts, and more information about your lineage. How about you help me? Together, we can go there and split whatever we find."


    The offer was somewhat intriguing, but there was one problem: William was essentially being forced into this. In this situation, he knew it would be very difficult to defeat the gang leader, meaning he was being coerced into working with him.


    If he refused, he would certainly lose the fight, become a prisoner, and be tortured until he agreed to help. The situation wasn''t easy.


    "And how can I guarantee you''ll hold up your end of the deal? I also want more information about demons, and these books would be important to me too," William said.


    "How about I give you a copy of this book and we make a blood contract? If I don''t hold up my end, I die. Fair enough?" the leader said. "I don''t consider myself a bandit anymore, and I''ve wanted to leave this gang for a long time. Your appearance here was exactly what I needed to move forward with my plan."


    The gang leader wanted to search for more information about demons, and he knew what to do. However, without someone with demonic lineage, it was impossible to enter those places. He was thrilled after meeting William.


    Now, William felt he might have a chance to pursue the knowledge he was so eager to obtain. Discover more stories at My Virtual Library Empire


    "If you''re serious about this, then we can talk. But how exactly do you plan to infuse demonic lineage into your body?" William asked.


    "Apparently, there''s something in the place we''re going to access that can grant me demonic lineage. From what I''ve researched, it was left behind to ensure the lineage never completely died out."


    Asura, his demonic sword, spoke in William''s mind. "He''s telling the truth. That place really exists. I know this because I have some memories about it. And here''s an interesting piece of information: the demons left these kinds of places in multiple parts of the world, not just on this continent."


    William felt more confident that the leader was telling the truth. "We can talk. But can you leave Lyfenea out of this and let her return to her shop? And what do you plan to do with the gang?"


    "Honestly, I don''t care about this gang anymore. I''m going to disband it and leave. How about we meet in the city in three days? Before that, I''ll give you a copy of the book for you to use."


    "That works."


    The leader then dispelled the magic restraining Lyfenea. She fell to her knees and looked at her brother, who now seemed to be on friendly terms with William.


    "What the hell happened?" she asked.


    "Nothing that concerns you. You can leave, and if you want, take some treasures with you. I don''t mind. This friend of yours and I will be leaving in a few days."


    "Come with me, please," the leader said to William.


    The two went to another room. It was the leader''s personal office, and no one else was allowed inside.


    "I''m going to perform the magic to clone this artifact," he said. "It won''t be made of the same ancient material, but it''ll be the same in essence. You can compare the two afterward."


    The leader performed a very unusual spell. It required preparation, including drawing several symbols on the ground and gathering specific ingredients. Not only that, but it also demanded a significant amount of power¡ªand William''s power as well.


    "One of the reasons this book is special is precisely because of the demonic energy it contains. So, we''ll use a bit of your power to give the copy its essence," he explained.


    The two worked together for about half an hour. In the end, they placed the original book in the center of the symbols, and together, they chanted incantations in a language William recognized: the language of demons.

 Chapter 157 New Spell, Passive, and Current Attributes

    [Tome of Sahrovar Volume 1 Acquired]When the ritual to create the book was complete, the System even sent a notification. This meant the artifact was truly special and that the ritual had been a success. William was thrilled.


    Not only that, but he noticed the copy was indeed identical to the original tome the gang leader possessed. Even the energy emanating from the book was the same. The only difference was that the original looked ancient, while William''s copy was brand new.


    "Looks like the ritual was a success," the leader said. "This is a difficult ritual to perform, but it''s used frequently. Most libraries do this to ensure that valuable books never go out of circulation and that people have access to knowledge."


    "You seem pretty intelligent for someone who runs a gang of bandits," William commented.


    The leader laughed. "I didn''t have a choice about getting involved in crime. My parents were in this life, and they dragged me into it. But after I acquired this book, I learned a lot, and now I can leave this life behind. And before you ask, our gang never killed civilians. We only stole and killed rival gang members when absolutely necessary."


    William wasn''t sure if he felt better hearing that or if it didn''t change his opinion. But there was no escaping the fact that the two of them would now be working together, and perhaps trying to understand each other was the best course of action.


    "My name is Kier," the leader said.


    "William. I hope we can work together without any betrayal," William replied.


    "Don''t worry. I''ll prepare the contract and show it to you before we leave, so you can read everything and feel confident you''re not being cheated. But I''ll need about three days to get everything ready. You can head back to the city if you want¡ªI''ll need to go there anyway. Stay at the Honeycomb Tavern."


    Kier had to go to the city to gather supplies and mounts for the journey to their destination, which was VERY far away.


    "Alright. I''ll wait for you there."


    William left the bandits'' hideout. Lyfenea was with him. In the end, her brother, Kier, had given her a few artifacts to sell for some money and let her go without any retaliation.


    Despite their complicated relationship, the two loved each other, and deep down, Lyfenea had always wanted to pull her brother out of the world of crime. She was happy that he had finally left it behind!


    But she was still incredibly curious about what her brother and William were planning. During the journey back to the city, she kept asking repeatedly about what the two had discussed.


    William, of course, wasn''t stupid. He didn''t say a word about it and did everything he could to avoid the subject.


    "You know we can''t talk about it. If we could, we would''ve told you already, right?" William said.


    "But can''t you give me a hint? Just one?"


    "No."


    Lyfenea was clearly frustrated, but she didn''t say or do anything extreme. Her only weapon against William was her relentless questioning, but even that didn''t last the entire trip. She eventually stopped asking.


    "How do you feel about your friends who died?" William asked her.


    It took her a few seconds to formulate a concrete answer, and it wasn''t what William expected. "We weren''t really friends¡ªmore like business partners. What happened to them was sad, but it doesn''t affect me deeply."


    "I see."


    The journey back to the city took a while. Perhaps Lyfenea''s constant talking made the trip feel longer and more tedious. William was relieved when they finally returned to the city.


    The two parted ways, and William headed to the tavern Kier had mentioned. It was one of the best taverns in the city, and while it was a bit more expensive to stay there, it wasn''t a problem for William.


    ''I''ll only be here for a few days, so I have enough money...'' he thought.


    And so, three days passed. William spent his time resting, eating, and, of course, reading his new book, which contained several spells and abilities that were perfect for him!


    All the spells in the book were related to the fire and dark fire elements, which, according to Asura, were the ideal elements for William due to his demonic lineage.


    And, well, Asura was right. After William tried to learn the first spell¡ªa simple black fireball¡ªhe received a notification from the System.


    [Black Flame Mastery (Rank S): Your demonic blood grants you +25% learning rate for dark fire element spells, +25% power for dark fire element spells, and -10% mana cost for dark fire element spells.]


    Stay connected via My Virtual Library Empire


    He had gained an incredible passive ability! One that would undoubtedly help him a lot. Not to mention, in just three days, he had managed to learn his first spell!


    [Black Fireball (Rank A): Allows the user to launch a Black fireball. Damage, size, and speed depend on the user''s mastery.]


    [Mana Cost: 30]


    By the end of it, William''s current stats were impressive!


    Name: William Velmont


    Level: 27


    Class: None


    Attributes:


    Strength: 88


    Agility: 102


    Stamina: 74


    Intelligence: 470


    Mana: 280


    Demonic Energy: 120


    His Intelligence attribute was the highest because he was a mage, meaning he gained more of this attribute with each level. Additionally, his Magic Mind passive, an extremely powerful and difficult-to-learn ability, gave him a significant boost.


    His demonic energy wasn''t as high. William still wasn''t sure how to increase it significantly, but it was gradually growing, which he took as a good sign.


    William felt like he was finally growing stronger. The only thing he was missing was a class, which he could have obtained upon reaching level 25. However, he was far from any magic academy and had no one to help him with the process.


    ''No need to rush...''


    Level 25 was the minimum requirement to obtain a class, but it was common for people to acquire theirs later. William was eager to get his class but wasn''t worried about the delay.


    Finally, on the third day, Kier showed up. William met him at the Honeycomb Tavern where he was staying, and to his surprise, Kier came more than prepared.


    "I''ve got two flying mounts waiting outside," Kier said.


    "I thought we''d be traveling through the desert on the ground," William replied.


    Kier laughed. "Of course not. Flying mounts are expensive but incredibly useful, especially in our case. You know our destination is far, and traveling by land would take forever."


    "Yeah, I know."


    "Let''s grab some supplies before we leave," Kier said. "I''ve got this artifact that can store a lot of things."


    William was impressed by the artifact! It was similar to the one that held Jinra''s treasure. He knew such artifacts were extremely rare and expensive, so how did Kier have one?


    "Before you ask, I didn''t steal this. I acquired it during one of my recent explorations," Kier explained.


    "I didn''t say anything."


    The two bought food and water. The tents they''d need for occasional camping were things Kier already had, so there was no need to purchase more.


    After gathering everything, they left the city and headed to the mounts waiting for them outside.


    They were two beautiful birds with red feathers. Their size was impressive.


    "These are firebirds," Kier said. "Some legends say they''re descendants of the phoenix, but I don''t know if that''s true. I''ve never seen a phoenix to ask." S~ea??h the N??elFir§×.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Kier explained that the birds could withstand extreme heat, making them ideal for traveling over the desert. They could also produce heat, which would be immensely helpful when they reached their destination, as it was a very cold place.


    ''Seems like he already had everything prepared for the trip,'' William thought.


    It was too much of a coincidence for Kier to have the perfect mounts ready so quickly. It was obvious he had been planning this journey for a while, just waiting for the right travel companion¡ªespecially one with demonic lineage.


    "Ah, I almost forgot. Here," Kier said, handing the blood contract to William.


    It wasn''t very long¡ªjust a single page¡ªbut William read it carefully to avoid any pitfalls.


    According to the contract, neither of them could betray the other during the journey, and they would share all the knowledge they acquired. In other words, if they found any books, they would make copies, just as they had done with the previous one.


    Overall, it seemed like a fair contract. The best part was that the contract would only dissolve after they left the area, and a significant distance was required. William felt confident that Kier wouldn''t try anything immediately after they left, as it would be impossible while the contract was still in effect.


    Stuart, William''s magical rat, also reviewed the contract and confirmed everything was in order before the two signed it and set off on their journey. They mounted the firebirds and flew toward the forbidden area of the continent¡ªthe place demons had once called home long ago.

 Chapter 158 Ambush

    Even while flying, traveling across the desert was no easy feat. The wind hitting William''s face was scorching hot, and the view from above wasn''t particularly beautiful. All he could see was sand, sand, and more sand.


    From time to time, they spotted groups of people traveling through the desert. Most of them were riding camels or desert hounds¡ªboth magical creatures.


    There were also oases, places where they could stop to rest before continuing their journey. William and Kier took advantage of these oases whenever they could.


    They made sure to bathe every time they stopped at one. The oases usually had a central water area where people could wash up.


    "To think we still have so much ground to cover," Kier said. "That place is really far."


    The two had been traveling for about three days, and it would take a while longer to reach their destination. But at least they''d only be in the desert for another seven to ten days, which was a relief.


    "Yeah, really. The good thing is that the journey is pretty safe," William replied. "Since we''re flying, there''s no danger, and we can always stop at one of these places."


    Kier looked proud when he heard that. "And who made that possible? Yours truly, with my mounts. You should thank me."


    William rolled his eyes. "Please. I could''ve gotten something like this if I wanted to."


    The two laughed. During their time traveling together, they had talked a lot and grown somewhat closer¡ªsomething William hadn''t expected.


    Before speaking with Kier, William had believed he was just a bloodthirsty thief, but that wasn''t the case. Kier rarely killed people¡ªWilliam believed he had killed more than Kier¡ªand he had only entered the world of crime because his parents were in it and forced him into it.


    "I''m really glad my sister left the life of crime, and now I''m finally leaving too. I feel freer, you know? I can go anywhere without having to constantly hide to avoid getting caught," Kier said.


    "But you know exploring that place won''t be easy, right?" William reminded him. "I''m new here, but from what I''ve heard, that area is forbidden because it''s so dangerous. Do we really stand a chance of coming out alive?"


    This was something William had been wondering for a while. Was it really worth trying to obtain all the demonic knowledge in that cursed valley? Were there no easier places for him to start?


    Despite his incredible progress, William knew his level of strength was still relatively low, and he had a lot of room for improvement¡ªespecially compared to the other heroes who were receiving training from the best instructors and using top-tier equipment.


    "I think we can do it," Kier said. "We''ll proceed cautiously and scout the area thoroughly before doing anything reckless. From what I know, there''s a village nearby that attracts adventurers who want to explore that area. Maybe we can gather some useful information there before blindly charging in."


    "Seems like you''ve done a lot of research on this, huh?" William said.


    Kier laughed. "Of course. I''m not an idiot."


    The two spent the night at the oasis. The only thing they had to worry about was their mounts. The fear was that someone might try to steal them, but the birds Kier had brought always made noise around strangers, so nothing happened.


    Before the sun rose, the two were already back in the air, heading toward their destination. After a few more days, they finally left the desert behind.


    The scenery changed completely. Gone was the endless expanse of sand, replaced by lush green forests, towering mountains, valleys, rivers, and lakes. It was breathtaking.


    William was amazed by the stark contrast in landscapes. How could the same continent be so different? What had happened in the middle of the continent to create that desert?


    That story about it being the result of a battle doesn''t seem so far-fetched after all... he thought.


    "Now that we''re out of the desert, we need to be more careful," Kier said.


    "Why''s that?"


    "In the desert, most enemies were ground-based, but here there are plenty of flying beasts. So we need to be more cautious."


    Flying on a bird like this was great for speed, but it also meant drawing a lot more attention¡ªso there were both benefits and drawbacks.


    The two continued for a few hours after leaving the desert and made a stop on one of the mountains. Camping at the top was ideal since there weren''t many magical beasts around.


    In other words, it was much safer to camp there than near the road. Besides the beasts, they also had to worry about ill-intentioned people, who were common throughout the continent.


    William sat by the campfire, reading his new book. Kier was impressed by how quickly William was improving.


    "You''ve already mastered one spell and are moving on to the second. It took me much longer to get that good. Impressive," he said.


    "It''s nothing special," William replied. "But what about those shadow spells you were using? Are they in this book too?"


    "Yes, they are. The book is divided by elements, so you''ll find fire, dark fire, and shadow spells. From what I understand, these are the main elements demons used. Out of those, I''m best with shadow magic," Kier explained.


    He didn''t have a demonic lineage like William, so he didn''t have the talent for all the elements demons used. William believed Kier only had a natural affinity for shadow magic, which was why he excelled in it. Sear?h the N??elFir§×.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "I see. And do you really think we''ll find those books? You said yourself that many adventurers go there. Isn''t there a chance someone already took them?" William asked.


    Kier nodded. "Yes, that''s true. But as I said, to access those books, you need someone with a demonic lineage, and I doubt anyone with that lineage has gone there. We have a good chance of finding them."


    Despite Kier''s optimism, William wasn''t feeling as confident. If those books had been there for years or even centuries, was it really possible that no one with a demonic lineage had shown up? That thought made William uneasy.


    But he had no choice but to go on this journey, so it was better to take the risk and see if they could find something useful. The worst that could happen was wasting some time.


    After eating the provisions they had brought and chatting for a while, they each retired to their tents. During the night, William received a notification from the System informing him that his temporal magic had recharged and he could use it at any time.


    ''Should I go back to the past?'' he wondered. Continue reading on My Virtual Library Empire


    In the end, he decided to postpone using it. His focus was on the mission, and they were getting close to their destination, so it was better to stay on track.


    The next day, they continued their journey. However, things didn''t go as planned.


    As Kier had mentioned earlier, flying beasts were common in the region, and they needed to be careful. But what they didn''t expect was to encounter other people riding those flying beasts.


    It was a group of mages. Kier recognized them and was visibly alarmed. "Those are slave traders! They''re strong and dangerous!"


    William didn''t like what he heard, and he liked what happened next even less. Kier moved closer to him and used a dagger to draw his blood, cutting his arm! The blood floated into a small glass vial.


    "What are you doing?" William demanded.


    "I''m taking your blood to access the place where the books are. Unfortunately, I''ll have to leave you here! No way we can take on these guys, and as much as I like you, I''d rather you get sold as a slave than me!"


    After saying this, Kier used a teleportation spell and vanished from sight. William was furious.


    Before he could do anything, the slave traders closed in and used a combined spell to create a magical barrier around him, trapping William. He wouldn''t be able to escape.


    Asura quickly spoke in his mind, "Put your blood on me. It''ll allow you to retain your consciousness within the sword as well."


    William didn''t understand why he should do that, but he decided to follow Asura''s advice. His blood was quickly absorbed by the sword, and the slave traders didn''t notice a thing.


    "Well, well, what do we have here? A young man with a sword that looks like it''s worth a fortune. Seems like it''s our lucky day," one of the mages said.


    They were all laughing and looking at William as if he was their prey. Things were not looking good for him.


    He even tried to use his spell to travel to the past, but it didn''t work. It was like the barrier they put around him was locking him in place.


    ''Damn it,'' he thought, ''I am fucked now, again!''


    Things were always hard for William. One of the mages got closer to him and placed something on his body. It was a seal restraining some of his abilities.


    "Now give me everything you have, and come with us," one of them said with a chilling smile.

 Chapter 159 Sold

    William didn''t know what to do in that situation. Luckily, most of his important items could be stored in his inventory, including the spatial bag he had taken from Jinra''s tomb.


    The only thing that remained outside was the Asura sword¡ªwhich, for some reason, couldn''t be stored in the inventory.


    Stuart was also unprotected, but that soon changed. He managed to enter Jinra''s spatial bag and stay safe inside, which was quite impressive.


    However, William still had to hand over his Asura sword to the slave traders.


    "This is going to fetch a good price," one of them said, laughing maniacally. "Not to mention, we''ll sell this guy too. He looks unusual¡ªI think he''ll be worth even more." S§×ar?h the N?velFire(.)net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    They quickly noticed that William looked different from the other people in the region, which made sense since he was from another world and continent.


    For them, this was a great thing and one of the reasons they were so excited to see him.


    "What about the guy who was with him? Should we go after him?" one of them asked. Find your next read on My Virtual Library Empire


    "No way! He seemed really strong and already teleported far away. Let''s focus on this one," another replied.


    They removed the magical barrier surrounding William, but he still couldn''t do anything! The seal they had placed on his body restricted his mana usage, similar to what had been done to James, leaving him powerless!


    Of course, his body was still resilient and capable of facing some magical beasts without using magic, but taking on those slave traders without his full strength was impossible.


    William was shackled, and his mount was confiscated for sale as well. He was taken on one of the slave traders'' mounts¡ªa giant bat-like creature.


    ''What the hell! How am I going to get out of this?'' he thought.


    He could no longer communicate with Asura. Somehow, they had cut off their mental link. William suspected it was because of the seal on his body, but he wasn''t sure.


    They flew through the region, heading toward what seemed to be the slave traders'' base. It was a small fortress hidden deep in the forest, isolated from the rest of the world.


    "Get down!" one of them ordered William as they landed. He pushed William off the mount, causing him to fall face-first onto the ground.


    One of the slave traders shoved William into a room where he saw something shocking. There were several people locked in cells, all with the same seal as him! And they weren''t just humans¡ªthere were other races too!


    They stripped William of his clothes, giving him old, tattered ones, and threw him into a cell with four other people. The cell was filthy, with feces and urine in some corners.


    The other people in the cell were dirty, but William could tell they were beautiful¡ªjust mistreated by the slave traders.


    One of them was a woman with silver hair. She approached William to talk. "Hi, did you manage to alert anyone while you were being brought here? Is someone coming to rescue us?"


    To her, William represented hope¡ªa chance that something might happen to get them out of this terrible situation.


    With a heavy heart, William replied, "I don''t think anyone''s coming to save us."


    The woman began to cry. William thought about comforting her and offering some words of encouragement, but he decided to stay reserved and keep to himself.


    He looked around and noticed that none of the slave traders were watching him, so he took the opportunity to pull out the blood contract he had signed with Kier.


    That''s when he noticed the contract was blank! Kier had tricked him! Not only him but also Stuart, who had a high level of magical perception. This only showed how skilled Kier was, and William had been foolish to trust him.


    "Damn it!" William shouted, punching the dirty floor of the cell.


    Immediately, one of the slave traders appeared and beat him, landing several punches to his face and ribs.


    "Shut up! You''re not allowed to scream here!"


    With that seal, William felt weak, but there was nothing he could do. The best course of action was to accept his situation and not resist the slave traders, as it could lead to worse consequences¡ªmaybe even death.


    William spent two days in that cell with the others. During that time, they spoke little, but it was enough for William to understand their fate.


    Soon, they would be taken out of the cells and brought to an auction where wealthy individuals would come to see and buy the slaves they wanted. William was "lucky" to only spend two days in the cell before being taken out.


    ''If I had to stay in this hellhole any longer, I''d lose my mind,'' he thought.


    However, leaving the cell didn''t mean things would get better. One of the slave traders opened the door and said, "You lot, come with me."


    William and the others were among the slaves chosen for the auction. Some remained in the cells¡ªthey weren''t as in demand or frequently sold.


    This time, they traveled by land, locked in a cage being pulled by a carriage. It was far from comfortable, and there was barely enough space for everyone.


    "They''re taking us to the auction," one of the prisoners said. "I hope a not-so-cruel noble buys me..."


    The prisoners were all anxious because they didn''t know what their fate would be. William felt the same way.


    ''Even if a less cruel noble buys me, I''ll still have to obey, and they probably won''t remove this seal...''


    The situation was far from easy. William''s mind kept drifting to Kier. Would he be able to enter the place where the demonic books were kept with just his blood?


    Had Kier planned to betray William from the very beginning, only needing his blood all along?


    There were so many unanswered questions, and the only thing William could do was endure the cell and use the bucket when necessary...


    A full week passed before they reached their destination. The destination was a mansion located outside the city. It was where nobles from the region and beyond would gather to see and buy the slaves on offer.


    Holding such an auction inside the city was illegal due to certain laws, but buying slaves wasn''t prohibited. So, all they had to do was hold the event outside the city.


    William and the other prisoners were taken inside the mansion¡ªwhich was completely empty¡ªand given baths and better clothes by the servants.


    The idea was to improve their appearance to fetch higher prices at the auction. To achieve this, they even cut the prisoners'' hair and shaved their beards. William had grown a fairly long beard over the past 20 days.


    In the end, their appearance changed drastically before they were put up for sale. The auction began, and several prisoners were sold.


    The price varied depending on the prisoner. The silver-haired woman was beautiful, and her hair color was rare, so she was sold for an exorbitant price.


    William wasn''t much different. He was valued for other reasons.


    "A strong, healthy young man capable of performing various manual tasks without issue. Starting bid: 5,000 gold coins!"


    The prices were outrageous, but these people had money to spare. Several bids were made, and in the end, William was bought by the same noble who had purchased the silver-haired woman.


    Because of this, the noble could no longer participate in the auction, as he had to leave the good opportunities for others. It was one of the auction''s rules, and everyone had agreed to it beforehand.


    The noble in question was a young-looking man with long hair and pale, almost corpse-like skin.


    "Come with me. Let''s leave. There''s no reason to stay here," the noble said.


    William and the silver-haired woman followed him¡ªboth still shackled and sealed.


    Outside the mansion, they saw the noble''s carriage. It wasn''t an ordinary carriage¡ªit could fly! It was the first time William had seen something like that.


    This only showed how wealthy the man was.


    "Get in and stay quiet," the noble said.


    They sat in the carriage and flew away.


    The view from above was stunning, but it didn''t change the fact that they had been sold to a nobleman, and their fate was uncertain.


    At least during the journey, the nobleman allowed them to sleep and provided them with food and drinks, ensuring their well-being.


    Would this continue, or was he simply being kind during the trip?And what a trip it was!


    William spent days in that carriage, and at one point, he decided to talk to the nobleman to find out where they were going.


    "Do you know the forbidden region of the continent? Well, my family''s house is in a region near there, a place full of snow. So, it''s not that close, it takes about a week with a flying mount," the nobleman said.


    William couldn''t hide his joy.


    ''At least I''ll be closer to the region I wanted to go to... Maybe I can escape and go there!'' he thought.

 Chapter 160 Arriving at Black Pine Manor

    Days passed until they finally arrived at the noble''s home. The place was located on top of a mountain, and everything around it was covered in snow. It was exactly as the noble had described.


    William felt like he was back at the Snowpeak Mountain magic academy. Not because of the structure itself¡ªthey were very different¡ªbut because of the snow. It made him think of his old companions and how much simpler life had been back then.


    ''I need to focus on the present and stop dwelling on the past!'' he thought.


    "This is my family''s mansion," the noble said as they stepped out of the carriage. "We are the Black Pine family, and this is Black Pine Manor."


    The noble''s family had lived in the region for a very, very long time. The forest surrounding the mansion was filled with black trees, which was why the family had changed their name over the years.


    William found the place quite beautiful. It reminded him of the resorts he used to see online back on Earth. But the size itself didn''t impress him much, as he had seen many grand things in his life.


    The woman with him, however, seemed more impressed by the place.


    ''She probably hasn''t traveled much in her life,'' William thought.


    The noble who had bought them was named Jonas, and he wasn''t the current head of the family. That was his father. Jonas would take over when his father was no longer able to lead, but that would still take a few years.


    However, even without being in charge, he was already learning a lot from his father and was seen as more important since everyone knew he would eventually take over. This extended to the other families living nearby. Everyone wanted to please Jonas, as it could mean receiving "blessings" when he became the leader.


    "Come with me. I''ll show you where you''ll be staying," Jonas said.


    William was already expecting the worst. They entered through the main gate, where a guard greeted them with a smile and kind words¡ªwell, he greeted Jonas. The guard simply looked at William and the woman without saying a word.


    They passed through the mansion''s garden. The garden had seen better days. Due to the snow, most of the flowers were dead, and only a few managed to survive. This didn''t last all year. During spring and summer, it was common to see more flowers in the area.


    Jonas led them inside the mansion, where William saw the other staff members working there, as well as other members of Jonas''s family. Just like with the guard, no one spoke to them¡ªonly to Jonas.


    "Master," one of the maids said, "we''ve been eagerly awaiting your return."


    "I''m back now," Jonas said with a smile.


    All the people working at the mansion for the Black Pine family seemed to like them a lot. William could tell. However, William and the beautiful woman with him weren''t there to be employees. No. They were there because they had been bought as slaves!


    This meant they wouldn''t receive the same treatment as the others. But, surprisingly, things were better than William had expected. Jonas took them to their rooms. Each had their own room, and although small, the rooms were tidy and clean.


    After what William had endured in the slave traders'' cell, he had expected something similar, but that wasn''t the case. Things were a bit better.


    "You can stay in your rooms today to rest, but tomorrow the work begins," Jonas said before leaving.


    The woman with William was named Wendy. "This seems too good to be true," she said. "I have a feeling the work we''ll start tomorrow is going to be terrible."


    "I think it''s going to suck too, but we can''t be too negative," William replied. "Let''s hope this noble Jonas is a good person."


    Wendy didn''t seem convinced, as she went to her room without saying another word, her face still somewhat sad. William didn''t believe his own words either. He always expected the worst.


    William also went to his room. Inside, there was a bed, a fireplace, and a small table with a chair. The room was so small that everything seemed cramped. It was even hard to walk around without bumping into something.


    The fireplace wasn''t there because Jonas wanted to give luxuries to his new slaves. It was necessary¡ªotherwise, William would freeze to death, and Jonas wouldn''t want to waste his money.


    William lay down on his bed, staring at the ceiling and thinking about life.


    ''What am I going to do now?'' he wondered.


    He didn''t know what would happen to him the next day, and that thought was somewhat terrifying. For him, training so hard in life to become a mage, only to be unable to use mana because of the seal placed on him, was simply awful.


    William eventually fell asleep after tossing and turning for a while. The warmth of the blankets in the freezing cold was impossible to resist.


    He woke up in the middle of the night to someone knocking on his door. It was one of Jonas''s maids, bringing him new clothes.


    "These clothes are warmer for you," she said, then added with a look of disdain, "I don''t know why Master Jonas is treating slaves so well. It''s like he''s treating you better than the staff."


    She then threw the clothes onto William''s bed. "And there''s food for you in the kitchen. Go get it, or you''ll sleep on an empty stomach."


    Everything happened so fast that William barely had time to process it. In the end, he tried to forget the hatred the maid had shown him.


    He changed into the new clothes, which were lined with animal fur to ensure he wouldn''t freeze. After that, William headed to the kitchen to get something to eat before going back to sleep.


    The problem was that the mansion was enormous, and he had no idea where the kitchen was. Before leaving, he knocked on Wendy''s door, which was next to his. When she answered, William noticed she was also wearing new clothes, likely given to her just like him.


    "Did they call you to the kitchen too?" Wendy asked. "From what I understood, there''s something for us to eat there."


    "Yeah, that''s right. Want to come with me to find the kitchen? I have no idea where it is."


    "Of course!"


    Wendy seemed a bit more cheerful than the last time William had spoken to her¡ªa few hours earlier¡ªand that was a good sign. Maybe the new clothes and food had won her over.


    The two walked together through the mansion''s wide corridors, admiring the paintings, sculptures, and flowers that adorned the place. The walls were made of excellent materials.


    They encountered some of the staff, but when they asked about the kitchen, no one answered them. They didn''t even say hello. It was as if William and Wendy didn''t exist.


    This made them feel sad, but neither of them confronted the staff. They searched for the kitchen on their own and eventually found it.


    The kitchen was quite large, with multiple ovens, pots for making soup, and a well-stocked pantry. Many people lived in the mansion, so they needed a lot of food daily to keep everyone well-fed.


    One of the cooks saw William and Wendy and said, "Here''s your food."


    She handed them two bowls of soup. The soup wasn''t watery¡ªit was hearty, filled with vegetables and meat. It was better than William had expected.


    Experience more tales on My Virtual Library Empire


    The two sat at one of the wooden tables in the kitchen and ate their dinner.


    "Why does it feel like they hate us?" Wendy asked.


    William looked around and noticed some hostile glances, but when he confronted those people, they turned away, unable to meet his gaze.


    "I have no idea, but I feel like we''ll find out soon. Maybe it''s just because they don''t like slaves."


    After eating, they placed their bowls in the sink and left. No one forced them to clean up, so they didn''t. If the kitchen staff had treated them well, William might have considered helping, but after all that hostility? No way.


    Wendy went straight to her room after eating, while William wanted to find a bathroom and took the opportunity to explore the mansion. It was nighttime, which meant most of the staff and Jonas''s family were asleep.


    It was the perfect time to walk around the mansion and try to learn more about its layout. William wandered through the now darker corridors. The silence was deafening, and the only people he saw moving around were the guards. S§×ar?h the novel(F~)ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "What are you doing walking around so late at night? You know that''s forbidden," a guard said.


    "I''m just looking for the bathroom. None of the staff would tell me where it is."


    William had already found the bathroom¡ªhe was just using it as an excuse.


    "Come with me," the guard said, "I''ll show you where it is."

 Chapter 161 Tough Job and Asura is Back

    The guard showed William where the bathroom was. He still tried to explore more of the mansion to understand why Jonas had bought him and Wendy, but he couldn''t figure anything out, which was a shame.


    In the end, he went to the bathroom, used it, and returned to his room.


    On the way back, the mansion felt even emptier, and the only sound William could hear was the wind hitting the windows. Explore more at My Virtual Library Empire


    One of the windows opened as he was heading back to his room, letting in a freezing gust of wind that sent shivers down his spine.


    "Chilly," William muttered.


    He walked over to close the window. There were no staff around, and William felt it wasn''t a good idea to leave it open.


    The last thing he wanted was trouble, and this could certainly lead to some.


    As he started closing the window, William looked outside and saw something curious. The window faced the back of the mansion¡ªa part he hadn''t seen yet¡ªand there, he noticed some lights on.


    William could see clearly thanks to his enhanced vision¡ªa gift from the strange snake''s lineage.


    ''What the hell is going on over there?'' he wondered.


    The light was coming from a small shack. It was strange to see someone out there so late at night, especially considering everything was covered in snow.


    ''Is that where some of the guards sleep?''


    Several possibilities ran through William''s mind as he tried to make sense of what he was seeing, but in the end, he couldn''t find an answer.


    The only way to find out more would be to leave the mansion and go out there, and he didn''t want to do that. At least, not now. William closed the window, returned to his room, and went to sleep.


    The next morning, William woke up to knocking on his door. He expected to see one of the maids¡ªmaybe even the same one who had treated him poorly¡ªbut it was none other than Jonas!


    "Get up and eat something in the kitchen. After that, meet me outside," Jonas said, then left.


    In that brief conversation, William could already tell that Jonas wasn''t treating him as kindly as he had during the journey to the mansion.


    ''He was just trying to make us feel comfortable¡­ We''re slaves, after all¡­''


    William did as Jonas instructed. Wendy also went to eat, but unlike him, she was called to go somewhere else.


    "Any idea what we''ll have to do?" William asked.


    "No clue. But it''s definitely going to be exhausting, and maybe even dangerous," Wendy replied.


    William nodded in agreement. "We''ll definitely be doing the things they don''t want to do."


    After eating bread, fruit, and eggs, William left the kitchen and went to meet Jonas outside.


    Jonas was waiting in front of the mansion, but that wasn''t their destination.


    "Come with me," Jonas said.


    They walked around the mansion¡ªand this made William curious about the lights he had seen the night before.


    William pointed to the shack he had noticed. "What''s that cabin over there?"


    "Nothing you need to know about, and don''t even think about going there, or you''ll face the consequences," Jonas said sharply. "Our destination is over here."


    The place they went to had another shack¡ªmuch smaller¡ªfilled with tools.


    And near this shack, on a dirt path, was the entrance to a mine. Jonas handed William a pickaxe and a sack to carry the mined materials.


    "Your job is simple: mine mana stones. You''ll do this all morning, take a break for lunch, and then continue until early evening," Jonas said.


    It was utterly inhumane. However, William couldn''t even complain. Unfortunately, his fate was no longer in his hands.


    Jonas left. William, with the pickaxe in hand, entered the mine.


    Inside, he found other people! There were three men there, all dirty and thin. They were also slaves working in the mines.


    Wendy wasn''t there, and William already knew why: the grueling labor of mining was simply too exhausting!


    He could tell just by looking at the men present. They were all malnourished, filthy, and had empty looks in their eyes.


    However, there was something they all had in common: they all had the same seal on their bodies as William.


    In other words, these slaves weren''t ordinary people¡ªthey were mages! They could be as strong as William, or maybe even stronger?


    This gave him a glimmer of hope.


    ''Can I get them to work with me to remove the seals?'' William thought.


    "Hey, guys," William said.


    None of the three men responded. It was as if they hadn''t even heard him. William tried again, and one of the men finally replied.


    "Listen, kid, I feel bad for you ending up here so young, but since you''re here, you need to learn how things work. Less talking, more working. Otherwise, one of the guards will show up and beat you."


    After that, no one spoke to each other. They were all mining mana stones, and they made it clear that William should do the same before something happened to him.


    William went deeper into the mine, away from the others. He just wanted to be alone.


    The walls, ceiling, and sometimes even the floor of the mine were filled with veins of blue stones¡ªthe mana stones.


    This mine had A LOT of mana stones.


    ''It must have been discovered recently, and now Jonas and his family want to claim all the wealth¡­''


    William believed it had been discovered recently because of the sheer amount of mana stones. If it were an older mine, it would have been nearly depleted by now.


    But that didn''t make much sense either. The mine was located right behind Jonas''s mansion. How could he or his family have taken so long to find it?


    Everything was very strange, but William could only focus on mining and stop thinking about these things. With the pickaxe in hand and the sack by his side, he began to mine.


    The good thing was that even though he was inside a mine¡ªwhere it was supposed to be quite hot¡ªthe temperature was actually bearable.


    William also felt that his much stronger body compared to normal mages gave him an advantage down there.


    His mana was blocked, but his physical strength was still intact, which meant he didn''t tire as easily while mining.


    In fact, he noticed that his strength made it easier to extract the mana stones. And on the very first day, he already came up with a plan.


    ''If I mine too much and bring back a lot of mana stones, they''ll expect more from me. So, it''s better to match the others'' output¡­'' he thought.


    Since it was his first day, he didn''t have a clear idea of how much he should bring. He mined for about two hours, filled his sack with a good amount of mana stones, and then sat down to rest.


    Thanks to his System inventory, he was able to pull out the book he had been studying and started reading. However, since his mana was blocked, practicing magic wasn''t very useful, so he put the book away.


    When it was time for lunch, William passed by the other men and checked how many stones they had collected to get an idea of how much he should work.


    From what he could tell, the amount was similar, but those men had started mining a bit earlier. This meant William would have to slow down his pace.


    ''This means I''ll have a lot of free time down here, but for what?''


    That was still a mystery to him. He and the other miners went to the kitchen to grab something to eat. S§×ar?h the N?vel?ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    There, William ran into Wendy again. She already looked tired, but nothing too extreme.


    "What kind of work are you doing?" William asked.


    "I''m responsible for cleaning the outside of the mansion and working in the greenhouse where they grow food and some medicinal herbs. What about you?" Wendy replied.


    That work sounded like a dream compared to what William had to do.


    "I''m stuck mining mana stones like crazy in the mine behind the mansion¡­" William said.


    Wendy felt a little sorry for him. She placed a hand on his shoulder, gave him a smile, but didn''t say anything.


    Unfortunately, she had no way to help him.


    William ate his lunch as quickly as possible, thinking he could use the time to explore the mansion a bit before heading back to the mine. But, unfortunately, that didn''t work out.


    "Done eating? Back to work," Jonas said as he passed by.


    Next time, William knew it would be better to take as long as possible to finish his meal¡­


    He returned to the mines once again, and started mining again. This time, he went a little slower, and finished his job hours before his shift ended.


    But what could he do with his free time? Well, there was something. Asura''s voice ringed inside his mind, which was odd considering the sword was far gone!


    "Can you hear me?"

 Chapter 162 Becoming a Sword

    William was very surprised to hear Asura''s voice again. He knew the same slave traders who had captured him had also taken his sword and surely sold it to someone.


    "How are we talking like this? I thought the seal had cut off our connection," William said mentally.


    "Yes, it did, and that''s why I asked you to put your blood on the sword. Now you can talk to me."


    "That''s great, but where the hell are you? I''m stuck at the end of the world here, working in a mine, mining mana stones¡­"


    As much as talking to Asura was a great thing, William still had no idea if it would help him in any way.


    Maybe it would help with the loneliness and give him someone to talk to, but what he needed was a way to escape, not just chat.


    "Really? What a situation¡­ Well, I''m far away too. I ended up being sold to a wealthy merchant who lives in a village. Can you believe it?"


    "Wow¡­"


    "Yeah, anyway, I have a way to help you. How about you take control of the sword? Do you have any free time there?"


    William did have some free time since he could mine the stones pretty quickly.


    "Yeah, I have some free time. But I''m not sure what you''re trying to do."


    Asura then explained. "Since I''m far from you, our connection is weak, and I''m almost forced to hibernate again. So, you''ll become the sword, not me. I want you to take over the sword''s consciousness during your free time!"


    "That way, you can talk to the person who bought me and try to influence them. If you can transfer your demonic energy to the user, well, then maybe you can get help to get out of there."


    The whole situation was quite complex, and William wasn''t sure if he could pull off what Asura was proposing.


    Wouldn''t it be easier to spend his energy trying to escape in another way?


    William was afraid of being unable to remove the seal¡ªhe knew it was difficult because James had also received a seal¡ªand there was a chance he''d be stuck there as a slave for a long time, or maybe even forever!


    So, in reality, trying this crazy plan Asura suggested seemed interesting.


    "Alright, let''s do it. But how do I do it?"


    "I''ll share some of my memories with you, and you''ll take over. You''ll understand."


    At that moment, many images flooded William''s mind. It was as if he had lived those moments himself.


    The memories Asura shared were mostly related to some spells and rituals he could perform when taking over the sword''s consciousness.


    All of this would be used to gradually influence the sword''s wielder and, in the end, get them to come to William and rescue him.


    It seemed like a slow process, but an interesting one. After receiving all that information, William had to sit at the back of the mine and process everything.


    After that, he did something he never imagined he could do. His consciousness shifted to the sword, and he began to see things as if he were Asura!


    The vision wasn''t great, but he could hear everything clearly and sense mana much more easily than he could with his original body.


    The most impressive part was that his real body still retained some consciousness¡ªenough for him to perform basic tasks like mining mana stones and maybe even sleep!


    ''Where am I¡­?'' he thought.


    William was in a dark room, locked away. He noticed other things around him. They were other types of weapons.


    And then, the door to the room opened, and two people walked in. One was an older man, and the other was a young woman.


    "What do you have to show me, Dad?" she asked.


    The man seemed very excited. He was smiling broadly.


    He walked over to where William was¡ªor rather, where his sword form was. Sear?h the N?vel(F)ire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    The man picked him up, removed the cloth covering him, and said, "I bought this impressive sword for you. It was a bit pricey, but it''ll be great for you."


    The young woman took the sword in her hands, and at that moment, William felt a strange sensation. It was odd for him to have someone holding his body, especially this beautiful woman with delicate hands.


    He wasn''t sure how he felt about it, but he stayed calm.


    "I love it! I really needed one, especially since I''m going to the battle academy in a few days. Thank you so much, Dad!"


    She gave her father a tight hug. William found the whole encounter very touching and beautiful.


    He didn''t do anything at first. As soon as the woman picked up William, he felt he could already send her mental messages.


    Enjoy new tales from My Virtual Library Empire


    However, that would only scare her, and it wouldn''t be worth it. He needed to slowly build a bond with her before starting to influence her. At least, that''s how he planned to act.


    After all, time seemed to be the most precious thing he had at the moment, as he was completely trapped in the Black Pine family''s mansion¡­


    For hours, he simply watched the woman swing him back and forth, practicing on a wooden training dummy.


    The strangest part was not feeling any pain even when hitting the dummy¡ªwhich made sense since he was a sword¡ªand also feeling his body being swung around.


    William already knew the woman''s name was Victoria, and that she would soon leave the village to train in magic and close combat at a battle academy in a larger city.


    This battle academy seemed more focused on battle mages¡ªthe type William was.


    On this first day, William didn''t try to talk to her. After a while, he fully returned his consciousness to his body since he needed to bring back the mana stones.


    With the sack of mana stones in hand, he left the mine and found one of the guards outside. This guard was responsible for collecting the mana stones from all the slaves.


    The other men handed over their mana stones and left. William did the same.


    The amount of mana stones was similar.


    ''At least now I know how much I need to work daily,'' William thought.


    It was already getting dark when he finally left the mines. He and the other miners went to the kitchen to eat something.


    "You seem to have handled your first day well," one of them said.


    This miner seemed younger, and he didn''t have the same empty, defeated look as the other two.


    "Yeah, but it''s the first day, right? Of course, it''s easier to handle. How long have you been here?" William asked.


    "About a year," the man said. "Those two have been here for several years, I think. I''ve kind of accepted that I''ll never leave this place."


    "They''ve been mining for that long? The mine still seems so full."


    "Mining started a year ago. We all came together. But from what I know, they did other things before. Now, if you ask me what, I have no idea."


    William thought about asking his name, but the man stopped him. "Don''t say your old name. None of us have names anymore, unless Master Jonas gives you one. If you say your name here and they hear it, well, you''ll get beaten."


    That caught William off guard! He remembered he had shared his name with Wendy¡ªshe had done the same¡ªbut luckily, no one had heard or simply forgot to report it to Jonas.


    "Really? I didn''t know¡­ Thanks for letting me know."


    "No problem. You can call me 03, okay? It''s because I was the third to come. And you can be 04."


    "This naming system seems simple enough."


    The two ate and chatted a bit, but after that, it was time to return to their rooms. William also found out that they only had free time to do other things three days a week!


    "We can do some other things at night three days a week, but on the other days, we have to stay in our rooms," 03 said, then leaned closer to William and whispered, "I''m pretty sure they do this so we don''t even have time to think of an escape plan."


    What 03 said made sense, and William agreed.


    They each went to their own room. When William arrived, he noticed that Wendy was already inside because of the lights, but when he went to knock on the door to talk to her, one of the guards who was standing nearby stopped him.


    "You can''t talk to her today. Go to your room and keep quiet."


    The treatment was terrible again, and William felt like trash. In fact, he didn''t expect anything else since he had been bought as a slave...


    He went to his room and spent the rest of the night looking out the window and reflecting on his next steps.


    ''I need to get the fucking out of here....''


    That thought grew inside his head with the passing days. Would he find a way out of that situation?


    William was staring at the window when he noticed something peculiar. A few people were walking on the courtyard, moving toward the back part of the mansion. It was the same area where he saw that cabin with the lights on.

 Chapter 163 Using Her

    Just like the last time, something was happening in that small cabin that Jonas didn''t want William to know about.


    ''What''s going on there? I have to find out!''


    William was growing curious, and as much as he wanted to go check it out, he didn''t.


    The mansion''s hallways were still being watched¡ªespecially the rooms where the slaves were¡ªso going there was almost impossible. sea??h th§× n?vel_Fire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    What he could do was jump out the window and venture over, but he decided to wait.


    In the end, William went to his bed, lay down, and tried to rest.


    Stay updated via My Virtual Library Empire


    The next morning, things happened the same way. He ate something in the morning and headed to the mine to work.


    However, two things changed. The first was that Wendy wasn''t there to have breakfast with them, which was strange.


    The second was that William was starting to socialize more with the other miners, especially 03, who was closer to William.


    As soon as they entered the mine, 03 said, "What do you think about trying to come up with a plan to escape? Do you have any idea how we can remove this seal that''s blocking our mana?"


    "No idea, but we can definitely think of something. There has to be a way out of here," William replied.


    The other two slaves weren''t too keen on the plan. "Do you really think we can escape? It''s impossible! They paid a lot to buy us, and they''ll never give us a chance to leave. Accepting that sooner will be better for you."


    William wasn''t surprised when he heard that. Just by looking at their faces, he could tell they had lost hope of escaping. However, all William needed to do was give them hope.


    If they realized there was a chance to escape, well, then they''d want to try and work together to find a way out of that place.


    "03, do you know anything about that cabin in the back? I noticed some lights there at night," William asked.


    "Ah, yeah, I''ve noticed it too. I''ve always been curious about it, but I''ve never been able to go check it out, and now I''ve kind of forgotten about it. You''ll forget about it too soon enough," 03 said, patting William on the back. "Let''s get to work, 04. We''ve got a lot of mana stones to collect."


    Each of them went to a different part of the mine. William went to the back, just like he had the day before, and started working.


    He collected the stones while his mind was also focused on the demonic sword.


    Victoria was sleeping. Her father was too. It was still early in the morning.


    William observed the surroundings using his enhanced senses and noticed that the house was quite large, but only two people lived there¡ªVictoria and her father.


    And as much as he wanted to explore the place, it was impossible since he couldn''t move.


    ''I think it''s time to start exerting my influence¡­'' he thought.


    He decided to take advantage of Victoria''s sleep to begin influencing her. Although it was risky to act so quickly, William felt it was better to act now rather than waste time.


    Using his demonic energy¡ªwhich wasn''t completely sealed since the seal only affected his mana¡ªWilliam managed to enter Victoria''s mind while she was sleeping!


    He entered her dreams! In the dream, William appeared in his "normal" form, but he wore ancient clothing, and at his waist was his Asura sword and a small bamboo flask containing alcohol.


    In her dream, Victoria was at the battle academy she was about to attend, and everyone there was impressed with her power!


    The students praised her and treated her well, and the teachers constantly said she was the best student they had ever had.


    ''It seems like everyone wants power to feel this way, huh? I guess there''s nothing wrong with that,'' William thought.


    He walked around the school, and it didn''t take long for Victoria to notice his presence. When she saw the sword at his waist, she said, "Oh my god, am I now dreaming about a handsome warrior who uses my sword?"


    She thought this was just part of her dream¡ªnormal for dreams¡ªbut it wasn''t quite like that.


    William approached her and said, "What an interesting dream you''re having. Is this what you''re looking for at the battle academy? Flattery and a handsome prince?"


    Victoria knew she was dreaming, and what William said was strange to her.


    "Is my mind playing tricks on me now? I know you''re just a product of my imagination," she said.


    "Am I? Or maybe your father bought a sword that contains a piece of my soul, gave it to you, and now I''ve come to talk to you in your dreams. Ever thought of that?" William replied.


    Victoria looked at him with a startled expression. "I''d never think of something like that, but it must just be part of my dream."


    Despite William''s influence, she was the one controlling the dream as she saw fit, so with just a thought, William was expelled from her dream.


    But when Victoria finally woke up and went to the living room where the sword was, she looked at it and began to reflect.


    "Was that real?"


    She picked up the sword and started examining it, noticing that it did indeed look ancient and had a different aura.


    At that moment, her father also woke up. "Good morning, my beautiful daughter. Already thinking about training? Please eat something first."


    Victoria placed the sword back on its stand. "I''ll train later. What are we having for breakfast?"


    "Whatever you want," her father said with a smile.


    The two prepared breakfast together. William felt a bit envious of Victoria. She still had her family with her. As for him? Well, he had lost his family and was now in a completely different world.


    Around 9 a.m., she took the sword and went to train. William thought she would train with the dummies in her backyard, but Victoria left and ventured into the forest.


    She went to a small stream near her home. There, she placed the sword on a rock, knelt in front of it, and said, "Was what happened in my dream true? Are you an ancient artifact with a soul?"


    William was surprised!


    ''Most people would be scared, but she''s willing to find out more. Is it because she''s thirsty for power?''


    This seemed like the perfect moment to try talking to her. Things were happening faster than William had expected.


    He concentrated and then sent her a mental message. It was extremely difficult to do.


    The two didn''t have a strong connection, and Victoria didn''t have any demonic lineage to easily use his energy.


    In other words, it was simply very hard to send a message. He had to think of something simple to say, something that could help in some way.


    "Yes, what happened in the dream was real. However, I can''t speak often or at length, but know that I''m here to help you and make you stronger."


    Victoria took a few steps back and almost fell into the stream. "I can''t believe it, the sword really talks! What do I do? What do I do?"


    This was the first time something like this had happened to her. And from what she knew, artifacts that could do something like this were incredibly rare and powerful.


    "Did I finally hit the jackpot? I think this will help me a lot at the battle academy!"


    This made her even more excited to practice. She decided to practice on some dead logs nearby.


    William once again took the opportunity to demonstrate a bit of the power he could channel through the sword. He used the black flames that enveloped the sword as she struck the log!


    This greatly increased the power of the attack, and the log burned to ashes in seconds.


    "The sword even has special attacks!"


    Victoria was thrilled and wanted to tell her father about it, but William spoke to her again.


    "This has to be kept a secret," he said. "Many people might want to use me, and I only accept those I find worthy. Your father can''t know."


    She and her father had always been very close, and Victoria began to feel bad about keeping secrets, but she could already imagine that telling him might not be a good idea.


    There was a chance her father would think the sword was dangerous and worth much more than he had paid, meaning he might want to take it and sell it.


    He was a merchant who thought a lot about money, so that was something he might do.


    Victoria didn''t want that. She wanted to use her new magical sword to become important at the battle academy she was about to attend.


    "Alright, I''ll keep it a secret. What else can you do to make me stronger?" she asked.


    William didn''t respond because he couldn''t send mental messages frequently, but he was already thinking of ways to use Victoria to his advantage and, perhaps, save his real body.

 Chapter 164 Preparation

    Victoria waited for a response, and although she didn''t get one, she was thrilled to know that the sword her father had brought wasn''t ordinary.


    She had worked hard to secure a spot at the battle academy and knew her talent wasn''t the most impressive. Having a powerful weapon might be exactly what she needed to become a key figure at the academy.


    "I''ll keep it a secret, just like the sword said, and I''ll surprise my father and everyone at the academy!" Victoria declared.


    Soon after, she returned to her training. William was observing everything she was doing, but from time to time, he had to shift his focus back to his main body.


    The reason was the slave 03, who had come to the back of the cave to talk to him. William noticed him approaching before he arrived and returned to avoid looking suspicious.


    "So this is where you''ve been mining," 03 said. "Are you antisocial or something?"


    William smiled. "Yeah, a little. What brings you here, my friend?"


    It was the first time 03 had come to talk to William like this. They usually only chatted during lunch or breakfast, never during mining hours.


    In fact, it was 03 who had warned William to be careful about talking too much, as getting caught would lead to penalties.


    "Well, I came to convince you of a risky proposal. Can we sit and talk?" 03 said.


    William frowned but agreed. Both sat on the dirt floor and began to whisper.


    "Tomorrow is our day off," 03 said. "Our shift will end earlier, and we''ll have some free time. But more importantly, Jonas is hosting a special dinner with the other noble families in the region."


    Still not understanding where this was going, William asked, "And what are you thinking?"


    "This will be our best chance to explore the mansion! I''m thinking of checking out that cabin you mentioned."


    William stroked his chin and began to reflect. Indeed, a dinner of that scale was the perfect opportunity to explore.


    The guards would be more focused there, and everyone would be busy with conversations and wine. This would certainly give William the chance to investigate.


    "And why not escape from here?" William questioned.


    03 shook his head. "There''s no way. They''ll have guards stationed at every exit. The best we can do is to explore this shed and hope to find something useful."


    William decided to go along with it. Standing still and hoping for a miracle wasn''t going to get them anywhere. The mine''s oppressive darkness seemed to close in around him, the faint glow of mana stones offering little comfort. His heart raced as he weighed the risks. Exploring the mysterious place behind the mansion was tempting, but the thought of Jonas''s cold, calculating gaze sent a shiver down his spine.


    "Alright, let''s do it," William said, his voice low. "But how do we get there without being seen?"


    03 hesitated, his brow furrowed. "We''ll use the darkness as cover. They''ll be too busy with dinner to notice us."


    William''s jaw tightened. "And the guards? Jonas isn''t stupid. He''s not going to let us roam around unsupervised."


    "We''ll handle them," 03 said, his tone firm. "Trust me. This will work."


    William nodded, though doubt gnawed at him. As 03 returned to the other slaves, William''s thoughts churned. The plan was risky, but what other choice did they have?


    Just then, a soft rustle came from his spatial bag. Out popped Stuart, his fur shimmering faintly with residual mana. The magical rat scurried onto William''s shoulder, his beady eyes gleaming with intelligence.


    "I''ve been listening," Stuart whispered. "That place behind the mansion¡­ it reeks of strange mana. We need to check it out."


    "Stuart!" William''s face lit up with relief. "You''re back!"


    "For now," Stuart said, his voice urgent. "I can''t stay out long. They''ll sense my mana, and that''ll draw attention. I''ll hide for now and come back tomorrow night."


    Before William could protest, Stuart vanished back into the bag.


    Alone again, William returned to his mining duties, but this time he chose not to bring his consciousness to his sword, Asura.


    He needed to stay focused, to think about this plan and whether it would succeed. He was incredibly anxious, as this could mean discovering something useful, or facing punishment...


    William was lost in thought throughout his shift, and although he saw 03 during meals, they didn''t discuss the matter. The reason was obvious: there were too many ears in the mansion, especially in the kitchen where the cooks loved to gossip, and seemed to dislike William and the others.


    Once again, when William returned to his room at night, Wendy was gone. He was starting to get worried, unsure of her whereabouts.


    The same guard as always stood there in front of the two rooms, acting as a kind of watchman. William approached him and inquired about Wendy in the most respectful way possible.


    "Excuse me, sir. Could you tell me where the young woman who sleeps in the room next door is? I haven''t seen her for two days."


    The guard initially considered responding rudely, but perhaps due to William''s polite demeanor, he decided to be more friendly. In truth, the guards weren''t inherently gruff; they were simply following orders from the noble family who employed them. However, it was nighttime, and no one from the noble family was around.


    "Listen, young man, I know she was working in the plantations and I''ve seen her there a few times, but she''s no longer sleeping in that room. I have no idea where she is. Now, go to your room before someone shows up and reprimands you."


    William quietly thanked the guard and returned to his room, even more pensive. Where could Wendy be? Enjoy new adventures from My Virtual Library Empire


    She seemed to have enjoyed her first day of work¡ªor at least it seemed that way when she spoke with William¡ªbut now she had vanished. What on earth was going on?


    ''If only I could go to the plantations during the day to talk to her... Could I manage that tomorrow?'' William wondered.


    He knew that for three days of the week it was possible to wander around the mansion at night, but according to 03, tomorrow''s shift in the mines would be shorter due to the dinner. In other words, he might be able to walk around the area in the afternoon and look for Wendy! The thought made William eagerly anticipate the arrival of dawn.


    With his body and mind exhausted, William laid his head on his bed''s pillow and drifted off, sleeping like a log.


    The next day, he woke up feeling energized and went straight to breakfast, where he found Jonas, who came to speak with him and the other miners.


    "Today you''ll only be mining in the morning," Jonas said, "and after that, you''ll take a bath and make yourselves presentable. I don''t want the other nobles to see you and think I don''t take care of my employees. Understood?"


    With that, he left. 03 glanced at William and gave him a smile, but said nothing. After breakfast, they all returned to the mines and began extracting mana stones.


    03 approached William again, leaving his work area at the beginning of the mine and going to the back where William usually stayed.


    "I told you we''d have more time today. It''s the perfect opportunity for us to find out something. Are you ready?" 03 asked.


    William had already accepted that he would have to go with him and take a chance. "Absolutely. In the afternoon, I want to go to where the plantations are. Do you know where they are?"


    03 frowned, "And why do you want to go there?"


    "Remember the woman who came here with me? She was working on the plantation and ended up disappearing, and now I want to find out what happened."


    "Yes, I remember. I can show you where it is."


    "Thanks, buddy."


    After that, the two parted ways and continued working. The hours passed slowly¡ªperhaps because William was anxious¡ªand when lunch finally ended, he was free!


    "Free for one day, what a pitiful situation," 03 remarked.


    The other two slaves who worked with them decided to leave and didn''t want to be part of their plan. In fact, they didn''t even know about the plan.


    "I''m going to take a shower and then you can show me where these plantations are," William said.


    "Sure thing."


    William went to the public bathroom¡ªthe only one he was allowed to use¡ªand took a cold shower. The shower was simply awful because it was already very cold, and he still had to shower with cold water. Luckily, his body was very resilient and he survived it just fine.


    After that, it was time to meet up with 03 and go look for Wendy.


    ''What exactly happened to her?'' William wondered as he left the mansion. sea??h th§× ¦Çov§×lFire .net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    He met with 03 on the back part of the mansion, and the two left, going toward the forest.

 Chapter 165 Seeing Wendy Again

    The snow on the ground was deep. William''s feet sank with every step.


    "Are you sure the plantation is around here?" he asked, looking around in complete confusion.


    It was the first time he had been to that part of the mansion. Since the day he arrived, he had only stayed in the mansion or inside the mines.


    03 nodded. "Yes, I''m sure. I came to take care of the plantation once, so I know where it is. We''ll see some greenhouses soon."


    And indeed, it didn''t take long for them to find the greenhouses. They had followed a small path through the forest until they reached an open area with the greenhouses.


    William quickly glanced around and saw about ten large greenhouses and three cabins.


    "Are those cabins for the workers? Maybe the woman who came with me is sleeping there?" William asked.


    03 was always the playful type. He nudged William with his elbow and smiled. "Are you in love? Don''t worry, your damsel is definitely there."


    "That''s not it," William said, pushing him back.


    The two laughed at the situation¡ªsomething rare in that mansion¡ªand then headed toward the greenhouses.


    William did think Wendy was a beautiful woman, but he wasn''t thinking about relationships. What he wanted was to find out what had happened to her.


    Despite only being there for a few days, he had already noticed that Jonas and the rest of his family weren''t careful with their employees, let alone their slaves.


    Not to mention the strange lights at the back of the mansion at night.


    ''I feel like they''re hiding something¡­'' William thought.


    As they approached the greenhouses and cabins, one of the greenhouse doors opened, and out came Wendy!


    Wendy saw William approaching, and a smile appeared on her face. She couldn''t contain her happiness at seeing him.


    She ran to him and gave him a hug. 03 didn''t say anything, just watched how things would unfold.


    "I was worried about you," William said, placing his hands on Wendy''s shoulders. "You disappeared out of nowhere, and I tried to ask about you, but no one said anything."


    Wendy looked sad after hearing that. "Yes, I know. For some reason, they decided I should sleep here, and they won''t let me go back to the mansion anymore. It''s a bit uncomfortable, but at least it''s quieter here."


    "Do you want to see my place?" she asked.


    "Of course."


    They followed Wendy to one of the cabins. On the way, she explained that other women were working with her, and each had their own cabin.


    Once inside, William noticed the interior. It was simple but cozy. Most importantly, there was a good bed with warm blankets and a fireplace. This made him less worried about Wendy.


    But the reason she had to stay there so suddenly was still strange. Even though it was closer to where she worked, the mansion wasn''t far either. Why did they want to keep her away like that?


    Continue your journey on My Virtual Library Empire


    "Overall, my job is fun but exhausting. There are a lot of plants to take care of here, from food to magical plants," she said.


    William and 03 exchanged glances. "And our job sucks. Imagine being stuck in a hot mine collecting mana stones all day."


    "Wow," Wendy said. "I can''t even imagine the suffering. But why are you here today? I thought it was forbidden to leave the mansion?"


    "There''s a noble dinner tonight, and everyone''s focused on that," William explained.


    "Really?"


    Wendy seemed very surprised when she heard that. It was as if she had no idea what was happening in the mansion, which was strange because it was right there.


    It was as if she was trapped in her own little world, unable to see what was happening outside.


    "You didn''t know?" William asked, surprised. "I thought everyone knew about it."


    "No, I didn''t. I don''t know anything about what''s going on there. The only person I see is a guard who brings me meals, and we don''t talk much."


    "Is that really true?"


    William hadn''t imagined they would keep Wendy so isolated from everything happening. It didn''t make much sense.


    There seemed to be another reason behind it, and William wanted to find out, but Wendy didn''t know anything at the moment.


    "That''s all I know," she said, "but thank you for visiting. It means a lot to me."


    At that moment, there was a knock on Wendy''s cabin door.


    She got up and went to answer it. She had no choice.


    On the other side of the door was a guard in heavy armor, with a sharp sword at his waist. "I noticed you have visitors," the guard said.


    William and 03 had just arrived, and yet a guard already knew they were there. They were constantly being watched, and this was a reminder that their mission to explore the mansion at night without being seen was quite risky.


    "Yes, I do. Is there a problem? I heard there''s a dinner tonight, and they''re off today," Wendy said.


    The guard smiled. "Yes, there''s indeed a dinner tonight, but they can''t be here. You two," the guard pointed at both of them, "can come with me?"


    Without any choice, William and 03 said goodbye to Wendy and left, following the guard. William was glad he at least found her and saw she was okay. That took away the bad thoughts that had been running through his mind¡­


    ''And why was the guard so polite with her? That''s rare with us. Everything is so strange¡­'' William thought.


    The guard stayed with them until they returned to the mansion''s entrance, where he warned them, "Don''t go there again. Next time, there will be consequences. And behave today so Lord Jonas doesn''t get embarrassed."


    Jonas had let the slaves roam free during the day not because he was kind but because he wanted them out of the way, not interfering with the dinner.


    William and 03 knew this well. After the guard left, 03 said, "So now what? Wait until night?"


    Their plan would only happen at night. Trying to go in before that was too risky.


    "I guess so. Can you meet me in my room?" William said.


    "Yeah, no problem. I''ll find something to do in the meantime. If I find anything useful, I''ll let you know later."


    Each went their separate way during the day. William was also unsure what to do. During free times like this, he loved practicing magic and getting stronger, but that was impossible with the seal on his body.


    Speaking of the seal, I think there''s a library here¡­ Maybe there''s something there?


    William entered the mansion and looked for the library. As soon as he entered, he encountered two guards at the door who wouldn''t let him in.


    "No employees or slaves are allowed in the library," one of the guards said. "Access is restricted to specific individuals. Go away."


    William left, a bit annoyed, even though he had expected something like this. However, he found where the library was and memorized the route from his room.


    ''I''ll check it out when I get the chance¡­''


    In the end, he just wandered around the mansion, trying to find anything useful inside. There were several rooms he couldn''t enter, and each time, William mentally marked the room to return to in the near future.


    Another thing that happened was him overhearing a conversation without being noticed. The conversation was between Jonas¡ªWilliam recognized his voice¡ªand another man William had never seen before. He was an older man.


    "And how''s the procedure going? Do you think it''ll work this time?" the older man asked.


    "Yes, it will, believe me. I think in three months, everything will be ready."


    "Great."


    At that moment, William noticed they were starting to move, so he left the area to avoid being seen and went straight to his room, where he spent the rest of the hours until nightfall.


    That scene and the things the two had said stayed in his mind for the rest of the day. He wanted to understand what he had heard, but no matter how hard he tried, nothing came to mind.


    When night fell, the mansion became very quiet. Well, the part where William and the employees stayed.


    The nobles who had come to visit Jonas stayed in the other part of the mansion, the area where guests slept, dined, and relaxed.


    The slaves and employees slept in the back part of the mansion, in a place where the nobles wouldn''t go.


    03 came to William''s door around 8 p.m.


    "This is the perfect moment," he whispered. "It''s really empty."


    William gestured for him to come into his room. After that, he closed the door.


    "How are the guards? Did you see anything before coming here?" William asked.


    "There are guards all over the mansion''s perimeter. Like I said, they don''t want anyone escaping. But that gives us a chance to explore other places inside," 03 said.


    "Great," William said. "Let''s start with the cabin with the strange lights."


    He went to the window of his room and opened it.


    "Shall we?"


    S§×arch* The Nov§×l?ire.n(e)t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.

 Chapter 166 Exploring the Shed

    03 stared at William for a few seconds, his mind buzzing with disbelief. "Through the window? Are you serious?"


    William shrugged. "Why not? It''s not like leaving through the front door will make us less likely to be seen."


    They could use one of the many back doors¡ªmost of the guards were absent¡ªbut William was still wary of the other workers under Jonas''s command. What if a cleaner, gardener, or even a cook spotted them and alerted Jonas? After all, none of them had any reason to side with the slaves. It wasn''t worth the risk.


    "Trust me, alright?" William said, a hint of determination in his voice. "Besides, I''ve got something that might give us an edge."


    As soon as the words left his mouth, Stuart emerged from the spatial bag, silent as a shadow. When 03 saw the rat, he stumbled back, confusion written all over his face.


    "What''s that? A rat?" he exclaimed, his voice rising slightly.


    William quickly stepped closer, raising a hand to calm him. "Keep it down. This is Stuart, my magical pet. He''s going to help us navigate this place without getting caught. He can make us invisible¡ªor close to it, at least."


    If they were going to work together, there was no point in keeping secrets. When 03 heard this, his eyes lit up with excitement.


    "Really? With our mana sealed, this might be our best shot. They''d never expect us to turn invisible!" Explore hidden tales at My Virtual Library Empire


    That was the whole point. Jonas wasn''t overly concerned about them precisely because of the seal on their bodies. Without mana, they couldn''t fight the guards or use spells to escape. But Stuart changed everything.


    "Exactly. I told you to trust me," William said, a small smirk playing on his lips. "Now let''s move. This is our best chance."


    William went first, climbing through the window and landing lightly on the roof. Their rooms were on the third floor, a level reserved for Jonas''s workers. 03 followed, his movements cautious but steady. The darkness provided some cover, but they both knew it wouldn''t last long.


    Once they reached the courtyard, the guards would spot them instantly. But before they took another step, it was time to put Stuart''s abilities to use.


    The rat leaped onto William''s shoulder and spoke in a hushed tone. "I can camouflage both of you for about ten minutes. After that, I''ll need to recharge before I can do it again."


    William quickly relayed the information to 03. "He can''t use his magic for too long, or they''ll sense it. That''s why we need to move fast."


    03, still visibly shocked by the talking rat, nodded without question. "Got it. Let''s go. The cabin isn''t far. We can make it in time."


    Stuart activated his camouflaging magic¡ªthe same spell he had used before. In an instant, their bodies vanished, blending seamlessly into the surroundings. Now invisible, talking was out of the question. Communication would have to be through gestures alone.


    With silent precision, they descended from the rooftop, their movements swift and deliberate. Even with their mana sealed, their enhanced physical abilities made the climb down effortless. Once their feet touched the courtyard, they paused, scanning the area for any signs of danger.


    A few seconds later, two guards strolled past, their conversation casual and carefree. They were chatting about women and their desire to visit a tavern for some entertainment. Thankfully, they didn''t notice the invisible intruders. William and 03 exchanged a quick glance, relief flashing in their eyes, before moving toward the mysterious cabin at the back of the mansion.


    This was the place where William had seen strange lights flickering at night. Tonight, however, it was shrouded in darkness. William guessed the absence of activity was due to the dinner event. But there was still one obstacle: a single guard stationed at the cabin''s entrance.


    It was just one guard¡ªbetter than two¡ªbut his presence was enough to complicate their plans. William frowned. On previous nights, there had been no guards here. Why now?


    ''They must know security is lighter tonight and are taking extra precautions,'' William thought, his mind racing.


    Stuart poked William with a tiny paw, drawing his attention. The rat nodded, his beady eyes glinting with determination. Though they couldn''t speak, William understood. It was time to act.


    As they approached the guard¡ªa tall, muscular man lounging in a chair by the door¡ªStuart worked his magic. A faint, sweet scent wafted through the air, invisible but potent. The guard inhaled, his eyelids growing heavy. Within moments, he slumped forward, fast asleep.


    Stuart didn''t stop there. With a flick of his paw, he camouflaged the guard''s body, ensuring no one would notice him. The area remained eerily quiet, with no other guards in sight.


    ''Stuart is incredible!'' William thought, a surge of admiration for his tiny companion.


    Now that the guard was no longer an issue, all that remained was to enter the mysterious cabin. But before stepping inside, they took a moment to scan the area. No guards were in sight¡ªjust the eerie stillness of the night. Satisfied, they moved quickly, slipping through the door and into the cabin.


    William''s curiosity had been building for weeks. The strange lights he''d seen at night suggested this place held secrets. What was inside? Why did people come here? His first assumption had been a tool shed, but Jonas had already shown them the actual tool shed in another building. This was something else entirely.


    The interior was pitch black, so dark that 03 couldn''t see a thing. But William''s vision, enhanced by the serpent blood, cut through the darkness like a blade. To him, the room was as clear as day.


    What he saw took his breath away.


    The cabin wasn''t a storage space or a simple shed¡ªit was a library. But these weren''t ordinary books. The titles on the spines spoke of forbidden knowledge: rituals, dark magic, deity summoning, even eternal life. These were just the subjects William could make out at a glance. The rest of the books promised even darker secrets.


    "I can''t see anything," 03 whispered, his voice tinged with frustration.


    Stuart had stopped using his camouflage magic. It wasn''t necessary anymore; they were hidden inside the cabin, shielded by the darkness. But that same darkness was now a problem for 03. sea??h th§× novel(F~)ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "We can''t risk turning on any lights," William said, his voice low. "If we do, they''ll see it from the mansion just as easily as I saw the lights from there. We''ll have to work in the dark."


    For William, the darkness wasn''t an issue, but 03 needed time for his vision to adjust. While 03 blinked and squinted, trying to make out shapes in the gloom, William took the opportunity to explore on his own.


    His enhanced vision led him to a table cluttered with scattered notes. He picked up one of the papers, his eyes scanning the contents. What he read sent a chill down his spine.


    It was a ritual¡ªa detailed, step-by-step guide to rejuvenation and curing all diseases. The instructions were precise, almost clinical, but the implications were anything but ordinary. At the bottom of the page, two names were scrawled in elegant handwriting.


    One name sent a jolt of recognition through him: Wendy, the Silver-Haired Lady. The other name was unfamiliar, but the surname was one he knew all too well.


    ''Vince Black Pine¡­ and Wendy¡­''


    What exactly was going on?

 Chapter 167 Revelations about the Shed

    William read the ritual carefully. Despite its detailed instructions, the final steps were missing. All he had were the effects¡ªrejuvenation and curing all diseases¡ªand the two names at the end.


    ''Is Wendy working with them?'' William wondered. ''No, it didn''t seem like she was¡­''


    Still, the possibility lingered. William had been lied to before, and he wasn''t about to rule it out. But Wendy had been sold as a slave, just like him. They''d arrived together, and he couldn''t imagine her collaborating with their captors. The thought didn''t sit right with him.


    03 appeared beside him, his eyes finally adjusting to the darkness. "You can see in the dark, can''t you? There''s no way a normal person could read anything here without light."


    "Yeah," William said, holding up the note. "Look, Wendy''s name is here, along with someone called Vince Black Pine."


    "Vince?" 03''s eyes widened. "That''s Jonas''s grandfather."


    "What?" William blinked, surprised. He''d guessed Vince was part of the family because of the surname, but he hadn''t realized it was Jonas''s grandfather.


    "Yeah," 03 explained. "He''s a powerful mage, really old, but some disease got to him. From what I''ve heard around here, he''s got maybe three years left at most."


    03 had been working there far longer than William, so he knew more about the inner workings of the Black Pine family.


    William gestured to the note. "This ritual claims to rejuvenate someone and cure all diseases."


    "No way," 03 said, shaking his head. "That''s impossible. Mages haven''t figured out how to do something like that yet. This has to be fake."


    Before William could respond, Stuart''s voice cut through the tension. "The guard will wake up in about five minutes. You need to explore the rest of this place¡ªfast."


    Stuart''s magic wouldn''t last forever, so they had to move quickly. William, the only one who could see clearly in the dark, took the lead. His enhanced vision swept the room, landing on a small wooden door. It looked ordinary, but William knew better than to assume anything in this place was normal.


    He pushed the door open, and what he saw made his blood run cold.


    The room was a nightmare. Rows of glass flasks lined the tables, each one filled with body parts and organs floating in murky liquid. It was a grotesque display, like something out of a mad scientist''s lab.


    ''What the hell is going on here?'' William thought, his stomach churning.


    The sight was enough to make him want to turn back, but time was running out. He stepped inside, scanning the room for anything useful. The flasks were horrifying, but there was nothing else of note. Whatever secrets this place held, they weren''t immediately obvious.


    William quickly retreated, rejoining 03, who was waiting by the door.


    "See everything?" 03 asked.


    "For now, yeah. Let''s go," William said, his voice tight.


    They retraced their steps, with Stuart''s magic cloaking them once more. In less than five minutes, they were back in William''s room, the window securely closed behind them.


    "That was close," 03 muttered, wiping sweat from his brow. "What did you see back there?"


    "You won''t believe it," William said, his tone grim.


    Before sharing, William cracked open his door to check the hallway. Paranoia was a habit he couldn''t afford to break. The corridor was empty¡ªgood. He shut the door quietly and turned to 03.


    "It was¡­ a lab," William began, struggling to find the right words. "But not like any lab I''ve ever seen. There were flasks everywhere, filled with body parts and organs. It was like something out of a nightmare."


    "What?" 03''s voice was a mix of disbelief and horror. "I never would''ve guessed that was inside that shed. What are they doing in there at night? And where the hell are those organs coming from?"


    03 fell silent, his brow furrowed in deep thought. William could see the gears turning in his friend''s mind, so he stayed quiet, giving him time to process.


    After a moment, 03 spoke again, his voice low and grim. "We might be in deeper trouble than we thought. Now that you mention it, I remember a few workers who went missing a few months ago. When I asked about them, Jonas said they''d just quit and left. But now¡­ I don''t think that''s what happened."


    William sat on the edge of his bed, the weight of 03''s words sinking in. The possibility that the missing workers were now floating in those flasks was horrifying¡ªand if that was true, staying here was more dangerous than they''d realized.


    "What do you think about sneaking into the library tonight?" William suggested, his voice steady despite the unease churning in his gut. "I want to see if there''s anything about the seals on our bodies. If we can break them, we might stand a chance."


    03 nodded, his expression resolute. "That''s a good idea. And tonight''s the best time to try it. Let''s do it." S§×arch* The ¦Çov§×lFire .net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    After finalizing their plan, the two were about to leave the room when they were stopped by a guard stationed in the hallway.


    "What are you two doing out this late? You need to return to your rooms," the guard said sternly.


    Experience new tales on My Virtual Library Empire


    William recognized him immediately¡ªit was the same guard who had been watching over him since the beginning. The one who had shared information about Wendy.


    William stepped closer, his tone calm and persuasive. "We''re just stretching our legs. As far as I know, we''re allowed to do that today, right? Look, if we leave, you can take a break or enjoy the festivities tonight. What do you say?"


    The guard hesitated, then sighed, his expression softening. "Fine. But don''t do anything stupid, and be back before midnight."


    "Thank you," William said with a nod.


    Once they were a safe distance away, 03 glanced at William, impressed. "That was smooth. How did you know it would work?"


    "I didn''t," William admitted. "But what other choice did we have? Let''s be careful from here on out. I don''t think we''ll be able to talk our way past the other guards."


    William led the way, retracing the path he''d taken earlier. When they reached the library, they were relieved to find no guards in sight. However, the door was still locked.


    As William approached, Stuart''s voice piped up from his shoulder. "There''s a magical formation here. I can crack it, but it''ll take about five minutes. Just wait."


    Once again, Stuart was proving invaluable. 03 couldn''t help but grin. "If you know any other rats like Stuart, let me know. I''d love to have one too."


    While Stuart worked on the formation, William and 03 hid in a shadowy corner, doing their best to stay out of sight. The minutes dragged on, each one feeling like an eternity as they waited for Stuart to finish.


    Time seemed to crawl as William and 03 waited for Stuart to disable the magical formation. When the rat finally succeeded, they slipped inside the library, but Stuart''s next words brought a wave of unease.


    "There''s a problem," Stuart said, his voice tense. "This type of magical formation records every time someone new disables it. They''ll know someone broke in tomorrow."


    "What do you mean?" William asked, his stomach sinking.


    "I can reactivate it, but the record will still be there. They''ll know someone was here," Stuart explained.


    "Damn it¡­" William muttered, running a hand through his hair.


    Despite the bad news, there was nothing they could do about it now. Their priority was finding information about the seals on their bodies. The search began in earnest, their movements quick and deliberate as they scanned the shelves for anything useful.

 Chapter 168 Jonas is Looking for the Culprit

    Unlike the library they had found inside the shed, the one inside the mansion contained ''normal books.'' There were no traces of dark magic or rituals that would send shivers down anyone''s spine.


    William and 03 worked together, browsing through the books for anything related to the seal on their bodies. It was a powerful seal, and neither of them knew how to destroy it.


    03 grew increasingly frustrated. He searched and searched but found nothing. What he really wanted to do was punch something¡ªhe even clenched his fist in preparation¡ªbut he restrained himself, knowing that making noise at that moment would be foolish.


    "I can''t believe we went through all of this just to find nothing," he said. "Now they''ll know someone was here."


    He was starting to give up. William, on the other hand, refused to surrender. Stuart was right there with him, helping search for information about the seal.


    At one point, they even heard noises coming from the hallway, which filled them with fear and panic. But no one entered, and nothing bad happened to them.


    "I found something," Stuart said.


    William and 03 quickly moved to where Stuart was, and they both read the same pages he had been examining.


    "This is the same seal you two have¡ªat least, it looks the same. But we have a problem," Stuart said.


    "What is it?"


    "To break it, you''ll need the blood of the person who placed the seal on you," Stuart explained.


    That was certainly a problem. Now William understood why Jonas had been so confident about the seal and unafraid that someone might find a way to break it.


    How could they obtain the blood of the person who placed the seal if they couldn''t even leave the place or use magic? It seemed impossible.


    03 realized this too, and his anger turned to sadness. "We''re going to be slaves forever¡­ This is heartbreaking."


    He sat on the ground, knees drawn up, hugging them tightly. The sight of 03 like that broke William''s heart. 03 had been a good friend and someone who didn''t deserve to be in this situation.


    "Who placed the seal on you?" William asked.


    "Someone from a gang¡ªfamous slave traders who roam around capturing people," 03 replied.


    "Those are the same ones who placed it on me too! Hey, we can find them. I have someone on the outside who might help us," William said.


    When 03 heard this, it was as if life returned to his face. He no longer looked devastated, and even a hint of a smile appeared.


    "Are you serious? Don''t play with me like this," he said.


    "Of course I am. Why would I lie to you? But I don''t know how long it will take to get out of here. It might take a year¡­"


    William was hoping that his influence on Victoria might lead her to grow stronger, and perhaps she could find a way to obtain the blood.


    Even with such a long timeframe, 03 wasn''t discouraged. His eyes still burned with hope. "That''s not a problem. Even if it takes five years, it''ll still be worth it! What do you think about talking to the others about this?"


    03 was referring to the other slaves working in the mines with them. Both had lost hope of ever leaving that place, but now they might have a chance to reignite that hope.


    William, however, remained cautious. "Let''s first see if they''re really trustworthy. We can''t let anyone ruin our plan."


    "Right, right. I''ll do my best to talk to them without revealing too much," 03 said.


    "Good."


    After obtaining what they needed, they left the library. Stuart reactivated the magical formation, but they couldn''t completely hide their traces.


    "Will they know it was us?" 03 asked.


    "They won''t know who it was, but they''ll know someone broke the barrier. We should avoid talking about this and return safely to our rooms," William whispered back.


    It took them much longer to return to their rooms. They couldn''t risk being seen, as that would certainly raise suspicions.


    William couldn''t stop thinking about the guard he had spoken to before leaving. The guard knew they had left.


    ''Will he say something to Jonas? What should I do?''


    03 had a different room, so they eventually parted ways. When William returned to his room, the guard was no longer standing in the hallway. He had accepted William''s request and gone to rest¡ªor perhaps to drink and join the party.


    That night was difficult for William. He tossed and turned in bed, thinking about what would happen the next day and about the guard.


    The next morning, someone knocked on William''s door. Unlike previous times, the knocking was much harder, as if the person was in a hurry.


    William answered, and it was Jonas. "I''m calling everyone for a meeting. Go to the courtyard, now."


    After dressing, William left his room. In the courtyard, he saw a large crowd.


    It wasn''t just the slaves like William and 03, but all the workers under Jonas'' command.


    The only person missing was Wendy, and William wondered why.


    Jonas stood in front of his employees and spoke in a harsh tone. "I''ve called all of you here today due to a security breach that occurred last night. Someone broke into the library."


    Everyone exchanged glances, looking surprised. William tried to appear equally shocked.


    "I know some of you are learning magic in secret, and that might be the reason you wanted to access the library to obtain books on the subject. For that reason, every single one of you is a suspect in this matter."


    William sighed in relief. He had been afraid that Jonas would immediately link the slaves to the incident, but apparently, other workers had also caused trouble in the past and present.


    "We''re going to interrogate all of you today, so your shifts are suspended," Jonas said.


    The situation wasn''t looking good. William wasn''t the first to be questioned, so he used the time to walk around.


    He searched for the guard who had seen him the previous night. It wasn''t hard to find him. The guard was hiding behind a tree, enjoying the gentle morning breeze.


    It was as if he had been expecting someone to approach him.


    William leaned against the tree and whispered, "I need to talk to you."


    The guard didn''t even look at him. "I know you''re the one who broke into the library."


    His tone was resolute. William instantly realized he wouldn''t be able to convince the guard otherwise, and with the evidence the guard had, his fate seemed sealed.


    "Don''t get me wrong¡ªI won''t tell anyone it was you," the guard said. "I think we can work together from now on. What do you say?"


    William couldn''t comprehend why the guard would want to collaborate with him. Surely, if the guard handed William over to Jonas, he would receive a hefty reward.


    "What do you have in mind? I just can''t understand how a guard like you can work with someone like me."


    The guard smiled. "I know you''re strong. The only problem is the seal on your body. And tell me, what makes you think I came here to work for Jonas willingly? Can''t I have my own motives?"


    "I see¡­ Well, let''s work together, then." Continue your saga on My Virtual Library Empire


    "The first thing we should do is establish our story."


    They talked for a while, hidden behind the tree. They needed a convincing story about what had happened the previous night, and that wasn''t difficult to fabricate. sea??h th§× ¦ÇovelFire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    The only thing worrying William was the fact that the guard had seen him leave shortly before the library was breached. But now that they were working together, that was no longer a problem.


    When it was time for William to tell his story, he knew exactly what to say.


    When the guard was questioned, his account aligned perfectly with William''s story.


    "Yes, I saw him leaving and accompanied him to the bathroom. After that, he returned to his room. I didn''t see anything else."


    Jonas trusted his guard. "Well, so it wasn''t the slaves¡­ Who could have done it?"


    There were just too many people working for Jonas, and it was getting hard for him to find the culprit.


    What made things worse for him was the information that came next.


    "Sir, there are no stolen books. Everything is at the exact same place."


    One of the things that might help Jonas find the culprit was something like a book in its possession, but now, he wouldn''t have that luxury. He was lost.


    William was both happy that no one had found him, and worried at the same time. The guard knew his secret.


    Would he ask for things? Would he try to manipulate him? Only time would tell what intentions the guard had.


    ''For now I should focus on using my sword to help Victoria...''


    She was the only one capable of helping William escape.


    During the afternoon of that same day, William stayed inside his room and used the sword to communicate with Victoria, who was close to leaving her village.

 Chapter 169 Leaving the Mansion

    When William used his powers to send his consciousness to the sword, he found himself inside a carriage.


    The carriage wasn''t particularly luxurious, and there were several other people inside. He counted six individuals in total, all wearing cloaks and hoods.


    Victoria was among them. She, too, was hiding her identity and wasn''t speaking to anyone.


    Over the past few days, Victoria had grown closer to the sword, and William felt their connection strengthening. He decided to try speaking to her mentally, and to his surprise, it worked.


    "Where exactly are we?" he asked.


    When Victoria heard the voice in her head, she nearly panicked. William understood the feeling well¡ªhe had felt the same way when Asura first spoke to him.


    Victoria responded through her thoughts, as if talking to herself. She wasn''t sure if it would work, but she tried anyway.


    "This is the carriage taking me¡ªor rather, us¡ªto the battle academy. How are you talking to me like this?" she asked.


    "Like this? You mean mentally? It''s pretty easy for me. I couldn''t do it before because our connection wasn''t strong enough," William explained.


    Their connection had indeed grown, but what truly enabled him to communicate with her was the abilities Asura had shared with him before leaving. There were many things he could do now, and he couldn''t wait to test them out.


    "I''m so nervous. I can''t mess this up," Victoria said.


    Victoria had the option to become a merchant like her father¡ªsomething she didn''t want¡ªor use her talent in magic to become strong.


    She was the type of person who couldn''t stand staying in one place for years. She loved the idea of traveling, meeting new people, and helping others. That''s why she had decided to pursue a spot at the battle academy.


    With her slightly above-average talent and her father''s connections, she had secured a place at one of the kingdom''s best battle academies.


    However, she would likely be one of the weakest students there. The academy attracted the most talented individuals in the kingdom, and with her current abilities, she would be at the lower end of the spectrum.


    William saw this as an opportunity to earn her trust and get her to work for him. His goal was for Victoria to grow strong enough to free him.


    "Don''t worry about it. I''ll help you get stronger. You just need to trust me, alright?" he said.


    "I will, absolutely. But tell me more about yourself. Who are you, exactly?"


    "Asura¡ªthat''s my name. I was a powerful mage ages ago, and now all that remains is a fragment of my soul in this sword."


    There was no way for Victoria to verify information about Asura or anything related to demons, so William wasn''t worried about revealing this.


    They talked extensively during the journey. William learned more about Victoria and, more importantly, about the place they were heading to.


    "I won''t need to take an entrance test, and classes start in two weeks. But it''ll take us a week to get there," Victoria explained.


    "What types of magic can you use?" William asked.


    "Lightning, and I know how to use a sword," she replied.


    That wasn''t what William had expected. Lightning was a rare element, known for its strength if the user could control it well.


    Would Victoria have the talent to become one of the best lightning mages? Only time would tell.


    If William had been able to choose an element for her, he would have picked fire. His own talent in wielding fire and black fire had grown tremendously recently, and he felt he could have helped her more with that.


    But with lightning, it was a different story.


    "That''s a pretty rare element," William said. "My abilities were related to fire, so I can''t help you much with learning lightning spells, but I can assist you with general techniques."


    "No problem," Victoria said. "I know you''ll be a great ally."


    William didn''t keep talking to her nonstop. He had to return to his original body. Things weren''t looking good in the mansion.


    Jonas had sent guards to watch over everyone¡ªincluding William and the other slaves¡ªmaking it much harder to move around without being noticed.


    The guard who wanted to work with William was also one of those assigned to watch him. He took the opportunity to speak with William privately.


    Find exclusive stories on My Virtual Library Empire


    "I need you to find out more about a staff member who went missing a few months ago," the guard said. "Can you do that?"


    Puzzled, William replied, "But aren''t you the one with more resources? I don''t see how I can do this."


    "Oh, you can. Don''t you know? You and the other slaves are going on a trip, and I need you to interrogate someone for me."


    "A trip? Why would Jonas bring us? It doesn''t make sense," William said.


    Jonas had many people working for him, and it seemed illogical for him to bring slaves instead of his more trusted workers.


    The guard explained, "Jonas isn''t concerned about you and the other slaves regarding the library incident. He doesn''t think it was one of you. So, he''s bringing you along. Plus, he needs strong people for manual labor."


    Jonas didn''t trust most of his workers to leave the mansion¡ªonly a select few. William and the other slaves were among those he believed hadn''t invaded the library.


    "And who do you want me to interrogate?" William asked.


    "A guard. I''ll point him out to you. Don''t worry."


    "A guard? Really?"


    Interrogating a guard wouldn''t be easy. Guards were stronger compared to the other workers under Jonas'' command, and if William were caught, it would cause serious problems.


    But what choice did he have? The guard, whom William now knew as Travis, had helped him avoid getting caught, and now William owed him.


    "Yes. I need you to interrogate him about Simone. He and Simone were involved, so he might know what happened to her," Travis said.


    "Who is she, anyway? If we''re going to work together, I need to know."


    Travis hesitated before answering. "She''s my sister, and she went missing. That''s why I came here. I need to find out what happened, but I can''t just roam around asking questions. Jonas is always watching the guards. But you can help me, and in return, I''ll help you."


    William knew he had to comply to settle the debt between them. Reluctantly, he agreed.


    "But how do you want me to proceed? Just ask him normally, or will I have to torture him for answers? Probably the latter, or you''d already know what happened."


    "Exactly," Travis said. "I need you to get the answers by force. But you''ll probably have to kill him or make it look like he died. There''s no way he won''t report this to Jonas if he survives."


    That was a pretty challenging task for William. With the seal still on his body, he wasn''t at his full strength, making it difficult to confront one of the guards.


    However, it wasn''t impossible.


    "Alright, I''ll do my best. When is this trip?" William asked.


    "Tomorrow. So, be prepared. I''ll talk to you again tonight," Travis replied.


    After their conversation, the guard left. Later that day, Jonas called William and the other slaves for a meeting, and it was precisely about the trip Travis had mentioned.


    Jonas didn''t share many details, but the slaves were thrilled at the chance to leave the mansion.


    Deep down, they saw it as an opportunity to attempt an escape, but William knew Jonas wouldn''t let that happen.


    ''He definitely has contingency plans to stop us,'' William thought.


    True to his word, Travis returned to speak with William that night. As one of the guards assigned to watch the corridor where William slept, Travis had easy access.


    He knocked softly on the door, careful not to draw attention. William had been expecting him and opened the door quietly.


    "So, what do you need?" William whispered.


    Travis handed something to William¡ªa dagger.


    "You''ll need a weapon to protect yourself and to get the answers we need," Travis said.


    "But Jonas will search us before we leave. There''s no way he''ll let me go with a dagger," William countered.


    Travis smiled. "See for yourself. Hold the dagger and lightly tap it five times." sea??h th§× N??elFir§×.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    William frowned, confused, but he did as Travis instructed, tapping the dagger five times with his fingers. To his surprise, the dagger disappeared.


    "It makes the dagger invisible," Travis explained. "Tap it again, and it will reappear. Or, if you do nothing, it will become visible again after thirty minutes."


    After explaining, Travis left. The dagger he had given William was an impressive weapon.


    It didn''t require mana to turn invisible, which made William even more curious.


    ''How does this even work?'' he wondered.


    There was no time to dwell on the mechanics of the dagger, but it was something he planned to investigate in the future.


    William went to bed and woke up early the next morning. Jonas gathered the people he trusted for the journey, including William and the other slaves.


    They left the mansion with four carriages, and William was surprised to find himself allowed to ride in one!


    "Before we leave, I''ll check all of you," Jonas announced. "You know, to make sure no one is bringing anything dangerous for the trip. 04, you''re first."


    William stepped forward, the invisible dagger safely hidden. He had no intention of getting caught.

 Chapter 170 Jonas Wants to Bet, and Finally a Chance

    The stealth capabilities of the dagger surprised William. Since it left no trace of mana, Jonas couldn''t sense it. William easily boarded the carriage, the dagger hidden securely behind his back.


    03 and the other slaves were unaware of the dagger or the mission Travis had assigned to William. William had no intention of telling them¡ªthis was a matter between him and Travis, and he didn''t want anyone interfering.


    Once everyone was inside the carriages, they set off.


    Unlike the flying carriages they had used before, these were ordinary ones, pulled by large, white-furred wolves capable of enduring the harsh cold weather.


    "Do you know where we''re going?" 03 asked William.


    William gazed out the window at the tall trees and the snow falling from the sky. "No idea," he replied, "but I doubt it''s too far. Otherwise, we''d be using a different mode of transportation."


    One of Jonas'' employees was also in the carriage with them¡ªa gardener. Unlike most of Jonas'' staff, this man wasn''t arrogant when speaking to William. In fact, he was quite friendly.


    "I believe we''re visiting a noble family not far from here," the gardener said. "One of the families that attended the dinner recently. Apparently, Jonas is lending a hand with some work in exchange for something."


    Essentially, Jonas was using the slaves to perform heavy labor for the noble family in return for some benefit. This didn''t surprise William at all. What did surprise him was how long it had taken for something like this to happen.


    "I see," William said. "Thank you for the information."


    "It was nothing." S§×ar?h the N??eFire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Their exchange was brief, but William already viewed the gardener in a positive light¡ªat least for the time being.


    William continued to look out the window, taking in the beautiful scenery. The sound of birds brought a sense of peace to his heart, and the scent of nature rejuvenated his soul. He savored every moment of the journey, knowing it might be a while before he left the mansion again.


    Two days passed. During this time, William spotted the guard he needed to interrogate. He saw him when they stopped to camp for the night.


    The guard was in another carriage and didn''t leave the campsite, so William didn''t get a chance to approach him.


    ''How should I handle this¡­''


    The mission Travis had given him was proving more difficult than he''d anticipated. He would have to kill the guard¡ªotherwise, Jonas would find out. And killing someone without using magic was a significant challenge.


    More days passed, and William still hadn''t found an opportunity. They eventually arrived at a mansion belonging to the noble family that had hired Jonas'' services.


    This mansion was smaller than Jonas'', and the number of workers there was also limited. That was one of the reasons they had sought Jonas'' help.


    "Jonas! Welcome, welcome!" an old, chubby man greeted them at the front gate. "I see you''ve brought the strong men for the heavy work. Wonderful!"


    03, standing beside William, muttered under his breath, "Heavy work again. When do we get a vacation?"


    Deep down, they all knew a vacation was out of the question. Such luxuries weren''t meant for slaves like them.


    Jonas and the chubby noble exchanged pleasantries¡ªthe usual insincere compliments between people who secretly disliked each other. William listened carefully, trying to understand the reason for their visit.


    When he finally learned the purpose, it wasn''t what he had expected. Apparently, the noble wanted help building a new structure on his estate¡ªa place where he could host fights for other nobles to bet on, like a coliseum.


    After speaking with the noble, Jonas addressed William and the other slaves. "You won''t just be helping him build this place. You''ll also be the first fighters to participate. I''ll be betting heavily on you, so I need you to win."


    William couldn''t believe it. He had expected to do some heavy lifting and then return, but now he was being told he would participate in fights¡ªand Jonas would be betting on them?


    "The construction work will start tomorrow. For now, we''ll rest," Jonas announced.


    He led everyone into the mansion, where the chubby noble had prepared rooms for them.


    To William''s surprise, the accommodations were decent, and the treatment he received was completely different from what he was used to.


    The manor''s staff treated him well, providing food and tending to his needs. Even 03, who was accustomed to being treated poorly, was taken aback.


    "Why are they being so nice?" 03 asked.


    "Probably because Jonas asked for it," William speculated. "He wants to bet on us in the fights, so he needs us to be in good condition to win. I think he''ll keep treating us well as long as we keep winning."


    It was just a guess, but to William, it made the most sense.


    For the rest of the day, they rested and ate well. The guard William needed to interrogate was sleeping in one of the rooms nearby, but he rarely left and was never alone or in a secluded place.


    As a result, William still hadn''t found an opportunity to act.


    The next day, William left the dagger hidden under his bed and met Jonas outside.


    "This is where we''ll be working¡ªor rather, where you''ll be working. I''ll just be here to make sure you''re doing your job," Jonas said.


    The new building was to be constructed next to the manor. It was designed as a large structure with seating for wealthy spectators to enjoy drinks and watch the fights. The chubby noble presented the project to William and the others.


    "We have professionals who will handle most of the construction, as I assume you lack the expertise. But I need you to help carry the heavy materials and ensure this project moves quickly. Understood?" the chubby noble said.


    Everyone nodded in agreement, largely because Jonas was glaring at them with a look that clearly said, You''d better agree, or there will be consequences.


    The heavy work the chubby noble had mentioned? It was truly heavy.


    William and the other slaves were tasked with carrying massive logs, stones, and other materials that ordinary people would never attempt to move without assistance.


    The chubby noble and Jonas watched everything unfold. "You said your slaves were strong, but I wasn''t expecting this. And they''re not even using mana?" the chubby noble remarked. Enjoy new chapters from My Virtual Library Empire


    "Indeed. Impressive, right? I''m quite pleased with my purchase," Jonas replied.


    "Can you show me where you buy them someday?"


    "Of course."


    William could hear them talking about the slaves as if they were mere assets to be bought at an auction. And, unfortunately, it wasn''t far from the truth.


    He spent the entire day doing backbreaking labor. The only silver linings were the breaks the chubby noble allowed and the decent food provided.


    It wasn''t just the slaves who were working. The other workers who had come with them were also contributing, though their tasks weren''t as physically demanding as William''s.


    This kind of work wasn''t for everyone. Some had the strength to handle it; others didn''t.


    03 was in a foul mood. "We were already doing heavy, boring work in the mines, and now we have to do this, which is even harder? Damn it."


    "At least we''re out in the open, breathing fresh air, and it''s not too hot," William pointed out.


    "Yeah, there''s that. But still, this sucks."


    Jonas noticed the two talking and called out, "Is something wrong?"


    "No, sir," they replied in unison.


    "Good."


    They both rolled their eyes and returned to their grueling work.


    A week passed. During that time, they spent most of their days laboring to complete the project as quickly as possible, and their efforts were paying off.


    The construction was halfway done, with just one more week to go.


    Finally, William found an opportunity to interrogate the guard.


    The opportunity William had been waiting for finally arrived¡ªthe guard was alone for the first time. The guard had left the mansion and ventured into the forest.


    William seized the chance to follow him. He slipped out of the mansion, clutching the dagger Travis had given him.


    The guard had gone into the forest to do something unusual: he was drinking a strange potion.


    ''Is he using drugs or something?'' William wondered.


    The liquid in the flask looked odd, and the guard''s behavior seemed altered after drinking it. William could only assume it was some kind of drug, especially since the man was consuming it in the middle of the forest, away from prying eyes.


    ''This is my chance to act.''


    William knew he might never get another opportunity like this, so he had to make the most of it. With the dagger in hand, he crept toward the guard.


    His movements were silent, and the guard didn''t notice his presence. Thanks to the seal on his body, William had no mana for the guard to sense¡ªa rare advantage that worked in his favor this time.


    In one swift motion, William grabbed the guard from behind and pressed the dagger to his neck.


    The blade was sharp, and when William applied a bit of pressure, it left a small cut on the guard''s neck.


    "Who are you?" the guard demanded, his voice tense.

 Chapter 171 Ally, and Return

    The guard could have used his magic, but it would take time to cast, and he wouldn''t survive if William decided to slit his throat.


    For that reason, the guard stayed still, trying to process the situation.


    "I need to ask you a few things. Are you willing to answer in exchange for your life?" William said.


    Shaking, the guard replied, "Of course. I''ll tell you anything you want to know."


    "Good. Let''s start with Simone. What happened to her?"


    When William mentioned Simone, the guard fell silent, as if he couldn''t believe what he was hearing.


    "Simone? I don''t know who she is," the guard said.


    "Bullshit!" William pressed the dagger harder against the man''s throat. "You and Simone were involved, weren''t you? So tell me, what happened to her? Where is she?"


    No one knew about Simone and the guard''s relationship¡ªexcept Travis. So, when the guard heard William''s words, he was both shocked and terrified.


    "H-How do you know this?" he stammered.


    "I''m the one asking questions here. Now, are you going to answer or not?"


    "Fine, fine. I knew her, and we were involved. But one day, she just disappeared. Jonas said she quit her job, but I don''t think that''s true," the guard admitted.


    This was information William already knew. Travis had believed the guard might know more about Simone''s disappearance¡ªor perhaps even be complicit in it. Enjoy new adventures at My Virtual Library Empire


    "This is useless," William said. "I need more than that."


    "I still think she''s inside the mansion!"


    The guard had kept this theory to himself because he lacked proof. But now, confronted by William, he had no choice but to share everything.


    "Why do you think that?" William asked.


    "I watched the exits the day she supposedly quit and left the mansion. She never left. I''m certain of it. And it''s not just her¡ªothers who supposedly quit also never left the mansion."


    The guard William was interrogating was responsible for monitoring the exits, so he saw everyone who came and went.


    Simone had visited him the day she "quit," and he had stayed up all day waiting to see her leave. But she never did.


    This had haunted him for a long time, and it was the first time he had shared his suspicions with anyone.


    William believed him. It made sense. "I''m actually trying to find out what happened to Simone and the others who went missing. Are you willing to work with me?"


    "Absolutely!"


    The guard was visibly excited. For the first time, he had someone to help him find the person he loved. The interrogation had gone in a completely different direction than William had expected.


    In the end, he had gained a new ally in his quest for answers about the mansion''s dark secrets.


    When the guard turned around, he saw William''s face and recognized him.


    "So, you''re one of the slaves. I mean, sorry¡ªone of the people who were sold to Jonas¡­"


    Unlike many of Jonas'' employees, the guard wasn''t entirely insensitive.


    "That''s right," William said. "So, are we good?"


    "Yes, we are. I''ve been asking around, trying to find out more about Simone, but no one would talk to me. It was always the same story. I even searched for places she might be but found nothing."


    When the guard said this, William recalled the room he had discovered in the shed¡ªthe one filled with flasks containing organs.


    Could Simone already be dead? The possibility was there, but William didn''t want to mention it to the guard¡ªor to Travis, her brother.


    He needed to be certain first.


    "I''m working with someone else on this," William said, "but for now, let''s keep that between us."


    "No problem," the guard said. "I''m Agnar."


    "William. Or 04, when we''re inside the mansion. You know, I don''t have my name anymore."


    Agnar''s expression softened with pity, but he didn''t say a word.


    "And what the hell were you drinking?" William asked.


    When he had seen Agnar heading into the woods, he''d noticed the strange flask in his hand containing an unknown liquid.


    "This? It helps me sleep. My mind hasn''t been in a good place lately," Agnar admitted.


    Simone had been the love of his life, but she had vanished without a trace. Agnar''s mental state had deteriorated, and the only reason he was still at the mansion was to find her.


    William realized that Travis and Agnar shared the same goal. Perhaps they could truly work together and make progress. That would be a good outcome.


    After their conversation, they returned to the mansion and went to their respective rooms. William felt a sense of excitement¡ªthings were finally starting to fall into place for him.


    Another week passed, and the project was finally completed. The structure was impressive: a large space with a central ring, surrounded by benches and chairs for the wealthy to sit, watch, and enjoy the fights.


    It wasn''t as massive as a coliseum or the mansion itself, but it was solidly built. William and the others had worked tirelessly to complete it in just two weeks.


    Once the project was finished, Jonas approached William.


    "We''re going to return to the mansion and come back here in a few weeks. They need time to prepare and invite the nobles, among other things."


    "So, I''m really going to fight?" William asked. S§×ar?h the Nov§×l?ire.n(e)t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "Yes, you are. You seem to have the strongest body, and all the fighters will have their mana blocked, just like you. So, you might be my best bet."


    Not just William, but 03 would also be fighting! However, the other slaves weren''t included.


    Jonas explained the reasoning: William and 03 had strong bodies, while 01 and 02 did not. Additionally, he needed someone to continue working in the mines, so he couldn''t afford to let all of them participate in the fights.


    On the way back to the mansion, Jonas treated William well¡ªjust as he had when they first met.


    Back then, Jonas had been kind to avoid scaring William away. But now? He saw William as a valuable asset for making a profit.


    In fact, during the trip back, Jonas informed William that he wouldn''t have to work in the mines anymore.


    "You''ll get proper meals, rest, and physical training," Jonas said. "I need you strong so you can bring in money for us."


    The improved treatment was a welcome change, but it came with a cost: William would still have to fight, risking injury or even death.


    So, while there were benefits, there were also significant downsides.


    03 was in the same carriage as William.


    "So, we''re going to fight now and stop working in the mines? This might be more exciting than digging for mana stones, but it''s also more dangerous," 03 remarked.


    "Yes, you''re right," William agreed.


    They didn''t know what to expect, and only time would reveal the answers they sought.


    When they arrived back at Black Pine Manor, Travis immediately sought out William. His expression darkened when he saw Agnar.


    The first thought that crossed his mind was that William had failed the mission.


    "Why is he still alive?" Travis demanded, grabbing William by the collar.


    William gripped Travis''s wrist firmly and said, "Relax. It''s even better than we expected."


    Hearing William''s calm tone, Travis loosened his grip and let go. "I''m sorry for that."


    "It''s okay. Now, can I explain?"


    "Sure."


    "The guard''s name is Agnar, and he was indeed involved with Simone. They were quite close, and he''s also looking for her. He told me some interesting things¡­"


    William explained Agnar''s belief that Simone never left the mansion and might still be there. He also shared Agnar''s reasoning behind this theory.


    Travis was visibly surprised by the information, and it gave him a glimmer of hope.


    "So, we have another ally now," Travis said. "Good, good. But did you tell him about me?"


    "I mentioned I was working with someone else, but I didn''t reveal it was you¡ªnot yet. Let''s first see if he''s truly trustworthy," William replied.


    "Good thinking," Travis agreed.


    William was gradually gaining more allies: Travis, Agnar, and 03. There was also Victoria, who had Asura with her and would soon become another ally.


    Things were looking promising for him. During this time, William hadn''t spoken with Victoria much, as she was still traveling to the academy. But when she finally arrived, it was time for William to reconnect with her.


    While resting in his room, William controlled Asura and initiated a conversation with Victoria.


    "So, we''re finally here," he said.


    They had reached the battle academy after a long journey, and Victoria was thrilled.


    "Yes, we are. What do you think of it?" she asked.


    "It''s impressive¡ªbig and well-protected. I can see why this is considered one of the best academies available."


    Now, it was time to help Victoria grow stronger and turn her into a valuable ally for William. Things were looking good for him. The only questions that remained in his mind were: would Victoria live up to it and get powerful with his help? And would he be alright when fighting for Jonas?

 Chapter 172 Victorias First Day, and Hand-to-Hand Training

    The battle academy was located in a secluded area, far from any cities.


    It followed the same principle as Snowpeak Academy: they didn''t want civilians nearby due to the risks associated with magical practice.


    Mages were powerful individuals capable of causing significant destruction, especially when experiments went wrong¡ªsomething common among beginners. Find adventures at My Virtual Library Empire


    Even with protective barriers in place, having a city nearby wasn''t worth the risk. Additionally, the quiet environment was better for studying and concentration.


    William could see and sense the surroundings through Asura, and the sight of students milling about the academy''s courtyard filled him with nostalgia.


    The arrival of new students reminded him of his own first day at Snowpeak Academy.


    ''Will James be alright? What about the king? I need to return¡­''


    Being far away didn''t mean his problems had disappeared. James still had a seal on his body, and the king was relying on William to bring back the antidote before it was too late.


    William believed James might have already found a way to break the seal, but the king''s time was running out.


    Meanwhile, Victoria was understandably overwhelmed as a new student. She wandered around the academy like a lost fly until a staff member approached her.


    "You''re one of the new students, right? Come with me; I''ll explain a few things," the staff member said.


    Victoria followed and listened carefully. William, through Asura, also paid attention.


    Most of the information was basic: the location of her dormitory, the start date of classes (in three days), and the layout of the academy, including classrooms, the library, and the gym.


    The staff member also emphasized the rules, which were the most critical part of the orientation.


    Breaking the rules would result in punishments, and severe violations could lead to expulsion.


    Victoria didn''t want that. She had worked hard to earn her spot, so she listened intently.


    Once the staff member left, Victoria spoke to William¡ªor rather, Asura, as she called him.


    "What do you think of the rules, Asura? I''m afraid I might not remember all of them."


    "I wasn''t really listening. Let''s go see your dorm instead."


    "¡­"


    The dormitories for new students were impressive. The building was massive, constructed entirely of stone, and adorned with sculptures, flowers, and other decorations.


    It was a pleasant and comfortable place to live.


    Victoria''s room was on the fourth floor. As she climbed the staircase, other students glanced at her curiously. They could tell she was new.


    "Why are they looking at me like that?" Victoria asked.


    "Because you''re new. These are all talented or wealthy individuals. They''re just curious about you."


    Victoria''s time at the academy wouldn''t be easy. She wasn''t the most talented or the wealthiest, so William would need to give her an edge to help her stand out.


    Her room was spacious and well-furnished. The first thing she did was jump onto the bed.


    "Ahh, this is so comfortable," she sighed.


    She placed William¡ªAsura¡ªon the bed as well, unsheathing him.


    "I really hope we can get stronger here. Are you sure you can help me?"


    "Of course I can. But that doesn''t mean you won''t have to study, practice, and work hard."


    "I know that. I''m not stupid."


    William had access to numerous rituals and spells from Asura''s memories, which he could use to help Victoria.


    But she would still need to put in the effort to grow stronger. William was determined to do everything he could to assist her.


    ''She needs to get stronger to free me¡­''


    "We still have three days before classes start. Are you planning to train or just rest?" William asked.


    "I think I''ll just rest," Victoria replied.


    "I see. Well, I''ll rest too. I need to gather energy to start helping you when classes begin."


    "No problem. See you later, Asura."


    "See ya."


    William wasn''t actually gathering energy. He was preoccupied with his real body, still trapped in the mansion.


    The next morning, Agnar approached William with some intriguing information.


    "Look, I''m certain Simone didn''t leave the mansion. I didn''t even see her go near that shed behind the mansion. I went there myself and saw some¡­ strange things."


    "You went there?" William was surprised. He hadn''t expected Agnar to explore that area. Given what was stored there, William assumed Jonas wouldn''t want his employees poking around.


    "Of course I did. But I don''t think those organs belong to Simone. At least, I hope not¡­ Anyway, I strongly believe there are secret areas in this mansion. Have you noticed we almost never see anyone besides Jonas? Where''s his family? Did you know he has about 20 family members?"


    "Really?"


    Now that Agnar mentioned it, William realized how odd it was. The only people he ever saw were Jonas and the old man he occasionally spoke to.


    But where were the others? It was strange, especially since Jonas wasn''t even the head of the family, yet he was the only one who appeared in public.


    "Do you have any clues about where to look?" William asked.


    Agnar had been working for Jonas longer than Travis and had been searching for clues about Simone since her disappearance.


    If anyone had leads, it was him.


    "Maybe," Agnar said. "I have a theory, but it''s hard to investigate. It''s a well-protected part of the mansion."


    "Of course it is¡­"


    "But we might have a chance¡­ I''ll talk to you later, alright?"


    "Okay."


    The rest of William''s day was a stark contrast to his previous routine. He enjoyed a hearty breakfast with far more food than he was used to.


    He also ate at a proper dining table instead of in the kitchen. Jonas was there, speaking to him and 03, who was also eating with them.


    "Like I said, you two will receive better treatment from now on, including training. But this will only continue if you win your fights. Understand?"


    "We understand," William and 03 replied.


    It was all about money now. Jonas was counting on William and 03 to win the fights and bring him a hefty profit.


    William didn''t have the option to refuse. He would have to fight, so why not aim to win? The improved treatment was a significant upgrade, and he no longer had to spend his entire day mining mana stones.


    Additionally, William saw this as an opportunity to get closer to Jonas. While finding Simone was a secondary objective, his primary goal was to gain Jonas''s trust.


    Doing so would increase his chances of escaping the mansion and ending his life as a slave.


    "After you two finish eating, head to the gym and train with our best guard. It''s just hand-to-hand combat training since you can''t use magic in the fights. Nothing too fancy," Jonas said before leaving them to their meal.


    "What are you up to?" 03 asked William once Jonas was gone.


    "What do you mean?" William replied, looking puzzled.


    "I know you''re up to something with those guards. Are you including me in this or not?"


    03 was observant and always paid attention to his surroundings. He had noticed William speaking with Travis and Agnar multiple times but had kept quiet, waiting for William to approach him.


    When William didn''t, 03 decided to confront him directly.


    "I''ll fill you in later. It''s not a good idea to talk about it here," William said.


    03 smiled, relieved that his friend was willing to include him.


    "No problem."


    They dropped the subject and finished their meal. Afterward, they headed to the gym, where they met their combat instructor¡ªnone other than Travis.


    This was unexpected, and William suspected Travis had convinced Jonas to assign him as their trainer.


    "Really?" 03 said, glancing at Travis and then back at William. "This is the guard I''ve seen you talking to¡­"


    Travis visibly tensed, but William quickly intervened.


    "Relax, 03 is someone I trust. He''s been working with me since before you came along. No problem, right?"


    Travis hesitated. Trusting Agnar had already been a stretch, and now adding another person to the mix made him uneasy.


    "No problem, but this is a combat training session. We shouldn''t discuss this now. Let''s get started."


    The training lasted about three hours. For William, it was relatively easy.


    While there were a few techniques he wasn''t familiar with, he was a quick learner when it came to combat. His body was also far stronger than average, thanks to his status as a summoned hero and the demonic energy enhancing his physical abilities.


    By the end of the session, Travis was impressed. S§×arch* The Novel?ire(.)ne*t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "You''re incredibly strong, even without mana. How did they even capture you?"


    "A group of slave traders. They placed a seal on me before I could react. I don''t have many spells to escape," William explained.


    "That''s unfortunate. Anyway, I have other guard duties to attend to. We''ll talk later."


    With the training over, William and 03 were free for the rest of the day. Their only tasks were to eat and rest¡ªa far cry from the grueling labor of mining mana stones.


    As they left the gym, they passed by the other two slaves who had been left behind to continue working in the mines. The envy in their eyes was unmistakable.


    "They''re jealous of us," William remarked.


    "You think? Now it''ll be even harder to get them to help us," 03 replied.


    It would indeed be more challenging, but William wasn''t counting on their help anyway.


    That night, 03 came to William''s room, where Agnar was already waiting. Agnar had some interesting information to share.

 Chapter 173 Prohibited Area

    03 came to William''s room to speak with him, as promised, to learn more about what was going on and why William had been talking with the guards.


    Agnar, on the other hand, was there because he had something important to discuss. When he saw 03, he was slightly surprised.


    "Why is he here?"


    Travis already knew about 03 wanting to help, but Agnar didn''t. William quickly explained, hoping Agnar would trust his judgment.


    "I''m okay with it, but let''s keep it this way. I don''t want more people involved, alright?"


    William nodded.


    "No problem. Now, what did you want to tell me?"


    They all sat on the bed¡ªsince William didn''t have a proper desk¡ªand spoke in hushed whispers in the cold night.


    "Remember when I said there''s a part of the mansion that''s hard to explore? Well, I just got the chance to be a guard there. They only assign the most trusted guards to that area, and now I have the opportunity."


    The area Agnar referred to was one that even most employees couldn''t access. Because of this, Agnar believed it might be where Simone was being held. It was just a theory, but it had some basis.


    "So, you''ll be one of the guards watching that area, and you''ll help me get in to explore it?" William asked.


    "Yes, exactly. What do you think? Are you up for it?"


    William was confident. Even without magic, he had Stuart to help him. Stuart was an expert in camouflage and stealth. If anyone could infiltrate that area undetected, it was William.


    "Of course. When are we doing it?"


    "Tomorrow night. Be prepared, and please, don''t mess this up."


    Agnar stood up and left, leaving 03 and William alone. Now, William had to explain everything to 03.


    He shared details about Travis, Simone, and Agnar, how they were connected, and why he had started helping them in the first place.


    "So, Travis knew we were the ones who broke into the library? Well, at least now you have some allies. Maybe they can help us escape if we help them find Simone?"


    William wasn''t sure they would, but he didn''t want to crush 03''s hope.


    "Yes, maybe. Anyway, keep this a secret, alright? Don''t tell anyone, not even the other miners."


    "Absolutely. It''s not like they want to talk to us anymore now that we''re Jonas''s official fighters."


    "Yeah, there''s that."


    They had considered asking the other miners for help, but the miners had grown resentful after being passed over for the fighter roles.


    William and 03 were now receiving better treatment, which had caused tension. In any case, that option was off the table.


    "So, is there anything else you want to share, or is that it?"


    03 wanted to make sure he was fully informed. He believed that the only way to escape was by working together, and that required complete transparency.


    When he asked, the first thing that came to William''s mind was his deal with Victoria and how he was using his powers to secure external help.


    But that wasn''t something he could share with anyone.


    "That''s all of it," William said. "Let''s just hope everything goes well tomorrow and that we find something useful."


    "Are you going alone?"


    "I think so, yes. It''ll be hard for Stuart to keep all of us camouflaged."


    03 already understood and wasn''t upset about it.


    "Yes, you should go alone. Anyway, I''ll head back to my room before anyone notices I''m here and starts asking questions."


    "Alright. Take care."


    "You too."


    Once 03 left, William was alone in his room. He felt a growing sense of anxiety about the next day.


    Deep down, he knew it would be incredibly difficult to navigate that part of the mansion without getting caught.


    Even with Stuart''s help and Agnar opening the way, it would still be a challenge. Jonas wasn''t stupid, and if his family or the missing workers were there, the security would undoubtedly be top-notch.


    ''Let''s just hope for the best¡­''


    The following day followed the same routine as the previous one: William ate a hearty meal, trained with Travis, and spent a significant portion of his day resting.


    This was now the structure of his days as one of Jonas''s fighters.


    The only difference was that he took the time to check on Victoria to see how she was doing. With a few days still left before her classes began, she spent most of her time in her room, reading books and trying to make friends.


    William communicated with her mentally¡ªacting as Asura¡ªa few times during the day, just to check in and ensure she felt his presence.


    This was the best way to build her trust and solidify their connection.


    However, as night fell, William''s focus shifted entirely to the task at hand: exploring the restricted part of the mansion where even employees weren''t allowed.


    Not even most guards could enter that area¡ªonly a select few, handpicked by Jonas. Agnar had recently been chosen as one of those guards.


    William wasn''t sure how Jonas made his selections, but he suspected it had to do with seniority and a clean record.


    Agnar had only started breaking the rules after Simone disappeared, but no one had discovered his secret investigations, so it hadn''t affected his promotion.


    Enjoy more content from My Virtual Library Empire


    When night came, William left his room and moved through the mansion as quietly as possible.


    Travis was stationed in the corridor outside William''s room. When he saw William, he simply nodded and remained silent.


    Everything had been arranged. The trio¡ªWilliam, Travis, and Agnar¡ªwere working together to make this happen.


    William had Stuart hidden in one of his pockets, ready to assist him.


    "Are you confident we can get through that area? They might have other defensive measures in place¡­ They could sense if you''re using mana," Stuart warned.


    William was already aware of the risks. It wasn''t going to be easy.


    "It''s not like we have much of a choice, right?" S§×arch* The ¦Çov§×lFire .net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    William was in this situation because Travis knew he had been the one to break into the library. If Jonas found out, it would mean certain death.


    "I get that¡­ I''ll do my best to keep you alive," Stuart said.


    "Thanks."


    They moved through the mansion, the moonlight streaming through the hallway windows. The sound of the wind echoed through the silent corridors.


    As they approached the restricted area, the atmosphere grew even quieter.


    William couldn''t shake the feeling that someone was watching him. It was an unsettling sensation.


    Eventually, they reached the "control" area¡ªthe checkpoint where guards stood to ensure no one entered the prohibited part of the mansion.


    This time, the guard stationed there was Agnar. He saw William approaching but remained silent.


    When William got close enough to stand beside him, Agnar whispered, "I saw a few guards patrolling inside, so be careful once you pass me. Good luck."


    William nodded back, but he didn''t say a word. He was really nervous about what was about to happen, and what would he see going into that place.


    After he passed by Agnar, Stuart used his magic to camouflage him. He didn''t want to make any mistakes. What if there was someone already there, watching them?


    So, only after getting invisible did William finally calm down.


    ''It''s finally time to find out what the fuck happened to that Simone lady...''

 Chapter 174 Finding...Corpses?

    The place was quieter than usual. While other parts of the mansion still had a few staff members¡ªeven during the night¡ªthis particular area was completely deserted. Read new adventures at My Virtual Library Empire


    Well, except for the guards. It didn''t take long for William to spot one sitting in a chair right in the middle of the hallway.


    This guard didn''t seem particularly alert. In fact, he looked rather relaxed, with a glass of some kind of drink on the table beside him.


    It was clear he didn''t expect anyone to make it this far into the mansion. In other words, he wasn''t exactly focused on his guard duties anymore.


    But there was a way to get here. William was living proof of that.


    With Stuart''s help, William slipped past the guard unnoticed and began exploring the area.


    At first, all he found was a straight hallway with a few locked doors. The corridor itself was similar to the others in the mansion¡ªwell-decorated and lined with large windows.


    There was nothing particularly special about the hallway. However, William soon reached another part of the mansion that felt... different.


    At the end of the corridor, he saw a set of double doors. Unlike the other doors he had tried earlier, these were made of stone and weren''t locked.


    There were no guards nearby, and according to Stuart, there didn''t seem to be any magical protections either. It was all very strange.


    "Let''s take a look. It can''t hurt," Stuart suggested. sea??h th§× N?vel(F)ire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    William agreed, though he didn''t have much of a choice. He slowly pushed one of the doors open, peeking through the crack to make sure no one was waiting on the other side to ambush him.


    No one was there. The room was pitch black, with no source of light whatsoever. The atmosphere was eerie, and William felt a chill run down his spine as he stepped inside.


    Just beyond the door was a staircase leading deeper down, into what seemed to be an underground area.


    William was convinced he would find Simone¡ªor perhaps even the other missing workers¡ªdown there!


    Why? Well, the place looked like a dungeon, a prison where Jonas and his family might keep people locked away.


    Anyone in William''s position would have thought the same. But what he found down there wasn''t what he expected.


    Instead, he encountered another hallway, this one adorned with gothic artwork¡ªstatues of gargoyles, bats, shadowy creatures that looked like demons, and morbid paintings on the walls.


    Once again, William saw several doors, but this time they were open. He considered entering, but Stuart stopped him.


    "I sense energy on the other side. I think there are people sleeping in there, and if you open the door, they might wake up."


    William was taken aback.


    "People on the other side? Like prisoners?"


    "I don''t think so. I think these people actually live here... for some reason."


    He pressed on, hoping to find more useful information. Eventually, he came across a door that was slightly ajar.


    This was his chance. William peeked through the gap and saw that the room was empty.


    Stuart quickly confirmed it, so they wouldn''t waste any time.


    "Whoever lives here must be somewhere else. Let''s take a look while we can."


    William stepped inside, doing his best to stay quiet. His movements were slow and deliberate, and he watched where he stepped to avoid making any mistakes.


    The room, though clearly a bedroom, was... strange.


    Everything was made of stone¡ªthe walls, the ceiling, the furniture. The strangest part was the bed, which looked more like a stone altar. It didn''t seem comfortable at all.


    William searched for something that could help him make sense of what he was seeing¡ªa note, perhaps, or anything that might reveal the identity of the person who lived there. But there was nothing.


    And that was what made it so odd. It was as if the person who slept here didn''t actually live here. It was more like they only came to lie down on that stone altar and then got up again.


    How was that possible? Why would anyone sleep in such a dark, uncomfortable place?


    This only reinforced William''s belief that the people staying here were prisoners Jonas was keeping. It didn''t make sense for it to be anything else.


    Stuart snapped William out of his thoughts.


    "Hide in the corner and stay quiet. Someone''s coming, and we don''t have time to leave!"


    Stuart had dispelled the invisibility spell as soon as they entered the room. He couldn''t maintain it indefinitely without risking detection, so he had taken the opportunity to rest.


    William quickly looked for a place to hide. He found an empty barrel in the corner of the room and ducked behind it.


    With the barrel concealing him and Stuart''s camouflage ability, he was confident no one would find him there.


    There were many things William imagined he might see when someone entered that room.


    Perhaps one of the guards? A servant? One of the prisoners forced to stay in those horrible rooms?


    His mind even conjured up the image of a creature coming to capture and kill him on the spot. There were so many possibilities, yet none of them turned out to be true.


    In reality, what William saw was far from anything he could have imagined. It was Jonas.


    Jonas was carrying a body in his arms. The body was remarkably well-preserved, save for two peculiar details: the grayish hue of its skin and its emaciated frame.


    He walked over to the altar and gently laid the body down.


    "Rest well, little sister. We''re getting closer to saving the family."


    William covered his mouth in shock¡ªpartly to stifle his gasp and partly to hold his breath.


    Jonas stayed there for a while, tenderly stroking his sister''s face and whispering kind words. After a moment, he left the room.


    It took William some time to muster the courage to come out from behind the barrel. He was in complete shock.


    Stuart was equally stunned. The little mouse crawled out of William''s pocket and said, "This is beyond bizarre. That person isn''t dead. It''s as if they''re in a state of magical preservation. I think Jonas is trying to bring them back to life... somehow."


    William couldn''t stop thinking about what 03 had told him regarding Jonas''s family.


    The family was supposed to be large, yet he had never seen many of them. It was as if a part of them had simply vanished, and no one had questioned why.


    Well, what if they were dead, and Jonas was doing everything in his power to bring them back to life?


    After what William had just witnessed, the idea didn''t seem so far-fetched anymore.


    "What should we do?"


    William wanted Stuart''s opinion. After all, Stuart was a magical creature who had lived for many years and was incredibly intelligent.


    "For now, let''s try to explore a bit more and then head back. I think we might find something else around here. But we shouldn''t attempt anything risky just yet. Your mana is still sealed, which means we can''t fight anyone if it comes to that."


    William nodded in agreement. Before leaving the room, he decided to approach the altar to take a closer look at the strange body lying there.

 Chapter 175 Fight Club

    William walked over to the altar to examine the body. When he stopped and observed it closely, he realized just how bizarre it truly was.


    It seemed as though Jonas''s sister was both alive and dead at the same time. It was as if something was keeping her in this suspended state.


    The strangest part was that her heart wasn''t beating, and there was no blood in her body, yet she was alive and breathing!


    William could have sworn she was looking at him, unable to speak or move. The thought was deeply unsettling.


    It got even worse when Stuart said something to him.


    "I think she can see everything around her but just can''t move or interact. Crazy, right?"


    When Stuart said that, William looked at her again, and her lifeless eyes were fixed directly on him.


    "She''s probably wondering who I am and what the hell I''m doing here¡­ Well, let''s get out of here."


    There was nothing more he could do there except stare at that strange corpse, so William decided to leave.


    Before completely exiting the room, he cracked the door open slightly to make sure no one was around.


    Jonas wasn''t there¡ªat least, William didn''t see him. There were no guards either.


    "This must be a family secret, so I doubt there are any guards around here," Stuart said. "I think only Jonas and his family come down here."


    William believed Stuart''s words. They made a lot of sense. Despite seeing a few guards earlier, they seemed to be there more to prevent anyone from reaching this far into the mansion.


    Inside, he had only seen those bodies and Jonas. Now that Jonas was gone, the place was empty.


    This was the perfect opportunity to explore further and see if he could find anything else.


    As much as William didn''t want to enter the other rooms in the hallway, he did so anyway.


    He had already imagined they would be rooms with bodies similar to the one he had seen earlier, and indeed, that''s exactly what he found.


    William opened each door and saw different bodies, all preserved in the same eerie state. All of them were unable to move or do anything.


    By now, William was certain these were all members of Jonas''s family. What could have happened to them?


    He was deeply curious. Finally, there was one last room at the end of the hallway. When William opened it, he found something different.


    It wasn''t a room like the others but a strange chamber with an altar¡ªalso made of stone¡ªand several chairs in front of it.


    It resembled the layout of a church, but the altar was bizarre, with a statue of some deity behind it.


    The deity looked like a creature made of various mismatched parts. The strangest thing was that the statue emanated a peculiar aura¡ªsomething similar to mana but not quite the same.


    "What are they doing here?" William murmured.


    Stuart seemed uneasy. The little mouse, with his vast knowledge, understood a bit of what was going on.


    "This is an altar to some deity. They''re trying to use divine power to accomplish something," Stuart said.


    "Probably to resurrect everyone here. Or maybe the deity is the one who did this to them in the first place?" William speculated.


    "That''s a valid theory, but we can''t be sure yet. Let''s get out of here before they notice our presence. Unfortunately, we didn''t find Simone¡­"


    They searched every corner but found nothing more. Was there a chance of a secret passage somewhere?


    Perhaps. William didn''t rule out the idea. But what if there wasn''t one? Where were Simone and the other missing workers?


    Had they really left the mansion, or had Agnar been wrong all along?


    In any case, as much as William wanted to stay and search longer, it wasn''t a good idea to linger.


    Jonas could return at any moment, or someone might notice William''s absence from his room, which would cause problems.


    William made his way back, passing the guards without issue¡ªthanks to Stuart''s camouflage.


    On the way, he glanced again at the locked doors he had seen earlier. sea??h th§× ¦Çov§×lFire .net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    ''There''s a chance Simone could be in one of those rooms¡­ How do I get the key? Maybe in Jonas''s office?'' he thought.


    That seemed like the best lead. As he passed Agnar, he signaled to him, but they didn''t speak.


    Agnar didn''t seem angry about it. He knew it wasn''t the right time to talk. William returned to his room without any issues.


    There, he decided to rest. The things he had seen were still fresh in his mind, and he couldn''t shake them off.


    The next day, breaking news arrived. Apparently, the fighting club that Jonas''s noble friend had started was ready, and the first event would take place in a few days.


    This meant it was time for William and 03 to leave the mansion and head to the fighting arena.


    William had known this moment would come, but he had expected it to take a bit longer. At least, that''s what Jonas had told him.


    "They managed to organize everything faster than expected, and the nobles are eager for some fights to liven up this harsh winter. We''ll have to go today," Jonas said.


    "Do we know who we''ll be fighting?" William asked. Continue your journey on My Virtual Library Empire


    Despite feeling confident in his abilities¡ªWilliam firmly believed his body was his greatest weapon¡ªhe still wanted to know more about his opponents.


    It would be good to have some idea, as it would give him some peace of mind. However, there was no way to know yet.


    "No fighter knows, especially since it''s the first event. But from what I''ve heard from Travis about your training, I''m sure you''ll win. There''s no way the other nobles have found fighters as good as you right off the bat," Jonas said.


    "Good to know."


    They prepared everything, and this time, they used Jonas''s flying carriage.


    Only William, 03, Jonas, and one guard traveled in the carriage. The group was small since the focus was solely on participating in the fights.


    On the way, William discussed strategies with Jonas.


    "Honestly, there''s no strategy. It''s a fistfight until one of the fighters gives up, and I want you to win because I''ve placed my bets on you."


    Jonas kept emphasizing this. He repeatedly mentioned how much he had bet on them and how confident he was in their victory.


    William even considered losing on purpose just to anger Jonas¡ªafter all, the bastard had bought him as a slave¡ªbut what good would that do?


    It would only give William a momentary sense of satisfaction. Afterward, he would suffer at Jonas''s hands, as Jonas would likely take out his anger on them.


    In any case, the journey was much faster than they had anticipated. Jonas''s carriage was incredibly swift, and within a few hours, they arrived at the noble''s estate where the fights were being held.


    The atmosphere was far livelier than the last time they had been there. Many people had come from outside to watch and support the fights, and of course, to pit their own fighters against one another.


    As soon as they arrived, all eyes turned to Jonas''s carriage.


    It was well-known that Jonas was the wealthiest noble among them, and they recognized him immediately by his flying carriage¡ªadorned with gold.


    When they stepped out of the carriage, the portly noble who owned the mansion came to greet them.


    "Jonas, it''s wonderful to see you. You''re early!" he said.


    Jonas smiled. "Yes, I am. I''m always impressed by how fast this carriage is."


    "Indeed, indeed. Come, I''ve prepared something for you to eat," the portly noble said, then added, "and for your fighters as well."


    They were led to a dining room filled with an array of different foods. William could feel the gaze of the other nobles on him.


    Everyone seemed intensely curious about William. Not just the nobles, but the other fighters were also exchanging glances.


    This already set the tone for the excitement surrounding the fights that would take place in a few hours.


    One of the nobles in the dining room approached Jonas. By his side was his fighter¡ªa towering, muscular man who looked like a mountain.


    He glanced at Jonas and said, "Is this the fighter you brought? Mine seems far superior."


    The tall fighter stood in front of William, making him appear incredibly small in comparison.


    Jonas felt a bit intimidated, but before he could say anything, William spoke up.


    "Anyone with even a basic understanding of combat knows your fighter is a piece of trash. Does he want to fight me? I''ll be happy to kill him today."


    Even Jonas was surprised when he heard that. It wasn''t every day someone spoke with such boldness and confidence.


    The tall fighter grew furious and was about to throw a punch at William when his master stopped him.


    "We''re not going to fight here and cause a scene in our friend''s home. We''ll settle this in the ring later."


    With that, he walked away, and the fighter followed him.

 Chapter 176 First Fight

    After they left, Jonas spoke to William.


    "You surprised me, talking like that. If you bring that same fire into the ring, I''m confident we''ll come out victorious."


    It wasn''t just Jonas who was surprised. The other nobles and their fighters were now paying closer attention to William.


    03 thought he knew William¡ªor at least, he believed he did¡ªbut even he was taken aback.


    "I didn''t know you had such a thirst for blood. Are you some kind of assassin or something?" 03 asked.


    William reflected on that. He didn''t consider himself an assassin, but he had indeed killed many people¡ªand monsters too.


    Had he already lost the innocence he thought he still had?


    "I''m not," William said with an awkward smile. "I just wanted to show dominance. You know how it is¡ªthe fight starts before you even step into the ring."


    03 nodded in agreement. He liked what he heard.


    "Well said, my friend, well said. Alright, let''s get ready. I don''t know if it''ll be you, me, or both of us fighting today, but let''s hope everything goes well¡­"


    "It will. Don''t worry."


    They spent some time there. The nobles were socializing among themselves, discussing their territories, businesses, and, of course, the fights.


    Everyone was excited about the matches. But the fighters themselves didn''t share the same enthusiasm.


    William could see that none of the fighters wanted to be there. It was obvious. They were all likely slaves, just like him, forced to fight and endure pain for the amusement of the nobles, with no other choice.


    One of the fighters approached William. He was a young man, thin, and looked more like a scholar than a fighter. He stood out among the others, who seemed more like thugs or bandits.


    "Hey, how''s it going?" the young man said.


    William gave him a cold look.


    "Why are you talking to me? It doesn''t make much sense, considering we might end up as opponents. What do you want?"


    The young man tried to appear friendly, sitting down next to William and offering a smile.


    "Relax, friend. I just came to talk, I swear. I''m not like that other fighter who tried to intimidate you. You know, you and I are in the same boat here."


    He wasn''t wrong about that.


    "But what''s the point of talking? It''s not like it''s going to benefit us," William replied.


    "Not right now, but I hope we can work together in the future. You know, I feel like we have more in common than you think."


    For some reason, the young man was trying to sound mysterious, as if he held some knowledge William wasn''t aware of.


    "We''ll see. I''ll remember your face."


    After saying that, William stood up and walked away to be alone. He didn''t want to risk staying close to other fighters. S§×ar?h the N?vel(F)ire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    In a situation like this, he could easily imagine a scenario where the young man''s master¡ªthe noble¡ªwould do anything to win, even sabotage the other fighters.


    What if William was poisoned? Or fell under some magical illusion? Or worse? It didn''t make sense to take such a risk for no reason.


    As the hours passed, the friendly atmosphere among the nobles began to fade.


    Each of them had a fighter, and they were also placing bets, which meant there was a growing rivalry between them.


    None of them wanted to lose. It would mean not only losing their honor but also their money.


    Jonas was feeling the same way.


    They all made their way to the arena that had been specially built for the fights. There, the nobles sat in the elevated areas with benches and tables, enjoying a privileged view of the ring while sipping drinks and snacking.


    Meanwhile, fighters like William and 03 were taken to the area reserved for the combatants. It was a lower area, on the same level as the ring, which was sunken into the ground.


    There, all the fighters waited to be called for their matches. From what William understood after speaking with one of the organizers, the matchups were random.


    Each fighter would only have one match per day. So, William would only fight once that night.


    But the next day, he would have another fight. Of course, he wasn''t thinking about the next day''s match. William was focused on winning his first fight.


    While waiting downstairs with the other fighters, William tried to assess which of them might be strong.


    But that was nearly impossible for him. Without the ability to use mana¡ªand the other fighters couldn''t either¡ªhe had no way of gauging their strength.


    Here, physical strength was what mattered, and it wasn''t wise to judge based on appearance alone.


    William, for example, was muscular and well-defined, but he wasn''t a giant like that other fighter who had approached him earlier.


    However, William was quite strong. So even the men who looked lean could have incredibly powerful bodies.


    03 stood beside William.


    "From what I''ve seen, there''s a chance we might end up fighting each other. If that happens, I think I''ll just forfeit," 03 said.


    Find your next read on My Virtual Library Empire


    "Forfeit?"


    "Yeah. I''m not confident about beating you, and Jonas won''t be mad because I already talked to him about it. He can''t bet on our match anyway."


    "I see."


    After about 20 minutes of waiting downstairs, one of the organizers came to call two of the fighters for a match.


    He pointed at each of them.


    "You, and you. Come with me."


    The two fighters who were called were strangers to William. He hadn''t interacted with either of them before.


    Before the organizer left, William asked him a question. He really needed to know the answer.


    "Can we watch the fights?"


    "Not for now, but we might consider changing that rule in the future."


    With that, the organizer left with the two fighters, who made their way to the ring.


    William wanted to watch not for entertainment but to see how the other fighters performed.


    What if he ended up facing one of them in the future? It would be good to know their strengths, to prepare and have an idea of what to expect.


    Perhaps that was exactly why they weren''t allowed to watch the fights. In any case, the only thing William could do was sit there and wait for his turn.


    03 seemed a bit anxious about the fights. William tried to calm him down.


    The first match between the two fighters lasted about 10 minutes. After that, they called other fighters, and this time, it was William''s turn.


    Before entering the ring, he had to remove his shirt and shoes, leaving him only in his pants. This gave the fights a more rustic, barbaric feel.


    William''s opponent was a middle-aged man covered in scars. Just by looking at the two of them, it was obvious who most people would bet on.


    "This is too easy," one of the nobles said. "Let''s bet on the guy with all the scars."


    Many of the nobles, sipping their wine as they watched the fights, thought the same way. But some were a bit hesitant.


    "Appearances can be deceiving. Is it really a good idea to bet on the scarred guy? Not to mention, if everyone bets on the same person, the payout will be terrible."


    Because of this reasoning, some decided to bet their money on William, hoping for a better payout.


    Jonas, on the other hand, placed an enormous bet on William¡ªmore than he had initially planned.


    The guard accompanying Jonas asked, "You''re betting all of that?"


    Jonas, with a smile, replied, "That fighter going against my slave is much weaker. This is the perfect opportunity to make a fortune."


    He didn''t want to miss this chance. The betting went on for about two minutes before the fight officially began.


    The event organizer explained the rules: no weapons were allowed, and if one fighter surrendered, the other had to stop.


    William already knew all this, so he didn''t pay much attention.


    "Begin the fight!"


    The two fighters stared each other down for a brief moment.


    "You wanna give up now, little fairy? You don''t look like much of a fighter," William''s opponent taunted.


    "Oh really? How do you think they''ll feel after you lose to me in less than 30 seconds?" William shot back.


    "What?"


    William''s opponent couldn''t believe what he was hearing. He started laughing, thinking William had lost his mind.


    Well, that wasn''t the case. William sprinted toward the fighter, his speed extraordinary.


    In less than three seconds, he had crossed the entire ring and appeared right in front of his opponent. Then, he clenched his fist and delivered a punch straight to the man''s stomach.


    The punch was so powerful that the sound of ribs cracking echoed through the arena, and all the nobles were left in shock.


    "I-I surrender!" the fighter gasped.


    Jonas couldn''t contain the smile on his face. He bet a lot of money, and now that William won, his anxiety was long gone.


    "I told you he would win!" Jonas said to the guard, "this guy will make me rich."

 Chapter 177 Running out of Time

    The shock was evident on the faces of all the nobles who witnessed William''s powerful punch. They couldn''t tell if William was just that strong or if his opponent was simply too weak.


    "That scarred guy is a joke," one of the nobles said. "He looks dangerous but isn''t. Where are the real fighters?"


    Many of them were furious for losing money by betting on the man with scars who had lost the fight after just one punch from William.


    Among them, Jonas was the most excited. After being declared the winner, William joined Jonas to watch the rest of the fights.


    There was no reason for him to stay downstairs with the other fighters since he wouldn''t be fighting again¡ªat least not that day.


    "You were incredible," Jonas said, giving William a slap on the shoulder. "I knew you were good, but that was something else."


    William, despite disliking Jonas for everything he had done¡ªand especially after seeing those strange bodies in the mansion¡ªdecided to play along and be as polite as possible.


    "It was nothing. I''m glad you made some money betting on me."


    Jonas laughed heartily.


    "Oh, I made a lot. A lot of money. If you keep this up, we might even talk about you buying your freedom. But let''s discuss that when we get back. For now, we''ve got more fights to enjoy."


    After saying that, he pointed to the chair next to him and said, "Sit down. And grab yourself some wine."


    William did as Jonas asked. He sipped the wine slowly, taking small gulps as he watched the fights.


    "Am I really allowed to stay here? I thought fighters weren''t supposed to watch the matches," William asked, his curiosity getting the better of him.


    "Normally, you wouldn''t be," Jonas admitted. "But the organizer already said you''re way stronger than the others, so you won''t be fighting anymore. They''re actually thinking of sending you to the bigger tournaments in the capital."


    The situation had completely changed, and William wasn''t sure how to feel about it.


    He wanted to stay close to Black Pine Manor, as Jonas''s mansion was near the forbidden area of the continent¡ªthe place where demons had lived long ago.


    Kier had tricked him and was heading to that area. In fact, he might already be there. William needed to find a way to escape as soon as possible.


    "But when are these tournaments happening?" William asked.


    Jonas said something interesting¡ªsomething that might actually be useful.


    "There are a few going on now, but we''ll only head out in about two months. I''ve got some important matters to attend to at the mansion and can''t be away for too long."


    The first thing that came to William''s mind were the mummified bodies of Jonas''s family that he had seen in the mansion''s underground area.


    ''Is he talking about that?'' William wondered.


    "I see. But what about back at the mansion? Will I have to go back to mining, or¡­?"


    William had been receiving better treatment precisely because he had become one of the fighters. Jonas saw him as an opportunity to make more money, so he wanted to keep William in good condition.


    But now that William wouldn''t be fighting for two months, what would he have to do?


    "No, of course not. In fact, I''m thinking of putting you to work on other tasks. Maybe as a guard for a while? Or helping to deal with some beasts that have been appearing near the mansion? I think it''s a good way to put your strength to use."


    Now that was interesting. William would continue to receive better treatment, and he might even have the chance to get closer to Jonas, which could help him escape in the future.


    In any case, they watched the fights, and when it was 03''s turn to fight, William''s interest grew a bit.


    03 wasn''t as good as William, obviously, but he wasn''t bad either. After a bloody fight with both sides taking hits, 03 managed to come out victorious.


    By the end of the match, his nose was bleeding, and his right eye was swollen, but he was okay. Jonas was happy again because he had bet on 03.


    "I made another good chunk of money! But he''ll need some time to recover, and I''m not sure if it''s worth taking him to the tournament in the capital in two months¡­"


    For the tournament, they would need the best fighters, and 03 wasn''t exactly top-tier in hand-to-hand combat.


    William thought he wouldn''t be interested in watching the remaining fights after 03''s match, but the final fight of the night surprised him.


    One of the fighters was the young man who had spoken those strange words to him earlier in the waiting area.


    This young man was simply powerful. The speed at which he rushed toward his opponent was even faster than William''s, and a single punch from him sent the other fighter flying across the ring.


    Everything happened so quickly, and within seconds, he had won the match. sea??h th§× N?vel?ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    After his victory, as the organizer raised his hand in celebration, the young man lifted his head and looked directly at William.


    ''Who is this guy?'' William wondered.


    The strength that young man had displayed wasn''t normal, and the cryptic words he had spoken to William were still echoing in his mind.


    However, as much as William wanted to learn more, he didn''t get the chance to talk to the young man after the fights ended. Jonas was eager to head home, so they all boarded the flying carriage and left.


    Inside the carriage, William tried to pry more information out of Jonas about the young fighter.


    "Do you know who he is? He seemed really strong."


    "No idea. All I know is that his master lives near the forbidden zone¡­ I don''t know how he manages to stay there. From the stories I''ve heard, it''s a dangerous place."


    "Forbidden zone?"


    "Yeah, a pretty famous one not too far from my mansion. They say humans with extraordinary powers once lived there, but that was a long time ago."


    It didn''t take a genius to figure out that Jonas was referring to the demons who had once inhabited that area.


    When William realized this, he immediately thought back to what the young man had said¡ªthat they were the same.


    ''What exactly did he mean by that? It''s too much of a coincidence that he lives near there¡­''


    William tried to dig deeper, but Jonas didn''t know much more than that. Besides, everyone was tired and ready to sleep.


    After a few hours, they arrived at the mansion, and each went to their respective rooms.


    "While you''re fresh as a daisy, I''m all banged up¡­ At least the fights are over for now," 03 said.


    "Will you have to go back to the mines?"


    "Probably, but not for another three days. What about you?"


    "From what I understand, no. Jonas said he has other tasks for me."


    03 was a little sad that his friend wouldn''t be with him during the grueling work, but he was still happy that William wouldn''t have to endure the heat and exhaustion of mining mana stones for hours on end.


    "I see. Well, see you tomorrow."


    "See you."


    William went to his room, lay down on the bed, and stared at the ceiling. Stuart was by his side.


    "We can''t afford to wait too long to get out of here. If you go to the capital for those tournaments, I''m sure you''ll have to stay there for a while. That means we have to escape within a month at most!" Experience new tales on My Virtual Library Empire


    "I know that, but I''m not sure what to do¡­ Should I try to speed things up with Victoria?"


    He had already discussed this with Stuart, so he had a rough idea of the escape plan.


    "I think so. It''s risky, but it''s the best option. Otherwise, we''ll be stuck here forever. Think about it¡ªshe still has to travel to get the blood and then come here to rescue us. We don''t have much time."


    "What if I try to escape even with the seal?"


    This was an idea that had crossed William''s mind after Jonas agreed to assign him other tasks. It would make it easier for him to flee.


    "I''m pretty sure that seal also acts as a tracker. So, you wouldn''t be able to escape for long¡­"


    "Damn it¡­"


    The next day, William woke up earlier than usual with the intention of starting a conversation with Victoria and trying to help her grow stronger.


    The classes had just begun, and Victoria was already feeling left behind compared to the other students. She was in a vulnerable state, susceptible to outside ideas¡ªlike William''s.


    "What do you think about performing a ritual to give you a bit more power? I think it could be good for you," William suggested.


    "A ritual? That sounds a bit¡­ dark."


    Victoria was in the library, reading some books early in the morning. Asura was perched on the table.


    "Well, you know that most powerful mages have to make some sacrifices to grow stronger. It''s a normal part of the process. But don''t worry, we''re not going to kill anyone."


    "I''ll trust you, Asura. What do you have in mind?"


    William was about to take a risk and perform the rituals Asura had taught him before going into hibernation. He needed to make Victoria stronger, no matter the cost.

 Chapter 178 Trying to Invade the Dungeon

    There were various rituals that Asura had taught William. Most of them worked by transferring demonic energy from William''s body¡ªand what Asura had stored in the sword¡ªto the user, in this case, Victoria.


    But for it to work, a kind of sacrifice was necessary. The idea was to take the life force of creatures, absorb it, and use it as a conduit for the demonic energy.


    This way, William could use the life force of the slain creature for himself, maintaining his strength.


    If he simply passed his demonic energy or the energy from the sword to Victoria, it would eventually run out.


    Not to mention, he would feel weaker. However, by using the life force of slain creatures and the magical symbols of the ritual, it was possible to mitigate this negative effect.


    And it could go even further. There was another ritual that could send demonic energy to William if Victoria performed a sacrifice for him.


    At first, this could be done with other types of creatures, like magical beasts, but eventually, human sacrifice would be the most effective.


    Perhaps this was one of the reasons the demonic race had been hated and had disappeared. William found this somewhat hypocritical. Many other mages and civilizations did worse things for their deities and yet continued to thrive.


    In any case, after William explained the procedure to Victoria, she was a bit apprehensive.


    "Is this really a good idea? We''ll have to sacrifice a magical beast? Look, it usually starts like this, and before you know it, I''m doing it with other humans¡­"


    William was surprised that she immediately saw where things could lead in the future. Not that it was hard to figure out.


    But Asura had told him something else: if she performed the rituals, William would eventually gain more influence over her.


    It would be like having a follower.


    ''The idea of having a cult doesn''t seem so bad¡­ From what I understand, with these rituals, I can have them perform sacrifices that will send more power to me¡­''


    The idea seemed great for increasing his power and, who knows, maybe even reviving the demonic race. Of course, those were things for the future. Right now, he was more concerned with escaping the mansion.


    "Don''t worry, we''ll only sacrifice magical beasts. And like I said, many mages do worse things for power. Remember, if you want to become strong, you''ll have to do things others aren''t willing to do."


    That phrase stuck in Victoria''s mind. She decided to trust William and go along with the idea of the ritual.


    "Alright, we can do this. But where are we going to find a magical beast to kill? It''s not like I can just leave the academy right now."


    "You can''t?"


    William wasn''t aware that this was the case at the battle academy. Typically, magic schools like this didn''t allow students to leave whenever they wanted. They lived there, with free shelter and food.


    "I can''t¡­"


    "But surely they must have some kind of dungeon or something here that has beasts. They have combat classes against beasts, right?"


    An academy like this would have the resources to teach its students in the best way possible. Having a few magical beasts, both weak and strong, was quite common.


    Victoria confirmed this when William brought it up. It was as if a lightbulb had gone off in her head.


    "That''s true, I had almost forgotten about that. But it''s not that easy to get in there."


    "I think we can figure it out. What''s the best time? At night?"


    "Yes, at night."


    Now that William didn''t have many commitments at Jonas''s mansion¡ªhe was ''recovering'' from the fight¡ªhe was able to spend the entire day talking with Victoria.


    He took the opportunity to study the layout of the battle academy, the guards'' routines, and where the dungeon was located. That''s where the magical beasts were kept. Your next read awaits at My Virtual Library Empire


    The security inside the academy wasn''t as tight as one might expect. They focused more on securing the entrance, and once inside, things were a bit more relaxed.


    Even so, they were confident that no one would try anything. All the students were selected after rigorous tests, interviews, and, of course, a significant financial investment.


    Despite this, there were still guards inside the battle academy, and the entrance to the dungeon was locked. Victoria didn''t know how to open it.


    The lock was magically sealed. William didn''t know how to pick it either, but he knew someone who could¡ªStuart!


    With his consciousness split between his real body and the sword, he consulted Stuart, explaining everything about the lock. Stuart gave him some practical tips on how to break it.


    When night fell, and Victoria was in her dormitory, it was time to sneak out and head to the dungeon entrance.


    Students weren''t allowed to leave the academy grounds, but they were free to move around inside. Because of this, it was relatively easy for Victoria to slip out and blend in with other students who were strolling through the gardens or visiting the on-campus restaurants.


    However, as they approached the entrance to the dungeon, the number of students dwindled. The reason was that the dungeon entrance was located inside the academy''s main building.


    The only place students could visit at that late hour was the library.


    As they passed by, they saw a few students studying. Most of them were the less talented ones, trying to catch up with the rest of the class by putting in extra hours.


    When they finally reached the dungeon entrance, they found a guard standing there. This was unexpected.


    "I swear there wasn''t a guard here the other nights I passed by. I don''t know why there''s one here now," Victoria mentally communicated to William.


    The situation had just become less favorable.


    "Is there anything we can do? Do you know anyone who could distract the guard?" William asked.


    Victoria seemed to be deep in thought about something. She then mentally communicated to William.


    "There''s a boy who seems interested in me, but I''ve never really paid him any attention. I could ask him for a favor. What do you think?"


    It wasn''t the best plan, as it would mean that the boy would know Victoria had done something wrong, but it was the best they had at the moment.


    Without getting the guard away from the door, it would be impossible to do anything, and it seemed the guard would stay there until late at night. He probably wouldn''t leave until the main building of the academy closed completely, and by then, it would be impossible to even get inside.


    "Alright, let''s do it."


    Victoria went to find the boy she had mentioned. Surprisingly, he was also walking around the garden. Was it a coincidence, or had he seen Victoria leave her room and decided to go out as well?


    He was a young man sitting alone on one of the benches. Victoria sat down next to him, which made the boy visibly surprised.


    "V-Victoria. What are you doing here at this hour?"


    He was stuttering. William found the scene amusing.


    "I know I shouldn''t just show up out of nowhere and ask this, but could you do me a favor? I really need your help."


    The boy didn''t hesitate.


    "Of course! Anything you need!"


    William was laughing hard on the inside.


    ''Ah, love is so funny¡­''


    Victoria explained what she wanted: she needed him to cause some kind of commotion in the library to attract the guards.


    The library was near the dungeon entrance, and there were no guards stationed there, so the guard at the dungeon door would have to be the one to respond.


    When the young man heard this, he hesitated.


    "Is this a good idea? I think it might cause trouble for me later," he said.


    He was considering backing out. William mentally communicated with Victoria, suggesting an idea.


    "Tell him you''ll agree to go out to dinner with him sometime. He''ll definitely say yes on the spot."


    "But then I''d have to go to dinner with him, and I don''t want to."


    "You can''t handle one dinner in exchange for getting stronger?"


    William managed to convince her.


    "How about we go out to dinner next week? If you do this favor for me, I''ll think about it," Victoria said.


    The young man responded in less than a second.


    "What kind of mess do you want me to make in the library?"


    It was surprisingly easy to convince him with that offer. Victoria waited in one of the hallways near the dungeon entrance.


    Neo, the young man, started causing a commotion in the library. It didn''t take long for the guard stationed at the dungeon entrance to head over and check what was going on.


    This was the perfect opportunity for them to enter the dungeon. Victoria rushed to the entrance and stopped in front of the locked door. sea??h th§× N?vel(F)ire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "How do I open this now?"


    William had learned from Stuart how to unlock the seal, and he began explaining the process to Victoria.


    The only problem was that he didn''t have access to mana to assist her, so Victoria had to do it all on her own.


    She tried to follow the rune creation William had taught her, but it wasn''t working. The magic to break the lock kept failing.


    "Relax and focus. It''s not that hard to do," William said.


    He was trying to stay calm, but they were running out of time. The guard could return at any moment.

 Chapter 179 Victoria is Intoxicated

    Despite her attempts to produce the magical seals, Victoria wasn''t succeeding. She was still a novice mage, and the magic Stuart had taught her wasn''t the easiest to perform.


    "I don''t think I can do this," she kept saying to herself, and that self-doubt was preventing her from completing the task.


    William had already tried to calm her down and get her to focus, but it didn''t work. Because of this, he decided to be a bit harsher with his words.


    "If you don''t do this, you''ll keep being one of the worst students here, and in the end, you''ll become a joke to everyone. Not to mention, you''ll never make your father proud."


    William''s words were harsh. Victoria felt a surge of anger upon hearing this from someone she had started to trust.


    She focused entirely on trying to unlock the dungeon door, and to her surprise, she succeeded on the first try! William''s harsh words had worked.


    They slipped inside the dungeon before the guard could return and closed the door behind them to ensure no one would notice they had entered.


    Once inside, Victoria confronted him.


    "Were you serious when you said that?"


    William laughed.


    "Of course not, but I realized it''s a great way to get you to focus. You work better when you''re angry, it seems."


    "Now that you mention it, it was during a fit of anger that I discovered my talent for magic¡­ Anyway, what now? What do we do?"


    Now that they were finally inside the dungeon, where would they go first? Neither of them knew the layout.


    The place was dimly lit, with only torches on the walls providing light. The entire area was made of stone¡ªa common feature for dungeons¡ªand it was eerily quiet.


    "Let''s move carefully. We don''t know if there are other guards inside."


    Victoria nodded and followed, moving slowly.


    There wasn''t much to see, just a straight path ahead. It was a simple corridor. At the end of the corridor was another wooden door with an iron latch. Luckily, it was open.


    And the door didn''t have any magical protection, which was strange.


    "Either they''re overly confident in the protection of the other door, or someone opened this and forgot to close it," William warned her.


    A place where magical beasts were kept needed to be heavily fortified, especially inside a magic academy! What if the beasts escaped and attacked the students?


    Of course, they wouldn''t keep extremely powerful beasts here, but it was always good to take precautions. Given that line of thinking, it was odd that the door wasn''t more reinforced.


    Victoria opened the door, pulling it slowly and peeking through the crack. She wanted to see if there were any guards inside.


    Her eyes scanned the area, and she didn''t see anyone. But what she did see were cells, each containing different types of creatures. Each cell was heavily reinforced, made of sturdy materials, and protected by powerful magic.


    Now it made sense why the outer door wasn''t as heavily protected. The beasts couldn''t escape their cells. The magic used for protection was incredibly strong.


    William gave Victoria the next instructions, as she seemed a bit lost, unsure of what to do.


    "Let''s look for a weak beast that you can easily defeat."


    This wasn''t too hard to do. Victoria walked along the cells, observing the creatures and sensing their magical power.


    There were creatures of various power levels. The academy used these creatures for student training.


    Victoria recognized one of the creatures.


    "This one here, I faced it in my first class. It''s a very weak creature."


    William observed the creature she mentioned but ultimately decided to choose another one. Victoria questioned his decision.


    "They''ll notice if a creature goes missing or dies. We won''t be able to hide the body. It''s better to face a slightly stronger creature so they''ll think another student killed it, not a novice like you."


    They had to think not only about killing the creature and performing the ritual but also about not getting caught. William was considering all of this, but it seemed Victoria hadn''t fully grasped it.


    "But what if I can''t defeat it?"


    "We''ll pick one that''s a bit stronger. I''ll help you with my power. It''ll be fine."


    The two continued searching for a suitable beast until they found a desert fox with red eyes and spines along its back.


    This fox was common in the desert and was quite unique. It could burrow into the sand to hunt smaller, weaker magical creatures that hid there.


    "This one could work."


    Victoria looked at the small fox, and despite its intimidating appearance, she felt a bit hesitant.


    "I think it''s kind of cute. Do we really have to kill it?"


    "Yes."


    She had no choice. The first thing she did was figure out how to open the cell¡ªsince she couldn''t break the magical protection.


    Of course, they had a way around it. The guards and even some professors wouldn''t be able to break the protection either. It was incredibly powerful, created by a remarkable mage.


    However, they didn''t need to break the barrier. All they needed was to use the master key hanging on the wall near the cells. The key could open any of the cells.


    Victoria was about to grab the key when William stopped her.


    "Cover your hand with something¡ªa cloth, a piece of your cloak. They might be able to track your touch."


    William didn''t know if they could track something like fingerprints, something common in his old world, but why take the risk? Given how versatile magic was, he wouldn''t be surprised if they could.


    After covering her hand with her cloak, Victoria took the key and approached the cell. She inserted the key into the lock and opened the cell.


    It was time for the fight. Victoria drew Asura from its sheath. William then activated the power through the sword. A dark, burning energy surrounded the blade.


    This power was something Victoria had seen before during her first training session with Asura, but this time it was stronger. William was using a significant amount of power to ensure Victoria would win the fight.


    With the sword empowered by demonic energy, Victoria felt much more confident facing the fox. She charged at the creature, gripping the sword firmly in her hands.


    The fox hadn''t fully realized it had been freed yet, and that was crucial for Victoria to land a surprise attack.


    If it had been an attack using only Victoria''s power, the beast wouldn''t have taken much damage, but the attack with Asura was incredibly powerful. The strike cut through the fox''s fur and skin, burning it in the process.


    The beast roared in pain and could no longer move after that first attack. This allowed Victoria to deliver the final blow without much trouble, finishing off the magical beast.


    "Such a powerful attack! I didn''t know you could use this much power."


    Victoria was even more excited than before.


    "There''s a lot more where that came from. You''ll soon be the strongest one here. Now, take the beast''s body, and let''s find a secluded spot down here."


    Victoria also pulled a glass vial from her pocket. William had asked her to bring it.


    Enjoy exclusive adventures from My Virtual Library Empire


    "What do I do with this vial again?"


    "Fill it with the beast''s blood."


    "¡­"


    She picked up the beast''s body and searched for a spot in the dungeon where they could perform the ritual.


    William had decided to do it down there because if they tried it in Victoria''s room or anywhere else in the school, the risk of being seen was too high.


    So, the dungeon, which was completely empty, was the best place to carry out the ritual.


    They continued exploring the dungeon until they found a room that seemed to belong to someone. It had a desk, several handwritten papers, and even a bed.


    "Does the dungeon caretaker live here? I wouldn''t be able to stand staying here¡­" Victoria said.


    "I don''t think he can either, since he''s probably somewhere else. Anyway, let''s do it here. Put the beast on the table."


    There was a table in the middle of the room, likely where the caretaker conducted experiments or something similar. They placed the fox on it and began drawing the symbols.


    The symbols were difficult to create. So, William used the same technique Asura had used to transfer information to him and decided to pass it on to Victoria!


    Of course, he only shared the information about the ritual and the symbols, not how the ritual worked. He wanted to keep that part a secret.


    The blood collected from the fox was used to draw the symbols. They were symbols from the time of the demons, meaning they were symbols no one used anymore.


    And since everything was done with blood, the whole thing looked quite macabre. It was rather sinister. Victoria wasn''t too fond of what she was doing.


    "Are you sure this ritual is safe? Seriously, this feels wrong¡­"


    "Trust me. Now, repeat the words after me."


    Once everything was ready, Victoria placed Asura on the table near the dead fox and began chanting words in a language she didn''t recognize.


    She didn''t even know how she was speaking it¡ªit was because William had passed the information to her as well.


    With each word, she could feel power flowing into her body. It was intoxicating, a sensation of lightness and strength.


    This began to intoxicate Victoria, and she started smiling as she repeated the words aloud.


    At that moment, William knew he had won Victoria over. He knew she would now do whatever he needed, and this would guarantee his escape from Jonas''s mansion. S§×ar?h the N??eFire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.

 Chapter 180 Trapped Inside the School

    As the ritual progressed, the dead fox underwent a complete transformation. The blood from its body evaporated, and so did its flesh. In the end, all that remained were its bones.


    As for Victoria, she too had changed by the end of the ritual. The demonic energy had entered her body, and she was stronger than before.


    William was somewhat impressed by how much stronger she had become with just the first ritual. However, not everything was perfect. He knew he couldn''t continue doing this without addressing a serious issue.


    ''She doesn''t have the demonic lineage, so she''s like Kier in that regard¡­ I need to find a way to give her that lineage, or the demonic energy will eventually drive her insane.''


    As serious as it sounded, this was a problem for the future. His immediate goal was to use Victoria to rescue him. That was the most urgent priority.


    "What do you think, Victoria?" William asked.


    Victoria was smiling as she clenched her fists. "From what I can tell, my attributes increased by about 15 points each. This is amazing!"


    "15? That''s a lot, but it''ll decrease over time."


    "It doesn''t matter! With your help, I''ll become one of the top students here. What''s the next ritual?"


    She was genuinely excited to continue with the rituals, and of course, William had to calm her down.


    "Let''s get out of here first. There''s no point in trying to clean this up¡ªremoving the blood will be impossible. We need to avoid being seen on the way out."


    "Right."


    After hearing that, Victoria seemed to snap back to reality. She needed to return to her room without being seen, or she''d have a huge problem on her hands.


    She retraced her steps, leaving the cell key exactly where she had found it on the wall.


    A good amount of time had passed since they first entered, so when they reached the dungeon door, the guard was no longer there.


    The school''s hallways¡ªwhich had been lit earlier¡ªwere now completely dark. There were no students anywhere. The nearby library was empty and silent.


    "Do you think we could take a look in the library? Maybe there''s a secret section full of books," Victoria suggested.


    Of course, the library would have a section like that. Every library William knew of had something like it, but it wasn''t a good idea to go there now.


    The library would definitely have some kind of security, and even if it didn''t, the forbidden section would. The risk of getting caught was too high.


    "Let''s save that for another time. Focus on getting back to your room without being seen. One thing at a time, Victoria."


    William was trying to reason with her the only way he could¡ªby talking.


    Luckily, Victoria wasn''t stubborn. After hearing that, she simply stayed quiet and did her best to return to her room.


    She walked through the empty school, and as she reached the main entrance, she saw two guards standing in front of the door.


    Mentally, she said to William, "There''s no way we''re getting past those two. What should we do?"


    "Look for another exit. There should be one at the back."


    It was the only thing they could do. Victoria circled around and went to the back of the school. There, she found another exit, just as William had said, but there were still guards there.


    One guard was standing near the door, and from the look of it, he was wide awake and focused on his job¡ªmeaning it wouldn''t be easy to get past him.


    In fact, it would be impossible. The situation wasn''t looking good for them. S§×ar?h the NovelFire.net* website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "Damn it, damn it. We''re going to get stuck here and expelled! Or worse, we might even go to jail!"


    Victoria was starting to panic¡ªwhich was expected. She had worked her entire life to get into that school, and now there was a chance she''d be expelled. It was eating away at her.


    "Relax, we''re fine. The good news is there are no guards inside the school, so we can figure out a way to get out."


    Even as he said this, William wasn''t entirely confident. Victoria searched every corner of the school. She checked all the exits and even looked out the windows.


    She thought about jumping out a window a few times, but outside, around the main building, guards were patrolling. It would be very difficult not to be seen.


    If William could still use Stuart''s magic to camouflage her, everything would be fine, but that was impossible for him now. They''d have to find another way.


    "Maybe there''s a secret exit inside that leads outside," William said. "Are there any other buildings besides this main one?"


    "There are the dormitories, and now that you mention it, I''ve heard some students talk about a passage like that, but no one knows where it is or if it''s even real."


    "A passage? Tell me more."


    "Well, from what they say, many years ago, a student at this school found an underground passage that connected this main building to the dormitory. He used it to sneak into the library and ended up becoming the top student. They only found out about it after he graduated."


    "What are the chances the school has already found and sealed that passage?"


    "There''s a chance."


    "Better than nothing. Let''s look for it."


    Victoria set out to search for the secret passage, but it was incredibly difficult, if not impossible. How on earth were they supposed to find something like that?


    The main building of the school was enormous, and the passage could be anywhere. As they walked through the hallways, they heard strange noises.


    William was already thinking the worst¡ªlike a guard, a teacher, or even some shady individuals meeting at night to plot against the school.


    That''s what he often saw everywhere he went. The nature of humanity was present in every corner.


    But what they found wasn''t that. In fact, it was something unexpected, something that caused immense embarrassment for both Victoria and William.


    She followed the source of the noise and found two older students. They were kissing, and the young man already had a wandering hand, exploring the young woman''s body.


    "They''re meeting here at night because men and women aren''t allowed in the same dormitory¡­ Oh my God, I want to unsee this," Victoria said.


    William, on the other hand, was excited about the situation.


    "This is good, very good."


    Victoria was confused. "Wait, don''t tell me you were some kind of perverted mage? Is this part of your soul in the sword also perverted? Look, if you need to look at other women, know that I''m here, and I''m quite beautiful¡­"


    A wave of confusion washed over William''s mind after hearing that. Victoria had misunderstood.


    "No, that''s not it. I mean, yes, you are beautiful, but I''m not a pervert. Look, think about it. If they''re here, they found a way in and know how to get out. So, we can follow them!"


    "That''s true!"


    Victoria simply agreed and tried to forget that she had said what she did. The two waited for a while¡ªof course, they weren''t watching¡ªbut the young couple seemed like they were going to stay there for a long time.


    In the end, William suggested that Victoria make some noise nearby to scare them off. It was a simple but effective idea.


    And it worked.


    "What was that?" the young man said.


    "It might be someone. Let''s get out of here."


    No one wanted to stay there and face the consequences. The two quickly put their clothes back on and left. Victoria followed them.


    They went to another room. This room was filled with weapons and armor. It was where the school stored the equipment students used.


    Victoria was very surprised, and so was William. Could the secret passage they used to enter the school really be in this room?


    It didn''t make sense because this was a room many people visited daily, so if there were a passage there, someone would have noticed.


    The couple entered the room and went straight to one of the corners. They approached the wall, and the young man began tapping specific stones.


    Find your adventure at My Virtual Library Empire


    This alone was very strange. Victoria watched closely which stones he was tapping¡ªWilliam also paid attention to memorize them.


    After about 15 seconds, the floor on the other side of the room moved on its own! There, they saw a small trapdoor with a ladder leading down to a tunnel.


    A few seconds after the couple entered, the floor closed again. Victoria decided to wait a bit before opening the passage herself.


    "How on earth do they know about this passage? It doesn''t make any sense."


    She was baffled. Opening the passage required something very specific, and it didn''t make sense for that couple to know about it.


    "I don''t know either. Let''s try to do the same."


    Victoria went to the wall after waiting for 5 minutes and tapped the same stones. She forgot some parts of the sequence, but luckily William helped her, pointing out the missing stones.


    Just like with the couple, the floor opened again. They quickly went to the trapdoor and entered, descending an old wooden ladder.


    "This is a tunnel. Let''s hope the exit is this way," Victoria said.


    They moved forward, not knowing what they would find in that tunnel.

 Chapter 181 One Dead, One Missing

    The tunnel was ancient, filled with cobwebs everywhere, and extremely dark. Your next chapter is on My Virtual Library Empire


    Victoria was a bit scared to go in. What gave her courage was the fact that the couple of students had entered first, meaning it should be safe.


    "Is this the passage from the stories? The one I told you about?"


    William believed it could be, but how did that couple know about it?


    "I think so. Do you know who those two are?"


    "No, I''ve never seen them before. But they seem to be older students. We can find out more when we get out of here."


    "Yeah."


    William really wanted to know how those students knew about that place.


    In any case, Victoria moved forward, following the only direction the passage led. Eventually, she saw some very old doors along the corridor.


    The doors were made of stone and were locked. It was impossible to open them. They had no idea what was behind those doors but continued moving forward.


    Eventually, they found the exit. It was a ladder leading to a trapdoor, similar to the one they had found in the other room.


    This ladder led to the back of the dormitory, behind a tree and a rock. The floor moved in the same way as it had in the other room when they passed through, and then it closed.


    "We''re behind the dormitory! That''s great. Let''s get back quickly."


    Victoria headed toward the dormitory, her attention heightened. She kept looking around to see if there were any guards or other people nearby. sea??h th§× n?vel_Fire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Luckily, the dormitory didn''t have many guards, and there was a back door for her to use. And that''s where the couple was.


    The two were very surprised to see Victoria there.


    "Who are you? What the hell are you doing here?" the guy said.


    Victoria whispered back, "I''m just heading back to my room, just like you two. How about we pretend we never saw each other here?"


    The best thing to do in that situation was to pretend nothing had happened. The couple couldn''t report Victoria to the school administration without getting themselves in trouble, so there was no reason to.


    Besides, they didn''t even know each other. There was no animosity between them.


    "Yeah, agreed."


    They didn''t exchange another word. Victoria returned to her room and lay down on the bed. She placed Asura on the bed as well.


    "Today was intense, my God. But in the end, everything worked out. Not only did the ritual succeed, but we also found a secret passage. Pretty cool, huh?"


    After saying that, Victoria started changing into her pajamas. It was at that moment that she felt a bit embarrassed and said, "Can you see me? Is it a problem if I change here?"


    William wasn''t sure what to say to her. Asura didn''t feel these things¡ªat least William believed it didn''t¡ªbut now he was the one controlling the sword using his consciousness.


    "Yes, I can see, but my feelings aren''t exactly what you imagine. I''m just a fragment of a soul trapped in an object."


    In the end, Victoria decided to change right there. William felt a bit awkward watching her undress, revealing the beautiful curves of her body.


    Her long red hair covered her chest, and her bright eyes shone in the moonlight. William had to admit it¡ªshe was beautiful.


    After changing into her pajamas, Victoria sat by the window of her room, looking outside.


    "When can we do another ritual? I feel like this will make me really strong."


    "Soon. But first, you need to know that you can''t keep doing rituals nonstop. We''ll have to leave the school and go somewhere else soon, or you''ll be consumed by the power."


    "Leave the school? Do you mean leave for a few days or leave for good? You know I can''t leave yet."


    "Yes, leave for a while¡­ I won''t force you, but if you want to pursue power, you might have to do that. Remember, there are many schools that will accept you. And you don''t even need to study at a school if you have my teachings."


    William wasn''t sure if it was a good idea to tell her about this issue ahead of time, but he felt that after the first ritual, Victoria had been won over. She wanted power.


    After she fell asleep, William returned his consciousness to his body. He was still in Jonas''s mansion, spending his time eating and training a bit with Travis.


    He and 03 hadn''t been talking much since 03 had to return to the mines. However, something strange happened, something that made him have to talk to 03 again.


    During the early hours of that same night, one of the workers disappeared, and another was found dead in the middle of the mansion''s courtyard with his wrists slit. The worker was hanging from the mansion''s water fountain.


    This shocked all the workers, and Jonas had to work hard to calm everyone down the next morning.


    "One of our guards is missing, but we''ll find him. You don''t need to worry about anything," Jonas said.


    Jonas''s words didn''t help much. All the workers were still nervous.


    Even the guards were nervous. Previously, the workers who had disappeared were the weaker ones.


    But a guard? That meant this could happen to any of them. Because of this, it didn''t take long for some guards to resign.


    Jonas had flexible contracts with them¡ªone of the only ways to get people to work in that extreme cold¡ªso they were able to quit without issues and leave.


    With the number of guards drastically reduced, Jonas had to appoint William and 03 as new guards! He took advantage of the fact that the two had already participated in the fights¡ªand earned some of his trust¡ªand now they became guards.


    "You''ll get uniforms and will have night patrols in a few days. The head of the guards will give you the necessary information. I hope you don''t disappoint me," Jonas said.


    William, pretending to like Jonas, said, "We won''t, don''t worry. You can count on us."


    As they walked around the courtyard in their new uniforms, 03 said, "This is really strange. Do you think Jonas kidnapped that guard and killed the other worker?"


    It was the first thing that came to mind, considering Jonas had probably kidnapped other workers, but William believed that wasn''t the case.


    Jonas''s expression was one of shock, fear, apprehension, and confusion.


    "I don''t think so. I think there''s something else going on here¡­"


    William looked toward the forest surrounding the mansion. He wasn''t entirely sure Jonas was innocent, but it seemed likely.


    What the hell was happening? William had so many problems that he didn''t know what to do.


    And just like that, a week passed since William and 03 became guards. Nothing major happened. William could patrol while part of his consciousness remained in the sword, talking to Victoria.


    After the ritual they performed, the news spread throughout the school, and they were looking for the person responsible. According to them, the culprit had performed a macabre, sinister, and demonic ritual.


    Because of these labels, Victoria became interested in learning more about demons, and the teachers even discussed them in class.


    William had no idea the school would recognize the ritual, the symbols, and associate them with demons.


    As for Victoria, she was a bit apprehensive. She decided to confront William.


    "Asura, tell me, and please be honest. Were you¡ªor are you¡ªa demon?"


    William thought this question would come later, but it seemed he would have to explain himself to her now.

 Chapter 182 Not Many Options

    William remained silent for a moment, then said, "Yes, I am. But you know the stories about us aren''t entirely true. And many mages have done far worse than we ever have."


    Victoria was stunned, at a loss for words. Over the past weeks, she had grown closer to William than she ever expected. The artifact she had discovered felt like it was about to change her life forever. Discover exclusive tales on My Virtual Library Empire


    "And why didn''t you tell me sooner? Why keep it a secret?" she asked, her voice tinged with hurt.


    "Would you have stayed with me if I had?" William replied, his tone softening. "I needed to show you first that I''m not the monster they say I am. Otherwise, you would have cast me aside without a second thought."


    A heavy silence fell between them. Finally, Victoria sighed. "Alright, I''ll trust you again. But you mentioned we''d have to leave the school. Where would we go?"


    "To the forbidden zone on this continent," William said, his voice steady. "The place where the demons once lived."


    Victoria''s eyes widened. "What? That forbidden zone where no one who enters ever returns? Why would we go there?"


    William hesitated, then began to explain. "Remember when I told you that continuing the rituals would come with a price? To undo that¡ªand to make you even stronger¡ªyou''ll need the demonic lineage. And that''s where we''ll find it."


    "A lineage?" Victoria''s voice was barely a whisper, but her eyes sparkled with a mix of curiosity and excitement. The promise of greater power was intoxicating, and for a moment, it seemed to eclipse everything else.


    William smiled faintly. He had chosen the right person. With Victoria by his side, his plan just might work.


    After William explained everything, things began to move quickly. He also revealed the other mission she would need to undertake. Sear?h the N??elFir§×.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "Wait, let me make sure I understand this," Victoria said, her brow furrowed. "I have to rescue a demon who''s imprisoned and being used as a slave? And this demon will help me obtain the lineage?"


    "Exactly," William replied, his voice calm but firm.


    What Victoria didn''t know was that the demon William spoke of was himself¡ªhis true form. He was speaking to her through the sword, and she had no way of realizing the truth.


    "If that''s the case, I''ll need to become even stronger," she said, her voice tinged with determination. "So, does that mean we''ll be performing more rituals?"


    "Yes," William answered without hesitation. "We will."


    William was eager to accelerate their plans. He knew it was time to move beyond small sacrifices, like the fox, and take greater risks. The rituals would grow darker, the stakes higher. But for Victoria to achieve what he needed, there was no other way.


    William carefully planted the idea in Victoria''s mind, his voice low and persuasive. "If you truly want to grow stronger quickly, the most effective way would be to perform the ritual with a mage. We could target bandits¡ªpeople who deserve it. That might make it easier for you. What do you think?"


    Victoria hesitated, her expression conflicted. "I¡­ I don''t know."


    This was already far beyond anything she was accustomed to. Sacrificing the fox had been difficult enough, but a person? The thought made her stomach churn.


    Yet, the old Victoria¡ªthe one who had never been touched by demonic energy¡ªwould have found this idea unthinkable. But the energy was already working its way into her mind, warping her sense of morality. And William''s influence was undeniable.


    Victoria didn''t respond that day. She spent hours lost in thought, unable to focus on her classes or anything else. Her mind raced with questions: Is this the right thing to do? Can I really go through with this? By the next day, after a sleepless night, she finally gave William her answer.


    "I''m in," she said, her voice steady but resolute. "Do we have to leave the school right away? If I''m going to leave eventually, it''s better to do it now¡ªbefore I get too attached to this place."


    Despite the years of effort she had poured into earning her spot at the prestigious magic school, Victoria was willing to walk away. She was placing an immense amount of trust in William, believing he could make her stronger than the school ever could.


    William, however, felt the weight of her trust pressing down on him. He had grown fond of Victoria and didn''t want to let her down. He wanted to help her become powerful, to make her father proud, and to give her the strength to explore the world on her own terms.


    "Yes, it would be best to leave soon," William said, his tone apologetic. "I''m sorry it''s come to this. I know how hard you worked to get here."


    To his surprise, Victoria seemed less upset than he had expected. "It''s fine," she said with a shrug. "Strength will open doors for me anywhere. And you promised to teach me things the school never could. I''m willing to take that bet. Staying here would only keep me average at best."


    Once her decision was made, Victoria went to speak with the school administration. They were shocked when she announced her intention to leave, but their response brought bad news.


    "I''m afraid no one is permitted to leave the school until we identify the individual responsible for that macabre ritual," the administrator said sternly. "You''ll have to remain here for the time being."


    William had nearly forgotten about that complication. Of course they wouldn''t let anyone leave¡ªnot while the investigation was ongoing. He felt a pang of frustration at his own oversight.


    "We''ll have to wait," Victoria said once they were alone. "But they''ll never find the culprit¡­ because it was us. What do we do now?"


    William paused, considering their options. "We have two choices," he replied mentally. "Either we find a way to pin the blame on someone else, or we escape. Which do you prefer?"


    "If we escape, they''ll probably come after us, won''t they?" Victoria asked. "They''ll assume I''m the one who performed the ritual."


    "Exactly," William said. "But it might be our only option. Even if we fabricate evidence to frame someone else, they have ways to detect forgeries. The investigation could drag on indefinitely, and we''d be stuck here for who knows how long."


    With no other options, they had to decide whether to risk an escape.


    "But how are we going to get out?" Victoria asked, her voice low. "The exits are all being watched."


    "What about that tunnel we found?" William suggested. "There were other doors down there¡ªmaybe one of them leads to an exit."


    It was their only lead. As night fell, Victoria made her way to the room where the weapons and armor were stored. Her heart pounded as she slipped inside, only to run into the same couple she had seen before. They recognized her immediately and exchanged puzzled glances.


    "Can we help you?" the man asked, his tone polite but wary. "Are you looking for something in the storage room?"


    The couple had seen her the other night, but they had no idea she knew about the secret passage. Victoria''s mind raced.


    "What now? What do I do?" she asked William silently.


    "We''ll have to confront them," William replied, his mental voice calm but firm. "We don''t have time to waste."


    Since the ritual, security at the school had tightened. Guards were clearing the main building earlier than usual, and patrols were more frequent. Victoria knew she had to act quickly.


    Taking a deep breath, she decided to take the risk. "I know about the secret passage in this room," she said, her voice steady but quiet.


    The room fell silent. The couple froze, their eyes narrowing as they studied her intently. The air grew heavy with tension.

 Chapter 1 - 1: Transmigrated, and SSS Portal Skill

    William tugged his worn backpack higher on his shoulder, his gaze fixed on the cracked pavement beneath his feet. The usual jeers and snickers followed him like a shadow. "Hey, Willy, did you remember to bring your blankie today?" Kevin, the school''s star quarterback and resident bully, sneered, his cronies erupting in laughter.


    William ignored them, his jaw clenched tight. He was used to it. Being the skinny, quiet kid with a scholarship to a prestigious academy made him a prime target. William just had to keep his head down, get through the day, and lose himself in the world of online RPGs and fantasy novels back in his tiny apartment.


    He slipped into his usual seat at the back of the classroom, the worn copy of "The Chronicles of Aethel" already open on his desk. Aethel ¨C a world of magic, mythical creatures, and ancient legends. It was William''s escape, a world where he could imagine himself as a powerful hero, not the invisible nobody he was here.


    Mr. Thompson, their hulking gym teacher with a booming voice and a permanent whistle around his neck, slammed the classroom door open, effectively silencing the pre-class chatter. "Alright, listen up, you bunch of slackers!" he roared. "Pop quiz on the history of basketball! And no cheating!"


    A collective groan rippled through the room. Even Kevin looked dismayed. William, however, felt a flicker of hope. This was one quiz he could actually ace.


    But fate, it seemed, had other plans.


    A low hum, like a thousand bees buzzing in unison, suddenly filled the air. The fluorescent lights flickered ominously, casting long, dancing shadows across the room. A tremor ran through the floor, sending textbooks tumbling from desks.


    "What the¡­?" Mr. Thompson''s voice was cut short as a gaping rift, swirling with iridescent colors, tore open in the middle of the classroom. It pulsed with an otherworldly energy, drawing all eyes towards its mesmerizing depths.


    Panic erupted. Screams filled the air as students scrambled away from the growing rift, desks and chairs clattering to the floor. Even Kevin, his face pale with fear, was frozen in place, his usual bravado forgotten.


    William, however, felt a strange pull towards the rift, a sense of anticipation he couldn''t explain. It was as if something deep within him recognized this strange phenomenon, beckoning him closer. He took a hesitant step forward, curiosity overcoming his fear.


    Before anyone could react, a surge of energy erupted from the rift, engulfing the entire classroom in a blinding light. William felt a tugging sensation, a feeling of weightlessness, and then¡­ nothing.


    He awoke to the scent of pine needles and damp earth. Groaning, William sat up, his head pounding. The classroom, the rift, the panicked screams ¨C it all felt like a distant, fever dream.


    He was in a forest, sunlight filtering through the dense canopy of leaves above. Towering trees, unlike any William had ever seen, stretched towards the sky. The air was crisp and clean, with a faint, sweet fragrance that he couldn''t place. S~ea??h the ¦ÇovelFire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    William wasn''t alone. Scattered around him were his classmates, groaning and disoriented. Even Mr. Thompson was there, his whistle dangling limply from his neck, his usually booming voice reduced to a bewildered mumble.


    "Where¡­ where are we?" A girl''s voice trembled with fear.


    "What just happened?" another student cried.


    William scrambled to his feet, his gaze sweeping across the unfamiliar surroundings. A sense of wonder mixed with apprehension filled him. This wasn''t Earth. This was¡­ different.


    As William took in the alien landscape, a strange sensation tingled through his body. It started as a warmth in his chest, spreading outwards like a wave, until it settled in his mind, leaving behind a sense of clarity and¡­ knowledge.


    He closed his eyes, focusing on the sensation. Images flashed through his mind ¨C a swirling vortex of colors, a sense of immense power, and then¡­ words.


    "SSS-Rank Skill: Portal ¨C Activated."


    A gasp escaped William''s lips. The words echoed in his mind, their meaning slowly sinking in. He had a skill. An SSS-Rank skill. A portal skill.


    A wave of dizziness washed over William, and he stumbled back against a tree trunk, his hand instinctively reaching for support. He closed his eyes, willing the nausea to subside. When he opened them again, a translucent blue screen hovered in front of him, filled with familiar RPG-like stats.


    Name: William Velmont


    Level: 1


    Class: None


    Attributes:


    Strength: 10


    Agility: 12


    Stamina: 9


    Intelligence: 15


    Mana: 10


    Skills:


    Chrono Shift (SSS-Rank): Allows the user to open a portal to a specific point in the past. (Details Locked)


    William stared at the screen, his heart pounding. It was real. This wasn''t a game. He actually had a system, just like in those webnovels he devoured. But what did "Details Locked" mean? And how was he supposed to use this Chrono Shift ability?


    "Whoa, check this out!" a voice exclaimed.


    William turned to see Sarah, usually one of the quieter students, staring at a similar blue screen in front of her with wide eyes. "I have a system too! It says I''m a ''Celestial Archer'' and I have an ''A-Rank Arrow of Light'' skill!"


    Others around them gasped, their initial fear giving way to a mixture of awe and excitement. It seemed everyone had a system, and they were impressive. Kevin, his arrogance somewhat restored, was boasting about his "S-Rank Iron Skin" skill, while Mr. Thompson, looking utterly bewildered, kept muttering about "divine intervention" and "the end times."


    "I''ve got ''B-Rank Sonic Boom''! " shouted a student William vaguely recognized from his history class.


    "Mine''s ''A-Rank Elemental Control''! I wonder if I can shoot fireballs," another student exclaimed, his eyes gleaming with excitement.


    William, however, couldn''t shake the feeling that his SSS-Rank skill was something unique, something far more powerful than anything his classmates possessed. He just needed to figure out how to unlock its full potential.


    As the students were busy comparing their newfound abilities, a rustling in the undergrowth caught their attention. A group of men emerged from the trees, clad in gleaming plate armor, their swords glinting in the sunlight. Behind them walked an elderly man in a flowing grey robe, his eyes glowing with an ethereal light.


    "Greetings," the old man said, his voice surprisingly strong despite his age. "I am Maester Elric, and these are the Royal Guards of Aerilon. We have been expecting you."


    A wave of murmurs rippled through the students. Expecting them? What did that mean?


    Mr. Thompson, ever the protector (and perhaps seeking a sense of control in this chaotic situation), stepped forward. "Expecting us? Where are we? And why were we brought here?" he boomed, his voice regaining some of its usual authority.


    Maester Elric smiled, his eyes twinkling. "You are in Aethel, brave souls. And you have been summoned here for a purpose. A great and noble purpose. You are the heroes destined to save our world."


    He gestured towards the towering trees, beyond which a majestic stone temple could be seen, its steps leading towards the heavens. "Come with me to the Temple of Ascendancy. There, I will explain everything."

 Chapter 2 - 2: Weak-willed, Cowardly

    The Temple of Ascendancy was even more impressive up close. Towering pillars of white marble reached towards the sky, intricate carvings depicting mythical creatures and ancient battles adorning their surfaces. A sense of age and power emanated from the weathered stone, whispering tales of a time long past.


    As William and his classmates ascended the seemingly endless staircase, whispers followed him.


    "Hey, Willy, what kind of lame skill did you get? Probably something like ''F-Rank Enhanced Pencil Sharpening''," Kevin sneered, his cronies snickering behind him.


    "Yeah, William, let''s hear it," another student chimed in. "Don''t be shy. We''re all friends here, right?"


    William clenched his fists, his gaze fixed on the steps ahead. He wasn''t about to reveal his SSS-Rank skill to these people, not after years of their relentless mockery.


    "Leave him alone," Sarah said, her voice surprisingly firm. "It''s none of your business."


    Kevin rolled his eyes. "Oh, look, Willy''s got himself a girlfriend. How cute."


    William ignored them, his jaw set. He would show them. He would prove them all wrong.


    The temple doors swung open, revealing a vast circular chamber bathed in soft light. Intricate mosaics adorned the walls, depicting scenes of heroes battling monstrous creatures and wielding incredible powers. In the center of the chamber stood a raised platform, where Maester Elric awaited them.


    "Welcome, heroes," he said, his voice echoing through the chamber. "This is the Temple of Ascendancy, a place of ancient power and knowledge. Here, you will learn your true purpose."


    He gestured towards the mosaics. "For centuries, our world has been at peace. But that peace is now threatened. The barriers between realms are weakening, allowing creatures of darkness to seep into our world. We call them the Corrupted ¨C beings twisted by a malevolent force, driven by an insatiable hunger for destruction."


    A chill ran down William''s spine. He remembered the swirling rift in his classroom, the otherworldly energy that had pulled them into this world. Was that a portal opened by these Corrupted?


    "We believe," Maester Elric continued, "that a powerful entity, known only as the Shadow Lord, is behind this growing darkness. He seeks to plunge Aethel into chaos and claim it for his own."


    "And we''re supposed to stop him?" Kevin scoffed. "With our measly skills? You''ve got to be kidding me."


    Maester Elric smiled. "Your skills are far from measly, young man. They are a gift, a potential for greatness. You have been chosen for a reason. Each of you possesses unique abilities that, when honed and mastered, can turn the tide of this war."


    He stepped closer, his eyes filled with a fiery intensity. "You are the heroes of prophecy, destined to rise against the darkness and restore balance to our world. But you are not yet ready. You must train, you must grow stronger, you must learn to harness the full potential of your powers."


    "And how are we supposed to do that?" a student asked.


    "We will guide you," Maester Elric said. "We will provide you with the knowledge, the resources, and the training you need to fulfill your destiny. But the journey will be arduous. You will face challenges, you will encounter dangers, and you will be tested in ways you cannot imagine."


    He looked at each of them, his gaze lingering on William. "But I have faith in you. I believe that you have the strength, the courage, and the determination to overcome any obstacle. The fate of Aethel rests in your hands."


    A heavy silence filled the chamber. The weight of responsibility settled upon William''s shoulders, a stark contrast to the insignificance he felt back on Earth. He was no longer just William, the skinny kid with his nose in a book. He was William, the hero, the wielder of an SSS-Rank skill, the one who could change the course of history.


    *


    The Temple of Ascendancy was more than just a place of worship; it was a sprawling complex with chambers dedicated to healing, meditation, and rest. Maester Elric led the exhausted students to a wing filled with simple but comfortable rooms, each equipped with a bed, a washbasin, and a small window overlooking the surrounding forest.


    William settled onto the surprisingly soft mattress, his mind racing. The weight of Elric''s words pressed down on him. Heroes of prophecy? Destined to fight a Shadow Lord? It all felt like a story ripped from the pages of his favorite novels, yet here he was, living it. S§×arch* The Nov§×l?ire.n(e)t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    He glanced at the translucent blue screen that still hovered in his vision. Chrono Shift... what secrets did it hold? Could he even learn to control such a powerful ability? And was it truly the right decision to join this fight? He had always been more comfortable in the world of books and games, not on a real battlefield facing actual monsters.


    Doubt gnawed at him. Maybe he wasn''t cut out for this hero business. Maybe he should just find a way back to Earth, back to his quiet, ordinary life.


    The next morning, as the other students buzzed with excitement, eager to begin their training, William sought out Maester Elric. He found the old mage in a small garden behind the temple, tending to a patch of glowing herbs.


    "Maester Elric," William began, his voice hesitant, "I need to speak with you."


    Elric turned, his brow furrowed. "What is it, young man? We haven''t much time. Your training begins shortly."


    William took a deep breath. "I... I don''t think I can do this. I''m not a hero. I''m not strong like the others."


    Elric''s expression hardened. "What nonsense is this? You were summoned here for a purpose. You cannot simply shirk your responsibilities."


    "But I''m not¡ª"


    "Silence!" Elric thundered. "I''ve seen your kind before. Weak-willed, cowardly. You think yourself above this fight? You think yourself better than those who risk their lives to protect this world?"


    William flinched, his face burning with shame. "No, I just¡ª"


    "Enough!" Elric cut him off. "We have more heroes than we anticipated. We don''t need another burden. You are hereby expelled from the Hero Squad. Begone!"


    He thrust a small purse into William''s hand. "This should be enough to get you started. Now leave, and don''t let the door hit you on the way out."


    Before William could protest, Elric raised his hand, and a surge of energy enveloped him. The world spun, the temple garden blurring into a kaleidoscope of colors. Then, everything went black.


    When William regained consciousness, he was lying in a muddy ditch beside a dirt road. The purse, thankfully, was still clutched in his hand. He opened it and peered inside. A few gold coins glinted in the dim light.


    He had been discarded, banished, deemed unworthy. Elric''s words echoed in his mind, sharp and cruel. Weak-willed. Cowardly.


    Anger mixed with a bitter sense of betrayal. He had been summoned to this world, given this incredible power, only to be cast aside like a broken tool.


    He looked around at the unfamiliar landscape, a sense of loneliness washing over him. He was alone, adrift in a strange world, with nothing but a few coins and an SSS-Rank skill he didn''t understand.

 Chapter 3 - 3: Finding Solace

    The dirt road wound through the dense forest, the muddy tracks offering little comfort to William''s already battered spirit. He trudged onward, the weight of his expulsion and Elric''s harsh words a heavy burden on his shoulders. The forest around him was alive with the sounds of rustling leaves and chirping insects, a symphony of nature that did little to soothe his troubled mind.


    He had no destination, no plan. Just a desperate need to put distance between himself and the Temple of Ascendancy, the place that had promised him a destiny only to snatch it away. He didn''t even have his backpack anymore, lost somewhere during the chaotic teleportation.


    The sun began to dip below the horizon, casting long shadows that danced ominously among the trees. A chill wind whipped through the branches, sending a shiver down William''s spine. He needed to find shelter, and soon.


    A low growl echoed through the trees, sending a jolt of fear through him. He stopped, his senses on high alert. The growl came again, closer this time, followed by the sound of rustling leaves.


    Three pairs of glowing eyes pierced the gathering darkness. Wolves. Their lean bodies emerged from the undergrowth, their fangs bared in a silent snarl.


    William''s heart pounded in his chest. He had never faced a wild animal before, let alone a pack of wolves. Panic seized him, his mind flashing back to the Corrupted creatures Elric had described. Were these wolves corrupted too?


    The wolves lunged. William stumbled backward, narrowly dodging their snapping jaws. He raised his arms in a feeble attempt to shield himself, fear making his limbs heavy and uncoordinated.


    He turned to run, but it was too late. Sharp teeth sank into his right forearm, tearing through his flesh. He cried out in pain, stumbling and falling to the muddy ground.


    Just as he braced himself for another attack, a blur of motion cut through the air. A figure emerged from the trees, a sword flashing in the fading light. With a series of swift, precise strikes, the figure dispatched the wolves, their lifeless bodies slumping to the ground.


    William looked up at his savior. It was a man, tall and powerfully built, with a thick black beard that reached his chest and tanned skin that spoke of a life spent outdoors. He wore a leather jerkin and carried a long sword strapped to his back, its hilt intricately carved with images of snarling beasts.


    "Are you alright, lad?" the man asked, his voice gruff but kind.


    William nodded, cradling his bleeding arm. "Thank you," he managed to say, his voice trembling.


    The man knelt beside him, examining the wound. "Nasty bite. We need to get you back to the village."


    He helped William to his feet, supporting him as they walked. "I''m Gorn, a hunter from Willow Creek," the man said. "What''s your name?"


    "William," he replied, grateful for the man''s assistance.


    They walked in silence for a while, the only sound the crunching of leaves beneath their feet. As they approached the village, William saw flickering lights through the trees. A sense of relief washed over him. He was safe, for now.


    Willow Creek was a small village, a cluster of wooden houses nestled amongst the trees. As they entered the village square, curious eyes followed them.


    "Who''s that with Gorn?" a woman whispered, her hand shielding her mouth.


    "Never seen him before," an old man muttered, leaning on his staff.


    "He looks hurt," a young girl said, her eyes wide with concern.


    Gorn led William to his home, a cozy cottage with a thatched roof and a small garden. A woman with kind eyes and a warm smile greeted them at the door.


    "This is my wife, Elara," Gorn said. "And this is our daughter, Maya."


    Maya was a young woman, about William''s age, with long, flowing black hair and bright, curious eyes. She blushed slightly as she met William''s gaze.


    Elara quickly took charge, leading William to a chair by the fireplace. She gently cleaned his wound, her touch surprisingly gentle despite her calloused hands. Maya fetched bandages and herbs, her movements quick and efficient.


    As they tended to his wound, William felt a warmth spread through him, a sense of belonging he hadn''t felt in a long time. These people, these strangers, had welcomed him into their home without hesitation, offering him kindness and care.


    He may have been rejected by the Hero Squad, but he had found a new kind of acceptance here in Willow Creek.


    Once Elara had finished bandaging William''s arm, she placed a steaming bowl of stew in front of him. "Eat, child," she insisted. "You need your strength." sea??h th§× N?vel(F)ire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    William gratefully accepted the food, his stomach growling in protest. He hadn''t realized how hungry he was until the aroma of the hearty stew filled his senses.


    Gorn settled into a chair opposite him, his gaze curious. "So, William," he began, "where are you from? We don''t get many travelers this far out."


    William hesitated, unsure how much to reveal. He couldn''t tell them the truth about being summoned from another world. He needed a believable story, something that would explain his presence without raising suspicion.


    "I... I''m from a noble family," he said, choosing his words carefully. "But I was... expelled."


    He saw a flicker of surprise in Gorn''s eyes, then a hint of understanding. Perhaps William''s refined features and clean-cut appearance lent credence to his story.


    "Expelled?" Maya asked, her voice soft. "What did you do?"


    William forced a wry smile. "Let''s just say I wasn''t living up to their expectations."


    He didn''t elaborate, and thankfully, they didn''t press him for details. Gorn nodded slowly, his expression thoughtful.


    "Well, you''re welcome to stay here as long as you need," he said. "Willow Creek is a peaceful village, and we always have room for those in need."


    William''s heart swelled with gratitude. "Thank you," he said sincerely. "I appreciate your kindness more than you know."


    Elara smiled warmly. "You''re safe here, William. Rest and recover."

 Chapter 4 - 4: Caught in a Lie

    The days that followed were a blur of healing and hesitant introductions. William''s wound, thanks to Elara''s expert care and the potent herbs Maya gathered, healed quickly. He spent his time exploring the small village of Willow Creek, learning the rhythms of their daily life.


    He helped Gorn chop firewood, his initial clumsiness with the axe slowly giving way to a newfound strength. He assisted Elara in the garden, marveling at the strange and vibrant plants that grew in Aethel''s fertile soil. He even tried his hand at fishing in the nearby stream, though his attempts were met with more amusement than success.


    Maya, true to her shy nature, mostly kept her distance. She would offer him a fleeting smile or a quick hello, but then disappear into the forest to tend to her own tasks, leaving William with a lingering sense of curiosity and a touch of disappointment.


    Gorn, on the other hand, seemed to take a liking to William. He saw a spark of determination in the young man''s eyes, a resilience that reminded him of himself. One afternoon, as they were sparring with wooden practice swords, Gorn turned to William with a proposition.


    "You''re surprisingly quick, William," he said, wiping sweat from his brow. "Have you had any real sword training before?"


    William, eager to impress and perhaps a bit too proud, blurted out, "My father taught me a little." It was a complete fabrication, of course. His father, a mild-mannered accountant, wouldn''t know the sharp end of a sword from a butter knife.


    Gorn''s eyes lit up. "A nobleman''s training, eh? It shows. But there''s a difference between parlor tricks and true combat." He gestured towards a clearing behind the cottage. "Come, I''ll show you a few things." S§×ar?h the n?vel_Fire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    William''s heart sank. He had painted himself into a corner. As they entered the clearing, Gorn tossed him a wooden sword. William fumbled with it, his grip awkward and unsure.


    "Show me your stance," Gorn instructed.


    William tried to remember the sword-fighting scenes from his favorite movies, striking a pose that he hoped looked somewhat convincing. Gorn, however, saw right through him.


    "That''s... interesting," Gorn said, his voice laced with amusement. "But it wouldn''t last a second against a real opponent."


    He stepped closer, adjusting William''s grip and posture. "Hold it like this. Feet shoulder-width apart, knees slightly bent. Always be ready to move, to react."


    William tried to follow Gorn''s instructions, but his movements were stiff and clumsy. He felt like a scarecrow trying to dance.


    Gorn sighed. "William," he said, his voice gentle but firm, "there''s no shame in not knowing something. But there is shame in lying about it."


    William''s face flushed with embarrassment. "I... I''m sorry, Gorn," he stammered. "I just wanted to..."


    "Impress me?" Gorn finished his sentence. "There''s no need for that, lad. I respect honesty more than any feigned skill."


    He clapped William on the shoulder. "Now, let''s start from the beginning. Forget what you think you know, and I''ll teach you the true way of the sword."


    Relieved and humbled, William nodded eagerly. He had been caught in his lie, but it had opened the door to genuine learning. And as Gorn patiently guided him through the basic stances and strikes, William felt a newfound respect for the art of swordsmanship, and for the man who was willing to teach him.


    *


    The afternoon sun beat down on the clearing as Gorn put William through his paces. "Again!" he barked, as William stumbled through a clumsy lunge. "Footwork! You''re moving like an ox with two left feet!"


    William gritted his teeth, sweat stinging his eyes. His muscles burned, his lungs screamed for air, and his pride was taking a serious beating. "How am I supposed to learn this in one afternoon?" he gasped, barely managing to parry Gorn''s next strike.


    "By doing it again, and again, and again!" Gorn roared back. "A warrior doesn''t give up after the first stumble!"


    He continued to press William, correcting his grip, his stance, his every move. William, though exhausted and frustrated, found a stubborn determination rising within him. He wouldn''t quit. He wouldn''t let Gorn down.


    As the hours passed, something remarkable began to happen. William''s movements, though still rough, became more fluid, more precise. His reflexes sharpened, his strikes gained power. He started anticipating Gorn''s attacks, even managing to land a few blows of his own.


    Gorn''s eyes widened in surprise. "Where did that come from?" he exclaimed, barely parrying a surprisingly swift strike from William. "You''re a natural, lad!"


    William grinned, a surge of exhilaration coursing through him. He hadn''t realized how much his attributes had been enhanced by the summoning. His agility, once only useful for climbing trees and escaping bullies, was now a real asset in combat.


    "Again!" William shouted, his voice filled with newfound confidence.


    They continued to spar, their movements a blur of wood and sweat. By the time the sun began to set, William was exhausted but triumphant. He had faced a challenge, pushed himself beyond his limits, and discovered a hidden talent.


    Gorn clapped him on the back, a broad smile on his face. "Well done, lad! You''ve got the makings of a fine warrior." He paused, his expression turning serious. "William, I have a proposition for you."


    William looked at him expectantly.


    "Willow Creek needs a new hunter," Gorn said. "Someone to protect the village from the dangers of the forest. Someone with courage and skill." He met William''s gaze. "Would you be interested?"


    A wave of warmth washed over William. He had been cast out, rejected, deemed unworthy. But here, in this small village, he had found acceptance, a purpose, a chance to prove himself.


    "Yes, Gorn," he said, his voice filled with gratitude and determination. "I would be honored."


    The walk back to the cottage was filled with a comfortable silence. William, exhausted but invigorated, felt a newfound respect for Gorn, not just as a warrior but as a mentor. He had been harsh but fair, pushing William to his limits while offering guidance and encouragement.


    As they approached the village, the scent of woodsmoke and roasting meat filled the air, a comforting welcome after the long afternoon. William''s stomach rumbled in anticipation of Elara''s hearty cooking.


    Unbeknownst to them, a pair of eyes watched them from the shadows of the forest. A figure, cloaked in darkness, stood silently among the trees, its gaze fixed on William. A low whisper, like the rustling of leaves, escaped its lips.


    "A hero is here..."


    The figure melted back into the darkness, leaving no trace of its presence. William and Gorn, oblivious to the unseen observer, continued their journey home, unaware of the shadows that were gathering around them.

 Chapter 5 - 5: First Hunt with Gorn

    The next morning, William woke to the sound of roosters crowing and the smell of sizzling bacon. He felt a thrill of anticipation. Today was his first day as a hunter. He quickly dressed and joined Gorn and Elara for a hearty breakfast of eggs, bacon, and freshly baked bread.


    "Ready for your first hunt, lad?" Gorn asked, a twinkle in his eye.


    William nodded eagerly, trying to mask his nervousness. He had practiced with the bow and arrow, but he had never actually hunted a live animal before.


    "Don''t worry," Elara said, sensing his apprehension. "Gorn will guide you. You''ll do fine."


    After breakfast, they gathered their gear. Gorn handed William a sturdy bow and a quiver filled with arrows. He also gave him a hunting knife, its blade gleaming sharply in the morning light.


    "Remember what I taught you," Gorn said. "Stay alert, be patient, and respect the creatures of the forest."


    William followed Gorn out of the cottage, the crisp morning air invigorating his senses. A few villagers, already busy with their daily chores, waved to them as they passed. A young boy, no older than ten, looked at William with wide eyes, a hint of hero-worship in his gaze. William couldn''t help but smile.


    The forest welcomed them with its familiar embrace. Sunlight filtered through the canopy of leaves, dappling the forest floor in shades of green and gold. Gorn led the way, his senses alert, his eyes scanning the ground for any sign of their prey.


    "Look here," Gorn said, pointing to a set of tracks in the soft earth. "See how these prints are heart-shaped, with two toes? That''s a deer. And judging by the depth of the tracks, it''s a buck, and a large one at that."


    He pointed to another set of prints, smaller and more rounded. "These are rabbit tracks. Plenty of them around, but we''re after bigger game today."


    William followed closely, trying to absorb every detail. He had always been a quick learner, and he was determined to prove himself worthy of Gorn''s trust.


    "The deer are plentiful this time of year," Gorn explained. "They come to the valley to graze on the tender grasses. But they''re also wary, with keen senses. We''ll need to be stealthy if we want to get close."


    He led William deeper into the forest, following the deer tracks with the practiced ease of a seasoned hunter. William felt a thrill of excitement mixed with a healthy dose of apprehension.


    As they walked, William''s curiosity bubbled to the surface. "Gorn," he began, trying to sound casual, "I''ve heard stories about people gaining incredible powers in this world. Is it true that everyone has a... a system, like the one you showed me?"


    Gorn nodded, his eyes twinkling with amusement. "Ah, so you''ve heard of the System. Aye, lad, it''s as real as the air we breathe. Everyone in Aethel has one, though its secrets are not fully understood."


    William pressed on, "And people gain levels by doing... different things? Like fighting monsters, or even just practicing skills?"


    "That''s right," Gorn confirmed. "The more you push yourself, the stronger you become. It''s the way of our world."


    William paused, feigning a thoughtful expression. "So, someone who spends all their time reading books... could they gain levels that way too?" S~ea??h the N??eFire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Gorn chuckled. "Indeed they could. Though they might not be much use in a fight." He winked at William. "Not everyone is cut out to be a warrior, eh?"


    William felt a surge of excitement. His SSS-Rank skill, Chrono Shift... could he use it to travel to the past, learn from ancient masters, and gain levels that way? The possibilities seemed endless.


    He continued to pepper Gorn with questions, carefully gauging his reactions. He learned about the different classes people could acquire, the varying levels of skills, and the dangers of the Corrupted creatures that roamed the land.


    Gorn, sensing William''s thirst for knowledge, patiently answered his questions, though he occasionally shot him a curious glance. William knew he had to be careful not to reveal too much, not to arouse suspicion. He was still an outsider, a stranger in this world, and he couldn''t afford to jeopardize the trust he had earned.


    They walked for what seemed like hours, the sun climbing higher in the sky. Finally, Gorn stopped, his hand raised in a signal for William to remain silent. He pointed towards a clearing ahead, where a small stream meandered through the trees. A deer, its coat the color of autumn leaves, grazed peacefully by the water''s edge.


    "Remember what I taught you," Gorn whispered, handing William an arrow. "Draw back slowly, aim for the heart, and release with a steady hand."


    William''s heart pounded in his chest. This was it. His first hunt. He nocked the arrow, his fingers trembling slightly. He took a deep breath, trying to steady his nerves. He drew back the bowstring, his muscles straining with the effort. He focused on the deer, its movements, its vulnerability.


    Gorn placed a steadying hand on William''s shoulder. "Easy now, lad. Focus. You can do this."


    William held his breath, his gaze fixed on the deer. He released the arrow. It flew through the air, a silent whisper of death. The deer startled, but it was too late. The arrow found its mark, piercing the animal''s heart. The deer stumbled, its legs collapsing beneath it. It let out a soft cry, then lay still.


    William lowered the bow, his body trembling with a mixture of adrenaline and awe. He had done it. He had taken a life.


    Gorn clapped him on the back. "Well done, lad! A clean shot. You''ve got a hunter''s eye."


    They approached the deer, its body still warm. Gorn showed William how to field dress the animal, his movements quick and efficient. William felt a pang of sadness for the creature, but he knew this was the way of life in Aethel. He had taken a life to sustain his own.


    As they worked, a sudden scream pierced the peaceful silence of the forest. It was a high-pitched wail, filled with terror and desperation.


    "HELP! SOMEONE, PLEASE!"


    Gorn froze, his eyes widening in alarm. "That came from the north," he said, his voice grim. "Something''s wrong."


    William felt a chill run down his spine. The scream had been filled with a raw fear. Was it a villager in trouble? Or something far more sinister?

 Chapter 6 - 6: Two Levels, and Strange Movements Around the Village

    Gorn and William exchanged a look, a silent understanding passing between them. They left the deer carcass behind, a minor concern compared to the potential danger. With weapons drawn, they sprinted towards the source of the scream, their footsteps pounding a frantic rhythm on the forest floor.


    They burst into a small clearing, the scene before them instantly raising their hackles. A middle-aged woman, Elara''s friend Martha, was cowering by the riverbank, her clothes basket overturned, tears streaming down her face. Surrounding her were four grotesque goblins, their leathery green skin stretched taut over bony frames, their yellowed fangs bared in vicious grins.


    One of the goblins lunged at Martha, its rusty dagger raised high. Gorn roared, charging forward with the force of a raging bear. His sword flashed, a blur of steel that cleaved through the goblin''s arm, sending the creature reeling back with a shriek of pain.


    William, adrenaline surging through him, drew his own sword. He had never faced a real opponent before, but the sight of the woman in danger ignited a fierce protectiveness within him. He charged into the fray, his sword a clumsy but determined extension of his will.


    He swung at the closest goblin, his blade connecting with a sickening thud. The creature staggered back, surprised by the unexpected attack. William pressed his advantage, his movements fueled by a desperate urgency. He thrust, parried, and dodged, his sword a whirlwind of steel.


    He felt a sharp pain in his side as a goblin''s claw raked across his ribs, but he ignored it, his focus solely on protecting Martha. He lunged again, his sword finding its mark, plunging deep into the goblin''s chest. The creature let out a guttural gasp, its eyes widening in disbelief before collapsing to the ground.


    A surge of power coursed through William, a warm sensation spreading through his limbs. A translucent blue screen flashed in his vision.


    [You have slain a Goblin!]


    [You have gained 100 EXP!]


    [Level Up!]


    [Level Up!] S§×arch* The ¦Çov§×lFire .net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    He had gained two levels! The realization fueled his determination. He spun around, his sword finding another goblin, its blade slicing through its neck. The creature crumpled to the ground, its life extinguished.


    Gorn, meanwhile, had dispatched the remaining two goblins with brutal efficiency. The clearing fell silent.


    Martha, trembling but unharmed, rushed towards Gorn and William, her eyes filled with gratitude. "Thank you, thank you both!" she cried, clutching their arms. "I thought I was done for!"


    She explained, her voice still shaky, that she had come to the river to wash clothes when the goblins ambushed her. "They came out of nowhere," she shuddered. "I never even saw them until they were upon me."


    Gorn reassured her, his voice calm and steady. "It''s alright, Martha. You''re safe now. We''ll make sure you get back to the village unharmed."


    They returned to the deer carcass, hoisting it onto Gorn''s broad shoulders. With Martha safely between them, they made their way back to Willow Creek, the forest no longer seeming so peaceful and welcoming.


    As they made their way back through the forest, William paused, a frown creasing his brow. "Gorn," he said, "can I check my status?"


    Gorn nodded, understanding the young man''s curiosity. William closed his eyes, focusing on the familiar blue screen.


    Name: William Velmont


    Level: 3


    Class: None


    Attributes:


    Strength: 12


    Agility: 14


    Stamina: 10


    Intelligence: 16


    Mana: 11


    Skills:


    Chrono Shift (SSS-Rank): Allows the user to open a portal to a specific point in the past. (Details Unlocked)


    He had gained two levels from defeating the goblins, and his attributes had increased significantly. Strength and agility had each gone up by two points, while stamina, intelligence, and mana had increased by one. He felt a surge of satisfaction. He was growing stronger, becoming more capable.


    Once they reached Willow Creek and ensured Martha was safely back in her home, Gorn pulled William aside, his expression serious. "William," he said, "goblins this close to the village... it''s not right. They usually keep to the deeper parts of the forest."


    He paused, his gaze intense. "Something''s happening, lad. Something we don''t understand."


    "What do you mean, Gorn?" William asked, a knot of worry tightening in his stomach. "Is Willow Creek in danger?"


    Gorn nodded grimly. "This area has always been relatively safe. We have our share of wild beasts, but nothing like goblins. They''re cunning, vicious creatures, and they rarely venture this close to human settlements unless..." He trailed off, his eyes filled with a troubled look.


    "Unless what?" William pressed, his anxiety growing.


    "Unless something is driving them," Gorn finished, his voice low. "Something dark and dangerous." He clapped William on the shoulder. "I need to speak with the other hunters, see if anyone else has noticed anything unusual." He handed William the deer carcass. "Take this back to Elara. She''ll know what to do with it."


    William nodded, his mind awhirl with worry. He watched as Gorn strode purposefully towards the village square, his broad shoulders radiating a sense of urgency.


    He hefted the deer onto his shoulders and headed back to Gorn''s cottage, the weight of the carcass a physical manifestation of the burden settling on his heart.


    Elara greeted him with a warm smile, but her expression quickly turned to concern when she saw the blood staining his tunic and the worry etched on his face. "William, what happened? Where''s Gorn?"


    He recounted the events of the morning, the goblin attack, Gorn''s grim pronouncements, and the unsettling feeling that something was amiss in the usually peaceful forest. Elara listened intently, her brow furrowed in thought.


    "Goblins..." she murmured, shaking her head. "That''s troubling indeed."


    But she quickly composed herself, her inherent practicality taking over.


    "Come now, William," she said with a reassuring smile. "Let''s get this deer cleaned and put away. Worrying won''t solve anything, and you need to eat."


    She bustled around the kitchen, her movements efficient and practiced as she helped William skin and butcher the deer. The aroma of roasting meat soon filled the cottage, a comforting scent that helped to ease the tension that had settled over them.


    After a hearty meal, William felt his weariness creeping in. The adrenaline of the hunt and the goblin encounter had faded, leaving him drained and emotionally spent. He bid Elara goodnight and retreated to his small room, the soft bed beckoning him with promises of restful sleep.


    Hours later, he was awakened by the creak of the front door and the murmur of hushed voices. He lay still, his senses alert, as Gorn and Elara spoke in the main room.


    "The others are worried, Elara," Gorn said, his voice heavy with concern. "Old Man Hemlock swore he saw strange tracks near the west field, and young Elspeth claims to have heard growls in the night. Even Torak, who lives on the edge of the Darkwood, says his dogs have been acting strangely."


    "What does it mean, Gorn?" Elara whispered, her voice filled with apprehension.


    "I don''t know," Gorn admitted. "But it''s not natural. Something is stirring in the forest, something dark and dangerous."


    "We''ll organize a search party at first light," Gorn continued, his voice firming with resolve. "We need to find out what we''re dealing with before it''s too late."


    William listened, his heart pounding. Something was definitely wrong in Willow Creek. But what could he do? He was just an outcast, a discarded hero with a mysterious power he barely understood.

 Chapter 7 - 7: Activating the SSS Skill

    Sleep offered no escape.


    Instead of oblivion, William''s mind was plunged into a vortex of images and sensations. A blood-soaked battlefield. The stench of death and decay. Towering figures, more beast than man, clashed in brutal melee. Their roars echoed across the ravaged landscape.


    Claws ripped through flesh, fangs tore at throats. Raw, untamed magic crackled in the air, warping the very fabric of reality. A hulking brute with the head of a wolf tore through a line of defenders, its every attack a symphony of violence.


    William watched in horror, unable to move, unable to scream. He was trapped in a nightmare he couldn''t escape.


    Then, the scene shifted. The battlefield dissolved, replaced by a towering city, its spires piercing the heavens. Shimmering crystals and obsidian formed its impossible structures. Ethereal beings, their forms fluid and ever-changing, flitted through the streets.


    Awe and dread warred within him. Aethel held secrets beyond his comprehension. He was caught in its web.


    He woke with a gasp, his heart pounding. The dream clung to him, vivid and disturbing.


    "William? Are you alright?" Elara''s concerned voice broke through the lingering darkness of the dream. He hadn''t realized he was crying out in his sleep.


    He blinked, his eyes adjusting to the dim light filtering through the window. Elara stood beside his bed, a worried frown creasing her brow. "You were tossing and turning," she said softly. "And you were sweating. Bad dreams?"


    William nodded, pushing himself up to a sitting position. "Just a strange dream," he murmured, trying to downplay the lingering fear that gripped him.


    "Well, it''s a new day," Elara said with a reassuring smile. "Come, breakfast is ready."


    The smell of freshly baked bread and sizzling bacon pulled William from the unsettling remnants of his dream. He joined Gorn and Elara at the table, forcing a smile as Elara placed a steaming plate of breakfast in front of him.


    "I spoke with the others this morning," Gorn announced, a grim edge to his voice. "There have been more sightings. Strange tracks, unsettling noises... something''s definitely not right."


    William''s heart pounded. "Are you going to investigate?"


    "We have to," Gorn said, his jaw set with determination. "We''re forming a search party to scout the surrounding forest."


    "Can I come?" William blurted out, surprising even himself.


    Gorn looked at him, his expression softening slightly. "I appreciate the offer, lad, but this is dangerous work. You''re still recovering."


    "But I want to help," William insisted. "I might be able to..." He trailed off, realizing he couldn''t reveal the true extent of his abilities.


    Gorn shook his head. "You''ve done enough already, William. You saved Martha''s life. That''s more than most would have done."


    William fell silent, disappointment gnawing at him. He watched as Gorn and a group of seasoned hunters gathered their weapons and ventured into the depths of the forest, leaving him behind with a growing sense of helplessness.


    He spent the rest of the morning lost in thought, wandering through the village with a heavy heart. He exchanged a few words with some of the villagers, their faces etched with worry.


    "Heading out, William?" Old Man Hemlock asked, leaning heavily on his gnarled staff. His voice was a low croak, a stark contrast to Gorn''s booming tones.


    "Just for a walk," William replied, forcing a smile.


    "Be careful, young man," Hemlock warned, his eyes narrowed. "The forest is not safe these days. I saw those strange tracks near the west field, something I''ve never seen before. Unnatural, they were."


    "I heard about that, Hemlock," William said, keeping his voice calm. "Don''t worry, I''ll be careful. I''m just going to the hill near the village."


    Hemlock seemed reassured by William''s words and the mention of the familiar hill. He gave a slow nod, his gaze lingering on William for a moment longer than necessary.


    William made his way to the hill overlooking Willow Creek, a place where he often sought solace. He sat on a moss-covered rock, his gaze drifting towards the distant treeline, where Gorn and the others had disappeared.


    His thoughts drifted back to Earth, to his family, to his old life... He wondered if they missed him, if they worried about his whereabouts. A pang of guilt pierced his heart. He had been so eager to escape his ordinary life, to find adventure in a fantasy world. But now, faced with real danger and uncertainty, he longed for the comfort and familiarity of home.


    He closed his eyes, the image of his mother''s kind face and his father''s gentle smile flashing through his mind. He missed them dearly, missed the warmth of their love, missed the feeling of belonging.


    A tear escaped his eye, tracing a path down his cheek. He was alone, adrift in a strange world, with a power he barely understood and a destiny he didn''t want.


    He clenched his fists, a surge of anger rising within him. He had been cast aside, deemed unworthy, but he wouldn''t let that define him. He would prove them wrong. He would master his power, uncover the secrets of Aethel, and find his own place in this world.


    He focused on the translucent blue screen that hovered in his vision. Chrono Shift... what secrets did it hold? Could he really travel to the past? Could he witness the events of his dream, the brutal battlefield, the ethereal city?


    William concentrated on the skill, picturing the swirling vortex of his dream, the feeling of being pulled through time and space. A surge of energy pulsed through him, and the air in front of him shimmered and distorted. A swirling portal, a gateway to the unknown, opened before his eyes.


    William stared in awe, his heart pounding with a mixture of fear and excitement. He had done it. He had activated his SSS-Rank skill.


    The portal probably possessed dangers that William might not be able to survive against, but he wanted to get stronger, and deep down, there was something in his mind. S§×ar?h the Nov§×l?ire.n(e)t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    ''Could this portal lead me back home?'' he thought.


    Maybe it was his eagerness for power, or the thoughts about his family made him want to go through the portal, but he did.

 Chapter 8 - 8: Exploring the Ancient World, More Levels

    Stepping through the swirling portal, anticipation and trepidation warred within William. The world twisted and contorted, a dizzying kaleidoscope of colors and sensations. Then, just as suddenly, the disorientation vanished.


    Solid ground. The portal shimmered behind him like a mirage. William found himself in a dense, primeval forest, the air thick with the scent of damp earth and unfamiliar vegetation. Towering trees, their trunks thicker than any he had seen before, stretched towards the sky, their branches forming a dense canopy that filtered the sunlight into an emerald twilight.


    The same hill overlooking the future site of Willow Creek, yet utterly different. No village, no sign of human habitation. Only the untamed wilderness stretching as far as the eye could see. This was Aethel in its raw, primordial state, a land untouched by civilization.


    Wonder mixed with apprehension. A stranger in a strange land, a visitor from a future that hadn''t yet been written. William quickly checked his system status, a new sense of urgency gripping him.


    Name: William Velmont


    Level: 3


    Class: None


    Attributes:


    Strength: 12


    Agility: 14


    Stamina: 10


    Intelligence: 16


    Mana: 11


    Skills:


    Chrono Shift (SSS-Rank): Allows the user to open a portal to a specific point in the past. (Details Unlocked)


    [Time Remaining: 5 hours, 57 minutes] [You are still learning how to use your SSS skill, so you cannot remain in this realm forever. You have 6 hours before being pulled back to the initial location of the portal.]


    Six hours. Not much time. He had to make the most of it. S~ea??h the N??eFire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Sword drawn, the familiar weight reassuring in his grip, William ventured into the dense undergrowth, senses on high alert. The forest was alive with the sounds of unseen creatures, their calls a strange chorus of chirps, growls, and hisses.


    A low growl rumbled through the undergrowth, and a pair of glowing eyes fixed on him from the shadows. A large wolf, its fur the color of twilight, emerged from the thicket, its fangs bared in a silent snarl.


    William''s grip tightened on his sword, his heart pounding. He circled the wolf, trying to gauge its intentions. The wolf mirrored his movements, muscles coiled, ready to spring.


    With a sudden burst of speed, the wolf lunged. William reacted instinctively, raising his sword to parry the attack. But the wolf was faster than he anticipated. Sharp fangs grazed his arm, tearing through his tunic and drawing a thin line of blood. Pain flared, but William gritted his teeth and countered with a swift thrust, his blade finding its mark, sinking deep into the wolf''s flank.


    The wolf yelped, its attack faltering. William pressed his advantage, his sword a whirlwind of steel. He ducked a desperate snap of the wolf''s jaws, then lunged again, his blade finding its mark, piercing the creature''s heart.


    The wolf collapsed with a final whimper. William stood over his fallen foe, his breath coming in ragged gasps, blood dripping from his wounded arm. He had faced a predator in its own domain and emerged victorious, but not unscathed.


    A surge of power coursed through him, and the familiar blue screen flashed in his vision.


    [You have slain a Twilight Wolf!]


    [You have gained 150 EXP!]


    [Level Up!]


    Adrenaline pumping, William pressed on, his confidence bolstered by his victory. He wasn''t just a skinny kid anymore. He was a survivor.


    A pack of wild dogs burst from the undergrowth, their snarls echoing through the trees. They were lean and hungry, their eyes burning with a feral intensity. William fought with a ferocity he hadn''t known he possessed, his sword a blur of motion, his movements a dance of death. He parried snapping jaws, dodged lunging bodies, and countered with swift, precise strikes.


    One of the dogs managed to sink its teeth into his leg, tearing through his trousers and drawing blood. Pain shot through him, but he refused to falter. He kicked the dog off, sending it sprawling, then finished it with a swift thrust of his sword.


    [You have slain a Wild Dog!]


    [You have gained 100 EXP!]


    [Level Up!]


    He pressed on, his movements growing more fluid, his strikes more powerful. He was adapting, learning, becoming a true warrior.


    A monstrous boar, its tusks gleaming like ivory daggers, emerged from the thick undergrowth, its enraged snorts shaking the very ground. William dodged its charges, his agility proving invaluable as he weaved through the trees, narrowly avoiding the creature''s deadly tusks. He drew his bow, his arrows finding their mark in the beast''s thick hide.


    The boar roared in pain, its attacks becoming more frenzied. William felt a searing pain as one of its tusks grazed his leg, tearing through his flesh. He gritted his teeth, ignoring the pain, and loosed another arrow. This one found its mark, piercing the boar''s eye and sinking deep into its brain.


    The boar stumbled, its massive body crashing to the ground with a thunderous thud.


    [You have slain a Forest Behemoth!]


    You have gained 300 EXP!]


    [Level Up!]


    [Level Up!]


    He battled a giant spider, its venomous fangs dripping with a deadly concoction. He danced around its silken webs, his sword flashing, severing limbs and finally ending the creature''s reign of terror. But not before its fangs grazed his shoulder, sending a jolt of burning poison through his veins.


    He staggered, his vision blurring, but he managed to stay on his feet, finishing the spider with a desperate thrust of his sword.


    [You have slain a Venomous Webspinner!]


    [You have gained 200 EXP!]


    [Level Up!]


    [Level Up!]


    William collapsed against a tree trunk, his body battered and bruised, his breath coming in ragged gasps. He had faced the dangers of this ancient world and emerged victorious, but the battles had taken their toll.


    He was exhausted, wounded, and his body throbbed with pain. But he had also gained seven levels, his strength and agility soaring, his stamina and mana reserves significantly increased. But William felt a surge of power he had never experienced before, a newfound confidence in his abilities.

 Chapter 9 - 9: Newfound Strength, and Bad News

    William slumped against the gnarled trunk of the ancient tree, the rough bark digging into his sore back. He closed his eyes and focused on the familiar blue screen, a wave of weary satisfaction washing over him as he reviewed his updated status.


    Name: William Velmont


    Level: 10


    Class: None


    Attributes:


    Strength: 19


    Agility: 21


    Stamina: 17


    Intelligence: 18


    Mana: 13


    Skills:


    Chrono Shift (SSS-Rank): Allows the user to open a portal to a specific point in the past. (Details Unlocked)


    Seven levels. In a handful of brutal hours, he had made more progress than he could have ever imagined. He felt the transformation in every fiber of his being - the newfound strength in his limbs, the lightning-fast reflexes, the surge of energy thrumming through his veins. He was no longer the weak, unassuming boy who had stumbled through the portal. He was stronger, faster, more capable. He was a survivor.


    A grim smile tugged at his lips. Cast aside, deemed unworthy by the arrogant Elric. Yet here, in the untamed wilds of Aethel''s past, he was proving them all wrong. He was forging his own path, seizing control of his destiny.


    William remained by the tree, allowing his battered body to recover. The aches and pains from his battles with the primeval beasts slowly subsided, replaced by a growing sense of strength and vitality. He felt a strange connection to this ancient land, a primal energy thrumming beneath his feet.


    As his strength returned, he ventured deeper into the primeval forest. The towering trees, their leaves painted in hues of twilight, cast long shadows that danced and writhed like phantoms. Unfamiliar scents filled his nostrils - the pungent aroma of damp earth, the cloying sweetness of exotic blooms, the sharp tang of something wild and untamed.


    He stumbled upon a hidden cave, its entrance veiled by a curtain of emerald moss and twisting vines. Sword drawn, senses heightened, he cautiously peered into the darkness. The air within was cool and damp, carrying the faint scent of something ancient and forgotten. It offered shelter, a sanctuary from the untamed wilderness.


    William slipped inside, his footsteps echoing in the cavernous space. He settled down on a bed of soft moss, the cool stone wall pressing against his back.


    As he drifted into a light sleep, a glint of light caught his eye. A small, shimmering object lay nestled amongst the rocks, its surface reflecting the dim light filtering through the cave entrance. Curiosity piqued, William rose and cautiously approached, his footsteps muffled by the soft earth.


    It was a stone, unlike any he had ever seen. It pulsed with a soft, inner light, its surface smooth and cool to the touch. He picked it up, turning it over in his hands, mesmerized by its otherworldly glow. Instinctively, he slipped it into his pocket, a strange sense of connection drawing him to the mysterious stone.


    Hours melted away in the quiet solitude of the cave. William rested, his body slowly recovering from the trials of the day. He drifted in and out of sleep, haunted by fragmented images of snarling beasts and flashing claws.


    Then, with a sudden jolt, he was back. The familiar hillside, the portal shimmering faintly like a fading memory. He checked his system clock. The same hour, the same minute as when he left. Time, it seemed, had stood still in his absence.


    But his Chrono Shift skill was grayed out, a message flashing beneath it:


    [Skill in Cooldown. Time Until Reactivation: Unknown.]


    Disappointment pricked him, but it was quickly overshadowed by the thrill of his newfound strength and the mystery of the glowing stone tucked safely in his pocket. sea??h th§× n??el Fire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    He made his way back to the village, his steps lighter despite his wounds. As he approached Gorn''s cottage, Elara rushed out, her eyes widening in alarm at the sight of his battered and bloodied form.


    "William!" she gasped, her voice laced with concern. "What happened to you?"


    He offered a sheepish grin, trying to downplay the severity of his injuries. "I... uh... went into the forest to train," he stammered. "I wanted to get stronger, so I could go with Gorn next time. I guess I got a little carried away."


    Elara''s eyes narrowed, but she didn''t press him further. She quickly ushered him inside, her hands hovering over his wounds with a practiced touch. "You''re lucky those weren''t worse," she scolded gently, applying a soothing balm to the angry red marks. "And you''ve been poisoned! That spider venom could have been deadly."


    William winced as she applied a poultice to the bite on his shoulder.


    "There," Elara said, stepping back to survey her handiwork. "That should help with the pain and the poison. But you need to be more careful, William. The forest is a dangerous place, even for experienced hunters."


    "I know," William mumbled, shamefaced. He hated lying to Elara, but he couldn''t exactly tell her the truth about his time-traveling escapades.


    Just then, the cottage door burst open and Gorn stumbled in, his face pale, his breath coming in ragged gasps. Behind him, the other hunters crowded into the small space, their expressions mirroring Gorn''s fear.


    "What is it, Gorn?" Elara cried, rushing to his side. "What happened?"


    Gorn leaned heavily on his spear, his eyes wide with a terror William had never seen before. "We found it," he choked out, his voice hoarse. "Or rather, it found us."


    He recounted a harrowing tale of their expedition. They had ventured deep into the forest, following the trail of strange tracks and unsettling sounds. But what they discovered was far worse than anything they could have imagined.


    "It wasn''t just goblins," Gorn explained, his voice trembling. "There were other creatures, things out of nightmares. Twisted, monstrous things, with claws like daggers and eyes that burned with an unholy fire."


    He paused, his gaze falling on William. "They were... Corrupted. But unlike any I''ve ever seen before. Stronger, faster, more vicious."


    "And that''s not the worst of it," Gorn continued, his voice barely a whisper. "We found... a cave. A lair. And inside..." He swallowed hard, his eyes filled with fear. "Inside, we saw it. The source of the corruption. A creature of immense power, its very presence radiating darkness and despair."


    And then, a bloodcurdling scream pierced the tense silence, echoing through the village, sending a wave of panic through the small gathering.

 Chapter 10 - 10: Difficult Fight

    The scream ripped through the tense silence like a shard of glass, its echoes bouncing off the wooden walls of the cottage. Gorn''s eyes widened in horror, his grip tightening on his spear. "Elara, Maya, stay here!" he barked, his voice laced with urgency. "William, protect them!"


    And with that, Gorn was gone, bursting out of the cottage, his spear held high, his movements a blur of determined purpose. William felt a surge of responsibility, his hand instinctively gripping the hilt of his sword. He met Elara and Maya''s terrified gazes, offering a reassuring nod, though his own heart hammered against his ribs.


    Minutes stretched into an eternity, each second filled with a gnawing anxiety. William paced the small cottage, his senses on high alert. He strained to hear any sound from outside, any indication of what horrors might be unfolding in the village.


    Then, a crash. The front door splintered inwards, and a creature unlike any William had ever seen lunged into the room. It was a grotesque parody of a wolf, its fur matted and stained with blood, its eyes glowing with an eerie green light. Its limbs were elongated and twisted, its claws razor-sharp, and its jaws gaped open, revealing rows of jagged teeth.


    A wave of fear washed over William, but he didn''t hesitate. He charged forward, his sword raised, his movements fueled by a desperate need to protect Elara and Maya.


    He swung his sword, the blade slicing through the creature''s flesh, drawing a hiss of pain. The creature retaliated with a swipe of its claws, raking across William''s chest, tearing through his tunic and drawing blood.


    William gritted his teeth, ignoring the pain. He parried another attack, his movements surprisingly fluid despite the fear that clawed at his throat. He lunged, his sword finding its mark, sinking deep into the creature''s flank.


    The creature roared in pain, its attack faltering. William pressed his advantage, his sword a whirlwind of steel. He dodged a snap of its jaws, then lunged again, his blade finding its mark, piercing the creature''s heart.


    But the creature was stronger than he anticipated. It lashed out with a powerful blow, sending William sprawling to the ground. He cried out as its claws raked across his back, tearing through his flesh. He tried to rise, but his body wouldn''t obey. He was pinned beneath the creature''s weight, its fetid breath hot on his face.


    "William!" Maya''s scream pierced the chaos, her voice filled with a terror that mirrored his own.


    He closed his eyes, bracing for the final blow. But instead of pain, he felt a surge of power, a burning energy coursing through his veins. A translucent blue screen flashed in his vision.


    [New Ability Unlocked: Hero''s Limit (S-Rank)]


    [Temporarily enhances all attributes by 50% for 1 minute. Significant physical strain will follow.]


    He opened his eyes, a newfound strength surging through him. He roared, pushing the creature off him with a force he hadn''t known he possessed. He scrambled to his feet, his sword a blur of motion. He attacked with a ferocity born of desperation and newfound power.


    The creature, caught off guard, stumbled backward. William pressed his advantage, his strikes relentless, his movements fueled by the adrenaline coursing through him. He felt the strain of his enhanced abilities, his muscles burning, his vision blurring. But he couldn''t stop. He had to protect Elara and Maya.


    He lunged one final time, his sword finding its mark, slicing through the creature''s neck. The creature''s head rolled across the floor, its body collapsing in a heap.


    William staggered back, his vision swimming, his body trembling with exhaustion. His enhanced abilities faded, leaving him weak and vulnerable. He collapsed to the ground, his consciousness slipping away.


    The cottage door burst open again, and Gorn rushed in, his face etched with worry. He surveyed the scene ¨C his home in disarray, his family cowering in fear, and William lying on the floor, battered and bloodied. His eyes then fell on the monstrous creature lying lifeless on the floor.


    Gorn rushed to William''s side, his voice filled with concern. "William! What in Aethel happened here?"


    William managed a weak smile. "I... protected them," he whispered, his voice barely audible.


    Gorn looked back at William, his eyes filled with gratitude and respect. "You saved my family," he said, his voice thick with emotion. "You are a true hero, lad."


    But William couldn''t hear him. Exhaustion finally claimed him, dragging William down into a darkness deeper than any he had known. The echoes of battle faded into a distant hum as unconsciousness took hold.


    He awoke to the scent of herbs and the soft touch of bandages against his skin. Blinking, his vision blurred, his body heavy and aching. A wave of dizziness forced him back onto the bed as he tried to sit up.


    "Easy there, William," Elara''s gentle voice soothed him. "You''ve been through quite an ordeal."


    William''s gaze settled on Elara and Maya, their faces etched with concern. "How long was I out?" he croaked, his voice raspy.


    "Almost a full day," Elara replied, her worry evident. "We were worried sick."


    "Maya and I tended to your wounds," she explained, a hint of pride in her voice. "We used the strongest healing herbs we could find. You''ll be right as rain in no time." S§×ar?h the Nov§×l?ire.n(e)t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    A smile tugged at William''s lips, but the effort sent a jolt of pain through his battered body. "I feel like I''ve been trampled by a herd of wild boar," he groaned.


    Maya giggled, a welcome sound in the otherwise somber atmosphere. "You look like it too," she teased gently.


    A weak chuckle escaped William, followed by a wince as the movement sent another wave of pain through his ribs. Still weak, his body protested every attempt to move. He lay back against the pillows, his gaze drifting towards the window, where the afternoon sun cast long shadows across the floor.


    "What happened to the creature?" he asked, his voice barely a whisper.


    "Gorn took care of it," Elara replied. "Dragged it out of the village and burned it. He didn''t want to risk any further contamination."


    "Gorn is a brave man," he murmured, a wave of respect washing over him.


    "He is," Elara agreed. "But so are you, William. You saved us. You saved our home."

 Chapter 11 - 11: Recover, and Seeking Help

    The following day, William focused on his recovery, eager to regain his strength and assess the full extent of his newfound power. He reviewed his updated status, a wave of satisfaction washing over him.


    Name: William Velmont


    Level: 11


    Class: None


    Attributes:


    Strength: 19


    Agility: 21


    Stamina: 17


    Intelligence: 18


    Mana: 13


    Skills:


    Chrono Shift (SSS-Rank): Allows the user to open a portal to a specific point in the past. (Details Unlocked)


    Hero''s Limit (S-Rank): Temporarily enhances all attributes by 50% for 1 minute. Significant physical strain will follow. Sear?h the N?velFire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Level 11, and a new skill, a hidden power unlocked in the heat of battle. He recalled the surge of strength, the desperate fight against the corrupted beast, the feeling of his limits being shattered. It had come at a cost, leaving him drained and battered, but it had also saved his life, and the lives of Elara and Maya.


    For the next few days, William focused on recovery. He devoured Elara''s hearty meals, savoring the warmth and nourishment that helped mend his battered body. He rested, allowing his wounds to heal, the aches and pains slowly subsiding.


    When he finally ventured outside, leaning heavily on a makeshift cane fashioned from a sturdy branch, he found Willow Creek shrouded in an unsettling quiet. The usual bustle of village life had been replaced by a hushed stillness. Fear hung heavy in the air, a palpable tension that mirrored the grim expressions on the villagers'' faces.


    The attack, the corrupted creature, had shaken them to their core. This wasn''t just a stray goblin or a rogue wolf. This was something different, something sinister. The villagers whispered of a growing darkness, a creeping corruption that threatened their peaceful existence.


    William encountered Gorn by the village well, his usually jovial face etched with worry lines. "You''re looking better, lad," Gorn said, his voice gruff but laced with concern.


    "Thanks to Elara''s care," William replied with a weak smile.


    Gorn leaned against the well, his gaze distant. "I''m heading to the city, William. In two weeks'' time."


    William''s heart skipped a beat. The city. William was eager to explore the vast world, so visiting a city was something he wanted. "Why?" he asked, his voice barely a whisper.


    "To seek help," Gorn replied, his voice heavy. "We can''t face this alone. Not anymore."


    A surge of determination coursed through William. "I want to go with you," he declared, his voice firm despite his lingering weakness.


    Gorn looked at him, surprise flickering in his eyes. "William, you''re still recovering¡ª"


    "I''m strong enough," William insisted, his gaze unwavering. "And I can help. I need to help."


    Gorn studied him for a moment, his eyes searching William''s. He saw the determination, the newfound strength, the unwavering resolve in the young man''s gaze. He saw a hero in the making.


    "Alright, lad," Gorn said, a hint of a smile tugging at his lips. "You can come."


    A wave of relief washed over William, a grin spreading across his face. "Thank you, Gorn," he said, gratitude filling his voice. "I won''t let you down."


    The city. Just the word conjured images of bustling markets, towering structures, and perhaps, most importantly, skilled healers who could mend his battered body. William still had no idea where this city was, what dangers or wonders it might hold, but the prospect of leaving the confines of Willow Creek, of venturing into the wider world of Aethel, filled him with anticipation.


    And there was coin. A hefty purse of it, courtesy of the arrogant Maester Elric. William had almost forgotten about the purse, tucked away in his belongings. Now, the weight of the coins seemed to promise possibilities ¨C new weapons, armor, perhaps even information about that mysterious SSS-Rank skill.


    Two weeks. It felt like an eternity, and yet, no time at all. William needed every moment to recover, to rebuild his strength after the brutal encounter with the corrupted wolf. Full healing seemed unlikely, but even eighty percent would be a vast improvement. He was determined to be an asset to Gorn, not a burden.


    The days that followed blurred into a monotonous routine of rest and recuperation. William devoured the few books Gorn had ¨C mostly tales of hunting and folklore, a far cry from the epic sagas and intricate world-building he craved. Still, they offered a glimpse into the culture and history of Aethel, a welcome distraction from the aches and pains that lingered.


    Hours were spent practicing swordsmanship, the movements slowly regaining their fluidity, strength returning with each swing. William even ventured into the forest surrounding the village, careful to stay within sight of the familiar landmarks, testing his newfound agility and stamina.


    Finally, the day of departure arrived. William woke with a jolt, his heart pounding with anticipation. He could barely contain his excitement as he packed his meager belongings, the weight of the mysterious stone a comforting presence in his pocket. He joined Gorn and Elara for a hearty breakfast, the aroma of freshly baked bread and sizzling bacon filling the small cottage.


    After breakfast, though, it was time to say goodbyes.


    "Take care, Elara," Gorn said, his voice gruff but filled with tenderness. He pulled his wife into a tight embrace, his calloused hands gently stroking her hair. "We''ll be back as soon as we can."


    Elara clung to him, her eyes brimming with tears. "Be careful, Gorn," she whispered. "And William, you too. Look after each other."


    "We will, Elara," William replied, offering a reassuring smile. He gave Maya a quick hug, her cheeks flushing under his touch. "See you soon, Maya."


    Gorn mounted his steed, his gaze lingering on his wife and daughter. "We''ll be back before you know it," he promised, his voice strong despite the worry etched on his face.


    With a final wave, they rode out of Willow Creek. William was both scared of leaving the village, riding into the unknown, but he was also excited!


    His strength had improved quickly, and he wanted to test it out in the world!


    ''Stupid Elric and stupid classmates, you''ll see who the loser is!'' thought William. He would prove them wrong.

 Chapter 12 - 12: Journey to the City

    Gorn urged the horse forward, its hooves drumming a steady rhythm against the packed earth. William clung to his back, the rough weave of Gorn''s tunic scratching at his cheek. It wasn''t the most comfortable mode of transport, but it was infinitely better than trudging through the mud on foot.


    "Apologies for the cramped quarters, lad," Gorn rumbled, glancing back over his shoulder. "This old mare''s all we''ve got."


    "No worries," William replied, grinning. He was just glad to be off his feet.


    For hours, they followed a narrow track that wound through dense woodland. The air hung heavy with the scent of damp earth and decaying leaves, and branches whipped at their faces as they passed.


    Finally, the trees thinned, giving way to a wide cobblestone road that stretched towards the horizon. Relief washed over William; this must be the main road Gorn had mentioned, the one that linked the scattered villages and towns of the region.


    "What''s the city like?" William asked, curiosity piqued. "How big is it? And how much farther?"


    "The city is called Alderanth," Gorn declared, his gaze fixed on the road ahead. "It''s a few days'' ride, but it''s where we need to go."


    William nodded, the terrifying image of the corrupted wolf still vivid in his mind. He''d read about all sorts of fantastical creatures ¨C griffins with their sharp talons and piercing cries, sprites that danced in moonlit glades, even dragons that breathed fire and terrorized kingdoms.


    But none of those tales had prepared him for the horrifying reality of the wolf. Its fur was the color of a moonless night, its eyes burned with an unnatural crimson fire, and a foul stench clung to it like a shroud.


    Even the goblins he''d encountered in the forest paled in comparison to this abomination.


    "How big is Alderanth?" William asked, forcing himself to focus on their destination.


    "It''s no capital," Gorn replied, "but it''s a sizable city. We''ll find someone who can help us there."


    They pressed onward, the well-worn cobblestone road leading them through a changing landscape. The dense woodland gradually gave way to rolling hills, where farmers tended their fields and shepherds watched over their flocks. They passed a group of merchants leading packhorses laden with goods, their bells jingling softly in the afternoon breeze.


    As twilight cast long shadows across the land, Gorn guided the horse off the road and into a hidden clearing. It was time to make camp.


    "Traveling at night is a foolish risk," Gorn warned, his voice thick with the weariness of a long day. "We need rest, and there''s no telling what creatures might roam these woods after dark."


    William nodded in agreement. Even though he was used to camping in the wilds of Earth, the thought of encountering something unknown in this magical world sent shivers down his spine.


    "Are there any inns along this road?" he asked, longing for the comfort of a warm bed and a hearty meal. "A place where we can rest properly?"


    "Don''t worry," Gorn reassured him, "there are taverns ahead. We won''t have to rough it for more than a night or two." S~ea??h the n?velFire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Gorn, with the efficiency of a seasoned hunter, quickly gathered dry leaves and branches, coaxing a small fire to life in a matter of minutes. The flames crackled and danced, casting a warm glow against the encroaching twilight.


    He then unfurled a simple tent, securing it with sturdy stakes driven deep into the soft earth. It wasn''t much, but it offered a welcome respite from the elements and a sense of security in the heart of the wild.


    "I''ll be back shortly," Gorn announced, grabbing his bow and quiver. "There should be some game nearby."


    William nodded, watching as Gorn melted into the shadows of the forest. He felt a pang of apprehension as he was left alone, the silence of the woods amplifying every rustle and snap.


    Less than an hour later, Gorn returned, two plump rabbits dangling from his belt. He quickly skinned and cleaned them, the practiced movements of his hands betraying years of experience. Soon, the enticing aroma of roasting meat filled the air, mingling with the scent of pine needles and damp earth.


    William watched Gorn work, a mixture of admiration and guilt swirling within him. Gorn moved with the fluid grace of someone intimately familiar with the wilderness, his every action precise and efficient. William, on the other hand, felt utterly useless.


    "I feel bad just sitting here," William confessed, picking at the roasted rabbit. "You''re doing everything to set up camp."


    Gorn chuckled, a deep rumble that echoed through the trees. "Lad, you''re still mending. Besides, someone needed to keep watch over our belongings. That''s a vital task in itself." He paused, tearing off a chunk of rabbit with his teeth. "You''ve got a good heart, wanting to help. But sometimes, knowing when to rest is just as important."


    "You''re right, Gorn," William conceded, a hint of resignation in his voice. "I''ll try to rest." He knew pushing himself wouldn''t help anyone, and he trusted Gorn''s judgment.


    The night was filled with the symphony of the forest ¨C the rustling of leaves, the hooting of owls, the distant howls of unseen creatures.


    William tossed and turned, his sleep punctuated by vivid dreams of the corrupted wolf and the looming threat to his village. Gorn, however, seemed to slumber peacefully, the sounds of the wild lulling him into a deep sleep.


    Dawn broke, painting the sky with hues of gold and crimson. Gorn was the first to stir, rising with the effortless grace of a seasoned hunter. He rekindled the campfire, its warmth chasing away the lingering chill of the night.


    Soon, they were packed and ready to continue their journey.


    As they journeyed further along the cobblestone road, the landscape around them steadily transformed, again. The dense forests thinned, giving way to rolling hills dotted with farms and pastures. They began to encounter more travelers ¨C merchants with their laden wagons, pilgrims on foot, even a knight clad in shining armor, his sword gleaming in the sunlight.


    The once quiet road became a bustling thoroughfare, evidence of Alderanth''s growing influence. William, accustomed to the solitude of the forest, found himself both fascinated and unnerved by the increasing activity.


    He observed the people they passed with a keen eye, noting their attire, their mannerisms, and the subtle ways in which this world differed from his own.


    Suddenly, Gorn reined in the horse, his gaze fixed on a figure lying crumpled in the middle of the road. "Someone''s hurt," he muttered, dismounting quickly.

 Chapter 13 - 13: Gorns Showcase of Power, and Tavern

    Gorn, ever alert, noticed the subtle shift in the woman''s posture, the unnatural stillness that betrayed her feigned injury. His years of experience navigating the treacherous roads had honed his instincts, and he knew a trap when he saw one.


    "William," Gorn''s voice was low, a warning in its tone, "bandits. Prepare for a fight."


    "Bandits!" William echoed, surprise coloring his voice.


    Unlike the thrill of encountering a rare magical beast, the threat of bandits was a mundane reality, a constant shadow lurking on the edges of civilization.


    William dismounted, drawing his sword with a practiced flourish. The woman, her act exposed, sprang to her feet, her eyes glinting with malice.


    "You''re quick," she sneered, "but not quick enough. Run while you can! Maybe your horse will carry you far enough to escape."


    William had entertained the same thought. Why not simply flee? But Gorn had a different plan.


    "Running is an option," Gorn admitted, his gaze fixed on the woman, "but we''ve been traveling for quite some time with only one horse between us. It''s time for an upgrade. And I believe you can help with that."


    As if on cue, a band of rough-looking men emerged from the surrounding woods, their leader astride a magnificent stallion. Gorn''s eyes glinted with a predatory light.


    The bandit leader bristled, his face reddening with fury. "Who do you think you are?" he bellowed, his voice echoing through the trees. "You think you can take us all on?" S~ea??h the Nov§×l?ire.n(e)t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Eight against two. The odds were undeniably stacked against them. Yet, an air of confidence clung to Gorn, unwavering and absolute.


    He surveyed the bandits with a chilling disdain. "Please," he scoffed, "your strongest barely scrapes level 25. You''re no match for me."


    A palpable tension rippled through the bandit ranks. Gorn''s casual assessment of their strength was unsettling. Accurately gauging an opponent''s level was a difficult skill, one that spoke volumes about his own power.


    "Don''t try to scare us with your tricks!" the leader blustered, though a flicker of doubt betrayed his bravado. "Numbers win battles, and we have you outnumbered!"


    Silence. Gorn didn''t waste another breath on threats or boasts. He simply moved. One moment he was standing beside William, the next he was a blur, a phantom of speed that vanished into the space between one blink and the next.


    Before any of the bandits could react, their leader''s head flew from his shoulders, a crimson geyser erupting from his neck. The stallion reared, its riderless form crashing to the ground. Gorn reappeared as if from thin air, his sword dripping with blood, his expression a mask of cold fury.


    The bandits, their bravado shattered, stumbled back in terror. They had never seen such speed, such power. This wasn''t a simple hunter; this was a force of nature unleashed.


    Gorn moved like a whirlwind, his sword a blur of deadly precision. He cut through their ranks, his every strike finding its mark. Cries of pain and terror filled the air as the bandits fell, their bodies littering the forest floor.


    The remaining bandits, their courage completely evaporated, turned and fled, their cries echoing through the trees. Even the woman who had orchestrated the ambush scrambled away, her limp forgotten in her desperate bid for survival.


    Gorn watched them go, his chest heaving, his eyes burning with a cold fire. He didn''t pursue them. He had made his point.


    William stared in awe, his mouth agape. He had witnessed Gorn''s strength in the village, but this... this was something else entirely. The sheer speed, the effortless power, the chilling precision ¨C it was like watching a predator toying with its prey.


    "Gorn," William breathed, his voice filled with a newfound respect, "that was incredible."


    Gorn grunted, wiping his sword clean on the fallen leader''s tunic. "They were weak," he said dismissively. "Undisciplined. A pack of wolves would have put up a better fight."


    But William knew better. He had seen the fear in the bandits'' eyes, the terror that had driven them to flee. He had witnessed the power that lay dormant within Gorn, a power that could shatter bones and extinguish life with terrifying ease.


    ''How strong is he?'' William wondered, a shiver running down his spine. He had much to learn, much to achieve, if he ever hoped to reach that level of mastery.


    Gorn approached the fallen stallion, its eyes wide with fear, its muscles trembling. He calmed the creature with a gentle touch, then turned to William. "Looks like you have a new mount, lad," he said, a rare smile gracing his lips.


    William grinned, his heart filled with gratitude. He approached the stallion, its fear quickly subsiding under his gentle touch. He mounted the magnificent creature, its powerful muscles rippling beneath him as he took the reins.


    With a newfound sense of purpose, they continued their journey.


    The journey proved surprisingly uneventful after the bandit attack. News of Gorn''s brutal efficiency seemed to have spread like wildfire, a silent deterrent to any would-be highwaymen.


    Had the surviving bandits relayed tales of his impossible speed and devastating power? William wouldn''t be surprised. Among those who lived by preying on the weak, Gorn''s reputation was clearly one to be feared.


    The next night, however, offered a welcome change from their previous roadside encampments.


    Gorn had mentioned taverns along the way, and he wasn''t exaggerating. As dusk settled, a two-story wooden building emerged from the twilight, its windows glowing invitingly. A weathered sign swung above the doorway, depicting a frothy tankard and the words "The Drunken Boar."


    A sturdy-looking fellow with a bushy beard stood near the entrance, his eyes assessing the approaching riders. "Welcome, travelers!" he boomed, his voice surprisingly cheerful. "I can tend to your horses for the night. Feed ''em, water ''em, and keep ''em safe from any sticky fingers."


    "How much?" Gorn asked, his tone blunt and to the point.


    The stableman blinked, momentarily thrown by Gorn''s directness. "Twenty copper coins," he replied, recovering quickly. "A fair price, wouldn''t you say?"


    Gorn, without a word, tossed the coins to the man and strode towards the tavern entrance, William close behind.


    Inside, the common room was sparsely populated. A few lone figures hunched over their drinks at scattered tables, their conversations hushed. The tavern keeper, a plump woman with tired eyes, dozed behind the counter, her head resting on a stack of worn ledgers. The door creaked open, startling her awake.


    "Good evening, travelers!" she chirped, her voice regaining a semblance of enthusiasm. "Welcome to the Drunken Boar! We have plenty of rooms available, all at a reasonable price."


    "How much?" Gorn''s voice boomed through the quiet room.


    "Eighty copper coins per person," the woman replied, her eyes widening slightly.


    Gorn, true to his efficient nature, simply placed the coins on the counter. "Two rooms," he declared.


    The woman''s smile widened, her weariness momentarily forgotten. "Excellent! Right this way, gentlemen. I''ll show you to your accommodations."

 Chapter 14 - 14: Posting a Request

    The room was small and sparsely furnished, with two narrow beds, a rickety table, and a single chair. A lone window offered a glimpse of the moonlit forest, the rustling leaves casting dancing shadows on the rough-hewn walls.


    William, exhausted from the day''s journey and the adrenaline surge of the bandit encounter, collapsed onto one of the beds, the straw mattress crackling beneath his weight. He closed his eyes, the events of the past few weeks swirling in his mind. He had faced death, traveled through time, and discovered hidden powers he was only beginning to understand.


    Sleep came quickly, a welcome respite from the constant turmoil of his new reality.


    The next morning, they were back on the road, the rising sun painting the sky in hues of gold and crimson. The Drunken Boar, with its weary tavern keeper and lumpy beds, faded into a distant memory.


    Two more days of travel brought them to the outskirts of the city. Even from a distance, it was an impressive sight. Towering walls of grey stone rose from the surrounding plains, their imposing presence a testament to the city''s strength and prosperity. A bustling crowd gathered at the main gate, a throng of merchants, travelers, and adventurers seeking entry.


    Gorn guided their horses towards the back of the queue, his gaze sweeping across the crowd, his hand instinctively resting on the hilt of his sword. William, despite his excitement, couldn''t shake a feeling of unease. The city, for all its grandeur, seemed to hum with an undercurrent of tension.


    As they reached the gate, two guards, clad in gleaming armor, stepped forward. They scrutinized the approaching travelers, their eyes sharp and alert. One of them, a burly man with a thick mustache, gestured towards a nearby table. "Weapons and belongings," he barked, his voice gruff. "Inspection."


    Gorn frowned, his brow furrowed in confusion. "Inspection?" he echoed, his voice laced with surprise. "Since when does Alderanth1 require an inspection?"


    The guard leaned closer, his voice lowering to a conspiratorial whisper. "Bandits, sir," he explained. "Sneaking in with stolen goods, causing trouble. Orders from the Captain. Just a precaution."


    Gorn grunted, a flicker of understanding in his eyes. He and William dismounted, placing their weapons and packs on the table for inspection. The guards, their eyes sharp, examined every item, their movements efficient and thorough.


    William felt a surge of anxiety as the guard''s hands hovered over the mysterious stone tucked in his pocket. He held his breath, hoping the stone''s unusual properties wouldn''t attract unwanted attention. But the guard, seemingly unfazed, moved on, his focus shifting to the next item.


    With a final nod of approval, the guards stepped aside, granting them entry into the city. William, his heart pounding with anticipation, followed Gorn through the imposing gates, eager to explore the wonders and secrets that awaited them within Alderanth''s walls.


    The city gates swung open, and William stepped into a whirlwind of sights and sounds. The streets teemed with a vibrant crowd - merchants hawking their wares, children chasing stray dogs, and adventurers swaggering with weapons strapped to their backs. The air buzzed with a cacophony of voices, the clatter of horse-drawn carts, and the enticing aromas of street food stalls.


    "Potions! Elixirs! Get your potent brews here!" a wizened old woman cackled, her stall overflowing with vials of colorful liquids. "Guaranteed to cure any ailment, from a common cold to a broken heart!"


    "Weapons! Armor! Finest craftsmanship in all of Alderanth!" a burly blacksmith bellowed, his hammer ringing against steel. "Swords that can cleave a man in two, shields that can withstand a dragon''s breath!"


    "Exotic delicacies! Rare ingredients! Tantalize your taste buds with the finest fare from across the realms!" a portly merchant proclaimed, his stall laden with strange and wondrous fruits, vegetables, and meats. "Try our roasted griffin wings, guaranteed to make your mouth water!"


    William''s eyes widened, taking in the bizarre and fascinating sights. He had never seen such a diverse and vibrant marketplace. He nudged Gorn, his voice filled with curiosity. "Where do we go to find help?"


    Gorn, his gaze scanning the crowd with a practiced eye, pointed towards a imposing building with a sign depicting a crossed sword and shield. "The Adventurer''s Guild," he said. "That''s our best bet."


    "Why not the army?" William questioned. "Shouldn''t they be dealing with this corrupted threat?"


    Gorn shook his head. "Alderanth is a merchant city, lad. No major military presence here. We''d have to travel to the capital to petition the king, and that would take weeks, maybe months." He paused, his expression grim. "We don''t have that kind of time."


    He steered their horses towards the Adventurer''s Guild, the imposing building looming closer with every step. "We''ll post a quest, offer a reward. Hopefully, we can find some skilled adventurers willing to investigate the corruption and deal with the threat before it spreads."


    William nodded. He was finally starting to understand how things were. Gorn looked quite knowledgeable.


    ''He is certainly more than a hunter,'' thought William as they moved toward the Adventurer''s Guild building. S§×arch* The n?vel_Fire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    The Adventurer''s Guild was a hive of activity. The vast hall buzzed with the chatter of adventurers, the clatter of mugs on tables, and the occasional boisterous laugh. A massive board dominated one wall, covered in parchments detailing various quests ¨C from retrieving lost cats to slaying fearsome beasts.


    Gorn approached a counter manned by a stern-looking woman with a scarred cheek and a bored expression. "We need to post a quest," he announced, his voice carrying over the din.


    The woman, without looking up from her ledger, gestured towards a stack of parchments and a pot of ink. "Fill this out. Be specific. And be prepared to pay the posting fee."


    Gorn grunted, grabbing a parchment and quill. He scribbled down the details of their predicament ¨C the strange occurrences in the forest, the corrupted creatures, the growing fear in Willow Creek. He hesitated for a moment, then added a hefty reward, a sum that made William''s eyes widen.


    "Will that be enough?" William whispered, concerned that they might be overspending.


    Gorn shrugged. "We need to attract the right kind of adventurers, lad. Ones who aren''t afraid of a little risk."


    He slammed the completed form onto the counter, the woman''s head snapping up with a glare. She scanned the parchment, her eyebrows rising at the offered reward. "This is quite a sum," she said, her voice laced with a hint of surprise.


    "It''s a dangerous job," Gorn replied, his tone firm. "We need someone with experience dealing with the Corrupted."


    The woman nodded, her expression turning serious. "Very well. I''ll post your quest. But I can''t guarantee you''ll find anyone willing to take it. The Corrupted are no laughing matter."


    Gorn grunted in agreement. "We know that better than anyone," he said grimly.


    I changed the name of the city. Already edited in the previous chapters

 Chapter 15 - 15: Hiring Adventurers, and Rumors

    As they stepped back from the counter, William''s curiosity bubbled to the surface. "Gorn," he began, his voice hushed, "where did you get that much money? That reward... it''s a fortune!"


    Gorn''s expression turned cagey. "A hunter has his secrets, lad," he replied, deflecting the question with a gruff chuckle. "Let''s just say I''ve had a few successful hunts in my time."


    William, sensing Gorn''s reluctance to elaborate, decided not to press the issue. He had learned that the hunter, despite his open and friendly demeanor, held a part of himself close, shrouded in mystery.


    Instead, William shifted his focus to the more pressing concern. "Those Corrupted..." he began, his voice laced with worry, "what exactly are they?"


    Gorn''s jovial facade vanished, replaced by a grim seriousness. "Sometimes, lad," he explained, "the magical beasts in our world... they change. Something twists them, makes them stronger, more vicious. It''s a rare occurrence, but when it happens..." He trailed off, shaking his head. "It''s never good."


    "And you think that''s what''s happening in the forest near Willow Creek?" William asked, his heart sinking.


    Gorn nodded. "Aye. And it''s usually not an isolated incident. Something triggers these mutations, some kind of... imbalance. Until we find the source, the corruption will likely spread."


    William felt a chill run down his spine. He recalled the monstrous creature he had faced in Gorn''s cottage, the corrupted wolf with its unnatural strength and ferocity. And Gorn had said these creatures were even stronger...


    He glanced around the bustling hall of the Adventurer''s Guild, his gaze falling on the various groups gathered around tables, their laughter and boasts echoing through the space. Were any of these adventurers strong enough to face this threat? Was he?


    He looked back at Gorn, his expression determined. "We need to find someone capable, Gorn," he said, his voice firm. "Someone who can stop this before it''s too late."


    Gorn nodded, a flicker of hope igniting in his eyes. "Aye, lad. We just need to find the right people for the job."


    They settled at a sturdy oak table, their gazes scanning the bustling hall. The minutes ticked by, each one a hammer blow against William''s growing anxiety. He watched as adventurers came and went, some pausing to glance at the quest board, others dismissing it with a scoff or a shake of the head.


    Just as William was about to lose hope, a group of three figures approached their table. Two men and a woman, their bearing radiating an air of confidence and experience that set them apart from the boisterous crowd.


    "You the ones offering a king''s ransom for some pest control?" one of the men asked, a grin spreading across his rugged face. He had a thick, braided beard and a mischievous glint in his eyes.


    Gorn, ever alert, assessed the newcomers with a practiced eye. "We need more than pest control," he replied, his voice grave. "We need experienced adventurers, those who aren''t afraid to face the Corrupted."


    The woman, her arms crossed over her leather breastplate, stepped forward. "We saw the posting," she said, her voice sharp and alert. "Tell us more about these ''Corrupted''."


    Gorn recounted the events of the past few weeks ¨C the strange occurrences in the forest, the mutated creatures, the attack on his home, the fear that gripped Willow Creek. He emphasized the unusual strength and ferocity of the Corrupted, the growing concern that something sinister was afoot.


    "We need someone to investigate," Gorn concluded, his gaze unwavering. "To find the source of this corruption before it spreads and consumes everything in its path."


    The three adventurers exchanged glances, a silent conversation passing between them. The second man, a tall, lanky figure with a longbow slung across his back, spoke up. "We''ve dealt with the Corrupted before," he said, his voice calm and measured. "It''s not a task we take lightly."


    The woman nodded in agreement. "But the reward is generous," she added, her eyes gleaming with a hint of determination. "And the villagers seem desperate."


    The bearded man grinned. "Sounds like an adventure to me!" he declared, clapping Gorn on the shoulder. "We''re in."


    Relief washed over William, a smile spreading across his face. He studied the three adventurers, taking in their confident stances and the subtle aura of power that surrounded them. He felt a surge of hope. Perhaps, with their help, Willow Creek could be saved.


    Gorn, his expression softening slightly, extended his hand. "Thank you," he said, his voice filled with gratitude. "You have our thanks, and the gratitude of our village."


    The adventurers shook Gorn''s hand, their grips firm and reassuring. "Don''t worry yourselves," the woman said, her voice carrying a quiet strength. "We''ll get to the bottom of this."


    "But," the archer added, "we have a few loose ends to tie up here in Alderanth. Give us four days to prepare, and we''ll meet you back here, ready to ride."


    Gorn nodded, understanding in his eyes. "Four days it is," he agreed. "We''ll be waiting."


    With a final exchange of farewells, the adventurers departed, leaving William and Gorn alone in the bustling hall. Sear?h the N??eFire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "Four days?" William echoed, a hint of impatience in his voice. "Can''t we leave sooner?"


    Gorn clapped a hand on his shoulder. "Patience, lad. Those three look capable, but even the best adventurers need time to prepare for a journey into the unknown." He paused, his eyes twinkling. "Besides, you''ve never seen Alderanth before. It''s time for a little exploration."


    And so, they ventured into the city, leaving the clamor of the Adventurer''s Guild behind. Gorn, like a seasoned guide, led William through the labyrinthine streets, pointing out notable landmarks and sharing snippets of local lore.


    They marveled at the towering spires of the Grand Cathedral, its stained glass windows casting kaleidoscopic patterns on the cobbled streets. They strolled through the bustling marketplace, where merchants hawked exotic wares and the air hummed with a symphony of bartering voices.


    As they passed a group huddled around a street performer juggling flaming torches, William caught snippets of their conversation.


    "...heard those summoned heroes are causing quite a stir up north..."


    "...powerful mages, they say, with incredible abilities..."


    "...saving villages, slaying beasts... even the king is impressed..."


    William''s heart skipped a beat. Summoned heroes. Up north. He knew exactly who they were talking about. His former classmates, the ones who had mocked and belittled him, were now celebrated heroes, their powers lauded throughout the land.

 Chapter 16 - 16: Place to Learn New Skills (1)

    Intrigued, William approached the group, a curious glint in his eyes. "Excuse me for interrupting," he interjected politely, "but who are these heroes you''re discussing?"


    One of the men, momentarily startled by William''s sudden appearance, quickly recovered his composure. "They''re a group of heroes who emerged recently," he explained. "From what I''ve heard, they were summoned from another world. They''re currently in a distant kingdom, but news travels fast, especially when it involves individuals with extraordinary abilities."


    "Just how far away is this kingdom?" William pressed, his curiosity piqued.


    "Quite a distance, young man," the man replied, shaking his head. "And the journey is fraught with peril. Don''t even think about trying to meet these heroes, alright?"


    He clearly assumed William was captivated by tales of heroism and yearned to meet these figures. The truth, however, was far more complex. William sought information. Elric''s spell had flung him far and wide, and now his former classmates were far away from him. Not that he wanted to chat with them, anyway.


    "Alright, thank you for the information," William replied respectfully, then rejoined Gorn.


    Gorn eyed him with a curious expression. "What was that about, lad? Why so interested in these heroes?"


    He wasn''t oblivious. Gorn sensed something unusual about William''s intense curiosity but chose not to pry further.


    "Just curious," William responded casually, "The whole hero talk was rather intriguing."


    "Right, right," Gorn said, a hint of skepticism in his voice.


    They continued their tour of Alderanth, Gorn pointing out various landmarks and bustling markets. Eventually, they settled into a restaurant to satisfy their hunger.


    The restaurant, located on the third floor of an imposing building, exuded an air of luxury. William once again marveled at how Gorn, a hunter from a small village, could afford such extravagance, but he kept his questions to himself. They both harbored secrets, and the answers would reveal themselves in due time.


    William relished the delicious meal, savoring each bite with gusto.


    "Enjoying yourself?" Gorn chuckled, watching William devour the food with undisguised enthusiasm.


    "Absolutely," William mumbled through a mouthful of chicken leg. "This is incredible!"


    They chatted and savored their meal, the earlier tension momentarily forgotten. With their hunger satiated, it was time to find lodging for the night.


    Alderanth boasted a variety of taverns, each catering to different budgets. Despite his apparent wealth, Gorn wasn''t about to squander his coins on unnecessary luxury.


    Especially since they had a four-day wait ahead of them before receiving a response from the adventurers'' guild. Four nights in a high-end establishment would put a significant dent in their funds.


    They opted for a more modest tavern called "Hod''s Tavern and Bar," a two-story wooden structure with a slightly worn but welcoming facade. The sign hanging above the entrance might have seen better days, but the lively atmosphere spilling onto the street promised a comfortable haven.


    Stepping inside, William and Gorn were greeted by a boisterous scene. The tavern was packed with patrons enjoying their ale, confirming its popularity among locals.


    Having just finished a hearty meal, neither of them desired food or drink. Their primary need was rest.


    Gorn approached the barkeep. "Got a couple of rooms available?" he inquired.


    The man, busy polishing a tankard, glanced at a nearby ledger. "Indeed," he confirmed. "Rooms eight and thirteen are free. They''re a bit apart, hope that''s alright."


    "No problem," Gorn replied. "We''ll take ''em both for four nights."


    After a brief exchange, William was directed to room thirteen at the end of a dimly lit corridor, while Gorn settled into room eight closer to the entrance.


    "If you need anything, lad, just come find me," Gorn said, his voice gruff but laced with concern. "Even though we''re safe within the city walls, you never know what might happen."


    A wave of warmth washed over William. Gorn and his family had practically adopted him after he''d materialized in their village, a bewildered stranger displaced by Elric''s magic. He had never imagined receiving such kindness from a stranger.


    "Will do," William replied, a genuine smile gracing his lips. "Rest well, Gorn."


    "You too, William," Gorn replied with a tired grin.William entered his assigned room, finding it simple yet cozy. The highlight was a small, inviting fireplace! The chill of autumn was creeping in, making the prospect of warmth especially welcome. A thick, woolen blanket lay folded on the modest bed, promising a comfortable night''s sleep. The window offered a view of the bustling street, which, while not typically scenic, was rather pleasant with the warm glow of the evening lights.William felt a surge of contentment. He had gained a solid understanding of his SSS-rank ability, which had allowed him to rapidly level up and boost his attributes.Name: William VelmontLevel: 11Class: NoneAttributes:


    Strength: 19


    Agility: 21


    Stamina: 17


    Intelligence: 18


    Mana: 13 S§×ar?h the Novel?ire(.)ne*t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Skills:


    Chrono Shift (SSS-Rank): Allows the user to open a portal to a specific point in the past. (Details Unlocked)


    Hero''s Limit (S-Rank): Temporarily enhances all attributes by 50% for 1 minute. Significant physical strain will follow.


    He now possessed another powerful skill, a valuable asset for emergencies despite its harsh aftereffects.


    ''Where can I learn more skills?'' William pondered. ''Should I venture into the past again and seek out a mentor? Perhaps I need to explore other avenues, since I haven''t fully mastered Chrono Shift yet...''


    With these thoughts swirling in his mind, he settled into the bed and drifted off to sleep, eager to face whatever challenges the new day would bring.


    The night passed uneventfully, providing William with a much-needed restful sleep. In the morning, he and Gorn decided to have breakfast at the tavern. The food was decent, and the prices were reasonable, making it a convenient option.


    The tavern was significantly less crowded in the morning. Most patrons came in the evenings to unwind with drinks and conversation after a long day''s work. It seemed the majority of the people they had seen the previous night hadn''t stayed the night.


    William''s mind was still preoccupied with ways to increase his strength. Gorn, with his apparent experience and high level, seemed like the perfect person to ask for guidance.


    "Gorn," William inquired during breakfast, "where can I learn more skills? Is there a place where I can find manuals or something?"


    Gorn seemed surprised by the question, but also pleased. "Yes, there is," he replied. "The Alderanth library has manuals on all sorts of magic. But you should take an aptitude test first. Not that you can''t learn any type of magic, but it''s best to focus on your strengths, especially when starting out."


    William''s excitement grew. The prospect of learning new skills and delving into the world of magic filled him with anticipation.

 Chapter 17 - 17: Place to Learn New Skills (2)

    "An aptitude test?" William echoed, curiosity piqued. "Where can I find one of those?"


    "The Mages'' Guild," Gorn replied, taking a hearty swig of his ale. "It''s not far from here. We can head over after breakfast."


    William nodded eagerly, his mind already racing with possibilities. What kind of magic would he be suited for? He imagined himself conjuring fireballs, summoning lightning bolts, or perhaps even manipulating the very fabric of time with his newfound magical prowess.


    They finished their breakfast, the tavern slowly filling with the morning rush of patrons seeking a quick bite before starting their day. Gorn settled the tab, his movements practiced and efficient, and they stepped back out into the bustling streets of Alderanth.


    The Mages'' Guild was an imposing structure, its tall spires reaching towards the sky, its walls adorned with intricate carvings depicting arcane symbols and mythical creatures. William felt a sense of awe as they approached the grand entrance, its heavy oak doors adorned with gleaming brass handles shaped like intertwined serpents.


    Inside, the atmosphere was hushed and reverent. Mages clad in flowing robes of various colors glided through the spacious halls, their voices low, their expressions serious. Shelves lined the walls, overflowing with ancient tomes and scrolls, their pages filled with arcane knowledge.


    Gorn approached a young mage seated at a polished mahogany desk. "We''re here for an aptitude test," he announced, his voice carrying a hint of respect.


    The mage, his eyes sparkling with intelligence, gestured towards a nearby chamber. "Please enter," he said, his voice smooth and melodic. "The test will assess your natural affinities and guide you towards the path best suited to your talents."


    William, his heart pounding with anticipation, followed Gorn into the chamber. It was a circular room, its walls lined with mirrors that reflected his image a thousand times over. A strange energy thrummed through the air, a tingling sensation that sent shivers down his spine.


    He took a deep breath, his gaze settling on a crystal orb resting on a pedestal in the center of the room. The orb pulsed with a soft, inner light, its surface swirling with a kaleidoscope of colors.


    "Place your hand on the orb," the mage instructed from beyond the door. "And focus your mind. Let your magic flow."


    William stepped forward, his hand trembling slightly as he reached for the orb. He closed his eyes, his thoughts swirling with anticipation. What secrets would the orb reveal? What path would his magical journey take him on?


    William extended his hand, his fingers brushing against the cool, smooth surface of the crystal orb. A jolt of energy surged through him, causing him to gasp. The orb, which had been a tranquil swirl of colors, erupted in a blinding flash of crimson light, the intensity momentarily blinding him.


    He stumbled back, shielding his eyes. When he could see again, the orb was no longer glowing serenely; it was pulsating rapidly, the crimson light deepening to an almost bloody hue. Cracks spiderwebbed across its surface, and a faint humming sound emanated from within, growing louder with each passing second.


    Suddenly, the orb shattered, exploding in a shower of crimson sparks that dissipated as quickly as they appeared. William stared at the fragments scattered across the pedestal, his heart pounding in his chest. What did it mean? Had he failed the test?


    The mage, who had been observing through a hidden window, rushed into the chamber, his face a mixture of shock and awe. "Incredible!" he exclaimed, his eyes wide with disbelief. "I''ve never witnessed such raw power, such potential..." He knelt down, carefully examining the shattered remnants of the orb. "This is... unprecedented. The orb reacted to your touch with an intensity that nearly overloaded its capacity. It seems you possess an extraordinary affinity for Body Enhancing magic."


    He looked at William, his expression turning serious. "But this level of talent comes with a price. Unlocking it will require a rare and costly catalyst." He turned to Gorn, his voice softening. "I''m afraid the fee for this procedure will be substantial."


    Gorn, who had been watching the proceedings with a mixture of concern and excitement, simply nodded. "Whatever it takes," he said, his voice firm. "This lad has a gift, and we won''t let it go to waste."


    The mage smiled. "Very well. I will begin the preparations immediately." He led them to a smaller chamber, where he instructed William to sit in a meditative pose. He then produced a small, intricately carved wooden box from his robes. Inside, nestled on a bed of velvet, lay a shimmering, emerald-green gem.


    "This," the mage explained, "is a Viridian Shard, a crystal imbued with the essence of life force. It will serve as the catalyst to unlock your latent potential." He placed the shard on William''s forehead, where it adhered gently, emitting a soft, green glow.


    William closed his eyes, feeling a warm sensation spreading through his body, invigorating his muscles and sharpening his senses. He could feel his power surging, his connection to his own physicality deepening. When he opened his eyes, the Viridian Shard had vanished, its energy absorbed into his being.


    The mage smiled. "Congratulations, William. You have successfully unlocked your Body Enhancing talent. You will find that your skills in this domain will be far more potent and efficient than those of an average mage."


    A notification appeared before William''s eyes, confirming the mage''s words:


    [Body Enhancing Talent I (B Rank): All Body Enhancing skill cost 20% less, are 20% more effective, and last 20% longer.]


    Stepping out of the Mages'' Guild and back into the bustling streets of Alderanth, William felt a newfound confidence surging through him. He practically bounced down the cobblestone streets, his eyes wide with excitement. He couldn''t wait to put his new talent to the test.


    Gorn, ever observant, chuckled at William''s barely contained enthusiasm. "Seems like someone''s eager to start their magical journey," he remarked, a hint of amusement in his voice. "So, tell me, lad, what grade did that passive skill of yours come at?"


    "It''s a B rank!" William announced, beaming with pride.


    Gorn''s eyebrows shot up in surprise. "A B rank? That''s impressive for a starting skill! Most beginners are lucky to get a C or even a D. You''ve got a good foundation to build on, lad. It''s possible to improve those skills further, you know, so starting with a B rank is among the best."


    William''s grin widened. "Really? How do I do that?" Sear?h the n??el Fire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "Practice and training, mostly," Gorn explained. "But also by finding higher-ranked skills to replace or enhance your existing ones. Which is why our next stop is the Alderanth Library. They have a decent collection of magic scrolls, and we''ll see if we can find some body enhancing techniques for you to learn."


    The Alderanth Library was a haven of tranquility amidst the city''s hustle and bustle. Its high-ceilinged reading rooms were filled with rows upon rows of bookshelves, the air thick with the scent of aged paper and leather. Gorn, with his familiarity with the library''s layout, led William through the labyrinthine aisles towards the section dedicated to magic.


    "Here we are," Gorn announced, gesturing towards a shelf laden with scrolls of varying sizes and colors. "Now, let''s see what we can find..."

 Chapter 18 - 18: New Skills, and Weapon

    While Gorn began sifting through the scrolls, William''s attention was drawn to a massive, leather-bound tome tucked away on a lower shelf. Its title, embossed in faded gold leaf, read "Chronicles of Primal Magic." Intrigued, he pulled the heavy book off the shelf and carefully opened it.


    The pages were filled with intricate diagrams and archaic script, depicting strange rituals and even stranger creatures. As he flipped through the brittle pages, a particular illustration caught his eye. It showed a mage, surrounded by swirling energy, mimicking the movements of a ferocious beast ¨C a hulking, bear-like creature with glowing runes etched across its fur.


    "What''s that, lad?" Gorn asked, noticing William''s fascination with the ancient tome.


    William showed him the illustration. "It looks like some kind of ancient magic," he said, tracing the runes with his finger. "The mage seems to be copying the beast''s movements."


    Gorn peered at the image, his brow furrowed in thought. "Ah, yes. This book describes the practices of the Primal Mages," he explained. "They believed that true power came from understanding and harnessing the natural world, particularly the strength and abilities of magical beasts."


    He pointed to the bear-like creature in the illustration. "This is a Runebear, a creature known for its immense physical strength and resilience. The Primal Mages would study these beasts, learning their movements and channeling their power to enhance their own bodies."


    "That''s incredible!" William exclaimed, his mind racing with possibilities. He imagined himself learning from these powerful creatures, mastering their techniques, and becoming an unstoppable force.


    Gorn chuckled. "It''s a fascinating piece of history, lad, but don''t get too carried away. This magic is ancient, long forgotten. The techniques described here are likely lost to time."


    William nodded, but inwardly, he was buzzing with excitement. Lost to time? Perhaps for others, but not for him. He had Chrono Shift, his SSS-ranked skill, a secret weapon that allowed him to manipulate time itself.


    ''I can go back to the past, to the era of the Primal Mages,'' he thought, a thrill running through him, ''I can learn those lost techniques, master their secrets...''


    He carefully closed the book, a determined glint in his eyes. He wouldn''t reveal his Chrono Shift ability to Gorn, not yet. But he knew that this discovery had opened up a whole new world of possibilities for him.


    "Alright, lad," Gorn said, interrupting William''s thoughts. "Let''s get back to finding you some suitable scrolls."


    After careful consideration, Gorn selected four scrolls for William. Three of them were C-rank Body Enhancing skills: Iron Skin, which increased the user''s physical defense; Enhanced Strength, which amplified raw power; and Swiftfoot, which granted increased speed and agility. The fourth scroll contained a B-rank skill called Kinetic Burst, which allowed the user to release a burst of concentrated energy, propelling them forward with incredible force.


    "These should keep you busy for a while," Gorn said, handing the scrolls to William. "I chose these specifically because they form a solid foundation for any aspiring body enhancing mage. Master these, and you''ll be well on your way to becoming a formidable force."


    William carefully tucked the scrolls away, eager to start practicing. He was already imagining the possibilities, the incredible feats of strength and speed he would be capable of.


    "Now," Gorn continued, "we need to get you a decent weapon. You know that body enhancing mages often become Battlemages, fighting in close combat. A good sword is essential."


    William''s eyes lit up. The idea of wielding a sword and channeling his newfound magical abilities in battle thrilled him. He had always admired the strength and skill of warriors, and now he had the opportunity to become one himself.


    They left the library and headed towards the weapon district, a maze of narrow alleyways lined with shops displaying an array of gleaming blades, sturdy armor, and other combat gear. Gorn, with his experienced eye, led William to a reputable-looking establishment called "The Steel Serpent."


    Inside, the shop was filled with the clang of hammers on metal and the scent of oil and leather. Weapons of all shapes and sizes adorned the walls, from daggers and short swords to massive two-handed greatswords.


    A gruff-looking blacksmith with a thick beard and arms like tree trunks emerged from the back of the shop, wiping his brow with a rag. "Looking for something specific, gentlemen?" he asked, his voice booming.


    "We need a good sword for this young lad," Gorn replied, gesturing towards William. "He''s just starting his training as a Battlemage."


    The blacksmith''s eyes twinkled. "Ah, a Battlemage, eh? A fine choice. Requires strength, skill, and a touch of magic. Well, you''ve come to the right place." He led them to a display case filled with an assortment of swords, each one gleaming with a sharp edge.


    "Now, for a beginner," the blacksmith explained, "I recommend something balanced and versatile. Not too heavy, not too light. Something that allows for both quick strikes and powerful blows." He pulled out a sword with a sleek, double-edged blade and a simple, leather-wrapped hilt. "This one is forged from high-quality steel, with a good balance and a sharp edge. Perfect for a young warrior learning the ropes."


    William took the sword in his hand, feeling its weight and testing its balance. It felt comfortable, an extension of his own arm. He could already envision himself wielding it in battle, channeling his magic through the blade to unleash devastating attacks.


    "I''ll take it," he said, a confident grin spreading across his face.


    Gorn nodded in approval. "A good choice, lad. Now, let''s get you back to the inn. You have a lot of training ahead of you."


    As they left the shop, William clutched his new sword tightly, his heart filled with anticipation. He was ready to embark on this new path, to hone his skills, and to become powerful.


    They had nothing else to do but wait until the adventurers were ready to go with them back to Willow Creek village to take care of the corruption problem. So, William had some time to spend inside the tavern, trying to learn his new skills.


    sea??h th§× n??el Fire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.

 Chapter 19 - 19: Leaving the City

    Back in the quiet solitude of his room at the inn, William unfurled the scroll containing the Swiftfoot technique. He was eager to dive into his magical training, and this skill seemed like the perfect starting point.


    As Gorn had said, speed and agility were crucial assets for any aspiring Battlemage, useful for both offense and defense. ''If I can master this,'' William thought, ''I''ll be able to dodge attacks, close the distance on my enemies, and even escape dangerous situations.''


    He carefully read through the instructions, his brow furrowed in concentration. The scroll detailed a complex process involving a specific breathing pattern, precise mana manipulation, and the drawing of intricate runes in the air. It wasn''t as simple as just willing himself to move faster; it required a delicate interplay of mind and body, a harmonious flow of magical energy.


    William took a deep breath and began to practice. He sat cross-legged on the floor, his back straight, and closed his eyes, focusing on his breathing. He inhaled slowly, counting each second, then exhaled just as deliberately, following the rhythm described in the scroll.


    Once he felt his breathing was steady and controlled, he moved on to the next step: mana manipulation. He visualized his mana channels, the pathways through which his magical energy flowed, and tried to direct the flow to his legs and feet, as instructed.


    It was like trying to guide a wild river, the energy surging and ebbing unpredictably. He gritted his teeth in concentration, trying to maintain focus. S§×arch* The N??eFire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Finally, he attempted to draw the runes. With a trembling finger, he traced the intricate symbols in the air, his movements slow and clumsy. The runes flickered into existence, faint and unstable, before dissipating into nothingness. He tried again and again, his frustration growing with each failed attempt.


    Hours passed, and William remained stubbornly dedicated to his practice. He repeated the breathing exercises, the mana manipulation techniques, and the rune drawings, tirelessly striving for even the slightest hint of progress.


    But the skill remained elusive. His runes were still weak and unstable, his mana control erratic, and his movements felt no faster than usual.


    By nightfall, exhaustion was creeping in, and discouragement began to weigh on him. He slumped against the wall, his head in his hands. ''Why is this so difficult?'' he thought, a wave of self-doubt washing over him. ''Am I not cut out for this after all?''


    Just as his spirits were sinking, a knock came at the door. "William, you in there, lad?" Gorn''s familiar voice called out.


    "Come in," William replied, his voice muffled.


    Gorn entered the room, carrying a tray with a steaming mug and a plate of bread and cheese. He took one look at William''s dejected expression and chuckled. "Having a bit of trouble, are we?"


    William sighed. "It''s this Swiftfoot skill. I''ve been practicing all day, and I''m not making any progress."


    Gorn placed the tray on the table and sat down beside William. "Ah, that''s perfectly normal, lad. Learning new skills takes time and patience. Don''t get discouraged just because you haven''t mastered it in a day."


    He took a sip from his mug. "Let me see you try it."


    William hesitated, feeling self-conscious, but he performed the sequence of breathing, mana manipulation, and rune drawing.


    Gorn watched intently, his eyes narrowed in concentration. When William finished, he nodded slowly. "Not bad, lad. Your breathing is decent, and your mana control is showing some promise. But your runes are still a bit shaky."


    He pointed to the air where William had drawn the runes. "See how they flicker and fade? That''s because your mana flow isn''t consistent. You need to focus on maintaining a steady stream of energy as you draw."


    Gorn then demonstrated the rune drawing, his finger moving with fluid grace. The runes he created glowed brightly, pulsating with power. "Try to visualize the flow of mana as you draw," he explained. "Imagine it like ink flowing from your fingertip, forming the runes in the air."


    William nodded, absorbing Gorn''s advice. He tried again, focusing on maintaining a steady mana flow as he drew the runes. This time, they were more stable, lasting a few seconds longer before fading.


    "That''s better," Gorn encouraged. "Keep practicing, lad. You''ll get there."


    The next morning, William woke with a renewed sense of purpose. Despite the challenges he faced with the Swiftfoot skill, he was determined to master it. He spent the early hours practicing the breathing techniques and mana manipulation, his focus sharpened by the prospect of the journey ahead.


    After a quick breakfast, he met Gorn in the common room of the inn. "Ready for the day, lad?" Gorn asked, a twinkle in his eye.


    "As I''ll ever be," William replied, trying to project an air of confidence.


    They left the inn and headed towards the Adventurers'' Guild. The guild hall was a hive of activity, with adventurers of all sorts coming and going. William, still somewhat intimidated by the seasoned mercenaries and mages, stuck close to Gorn as they navigated through the bustling crowd.


    Gorn led him to a table where Aella, Borin, and Kael were already seated, their gear laid out on the table before them. They were checking their weapons and supplies, ensuring they were fully prepared for the journey ahead.


    "Ah, there you are," Aella said, nodding to William and Gorn. "Ready to head out?"


    "Just about," Gorn replied. "We just need to confirm a few details with the Guild Master."


    They approached the Guild Master''s desk, where a stern-looking woman with a sharp gaze was reviewing a stack of parchments. Gorn presented her with the contract for the Willow Creek mission, and she quickly verified the details.


    "Everything seems to be in order," she said, stamping the contract with the guild''s seal. "I wish you all the best in your endeavor. The corruption in Willow Creek is a serious matter, and the villagers will be grateful for your assistance."


    "We''ll do our best, Guild Master," Gorn assured her.


    With the formalities completed, they returned to their table to gather their belongings. William felt a flutter of nerves as he realized that they were about to depart.

 Chapter 20 - 20: Something is not right

    "Right then," Gorn clapped his hands together, a grin splitting his weathered face. "Time to head home!"


    William felt a surge of anticipation. Home. It had been strange being away from Willow Creek, even for just a few days. He missed the familiar creak of the floorboards in Gorn''s cabin, the smell of Elara''s baking bread, and the playful banter with Maya.


    They gathered their gear and left the guild hall, the midday sun glinting off the cobblestones. William, sword secure at his hip and scrolls tucked safely in his pack, felt a thrill course through him. This was it ¨C his first real adventure beyond the village.


    At the stables, William''s horse, a spirited bay mare, nickered a greeting. He swung into the saddle, feeling a familiar sense of freedom as he settled in.


    Gorn, Aella, Borin, and Kael mounted their own steeds. With a final nod to each other, they rode out of Alderanth, the city gates closing behind them like a final farewell. The road to Willow Creek beckoned, a familiar path winding through rolling hills and whispering forests.


    The journey was a welcome change. William spent hours practicing his mana manipulation, striving for a steady flow of energy despite the horse''s rhythmic gait. He watched the adventurers, their practiced movements and easy confidence a testament to their years of experience.


    Aella, the mage, conjured flames with a flick of her wrist, her spells illuminating the twilight forest with bursts of fiery brilliance. Borin, a giant of a man, wielded his axe with a power that made William''s own sword feel like a feather. Kael, ever the rogue, seemed to melt into the shadows, his movements fluid and silent.


    Evenings were spent under the vast expanse of the night sky. William, Gorn, and the adventurers shared stories and laughter around the campfire. Gorn, a seasoned warrior and a patient teacher, offered William guidance on his training, emphasizing the importance of discipline and focus. William, in turn, found himself captivated by Gorn''s tales of daring battles and narrow escapes.


    One night, as the embers glowed and the stars twinkled overhead, William found himself thinking of Elara and Maya. He missed Elara''s warm smile and Maya''s teasing laughter. He wondered how they were faring, if they were worried about Gorn and him.


    After days of travel, they finally crested the last hill and saw Willow Creek nestled in the valley below. But as they rode into the village, a sense of unease settled over William. The usual bustle was absent, replaced by an unsettling quiet. The villagers they passed seemed withdrawn and fearful.


    "Gorn," William''s voice was tight with worry. "Something''s not right."


    Gorn nodded grimly. He stopped a passing villager, his voice rough with concern. "Friend, has something happened while we were away?"


    The villager''s face crumpled. "Old Man Hemlock... he''s gone. Taken by a corrupted beast."


    Gorn''s expression hardened. "A corrupted beast? Here?"


    The villager nodded miserably. "It happened so fast. No one could stop it."


    A wave of dread washed over William. The corruption was worse than they feared, reaching into the heart of their home.


    Gorn, his face pale, spurred his horse forward. "Come on, lad! To the cabin!"


    They raced through the silent village, anxiety gnawing at them. William felt a surge of protectiveness for Elara and Maya. He had to make sure they were safe. S~ea??h the N??elFir§×.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    They reached the cabin, and Gorn burst through the door, his voice echoing through the small space. "Elara! Maya!"


    A moment of breathless silence, then a cry of relief. "Gorn!"


    Elara rushed out, her face etched with worry, but her eyes shining with relief at the sight of her husband. Behind her, Maya appeared, her expression a mixture of joy and concern.


    Gorn pulled them into a tight embrace. William stood back, a wave of warmth washing over him. Elara and Maya were safe. For now.


    But the danger wasn''t over. The corruption lurked, a shadow hanging over their village.


    The weight of Hemlock''s death settled over the small cabin. Gorn, his arm still protectively around Elara and Maya, turned to the adventurers, his expression grim. "It seems we have a serious problem," he said, his voice heavy. "The corruption has struck the village itself."


    Aella, her silver eyes blazing with determination, nodded sharply. "We need to act quickly. This cannot be allowed to spread."


    Borin, his imposing figure radiating strength, gripped his axe tightly. "Where was this creature last sighted?"


    "Near the old oak grove," a villager called from the doorway, where a small crowd had gathered, drawn by the commotion. "At the edges of the Blackwood."


    "Then that''s where we''re headed," Kael declared, already moving towards the door, his daggers glinting ominously.


    William, his heart pounding with a mix of fear and excitement, stepped forward. "I''m going with you!"


    Aella turned to him, a flicker of concern in her eyes. "William, it''s best you stay here. The Blackwood is dangerous, especially now."


    "But I can help!" William insisted, his hand instinctively reaching for his sword. "I''ve begun my magic training."


    Borin let out a gruff chuckle. "Lad, fighting a corrupted beast isn''t a child''s game. You need more than a few magic tricks for that."


    Gorn placed a reassuring hand on William''s shoulder. "He''s right, William. It''s too dangerous. Stay here with Elara and Maya. They need you here."


    Gorn turned to the adventurers, his gaze resolute. "I''ll go with you. The village needs to see that we will not cower in fear." He looked at William, his eyes filled with a fatherly concern. "Keep them safe, lad."


    As Gorn and the adventurers disappeared into the twilight, William felt a pang of frustration. He longed to be by Gorn''s side, fighting alongside him, proving his worth.


    But he knew that his duty lay here, protecting Elara and Maya. He clenched his fists, a new resolve hardening his gaze. ''I will become stronger,'' he vowed silently. ''Strong enough to face any danger, strong enough to protect those I care about.''

 Chapter 21 - 21: SSS Skill is Back

    He turned towards the cabin, and found Maya watching him, her brow furrowed with concern. "Will they be alright?" she asked, her voice barely above a whisper.


    William forced a reassuring smile. "Of course they will. Your father is one of the strongest warriors I know, and the adventurers are skilled as well. They''ll handle it."


    Maya nodded slowly, but the worry in her eyes didn''t completely disappear. "It''s just... it''s scary, you know? This corruption... it feels like it''s closing in on us."


    William understood her fear. He felt it too. But he also knew that giving in to fear wouldn''t help anyone. "We can''t let fear control us, Maya," he said, his voice firm. "We have to be strong, for your parents, for the village."


    Maya''s expression shifted, a spark of determination replacing the fear. "You''re right," she said, her voice gaining strength. "We won''t let it win." She paused, then a curious glint entered her eyes. "So, tell me about Alderanth. What was it like?"


    William''s spirits lifted. He was glad for the change in subject, for the chance to focus on something other than the looming threat of the corruption. "Alderanth is... incredible," he began, his eyes lighting up as he recalled the bustling city. "It''s huge, with towering buildings and streets filled with people from all over the kingdom. There are shops selling all sorts of things you can''t even imagine, and the Mages'' Guild..." He trailed off, remembering his experience at the guild.


    "What about the Mages'' Guild?" Maya prompted, her curiosity piqued.


    William hesitated for a moment, unsure how much to reveal about his magical training. He didn''t want to worry Maya, but he also didn''t want to keep secrets from her. "It was amazing," he finally said. "I even took an aptitude test, and it turns out I have a talent for body enhancing magic."


    Maya''s eyes widened. "Really? That''s incredible! So you''re learning magic now?"


    William nodded, a shy grin spreading across his face. "I am. It''s not easy, but I''m determined to master it." He pulled out the scroll containing the Swiftfoot technique. "I''m practicing this skill now. It''s supposed to make me faster and more agile."


    Maya leaned closer, examining the scroll with interest. "Wow, that sounds amazing! Can you show me?"


    William hesitated. He wasn''t very good at the skill yet, and he didn''t want to embarrass himself in front of Maya. But seeing the genuine excitement in her eyes, he couldn''t refuse.


    "Alright," he said, taking a deep breath. "But don''t laugh if I mess it up."


    He closed his eyes, focusing on his breathing and mana control. Then, with a concentrated effort, he attempted to draw the runes in the air. The runes flickered into existence, faint and unstable, but they held for a moment longer than before.


    Maya gasped. "That''s incredible, William! You''re amazing!"


    William blushed, pleased by her enthusiastic response. "It''s not much yet," he admitted. "But I''ll get better. I promise." sea??h th§× novel(F~)ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    The night settled over Willow Creek, casting long shadows across the village. A sense of apprehension lingered in the air, the villagers huddled in their homes, fear keeping them company.


    Inside the cabin, William sat beside Elara and Maya, the flickering candlelight casting a warm glow on their faces. They spoke in hushed tones, sharing stories and memories, trying to keep the fear at bay.


    Suddenly, the sound of approaching footsteps broke the silence. The cabin door swung open, revealing Gorn and the adventurers, their faces etched with exhaustion and grim determination.


    "We found them," Gorn announced, his voice weary but firm. "Three corrupted beasts, lurking near the old oak grove. We dealt with them."


    A wave of relief washed over William, Elara, and Maya. At least for now, the immediate threat was gone.


    Aella, her usually vibrant face pale with fatigue, sank into a chair. "Those creatures... they were stronger than we anticipated. The corruption seems to be growing more potent."


    Borin grunted in agreement, rubbing a sore shoulder. "Aye, they were fierce. But we''ll keep hunting them down, one by one, until this village is safe."


    Kael, ever restless, paced the small cabin. "But we still haven''t found the source of this corruption. Until we do, this is just a temporary fix."


    Gorn nodded grimly. "We''ll continue the search tomorrow. For tonight, we rest."


    With no room to spare in the small cabin, the adventurers set up camp outside, their bedrolls spread beneath the star-dusted sky. William, exhausted from the day''s events and his own magical practice, fell into a deep sleep.


    Dawn broke, painting the sky with hues of orange and pink. William woke with a start, a strange sensation tingling through his body. A notification blinked before his eyes, its words sending a jolt of excitement through him:


    [Chrono Shift (SSS Rank) has finished cooling down. You can now travel through time once again.]


    William''s heart leaped as he read the notification. Chrono Shift was ready! He couldn''t wait to use it again. He quickly finished his breakfast, a surge of energy propelling him out of the cabin.


    "I''m going to train!" he called to Elara and Maya, already halfway out the door.


    He made his way to his favorite spot ¨C a secluded hill overlooking Willow Creek. The morning air was crisp, and a light mist clung to the ground, painting the landscape with an ethereal beauty.


    William reached the top of the hill, his breath misting in the cool air, and took a moment to appreciate the view. From here, he could see the entire village spread out before him, peaceful and quiet in the morning light.


    He turned his attention to the task at hand. Chrono Shift. He closed his eyes, focusing on the swirling energy within him, the power to manipulate time. He pictured his destination ¨C the era of the Primal Mages, a time when magic was wild and untamed.


    With a surge of will, he activated his skill. The air around him shimmered and distorted, forming a swirling vortex of colors. A portal opened, a gateway to the past. He took a deep breath, a mix of excitement and trepidation swirling within him, and stepped through.

 Chapter 22 - 22: Returning, and Looking for Civilization

    The portal shimmered with an enticing glow, and William stepped through, eager to explore the primitive world of Aethel. He hoped this time he''d find the mentor he desperately sought.


    He materialized on a familiar hilltop, the same spot as his previous visit, though who knew how much time had passed in this world? ''So, the destination isn''t random,'' he mused, ''it''s linked to the portal''s location. At least that''s something!''


    Checking his timer, William saw he had 16 hours ¨C longer than his last trip. His mastery over the portal skill was clearly growing. He descended into the dense forest, his senses alert for any sign of life. It wasn''t long before the local fauna took an interest in him.


    A seemingly harmless frog hopped onto the path, but William knew better than to be fooled by appearances. In a flash, the creature bristled with poisonous spikes and launched them like darts.


    William reacted instantly, diving behind a thick tree trunk just in time. As the frog paused, its spike reserves depleted, William seized his chance. He dashed forward, his sword a blur of motion, and cleaved the creature in two.


    [+30 EXP]


    ''Is that a lot?'' he wondered. His system didn''t reveal how much experience he needed to level up, but every bit counted.


    Pressing onward, William hacked through the dense undergrowth. He noticed something curious ¨C the path he''d cleared on his last visit was still visible, the severed branches and vines unchanged. Time in Aethel clearly flowed differently; his past actions remained in the past.


    This realization was both exhilarating and unsettling. It confirmed that his journeys were real, not mere dreams, but it also meant he had to be mindful of the consequences of his actions.


    For now, though, his thirst for power outweighed his caution. He continued his trek, battling any beast that crossed his path, determined to find civilization in this untamed wilderness.


    William''s objective was to find any vestige of civilization in that place. At first glance, all he could see was dense vegetation.


    ''Maybe I should climb a tree and take a look around,'' William thought.


    Most of the trees were difficult to climb, but he found one that was perfect. It had branches that made climbing easier, and the top of the tree had a less dense canopy, allowing for a clear view of the surroundings.


    William climbed the tree, holding onto the branches and jumping with phenomenal agility. He was getting stronger, quite different from when he first appeared in that world.


    His attributes were higher, and his growth was certainly greater than that of ''normal people'' since he was one of the heroes summoned to that world.


    Anyway, as soon as he climbed up, William looked around and saw a vast green field. The sky was beautiful, clear, blue, and the view of the entire valley filled with forest was simply breathtaking.


    For a moment, William forgot why he had climbed that tree. He stayed there, enjoying the view, looking at the surroundings, listening to the birds singing and the sound of a river flowing.


    It was a very beautiful place. Not that it wasn''t beautiful back in the village ¨C in the present time of Aethel ¨C but it was indeed more beautiful in that more primitive, more natural way.


    After returning to reality, William decided to specifically look for traces of civilization. He didn''t expect to find a city there, but maybe a village would suffice. sea??h th§× n?vel_Fire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    He looked in every direction, and that''s when he noticed a small plume of smoke in the sky. William wasn''t foolish.


    ''That looks like a chimney or a bonfire,'' he thought.


    The smoke was coming from a less dense part of the forest and seemed to be near the river as well, but it wasn''t that close. William would have to walk for a long time to get there, especially considering how difficult it was to walk through the forest.


    But he had a question. Would the language spoken in this era be the same? He hadn''t read many books about Aethel''s past. From what he understood, all the kingdoms spoke the same language since they were once a single kingdom but had been divided.


    However, the time William was in seemed very primitive. Perhaps no kingdom even existed at that point.


    Even with those doubts in mind, William decided to venture out and go to the place where the smoke was. He needed to explore and use his skill in the best possible way. It didn''t make sense to use his SSS-rank skill just to stand still.


    Therefore, William descended from the tree and headed towards his destination. He decided to stay close to the river and use it to walk through the forest, thus having a point of reference.


    Not only that, but the vegetation was less dense near the river, allowing him to walk without having to cut through the forest all the time.


    However, William soon found the downside of his strategy. The river was a place where various kinds of magical beasts went to drink water, and he was attacked.


    The first creature that attacked him looked like a rabbit the size of a dog, its eyes were red, and its mouth had sharp teeth, like a shark''s.


    Its fur was brown, making it camouflage very well in the muddy parts of the forest. This magical mutant rabbit jumped towards William with its mouth open, wanting to bite his neck!


    The animal was fast, very fast. But of all William''s qualities, speed was his best. So much so that it was his highest attribute: 21 points in agility.


    He was able to dodge the creature''s attack in time, moving to the side with an agile and precise roll.


    As soon as he finished the roll, William drew his sword and decided to charge towards the rabbit, not giving it a chance to escape or attempt another attack.


    Again, his high agility helped him reach the rabbit swiftly, and with a slash of his sword, William struck the creature''s legs!


    After that, he jumped back, dodging the claw attack that the rabbit tried to land on him.


    "I already expected you to do that," William said out loud.


    The rabbit''s legs were injured from the sword strike. A lot of blood was flowing from the wounds, and William noticed that the creature''s movements were impaired.


    That was precisely the reason for the attack. William wasn''t stupid. He knew that for someone like him, who had speed as his best factor, this kind of hit-and-run combat was ideal until his opponent died.


    Some might call him a coward, but William wasn''t worried about that. In the end, he just wanted the EXP. He just wanted to get stronger.

 Chapter 23 - 23: Level Up, and Meeting Someone

    The rabbit even tried to attack William again, but was unable to. The bleeding was too intense, and with a few more sword strikes from William, the creature died.


    [+120 EXP]


    [Level UP]


    A smile spread across William''s face as he saw the level-up notification. Leveling up was the key to his survival and, more importantly, to his revenge. He remembered the humiliation he had suffered at the hands of the other heroes, and a wave of anger washed over him. ''I''ll show them what I''m capable of,'' he thought, clenching his fists. ''They''ll regret underestimating me.''


    After defeating the creature, William continued to follow the river, heading towards the smoke he had seen in the distance.


    He walked for a long time, making his way through the dense forest. The sound of his footsteps echoed through the woods, mingling with the birdsong and the buzzing of insects. Along the way, he fought some creatures ¡ª small goblins and giant spiders ¡ª but luckily, they were all weak.


    ''That smoke is even farther than I thought,'' William thought, wiping the sweat from his forehead.


    Finally, he reached the place where the smoke was coming from. Near the river, on a small hill, he saw a wooden house. It was a simple building, just one story, with log walls and a thatched roof. Around it, there were crops of corn, wheat, and pumpkins, and some animals ¡ª chickens pecking at the ground and cows grazing ¡ª completed the bucolic landscape.


    It was a cozy place, but William had no idea who lived there. What if it was a dangerous person? Above all, he needed to communicate. Would whoever lived there speak the same language?


    William walked slowly towards the house. As he approached, he noticed the curtain moving and a face staring curiously at him.


    It was an old man, with a long white beard and gray hair that fell over his shoulders. His clothes were simple and worn with time.


    The man seemed surprised to see William. He opened the door, but hesitantly said, "Stay a little further away for now. I don''t know you."


    William sighed with relief. He understood what the man said. ''Could it be some kind of summoned hero power?'' he wondered. ''Maybe my System is translating his language.''


    "Young man, what brings you to such an isolated place?" the old man asked, his voice raspy. "I''m surprised to see you alive. Walking through the forest is dangerous."


    "I''m lost," William replied, trying to appear as harmless as possible. "I''ve been attacked several times. Luckily, I have this," he said, showing the scabbard of his sword.


    The old man narrowed his eyes, looking at William suspiciously. "You don''t look like someone who''s lost in the woods," he said, frowning. "Your hair is neat, and your clothes are barely dirty."


    "I... I was careful," William stammered, disconcerted.


    "I see," the old man said after a pause. "How can I help you?"


    William, still a little awkward, asked, "I wanted to know if there is any civilization around here... Maybe a village or a city?"


    The old man shook his head. "Unfortunately not. You''ll have to walk for quite a while before you find a civilization. As far as I know, if you follow the river, you''ll eventually reach one. But as I said, traveling at night is not a good idea."


    The news was not good. A shadow of frustration crossed William''s face. ''That far? How will I get there?'' he thought, discouraged. He still didn''t know if he would be able to keep the progress he made within that dimension.


    The place where he appeared was the same place where he opened the portal in Aethel''s current time. This meant that he would have to travel the entire way again if he continued to open the portal in the same place.


    ''I need to find a way to save my progress. That''s the only way I''ll be able to reach civilization since it''s so far away...'' he thought, worried.


    William, curious, asked, "And what are you doing here, so far away from everyone?"


    The old man, with his tired look, said, "I was a powerful adventurer during my life. Now I just want to relax and be at peace. I''m tired of always being in trouble."


    "I understand...", said William, still unsure of what to do. "Well, thank you anyway. See you later, then."


    William turned to leave, but the old man called him: "Wait! Are you crazy, young man? You can''t go at night. Spend the night here, at least. I can offer you a bed in the barn."


    William hesitated for a moment. '' Should I trust him? He seems harmless, but...'' he thought cautiously. But the prospect of spending the night alone in the forest was even more frightening.


    "Thank you," said William with a grateful smile. "I accept your offer."


    The old man smiled back and led William to the barn. It was a rustic building, with wooden walls and the smell of hay. In the corner, there was a makeshift bed with a straw mattress and some blankets. "I hope it''s comfortable enough," said the old man.


    "It''s perfect," replied William, feeling relieved and grateful for the unexpected hospitality.


    William was a little tired; this was the first negative thing about his ability. While time passed normally in that dimension, it would remain static in Aethel''s current time.


    In other words, extended stays in this dimension could disrupt his sleep patterns and lead to exhaustion. But the rewards far outweighed the risks, in William''s mind.


    As he lay down on the makeshift bed, a notification surprised him.


    [Resting place detected. Would you like to set this location as your respawn point?]


    Excited by the prospect of a reliable haven, William eagerly accepted. At least one of his problems had been solved.


    As soon as night came, William decided to sleep and woke up back on that hill near Willow Creek. The morning sun was shining brightly, and the air was fresh and invigorating.


    William got up, feeling rested after a good night''s sleep.


    ''It''s good that I managed to save my progress,'' he thought, observing the surrounding landscape. The dense forest stretched to the horizon, and the sound of the river flowing in the distance broke the silence of the morning.


    After spending the time limit in the dimension, William had to return. Finding the first person in that dimension made him feel great, even if he hadn''t gained that many levels.


    It was normal for evolution to slow down as the level increased. But William was determined to get stronger.


    ''I need to be prepared for any challenge,'' he thought as he descended the hill towards Gorn''s house. S§×arch* The ¦Çov§×lFire .net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.

 Chapter 24 - 24: Three Days

    William returned to the village. The narrow dirt streets were practically deserted. Most of the villagers remained in their homes, with doors and windows locked. The fear of the corrupted beasts still hung in the air, creating a somber and oppressive atmosphere.


    But the presence of the adventurers brought some relief. They patrolled the streets, with gleaming armor and weapons in hand, ready to defend the village from any threat. If any villager needed to go out into the forest, one of the adventurers would accompany them, ensuring their safety.


    Their mission was not only to protect the villagers but also to investigate the cause of the corruption affecting the magical beasts. They were experienced warriors, sent from the capital to solve the mystery that plagued the region.


    As soon as William arrived at Gorn''s house, he heard him talking to Aella, one of the adventurers. She was a tall and imposing woman, with a serious expression and piercing eyes. Her leather armor was impeccably polished, and a long sword hung from her belt.


    "Are you sure the corruption is coming from that place? From that cave?" Gorn asked, his voice full of concern.


    Aella nodded firmly. "Yes. It''s coming from a cave near the river. We found traces that confirm our discovery, but we haven''t been there to check yet."


    The most impressive thing was that the cave in question was close to where William had been summoned by Elric''s magic.


    ''Could Elric be the reason for this corruption?'' William wondered, intrigued. Elric had summoned the heroes and sent him away with powerful magic.


    Gorn noticed William''s arrival and interrupted his conversation with Aella.


    "William! How are you? I heard you went to get some air on the hill."


    "Actually, I went to train," William replied. "I have a lot of magic to learn now."


    "Yes, indeed," Gorn agreed. "Well, I believe you heard our conversation. Remember not to go there, okay? Leave this dangerous mission to us."


    Gorn didn''t want William to get involved in the mission. It was too dangerous for a young man still as weak as he was.


    But William thought differently. He was getting stronger quickly and wanted to test his progress.


    "I understand, Gorn," William said. "I won''t go there. But... do you have any idea when you''re going to explore the cave?"


    "Well..." Gorn began as he searched for a drink in the kitchen. "I think in about three days? We still want to clear the area well to ensure there aren''t too many monsters while we''re away."


    William smiled. "And what if I happen to master my first skill, Swiftfoot, in three days? Would you let me go?"


    Gorn seemed surprised. "Master that skill in three days? Even though it''s a beginner level skill, it''s impossible to master in three days. Well, that skill would give you a better chance of escaping if something happened, so yes, I''d let you go without a problem if you mastered it in three days."


    He didn''t believe William could master the skill in three days. Not that William lacked talent, but mastering a skill took time.


    ''I can work hard and use my SSS skill to train in that place without losing time. That will increase my chances! '' William thought, a determined glint in his eyes.


    Determined, William went to his room in Gorn''s house and resumed his training. He focused on drawing the runes for the Swiftfoot skill. With each attempt, the runes glowed brighter and lingered longer in the air. It was a sign that he was improving, albeit slowly.


    He was so engrossed in his practice that he didn''t notice Maya enter the room. She stood silently in the doorway, her eyes wide with fascination as she watched him manipulate the magical energy. To her, magic was mysterious, powerful, and beautiful¡ªsomething she yearned to learn one day.


    "Why don''t you ask your father if you can try it? You might have a talent for magic," William suggested, noticing her presence.


    Maya shook her head. "I don''t know if he''ll approve. But I''ll try, okay? Imagine if we could both learn magic at the academy!"


    Realizing she was getting carried away, Maya excused herself. "I''ll go see if Elara needs help in the kitchen. See you later."


    Maya rushed out the door, her face flushed. She desperately searched for a place to hide her embarrassment.


    William, oblivious to her distress, was preoccupied with his newfound skill. The progress he was making thrilled him.


    He devoted the remainder of the day to honing his Swiftfoot technique. He paused occasionally for meals and, at one point, showered to avoid his room becoming unbearable.


    By nightfall, exhaustion had taken hold. After a day of intense rune drawing and mana control, William craved rest. S~ea??h the N??elFir§×.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    He slept soundly through the night. Like a stoic rock beside the ocean, he remained undisturbed by any waves of noise or movement. Nothing could rouse him from his slumber.


    The following morning began with breakfast and farewells.


    "Heading to the hill for training, alright?" William called out as he departed.


    William was intensely focused on improving. He was determined to master that skill within three days, and with the dedication he displayed, it just might be possible.


    One of his greatest assets was his SSS-rank special ability, which he activated immediately upon reaching the hill.


    The cooldown period had ended. A portal materialized before William, and he stepped through.


    He found himself in the familiar barn the old man had offered him for shelter. It was early morning.


    William emerged from the barn, his movements catching the old man''s attention. "Awake, are you? How about some breakfast?" he inquired.


    Although he had just eaten, William wouldn''t refuse the offer.


    "That would be great!" William replied, entering the old man''s house.


    The interior of the house was tidy and clean. The furniture was simple, made of wood, but everything was spotless. William noted the old man''s care for his home.


    "My name is Jinra, by the way. And yours?" the old man said.


    "William. It''s a pleasure to meet you."


    "William... an unusual name. Well, no matter. Please, have a seat," Jinra said, gesturing towards a chair.


    Breakfast was already prepared, consisting of eggs from the chickens he raised. William ate lightly, not wanting to appear impolite in Jinra''s home.


    "Any plans for today, young man?" Jinra inquired.


    William considered for a moment before replying, "Actually, I''m hoping to learn this skill."


    He produced the Swiftfoot manual, and to his surprise, the man seemed familiar with it!


    "Ah, a body enhancement magic. Yes, I know how to use this skill, and many others. Would you like some help?"


    William couldn''t contain his happiness. ''Did I just find a mentor?''

 Chapter 25 - 25: Learning from an Old Master

    Jinra was impressive. William watched him utilize Swiftfoot, the very skill he was struggling to learn.


    But Jinra executed the ability with far greater speed and mastery. The runes appeared in the air in less than a second, then flew towards his body. William could sense the difference in Jinra.


    "The runes attach to the body, providing the benefits of the magic in question," Jinra explained, pulling back his sleeve to reveal the runes inscribed on his skin.


    They resembled tattoos.


    "You make it look so easy," William said, staring at the ground. "I''m trying to learn, but I can barely keep the runes in the air."


    "Let me see you do it," Jinra said.


    William nodded, then mirrored the old mage''s actions. He visualized the specific runes for the Swiftfoot spell, and attempted to form them.


    To do this, he needed to manipulate his mana precisely, or the runes wouldn''t appear at all. He was already good enough to form the runes without a problem, the difficulty lay in sustaining them with enough energy to stabilize the spell.


    Jinra watched him form the runes¡ªmuch slower than he himself could¡ªand hold them in the air. But after about five seconds, they flickered and dissolved.


    "Tell me," Jinra said, his gaze intent, "why didn''t you complete the spell? Cast the runes onto your body."


    The request caught William off guard. He hadn''t expected that at all. His reasoning was simple: according to his studies, one needed to maintain the runes intact for a full minute. Only then would a mage be ready to cast the spell itself.


    But Jinra clearly disagreed. Was this common knowledge among more ancient mages? Or was it unique to him?


    "What do you mean? I thought I had to hold the runes for a full minute before I could cast the spell," William said, confusion evident in his voice.


    Jinra chuckled, a deep rumble in his chest. "Where did you learn that, young one? That theory was refuted long ago by the elves. They are the most skilled magic users we know."


    "What?" William exclaimed, shocked.


    "Their studies showed that it''s best to cast the spell directly. This allows you to master the skill much faster," Jinra explained.


    William had been using his SSS-Class skill recently, and it was already paying dividends. Of course, he still needed to test Jinra''s claims, but the prospect was exciting.


    ''There must be something to this,'' William thought. ''Surely other mages must have tried casting the spell before mastering the runes...''


    He couldn''t fathom a world where no other mage had attempted this. In fact, if this method was superior according to elven research, why wasn''t anyone in Aethel currently using it?


    "But there''s a secret, of course," Jinra continued, his voice drawing William back to the present. "You know how you''re channeling mana into the runes to sustain them? You must stop channeling and then cast them onto your body. The feeling is similar to when you''re absorbing mana."


    William listened intently. "But is there any danger in using magic this way?" he asked. It seemed far superior to the method he was accustomed to, so William was wary. There had to be a catch.


    Jinra nodded. "Yes. Forcing the runes onto your body before you have complete control, like holding them for a full minute as you mentioned, can damage your body. That''s why the secret lies in physical training. Most mages neglect this completely, assuming it''s only for warriors."


    He was beginning to understand the key difference between ancient and modern mages. In present-day Aethel, mages rarely focused on physical conditioning. The only exceptions were battle mages like William.


    Scholarship and research had become paramount, leading to a predominantly academic environment. This explained the widespread adherence to the method of sustaining runes for a full minute before attempting to cast a spell.


    William theorized that because Aethel was a far more dangerous place in ancient times¡ªwith fewer safe havens and beasts lurking everywhere¡ªpeople needed to master magic quickly, and their bodies were naturally more resilient due to the harsh conditions.


    It seemed to him that mages of the past were inherently stronger. Everything he had read and heard supported this: the most powerful mages and warriors in human history all hailed from bygone eras.


    "I understand," William said, a thoughtful frown creasing his brow. "Do you think my body is prepared to handle this skill?"


    Jinra stepped closer, placing a hand on William''s shoulder. He closed his eyes, concentrating. After a moment, he opened them and declared, "Yes, you are ready. In fact, your body is quite strong for someone who doesn''t specifically train for it. Are you already at level 12?"


    "Yes, exactly. How did you know?" William asked, surprised. He could sense the aura of his opponents to get a general idea of their power, but discerning their exact level was impossible.


    "I can tell because I''m touching you and concentrating," Jinra explained. "It''s usually difficult to determine someone''s level during combat. And honestly, levels shouldn''t be your primary focus. Attributes can be increased in other ways, and it''s quite common for people with lower levels to be incredibly strong." S§×arch* The novel(F~)ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    William was absorbing a wealth of new information. Eager to put it into practice, he decided to attempt the spell. Just as before, he formed the runes. Once they were stable, he stopped channeling mana and focused on absorbing them into his body.


    It worked on the first try! The runes flowed into him, and he could feel the difference instantly.


    "It worked! I feel so much faster," William exclaimed, a grin spreading across his face.


    [+20 Agility points]


    [+10% movement speed]


    Jinra was impressed. "You learn quickly. Congratulations. Now your focus should be on using the skill and maximizing its potential. In the case of Swiftfoot, that means running and jumping around to take advantage of the extra speed."


    He was subtly encouraging William to practice diligently, but this was already a fantastic start.


    William, brimming with excitement, left Jinra''s house and ventured outside. He began running and climbing trees, just as Jinra had suggested. Everything felt easier, more fluid. He couldn''t wait to show Gorn his progress.


    ''He''ll be shocked!'' he thought, a surge of anticipation coursing through him.

 Chapter 26 - 26: Sincere Talk with Jinra

    Running and climbing were excellent ways to utilize the benefits of Swiftfoot, but Jinra had more in mind. He challenged William to a sparring session¡ªwith wooden swords, of course.


    From the first clash, William realized Jinra was incredibly skilled, far surpassing even Gorn, who was already a formidable warrior.


    "Forgive my curiosity," William asked, panting between parries, "were you part of the army or something similar?"


    Although the kingdom was much smaller back then, it still had a standing army.


    "Indeed, you are correct," Jinra replied, a grin flashing across his face as he effortlessly deflected a blow. "I was the commander of the army, though I am now retired."


    "That explains a lot! You''re incredibly strong. I don''t stand a chance against you," William admitted, breathless from the exertion.


    "Relax, William," Jinra said with a chuckle, his movements still fluid despite his age. "I reckon the number of people who could best me in combat is quite small, even in my old age. You are a bit behind others your age, but you possess greater potential."


    Once again, the differences between eras were stark. William knew he was decent in combat¡ªnot exceptional, but better than most mages and battle mages his age who focused solely on research while studying at the magic academies. Yet, he was still far behind the mages and battle mages of the past.


    "What do I need to reach their level?" William asked, gritting his teeth as he parried a swift strike.


    "Experience," Jinra replied, his wooden sword a blur of motion. "It''s common for Acolytes to embark on practical missions, hunting beasts and the like. With time, you''ll improve as well."


    From time to time, William''s Swiftfoot spell would wear off, and he''d need to recast it. Even with his passive skill enhancing the duration of his body-enhancement magic, it didn''t last forever.


    Furthermore, he was still learning, so the duration was even shorter. But Jinra patiently waited for him, seemingly content with the breaks. In fact, he appeared genuinely happy to have the company.


    "It''s wonderful to have someone to talk to and practice with," Jinra admitted, leaning against a weathered oak tree. "Despite enjoying the solitude here, I''ve been feeling a bit lonely lately. It''s been two years since I moved here."


    "Why did you move?" William asked, curious. The two were sitting on the grass, taking a break from their sparring session.


    "My son is in the army, so I don''t have much time to see him," Jinra explained, a hint of sadness in his voice. "And my grandson is studying at a magic school. I came here to have some time alone after my wife passed away, but I think I''ll return to the city soon to be closer to them."


    An idea sparked in William''s mind. He could travel to the city with Jinra! That would make his journey far easier and safer.


    Jinra seemed to read his thoughts, or perhaps he anticipated them after William''s earlier inquiries about the nearest city. "Soon for me means at least a year," Jinra said, a knowing smile playing on his lips. "And I imagine you won''t be staying here that long. After all, if you want to enroll in a magic school, you need to be in the city in six months."


    A magic school in this era... The prospect intrigued William. He had already considered enrolling in one back in present-day Aethel. If he could attend one in the past as well, he could gain an even deeper understanding of magic!


    "But wouldn''t it be dangerous for me to travel alone?" William asked, a hint of worry in his voice.


    "Not particularly," Jinra reassured him. "The journey to the city takes two months, so we have roughly three months to train. Considering your progress, I''m confident I can make you capable enough to survive on your own in that time."


    "And there''s more," Jinra added, his eyes twinkling. "You can travel with others who are also seeking entry into the school. I believe a caravan departs from a village not too far from here. I can guide you there when the time comes."


    Things seemed to be falling into place for William. He had found a powerful mentor¡ªwho, unfortunately, could only teach him for three months¡ªbut he already had a plan to enroll in a magic school and further his magical education!


    "I understand," William said, a renewed determination burning in his eyes. "Well then, let''s get back to training. I can''t afford to relax just yet." He rose and retrieved his wooden sword.


    Jinra smiled, his eyes crinkling at the corners. "Eager to take another beating from me, are you?"


    They resumed their sparring, training for hours. The constant use of Swiftfoot drained William''s mana, and he eventually needed to rest. Sustaining the spell for hours on end was impossible for him at this stage. In fact, Jinra was surprised he had lasted as long as he did.


    "Unfortunately, you''ll have to sleep in the barn again," Jinra said as the sun began to dip below the horizon. "And it''s not because I''m suspicious of you. It''s just that I only have the one bedroom. Is that alright with you?"


    Of all the challenges William faced, sleeping in a less-than-comfortable bed was hardly a concern.


    "No problem at all," William replied gratefully. "Thank you for the training."


    "Think nothing of it. I appreciate the company. I''m going to make us some dinner, so go take a bath. You reek," Jinra said, wrinkling his nose in mock disgust. He headed back to the house and tossed William a towel.


    While William had been pushed to his limits during the training, Jinra seemed as fresh as a daisy. It was truly remarkable.


    William made his way to the river to bathe. Perhaps it was Jinra''s presence in the area, but no creatures dared to disturb him as he washed off the sweat and grime.


    By the time he returned, dinner was almost ready. Jinra had prepared a venison stew from a deer he had hunted and some potatoes he had grown near his house. The aroma was intoxicating, and William''s stomach rumbled in anticipation. S§×ar?h the n??el Fire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    He checked his System; it indicated he still had two hours remaining in this dimension. Plenty of time to eat and settle down for the night before returning.

 Chapter 27 - 27: Impressing Gorn

    William took the opportunity to engage in further conversation with Jinra during dinner. They had grown closer, and William was always eager to learn from those with more experience.


    "You''re doing very well," Jinra praised him, a warm smile gracing his weathered features. "But remember, this is just the beginning. The training will become progressively more challenging."


    It wasn''t as if William hadn''t expected that. Or rather, hadn''t wanted that. He was eager to push himself.


    "Thank you," William replied, "and yes, I know. Well, I think I''ll get some rest, Jinra. We can talk more tomorrow, right?"


    "Of course," Jinra assured him.


    William''s time in the past was dwindling. He returned to the barn where he was sleeping and lay down, feigning sleep. He wasn''t particularly tired yet, but he wanted to be ready to return to the present when the time came.


    And then, just like that, he found himself back on the hill where he had opened the portal. The time was exactly the same as when he had used the skill ¨C early morning.


    ''It seems time freezes in the past while I''m gone, too'' William mused. ''I suppose that''s how my skill works at least...''


    It seemed to make the most sense, but he couldn''t be sure. One thing was certain: time in the present didn''t progress while he was in the past.


    After spending a couple of hours enjoying the view, William decided to return to Gorn''s cabin. He pretended to have been out training, as returning immediately after leaving would seem strange.


    Gorn was waiting for him. "How was the training?" he asked, his eyes filled with curiosity.


    William was tempted to reveal that he had already learned Swiftfoot. If it were anyone else, he might have hesitated. But Gorn was someone he trusted.


    "If I tell you," William began, leaning in conspiratorially, "do you promise to keep it a secret? Especially from those adventurers I don''t trust."


    Gorn frowned, a bit confused. "Of course, but what do you mean? I don''t understand."


    With a grin, William declared, thumping his chest, "I can already use Swiftfoot! Just don''t tell anyone that I learned it so quickly. That''s what I want to keep secret."


    "What?!" Gorn exclaimed, his voice booming through the cabin.


    "Stop joking around," Gorn scoffed, though a hint of wonder flickered in his eyes. "I know you''re talented, but that''s just impossible."


    William wasn''t offended. In fact, exceeding Gorn''s expectations by such a wide margin felt exhilarating.


    Without a word, he channeled his mana, constructing the runes for Swiftfoot. Then, he seamlessly imbued them into his body, activating the spell''s effects.


    Gorn watched intently, his jaw slack with disbelief. He was speechless, utterly stunned by the display.


    After a long moment, he finally managed to stammer, "Th-that''s... incredible. Truly incredible. It seems like a waste for you to stay here in this village. Have you ever considered formally studying magic at a school?"


    Just as Jinra had encouraged William to pursue formal magical education, Gorn seemed to share the sentiment.


    "I''ve never really considered it," William admitted, pondering the idea. "Is it truly worth it?"


    "Of course!" Gorn exclaimed, his enthusiasm bubbling over. "Not only will you learn a great deal, but upon graduating, you''ll have numerous paths to choose from. You could become a researcher, a professor at a magic school, or even join the army at a much higher rank. People with average talent do very well in life with formal training, so imagine what you could achieve!"


    Jinra hadn''t emphasized these benefits, which was understandable. Times were different then. There were fewer cities, fewer schools, and everything was far more primitive. But in present-day Aethel, things were different.


    "Now that you mention it," William said, his interest piqued, "studying does sound very appealing. Am I even the right age to enroll?" He wondered if there were younger students or if he would be at a disadvantage compared to those who had started earlier.


    "Most students enroll earlier," Gorn explained, "but it''s not uncommon to have older students. However, you would likely be placed in an advanced class, which means you''ll need to study diligently. I believe recruitment begins in six months..."


    Remarkably, it was the same recruitment period Jinra had mentioned. Had the recruitment window remained unchanged throughout history, or was it merely a coincidence?


    Regardless, William now had a goal to strive for in the next six months, and the prospect filled him with excitement.


    "And Gorn," William began, a slight hesitation in his voice, "regarding Maya..."


    Gorn immediately interjected, "If you''re smitten with her, I''ll consent to your marriage, but only after you graduate and make something of yourself."


    William blushed, slightly embarrassed. "Actually, I just wanted to talk about possibly sending her to study magic as well... She''s very curious to learn."


    "Oh," Gorn mumbled, rubbing the back of his neck sheepishly. "That''s what you meant..."


    "Well, I''ll talk to her, and maybe start some training as well," Gorn replied, stroking his beard thoughtfully. "But I think she''ll likely enter the school in a year''s time. I want her to have a solid foundation before she goes."


    "Alright, I understand," William said. "Well, I''m going to my room to read for a bit..." S§×arch* The novel(F~)ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "Of course, go ahead," Gorn said with a wave of his hand.


    William headed to his room, intending to take a nap. He was feeling the effects of his disrupted sleep from traveling between the past and present.


    Now that he had practically mastered Swiftfoot, William decided to start learning the other skill he had purchased: Kinetic Burst. This skill would grant him a short-range teleportation ability, like a dash or blink. It would undoubtedly prove useful in combat and exploration.


    He still had two days until their expedition to the cave to investigate the corruption plaguing Willow Creek, and William was determined to learn this new skill before then.


    With his newfound approach to mastering skills, he was confident he could do it. The only problem was that his SSS-ranked skill was still on cooldown, meaning he couldn''t visit Jinra for guidance.


    ''When will it be off cooldown?'' William wondered, frustrated. The information wasn''t displayed in his System interface. He pushed the thought aside and focused on learning Kinetic Burst.


    Two days passed, and things in the village took a turn for the worse...

 Chapter 28 - 28: Unexpected Sight at the Caves Depths

    Despite the adventurers'' constant patrols, the situation in the village remained tense. The unsettling aura of corruption still clung to the air, a constant reminder of the looming threat. The villagers knew true relief would only come once the source was destroyed.


    The plan was to explore the cave ¨C the suspected origin point ¨C in three days. However, a day earlier than anticipated, a pillar of black light erupted from the earth, a beacon of darkness rising towards the sky.


    The adventurers, alerted to the ominous phenomenon, gathered in front of Gorn''s house.


    "It''s coming from the direction of the cave," Kael announced, his brow furrowed with concern. "We''ll have to go there and put an end to this."


    Borin and Aella nodded in agreement. Gorn, his expression grim, concurred. And William, despite the obvious danger, felt a surge of determination. He needed to push himself, to face challenges head-on if he wanted to grow stronger.


    Gorn, as the one financing the adventurers and a formidable warrior in his own right, naturally assumed leadership. He commanded the respect of the group.


    "Let''s head there," he declared, his voice ringing with authority. "Today, this situation ends!" He turned towards the house. "Elara, Maya, stay inside and keep everything locked," he instructed. "William will be coming with me this time."


    "What?" everyone exclaimed in unison.


    Elara and Maya were shocked. In their eyes, William was still too inexperienced to face such a threat. The adventurers, too, were taken aback.


    "Are you sure?" Aella questioned, her voice laced with worry. "This will be dangerous, and he''s just a young, untested Acolyte."


    Gorn, a man of his word, wouldn''t go back on his promise to William. "Yes, I''m sure," he stated firmly. "Let''s go."


    They sped through the forest, their pace brisk. William struggled to keep up; the adventurers and Gorn were undeniably powerful, their strides eating up the terrain with ease. But he pushed himself, his agility, his greatest strength, propelling him forward. He refused to fall behind.


    Soon, they arrived at the source of the ominous pillar of black energy. As they had suspected, it emanated from within the cave, its entrance shrouded in an unnatural darkness.


    "This is the place," Kael said, his voice low and serious, "the source of the energy corrupting the magical creatures. We need to proceed with caution."


    "Indeed," Borin added, his hand resting on the hilt of his sword. "With this much energy pouring out, if a creature has been corrupted here, it will be incredibly powerful."


    They advanced slowly into the cave, weapons at the ready. Kael notched an arrow in his bow, Aella clutched her wooden staff, and Borin hefted his greatsword. Gorn and William mirrored his stance, swords drawn, their senses alert for any sign of danger.


    It was nighttime, and William realized this area was where he had materialized after being teleported by Elric''s magic. He remembered it vividly because of the wolf attack and Gorn''s timely rescue. Of course, it wasn''t the exact same spot, and he had no recollection of the cave itself, but the familiarity of the surroundings offered a strange sense of d¨¦j¨¤ vu.


    Aella, a mage specializing in long-range magic, conjured an orb of light, illuminating the cavern with an ethereal glow.


    ''Incredible!'' William thought, impressed. It was like a floating torch, providing illumination without occupying either of her hands. Aella summoned several more, expertly directing them to reveal hidden corners and crevices.


    "It''s eerily quiet," Gorn commented, his voice echoing in the cavern. "But we need to reach the end. The source of the dark energy must be there."


    Everyone agreed. William felt a knot of anxiety tighten in his stomach, his heart pounding, and a thin sheen of sweat forming on his brow. Gorn, noticing his apprehension, placed a reassuring hand on his shoulder. "Relax, lad. I''m here to protect you."


    His words calmed William somewhat, but he remained vigilant. Thankfully, no beasts attacked them on their journey deeper into the cave. And then, they reached the end.


    What they found there was completely unexpected. A lone man stood before an altar, clad in leather garments, resembling a hunter from the surrounding woods. He grasped a sword plunged into the stone, a blade as black as obsidian, radiating the malevolent energy that had plagued the village.


    The hunter, startled by their arrival, erupted in manic laughter. "You''re too late!" he cackled. "I will be the one to claim this treasure! This power will be mine!"


    He wrenched the sword free, and the pillar of dark energy surged into his body. Black veins spider-webbed across his skin as his mana spiked dramatically. It was a different kind of mana, chaotic and sinister.


    "Damn it," Gorn cursed, his eyes narrowing. "That''s a demonic artifact. Prepare for battle! This man is about to become a serious threat!"


    A dark aura crackled around the hunter''s transformed body, his former weakness replaced by an ominous power. The black veins pulsed with an alien energy, and his eyes burned with malevolent intent. Sear?h the N?vel?ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    William''s mind reeled. ''A demonic artifact? This is bad! This wasn''t part of the plan!'' He knew little about such artifacts, but the name alone spoke volumes.


    The hunter, now a vessel for demonic power, swung the obsidian sword in a horizontal arc. A crescent of dark energy materialized, hurtling towards William and the others.


    Evasion was impossible. But Aella reacted with impressive speed, conjuring a shimmering blue barrier just in time. The dark energy slammed against it, the contrasting colors painting the cavern in an eerie light.


    "I can''t hold this for long if he attacks like that again!" Aella shouted, her voice strained with effort. "Please, attack!"


    Kael was the first to strike. With practiced precision, he etched runes onto his arrow, imbuing it with an icy aura. Then, with a smooth draw and release, he loosed the projectile.


    The force behind the arrow was incredible. It struck the hunter squarely in the chest, the impact echoing through the cavern. For a fleeting moment, hope surged through the group. The attack had landed cleanly, and the wound appeared grievous. But then, the hunter simply ripped the arrow from his chest, the injury closing with unnatural speed.


    A chilling laughter echoed through the cavern. "You will all die here today!" he roared, his voice infused with demonic power.

 Chapter 29 - 29: A Fierce Battle

    The demonic hunter lunged at Kael, obsidian sword poised to strike. He wasn''t foolish; Kael, with his bow, was a priority target.


    His speed was startling. In a blink, he was upon Kael, the deadly blade a hair''s breadth away. "Die!" he rasped, his voice a guttural growl.


    But Gorn reacted instantly, intercepting the attack with his own sword. The clash of steel resonated through the cavern, forcing Gorn back a few steps. He held his ground, though, his expression unwavering.


    Meanwhile, Aella was already weaving her magic. The cave floor beneath the demon''s feet turned to quicksand, trapping his legs in its grasp. Gorn, thankfully, was outside the spell''s area of effect.


    "Now! Long-range attacks!" Aella commanded.


    She and Kael began casting more powerful spells, their incantations echoing off the cavern walls. These were clearly not simple, instant spells.


    William watched intently, assessing the flow of the battle. He judged the demonically empowered hunter to be strong, but likely still weaker than Gorn and the seasoned adventurers.


    ''He might have the upper hand in a one-on-one fight,'' William thought, ''but we have the advantage of numbers...''


    And indeed, that advantage was proving decisive. While the hunter struggled to free himself from the magical quicksand, more attacks were incoming.


    Kael invoked runes, enchanting three arrows simultaneously, each imbued with the power of fire. Aella, in a synchronized assault, conjured a blazing fireball.


    The temperature in the cave spiked dramatically. Gorn pulled William back, his grip firm. "The impact will be nasty. Let''s give them some space."


    William readily agreed, retreating to a safer distance. Just then, the three fiery arrows and the searing fireball found their mark.


    The resulting explosion was deafening. The cavern shook violently, and small rocks rained down from the ceiling. William''s heart leaped into his throat. ''This damn cave is going to collapse¡­''


    But thankfully, it held. Flames engulfed the area around the trapped hunter.


    "Did we get him?" Aella wondered aloud, her voice a mix of hope and uncertainty. S~ea??h the ¦ÇovelFire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    The smoke gradually dissipated, revealing the hunter''s charred and broken form. His clothes were reduced to tattered remnants, and the obsidian sword lay abandoned on the ground beside him.


    "Seems our fire attacks were effective," Kael said, a triumphant grin spreading across his face. "Our team always prevails, doesn''t it? We''re one of the best!"


    Overconfident, he strode towards the fallen figure. The others exchanged uneasy glances.


    "Don''t get too close, Kael," Borin cautioned. "We need to be sure he''s dead."


    But it was too late. With a sudden burst of energy, the demon snatched up the sword and lunged, plunging the blade deep into Kael''s heart. It was a fatal blow.


    "Gah..." Kael gasped, his eyes widening in shock and pain.


    The demon''s laughter echoed cruelly through the cavern. "I told you, you will all die here today! Foolish humans!"


    The adventurers faltered. Borin and Aella froze, unsure how to react to the sudden turn of events.


    Gorn, however, remained calm. And so did William. He had been observing the fight closely, and a crucial detail had caught his attention.


    "Aella," William said urgently, "the demonic energy is fading fast! If we can keep him contained, we can win this!"


    His words snapped Aella back into focus. She concentrated, and indeed, the demon''s aura was diminishing.


    With renewed determination, she attempted to ensnare the demon''s feet once more with her quicksand spell. But this time, he was ready. With a powerful leap, he evaded the attack and charged towards Aella.


    Borin intercepted the demon, his sword meeting the obsidian blade with a resounding clang. But unlike Gorn, he couldn''t withstand the demonic power. The black sword sliced through his shoulder, drawing a cry of pain.


    Blood gushed from the wound, the severity of the injury evident. It was clear that Gorn was the only one with the strength to face the demon now.


    With a roar, Gorn charged, his sword raised high. "I am your opponent now!" he bellowed, meeting the demon''s furious assault head-on.


    The demon seemed genuinely surprised by Gorn''s display of skill. "Not bad, old man," he sneered, "but you''re past your prime. You know you can''t win."


    The dark energy surging through the hunter''s body intensified, exceeding even its initial levels. It wasn''t just the quantity of demonic power, but its potency. It was as if he was unleashing its full force all at once.


    The demon became a blur of motion, his strength amplified. He and Gorn clashed in a whirlwind of steel, their swords meeting in a furious exchange of blows.


    "Steel Skin!" Gorn roared, his voice echoing through the cavern.


    "Featherweight!"


    "Sharpened Senses!"


    He activated a series of body-enhancement skills, each far exceeding William''s in both level and mastery. Gorn''s power surged, matching the demon''s increased ferocity.


    The sounds of their battle reverberated through the cave, the clang of steel and guttural roars filling the air. Aella desperately wanted to help, but the two combatants were moving with such blinding speed that she couldn''t risk a mistimed spell.


    William, too, could only watch, his heart pounding in his chest.


    Despite the boost from his magic, Gorn was still outmatched. The demon, seizing an opportunity, landed a vicious kick to Gorn''s stomach, momentarily throwing him off balance. In that instant, the obsidian blade flashed, slicing deep into Gorn''s arm.


    A cry of pain escaped Gorn''s lips. The Steel Skin skill had prevented him from losing the limb entirely, but the wound was severe, hindering his movements.


    The situation was deteriorating rapidly. William felt a surge of adrenaline, the pressure to act overwhelming. He couldn''t just stand by and watch.


    But before he could step forward, Borin''s hand clamped down on his shoulder, holding him back. "Leave this to me, lad," he rumbled, his voice surprisingly steady despite the grim situation.


    Borin, a mountain of a man with a gentle heart, charged towards the demon, his roar shaking the very foundations of the cave.


    "Die, you monster!"


    He swung his greatsword, but the demon, empowered by the dark artifact, was far too strong. The attack was effortlessly parried, and in a swift, brutal counter, Borin''s head was severed from his body. He crumpled to the ground, lifeless.

 Chapter 30 - 30: By Someone Like You

    William''s mind raced. Two adventurers, who seemed like decent people, were dead. Aella was the only one left from their group. Gorn, despite his wounded arm, appeared ready to fight, but his power had clearly waned.


    ''Damn it... I don''t know if I can face that thing,'' William thought, fear gnawing at his resolve. Even with his recent progress, he was nowhere near the demon''s level.


    Gorn, ever perceptive, addressed them, "I''ll use a technique to weaken him, but after that, it''s the two of you against him. Understood?"


    Before William or Aella could respond, Gorn began casting his spell. Twenty intricate runes materialized around him, shimmering with potent energy.


    Aella, a mage with extensive knowledge, gasped. "Th-that''s a high-level spell!" she exclaimed. "Just who is this man?"


    The runes converged on Gorn, sinking into his flesh. His eyes blazed with an intense blue light, and the mana in the atmosphere surged towards him, drawn to his form like moths to a flame. He became a conduit for raw magical power. The runes enhanced his mana absorption and granted him the capacity to withstand the immense influx of energy.


    His muscles bulged, his entire body growing in size. He reached a towering height of three meters, his clothes tearing under the strain of his newfound power.


    William stared in awe. ''G-Gorn is incredible!''


    Fear flickered in the demon''s eyes, but it was too late. Gorn charged, his fist cocked back. The blow landed with earth-shattering force, caving in the demon''s chest and sending him flying through the cavern wall, crashing into the forest outside.


    After the devastating attack, Gorn reverted to his normal size, collapsing to one knee. He was visibly weakened.


    "F-finish the job," he gasped, his voice hoarse. "I can''t fight anymore. I need to rest..."


    That devastating blow was the last act Gorn could muster in the fight.


    Aella and William emerged from the cave through the gaping hole created by Gorn''s attack. Near a towering oak, they found the demon, his body ravaged, a gaping wound in his chest, blood staining the forest floor.


    Yet, impossibly, he rose to his feet. William felt a wave of terror wash over him. The sheer power granted by the demonic artifact was horrifying.


    "D-do you think you can kill me?" the demon rasped, his voice laced with malice. "That old man is out of the fight, leaving just the two of you. A mage and a weakling who can barely cast a spell. This will be easy."


    Aella, though shaken by the loss of her companions, steeled herself. "I''m still standing," she declared, her voice firm. "Don''t underestimate me."


    The demon laughed, a chilling sound that echoed through the trees. "Oh, I don''t underestimate you, mage. You''re probably only weaker than that brute back in the cave. But a mage is only strong if they can use their magic, wouldn''t you agree?"


    Aella frowned, confused, but then she understood. The demon had one more trick up his sleeve.


    With the last vestiges of his demonic energy, he conjured a cage of dark energy around Aella, trapping her within its confines. This wasn''t just a physical barrier; it was a magic-suppressing prison. Aella was completely incapacitated, unable to cast even a single spell.


    William and the demon were alone.


    "Sorry, kid, but I have to do this," the demon said, a cruel smile twisting his lips. "This power I''ve gained from the demon lord is just the beginning. We will dominate this world. And even if you humans try to summon your heroes, we won''t lose!"


    ''Summon heroes? So my classmates and I were brought to this world to fight the demon lord?'' William thought, his mind reeling.


    He recalled Elric mentioning the Shadow Lord and his impending return to Aethel. Could the demon lord and the Shadow Lord be the same entity? It seemed plausible, considering the corruption was linked to this demonic energy.


    "I can fight too," William declared, drawing his sword. He activated Swiftfoot, enhancing his agility and speed.


    [+20 Agility points]


    [+10% movement speed]


    He felt the familiar surge of power. The demon clapped slowly, a mocking smile on his lips. "My, my, you can use magic after all. I underestimated you. But is it enough?"


    Despite his wounds, the demon''s speed was still formidable. He lunged at William, the obsidian sword aimed at his head.


    William reacted instantly, parrying the blow. Swiftfoot allowed him to match the demon''s movements, but only because the creature was severely weakened. At his full strength, William wouldn''t have lasted a second.


    ''Damn it, I''m still so weak... I need to train harder!'' he thought, frustration mixing with fear. Even in this life-or-death struggle, he couldn''t help but critique himself. He was still new to this world, and he had much to learn. But he was improving rapidly, and that was a good sign.


    However, even his enhanced abilities weren''t enough. The demon''s attacks landed with increasing frequency, drawing blood. William grew pale, his movements sluggish. The blood loss was taking its toll.


    Just then, a small notification appeared, visible only to him.


    [You can use the skill Hero''s Limit. Do you wish to activate it?]


    It was the special skill he had gained during the fight at Gorn''s cabin. Despite the risks, he had no choice.


    ''Activate!''


    [All attributes increased by 50% for 1 minute.]


    The effect was immediate. Combined with Swiftfoot, the boost in power was overwhelming. William felt invigorated, his strength and speed surging. The fatigue from blood loss vanished, replaced by a rush of adrenaline.


    He became a whirlwind of steel, his attacks relentless. The demon, caught off guard, staggered back.


    "Impossible! What did you do? How did you become so strong?" he sputtered, fear creeping into his voice.


    Aella watched with a mixture of awe and curiosity. She remained silent, her hopes pinned on William''s victory.


    William pressed his advantage, forcing the demon to his knees. With a well-aimed kick, he sent the obsidian sword skittering away, leaving his opponent disarmed and vulnerable.


    "Any last words?" William asked, his voice cold.


    The demon leaned against William''s arm, his fear seemingly replaced by a strange sense of acceptance. "H-haha," he chuckled, "to be killed by someone like you... it''s an honor, I suppose. Not such a bad way to go."


    William frowned, unable to comprehend the man''s words. "I see. Well then, die."


    With a swift, clean stroke, he ended the demon''s life. The battle was over.


    And then, darkness consumed him. William collapsed, unconscious.


    sea??h th§× N?vel(F)ire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.

 Chapter 31 - 31: Gorn is unwell

    William awoke in Gorn''s cabin, his eyes fluttering open. "Wh-what happened?" he mumbled, his voice raspy.


    Memories flickered through his mind, hazy and fragmented. He couldn''t quite piece together the events that had led him here.


    A familiar face leaned over him, concern etched in her features. "I brought you and Gorn back," Aella explained softly. "He''s resting as well. I was worried, but I''m so glad you woke up."


    Initially, she and William had maintained a polite distance, their differences in age and experience creating a natural barrier. But Aella couldn''t deny William''s courage, his pivotal role in their survival.


    "And the demon?" William asked, his brow furrowed. "Is he truly dead?"


    "Yes," Aella assured him, "you can rest easy. I''ll stay here with you both until you recover."


    Her presence would be a welcome comfort to the villagers. Even with the corruption vanquished, the people of Willow Creek needed time to heal, to rebuild their lives after the harrowing ordeal.


    William reached out and gently took Aella''s hand, his gaze sincere. "Thank you for your help," he said softly, "and I''m so sorry for the loss of your friends."


    Aella blinked back tears, the pain of losing her comrades still fresh. She nodded, appreciating his words. "Thank you, William... I made some soup. Would you like some?"


    William''s stomach rumbled in response. "Definitely," he said with a weak smile. "Bring it on. I''m starving."


    Aella smiled and left the room, heading towards the kitchen. As he waited, William''s memories of the battle sharpened, the details becoming clearer.


    ''What did that demon mean by ''killed by someone like you''...?'' The words echoed in his mind, their meaning elusive. Perhaps they meant nothing at all. The demon had been delirious, grasping at straws.


    Aella returned with a steaming bowl of rabbit stew. William ate slowly, savoring the flavors as he regained his strength.


    "This is delicious," he complimented.


    "I''m glad you like it," Aella replied. "But William, now that you''re feeling better, there''s something I need to tell you..." Her voice held a note of concern.


    William paused, his spoon halfway to his mouth. He met her gaze, a sense of foreboding settling over him. "What is it?" he asked.


    "The wound Gorn suffered from that obsidian sword," she explained, her voice heavy, "it seems to have poisoned him. He''s recovering, but he won''t be back to his full strength. We''ll need to return to the city to seek a cure."


    "Honestly, I thought it would be worse," William said, relieved. "I''m sure Gorn can survive this poisoning."


    But his words didn''t seem to reassure Aella. Her brow remained furrowed, her expression troubled.


    "As you know, I''m a mage, and I also study alchemy," she explained, her voice laced with worry. "I''ve never encountered a poison like the one afflicting Gorn, and I''ve been studying for many years. This could be very serious..."


    William''s momentary relief evaporated. If Aella was this concerned, then the situation was indeed dire.


    "I understand," he said, his voice grave. "Do you think he''ll be able to make it to the city?"


    "I believe so," Aella replied. "The toxin seems to be slow-acting, which gives us time. Focus on recovering as quickly as possible. I want to leave in two or three days, maximum."


    William nodded, accepting her assessment. Rest was his only option for now.


    After Aella left, Maya came to check on him, her face etched with worry for both him and her father.


    "I''m so glad you woke up!" she exclaimed, her voice filled with relief. "I knew you would. It must have been like last time!"


    Maya wasn''t wrong. The last time he''d collapsed, it was due to exhaustion from the battle and the strain of using Hero''s Limit.


    "Of course I''d wake up," William said, a playful grin spreading across his face. "Did you think I''d leave you alone?"


    He cringed internally as soon as the words left his mouth. That sounded a bit too cheesy, even for him.


    "I''m worried about my father..." Maya admitted, her voice barely above a whisper.


    William''s heart went out to her. "Aella said he''ll be alright," he reassured her, "and we''ll go to the city to find a cure. Everything will be fine."


    "She said that?" Maya''s expression brightened. "Oh, that eases my mind a bit. Well, I''ll let you rest. I just wanted to see how you were doing." She rose from the bedside, turning to leave.


    Before she could go, William called out, "Wait! Could you bring me a book to read?"


    "Sure," Maya replied with a smile. "I''ll be right back."


    Two days passed in a blur of rest and recuperation. William devoured books and meals, his body healing rapidly.


    The fatigue he felt stemmed primarily from using Hero''s Limit, not from any significant physical injuries.


    By the end of the second day, he was walking and even sparring lightly, his strength nearly at eighty percent.


    Aella, eager to seek help for Gorn in the city, announced their departure. Gorn, though still weak, was able to walk with assistance.


    "Elara, my love," Gorn said to his wife, his voice thick with emotion, "I''m so sorry to leave you like this, worried and alone. But don''t fret. I''ll be fine."


    He shared a tender moment with Elara and Maya, exchanging heartfelt words and embraces before turning towards William and Aella. William offered a reassuring nod, and they mounted their horses, leaving Willow Creek behind.


    Their destination was Alderanth ¨C again. It was the closest city with the resources they needed.


    As they rode, William noticed a long, cloth-wrapped bundle strapped to Aella''s back. "What''s that you''re carrying, Aella?" he asked, curiosity piqued.


    "Oh, this?" she replied casually. "It''s the demon''s sword."


    William''s blood ran cold. Aella, sensing his alarm, quickly added, "It''s been depleted of demonic energy. In theory, it''s just a broken artifact now. That''s what my System indicates, anyway."


    William glanced at Gorn, who confirmed Aella''s statement with a nod.


    "Wait, your System tells you that?" William asked, intrigued.


    "Any weapon or armor you use has different properties that you can see through the System," Aella explained. "You''ve probably never noticed because you haven''t focused on analyzing your weapons and items."


    Intrigued, William concentrated on his sword, trying to discern its properties. After a few moments, a window appeared before his eyes.


    [Steel Sword (Normal Quality)]


    [Damage: 10-10]


    [A steel sword crafted by a skilled blacksmith.]


    [Condition: Durability is excellent, with some signs of use.]


    William felt a pang of frustration. He could have been doing this all along?


    "I see it!" he exclaimed. "This is incredibly useful! But I don''t understand. Why is it so easy to see information about items, but more difficult with people?" He was referring to discerning levels, attributes, and other such details, both for other people and creatures.


    Aella, ever the scholar, explained, "That''s because living beings have a natural energy field that acts as a protective shield. Items, even magical ones, aren''t alive and don''t possess this field."


    The workings of this world were starting to make more sense to William. Unlike the other heroes, he hadn''t received a comprehensive introduction. Elric had practically kicked him out before he could even ask a proper question.


    "I understand," William said, nodding slowly. "But what do you plan to do with that sword?" He eyed the bundle on Aella''s back, a shiver running down his spine.


    Aella shrugged. "Honestly, nothing for now. I know if I hand it over to the authorities, they''ll simply lock it away and forget about it. No one seems interested in studying these things." She sighed. "And I don''t have the time to research it myself."


    She fell silent for a moment, then, to William''s surprise, unstrapped the bundle and tossed it to him. "You can have it if you want," she said. "You decide what to do with it. After all, you were the one who delivered the final blow." Sear?h the nov§×lF~ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    The sword remained tightly wrapped, concealing its obsidian darkness. William wasn''t ready to look at it yet. The weapon was a stark reminder of the bloody battle, the deaths of Kael and Borin still fresh in his mind.


    "I understand," William said, his voice somber. "I''ll keep it wrapped for now."


    The trio continued their journey towards Alderanth, their hopes pinned on finding a cure for Gorn''s affliction. But a nagging doubt lingered in William''s mind. Was this something that could truly be healed?

 Chapter 32 - 32: Looking for the Churchs Help

    The journey seemed longer than usual, each passing day marked by Gorn''s deteriorating condition. William and Aella rode with a growing sense of urgency, their anxiety mounting with every labored breath Gorn took.


    While Gorn had been able to manage during the first few days, his strength waned as they neared Alderanth. By the time they reached the city gates, he was unable to walk without assistance. William supported him, their progress slow and unsteady.


    The guard at the gate eyed Gorn with suspicion, inquiring about his condition. Aella, with her relatively high rank in the Adventurers'' Guild, managed to deflect his questions and gain entry without much hassle.


    "Why was he looking at us like that?" William asked, his brow furrowed.


    "He''s probably wondering if I''m infected with something contagious," Gorn rasped, his voice weak.


    William understood. He''d harbored similar concerns at first, unsure if Gorn''s affliction could spread. But no one in Willow Creek had shown any signs of illness, so he assumed it wasn''t transmissible, at least not through casual contact.


    They navigated the bustling city streets, William acting as a crutch for Gorn. The usual vibrancy of Alderanth, with its throngs of people and boisterous vendors, provided an odd contrast to their somber procession. The crowd seemed oblivious to Gorn''s alarming state.


    "Where should we go first?" William asked, deferring to Aella''s greater familiarity with the city.


    "I think we should head to the church," she replied.


    William blinked, surprised. He hadn''t noticed a church during his previous visit.


    "Why the church?"


    "They often have priests skilled in healing magic," Aella explained. "It''s the best place to understand what''s happening to him."


    William realized her logic was sound, especially considering the demonic nature of Gorn''s affliction.


    They made their way to the church, a grand structure with towering spires. As they approached the entrance, a man in flowing robes greeted them, a friendly smile on his face and thinning gray hair framing his kind eyes.


    "Good morning, my young friends," he said warmly. "What brings you here today?"


    "We need help," William said, his voice carrying a note of urgency.


    "Help with what, exactly?" the priest inquired, his kind eyes searching their faces.


    "Our friend seems to have been poisoned by something we don''t recognize," William explained, gesturing towards Gorn. "Would you be able to assist us?"


    The priest had already noticed Gorn''s pale complexion and labored breathing. "Of course," he said, his voice soothing. "Bring him inside, and I''ll take a look."


    They followed the priest into the church, bypassing the main hall where other priests and townsfolk were engaged in prayer. It wouldn''t be appropriate to conduct a medical examination in such a public space. The priest led them to a small, private room. S§×ar?h the n?vel_Fire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "Now, let me see," the priest said, gently guiding Gorn to a chair. He carefully peeled back Gorn''s sleeve, revealing the network of black veins that snaked across his skin. A look of concern crossed his face.


    William''s mind flashed back to the demon, his body similarly marked by the dark energy. ''What''s going on?'' he wondered, anxiety gnawing at him.


    Aella, too, was worried, especially after witnessing the priest''s reaction.


    "I don''t want to alarm you," the priest began, his voice grave, "but this seems quite serious. I''ve never seen anything like it."


    William and Aella exchanged a worried look. Gorn, however, remained surprisingly calm. "Relax, you two," he said, attempting to soothe their fears. "I''m sure the priest will know what to do."


    "May I have a moment alone with him?" the priest requested.


    "Of course," Aella replied. "Let us know if you need anything."


    They left the room and returned to the main hall, taking a seat on one of the wooden pews. William, not particularly religious, simply waited patiently.


    Aella, too, seemed content to observe the quiet reverence of the space. They kept their voices low, mindful of the others who had come to pray and reflect.


    "Will everything be alright?" William asked, seeking Aella''s reassurance. Her opinion always seemed to bring him a sense of calm.


    "To be honest," Aella said, her voice low, "I don''t think it looks good." Despite wanting to offer comfort, she believed in being realistic. Sometimes things didn''t go as planned, and that was okay.


    "I understand..." William said, a wave of sadness washing over him.


    Just then, another priest approached them, his face etched with concern. "You seem troubled, young man," he said to William.


    William looked up and met the priest''s kind gaze. "Yes," he admitted, "I am."


    "Whatever it is," the priest said gently, "it will pass. Everything will be alright if you have faith in the powers greater than us mere mortals."


    He didn''t press further, sensing William''s need for solitude. With a warm smile and a reassuring pat on the shoulder, he moved on, leaving William and Aella to their quiet contemplation.


    William, though not a religious man, found himself pondering the reason for his summons to this world.


    Could some divine force have orchestrated their arrival? He knew it was Elric and other powerful mages who had performed the ritual, but why him and his classmates?


    Was it random chance, or was there a deeper purpose behind their selection? He had no answers, but the solemn atmosphere of the church stirred these existential questions within him.


    After about ten minutes, the priest who had initially greeted them beckoned them back to the private room where Gorn awaited.


    "Well," the priest began, his expression a mixture of hope and concern, "I have good news and bad news."


    "Bad news first," William said, steeling himself. "Let''s get it over with."


    The priest nodded. "Alright... The bad news is that I don''t know how to cure him, and it''s possible no one in this city does either. However, the good news is that I know how to slow the progression of the toxin, and a priest far more skilled in healing magic than myself is arriving in a week. Perhaps he''ll know what to do."

 Chapter 33 - 33: Things are Getting Worse

    The situation was far from ideal, the news a heavy blow to their hopes. William desperately wished for a miracle cure, a swift return to normalcy for Gorn and his family, but reality proved harsher.


    "Alright..." William said, his voice heavy with disappointment. "Then please, do what you can to slow the toxin."


    "Of course," the priest replied. "I''ll prepare the medicine."


    He disappeared into a back room, closing the door behind him. William and Aella could only wait, their anxiety growing with each passing moment. They turned to Gorn, offering words of comfort.


    "You''ll be fine, Gorn," William said, forcing a confident tone. "I know it."


    But Gorn''s condition had worsened. He looked at William, his eyes brimming with tears. "I''ll be honest with you, William," he rasped, his voice weak. "If I don''t make it, know that you quickly became the son I never had. You''re a good lad. Thank you for everything."


    William''s heart ached. He cherished Gorn''s words, but the underlying message filled him with dread. This wasn''t the time for farewells.


    "I appreciate your kind words, Gorn," William said, his voice firm. "I also see you as a father figure who cared for me in difficult times. But cut the crap about goodbyes. You''re going to pull through this. Do you hear me?"


    William''s forceful words seemed to have an effect. Gorn nodded, a glimmer of determination returning to his eyes. "Yes," he said, his voice stronger. "I''ll pull through. How can I leave my family alone? This damn toxin won''t win."


    Though William disliked the defeatist tone, he couldn''t blame Gorn for his despair. The man was clearly suffering, his weakened state driving him to speak words of surrender.


    Aella, however, seethed with a mixture of grief and fury. That damned demon had not only murdered her two companions but was now, even in death, trying to claim Gorn''s life as well. It was infuriating!


    She clenched her fists, resisting the urge to unleash a torrent of curses and punch the nearest solid object. Perhaps the sanctity of the church gave her pause, preventing her from succumbing to her rage.


    They waited anxiously as the priest returned, a vial of shimmering yellow liquid in his hand. Neither William nor Aella could identify its contents, but the priest had assured them it would help Gorn recover and slow the spread of the toxin. They placed their trust in his expertise.


    "Here you go," the priest announced, a gentle smile gracing his lips. "This concoction is crafted from various medicinal herbs, enhanced by my divine magic."


    Priests and members of the various churches scattered throughout the land often referred to healing magic as "divine magic." It was a matter of semantics, as the magic itself functioned no differently than other forms.


    However, many religious figures channeled a unique energy source, often attributed to divine powers.


    Gorn accepted the vial and drank the contents in a single gulp. The effect was immediate. A wave of relief washed over him, and color returned to his face. "I already feel better," he remarked, surprised. "How is that possible?"


    "You''ll continue to improve over the next few hours," the priest explained, "but the effects are temporary. This should stabilize you until the arrival of the church member I mentioned."


    Despite the momentary relief of seeing Gorn''s condition improve, William knew it was a temporary reprieve.


    The uncertainty of the future gnawed at him.


    ''What if this other priest can''t cure Gorn? What then?''


    The thought of losing Gorn, who had become a true friend and mentor, was unbearable. But all they could do now was wait and hope.


    The trio left the church, stepping back into the bustling city.


    "I have some errands to run," Aella announced. "You two will have to manage on your own for a bit."


    "No problem," Gorn said with a reassuring smile. "We''ll find a tavern to rest in."


    "See you later, Aella. Take care," William added.


    They bid farewell and watched as Aella disappeared into the crowd.


    "What a situation, eh?" Gorn remarked, clapping William on the shoulder. "Let''s head to that tavern."


    They decided to return to the same tavern they had visited before ¨C a decent establishment with reasonable prices. They needed to wait seven days for the other priest to arrive, and a luxurious inn was out of the question.


    This time, they opted for a single room. William wanted to stay close to Gorn, to keep an eye on him and ensure his condition didn''t worsen.


    "That medicine has made me drowsy," Gorn confessed as they entered their room. "I''m going to rest for a bit, alright?"


    Before William could even reply, Gorn collapsed onto the bed, snoring loudly. Sear?h the Novel?ire(.)ne*t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "What kind of special skill is that, falling asleep so quickly?" William murmured, a wry smile touching his lips.


    He had little to do but wait. Chrono Shift was still on cooldown, and even if it wasn''t, he wouldn''t have used it. His focus was solely on Gorn''s recovery.


    He settled at the small table in the room, pulling out the manual for Kinetic Burst.


    As he flipped through the pages, his gaze fell upon the demon sword, still wrapped in cloth and resting in the corner of the table.


    A strange sensation washed over him, a mix of unease and morbid curiosity.


    ''Must be my trauma,'' he thought, quickly averting his gaze.


    He returned to his reading, immersing himself in the intricacies of Kinetic Burst. After an hour or so, William decided to seek out a restaurant and procure some food.


    Gorn was still sound asleep, but he would undoubtedly wake up hungry. Nourishment was crucial for his recovery, or at the very least, it would prevent his condition from deteriorating further.


    Alderanth boasted a wide array of culinary options, from humble street vendors to lavish establishments.


    Mindful of Gorn''s funds, William opted for a more affordable eatery. Even the cheaper restaurants in Alderanth offered surprisingly good quality.


    He settled on a place called Robert''s Delights, the name bringing a smile to his face. The interior was cozy, with ample seating and warm lighting.


    A steady flow of customers provided a vote of confidence. After perusing the menu, William decided on two seafood platters.


    Seafood was a rare treat in Willow Creek. Although a river flowed nearby, he lacked the time for fishing, and the variety of fish was limited.


    Alderanth, however, benefited from numerous surrounding rivers and lakes, teeming with diverse aquatic life.


    "Would it be possible to have these packed to go?" William asked.


    The man who took his order was tall and stout, with a jovial demeanor. He wore a chef''s uniform, and William assumed he was Robert, the owner.


    Robert seemed surprised by the request. William remembered that takeout and delivery were not common practices in this world. Will he refuse? he wondered.


    But Robert''s reaction was quite the opposite. A broad smile spread across his face. "Young man," he declared, "you''ve just given me a brilliant idea to expand my business! Thank you!"


    With that, he bustled back to the kitchen.


    William couldn''t help but feel a pang of regret. He had missed the opportunity to introduce the concept of food delivery to this world.


    ''Ah well,'' he thought, ''being an adventurer is far more lucrative anyway, especially if I become strong.''


    After a short wait, William received his order, carefully packaged in sturdy containers. The chef, still beaming, likely continued to envision his future delivery empire.


    Back in the tavern room, Gorn remained blissfully asleep. William decided to wake him. Gorn startled awake, momentarily disoriented, but quickly regained his composure.


    "I thought something was wrong," he grumbled, rubbing his eyes. "Hmm, what''s that delicious smell?"


    "I brought us dinner," William announced, revealing the seafood platters. "Want to try some?"


    Gorn''s eyes lit up at the sight of the food. He was clearly famished. They ate while chatting about life. Robert''s Delights did not disappoint. The seafood was fresh and expertly prepared.


    However, as they ate, Gorn''s condition took a turn for the worse. This wasn''t supposed to happen. The priest had been confident the medicine would halt the toxin''s progress, but it seemed to be failing.


    "What''s wrong, Gorn?" William asked, his voice laced with concern.


    The black veins beneath Gorn''s skin grew more prominent, creeping up his neck and onto his face. His eyes took on an unnatural reddish hue.


    Panic swelled within William. Should he seek help? But who? The priest had said no one in the city could help at this point.


    Suddenly, a strange sensation washed over William, a tingling awareness of something amiss. He felt a presence, a shift in the very air around them.


    A chill ran down William''s spine. The presence emanated from the demonic sword, still wrapped in cloth on the table. An inexplicable urge to uncover it, to see the obsidian blade once more, compelled him forward.


    With trembling hands, he peeled back the fabric. The sword lay bare, its dark surface marred with scratches and chips, a shadow of its former menacing glory. No power pulsed from it, no demonic energy thrummed in its depths. It seemed inert, lifeless.


    Yet, as William reached out and touched the cold surface of the blade, a voice echoed in his mind, raspy and chilling, sending shivers down his spine.


    "Finally," it rasped, "a true heir..."


    A System notification flashed before his eyes.

 Chapter 34 - 34: Demonic Sword Master

    [The Demonic Sword has acknowledged you as its master.] [You have acquired the skill ''Demonic Absorption''.]


    [Demonic Absorption (Passive): Allows the user to absorb demonic energy, converting it into mana.]


    William stared at the sword, a whirlwind of thoughts and emotions swirling within him. What was happening? Was this voice truly coming from the sword? And what did it mean, calling him a "true heir"? The idea of being associated with demonic forces filled him with unease.


    He cautiously picked up the sword again, turning it over in his hands. It felt cold and strangely inert, yet he couldn''t shake the feeling that it was somehow...alive.


    "Stupid lad, get the sword. You can use it to absorb the toxin from your friend. Damn it, why is my master so stupid?"


    William blinked a few times, unsure how to respond. Could he talk back to the sword? He tried to answer it mentally, but nothing happened.


    "Now you are trying to speak with me mentally, so funny. You have to speak normally with me. Yes, it might make you look like a crazy person talking alone, but who cares?"


    "Damn it," William muttered, glancing at Gorn. "Do you think it will work? Will I get sick if I absorb the toxin?"


    "No, everything should be fine. The toxin is demonic energy, so you will just convert it into power. Go ahead before your friend dies. Also, don''t say you are a demonic heir to anyone, or that I speak. This will make the church kill you."


    William hesitated for a moment, weighing his options. He didn''t fully trust the sword, but Gorn''s deteriorating condition spurred him to action. He approached Gorn, who was now gasping for air, his face contorted in pain.


    With a deep breath, William touched the tip of the obsidian blade to Gorn''s forehead. The black veins pulsing beneath Gorn''s skin seemed to recoil, retracting as a dark mist flowed into the sword.


    William felt a surge of power coursing through him, a strange warmth spreading through his limbs.


    Gorn''s eyes fluttered open, his breathing becoming more regular. The black veins faded completely, and the unnatural redness in his eyes disappeared.


    "What...what happened?" Gorn mumbled, his voice weak but clear.


    "I think the toxin made a final push to overwhelm you, but your strong will resisted," William improvised, hoping the explanation would suffice.


    Gorn frowned, his brow furrowed in confusion. He seemed to have a hazy recollection of the events. "But why do you have the sword with you, then?" he asked, suspicion creeping into his voice.


    William''s mind raced. "We were just examining it together while eating dinner," he explained, "and then you suddenly got worse."


    The story wasn''t airtight, but Gorn''s hazy memory worked in William''s favor. He didn''t even recall eating dinner, let alone handling a demonic sword!


    Relief washed over William. Seeing Gorn healthy again filled him with joy. A wave of excitement coursed through him as he considered the possibilities his newfound skill presented.


    "I''m feeling great now, hell yeah!" Gorn boomed, his voice regaining its usual strength. "I mean, it was probably the priest''s medicine that helped me, so I won''t question it..."


    William quickly wrapped the demonic sword, concealing it once more. He still had much to learn about this unexpected power, and the idea of being a demonic heir remained unsettling.


    ''Maybe they''re not truly demonic forces,'' he mused, grasping for a more palatable explanation. ''Perhaps they''re just misunderstood?''


    Regardless, both William and Gorn were overjoyed at the turn of events. Gorn slept soundly that night, and the following day, they returned to the church to speak with the priest.


    "Your medicine worked wonders," Gorn declared, beaming. "In fact, I think you completely healed me!"


    The priest''s eyes widened in surprise. He stepped forward, examining Gorn with a practiced eye.


    "You are indeed healed!" he exclaimed, astonishment coloring his voice. "That''s incredible! I... I didn''t expect it to be so effective. May the Gods watch over you, my friend."


    They chatted with the priest for a while longer, expressing their gratitude, before taking their leave. Gorn was eager to find Aella, pay her for the mission, and share the good news of his recovery.


    They entered the bustling Adventurers'' Guild, hoping to inquire about Aella''s whereabouts. The same receptionist from their previous visit sat behind the counter. Her face fell when she saw Gorn.


    "We''re looking for Aella," Gorn announced. "Do you know where she is?"


    "Uh, hello," she stammered, her gaze flickering towards the bar. "She''s...right over there."


    They turned to see Aella nursing a drink, her expression downcast. Gorn and William approached and sat beside her.


    "Why are you drinking so much?" Gorn asked, concern lacing his voice.


    Aella sighed. "Well, two of my friends died, and you are in pretty bad shape, so..."


    Gorn smiled, relief radiating from him. "That''s why we came to talk to you. I''m healed! The priest''s medicine worked."


    Aella nearly choked on her drink. "What? Are you serious?" She scrutinized Gorn, searching for any sign of the black veins. He looked healthy, his energy restored.


    "Yes," Gorn confirmed. "The toxin made a final attempt last night, but I pulled through. It''s amazing, right? Anyway, I''m also here to pay you for your services."


    He handed her the full payment for the mission, including the shares meant for her fallen comrades. Despite receiving more than expected, Aella couldn''t shake the bittersweet feeling. Still, the news of Gorn''s recovery lifted her spirits.


    "Well, thanks," she said, managing a weak smile. "I''m glad I could help your village. I hope we meet again sometime."


    It was goodbye, at least for now. Aella had other missions calling her, while Gorn and William prepared to return to Willow Creek.


    William was eager to resume his training, his sights set on the magic school entrance exams in six months. But now, a new thirst for knowledge burned within him ¨C a desire to learn more about demons and the powers they wielded.


    He briefly considered asking Gorn for money to visit the library and research the topic, but quickly dismissed the idea. It would raise too many questions.


    ''The magic school will have plenty of books about demons,'' he reasoned. ''I''ll have to wait until then.''


    They decided to depart that very day. William welcomed the idea, eager to return to his training regimen.


    He had noticed the sword had fallen silent; he had mentally blocked its attempts at communication. He was the master, after all, and such control seemed to be within his grasp.


    ''This new skill was certainly helpful back there,'' William mused, ''but it doesn''t seem all that useful now. Where am I going to find demonic energy to absorb, for starters?''


    His lack of knowledge about Demonic Absorption frustrated him. He had no idea what its full potential might be, or what he might learn in the future.


    The sword remained wrapped in cloth, strapped securely to his back. Aella hadn''t wanted to keep it, and even if she had, William wouldn''t have relinquished it. There was a connection between him and the obsidian blade, a link he couldn''t ignore.


    During their journey back to Willow Creek, William noticed a change in his status. His level remained the same, but after absorbing the demonic energy, all his attributes had increased!


    Name: William Velmont


    Level: 12


    Class: None


    Attributes:


    Strength: 22


    Agility: 25


    Stamina: 21


    Intelligence: 23


    Mana: 18


    This unexpected development further fueled his curiosity about Demonic Absorption. What other hidden powers did this skill hold? sea??h th§× nov§×lF~ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    He earned around 2 to 3 points in each attribute by just absorbing that small amount of demonic energy from Gorn''s body, so what would happen if he found more?


    Suddenly, William wasn''t that scared of finding more demons...

 Chapter 35 - 35: Festival, and More Training

    Their return to Willow Creek sparked jubilation. Worried faces transformed into beaming smiles as news of Gorn''s recovery spread like wildfire.


    "Gorn is back! He''s been saved!"


    "I knew he would pull through!"


    Villagers swarmed Gorn, offering congratulations and heartfelt embraces. He basked in their warmth, his laughter echoing through the streets. William, content to observe, allowed Gorn his moment of triumph.


    That night, a joyous festival erupted. Music filled the air, villagers danced with abandon, and the aroma of roasted meats and sweet treats mingled with the crackling of a bonfire. It was a celebration of Gorn''s return and a way to honor those lost to the corrupted beasts. S~ea??h the ¦Çov§×lFire .net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Elara and Maya, their faces etched with relief, joined the festivities. The worry that had plagued them for days melted away, replaced by a shared sense of joy and gratitude.


    Later, William and Maya found themselves sitting beneath a tree, sharing stories and laughter.


    "I''m so glad everything worked out," Maya said, her eyes sparkling in the firelight. "And how is your magic practice going?"


    "Pretty well, I think," William replied, taking a sip of his drink. "I''ve mastered that spell I showed you, and I''m planning to try for the magic school entrance exams in six months."


    Maya''s eyes widened. "That''s wonderful!" she exclaimed, then her expression turned wistful. "But that means you''ll be leaving..."


    William turned to her, a mischievous glint in his eyes. "Don''t tell anyone," he whispered, "but your father is going to start your magic training soon. He believes you can enter a magic school in a year."


    "He did?" Maya gasped, her face lighting up. "I''ll try for the same school as you... But even if I don''t get in, we''ll still see each other, right?"


    "Of course," William assured her.


    He truly valued Maya''s kindness and unwavering support, both for him and her family.


    The revelry continued late into the night. William, though eager to resume his training, recognized the value of such communal celebrations. He knew a balance of exertion and rest was essential, both for his physical development and mental well-being.


    As the festivities wound down, William, pleasantly full of food and drink, retired to his room. It remained unchanged, save for the addition of the demonic sword tucked away in a corner.


    ''I''m not ready to use that thing yet'', William thought, eyeing the wrapped blade with a mix of apprehension and curiosity. I need to learn more about it first.


    The boost to his attributes from absorbing the demonic energy had been thrilling, but the lingering presence of that energy within him was unsettling.


    Could he become like the possessed hunter, losing control to the demonic influence? His ignorance about demons and their artifacts made him cautious.


    He would stick to his SSS-ranked skill for now; at least he knew it wouldn''t have any adverse side effects, as long as he didn''t meet an untimely end in the past.


    William sank into his pillow, falling into a deep, dreamless sleep.


    The following morning, a peaceful quiet settled over Willow Creek. The revelry of the previous night had taken its toll, and the village slumbered, recovering from the festivities. Even William felt a bit sluggish, but the lingering warmth of the celebration made it worthwhile.


    When he finally emerged from his room, he found Gorn and Elara already awake, enjoying a quiet cup of tea at the table.


    "I made some tea for you," Elara said, her smile as radiant as the morning sun. "It will help you feel better after all that celebrating."


    William joined them, accepting the steaming cup with gratitude. "Thank you," he said, taking a sip. "And Gorn, how are you feeling?"


    "Never better," Gorn declared, his voice booming with renewed vigor. "In fact, this is the best I''ve felt in ages!"


    William beamed. It seemed absorbing the demonic energy had indeed cured Gorn completely.


    "That''s fantastic," William said, savoring the soothing warmth of the tea. "And this tea is delicious."


    Gorn chuckled. "Enjoy it while you can," he said. "Soon, your training will begin. You''ll be sparring with me every morning."


    While William was eager to begin training immediately, Gorn, wise in the ways of both combat and hangovers, decreed they would start the following day. The festivities had taken their toll, and even the strongest warrior needed time to recover.


    William, too, welcomed a day of respite. Though his Chrono Shift ability had refreshed, he opted for a true day off, a chance to clear his mind and recharge.


    After a hearty breakfast with Gorn and his family, he set out with a fishing rod and bucket in hand. "Don''t wander too far," Gorn had cautioned, "the forest is still dangerous."


    The river near the village wasn''t ideal for fishing. The commotion and activity kept most fish at bay.


    However, a short walk upstream led him to a tranquil spot, perfect for his purpose. He gathered some worms for bait and settled on the grassy riverbank, savoring the peace and quiet.


    The soft grass cushioned him, a gentle breeze rustled the leaves, and the symphony of nature filled his ears.


    "Ah," William sighed contentedly, "how wonderful it is to have a carefree day with nothing to do. Better enjoy it while it lasts, because tomorrow things get serious..."


    Time flowed by like the river itself, carrying William along in its current. After the first catch, more fish filled his bucket. The simplicity of the task, the repetitive motion, and the quietude allowed his mind to wander.


    ''First, I''ll train with Gorn and Jinra,'' he thought, ''master as many spells as I can, and then it''s off to magic school! There, I''ll learn everything I can about demons and these new abilities...'' A solid plan was forming in his mind.


    As dusk approached, William returned to the village, his bucket overflowing with his catch. He expertly cleaned the fish, and Elara worked her culinary magic, transforming them into a mouthwatering feast. Famished from his day by the river, William devoured his share with gusto.


    "Goodnight, Gorn, Elara, Maya," he said, already feeling the pull of sleep.


    He knew Gorn would be eager to start their training, but he hadn''t anticipated being roused from slumber at the ungodly hour of five in the morning.


    "Wake up, William!" Gorn''s booming voice shattered the predawn stillness. "Didn''t I say we were training?" He ripped the covers off William''s bed with a flourish.


    "B-but what?" William sputtered, his mind still foggy with sleep. "Isn''t it too early?"


    Though tempted to grumble about the early hour, William knew better than to question Gorn''s training methods. He rose like a zombie, stumbling out of bed and into the crisp morning air, a wooden sword clutched in his hand.


    "Today, we advance your skills," Gorn declared, his voice ringing with energy. "Stay sharp, lad!"


    Before William could even blink the sleep from his eyes, Gorn charged, his wooden sword whistling through the air. The blow connected squarely with William''s head, jolting him awake with a resounding thwack.


    "Ow, my head!" William groaned, clutching his throbbing skull.


    Gorn roared with laughter. "That''s one way to wake you up!" he boomed. "Now get up and prepare yourself!"


    Their training session was intense, far exceeding their previous sparring matches.


    In addition to swordplay, Gorn had William running, performing push-ups, squats, and sit-ups, with barely any time to rest between exercises.


    William silently thanked the heavens when he spotted Elara approaching.


    "Lunch is ready!" she announced, a welcome respite from Gorn''s relentless drills.


    William''s stomach rumbled in response. ''Finally, a break from this madman...'' he thought gratefully.

 Chapter 36 - 36: Wooden Sword Where the Sun Dont Shine...

    Over lunch, Maya peppered William with questions about his training. "How was it?" she asked, her eyes bright with curiosity. "Did you learn a lot?"


    "Tons," William replied with a confident grin. "Your father didn''t stand a chance against me. I knocked him down so many times, I think he learned more from me."


    Gorn, mid-bite of a particularly juicy piece of meat, nearly choked. "You''re kidding, right?" he sputtered, wiping his mouth with a napkin. "I practically had to hold back to keep from shoving that wooden sword where the sun don''t shine..."


    Elara laughed, shaking her head. "Boys, please, mind your language. The dinner table is no place for such talk."


    Even William couldn''t help but chuckle at Gorn''s indignant expression. After lunch, he retired to his room for an hour''s rest before heading towards the hill.


    Gorn, as the village''s strongest warrior and one of its primary hunters, had a busy schedule. Their training was limited to the mornings, but William had Chrono Shift at his disposal, and he intended to make the most of it.


    He activated the skill, stepping through the shimmering portal. He materialized in the familiar barn at Jinra''s house. It was still nighttime, the same time he had left days ago. Wide awake and eager to hone his skills, William began practicing Kinetic Burst.


    His first task was to master the intricate runes required for Kinetic Burst. This particular spell demanded eight distinct runes, each a complex pattern of lines and curves, unlike anything William had encountered before.


    While his previous skills were C-rank, Kinetic Burst was a B-rank spell, making it significantly more challenging to learn. But William was determined.


    He spent hours meticulously practicing the runes, stopping only when it neared the time Jinra usually woke. He needed to maintain a pretense of normalcy, lest Jinra grow suspicious of his rapid progress.


    Feigning tiredness, William lay down on his makeshift bed and napped, awakening only when Jinra called him for breakfast.


    "How did you sleep?" Jinra inquired, setting a plate of bread and cheese before him.


    "Great," William replied, taking a bite of the crusty bread. "I''m getting used to the barn. It''s actually more peaceful than I expected. I guess no beasts dare come near your house."


    Jinra chuckled. "Aye, this area is quite safe thanks to my presence. But tell me, you seem...different. Stronger. How is that possible?"


    To Jinra, it felt like they had just seen each other, but for William, time had passed, filled with training and adventures in present-day Aethel.


    "You think so?" William said with a shrug, feigning nonchalance. "Maybe it''s just my natural talent."


    "Indeed," Jinra agreed, his eyes twinkling. "You do seem to possess a remarkable talent. I have a feeling your name will be etched in history, kid. Of course, that''s only if you dedicate yourself to training for the rest of your life."


    That was certainly William''s intention. He had to surpass those summoned heroes with their extraordinary abilities, and he wouldn''t let anything stand in his way.


    After breakfast, they moved to the training grounds. William showed Jinra the Kinetic Burst skill, hoping for some guidance, but Jinra seemed perplexed.


    "To be honest, I''ve never seen this skill before," Jinra admitted, stroking his beard. "Where did you acquire it?"


    William recounted the fabricated tale of his family troubles and his departure from home. "It was in my family''s library," he explained.


    "Perhaps it''s unique to your lineage," Jinra said respectfully. "I apologize for prying. I meant no disrespect."


    "It''s alright," William assured him. "But can you still help me learn it?"


    Jinra nodded. "Of course. I''ll try to master the skill myself and then guide you."


    "And how long will that take?" William asked, curious.


    Jinra''s response was astonishing. "Five minutes, tops. Give me a moment."


    William watched in awe as Jinra effortlessly formed the unfamiliar runes, activated the skill, and blinked across the training grounds in a matter of seconds.


    "Don''t look so surprised," Jinra chuckled. "I can learn it quickly because I know higher-ranked skills, much higher. A B-rank skill is child''s play in comparison. It will be the same for you one day."


    William couldn''t help but find the statement ironic. He already possessed an SSS-rank skill, yet this B-rank ability was proving quite challenging. ''It must be because I didn''t actually learn my SSS-rank skill,'' he reasoned. ''I was granted it when I came to this world.'' Sear?h the Novel?ire(.)ne*t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    With the skill firmly within his grasp, Jinra turned his attention to guiding William. He observed William''s attempts, patiently correcting each misstep and demonstrating the proper flow of mana.


    Despite Jinra''s expert tutelage, William struggled to control his mana with the precision required to form and sustain the runes.


    They trained tirelessly throughout the day, yet William made little progress. Frustration gnawed at him, but Jinra offered encouragement and a dose of reality.


    "Even prodigies take months to learn a skill like this," Jinra reassured him. "But once you master it, lower-ranked skills will become much easier. We can expand your arsenal of C-rank spells before you take the magic school entrance exam."


    "Speaking of which," William asked, curiosity piqued, "where exactly is this magic school? Is it large? Are there many students? Is the exam difficult?"


    "Yes, it''s quite large, and the exam is challenging," Jinra confirmed. "But I believe you''ll pass with flying colors. The city where the school is located is quite a distance from here, so we''ll need to depart two months in advance. But let''s focus on your training for now."


    "Right, that makes sense," William agreed.


    He ate, rested when he could, and as night fell, he activated Chrono Shift, returning to his own time. It was still afternoon, the exact moment he had left. He was essentially gaining two days of training for every one that passed in the present.


    Of course, the cooldown on Chrono Shift limited his usage, but even so, he held a significant advantage over others.


    As he emerged from the portal, he was surprised to see Maya approaching. He was relieved he had activated the skill discreetly, without being observed. ''I''ll have to be more careful now that Maya is coming here,'' he thought.


    "William, what do you do up here on the hill?" Maya asked, her eyes sparkling with curiosity. "I''ve always wondered."


    "I come here to practice magic," William replied, his gaze sweeping across the vista, "and to enjoy the view. Have you ever noticed how beautiful it is from here?"


    Maya stepped beside him, following his gaze. From the hilltop, they could see the entire village spread out below: the villagers going about their daily routines, tending to their farms and livestock, the water wheel churning by the river, children chasing each other through the fields. The lush greenery and the peaceful quiet created a sense of tranquility.


    "It really is beautiful from up here," Maya admitted. "I''ve never been here before. Father always said it was too dangerous."


    "And he let you come now?" William asked, raising an eyebrow.


    "Yes," Maya replied with a playful smile, "because he knew you were here."


    "That makes sense," William chuckled, shaking his head.


    "Can I stay and watch you train?" Maya asked, her eyes shining with anticipation. She was eager to begin her own magical journey and didn''t want to miss the opportunity to observe William.


    Since he wouldn''t be using Chrono Shift ¨C his closely guarded secret ¨C William saw no harm in Maya''s presence. "Of course," he replied with a smile. "You''re welcome to stay."

 Chapter 37 - 37: Four Months of Training

    William focused intently on mastering the runes for Kinetic Burst. Each intricate pattern proved a challenge, demanding precise control over his mana flow. He struggled to maintain their form and potency, but with each attempt, he felt a flicker of progress.


    Jinra''s unorthodox method of casting spells ¨C bypassing the traditional one-minute rune sustainment ¨C echoed in his mind. The elven approach, Jinra claimed, was the key to rapid mastery.


    But even this technique required a degree of control William hadn''t yet attained. He couldn''t hold the runes for the suggested five seconds, let alone the full minute. Still, he was determined. He would conquer these runes, no matter how long it took.


    Maya''s enthusiastic cheers punctuated his efforts. "You can do it, William!" she''d exclaim with unwavering support.


    While William typically preferred solitude for his practice, he found Maya''s presence surprisingly comforting.


    During breaks, they would sit side-by-side, sharing stories and laughter as they gazed down at the peaceful village nestled in the valley below.


    "Do you think my father is truly alright?" Maya asked, her brow furrowed with a lingering worry.


    Her question caught William off guard. Gorn seemed to have made a full recovery, a fact evident to everyone in the village. But was there more to it? sea??h th§× n?velFire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "Yes, he is," William assured her, hoping to dispel her doubts. "The priests at the church took good care of him with their powerful healing magic. Don''t worry, everything is fine."


    After hours of training, William returned to the village, seeking respite for his weary mind. As always, Elara had prepared a delicious meal, her warm smile a comforting welcome.


    Four months passed just like that. William sparred with Gorn every morning and honed his skills with Jinra whenever Chrono Shift was available.


    While he hadn''t faced any monsters during this time, his level remained unchanged, but his progress was undeniable.


    He mastered Kinetic Burst, and with that accomplishment, other skills seemed to fall into place more easily. He learned Iron Skin and Enhanced Strength, bolstering his defenses and offensive capabilities.


    Jinra''s rigorous physical conditioning had transformed William''s physique. While he remained lean to maintain his speed and agility, his muscles were now well-defined, his body honed for combat. These physical gains translated into increased strength and agility:


    Name: William Velmont


    Level: 12


    Class: None


    Attributes:


    Strength: 26


    Agility: 29


    Stamina: 21


    Intelligence: 23


    Mana: 18


    ''Imagine what I can achieve when I start gaining experience again, William mused, or learn more about Demonic Absorption...'' He was excited about his future and the possibilities that lay ahead.


    The most significant milestone on the horizon was his journey to the magic school. Both Gorn and Jinra had prepared him for this moment, each in their own way, across different eras.


    "I still can''t believe you learned all those spells in such a short time," Gorn remarked as they packed their belongings for the journey.


    "I''m amazing, aren''t I?" William said, brimming with confidence. "And just wait until I get some formal instruction at the school. I''ll be unstoppable."


    Gorn chuckled. "Don''t get ahead of yourself, lad."


    They bid farewell to the villagers, not just Elara and Maya, but the entire community. Everyone gathered to see them off, offering words of encouragement and well wishes.


    "You''ll do great, William!"


    "Make Willow Creek proud!"


    "After putting up with grumpy Gorn for months, you can overcome anything!" one of the hunters shouted, drawing laughter from the crowd.


    William basked in their support, a stark contrast to the teasing and mockery he had often endured from his peers back on Earth. This small village had become his home, and these people, his family. He would make them proud.


    They set off on horseback, the most efficient way to traverse the considerable distance. "Are you sure you''re comfortable leaving your family for so long?" William asked, concern lacing his voice.


    The journey to the magic school would take nearly two months, and Gorn would have to make the return trip alone, effectively doubling his time away from home.


    Gorn nodded, his expression resolute. "We''ll stop in Alderanth and speak with Aella," he explained. "I''ll hire her to stay in Willow Creek and ensure their safety."


    Despite the prevailing peace in the village, Gorn couldn''t shake the feeling of vulnerability, leaving his loved ones unprotected.


    But William, who had become like a son to him, needed his guidance and protection on this journey. He knew he was making the right decision, fulfilling his duties as both a father and a mentor.


    "Great idea," William agreed. "But what if she''s busy with another mission?"


    Gorn, ever prepared, had already considered that possibility. "I spoke with her about this the last time we were in Alderanth," he explained. "So unless something urgent has come up, it should be fine."


    They set off for Alderanth once more. The city, once a source of wonder for William, now held a familiar charm. He longed to explore new horizons, his anticipation for the magic school growing with each passing day. Their journey was punctuated by nights spent camping along the road or, when their funds allowed, indulging in the comforts of a roadside tavern.


    They arrived in Alderanth after nightfall. The usually bustling city gates were quiet, the line of travelers nearly nonexistent. Guards inspected their belongings for contraband before waving them through.


    At the Adventurers'' Guild, they inquired about Aella.


    "She''s in the city at the moment," the receptionist confirmed. "You''re Gorn, right? She said I could give you her address. Just a moment..." She scribbled something on a piece of parchment and handed it to Gorn.


    "Thank you," Gorn said, taking the paper.


    They navigated the maze of streets, eventually finding Aella''s residence in a pleasant middle-class neighborhood. It was a charming house, a testament to her success as an adventurer.


    Aella answered their knock, her face creased with sleep. "Who dares disturb my slumber at this late hour?" she grumbled, then her expression softened upon recognizing her visitors. "Oh, it''s you two! Come in, come in."


    William noticed a hint of a smile playing on her lips as she ushered them inside.


    The house was a cozy haven. Whitewashed walls, large windows, and a crackling fireplace gave it a welcoming atmosphere. Four bedrooms and an impressive library spoke of comfort and a love for knowledge.


    "This place is amazing," William remarked, impressed. "After graduating from magic school, I want to become an adventurer. Seems like the pay is pretty good."


    Aella laughed. "You don''t even need to graduate," she said. "After the first year, you''ll be eligible for missions, maybe even sooner. But with your talent, I think you can do whatever you set your mind to."


    "You really think so?" William asked, a wide grin spreading across his face. "Thanks for the vote of confidence!"


    The trio moved to the living room, settling onto a plush leather sofa. William sank into its softness, enjoying the comfort as Aella and Gorn discussed the details of their arrangement.


    "I''m taking this young lad to the magic academy," Gorn announced, gesturing towards William with a proud grin. He nudged William''s foot, prompting him to sit up properly. "I''d like you to head to Willow Creek and keep an eye on things while we''re gone. Four months, to be precise."


    Aella listened intently, then nodded in agreement. "Certainly, no problem. I was planning a vacation around this time anyway. I hear there''s excellent fishing near Willow Creek, and even some hot springs?"


    "Indeed," Gorn confirmed. "Thank you for looking after the village in my absence."


    William, who had been on the verge of dozing off, snapped to attention. "Wait, what?" he exclaimed. "Hot springs? How come I never knew about this?"


    Gorn chuckled. "You were supposed to be focused on your training, lad. No hot springs for you."


    "But that''s bull¡ª" William began to protest, but Gorn cut him off with a stern look.


    "Enough complaining," Gorn said, his voice firm. "Your training has prepared you well. Now it''s time to put your skills to the test."

 Chapter 38 - 38: Unpleasant Stay

    William and Gorn enjoyed a comfortable night''s rest at Aella''s house, a welcome respite after their journey. But with the dawn came the time to depart. Aella, too, packed her belongings, ready to fulfill her end of the bargain. As William and Gorn headed north, Aella would journey south to Willow Creek.


    "Take care on your travels," Aella said, a warm smile gracing her features. "And behave yourself, William."


    William rolled his eyes playfully. "I''m not a child," he retorted. "You take care too, Aella."


    With farewells exchanged, they left Alderanth behind. From this point onward, everything would be new territory for William. A nervous flutter danced in his stomach.


    "Is this region dangerous?" he asked, scanning the unfamiliar landscape.


    "Travel always carries some risk," Gorn replied, his gaze steady. "But sticking to the main roads will minimize it. Security is much tighter along these routes. Most travelers get into trouble when they try to take shortcuts."


    They had departed early precisely to avoid rushing. Gorn, a seasoned traveler, preferred the well-trodden paths to risky shortcuts. The main roads, paved with stone and dotted with taverns, offered a comfortable and secure journey, patrolled regularly by kingdom soldiers.


    "Why does everyone travel by horse?" William asked, curious. "Is it the fastest way?"


    "Certainly not," Gorn replied, amusement in his voice. "We have magic-powered airships, mages who can fly independently, and, most commonly, flying magical beasts."


    "Horses are simply more affordable and accessible," he added. "And certainly better than walking."


    "Wow, that''s amazing," William exclaimed, his imagination ignited. "One day, I want a flying beast of my own. Imagine riding a dragon!"


    Gorn chuckled. "The only problem is dragons don''t exist anymore. But it would be quite a sight, wouldn''t it? Tell me, how would you go about taming a dragon?"


    William, caught off guard, blurted out the first thing that came to mind. "With my incredible sense of humor?"


    "Idiot..." Gorn muttered, shaking his head.


    Their journey progressed smoothly for a while. But during a routine stop at a tavern, things took an unexpected, and sinister, turn.


    The tavern was located in a tiny settlement, barely a village, with no more than eight houses huddled together. It was smaller than Willow Creek, its only distinguishing feature a protective wall.


    Night had fallen when they arrived, cloaking the town in an eerie darkness. A thick fog rolled in, adding to the unsettling atmosphere. A lone villager stood at the gate, his expression grim.


    "What brings you here?" he asked gruffly.


    "Travelers seeking shelter for the night," Gorn replied. "May we enter?"


    "Of course," the villager said, stepping aside. "Please, come in."


    They rode through the gate, the rhythmic clip-clop of their horses'' hooves echoing through the deserted streets. They dismounted in front of the town''s sole tavern, its windows dark and uninviting.


    "This place gives me the creeps," William muttered, eyeing the dilapidated buildings and fog-shrouded streets. "Honestly, I''d rather camp in the woods."


    Gorn shared his sentiment. "Indeed," he grumbled, "but we need supplies and rest for the horses. Hunting in this fog would be a fool''s errand. We''ll have to make do with this tavern. Perhaps the interior is more inviting."


    They left their horses in the care of a sullen stable boy and stepped into the tavern. The interior was dimly lit, the air thick with the musty scent of neglect. Cobwebs clung to the corners, insects crawled along the walls, and the wooden floorboards creaked ominously beneath their feet.


    "Well, so much for a more inviting interior," William quipped, wrinkling his nose.


    They approached the bar, where a man with a scraggly beard, missing teeth, and a disconcertingly cheerful grin sat polishing a tankard. He looked like he had stepped straight out of a horror film.


    "Do you have any rooms available?" Gorn inquired.


    The man''s smile widened. "Indeed we do," he chirped. "Will two rooms suffice?"


    "Yes, that will be fine," Gorn replied.


    The innkeeper handed them keys, informing them he would settle the payment in the morning. "I''m feeling quite weary," he explained, stifling a yawn. "I''ll be closing up for the night."


    This struck William as odd. Taverns usually operated around the clock, with staff working in shifts. Perhaps this establishment didn''t receive enough traffic to justify such hours. The place felt so deserted that William wondered if he and Gorn were the first customers in months.


    They climbed the creaking stairs to the second floor. The rooms were spartan, each containing a single bed with a rock-hard mattress and little else. No windows, no amenities, not even a washbasin.


    ''This feels more like a prison cell than a tavern room,'' William thought grimly. Sleeping in the woods suddenly seemed far more appealing.


    A few minutes later, Gorn arrived with a steaming bowl of soup for each of them. Despite the dismal surroundings, the soup was surprisingly delicious.


    Perhaps it was their hunger amplifying the flavors, but the warm meal brought a much-needed sense of comfort.


    "We''ll resume our journey in the morning," Gorn said, his voice low as he savored the soup. "I don''t want to stay in this forsaken place any longer than necessary."


    "Agreed," William replied, sharing his sentiment.


    After their meal, Gorn retired to his room, leaving William alone with his thoughts. He lay down on the lumpy bed, the unsettling atmosphere making it difficult to relax. Sleep finally came, but it was a restless slumber, punctuated by strange noises in the dead of night.


    William''s eyes snapped open. He reached for his sword, his heart pounding. Footsteps echoed in the hallway outside his room. At first, he dismissed it as a normal occurrence in a tavern, but then he remembered ¨C the tavern was closed. There shouldn''t be anyone else here.


    ''It''s just me and Gorn,'' he thought, his grip tightening on the sword hilt. ''Who''s out there?''


    He hesitated, fear battling with curiosity. Just as he mustered the courage to investigate, the footsteps ceased. Unease prickled his skin, but exhaustion eventually won over, and he drifted back to sleep.


    Morning arrived with a rude awakening. Gorn pounded on his door, his voice filled with urgency.


    "Lad, we have a problem," Gorn announced as William opened the door. "Someone stole our horses!"


    He punctuated his statement with a furious punch that nearly sent the flimsy wall crumbling.


    The news was a blow. This desolate town was in the middle of nowhere. There was no telling where they could find replacements.


    "What do we do now?" William asked, his stomach churning with anxiety.


    "We track down those horses," Gorn declared, his jaw clenched. "And if we can''t find them, we pray someone here has some to sell. Worst case scenario, we walk to the next town, but that will delay our journey significantly."


    Their first lead was the stable boy, but he had vanished without a trace. They questioned the other townsfolk, but were met with indifference, even a hint of malicious glee at their misfortune. Gorn, a man of action, felt a growing sense of dread.


    He couldn''t bear the thought of William missing the magic school entrance exam after months of dedicated training.


    "We''ll stay one more day to search for the horses," Gorn declared, his voice tight with frustration. "If we have no luck, we''ll continue on foot."


    William nodded, trusting Gorn''s judgment. They spent the day scouring the town, questioning every resident, but their efforts proved futile.


    No one had seen the horses, nor did anyone have any to sell. Resigned, they returned to the dilapidated tavern for another miserable night. And that''s when the true horror began.


    Sear?h the N?vel(F)ire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.

 Chapter 39 - 39: Boost in Power

    The same chilling sounds from the previous night echoed through the tavern hallway. But this time, the disturbance escalated. A figure cloaked in shadow, their face obscured by a mask, slipped silently into William''s room.


    "Wh-what the...?" William mumbled, startled awake.


    He scrambled to his feet, reaching for his sword, but a wave of dizziness washed over him. An unseen force had filled the room, a soporific smoke that sapped his strength and clouded his mind. He slumped back onto the bed, unconscious.


    The intruder effortlessly hoisted William over their shoulder and slipped out of the tavern, unnoticed. A few townsfolk witnessed the abduction, but remained silent, their faces betraying a disturbing complicity.


    "Best stay hidden," the innkeeper had warned one of them. "That other one, the older fellow, he seems strong. Causing him trouble could be...unpleasant."


    It was clear that everyone in this forsaken town was involved in some dark conspiracy.


    William awoke to the chilling realization that his arms were bound tightly, and a gag stifled any cry for help. He found himself in a dank, cold cell, the air heavy with the stench of mildew and decay.


    A sturdy iron door stood between him and freedom, far beyond his reach. The thick stone walls offered no hope of escape through brute force. He was trapped, a prisoner in this silent, subterranean tomb.


    Panic clawed at William''s throat. Gorn was nowhere to be seen. He was alone, trapped in this forsaken cell, with no obvious means of escape.


    ''Damn it, how am I going to get out of here?'' he thought, his mind racing.


    He strained against the ropes binding his wrists, but they held firm, mocking his efforts. Then, a spark of hope ignited within him.


    Enhanced Strength! He contorted his fingers, painstakingly forming the runes with his mana, and cast the spell. Power surged through his muscles, his body thrumming with newfound strength.


    [+30 Strength]


    With a guttural cry, he pulled against the ropes. They snapped, the frayed ends falling away like broken spiderwebs.


    He ripped the gag from his mouth, his heart pounding. The iron door, however, proved an insurmountable obstacle.


    Even with his enhanced strength, it remained stubbornly shut. He slammed his fists against the cold metal, each blow echoing through the silent dungeon, but to no avail.


    ''Damn it!''


    The commotion drew attention. Footsteps approached, stopping just outside the cell. William recognized the villager who had greeted them at the gate two days prior.


    "Keep it down," the man hissed through the bars. "You may have freed yourself from those ropes, but you''ll never break that door. Just stay put and wait your turn."


    "What does that mean?" he asked, confused.


    But the man said nothing more and simply walked away.


    "Hey, come back here! Hey!" William shouted after him.


    But the man left without another word. William was frustrated. He still had no idea where he was, who had kidnapped him, or why.


    He was sure that everyone in this creepy town was involved! The guard at the town gate was also watching his cell, so who else was in on it?


    ''That tavern was a dump, I wouldn''t be surprised if the owner was part of this too. But what do they want with me?'' William wondered.


    The only thing he could do was wait, and hope that Gorn would find him.


    He knew it was a long shot, but it was better than giving up and accepting whatever horrors awaited him.


    William sat in the cold, dark corner of his cell, and waited. He listened to the rats scurrying in the darkness.


    Eventually, someone appeared at his door. Again, they threw some kind of gas in to weaken him.


    He tried to hold his breath, but he couldn''t hold it forever.


    He had to breathe, and the gas filled his lungs, making him weak.


    [All attributes reduced by 90%]


    The message appeared before him. The gas was potent, and he felt incredibly weak.


    A figure in a black robe and mask entered the cell to retrieve him.


    They led William to a room with several figures in similar robes, and an altar in the middle with a chalice on it.


    William realized he was surrounded by fanatics, and this situation could very well be his end.


    They tied him to the stone altar with iron chains, making sure he couldn''t escape.


    One of the robed figures, this one in red, like a leader, began to speak. S§×arch* The n?vel_Fire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "Good evening, my dear friends. We are all gathered here today to perform the invocation of our god. This is a momentous occasion."


    "We have found a healthy young man to serve as a vessel for our god!"


    The others murmured excitedly.


    "Silence, please. I will now begin the ritual."


    William was tied up and weak, but he could still see and hear everything. It was all so bizarre.


    One by one, they went to the chalice and placed some of their blood in it. Even the leader.


    Then, they poured the blood onto William''s body. Thankfully, they avoided his face.


    After that, they began chanting in a language William didn''t recognize.


    The chanting intensified, a chorus of voices echoing through the cavernous space. William, bound and helpless upon the cold stone altar, watched the cultists sway in their dark robes, their faces obscured by grotesque masks.


    The scene was unsettling, a nightmare come to life. He felt a growing sense of dread, a primal fear he couldn''t quite explain. Escape seemed impossible.


    The chains bit into his wrists, and the chanting grew louder, a hypnotic drone that threatened to overwhelm him.


    The ritual reached a fever pitch. The air crackled with energy, a palpable tension that raised the hairs on William''s neck. It was a sensation he had experienced before, a whisper of something dark and powerful, but he couldn''t place it.


    "Our god is coming!" the leader proclaimed, his voice booming through the chamber. "Let us praise it together!"


    Suddenly, a torrent of energy surged towards William, enveloping him in its power. It was supposed to be the cult''s deity manifesting, but something had gone terribly, terribly wrong.


    [Demonic Energy entering your body]


    [Demonic Absorption Activating]


    The energy flooding his senses was not divine, but demonic. And his body was absorbing it, drinking it in like a parched sponge. The cultists, oblivious to the error in their summoning, continued their fervent chanting.


    William felt the power coursing through him, strengthening his muscles, sharpening his senses. The lingering effects of the paralyzing gas vanished, replaced by an exhilarating surge of energy.


    [+20 Strength]


    [+20 Agility]


    [+20 Stamina]


    [+20 Intelligence]


    [New Attribute Earned, Demonic Energy]


    [Demonic Energy: 10]


    Notifications blinked before his eyes, a testament to his rapidly transforming abilities. He was becoming something more, something beyond human.


    A dangerous glint entered his eyes. These cultists had unwittingly unleashed a power they couldn''t control. And William, fueled by their misguided ritual, was ready to make them pay.


    William felt stronger than ever, and all those cultists who were waiting to see their deity coming to that world would get a reality check.


    The leader, the one in red, said while kneeling, "Our lord, welcome."


    William pulled the chains and destroyed them using his strength. Then, he looked at all the cultists that were trying to use him as a sacrifice.


    "You will regret this," he said, coldly.

 Chapter 40 - 40: Massacre, Reaching the City

    The cultists, their faces contorted in a mix of fear and reverence, struggled to comprehend the sight before them. Their god, their dark savior, had returned...but something was amiss.


    "Oh great lord," the cult leader stammered, his voice trembling, "we know you are displeased by these restraints, but they were necessary to prepare the vessel."


    William''s eyes, now burning with an unnatural intensity, scanned the assembled figures. They were weak, their power paltry compared to the demonic energy coursing through his veins. Only the leader posed a potential threat, but even he would be no match for a surprise attack.


    A cruel smile twisted William''s lips. "Ah, is that so?" he purred, his voice dripping with false reassurance. "Forgive my... outburst."


    The leader, momentarily relieved, gasped as a searing pain pierced his chest. He looked down to see the obsidian blade protruding from his heart, its dark surface slick with blood.


    "B-but why...?" he choked out, his eyes wide with disbelief.


    Those were his last words. He crumpled to the ground, lifeless. A notification flashed before William''s eyes, confirming the kill and the experience points gained. It was the first time he had taken a human life.


    He had slain the demon, of course, but that felt different, less...real. He should have felt remorse, guilt, but those emotions were strangely absent. Instead, a dark satisfaction bloomed within him, a thirst for vengeance against those who had sought to sacrifice him.


    With a roar, William lunged at the nearest cultist, his sword a blur of deadly motion. He cleaved through flesh and bone, severing limbs, heads, and torsos.


    Blood splattered across the altar, staining the stone floor crimson. The enhanced strength and agility granted by the demonic energy made each attack effortless, each strike precise and devastating.


    The cultists'' screams echoed through the chamber, their desperate pleas for mercy falling on deaf ears. William, consumed by a terrifying rage, cut them down without hesitation.


    Some attempted to fight back, one even managing to plunge a dagger deep into William''s shoulder. The pain was intense, but in that moment of adrenaline-fueled fury, he barely registered it.


    The carnage ended. Silence descended, heavy and oppressive. William fell to his knees, the reality of his actions crashing down upon him.


    He had just slaughtered a room full of people. Blood stained his hands, his clothes, the very air he breathed. He buried his face in his hands, overwhelmed by the enormity of what he had done. He tried to convince himself it was self-defense, that they had intended to kill him first.


    But a nagging voice whispered doubts in his ear. Was this truly him? Or was the demonic energy influencing his actions, pushing him towards violence?


    He rose, his legs shaky, and stumbled out of the chamber. Following a set of wooden stairs, he emerged into a grand mansion, nestled deep within the forest.


    This was the cult''s headquarters, a place of dark rituals and sinister secrets. He briefly searched for valuables, hoping to find something useful, but found nothing of interest.


    Outside, he washed the blood from his body in the cool water of a nearby well, scrubbing at his skin until it was free of the crimson stain.


    He changed into a simple peasant''s outfit he found within the mansion, the rough fabric a stark contrast to his usual attire. Two horses grazed peacefully nearby. Recognition sparked in William''s eyes. These were the horses stolen from him and Gorn.


    ''Those bastards,'' he thought, his anger rekindled.


    He returned to the deserted town, the tavern looming like a specter in the eerie silence. Most of the townsfolk had been present at the ritual, leaving the streets deserted. He found Gorn pacing anxiously in front of the tavern, his face etched with worry.


    "Lad!" Gorn exclaimed, rushing towards William and pulling him into a tight embrace. "What in the world happened?"


    "I can explain on the way," William replied grimly. "Let''s get out of here!"


    Gorn nodded, mounting one of the horses. William followed suit, and they rode out of the cursed town, leaving the horrors behind them.


    William recounted his harrowing experience, carefully omitting the details of the demonic energy absorption and the ensuing massacre.


    He claimed to have been captured, but concocted a believable escape, attributing his freedom to a combination of luck and resourcefulness. Gorn, though sensing some gaps in the story, trusted William implicitly.


    "I''m glad you managed to escape that dreadful situation," Gorn said, relief washing over him. "And they were the ones who stole our horses? Mother fuckers!"


    "Yes," William confirmed, eager to put the ordeal behind him. "I found them outside that mansion. Honestly, the whole experience was rather traumatic. I''d prefer to focus on our journey now."


    "Agreed," Gorn said, steering their conversation towards safer topics.


    They resumed their travels, the magic school drawing ever closer. The remaining journey was uneventful, a welcome respite after their harrowing encounter. While William appreciated the peace, a part of him craved excitement, a yearning for adventure that simmered beneath the surface.


    That excitement arrived in the form of two magnificent griffins. Gorn, ever resourceful, had arranged for these majestic creatures to carry them over the treacherous mountain range that lay ahead. S~ea??h the nov§×lF~ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "Gods above!" William exclaimed, his eyes wide with awe. "Why are we riding griffins?"


    "We''re entering a mountainous region," Gorn explained, "and traveling by horse would take far too long. These magnificent beasts will carry us to the city where your magic school awaits. It should take no more than seven days."


    The final leg of their journey had begun, and with it, a sense of anticipation and wonder filled William''s heart. He was ready to embrace the challenges and opportunities that awaited him at the academy.


    A nervous thrill coursed through William as he clambered onto the griffin, tentatively stroking its beak as the handler had instructed. The creature, surprisingly docile, responded with a soft chirp. With a powerful leap, they took to the sky.


    William gasped, the wind whipping through his hair, the world stretching out beneath him like an endless tapestry. He had never experienced flight like this, the freedom and exhilaration unlike anything he could have imagined.


    Gorn soared beside him, a wide grin splitting his weathered face. "Magnificent, isn''t it?" he shouted over the wind.


    The towering mountains, their snow-capped peaks gleaming in the sunlight, painted a breathtaking panorama. William, mesmerized by the sheer beauty of it all, took a moment to respond.


    "It''s incredible!" he yelled back, his voice filled with awe. "This is the best part of the journey!"


    "You bet it is!" Gorn roared, guiding his griffin into a graceful arc.


    And so, seven days passed. William savored every moment of the journey, and then, from a mountaintop, he beheld the city that would be his home for a considerable time!


    It was enormous, with towering stone walls and even taller buildings. A short distance from the city, on an even higher part of the mountain, stood a colossal structure, encircled by a rampart and a blue barrier, like some magical shield.


    "That''s the magic school you''ll be attending," Gorn said, pointing towards it. "But first, we''ll take a break in the city. You still have a few days before your exam, I believe."


    "Understood," William replied.


    Excitement thrummed through him. He had finally reached his destination.

 Chapter 41 - 41: Two Days Before the Exam

    They dismounted their griffins at the city''s edge, the majestic creatures folding their wings as they settled onto the ground. While the griffins could have easily soared over the towering walls, the city had strict regulations against aerial entry.


    The path leading up to the gate was sparsely populated, not due to any lack of appeal, but because of the treacherous mountain trails that served as the only access point. The Snowpeak Mount, as it was known, stood in stark contrast to the gentler landscapes William was accustomed to.


    "This is The Snowpeak Mount. What do you think?" Gorn asked, a hint of pride in his voice.


    Even having traversed through worlds thus seeing great things back on Earth, William found himself captivated by the city''s grandeur. Its ancient stone architecture, accented by the subtle shimmer of ambient magic, exuded an aura of timeless wonder.


    "Looking pretty magical," William admitted, his gaze sweeping over the cityscape. "But how long do we have to wait until the exam?"


    "A few days. Let''s get inside, shall we?" Gorn gestured towards the imposing front gate.


    The guards, clad in gleaming armor, conducted a thorough search, their practiced hands expertly checking for any contraband.


    "Why are you two coming to the city?" one guard inquired, his voice sharp and alert.


    "I am taking him to the exam to enter the magic school," Gorn explained patiently. "After everything is done, I''ll be leaving."


    The guard''s stern expression softened slightly. "Oh, another student coming for the exam," he remarked with a hint of amusement. "Many of them arrived last month. I think this year''s exam might be exciting. Anyway, go in, and enjoy your stay."


    The gate swung open, revealing a bustling city with cobblestone streets teeming with people. The air hummed with activity, a stark contrast to the serene mountain path they had just traversed. S§×arch* The Novel?ire(.)ne*t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    But beyond the bustling markets and impressive displays of magic, what struck William most was the pervasive sense of security.


    The city guard, a mix of seasoned warriors and powerful mages, some even graduates of Snowpeak Mount''s esteemed academy, patrolled the streets with an air of confident authority.


    "This is incredible," William breathed, his eyes wide with wonder. "There are alchemy shops, enchantment shops, magic tomes shops¡­ This is a paradise for anyone seeking knowledge!"


    He was captivated by the sheer variety of magical wares on display, and this wasn''t even the school itself! He knew that within the academy''s walls lay even greater treasures ¨C ancient texts and rare spellbooks, accessible to students who proved their worth. The prospect ignited a fire of ambition within him.


    "Hungry?" Gorn asked, interrupting William''s awestruck musings. "First, let''s find a safe place for the griffins."


    Though their arrival on griffin-back had initially drawn some curious glances, it was hardly an uncommon sight. Griffins were a favored mode of transport for those journeying to Snowpeak Mount, offering both speed and safety in equal measure.


    The city boasted a well-equipped care center specifically for flying mounts. They led their griffins through a grand archway into a spacious stable, where attendants bustled about, tending to a variety of winged creatures.


    "Alright, it''s 50 silver coins a day. Understood?" the gruff owner declared, eyeing them with a practiced gaze.


    Gorn nodded, handing over the payment without hesitation, and then steered William back towards the city center, his familiarity with the winding streets evident.


    He moved with the assurance of someone who had walked these paths many times before, a fact that did not escape William''s notice.


    "This isn''t your first time here, is it?" he asked, curiosity piqued.


    Gorn chuckled. "You''re quite perceptive, lad. And no, it isn''t. I''ve been here many times throughout my life."


    The more Gorn revealed, the more enigmatic he became. He possessed the skills of a seasoned warrior, yet presented himself as a simple hunter from the remote village of Willow Creek.


    How could a hunter afford such frequent trips to Snowpeak Mount? Where did he acquire his wealth and his combat prowess?


    Despite his growing curiosity, William held onto his trust in Gorn. He sensed that the man had his reasons for keeping secrets, and that in time, those secrets would be revealed.


    They went to a tavern to get some food and rest after their difficult journey.


    The place was called Dale Ale. When they pushed the door open, many eyes went straight to them.


    William wasn''t scared of being stared at anymore. He looked back and noticed a few young faces in the bar, each accompanied by someone older.


    He didn''t need much knowledge to understand who those people were ¨C people wanting to take the same exam as he was. Judging by the scanning eyes the young folks gave William, they were thinking the same thing.


    Gorn went to the counter to speak with the attendant, ordering some food and a room for later. They chose a table in the corner of the tavern, ate their food, and went to their rooms afterward.


    As William was going up the staircase, before he could even take the first step, a young man stopped in front of him. The young man was blond, not that tall, and slim. "Hey, nice to meet you. I am Altair."


    "William," William said, shaking the man''s hand. He didn''t understand why that person came to speak with him, but there was no need to act rude when the other party wasn''t.


    "I can tell you are taking the exam in a few days. You know there are a few spots, right? So, good luck. I hope you and I can get our spots," Altair said with a smile, and then he left, returning to his table.


    "Good luck to you too," William said while Altair was moving away. The youth heard it, as he turned his head to see William and give him a thumbs up.


    As they were going up the staircase, William muttered, "That was strange."


    Gorn was right beside him. "It could be one of two things: either this Altair is targeting you, which means you''ll have some problems in the future, or he''s just someone who wants to be friends if both of you get into the magic academy."


    William was hoping it was the latter. He wasn''t looking to make enemies before even stepping foot inside the magic academy. That would be horrendous.


    They went all the way up to the tavern''s third floor where their room was. Yes, their room. The city had so many people coming for the exams that they didn''t have any more rooms left. The good part was that the room itself was pretty big, and it had two beds inside.


    "The tavern owner certainly knows his customers, or maybe he prepared it especially for the exam period," William said as he jumped on the single bed.


    "Yep. They often change the rooms when the city gets more visitors, like during the exam period. They know the aspiring acolytes always come with a guard or a mentor, so that''s why they design the rooms like this."


    William gave an acknowledging nod. "These owners are pretty smart."


    "That''s how they keep their profit."


    The two decided to rest after the long journey. William slept like a rock on the single bed, while Gorn slept on the king-size bed.


    It was around 5 pm when they slept, only waking up the next day at around 5 am... That was a lot of sleep. William woke up feeling like he had been hit by a truck.


    ''Not sleeping sucks, sleeping too much sucks too,'' he complained internally.


    According to their calculations, they still had two free days before the exam, and Gorn wanted to make sure William was prepared.

 Chapter 42 - 42: Learning About the Exams

    Two days before the exam. It wasn''t a decent time to train for anything. No one would be training during this period. But it was important for William to understand how the exam worked and what he should expect. Gorn and William were sitting on the bed, talking about it.


    "Before anything, I''ve never participated in these exams," Gorn said.


    William was expecting to hear something similar to that, but what he heard next shook him to his core.


    "But I have participated in the examination boards, so I know how the process works and the best things to do to get a good score," Gorn said.


    The whole thing about Gorn''s identity was just too much for William to handle. It seemed like every time, Gorn became even more mysterious.


    A ''normal'' person could never participate in the examination board of such a great magic academy. Hell, a ''normal'' person would never participate in any board.


    So how was Gorn there? A simple hunter with some good skills? William didn''t believe any of that.


    "I won''t even ask you how you are on this board," William said, rolling his eyes at the statement.


    Gorn, on the other hand, said, "I was once a teacher in that school. To become one, you don''t have to go through the same exam the students go through. It was another one."


    That, at least, was some explanation. William didn''t push him for more answers. It was good enough for him.


    "So the first part of the exam is in fact the talent thing you did. They admit people with various talents, as this is something that can be improved, and it doesn''t mean you are smart or will become someone powerful. After that, those who passed the talent test will go to the second test, which is basically a field thing. They change the area every time so I don''t know for certain, but expect to use your body to endure harsh conditions."


    The first two tests weren''t concerning to William. He knew he had a good talent, so the first test was already a win. And his body was his strongest asset, so the second test was in the bag too. But the rest of the exam was another story.


    "The third exam is comprised of fights between those who have passed the other tests. Remember this clearly," Gorn said, calling for William''s attention. "This test is not looking for the one who wins the fight. You get points based on your usage of the runes, the spells, how many spells you show during combat, and how well you fight. Don''t go there trying to just win without showing what you are capable of." S~ea??h the n?vel_Fire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Well, that certainly was a good piece of information; some people taking the exams would know it, and some wouldn''t.


    "The last part of the exam is the hardest. You''ll be staying in the magic academy as if you were already a student, but you won''t be before passing this test," Gorn said.


    William paid close attention to what Gorn was saying. He didn''t want to mess up his chance of becoming a student in that prestigious school! He wanted access to the books, the resources, the teachers that could guide him! William wanted to become stronger.


    "You''ll be staying for one month in the school. Not taking classes or anything, but you can use the library. Anyway, the test is essentially this: the more spells you learn during this time, the more points you get," Gorn explained.


    This part worked with a points system. The lower-ranked spells earned fewer points, but they were easier to learn, so you could learn more than one during the one-month period. The higher the spell rank, the higher the points acquired.


    But Gorn warned William, "You need to learn at least one spell during this time. I have seen so many students trying to learn high-ranking spells to get the highest points, and in the end, they learn nothing and lose their chances. Play it smart during this part."


    "Understood."


    William now knew how all the parts of the exam worked, which was huge for him.


    "This won''t give you a major advantage, though. The nobles already know all of this, maybe even more. But at least you are on equal terms with them," Gorn explained.


    The people trying to enter the magic academy ranged from poor to rich, influential to not influential. Everyone knew the nobles had access to information the commoners couldn''t get, but that didn''t mean the commoners couldn''t enter the magic academy. In fact, there were more commoners than nobles, and the number was steadily increasing.


    Anyway, William spent the remainder of the time after that conversation resting. He rested for the entirety of the two days, only going out to eat and explore some parts of the city. He didn''t train a single day. He wanted to keep his mind fresh and sharp for the upcoming tests, so it wasn''t a good idea to overexert himself.


    It had been a while since the last time he used his SSS skill, but he didn''t have the chance during the journey¡ªGorn would see him use it, and that couldn''t happen. But William sensed that he would be using it soon.


    The morning of the first day of exams arrived, and they set off, heading all the way toward the highest part of the mountain where the magic academy was located. Could they use their griffins to get there faster? In theory, yes, but there was a barrier close to the magic academy that made flying impossible.


    William noticed other students who were also heading toward the academy, just like them. In fact, he even spotted Altair, who came to talk with him. The blond lad looked as happy as ever.


    "Hey, William. Excited for the tests?" Altair said; then he leaned closer to William, whispering, "Want to know how the tests work?"


    That was pretty nice of Altair, being willing to share how the tests worked with William.


    "Thank you, but I already know," William said, smiling. "But thank you. Not everyone seems to be willing to help."


    Altair looked at the other students around them with scorn. "Yeah, you can expect these students to be mostly pricks, especially the nobles." He then added, "I know the nobles can be jerks because I am a noble myself, but I am not a jerk, obviously."


    The two decided to chat during their journey to the academy. It took them around an hour of walking to get there. Altair looked somewhat exhausted.


    ''He certainly is not a mage who focuses on the body, like me,'' thought William.


    They all stopped in front of an imposing gate. The walls surrounding the school were massive, entirely made of stone. Towers stood at each corner of the school with guards stationed above, staffs in hand, ready to protect the school if anything happened.


    But even before that, the school had a magical barrier protecting it. It was one of the safest places in the entire kingdom.


    All the students were gathered in front of the gate, waiting for the exam supervisor to show up. They couldn''t just enter; there were rules for them to follow.


    William waited there, his heart beating fast and his fingers fidgeting without a break.


    "Relax," Gorn said.


    That wasn''t enough to relax him. But he wasn''t nervous because he believed he wouldn''t pass the test. He was just excited to start it as soon as possible!

 Chapter 43 - 43: Magic Academy Exam (1)

    The school''s front gate buzzed with nervous energy. William, though outwardly calm, felt a flutter of anticipation in his stomach. He observed the crowd, noting the varied ages and backgrounds of the applicants. Some were barely older than Maya, while others appeared to be in their late twenties.


    "Gorn," he whispered, "what''s the age range at this academy?"


    "There''s a minimum age to enroll, but no maximum," Gorn explained. "It''s common to see students of all ages in the same class, though most are between sixteen and twenty-four. Older students are rarer."


    William recalled that the minimum age was sixteen, but that didn''t mean aspiring mages only began their training then. Nobles, with their privileged access to resources and tutors, often started much younger, giving them a significant head start. William had only begun his magical journey recently, but his experiences in the past and his unique skillset gave him a distinct advantage.


    "You might be slightly behind some of these nobles," Gorn said, his voice filled with confidence, "but with your talent, you''ll surpass them in no time."


    William knew his talent was above average, but not extraordinary. It was his Chrono Shift ability that truly set him apart. He couldn''t help but feel a twinge of guilt, knowing he possessed an unfair advantage.


    Thirty minutes crawled by, the tension in the hall thickening. A young noble, his impatience evident, voiced his frustration. "Our families practically fund this school!" he complained loudly. "Why are they treating us like this?"


    Just then, an elderly man in flowing gray robes materialized at the top of the grand gate. His long white beard and hair framed a face remarkably devoid of wrinkles. He floated effortlessly to the ground, his eyes twinkling with an ageless wisdom.


    "The school is free," the man boomed, his voice amplified by magic, "and everyone receives the same treatment. Our esteemed researchers and professors serve the kingdom, not your coin purses, young man."


    William glanced at Gorn, whose face had drained of color. "What''s wrong?" William whispered.


    "Th-that''s the headmaster!" Gorn stammered, his voice barely above a whisper. "I don''t know why he''s here!"


    The young noble, his arrogance deflated, opened his mouth to retort, but an older man beside him intervened. "I apologize for my son''s impudence, Headmaster," the man said, bowing respectfully.


    The headmaster smiled. "It''s understandable. Youngsters have much to learn." He surveyed the crowd, his gaze piercing. "For those who don''t know me, I am Tholfnir, Headmaster of this academy."


    A hush fell over the hall. The earlier commotion evaporated, replaced by a respectful silence. No one dared to anger the man who held their future in his hands.


    "The supervisor for today''s entrance exam is usually a professor," Tholfnir continued, "but due to unforeseen circumstances, I will be overseeing the proceedings myself. Consider yourselves fortunate to have this opportunity to impress me directly."


    William felt a surge of anxiety. He looked at Gorn, his voice barely a whisper. "Is this good or bad?"


    "Good if you have something impressive to show him," Gorn replied, his voice low, "and bad if you...don''t. I think you''ll be just fine."


    "First," Tholfnir announced, his voice resonating with authority, "we shall enter the academy grounds. The initial tests will be conducted within."


    With a groan of ancient hinges, the massive gates swung open, revealing a glimpse of the wonders within. The sight drew gasps from the assembled crowd.


    William felt dwarfed by the sheer scale of the entrance, its grandeur a testament to the prestige of the institution. Headmaster Tholfnir led the way, pausing to address the applicants.


    "Only those participating in the entrance exam may proceed," he declared. "All others are to return to the city."


    Gorn, along with the other guardians, bid their farewells. "We''ll speak later," Gorn said, squeezing William''s shoulder. "You''ll likely have two stages of testing today."


    "Alright," William replied, his confidence unwavering. He knew exactly what to expect, thanks to the information Gorn gave him. "Thank you for accompanying me this far."


    Gorn ruffled William''s hair with a grin. "It was my pleasure, lad. Good luck."


    Similar scenes unfolded amongst the other applicants, a mix of encouragement and nervous anticipation hanging in the air. Once the farewells were complete, Tholfnir turned and led the way through the gates.


    As the last student entered, the gates swung shut with a resounding boom, sealing them within the academy grounds.


    A reverent silence fell over the group as they followed the headmaster. Perhaps if a regular professor had been leading them, their demeanor would have been more relaxed, but Tholfnir commanded respect.


    He was a legendary figure, a mage of immense power, capable of devastating force. Rumors circulated about his abilities, some claiming he could single-handedly defeat thirty thousand mages, a staggering thought.


    They arrived at a courtyard, a tranquil oasis of lush greenery interwoven with winding stone paths. Benches nestled beneath ancient trees offered a place for contemplation and study. Tholfnir stopped before a large crystal, its surface shimmering with an inner light.


    "This crystal will assess your magical aptitude," he explained. "While I believe everyone present possesses the potential to pass, this serves as a formality before the true test." S~ea??h the ¦Çov§×lFire .net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    William recognized the crystal from his previous experience. While it was true that everyone seemed to pass this stage, he suspected there was more to it than met the eye. As he observed the other applicants step forward, he noticed Tholfnir''s keen interest in those who displayed exceptional talent.


    The headmaster was clearly identifying promising candidates, those who might warrant greater attention and resources should they gain admission.


    William''s turn arrived. He placed his hand on the cool crystal surface. A vibrant light erupted, its intensity exceeding that of the previous applicants.


    But this time, there was a difference. A subtle darkness swirled within the brilliance, a shadow that caught Tholfnir''s attention. The headmaster''s eyes narrowed, a flicker of curiosity in their depths, but he remained silent.


    Once all the applicants had been assessed, they proceeded to the next stage of the exam, held in the sprawling forest behind the academy.


    "Your talent seems quite strong, William," Altair remarked as they followed Tholfnir along a wooded path. "Let''s focus on passing the remaining tests."


    "Yes, of course," William replied, a confident grin spreading across his face. "I believe we can do it."


    They exited through a smaller gate at the rear of the academy, the throng of hopefuls numbering somewhere between one hundred and one hundred and twenty. Tholfnir''s voice, amplified by magic, cut through the air.


    "This test is eliminatory," he declared, his gaze sweeping across the anxious faces. "Our aim is to reduce your numbers by at least half. For those unaware, there are a maximum of thirty-five places available in this year''s intake."


    The news brought a wave of tension. Thirty-five places... the competition was fierce. The forest behind the academy, though seemingly devoid of major threats, pressed in on them, its silence broken only by the rustling of leaves and the occasional bird call.


    "Each of you will be given a ring," Tholfnir explained, holding up a simple silver band. "For every beast you eliminate, a portion of its mana will be transferred to the ring, accumulating points."


    A ripple of excitement passed through the crowd. The test sounded straightforward enough. But then Tholfnir added, "You may also absorb a portion of the mana from the rings of other students. This will grant you more points than slaying beasts and, of course, eliminate your competition."


    The atmosphere instantly shifted. A palpable sense of unease settled over the group. The rules had just changed the game, turning a test of skill into a ruthless battle for survival. Every smile vanished, replaced by wary glances and calculating stares. Alliances were out of the question; in this forest, there were no friends, only rivals.

 Chapter 44 - 44: Magic Academy Exam (2)

    "Maybe we can start an alliance?" Altair whispered to William.


    Tension crackled through the air, thick and suffocating. Altair, despite his friendly demeanor, was undeniably a competitor. William, though tempted by the offer, hesitated. Trusting anyone in this cutthroat exam felt like a recipe for disaster.


    "We can discuss that near the end of the trial," Altair proposed, sensing William''s hesitation, "if either of us needs a boost."


    "Alright," William agreed, a flicker of caution still lingering in his eyes.


    The silver rings they had been given pulsed with a faint light, their purpose more sinister than their plain appearance suggested.


    Tholfnir explained their function, revealing their connection to one another and their ability to shift color based on the wearer''s ranking.


    Those in the top half, with sufficient mana accumulated, would see their rings glow green, a beacon of safety. Those lagging behind would be marked with a glaring red, a target for those desperate to climb the ranks.


    As Tholfnir distributed the rings, they remained colorless, dormant until the start of the trial.


    "The exam will last twelve hours," Tholfnir announced, his voice booming through the forest. "Severely injuring your fellow participants is strictly prohibited. If you find yourself outmatched, surrender. I will be observing you all closely."


    His words held a chilling weight, a reminder that while ruthless ambition was encouraged, crossing the line would have severe consequences.


    After explaining everything to them, it was time to start the actual test. The first hour was for the participants to scatter through the forest and find a place to hide or find beasts to kill to earn points. Fights between them were prohibited at the start, only allowed after one hour had passed.


    Everyone went to a different part of the forest. William observed some of the participants, and apparently, almost no one was forming teams, only a few were.


    The chilling wind of the forest hit William like razor blades as he walked through the snowy terrain. The school was on top of a mountain, after all.


    ''Where should I hide?'' William pondered, looking at his surroundings.


    One of the first things he realized was how the forest had barely any beasts. While most of the students didn''t know how to hunt¡ªespecially the nobles¡ªhe did, and there were almost no tracks.


    It was as if that whole part of the exam was focused on the fights between the students and not the actual fight against beasts.


    ''But if I want to absorb the mana from someone else''s ring, it must have mana, right? So they need to kill beasts to get it?''


    Considering everyone started at 0 points, they needed to kill beasts first before even trying to steal the points from someone else. So if that was the case, then where were the beasts? William had that doubt in his mind.


    After walking for 20 minutes, always looking around him, making sure no one was following him, he saw it: a cave in the middle of the forest. William walked toward it and went inside.


    A cave in the forest was not uncommon. It was actually pretty common to find them. William walked toward it slowly. If beasts were in the area, a cave like that one was the perfect spot for them to live.


    Once inside, he realized how dark it was. Having no source of light made it very hard to see. William''s caution increased tenfold. He didn''t want to step on the wrong place or get attacked by a beast pouncing at his neck from the pitch-black darkness.


    But things changed after he walked a little bit further. He saw a few torches on the wall, glowing with a green light.


    ''Magical torches,'' William murmured.


    The torches made it possible for him to see clearly, and the deeper he went, the more torches he saw. At one point, he came to a stone door marked with the symbol of a skull. William noticed a letter written next to it and picked it up to read.


    "This is a special area for the test. Inside, you will find many skeletons and undead beasts. There are entrances scattered all over the forest, and this is where you will encounter the monsters to earn points." - Tholfnir.


    It was a letter written by the school''s headmaster, the person responsible for watching over the exams. They had built a type of dungeon with the beasts inside, and all the students would go to that underground area to find the monsters.


    ''This will make hiding much harder once all the students are down there,'' William thought.


    That would force the students into fighting against each other to get the points and secure a spot for the next test!


    Anyway, William had no choice but to enter, so he pushed the door open and continued forward.


    The first thing he saw was a hallway completely made of stone, with the same torches on the walls. It was easy to see inside¡ªnot all participants knew a spell that could light up the area, so they had to use the torches so that everyone had a fair chance.


    William had been in this new area for only 10 seconds when a monster came his way. It was a skeleton with a curved sword and a wooden shield. The skeleton wasn''t that strong. William tried to focus to see if he could at least determine what level the creature was, and it worked.


    [Skeleton]


    [Level: 3]


    That was the approximate level of the monster, and the name suggested by the system was basic too.


    William couldn''t see the attributes of the monster or anything else related to it. The level itself was not a good thing to focus on too much!


    Gorn had warned him that things may have the same level, but their attributes could be vastly different.


    So the level 3 skeleton could have similar attributes to another creature that was level 10!


    William himself was a testament to that. His level had stayed the same, but his attributes had increased dramatically with the absorption of demonic energy.


    He still had his sword¡ªin fact, he had two of them, the ''normal'' one and the demonic one. William used the ''normal'' one to fight against the skeleton.


    He didn''t wait for the monster to come to him but instead moved toward it with tremendous speed. He was in front of it in seconds. Sear?h the n?vel_Fire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    The recent boosts in his attributes were certainly making a huge difference.


    With a clean slash, William cut off the monster''s head, or rather, its skull. The skeleton didn''t resist and died instantly, falling to the ground and shattering into pieces.


    [+50 EXP]


    William then noticed a blue energy emanating from the skeleton''s bones and flowing straight to his ring, making it shine with a green light.


    ''A green light! So I might be among the first ones to actually find this place,'' William realized.


    He couldn''t just stand there after killing just one monster. William moved forward, looking for more creatures to kill to earn more points!


    Then he saw more skeletons coming his way. It was a group of ten this time, far more than the previous encounter! But that wasn''t scaring him.


    ''Let''s kill these bald skeletons!'' William thought as he gripped his sword tightly and charged toward the group.

 Chapter 45 - 45: Magic Academy Exam (3)

    The skeletons had varied weapons. Some used swords while others used spears or even bows. That made the fight much harder for William. While fighting in close range with the skeletons, he had to keep his attention on the ones with bows.


    A hit by an arrow would hurt a lot. It wasn''t a good thing to get hurt during the first hours of the exam, as it would lower his chances of passing the first part.


    However, even with the numerical advantage, the skeletons were still too weak compared to William. All of his sword slashes had tremendous force behind them, and the skeletons couldn''t withstand it.


    One even tried to block with its shield, but it was destroyed instantly, and the skeleton met the same fate. As for the arrows coming his way, William''s reflexes were so great that he dodged or deflected them using his sword.


    Every single one of the skeletons perished against him. He didn''t receive a single blow. William smiled when he saw the EXP notifications and looked at the ring shining with a green light on his finger.


    Things were going in the right direction for him, at least during the first part of the exam.


    ''There are like 11 hours until it ends, so I cannot get lazy!'' William reminded himself.


    The worst part for him was traversing that place. It consisted mostly of hallways with no room for a proper fight, and it had many different paths to follow, meaning it was easy to get lost.


    Eventually, William arrived at an open area. It was a large room with a high ceiling and enough space for a proper fight. In fact, it was quite big. It reminded William of an arena, like the ones gladiators used¡ªthough gladiators didn''t fight in creepy dungeons, or did they?


    William stepped into the open area, and that''s when he saw a coffin in the middle of the room. That was not a great sign.


    "I''ve played enough RPGs to know that this is shaping up to be a boss fight," William said.


    One didn''t need to be particularly clever to realize the room held a more powerful creature than the skeletons he had faced before.


    Then, as William got close enough, the coffin lid creaked open. From within, an undead creature emerged.


    Unlike the skeletons, this one had skin! It looked like a mummy with a long robe and a golden staff in its hands.


    William tried to discern some information about the creature, like its level, but it didn''t work. He could only see the levels of very weak creatures like the skeletons. His proficiency wasn''t high enough yet to see higher levels.


    But William could sense its power! Gorn had said the most accurate way of gauging an enemy''s strength was through its aura. The aura this undead creature emanated was decent, but it was still weaker compared to William''s. Sear?h the Nov§×l?ire.n(e)t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    His recent boosts in attributes, with a total of 20 points added to all of them, had turned him into a completely different beast.


    That essentially doubled his attributes, so his actual power was far beyond what those creatures possessed. He wasn''t scared of them. William jumped into the arena, sword in hand.


    One of the things he considered was using his skills to boost his attributes even further, but it was wise to conserve mana and only use them if strictly necessary. William believed his power without the skills was enough to fight against that creature.


    With that in mind, he dashed toward the creature, his image a blur. The undead creature wasn''t as simple as the skeletons from before. It waved its staff and created runes that cast dark energy toward William.


    He jumped to the side to avoid the attack. The ground where the dark energy hit started to melt. William was glad he had managed to avoid such a devastating attack.


    But now it was his turn to fight back. William didn''t have any actual combat skills, only self-buffs, but with his high attributes, even normal slashes from his sword caused tremendous damage. He swung his sword right at the undead''s arm, trying to cut off the arm holding the staff.


    The undead floated away from the attack, avoiding it completely. Then, it cast yet another spell. This time, the dark energy shapeshifted into ropes, binding William in place.


    "Damn!" he cursed.


    With his movements restrained like that, he would become an easy target for the undead''s other spells. That was not ideal.


    However, William was not the kind of person to give up easily. He didn''t want to use any skills, but he had to in this situation.


    He drew a few runes in the air and then activated them! The runic symbols appeared on his body, and he shone with a blue light.


    "Kinetic Burst!"


    William''s body surged forward like a battering ram! The force behind the advance was so great that the magical ropes binding his body snapped. The undead was not expecting that! William, with his sword in hand, took advantage of the propulsion from Kinetic Burst and cut the undead creature in half!


    [+400 EXP]


    It was dead. William wiped a drop of sweat from his forehead with his hand. "That was dangerous."


    Without a spell to break free from those ropes, William''s situation would have been much different, and he likely would have lost that fight.


    But thankfully, that wasn''t the case. He looked around to see if he spotted more enemies or even one of the other participants, but there was nothing around him. So, he continued his exploration.


    ---


    While all of that was happening, Tholfnir was floating above the forest with a crystal orb in hand. With it, he could see everything that was happening in the test. Tholfnir saw the fight between William and the undead creature.


    "This young man is quite impressive... His body is far stronger than anyone else... And his aptitude test had that strange color too..."


    After witnessing such a display of skill, Tholfnir made a mental note to pay close attention to William and what he would accomplish in the future.


    ---


    William encountered the first participant in one of the hallways right after fighting the undead creature. It was a noble, judging by his attire. The young man saw William and how his ring had a green light.


    "Hey," the noble said, scorn in his voice, "you can just give me the mana in your ring without a fight, so let''s get this over with."


    The noble was confident in his skills and wasn''t scared of William. One reason was that William didn''t look like a noble.


    To him, commoners had far less magical training and therefore couldn''t win against him in a fight. William also saw the green light emanating from the noble''s ring, but he wasn''t the type¡ªor rather, stupid enough¡ªto waste time talking with his adversary.


    He dashed forward and attacked the noble. The speed at which his body moved shocked the noble, whose eyes went wide with despair.


    It was impossible to dodge. William cut the noble on the arm, making sure the wound wasn''t deep enough to cause permanent damage or disqualify him from the exam.


    "Stop it!" the noble screamed, begging for his life. "I''ll just give you my points, don''t hurt me!"


    The noble transferred all of his points to William and walked away. It was wiser that way. At least his wounds weren''t so bad that he wouldn''t be able to earn back his points. What he didn''t want was to be beaten up so badly by William that he couldn''t fight anymore.


    William now had a lot of points, but that was just the beginning of the exam!

 Chapter 46 - 46: Magic Academy Exam (4)

    The exam soon turned into a fierce battle. It wasn''t the undead creatures inside the dungeon that were the real enemies. Once most of the participants had some points in their rings, the number of creatures down there diminished greatly.


    So, how could they get more points? Fighting against other participants was the answer. Some didn''t even have any points, but they had the chance of winning against someone who did and climbing back into the green rankings.


    William walked through one of the dark hallways, and that''s where he found a familiar face: Altair. The first thing William checked was the youth''s ring, which had a red light.


    "Altair," William said with a smile, "do you want some help getting points?"


    Altair had always treated William well and, up to that point, had never given him a reason not to trust him.


    "William," Altair said, checking William''s ring, "so you are in the green zone. Ay, I''m in trouble here."


    "There''s no need to panic. We still have three hours, more than enough time for us to get you some points," William said.


    After facing that noble, William had spent most of his time just walking around and avoiding others. He didn''t want to lose his points and didn''t need to earn more. But now he wanted to make sure he would have enough when the exam ended, so it was a good idea to get some more.


    Altair stepped forward and put a hand on William''s shoulder. "Would you really help me with this? I wouldn''t know how to repay you..." he said with a deep sigh.


    "We can talk about that later if we both get into the school. Come on," William said, gesturing with his hand, "let''s find someone to take some points from."


    Altair was at a loss for words but followed William nonetheless. He wanted to get into the school. It was his dream, and getting some help wouldn''t make it any less important to him.


    They soon found another one of those open areas that looked like arenas, and that''s where they found a few people fighting each other. S§×ar?h the NovelFire.net* website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    There were a total of five people there, making it a messy and destructive scene. William and Altair crouched behind a stone pillar, watching the scene ahead with caution and care, trying not to make any noises that might attract unnecessary attention.


    "That''s our chance to sneak in and knock someone down," William whispered. "They won''t even see it coming."


    Altair nodded. "Understood. But who will we get first?"


    With five different targets, it was difficult to single out the best one. William decided to wait and watch for a while before acting. He also formulated a plan in his mind. "I''ll go behind someone, bear hug them, and you''ll knock them down somehow."


    Altair was the one who desperately needed points, so they wanted to get him the ''last hit.''


    "Are you sure this will work?" Altair asked, doubt lingering in his voice. "Can you really hold them down like that?"


    The plan was daring, relying on William''s physical prowess, a stark contrast to the magic-focused strategies of the other applicants. But William had no doubts. Subduing these pampered nobles would be child''s play.


    "My part is no problem," William assured Altair, a confident grin spreading across his face. "But what about you? Can you knock them out without causing serious injury? Remember, we can''t risk disqualification."


    Altair nodded, his expression determined. "I can handle it."


    The plan was set, but the timing was crucial. They had to wait for the perfect opportunity to strike.


    The five participants in the arena were locked in a chaotic struggle, spells flying in all directions. One unleashed a torrent of fire, creating a blazing inferno that forced the others to scramble for safety. Their movements were restricted, their focus consumed by evading the flames.


    Suddenly, another youth countered with water magic, dousing the flames and creating a thick cloud of steam. In that moment of confusion, the fire mage stumbled towards William and Altair''s hiding spot, separated from the others.


    "Now''s our chance!" William hissed. "Let''s go!"


    He activated Swiftfoot, his body surging with enhanced agility. He shot out from behind the rock, a blur of motion. Before the fire mage could react, William had him pinned to the ground, his superior strength undeniable.


    "Let me go!" the fire mage yelled, his voice laced with panic. His struggles were futile against William''s superior strength.


    The other participants in the arena paused their duel, their eyes widening in surprise at William''s sudden appearance and the sheer speed he had displayed. Even Altair, despite their plan, seemed taken aback. He arrived moments later, panting slightly from the exertion.


    "You can give all your points to him," William said to the captive mage, nodding towards Altair. "Or he''ll have to...persuade you. The choice is yours."


    The young mage remained silent, his focus consumed by futile attempts to break free. William''s patience wore thin. They couldn''t afford to linger; other participants might arrive at any moment.


    "Do your thing, Altair," William said, hoisting the struggling mage higher.


    Altair''s hands glowed with a soft light as he swiftly formed the runes for a spell. Two shimmering gauntlets materialized around his fists, their magical energy crackling. William, though intrigued, kept his focus on their captive.


    With a swift punch to the gut, Altair rendered the fire mage unconscious. A portion of mana flowed from the unconscious mage''s ring to Altair''s, its color shifting from a dull red to a vibrant green.


    "Let''s get out of here and find another target," William said, adrenaline coursing through him.


    "Agreed," Altair replied, his eyes gleaming with excitement.


    They vanished back into the maze of corridors, leaving the remaining four participants to their chaotic duel.


    "Why didn''t we take on the other four back there?" Altair asked, a hint of disappointment in his voice.


    "We need to use our numbers to our advantage," William explained. "Facing four opponents at once would have been reckless." The purpose of their alliance was to help Altair secure enough points to advance. Risking their progress for unnecessary battles went against their strategy.


    Both their rings now glowed a reassuring green, but with two to three hours remaining, accumulating extra points was a wise precaution. However, their search for more targets proved fruitless. The corridors remained eerily empty.


    They even returned to the arena where they had left the four participants, but it was deserted.


    "Where is everyone?" Altair wondered aloud, his brow furrowed in confusion.


    William quickly grasped the situation. "They''ve retreated to the forest," he said. "It''s safer to hide there, and no one wants to risk losing their points so close to the end."


    With renewed purpose, they navigated the maze-like corridors, emerging from the dungeon into the snowy forest. It was time to flush out those who sought refuge in the shadows. The hunt was far from over.


    William, his senses honed from months of training in the wilds, led the way. But the steadily falling snow blanketed the forest floor, obscuring any trace of their quarry.


    "The snow is covering their tracks," William muttered, frustration edging his voice. "This is going to be difficult."


    Altair, though reassured by his green-glowing ring, couldn''t shake a nagging worry. What if someone surpassed them in these final hours? The thought of being eliminated so close to the finish line was unsettling.


    "Let''s keep searching," he urged. "We still have time."


    They pressed on, their eyes scanning the snow-laden branches and dense undergrowth. Suddenly, William froze, a faint sound reaching his keen ears.


    "Shh," he whispered, silencing Altair. His enhanced senses confirmed his suspicions; someone was nearby.


    He scanned the trees, his gaze drawn upwards. There, perched precariously on a high branch, a lone figure huddled amongst the leaves. Their eyes met, a silent exchange of surprise and apprehension.


    "Get down here," William called out, his voice firm, "or I''ll come up and get you."

 Chapter 47 - 47: Magic Academy Exam (5)

    William was expecting the youth to be quiet and ignore what he said, but the man actually answered him.


    "Please, find someone else," the youth pleaded, his voice trembling. "I-I need these points to get into the school and give my family a better life, please!"


    With a quick analysis, William noticed that the youth had simple clothes. He even spotted a hole in the shirt the young man was using it. It was evident that the boy was one of the commoners.


    "Are you speaking the truth?" William asked, "I don''t want to get the spot of a commoner who really needs it."


    "Yes, of course I am! Look, I know where a noble is hiding, so you can get his points!" the commoner blurted out, desperation clinging to his voice.


    William exchanged glances with Altair. "I think it''s better to target the nobles," Altair said, echoing William''s own thoughts. "They have other options, other magic schools, private tutors... For commoners like them, this is their only chance."


    "Fine," William agreed. "Where is this noble?"


    The commoner''s expression brightened slightly. "Actually, there are two of them," he revealed. "I saw them heading towards the waterfall." He gave them detailed directions.


    Following the commoner''s instructions, William and Altair located the river and the cascading waterfall. Behind the torrent of water, a hidden cave beckoned. They plunged through the icy spray, their hopes high, but the cave was empty. Either the commoner had lied, or the nobles had moved on.


    "What do you think?" William asked, his voice laced with disappointment.


    "He seemed honest," Altair replied, frowning. "I think they must have left."


    Just as they were about to leave the cave, a figure materialized before them. It wasn''t another student, but Headmaster Tholfnir himself. His long robes billowed around him, his presence radiating an aura of immense power.


    "You two," he boomed, his voice echoing through the cave, "you have accumulated enough points to advance. Remain here. I do not wish for others who are also passing to be unduly disadvantaged. Remember, I require at least half of the participants to succeed. You cannot simply hoard all the points for yourselves."


    William''s heart sank. He had hoped to impress the headmaster, but it seemed he had done the opposite.


    "Do not be discouraged," Tholfnir said, sensing their dismay. "I am issuing the same warning to all those with high scores. I shall see you in a few hours." With a subtle gesture, he cast a teleportation spell, vanishing in a shimmer of light.


    "That was scary," Altair admitted, letting out a shaky breath. "I thought we were in trouble."


    "Me too," William agreed, his heart still pounding.


    Relieved of the pressure to hunt down more students, William and Altair settled into an uneasy truce with the forest. They had secured their place in the next phase, and now all that remained was to wait.


    "It''s nice to finally relax," Altair sighed, sinking onto a moss-covered rock.


    "Definitely," William agreed, stretching out his legs. "Do you know what the next part of the exam will be like?" Though Gorn had briefed him, he wanted to confirm the details.


    "I believe it''s a tournament," Altair replied. "A series of one-on-one duels. But honestly, I think everyone who made it this far will pass."


    "Really?" William asked, surprised.


    "Yes," Altair explained. "Considering the number of participants left, they won''t cut many more."


    Altair estimated that perhaps five more applicants might be eliminated in the next round, but no more than that. The final stage of the exam, the true test of their abilities, loomed on the horizon. That was the challenge William needed to prepare for now.


    The remaining hours of the trial passed in a blur of conversation and nervous anticipation. William and Altair discussed their hopes for the future, their dreams of mastering magic within the academy walls.


    The trial''s end came abruptly, heralded by Tholfnir''s booming voice echoing through the forest.


    "Return to the academy courtyard, now!"


    The remaining participants, along with those who had failed, assembled before the headmaster. As predicted, roughly half had been eliminated. Tholfnir addressed the dejected group, offering words of encouragement before guards escorted them from the grounds.


    Those who remained, their rings glowing green, faced the headmaster.


    "Congratulations," Tholfnir said, his gaze sweeping across their faces. "You have proven yourselves worthy of continuing. You will stay at the academy tonight, and the next stage of the exam will commence tomorrow morning. I shall show you to your accommodations."


    Tholfnir guided them through the sprawling academy grounds, finally arriving at a secluded building tucked away in the northwest corner. It appeared deserted, not due to neglect, but simply because it lacked the bustle of student life.


    "These are the dormitories reserved for entrance exam participants," Tholfnir explained. "The regular students reside in other accommodations."


    That explained the eerie quiet. Tholfnir assigned rooms at random, William receiving number eleven. Sear?h the Nov§×l?ire.n(e)t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "I''m all the way in room thirty-eight," Altair grumbled. "Damn it, that''s miles away."


    Separated from his newfound ally, William offered a reassuring smile. "We can talk more tomorrow. See you then."


    He entered his assigned room, surprised by its comfortable furnishings. A large bed with a plush mattress dominated the space, accompanied by a sturdy desk, a bookshelf stocked with intriguing titles, a small balcony overlooking the grounds, and a private bathroom.


    It exceeded his expectations, and he imagined the rooms for regular students would be even more luxurious. But that was a concern for another day, assuming he passed the remaining trials.


    Exhausted from the day''s challenges, William simply closed the door, kicked off his boots, and collapsed onto the bed, falling into a deep slumber without bothering with dinner or a shower. Those were concerns for the morning.


    He awoke hours before the designated wake-up time, a habit ingrained from his training with Gorn. With time to spare, he indulged in a hot shower and set out in search of sustenance. Unfamiliar with the academy layout, he wandered the grounds until he encountered a young girl with round glasses and vibrant green hair, sitting on a bench amidst the gardens.


    "Why are you awake so early?" she asked, her voice laced with curiosity. The morning air was frigid, but she seemed unfazed by the cold.


    "I''m hungry," William admitted with a sheepish grin. "The exams are tiring."


    "Ah, you''re one of the applicants," she realized, her eyes widening slightly. She seemed eager to engage in conversation, but William pressed for the information he needed.


    "Do you know where I can find some food?"


    "Of course," she replied, pointing towards a grand building in the distance. "Head to the main building, turn left, and keep going straight. You''ll find the dining hall there."


    "Thank you," William said, offering a grateful nod.


    He followed her directions, arriving at a spacious hall filled with long tables and bustling cooks preparing breakfast. At this early hour, only a few other students were present, their voices hushed in the quiet morning air.


    William approached one of the cooks, an elderly man with a kind smile. "Excuse me," he asked, "but may I eat here? I''m participating in the entrance exam."


    The cook''s smile widened. "Of course, young man," he replied. "Grab a plate and help yourself."

 Chapter 48 - 48: Magic Academy Exam (6)

    The dining hall offered a staggering variety of breakfast options, from simple fare like bread, eggs, and bacon to more elaborate dishes typically reserved for lunch. William, however, gravitated towards the familiar comforts of his Earthly breakfast routine.


    As the morning progressed, more and more exam participants trickled into the hall, their faces betraying a mix of anticipation and exhaustion. Altair joined William just as he finished his meal.


    "How are you up so early?" Altair asked, settling into the seat beside him.


    "I''m used to it," William replied with a shrug. "Early mornings were the norm back in the village."


    "I see," Altair said, nodding in understanding. "Well, even though you''ve already eaten, stick around and chat for a bit, if you''d like."


    William, with no pressing engagements before the exam, readily agreed. Altair returned from the buffet with a plate piled high with an assortment of breakfast delicacies.


    "Are you really going to eat all that?" William asked, raising an eyebrow. "No way a skinny guy like you can handle that much food."


    "Oh, come on!" Altair scoffed playfully. "Respect the skinny bros." He winked, a mischievous glint in his eye.


    William observed the growing crowd, noting a distinct lack of fear compared to the tension that had permeated the previous exam. Could it be, as Altair had suggested, that they knew this stage was merely a formality?


    "I think so," Altair confirmed, his gaze sweeping across the room. "Notice how the nobles are the most relaxed, while the commoners still seem anxious? That''s because the nobles are privy to information the rest of us aren''t."


    His words resonated with William''s own observations. Just then, Tholfnir entered the hall, his presence silencing the chatter.


    "You have five minutes to finish your breakfast," he announced, his voice carrying through the room. "Then meet me in the courtyard." With that, he turned and departed.


    Most had already finished their meals, but the five-minute warning spurred the remaining few to hasten their consumption. William and Altair joined the procession of exam participants following Tholfnir to the courtyard, and from there, to the academy gymnasium.


    The gymnasium was a vast, impressive structure, its interior housing numerous dueling platforms and training dummies. Rows of bleachers lined the walls, providing ample space for spectators. Tholfnir stood in the center of the arena, addressing them.


    "This stage of the exam consists of duels," he explained, his voice echoing through the spacious hall. "One-on-one combat. The only difference this time is that you will have an audience. Several professors have graciously offered their time to observe your performance, as well as some students."


    The presence of an audience added a thrilling new dimension to the exam. While this stage might not be eliminatory, the opportunity to impress the professors and establish dominance amongst their peers was a powerful motivator. No one wanted to appear weak or incompetent in front of those who might become their mentors and classmates.


    Tholfnir explained the rules: the duels would be randomly assigned, and each participant would fight only once. As he spoke, professors and senior students began to fill the bleachers, their expectant gazes adding to the pressure.


    William, his competitive spirit ignited, hoped for a challenging opponent. He wasn''t afraid of facing a strong adversary; in fact, he relished the opportunity to showcase his skills. He only hoped he wouldn''t be pitted against Altair.


    The air crackled with anticipation as Tholfnir began announcing the pairings.


    Tholfnir, unfamiliar with the applicants, assigned each a number. William received token number twenty-two.


    "I shall now call out pairs of numbers," Tholfnir announced. "Those called will step into the dueling ring."


    The first duel pitted a young nobleman against a girl who appeared to be a commoner. William, along with the other participants, watched with keen interest.


    "Who do you think will win?" Altair asked, leaning towards William.


    William assessed the two combatants, his senses attuned to their magical auras. "I believe the girl will win," he replied. "Her mana is stronger, and the noble will likely underestimate her."


    Altair disagreed, favoring the noble''s presumed training and experience. The duel commenced, and within moments, William''s prediction proved accurate. The girl unleashed a series of lightning spells, her control and precision impressive. Whispers rippled through the bleachers.


    "Lightning affinity is rare," one professor remarked to another. "She could be a valuable addition to the academy."


    "Indeed," another agreed. "Let''s hope she performs well in the final exam."


    The girl''s victory and her rare affinity had clearly caught the attention of the faculty. But as William knew, this was just one hurdle in a series of challenges.


    More duels followed, but none held William''s interest. After facing the demonically empowered hunter, these sparring matches seemed tame, the participants lacking in both power and finesse. Their spells were rudimentary, their movements predictable.


    William, though not the most experienced mage, couldn''t help but feel a sense of superiority. He knew these were merely apprentices, their skills still developing, but he couldn''t deny the confidence blooming within him.


    "Number twenty-two!" Tholfnir''s voice boomed through the gymnasium. "Step into the ring."


    William felt a surge of adrenaline as he strode towards the dueling platform. His opponent, a young man with an air of arrogance, awaited him. It wasn''t Altair, thankfully, but this was no ordinary noble.


    "Good luck, bro," Altair whispered as William passed. "After seeing you in action in the dungeon, I know you won''t lose."


    William cracked a grin. "Thanks for the vote of confidence." He stepped into the ring, facing his opponent. sea??h th§× ¦ÇovelFire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "So, I''m up against a commoner," the young man sneered. "How... predictable."


    "And you are?" William inquired, raising an eyebrow.


    "You may address me as Prince Lance," the youth declared, puffing out his chest.


    "A prince, huh?" William mused, a hint of mischief in his voice. "I just hope your father doesn''t disown you after you lose to a commoner."


    The prince''s face flushed with anger. Murmurs rippled through the audience.


    "Why is he provoking the prince?" one of the professors whispered. "It will only make his defeat more humiliating."


    While a noble losing to a commoner wasn''t unheard of, the prince was a different story. He had access to the kingdom''s best resources, tutors, and training. The king would have spared no expense to ensure his son''s strength. Of all the applicants, Lance was undoubtedly the most formidable.


    Tholfnir silenced the whispers with a raised hand. "Silence, please," he commanded. "The duel is about to commence."


    A hush fell over the gymnasium, the tension palpable. All eyes were on William and the prince, the stage set for a clash of both magic and social standing.


    William weighed his options. He could hold back, relying on his physical prowess alone, or unleash his full arsenal of skills, demonstrating his true potential. The choice was clear. There was no benefit in hiding his power, especially against an opponent as formidable as the prince.


    With a surge of mana, he activated a series of body-enhancing spells, transforming himself into a force to be reckoned with.


    "Swiftfoot!"


    "Iron Skin!"


    "Enhanced Strength!"


    His body responded instantly. Swiftfoot granted him increased agility and speed, Enhanced Strength bolstered his physical power, and Iron Skin hardened his flesh into an almost impenetrable armor. The rapid-fire casting, three spells activated in quick succession, drew gasps from the audience. Such seamless execution was rare, especially for someone with limited formal training.


    But he wasn''t finished.


    "Kinetic Burst!" he roared, his voice echoing through the gymnasium.

 Chapter 49 - 49: Magic Academy Exam (7) - Shocking Everyone

    With the combined might of his enhancements, Kinetic Burst propelling him forward like a phantom, and his naturally high attributes, William became an unstoppable force. The prince, despite his royal lineage and privileged training, was utterly outmatched.


    William''s speed drew gasps from the audience. He moved with a blurring swiftness that defied expectations, appearing before the prince in the blink of an eye, his sword a hair''s breadth from the royal throat.


    "Yield," William commanded, his voice devoid of emotion.


    The prince, his pride wounded, refused to surrender. He gripped his staff, his fingers dancing as he attempted to weave a counterattack.


    "I apologize for this," William said, a hint of regret in his voice. But his actions were swift and decisive.


    With 52 points in Strength, amplified by Enhanced Strength, his power was monstrous. He unleashed a precisely targeted punch to the prince''s gut, the impact echoing through the silent gymnasium. Even holding back, the blow was devastating.


    The prince crumpled, his staff clattering to the ground. He lay unconscious in the dust of the arena. A concerned professor rushed forward to examine him.


    "He''s fine," the professor announced after a brief examination. "Just needs some rest."


    William exited the ring, deactivating his spells with a flick of his wrist. The runes faded from his skin, his muscles returning to their normal size. He approached Altair, a subtle smirk playing on his lips.


    "What did you think?" he asked, his voice laced with amusement.


    Altair, overwhelmed by the sheer dominance of William''s victory, could only gape in response.


    The atmosphere in the gymnasium crackled with a newfound respect for William. Whispers followed him as he moved through the crowd, the other participants and onlookers casting awed glances in his direction.


    His victory over the prince had shattered their preconceived notions, proving that strength and skill could emerge from unexpected places.


    "I told you he was strong!" the noble William had defeated in last exam boasted to his companions. "That''s why he beat me!"


    The remaining duels proceeded, but the excitement had waned. William''s stunning performance had set a high bar, leaving the other participants struggling to capture the attention of the audience.


    Word of William''s feat spread like wildfire throughout the academy. He had become a legend in the making, his name on everyone''s lips. S~ea??h the ¦ÇovelFire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    As predicted, no one was disqualified from this stage of the exam. Even the prince, despite his lackluster performance, retained his place. William couldn''t help but feel a twinge of cynicism.


    ''Of course he wouldn''t be disqualified,'' William thought, rolling his eyes. ''He''s royalty.''


    The final stage of the exam loomed, the one that would shatter the dreams of many and pave the path to glory for a select few.


    With only thirty spots available and sixty hopefuls remaining, the competition was fierce. But a sudden announcement from Headmaster Tholfnir threw the applicants into disarray.


    "Regarding the available places," Tholfnir began, his voice resonating with an unexpected gravity, "a change has become necessary. Instead of thirty, we now have only fifteen spots available for this year''s intake."


    A collective gasp arose from the crowd. Anxiety etched itself onto every face, the weight of the announcement pressing down on their hopes.


    "Headmaster," a young woman''s voice called out, trembling slightly, "why were the spots reduced so drastically? Could you please explain?"


    Tholfnir''s smile held a hint of apology, but his eyes remained guarded. "I had a rather...urgent meeting yesterday," he revealed, "and the decision was made to limit enrollment. This is not unique to our academy; other institutions are facing similar restrictions." He paused, his gaze sweeping across the sea of anxious faces. "As for the reasons behind this sudden change...that, I''m afraid, I cannot divulge at this time."


    The weight of Tholfnir''s words settled upon the applicants, a stark reminder of the fierce competition they faced. William''s determination burned brighter than ever. He would not be denied his chance to enter the academy.


    Tholfnir gathered the participants in the courtyard, his presence commanding their attention. "One by one, step forward," he instructed. "I shall assess your magical repertoire."


    The final exam, the ultimate hurdle, was designed to gauge their ability to learn and master spells. Each spell, categorized by rank and complexity, would be assigned a point value.


    Only the top fifteen scorers would earn a coveted place at the academy. This trial was a true measure of their potential, a glimpse into their future as mages.


    William watched with a mix of awe and apprehension as Tholfnir effortlessly assessed each applicant, a mere touch revealing their magical knowledge. The headmaster''s power was undeniable, a testament to decades of mastery. When it was William''s turn, a flicker of surprise crossed Tholfnir''s face, but he remained silent.


    "Next," Tholfnir said, his voice betraying no hint of his thoughts.


    William waited patiently as the remaining students underwent the assessment. Finally, Tholfnir addressed the group, outlining the rules of the final trial.


    "You have one month to learn as many spells as possible," he explained. "An A-rank spell is worth fifty points, a B-rank spell is worth five points, and a C-rank spell earns a single point. Lower-ranked spells do not count."


    The vast difference in point values reflected the difficulty of mastering higher-ranked spells. William knew firsthand the challenge of learning a B-rank skill like Kinetic Burst.


    His other spells were all C-rank, mere stepping stones compared to the complexity of A-rank magic.


    He had never even attempted such a feat; those spells were typically reserved for advanced students in their second or third year.


    "You will remain in the dormitories I assigned yesterday," Tholfnir continued. "Meals are provided in the dining hall three times a day, and you have full access to the library. That is where you will find the spells you seek."


    The challenge was set. One month to prove their worth, to delve into the depths of magical knowledge and emerge victorious.


    "However," Tholfnir added, his voice taking on a sterner edge, "you are forbidden from seeking assistance from the academy''s students or professors. Should I discover any such collaboration...well, you know the consequences."


    The warning hung heavy in the air. They were guests within the academy walls, not yet students entitled to guidance. William, however, had anticipated this restriction. He was confident in his ability to learn independently.


    With the rules laid bare, the applicants surged towards the library, eager to begin their month-long quest for magical knowledge. Altair, his admiration evident, kept pace with William.


    "You''re a legend, you know," Altair said, his voice hushed. "Everyone''s talking about how you stood up to the prince."


    "That won''t mean much if I don''t secure a spot in the academy," William replied, his focus unwavering. "Let''s concentrate on the task at hand."


    "Right, right..." Altair agreed, his gaze already darting towards the towering bookshelves.


    The library was a sight to behold. Its vastness dwarfed any William had encountered on Earth, rows upon rows of books stretching towards the vaulted ceiling.


    He estimated there were at least fifty thousand volumes within its walls, perhaps even more. A treasure trove of magical knowledge awaited, and William, his thirst for power insatiable, was ready to delve into its depths.

 Chapter 50 - 50: Magic Academy Exam (8) - Hardest Spell

    Most applicants gravitated towards the shelves containing B and C rank spells, their choices driven by practicality and the ticking clock. William, however, craved a challenge. He wasn''t interested in simply passing; he wanted to excel, to push his limits and prove his worth. A-rank spells, the domain of seasoned mages, beckoned him.


    "What spells are you planning to learn?" Altair asked, his brow furrowed as he scanned the titles.


    "Not sure yet," William replied, his eyes gleaming with determination, "but I do know I''m going to master an A-rank spell."


    Altair''s jaw dropped. "Bro, I know you''re talented, maybe even a genius, but are you sure?" he sputtered. "It''s not that I doubt your ability, but we only have a month! Time is our enemy."


    Altair''s concern was valid. Mastering high-ranking spells was a time-consuming endeavor. But William had a secret weapon: his SSS-rank Chrono Shift ability. With its time-bending power, he could accelerate his learning beyond the constraints of a normal month.


    "Relax," William said with a confident grin. "Trust me. But I''ll also pick up a few B-rank spells, just in case my A-rank plan goes sideways."


    Altair, though still apprehensive, seemed reassured. "Alright, alright," he conceded.


    The library, despite its vastness, held restricted sections. Only a designated area was accessible to the exam participants, the remaining tomes and grimoires reserved for enrolled students and faculty. Even with this limitation, the sheer volume of available spells was overwhelming.


    William''s fingers traced the intricate runes detailed in the [Magic Mind] tome. This A-rank spell, notorious for its difficulty, promised to elevate his mental capabilities to extraordinary levels.


    A boost of 100 points in Intelligence, coupled with a 40% increase in learning speed and memory retention, was a temptation he couldn''t resist. It was the perfect foundation for mastering even more complex magic.


    Altair peered over his shoulder, his expression a mix of awe and apprehension. "Bro, that''s supposed to be the hardest A-rank spell out there," he cautioned. "Are you absolutely sure you want to attempt it?"


    William nodded, his determination unwavering. "It seems like the ideal spell to learn first," he explained, "It will make learning everything else much easier."


    "I guess," Altair conceded, a hint of doubt still lingering in his voice. "I was thinking of trying for a flight spell. They look awesome, but I know it''s probably beyond my reach."


    Just then, Tholfnir materialized beside them, his presence casting a long shadow across the bookshelf. William''s heart skipped a beat.


    "Young man," Tholfnir began, his voice grave, "there are professors within this academy who have mastered numerous A-rank spells, even S-rank spells, yet this particular one eludes them. Are you certain you wish to pursue this path?" His eyes, filled with a genuine concern, met William''s. "You possess a rare talent, one I would be pleased to nurture within these walls. Choose wisely."


    Tholfnir''s departure left William wrestling with doubt. Professors who commanded S-rank magic couldn''t master this spell? How could he, a mere novice, hope to succeed where they had failed? But the potential rewards were too enticing to ignore.


    "If you want to risk it," Altair said, his voice firm, "then go for it. I trust you to make the right decision, and I''ll support you either way."


    "Thanks, bro," William replied, gratitude warming his chest.


    He clutched the [Magic Mind] tome, its worn leather cover a promise of untold power. It was the only spell he chose.


    The librarian, a stern-faced woman with spectacles perched on her nose, gave him a pitying look as he checked out the book.


    He received similar reactions from other students and even a few professors, their expressions a mix of concern and disbelief. The spell''s notoriety was clearly widespread.


    Rumors swirled about its true nature. Some whispered it was an ancient, lost technique, far surpassing the limitations of a mere A-rank spell. William''s research confirmed its rarity. Only eight mages in the entire kingdom had managed to master it. Eight. And Tholfnir, the most powerful mage in the land, was one of them.


    The weight of the challenge settled upon William''s shoulders, a mix of apprehension and exhilaration. He held in his hands a key to unlocking extraordinary potential, a power that had eluded countless others. He would not be deterred. He would master this spell, or die trying.


    William''s reputation preceded him. Whispers followed him through the halls of the academy, his name echoing in hushed conversations.


    "Did you hear about the guy who beat the prince?"


    "Yeah, the one who chose that A-rank spell, Magic Mind? Is he insane?"


    "He''s going to fail for sure. Only eight mages in the entire kingdom have mastered that spell. What''s he thinking?"


    The prevailing sentiment was one of disbelief and mockery. William, the commoner who had dared to challenge royalty, was now seen as a foolhardy novice, destined to crumble under the weight of his ambition.


    Of all the people buzzing with gossip and doubt, only Altair offered a genuine word of encouragement. "I believe in you, William," he said, clapping a hand on his friend''s shoulder. "Don''t let those naysayers get to you. So what if only eight people have mastered this spell? You can be the ninth and prove them all wrong!"


    William, though disheartened by the negativity, felt a surge of gratitude for Altair''s unwavering support. "Thanks, Altair," he replied with a grateful smile. "I appreciate that."


    "Anytime," Altair said, returning the smile. "If you need anything, just let me know."


    William retreated to his room, the weight of the challenge settling upon him. He placed the [Magic Mind] tome inside his backpack and activated Chrono Shift. The familiar portal shimmered into existence, offering an escape from the whispers and doubts. He stepped through, materializing in the quiet solitude of Jinra''s barn.


    Dawn painted the horizon with streaks of purple and orange as he opened the tome. The complexities of the spell unfolded before him, revealing its unique nature. Unlike most spells, which required activation to trigger their effects, Magic Mind was a constant, its benefits woven into the very fabric of the caster''s being. This, William realized, was the source of its difficulty.


    He delved deeper into the text, his heart sinking with each page. One hundred and ninety-two runes. One hundred and ninety-two intricate patterns of mana manipulation, each demanding absolute precision. Even S-rank spells contained fewer runes. S§×ar?h the nov§×lF~ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    ''Did someone classify this as A-rank as a joke?'' William wondered, his frustration mounting. ''This must be far more advanced!''


    The urge to abandon the spell gnawed at him, but he sought Jinra''s wisdom before making a decision. As the old mage stirred, William approached, eager for guidance.


    "Good morning, young man," Jinra greeted him, his voice raspy with sleep. "Did you rest well?"


    "Jinra, I need your help with something," William confessed, his brow furrowed with worry.


    Jinra, ever the gracious host, invited him in for breakfast. As they ate, William explained his predicament, revealing the [Magic Mind] tome and detailing its daunting complexities.


    Jinra''s eyes widened in recognition. "I know this spell," he declared, "but the version I''m familiar with is quite different. This seems...overly complicated, as if someone attempted to recreate it from memory after losing the original."


    A wave of hope washed over William. Could Jinra, with his vast knowledge and experience, hold the key to mastering this elusive spell? The possibilities swirled in his mind, fueling his determination. He would conquer this challenge, with Jinra''s guidance, and prove those doubters wrong.

 Chapter 51 - 51: Magic Academy Exam (9) - Jinras Guidance

    "Are you sure you aren''t mistaking this for another spell?" William asked, excitement in his voice. He was hoping to get Jinra''s help to learn the spell faster, but if what Jinra said was true, things were going even better than he''d hoped.


    Jinra read the spell again. "Uh, yes, yes. I am old but not crazy. This is the spell I know."


    Many thoughts were racing through William''s mind at that moment, but he just asked one thing. "Can you help me learn it in one month?"


    Jinra got up from the dining chair and started pacing through the hall, both hands behind his back. "I can help you learn it, yes, but I think one month might be too short. This is not a simple spell. In fact, only a handful of people know this."


    In the current state of Aethel, only eight people knew it, and apparently, it wasn''t that different in ancient times. The only difference was that the spell tome was much better written. Jinra looked at William and saw his eyes fall.


    "Don''t look so sad, kiddo. Let''s do our best so that you can learn it in one month, alright?"


    It wouldn''t be an easy task, and for Jinra, it would be impossible if not for William''s talent for learning magic. But time was still short; therefore, they started the training right after breakfast.


    Jinra searched his entire house for something, and after about an hour of searching, he came back with an ancient scroll in hand. "This is the Magic Mind I know," he said, handing the scroll to William. "Take a look." Sear?h the n??el Fire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    The scroll had far less information about the spell, but most of the information there was not present in William''s Magic Mind tome. It still had the 192 runes, but they were better explained and not filled with useless words.


    William now agreed with Jinra. "My tome feels like someone tried to make it harder so that no one could learn it."


    Jinra nodded. "Yes, correct. This is not something new, you know," Jinra explained. "It''s normal for very good spells like this one to change throughout the years. Sometimes people lose track of how the spell was originally cast, or they try to fool you with an adulterated version."


    William knew that Tholfnir or the magic academy wouldn''t provide adulterated spell tomes for their students. The Magic Mind tome William had was the same one everyone else had, but if that was the case, then what happened to the original copy? Did something happen to humanity, and had they lost their knowledge?


    William was certain that something had changed throughout history simply because the greatest mages of all time were in the past. After meeting Jinra, someone incredibly powerful who knew many spells, William was sure that the ancient mages were far stronger.


    However, the reason for humanity''s decline was still a mystery to him, something unknown that he wished to uncover in the future.


    "Let''s start your training then," Jinra suggested. "This is not easy, and you might not succeed, but like I said, let''s try our best."


    They went outside the house, into the open area to feel the fresh morning breeze and hear the distant sounds of the river and the singing birds. That brought a sense of inner peace that helped with training, or at least it seemed to.


    "You know there are plenty of runes for you to master, right?" Jinra said. "192."


    "Yes, I know, and the effect is always on, right? So this must make the spell much harder to learn."


    Jinra confirmed, "You are right about that. Let''s start with the first 50 runes, shall we?"


    The spell was divided into four parts: 50 runes, 50 runes, 50 runes, and the remaining 42 runes.


    Whoever created the spell believed it was a way of making it easier to learn, as the student could first learn the first 50 runes, add them to their body, and experience minor effects of the Magic Mind spell without completing it entirely.


    Well, that was what the tome Jinra had explained. The one William had was not like that, and perhaps that was what made it so much harder.


    "The idea behind completing the first set of runes is to experience the minor effects of the spell," Jinra explained to him. "You know one of the effects is faster learning of other spells, right? So, you can learn the remaining parts more easily."


    When the training started, William regretted choosing that spell. The runes were overcomplicated, and the first set already contained 50 for him to master! It was incredibly difficult. Jinra demonstrated the runes, creating them effortlessly.


    Despite having someone to guide him, William had a hard time recreating them. That''s when Jinra decided to try something different.


    "Are you up to try something dangerous?" Jinra asked him.


    "Something dangerous?" William repeated, stopping his practice and staring at Jinra.


    Jinra nodded. "I can help you unlock the mana points inside your body, making it easier for the mana to flow. This will make it much easier for you to learn any spell. But the thing is, it''s dangerous. If it fails, you could be crippled."


    William wasn''t a particularly brave person¡ªmost of the time, at least¡ªand the idea of being crippled wasn''t appealing. What if things went wrong? Would he ever have the chance to get his revenge?


    "I''ll think about it. For now, let''s just keep practicing as we are."


    "Sure. No problem."


    They kept practicing the runes for hours. William managed to create the first five¡ªfor a short time¡ªbut that was already something. Jinra helped him in any way he could, whether by demonstrating how the spell was cast or helping him guide the mana. But he also seemed distracted, as if he was thinking of something else. He was trying to find a way to help William learn faster without the risk of crippling him, like his previous suggestion.


    At the end of the training day, William was covered in sweat. He was sitting on the grass outside, with Jinra right in front of him.


    "Kid," Jinra said, "do you think you can stay here alone for a few days?"


    "I guess. But why?" William asked him.


    "I need to go find something, something that might help you. But it will take me a few days..." Jinra said.


    Considering William''s situation, he was more than willing to stay alone for a few days if Jinra brought back something that might help him. The Magic Mind spell was incredibly difficult, and he only had one month to learn it if he wanted to pass the exam.


    "Sure."


    "Alright," Jinra gestured for him to follow him. "I''ll show you the house."


    William got up and followed him.


    Jinra showed him all parts of the house¡ªwith the exception of a few locked doors.


    "You can stay in this room; don''t sleep in the barn again," Jinra said. "Before you ask, the house and the surrounding area have magical formations to protect you. The only reason you got close to the house the day we met is because I deactivated them; otherwise, you would be dead."


    "...Right, that''s good to know," William said.


    After the house tour, Jinra packed a few things into a backpack and left, leaving William alone in the house. William, the disciplined student that he was, started practicing Magic Mind again. He couldn''t afford to lose any time.


    When night came, he went to the bedroom to sleep¡ªand then return to his present time in the magic academy¡ªand that''s when he heard a strange noise coming from one of the locked doors. It sounded like a voice.

 Chapter 52 - 52: Magic Academy Exam (10) - The Truth

    ''What the fuck is this?'' William thought as he got up from the bed.


    The sound was too strange. He did his best to remain quiet so that he could hear it better¡ªand not be heard. It came from one of the locked doors in Jinra''s house. William stopped in front of it and waited. He wanted to hear the sound again, just to be sure.


    Then, after a few minutes, the creepy sound came from the other side of the door once more. William heard scratching on the walls, followed by a muffled voice.


    It gave him the creeps, so much so that he decided to return to the barn and try to sleep there. William didn''t have the courage¡ªor the reason¡ªto open that door and see what was on the other side.


    ''I''ll just wait until Jinra returns and ask him...'' William thought.


    The barn wasn''t the best place to sleep, but it was better than being inside that house. He closed his eyes, and sleep came...


    William returned to the present in Aethel, inside his temporary dorm room in the magic academy. He looked at the clock on the wall, seeing it was around 3 am.


    With nothing better to do, he continued his training. The progress had been minimal, but that was expected with Magic Mind, an almost impossible spell to learn.


    He managed to create a few runes and keep them ''alive'' for a few seconds, not much different from what he had managed to do in Jinra''s house. The only difference was an increase of one second before the runes disappeared.


    When it was around 7 am, William left his dorm to meet the others, Altair included, to get breakfast in the same dining hall they had been in previously.


    Every single exam participant was there, as well as some students. The students kept glancing at William.


    He had become a kind of celebrity, but not in a good way. They all expected him to fail the test, to fail to learn the Magic Mind spell.


    Altair, who had a chicken leg in his mouth so early in the morning, said, his voice almost impossible to understand with the amount of food stuffed inside, "Don''t mind their looks, bro. You will succeed."


    William smiled. "It''s been how many days since you last ate?"


    "S-Shut up!" Altair said, a small piece of chicken flying from his mouth.


    Breakfast was one of the best parts of William''s day. All he did during the rest of the day was practice the spell and endure the anxiety of not knowing if he would pass the exam. He imagined that every exam taker felt the same way, but at least they had easier spells to learn.


    William returned to his room after breakfast and stayed there the entire day. He left his room two other times¡ªto get lunch and dinner. The rest of the day was spent practicing the Magic Mind spell. When his Chrono Shift spell was off cooldown, he would use it again and practice more in Jinra''s barn.


    Yes, Jinra''s barn. He didn''t feel like returning to the house. William was even hunting his own food in the surrounding area to avoid the food stocked inside the house. The voice was just too creepy for him.


    Following that routine, seven days passed. During the seventh day, as he was practicing inside the barn as always, Jinra returned. Jinra saw him in the barn and couldn''t help but ask, "I am back, William. Did something happen?"


    "We need to talk."


    "Sure. Let''s go inside and talk about it," Jinra said with a gentle smile.


    William didn''t want to go. "Look, I''ll be brief. I heard some creepy sounds coming from one of your locked doors. It was as if a person was scratching the walls and murmuring. Can you explain?"


    The first thing that came to William''s mind was that Jinra was some kind of maniac who locked people in his basement. With everything that William had witnessed in his previous world and this one, it was more than possible.


    Jinra, on the other hand, was relieved. "Oh, so that''s what you heard? I thought it was something bad. Do you want to come with me and see what''s behind the locked door?"


    William pictured the two of them opening the door, and then Jinra tossing him inside. But considering he had his portal skill to escape if needed, William went along with it. "Sure, let''s go."


    Jinra had been kind to him, and he wanted to believe the old man wasn''t a bad person. Once they were inside the house, Jinra placed his backpack on the table and went to the locked door where the noises came from.


    "Is this the door?" Jinra asked.


    William nodded, a shiver running down his spine as he recalled what happened that night.


    Jinra opened the door, and the first thing they saw was a staircase leading down to some sort of basement. Before either of them said a word, Jinra went down. William followed close behind. What he saw down there was unexpected: a room stacked with various items.


    "This is where I keep most of the stuff I got during my adventuring days, and even after that. What you heard came from this thing right here," Jinra said, stopping in front of a necklace locked behind glass panels.


    "A necklace I got from a Lich. Its power is still a mystery to me, but I know it can cause those strange noises at night, trying to mess with your head. But it stopped for me after a week or so. Maybe it just gets tired, or my mental strength was too strong for it to influence," Jinra explained.


    William sighed in relief. "Never would I have thought it was something like this, damn it. That shit scared me."


    "I can imagine. I forgot to tell you about it since it''s been so long since the last time this necklace tried anything. Anyway, come with me; I need to show you something," Jinra said, moving away from the necklace and going back up the stairs.


    Before following him, William took a good look around to see the treasures hidden there, and then he followed Jinra, who locked the door again after they left.


    Jinra moved to the table where the backpack was, and from it, he pulled out a lot of potions.


    "I went to the city to speak with my friend, one of the best alchemists in the world. He made a few potions for me, and these potions should help you learn Magic Mind faster and more easily. It cost me a lot, but who cares? It''s not like I have anything else to spend my money on."


    The potions Jinra had varied in color, and when William looked at them, he could feel their power. They weren''t ordinary potions that most alchemists could make. The ones Jinra brought were exceptional.


    William was excited to try them. "So there aren''t side effects with this method?"


    "Uh, yes, but you can''t take them all at once. Let''s go gradually," Jinra warned him. sea??h th§× n?velFire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    William grabbed the first potion¡ªa reddish one¡ªand drank it. A notification from the System appeared right after.

 Chapter 53 - 53: Magic Academy Exam (11) - 1000% Learning Speed Bonus!??!

    [Learning speed increased by 1000% for 72 hours]


    The notification revealed a powerful effect from the potion William drank. With a 1000% bonus to his learning speed, learning Magic Mind would be much faster.


    "This potion is incredible," William said. "Who made it?"


    What Jinra said next surprised William. "It''s good but not that good. Like, a 100% increase in learning speed is decent but not exceptional, right?"


    "100%?"


    William didn''t know why he got a 1000% bonus and not 100% like Jinra had said. With a confused expression, he asked, "And do you know the ingredients for this potion?"


    Jinra grabbed the empty flask and placed it near the sink. "Are you sure you want to know about it?"


    "Yes."


    "Well, it''s made with blood, alright? According to my friend, he used blood from demonic creatures. I know it sounds bad, but the other ingredients nullify any side effects. A lot of people use his potions," Jinra said.


    Things were starting to make more sense to William. The demonic blood was once again giving him significant advantages.


    He still didn''t know how to feel about that.


    What if it had consequences in the future? But at that moment, he wanted to learn the Magic Mind spell; therefore, he would use all means necessary. Especially considering he needed to learn the spell to enter the magic academy. The weight on his shoulders increased because of that.


    William, his eyes alight with renewed determination, wasted no time. "Shall we get back to training, then?" he asked, eager to put his enhanced learning to the test.


    Jinra, accustomed to William''s enthusiasm, simply nodded. "Of course," he replied, leading the way outside. "Let''s see what you can do."


    The training resumed with renewed vigor. William focused his mind, channeling mana into the intricate runes of the Magic Mind spell. Jinra observed intently, offering guidance and corrections, his keen eyes detecting the slightest flaw in William''s technique. Sear?h the N??elFir§×.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Jinra watched, impressed. William''s mana manipulation was flawless, his control over the ethereal energy remarkable. The difficulty lay not in his technique, but in the sheer complexity of the spell itself. Yet, even with this monumental challenge, the potion''s effects were undeniable.


    William, his mind sharpened and his learning accelerated, surpassed his previous limitations. He effortlessly formed twenty-five runes simultaneously, sustaining them for an impressive twelve seconds. The progress was extraordinary, even for someone of William''s talent.


    "I never expected such a dramatic improvement," Jinra admitted, his voice laced with surprise. "And you said this potion''s effects last for seventy-two hours?"


    "That''s what my System indicated," William confirmed, still catching his breath from the exertion of maintaining the complex spell structure.


    Jinra, unaware that the potion''s effects were ten times stronger than William had initially described, was astonished by his rapid progress. He had witnessed countless mages struggle with this spell, their efforts spanning months, even years. William, however, seemed poised to master it in a fraction of the time.


    As dusk settled over the land, William prepared to rest in the barn.


    "Are you sure you want to sleep out here again?" Jinra asked, concern etched on his weathered face.


    "Yes," William replied, a wry smile tugging at his lips. "I need to focus all my energy on mastering this spell. Avoiding the...distractions of your Lich necklace will help with that."


    Jinra chuckled, understanding dawning in his eyes. "Very well, lad. I''ll see you in the morning."


    It didn''t take long for William to sleep. He didn''t know exactly when his body floated back to the current time of Aethel, but he felt rested when he woke up at around 5 am, so he got some good hours of sleep before returning on his own.


    He was once again back in the familiar dormitory every single one of the exam takers were sleeping at.


    When he went to the hallway, the place was vivid. Most people were starting to learn their first spells.


    "I''ve managed to complete 2 C rank spells by now, and almost a B rank too. What about you?" a girl asked her friends.


    "I have two B rank spells."


    "Wow! That''s impressive! We still have time so let''s work hard."


    Everyone who found some success in learning the spells was happy. There were still around 17 days to go, so the exam participants had plenty of time to learn more spells and accumulate more points.


    William, on the other hand, was not so focused on these low ranked spells. He wanted to master his A rank spell, and shock every single one of them.


    But for now, of course, he was the laughing stock of everyone.


    "William, right?" a young man approached William in the dorm hallway, "How is your spell learning going? Managed to get at least 5 runes going?"


    The people around them started laughing, leaving William in discomfort. But he was used to it. His classmates back on Earth made fun of him, and that wouldn''t get to him.


    William smiled. "Yeah, I am holding the runes well during the spell practice. Pretty sure I am at least holding better than your father did with his seed. Imagine having an intimate time of 15 seconds, and make someone like you come into this world. What a fucking shame."


    Those who were laughing stopped completely. What William said hurt the feelings of the young man who came to make fun of him.


    As nobles, their lineage and family were really important, and the noble didn''t want to get treated like that in front of the other nobles who were watching.


    "What did you say?" the young man said in anger.


    "I believe you heard me correctly," William reiterated, his voice laced with a cool confidence. "If you have a problem with it, you can schedule a duel with me once we''re both students." He paused, letting the challenge hang in the air. "Assuming, of course, that you have what it takes to actually pass the exams and earn your place here."


    With that parting shot, William exited the dormitory, leaving a trail of stunned silence in his wake. He had no time to waste on petty squabbles.


    His first stop was the dining hall, where he piled his plate high with a breakfast feast. Altair arrived shortly after, concerned.


    "I heard you had a bit of a...disagreement with a noble," Altair began tentatively. "Is everything alright?"


    "Everything''s perfectly fine," William assured him, spearing a generous portion of his omelet. "If he makes it into the academy, we''ll settle things with a duel. I''m confident I can handle him."


    After breakfast, William headed to the gymnasium. While he often practiced in his room, the talking among the exam takers and the small environment made it less than ideal for focused spellcasting. The gymnasium, with its vast training areas and high ceilings, offered the perfect environment to hone his skills.


    A few academy students were already practicing, their movements fluid and precise. William found a secluded corner, a simple task in the massive space, and resumed his training. Twenty-five intricate runes shimmered around him, their complexity drawing curious glances from the other students. William, however, remained oblivious, his concentration absolute.


    The next goal he had was to get the first set of 50 runes going, and reap the benefits of the Magic Mind spell.

 Chapter 54 - 54: Magic Academy Exam (12) - Secret Meeting, and First 50 Runes

    The students training in the gymnasium were visibly awestruck by William''s progress. Word of his attempt to master the infamous Magic Mind spell had spread like wildfire, and the sight of twenty-five intricate runes swirling around him solidified his reputation as a prodigy.


    He trained relentlessly, pushing his limits, and by day''s end, he had increased his count to twenty-seven. News of his accomplishment spread through the halls of Snowpeak Academy, fueling both admiration and disbelief.


    In the academy courtyard, a group of students huddled together, their conversation dominated by William''s feat. One of them, a red-haired youth, spoke with fervent admiration.


    "Did you hear?" he exclaimed, his eyes wide with excitement. "William has already mastered twenty-seven runes of the Magic Mind spell!"


    "You''re joking, right?" one of his companions scoffed. "That''s the best joke I''ve heard all year!"


    "I''m serious!" the red-haired student insisted. "He''s a genius! I want to learn from him someday."


    Their conversation was interrupted by the sudden appearance of Headmaster Tholfnir. "Are you certain he has mastered twenty-seven runes?" Tholfnir inquired, his voice a gentle rumble.


    The students, startled by his unexpected presence, bowed respectfully. "Yes, Headmaster Tholfnir," the red-haired student confirmed. "I saw him practicing in the gymnasium. I wouldn''t lie."


    Tholfnir''s lips curled into a subtle smile. "I know you wouldn''t," he said, his eyes twinkling with an unspoken knowledge. "Thank you for informing me."


    With a subtle gesture, Tholfnir vanished, leaving the students to ponder the meaning behind his cryptic words.


    The students'' hushed whispers followed William like a shadow. His audacious choice of spell, his rapid progress, and his defiant stance against the prince had made him a legend within the academy walls. But admiration was often intertwined with mockery.


    "So what if he''s mastered a few dozen runes?" scoffed a noble student, his voice dripping with disdain. "There are, what, a hundred and eighty of them or something?"


    "Actually," one of his companions corrected, "there are one hundred and ninety-two runes in the Magic Mind spell."


    "Hah!" the noble exclaimed, his laughter echoing through the courtyard. "That makes it even worse! The idiot''s going to fail."


    The group erupted in laughter, their scorn for William evident. He was, once again, the subject of ridicule, his ambition dismissed as foolish arrogance.


    But not everyone shared this dismissive attitude. The professors, witnessing his relentless dedication and remarkable progress, recognized a rare talent. Even Headmaster Tholfnir, his wisdom honed by centuries of experience, saw something special in William. S§×ar?h the ¦ÇovelFire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Under the cloak of night, while the academy slumbered, Tholfnir summoned the professors to a secret meeting. They gathered around a circular table in a hidden chamber, the air thick with anticipation.


    "I believe we must grant him a place, even if he doesn''t fully master the spell or achieve the required points," Tholfnir declared, his voice resonating with conviction. "His ability to learn so many runes of the Magic Mind spell in such a short time speaks volumes about his potential."


    A young professor with slicked-back hair raised an objection. "But Headmaster," he argued, "won''t this damage the academy''s reputation? The entrance process has remained unchanged for centuries. Making an exception for him could spark outrage."


    Tholfnir''s lips curled into a knowing smile. "I am well aware of the process," he replied, his eyes twinkling. "And I also recall that the last student granted such an exception was...myself, centuries ago." He paused, his gaze sweeping across the assembled professors. "I believe this young man is worth the risk. What are your thoughts?"


    The professors, their initial reservations overridden by Tholfnir''s conviction and William''s undeniable talent, agreed to grant him a place even if he fell short of the required points. A sense of excitement filled the room, and a wager was proposed. One professor, his beard as white as the snowcapped peaks surrounding the academy, declared he would craft a unique enchanted ring for William if he succeeded. Others chimed in with promises of favors and preferential treatment, though most remained skeptical of his chances.


    Tholfnir''s next words, however, shocked the room into silence. "If he masters Magic Mind," he declared, his voice resonating with an unwavering belief, "I shall take him as my personal disciple." He paused, letting the weight of his statement sink in. "If he fails, I shall grant each of you a favor. But if he succeeds, I expect you to provide him with every advantage and opportunity this academy has to offer."


    A favor from Tholfnir, the kingdom''s most powerful mage, was a prize beyond measure, especially with no limitations placed upon the request. The prospect of such a reward, coupled with the potential to mentor a student of William''s caliber, sparked a competitive fire in their hearts.


    "Don''t feel bad when I call in that favor, Tholfnir," James, the young professor with slicked-back hair, chuckled. "That kid is talented, no doubt, but he won''t master that spell in the remaining time. No way."


    "I agree with James," another professor chimed in. "It''s simply too much to ask."


    Tholfnir, his eyes twinkling with an ancient wisdom, simply smiled. He knew better than anyone the challenges William faced, but he also recognized the spark of greatness within the young man. Only time would tell if William could rise to the occasion and claim his destiny.


    William was blissfully unaware of the clandestine meeting transpiring elsewhere. He was dead to the world, lost in the depths of slumber after an exhausting day spent wrestling with the intricacies of the Magic Mind spell.


    Three days had flown by since he''d imbibed the potent elixir. The 1000% boost to his learning speed was no joke; he''d already managed to piece together the first 50 runes of the spell, an impressive feat by any measure.


    Of course, he wasn''t alone in this endeavor. Jinra, his ever-present guide, was there every step of the way, helping him weave those arcane symbols into his very being, coaxing forth the first faint whispers of the Magic Mind''s power.


    "Focus, William," Jinra instructed, his voice a calming presence amidst the chaotic storm of magic. "Guide the runes directly into your mind. They cannot take root elsewhere."


    Creating the runes had been an ordeal, a trial by fire that pushed William to his limits. But inscribing them onto his soul, weaving them into the fabric of his mind ¨C that was proving to be an entirely different beast.


    Despite Jinra''s guidance, it was like trying to thread a needle in a hurricane. Each attempt to absorb the runes sent them scattering through his body, a chaotic dance of energy that refused to be tamed.


    "You need to focus," Jinra repeated, his voice laced with concern.


    Hours blurred into a frustrating haze of failed attempts. Finally, William erupted, his frustration boiling over. "I am focusing!" he roared, slamming his fist against the floor. "I''m trying my best!"


    Jinra placed a calming hand on William''s shoulder. "Alright, alright, I know you are," he said softly, a hint of amusement in his voice. "Just relax for a moment. Let''s take a breather. I''ll go fetch us some water."


    He was, undeniably, a good mentor. He understood that berating William for his lack of focus would only exacerbate the issue. Sometimes, a gentle touch and a moment of respite were far more effective than relentless pressure.


    William watched him go, then slumped back against the rough bark of a nearby tree, the frustration gnawing at him. He was surrounded by the tranquil beauty of the forest clearing, the sun dappling through the leaves, birdsong filling the air. Yet, all he could feel was the burning impatience of his own shortcomings.


    ''Will I succeed in time?'' The thought echoed through his mind, a chilling whisper that threatened to consume him. The deadline loomed, a menacing shadow that stretched ever closer.

 Chapter 55 - 55: Magic Academy Exam (13) - Another HERO??

    Even mastering the first 50 runes¡ªa mere fraction of the 192 that formed the complete Magic Mind spell¡ªdid little to quell the doubt gnawing at William. Could he truly conquer this monumental task in time?


    He trained relentlessly, pushing himself to the brink of exhaustion. Every waking moment within Aethel''s past was consumed by the intricate dance of runes, their complex patterns swirling in his mind''s eye.


    He would practice until his body screamed for respite, then activate Chrono Shift, that potent SSS-rank skill, ripping open a portal to the past and stepping back into Aethel to relive those hours anew.


    With time frozen in the present¡ªin the academy where he truly belonged¡ªhe effectively doubled his training time. Yet, even with Jinra''s unwavering support, it felt like an insurmountable challenge.


    "Only eight individuals in history have ever mastered this spell," William muttered to himself, the weight of that knowledge pressing down on him. "Eight legendary mages, each a titan in their own right. Why did I even entertain the thought of joining their ranks?"


    The seed of this reckless ambition had been planted in a moment of youthful arrogance. He''d yearned to prove himself, to silence the whispers of doubt that followed him like a shadow.


    Summoned to this world as a hero, he carried the burden of expectation, the crushing weight of a destiny he hadn''t chosen. If a hero couldn''t master this spell, then who could?


    Jinra returned, a glass of cool water sloshing gently in his hand. "Here," he said, offering it to William. "Drink this. You''ll feel better."


    William gratefully accepted the water, the cool liquid soothing his parched throat. "Thanks," he mumbled, then hesitated. "Is it normal for this to be so...difficult? I mean, getting the runes to settle into my mind feels like wrestling a swarm of angry hornets."


    Jinra chuckled, a low rumble that echoed through the clearing. "You''re accustomed to the ease of lower-rank spells, William," he explained. "But the Magic Mind is in a league of its own, far more complex and demanding than anything you''ve encountered before. This struggle is to be expected." He clapped a reassuring hand on William''s shoulder. "But fret not, young one. We''ll get there. Persistence is key."


    William''s eyes lit up with a sudden thought. "What about potions? Could another draught give me the edge I need?" His mind flashed back to the potent concoction brewed from demonic blood¡ªits effects amplified tenfold within his unique physiology.


    Jinra, however, shook his head, a stern expression settling on his face. "I have a few potions remaining," he admitted, "but your body needs time to recover from the last dose. We cannot afford to rush this process, William. Impatience could lead to grave consequences, even crippling you. I won''t risk your well-being for the sake of a shortcut."


    No choice remained. After a brief respite, William steeled his resolve and plunged back into the maelstrom, wrestling with the unruly runes.


    Hours bled into one another as he grappled with the chaotic energies, his focus unwavering. Finally, with a surge of power that left him breathless, he triumphed. Fifty runes, glowing with an ethereal blue light, etched themselves onto his forehead, intertwining and converging until they formed a single, radiant symbol.


    The system''s notification chimed, a symphony of success:


    [+30 Intelligence]


    [+15% Learning Speed]


    [+15% Memory Retention]


    [You can now achieve a clearer mind during meditation]


    The effects were staggering, and this was merely the first act in the grand play of Magic Mind. While the 15% learning speed boost paled in comparison to the potion''s explosive 1000%, the permanent nature of this enhancement, coupled with the amplified memory retention and the surge in raw intelligence, far outweighed any temporary gains.


    Each point of intelligence amplified his learning capacity exponentially, making this permanent upgrade far superior to any fleeting potion-induced boost.


    And the absence of debilitating side effects? Priceless. Potions were a crutch, a dangerous gamble with potentially devastating consequences. This, however, was pure, unadulterated power.


    "I did it!" William roared, his voice ringing with triumph.


    Jinra beamed, his pride radiating like the sun. He pulled William into a tight embrace, his gruff voice softening with affection. "Well done, lad! You possess a rare talent indeed."


    Their bond, forged in the crucible of magical pursuit, had deepened considerably in their short time together. To witness a student unlock the secrets of a spell as profound as Magic Mind was a reward in itself for any mentor.


    "Thanks," William replied, a grin splitting his face. "It''s just the beginning, I know, but it''s a damn good start. This definitely fuels the fire!"


    Twilight painted the sky in hues of orange and purple as William finally emerged from the depths of his magical struggle. His time within Aethel''s past was drawing to a close; Chrono Shift, for now, limited him to a single day in that bygone era.


    Exhausted but elated, he stumbled towards the barn, collapsing onto a bed of hay. Sleep claimed him instantly, and he awoke with the dawn, back in his familiar dormitory within the bustling magic academy.


    The hallway buzzed with the usual pre-exam chatter. Students boasted of their accomplishments, their voices laced with a mixture of confidence and anxiety. Some had already mastered a few low-level spells, earning them precious points towards passing the test.


    William, despite his monumental achievement, remained at zero. But the Magic Mind...ah, that was a game changer. If he could conquer that behemoth, the top spot in the rankings was all but assured.


    He was about to head towards the dining hall when a familiar figure materialized beside him. Altair, with his ever-present smile and helpful demeanor, was like a golden retriever in human form.


    "Heard about the lecture today?" Altair chirped, his eyes sparkling with enthusiasm. "Apparently, it''s supposed to be a real eye-opener, even for seasoned mages. Might give us an edge in our training." He paused, dropping his voice to a conspiratorial whisper. "And guess what? It''s being given by one of the summoned heroes! Right after breakfast!"


    William blinked, momentarily disoriented. Lost in his intense training within Aethel''s past, he''d been oblivious to any news or announcements.


    He even thought he had heard it wrong.


    "One of the summoned heroes?" William echoed, his voice tight with a mixture of apprehension and disbelief. He knew exactly who Altair was talking about ¨C it had to be one of his former classmates, another soul ripped from their world and thrust into this one. But while those heroes were celebrated and lauded, William had been cast aside, stripped of his title, and left to fend for himself. S~ea??h the N?vel?ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Altair, blissfully unaware of the turmoil brewing within William, continued his enthusiastic chatter. "Yep! Apparently, he''s some kind of prodigy. Already mastered a bunch of high-level spells and even helped some of the professors with their...uh...professor stuff. Everyone''s calling him a genius." He gave William a playful nudge. "Maybe you should try to snag a seat next to him. Some of that brilliance might rub off on you!"


    William forced a chuckle, his mind a whirlwind of conflicting emotions. This was a disaster. He couldn''t risk being seen by one of them. Who knew what kind of reaction they''d have? Would they expose him as a failure, a hero who had been discarded? Shame burned in his throat, a bitter taste that threatened to choke him.


    He had to find a way to attend the lecture without being noticed. Perhaps he could disguise himself, or slip in late and find a seat in the back...


    "Uh, yeah, that''s...great," William stammered, trying to maintain his composure. "Just remembered something I need to take care of first. How about we meet at the lecture hall? I''ll see you there."


    Altair, though clearly sensing William''s evasiveness, graciously let it slide. "Sure thing," he replied with a shrug. "See you later!"


    As Altair bounded off down the hallway, William leaned against the wall, his heart pounding. He needed a plan, and fast. This lecture had just become a high-stakes game.

 Chapter 56 - 56: A Hero Giving a Lecture

    A hero, lecturing at Snowpeak Magic Academy? The very notion sent a shiver down William''s spine. As far as he knew, Elric''s teleportation magic had flung him into an entirely different kingdom. What was one of his former comrades doing here? And why?


    ''Could they be looking for me?'' The thought burrowed into his mind like a persistent worm. It wasn''t entirely implausible. If that were the case, he was in serious danger.


    Even if this hero''s presence was merely a coincidence, William couldn''t risk being recognized. The shame of his expulsion was a burden he wasn''t ready to share.


    His initial instinct was to avoid the lecture altogether. But as he hurried through the academy grounds, a stern-faced professor intercepted him.


    "William, is it?" the old mage rasped, his eyes peering down at William over the rim of his spectacles.


    "Yes," William replied, his anxiety growing. "Is something wrong?"


    "Though you''re not yet officially a student," the professor declared, "attendance at this morning''s lecture is mandatory for all. It''s of vital importance, young man. Do not miss it, or face the consequences."


    "Okay," William mumbled, his stomach churning. Consequences? What kind of consequences? He needed to find a way to camouflage himself, become invisible. Even amidst a sea of faces, he was certain his former classmate would recognize him.


    There was only one person he could think of who might be able to help: Headmaster Tholfnir. With a renewed sense of urgency, William set off to find the elusive mage.


    Tholfnir''s chambers were located within the academy''s main building, but he wasn''t known for his consistency in keeping office hours. Rumors swirled about his frequent travels, whispers of a secret hideaway known only to a select few. Still, William clung to the hope that the impending lecture would have drawn him back to the academy.


    A stoic guard barred his path as he approached Tholfnir''s door.


    "State your business," the guard demanded, his voice devoid of any warmth.


    "I need to speak with Headmaster Tholfnir," William replied, trying to project an air of confidence he didn''t feel.


    The guard scoffed. "Not even enrolled students can meet with him on a whim. And you think you can? There are professors and staff members more suited to address your concerns. Headmaster Tholfnir is a busy man."


    William knew the guard wasn''t wrong, but he had to try.


    Suddenly, as if conjured from thin air, Tholfnir appeared beside them. He placed a calming hand on the guard''s shoulder. "It''s alright," he said, his voice a low rumble. "Let him pass." He turned to William, a glimmer of amusement in his eyes. "Come, William. Let''s talk in my office."


    William followed, his heart pounding with a mixture of relief and trepidation. He cast a glance back at the bewildered guard, who stood frozen in disbelief. How had he, a mere prospective student, gained such easy access to the headmaster? He didn''t have the answer, but he wasn''t about to question his good fortune.


    Tholfnir''s office was a testament to his personality: meticulously organized, with towering bookshelves lining the walls and a massive window offering a panoramic view of the academy courtyard. William settled into a plush chair facing the headmaster''s imposing oak desk.


    "So, William," Tholfnir began, a warm smile gracing his features. "How can I be of assistance?"


    William''s mind raced. What could he possibly say? Confessing his true identity as a fallen hero was out of the question. He needed a plausible excuse to avoid the lecture or, at the very least, to attend incognito.


    "Do you know how long this summoned hero will be at the academy?" William asked, feigning casual curiosity.


    Tholfnir''s brow furrowed slightly. "Just today. He''s passing through and offered to share some insights with the students. Why do you ask?"


    "I was wondering if there might be a way for me to...skip the lecture?" William ventured. "I could use the extra time to focus on my training. As you know, the spell I''ve chosen is quite challenging."


    Tholfnir shook his head gently. "While I understand your dedication, William, the lecture will be brief. It might even prove beneficial to your studies."


    William pressed on, desperation edging into his voice. "But I''m at a critical juncture in my training. If I must attend, could you perhaps provide me with a secluded spot to watch? A place where I can maintain my focus? I just completed the first 50 runes of Magic Mind, and I need to capitalize on this momentum."


    It was a flimsy excuse, but William was grasping at straws. He hoped that demonstrating his progress might sway the headmaster.


    And it worked. Tholfnir''s eyes widened in disbelief. "What did you say? You''ve already mastered 50 runes? Is this true, young man?"


    Instead of answering, William summoned the runes, letting them swirl around him in a mesmerizing display of blue light. Tholfnir, stunned, sank back into his chair.


    "T-this is incredible," he stammered, his voice laced with awe.


    Tholfnir stroked his beard, a thoughtful expression settling on his face. "Very well," he declared. "I can arrange for a secluded space where you can observe the lecture without interruption. But are you certain you can multitask effectively? Simultaneously meditating and absorbing information is a difficult skill to master."


    William, however, had a secret weapon. The first set of Magic Mind runes, unbeknownst to Tholfnir, granted him exceptional clarity during meditation. "Yes, Headmaster," he replied confidently. "I''m sure I can manage."


    "Excellent," Tholfnir said, a hint of pride in his voice. "I''m impressed by your dedication, William. Now, let''s head to the lecture hall, shall we?"


    William followed, curiosity piqued. Where exactly would he be observing from? Tholfnir led him not to the crowded hall, but to the academy''s top floor¡ªan area typically off-limits to students. The ceiling had been enchanted to provide an open-air view of the entire grounds, including the stage where the lecture was to take place.


    "Will I be watching from here?" William asked, surprised.


    "Of course not," Tholfnir chuckled. "You wouldn''t be able to hear a thing from this distance. Observe and learn, young one."


    With a practiced flourish, Tholfnir conjured a series of runes in the air. A shimmering, translucent sphere materialized before them, growing rapidly until it dwarfed both of them. With a snap of his fingers, the sphere opened, revealing a passageway into its depths.


    William gasped. The interior was astonishing¡ªa spacious, luxuriously furnished room, far grander than anything he could have imagined. Even more remarkable was the sphere''s one-way transparency. He could see the outside world with perfect clarity, yet from the outside, the sphere remained opaque.


    "We''ll be watching from here," Tholfnir announced, gesturing towards a plush sofa. "Refreshments are available should you require them."


    With a subtle gesture, Tholfnir guided the magical sphere through the walls of the academy, bypassing crowded corridors and bustling classrooms, arriving finally at the grand hall where the lecture was to commence.


    "Won''t they notice us floating in here?" William asked, a hint of concern in his voice.


    Tholfnir chuckled. "Only if I allow it," he replied, a mischievous twinkle in his eye. "I''ll simply adjust the sphere''s size and opacity, rendering it practically invisible to the casual observer."


    The sheer versatility of the spell was astounding. William stared at Tholfnir with newfound respect. ''He truly is the strongest mage in the kingdom,'' William thought, a flicker of ambition igniting within him. ''Will I ever reach such heights?''


    The lecture hall was packed. Students and exam-takers alike crammed into every available space, their anticipation palpable. As the appointed time drew near, the crowd hushed, their attention drawn to the elevated platform at the center of the hall. S§×arch* The n?velFire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    And then, he appeared.


    The summoned hero.


    William''s breath caught in his throat. It was him. A face etched in memory, a classmate from his former life on Earth. But here, in this world, he was a beacon of power, a symbol of hope. A stark contrast to William, the summoned hero who no one knew about.

 Chapter 57 - 57: Critical Information, and Exam Ending

    The person giving the lecture was Kevin...


    Of all the summoned heroes, all those insufferable classmates from college, Kevin was the absolute worst. The memories of his relentless bullying, the snide remarks, the shoves in the hallway, and the humiliating beatdown in the gym locker room ¨C they all came flooding back, a torrent of resentment and anger.


    And there he stood, basking in the adulation of the crowd, the savior of this world, the prodigy, the genius. William''s fists clenched, his nails digging into his palms. He''d give anything to wipe that smug grin off Kevin''s face, to see him toppled from his pedestal.


    ''Why him?'' William seethed, his frustration mounting. Of all the people to be celebrated, why did it have to be the one who had made his life a living hell? It felt like a cruel cosmic joke.


    William fought to maintain a neutral expression, burying his resentment deep within. He couldn''t let Tholfnir sense his turmoil. The invisibility sphere was a blessing in disguise. He could observe Kevin without fear of being recognized, a voyeur in his own twisted reunion.


    Kevin''s power was immediately apparent, radiating from him in palpable waves. It was undeniable ¨C the man was leagues ahead of William.


    They were both summoned heroes, blessed with exceptional talent and innate skills, but while William had trained under the tutelage of Gorn and Jinra, Kevin had clearly been molded by the best of the best. Mages on par with Tholfnir, or perhaps even stronger, had honed his abilities. Resources flowed freely to him, the chosen savior destined to confront the demon lord.


    But instead of discouragement, a fierce determination ignited within William. He would work harder, push himself further, and surpass them all, even without their privileged access to resources and elite instructors. He would carve his own path to power.


    A hush fell over the hall as Kevin began his lecture. He started with training tips, sharing insights gleaned from his diverse mentors across various kingdoms.


    These methods differed significantly from Snowpeak''s traditional practices, making them particularly valuable to the eager audience. William, despite his animosity, found himself leaning forward, absorbing every word.


    Despite his personal feelings, William wasn''t foolish enough to ignore potentially valuable information. He listened intently, gleaning whatever insights he could from Kevin''s lecture. He maintained a meditative facade, more for Tholfnir''s benefit than his own. He''d already made significant progress with the Magic Mind runes; his focus now was on staying under the radar.


    The second part of the lecture, however, took a sharp turn. Kevin''s confident demeanor shifted, a gravity settling over his features as he addressed the audience.


    "The demon lord and his forces are not the only threat we face," he announced, his gaze sweeping across the room. "The Kingdom of Sartana is mobilizing against yours. And they have allies. My kingdom is prepared to offer assistance in this impending war."


    A ripple of unease spread through the hall. William glanced at Tholfnir, who sat beside him with a grim expression.


    "Did you know about this?" William whispered, his voice laced with concern.


    Tholfnir nodded slowly. "We were aware of Sartana''s aggression," he admitted, "but the involvement of allies...that is troubling news. It''s not a full-scale war yet, but they''ve been testing our defenses, sending troops across our borders, embedding spies within our ranks."


    William''s mind raced. "Does this have anything to do with the reduced intake of students at the academy?" he asked, a sudden realization dawning on him.


    Tholfnir met his gaze, a flicker of admiration in his eyes. "You''re a perceptive young man, William," he said. "Indeed, you''re correct. We must conserve our resources. Each student represents a significant investment."


    It all made sense now. The academy provided everything for free ¨C tuition, lodging, even meals. With war looming, they were tightening their belts, ensuring they had the financial means to weather the coming storm.


    The weight of the impending conflict settled heavily on William''s shoulders. The future seemed fraught with uncertainty, and his desire to join the academy intensified. It was his best chance to gain strength, to become a force to be reckoned with, and perhaps even to find a way to navigate the treacherous currents of the looming war.


    As the two-hour lecture concluded, Kevin approached Tholfnir, requesting a private conversation. Tholfnir exited the sphere, leaving William concealed within its shimmering walls. From his hidden vantage point, William listened with bated breath as their hushed words reached him.


    "I''m also here seeking information about one of the summoned heroes," Kevin murmured, his voice low and conspiratorial. "I have reliable intel suggesting he''s hiding somewhere in this kingdom."


    Tholfnir''s brow furrowed. "One of your own? Why isn''t he with you?"


    "Let''s just say there were...complications," Kevin replied evasively. "Unfortunately, I don''t have a portrait, and his appearance may have changed. But I''ll return in a year to continue the search, and I hope to enlist your aid."


    "Of course," Tholfnir agreed readily. "We can work together to locate him."


    Fear gripped William''s heart. He had one year. One year to either vanish from Kevin''s radar or to become strong enough to face him head-on. The clock was ticking.


    The irony wasn''t lost on William. He hadn''t even set foot inside the academy as a student, and yet, his primary goal had already shifted to surpassing Kevin, to proving himself not just worthy, but superior.


    A wave of relief washed over him as Kevin finally departed, soaring through the sky with a display of high-level magic that underscored the chasm between their current abilities. He and Tholfnir exited the now-invisible sphere, stepping back into the bustling hall.


    "I must attend to urgent matters in light of this new information," Tholfnir declared, his brow furrowed with worry. "We''ll speak again soon, William."


    William simply nodded, understanding the gravity of the situation. He wouldn''t burden the headmaster with trivial concerns.


    As Tholfnir hurried away, Altair materialized beside William, his usual cheerfulness replaced with a frown.


    "Where were you?" he demanded. "I looked everywhere! You know those who skipped the lecture will be punished, right?"


    William shrugged, a smirk playing on his lips. "I''m not officially a student yet, so what can they do? Besides," he added casually, "I watched the lecture with Headmaster Tholfnir."


    Altair''s jaw dropped. "W-what? With the headmaster? How?"


    "I just asked," William replied vaguely. He clapped a hand on Altair''s shoulder, his expression turning serious. "We need to secure our places in this academy, Altair. If war is coming, we need to be ready."


    The levity vanished from Altair''s face. "You don''t need to tell me," he said, his voice tight with determination. "My family lives near the border. I have to get stronger, to protect them."


    The atmosphere within the academy crackled with a newfound intensity. Kevin''s lecture, with its stark warnings of impending war, had cast a long shadow over the exam-takers. The carefree confidence of the previous days evaporated, replaced by a grim determination.


    The tension ratcheted up another notch when Tholfnir announced a further reduction in available spots.


    Only eight individuals would gain entry into the academy. Panic rippled through the ranks, but William remained unfazed. His strategy was clear: master the Magic Mind spell. The sheer power of that spell would guarantee him a place, regardless of how many spots were up for grabs.


    Time seemed to accelerate, the remaining days blurring into a frenzy of focused study and practice. Finally, the moment of truth arrived. The exam. A chance to showcase their newfound abilities, to prove their worth, and to secure their future in a world teetering on the brink of war.


    Sear?h the N?velFire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.

 Chapter 58 - 58: The Ninth Person, Officially a Student

    The final stage of the exam, lasting 30 days, was finally over. William had worked tirelessly to learn the Magic Mind spell. Days and days of training, not just within the academy but also in the past with Jinra''s guidance, had taken their toll.


    Many times, he had thought of giving up. What gave him the strength to keep going was seeing Kevin, his former classmate, there in the academy. It was a brief encounter, but William remembered all the things Kevin had done to him.


    Tholfnir summoned all the exam participants to the gymnasium, where he would test them to see if they had learned their chosen spells. Many students were there to witness the event, as well as the professors. It took place during the morning, right after breakfast.


    Altair had learned some spells during this month and shared his accomplishments with his friend William. "I''ve learned five B-rank spells, totaling 25 points. Impressive, right?" Altair said as they walked together toward the gymnasium. "I think I''m in the top three with the highest points!"


    The total number of spots had dwindled to just eight, and Altair had done his research. With his current 25 points, he was confident he would secure a spot! William was happy for him. Altair was a kind noble who had befriended him despite their different social standings.


    "That''s impressive. I''m glad you''re taking one of the spots. You deserve it." William hadn''t told Altair or anyone that he had mastered the Magic Mind spell. He wanted to surprise them all.


    "I hope you got enough points to pass too. You know, everyone in the academy is talking about how you didn''t learn the spell and will be eliminated," Altair said, sharing his concerns with his friend.


    William, looking mysterious, said, "You''ll see in time. No need to rush things."


    Altair complained, "Ahh, bro. Just tell me. I can''t live with this anxiety."


    "You''ll have to."


    "Damn it!"


    No matter what Altair said, he couldn''t convince William. The only way for him to know for sure if his friend had passed the exam was during the check-up done by Tholfnir.


    Speaking of Tholfnir, he was standing in the middle of the gymnasium, with all the exam participants lined up in front of him. The bleachers around them were filled with students and professors watching the prestigious event.


    Tholfnir, his voice grave and amplified by magic, said, "Welcome, everyone. We are here today to see who the new students will be." He then gestured with his hands to a few professors who were seated behind tables. "We have a few professors writing down the points for us to check later."


    There was a buzz among the participants, but they quieted down after Tholfnir told them to. "I''ll call you randomly. You''ll step forward, give me the manuals of the spells you learned, and then demonstrate them to me. Don''t try to fool me by using a spell you already knew, as I checked all of you beforehand and have all your data," Tholfnir reminded them.


    He had checked everyone 30 days prior and written down all the spells the exam takers knew to ensure no one would try to trick him.


    "Bernard, step forward!"


    Bernard managed to learn only two B-rank spells and three C-rank spells, totaling 13 points. That was quite low compared to Altair, for example.


    Tholfnir called the other participants. They went to the middle of the arena and demonstrated the spells they learned. The professors wrote down all the points.


    When it was Altair''s turn, William tapped him on the back. "Good luck, bro. Show them what you got."


    "I will. Watch!" Altair said, confidently walking forward.


    Everyone in the gymnasium paid close attention to Altair for two reasons: first, his fame as a talented mage, and everyone wanted to see how he would perform. The other reason was that they knew he had befriended William, and William was currently the most talked-about person in the entire academy.


    Altair demonstrated the B-rank spells he had learned¡ªall of them focusing on body enhancement. Everyone looked surprised to see that he had learned five B-rank spells. Even Tholfnir had to give him credit. "Congratulations, young man. Not everyone can do this."


    Altair bowed. "Thank you, Headmaster Tholfnir. It''s a pleasure to receive a compliment from someone like you."


    As he made his way back to the other participants, everyone stared at him, shocked by his performance.


    The participants continued demonstrating the spells they had learned, and the professors diligently recorded their points.


    Everyone was aware of the top eight contenders, as they had been closely monitoring each other''s scores. As a result, a few participants appeared relaxed and even distanced themselves from the rest of the group. This exclusive group of eight included Altair.


    The only person who had yet to demonstrate his spells was William, but everyone assumed he hadn''t learned the Magic Mind spell.


    They even laughed at him when Tholfnir called him to the arena.


    The person with the lowest points among the top eight said, "Go quickly, William. I want the ceremony to start."


    He truly believed he would be among the top eight. William had some bad news for him.


    William stopped when he heard what the noble said. He stared at the young man and smirked, his voice loud enough for everyone to hear.


    "Relax, little bro. You''re the one with the lowest points, meaning you''ll lose your spot to me. Also, bow to your boss. I am the ninth person to learn the Magic Mind spell!" sea??h th§× n??el Fire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    William was done with the mockery. Why be humble with people who had been condescending to him?


    No one believed him, but the entire gymnasium fell silent as he approached the arena. William began casting his spell. 192 runes appeared around him, blue energy dancing around his body like ocean waves. The runes formed a unique rune that shone on his forehead. It was the symbol of an eye.


    Tholfnir almost stumbled. He couldn''t believe his eyes. He moved next to William to examine him, and he knew William had truly mastered the Magic Mind spell. He knew it because he was one of the eight people who had accomplished this feat.


    "Y-You did it, William! You mastered it! This is incredible. I can''t believe our school has the privilege of having a genius like yourself with us!"


    The professors, who had been observing, rose from their seats, blinking a few times, unsure if what they were seeing was real.


    It was a moment they thought they would never witness. The ninth person to ever learn the Magic Mind spell in the current time of Aethel, and it was a young man who hadn''t even begun his formal magical studies!


    The most impressive fact was that William had learned it in just one month! They had never seen anything like it. Tholfnir himself, the strongest mage in the kingdom, hadn''t learned the Magic Mind spell for years, let alone in a single month.


    Tholfnir announced the top eight, with William ranked first. The noble who had prematurely claimed victory had a sour expression when he was cut from the top eight, losing his spot in the magic academy. He even considered threatening William, but then he realized how talented William was, and that in the future, a mage like William could wipe out his entire family, so he thought better of it...


    "Congratulations to all of you. You are now officially students of Snowpeak Academy!" Tholfnir proclaimed.

 Chapter 59 - 59: Farewell, and First Day as a Student

    Everyone in Snowpeak Academy was utterly shocked after witnessing William''s display of skill. They were all gathered in the gymnasium, and Tholfnir used the opportunity to warn them about spreading the news.


    "Don''t breathe a word of this to anyone outside the school yet," Tholfnir instructed. "We need to ensure that the fact William knows this spell remains confidential for now. Understood?" Tholfnir was doing his best to keep William safe, trying to avoid any danger that might come his way due to his magical talent and achievement.


    He placed his hand on William''s shoulder and whispered, "Don''t worry, kid. If anything happens, I''ll protect you, and I have some powerful friends to help me if I need it." William felt reassured knowing that someone like Tholfnir was watching his back.


    Ordinarily, the academy would hold a welcoming party for the new students, but there were only eight this time, so they didn''t feel it was necessary. Not to mention, every single one of them was thinking about what Kevin had said regarding the war, and none of them could relax because of that.


    Altair couldn''t contain his happiness. He was jumping around and smiling like crazy. "You did it, bro! Now I have my friend with me, so the classes won''t be so boring!"


    "Don''t get too excited," William said. "Remember that you''ll have to work hard to keep up with me. I want a strong ally."


    "Oh, you can relax about that. I won''t stop until my power is close to yours."


    William smiled. "It''s nice to hear that, though there''s no way I''m letting you surpass me."


    Eventually, the students and professors left the gymnasium. They had classes to attend. William and the other new students had a day off, meaning they didn''t have classes that day.


    "Can I leave the academy, or can you let Gorn come here?" William asked Tholfnir.


    "It is up to you to decide," Tholfnir said. "I would suggest you enjoy the city, as you''ll be staying in the academy for a while, focusing on your studies starting tomorrow."


    "Thank you. I''ll be going out, then," he said.


    William descended the snow-covered slopes, his heart pounding with anticipation. It had been weeks since he last saw Gorn, and he was eager to share the news of his success. The city was blanketed in a thick layer of snow, the winter chill biting at exposed skin. He navigated the snow-laden streets, heading straight for the familiar tavern where Gorn awaited.


    He found Gorn nursing a mug of ale, his brow furrowed in thought. The man''s face erupted in a broad smile as he spotted William.


    "Lad!" he boomed, rising and pulling William into a bear hug. "How did it go?"


    "Better than ever," William replied, a grin splitting his face. "Sit down, I have news."


    Gorn''s impatience was palpable. "Just spit it out, lad! I know you secured a spot. I didn''t train you for nothing!"


    "You''re right," William said, his smile widening. "I earned one of the eight spots!"


    Gorn''s eyebrows shot up. "Eight spots? What happened? But damn it, lad, I knew you could do it!"


    William recounted his experience, including the overheard conversation during Kevin''s lecture, sharing the crucial information about the impending war. He explained that as a student, he would be confined to the academy, unable to leave at will. Gorn needed to prepare, to protect his family from the looming threat.


    "This is bad..." Gorn muttered, taking a long pull from his mug. "If the neighboring kingdoms are uniting against us, a full-scale war could erupt at any moment. I''m glad you''ll be safe within the academy walls."


    "But what about you? Elara? Maya?" William asked, concern etched on his face. S§×ar?h the N?vel?ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "I''ll try to get Maya into Snowpeak next year," Gorn said, his voice firm. "It will take a few years for this war to truly escalate." He saw the worry in William''s eyes and added, "Relax, lad. We''ll be fine. I''m not about to let my family suffer."


    William knew Gorn meant every word. The man was a force to be reckoned with, a protector who would shield his loved ones at any cost.


    "Alright," William said, nodding. "But you should return to Willow Creek as soon as possible. This is urgent."


    "Agreed," Gorn said. "But let''s enjoy today. You''ve earned it."


    They spent the day reveling in William''s success, sharing stories, laughter, and good cheer. They even ventured out into the snow, engaging in a playful snowball fight, their laughter echoing through the frosty air. But the following day, the time to part ways arrived.


    The farewell was bittersweet. William, unsure when he would see Gorn again, felt tears welling up in his eyes. For the first time since arriving in this world, he cried. Gorn, his gruff exterior melting away, pulled William into a tight embrace.


    "Damn it, lad," he choked out, "I always wanted a son, and you''re the kind of son any father would be proud of." He released William, wiping a tear from his cheek. "Alright, enough of this blubbering. Go on, now. Make us proud."


    With a final farewell, they parted ways. Gorn left going towards Willow Creek, while William ascended the snow-dusted path back to the academy, eager to embark on his magical education.


    The guards at the gate greeted him with unexpected warmth. Their usual formality had been replaced by a friendly deference, their smiles genuine. William, though surprised by the preferential treatment, accepted it with a gracious nod.


    "Have a nice day, you two," he said, a hint of amusement in his voice.


    "You too, William," one of the guards replied. "Enjoy your first day of classes."


    Within the academy walls, William''s newfound celebrity status was undeniable. Whispers followed him down the halls, heads turned as he passed. He had become a legend in the making, his name synonymous with talent and ambition. While he appreciated the perks of his reputation, the constant attention was a double-edged sword.


    He pushed through the curious stares, heading towards his first class: Combat Magic. The classroom, located on the second floor, buzzed with anticipation. As William entered, all eyes fell upon him. A few empty seats remained, one conveniently beside Altair.


    "Over here!" Altair called out, waving him over. "I saved you a spot."


    William settled into the chair, his gaze scanning the room. He had expected a grizzled veteran, scarred and hardened by battle, to lead the class. Instead, a young man with slicked-back hair and a scholarly air stood at the lectern. He wore a long, dark red tunic and round spectacles, his appearance more befitting a researcher than a warrior.


    The students, their excitement palpable, chattered amongst themselves, oblivious to the professor''s growing impatience.


    "Silence!" the professor boomed, his voice cutting through the din. "Settle down before I lose my patience."


    The students, their youthful exuberance unchecked, continued their chatter, ignoring the professor''s warning.


    William, observing the room, noticed that while all eight new students were present, they were joined by a handful of unfamiliar faces.


    He initially assumed these were senior students, perhaps auditing the class or participating in some advanced training. But their expressions mirrored his own confusion, their eyes wide with uncertainty.


    ''This isn''t going to end well,'' William thought, bracing himself for the inevitable explosion.


    The professor, his face reddening with frustration, took a deep breath and raised his hand. A surge of mana crackled around him, and with a flick of his wrist, he unleashed a silencing spell. A wave of energy washed over the room, and the students'' voices abruptly cut off, leaving an eerie silence in its wake.

 Chapter 60 - 60: First Classes, and Shocking Information

    The silencing spell held them captive, a stark reminder of the professor''s authority. Even William, an innocent bystander in the cacophony, found himself unable to utter a word.


    "I am Professor James," the young man announced, his voice resonating with a newfound firmness. "And I will be responsible for instructing you in the art of combat magic. Now, please, refrain from excessive chatter during my class, or any other class for that matter."


    He released the spell, and the room erupted in a flurry of apologies. Professor James nodded in approval. "Conversation is not prohibited," he clarified, "but maintain a respectable volume, especially during my instruction."


    William raised his hand, catching James'' attention. S~ea??h the Novel?ire(.)ne*t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "Go on, William," James encouraged.


    "I understand this is a new class," William began, "but it seems there are more students present than those who participated in the entrance exams."


    Tholfnir had explicitly stated that there were only eight spots available.


    "You are observant, William," James replied, a hint of grimness in his voice. "The additional students are from other academies facing...difficulties due to the impending war. We are offering them temporary refuge and continued instruction."


    William''s heart sank. If other schools were already feeling the pressure of a war that hadn''t even begun, the future seemed bleak indeed. He noticed a similar apprehension dawning on the faces of his fellow students.


    James continued with his introduction. At twenty-five, he was a remarkably young professor, renowned for his mastery of fire magic and his contributions to magical research and excavation. Rumors circulated about his discoveries of ancient artifacts and lost spells, labeling him a rising star in the field.


    The introductory lecture concluded with a promise of practical application. "I''ve reviewed your files," James announced, "and I''m familiar with your strengths and weaknesses. While my primary expertise lies in fire magic, I am proficient in other elements and capable of guiding you all."


    He led them to the gymnasium, eager to move beyond theory and into the realm of action. "We''ll begin with a simple spell that everyone can learn," he declared. "It''s called Candlelight."


    William recognized the spell instantly. Aella had used it to illuminate the cave during their encounter with the demon. ''Why is James teaching us such a basic spell?'' he wondered. ''It''s not exactly combat-oriented.''


    Professor James offered no explanation, simply demonstrating the spell''s execution with practiced ease. Five runes, their patterns simple yet elegant, shimmered around his fingertips.


    "Now it''s your turn," James instructed. "Show me what you can do."


    Some students exuded confidence, eager to showcase their innate talent. Others, less assured, fumbled with the unfamiliar patterns. William, however, mastered the spell in a matter of minutes. Candlelight was a simple spell, but his speed was unnatural, even for a prodigy.


    The rune on his forehead, a delicate symbol resembling a magical eye, pulsed with a soft light as he practiced. The effects of the Magic Mind spell were undeniable. His mind felt sharper, his thoughts clearer, his grasp of the magical concepts effortless.


    He was a sponge, absorbing knowledge at an astonishing rate.


    James stood beside him, observing his technique. "You learned it quickly, William," he commented, a hint of approval in his voice.


    William, however, wasn''t one to get complacent. "Using it and mastering it are two different things," he replied, his brow furrowed in concentration. "I''ll need to practice more to become truly proficient. But Professor," he added, curiosity piqued, "if I may ask, why are we learning this spell? It seems rather basic for a combat magic class."


    The question hung in the air, drawing the attention of the other students. They, too, had expected to delve into the intricacies of offensive and defensive spells, not a simple illumination cantrip.


    James smiled, sensing their curiosity. "Indeed," he said, his voice taking on a conspiratorial tone, "there''s a reason we''re starting with this seemingly mundane spell. In a few days, we will be embarking on an expedition to explore an ancient excavation site, and reliable illumination will be essential in the depths of those ruins."


    The students erupted in a chorus of excited chatter, their imaginations ignited by the prospect of exploring ancient ruins. A girl with bright eyes and an eager smile raised her hand.


    "Professor," she asked, her voice bubbling with curiosity, "what kind of ruins are we going to? Can you tell us more?"


    James chuckled, his own excitement barely contained. "Patience, my eager students," he replied. "I''ll reveal more details in our upcoming classes. For now, focus on mastering Candlelight."


    He couldn''t help but smile at their enthusiasm. As a history aficionado and avid researcher, he shared their fascination with the mysteries of the past. Their eagerness warmed his heart, reinforcing his belief in the power of knowledge and discovery.


    The revelation of the expedition seemed to galvanize the students. Their efforts intensified, their focus sharpened. Perhaps the allure of adventure had unlocked a hidden drive, or maybe the prospect of applying their newfound skills in a real-world scenario had ignited their determination.


    William, already proficient in Candlelight, used the remaining class time to refine his technique, his mind drifting towards the upcoming expedition.


    The first class had left William feeling optimistic. Professor James, with his youthful energy and obvious expertise, had set a high bar.


    The second class, however, promised a different kind of challenge. Enchantment, a field steeped in mystery and intricate techniques, was taught by a venerable professor with a long, flowing beard and an air of ancient wisdom.


    William was particularly intrigued by this subject, his curiosity fueled by the enigmatic demonic sword he carried. He hoped to unravel its secrets, to understand how the demonic energy had become infused within its obsidian blade.


    The classroom was filled with a respectful silence, the students having learned their lesson from the earlier outburst in James'' class.


    "Welcome, everyone," the professor began, his voice a warm rumble. "I shall be your guide through the fascinating world of enchantment. I hope you find it as captivating as I do."


    He stepped forward, a glint of mischief in his eyes, and presented William with a delicate silver ring. "This enchanted ring is for William," he announced, his voice carrying through the room. "Not because of any personal favoritism," he added with a wink, "but because he has mastered the Magic Mind spell. Here at Snowpeak Academy, we reward hard work and exceptional progress. Let this serve as an example to you all."


    William''s eyes widened in surprise. "This is really for me?" he stammered, a wave of gratitude washing over him. "Thank you, Professor!"


    "Indeed it is," Professor Sebastian confirmed with a warm smile. "A well-deserved reward for your dedication and remarkable achievement."


    William, still slightly bewildered, accepted the ring with gratitude. He couldn''t help but wonder about its enchantments, eager to discover its hidden properties.


    The grueling thirty days spent wrestling with the intricacies of Magic Mind had taken their toll, and this unexpected gift was a welcome acknowledgment of his efforts.


    Professor Sebastian launched into a captivating lecture on the history of enchantment, tracing its origins back to an ancient civilization.


    "The earliest enchantments were not applied to objects," he explained, his voice resonating with a passion for the subject, "but to the very walls of their cities, for protection and sustenance. They also used enchantments to manage their resources, ensuring a steady supply of water and other necessities."


    William, captivated by the professor''s words, found himself transported to a bygone era, imagining the ingenuity and power of those early enchanters. But it was the mention of a familiar name that truly shocked him.


    "One of the most skilled enchanters of that age," Professor Sebastian continued, "was a man named Jinra."


    William''s heart skipped a beat. Jinra. The name echoed in his mind, a link to the past, a connection to the enigmatic mentor who had guided him through the intricacies of magic. Could it be the same Jinra? The possibility sent a shiver down his spine, a reminder that the threads of destiny were often interwoven in unexpected ways.

 Chapter 61 - 61: Learning About Herbs, and Ancient Ruins

    William''s hand shot up, his curiosity burning. "Professor," he asked, his voice eager, "what else can you tell us about this Jinra? Do you know anything about his life?" The possibility, however remote, that this legendary enchanter might be his mentor from the past ignited a spark of excitement within him.


    Professor Sebastian stroked his beard thoughtfully. "Unfortunately, no," he admitted. "We have little information about him beyond his name and his contributions to the field of enchantment. Records from that era are scarce, and details about individual enchanters are even rarer."


    "I see," William replied, a hint of disappointment flickering across his face. He would have to rely on Jinra himself to unravel this mystery.


    The remainder of the class focused on the theoretical foundations of enchantment, exploring its principles and applications. The students, accustomed to the importance of theory in magical studies, listened attentively, their fascination with the subject evident.


    As the class concluded, William approached Professor Sebastian, eager to learn more about the ring.


    "What enchantments does it hold?" he asked, his eyes shining with anticipation.


    Professor Sebastian smiled, as if anticipating the question. "You are a promising student, William," he said, his voice warm. "In fact, you may well become one of the greatest mages this kingdom has ever seen." He paused, his eyes twinkling. "Therefore, I crafted this ring to aid you on your journey. It will enhance your regenerative abilities and provide a protective barrier in times of need."


    "Wow," William breathed, genuinely impressed. The ring sounded incredibly useful, especially for a mage specializing in body enhancement.


    "I believe it will complement your fighting style well," Sebastian added. "Now, if you''ll excuse me..."


    "Of course, Professor," William replied, a touch of awe in his voice. "Thank you for this wonderful gift."


    Professor Sebastian, with a final nod, departed for his next class. William, clutching the ring, felt a surge of gratitude and a renewed determination to prove himself worthy of the professor''s confidence.


    His final class of the morning was Herbology and Alchemy, held in the courtyard near the greenhouse. The students gathered, their energy buzzing as they awaited their instructor.


    A woman with vibrant green hair and round spectacles approached, her smile radiating warmth and energy. "Good morning, everyone!" she chirped. "I am Professor Martha, and I shall be your guide through the fascinating world of plants and potions."


    Unlike the reserved James and the aged Sebastian, Martha exuded a contagious enthusiasm.


    She gestured animatedly, her voice brimming with passion as she introduced herself and the course. William, intrigued by her vibrant personality and the promise of alchemical knowledge, settled in, ready to absorb the lessons of this new subject.


    "The foundation of alchemy lies in understanding the unique properties of magical herbs," Martha explained, her voice brimming with enthusiasm. "Each herb possesses distinct effects, and when combined correctly, they can create powerful potions with a wide range of applications."


    She paused, her gaze sweeping across the eager faces of her students. "But before you can even begin to concoct a potion, you must possess a deep knowledge of these magical ingredients. You must understand their individual properties, their interactions with other herbs, their resistance to various elements, and their potential reactions."


    To illustrate her point, she led them towards the academy''s greenhouse, a towering structure that housed a vast collection of botanical wonders.


    "Come along, everyone," she chirped, ushering them forward. "It''s a bit chilly outside, so we''ll need to keep the greenhouse closed."


    A shimmering barrier enveloped the greenhouse, maintaining a carefully controlled climate within. The warm, humid air, thick with the scent of exotic flora, enveloped them as they stepped inside. S~ea??h the NovelFire.net* website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    William gasped, his eyes widening at the sheer variety of plants on display. Some were familiar, while others were unlike anything he had ever seen, their leaves shimmering with iridescent colors and their flowers emitting a soft, ethereal glow.


    "Whoa," Altair breathed, his gaze drawn to a particularly vibrant specimen. "This is incredible!"


    William, recognizing the opportunity to trick Altair, offered an impromptu explanation. "That''s a Water Lily," he said, pointing to the blueish leaves. "It''s commonly found in the southwest of the kingdom, growing near rivers. Legend has it that if you eat its petals, you can breathe underwater."


    Altair''s jaw dropped. "Seriously?" he exclaimed, his eyes wide with wonder. "You''re so knowledgeable, William!"


    Professor Martha, overhearing their exchange, chuckled softly. "He''s pulling your leg, Altair," she said, amusement twinkling in her eyes. "But it''s a good story, nonetheless."


    William, with a mischievous grin, wandered off, leaving Altair sputtering in his wake. "You lied to me, William!" he called out, hurrying to catch up. "You lied!"


    Martha, unable to cover the entire collection in a single lesson, focused on the essential herbs used in elementary potions. She explained their properties, their uses, and their potential dangers, her passion for the subject infectious.


    "This herb is called Snowy Eye Leaf," Martha explained, her voice filled with enthusiasm. "It gets its name from its distinctive shape. Can you see how the veins resemble an eye?"


    The students leaned in for a closer look, their curiosity piqued.


    "And ''snowy'' because it thrives here on Snowpeak Mountain," she added with a smile.


    The Snowy Eye Leaf, she explained, possessed a unique property: frost resistance. While consuming it raw offered some benefits, its true potential was unlocked through alchemical processes. Martha recounted how the region''s native inhabitants used the leaf in teas and poultices to withstand the harsh winter conditions.


    William, fascinated by the interplay between nature and magic, listened intently, peppering Martha with questions about the leaf''s properties and applications.


    "This next herb," Martha continued, gesturing towards a vibrant red specimen, "is called Crimsonfrost Bloom. It also possesses frost resistance properties, but be warned, it''s highly poisonous if ingested directly."


    The lesson continued, a whirlwind of botanical knowledge and alchemical insights. William diligently recorded the key details in his notebook, his mind already churning with potential uses for these fascinating herbs.


    As the class concluded, William and Altair headed to the dining hall for lunch.


    "What do you think of the classes so far?" Altair asked, spearing a juicy piece of roast chicken.


    "They''re great," William replied, savoring a spoonful of hearty stew. "The professors are all incredibly knowledgeable. But do we only have three classes a day?"


    "That''s right," Altair confirmed. "But remember, we have classes every day of the week. And our free time isn''t exactly free. We have spells to practice, books to read, and research to conduct."


    The life of a Snowpeak student was one of constant learning and dedication, the pursuit of magical mastery demanding every ounce of their energy.


    ''I need to make the most of this "free time",'' William thought, his mind already strategizing. ''I can see how some students might fall behind if they don''t stay disciplined.''


    The academy''s schedule was designed to foster self-sufficiency and encourage independent learning. While professors were always available for guidance, the onus was on the students to hone their skills and expand their knowledge.


    Snowpeak even boasted multiple professors for each subject, ensuring that students always had access to expert assistance.


    Four days flew by in a whirlwind of classes, practice sessions, and late-night study sessions. William awoke on the fifth day with a surge of excitement.


    "Today''s the day we explore the excavation site!" he exclaimed, a grin spreading across his face.


    He joined his classmates, their anticipation palpable, as they gathered to meet Professor James.

 Chapter 62 - 62: Arriving at the Ancient Ruins

    William surveyed his classmates, their faces alight with anticipation. He adjusted the weight of his own pack, ensuring his essentials were secure: food, water, a tent, his trusty sword, a bow and quiver of arrows, and, of course, the enigmatic demonic sword wrapped in cloth.


    He had scoured the library for any mention of the obsidian blade, but his searches had yielded nothing. He suspected the information he sought lay hidden in restricted sections, inaccessible to a mere first-year student. For now, the sword remained a mystery, a source of both power and unease.


    "Is everyone prepared?" Professor James''s voice cut through the excited chatter. "It will be a rather lengthy journey."


    "Yes, Professor!" a chorus of voices responded.


    The ancient ruins lay nestled in a remote valley beyond the mountain range that housed the academy and the city of Dale. Reaching them would require a circuitous route, a journey best undertaken by carriage.


    While flying mounts offered a faster alternative, Professor James had opted for the more practical approach. The expedition''s primary goal was to explore and document the ruins, bringing back artifacts and knowledge for further study. A carriage provided the necessary space for transporting their findings.


    Four luxurious carriages awaited them at the academy gates, each drawn by a team of sturdy mountain drakes. Their spacious interiors, complete with plush seating and ample storage, promised a comfortable journey. Just as they were about to depart, a figure came rushing towards them, a massive backpack bouncing against her back.


    "Wait!" Professor Martha cried, her round glasses nearly slipping from her nose as she skidded to a halt. "Wait for me!"


    Even James seemed surprised by her sudden appearance. "Professor Martha?" he questioned, raising an eyebrow. "What''s this about?"


    Martha, breathless from her exertion, waved a hand dismissively. "I''m coming along," she declared, her voice firm.


    "But don''t you have classes to teach?" James asked, perplexed. "I arranged for a few days off specifically for this expedition."


    "As did I," Martha replied with a mischievous grin. "Headmaster Tholfnir suggested it would be prudent to have more than one professor accompany the students."


    James''s eyes widened in understanding. "You mean, one more professor to keep a closer eye on William," he whispered conspiratorially.


    Martha let out a nervous chuckle. James wasn''t wrong. William had become the academy''s prized possession, and Tholfnir was clearly taking no chances.


    With Martha joining the expedition, the carriages finally set off. William found himself sharing his ride with Altair, a few other students, and Professor Martha. As the drakes pulled them away from the familiar academy grounds, William turned to his companions, his curiosity piqued.


    "Do we even know what kind of ruins these are?" he asked, his gaze fixed on the winding mountain path ahead.


    The other students, their knowledge limited to the briefings provided by Professor James, leaned in with interest. Martha, however, possessed a deeper understanding of the site''s significance.


    "It''s believed to be an ancient elven ruin," she revealed, her voice hushed with reverence. "Not just any elves, mind you, but Snow Elves. A rare and enigmatic kind."


    William''s curiosity piqued. Jinra had spoken of the elves'' mastery of magic, their techniques far surpassing those of humans. But where were they now? In his time, only remnants of their civilization remained, scattered ruins whispering of a lost grandeur.


    "What happened to the elves?" William asked, voicing the question that had lingered in his mind.


    Martha smiled, her eyes twinkling with a scholar''s passion. "That, William, is one of the enduring mysteries surrounding the elven civilization. They were far more advanced than us in many ways, yet their civilization faded, while ours endured."


    "Perhaps a war?" William suggested, recalling the conflicts that had plagued human history.


    "It''s possible," Martha conceded, "but the elves were a reclusive people, masters of stealth and camouflage, dwelling deep within forests and mountains. It''s difficult to imagine anyone successfully waging war against them in such terrain, or even finding them in the first place."


    William pondered her words, his fascination with the elves deepening. He recalled Jinra''s teachings, the elven method of casting enhancement spells, and wondered what other secrets their lost civilization held.


    He thought of his own connection to the past, his Chrono Shift ability lying dormant, its recharge delayed after the intense training sessions with Jinra. But for now, his focus was on the present, on the adventure that awaited them within the ancient elven ruins.


    He couldn''t shake the feeling that this expedition held more significance than a mere academic exercise. Perhaps, within those crumbling walls, he would find answers to questions he hadn''t even known to ask.


    The journey to the ancient ruins stretched over two days, winding through a desolate landscape of towering peaks and shadowy valleys. The silence was profound, broken only by the occasional rustle of wind through the trees or the distant cry of a hawk.


    William, gazing out the carriage window, saw no signs of civilization, only the untamed beauty of the wilderness.


    While some of his classmates fidgeted with apprehension, William felt a sense of calm settle over him. He was no stranger to the wilds, and the solitude of the mountains held a strange allure.


    As twilight descended, casting long shadows across the valley, Professor James called for a halt.


    "It''s not safe to travel through these mountains at night," he explained, his voice carrying a note of caution. "Especially with so many carriages. We''ll rest here and resume our journey in the morning."


    The students readily agreed, eager to stretch their legs and enjoy a proper meal. While the carriages were comfortable, the constant motion and the narrow, winding roads had taken their toll.


    They worked together to gather firewood and build campfires, their laughter and chatter echoing through the stillness of the valley. Professor James and Professor Martha took charge of preparing dinner, their culinary skills surprisingly adept.


    "We''ve brought enough provisions to last us several days," James assured them with a reassuring smile. sea??h th§× N?vel?ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    That night, they feasted on roasted meat, grilled vegetables, and baked potatoes cooked over the open flames. The simple meal, devoured eagerly, satisfied their hunger and lifted their spirits.


    The students then turned their attention to setting up camp. While the carriages were spacious, they couldn''t accommodate everyone comfortably for the night. Professor James and Professor Martha, ever mindful of their students'' needs, opted to sleep outside, leaving the carriages for the students.


    William, despite the professors'' insistence that he take a bed inside, chose to join the few classmates who were pitching their tents.


    "I enjoy sleeping under the stars," he explained, a touch of nostalgia in his voice. "I''m quite used to it."


    James and Martha exchanged a worried glance. Tholfnir''s directive to prioritize William''s safety weighed heavily on their minds.


    "Very well, William," James conceded, "but if you hear anything unusual, even the slightest rustle, you go straight to the carriage. Understood?"


    "Understood, Professor," William replied with a reassuring grin.


    The night passed without incident, the silence broken only by the crackling of the campfire and the soft snores of sleeping students. Dawn brought a renewed sense of purpose, and they packed their belongings, eager to resume their journey.


    After another day of travel, the valley opened up to reveal a breathtaking sight. Nestled amongst the towering peaks, the ancient elven ruins emerged from the mist.

 Chapter 63 - 63: Ancient Ruins Expedition (1) - Loot

    The ancient elven ruins were unlike anything William had imagined. Instead of towering structures and sprawling cities, he found a series of elegant arches and smooth, white marble edifices, all nestled within a surprisingly compact area.


    Professor James, sensing their surprise, explained, "The most fascinating aspect of these Snow Elves is their preference for subterranean living."


    A chorus of "wows" erupted from the students. William, too, was intrigued. He had always pictured elves dwelling in treetop cities, their homes woven amongst the branches of ancient forests. This subterranean civilization challenged his preconceptions.


    Professor Martha added, "It''s important to remember that this was specific to the Snow Elves. Different elven cultures had vastly different ways of life, and even within the same culture, there could be significant variations."


    "First, we''ll set up camp here, in front of the ruins," Professor James instructed, his voice carrying a note of authority. "We''ve had a long journey, and these ruins could hold hidden dangers. It''s best to rest and prepare before venturing inside."


    The students, though eager to explore, readily agreed. Altair, however, fidgeted with barely-contained excitement.


    "Do you think it will be dangerous?" he asked William, his eyes sparkling with anticipation. "I''ve always wanted to explore ancient ruins, to learn more about the elves. My parents used to tell stories about their mysterious powers and hidden cities."


    William shared his enthusiasm. "It''s possible there''s danger lurking within," he admitted, securing his tent stakes, "but with two professors to guide us, we should be fine. As long as we''re careful."


    "I suppose," Altair replied, a hint of nervous excitement still lingering in his voice.


    With their camp established, they enjoyed a hearty meal and prepared for their descent into the unknown. The students were divided into two groups, one led by Professor James, the other by Professor Martha. William and Altair found themselves under Martha''s guidance.


    As they approached the ruins, Professor James, his passion for history evident, began his lecture.


    "You might be wondering why there are structures here on the surface if these elves lived underground," he said, gesturing towards the marble arches. "The fascinating thing is that these structures were once invisible!"


    A wave of astonishment rippled through the students.


    "The only reason we can see them now," James continued, "is that the magical formation that cloaked them has degraded. This entire complex was once hidden from sight, a clever defense mechanism to ensure the true entrance remained undiscovered."


    William traced his fingers along the smooth marble, marveling at the ingenuity of the elven magic.


    "How long ago did this cloaking magic fail?" he asked, curiosity piqued.


    "We estimate about a year, perhaps two," James replied. "It took us some time to locate these ruins, primarily because of their remote location."


    That region, nestled deep within the mountains, was largely unexplored, its treacherous terrain and harsh climate deterring most travelers. The presence of dangerous magical beasts and the lack of civilization made it a perilous destination. Only the proximity of Snowpeak Academy had prompted Professor James and his fellow researchers to venture into its depths, their curiosity outweighing the risks.


    After a brief overview of the site''s history and significance, they prepared to enter the ruins. At the heart of the surface structures, a hidden entrance beckoned, a doorway adorned with intricate elven script. Professor James paused before it, his eyes gleaming with a scholar''s passion.


    "This is elven writing," he explained, tracing the elegant symbols with his fingers. "Though an ancient language, we still possess some surviving texts, allowing us to decipher its meaning." He puffed out his chest slightly, pride evident in his voice. "I took the liberty of learning it myself, to aid in my research."


    The students stared at him with newfound admiration. James, despite his youth, had already proven himself a capable instructor and a dedicated scholar. He had mastered a complex language to further his understanding of the past, a testament to his dedication.


    ''He''s truly impressive,'' William thought, his respect for the young professor growing.


    James placed his hand on the inscription, murmuring words in the ancient elven tongue. The symbols glowed with a soft light, and the door slowly swung inward, revealing a descending staircase carved from the same white marble as the surrounding structures.


    "Shall we?" James asked, a smile playing on his lips.


    He led the way, his excitement palpable. Though this wasn''t his first foray into the ruins, the prospect of sharing its wonders with his students filled him with a sense of anticipation. Prior expeditions had confirmed the relative safety of the site, ensuring that these first-year students wouldn''t face undue danger.


    The students, their faces illuminated by the soft glow of their Candlelight spells, descended the staircase, their footsteps echoing in the cavernous space.


    The darkness was absolute, the silence broken only by their hushed whispers. William understood why James had prioritized the seemingly simple spell; without it, they would be stumbling blindly, their torches a meager defense against the encroaching shadows.


    "Proceed with caution," James instructed, his voice echoing in the darkness, "but do not worry. Our initial explorations suggest these ruins are safe."


    The initial descent was monotonous, a seemingly endless tunnel spiraling downwards. But after fifteen minutes of steady progress, the monotony gave way to a choice. Three distinct paths diverged before them, each shrouded in shadow and mystery.


    "We''ve only explored one of these paths so far," James explained, his voice echoing in the confined space. "For now, we''ll stick to the familiar route."


    The expedition''s primary goals were twofold: to introduce the students to the wonders of the elven ruins and to collect artifacts and knowledge for further research. While James and his team had previously confirmed the safety of this particular path, they had yet to fully document its contents or retrieve any items for study.


    They chose the rightmost path, their Candlelight spells illuminating the way. The tunnel opened into a vast cavern, its ceiling lost in the shadows. Before them stood a magnificent temple, its grandeur defying the subterranean setting. Sear?h the n?velFire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Massive columns supported the towering structure, a grand staircase leading towards its imposing entrance. William was reminded of the ancient Greek temples he had studied back on Earth, but this elven edifice dwarfed even those impressive constructions.


    As they ascended the stairs, a sense of awe washed over the students. The sheer scale of the temple, its intricate carvings and elegant design, filled them with a sense of wonder.


    "We believe this was a place of worship and ritual," James explained, his voice hushed with reverence. "During our previous exploration, we discovered numerous books, scrolls, and other artifacts within. Those will be our primary focus today."


    Upon entering the temple, the students were awestruck by the sheer volume of artifacts and relics within. Numerous chambers branched off from the central hall, some empty, others furnished with elven craftsmanship: intricately carved furniture, shelves overflowing with books and scrolls, and even an armory displaying ancient elven weaponry.


    William''s eyes were drawn to a magnificent sword, its blade gleaming as if freshly forged. "This sword looks brand new," he remarked, tracing its intricate design. "It doesn''t make sense, considering how much time has passed."


    Martha, observing his fascination, nodded. "Indeed," she explained. "The elves used a unique material in their weaponsmithing. This blade is likely still incredibly sharp. We can certainly take it back for study, though I doubt you''ll be allowed to keep it for yourself." She knew William favored a blend of magic and swordsmanship, his combat style incorporating both physical and magical prowess.


    William, though momentarily disappointed, shrugged it off. He had his demonic sword, a weapon with untold potential. "Of course," he replied. "It should be studied." He knew that even without claiming the elven blade for himself, the knowledge gained from its analysis would be invaluable.


    The students, their excitement palpable, dispersed throughout the temple, carefully collecting artifacts and documenting their findings. William, however, couldn''t shake a sense of unease. He caught fleeting glimpses of shadows flitting at the edge of his vision, a subtle whisper of movement that sent shivers down his spine. He dismissed it as fatigue or an overactive imagination, but the feeling lingered.


    They made repeated trips back to the carriages, their packs laden with elven relics. The process was slow and methodical, but no one was in a hurry. They had stumbled upon a treasure trove of knowledge, a window into a lost civilization. But on the second day, their peaceful exploration took a sinister turn.

 Chapter 64 - 64: Ancient Ruins Expedition (2) - Demonic Sword

    The second day of their expedition dawned bright and promising. They awoke to the crisp mountain air, the ruins looming silent and majestic against the backdrop of snow-capped peaks. After a quick breakfast and a brief respite to answer nature''s call, they delved back into the depths of the elven city. S§×ar?h the N?vel(F)ire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    With the temple thoroughly explored, Professor James felt a growing urge to venture further into the unknown. Two paths remained, beckoning them with the promise of discovery. He yearned to explore both, but caution prevailed. These were, after all, first-year students, their skills untested.


    "I propose we divide into two teams again," he announced, his voice echoing through the cavern. "One team will continue collecting artifacts from the temple, while the other will explore one of the remaining paths."


    The students buzzed with excitement, their youthful curiosity outweighing any apprehension. Professor Martha, however, expressed her concern.


    "Are you certain this is wise, James?" she asked, her brow furrowed.


    "Of course," James replied, his confidence unwavering. "Why wouldn''t it be?"


    "This place could be dangerous," Martha argued, her voice laced with worry. "These students aren''t prepared to defend themselves if something goes wrong."


    William, listening intently, couldn''t help but agree. While he had proven himself capable in combat, his classmates were still novices, their skills untested in a real-world scenario.


    "How about this," James proposed, a thoughtful expression crossing his face. "Martha and I will accompany the exploration team, while the remaining students focus on the temple. It''s been deemed safe, and there''s still plenty to document and collect."


    Martha seemed to relax slightly. "That''s a good compromise," she conceded. "But let''s appoint a student leader to oversee the temple team."


    Both professors immediately thought of William. He was disciplined, responsible, and had demonstrated remarkable leadership qualities during the entrance exams. William, however, longed to join the exploration team, eager to delve deeper into the elven ruins.


    "We can''t risk it, William," James explained, pulling him aside. "Your talent is invaluable. We need to ensure your safety."


    Once again, William found himself the recipient of preferential treatment. While he appreciated their concern, he couldn''t help but feel frustrated.


    "How about this," James offered, sensing his disappointment. "You remain here for one more day and oversee the temple team. Tomorrow, I''ll return and you can join us in exploring the remaining path."


    William, recognizing the futility of arguing, reluctantly agreed. He wouldn''t disobey his professors or sneak off on his own. He would fulfill his assigned duty, and then claim his chance for adventure.


    "Excellent," James said. "Let''s gather everyone and explain the plan."


    The students assembled, their excitement palpable. Some, including Altair, were thrilled to join the exploration team, while others were content to continue their work in the temple. William, appointed as their leader, felt a surge of responsibility. He would ensure the safety of his classmates and the successful completion of their task.


    "Take care, my friend," Altair said, clasping William''s shoulder. "The temple seems safe, but you never know."


    "You too," William replied, returning the gesture. "If things get hairy, just get out of there and come back here."


    "Don''t worry," Altair assured him with a grin. "I will."


    With farewells exchanged and teams assigned, the expedition split once more, venturing deeper into the mysteries of the elven ruins.


    William addressed the remaining students, his voice carrying a newfound authority. He delegated tasks, assigning teams to specific areas of the temple, ensuring a systematic and efficient approach to their artifact retrieval.


    To his relief, his leadership was met with respect and cooperation. He had feared resistance, but his reputation as a prodigy and his recent triumph over the prince had earned him their admiration.


    With the teams organized, they resumed their exploration, William overseeing their progress while continuing his own investigation of the temple. The grandeur of the elven architecture never ceased to amaze him. He craned his neck, gazing up at the towering columns and vaulted ceilings, his own stature dwarfed by their immensity.


    "Incredible..." he murmured, a sense of awe washing over him.


    He ventured into unexplored chambers, his Candlelight spell illuminating the intricate carvings and murals that adorned the walls. Detailed scenes depicted landscapes far different from the surrounding mountains, lush forests teeming with exotic creatures and vibrant cities bustling with elven life. It was as if the artists had sought to bring the outside world into their subterranean sanctuary.


    ''Why did they choose to live this way?'' William wondered, his curiosity piqued.


    The elves had already sought refuge in a remote and isolated region. Why retreat further underground? What secrets were they hiding from?


    He stumbled upon a library, its shelves cluttered with fallen books and scattered scrolls. It was as if the elves had abandoned their sanctuary in haste, leaving behind a treasure trove of knowledge.


    William''s fingers itched to delve into the texts, eager to uncover the mysteries of this lost civilization.


    Despite his burning curiosity about the elves and their abandoned library, William couldn''t decipher their intricate script. He decided to explore the remaining chambers, his footsteps echoing in the cavernous silence.


    He stumbled upon another section of the library, this one in disarray. Most of the bookshelves lay in ruins, their contents scattered across the floor, victims of time and neglect.


    But one bookshelf, tucked away in a shadowy corner, stood pristine, untouched by the ravages of time. Its polished wood gleamed in the dim light, a stark contrast to the surrounding chaos. Intrigued, William cautiously approached. As he drew closer, he sensed a faint hum of magical energy emanating from the bookshelf.


    ''A magical formation?'' he wondered, recalling Professor James''s earlier explanation of the cloaking spell that had once hidden the ruins.


    Could this be another hidden mechanism, a secret passage or a protective ward? A thrill of excitement, mixed with a healthy dose of apprehension, coursed through him.


    ''This could be dangerous,'' he thought, his hand hovering over the bookshelf.


    But the allure of the unknown, the chance to uncover a hidden secret, was too strong to resist. He began to carefully examine the bookshelf, tracing his fingers along its smooth surface, searching for any indication of its purpose.


    Despite his meticulous examination, William couldn''t find any obvious trigger for the formation.


    He tried pushing the bookshelf, hoping to reveal a hidden mechanism or a secret passage, but it wouldn''t budge. His enhanced strength, usually more than sufficient for such tasks, seemed to have no effect. The bookshelf was immovable, as if rooted to the very foundation of the temple.


    ''There''s definitely something strange about this,'' William thought, his curiosity piqued.


    He tried to think like an elf, to imagine how they might conceal a secret passage within their library. A silent trigger would be essential in a place dedicated to quiet study. But what kind of trigger?


    Suddenly, a voice echoed in his mind, a chillingly familiar voice he hadn''t heard in weeks.


    "What are you doing in this forsaken elven ruin, boy?" the demonic sword rasped, its tone laced with disdain.


    "Exploring," William retorted mentally. "What''s it to you? And why have you decided to grace me with your presence again?"


    "You''ve been carrying me around," the sword replied, its voice a low growl. "I can see what you''re up to. And frankly, your bumbling attempts to open this pathetic excuse for a secret passage are infuriating. Step aside and let me handle this."

 Chapter 65 - 65: Ancient Ruins Expedition (3) - Newfound Ability

    William drew the demonic sword, its obsidian blade gleaming menacingly in the dim light. It was a magnificent weapon, its power undeniable despite the unsettling voice that resided within.


    He stood motionless, the sword held aloft, until the voice echoed in his mind once more. "Boy, I don''t have arms or legs, you know. Put me closer to that bookshelf, and be quick about it."


    William, a blush creeping onto his cheeks, obeyed. He held the sword against the bookshelf, a strange warmth radiating from its surface. He waited, his heart pounding, unsure what would happen next.


    The sword remained an enigma, its origins and purpose shrouded in mystery. William, chosen as its wielder, felt a growing connection to the obsidian blade, yet he couldn''t shake the unease that lingered in its presence. He kept it hidden, its secrets tucked away beneath layers of cloth, a silent promise of power and a potential threat he couldn''t fully comprehend.


    As he held the sword against the bookshelf, a strange sensation washed over him. He felt a subtle drain of energy, a tingling sensation that flowed from the elven formation, through the sword, and into his own body.


    "Just so you understand, boy," the sword''s voice rasped in his mind, "I''m absorbing the mana from this pathetic elven contraption and channeling it into you. I can only handle demonic energy on my own, but with you as a conduit, I can siphon other forms of magic as well. Got it? Now, tell me if you start feeling unwell. You won''t be able to handle this much mana for long."


    William''s eyes widened in surprise. This was a new ability, a hidden power he hadn''t known the sword possessed. The possibilities swirled in his mind. Could he use this in combat, absorbing his opponent''s spells? The potential was exhilarating.


    After a minute, a wave of nausea washed over him. A throbbing headache pulsed behind his eyes, and his body felt heavy and sluggish. The sword, sensing his distress, ceased its absorption.


    "Fortunately, the mana ran out," the sword remarked, its tone laced with amusement. "You were starting to look a bit green around the gills. Anyway, you can move that bookshelf now and access your precious secret passage. Now, if you''ll excuse me, I need a nap."


    The sword fell silent, its energy depleted. William carefully rewrapped it, concealing its dark gleam. A System notification flashed before his eyes.


    [Pure mana absorbed. Upon assimilation, you will gain benefits.]


    [Until fully assimilated, you will experience decreased physical and mental capabilities.]


    William, still feeling the lingering effects of the mana overload, pushed against the bookshelf. It moved with surprising ease, sliding away from the wall to reveal a hidden passage. A thrill of excitement shot through him, the promise of discovery outweighing his discomfort. He stepped into the darkness, the unknown beckoning him forward.


    He found himself in a narrow passage, just wide enough for a single person to pass. Where does this lead? he wondered, a thrill of excitement coursing through him. Should he return and alert the others, or forge ahead on his own? He decided on the latter. The other students, while well-intentioned, were inexperienced. Their presence might hinder more than help.


    With his steel sword drawn and his senses heightened, William ventured into the darkness. The tunnel was unremarkable, devoid of traps or dangers, save for the occasional scuttling insect or startled rodent. After ten minutes of walking, he heard voices echoing in the distance. His heart pounded with a mix of apprehension and anticipation. As he drew closer, he recognized the voice of Professor James!


    He quickened his pace, arriving at the end of the tunnel. A lever protruded from the wall. With a hesitant pull, a hidden door swung open, revealing a chamber beyond.


    "What in the world...?" James''s startled voice reached him.


    The professor, his hand instinctively reaching for his spellcasting focus, relaxed upon seeing William. Confusion replaced his initial alarm.


    "William?" he exclaimed. "What are you doing here? And what is this passage?"


    "I found a secret entrance in the temple library," William explained, gesturing back towards the hidden door. "I think it connects to other areas of the ruins."


    "That makes sense," James mused, stroking his chin thoughtfully. "But you should return and inform the others."


    Seizing the opportunity, William pressed his case. "Professor, couldn''t I join you? Perhaps finding this passage means I''m meant to be part of the exploration team..."


    James hesitated, then, with a resigned sigh, agreed. "Alright, William," he conceded. "I''ll return with you and inform the others."


    They retraced their steps, rejoining the remaining students in the temple. James explained the situation, appointed a new student leader, and then, with William in tow, ventured back into the tunnel.


    "Find anything interesting?" William asked, eager to catch up.


    "Just a long, straight passage so far," James replied, "but I suspect we''re close to something significant, considering this secret tunnel intersects with our path."


    He theorized that the tunnel likely led to a safe haven, a hidden escape route in case of danger within the temple.


    They rejoined the rest of the group, finding Martha and the other students waiting patiently where the tunnel opened into the cavern. Altair, his earlier bravado replaced by a hint of relief, greeted William with a grin.


    "Glad you''re here," he admitted. "If things go south, at least we''ll go down together."


    William chuckled, slinging an arm around Altair''s shoulders. "Are you crazy? If things get dicey, I''m using you as a distraction while I make my escape."


    Their laughter echoed through the cavern, easing the tension that had begun to build. Professor James, his instincts proven correct, led them deeper into the ruins. Within minutes, they emerged into a breathtaking sight.


    The subterranean city unfolded before them, a testament to elven ingenuity and artistry. Even in its ruined state, its beauty was undeniable. Gasps of wonder echoed through the cavern.


    "Incredible!" one of the students exclaimed, his voice filled with awe.


    The centerpiece of the city was a crystal-clear lake, its waters sparkling in the light of their spells. Buildings, crafted from the same white marble as the temple, lined the shores, their elegant arches and intricate carvings reflecting in the still water. In the center of the lake, a small island held a cluster of structures, their purpose a tantalizing mystery. S§×ar?h the N?velFire(.)net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "This is an extraordinary find," Professor James declared, his voice hushed with reverence. "An elven city preserved in such pristine condition is incredibly rare. This will be invaluable for our research! We''ll need to establish a base here."


    He envisioned a permanent research outpost, a hub for scholars and mages to study the elven ruins and unlock their secrets.


    The students, however, would soon return to their classes. Their time in the ruins was limited, a fleeting glimpse into a world lost to time.


    "We''ll explore a small section of the city today," James announced, his gaze sweeping across the eager faces, "and then return to camp. There''s much to see, and we must proceed with caution."


    Unbeknownst to the students and professors venturing deeper into the elven city, a new group arrived at the surface. They emerged from the dense forest, their cloaked figures casting long shadows in the fading light. Four hooded figures dismounted from their steeds, their faces obscured in the twilight.


    "They were here first?" one of them hissed, their voice a low growl.


    "It seems we''ve been delayed," another replied, their tone laced with annoyance. "But no matter. It simply means we''ll have to...adjust our plans."


    With a shared glance of grim determination, they tethered their mounts and approached the ruins. They descended the stone staircase, their footsteps echoing in the silence.

 Chapter 66 - 66: Ancient Ruins Expedition (4) - Tragedy

    After a lively discussion about which area to explore first, they decided to focus on a district where the houses appeared uniform in size and design.


    "This section likely housed the common folk," Professor James explained, his voice echoing in the spacious cavern. "Much like human societies, elves also had social hierarchies. Those with higher status typically resided in more desirable locations within the city."


    The concept of social stratification, though disheartening, wasn''t surprising to William. Even the advanced elven civilization wasn''t immune to such divisions. S~ea??h the n?vel_Fire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    The students dispersed, eager to explore the individual dwellings. Working in pairs allowed them to cover more ground, and William naturally gravitated towards Altair.


    "This house is amazing!" Altair exclaimed, stepping through a doorway into a surprisingly well-preserved home. "Look how it''s still standing after all these years!"


    The house, constructed from the same white marble as the other structures, was remarkably intact. Only the wooden furnishings had succumbed to the ravages of time, while the stone elements remained pristine. The interior was simple, with a few sparsely furnished rooms and a single bedroom.


    At first glance, the house seemed disappointingly bare. Aside from the well-preserved furniture, there were no bookshelves or scrolls, nothing of obvious value to the mages and researchers of Snowpeak Academy.


    "Too bad we didn''t find anything," William sighed, turning to leave.


    But just as he stepped through the doorway, Altair''s excited voice called him back. "Wait!" Altair exclaimed, holding up a small, folded piece of parchment. "I found this letter tucked away in a drawer. I can''t understand the writing, but it might be worth investigating."


    William hurried back inside, his curiosity piqued. The parchment, miraculously intact despite the passage of time, was covered in elegant elven script. They carefully placed it in Altair''s pack, their excitement growing. Perhaps this seemingly insignificant letter held valuable clues about the elven civilization and its mysterious disappearance.


    They continued their exploration, moving from house to house, their findings intriguing but not groundbreaking. Professor James, his gaze drawn to the island at the center of the lake, announced their next objective.


    "I believe that''s where the elven royalty resided," he explained, his voice filled with anticipation. "We''ll head there next."


    But their plans were abruptly shattered. A figure emerged from the tunnel leading back to the temple, stumbling towards them with a look of sheer terror etched on their face. It was one of the students tasked with collecting artifacts from the temple. Blood stained his clothes, and his left arm hung limp, the sleeve soaked crimson.


    "H-Help!" he gasped, his voice raw with fear.


    Professor James and Professor Martha rushed to his aid, their faces etched with concern. They worked quickly to staunch the bleeding, while simultaneously demanding an explanation.


    "A group...four of them..." the student stammered, his breath coming in ragged gasps. "They attacked the temple...killed everyone... I barely escaped..."


    The atmosphere in the elven city instantly shifted. The excitement and wonder that had filled the air evaporated, replaced by a chilling fear.


    Panic rippled through the group. The students, their faces pale with fear, huddled together, their whispers echoing in the cavernous space. Professor James and Professor Martha exchanged a horrified look, the weight of responsibility settling upon their shoulders. The expedition, intended as a learning experience, had turned into a nightmare.


    "We need to act quickly," James said, his voice firm despite the tremor in his hands. "Martha, tend to the injured student. I''ll gather the others and assess the situation."


    Martha, her medical expertise taking over, guided the wounded student towards a sheltered alcove. James addressed the remaining students, his voice laced with urgency.


    "Everyone, remain calm," he instructed, his gaze sweeping across their anxious faces. "We need to return to the temple and assess the situation. Stay close and be prepared for anything."


    William, his instincts honed from his encounters with danger, felt a surge of adrenaline. He gripped his sword, his senses alert, ready to face whatever threat lurked within the ruins.


    The professors exchanged a worried glance. The death of their students was a devastating blow, one they weren''t prepared to face. Explaining this tragedy to Tholfnir and the grieving families would be a heavy burden.


    "We could try to hide within the city," Martha suggested, her voice laced with uncertainty, "but what if that proves even more dangerous?"


    The idea of confronting the mysterious attackers, or at the very least evading them, seemed like their only viable option.


    "What do we do, James?" William asked, his voice steady despite the tremor of fear that ran through him.


    "I don''t know their strength," James admitted, his brow furrowed in thought. "They killed our first-years, but that doesn''t tell us much. Those students had barely begun their training."


    Martha, tending to the injured student, interjected, "Could we contact Tholfnir from here?"


    They carried communication artifacts, as all professors did, capable of reaching the headmaster even at a distance. But there was a catch.


    "The signal can''t penetrate the barrier surrounding the ruins," James explained, frustration evident in his voice. "We''d need to return to the surface. But how can we get past those attackers without being detected?"


    William''s mind raced. "They''ll likely use the main tunnel," he said, an idea forming. "We can use the secret passage I found, bypass them completely, and then contact Tholfnir from outside."


    "That''s...not a bad plan," James conceded. "In fact, it''s our best option given the circumstances. Alright, let''s move." He turned towards Martha. "How is he doing? Will he survive?"


    But as he looked at the injured student, a wave of dread washed over him. The young man was trembling, his eyes wide with terror, his gaze fixed on the tunnel entrance. James followed his line of sight and saw them ¨C the four cloaked figures emerging from the passage.


    "Damn it," James cursed under his breath. "They''re already here. We have to act fast. William, lead the students and get out of here. Find a place to hide. Martha and I will hold them off."


    William knew he couldn''t face those attackers. Despite his own growing power, he was still a novice compared to the professors. His involvement would likely hinder more than help.


    "I understand," William said, his voice firm. "We''ll find a place to hide. Please, be careful."


    James and Martha nodded, their expressions grim as they drew their weapons.


    "Follow me," William commanded, leading the students away from the confrontation. But where could they go? He was unfamiliar with the city layout, and the only known exit was blocked by their attackers.


    As they hurried through the deserted streets, the sounds of battle echoed through the cavern, the ground trembling beneath their feet.


    "This is a nightmare," one of the students whimpered.


    "We''re all going to die here," another wailed.


    Fear threatened to consume them. William, his leadership instincts taking over, sought to rally their spirits.


    "Remember what Professor James said about the elven social structure?" he asked, his voice cutting through their panic.


    They looked at him, their faces etched with confusion.


    "He said the nobility likely resided on that island," William explained, pointing towards the center of the lake. "And if the nobles lived there, there must be a secret escape route. It''s how we do things in human society, and the elves likely followed a similar pattern."


    A spark of hope flickered in their eyes. William, fueled by a desperate need to survive, led them towards the lake, praying that his hunch was correct.

 Chapter 67 - 67: Ancient Ruins Expedition (5) - Fierce Battle for Survival

    Reaching the island required a cautious approach. Swimming was out of the question; the frigid water and the unknown depths posed too great a risk.


    "We need to find a boat," William declared, scanning the shoreline. "There has to be a way for them to have reached the island."


    His words sparked a renewed sense of purpose. The students spread out, searching for any sign of a vessel. They soon discovered a hidden dock, several small boats bobbing gently in the water. Relief washed over them; there were enough boats to accommodate all twelve survivors.


    "Divide into groups and take a boat each," William instructed, his voice steady despite the urgency of their situation. The students, their fear momentarily forgotten, scrambled towards the vessels.


    As they rowed towards the island, they strained to hear any indication of the battle''s progress. The sounds of clashing magic still echoed through the cavern, offering a glimmer of hope that James and Martha were holding their own.


    The island, dominated by a grand palace and surrounded by smaller, luxurious dwellings, confirmed their suspicions.


    "This must be where the elven nobility lived," one student whispered, a flicker of hope returning to their eyes. "We might find an escape route here."


    William, though relieved to have reached the island, remained cautious. He led the way towards the palace, his senses alert.


    "Stay vigilant," he warned. "There could be traps or other dangers."


    They approached the palace cautiously, their footsteps echoing in the eerie silence. The grand structure, though weathered by time, exuded an aura of power and mystery. William couldn''t shake the feeling that they were stepping into the heart of the elven city.


    The palace was a labyrinth of corridors and chambers, its grandeur surpassing even the most opulent houses in the human cities William had visited. The students, their footsteps echoing in the vast silence, moved with trepidation, their eyes darting nervously, searching for any hint of danger.


    William, leading the way, felt a familiar tremor of apprehension. He couldn''t shake the feeling that they were treading on hallowed ground, a place where the echoes of elven royalty still lingered. Yet, the fear of the unknown paled in comparison to the threat posed by the mysterious attackers. He pressed onward, his senses heightened, determined to find a safe haven within the palace walls.


    The interior was remarkably preserved, the elven craftsmanship evident in every detail. Intricate carvings adorned the walls, depicting scenes of elven life, their forms fluid and graceful. William noticed a higher concentration of magical formations here, their subtle energy humming beneath the surface. He wondered if these enchantments were defensive measures or perhaps remnants of the elves'' advanced technology.


    Suddenly, the demonic sword''s voice echoed in his mind, shattering the silence. "Why are we in this place, boy?" it hissed. "I sense a potent concentration of magical energy. It''s...intoxicating."


    William, no longer startled by the sword''s intrusions, replied mentally, "Don''t sneak up on me like that. It''s unnerving. And to answer your question, we don''t have much choice. A group of people attacked us. They killed some of the other students."


    "What?" the sword exclaimed, its tone laced with a surprising concern. "Are you alright? If you die, I die."


    "I''m fine," William assured it, "but we need to find a way out of here. I''m hoping the elven royalty had a secret escape route."


    "A sound strategy," the sword replied, its voice approving. "Especially considering the level of security in this place. But finding it won''t be easy. We may be in over our heads, boy."


    William, despite the sword''s ominous warning, pressed on. He had a knack for finding hidden things, and he wouldn''t let fear deter him.


    "Let''s spread out and search for anything that might be helpful," William instructed, his voice echoing in the cavernous hall.


    The students dispersed, their footsteps muffled by the plush carpets that lined the palace floors. They carefully examined each room, their eyes scanning the walls for hidden levers, their fingers tracing the intricate carvings, hoping to uncover a secret passage.


    Meanwhile, outside the palace walls, a fierce battle raged. Martha, her staff held aloft, summoned a torrent of vines from the earth.


    "Vine Eruption!" she cried, her voice echoing through the cavern.


    The vines snaked across the ground, ensnaring the legs of the hooded figures. But one of the attackers countered with a powerful Fire Lotus spell, incinerating the vines in a fiery explosion.


    Martha, her strength lying in support magic and healing, focused on keeping James alive. The true offensive power came from James himself.


    He stood amidst the chaos, his body enveloped in a blazing aura, his hair dancing in the heat. This was his signature spell, the one that had earned him the moniker "The Fire Serpent" and cemented his reputation as a magical prodigy.


    Fire Mantra.


    It granted him incredible resistance to flames, enhanced his fire magic, and turned his very touch into a searing weapon. The academy had classified it as an S-rank spell, a testament to its power and rarity.


    One of the hooded figures, their voice muffled by their cloak, recognized the fiery aura. "Are you the Fire Serpent, James?" they asked, their tone a mix of surprise and disdain.


    James, though momentarily flattered by the recognition, felt a surge of anger. He despised these attackers, these killers who had disrupted their peaceful expedition and threatened the lives of his students.


    "And you are?" he retorted, his voice laced with a chilling calm. He needed information, a clue to their identity and their motives.


    "Do you really think I''ll tell you that?" the attacker sneered, their voice dripping with malice. "Just know that we didn''t intend to kill your students. They were simply...in the wrong place at the wrong time."


    Fury surged through James. He drew his sword, its blade igniting with fiery energy. With a speed that belied his scholarly appearance, he lunged towards the attacker, his movements a blur.


    The attacker, caught off guard, couldn''t react in time. James''s blade sliced through the air, connecting with the attacker''s left arm, leaving a deep, cauterized wound.


    "Agh!" the attacker screamed, their voice raw with pain. The smell of burning flesh filled the air.


    James, momentarily distracted by his initial victory, felt a surge of heat at his back. He turned to see a blazing fireball hurtling towards him.


    "Trying to hit me with fire?" he scoffed, his voice laced with arrogance. "Foolish."


    The attacker grinned, a cruel glint in his eyes. "Actually," he replied, his voice a chilling whisper, "I''m just distracting you."


    Suddenly, a figure materialized from the shadows behind James. This attacker, cloaked in darkness, wielded the rare and deadly power of shadow magic. James, his senses attuned to fire, hadn''t even registered their presence. A dagger, tipped with a sinister black energy, plunged deep into his chest. Blood blossomed, staining his pristine robes crimson.


    "James!" Martha''s scream echoed through the cavern.


    The silence that followed the abrupt end of the battle was deafening. The students, huddled within the opulent walls of the elven palace, exchanged terrified glances. The echoes of magical combat had ceased, leaving a chilling void in their wake. A wave of despair washed over them. Their protectors, their mentors, had fallen.


    "Damn it!" one of the students cried, slamming his fist against the wall in frustration. S§×ar?h the n?vel_Fire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    The impact dislodged a painting, sending it crashing to the floor. Behind it, they found something.

 Chapter 68 - 68: Ancient Ruins Expedition (6) - Mysterious Flute

    What they found behind the painting was a safe, locked with some sort of combination of numbers.


    The student''s frustration was palpable. "We don''t know the combination," he groaned, kicking at the ornate rug that lay before the safe. "This is useless!"


    William stepped forward, his curiosity piqued. "Let me take a look."


    The safe, though ancient, appeared similar to those he had encountered in his own time. He examined the dial, the intricate carvings that adorned its surface, searching for any clue to its combination.


    "I can find the combination for you," the demonic sword''s voice whispered in his mind.


    William, though growing accustomed to the sword''s unexpected assistance, couldn''t help but feel a surge of skepticism.


    "Are you sure?" he asked mentally. "And how, exactly, do you propose to do that?"


    "This safe requires more than just a numerical code," the sword explained. "It also requires the user to channel mana into each number as it''s selected. I can sense the residual mana from previous activations, like a ghostly imprint on the dial."


    "But that''s impossible," William argued. "The last person to open this safe was probably centuries ago. The mana couldn''t have lasted this long."


    "Trust me, boy," the sword retorted, its tone confident. "I know what I''m doing."


    William, despite his reservations, decided to trust the sword. He needed to get that safe open, and quickly. But unwrapping the demonic blade in front of the other students was out of the question. He needed a distraction.


    "Let''s split up and search for clues to the combination," he announced, his voice projecting an air of urgency. "Don''t work in teams. Time is of the essence, considering the fight outside seems to have ended."


    The students, their anxiety heightened by the silence from the battle, readily agreed. They scattered throughout the palace, their footsteps echoing in the vast hallways.


    William lingered for a few minutes, pretending to search, before returning to the safe. He unwrapped the demonic sword, its obsidian blade gleaming in the dim light. He held it close to the dial, waiting for the sword to work its magic.


    The demonic sword hummed with a faint energy, its obsidian blade pulsing with a dim light. After a tense silence, the sword''s voice echoed in William''s mind, the numbers resonating with an eerie clarity.


    "3774269"


    William carefully inputted the code, his fingers trembling slightly. With a satisfying click, the safe swung open, revealing its hidden treasures. Inside, nestled on a bed of velvet, lay two objects: a flute crafted from a dark, polished wood and a book bound in black leather, its cover embossed with a serpent devouring its own tail.


    "This is strange..." William murmured, his brow furrowed. He recognized the symbol, the Ouroboros, from his past life, but its meaning in this world remained a mystery.


    "I''ve never seen anything like it," the demonic sword admitted, its voice laced with curiosity. "And I''ve been in this world for a long time. That flute...it radiates a peculiar energy."


    William reached for the book, his fingers tracing the serpent''s scales. It refused to open, its pages sealed by an unknown magic. He turned his attention to the flute. As his fingers brushed against its smooth surface, a torrent of images flooded his mind.


    The visions were vivid, immersive. William found himself transported to the elven city''s vibrant past. He saw Snow Elves, their faces etched with joy and contentment, going about their daily lives. The city pulsed with light, its streets and buildings illuminated by a radiant blue orb suspended high above the lake, a magical substitute for the sun. Gardens flourished under its gentle glow, their exotic plants thriving in the artificial sunlight.


    Then, a figure emerged from the crowd, an elf adorned in ornate robes, a flute clutched in their slender hands. As the elf raised the instrument to their lips, a haunting melody filled the air. The waters of the lake began to churn, rippling violently as if disturbed by an unseen force.


    Suddenly, a colossal serpent erupted from the depths, its scales shimmering like polished obsidian. Its eyes, twin orbs of molten gold, were the size of houses, its gaze filled with an ancient, terrifying power. The creature''s immense body, easily spanning a hundred and twenty meters, barely fit within the cavern, its tail thrashing wildly, sending tremors through the city. S~ea??h the N?vel?ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    The vision abruptly ended, leaving William gasping for breath, his heart pounding in his chest. He stared at the flute in his hand, its smooth surface now chilling to the touch. He had just witnessed a glimpse of the elves'' power, a magic that could summon colossal creatures from the depths. Fear mingled with awe, a potent cocktail of emotions that left him trembling.


    "What did you see?" the demonic sword pressed, its voice a low growl. "You reek of fear and awe. Something powerful touched your mind."


    "You won''t believe me," William said, his voice barely above a whisper. "I saw an elf playing this flute, and then...a gigantic serpent emerged from the lake. It was colossal, at least a hundred and twenty meters long."


    "What?" the sword exclaimed, its tone incredulous. "If that''s true, then it could be a mythical creature. Something beyond even my understanding."


    William, still reeling from the vision, gathered the other students. He recounted what he had seen, the details vivid in his mind. The students, though initially skeptical, listened with growing apprehension.


    "Are you thinking of using that flute?" Altair asked, his voice laced with worry. "We''re trying to escape, not summon a monstrous serpent."


    "We haven''t found an exit yet," William argued, "and those attackers are still out there. The serpent didn''t seem hostile towards the elf who played the flute. Perhaps it will help us."


    "Assuming it doesn''t attack humans," Altair countered. "Remember, the flute player was an elf, like everyone else in this city."


    William hesitated, weighing the risks. Was it a good idea to use the flute, or was he doing something that would make things even worse for them?


    William, his resolve hardening, made a decision. He would use the flute. He gathered the students, his voice unwavering despite the tremor of fear that ran through him.


    "I''m going to summon the serpent," he announced, his gaze sweeping across their anxious faces. "But I need you all to remain inside the palace. I''ll ensure it''s safe before signaling you to come out."


    "William, no!" Altair protested, his voice filled with concern. "That''s too dangerous! We can find another way."


    Other students echoed his sentiment, their voices a chorus of dissent. But William, his leadership instincts taking over, held his ground.


    "I appreciate your concern," he said, his voice firm, "but this is our best chance. I won''t risk all our lives by summoning it without precautions. Trust me."


    He met their gazes, his determination unwavering. Reluctantly, they agreed. William, clutching the flute, stepped out of the palace and onto the shores of the lake. He closed his eyes, took a deep breath, and raised the instrument to his lips.


    "Let''s do this," he whispered, a hint of fear battling with the resolve in his voice.


    The water around the island started to move, and William knew that was the sign the serpent was waking from its slumber.

 Chapter 69 - 69: Ancient Ruins Expedition (7) - End

    The lake''s surface churned violently, waves crashing against the island''s shores. Inside the palace, the students watched with a mixture of awe and terror, their faces pressed against the windows.


    "The water''s movement is unnatural," one student whispered, his voice trembling. "There''s something down there... He was right about the serpent!"


    Altair, his belief in William unwavering, felt a surge of both excitement and fear. The other students, their skepticism replaced by a chilling realization, exchanged panicked glances.


    William stood his ground, his heart pounding in his chest. Should he flee? Would the serpent attack? He steeled his nerves, Gorn''s words of encouragement echoing in his mind. He would face this challenge head-on.


    The serpent''s colossal head emerged from the depths, its scales shimmering like polished obsidian, its eyes like molten gold. The four cloaked figures, who had been approaching the island, froze in their tracks, their faces a mixture of shock and disbelief.


    "It...it actually exists!" one of them stammered. "I thought it was just a legend!"


    The serpent''s gaze swept across the city, its ancient eyes taking in the ruined grandeur. It focused on William, its immense form dwarfing the young mage.


    "Are you the one who summoned me?" the serpent''s voice boomed within William''s mind, its power resonating deep within his soul.


    "Yes," William replied, his voice steady despite the tremor of fear that ran through him. "I played the flute."


    The serpent surveyed its surroundings, its confusion growing. "The city...it''s in ruins... How long has it been? How long have I slumbered?"


    "I don''t know exactly," William admitted. "I discovered these ruins with my classmates and professors. We''re here to study them. But I believe it''s been centuries since this city was abandoned."


    The serpent recoiled, its surprise palpable. "Impossible... Why didn''t they call for me? I would have defended them, protected our home... but now..." Grief and anger resonated in its voice, a deep thrum of sadness that shook the cavern.


    William seized the opportunity. "There are intruders here," he explained, his voice urgent. "They attacked us, killed some of my friends. They''re here to cause harm, to desecrate this place. Can you help us?"


    The serpent considered his plea, its massive head tilting slightly. ''I cannot fight them directly,'' it finally replied, its voice laced with regret. "There are rules that bind creatures of my power, ancient laws that prevent our interference in mortal affairs. But I can frighten them, drive them away. And I can offer you a gift, a token of my gratitude. Would that suffice?"


    William, though disappointed that the serpent couldn''t eliminate the threat entirely, knew this was a valuable offer. He yearned for vengeance, but the safety of his classmates was his priority.


    "That would be appreciated," William agreed.


    The serpent turned its massive head, its gaze fixed on the four figures huddled on the distant shore. They, sensing the impending danger, unleashed a barrage of spells, their attacks striking the serpent''s impenetrable scales. The magic dissipated harmlessly, like raindrops against a mountain.


    The serpent unleashed a wave of pure magical pressure, an aura of immense power that crashed against the attackers, forcing them to their knees.


    "What are you doing here?" the serpent boomed, its voice echoing through the cavern. This time, the words were spoken aloud, a physical manifestation of its power that sent shivers down their spines.


    Faced with the serpent''s overwhelming power and undeniable authority, the cloaked figures abandoned their pretense of scholarly curiosity.


    "We seek the secrets of this lost civilization," one of them admitted, their voice trembling. "Our organization desires the knowledge and power the elves possessed."


    The serpent let out a low hiss, its displeasure echoing through the cavern. "I am awake now," it boomed, its voice laced with a chilling finality. "You will take nothing from this city for at least a thousand years, until I slumber once more. Do you understand? Or do you wish for me to unleash my wrath upon your lands?"


    The threat was clear. The attackers, their faces pale with fear, wasted no time in making their retreat.


    "W-We will leave," they stammered, bowing their heads in submission. "We apologize for our intrusion."


    They turned and fled, their footsteps echoing through the silent city as they disappeared back into the tunnel. The serpent, satisfied with their hasty departure, turned its attention back to William.


    "It is done, young one," it said, its voice softer now. "Now, about your gift... I sense a peculiar aura within you, a bloodline both familiar and...unexpected."


    William froze, his heart pounding. What did the serpent mean?


    "Are you, perhaps, a descendant of the demon royalty?" the serpent inquired, its voice filled with curiosity. "It would explain the strange energy I sense, for I, too, am of the demon lineage."


    "What the...?" the demonic sword exclaimed, its voice a mix of surprise and disbelief. "This serpent is a demon, too?"


    The serpent, its senses attuned to the sword''s presence within William''s mind, chuckled. "Ah, so you even possess a demonic artifact. Impressive. I can offer you a drop of my divine blood, young one. It may prove beneficial on your journey."


    "Divine blood?" William echoed, confused. "But you said you''re a demon."


    The serpent tilted its massive head, its golden eyes gleaming with amusement. "Indeed I am. Demons are a race, not inherently evil or opposed to divinity. Are you suggesting only humans can possess divine qualities?"


    "No, of course not," William stammered, a blush creeping onto his cheeks. "I apologize for my ignorance."


    The serpent chuckled, a deep rumble that shook the cavern. "Think nothing of it, young one. Now, hold out your hand."


    William extended his hand, his heart pounding with a mix of anticipation and apprehension. A single drop of the serpent''s blood, shimmering with an emerald luminescence, materialized above his palm.


    It fell, surprisingly heavy, engulfing his hand entirely. Then, with a tingling warmth, it vanished, absorbed into his very being.


    "The benefits will manifest in due time," the serpent assured him, its voice resonating with an ancient power. "Sooner than you might expect."


    "Thank you," William replied, gratitude filling his voice. "And is there a chance those attackers are waiting for us on the surface?"


    "None whatsoever," the serpent replied confidently. "I can sense their presence, and they have fled. You are safe."


    Reassured, William attempted to inquire further about the demonic lineage the serpent had mentioned, but the creature had already turned its attention back to the depths. With a final ripple of the water, it vanished, leaving William alone on the island.


    The immediate threat neutralized, the students rejoiced. Their escape route secured, they prepared to leave the elven city, their hearts lighter despite the lingering sadness for their fallen classmates. As they rowed back towards the mainland, a somber silence fell over them, their tears a tribute to those lost. S§×arch* The ¦ÇovelFire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    But upon reaching the shore, a sight met their eyes that banished their grief. Standing near the tunnel entrance, battered but alive, were Professor James and Professor Martha.


    "Professors!" the students cried out in unison, their voices filled with disbelief and relief.


    "We thought you were..." William began, his voice choked with emotion.


    James sighed, leaning heavily on his staff. "We managed to escape," he admitted, wincing as he adjusted his position. "They were too strong. But what in the world was that serpent? We saw it from across the city!"


    William, his mind still reeling from the encounter, knew he had much to explain. But first, they had to reach safety and alert Tholfnir.


    The academy needed to be warned, the attackers brought to justice. The journey back, once filled with the excitement of discovery, was now heavy with the weight of loss and the looming threat of a hidden enemy.

 Chapter 70 - 70: Dark Times, and Back in the Past

    The return to the temple was a somber affair. The sight of their fallen classmates, their lifeless bodies scattered amongst the elven artifacts, brought a wave of grief and despair. Professor James knelt beside them, his shoulders slumped, his face etched with sorrow.


    "We''ll preserve their bodies," he said, his voice thick with emotion. "We''ll return for them later."


    Martha, her eyes filled with tears, cast a preservation spell, encasing the bodies in a shimmering frost. The carriages, already laden with artifacts, couldn''t accommodate the fallen students. It was a grim reminder of the expedition''s tragic turn.


    The journey back to the academy was a somber procession. Silence filled the carriages, the weight of loss pressing down on their spirits.


    William, though not close to those who had perished, couldn''t shake the feeling of sadness, the knowledge that their dreams had been cut short, their potential forever unrealized.


    He had gained much from the expedition ¨C a powerful gift from a mythical creature, a deeper understanding of the elven civilization ¨C but the cost felt unbearably high.


    Upon their return to Snowpeak, the professors were met by Headmaster Tholfnir. He had received their urgent message and stood waiting, his face etched with worry and grief.


    "Tell me everything," he commanded, his voice heavy.


    James instructed the students to unload the carriages while he and Martha accompanied Tholfnir to his office. William, eager to distract himself from the grim task, joined the other students, their movements mechanical as they carried the elven artifacts into the academy. The weight of the tragedy settled over them.


    News of the tragedy spread like wildfire through the academy and the nearby city of Snowpeak Mount. The unexpected loss of young lives cast a pall over the community, their fears about the looming war amplified by the grim reality of death.


    Altair, his usual cheerfulness replaced by a somber expression, worked alongside William, unloading the carriages. "I never imagined something like this would happen," he confessed, his voice heavy with sadness. "The expedition seemed so promising..."


    "Sometimes," William replied, his gaze distant, "things don''t go as planned. And I have a feeling this is just the beginning. Can you sense it too? A darkness hanging over us?"


    Altair nodded, his eyes filled with a grim understanding. "Yes," he agreed. "Everyone is on edge, bracing for the war. Dark times are coming, my friend."


    The magic academy suspended classes for several days following the tragic incident. The bodies of the fallen students were retrieved from the ruins, and a somber memorial service was held. Grieving families traveled to the academy, their hearts heavy with loss. Some chose to take their loved ones home for burial, while others decided to lay them to rest in the Snowpeak Mount cemetery, believing their children would find solace in being close to the dreams they had pursued.


    During this time of mourning, William sought refuge in his studies, immersing himself in books and practicing his spells. He attended the memorial service, paying his respects to the fallen, but the weight of the tragedy lingered.


    Four days later, a surge of energy coursed through him, signaling the return of his Chrono Shift ability. He had eagerly awaited its return, the suspension of classes making its availability even more valuable.


    "I should visit Jinra and continue my training," he mused, a plan forming in his mind. "In fact, it might be time for our journey to the magic school in the past."


    The prospect of enrolling in an ancient elven academy, of learning magic from a different era, filled him with anticipation. He envisioned gaining knowledge and skills that would set him apart from his peers, enhancing his already formidable abilities.


    With a newfound sense of purpose, William activated Chrono Shift within the privacy of his room. The familiar portal shimmered into existence, and he stepped through, returning to Jinra''s humble abode.


    The morning sun cast long shadows across the dew-covered grass as William materialized in the barn. He waited patiently for Jinra to awaken, his mind buzzing with anticipation.


    The old mage emerged, his weathered face creased with a welcoming smile. He carried several bulging packs, setting them carefully beside the barn door.


    "Good morning, William," Jinra greeted him, his voice warm.


    "Good morning, Master," William replied, his curiosity piqued. "What''s with the bags?" S§×ar?h the N??eFire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Jinra chuckled. "Don''t panic, lad, but those are our travel packs. I figured it was time to set off for the magic academy. Ready for a new adventure?"


    "Absolutely!" William exclaimed, his excitement bubbling over.


    Jinra had spent the previous night packing their provisions, carefully selecting the essentials for their journey. He couldn''t carry too much, of course, but he had ensured they wouldn''t go hungry.


    "We might need to hunt along the way," he explained, securing the last of the bags, "and find lodging in roadside taverns. But that shouldn''t be a problem for a seasoned adventurer like you, eh?"


    William, who had faced far greater challenges in recent months, merely grinned. "No problem at all," he replied. "But tell me, Master, which magic academy are we heading to?"


    He was curious. In this era, civilization was still in its infancy. He had no idea what kind of magical institution Jinra had in mind.


    "It''s a newly established academy," Jinra explained, "built atop a remote mountain. They seem to be accepting students with minimal requirements, likely because few are willing to endure the harsh conditions."


    William''s interest piqued. Jinra''s description sounded eerily similar to Snowpeak Academy, his current school. Could fate be leading him to the same institution, albeit in a different era?


    "Does this place have a name?" William asked.


    Jinra shook his head. "Not yet, lad. It''s quite new, as I said. But I hear there are some interesting rumors surrounding it. Something about sightings of Snow Elves in the area. Whether those are just tales or the truth, I can''t say."


    William''s suspicions grew stronger. This was undoubtedly Snowpeak Academy, in its nascent form. He wondered if these rumored Snow Elves were the same ones whose ruins he had explored with Professor James. The implications were intriguing, but also concerning.


    ''Could my presence here disrupt the timeline?'' he worried. ''I don''t want to inadvertently cause some catastrophic paradox.''


    The thought troubled him, but he reasoned that the chances of causing significant damage were slim. He was deep in the past, likely thousands of years before his own time. As a mere student, his influence on the grand scheme of things would be minimal. He pushed aside his anxieties, his excitement for the journey outweighing his fears.


    They set off after a hearty breakfast, their horses'' hooves kicking up puffs of snow as they left the familiar surroundings of Jinra''s home. The old mage beamed with pride, his eyes twinkling.


    "You''ve mastered the Magic Mind spell, William," he said, his voice filled with admiration. "Few your age could accomplish such a feat. In fact, few mages ever manage to learn that spell. I have a feeling you''ll thrive at this academy."


    "You think so?" William asked, a grin spreading across his face.


    "Absolutely," Jinra confirmed. "Now, shall we be off?"


    They mounted their horses, the crisp mountain air invigorating their spirits. William, a mix of excitement and apprehension bubbling within him, couldn''t help but wonder what awaited them at this ancient iteration of Snowpeak Academy.

 Chapter 71 - 71: Prohibited Session in the Library

    "Jinra," William asked, his curiosity piqued, "are you, by any chance, an enchanter?" He recalled Professor Sebastian''s mention of a master enchanter named Jinra and couldn''t help but wonder if it was more than just a coincidence.


    Jinra, his eyebrows raised in surprise, chuckled. "Indeed I am," he admitted, "though I wouldn''t consider myself a master. How did you know?"


    William, ever quick with an explanation, gestured vaguely towards the bags strapped to their horses. "I noticed some of the items you packed," he said, hoping his excuse sounded plausible. "They seemed...enchantment-related."


    "Keen eyes, young man," Jinra said, a hint of pride in his voice. "But be warned, our journey will be arduous. The academy is in a remote location, and you must be prepared for the challenges that await."


    William, familiar with the harsh climate of Snowpeak Mountain, was intrigued. "What do you mean?" he asked.


    "The academy is still under construction," Jinra explained, "and there are no settlements nearby. I hear students must rely on their own skills for survival, hunting for food and braving the elements."


    William''s excitement grew. This ancient version of Snowpeak Academy sounded like a true test of his abilities. He was eager to experience this primitive, untamed version of the institution he knew so well.


    The journey stretched on, the monotonous rhythm of their horses'' hooves lulling William into a meditative state. With his Magic Mind spell enhancing his focus, he found a deep tranquility within himself, his mind expanding, his mana reserves replenishing.


    He missed the thrill of battle, the surge of leveling up after defeating a powerful foe, but he knew that patience and preparation were essential for the challenges ahead.


    Just as William was contemplating the need for some monster-slaying action, a band of kobolds emerged from the thick underbrush, their beady eyes glinting with malice.


    "I''ll conceal my power for now," Jinra said, a mischievous twinkle in his eye. "This is a good opportunity for you to gain some experience. But if things get hairy, I''ll step in."


    William grinned, his pulse quickening. He couldn''t resist the chance to test his skills against these primitive creatures. Travel in this era was far more perilous than in his own time, where roads were well-maintained and patrolled. Here, danger lurked around every bend.


    He leaped from his horse, drawing his steel sword. The demonic blade remained wrapped, a secret he wasn''t ready to reveal to Jinra. The kobolds brandished crude weapons, their guttural battle cries echoing through the forest. William, unfazed by their attempts at intimidation, activated his spells.


    "Iron Skin! Enhanced Strength! Swiftfoot!"


    His body surged with power, his muscles coiling beneath his skin, his senses sharpening.


    The kobolds, sensing the sudden surge of power emanating from William, hesitated. Fear flickered in their beady eyes, but it was too late to flee. They were committed to the attack.


    William, his movements a blur, became a whirlwind of steel and fury. He weaved through their clumsy attacks, his sword finding its mark with deadly precision.


    Three kobolds fell, their crude weapons clattering to the ground, their lifeblood staining the snow crimson.


    The remaining kobold, armed with a bow, loosed a desperate arrow. William, his reflexes honed by countless hours of training, deflected it with ease. He closed the distance in a blink, his sword rising and falling in a swift arc.


    The kobold''s cry was cut short, its lifeless body slumping against a snow-laden tree.


    [+800 EXP]


    [+800 EXP]


    [+800 EXP]


    [+800 EXP]


    The accumulated experience points brought William closer to his next level, a satisfying reward for his efforts.


    "Impressive moves," Jinra commented, watching as William cleaned his blade. "Our training has clearly paid off."


    Their journey continued, the road ahead fraught with peril. Goblins, wolves, and even massive bears emerged from the shadows, their hunger for blood evident. William faced each encounter with a mix of skill and ferocity, his sword a blur of motion, his spells amplifying his strength and agility. He suffered a few wounds, including a deep gash from a bear''s claws, but he refused Jinra''s offer of healing potions.


    "I want to test my natural healing abilities," he explained, flexing his arm gingerly.


    "As you wish," Jinra replied, a hint of pride in his voice. "But allow me to clean that wound, at least."


    They made camp beside a crystalline stream, the setting sun casting long shadows across the snow-covered landscape. Jinra carefully cleansed the wound, the cool water and the sting of alcohol a stark contrast to the warmth of the campfire. William winced, but the pain was manageable. His body, honed by rigorous training, was resilient, his recovery swift.


    As the sun dipped below the horizon, William''s time in the past came to an end. He vanished from Jinra''s side, reappearing in his dormitory room at Snowpeak Academy. The transition was seamless, the flow of time frozen in both realities, his secret ability leaving no trace.


    The academy was unusually quiet. Classes had resumed, but the recent tragedy and the looming threat of war had cast a pall over the students'' enthusiasm. Many longed for the end of the term, eager to return home and seek solace with their families.


    William, however, remained focused on his training. He understood that in these uncertain times, strength was their greatest defense. He sought refuge in the library, its towering shelves and countless volumes a welcome distraction from the somber atmosphere.


    He sought new spells to master, his ambition pushing him towards more advanced magic. While his current repertoire of body-enhancing spells served him well, he yearned for greater power, for the edge that would ensure his survival in the battles to come.


    The librarian, a bespectacled man with a perpetually worried expression, approached William with a hesitant apology.


    "I...I apologize for doubting your ability to master the Magic Mind spell," he stammered, his cheeks flushing. "I never imagined...well, you''re quite the prodigy."


    William smiled, his earlier annoyance forgotten. "It''s alright," he reassured the librarian. "You were just looking out for me. Speaking of which, could you perhaps offer some assistance? I''m looking for some B-rank body enhancement spells."


    The librarian, eager to make amends, readily agreed. "Of course, William! I know just the tomes you need. Follow me."


    He led William through the labyrinthine shelves, pointing out several promising volumes. Other students, witnessing this preferential treatment, couldn''t help but feel a pang of envy. The librarian was notoriously unhelpful, yet here he was, practically fawning over William.


    "That William," one student muttered to his companion, "he''s certainly the golden boy around here, isn''t he?"


    "Indeed," the other replied with a sneer. "And to think, he''s not even a noble. Just some peasant who got lucky. This academy is going to the dogs." S~ea??h the ¦Çov§×lFire .net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    William, oblivious to their jealous whispers, eagerly collected the recommended tomes, his mind already buzzing with the possibilities of his enhanced magical arsenal.


    As the librarian guided William through the labyrinthine shelves, his eyes were drawn to a secluded section, cordoned off by a velvet rope and a sign that declared, "Restricted Access: Authorized Personnel Only."


    "What kind of books are in there?" William asked, curiosity piqued.


    The librarian followed William''s gaze, a nervous chuckle escaping his lips. "Ah, that''s where we keep the...more sensitive materials," he explained, his voice dropping to a conspiratorial whisper. "Tomes that wouldn''t be suitable for the average student. Quite a bit of it is related to...demons. Nothing you need to worry about, of course."


    William''s interest intensified. He had to get into that restricted section. He pressed the librarian for more information, learning that access required becoming a certified researcher of ancient civilizations.


    "Demons are remnants of an ancient civilization, long vanished," the librarian explained. "Their ruins are scattered across the world, rare and often dangerous. Becoming a researcher is a lengthy process, requiring years of study, rigorous examinations, and proven expertise. Even with Headmaster Tholfnir''s favor, you''d still have to follow the standard procedures."


    Despite the daunting requirements, a new ambition took root within William. He would become a researcher, unlock the secrets of that restricted section, and delve into the mysteries of the demonic civilization. He would uncover the truth about his sword, his heritage, and the destiny that seemed to be intertwined with these ancient powers.

 Chapter 72 - 72: Corruption, Again?

    The librarian, eager to assist, gathered a selection of tomes he deemed suitable for William''s needs.


    "I understand your focus is on body enhancement," he said, his eyes twinkling behind his spectacles. "These should provide some significant boosts to your abilities."


    The first tome detailed a B-rank spell called Raging Torrent, which promised to amplify William''s strength to extraordinary levels. What intrigued William most was the spell''s potential for modification and enhancement. sea??h th§× N?velFire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "Once you reach B-rank and above," the librarian explained, "you can customize and refine your spells, creating unique variations tailored to your specific needs. Think of them as the foundation for your magical repertoire."


    Lower-ranked spells lacked this adaptability. This, William realized, was why mages were truly recognized for their mastery of B-rank and higher magic. Those were the spells that defined their abilities and set them apart.


    William collected tomes for enhancing his strength, agility, and stamina, each a significant upgrade from his current spells. But he also sought to expand his repertoire, venturing beyond his comfort zone. He wanted to explore different elements and magical disciplines.


    Just because his focus was on physical enhancement didn''t mean he couldn''t branch out and become a more versatile mage. With Magic Mind amplifying his learning capabilities, the possibilities seemed endless.


    The librarian, whom William now knew as Roland, offered some sage advice.


    "Since you''re venturing outside your area of expertise," Roland suggested, "it''s wise to start with elements that align with your environment. Here, in this frozen mountaintop, ice magic would be a natural choice."


    The logic was sound. Ice magic thrived in frigid environments, just as fire magic flourished in warmer climates. It was common for mages to travel the world, seeking out locations that complemented their chosen disciplines.


    "Thank you, Roland," William said, his gratitude evident. "I''ll definitely explore some ice magic."


    Roland smiled. "Of course, William. Feel free to ask if you need anything else."


    He returned to his post at the main desk, his watchful gaze ensuring order within the library. William, for the first time, ventured beyond the familiar shelves of body enhancement magic, his curiosity leading him towards the section dedicated to ice spells.


    There, amidst the towering stacks, he encountered a young woman with striking white hair and captivating blue eyes. Her uniform, subtly different from his own, indicated she was a senior student, perhaps in her second or third year. She glanced up as he approached, her expression a mix of curiosity and recognition.


    "You''re William, aren''t you?" she asked, her voice laced with a hint of amusement. "The famous one."


    William, caught off guard, attempted a playful response. "The one and only," he replied with a grin. "Don''t tell me you''ve fallen for my charms too?"


    He instantly regretted his words. His attempt at humor fell flat, the awkwardness hanging heavy in the air.


    The girl''s expression soured. "How absurd," she scoffed, rolling her eyes. "Good luck finding your spells, then," she added, her tone dismissive. "Idiot."


    She turned and stalked away, leaving William standing there, mortified. He wanted to kick himself.


    ''Idiot! What have I done?'' he thought, his cheeks burning with embarrassment. ''Of all the things to say to such a beautiful girl...''


    Fortunately, the awkward encounter was quickly forgotten as William immersed himself in the pursuit of knowledge and power. He scanned the shelves of ice magic, his eyes drawn to spells that would complement his fighting style.


    He envisioned himself a master of both physical and magical combat, his enhanced strength and agility augmented by spells that could immobilize or hinder his opponents.


    ''Imagine trapping an enemy in ice,'' he mused, ''then closing in for a decisive strike.'' The possibilities excited him.


    He selected a B-rank spell called Ice Tomb, which promised to encase an opponent''s legs in a solid block of ice, effectively immobilizing them. He also chose an A-rank spell, part of a two-part set, that imbued his weapon with icy power.


    The second part of the set, which conjured a formidable ice armor, would have to wait. Mastering even one A-rank spell was a daunting challenge, and he didn''t want to overextend himself.


    With his chosen tomes in hand, William retreated to a quiet corner of the library, eager to delve into the intricacies of ice magic.


    The manuals were proving to be a fascinating challenge, their intricate runes and complex incantations demanding his full attention. As William sat immersed in his studies, a group of students approached, their presence disrupting his concentration. He recognized them as second-years, their uniforms bearing the markings of their advanced standing.


    "Excuse me, William?" one of them began, a tentative smile on his face. "Would you mind if we joined you for a moment?"


    William closed his tome, his curiosity piqued. "Certainly," he replied, gesturing towards the empty seats across from him.


    The three students settled into the chairs, their expressions a mix of eagerness and apprehension.


    "We''re registered adventurers with the guild," the first student explained, "and we''re currently undertaking a mission that requires an additional member. We were hoping you might be interested in joining us."


    William was taken aback. While he knew it was common for second and third-year students to participate in guild missions, he was still a first-year, a novice in the world of magic.


    "May I ask why you''ve approached me?" he inquired, his brow furrowed. "Wouldn''t a student from your own year, or perhaps a more experienced mage, be a better fit?"


    The students exchanged glances, a hint of admiration flickering in their eyes.


    "We know you might not enjoy discussing it," the first student began, "but you were the sole survivor of that tragic expedition to the elven ruins. Word of your...resourcefulness and talent has spread throughout the academy. We believe you''d be an invaluable asset to our team."


    William, though flattered by their assessment, remained cautious. He sensed there was more to their request than met the eye. But the allure of adventure, the chance to test his skills in a real-world scenario, was difficult to resist.


    Intrigued, William leaned in, eager to hear more.


    "We believe it has something to do with demons," the student whispered, his voice apprehensive. "There''s a village nearby that''s been overrun by...well, corruption. We need to investigate and, if necessary, eliminate the threat."


    "Demons?" William echoed, his mind flashing back to the obsidian blade tucked away in his pack and the serpent''s cryptic words about his own demonic lineage.


    "Yes," the student confirmed, "though it''s more accurate to say the corruption is caused by demonic energy. That doesn''t necessarily mean there are actual demons involved. They''re practically extinct, after all. But this village is suffering, and we need to help."


    The students explained that the village was plagued by a dark force, its inhabitants succumbing to a sinister influence, their livestock withering, their crops failing. It was a chilling echo of the events that had unfolded in Willow Creek.


    William, remembering the villagers who had perished, felt a surge of determination. He wouldn''t stand idly by while others suffered the same fate.


    "I''ll join you," he declared, his voice firm. "But I need to speak with Headmaster Tholfnir first, to ensure he approves."


    "Of course," the student replied. "We understand. We plan to depart tomorrow, so you have time to speak with him today."


    With their agreement secured, the students departed, leaving William alone with his thoughts. He gathered the spell books he had selected, checked them out with Roland, and headed towards Tholfnir''s office. He needed to convince the headmaster to allow him to join this mission.

 Chapter 73 - 73: Teach me Bro

    William headed straight to Tholfnir''s office, his heart pounding with a mix of anticipation and apprehension.


    "What?" Tholfnir exclaimed, his brow furrowed in concern. "You want to go on this mission? Absolutely not. We''ve already lost too many students on that expedition."


    William had expected resistance, but he wouldn''t be deterred. "Please, Headmaster," he pleaded. "I believe it would be an invaluable learning experience. And besides," he added, holding up his hand, "I have this protective ring Professor Sebastian gave me."


    Tholfnir examined the ring, his expression thoughtful. "Indeed," he conceded, "this ring possesses a powerful barrier. But even so, don''t you think this is too dangerous? You''ve only just returned from those ruins..."


    William understood Tholfnir''s reluctance to risk another student''s life, but he pressed his case. "Just because tragedy struck during the expedition doesn''t mean it will happen again. The war could erupt at any moment, and I need practical experience to be prepared. Don''t you agree?"


    Tholfnir sighed, his shoulders slumping slightly. "You make a valid point, William," he admitted. "But I still believe it''s unwise for you to go now. You have classes to attend, studies to pursue. Perhaps in a few months? What do you think?"


    Despite his best efforts, William couldn''t sway Tholfnir. The headmaster, though fond of William, remained firm in his decision.


    "I understand," William said, masking his disappointment. "It''s no problem. I''m sure they''ll find someone else for the mission." sea??h th§× Novel?ire(.)ne*t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "Indeed," Tholfnir agreed. "But William, I have another proposition for you. What do you think about assisting the kingdom''s army?"


    William''s eyebrows shot up. "You won''t let me go on a simple mission, but you''re suggesting I join the war effort?"


    Tholfnir chuckled. "It''s not quite like that, lad. In six months, I plan to send a few students to various military camps to provide training and magical instruction to the soldiers. Many new recruits are joining the ranks, and they need to be prepared for the upcoming conflict."


    "So, I''d be like a... contracted instructor?" William clarified.


    "Something like that," Tholfnir confirmed. "The compensation would be generous, both financially and in terms of experience. You''d also have the opportunity to make valuable connections within the military. And you know, when things get tough, having allies in the army can be a lifesaver."


    The offer was tempting. While disappointed about the mission, William recognized the value of military training and the chance to contribute to the kingdom''s defense.


    "I''m interested," he said, "but let''s revisit this in six months. Things might change."


    "Of course," Tholfnir agreed. "No pressure."


    As William left the headmaster''s office, he encountered Altair, who was heading towards the gymnasium for some combat practice.


    "Hey, William," Altair greeted him. "Mind helping me with some sparring? I want to test out some new spells I learned for my gauntlets." He clasped his hands together, a hopeful expression on his face. "Pretty please?"


    With no pressing engagements, William readily agreed. They headed towards the gymnasium, their footsteps echoing in the quiet hallways. The prospect of a friendly duel, a chance to hone his skills and test his new magic, filled William with a sense of anticipation. He was eager to see how his abilities measured up against Altair''s enhanced gauntlets.


    When William and Altair arrived at the gymnasium, they saw students diligently practicing their spells, casting them on the training dummies. Everyone appeared focused. The recent attack on the ruins had motivated them to seek more power, fearful that they might face a similar fate in the future. The looming war also proved to be a powerful motivator.


    Altair led the way to a closed room he had reserved for their training. "There are a few locked rooms like this one," he explained. "We can use them for a few hours daily. After that, we need to leave so other students can use them."


    These rooms were used for more sensitive training and research. Not every student utilized them, but some did. William hadn''t known about these rooms inside the gymnasium, and he appreciated this new information.


    "That''s good to know," William said, "but what about your training? What can I do to help you, exactly?"


    Altair smiled. "You''re the strongest physical combatant I''ve met, so I believe you have what it takes to fight against me one-on-one. It''s just for me to gauge my level."


    William knew Altair was skilled, but could he compete against him? After absorbing the demonic energy and learning new spells, William felt their levels were quite different.


    "Sure, why not?" William agreed. In the end, he decided to help his friend.


    It would be a good way for Altair to understand his level compared to his peers. When fighting powerful enemies from outside the academy, it was hard for William to get a good grasp of his own power level, so it would be a good thing for William too. They had nothing to lose in that sparring match.


    Altair utilized his signature spell, creating two magical gauntlets that covered his hands, increasing the power behind his attacks. "While you use weapons like swords, I use these gauntlets. They''re pretty effective," Altair said.


    William liked the spell Altair used. It was different from what he was used to, and Altair had clearly worked hard to master it. But William didn''t move or grab his sword. He just stood there, puzzling Altair.


    "Why aren''t you getting your weapon ready? Do you think you can win against me without your weapons?" Altair asked.


    That was exactly what William thought. He strongly believed that his power was on a different level compared to the other first-year students. He was simply too strong for them.


    Altair, feeling a little disrespected by his friend, dashed toward William, aiming a punch at him.


    William, with his high stats, could easily see Altair''s movements. They weren''t fast enough for him. He simply dodged to the side and even slapped the back of his friend''s head, teasing him.


    "You''ll have to be faster than that to get me, bro," William said.


    Altair turned around and lunged toward William once again. This time, he activated another spell, one that enhanced his attributes, similar to the ones William used. With it, he was much faster than before, and he managed to land a punch on William, who blocked it using both hands. William slid back with the impact, but the damage wasn''t significant. His natural defenses were strong.


    "How are you undamaged?" Altair asked, shock evident on his face. "Are you made of steel?"


    "Haha, no. I just train my body to handle these things. You know, that''s my focus, so of course I have a strong body," William said.


    Altair, who had believed he was close in terms of power to his friend, now saw that the reality was the complete opposite. He had a lot to improve to get close to William. Did that make him sad? No. Altair was glad that he had a powerful friend who could help him.


    "Teach me how you do it," Altair pleaded.


    William looked at him and smiled. "Of course."


    With the knowledge he had gained from Jinra, William was confident that he had a lot to teach Altair. That way, he could help his friend while also practicing for when he would have to teach the kingdom''s army in a few months.


    ---


    Inside a secret room within the academy, Tholfnir conversed with a cloaked figure.


    "Let the boy go on this mission," the cloaked figure commanded.


    Tholfnir was confused. "Why? It''s dangerous."


    "Do as we command."


    "Understood," Tholfnir replied, saluting the cloaked figure as it vanished.

 Chapter 74 - 74: Shit

    William taught Altair a few things¡ªtips he had learned from Jinra and some from Gorn. Altair was a good student. He listened carefully to what William had to say and tried his best to do as he was told. That was the best kind of person to teach. William liked it, and he was starting to believe that teaching the kingdom''s army, like Tholfnir had asked him to, wouldn''t be that hard.


    Their training session lasted for hours. The fights between the two were so intense that the students outside heard the impacts of their blows, some even wondering what was going on.


    "Are they fighting gigantic gorillas or something?" one student wondered aloud.


    "Nah, I think that''s just William. He''s a prodig¡ª" Sear?h the ¦ÇovelFire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "Shut up! Stop praising him; he won''t take you as his disciple or befriend you."


    William and Altair left and went to their dorm rooms. They lived in the same area, after all.


    "See you tomorrow, William," Altair said as he waved. "Great training today."


    "See ya!"


    The first thing William needed after a training session like that was a shower and a meal with plenty of protein to help his muscles recover. The next morning, however, started quite differently for him. He woke up to Tholfnir knocking on his door. No one in the dorm could believe their eyes when they saw Tholfnir there. It was rare for him to visit a student like that.


    William, too, was surprised. He almost freaked out when he saw Tholfnir through the magical peephole.


    "Headmaster Tholfnir," he said, "what brings you to my room this early?"


    "Can I come in?" Tholfnir asked.


    The question wasn''t necessary, as Tholfnir was the head of the academy, but William appreciated that he had the decency to ask.


    "Of course. Come in."


    Tholfnir sat on the couch with William.


    "I know that yesterday I said no to that mission, but I''ve changed my mind. You can go with them," Tholfnir said.


    William was surprised. "What? Are you sure?"


    "Yes, I am. You were right about needing some real-world practice, and honestly, you''re quite strong compared to your first-year peers."


    Although he appreciated the opportunity, William still couldn''t understand Tholfnir''s sudden change of heart. The headmaster wasn''t usually indecisive. But despite his lingering questions, William decided to let it go and simply enjoy the chance to participate in the mission with the other students.


    "Well, thank you very much for this," William said, his smile beaming. "I''ll do my best to stay out of danger. And I have this, remember?" William showed the enchanted ring Professor Sebastian had given him.


    "Right," Tholfnir acknowledged. "I''ll take my leave, then. You cannot be gone for longer than 15 days before I send someone to retrieve you." He was just being cautious in case William disappeared.


    "No problem, Headmaster."


    After that, Tholfnir left, and William started to pack some things for the journey. He then met the other students who were waiting for his answer in the academy''s courtyard.


    "So, did they let you go with us?" the leader of the group asked when he saw William.


    "Yes, they did," William confirmed. "Are we going by horse?"


    The students exchanged glances and smiled. "No, of course not. We have flying mounts."


    William then realized the students were all nobles. Money was no object for them, so obtaining flying mounts was easy. The good news was that the students had acquired a flying mount for William too, free of charge, which was great.


    They didn''t have many things to bring along for the mission, so flying mounts were ideal. It wasn''t as if they had a lot of luggage to carry in a carriage, for example.


    Before leaving for the mission, William spoke with Altair, since the two were training together.


    "Another mission already? Damn, you don''t stop, do you?" Altair said, a little worried.


    "I''ll rest after this one," William reassured him. "Don''t do anything stupid while I''m away. I won''t be here to save your ass."


    "Oh, shut up. I can take care of myself, bro," Altair said, playfully pushing William away.


    After their brief conversation, William left and joined the other students, who already had their griffins ready at the academy''s main gate. William mounted his griffin and flew off, following the other students who knew their destination.


    "We didn''t introduce ourselves yet," one student yelled from their griffin. "I am Gilbert, this is my friend Yang, and that''s Bianca."


    The three students were all from the second year. William didn''t have much contact with students outside of the first year, so this was his first interaction with them.


    "It''s a pleasure to meet all of you," he said.


    "We all know your name, so there''s that. Anyway, the village isn''t that far. With our griffins, I think we can get there in one day."


    One day was a short trip. William had traveled very far to get to the academy, so for him, one day was nothing. Not only that, but he was flying this time! The view from atop the griffin was gorgeous. It wasn''t something he had the chance to see every day.


    The hours flew by, and when night came, they decided to make a quick stop. The spot they found for camping was on top of a mountain¡ªone of the perks of having a griffin.


    "This is the perfect spot to camp," Bianca said. "No monsters to bother us, and a beautiful view."


    "Are you experienced with camping?" William asked her.


    "Sort of. My father loved hunting with his friends, so I went with them a few times," she said.


    Hunting was a popular activity among nobles. But while Gorn and the other hunters of Willow Creek hunted to eat and provide food for their families, the nobles usually hunted for fun. There was nothing wrong with that. It was just a different perspective on the same activity.


    They only had two tents, meaning William would have to share with one of the students. He expected to sleep with either Gwen or Yang, as Bianca would certainly be scared of sharing a tent with a man she didn''t know. But that wasn''t the case. Bianca actually wanted to share the tent with William, which caught him off guard.


    He didn''t say anything at the time, though. They prepared something to eat using the bonfire, and William only spoke with her about it once they were inside the tent.


    "Why did you choose to sleep with me? I mean, aren''t they your friends?"


    Bianca smiled. "I just think you are a promising mage and a pretty cool person. Besides, we are sharing a tent, not sleeping together. There''s a difference, alright?"


    "Yeah, I know," William said, preparing his place to sleep. "And thanks for the compliments."


    "You''re welcome."


    The two smiled at each other. The good news was that the tent was a decent size, so they weren''t too close. Both of them had their privacy for the night. William preferred that. He didn''t know Bianca that well yet, so it was nice to have some space.


    Because of the journey, he slept soundly and woke up the next day feeling refreshed. Nothing had happened during the night, which was good. But then, he realized something was off. He looked around and saw that no one else was there. The students were gone, as were the griffins. The only things he had were the tent and the campfire that had extinguished during the night.


    "Shit!"

 Chapter 75 - 75: Lost, and Urgent Matter

    All William had was his steel sword, his demonic sword, and the clothes on his back. His backpack with his supplies was gone. Not only that, but the magical tomes he had borrowed from the school''s library were gone too.


    "Damn it!"


    He had brought the tomes to study during his time away from the school, as he didn''t want to lose any practice time. What would he say to Tholfnir when he got back? That he had lost the precious tomes? And that was assuming he even made it back...


    William walked a few steps and looked around. He was on the peak of a mountain. It was very tall, and freezing cold. The mountain had no discernible path leading up to it. The only way William had managed to get there was by griffin.


    This meant it was essentially impossible for him to descend. What would he do in this situation?


    The first thing William did was try to find a way down. He looked everywhere, but it was impossible. Even with his enhanced attributes, jumping from that location wasn''t a good idea.


    The demonic sword, wrapped in cloth and strapped to his back, woke up. "What happened, kid? Did someone trick you?"


    William already had too many problems, and having that voice inside his head wasn''t helping. "Yes, someone did. Why? Are you here to make fun of me?" William snapped.


    "Of course not," the demonic sword replied, its hoarse voice shivering. "I just want to help you. If you die in this place without food, water, or from the cold, what will happen to me?" The demonic sword knew that William was the chosen one, so protecting him was exactly what it wanted to do.


    In that situation, William wanted to understand why those students had done this to him. Was it envy? Or was there something else behind it?


    There were so many questions that William didn''t have answers to, and his mind was a complete mess. The students seemed to be very sure that William wouldn''t return to the magic academy. The main reason for this was the fact that he was completely lost. He didn''t even know if they had actually gone towards the location where the mission was supposed to be.


    With the privileged view from above, William looked around and noticed only frozen forests and other mountains. He couldn''t see a house or any sign of civilization. Where the hell was he?


    "What should I do first?" William asked.


    "First of all, explain to me what happened."


    William told the demonic sword about the students who had invited him on the mission, and how they had gone to that mountain to camp for the night. The demonic sword laughed.


    "This is strange. Did they show you the scroll with the details of the mission? You know it works just like the guild, where someone has to make a request."


    "No, they didn''t."


    "So how do you know they are actually students?"


    "I mean, how would they enter the academy without anyone noticing them?"


    William was still young and naive, and the demonic sword had to explain things to him. "Look, there are skilled mages who specialize in illusion magic and can disguise themselves. What if they kidnapped real students and assumed their appearances to lure you?" the demonic sword suggested.


    That possibility seemed more likely now that William thought about it, but what for? Why would they kidnap a student like him? A first-year who was still weak compared to the more advanced students at the school?


    The demonic sword didn''t know the answer either. "Did Tholfnir say anything to you when you left? Considering he was the one who allowed you to go."


    William tried to recall the conversation he had with Tholfnir. "Uh, yes. He said that if I don''t get back in 15 days, he would come after me."


    "This is not good, kid," the demonic sword said.


    William didn''t answer. He stood there, thinking about what it could mean. Apparently, the sword already had a guess, but William wanted to figure it out for himself.


    "Tholfnir said he would come after me, meaning he would leave the school... Leaving the school?"


    Things were starting to add up and make more sense to him. Tholfnir was one of the strongest mages in the kingdom, if not the strongest. No one would dare attack the academy with him there, but what if he left to search for his prodigy student? If there was anyone who could make Tholfnir leave the school unattended, it was William.


    "Damn it!" William cursed, punching a nearby tree. "They want to lure Tholfnir out to do something to the school. Is it the kingdom that wants to go to war with us? Or maybe it''s someone else?"


    This wasn''t good. William now had to find a way back to the magic academy in less than 15 days.


    Now that he understood the situation, William didn''t want to waste any time. He searched for a way down the mountain once again, and when he couldn''t find one, it was time to take a risk.


    "Enhanced Strength! Swiftfoot! Iron Skin!"


    He cast all the body-enhancing magic he had, and then began climbing down the mountain. It was steep, tall, and dangerous. He had to jump a few times, and the impact on his body was devastating. At one point, he hit his left arm on a tree while descending, and the impact was so strong that it broke.


    "Agggh, fuck!" William yelled in pain. His arm bent to the side, making it look grotesque. It was a severe injury, but one that could heal, and that was good enough for William. sea??h th§× N?vel(F)ire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    It took him around six hours to reach the base of the mountain, not because he was slow, but because the mountain was so high. And he couldn''t jump from just anywhere. William had to think carefully before each move, making sure he wouldn''t fall to his death.


    The first problem, descending the mountain, was solved. But what now? He had seen the surrounding area from the peak, and there was nothing there. No villages, no cities, nothing. William found himself in a snowy forest, surrounded by vegetation and animals. Snowflakes fell from the sky, landing on his hair and almost changing its color.


    "Kid, even if you don''t make it back to the academy in time, focus on surviving," the demonic sword advised. "If you can survive, then everything will be fine."


    William sighed. He wanted to get back in time to avoid any possible danger, but the demonic sword was right. The priority should be surviving. That was what William needed to do.


    With that thought in mind, William moved into the forest, looking for a source of water. He was thirsty after descending the mountain.


    His left arm was useless at that point, so if anything attacked him, the fight would be fierce and difficult. Thankfully, because of the harsh winter, many animals and magical beasts were in caves and shelters, avoiding the weather.


    While that was good for them, it was tough for William, who didn''t have any shelter...


    After walking for a while, he did find a source of water, a river flowing through the forest. But with it, came danger.

 Chapter 76 - 76: Becoming a Beast Tamer?

    William slowly walked toward the river. He needed water to drink, and a place to think about what to do next. But things didn''t always go his way. He crouched near the water and drank. At first, nothing happened, and he felt safe, but then, a hand burst from the water and grabbed his arm.


    "What the fuck?"


    Startled by the sudden appearance of the hand, William used all his strength to break free. The hand had a powerful grip, and his forearm hurt, but William didn''t give up. He drew his sword with his other hand and slashed at the mysterious hand. It worked.


    The hand let go, and William was finally free. But what was that hand? He couldn''t understand what had tried to pull him into the water.


    "Do you know what monster that could be?" William asked the demonic sword.


    "No idea, but it can''t be good. Stay away from the water for now," the sword advised.


    "You don''t need to tell me that."


    William wasn''t stupid, so he backed away and stayed far from the river.


    But that encounter gave him some clues about his location. William knew that hands like that pulling people into the river weren''t common, at least not in areas frequented by humans. If it were common, he would have heard rumors about it, but he never had.


    Therefore, the only explanation was that he was in an unexplored area, far from civilization. That made the most sense to him. William walked through the forest once again, finding a tall tree to climb to get a better view of the area.


    He did so with ease, thanks to his enhanced physical abilities, and reached the top quickly. He searched the surrounding area, but there was nothing but trees, rivers, and mountains. That wasn''t good.


    "We have a few options to get out of here," the demonic sword said, its voice a low growl that resonated within William''s mind. "We can try to find someone, which is unlikely, or we can tame a flying beast and leave this place."


    William pondered the options, the weight of their predicament settling upon him. Finding someone in this desolate wasteland was a long shot.


    He had surveyed the area multiple times, his senses amplified by his magic, and there was no sign of civilization, no wisp of smoke, no distant call of human activity. Taming a flying beast seemed like their only viable option, but doubts gnawed at him.


    "How can we even find a beast that''s not too powerful to tame?" he mused aloud, his voice barely a whisper in the vast emptiness. "And even if we do, I''m not a beast tamer. I wouldn''t know where to begin."


    The demonic sword, its obsidian blade humming with a faint energy, offered a solution. "I can help you tame a beast, but it won''t be permanent."


    "How?" William asked, a flicker of hope igniting within him.


    "You can use the demonic energy stored within your body," the sword explained. "It will allow you to temporarily dominate the beast, turning it into your demonic mount. But it won''t last forever. Your reserves of demonic energy are...limited."


    "I can do that?" William exclaimed, surprised by the revelation.


    The demonic sword let out a dry, rasping chuckle. "You can do many things, my friend. You just haven''t discovered them all yet."


    With a plan in place, William turned his attention to the immediate challenges. Survival was paramount.


    He wouldn''t be able to tame a flying beast if he succumbed to the harsh realities of this desolate land. Shelter, fire, and food were his priorities. Water, thankfully, was readily available from the nearby river, though the chilling memory of the hand made him wary of approaching its banks.


    He ventured into the forest, his senses alert, searching for a suitable shelter. A cave, nestled within the base of a rocky outcrop, soon presented itself. Dark, damp, and undeniably creepy, it was far from ideal, but it would suffice.


    Sword drawn, William cautiously entered, prepared to fight for his sanctuary. He wasn''t disappointed. A grotesque creature, a quadrupedal zombie with a grotesquely twisted neck, lunged from the shadows, its decaying limbs reaching for him. William, his heart pounding, activated his system''s analysis function. S§×ar?h the n??el Fire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    [Zombie]


    [Estimated Level: 9]


    A wave of relief washed over him. The creature was weak, its level far below his own. He sidestepped the clumsy attack, his sword flashing through the air, severing the zombie''s head with a sickening crunch. He waited, wary of any further movement, but the creature remained still.


    He pressed deeper into the cave, encountering and dispatching several more zombies. But a nagging question lingered in his mind.


    "Why are there zombies here?" he muttered to himself, his voice echoing in the cavernous space. "And that hand... These aren''t the typical creatures one would find in a normal forest."


    A sense of unease settled over him. This place was different, touched by a darkness that went beyond the natural dangers of the wilderness.


    He shared his concerns with the demonic sword, hoping for an explanation.


    "This is...unusual," the sword admitted, its voice a low growl. "The presence of undead creatures, especially in such numbers, suggests a powerful necromantic influence. Perhaps a Lich, or a skilled necromancer, resides nearby."


    "A Lich or a necromancer?" William echoed, his brow furrowing. "Aren''t those incredibly powerful?"


    "Indeed," the sword confirmed. "You''ll need to be cautious. Now, if you''ll excuse me, I must return to my slumber to conserve energy for our taming endeavor. Do not disturb me unless absolutely necessary."


    With that, the sword fell silent, its consciousness receding into the depths of the obsidian blade. William understood. Taming a beast for him would require a significant expenditure of the sword''s power. He would have to face the challenges of this desolate land alone, at least for now.


    He cleared the cave of the remaining zombie debris, tossing the decaying limbs outside, reclaiming the space as his own. He gathered fallen branches and dry moss, building a small fire near the cave entrance. The flickering flames offered a welcome warmth against the biting cold, casting dancing shadows on the cave walls.


    As night fell, the weather took a turn for the worse. Snow piled up outside, the wind howling through the trees.


    "A snowstorm," William muttered, watching the swirling flakes through the cave entrance.


    He retreated deeper into the cave, seeking shelter from the blizzard. Hunger gnawed at his stomach, but venturing out in this weather was out of the question. He would have to endure, to wait for the storm to pass and hope for better conditions come morning. He curled up near the fire, its warmth a small comfort in the face of the unforgiving wilderness.


    But something happened during the night.


    William''s eyes snapped open, his senses alert. A guttural growl, low and menacing, echoed through the cave. He scrambled to his feet, his hand instinctively reaching for his sword. He moved with a practiced silence, slipping behind a large boulder that offered a sliver of concealment. He peered around the edge, his heart pounding in his chest.


    Two figures, cloaked in dark robes, stood near the remnants of his campfire. Their faces were obscured by deep hoods, their voices hushed whispers that barely carried in the wind.


    "Do you think he''s still here?" the man''s voice rasped, a chilling sound that sent shivers down William''s spine.


    "Judging by the state of this...campsite," the woman replied, her voice equally unsettling, "I doubt it. Perhaps he heard us approaching and fled."


    "Perhaps," the man conceded. "We''ll send out scouts in the morning. If he''s still in the area, we''ll find him."


    With a final, chilling glance around the cave, they vanished into the swirling snow, their presence leaving a lingering sense of dread. William remained hidden, his body tense, his mind racing. Who were these people? What were they searching for? And why did they seek him?

 Chapter 77 - 77: Necromancers in the Area

    William''s mind raced. He had no idea who those figures were or why they sought him, but their threat was clear. They were sending scouts to hunt him down. He considered his options, his heart pounding against his ribs like a trapped bird.


    ''What kind of scouts?'' he wondered, his gaze sweeping the desolate landscape. The demonic sword''s words echoed in his mind. ''Necromancers...''


    He recalled the grotesque forms of the zombies he had slain, their unnatural movements, their vacant eyes. A chilling realization dawned on him.


    ''Could the zombies be their scouts?'' he thought, a shiver running down his spine. ''They were the only monsters I faced, and I didn''t see anyone else...''


    The best explanation he could find was that the scouts were the zombies, or the hand that had pulled him into the water, but zombies were more likely. He had to avoid them and any other creatures that might come his way. But how?


    Still afraid that necromancers or other monsters might appear while he slept, William took a while to fall asleep again. He woke up early in the morning, hoping to avoid any scouts the necromancers might send.


    The first thing he did was destroy everything to cover his tracks, and then he left the cave and went into the forest. His priorities were finding food, avoiding undead monsters, and finding a flying beast to tame.


    William knew that flying beasts often lived in the mountains, and there were many mountains around him.


    "I should get some food first, and then climb the mountains again," he murmured.


    The best source of food William could think of was fish. Without a bow, and with the chance of encountering scouts in the forest, fishing seemed to be the safest option. But the hand that had pulled him into the water still worried him, so William decided to fish somewhere else.


    He followed the river, always looking around, trying to spot monsters before they got to him. Eventually, he found a waterfall, where he saw fish jumping out of the water. It was the perfect spot to catch them without a fishing rod. All he had to do was wait until they jumped and grab them with his hand.


    William, with his enhanced strength and agility, made quick work of the fish. He expertly gutted and cleaned it, the sharp scales glinting in the morning light.


    The fish, though not the most appetizing meal, would sustain him. He grimaced as he tucked the slippery carcass into his pockets, the fishy odor clinging to his fingers. It was a small price to pay for survival.


    He would wash his clothes later, once he found a suitable water source. For now, food was his priority.


    William surveyed the landscape, his gaze sweeping across the jagged peaks and snow-dusted slopes. Each mountain held the promise of a hidden lair, a potential sanctuary for a flying beast. He considered his options, his mind sharp despite the hunger gnawing at his stomach.


    ''Trees for shade, a cave for shelter...'' He narrowed his eyes, focusing on a mountain that seemed to fit the criteria. Its lower slopes were cloaked in a thick forest, while its upper reaches were a jagged expanse of rock and ice, riddled with potential caves.


    With a determined glint in his eyes, William set off, his footsteps crunching in the fresh snow. The climb was arduous, the wind whipping at his exposed skin, the cold seeping into his bones. But he pressed on.


    The aftermath of the snowstorm transformed the mountain into a treacherous labyrinth of ice and snow. Each step was a battle against the elements, the biting wind stealing his breath, the treacherous footing threatening to send him tumbling into the abyss.


    Even with his enhanced abilities, William felt his strength waning, his body shivering with exhaustion and hunger. He paused midway up the slope, leaning against a sturdy pine for support, his lungs burning, his muscles screaming for respite.


    From his vantage point, he spotted movement at the base of the mountain. A horde of undead creatures ¨C zombies, skeletons, and grotesque wolf-like figures ¨C scoured the area, their movements purposeful, their forms a chilling reminder of the necromancer''s presence.


    William''s heart pounded. ''They know I''m here,'' he realized, a wave of fear washing over him. ''But they can''t reach me'', he reassured himself, clinging to a sliver of hope.


    The terrain was treacherous, the climb demanding even for someone with his enhanced abilities.


    Those decaying creatures wouldn''t stand a chance. He was safe, for now. But the respite was temporary. He needed to reach the summit, find the flying beast, and escape this cursed land before the necromancers found a way to reach him.


    He stumbled towards the summit, his legs burning, his lungs aching. The world narrowed to a blur of snow and ice, his vision tunneling as exhaustion threatened to consume him. But he pushed on, driven by a desperate need to escape. Finally, he crested the peak, collapsing onto the frozen ground, gasping for breath. sea??h th§× nov§×lF~ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    He lay there for a moment, his chest heaving, his body trembling with fatigue. He needed food, rest, a moment to gather his strength. His gaze swept across the summit, taking in the jagged peaks and the vast expanse of snow-covered wilderness.


    A pristine lake, its surface shimmering like a sapphire mirror, nestled amongst the rocks. ''Perfect,'' he thought. ''A source of water, a potential hunting ground... This must be where the flying beast makes its home.''


    But his hopes were dashed by a distant roar, a chilling sound that echoed through the mountains. He looked up to see a horrifying sight. A griffin, its feathers matted and decayed, its eyes glowing with an eerie green light, circled overhead. And upon its back, the cloaked figure of the necromancer, their skeletal face grinning triumphantly.


    "Fuck!" William cursed, scrambling to his feet. He had underestimated his pursuers.


    They had aerial capabilities, their reach extending beyond the limitations of the ground. Panic surged through him, but he quickly regained his composure.


    He needed to hide, to find a place to regroup and plan his next move. His eyes fell upon a cave, its dark maw gaping open like a hungry beast. He sprinted towards it, his heart pounding, the griffin''s shadow looming over him.


    The cave''s maw yawned before him, a dark abyss promising both refuge and potential danger. William hesitated for a fleeting moment, weighing the risks. Remaining exposed on the mountaintop was a death sentence, the necromancer''s undead griffin circling overhead like a predator stalking its prey. The cave, despite its unknown depths, offered a sliver of hope, a chance to regroup and evade his pursuers.


    He plunged into the darkness, his senses heightened, his sword gripped tightly in his hand. The air grew heavy, the silence pressing down on him like a physical weight. The stench of decay and damp earth filled his nostrils, and his footsteps echoed in the cavernous space.


    The tunnel opened into a vast chamber, its ceiling lost in the shadows. A subterranean lake, its surface eerily still, shimmered in the faint light filtering through a crack in the ceiling. The sight was both beautiful and unsettling, a reminder of the unnatural forces at play in this desolate land.


    And then he saw it. A small cabin, nestled against the far wall, its wooden frame warped and weathered, its windows dark and lifeless.


    ''A cabin?'' William thought, his brow furrowing in confusion. Who would build a dwelling in such a remote and inhospitable place?

 Chapter 78 - 78: Mysterious Girl

    The cabin''s presence in this desolate cave was an anomaly, a puzzle piece that didn''t fit the grim landscape. William, his senses heightened, approached with caution, his footsteps barely disturbing the dust that coated the warped floorboards. He circled the cabin, peering through the grimy windows, searching for any sign of life.


    Inside, bathed in the faint light filtering through the cracks in the walls, lay a woman. She was asleep, her red hair fanned out across a threadbare pillow, her breathing slow and even. Even William''s deliberate attempts to make noise failed to rouse her.


    He studied her closely, taking in her delicate features, her unblemished skin, and the archaic style of her clothing. She seemed out of place, a figure from a bygone era. He activated his system''s analysis function, hoping for a clue to her identity, but it remained stubbornly silent.


    Despite the lack of information, one thing was clear: this woman was no ordinary being. A powerful aura emanated from her, a palpable energy that pressed against William, making it difficult to breathe.


    He scanned the cabin''s interior, his gaze sweeping across the meager furnishings, searching for anything that might shed light on this enigmatic woman and her connection to this strange, desolate land.


    Scattered across a dusty table, he discovered a small hoard of gold coins, their gleam catching the faint light.


    A closer inspection revealed a collection of exquisite jewelry and several artifacts that pulsed with a subtle magical energy. Temptation flickered in William''s eyes, but he quickly dismissed the thought of taking them.


    He had no place to store such treasures, and the risk of waking the slumbering woman, whose power he couldn''t fathom, was too great.


    ''Focus, William,'' he chided himself. ''You need to deal with the necromancers and find a way to escape.''


    He continued his search, but the cabin yielded no further clues. Frustrated, he turned his attention back to the sleeping woman.


    Perhaps she could offer some answers, some guidance. He gently shook her shoulder, calling her, but she remained unresponsive. He tried again, his voice louder, but she didn''t stir. It was as if she were trapped in a deep slumber, her consciousness unreachable.


    The mystery deepened. Who was this woman? Why was she sleeping in this remote and dangerous place? And how could he wake her? The weight of these questions settled upon him, adding to the growing sense of unease.


    The cave entrance echoed with the screech of the undead griffin, its massive wings scraping against the stone. William''s heart pounded in his chest. He had no chance against the necromancer and their monstrous mount in a direct confrontation. He had to hide.


    With a desperate glance around the cavern, his eyes fell upon the subterranean lake. It was his only option. He plunged into the icy water, the shock stealing his breath. He dove deep, the darkness closing in around him. He could hold his breath for an extended period, thanks to his enhanced stamina, but time was not on his side.


    He watched from his watery sanctuary as the necromancers entered the cabin. Their surprise at finding the sleeping woman was evident.


    "What is this place?" the male necromancer exclaimed, his voice echoing in the cavern. "Who is she?" S~ea??h the N?velFire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "I don''t know," the female necromancer replied, her voice laced with greed as she scooped up a handful of gold coins. "But look at all this treasure!"


    But as her fingers closed around the coins, the woman on the bed stirred. Her eyes snapped open, revealing a fiery red that matched her hair. She glared at the intruders, her voice a chilling whisper.


    "Who are you?" she demanded, her tone laced with a dangerous calm. "And what are you doing in my lair?"


    The necromancers scoffed, their arrogance evident. "Your lair?" the male necromancer sneered. "This is just an abandoned cabin in the middle of nowhere. But you seem to have collected some valuable trinkets. We''ll be taking those." He pointed at the gold coins. "We didn''t find who we were looking for, but this will do nicely."


    William, his lungs burning, watched the scene unfold with a mixture of awe and terror. The red-haired woman exuded an aura of power that dwarfed even the necromancers. Her calm demeanor and chilling threats sent shivers down his spine.


    The female necromancer, her greed outweighing her caution, sneered. "We won''t be leaving," she spat, "and you''ll be handing over all your valuables. Understood?"


    That was the final straw. The red-haired woman moved with a speed that defied expectations, her form a blur as she crossed the room. She seized the necromancer by the neck, lifting her effortlessly, and hurled her through the cabin window.


    The impact sent the necromancer sprawling, but she quickly recovered, her anger fueling her power. "That''s all you''ve got?" she taunted.


    The red-haired woman''s response was swift and devastating. She opened her mouth, unleashing a torrent of fire that engulfed the necromancer in a blazing inferno. The screams were cut short as the flames consumed her, leaving only a pile of ash in her wake.


    The male necromancer, his eyes wide with terror, scrambled towards the griffin. He knew he was no match for this woman, her power far exceeding his own. He leaped onto the griffin''s back, urging it to take flight.


    But it was too late. Another blast of fire erupted from the woman''s mouth, engulfing both the necromancer and the undead griffin in a fiery embrace. Their screams echoed through the cavern as they were consumed, their ashes raining down upon the lake.


    William, his body trembling, watched the carnage unfold. He was trapped, his lungs screaming for air, his escape route blocked by a woman who could incinerate him with a breath. He braced himself for the inevitable attack, but instead, her voice, amplified by an unseen force, echoed through the cavern.


    "Would you please emerge from the water?" she called out, her tone surprisingly calm. "I know you''re there."


    William, his body trembling from the cold and the lingering fear, emerged from the lake. He approached the cabin cautiously, his hands raised in a gesture of surrender.


    The woman studied him with a curious gaze, her fiery eyes softening slightly. "You should warm yourself," she said, her voice surprisingly gentle. "You''re freezing. Come here."


    He obeyed, his heart pounding in his chest. He couldn''t afford to anger this woman, whose power dwarfed his own. She pulled him into an unexpected embrace, her warmth enveloping him. William''s cheeks flushed, his body stiff with surprise.


    With a subtle gesture, she channeled her fire magic, drying his clothes and warming him to the core. Then, her nose wrinkled slightly.


    "You have a fish in your pocket," she observed, a hint of amusement in her voice. "It''s rather pungent."


    William, embarrassed, nodded sheepishly. "Yes, I know," he admitted. "I apologize. I didn''t mean to intrude. I was fleeing from those necromancers and stumbled upon your cabin by accident."


    The woman leaned closer, inhaling deeply, her action both unexpected and strangely intimate. "It''s alright," she said, her voice softening. "You have a familiar scent. I''m not angry. You may stay here for a while if you need to, but not too long. I''m quite tired." She yawned, her fiery eyes flickering with a hint of exhaustion. "I''ll be returning to my slumber now."


    Before she reached the bed, William asked, "Can you help me get out of here? I don''t even know where I am..."


    She stopped her movements, staying there in a thoughtful state for a few seconds before turning around to face him.


    "Maybe I can help. Let''s talk."

 Chapter 79 - 79: Womans Identity Revealed

    They settled onto the edge of the bed, the rough-spun blanket scratching at William''s skin. The woman, though her eyelids drooped with weariness, listened attentively as he recounted his tale. He described the mission, the betrayal, the harrowing escape, and his desperate flight through the wilderness. He confessed his ignorance about his current location and his inability to find his way back to Snowpeak Academy.


    The woman''s brow furrowed as she absorbed his story. "Something doesn''t add up," she mused, her voice thoughtful. "You mentioned traveling for a day on a griffin, yes?"


    "That''s correct," William confirmed. "At least, that''s how long it felt."


    "That''s the problem," the woman explained. "To the best of my knowledge, it would take at least three months to reach this location by griffin, even with favorable winds. Are you certain that''s all the time that passed?"


    William''s eyes widened in disbelief. "No, that can''t be right," he insisted. "I know I didn''t travel for that long. It was just one day."


    "Perhaps you were transported using some form of teleportation device," the woman suggested, her eyes gleaming with a sharp intelligence. "Such devices are not uncommon, especially among those with...nefarious intentions. You mentioned a war and a possible connection to your kidnapping? If this is indeed war-related, they wouldn''t hesitate to utilize any means necessary to achieve their goals."


    The woman''s words echoed in William''s mind, each syllable a hammer blow against his understanding of the events. He racked his brain, trying to recall any detail, any sensation that might confirm or deny her theory. But his memories were hazy, fragmented.


    "We did stop on a mountain before nightfall," he conceded, his brow furrowed in thought. "It was... secluded. We couldn''t see much in the darkness." He paused, the realization dawning on him. "They could have used a teleportation device while we slept. Sent us... here."


    "Precisely," the woman affirmed, her voice calm and reassuring. "And no, you wouldn''t have noticed. These devices operate silently, leaving no trace. It''s the most logical explanation." She leaned closer, her gaze intense. "And I suspect those who attacked you followed you here. The undead griffin you encountered... its recent demise suggests it belonged to one of your kidnappers, or perhaps it was the very one you rode from the academy."


    William''s mind reeled. He had been a pawn in a game far more complex than he had imagined. But who were these people? And what was their purpose in bringing him to this desolate land? He looked at the woman, her knowledge and insight both impressive and unsettling. Who was she? What was she doing in this remote and dangerous place?


    "Where exactly are we?" he asked, his voice barely a whisper.


    "This," she replied, her gaze fixed on the dancing flames she cast in her fingers, "is known as the Shadowlands. A haven for those who practice the darker arts, those who seek to avoid the scrutiny of the kingdom and its laws."


    "Practitioners of the dark arts?" William echoed, his brow furrowing. "Are you saying you''re one of them?"


    The woman threw back her head and laughed, a sound that echoed through the small cabin. "Of course not, kid," she said, her voice light and amused. "I''m just here to relax, to get away from the hustle and bustle of civilization."


    "Kid?" William retorted, a touch of indignation in his voice. "We''re practically the same age."


    "Ah, but there you''re mistaken," she replied, her eyes twinkling with mischief. "I have a little secret, so please promise not to tell anyone, or I''ll be forced to incinerate you and turn your precious academy into a pile of ash. You see," she leaned closer, her voice dropping to a conspiratorial whisper, "I''m actually a dragon."


    William stared at her, speechless. Dragons were practically extinct, mythical creatures relegated to legends and bedtime stories.


    "That''s absurd," he finally managed, his voice incredulous. "Dragons don''t exist. No one has seen one in ages."


    The woman smiled, a knowing expression on her face. "That''s because," she explained, "we mastered a spell that allows us to assume human form. It''s been exactly two thousand four hundred and sixty-eight years and ninety-three days since we perfected the transformation. That''s why dragon sightings are so rare."


    William hesitated, unsure whether to believe her outlandish claim. Her power was undeniable, but her casual demeanor and playful tone made it difficult to accept her as the legendary creature she described.


    The woman, sensing his disbelief, let out an exasperated sigh. "You don''t believe me, do you?" she huffed. "Of course not. Fine! If I show you my true form, will you promise to keep it a secret?"


    "Of course," William agreed, his curiosity piqued.


    He knew that dragons were immensely powerful, their strength rivaling even the most skilled mages. If this woman was truly a dragon, keeping her secret was a matter of self-preservation.


    She stepped out of the cabin, her gaze fixed on the night sky. "I wouldn''t want to accidentally demolish my humble abode," she explained with a wink.


    Then, with a surge of energy that crackled through the air, she transformed. William gasped, his eyes widening in disbelief. Before him stood a magnificent dragon, its scales shimmering like amethysts, its wings outstretched like vast tapestries of emerald silk.


    The sheer power emanating from the creature was overwhelming, dwarfing even the aura of the mythical serpent he had encountered in the elven ruins.


    ''Who would win in a fight?'' he wondered, comparing the two creatures in his mind. He instinctively felt that the serpent held a slight edge, its aura darker, more ancient.


    "Satisfied?" the dragon rumbled, its voice a deep, resonating echo. "I told you I was a dragon, you fool."


    With another surge of energy, she transformed back into her human form, her nakedness momentarily forgotten. William, flustered, averted his gaze.


    "Perhaps you could... put some clothes on?" he stammered, his cheeks burning.


    The woman blinked, her expression puzzled. "What? Don''t humans do this sort of thing? Oh, right..." She turned and disappeared into the cabin, returning moments later clad in a simple white dress.


    "So," she asked, settling back onto the bed, "what are you planning to do now? You mentioned wanting to return to your academy in fifteen days, but as I explained, that''s simply not possible."


    "I realize that now," William admitted, his shoulders slumping. "Even with your help, it would take far too long."


    "Indeed," she confirmed. "We''re quite a distance from your precious academy."


    The idea had been to get back to the academy before Tholfnir left, as the people who kidnapped him clearly wanted to do something there, but that wasn''t going to work.


    "I can at least help you reach civilization, and from there, you can continue your journey," the woman offered. "Unfortunately, I cannot reveal my identity. You know, humans are crazy enough to hunt down a dragon and tell everyone about it. I am taking a risk by even speaking to you." S~ea??h the N?velFire(.)net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "Would you really help me with that? It would mean a lot to me!" William said, his heart filled with gratitude.


    "Of course," she said. "I am Amber, by the way."


    "William Velmont. It''s a pleasure to meet you."


    ---


    The flickering torchlight cast long, dancing shadows across the rough-hewn walls of the hidden chamber. A group of cloaked figures huddled around a stone table, their faces obscured by deep hoods, their voices hushed whispers that echoed in the oppressive silence.


    "Report," a voice commanded, its tone sharp and demanding. "How progresses the plan?"


    "The prized mage is secured," one of the figures replied, their voice a low hiss. "I anticipate Tholfnir will abandon his post to search for the boy within days. Then, we proceed."


    A murmur of approval rippled through the group. Their plan, years in the making, was nearing fruition.

 Chapter 80 - 80: Let me Handle This

    "We''ll depart tomorrow," Amber announced, her voice a low rumble that echoed through the small cabin. "It''s getting late, and while I have no fear of the dark, it''s not exactly a safe environment for a human like you."


    William, his mind still reeling from the day''s revelations, realized he had lost track of time completely. The sun had already dipped below the horizon, casting long shadows across the snow-covered landscape. He sighed, accepting the delay.


    "Alright," he agreed, a hint of worry creeping into his voice. "But what if you...fall asleep again?"


    "I won''t," Amber assured him, her tone firm.


    "Are you sure?" William pressed, his anxiety evident.


    "Absolutely," Amber replied, a hint of amusement in her voice.


    "But what if you do?" William persisted. "What should I do then?"


    "Wake me up," Amber said, rolling her eyes. "It''s not complicated."


    "But what if I can''t?" William argued. "What if¡ª"


    "Enough with the ''what ifs''!" Amber interrupted, her voice laced with a playful exasperation. "Just get some sleep."


    William, exhausted from his ordeal, readily obeyed. He collapsed onto the bed, his body sinking into the surprisingly soft mattress. Sleep claimed him almost instantly.


    Amber, however, remained awake. She settled into a worn armchair by the fireplace, her dragon eyes gleaming in the firelight, a silent guardian watching over the slumbering mage.


    When William awoke, the smell of roasted fish filled the air. He emerged from the cabin to find Amber tending a small campfire by the lake, a freshly caught fish sizzling over the flames.


    "Good morning," he mumbled, rubbing the sleep from his eyes.


    Amber glanced at him briefly, then returned her attention to the fish. "Morning," she replied. "There''s food if you''re hungry."


    William, his stomach growling in agreement, grinned. "I definitely am."


    He settled on the grassy bank, savoring the warm, flaky fish.


    "How far is the civilization?" William asked.


    "Far," Amber replied, her voice a low rumble. "And I won''t be flying you there, if that''s what you''re hoping for. I can''t risk exposure."


    William understood. Dragons had lived in hiding for centuries, their existence a secret known only to a select few. Amber''s willingness to help him at all was a testament to her kindness, or perhaps her curiosity.


    "No problem," William assured her. "I appreciate your help regardless. But do you think those... ''students'' who kidnapped me are still in the area?" He remembered the stolen spell books, a valuable resource he couldn''t afford to lose.


    Amber''s lips curled into a sly smile. "I can''t say for sure," she replied, "but I''ll keep my senses alert. Dragons have an exceptional sense of smell, you know. I might be able to catch their scent."


    With a newfound determination, they set off, their footsteps crunching in the snow. The journey ahead was long and uncertain, but William, with Amber by his side, felt a flicker of hope ignite within him. He would return to Snowpeak Academy, reclaim his stolen tomes, and warn his friends of the impending danger.


    They descended the mountain, the journey less arduous now that William''s strength had returned. The sun beat down upon them, the snow glistening under its rays.


    "Do you think we could find those ''students'' and use their teleportation device to return to the academy?" William asked, a hopeful note in his voice. He still clung to the idea of reaching Snowpeak before it was too late.


    "It''s possible," Amber conceded, "but unlikely. If they were truly determined to bring you here, they wouldn''t risk leaving such a valuable tool behind. They''re probably long gone by now."


    William sighed, his shoulders slumping. He knew Amber was right, but the thought of spending months traversing this vast wilderness was disheartening. He had to find a way to accelerate his journey, to reach the academy before the attackers could execute their plan.


    William''s gaze swept across the desolate landscape, a sea of white stretching to the horizon. He couldn''t deny the logic in Amber''s words. Even in this remote wilderness, danger lurked. He had already encountered necromancers and their undead minions. Who knew what other threats might be hidden amongst the snow-covered peaks?


    Amber, her senses attuned to the subtle shifts in the environment, led the way, her path winding through treacherous ravines and icy streams.


    "We should reach civilization in twelve to thirteen days," she estimated, her voice a low rumble. "This winter weather slows our progress."


    William, his impatience growing, pressed her again. "Are you absolutely certain you can''t fly us there? Even at a high altitude?"


    "It''s too risky," Amber insisted. "Even in this remote region, there''s always the chance of being spotted. And those who dwell in the Shadowlands... they tend to possess keen eyes and powerful magic."


    Resigned, William trudged onward, the monotony of the journey broken only by the occasional flurry of snow and the comforting warmth of Amber''s fire magic. She conjured small flames to ward off the chill and ignited their campfires with a flick of her wrist. William, observing her effortless control over the element, added fire magic to his growing list of spells to master. sea??h th§× N?vel(F)ire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Three days passed in a blur of snow-covered landscapes and silent nights. They encountered no monsters, no other humans, only the vast emptiness of the Shadowlands. Then, as they crested a ridge, Amber paused, her nostrils flaring.


    "I smell something," she announced, her voice low and alert. "It could be those ''students'' you mentioned."


    William''s heart leaped with a mix of hope and apprehension. "Are you sure?"


    "Ninety-nine percent," Amber confirmed. "I detect the scent of three griffins. And you said your attackers had griffins, yes? Wild griffins are solitary creatures. This is likely them."


    Hope surged through William, a potent antidote to the weariness that had settled in his bones. The prospect of confronting his captors, of reclaiming his stolen possessions and potentially utilizing their teleportation device, ignited a fire within him. He yearned to understand their motives, to unravel the mystery behind their attack.


    Amber, her senses guiding them, led the way through the snow-covered wilderness. The air was thick with the scent of pine and damp earth, making it challenging to isolate the specific trail she sought. She paused frequently, her nostrils flaring, her brow furrowed in concentration. William, patient and observant, followed closely behind, his hand resting on the hilt of his sword.


    Two days passed, the monotony of the journey broken only by Amber''s occasional updates.


    "They''re moving," she announced, her voice low and alert. "But they''re not using their griffins for long-distance travel. It seems they''re searching for something in this area."


    Intrigue mingled with William''s determination. What were they seeking in this desolate land? Could it be related to the reason they had kidnapped him? The questions fueled his resolve.


    Finally, as they traversed a dense thicket of snow-laden pines, a sight emerged that quickened William''s pulse. A small encampment, nestled amongst the trees, its tents flapping gently in the wind. He recognized the distinctive blue canvas, the same tents they had used during the ill-fated expedition.


    "It''s them!" he hissed, his grip tightening on his sword. The moment of confrontation had arrived.


    The griffins were there, too. All three were tied to nearby trees close to the tents. But at first glance, they didn''t spot the people who had kidnapped William.


    "Let''s go," Amber said. "Don''t be scared. I am here."


    With a powerful dragon by his side, William wasn''t afraid of the mysterious people who had done this to him. Even if they were powerful mages, he doubted they would be anywhere near as strong as Amber.


    They slowly walked over to the camp. When the griffins saw them, they started to make noises, but Amber commanded them to be silent. All it took was a single word from her.


    They cautiously surveyed the campsite. William''s eyes lit up as he spotted his familiar backpack tucked inside one of the tents. He retrieved it, relief washing over him as he confirmed the presence of his precious spell books.


    "Finally," he muttered, a grin spreading across his face.


    "They''re coming," Amber warned, her voice low and alert. Her keen sense of smell had detected their approach.


    Moments later, three figures emerged from the trees. They were older than the ''students'' William remembered, their faces weathered, their attire more befitting seasoned adventurers. The disguises had been convincing, but their identities were undeniable.


    "William?" one of them exclaimed, their surprise evident. "What are you doing here? You were supposed to be..." He trailed off, unable to voice the word ''dead''.


    William''s lips curled into a smirk. "Dead?" he echoed, his voice laced with a newfound confidence. "Not before I get some answers."


    "Answers?" the man scoffed. "You''re entitled to nothing. Damn it!" he cursed, his frustration evident. "Those necromancers were useless. They couldn''t even handle a single student."


    "Oh, you mean the necromancers I killed?" William countered, a hint of amusement in his voice.


    Amber leaned closer, her voice a barely audible whisper. "You mean the necromancers I killed, right?"


    "I know, I know," William whispered back. "But let me handle this." He stepped forward, his gaze fixed on the three figures.

 Chapter 81 - 81: Return

    "You pretended to be students," William accused, his voice laced with a mixture of anger and disdain, "just to kidnap me? You imbeciles!" The frustration and fear he had endured boiled over, fueling his defiance. He knew he was outmatched in a direct confrontation, but with Amber at his side, he refused to cower. S~ea??h the N?vel(F)ire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    The apparent leader of the group sneered. "Indeed we did," he admitted, his tone arrogant. "But don''t flatter yourself, boy. You''re not special."


    "What do you mean?" William pressed, his curiosity piqued.


    "We''re not telling you anything," the mage snapped. "In fact, we''ll finish what those incompetent necromancers failed to do. We''ll eliminate you."


    He began to cast a spell, his hands moving with practiced precision, arcane symbols forming in the air before him. A surge of mana gathered, the atmosphere crackling with energy. It was a high-level spell, its power palpable. William felt a wave of apprehension, but Amber remained unfazed.


    With a casual flick of her wrist, she dispelled the gathering mana, the spell collapsing before it could take form. The three mages stumbled back, their faces contorted in shock and disbelief. They tried again, their combined efforts a desperate attempt to overcome this unseen force, but Amber effortlessly neutralized their magic.


    "W-who are you?" one of them stammered, his voice trembling. "How are you doing this?"


    They had never encountered such power, such effortless control over magic. The realization that they were facing an adversary far beyond their comprehension dawned on them, their arrogance melting into fear.


    For a moment, they thought of trying to escape, but they realized their griffins were frozen in place. The presence of Amber filled them with fear, paralyzing them.


    William sneered. "You''re going to tell me everything I want to know, or you''ll suffer."


    He expected the spies who had infiltrated the academy to crumble under his threat, but they remained defiant.


    One of them shouted, "Destroy the teleportation device before he uses it!"


    They charged towards one of the tents, casting spells on the run, attempting to destroy the tent and the teleportation device within.


    "No!" William roared.


    Amber swiftly neutralized their spells. With blinding speed, she appeared before them, seizing two of the spies by their necks. The last one she eliminated with a single, devastating kick, leaving a gaping hole in their chest.


    The remaining spies, realizing their desperate situation, resorted to a hidden poison concealed within one of their teeth.


    "You ain''t learning anything," they spat.


    These were their final words before the poison ended their lives. William stood speechless. He hadn''t obtained any answers, but at least the teleportation device remained intact.


    "That was close," he muttered. "Imagine if they had destroyed the device."


    Amber rolled her eyes. "And you said you were going to handle this yourself."


    "Things got in the way, alright? Anyway, let''s find this teleportation device. I don''t even know what it looks like," William grumbled.


    He and Amber began searching the camp for the device. They focused on the tents, the spies'' intended target.


    The tents were a chaotic mess, filled with scattered belongings. Finding anything in that disarray seemed impossible.


    After five minutes of searching, Amber discovered the teleportation device. She was the only one who knew what it looked like¡ªa box with a shimmering gemstone on top.


    "This is it," she announced.


    "How does it work?" William asked.


    "The user links two locations, creating a pathway between point A and point B. Point A is likely that mountain stop where you camped," Amber explained.


    "That''s incredible!" William exclaimed, seeing the teleportation device in Amber''s hands. "Let''s head back to the academy now."


    Amber, however, shook her head. "I won''t be accompanying you," she stated, her voice firm. "This is my home, and you''re the one who needs to return, not me."


    William, though disappointed, understood. He had hoped to forge a friendship with this powerful dragon, but her reluctance to leave her sanctuary was understandable.


    "No problem," he said, a grateful smile spreading across his face. "Just send me back to the academy, and I''ll be on my way."


    Amber, her knowledge of ancient magic and technology vast, guided him through the activation process of the teleportation device.


    "Simply stand still and prepare yourself," she instructed. "The sensation can be somewhat disorienting."


    William, remembering his previous experience with the device, braced himself. Amber channeled her mana into the device, its surface glowing with an intense light. She placed it at William''s feet and stepped back.


    "It will activate in a few seconds," she explained. "You''ll materialize back on the mountain where you were initially captured. From there, you''ll have to continue on your own."


    Before William could respond, the world around him dissolved into a blinding flash of light. A wave of nausea washed over him, his senses reeling.


    He blinked repeatedly, trying to regain his equilibrium. When his vision cleared, he found himself standing on the familiar mountaintop, the academy a distant silhouette against the horizon.


    "Those bastards are good," he muttered, shaking his head in disbelief. He had been transported hundreds of miles without even realizing it.


    Now it was time for him to descend the mountain.


    The descent was arduous, the treacherous slopes and loose scree testing his agility and endurance. He cursed his decision not to liberate one of the griffins, but the thought of riding a creature tainted by his enemies filled him with unease.


    "Besides," he muttered to himself, "who''s to say they would even obey me?"


    He navigated the treacherous terrain, the sun serving as his guide.


    Reaching the base of the mountain, he discovered a well-worn path, a welcome sight after days of navigating the pathless wilderness.


    He followed the road, his spirits lifting as he recognized signs of civilization: the occasional farmhouse, a distant plume of smoke rising from a village, and the comforting sound of human voices carried on the wind.


    William was leaving the Shadowlands behind, its darkness and dangers fading with each step. The creatures he encountered now were mere nuisances compared to the horrors he had faced in the depths of that desolate land. He felt a renewed sense of purpose, his determination to reach Snowpeak Academy burning bright.


    The journey was a grueling test of endurance, the road stretching endlessly before him. William pushed himself to his limits, stopping only when exhaustion threatened to overwhelm him.


    He snatched what sleep he could in roadside taverns, his dreams haunted by visions of the Shadowlands and the looming threat to the academy. Guilt gnawed at him, a constant reminder of the danger his friends and mentors faced. He had to reach them in time.


    Three days later, the familiar gates of Snowpeak Academy loomed before him. Relief washed over him, a wave of exhaustion quickly following. As he stepped through the gate, a figure emerged from the shadows. Headmaster Tholfnir, his face etched with worry, approached with a brisk stride.


    "William!" he exclaimed, his voice a mixture of relief and concern. "Where have you been? I was about to organize a search party."


    William met his gaze, his expression serious. "Headmaster," he said, his voice low and urgent, "we need to talk. In private."


    Tholfnir, sensing the gravity of the situation, nodded. "Follow me," he instructed, leading William towards the academy''s inner sanctum.

 Chapter 82 - 82: Dark Revelation, and Trapped?

    William didn''t have much to tell Tholfnir. Despite knowing the spies had planned something at the academy, he remained unaware of their specific goal or identities.


    The two walked through the academy and went straight to Tholfnir''s office. Tholfnir used his magic to further seal the room, adding an extra layer of security to the existing magical formations.


    "So," Tholfnir said, settling into his office chair. "Tell me what happened."


    "The students who recruited me for their mission were actually spies!" William exclaimed.


    "Wait, what?" sea??h th§× Nov§×l?ire.n(e)t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Tholfnir frowned. This wasn''t what he had expected. Spies? In Snowpeak Academy? He couldn''t fathom their motives.


    "Yes, I know, crazy, right?" William said. "They used a teleportation device and sent me to the Shadowlands. I managed to find the device again and return to a mountain near the academy."


    "And what did they want with you? If you''re telling the truth, the real students might be missing!" Tholfnir said, realizing the gravity of the situation.


    "They wanted me gone so you would search for me. With you away from the academy, they planned to do something here. I don''t know what, but they didn''t want you around," William explained.


    It was the most logical explanation he could come up with, considering everything that had happened.


    Tholfnir fell into deep thought. "This isn''t the first time something like this has happened," he said. "In fact, spies have been trying to infiltrate this place for ages, but no one knows why."


    "What do you mean? Aren''t they trying to steal books or artifacts?" William asked.


    He assumed Snowpeak Academy would be a prime target for thieves, with its valuable books and artifacts. But apparently, that wasn''t the case.


    "Yes and no. We do have some valuable books, but most have multiple copies. We''re not the only academy with a library. There are countless libraries throughout the world."


    But a nagging doubt lingered in William''s mind.


    "Headmaster," he said, "why would they need you out of the academy? You constantly leave for meetings and other urgent matters. They could have done something without kidnapping me!"


    William stared at Tholfnir, awaiting an answer. The old headmaster was lost in thought.


    "Are you sure they wanted to kidnap you just to get me out of here?" Tholfnir asked.


    "Sure is a strong word, but yes, I believe so. The kidnappers said I wasn''t special, just a pawn in their plan."


    Tholfnir sighed. "I don''t have an answer for that, but I''ll investigate further. I''m glad you''re back and safe. I should have forbidden you to go."


    William shook his head. "Don''t blame yourself, Headmaster. It wasn''t your fault. Let me know if you find the answer to my question. I want to know more about these people."


    He left Tholfnir''s office.


    Tholfnir waited a moment before casting a spell, vanishing from his office and reappearing inside a secret chamber within the academy grounds.


    A cloaked figure sat on a throne-like chair. The figure was grotesque, with a massive mana stone connected to its body, pulsing with life.


    "So, how did it go?" the cloaked figure asked.


    Tholfnir saluted. "The kid didn''t realize I''m not the real Tholfnir. Everything is proceeding according to plan."


    "Good. You were right about Tholfnir," the cloaked figure said. "He left to search for the boy, falling right into our trap."


    Tholfnir laughed. "He did? How did you subdue that beast of a mage?"


    "Preparation is key. Tholfnir is sealed and being transported to one of our islands," the figure said. "But can you maintain the disguise? Our operation will take time."


    "Yes, of course."


    "Good."


    The mysterious figure vanished, along with the throne and the pulsating mana stone. The image had been projected from elsewhere.


    The imposter Tholfnir left the secret chamber and returned to his office.


    William walked through the academy and encountered Professor James, who approached him with a warm greeting.


    "William, you''re back! Tholfnir searched for you but couldn''t find you. I''m glad you''re safe," James said.


    This struck William as odd. Tholfnir hadn''t mentioned searching for him.


    ''Maybe he just looked around the academy and didn''t find me...'' he thought.


    It was strange, but William trusted that Tholfnir wasn''t lying.


    "Yes, I''m safe and sound. How''s your recovery coming along?" William asked.


    James still bore some injuries from their encounter in the elven ruins. "Things are progressing well. I''m back to teaching, and we''re preparing to explore the ancient ruins further. I also wanted to speak with you about something."


    They went to the library for a private conversation. Though not as secluded as William''s meeting with Tholfnir, the library was mostly empty.


    "I need a research assistant," Professor James began. "Not just to study the artifacts we found in the ruins, but to..." He leaned closer to William. "...learn more about the people who killed the students."


    "But didn''t the academy higher-ups say they would handle this?" William whispered back. "I don''t think we should investigate on our own."


    Professor James sighed. "I don''t know if they''ll find anything or are even trying. But I also know it''s dangerous to pursue this, so you can assist me with other things for now."


    James wouldn''t intentionally endanger a student, especially after what happened in the ruins.


    "What''s in it for me?" William asked. "You know I have a lot on my plate with my studies."


    Life at Snowpeak Academy was demanding. William needed a good reason to take on more.


    "I can pay you and offer private combat lessons," Professor James suggested.


    William didn''t hesitate. "Deal."


    He wasn''t interested in the money, but the combat lessons were a valuable opportunity to grow stronger.


    "Great," James said. "But private lessons are forbidden, so we must be careful not to get caught. Don''t expect these lessons to start immediately."


    "No problem," William said, "but can we talk about it tomorrow? I need to rest."


    "Of course."


    William left the library and returned to his dorm. Tholfnir had informed the professors that William would have three days to recover.


    Back in his room, William noticed his SSS skill had recharged. He activated it, opening a portal to Aethel''s ancient past.


    It was morning, and Jinra was already urging him to return to their journey.


    "We can''t afford to lose time," Jinra said. "The academy is still far away."


    William got up, then realized something was different. The timer that usually indicated his remaining time in the past¡ªtypically 24 to 48 hours¡ªnow displayed a much longer duration.


    He calculated that he would have to remain in the past for three months.


    ''Three months? Why the sudden change?'' William wondered.


    He tried to recall any significant events from the past few days but couldn''t think of anything that might explain it.


    ''It seems I''ll be here for a while...'' William thought.


    Not that it was a bad thing. William was excited to have more time to explore the past, especially with the prospect of visiting a past version of Snowpeak Academy¡ªat least, he believed that''s where they were headed.


    "I''m ready," William said.


    They mounted their horses and resumed their journey toward the academy.


    William still had a long way to reach the academy, but he believed time would fly past him in the following days.

 Chapter 83 - 83: Ancient Snowpeak Academy

    The journey proved challenging for William. Aethel''s primitive past was a dangerous place.


    The roads were unsafe, and Jinra, by concealing his aura, ensured that beasts would attack them.


    "This is part of your training," he said, observing William as he battled all manner of creatures.


    "Die, beast!" William roared, slashing his steel sword through a three-headed boar.


    [Level Up]


    [Level Up]


    [Level Up]


    That message flashed before William''s eyes repeatedly throughout his journey. He constantly battled beasts, gaining incredible amounts of experience.


    Jinra only intervened when William faced insurmountable odds, otherwise leaving him to fight independently.


    With each passing day, William felt his body grow stronger and his movements sharper. They traveled by horse, stopping only to fight creatures that crossed their path.


    At night, they camped. William used this time to read and practice spells from his academy manuals, but exhaustion from the day''s battles often overcame him, preventing him from studying for long.


    Thus, a month passed.


    After a month of travel with Jinra, they finally reached a familiar landmark: Snowpeak Mount.


    Unlike in present-day Aethel, there was no city here. It was just a mountain, with a few cabins and a stone building under construction at its peak.


    "That''s the academy you''ll be attending," Jinra said, pointing to the summit. "It will take us a few days to climb, but we''re close."


    The academy looked different from the one William knew, but he could see the foundational structure was the same.


    As they prepared to continue their climb, a young man passed by. He wore fine robes, his long hair framing a face adorned with round glasses. He had the distinct air of a scholar.


    "Are you two heading to the magic academy?" the man inquired.


    Jinra nodded. "Yes, we are. Why?"


    The man smiled. "I''m heading there as well. In fact, I''m one of the professors. Would you like a ride? I have a flying mount that will make the journey much faster."


    "What about our horses?" Jinra asked, though he was clearly interested in the offer. Reaching the academy quickly was appealing, as scaling the mountain with its precarious infrastructure would be arduous. There was no clear path, no shelter from the harsh weather, and no place to rest during the climb.


    "Don''t worry," the man assured him. "I can use my magic to lift them as well. So, what do you say?"


    Jinra accepted, especially since William was eager to fly. The professor cast two spells: one to lull the horses to sleep, and another to levitate them.


    The flying mount turned out to be a winged lizard, a creature unlike anything William had ever seen.


    They climbed onto the lizard''s back, which had ample space, and soared towards the academy. The horses floated beside them, enveloped in a protective blue barrier generated by the professor''s magic.


    "So, are you bringing your son or grandson to join the academy?" the professor asked, his eyes twinkling with curiosity as he glanced between the weathered old man and the young boy at his side.


    Jinra, his beard as white as the snow-capped peaks surrounding them, chuckled. "Indeed. I am Jinra, and this is William." He paused, a hint of amusement in his voice. "And you are?"


    "Oh, forgive my rudiness!" The professor extended a hand, his grip surprisingly strong. "Professor Lincoln. Welcome to Snowpeak Magic Academy."


    William, despite his youthful appearance, was already attuned to the subtle currents of magical energy. He could sense that Lincoln was a powerful mage, perhaps even stronger than Professor James.


    ''Could he beat Professor James in a fight?'' The thought flickered through his mind.


    "We have around 80 students currently enrolled," Lincoln said, his voice carrying a hint of pride. "We''re glad you''ve chosen to join us, William. It''s tough to live in this harsh weather, but you''ll get used to it."


    "80 students?" William echoed, surprised. He was used to academies teeming with hundreds, even thousands of aspiring mages.


    Lincoln nodded, understanding the boy''s surprise. "It''s a modest number, I admit. We''re a relatively new academy, and our location isn''t exactly...favorable." He gestured towards the towering, snow-laden mountains that encircled them. "Most acolytes prefer to learn magic in the academies near the beaches. There''s one on a tropical island that''s quite famous."


    William understood. Snowpeak Magic Academy wasn''t renowned. It lacked the allure of sun-drenched beaches and bustling cities.


    "Is this place safe?" William asked, his young brow furrowed with concern. The imposing mountains and the starkness of the landscape seemed to whisper of hidden dangers.


    Professor Lincoln puffed out his chest, a touch of defiance in his voice. "Of course! We have a sturdy wall surrounding the academy grounds," he said, gesturing towards the stone barrier that snaked through the snowdrifts. "We''re even reinforcing it and exploring ways to add magical defenses in the future. Rest assured, the main building and the dormitories are perfectly secure. You won''t be disappointed."


    William, however, couldn''t help but compare this Snowpeak Academy to the one he knew. That academy boasted an infamous entry exam, a grueling trial that only the most talented could overcome. This Snowpeak Academy seemed...desperate. As if they''d accept anyone just to fill their classrooms.


    He observed the landscape as they ascended the mountain, his eyes taking in the unfamiliar sights. The main building, perched atop the peak, bore a striking resemblance to the one he remembered. But the surrounding walls were smaller, less imposing. And where were the shimmering barriers, the intricate magical formations that should have enveloped the academy in a protective embrace? sea??h th§× n??el Fire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    The silence was unsettling. The bustling city that usually thrived near the academy was absent, replaced by an eerie stillness. With only 80 students scattered across this vast expanse, the place felt desolate, almost haunted.


    "Here we are," Professor Lincoln announced, his voice breaking the silence. "You''re welcome to stay in the dormitory for a few days before returning, Jinra. Just to help William settle in."


    "I''ll show you to your rooms for the night," Lincoln continued, "and then we can have a tour tomorrow."


    William knew the layout of the academy like the back of his hand. What could a tour possibly offer? Still, a flicker of curiosity lingered. Perhaps this Snowpeak Academy held surprises he hadn''t anticipated.


    Professor Lincoln led them towards the dormitory. It occupied the same location as William recalled, but the building itself was a pale imitation of its counterpart. Smaller, older, almost dilapidated.


    "All the rooms are the same," Lincoln said with a dismissive wave, "so you don''t even need to choose."


    William''s heart sank. No choices. No options. Just like this entire academy, it seemed ¨C a faded echo of the grandeur he knew.


    The night passed surprisingly well for William. The unfamiliar bed and the chilling mountain air did little to disturb his sleep. He awoke feeling refreshed, a flicker of anticipation rising within him as he remembered the promised tour.


    Stepping out of the dormitory, he was met with a barrage of curious stares. The other students, scattered across the courtyard, seemed to pause in their activities, their eyes drawn to the newcomer.


    William realized that in an academy this small, every new arrival would be an event. News must have traveled fast. He was a stranger in a tight-knit community, an outsider stepping into their world.


    Instead of Professor Lincoln, a tall, imposing figure awaited them. The headmaster. His muscular frame and the jagged scar that bisected his right eye spoke of battles fought and hardships endured.


    "You''re the new student?" the headmaster boomed, his voice resonating with authority. "Follow me."


    No pleasantries. No welcoming smiles. Just a curt command that echoed the starkness of the academy itself. William, despite his initial reservations, found himself intrigued. This Snowpeak Academy, with its rough edges and its air of mystery, was slowly drawing him in.

 Chapter 84 - 84: Bloodline?

    "This is the main building where most classes are held," Headmaster Grant declared, his voice echoing through the cavernous space. He gestured towards the imposing structure with a sweep of his hand. "There are a few outdoor lessons, of course, but those are primarily for specialized disciplines."


    Grant strode through the academy grounds with a brisk pace, pausing only for fleeting explanations. He seemed determined to rush through the tour, as if his time were a precious commodity.


    "We''re still developing this academy," he said, his tone leaving no room for argument. "Don''t expect luxuries. You''re here to study, am I right?"


    "Yes, Headmaster Grant," William replied, a hint of uncertainty in his voice.


    "Good. Now, head inside and find your first class. It''s in the third room on the right as you enter."


    "But what about the uniform?" William asked, remembering the mandatory attire at his previous academy.


    Grant let out a harsh laugh. "Uniform? Kid, we barely have a foundation here. Uniforms are the least of our concerns. Now, off you go."


    With that, Headmaster Grant turned and strode away, his attention clearly drawn elsewhere. The academy, with its ongoing construction and the looming task of establishing magical defenses, demanded his constant oversight.


    Following Grant''s directions, William navigated the main building with ease. The interior, while spacious, lacked the intricate details and ornate decorations he was accustomed to.


    He arrived at his classroom just as the lesson began. The instructor, a man named Kurt, was already addressing the assembled students.


    "A new student!" Kurt exclaimed, his face breaking into a welcoming smile. "We''re always happy to have more eager minds. What''s your name?"


    "William," he replied.


    "Welcome, William. Please, take a seat. This is the introductory combat class."


    As William surveyed his classmates, he noticed a distinct lack of noble attire. These were commoners, their faces etched with a mixture of determination and apprehension. Sear?h the n?vel_Fire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    It dawned on him then. Snowpeak Academy, with its remote location and lack of an entry exam, presented a rare opportunity for these commoners. A chance to learn magic, to rise above their station.


    In this era, where information traveled slowly, the presence of these commoners spoke volumes. They likely had connections to merchants or influential families, allowing them to learn of this hidden academy. They weren''t simple farmers; they were driven individuals seeking to forge their own destinies.


    "The path to combat mastery lies in practice," Kurt declared, his voice ringing with conviction. "First, you''ll each learn a spell suited to your abilities. Then, we spar! That''s how you truly hone your skills."


    Professor Kurt moved with surprising agility, quickly assessing each student''s magical affinity. He assigned spells with a practiced eye, tailoring them to individual strengths.


    William received a C-rank body enhancement spell. It was child''s play. With his Magic Mind active, he absorbed the intricate workings of the spell in an instant. He''d already mastered far more complex incantations.


    "You''ve mastered it already?" Kurt exclaimed, astonishment etched on his face. "That''s incredible! Have you studied magic before?"


    "A bit," William replied casually. "There was a reclusive mage in my village who taught me the basics."


    "Even so, this is remarkable," Kurt said, shaking his head in disbelief. "You can use the remaining time to explore the library or practice. We''ll begin sparring once everyone has grasped their assigned spell."


    William frowned. "Are you certain? What about the other classes?"


    "Other classes?" Kurt chuckled. "Our focus here is combat. Other subjects are touched upon occasionally, but they''re secondary."


    This academy was drastically different from what William expected. He soon learned why. Fields like enchantment, alchemy, magical history, and artifact creation were in their infancy. Knowledge was scarce, research limited. Teaching these subjects was considered impractical, even frivolous.


    In this primitive era, survival was paramount. Aethel was a land riddled with magical beasts and hidden dangers. Families sent their children to learn magic not for scholarly pursuits, but to become weapons. To protect their homes, to vanquish threats. Brewing potions held little appeal compared to the raw power of combat magic.


    While this disappointed William, who thirsted for knowledge in all its forms, he quickly recognized the opportunity. ''I can use my advanced understanding to pioneer these neglected fields...''


    The idea sparked excitement within him. Becoming an expert in a burgeoning field could bring him wealth, resources, and connections. He could explore the world, uncover its secrets, and achieve a level of influence far beyond that of a mere student.


    With his first class effectively dismissed, William decided to explore the library. Though the main building''s exterior mirrored the one he knew, the interior was a labyrinth of unfamiliar corridors and misplaced rooms. Finding the library proved to be a challenge in itself.


    When he finally located it, a wave of disappointment washed over him. Gone were the towering shelves overflowing with ancient tomes. This library, while spacious, was a paltry shadow of its counterpart. The collection was meager, and most of the available books focused solely on combat.


    As William browsed the limited selection, a voice echoed in his mind ¨C the demonic sword, its presence a constant companion.


    "We''re in the past, aren''t we?" the sword mused, its tone a blend of curiosity and awe. "I still can''t fathom how you achieved this... Regardless, brat, I sense a book here that might hold valuable information about demons and demonic energy. You should seek it out."


    "Why don''t you just tell me what I want to know?" William retorted, a hint of frustration in his voice. "I''m wasting time searching while you could simply provide the answers."


    A brief silence followed. "The truth is... I don''t remember everything," the sword confessed. "I''m merely a sword infused with a demonic soul. I don''t possess the full memories of the being that was used to enchant me."


    The sword''s knowledge, while vast, was fragmented. If William truly wanted to understand the sword and the demonic energy he wielded, he needed to seek answers elsewhere.


    "Are you sure there''s even a relevant book here?" William asked, skepticism coloring his tone. "The present-day library has a restricted section with such texts, but I doubt this one does."


    "There is one," the sword insisted. "I can sense its power. It may not contain all the answers you seek, but it''s worth investigating."


    Guided by the sword''s subtle promptings, William embarked on a quest through the library''s shelves. Finding a specific book without knowing its title or appearance was like searching for a needle in a haystack.


    But the sword could feel the book''s energy, leading William with an almost instinctive certainty. After an hour of relentless searching, he found it.


    The book was bound in dark leather, its cover adorned with a strange symbol ¨C a serpent, coiled and menacing.


    ''A snake? Like the one I found in the ancient ruins?'' The thought struck him like a bolt of lightning.


    As William reached for the book, a jolt of energy surged through him. He felt an inexplicable connection, a sense of familiarity. Fleeting images flashed before his eyes ¨C fragmented memories, dark rituals, and a sense of overwhelming power.


    [Your bloodline is awakening...]


    [Time for completion: 3 months]


    William had no idea what that was, but he guessed it had something to do with the blood the mythical snake gave him...

 Chapter 85 - 85: New Friend, Test and Practice

    The System remained silent, leaving William to ponder the cryptic message. He glanced around the library, ensuring he was alone before carefully opening the book and delving into its contents.


    It was a chronicle of demonkind, detailing their history and diverse races. Contrary to popular belief, demons weren''t inherently evil. They were simply another race, like elves, that once walked the world.


    Of course, demons differed from the benevolent image of elves. They were often depicted as barbaric and ruthless. But how much of that was truth, and how much was propaganda? William had only encountered elven ruins, not the elves themselves. And his sole experience with a demon was a hunter driven mad by corrupted energy, not a true demon by birth.


    Intrigued, he tucked the book into his backpack, eager to devour its contents in private. ''What else can I find here?'' he wondered, scanning the shelves.


    Some spells mirrored those he knew from the present, albeit in cruder forms. The manuals were less organized, the techniques less refined. Yet, William sensed valuable insights within these archaic texts. They offered a different perspective, a glimpse into the magical practices of a bygone era.


    As he immersed himself in exploration, another student entered the library.


    "You''re the new student, right?" he said, extending a hand. "Marcel Blackwood. Pleasure to meet you!"


    "William," he replied, returning the gesture. "The pleasure is mine. What brings you here?"


    Marcel, an affable young man with an easy smile, seemed eager to chat. "Trying to find a new spell to learn. There are so many options here, it can be overwhelming."


    "I understand completely," William agreed. "But I''m sure you''ll find something worthwhile in this collection."


    "Oh, definitely," Marcel said with a laugh. "Coming from a place with practically no books, having this many to choose from is a luxury! I''d rather have this problem than no spells to learn at all."


    Marcel''s comment piqued William''s curiosity. "You said you come from a place with few books?" he inquired, eager to learn more about this world and its inhabitants.


    "We had a handful," Marcel explained, "less than ten in the entire village. It''s a miracle I learned to read and write. I''m grateful my father hired a tutor."


    "And where is this village?" William asked.


    "The Shadowlands," Marcel replied. "The name might sound ominous, but it''s not that bad. I think it''s called that because of all the mountains casting shadows. Don''t get any ideas about me practicing dark arts, though!" he added with a grin.


    William''s mind raced. The Shadowlands, in his time, was a desolate place filled with treacherous forests, towering mountains, a dragon lurking in a cave, and necromancers seeking his life. Could this be the same place?


    "I''ve never heard of the Shadowlands," he said, feigning ignorance. "Are there any cities there?"


    "There''s one major city," Marcel explained, "but most people live in villages. I grew up in one, but my father was a merchant, so we were better off than most. What about you?"


    "Similar story," William replied. "I''m from a small village called Willow Creek. I learned what I know from a reclusive mage who lived nearby."


    "That''s amazing!" Marcel exclaimed. "No wonder you mastered that spell so quickly. You already had a mentor!"


    "He certainly did help me with it," William agreed, a genuine smile gracing his lips. He found himself enjoying Marcel''s company, a welcome respite from the unfamiliar surroundings.


    They chatted for a few more minutes before Marcel announced his departure. But as he turned to leave, he paused, a mischievous glint in his eyes. "I know you''re new here, but are you planning on participating in the upcoming mission?"


    "Mission?" William echoed, his curiosity piqued.


    "You know the academy has another branch, right?" Marcel explained. "It''s like a sister academy, with the same principles and goals. They''re facing some challenges, being newer than us, and they need students to help build it up. Some might even become tutors there. It''s located on one of the islands in an archipelago."


    "What? Really?" William exclaimed, surprised. He''d never heard of another Snowpeak Academy, let alone one on an island.


    ''This can only mean that the project ultimately failed...'' he thought, recalling the academy''s history. This island endeavor was clearly not recorded in the annals of the present-day Snowpeak Academy.


    "It''s true," Marcel confirmed. "They''re selecting the best students. But the actual test is in six months. If you prove yourself, we could go together! I like the idea of living on an island and becoming a tutor. It certainly beats this freezing weather."


    The prospect appealed to William as well. He yearned to explore new places, and six months at Snowpeak Academy would provide ample time to uncover the secrets of this era.


    "Thanks for telling me," William said, his enthusiasm growing. "I''ll definitely try my best to qualify. It sounds like an incredible opportunity."


    "That''s awesome!" Marcel beamed. He gave William a final wave. "See you later!"


    As Marcel disappeared amongst the bookshelves, William felt a surge of excitement.


    The prospect of exploring a new branch of the academy ignited William''s adventurous spirit. He left the library, his mind buzzing with possibilities. He briefly considered searching for more spells, but decided to focus on mastering the ones he already possessed ¨C a collection of ice spells and advanced body enhancement techniques acquired before his journey into the past.


    Back in his room, William reviewed his status:


    Name: William Velmont


    Level: 16


    Class: None


    Attributes:


    Strength: 48


    Agility: 47


    Stamina: 46


    Intelligence: 423


    Mana: 102


    Demonic Energy: 10


    Active Bonuses: +40% Learning Speed


    His level was impressive, and his attributes were significantly higher than average, thanks to the demonic energy coursing through his veins. But the absence of a class nagged at him. He knew classes typically manifested around level 30, though some rare individuals developed them earlier, around level 20.


    ''Still a long way to go,'' he mused.


    His room, while lacking the comforts of his previous life, provided adequate shelter from the biting cold. The crackling fireplace offered a welcome warmth, casting dancing shadows across the stone walls.


    He settled near the hearth, his attention drawn to the "Icy Weapon" spell tome. This A-rank spell promised to infuse his weapon with ice, amplifying its power and inflicting debilitating effects on his enemies. As a swordsman, this was a must-have in his arsenal.


    With the fire warming his body and a steaming cup of tea at his side, William immersed himself in the intricacies of the spell. He practiced the incantations, visualized the flow of mana, and honed his control over the icy energy. He took occasional breaks to replenish his tea and stretch his limbs, but his focus remained unwavering.


    As the day waned, the dormitory gradually filled with returning students, their chatter and laughter disrupting the peaceful atmosphere. Recognizing the need for rest, William set aside his practice, content with the progress he''d made.


    A knock echoed through the room, pulling William from his thoughts. He opened the door to find Marcel standing sheepishly in the hallway.


    "I asked around and found out which room you were in," Marcel admitted, "I was wondering...would you be interested in grabbing some dinner? They serve a free meal in the dining hall."


    William chuckled. Some traditions, it seemed, transcended time. "Sure, why not?"


    The dining hall bustled with activity as students gathered for the evening meal. Among the crowd, William spotted a familiar face ¨C Professor Lincoln, the man who had escorted them to the academy.


    Marcel, who had settled beside William, followed his gaze. "He''s one of the most enigmatic professors here," he commented, his voice dropping to a conspiratorial whisper. "Doesn''t actually teach any classes, though. I have no idea what he does."


    William shared Marcel''s curiosity. Was Lincoln involved in constructing the academy''s defenses? Or did he serve some other, more clandestine purpose?


    Across the hall, William noticed Professor Kurt, his combat instructor, engaged in a lively conversation with a group of students.


    The intimate atmosphere of the academy fostered a sense of camaraderie. Unlike the sprawling, competitive environment of his previous school, here, everyone knew each other, creating a more supportive and collaborative learning experience.


    William savored the hearty meal, primarily composed of game hunted from the surrounding wilderness. It was a welcome change from the more refined, yet somewhat bland, cuisine of his former academy.


    After dinner, William announced his intention to return to the library. Marcel, surprised by his dedication, raised an eyebrow. sea??h th§× N?vel(F)ire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "Are you sure? The library at this hour? I don''t think anyone else studies this late," Marcel remarked, a hint of amusement in his voice.


    "I''d like to get some more reading in," William explained. "The dormitory is a bit too lively for serious study right now. Besides, I need to prepare for that test in six months, right?"


    The mention of the test reignited Marcel''s enthusiasm. "You''re absolutely right! Go for it, William! I know we''ll both pass with flying colors!" He clapped William on the back with a grin and headed towards the dormitory.


    William, with renewed determination, made his way back to the library. He settled into a quiet corner, the "Icy Weapon" tome open before him. Hours melted away as he immersed himself in the intricacies of the spell. Eventually, fatigue overcame him, and he drifted off to sleep amidst the towering shelves.


    He awoke with a start, the silence of the library shattered by a muffled sound echoing from the hallway. Someone was moving about in the darkness.

 Chapter 86 - 86: Marcel has a Secret

    William''s eyes snapped open, his heart pounding in his chest. The sharp echo of footsteps sliced through the silence of the library, jolting him awake. ''I fell asleep...'' He blinked rapidly, rubbing the sleep from his eyes.


    He pushed himself to his feet, the footsteps echoing once more, sending a surge of adrenaline through his veins. Who else would be in the academy at this hour? The library was shrouded in darkness, the rest of the building equally still and silent.


    Fear prickled his skin. He instinctively ducked behind a bookshelf, the inky blackness concealing him. Peering towards the entrance, he saw a figure emerge from the hallway. A figure cloaked in black, their face obscured by the shadows.


    Curiosity battled with caution. It was risky to follow, but William couldn''t resist the urge to uncover the mystery. He moved with practiced stealth, keeping close to the walls, his footsteps barely disturbing the quiet.


    The figure turned a corner. William followed, his heart pounding in his chest. But when he reached the turn, the hallway was empty. ''Where did they go?''


    A hand clamped down on his shoulder, freezing him in place. He whirled around, his breath catching in his throat.


    It was Professor Lincoln.


    "William? What are you doing here?" Lincoln asked, his brow furrowed in confusion.


    William''s eyes darted to Lincoln''s attire. It was different from the black robe he''d seen on the mysterious figure. "I fell asleep while studying," he explained, forcing a casual tone. "I woke up when I heard footsteps."


    Lincoln''s expression shifted. "Footsteps? It was probably just me. I forgot something in my office and came back to retrieve it."


    Doubt gnawed at William. Could it really have been Lincoln? Or was there something more to this encounter? He decided to keep his suspicions to himself. "Makes sense," he replied, feigning understanding. "Well, I should get back to my room."


    "Indeed you should," Lincoln said with a smile.


    As William turned to leave, Lincoln stopped him. "Hey, William," he said, his voice dropping to a conspiratorial whisper, "could you keep this a secret? Headmaster Grant doesn''t like professors wandering the halls at night. I don''t want to get in trouble. I''ll make it worth your while."


    The request, coupled with Lincoln''s earlier behavior, amplified William''s suspicions. Something wasn''t right.


    "Sure, no problem," he agreed, his mind racing. He needed to get to the bottom of this.


    William returned to his room, the silence of the academy pressing in around him. In this bygone era, Snowpeak lacked the security measures of the future. No guards patrolled the grounds, no protective enchantments shimmered in the darkness. The academy stood alone, a solitary beacon against the vast wilderness. Sear?h the n?velFire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    The dormitory was shrouded in sleep, the students lost in dreams of magical prowess and future triumphs. William slipped into his room, his mind a whirlwind of unanswered questions. Sleep eluded him as he replayed the encounter in the library, analyzing every detail, every word.


    The next day dawned, and William found himself with another free day. While his classmates grappled with their newly assigned spells, he dedicated himself to mastering "Icy Weapon." He meticulously practiced the intricate runes, his focus unwavering despite the lingering unease from the previous night.


    Jinra, his loyal mentor, remained at the academy, providing a comforting presence. William, trusting his elder implicitly, recounted the mysterious encounter in the library.


    Jinra listened patiently, his expression a mix of concern and reassurance. "Worry not, William," he said calmly. "Headmaster Grant is a man of honor and justice. But if you discover more about this mysterious figure, you should inform him. He will know what to do."


    "I understand. Thank you for your guidance," William replied, feeling a wave of gratitude for Jinra''s unwavering support.


    "It was nothing," Jinra said warmly. "Remember, should you become a powerful mage, I can secure you a prestigious position in the army, if that is your desire."


    "I appreciate the offer, Jinra," William said, "but I yearn to explore the world, not be confined to a single place. Speaking of which," he continued, his curiosity piqued, "I heard that Snowpeak Academy has a branch on an island, and they''re seeking assistance in its development. What are your thoughts?"


    "That''s news to me," Jinra admitted, stroking his beard thoughtfully. "It could be a valuable experience, but if they''re actively recruiting help, it suggests the situation isn''t ideal."


    "I understand," William replied. "They need people to assist with construction and act as mentors. I have six months to consider it. If I decide to go, I''ll send you a letter."


    Jinra beamed, pleased that William kept him informed. "Thank you, William. I appreciate you confiding in me." He paused, then added with a chuckle, "Now, if you''ll excuse me, I believe I''ll return to my room. Headmaster Grant doesn''t take kindly to outsiders like myself wandering the halls."


    Jinra departed, leaving William alone in the courtyard. Moments later, Marcel appeared, his face etched with a mixture of excitement and apprehension.


    "William," he began, his voice hushed, "I have something important to tell you. Can we speak somewhere more private?"


    William, intrigued, readily agreed. He''d only known Marcel for a short time, but the young man''s earnest demeanor piqued his curiosity. What secrets could he possibly possess after only a few months at the academy?


    They ventured beyond the academy walls, seeking refuge within the dense forest. "Even the dormitories aren''t safe," Marcel explained, his eyes darting nervously towards the imposing structure. "They could be listening. I think this is the best place, though it''s a bit risky being out here."


    The surrounding woods were indeed treacherous, teeming with magical beasts. Venturing outside alone was a gamble, but Marcel''s urgency outweighed the danger.


    They walked until they reached a flowing river, its icy waters a testament to the harsh climate.


    "What is it you wanted to share?" William asked, his anticipation growing.


    Marcel scanned their surroundings before revealing his secret. "A few months ago, I discovered some hidden passages within the academy," he whispered. "I haven''t explored them extensively, but based on my observations, the professors seem unaware of their existence. Perhaps Grant knows, but there''s a chance he doesn''t."


    "Secret passages?" William echoed, intrigued.


    "Exactly! It''s like there''s an entire hidden academy beneath the one we see," Marcel explained, his voice laced with wonder. "What if this academy was built atop the ruins of another?"


    "But wouldn''t they have discovered it during construction?" William questioned. It seemed improbable that such a significant structure could remain hidden if they had excavated the area.


    "It''s very deep," Marcel insisted. "They would have to dig much deeper to find it."


    A mischievous grin spread across Marcel''s face. "What do you say we explore it together? It shouldn''t be too dangerous, right? If there were any threats down there, someone would have discovered them by now."


    William wasn''t entirely convinced, but the allure of the unknown was too strong to resist. He also pondered the possibility that these secret passages might still exist in the future. Could he return to the present-day Snowpeak Academy and uncover a hidden layer of history beneath his feet? The prospect was thrilling.


    "Let''s do it," he agreed, his voice firm despite the flutter of apprehension in his stomach.


    "But we need to be cautious," Marcel cautioned. "We''ll have to go at night. I''m not sure we can leave the academy undetected during the day. That''s why I''ve been hesitant to explore on my own."


    "Perhaps we could learn an invisibility spell?" William suggested. "There''s no need to rush into this unprepared."


    "Good idea," Marcel agreed, his eyes gleaming with excitement.


    William''s anticipation grew with each passing day. What secrets lay hidden beneath Snowpeak Academy? What mysteries awaited them in the depths of the unknown? He was determined to find out.

 Chapter 87 - 87: First Mission

    William headed to the library, his gaze scanning the shelves for invisibility spells. He found one, but it was an A-rank spell, a formidable challenge even for seasoned mages. Furthermore, it was an illusion spell, a branch of magic William had little natural aptitude for.


    Learning it would be an uphill battle, even with his Magic Mind. But the potential rewards were too great to ignore. An invisibility spell would be invaluable for their clandestine exploration.


    Marcel, ever the optimist, offered encouragement. "Between the two of us, you definitely have the best chance of mastering this," he declared, his confidence in William unwavering. "You have a real talent for magic. Think you can learn it in a month?"


    William met his gaze, a determined glint in his eyes. "It''s hard to say for sure, but I''ll give it my all. I''ll let you know when I''ve got it down. And let''s keep this between us for now. We don''t want anyone else finding out about the passages or the spell."


    "Agreed," Marcel said.


    Two weeks flew by in a blur of focused practice. William diligently honed his skills with the invisibility spell and the combat spells assigned by Professor Kurt. He quickly surpassed the other new students, mastering Kurt''s lessons with ease. This allowed him to dedicate more time to the intricate workings of the invisibility spell and the formidable "Icy Weapon" incantation.


    Just as William settled into a routine, a call to action disrupted the tranquility of the academy. Headmaster Grant summoned the students, his imposing figure radiating an air of grave urgency.


    "I have gathered you all here today because a nearby village requires our assistance," he announced, his voice resonating with authority. "They are facing a dire threat from a magical beast. Your participation is not mandatory, but those who volunteer will be handsomely rewarded. However," he added, his tone turning somber, "this mission is fraught with peril. You could face serious injury, even death." S~ea??h the Nov§×l?ire.n(e)t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    A hush fell over the assembled students. The gravity of Grant''s words hung heavy in the air. These were, for the most part, commoners who had striven tirelessly to reach the academy. They had journeyed from distant lands, like Marcel, with dreams of mastering magic and improving their lives. Risking those hard-won futures was a daunting prospect.


    Unsurprisingly, most students recoiled from the challenge. Preserving their lives took precedence over potential rewards. In the end, only a handful of brave souls stepped forward.


    Marcel, cautious as ever, remained among the majority.


    But William, his thirst for adventure and self-improvement burning bright, joined the ranks of the volunteers. He never backed down from a challenge, and this was an opportunity to gain valuable experience, hone his skills, and further enhance his attributes.


    "Are you sure about this?" Marcel asked, his brow creased with worry. "It sounds incredibly dangerous."


    William''s resolve remained unshaken. "Absolutely. Practical experience is crucial for growth. But you should stay here and focus on... other matters," he said, subtly alluding to their planned exploration of the secret passages.


    Marcel caught his meaning instantly, a mischievous glint returning to his eyes. "Right. I''ll be doing that," he whispered conspiratorially.


    In the end, a mere eight students volunteered for the mission, a paltry number compared to the academy''s total enrollment. Headmaster Grant, however, seemed satisfied.


    "This should be sufficient," he declared, addressing the small group. "The threat is not insurmountable."


    One of the volunteers spoke up, his voice tinged with apprehension. "Why can''t a professor accompany us? Perhaps Professor Lincoln, since he doesn''t teach any classes?"


    William''s ears perked up. He, too, was curious about Lincoln''s role at the academy. Perhaps Grant would shed some light on the matter.


    Grant, however, deftly evaded the question. "The professors have essential duties here, including Professor Lincoln. You will undertake this mission unaccompanied. Is everyone still certain they wish to proceed?"


    The pointed question caused one student to waver, reducing their number to seven. William remained undeterred. He had faced far greater perils in the ancient elven ruins. This mission, though undoubtedly challenging, held no fear for him.


    The mention of the ruins sparked a thought. He wondered if they still existed in this era. ''I should investigate when I have the opportunity,'' he mused, adding it to his growing list of explorations.


    The seven students, a motley crew of aspiring mages, prepared for their expedition. The journey to the village would take several days, and their task of subduing the troublesome magical beasts promised to be even more time-consuming. They anticipated an extended stay, their skills and courage put to the test.


    "Do not concern yourselves with missed lessons," Headmaster Grant assured them, his voice carrying a hint of paternal concern. "You will receive private instruction upon your return to compensate for any lost time. Furthermore, the villagers have pledged to provide food and lodging for those who come to their aid."


    William, ever prepared, had most of his necessities stowed within his trusty backpack. He required little additional preparation, his mind focused on the challenges ahead.


    The following morning, the group departed from the academy, their horses'' hooves kicking up plumes of snow as they ventured into the unforgiving wilderness. Xavier, a seasoned student with two years of training under his belt, assumed leadership. His map, weathered and creased, guided their path.


    "My word is law," Xavier declared, his tone brooking no argument. "I am Xavier, your leader. Follow my instructions without question."


    While William typically bristled at following orders, especially from another student, he recognized the wisdom in Xavier''s leadership. The group''s safety and success depended on unity and cooperation. William, though confident in his own abilities, understood that the other students were less experienced. Xavier''s guidance provided a sense of security and direction.


    As they descended the mountain, the biting wind whipped at their faces, and snow crunched beneath their horses'' hooves. But with each passing day, the temperature gradually rose, and the landscape transformed. The stark white of the mountain peak gave way to lush greenery, and the air filled with the sounds of life. Birdsong replaced the howling wind, butterflies flitted amongst vibrant wildflowers, and deer darted through the undergrowth.


    They followed the course of a winding river, Xavier consulting his map at regular intervals. "We''re almost there," he announced, a hint of relief in his voice. "The village lies just ahead, along the riverbank."


    The village was indeed small, a cluster of humble dwellings huddled together against the vast wilderness. One building, larger and more imposing than the rest, stood at the center. This, William surmised, belonged to the village chief who had requested their assistance.


    As the group approached, the chief emerged from his dwelling, his weathered face etched with worry. Upon seeing the young mages, a wave of relief washed over him.


    "Welcome, mages," he greeted them, his voice raspy with anticipation. "You have come in response to my plea?"


    Xavier stepped forward, assuming his role as spokesperson. "Indeed we have. Please, tell us more about the situation."


    "Of course, of course," the chief replied, ushering them towards his residence. He led them through a sturdy wooden door and into a spacious meeting room.


    "We face a grave threat," he began, his voice heavy with concern. "I fear it may be related to... corruption."


    William''s attention sharpened. Corruption. The very force that had amplified his powers. Perhaps this mission would present another opportunity to absorb its energy and further enhance his abilities.

 Chapter 88 - 88: New System Feature

    The chief''s meeting room, though modest in size, comfortably accommodated the seven students. They settled into wooden chairs surrounding a sturdy round table, their attention focused on the village leader as he recounted the unsettling events that had befallen their community.


    "It began a month ago," the chief explained, his voice heavy with worry. "One of our hunters vanished without a trace. Then, more disappearances followed. We fear some intelligent creature is preying upon our people."


    William had expected to hear tales of monstrous beasts rampaging through the village, but the reality was more insidious. These were kidnappings, carefully orchestrated and shrouded in mystery.


    "We discovered some tracks in the woods," the chief continued, "footprints, but nothing conclusive."


    William raised his hand, a question forming in his mind. "Are you certain this is the work of a beast or related to corruption?" he inquired. "Could it be that someone within the village is responsible for these abductions?"


    Several other students nodded in agreement. Human depravity was, sadly, not unheard of. But the chief quickly dismissed the notion. "The people here are good folk," he insisted. "We are a tight-knit community. I trust them implicitly."


    Despite the chief''s assurances, William harbored doubts. He had witnessed the darkness lurking within seemingly ordinary individuals. Still, he wasn''t leading the investigation, and only time would reveal the truth.


    Xavier, ever the pragmatist, took charge. "Can you show us where the last disappearance occurred?" he asked. "And is there anyone who might have witnessed something?"


    The chief shook his head. "I can lead you to the location, but I''m afraid there were no witnesses. Follow me."


    They ventured into the woods, the chief guiding them along a well-worn path. He explained that all the missing villagers had been hunters, their disappearances occurring within the depths of the forest.


    They arrived at a picturesque waterfall cascading over moss-covered rocks. "This is where the last hunter was seen," the chief said, gesturing towards the tranquil scene. "Someone was bathing in the pool below and saw the hunter heading into the woods in this direction, but they thought nothing of it at the time. Hunters frequent these woods, you see."


    William admired the beauty of the waterfall, the refreshing spray a welcome contrast to the icy climate of the mountains. ''I''ll have to take a dip here when this is all over,'' he thought.


    The chief led them deeper into the forest, stopping at a patch of muddy ground. "We found some footprints here a few days ago," he said, pointing at the disturbed earth. "But the rain has washed away most of the evidence. They appeared to be humanoid in shape."


    Xavier, who had been observing the scene with a thoughtful expression, finally spoke. "We will do everything in our power to uncover the truth," he assured the chief.


    The village leader smiled gratefully. "I appreciate that, young man. And while you''re at it," he added, "perhaps you could help us with another problem. The forest is overrun with aggressive magical beasts. Thinning their numbers would earn you our eternal gratitude, and additional compensation."


    Two missions weighed upon their young shoulders: unraveling the mystery of the vanishing hunters and culling the overpopulated magical beasts. It was clear that their stay in the village would be an extended one, just as Headmaster Grant had forewarned.


    The village chief, though hospitable, lacked the resources to house them all comfortably. "I apologize, but we do not have sufficient space to accommodate everyone within our homes," he explained, a hint of regret in his voice. "However, we will provide you with tents and ensure you have ample food, water, and shelter from the elements."


    The pleasant weather made the prospect of camping less daunting, and William found himself appreciating the fresh air and the symphony of nature surrounding them. He hoped the favorable conditions would hold.


    Xavier, ever the strategist, decided to prioritize the beast extermination. "We need to venture into the forest to investigate the disappearances," he explained. "Clearing out the excess beasts will make our task safer and more efficient."


    He proposed dividing the group into pairs, a sensible approach that maximized their coverage while minimizing individual risk. However, with seven members in their party, an odd number presented a logistical challenge. Instead of forming a group of three, Xavier declared that William would work alone.


    "Unfortunately, William will have to go solo," Xavier announced, his eyes meeting William''s with an odd intensity. "But you''re more than capable, aren''t you?" He clapped William on the shoulder, a forced smile plastered on his face.


    William bristled at Xavier''s condescending tone and the unsettling glint in his eyes. He sensed an ulterior motive, a deliberate attempt to isolate him. But he kept his suspicions veiled, choosing his battles carefully.


    "I''ll be fine," he replied coolly.


    "Excellent," Xavier said, his smile widening.


    With that, the pairs dispersed into the dense undergrowth, leaving William to face the potentially perilous forest alone. If the chief''s assessment of the beast population was accurate, William was in for a challenging, and possibly dangerous, experience.


    The forest loomed, a dense tapestry of ancient trees and tangled undergrowth. Eerie sounds echoed through the shadowy depths, a constant reminder of the dangers lurking within. Soon, the crackle of spells and the clash of steel reached William''s ears. They''ve already engaged, he realized, his senses sharpening.


    Suddenly, a creature launched itself from the canopy, its sights set on William. It resembled a panther, but with wicked spikes protruding from its back and a sinuous, vine-like tail.


    [Forest Panther] [Estimated Level: 12]


    William assessed the creature''s level, thanks to the System''s handy information. A level 12 beast posed a minor threat, nothing he couldn''t handle.


    "Let''s dance, kitty," he taunted, drawing his steel sword.


    Without resorting to magic, he charged towards the panther, his speed surpassing the creature''s. He appeared beside it in a blur, his sword aimed at its neck with deadly precision.


    But the panther was agile. It twisted its body, causing William''s blade to strike one of its back spikes instead. The impact reverberated through his arm, the sword bouncing harmlessly off the sturdy protrusions.


    "What the¡ª?" William exclaimed, surprised by the creature''s resilience.


    Before he could recover, the panther''s vine-like tail whipped around him, constricting his movements. The beast lunged, its fangs sinking into his right arm.


    "Gah, damn it!" he cursed, pain shooting through his arm.


    But William was undeterred. He dropped his sword and seized the panther''s neck with both hands, his enhanced strength overpowering the creature''s struggles. He squeezed with relentless force, ignoring the pain in his arm, until the panther''s struggles ceased.


    [+900 EXP]


    [Forest Panther Fangs Dropped] S~ea??h the NovelFire.net* website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    An item! William stared in surprise as a set of sharp fangs materialized beside the fallen panther. A system message flashed before his eyes.


    [System Feature Unlocked]


    [Inventory Unlocked]


    [The inventory is not infinite, so be careful of what you store inside]


    William''s heart leaped. An inventory! A feature common in many games and stories, but not something he expected to encounter in this world. He pondered its sudden appearance. Was it triggered by obtaining an item? Was it a unique feature of this era? Did others possess this ability?


    He recalled that inventories were often associated with summoned heroes in this world. ''Perhaps that''s why I have one now...'' he mused.


    Regardless of the reason, William was thrilled. An inventory would prove invaluable for storing items and managing his resources.

 Chapter 89 - 89: Hunting Down a Beast to Tame

    He examined the fang with fascination, noting its miniature form within one of his inventory slots. It was like something straight out of a game. But he couldn''t afford to dwell on this new feature. He had a mission to complete.


    First, he cleansed his wound in the cool river water. To his surprise, the pain had already subsided, and the gash was healing at an astonishing rate. He hadn''t even needed a bandage. His enhanced physique, combined with the superficial nature of the wound, allowed for rapid recovery.


    Rejuvenated, William ventured deeper into the forest, encountering a variety of mutated creatures. He battled packs of mutated wolves, more spiked panthers, and even gigantic bats emerging from hidden caves. Each victory brought him closer to his goal, and the steady accumulation of experience points resulted in a satisfying level-up.


    Then, he stumbled upon a goblin encampment. These were not the simple, cave-dwelling goblins he was accustomed to. These wore crude armor crafted from leather and bone, and their camp boasted rudimentary structures for shelter and storage. They had formed a structured society, a tribe thriving within the heart of the forest.


    William crept closer, utilizing the System to assess their threat level. Sear?h the n?vel_Fire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    [Goblin Warrior] [Estimated Level: 19]


    [Goblin Archer] [Estimated Level: 19]


    [Goblin Shaman] [Estimated Level: 22]


    He was outnumbered, and some of the goblins surpassed him in level. Should I engage? he pondered.


    The tribe''s proximity to the village posed a potential danger. But they could also be beneficial, their hunting activities naturally culling the beast population. William weighed his options.


    Ultimately, he decided to eliminate the goblins. Even if they were currently preying on beasts, they would undoubtedly attack any humans they encountered. Goblins were inherently hostile towards humans, and the risk was too great. Besides, the chief''s description of humanoid footprints suggested a possible connection to the missing villagers.


    Only one way to find out, William thought, steeling his resolve.


    But how could he overcome such a large group? He was alone, with no backup in sight. He needed a strategy, an advantage.


    The demonic sword''s voice echoed in his mind. "Remember I mentioned taming beasts? I can assist you with that. Why not tame a powerful creature in this forest and use it to your advantage against the goblins?"


    The idea sparked a flicker of excitement within William. "That''s a brilliant plan!" he replied mentally. "Can you help me locate a suitable beast? Perhaps sense its energy?"


    "Unfortunately, it''s not that simple," the sword replied. "You''ll have to find it yourself."


    With that, the sword fell silent. William, undeterred, began searching for a potential ally. He scanned the surrounding area, his senses heightened, seeking a creature with the strength and ferocity to turn the tide of battle in his favor.


    He could easily find a simple beast to aid him, but William sought a powerful ally, one that could not only help him conquer the goblin tribe but also prove valuable in future endeavors. Such a creature wouldn''t be found amongst the common beasts roaming the forest. He needed to venture deeper, into the territory of apex predators.


    William reasoned that the most silent areas of the forest were likely the domains of the strongest beasts. Where others feared to tread, where the usual cacophony of the forest fell still, that''s where he would find his champion. The safest-seeming locations were potentially the most dangerous.


    He pressed onward, his senses alert, his sword at the ready. He fought off occasional attacks, but as he ventured further, the assaults became less frequent. An unsettling quiet descended, broken only by the rustle of leaves and the distant calls of birds. He had reached the domain of a predator.


    A cave, shrouded in moss and hidden behind a veil of thick vegetation, materialized before him. This, he instinctively knew, was the lair of the beast he sought. With a mix of anticipation and caution, William approached, his footsteps barely disturbing the forest floor.


    He cautiously entered the cave, his senses on high alert. The air was thick with the stench of decaying flesh, and an oppressive silence hung in the air. Whatever resided within this cavern clearly preferred to dine in the privacy of its lair.


    William navigated the uneven terrain, careful not to disturb the scattered bones littering the floor. The darkness was absolute, but his enhanced senses guided him forward.


    At the far end of the cave, a monstrous shape emerged from the shadows. It was a lizard, similar to Professor Lincoln''s, but smaller.


    [Infant Winged Lizard]


    [Estimated Level: 23]


    An infant, yet already a formidable predator. Its level exceeded William''s, and a wave of apprehension washed over him. He wasn''t sure he could defeat such a creature.


    He consulted the demonic sword. "How does this taming process work?" he inquired mentally. "Is it permanent? Do I need to weaken the beast first?"


    "Indeed," the sword replied. "You must bring it to a weakened state, then use me to pierce its flesh. I will handle the rest."


    The instructions were straightforward enough, but the execution was daunting. He had to subdue a creature stronger than himself, carefully balancing the need to weaken it for taming without inflicting lasting damage.


    William steeled his resolve, activating his arsenal of spells.


    [Iron Skin]


    [Swiftfoot]


    [Enhanced Strength]


    He felt the familiar surge of power coursing through his veins. He was growing more proficient with these spells, their effects subtly increasing. Swiftfoot now granted him 25 agility instead of 20, and his movement speed was boosted by 12 instead of 10. Similar improvements applied to his other spells. But he knew that to achieve truly significant gains, he would need to master higher-ranked spells.


    With his body enhanced and his spirit resolute, William prepared to confront the Infant Winged Lizard. The cavern''s silence shattered as he launched himself towards the beast, his sword flashing in the dim light.


    The lizard''s eyes snapped open, piercing the darkness with an eerie yellow glow. It had sensed the intruder.


    William pressed his attack, knowing his enhancements were temporary. He aimed for the lizard''s leg, seeking to cripple its mobility.


    But the Infant Winged Lizard was faster than he anticipated. With a deafening roar, it whipped its powerful tail, striking William before he could land a blow.


    The impact sent him flying backward, crashing against the cave wall. Pain flared through his back, a testament to the creature''s raw strength. He had barely landed a blow, and already he was reeling.


    William gritted his teeth, pushing through the pain. He staggered to his feet, his determination unwavering. This fight was far from over.


    He dashed towards the lizard, his movements a blur. This time, he was ready. The lizard lunged, its jaws snapping shut, but William was too quick. He leaped, propelling himself towards the cave ceiling. Using the momentum, he launched himself downwards, his sword aimed with deadly precision.


    His blade pierced deep into the lizard''s wing, drawing a roar of pain. Blood splattered across the cavern floor. But before William could press his advantage, another lizard emerged from the cave entrance, its eyes glowing menacingly. He was trapped.


    William got anxious, not knowing what to do. The situation was not one that he liked being at.

 Chapter 90 - 90: You... You Tamed it?

    Trapped between two formidable foes, William felt a surge of despair. He couldn''t possibly subdue both lizards for the taming ritual. He needed to escape, regroup, and formulate a new plan.


    Just as he considered his options, two figures appeared at the cave entrance ¨C Xavier and another student.


    "William?" Xavier called out, feigning surprise. "What''s going on here? Look at those lizards!"


    Despite his misgivings about Xavier, William clung to a sliver of hope. "Can you handle one of them?" he shouted back. "I''m pinned down here!"


    Xavier reacted swiftly, but not in the way William expected. He raised his scepter, casting an Earth element spell that conjured a solid barrier, sealing the cave entrance shut.


    William''s heart sank. Xavier had betrayed him, deliberately trapping him with the enraged lizards. A wave of confusion and anger washed over him. What possible motive could Xavier have for such a treacherous act?


    But there was no time to dwell on Xavier''s betrayal. He was now faced with a desperate fight for survival. With his escape route blocked, he had no choice but to confront the two Infant Winged Lizards head-on.


    Uncertainty gnawed at William. Should he focus on the wounded lizard or attempt to break through Xavier''s barrier? Time was of the essence, as both lizards advanced, their roars echoing ominously through the cavern.


    It was a fight for his life. He lunged towards the wounded lizard, his sword raised.


    "Use me," the demonic sword urged. "I will amplify your power and aid in the taming."


    William obeyed, discarding his steel sword and unsheathing the demonic blade. He felt the familiar drain on his energy, but the surge of power was undeniable. A dark aura enveloped him, pulsating with malevolent energy.


    [Demonic Transformation Stage 1 Active]


    [Demonic Energy and Mana will diminish with time]


    A new transformation. Unlike the crazed hunter he had encountered, William retained his clarity and control. His senses sharpened, his attributes surged with demonic power. But like Hero''s Limit, this power came at a cost.


    He couldn''t afford to waste time. He attacked the wounded lizard with a ferocity fueled by desperation and demonic energy. The creature was overwhelmed, unable to defend against his relentless assault.


    William''s sword found its mark, tearing into the lizard''s flesh. The beast retaliated, its claws raking across William''s chest, leaving deep, bloody gashes.


    "You are gravely wounded," the sword warned. "Press the attack. Once I tame this one, the other will submit."


    William gritted his teeth, ignoring the searing pain. He moved with a speed and agility he had never experienced before, his attacks a blur of motion. He struck the lizard repeatedly, weakening it with each blow.


    Finally, he aimed for the kill. His demonic sword plunged into the creature''s right wing, initiating the taming process. Dark energy pulsed through the lizard''s body, its eyes turning an inky black. In seconds, it was subdued.


    The other lizard, sensing the shift in power, halted its advance. A silent communication passed between the two creatures, an acknowledgment of William''s dominance.


    "A fragment of my essence now resides within the tamed lizard," the demonic sword explained. "I control its actions."


    "Incredible!" William exclaimed, marveling at the power he now wielded. He had faced death and emerged victorious, gaining a formidable ally in the process.


    "I require rest to recuperate," the demonic sword said, its voice echoing in William''s mind.


    William, pleased with the successful taming, decided to bestow a name upon his demonic sword. "How about Asura?" he suggested. "Do you like it?"


    "Asura," the lizard repeated, the name resonating with a newfound sentience. "It is a good name."


    Asura needed time to heal from the wounds sustained in battle. The other lizard, now docile, remained by their side. But the cave, with its oppressive stench and lingering tension, was no place to recover.


    They exited the cavern, working together to dismantle Xavier''s earthen barrier. There was no sign of Xavier or his companion.


    "What will you do about him?" Asura inquired, a hint of anger in his voice.


    "For now, nothing," William replied, his mind racing. "I need to understand his motives."


    He couldn''t allow his anger to distract him from the mission. Besides, confronting Xavier now would be unwise. He needed to regain his strength and assess the situation.


    With Asura at his side, William sought a safe haven for the night. Returning to the village with a tamed lizard in tow seemed imprudent, especially after Xavier''s betrayal. Fortunately, the wilderness offered ample refuge. Asura''s presence alone would deter most creatures.


    They found a clearing near a small cliff, a natural barrier providing an added layer of security.


    "This will do," William declared. "No monsters will approach from the cliff, and we can always jump if necessary."


    He lacked a tent, but the blankets in his backpack would suffice. He spread them on the ground and settled down to rest. The wounds on his chest were deep, but the bandages stemmed the bleeding. The pain had subsided, and the healing process was underway, but he knew it would take time to fully recover.


    William spent the day recuperating, his body slowly mending. He had ample food and water, and Asura''s presence provided a sense of security. Sleep came fitfully that night, the hard ground offering little comfort. But exhaustion eventually claimed him.


    The next morning, he ventured to the river to cleanse his wounds and change the bandages. The gash on his chest, though still unsightly, was healing steadily.


    Asura, his wounds also mending rapidly, followed close behind. "This lizard''s regenerative abilities are remarkable," he observed. "I find this form quite agreeable. Far preferable to being an inert blade." Sear?h the ¦Çov§×lFire .net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "I can imagine," William chuckled. "But what about that transformation I underwent?" he asked, curiosity piqued.


    "Ah, that was the demonic energy within you manifesting," Asura explained. "The more you accumulate, the more potent the transformation will become."


    A new power was always welcome, but William knew he needed to exercise caution. He had much to learn about this demonic energy and its potential consequences.


    Refreshed and reinvigorated, William and Asura set off towards the goblin encampment. As they approached, they noticed a figure lurking in the shadows, observing the goblins from behind a bush.


    It was Xavier. His eyes widened in disbelief when he saw William, accompanied by the tamed lizard. He had assumed William would perish in the cave.


    "William!" he exclaimed, feigning relief. "I knew you were alive!"


    William fought the urge to punch the conniving student. Instead, he played along, feigning ignorance. "Of course, I am. I know you were just trying to help and miscast the spell, right? You''d never intentionally trap me." He offered Xavier a disarming smile.


    Xavier, to William''s astonishment, readily accepted the charade. "Yes, yes, indeed. I''m still learning that spell. My apologies."


    William seethed inwardly. "Are you planning to attack the goblin camp?" he asked, his voice deceptively casual. "We could join forces."


    Xavier opened his mouth to reply, but his eyes fell upon the imposing lizard at William''s side. He froze, fear replacing his feigned concern. He instinctively reached for his scepter, but William quickly interjected. "I tamed it," he explained. "It''s my companion now."


    "You... tamed it?" Xavier stammered, his voice laced with disbelief.

 Chapter 91 - 91: Mysterious Cabin

    Xavier''s face paled. Taming a creature like the Infant Winged Lizard was an unheard-of feat, a testament to William''s extraordinary abilities. His plan had backfired spectacularly, leaving him vulnerable and exposed.


    William, sensing Xavier''s unease, pressed his advantage. "Let''s put this behind us," he said, his voice deceptively friendly. "We have a job to do. Any progress on the missing villagers?"


    "Nothing yet," Xavier mumbled, avoiding William''s gaze. "We''re focusing on clearing the forest first. We eliminated a significant number of beasts yesterday, but this goblin camp remains a threat."


    The student accompanying Xavier shifted uncomfortably, clearly disturbed by the events in the cave. But they were bound by their mission, forced to cooperate despite the underlying tension.


    "I understand," William said, his tone hardening. "Then let''s finish this."


    With a shared nod, they launched their assault on the goblin encampment. Xavier unleashed a barrage of earth spells, summoning massive stones that crushed the goblins with brutal efficiency.


    William and Asura plunged into the heart of the fray, their combined might a whirlwind of destruction. William''s sword danced through the air, slicing through goblin flesh with deadly precision. Asura''s claws and tail ripped through the enemy ranks, sending goblins flying or cleaving them in two.


    The goblins, despite their numbers and crude weaponry, were no match for the coordinated assault. Their camp, once a bustling hub of activity, was reduced to a scene of carnage in a matter of minutes.


    Even the Goblin Shaman, with its superior strength and mystical abilities, fell before their combined might. Xavier, wielding his earth magic with impressive control, and the other student, though less experienced, proved valuable assets in the battle.


    William, driven by his insatiable desire for growth, focused on eliminating as many goblins as possible, maximizing his experience gain. Each kill brought him closer to his next level, fueling his determination.


    With the goblin threat neutralized, they scoured the encampment for clues related to the missing villagers. The humanoid footprints had raised suspicions, but their search yielded nothing. The goblins were not the culprits.


    "What now?" William asked, turning to Xavier.


    "Let''s regroup with the others and assess the situation," Xavier replied, his earlier animosity seemingly forgotten.


    "Back to the village then," William agreed.


    As they entered the village, all eyes turned towards William, or rather, towards the imposing lizard at his side. He explained that he had tamed the creature, eliciting gasps of awe and admiration. Even the villagers were impressed, some expressing a desire to learn the art of beast taming themselves.


    Xavier gathered the group in the village square, seeking updates on their progress. Perhaps someone had stumbled upon a clue during their foray into the forest.


    To their surprise, one student stepped forward, his face etched with uncertainty. "I came across a cabin deep within the woods," he reported. "It looked inhabited, but I didn''t see anyone. Perhaps whoever lives there spotted me and hid."


    A cabin in such a remote location was undoubtedly suspicious. The village chief, who had joined their gathering, frowned. "No one from our village lives in a cabin," he confirmed. "This is troubling news."


    "William," Xavier said, his voice dripping with faux concern, "this cabin could be crucial to finding the missing villagers. You''re the most skilled among us. I think you should investigate."


    William saw through the charade. Xavier was trying to eliminate him, plain and simple. But he masked his anger, choosing his moment for confrontation carefully. I''ll have my revenge, he vowed silently.


    He agreed to investigate, his curiosity piqued by the mysterious cabin. He ventured into the depths of the forest, following the directions provided by the student who had made the discovery.


    The cabin was secluded, nestled deep within the woods. It took William nearly an hour to reach the location, even with prior knowledge of its whereabouts. The structure was well-hidden, shrouded by dense vegetation and positioned near a tranquil pond. Built from weathered wood, it exuded an air of rustic simplicity. A small garden flourished beside the cabin, filled with herbs commonly used in potion-making.


    "Stay here and keep watch," William instructed Asura, leaving the imposing lizard to guard the perimeter. He approached the cabin cautiously, his hand resting on the hilt of his sword. The door creaked open, revealing a sparsely furnished interior. A simple bed, a rough-hewn table, and a few shelves lined the walls. Books and papers lay scattered across the table, evidence of recent activity.


    William''s gaze fell upon the fireplace, where a pot simmered over the glowing embers. Someone had been here very recently. He turned to examine a peculiar marking on the wall, a strange symbol etched into the wood. As his fingers traced the intricate lines, a section of the wall swung inward, revealing a hidden passage.


    Before he could react, a figure emerged from the shadows, a gleaming dagger pressed against his throat. William froze, his eyes widening in surprise. His attacker was a woman, her face framed by raven hair and her eyes flashing with a mixture of fear and determination.


    "Who are you?" she demanded, her voice a low growl. "And what are you doing in my home?"


    William, careful not to provoke his captor, explained his mission, detailing the missing villagers and the discovery of the cabin. The woman listened intently, her expression softening as he spoke.


    "I''ve seen nothing," she admitted, her voice regaining its composure, "but perhaps I can offer some assistance." She stepped back, gesturing towards a steaming bowl on the table. "Would you care for some soup? It''s a simple recipe, but fortifying."


    William, his hunger piqued by the enticing aroma, gratefully accepted. He settled at the table, watching as the woman ladled a generous portion into a wooden bowl.


    "I know nothing of the missing villagers," she continued, her brow furrowed in thought, "but I did witness something unusual a few nights ago."


    "What did you see?" he asked.


    "I can''t be certain," she replied, her brow furrowed in concentration, "but I heard muffled sounds coming from the woods a few nights ago. The kind of sounds one might make if gagged."


    William nodded slowly, intrigued. He still wasn''t sure if he could trust this woman, but the absence of a dagger at his throat was a welcome improvement.


    "Why does no one in the village know you live here?" he asked, his eyes fixed on the untouched bowl of soup before him. He couldn''t shake the feeling that something wasn''t quite right.


    "They''ve never ventured this far into the forest," she explained. "It''s dangerous out here. I survive because I can protect myself."


    Her words held a ring of truth, but William remained cautious. He pressed for more details, asking her to pinpoint the direction from which she had heard the muffled sounds.


    "It came from this direction," she said, pointing towards a barely visible path leading deeper into the woods, "and then moved that way."


    William thanked her, his mind already piecing together a plan. He decided to pursue this lead alone, keeping his discovery a secret from the other students. ''They''ll only slow me down,'' he thought, his determination growing. Sear?h the N?vel?ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    He and Asura followed the path, going deeper into the forest. William hoped that the mystery would soon come to an end.

 Chapter 92 - 92: Conspiracy

    The narrow path wound through dense thickets and over gnarled roots, a challenging trek even for William. Asura, with his considerable size, struggled to navigate the overgrown trail.


    "Do you think she was being truthful?" William asked, glancing at his reptilian companion.


    Asura, who had listened intently to their conversation from outside the cabin, pondered the question. "She seemed sincere," he replied, "but her presence in this secluded location is unusual. It''s difficult to say for certain."


    William agreed. The woman''s isolation and the mysterious cabin raised suspicions. He resolved to inform the village chief upon his return.


    As they ventured deeper into the forest, the path grew fainter, disappearing altogether in some areas. William relied on his instincts and Asura''s keen senses to guide them forward.


    The forest floor was pristine, undisturbed by human presence. William was certain that no villager had ventured this deep into the woods. Then, a glint of brown beneath a leafy bush caught his eye. A footprint, partially obscured, preserved in the mud. The overhanging foliage had shielded it from the rain, leaving a clear impression.


    A footprint here was undeniably suspicious. William''s pulse quickened, his curiosity piqued. He pressed onward, eager to unravel the mystery. A prickling sensation crept up his spine, a feeling of being watched. He glanced over his shoulder, scanning the shadows, but saw nothing.


    "There''s no one there," Asura assured him, his keen senses detecting no other presence. "It''s just your imagination."


    William hesitated, torn between his instincts and Asura''s reassurance. He decided to trust his companion, pushing aside the unease. He continued forward, his eyes fixed on the path ahead.


    A dark opening in the hillside materialized through the dense undergrowth. A cave, its entrance barely large enough for William to squeeze through. Asura, in his current form, would be unable to accompany him.


    "I''ll be with you as the sword" Asura said, his voice echoing in William''s mind. "We can still communicate if you need assistance. But this lizard form will have to remain outside."


    William crouched low, slipping through the narrow cave entrance. The interior was surprisingly spacious and well-lit, with torches casting a warm glow on the rough-hewn walls. Furniture was scattered about ¨C a bed, a desk, and even a strange oven emitting a foul odor. Someone lives here, William realized, his curiosity piqued.


    He was about to investigate further when a muffled sound reached his ears. He followed the noise to a corner of the cave, where he discovered a trapdoor concealed beneath a pile of furs. He lifted it cautiously, the creaking hinges echoing through the cavern. A ladder descended into darkness.


    Apprehension gnawed at him, but William knew he couldn''t ignore this potential lead. He gripped his sword tightly and descended the ladder, his senses alert.


    The ladder led to a damp, subterranean chamber. William''s eyes widened in surprise as he took in the scene before him. Several cells lined the walls, and within one, he recognized a missing villager, bound and unconscious. The other cells were empty.


    "Hey, wake up!" William called out, trying to rouse the captive. But the villager remained unresponsive. William broke the cell door, rushing to the villager''s aid. He tried shaking him awake, but to no avail.


    Frustrated, William hoisted the unconscious villager onto his shoulder and carried him back up the ladder and out of the cave. He laid the villager gently on the soft grass, then returned to the cave to search for clues. He discovered a stack of letters, their contents detailing a deep-seated resentment towards the village and its inhabitants.


    ''One of the villagers is behind this,'' William concluded, his mind reeling from the revelation.


    As he prepared to leave, Asura''s panicked voice echoed in his mind. "I''ve been immobilized! Someone is entering the cave!"


    Before William could make his escape, three figures emerged from the shadows, blocking his path. One was the woman from the cabin, her eyes now cold and calculating. Beside her stood the village chief, his face a mask of betrayal. And to William''s utter astonishment, the third person was Xavier, his supposed ally.


    "Well, well, William," Xavier sneered, a triumphant glint in his eyes. "It seems you''ve stumbled upon our little secret."


    William''s mind reeled. He had walked into a trap, a carefully orchestrated conspiracy involving the very people he had been sent to help. "Chief? You''re involved in this?" he stammered, taking a step back.


    "I still don''t know how you survived those lizards," Xavier continued, ignoring William''s question, "but your luck has run out."


    "Why?" William demanded, his voice laced with confusion and anger. "I thought we were in this together. Why are you doing this?"


    Xavier''s smile widened, revealing a chilling malice. "You see this lovely woman?" he gestured towards his accomplice. "She is my sister. She and the village chief are part of a... secret organization. They needed my help to conceal their activities. Soon, I will join their ranks." S~ea??h the n?velFire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "What is this organization?" William pressed, his hand instinctively reaching for his sword. "What are you planning?"


    The village chief stepped forward, his face etched with a chilling fanaticism. "We serve a higher power, William," he proclaimed, his voice echoing through the cavern.


    William''s heart pounded. He was trapped, outnumbered, and facing a force he didn''t understand. But surrender was not an option.


    The gravity of the situation settled upon William like a crushing weight. These were not mere bandits or rogue mages; they were fanatics involved in something far more sinister. Kidnapping villagers for dark rituals... the thought chilled him to the bone. He had to escape, to expose their plot and bring them to justice.


    With his back against the wall, William unleashed his full power. He unsheathed the demonic sword, the dark energy surging through his veins, activating the first stage of his demonic transformation.


    [+30% to all attributes]


    The boost was substantial, but he didn''t stop there. He tapped into the depths of his heroic power, pushing his limits beyond their usual constraints, utilizing his S rank skill, Hero''s Limit.


    [+50% to all attributes for 2 minutes]


    His aura flared, an intimidating display of raw power that sent Xavier and his accomplices stumbling backward. They stared in disbelief, their eyes wide with fear and confusion.


    William wasn''t done. He layered his body enhancement spells, amplifying his strength, speed, and resilience. He was a force to be reckoned with, a whirlwind of magic and fury.


    His voice, amplified by the demonic transformation, resonated through the cavern. "I''ll show you true power. I''ll show you what a higher power is."


    William advanced, each step imbued with purpose and power. Two minutes. That''s all he had to dismantle this twisted conspiracy and deliver justice. He felt invincible, a vessel of pure energy ready to unleash its fury.


    Xavier, his bravado crumbling, attempted a desperate plea. "William, we can negotiate," he stammered, his voice trembling. "Our organization can offer you riches, artifacts, anything you desire!"


    William scoffed, his eyes blazing with contempt. "Silence, Xavier. You and your sister will pay for your crimes."


    He would not let them go, especially Xavier, who tried to kill him the other day. That bastard would suffer. William was sure of that.

 Chapter 93 - 93: Returning with the Traitor

    William wasted no time. With a burst of speed, he launched himself at the closest enemy - the woman from the cabin. Xavier reacted instantly, summoning a wall of earth to shield his sister, just as he had done in the cave.


    But this time, it was different. William didn''t slow down. His fist, imbued with incredible force, slammed into the earthen barrier. The wall shattered like glass, the fragments exploding outwards. William continued his relentless advance, closing in on the terrified woman.


    Xavier''s desperate cry, "Be careful!" echoed through the clearing.


    She tried to evade the attack, but it was futile. William''s fist connected with her chest in a devastating blow. A gaping hole appeared where her heart had been, her life extinguished in an instant.


    Even William was stunned by the sheer power he wielded. It was beyond anything he could have imagined.


    Xavier stared in disbelief, his sister''s lifeless body sprawled on the ground. Rage and grief consumed him. "You bastard!" he roared. "I''ll kill you!"


    He raised his staff, arcane energy crackling around him, but William was too fast. A single, brutal punch sent Xavier flying, his ribs and shoulder shattered.


    The village chief, the weakest of the three, watched the carnage unfold, paralyzed with fear. He didn''t know whether to flee or beg for mercy.


    William''s voice, cold and menacing, cut through his panic. "Tell me everything, and I might grant you a swift death."


    Desperate to survive, the chief spilled everything he knew. "I''m part of an organization, just like she was, but we''re kept in the dark. We don''t know who leads it or their true faces. Everyone wears masks during the meetings. I swear, it''s the truth!"


    William listened intently, extracting every bit of information. When the chief had nothing left to offer, William delivered his final judgment. "I see. Then die."


    A swift slash of his sword, and the chief''s head rolled to the ground.


    Only Xavier remained, broken and helpless.


    "You''re coming with me," William declared, "to explain all this to Headmaster Grant."


    He found ropes in the cave and bound Xavier securely. Then, he returned to the village, carrying the unconscious villager and his captive. Asura followed close behind.


    The villagers were bewildered by the sight. Most assumed they had been attacked by some unknown force, which explained Xavier''s injuries.


    William, still radiating an aura of barely-contained power, addressed the gathered villagers. His voice, though firm, held a note of somber respect for the lives lost. "The village chief and the woman who attacked us are dead. They were part of a shadowy organization, and Xavier here was also with them." He explained how the chief had confessed his allegiance before meeting his end.


    A wave of murmurs and gasps rippled through the crowd. The villagers, simple folk who had always trusted their leader, were struggling to process this shocking revelation. William continued, "The missing villager is safe, though unconscious. We will learn more when he wakes."


    They brought the unconscious man to a small, tidy hut and laid him on a bed. A local healer, a kind woman with gentle hands and wise eyes, tended to him, assuring William that he would recover soon.


    As the villagers dispersed, whispering amongst themselves, William found a quiet corner to collect his thoughts. Asura, ever vigilant, sat beside him, his presence a comforting weight. He couldn''t shake the feeling that there was more to this story than met the eye. Who was behind this mysterious organization? And what were their true motives?


    The wait was agonizing. William paced restlessly, his mind replaying the events of the day. He thought of the woman he had killed, her face contorted in fear, and the village chief, pleading for his life. The weight of his actions pressed heavily upon him.


    Finally, after what seemed like an eternity, the missing villager stirred. He woke with a start, his eyes wide with terror. But when he saw William, a look of recognition and relief washed over him.


    "You...you saved me," he stammered, his voice weak.


    William nodded. "What happened? Who took you?"


    The villager''s gaze hardened with anger. "It was the chief! He lured me into the forest, then knocked me unconscious. When I woke up, I was tied up in that cave."


    The pieces of the puzzle were falling into place. The chief''s betrayal, the woman in the cabin, it was all connected to this shadowy organization. But who were they, and what did they want with the academy?


    With the truth revealed and the immediate danger contained, a sense of calm settled over the village. The villagers, though still shaken, were grateful for William''s intervention. They offered him and the other students their hospitality, insisting they stay the night before returning to the academy.


    The next morning, after a night of fitful sleep, the students bid farewell to the villagers. They carried a mix of emotions with them: relief at the rescue, sorrow for the lives lost, and a lingering unease about the unknown forces at play.


    The journey back to the academy was a somber one. The students, usually boisterous and full of energy, were subdued, lost in their own thoughts. William, burdened by the weight of his actions and the secrets he carried, walked in silence, his gaze fixed on the winding path ahead.


    Three days later, they reached the imposing gates of the academy, perched atop the mountain. Headmaster Grant, his face etched with concern, greeted them with a mixture of relief and apprehension.


    William recounted the events of the past few days, detailing the attack, the deaths of the village chief and the woman, and the chief''s confession about the organization. He also revealed Xavier''s involvement, explaining how he had been captured and brought back to the academy. S§×ar?h the n?velFire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Headmaster Grant listened intently, his expression growing graver with each revelation. When William finished, he sighed heavily. "This is troubling news indeed," he said. "It seems we have underestimated the reach of this organization."


    He turned to Xavier, who stood silently, his gaze fixed on the ground. "Xavier," Headmaster Grant said, his voice stern, "you will be confined to the academy dungeon while we investigate this matter further."


    Xavier offered no resistance. He allowed himself to be led away, his face a mask of defeat.


    Headmaster Grant then addressed the other students. "I commend you all for your bravery and resourcefulness in this difficult situation. I''ll prepare your rewards, but for now, rest."


    News of Xavier''s treachery and his connection to the shadowy organization spread through the academy like wildfire. Within hours, everyone knew about the attempted murder, the secret cult, and William''s extraordinary feat of taming the Infant Winged Lizard.


    Marcel, ever the loyal friend, visited William in his room, concern etched on his face.


    "You look awful," Marcel remarked, taking in William''s pale complexion and weary posture.


    William, still recovering from the aftereffects of the demonic transformation and Hero''s Limit, managed a weak grin. "Don''t I know it," he said, his voice raspy. "That was the worst mission ever. What did I miss while I was out of commission?"


    "Nothing important," Marcel assured him. "But I have to know... what''s the deal with that lizard outside? How did you tame it? Everyone''s talking about it."


    "Oh, you mean Asura?" William replied, a touch of pride in his voice. "It wasn''t that difficult, actually. He''s quite friendly, once you get to know him."


    "Asura, huh?" Marcel mused, scratching his chin. "That''s a pretty cool name. So, you just... what, walked up to it and said, ''Hey, wanna be friends?''" He chuckled, but his eyes held genuine curiosity.


    William grinned, enjoying the bewildered look on Marcel''s face. "Not quite," he replied, choosing to keep the details of the taming process to himself. "It involved a bit of... persuasion." He winked, leaving Marcel to ponder the cryptic response.


    "Well, whatever you did, it clearly worked," Marcel conceded, nodding towards the window where Asura could be seen basking in the afternoon sun. "That thing looks like it could take on a whole army."


    "He''s definitely a valuable ally," William agreed, a flicker of pride in his voice. "Especially with people like Xavier lurking about."


    Marcel''s expression turned serious. "Speaking of Xavier... what''s going to happen to him? And what about that organization he was involved with?"


    William sighed, the weight of the situation settling upon him once more. "I don''t know, Marcel. Headmaster Grant is investigating, trying to uncover the extent of their reach. As for Xavier... I suspect he''ll face severe consequences for his actions."


    "He deserves it," Marcel declared, his voice firm. "Trying to kill you like that... it''s unforgivable."


    William nodded, appreciating his friend''s support. "I''m just glad it''s over," he said, leaning back against the pillows. "For now, at least. I have a feeling this is just the beginning."

 Chapter 94 - 94: More Training, and Academy Secrets

    It took William nearly two weeks to fully recover from the combined strain of Hero''s Limit and the demonic transformation.


    He had anticipated a period of weakness, but the extent of his exhaustion surprised him. During this time, he was unable to practice magic, limited to attending classes for the theoretical instruction.


    He spent his days conversing with Marcel and immersing himself in non-magical literature, giving his body time to mend.


    One afternoon, William and Marcel found themselves in the academy library, discussing the peculiarities of their surroundings.


    "Lincoln is such an oddity," Marcel remarked, leaning back in his chair. "I still can''t figure him out. While you were recovering, I tried to observe him, but he barely does anything all day. Just eats, reads some letters... that''s it."


    "Maybe he''s just a really dedicated reader?" William suggested, though the explanation felt flimsy even to him. Lincoln''s presence at the academy was a puzzle. He didn''t teach, he didn''t seem involved in research, and yet he held the title of Professor. What was his purpose?


    "I guess," Marcel said with a shrug. "But it''s still strange, don''t you think? He''s like a ghost, always lurking in the background."


    "He does seem to be constantly watching, observing," William agreed, a sense of unease settling over him. "As if he''s waiting for something."


    "Waiting for what?" Marcel wondered aloud.


    William''s mind flashed back to the encounter in the library, Lincoln''s late-night wanderings, and his suspicious request for secrecy. "I don''t know," he admitted, a shiver crawling down his spine. "But I have a feeling it''s not good."


    A thoughtful silence fell between them as they contemplated the enigma that was Professor Lincoln. William picked up a book on ancient Aethelian history, idly flipping through its pages.


    But his thoughts remained preoccupied with the enigmatic professor and the growing sense that something was amiss at Snowpeak Academy.


    A silver lining emerged from the turmoil of the past weeks. Asura had fully recovered, granting William access to a magnificent flying mount. Marcel, upon learning of this development, bombarded William with pleas to experience flight, his enthusiasm bordering on obsession. William, though tempted, knew he couldn''t simply abandon the academy. Their aerial adventures would have to wait.


    One day, Headmaster Grant summoned William to his office for a private meeting.


    "You deserve a reward for your service to the village," Grant declared, his expression a mix of gratitude and admiration. "What would you desire? I have several options at my disposal."


    "Options?" William echoed, his curiosity piqued. He hadn''t considered requesting a reward, but perhaps Grant had something unique to offer.


    "How about a rare spell tome?" Grant suggested. "We possess a unique body enhancement manual here at the academy."


    He described the tome, a compilation of various spells woven into a single cohesive technique. Its rank remained undefined, as no one had successfully mastered its intricacies.


    "It''s an ancient text," Grant admitted. "I know of no one who has successfully learned it, but it''s yours if you want it." He rose from his chair. "Wait here. I''ll retrieve it for you."


    William''s interest was piqued. A unique body enhancement tome, potentially more powerful than any he currently possessed? This was a reward worth having. He waited patiently as Grant retrieved the tome from a locked cabinet, its worn leather cover hinting at its age and the secrets it held within.


    "Here it is," Grant said, presenting the tome to William. "Handle it with care. It''s a powerful artifact."


    William carefully took the tome, his fingers tracing the faded inscription on the cover. He could sense the potent energy emanating from within, a chaotic blend of different magical disciplines. It was a challenge he couldn''t resist.


    "Thank you, Headmaster Grant," William said, his eyes gleaming with excitement. "I won''t disappoint you."


    Grant nodded, a hint of a smile playing on his lips. "I trust you, William. You have proven yourself to be a capable and resourceful mage. I believe you have the potential to unlock the secrets of this tome."


    William returned to his room, eager to delve into the mysteries of his newfound prize. He settled into a comfortable chair, the tome open before him. The script was archaic, the diagrams complex, and the instructions cryptic. It was a daunting challenge, even for someone with William''s advanced knowledge and magical aptitude.


    He spent hours deciphering the text, his mind working tirelessly to unravel the intricate web of spells and incantations. The tome was a puzzle, a labyrinth of interconnected magical theories and practices. It demanded not just rote memorization, but a deep understanding of the underlying principles.


    As he progressed, William realized that the tome wasn''t merely a collection of spells; it was a holistic approach to body enhancement, a way to harmonize the different aspects of his physical and magical being. It incorporated elements of strengthening, agility, resilience, and even subtle manipulations of internal energy flows. S§×ar?h the nov§×lF~ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    He began practicing the techniques, starting with the most basic exercises. The movements were unfamiliar, the mana manipulation challenging, and the results initially underwhelming. But William was persistent, driven by an insatiable curiosity and a desire to master this unique form of magic.


    Days turned into weeks, and William''s dedication paid off. He gradually gained proficiency in the techniques, his body responding to the subtle manipulations of mana and energy. He felt stronger, more agile, and more resilient. The chaotic energy within the tome began to harmonize, aligning with his own magical signature.


    The tome''s power was enigmatic, its effects subtle and profound. The System remained silent, offering no notifications of new spells or attribute increases. It was as if the transformation was occurring on a deeper level, beyond the System''s current comprehension.


    In the meantime, William diligently practiced the invisibility spell, chipping away at its complexities. Mastery seemed an impossible feat, but he managed to achieve a rudimentary understanding, enough to cast a crude version of the spell. He and Marcel could now cloak themselves in invisibility for a brief period.


    "One minute?" Marcel questioned, his brow furrowed with concern. "Will that be enough time?"


    "That depends on you," William replied with a smirk. "You''re the one who knows the location of the secret passage."


    "True, true," Marcel conceded. "We can test it tonight. I hear the professors will be... indisposed."


    "Indisposed?"


    "There''s a festival tonight," Marcel explained. "A celebration of some sort. You and I will abstain from the festivities, of course. We need to be at our best for our exploration."


    William had been so engrossed in his training that he was unaware of the upcoming event. This was their chance, a window of opportunity to delve into the academy''s hidden depths.


    As the afternoon progressed, the academy grounds transformed into a festive scene. Students gathered around bonfires, their laughter and singing echoing through the courtyard. William and Marcel, however, remained vigilant, avoiding the merriment and conserving their energy.


    Nightfall brought a hush over the academy. The revelers, their spirits dampened by excessive indulgence, stumbled back to their dormitories.


    William and Marcel left the dorm, their eyes set on the main building of the academy.


    "That''s where the passage is," Marcel whispered, "Let''s circle around and enter through the back."

 Chapter 95 - 95: Exploration Underground

    The academy was unusually still, the silence amplified by the lingering fatigue of the previous night''s revelry. William learned that the annual festival commemorated the founding of Snowpeak Academy, a tradition seemingly absent in the future iteration he knew.


    They moved through the shadows, utilizing the foliage and the darkness as cover. When they reached an exposed section of the courtyard, Marcel turned to William, a sense of urgency in his eyes.


    "Now''s the time," he whispered.


    William nodded, summoning his limited mastery of the invisibility spell.


    [Minor Invisibility (A Rank): Turn you and anyone around you invisible for a maximum of 1 minute]


    [Cost: 40 Mana]


    One minute was all they had to cross the open ground undetected. He cast the spell, their forms shimmering and fading into the darkness. They hurried across the open space, their footsteps silent against the cobblestones.


    The academy now had guards patrolling the grounds, a security measure absent before. The invisibility spell, despite its limitations, was crucial for their infiltration.


    Once inside the main building, they breathed a sigh of relief. The halls were deserted, the silence broken only by the distant creak of floorboards.


    "This way," Marcel whispered, beckoning William to follow.


    William, however, held him back. "We need to be cautious," he warned, recalling his late-night encounter with Professor Lincoln. "What if there are other professors lurking about?"


    "You''re right," Marcel agreed, his excitement tempered by a newfound caution. "Let''s not ruin this now."


    They moved through the darkened corridors, their senses heightened. Every sound sent a jolt of apprehension through them. But the sounds were merely the whispers of the wind and the settling of the ancient structure.


    They reached a familiar door, the entrance to the academy''s lavatory.


    "Why are we here?" William asked, his brow furrowed in confusion.


    "This is where the secret passage is," Marcel explained, a mischievous grin spreading across his face. "Can you believe it? The architect was a genius. I stumbled upon it while taking a shit."


    "I don''t want to know that," William said, a disgusted expression on his face.


    The passage wasn''t inside a toilet, thankfully. It was located near the sink. Marcel revealed a button hidden underneath. When pressed, a panel on the wall slid open.


    "No way no one has found this yet," William said, surprised.


    "There are multiple bathrooms in the school. No one uses this one," Marcel explained.


    That explained why it remained undiscovered, though William doubted it would stay that way for long.


    With the passage revealed, it was time to explore.


    "Have you ever been inside?" William asked, curious about the secret area.


    Marcel nodded. "Yes, but I didn''t venture far. It''s a little creepy."


    They entered the passage. William cast a candlelight spell to illuminate the space.


    A staircase descended¡ªa typical feature of secret passages. They proceeded cautiously, focused on their footing.


    Their initial fear of being discovered by guards or professors had faded. Now, a new fear arose: what if the place was dangerous? Could there be monsters lurking within?


    They descended for about five minutes before reaching a stone room of decent size. Cobwebs clung to the walls, and a few old crates lay scattered about.


    "This looks like a storage room," William observed.


    "Yep. That''s what I thought."


    They approached the only door in the room and pushed it open. Beyond lay a hallway with multiple rooms on either side. It resembled an academy. William, initially skeptical of Marcel''s claim, now believed him.


    "What the hell is this place?" William exclaimed. "This really does look like an academy. Did you ever talk to Grant? Maybe ask him about the school''s construction?"


    "I did. There was nothing here when construction first started. I know because I was here helping them."


    "You what?"


    Marcel smiled, slightly embarrassed. "You know the journey from where I live is long, right? I heard about the construction and came to help to earn some money. I didn''t want to use my family''s."


    William sensed underlying issues with Marcel''s family and refrained from further questions. He knew the academy was new but hadn''t realized how recent.


    "Did you explore any of the rooms here?" William asked, his gaze shifting between the many doors lining the hallway.


    There were many rooms within.


    Marcel, however, hadn''t explored them. "This is the farthest I came. When I saw this alone, it scared me, so I turned back."


    William didn''t blame him. He would have been scared too.


    "Let''s explore together then," William said. "No need to split up. We have plenty of time."


    Marcel liked the idea. He wouldn''t want to be alone down there.


    The first room on the right resembled a classroom, but the furniture was destroyed, except for the professor''s sturdy stone table near the board.


    Other similar rooms reinforced their theory of an old academy.


    "Do you think this academy was built on the surface where we are building now, or was it always underground?" Marcel asked.


    "Underground," William answered confidently.


    "Why?"


    He pointed at the room''s walls. "What''s missing?"


    Marcel thought for a moment, then realized. "Oh, right. There are no windows." Sear?h the n?velFire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    The entire place lacked windows. It was an underground academy.


    But what academy was it? William had never read about anything like it. It looked abandoned.


    They had many questions but no answers. Eventually, they found the library.


    It contained few books. Most were gone.


    "They took the books and scrolls before leaving," William said. "Classic."


    But some remained. William opened one, finding the writing completely foreign.


    "I have no idea what this is," he said, tossing the book to Marcel. "Do you?"


    Marcel glanced at it. "Nope. Unlike any writing I''ve ever seen. But we can take it back and research it. It might give us some answers."


    William nodded. After collecting the remaining eight books, they continued exploring, discovering a strange room.


    It had an altar and a chalice, resembling a ritual chamber.


    "This could mean this academy practiced the dark arts," William said.


    That would explain the academy''s hidden location. No one condoned the practice of dark arts. Anyone aware of their existence would seek to eliminate them.


    But an entire academy underground, atop a mountain? William suspected they had survived for centuries, delving into forbidden knowledge.


    They explored the remaining rooms, finding most empty or uninteresting. That changed when William discovered an office.


    He searched for anything useful, finding a letter tucked away in a drawer.


    Written in a familiar language, it was addressed to someone within the academy, likely a high-ranking individual.


    "Look at this," he said.


    Marcel joined him, and they read the letter together.


    An unknown friend warned the recipient that their location had been discovered and urged them to leave. They suggested relocating to one of the archipelago islands, deeming it safer than the mainland.


    After reading the letter, William and Marcel shared a common desire: to visit the Snowpeak branch on that island and study there.


    "This is valuable information," Marcel said. "We should head back."


    As they prepared to leave, a chilling grunt echoed from the hallway outside. William and Marcel stood there, not knowing that to do.


    "This doesn''t sound human," William whispered, "let''s hide, and prepare for a fight."

 Chapter 96 - 96: Sharing Knowledge, and Return

    The only hiding spot was the office closet, surprisingly well-maintained. They wasted no time taking cover. Moments later, someone entered the office.


    A flesh golem, decaying parts spilling from an open wound in its belly. The creature was grotesque, its putrid smell filling the room. William nearly vomited but managed to restrain himself. The golem was powerful, level 30¡ªfar beyond anything William had encountered. Fighting it seemed like a terrible idea.


    The golem lumbered around the office before returning to the hallway and entering other rooms, seemingly searching for them.


    This was their chance. William and Marcel slipped out of the closet and made for the exit. They hastened their steps, no longer concerned about making noise. The passage was too narrow for the golem; if they reached it, they would be safe.


    The golem noticed them and gave chase! The sight of the massive flesh golem pursuing them was terrifying.


    "Let''s go, Marcel, quick!" William urged, not looking back.


    They didn''t stop. After reaching the storage room, they opened the passage, slipped through, and sealed it again.


    They were safe. The golem couldn''t enter, but they wouldn''t relax until they were back in the academy bathroom.


    Once there, they collapsed on the floor, gasping for breath. "That was close. What the hell was that thing?" Marcel exclaimed.


    William had a few theories. "Probably a guardian left behind. Maybe not the only one. If we go back, we need to be careful."


    The academy''s occupants were long gone, but that didn''t mean the place was safe. They were fortunate the golem couldn''t fit through the passage. What if it had been another type of creature? A powerful specter that could pass through walls? They would be dead.


    Marcel looked apprehensive. "No way I''m going back there. That place is dangerous, and I want to stay alive."


    They returned to the dorm, retracing their steps to the bathroom.


    Each retreated to their own room. William collapsed onto his bed and slept soundly through the night.


    The next day, before classes started, William went to the library. It was early morning, and the library was empty. Most students were still asleep. He hoped to find something that would help him decipher the language in the books he''d recovered.


    With one of the books in hand, William searched for texts on different civilizations and languages, focusing on ancient cultures, hoping for answers.


    He had two hours before anyone else arrived¡ªample time to browse the shelves and look for similar symbols.


    He found nothing. There were languages from ancient civilizations, but none resembled the writing in his books.


    ''How is this even possible?'' William wondered, feeling his research had been fruitless.


    Still, he focused on the positives: he knew the academy had relocated to one of the archipelago islands, and he planned to go there. Perhaps he would find answers there.


    Even Asura, a demon of unknown age, was unfamiliar with the language.


    "Remember when I said my memory is a mess? Maybe I knew about this before, but I don''t recall now," Asura admitted. sea??h th§× NovelFire.net* website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "So basically, you don''t know? Why not just say that without making excuses?" William retorted.


    "Shut up, kid. Let me say this to feel less useless."


    "Alright, alright. Sorry."


    William left the library and headed to class. It was Professor Kurt''s class, and as usual, he had planned student duels.


    "William, you don''t have to participate. You''re still recovering," Professor Kurt said, then added, "Honestly, even with both arms tied behind your back, I think you could win against these students."


    The other students weren''t offended. They aspired to be as skilled as William, and some even asked for advice.


    William took the opportunity to teach them, helping them improve.


    Two students, sisters studying together, benefited greatly from his instruction. They were both mages specializing in body enhancement magic, just like William.


    He helped everyone, of course, but he had more to offer the sisters due to their shared magical affinity.


    "Focus on your breathing," he advised. "It might seem irrelevant, but your body should be connected to your mana flow. If you don''t breathe properly, the spell won''t be as effective."


    The students focused solely on using mana to enhance their bodies, but that was only part of the equation. Mana was essential, but their bodies needed to work in harmony with it.


    William also recommended adding exercises to their routine, stating it would make everything easier. He extended this advice to all the mages. Professor Kurt, intrigued, called William aside for a conversation.


    "Physical exercise, even for mages who don''t use body enhancement spells?" Kurt asked. "Are you sure this is beneficial? Not that I''m complaining, I''m just curious about the reasoning."


    Information traveled slowly in those times, a fact William used to his advantage. "A mentor of mine taught me this. He was a powerful mage. He believed a strong body strengthens the mind."


    The quote wasn''t accurate, but it served its purpose. Professor Kurt seemed impressed.


    "That makes a lot of sense," Kurt said. "I''ll add exercises to my routine. Thank you for your insights, William."


    Everyone viewed William favorably. He was happy to share his knowledge.


    But what impressed him most was Professor Kurt''s eagerness to learn. That, William thought, was the mark of a true mentor. He admired Kurt''s humility.


    Weeks passed. William attended classes daily and practiced magic in his free time.


    One day, Headmaster Grant summoned him, explaining that Xavier wished to speak with him.


    William headed towards the academy dungeon, curious about what Xavier wanted to discuss.


    Suddenly, the timer ran out. Three months had passed in the past, and William abruptly returned to the present.


    He materialized back in his familiar bedroom, a wave of relief washing over him. It was good to be back.


    But the situation at the academy deteriorated in the following days. The spy incident and the looming war had everyone on edge. However, William soon found a welcome distraction: his role as Professor James'' research assistant.

 Chapter 97 - 97: Strange Happenings in the Academy

    "This artifact is incredible," Professor James said, his eyes fixed on a vase displayed on a table. "It might look ordinary, but it can create an endless supply of water. Isn''t that amazing?"


    William, assisting Professor James in studying their findings from the elven ruins, was equally astonished when he learned about the artifact''s power.


    "Are you serious?" William asked. "How does it work?"


    "I don''t know yet, but what intrigues me most is that it doesn''t require mana to function. That''s a rare trait among artifacts," James explained.


    The artifacts recovered from the ruins were impressive, but James''s primary objective for William was to uncover the identities of the students'' killers.


    "How am I supposed to learn more about them?" William asked. "I can''t just leave the academy whenever I want."


    "I know," Professor James acknowledged, "but you''ll be leaving for the capital soon, remember? For that army conscription. The capital is the best place to seek answers. I want you to seize this opportunity."


    James retrieved a small notebook from his room.


    "This contains information about my contacts in the capital. Speak to them while you''re there."


    William accepted the notebook. Professor James couldn''t leave the academy, and neither could most students, especially with the war looming. But William had a chance that James didn''t.


    "I''ll do my best," William assured him.


    After leaving James''s office, William encountered Altair, who wore a serious expression.


    "Hey, bro," Altair said, "I think Tholfnir is acting a little strange."


    "What do you mean?" William asked.


    Altair was a creature of habit, always following the same routine. He woke up at the same time each day and often saw Tholfnir every morning.


    He explained that he used to see Tholfnir almost daily in a specific spot in the courtyard. Tholfnir would sit there and watch the sunrise in the early morning hours, admiring the flowers.


    But that had changed. Altair hadn''t seen Tholfnir there recently. S§×arch* The N?vel(F)ire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "That doesn''t sound like a big deal," William said, dismissing the observation.


    However, Altair''s next words gave William pause.


    "Didn''t you tell me spies impersonated students using magic? What if someone is pretending to be Tholfnir?"


    William felt a chill crawl down his spine. The possibility, however remote, sent a shiver of unease through him. He had almost forgotten about the spies. "Did you notice anything else different about him?" he asked, his voice low.


    Altair shook his head. "Not really. He seems the same, but...it''s just that missing piece of his routine that feels off."


    William pondered this new information. Tholfnir, the stoic and predictable Headmaster, altering his routine? It was indeed strange. He decided to keep an eye on Tholfnir, observing him from a distance, trying to detect any inconsistencies in his behavior.


    The next few days were a blur of activity. William immersed himself in his studies, trying to push the unsettling thoughts about Tholfnir and the spies to the back of his mind. He spent his free time practicing his swordsmanship, honing his skills for the upcoming conscription. He also discreetly observed Tholfnir whenever possible, but the Headmaster seemed his usual self, conducting his duties with his customary efficiency and aloofness.


    One evening, as William was returning to his dormitory after a grueling training session, a messenger owl arrived, carrying a small, sealed letter. It was from Tholfnir, reminding him about their upcoming trip to the capital for the conscription.


    "Finally," William muttered to himself. This was his chance to investigate the murders and hopefully find some answers. He had assumed Tholfnir would accompany him, but the letter stated that someone else would be joining him instead.


    William''s heart sank as he read the name: Professor James.


    Why would Tholfnir send Professor James? Wasn''t the Headmaster the logical choice to accompany a student to such an important event? A wave of suspicion washed over William. Could Altair be right? Could someone be impersonating Tholfnir?


    He needed to talk to Altair immediately. He rushed towards his friend''s dormitory, his mind racing with questions and doubts. This new development had just thrown everything into chaos.


    He burst into Altair''s room, startling his friend who was engrossed in a book about ancient runes. "Altair, you were right! Something''s definitely wrong with Tholfnir!"


    Altair looked up, his brow furrowed in concern. "What happened? Did you see something?"


    William relayed the contents of the letter, emphasizing the unexpected change in travel companions. "It makes no sense for Tholfnir to send Professor James with me. He''s the Headmaster, he should be the one to go!"


    Altair''s eyes widened. "This is strange indeed. But why would someone impersonate Tholfnir? What could they possibly gain from it?"


    "I don''t know," William admitted, pacing the room. "But I have a bad feeling about this. It''s like he wants to stay at the academy for some reason..." He stopped pacing and turned to Altair, his expression serious. "Altair, I need you to be extra vigilant. Keep an eye on Tholfnir, and write down anything, anything at all, that seems out of place. Even the smallest detail could be important."


    Altair nodded, his face grim. "I will. But be careful yourself, William. This whole situation seems dangerous."


    "I will," William assured him. "And try to be discreet. We don''t want to alert whoever this imposter might be."


    He left Altair''s room, his mind a whirlwind of thoughts. The trip to the capital, which had initially seemed like an opportunity to uncover the truth, now felt like a step into the unknown. He couldn''t shake the feeling that he was walking into a carefully laid trap, and that he was only beginning to unravel a much larger conspiracy.


    William sought out Professor James, who was also surprised about the assignment. He hadn''t expected to be chosen. While William felt apprehensive, James was elated.


    "This is a fantastic opportunity, William," James exclaimed. "We can work together to gather information about the students'' killers."


    ''Should I tell him about my suspicions?'' William wondered.


    He decided against sharing his theories with James. What if the professor was involved in the conspiracy?


    "Yes, it''s great!" William said, feigning enthusiasm. "We should prepare for the trip immediately!"

 Chapter 98 - 98: Going to Ignis

    William didn''t need to prepare anything for the journey. Professor James, brimming with excitement, took care of everything.


    They would travel to the kingdom''s capital on a fire salamander, a flying mount that James owned. The creature was massive, with four wings and, according to James, the ability to breathe fire and a poisonous tongue.


    "I found this little one near a volcano," he explained. "It''s quite rare."


    William sensed the creature''s immense power, though his system couldn''t discern its level or other details.


    They gathered their belongings, eager to depart. James, wanting to leave as soon as possible, scheduled their departure for that afternoon.


    A nagging worry plagued William. His mind kept returning to Altair''s words. What if Tholfnir was an imposter? What were they plotting at the academy? He couldn''t focus with those thoughts swirling in his mind.


    Their journey began, a long voyage ahead. The capital of the Black Flame Kingdom, known as Ignis, was the largest city in the realm. It was a hub for mages, a place to exchange knowledge and trade magical items.


    There were no magic academies in Ignis, except for a training ground for mages in the kingdom''s army.


    The fire salamander, with William and Professor James perched on its broad back, launched itself into the sky. The ground receded quickly, the familiar sights of the academy shrinking into miniature. William gripped the reins, a thrill coursing through him despite his anxieties. He had never flown before, and the sensation was exhilarating.


    "Hold on tight!" James shouted over the rushing wind, a wide grin splitting his face. "This is just the beginning!"


    The wind whipped at William''s hair and clothes, and the world stretched out beneath them like an unfurling map. Forests became patches of green, mountains transformed into wrinkles on the earth''s skin, and rivers snaked like silver ribbons through the landscape.


    As the sun began its descent, painting the sky in hues of orange and purple, James steered the salamander towards a plateau overlooking a vast lake.


    "We''ll camp here for the night," he announced, guiding the creature towards a smooth landing.


    William dismounted, his legs a bit wobbly from the unfamiliar sensation of flight. The air was crisp and cool, carrying the scent of pine and damp earth. He helped James unload their supplies ¨C tents, bedrolls, food, and a few essential tools.


    "It''s beautiful," William remarked, gazing at the serene landscape. The lake shimmered under the fading light, reflecting the fiery colors of the sky.


    "It is," James agreed, a hint of melancholy in his voice. "Reminds me of why we do what we do. To protect this beauty, this world."


    They set up camp, James expertly building a fire while William arranged their sleeping gear. As darkness enveloped them, the flames of the campfire danced, casting flickering shadows on their faces. They ate a simple meal of dried meat and fruit, discussing their plans for the journey and their hopes for finding answers in Ignis.


    "I have a few contacts in the city guard," James shared, poking at the embers with a stick. "They might be able to help us track down those responsible for the attack in the ruins."


    William nodded, intrigued. "Do you think they''ll have any leads?"


    James shrugged. "It''s worth a shot. They have access to information and resources we don''t. Hopefully, they can provide some clues about the attackers'' identities or whereabouts."


    "That would be a huge help," William said, feeling a flicker of hope. "I''m eager to learn more about those who attacked us."


    "Me too," James said, his expression grim. "Those responsible need to be brought to justice."


    The night deepened, the fire crackling softly as the two men settled into their bedrolls. William, despite his exhaustion, found sleep elusive. The image of the flesh golem haunted his thoughts, and Altair''s words about Tholfnir echoed in his mind. He tossed and turned, the anxieties gnawing at him.


    Just as he was finally drifting off, a guttural roar shattered the silence. William sat up, his heart pounding. James was already on his feet, his hand instinctively reaching for his staff.


    "What was that?" William whispered, his voice trembling slightly.


    "Sounds like a wyvern," James muttered, peering into the darkness. "Stay close."


    A pair of glowing eyes pierced the night, followed by the leathery wings of a large, reptilian creature circling overhead. The wyvern landed a short distance away, its clawed feet scraping against the rock. It let out another roar, its breath steaming in the cool air.


    William felt a surge of fear, but James remained calm. He raised his staff, a surge of mana crackling around him.


    "Luminos!" he incanted, and a blinding light erupted from the staff, illuminating the wyvern in stark detail.


    The creature snarled, its eyes narrowed in fury. It lunged at James, its jaws snapping. James sidestepped the attack, his staff glowing brighter.


    "Inferno!" he shouted, and a jet of fire erupted from the staff, striking the wyvern in the chest.


    The creature shrieked, its scales smoking from the intense heat. It retreated, flapping its wings in agitation. James pressed his attack, casting a series of spells that bombarded the wyvern with fire, ice, and lightning. "Glacies! Fulgur!"


    William watched in awe, the power of James''s magic both terrifying and exhilarating. He had never witnessed such a display of magical prowess.


    The wyvern, overwhelmed by the relentless assault, finally succumbed, crashing to the ground with a heavy thud. James, panting slightly, lowered his staff, the light fading.


    "That takes care of that," he said, a hint of satisfaction in his voice.


    William, still reeling from the encounter, could only nod in agreement. They returned to their campfire, the adrenaline slowly subsiding.


    "That was..." William began, struggling to find the right words.


    "Intense?" James offered, a wry smile playing on his lips.


    "Yeah, intense," William agreed. "I''ve never seen anything like it."


    "Just a taste of what''s out there," James said, his gaze fixed on the flickering flames. "This world is full of wonders and dangers, William. And sometimes, they''re one and the same."


    They spent the rest of the night alert, but no other creatures disturbed their rest. The next morning, they packed their belongings and resumed their journey, the encounter with the wyvern a stark reminder of the perils that awaited them.


    As they flew over a dense forest, William noticed something strange. The trees below seemed to be moving in an unnatural pattern, as if something large was pushing through them.


    "Professor," he said, pointing towards the forest. "Look."


    James followed his gaze, his brow furrowing. "What is that?"


    The trees parted, and a colossal creature emerged from the forest. It was unlike anything William had ever seen, a towering behemoth with thick, gnarled limbs and a head that resembled a grotesque fusion of animal and plant. Its skin was covered in moss and vines, and its eyes glowed with an eerie light.


    The creature let out a deafening roar, shaking the very ground beneath them. The fire salamander shrieked in fear, its wings faltering.


    "Hold on!" James yelled, struggling to control the panicked creature.


    The behemoth''s roar echoed through the air, a guttural sound that sent shivers down William''s spine. The fire salamander, sensing the immense danger, thrashed its wings, ready to take flight.


    "We need to get out of here!" James yelled, his voice strained. "This thing is far beyond our capabilities!"


    He urged the salamander upwards, and the creature, with powerful beats of its wings, ascended quickly, leaving the behemoth far below.


    "That was too close," William muttered, wiping the sweat from his brow.


    "Agreed," James said, his voice still shaky. "I''ve never encountered anything like that before. It was... monstrous."


    They continued their journey, the encounter with the behemoth casting a shadow over their spirits. The once exhilarating flight now felt fraught with danger, the vast landscape hiding unknown threats.


    As dusk approached, they spotted a small, isolated tavern nestled amidst a cluster of trees. Smoke curled from its chimney, promising warmth and respite.


    "Let''s stop there for the night," James suggested, guiding the salamander towards the tavern.


    They dismounted, stiff and weary from the day''s events. The tavern, a quaint, wooden structure with a thatched roof, welcomed them with the inviting aroma of roasted meat and ale.


    Inside, a handful of patrons occupied the rough-hewn tables, their conversations hushed and their faces etched with weariness. A buxom woman with fiery red hair and a warm smile greeted them from behind the bar.


    "Welcome, travelers," she said, her voice husky and inviting. "What can I get for you?"


    James ordered ale and stew, while William, his appetite diminished by anxiety, opted for a simple bowl of soup. As they waited for their meal, a young woman approached their table, her eyes filled with a mixture of hope and desperation.


    "Excuse me, sirs," she began, her voice trembling slightly. "I couldn''t help but overhear that you''re traveling to Ignis."


    James nodded, his gaze curious. "We are. Why do you ask?"


    "I... I need to get to the capital," she explained, her voice barely above a whisper. "My father is ill, and I need to reach him before it''s too late."


    She looked at them with pleading eyes. "I know this is a lot to ask, but I would be eternally grateful if you could grant me passage on your... magnificent creature." Sear?h the ¦Çov§×lFire .net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    James, his heart touched by her plight, readily agreed. "Of course, you can join us. We have plenty of room."


    The young woman''s face lit up with relief. "Thank you, sir! You''re a lifesaver!"


    William, who had been silently observing the exchange, found himself captivated by the young woman''s beauty. Her long, flowing hair, her delicate features, and her expressive eyes held him spellbound. He remained silent, however, content to admire her from a distance.


    They spent the night at the tavern, enjoying the hearty food and the company of their fellow travelers. The young woman, whose name was Gwyneth, regaled them with stories of her life in the countryside, her laughter filling the room with warmth and cheer.


    William found himself drawn to her infectious energy and her genuine kindness. He learned that she was the only child of a renowned blacksmith in Ignis, and that she had been away visiting relatives when she received news of her father''s sudden illness.


    The next morning, they resumed their journey.

 Chapter 99 - 99: Invitation

    The salamander James rode was indeed large, easily accommodating the three of them with space to spare. William estimated it could comfortably carry at least five people.


    Gwyneth proved to be an engaging travel companion. She, too, was a mage, though her focus lay in different magical disciplines.


    "My father is renowned for his skill in smithing and enchanting," she explained. "I followed in his footsteps, learning his craft and enrolling in a magic academy. But then, this sudden news..." Her face clouded with worry.


    She had been away when her father fell ill. "I journeyed to the countryside to visit family and gather ores for my father. I never imagined something like this would happen. It''s baffling!"


    Her father, a healthy man and a mage, had fallen ill unexpectedly. Gwyneth suspected foul play but had no proof.


    "If I may ask," Gwyneth inquired, "what takes you two to Ignis?"


    William started to answer, but James spoke first. "Academy business," he stated simply.


    "Academy business?" she echoed.


    "Indeed. We hail from Snowpeak Academy."


    "Snowpeak!" Gwyneth exclaimed. "I''ve heard it''s one of the finest, and notoriously difficult to enter."


    William, though his chest swelled with pride at her words, remained silent.


    Their journey continued. Initially, William harbored a flicker of suspicion towards Gwyneth. However, after conversing with her for a while, he felt reassured that she posed no threat. Furthermore, James, with his keen magical senses, had readily accepted her company. He clearly sensed no danger from her.


    Gwyneth tried to learn more about William, James, Snowpeak, and their mission, but James remained tight-lipped. He made it clear that he wasn''t willing to share that information with outsiders.


    They talked about themselves, carefully avoiding anything related to Snowpeak Academy and their mission. William, seeing James''s reticence, followed suit. It wouldn''t be wise to anger one of his professors.


    Time flew by as they journeyed across the kingdom.


    "This is so much faster," Gwyneth remarked. "It would take me ages to return with a horse."


    Whenever someone praised his salamander, James beamed with pride. "Right? This salamander is incredible! It''s truly rare. And do you know where I found it? Well, I was on an island with a volcano, and then..."


    James clearly loved recounting the tale of how he found and tamed the salamander. William, having heard it before, patiently listened.


    Days passed, and finally, they reached the capital, Ignis.


    Nestled amidst a forest and surrounded by mountains, Ignis was a naturally fortified city. Its towering walls, exceeding 40 meters in height, provided an imposing defense. Yet, even with such formidable walls, it was still possible to see the numerous buildings within the city and the palace situated on the highest point. That was where the royal family resided, the most guarded and secure location in the entire kingdom.


    A river flowed through the city, a renowned waterway that stretched across a significant portion of the kingdom. Many other villages and cities had been built along its banks.


    "This is incredible!" William exclaimed. "Look at the architecture of these buildings, and the powerful barrier surrounding the city..."


    William was awestruck by Ignis. Not only were the buildings impressive, but the barrier encircling the city was far stronger than the one at Snowpeak Academy, which was already considered one of the best in the kingdom.


    He couldn''t imagine anyone possessing the power to conquer such a city, at least not easily.


    James controlled the salamander as they descended. "We can enter the city with it, but we cannot fly within or above it." Sear?h the n?velFire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    They had to land before entering Ignis. A long queue stretched from the main gate, filled with people from all corners of the kingdom, and indeed, the world. Ignis might not have magic academies nearby, but it was renowned as a hub for mages to exchange knowledge and goods. Moreover, it was home to the finest smiths, enchanters, and alchemists.


    Ignis was a haven for crafters, a center of research and innovation.


    They joined the end of the queue. James frowned. "This might take us at least four hours to get inside..."


    The looming threat of war had made entering the city far more difficult.


    Gwyneth, however, had a solution. "I can enter through the VIP gate. Follow me, please."


    William gaped at her. "VIP area? You can access that?" He was astonished that Gwyneth had such privileges.


    "I told you my father is one of the best smiths in Ignis. I have a few perks. Follow me," Gwyneth said.


    They walked towards a side gate, slightly to the right of the main entrance. The people queuing looked at them with envy.


    "I wish I could enter the city so easily..." one murmured.


    Gwyneth led the way. Two imposing guards stood in front of the VIP gate. When they saw Gwyneth, they were shocked. "P-Princess? Why are you here? We thought you were away studying."


    Gwyneth, with a regal air, replied, "You know why I''m back. Please, let me enter. These two are my friends; grant them VIP access as well."


    "Of course, princess," the guard said.


    He retrieved a token and handed it to William and James. This token would allow them to enter through the VIP gate even without Gwyneth.


    Once inside the city, James exclaimed, "Who are you? You said your father was a blacksmith, but he''s the king!"


    Gwyneth hushed him. "Don''t shout, please. I wasn''t lying. The king is one of the best blacksmiths in the kingdom. Just because he''s the king doesn''t mean he can''t practice his craft."


    William agreed with her logic. James tried to calm down, noticing the strange looks people on the streets were giving him.


    "You still need to explain why you lied to us," James insisted.


    Gwyneth sighed and explained everything, eager to appease them.


    "Everything I said was true to a certain extent," she clarified. "My father is one of the best blacksmiths in the kingdom, and I was indeed away looking for ores, but also studying independently. I had to return after he fell ill, but I couldn''t announce my identity as a princess. You know how bandits would react ¨C kidnapping me and demanding a ransom..."


    James and William listened, finding her explanation reasonable. She was far from the royal palace, so concealing her princess status made sense.


    "But how can you leave so freely?" James asked. "I thought you had to stay in the palace most of the time."


    "Well, my mother isn''t the queen," she revealed. "Some people don''t want me in the palace, so I have certain privileges."


    When they heard this, they noticed the sadness etched on Gwyneth''s face. They couldn''t fathom how difficult her situation in the palace must be.


    "But that''s why I had to return," she said, her voice firm. "My father was the one who loved me most. I need to be here for him."


    James offered a gentle smile. "We can accompany you to the palace if you wish."


    "That would be wonderful!"


    The three walked through the streets of Ignis together. Gwyneth pointed out significant landmarks.


    "That''s one of the most famous alchemy shops in the kingdom," she said, gesturing towards a grand building. "You can find anything you desire there, but it''s quite expensive."


    "And this is one of the many churches in the city," she added, indicating a tall, stone structure.


    As William passed the church, he felt a strange sensation, a subtle discomfort.


    ''Could it be because of my demonic powers?'' he wondered.


    The city was vast and bustling. It took them a while to reach the palace. Security was tight; no one could approach without permission. However, when the guards saw the princess approaching, they bowed and granted her passage.


    Gwyneth vouched for William and James, explaining their presence without any issues.


    They stopped in front of the palace gate. The building was constructed from white stone, and the gardens were expansive, filled with flowers and lush green grass.


    Numerous guards stood watch. William sensed their considerable strength, which made sense considering the palace was the most heavily guarded location in the kingdom.


    "This is as far as I can go with you. I appreciate your help," Gwyneth said. "I''ll seek you out if I need anything else. Thank you, William. Thank you, Professor James."


    "It was our pleasure, princess," they replied.


    As William and James turned to leave, the palace doors opened, and a man approached them. He wore fine clothing, with a neatly trimmed beard and spectacles perched on his nose.


    "Excuse me," the man said. "I heard there''s a professor from Snowpeak here? Is that you?" he asked, looking at James.


    Professor James was taken aback. How had news of his arrival spread so quickly? It highlighted the royal family''s extensive network and the speed at which information traveled.


    "Yes, I am," James confirmed. "Is there something I can do for you?"


    The man bowed slightly. "It''s an honor to have someone of your stature here. Would you care to come inside? We may require your services. And is this your assistant?" he asked, glancing at William. "He looks quite young. He''s welcome to join us as well."

 Chapter 100 - 100: Royal Request

    An invitation to enter the royal palace was an honor few received. Professor James, with his esteemed social standing, wasn''t entirely surprised by the invitation. But for William, it was a remarkable opportunity to witness the grandeur of the palace and meet influential figures. sea??h th§× N??eFire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "Of course," James accepted. "I would be glad to offer my services."


    "Excellent. Follow me, please."


    They entered the palace. William was awestruck by the pristine interior. The absence of even a speck of dust, the high ceilings, and the marble columns created an air of grandeur.


    The sheer number of staff was astounding. There were people dedicated to cleaning, preparing meals, tending the gardens, and guarding the palace. William couldn''t fathom the amount of gold required to maintain such a vast operation.


    They conversed with the man who had greeted them, Orgnar, who managed the royal library and oversaw some of the king''s financial affairs. He held a position of considerable authority, and William and James were careful not to offend him.


    Gwyneth bid them farewell. "I must go see my father."


    But Orgnar stopped her. "There''s no need to rush, princess. We''re going there now, together. I was hoping Professor James and his assistant could lend their expertise in finding a cure for the king."


    Professor James possessed neither medical nor alchemical expertise, and neither did William. Considering Ignis housed some of the best alchemists and healers, they were puzzled as to how they could contribute to finding a cure for the king.


    However, they kept their doubts to themselves and followed along, curious to see where this would lead.


    They were escorted to a private area at the back of the palace, the royal family''s living quarters. Only authorized personnel were permitted access.


    Orgnar, exercising his authority, explained William and James''s presence to the guards before entering. Even with his position, he had to state his purpose to gain entry.


    Inside the king''s bedchamber, they encountered several other individuals.


    "Princess?" one sneered. It was a man with a scornful expression. "I don''t believe you''re welcome here."


    "Silence, brother. You have no authority over me," Gwyneth retorted.


    The man was the prince, who clearly held no affection for Gwyneth.


    Orgnar, sensing a potential conflict, intervened. "This is not the time for disputes."


    The prince glared at him. "You have no right to speak to me in that manner. Remember, you are employed by us, and you must obey."


    The king, lying weakly in bed, spoke, his voice hoarse. "He is employed by me, and he obeys me, just as you do. Please, leave us. I wish to have a private moment with my daughter."


    The prince, lacking the audacity to defy the king, left the room, followed by the others, leaving Gwyneth and her father alone.


    Outside, the prince scrutinized William and James. "And who are you?"


    Orgnar interjected, "They are guests."


    The prince scowled at them before departing.


    They all waited respectfully while the king spoke with Gwyneth. It was a private, familial moment that no one wished to intrude upon.


    After ten minutes, Gwyneth opened the door and invited them inside.


    The king, with effort, propped himself up in bed, his back against the wall. "I require your services, Professor," he rasped. "Are you willing to help me? I can offer compensation and assistance with any need you may have."


    Professor James had anticipated this request. He was prepared to help. The king was a symbol of the kingdom, and with the looming war, his leadership was crucial.


    "Of course," James agreed. "But I lack medical expertise. How can I be of assistance?"


    The king chuckled. "I''m aware of that, young man. I require a different kind of help."


    He explained the task. "I have a physician who knows how to cure me, but the ingredients for the potion are rare and difficult to acquire. I need a powerful mage like yourself to help me obtain them."


    "Why me?" James inquired. "Not that I''m unwilling, but surely there are other powerful mages available."


    "Indeed, but not with your combat prowess. Most mages here specialize in other fields of magic."


    James considered the proposition, weighing the potential rewards.


    "I have a request," he countered. "Someone murdered our students during an expedition. I seek to find those responsible. Can you assist me in locating them?"


    The king nodded. "Yes. We have extensive contacts and skilled investigators. I can find those individuals. Moreover, I''m willing to offer you gold and valuable items in exchange for your help in recovering my health."


    It was a matter of life and death. The king was desperate for a cure. He couldn''t bear the thought of dying and leaving his family, especially Gwyneth.


    "I can help," James agreed. "But how long will this endeavor take? I cannot be away from the academy for an extended period."


    "It may take some time," the king admitted, "but I can send a letter to Tholfnir. We are close allies."


    Even with his power, Tholfnir adhered to the king''s authority. The king himself might not be a powerful mage, but he had the backing of influential figures. Defying the king was unwise.


    "Very well. We will help you," James declared. "But may my student and assistant accompany me?"


    The king saw no issue with this. "Of course. However, the journey might be perilous. Will he be safe?"


    James wasn''t sure whether bringing William was a good idea, but William was eager to go.


    "He will be fine. Can we discuss the details?" James requested.


    "Yes, tonight. The alchemist responsible for preparing the potion will join you. You can discuss the details then. For now, Orgnar will show you to your chambers."


    They followed Orgnar through the palace to their chambers for the night.


    "What a turn of events," James remarked as he settled onto the bed. "But if we help the king, it will benefit both the kingdom and us. They''ll assist us in finding those responsible for the students'' deaths."


    William nodded, excitement bubbling within him. The potential rewards for aiding the king were enticing.

 Chapter 101 - 101: Private Dinner, Rare Ingredients, and Sea Time

    The king''s invitation to a private dinner that evening was an unexpected honor. It wasn''t a grand banquet with numerous guests, but an intimate gathering. William, James, Gwyneth, and the alchemist were the only ones invited. This exclusivity fueled gossip throughout the palace.


    "Those two young men arrived today and are already invited to a private dinner? What''s happening?" a kitchen worker whispered. sea??h th§× ¦ÇovelFire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    The chef smacked the man with a wooden spoon. "Enough of that. Focus on preparing the best meal possible. These individuals must be influential; otherwise, the king wouldn''t invite them."


    The kitchen staff ceased their whispers and dedicated themselves to creating a culinary masterpiece.


    William and James received fine attire from the king.


    "These are new clothes purchased today from one of the finest shops in the kingdom," a lady explained to William. "Allow me to assist you in changing."


    William, unaccustomed to such service, politely declined. "Thank you for your kindness, but I can change myself."


    "Of course, sir," the lady bowed and left.


    The clothes were of exquisite quality: a shirt, pants, a belt, and a long, fur-lined coat.


    "This fur is so soft and warm, perfect for this winter weather," William murmured, stroking the luxurious material.


    He recognized the fur as belonging to rare creatures, its quality undeniable.


    After changing, he made his way to the private dining room near the king''s chambers. Professor James, also dressed in the fine clothes provided, joined him.


    "Your clothes look better than mine," James grumbled, eyeing William with envy. "Not fair."


    William rolled his eyes. "Just accept it."


    As they traversed the palace halls, they encountered guards stationed near the entrance to the royal family''s private chambers. The guards, recognizing James and William, granted them entry.


    William scanned the area for the dining room, and that''s when he saw the prince, causing a commotion.


    "A private dinner without me? Is he mad?" the prince yelled at a guard.


    "I''m merely following orders, sir," the guard stated. "You are not invited."


    The prince, enraged, was on the verge of striking the guard but refrained, knowing the guard was his father''s appointee. His anger intensified when he saw James and William approach. His expression was murderous.


    "You two?" he seethed, clenching his fists. "Don''t tell me you''re part of this private dinner? I thought it was just my father and Gwyneth, but this is an outrage!"


    William was growing weary of the prince''s behavior but held his tongue. He lacked the authority to defy a prince, but Professor James was a different story. He fixed the prince with a stern glare. "Step aside and let us pass."


    The prince was about to retort when James seized him by the neck and lifted him off the ground.


    An aura of fire erupted around James, raising the temperature dramatically. The guard, drawn by the heat, approached cautiously. He nearly burned himself attempting to place a hand on James''s shoulder, stammering, "My apologies, Professor James. I''ll ensure this never happens again."


    James was not someone to be trifled with. He would never disrespect the king, but the prince was not as untouchable as he believed.


    James tossed the prince aside and strode towards the private dining room where the king, Gwyneth, and the alchemist awaited. William followed close behind.


    The king greeted them warmly. "Welcome. I apologize for my son''s outburst outside. He''s always been... difficult."


    James smiled graciously. "It''s no trouble, your Majesty. It was nothing."


    "Good, good," the king chuckled. "Now, allow me to introduce the alchemist I mentioned."


    The alchemist rose from his chair and extended a hand. "I am Fabian Castelos."


    James''s eyes widened in recognition. "The Fabian Castelos? The one who created over a hundred potions?"


    Fabian laughed. "Indeed. And you are the mage who created the Fire Mantra, one of the few to achieve a rank S spell."


    "You know of me?" James asked, surprised. "That''s not common knowledge."


    "Of course. Anyone with a respectable understanding of magic knows your name."


    William was stunned. James was even more impressive than he''d realized.


    ''James created a rank S spell? Incredible! And this Fabian has created over a hundred unique potions? What am I doing here?'' he thought, feeling a pang of inadequacy.


    Based purely on achievements, William was outmatched by everyone in the room. However, he was a summoned hero, a distinction that surpassed any other accomplishment.


    "And this is?" Fabian inquired, gesturing towards William.


    James introduced him. "This is my research assistant and a student at Snowpeak Academy."


    Fabian nodded approvingly. "A very talented young man, I presume? Enrolling in that academy is no easy feat, and serving as your assistant is even more challenging."


    "Indeed, he is," James confirmed.


    They took their seats at the dining table, and soon, the kitchen staff arrived with a procession of plates laden with food, drinks, and desserts.


    William''s mouth watered. ''This looks delicious.''


    After arranging the feast, the staff departed, leaving only the king, Gwyneth, James, William, and Fabian in the room.


    "Here is the list of ingredients," the king said, handing a paper to James. "You may be familiar with some of them."


    James scanned the list, his expression shifting into one of disbelief. The ingredients were exceptionally rare, explaining why the king couldn''t simply purchase them.


    "Mermaid''s Tear, blessed water by a priest of the Ninth Order, a fire blossom flower, and... a dragon scale" James read aloud, incredulous. "Are you serious?"


    William could indeed imagine the rarity of the ingredients based on their names alone. The mention of a dragon scale brought to mind Amber, the dragon he had encountered in the Shadowlands.


    ''I won''t reveal her location,'' William decided.


    King Memphis offered a weary smile. "Yes, I know it sounds absurd, but I was hoping you might have some knowledge of where to find these ingredients. It''s difficult for me to gather information discreetly. This must remain confidential."


    To their surprise, James knew where to find some of the ingredients. "I saw a fire blossom flower on the volcano where I found my salamander. We can retrieve it from there."


    "Mermaid''s Tear can be found in the sea. I know a few people who have encountered mermaids before. But the other two, I have no idea."


    William listened intently, then asked James, "I understand that finding a dragon scale is challenging, but what about the blessed water? Shouldn''t that be easier to obtain? That would leave us with only one unknown ingredient."


    James shook his head. "The blessed water is even harder to find. To obtain a dragon scale, we can follow rumors of dragon sightings. But the Ninth Order is extinct. They were last active around five thousand years ago. How can we possibly acquire that?"


    Memphis nodded. "I understand. Our plan is to gather the other ingredients first, leaving the blessed water for last. I can endure for another year before my condition deteriorates significantly."


    Fabian offered reassurance. "I can prepare a temporary antidote for the king, granting him a year of reasonable health before his illness worsens. This gives us approximately two years to gather all the ingredients."


    Two years seemed like ample time. William wondered if he and James would spend the entire period searching for these rare components.


    "We can prioritize the flower and the Mermaid''s Tear," James suggested. "The volcano where the flower grows is on an island, so we can obtain both ingredients during the same journey. We can then deliver them here for safekeeping and focus on the remaining items. I believe we can acquire those three ingredients in under five months. However, the blessed water remains problematic."


    Everyone agreed to focus on acquiring a portion of the ingredients first, then pursue the others.


    Gwyneth looked relieved. "Thank you, all of you," she expressed. "I feel more confident in obtaining the ingredients with your help. I was so scared before..."


    Memphis pulled his daughter into an embrace. "It will be alright."


    William raised a question. "Your Majesty, if I may inquire, what caused your affliction? Seeing how rare the ingredients are for the cure, I can only imagine..."


    James looked at the king, sharing the same curiosity.


    "A curse," Memphis revealed. "You know we possess many treasures, some passed down through generations. One of them carried a dormant curse, and unfortunately, I was the one to trigger it..."


    "When did you trigger it?" William pressed. "Was it long ago?"


    "Approximately eight months ago, I believe. I can''t recall precisely," Memphis admitted.


    William frowned. That coincided with the time he and his classmates had been summoned to this world. Could there be a connection, or was it merely a coincidence?


    They finished their dinner, discussing the details of their plan. Memphis assured them that he had already sent a letter to Tholfnir and that they shouldn''t worry.


    However, William couldn''t shake Altair''s words.


    ''Is Tholfnir truly who he seems?'' he pondered.


    Despite his burning curiosity, that question would have to wait. The following day, he would embark on a seafaring adventure with James and a crew provided by the king.


    It was time to gather the first ingredients for the antidote.

 Chapter 102 - 102: New Books, and Worried about James

    While William remained at the palace for the night, Professor James ventured into the city to contact his associates. He trusted the king''s promise of assistance but anticipated a lengthy process to gather all the necessary ingredients. Therefore, he decided to pursue alternative avenues for information gathering.


    His first stop was an unassuming bookshop nestled within the affluent district. Dwarfed by the surrounding grand structures, the shop was almost invisible. James navigated through a maze of alleys, eventually arriving at his destination. The streets were deserted in the late hours, and the shop was closed, as expected. Undeterred, James knocked on the door, following a distinct, rhythmic pattern.


    Silence greeted him initially, but after five minutes, the door creaked open. A middle-aged man with neatly trimmed hair but an unkempt beard stood in the doorway.


    "James? What are you doing here so late? Even as friends, you can''t just show up and wake me!" the man exclaimed.


    They exchanged serious glances for a few seconds, then broke into smiles and embraced.


    "I missed you too, buddy," James said warmly.


    "Can I come in?" James asked. "I have something important to discuss..."


    The man glanced around the alley, ensuring they were alone, before ushering James inside.


    Meanwhile, William explored the palace. It was a magnificent place, and he wasn''t sure when he might have such an opportunity again. The staff, now familiar with his identity, treated him with respect. As the assistant of a Snowpeak professor, he had a powerful ally.


    At one point, curiosity led him to the palace library. He envisioned a vast collection of volumes within, likely with restricted access. However, he had already infiltrated the palace; the most challenging part was behind him.


    Upon entering the library, he was greeted by magnificent, well-maintained bookshelves and a tranquil atmosphere. The scent of books and incense filled the air, and the sight of a familiar face brought him comfort.


    It was Orgnar, the man who had initially greeted them upon their arrival.


    "William?" Orgnar inquired, adjusting his spectacles for a better look. "What brings you here so late?"


    Orgnar was among the few who knew about their upcoming mission, a fact William intended to exploit.


    "I''ve come to borrow some books for the journey," William replied with a smile. "You know, it can get quite tedious."


    "Indeed, it can be quite dull at times. Are you looking for anything in particular?" Orgnar asked.


    William recognized an opportunity to leverage his charisma and persuasive skills.


    "You''re aware that Professor James and I study ancient history together at the academy, correct?" William began.


    "Indeed. James is quite the scholar."


    William nodded. "We''ve been focusing on elven history recently, but I have a particular interest in the ancient civilization we refer to as demons."


    Orgnar''s expression turned serious. "May I ask why you''re so interested in that?"


    The question caught William off guard, but his mind raced to find a plausible answer that wouldn''t arouse suspicion.


    "I''ve heard that corruption is linked to demons, and my village suffered from a corruption problem. Some of us perished, which fueled my desire to learn more about that civilization."


    It wasn''t a bad excuse, in William''s opinion. Orgnar scrutinized him for a moment before replying, "I do have some books about them here. Follow me." Sear?h the N?vel(F)ire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Orgnar seized the opportunity to showcase the library to William, seemingly eager to highlight his role in the palace.


    "It''s not every day that someone visits," Orgnar explained. "The staff typically cannot access the library, and those with permission are usually occupied with other matters."


    William offered compliments. "The library looks amazing. I can see you''ve dedicated yourself to keeping it clean and organized."


    "It takes a considerable amount of time, indeed. Maintaining cleanliness is quite challenging. You wouldn''t believe how much dust these books accumulate."


    The library was smaller than those William was accustomed to, but its collection was exceptional. It housed spell tomes and books he wouldn''t find elsewhere.


    "You may borrow some of the books related to the demon civilization, as they are primarily historical," Orgnar explained. "However, the spell books are off-limits for now. I''m confident that if you succeed in your task for the king, you''ll gain access to some of them. They contain only rank A and S spells, all of the highest quality."


    Orgnar leaned closer, lowering his voice. "There''s even one rank SS spell that we haven''t managed to decipher yet."


    ''A rank SS spell?'' William thought, unable to contain his surprise. Orgnar noticed his astonishment but remained silent.


    The library tour concluded in the history section. Orgnar selected three books from a shelf. "You''re welcome to browse the other books, but these three are the only ones concerning the demon civilization."


    William accepted the books eagerly.


    "I''ll lend these to you. You should have ample time to read them during your mission," Orgnar offered.


    The books were thick, but the journey would be long. William was confident he would have enough time to read them all.


    "Thank you for lending me these books," William expressed his gratitude. "I appreciate it."


    Orgnar smiled gently. "It''s my pleasure, young man. It would be remiss of me to deny a student like yourself access to knowledge. I simply hope you''ll return to chat and read with me sometime."


    The invitation was invaluable. Orgnar held a high position in the palace, his influence extending throughout the Black Flame Kingdom.


    "I absolutely will. We can do that after I return," William promised.


    "I look forward to it."


    After acquiring the books and conversing with Orgnar, William returned to his room. He expected to find Professor James there, but when he knocked on the adjacent door, there was no response.


    ''Why is he taking so long?'' William wondered, a sense of unease creeping in.


    Professor James had informed him of his estimated return time, implying that a delay meant something was amiss.


    William waited a few more minutes, but when James still hadn''t returned, he decided to act.


    He stored the three books in his inventory, a convenient feature he had unlocked, and left the palace.


    The guards eyed him curiously as he departed. It was unusual for people to wander around so late, especially palace guests. However, they couldn''t interfere. Professor James and William were guests of the king, and their actions were beyond reproach.


    William retrieved the note Professor James had given him, the list of contacts in Ignis. He decided to visit the first contact, hoping for information about James''s whereabouts.


    The first contact was a woman employed by a noble family as their private wizard. She served as an advisor, a teacher, and a combatant when needed. It was a demanding position, but the compensation was excellent, which is why she had agreed to a five-year contract. Afterward, she would be wealthy and free to pursue her own interests.


    William headed towards the noble house where she worked. The noble district was heavily guarded, and the guards frowned upon late-night wanderers like William.


    When they approached him, he presented his VIP token and declared himself a guest of the king. This tactic proved effective, allowing him to proceed deeper into the district until he reached the mansion where James''s contact resided.

 Chapter 103 - 103: Looking for James

    The house was indeed massive, like all the others in the district. Two guards stood watch at the main gate, both looking weary, their eyelids drooping. William guessed their shift change was imminent.


    He approached the guards, his presence jolting them from their lethargy.


    "Who are you?" one demanded.


    William''s fine attire, courtesy of the king, earned him a more respectful reception than he might have received otherwise. Had he been dressed as a commoner, the guards would likely have been more aggressive, assuming ill intent.


    "I''m here to speak with your resident wizard," William stated. "Inform her that James from Snowpeak Academy wishes to see her."


    The guards exchanged glances, and after a moment''s deliberation, one went to fetch the wizard. "Wait here," he instructed.


    William waited patiently. He could have given his real name, but he doubted the wizard would come out for a stranger. This way, she might.


    After a few minutes, the guard returned, accompanied by a blonde-haired woman who looked rather sleepy.


    Seeing that William wasn''t James, she remained silent for a moment, then addressed the guards. "May I have a word with this young man in private? Your shift is almost over, so you can rest. I''ll secure the entrance."


    "Thank you, ma''am," the guards replied gratefully, leaving William and the wizard alone in the deserted street.


    "Who are you? You''re not James," she stated, her voice laced with suspicion.


    "My apologies," William said, bowing his head. "I am a student at Snowpeak Academy and Professor James''s research assistant. We''re in the capital on academy business, and he mentioned speaking to a list of contacts. However, he hasn''t returned, so I''m here looking for him."


    The woman''s curiosity was piqued. "Can you explain why he''s seeking out his old contacts?"


    William, seeing no way around it, explained James''s motive: to gather information about the individuals who had murdered the students during the elven expedition.


    William was hesitant to share such sensitive information with a stranger, but he reasoned that if James trusted this woman enough to include her as a contact, she must be reliable.


    "I understand... Well, I can help you find him, if you wish," she offered. "It can be quite dangerous to wander alone at night, especially dressed in such fine attire."


    Every city had its share of dangers. Despite being the most heavily guarded city in the kingdom, Ignis attracted people from all walks of life, including those with ill intentions.


    "Would you really do that for me?" William asked, relieved. "Can you leave the mansion this late without repercussions? I wouldn''t want you to lose your job."


    Beatrice chuckled. "It''s alright, I won''t. My name is Beatrice, by the way."


    "I know," William replied. "It''s written here on the note. I''m William."


    Beatrice extended her hand. "May I see the note?"


    William handed it to her. It contained no sensitive information, just names and locations. Beatrice, one of the names on the list, recognized a few others. "We should speak with this person first," she suggested, pointing to a name. "He''s a close friend of James''s, and he was likely James''s first stop."


    They set off to find Leonard, the bookshop owner. Beatrice waited briefly for the next guard rotation before departing.


    "I''ll be leaving now," she informed the guards. "Ensure no one is concerned about my absence."


    "Yes, ma''am," they assured her.


    William and Beatrice left the noble district and headed towards a commercial area filled with shops. There, they hoped to find Leonard''s bookshop.


    "Why does he have his shop here?" William wondered aloud. "The competition is fierce."


    As they walked through the district, William couldn''t help but agree. Establishing a shop here seemed incredibly difficult. The larger shops had vast resources and connections, allowing them to acquire goods at lower prices for resale or crafting.


    William could only envision a scenario where someone exceptionally skilled, surpassing all others, could thrive here. But a bookshop? He doubted it would be successful.


    "Just wait until you see how small his bookshop is," Beatrice added with a chuckle. "The shop is just a facade. He''s already wealthy and offers other services, though I''m not privy to the specifics."


    William''s curiosity about Leonard''s services would have to wait. They navigated through dimly lit alleys, encountering shady individuals lurking or sleeping on the ground. However, none dared to approach; Beatrice''s aura was a powerful deterrent.


    "Why do they sleep here, and why don''t the guards intervene?" William inquired.


    "This area isn''t well-patrolled. There aren''t many shops here, so the guards focus on the larger establishments. Perhaps that''s why Leonard chose this location for his bookshop."


    Finally, they arrived at Leonard''s bookshop.


    "You were right," William remarked, staring at the small, dilapidated building. "This is even smaller than I expected."


    The building was grimy, with cracks marring its walls. It was far from appealing. S§×arch* The NovelFire.net* website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "I told you," Beatrice said with a smug grin.


    She knocked several times, but no one answered. This was not a good sign.


    William watched as Beatrice cast a spell to unlock the door. The spell was swift and silent, unlocking the door in seconds.


    "That was the easy part," she warned. "Leonard likely has traps and other magical formations inside. Let''s hope they''re deactivated."


    Beatrice led the way, her magical prowess surpassing William''s. He wouldn''t be able to navigate the traps alone.


    "The traps are deactivated," she announced, examining the entrance. "Leonard likely disabled them for James, but would have reactivated them had they left."


    However, a thorough search of the bookshop, which also served as Leonard''s residence, revealed no sign of either man. Yet, there were indications that Leonard had indeed had a visitor ¨C two teacups instead of one. Beatrice recognized the aroma.


    "This is James''s favorite tea," she noted. "He was here. But where are they? And why are the traps deactivated if they left?"


    Neither of them could understand the situation. William wandered around the bookshop, observing the dusty, neglected books. It was evident that the shop received few visitors.


    ''She was right about this being a facade,'' William thought.


    They pondered the situation, but the bookshop offered no further clues.


    "If the traps aren''t activated, it could mean they haven''t left," William proposed. "And if they''re not here, there might be another exit. Perhaps Leonard and James used a hidden passage, and Leonard forgot to reactivate the traps in his excitement?"


    Beatrice''s eyes widened. "You might be right. Leonard is prone to forgetfulness when he''s enthusiastic, and reuniting with his best friend after years could certainly cause that. As for another passage, that''s also plausible. Leonard has connections to the sewers."


    "Sewers?" William echoed, surprised.


    "Yes, the Ignis underground. It''s where people conduct illicit business. You''ll find bandits, assassins, scammers, slave traders ¨C you name it. It''s the city''s black market."


    William couldn''t fathom how someone like Leonard had ties to such a place. Was he involved in something illegal?


    Their immediate challenge, however, was to locate the hidden passage. Where should they begin their search?


    Beatrice and William rose and started their investigation. The bookshop itself was not big enough to pose a threat in finding the passage, but according to Beatrice, Leonard was a smart guy.


    "This won''t be easy," she said.


    "We will find it."

 Chapter 104 - 104: Getting Answers in the Sewers

    Though the bookshop was dusty, it was well-organized. In contrast, Leonard''s living quarters, located at the back, were clean and tidy. Clearly, he took pride in his personal space; the bookshop''s dustiness stemmed from a lack of customers.


    "Leonard is an experimental mage," Beatrice commented as they searched his room. "We should assume he has a secret room for his work, which might also connect to the sewers."


    Most mages had a private space for research and experimentation, a sanctuary free from distractions. William himself appreciated such a space for his training. It fostered concentration.


    They began their search, focusing on potential hidden passages in the walls or a trapdoor leading downwards. There was no other logical possibility.


    They pulled on suspicious-looking books and examined every piece of furniture, but found nothing. Frustration mounted as their efforts proved fruitless.


    They considered the possibility of Leonard having a separate location for his experiments and the sewer access, but it seemed illogical. If that were true, he would have activated the traps in his shop and home.


    Just as they were about to give up, William''s demonic sword, Asura, offered a solution.


    "I sense mana in a specific location," Asura''s voice echoed in William''s mind. "It might be something."


    William was taken aback. Neither he nor Beatrice, a powerful mage, had sensed anything. How could the sword detect mana so easily? Was it because Asura was a magical artifact, or were demonic objects inherently better at sensing mana?


    William knew Asura could sense demonic energy from afar, but this sensitivity to ''normal'' mana was new.


    "Are you certain?" William asked mentally. "Can you tell me where it''s coming from?"


    Beatrice watched as William seemingly spaced out, unaware of his mental conversation with the sword. Asura provided directions.


    "There''s a trace of recent mana usage behind a bookshelf in Leonard''s room," the sword informed him.


    The bookshelf Asura mentioned was one they had already examined, pushing it aside to check for hidden mechanisms. They found nothing at the time. Could Asura be mistaken, or had they missed something?


    William decided to investigate. He crossed the room and pushed the bookshelf aside once more.


    "What is it?" Beatrice inquired, curiosity piqued. "Did you find something?"


    She was puzzled by William''s sudden shift in focus but chose to observe.


    The bookshelf scraped against the wooden floor, and as it moved, William''s eyes fixed on the wall behind it.


    As expected, the wall appeared bare. They had inspected it thoroughly just moments ago.


    "Place your hand on the wall and channel your mana," Asura instructed.


    William obeyed, while Beatrice observed with curiosity. She understood what he was attempting, but she hadn''t sensed anything unusual about the wall.


    Suddenly, a section of the wall shimmered and vanished, revealing a hidden passage. It had been concealed by an invisible barrier!


    ''I''ve seen this in some cool games back on Earth,'' William thought, amused.


    "How did you know?" Beatrice asked, astonished.


    Unable to reveal Asura''s involvement, William simply said, "I can sense mana quite well. I''m not sure why I couldn''t before."


    Beatrice accepted the explanation without further questioning, relieved that they had found the hidden passage. It was a descending corridor, not a straight path.


    "Will this be safe?" William asked, apprehensive.


    Beatrice took the lead. "Let me go first and check."


    As the stronger mage, she felt responsible for William''s safety.


    William nodded and followed. The corridor was well-lit by magical torches with blue flames, creating an eerie ambiance.


    They encountered several doors. "These must be Leonard''s research rooms," Beatrice deduced. "We shouldn''t intrude. He wouldn''t appreciate it. Let''s continue towards the sewers."


    Despite her words, Beatrice approached the doors to check for any sign of Leonard or James. "Leonard? James?" she called out.


    Silence met her calls. Satisfied that the rooms were empty, they continued onward.


    They eventually reached another door, this one reinforced with additional security measures.


    "This leads to the main sewer area," Beatrice explained. "The doors here are usually well-protected to prevent unwanted intrusions."


    Many people had similar passages within their homes, not just Leonard.


    "Can you open it?" William inquired.


    Beatrice smiled confidently. "Yes, I''m quite skilled at unlocking things. And since we''re approaching from the inside, it''s much easier than attempting to unlock it from the sewers."


    "That makes sense," William agreed.


    Beatrice examined the door, her fingers tracing the intricate runes etched into its surface. She muttered a series of incantations, her hands glowing with a faint, ethereal light. The runes responded, their glow intensifying as they pulsed with magical energy. With a final flourish, Beatrice pushed the door open, revealing a dark, damp passage leading into the depths of the city.


    "After you," she gestured, a playful smile gracing her lips.


    William, steeling his nerves, stepped into the unknown. The air was thick with the stench of mildew and decay, and the only light came from the faint glow of Beatrice''s magic. The passage descended steeply, the rough-hewn steps slick with moisture.


    William observed several similar doors scattered throughout the sewer area. Two narrow walkways flanked a central channel filled with foul-smelling water. William was determined to avoid stepping in it. S§×arch* The N??eFire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "Let''s move," Beatrice urged. "They must have gone to the main chamber."


    The sewers led to a spacious chamber where illicit trade flourished. Beatrice navigated the maze with ease, heading towards the building where transactions took place.


    "Do you come here often?" William inquired, impressed by her familiarity with the place.


    "Occasionally," she replied. "It''s a good source of information and valuable items. I come here on behalf of the noble house I work for, not for personal gain."


    They reached a double door guarded by two imposing thugs. Their strength was evident. Beatrice approached confidently, and when challenged with a secret phrase, she responded correctly, granting them passage.


    William entered a large, open room teeming with people from all walks of life, most cloaked to conceal their identities. He glanced at the various stalls, his eyes widening at the sight of potions, enchanted items, slaves, stolen artifacts ¨C all manner of illicit goods.


    "You can find bargains here," Beatrice explained. "Most items are stolen, so they''re sold cheaply to ensure a quick turnover. You can''t sell stolen goods to legitimate shops; they can identify them."


    "Wait, what? How?" William asked, intrigued.


    "When crafting an item, an imprint of your mana is left on it, including potions. If you''re the crafter, selling it is easy. If not, you must prove you obtained it legitimately," Beatrice clarified.


    William was unaware of this practice. The sewers provided an outlet for those who stole items they didn''t intend to use.


    "I presume such places exist in most large cities," William commented.


    "Absolutely. It''s a massive market. Now, follow me."


    Beatrice led him to a corner of the room and opened a small door. Inside, they found an old man with a wrinkled face and a long beard, emanating a foul odor.


    "Ah, it''s you," the man greeted. "What do you need?"


    He didn''t know Beatrice''s name, as anonymity was common in the sewers. People recognized each other by appearance or code names.


    "I''m looking for two men who arrived here today..."


    Beatrice described Leonard''s appearance, then asked William to describe James, in case he looked different since she last saw him.


    The man listened intently, his mind racing to recall the faces they described.


    "Can you wait a moment?" he requested. "I''ll check with my informants."


    This man had eyes and ears everywhere, a valuable source of information. However, his services were costly, but Beatrice was prepared to cover the expense for William.


    After a brief interval, the man returned with news. "They were here earlier tonight, but a group captured them."


    "Captured them?" Beatrice gasped, shocked.


    "Indeed. They used magic-suppressing handcuffs, it seems. No one knows their identities, but they left the sewers through a passage leading outside the city, towards the forest," the man explained.


    Beatrice, trusting the man''s information, was perplexed.


    "I''ll pay you next time I''m here," she promised.


    The old man nodded. Beatrice was a valued customer, and he wouldn''t risk losing her patronage.


    William hurried after Beatrice, who wasted no time heading towards the passage leading out of the city.


    "We need to follow them," she declared. "The kidnapping was recent, so we must search for them immediately."


    William agreed, and they hurried through a long tunnel resembling the one they had used to enter the sewers.


    "Why didn''t anyone intervene?" William questioned.


    "This is a lawless place," Beatrice explained, "or at least, law enforcement rarely ventures down here. The only explicit rule is against outright fighting and killing. But from what we''ve gathered, someone ambushed Leonard and James, quickly restraining them with magic-suppressing handcuffs."


    "Aren''t those handcuffs incredibly powerful?" William asked, concerned.


    The ability to completely nullify a mage''s powers was a significant threat. That random individuals could subdue James and Leonard so easily was alarming.


    Beatrice nodded. "Yes, they are rare and expensive. I''m baffled by how these people acquired such items."


    Questions swirled in their minds, unanswered. William clung to the hope that James was safe.

 Chapter 105 - 105: Coming for the Rescue

    Few people used the tunnel. William inquired about this, and Beatrice explained that its existence was a well-kept secret within the sewers.


    "It''s one of the hidden passages," she said.


    Beatrice''s knowledge stemmed from her status as a powerful mage, her connection to an influential noble family, and her close relationship with the well-informed old man. These factors granted her access to information unavailable to most.


    They traversed the tunnel for about fifteen minutes before reaching its end, which opened into the forest surrounding Ignis. The exit was cleverly concealed, not only by vegetation but also by magic that rendered it invisible to outsiders.


    "Guards patrol this area frequently, so the magical formations here are quite potent," Beatrice explained. "This ensures the passage remains undiscovered."


    "Where should we begin our search?" William inquired.


    "They passed through here, so we need to find any marks indicating their direction. The lack of traffic here works in our favor," Beatrice replied.


    William nodded, and they split up to search the area for footprints or other clues. They were still in the dark about the number and identity of their adversaries.


    Within minutes, William discovered a cluster of footprints in the mud. Two sets were in the center, surrounded by various others. He called for Beatrice.


    "Doesn''t this look like two people were surrounded by others? It could be James and Leonard," William pointed out.


    Beatrice knelt beside the prints, illuminating the area with a magical orb of light. "Yes, it does. I haven''t found anything in other directions, so this must be the right way."


    The footprints appeared fresh. They decided to follow them.


    The possibility of following a false trail loomed over them, but it was a risk they had to take. Their best chance of finding James and Leonard was to follow these tracks and locate them quickly.


    Delay could prove disastrous. The tracks might vanish, and their captives could face unknown perils.


    William and Beatrice ventured deeper into the forest, away from the city. Beatrice''s worry was palpable, fueled by the knowledge of the magic-suppressing handcuffs.


    "We''re dealing with powerful adversaries, kid," she cautioned William. "Are you prepared to face them? This could have dire consequences if they decide to retaliate."


    William understood the risks but couldn''t abandon James. They shared a bond of mutual assistance and a crucial mission for the king.


    They pressed onward, the sounds of nocturnal creatures echoing through the stillness. A full moon illuminated the forest, casting an ethereal glow. William''s senses sharpened, attuned to every rustle and snap.


    At last, they stumbled upon their destination. Concealed amidst dense vegetation and towering rocks was a campsite, its presence betrayed by the telltale wisps of smoke rising from a campfire. A group of cloaked figures huddled around the flames, and near the blaze, they spotted James and Leonard, both bound with magic-suppressing handcuffs. Their captors had effectively neutralized their powers, rendering them vulnerable.


    "It''s them," William whispered, his voice barely audible.


    Beatrice frowned, her gaze fixed on the figures surrounding James and Leonard.


    "They''re competent, but not exceptionally strong," she assessed. "The handcuffs are their only advantage."


    "Isn''t that a good thing?" William asked, puzzled by her grim expression.


    "Yes, but there''s something else... Let''s focus on rescuing them first. Are you ready for a fight?" Beatrice asked, gripping her staff tightly.


    William gripped his steel sword, ready for battle. He was prepared to do whatever it took to save James, even if it meant risking his life or revealing his hidden powers.


    He had assessed the mana levels of their adversaries, and they weren''t overwhelmingly strong. William was confident in his ability to defeat at least three of them.


    Despite being outnumbered, he felt no fear. Beatrice was a formidable mage, more than capable of handling all of them single-handedly if necessary.


    But William wanted to contribute, to fight alongside her. The prospect of engaging in battle invigorated him.


    "Let''s go," Beatrice commanded, and they charged into the fray.


    While William excelled in close combat, Beatrice specialized in ranged magic. She wouldn''t miss the chance to exploit her advantage.


    "I''ll immobilize them, and you cut them down," she declared.


    Their strategy was simple yet effective. Beatrice conjured a series of runes, and the cloaked figures near the campfire found their senses disrupted.


    Blinded and deafened, they were easy targets. Beatrice was a master of illusion magic, and manipulating her opponents'' senses was one of her specialties.


    William seized the opportunity.


    "Enhanced Strength! Swiftfoot!"


    His strength, agility, and speed surged. He moved like a phantom, closing the distance in seconds.


    He slashed at the first cloaked figure, his sword cleaving through their chest. Blood splattered his face and clothes, but he didn''t falter.


    Another slash, and the figure crumpled to the ground, lifeless. With Beatrice''s spell still active, William pressed his advantage. He dashed towards the next opponent and attacked.


    The next target fell just as swiftly, unaware of the impending strike. However, after two of their number were eliminated, Beatrice''s spell dissipated.


    "We''re under attack!" one shouted as their senses returned.


    Despite only managing to eliminate two, it was a significant advantage. Fewer enemies to contend with when the real battle commenced.


    The cloaked figures spotted William first. Beatrice was still approaching.


    "There!" they yelled. "Attack him!"


    Faced with a barrage of spells, William knew evasion was crucial. A direct hit from that many spells could prove fatal. S~ea??h the ¦Çov§×lFire .net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    He preemptively cast Kinetic Burst, a spell that functioned as a rapid dash. As the enemy spells hurtled towards him ¨C poison, fire, water, and lightning ¨C he activated the spell, narrowly evading them.


    William''s evasive maneuver surprised them, but they remained undeterred. They had ample mana to continue their assault, and William couldn''t evade indefinitely.


    However, he wasn''t alone. Beatrice had arrived, and her presence triggered a panicked reaction.


    "A-A behemoth!" one shrieked. "Why is it here? We must flee!"


    Beatrice had invoked another illusion, making them perceive her as a behemoth, a fearsome creature occasionally sighted near Ignis.


    Capitalizing on their terror, Beatrice unleashed a series of deadly attacks. Lotus flowers materialized, their petals sharp as blades, slicing through the air and severing the throats of her paralyzed adversaries.


    Beatrice spared only the apparent leader, who stood paralyzed with fear, barely able to speak.


    "Please, have mercy," he pleaded.


    William watched, his perception of Beatrice shifting. She was not someone he wanted to cross.


    ''She''s terrifying,'' he thought.


    Beatrice approached the captive and began her interrogation. "Why did you take them?" she demanded.


    Desperate to survive, the leader readily divulged information. "The prince hired us," he confessed. "Our target was James, but the other man was with him, so we took both."


    William''s mind raced. The prince''s involvement was puzzling.


    ''Is he trying to sabotage our mission to gather the antidote ingredients? But how did he find out? It''s a closely guarded secret...'' William pondered.


    Beatrice, meanwhile, was reeling from the revelation.


    "The prince? Are you serious? Why is he involved in this?" she questioned, her voice laced with disbelief.


    The prince was a formidable figure, and Beatrice was wary of incurring his wrath. Crossing the royal family was a dangerous game.


    "I don''t know," the man insisted. "I was merely following orders. I swear!"

 Chapter 106 - 106: Sealed?

    Beatrice, ever cautious, wouldn''t blindly trust the kidnapper''s words. She cast a powerful illusion spell, one that required the target to remain immobile, a condition the captive readily met. The spell''s intricate execution took time, but it would reveal the truthfulness of his claims and potentially yield more information.


    Meanwhile, William rushed to James and Leonard, removing the gags from their mouths.


    "William!" James exclaimed, relief washing over him. "You found me!"


    Leonard nudged James with his elbow. "This is the student you mentioned? He seems quite capable."


    A warmth spread through William''s chest. It was gratifying to know that Professor James had spoken highly of him to his friend.


    "What happened?" William asked, eager to free them. "How can I remove these cuffs?"


    "The leader likely has the keys. Check his pockets," Leonard advised.


    William swiftly searched the leader''s clothes and found the keys. James and Leonard, freed from their restraints, rotated their wrists with audible relief.


    "Much better," James declared, picking up the discarded cuffs. "We should keep these."


    Beatrice, her spell nearing completion, focused intently on the captive''s mind. Images flickered before her eyes, revealing the prince''s clandestine meeting with the kidnappers, his instructions clear and his demeanor menacing. The prince''s motive, however, remained shrouded in mystery.


    Suddenly, a sharp cry pierced the air. Beatrice whirled around, her eyes widening in alarm. One of the fallen kidnappers, seemingly lifeless, had sprung to his feet, a dagger clutched in his hand. He lunged towards William, his face contorted with rage.


    William, caught off guard, barely had time to react. The dagger plunged towards his chest, its point glinting ominously in the moonlight.


    Just as the dagger threatened to pierce William''s flesh, Leonard intervened. With astonishing speed, he moved in front of William, his hand intercepting the blade.


    The dagger shattered against Leonard''s palm, unable to penetrate his skin.


    "W-What?" the attacker stammered, disbelief etched on his face.


    Leonard''s expression remained cold as he delivered a swift kick to the man''s head, ending his life instantly.


    William, shaken, stared at the scene. Leonard''s speed was terrifying. It was unsettling to realize someone could end his life so easily.


    James, sensing William''s apprehension, explained, "Leonard specializes in body enhancement magic, like you. Between the two of us, he was the only one capable of reaching you in time."


    "That was incredible!" William exclaimed, admiration replacing his fear.


    He then noticed James''s troubled expression. James was repeatedly attempting to cast a simple spell, but nothing happened.


    "Damn it!" James cursed. "He was telling the truth?"


    Leonard, noticing his friend''s distress, rushed to his side. He pulled up James''s shirt, revealing a rune etched onto his torso.


    "Do you think that Runic Sealer was serious?" Leonard asked, concern in his voice. Sear?h the Novel?ire(.)ne*t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "It seems so..." James replied grimly.


    William, confused, sought an explanation. James''s words filled him with anxiety.


    "They hired the best Runic Sealer in the kingdom," James revealed, his voice trembling. "He sealed my mana. I can''t cast spells anymore." He paused, his gaze distant. "He claimed to be the only one who can remove the seal, and he''s long gone. I''ll have to find a way to break this seal..."


    Leonard, skilled in body enhancement magic, was also adept at creating magical formations, including those designed for sealing. He examined the rune on James''s torso, his expression growing grim.


    "I don''t believe anyone possesses the knowledge to remove this rune..." Leonard admitted. "You might have to endure it for some time."


    William''s apprehension grew. If the prince had orchestrated James''s incapacitation, he must be aware of their mission to gather the antidote ingredients. With James powerless, the responsibility now fell solely on William''s shoulders.


    "Let''s leave," Beatrice declared. "The captive has no further information to offer. We should hand him over to the authorities."


    They returned to the city, the kidnapper leader bound and secured. They informed the guards, and the man was promptly arrested.


    Beatrice bid them farewell. "I can''t stay away any longer, or the family I work for will become suspicious."


    She embraced James. "It''s been a while, James. I''ll do everything I can to help you remove that seal."


    William observed their interaction and sensed an underlying connection between them. He wasn''t oblivious, but he wisely chose to remain silent, saving his teasing for a more private moment.


    After Beatrice departed, Leonard followed suit. "I need to return to my house," he explained. "If your student and Beatrice were able to enter, it means the traps are deactivated."


    With Leonard gone, James and William were alone.


    "What should we do now?" William asked as they walked towards the palace.


    "The prince is behind this," James mused, "but I can''t confront him while my mana is sealed. I believe staying in the palace is the safest course of action for now. No one will attempt anything there."


    Within the palace walls, the prince wouldn''t dare to act against them. The king''s guards were numerous and vigilant; the prince wouldn''t risk such a brazen attack. That''s why he had seized the opportunity while James was outside.


    With his mana sealed, James was vulnerable and needed a safe haven.


    "I''ll speak with the king and see if he can help me with this seal," James decided. "Should I tell him about the prince''s involvement?"


    William considered this. "Yes, I think so. It''s better to inform him and avoid any surprises. If he knows his son is plotting something, he can monitor his actions."


    Whether it was the right decision remained to be seen, but they were willing to take the risk.


    However, another challenge arose. "How will I gather the ingredients alone?" William expressed his concern. "I''ll have the crew, but without you, I''m not sure I can succeed."


    James placed a reassuring hand on William''s shoulder. "I have faith in you," he said. "I believe the king will assign another powerful mage to assist you, someone he trusts. It won''t be the same, but it will have to suffice. We can''t afford to delay; the king''s life is at stake."


    The mission was indeed critical. With war looming, the king''s survival was paramount. He was a powerful figure and a symbol of the Black Flame Kingdom. His death would have dire consequences.


    They returned to the palace and retired to their chambers. It was too late to speak with the king that night. After a restless sleep, they scheduled a meeting with the king in his private chambers.


    When James informed the king of the events that had transpired, the old man was overcome with a mixture of anger and sorrow.


    "My son has always been troublesome, but to act against me..."


    King Memphis''s sadness was palpable. His strength seemed to drain away, his shoulders slumped, and his eyes held a vacant expression. The betrayal of his own son had dealt him a heavy blow.


    "I won''t reveal to my son that I know his intentions, but I''ll keep a close eye on him," Memphis assured them. "I''ll also find someone to examine this seal on you, James. If it cannot be removed, I''ll assign another mage to accompany William. We''ll need to wait a few days."


    James and William departed the king''s chambers. As they entered the main palace area, they spotted the prince strolling through the corridors. He smirked at them but remained silent. James felt a surge of anger, but he was powerless for now. Revenge would have to wait.

 Chapter 107 - 107: Aqualon

    King Memphis, with his vast network, summoned experts to the palace. They examined the rune on James''s torso for hours, each a specialist in magical formations and seals. However, despite their efforts, none could find a way to break the seal.


    One of the kingdom''s most renowned rune masters eventually examined James, but even he was baffled.


    "This might be the work of a rune master from another kingdom," he concluded. "If I cannot break it, you won''t find anyone in this kingdom who can."


    James was disheartened. He had hoped someone would recognize the seal, especially with the king summoning the kingdom''s best, but no one could overcome it.


    James would remain at the palace while William embarked on the quest for the ingredients.


    "Someone will arrive tomorrow," King Memphis informed them. "She is a powerful mage I trust, and she will accompany you on your journey, William."


    The weight of the mission now rested solely on William''s shoulders.


    The weight of the responsibility settled heavily on William''s shoulders. He spent the rest of the day contemplating the task ahead, the gravity of the situation pressing down on him. He wandered the palace gardens, the vibrant colors and fragrant blooms doing little to ease his troubled thoughts.


    He joined James for a quiet dinner in a small dining hall, the usual chatter and laughter replaced by a somber silence. They discussed the mission, James offering advice and sharing his knowledge of the ingredients they sought.


    "The fire blossom is a delicate flower," James explained, "its petals as fragile as spun glass. You must handle it with care, or its essence will dissipate."


    William listened attentively, committing every detail to memory. He knew that without James''s expertise, he would have to rely on his own resourcefulness and the assistance of the unknown mage the king had promised.


    Later that evening, William found himself drawn to the palace library. He spent hours poring over ancient texts, seeking any information that might aid him in his quest. The library, with its hushed atmosphere and the comforting scent of old parchment, provided a welcome sanctuary from his anxieties.


    As the day drew to a close, William retired to his chambers, exhaustion finally claiming him. He slept fitfully, his dreams plagued by images of treacherous seas, fiery volcanoes, and elusive mermaids.


    The next morning, he awoke with a renewed sense of purpose. He dressed in the fine attire provided by the king, the soft fabrics and intricate embroidery a stark contrast to his usual student uniform. He joined James for a light breakfast, their conversation punctuated by nervous anticipation.


    A messenger arrived, announcing the arrival of the mage who would accompany William. He followed the messenger through the labyrinthine corridors of the palace, his heart pounding with a mixture of excitement and apprehension.


    He entered a grand reception hall, his eyes widening at the sight of the mage who awaited him. She was a vision of elegance and power, her pink hair cascading down her back like a silken waterfall. Her eyes, the color of amethyst, sparkled with intelligence and determination.


    "You must be William," she greeted him, her voice melodic and warm. "I am Seraphina, and I will be your companion on this quest."


    William bowed respectfully. "It''s an honor to meet you, Lady Seraphina."


    Seraphina smiled, her expression radiating confidence. "The honor is mine, William. I have heard much about your exploits, and I am eager to witness your skills firsthand."


    They exchanged pleasantries, discussing the journey ahead and the challenges they anticipated. Seraphina exuded an aura of calm competence that reassured William. He felt a surge of hope, believing that with her by his side, they might actually succeed.


    After a brief audience with the king, who offered words of encouragement and a promise of generous rewards, they departed the palace. A carriage awaited them, drawn by a pair of magnificent white horses. They settled into the plush interior, the carriage setting off at a brisk pace towards the coastal city of Aqualon, where their ship and crew awaited.


    The journey was uneventful, the rolling countryside a blur of green fields and quaint villages. William and Seraphina conversed, sharing stories and experiences. William learned that Seraphina was a renowned mage, specializing in water magic and possessing a deep knowledge of the sea and its creatures.


    "The Mermaid''s Tear is a rare and precious substance," she explained, her voice filled with reverence. "It is said to hold the essence of the mermaids'' sorrow, their tears crystallized into pearls of immense magical power."


    William listened, captivated by her tales of the underwater world, a realm he had only glimpsed in books and his dreams. He felt a growing sense of camaraderie with Seraphina, their shared purpose forging a bond between them.


    As dusk approached, they reached Aqualon, a bustling port city teeming with merchants, sailors, and adventurers. The salty tang of the sea filled the air, mingling with the exotic scents of spices and foreign goods.


    They decided to find lodging for the night before embarking on their seafaring adventure. Seraphina led William through the bustling streets, navigating the labyrinth of market stalls and crowded taverns with practiced ease.


    "Aqualon is a vibrant city," she commented, her eyes twinkling with amusement. "It attracts all sorts of interesting characters."


    They eventually found a cozy tavern tucked away in a quieter corner of the city. The tavern, with its low-beamed ceilings and roaring fireplace, offered a welcome respite from the day''s journey. They secured a private room and enjoyed a hearty meal of fresh seafood and local ale.


    "To a successful quest," Seraphina toasted, raising her tankard.


    "To success," William echoed, clinking his tankard against hers.


    The following morning, they made their way to the docks, the Sea Serpent looming large against the dawn sky. The crew, a mix of weathered sailors and sturdy mages, bustled about, preparing the ship for departure.


    "Captain Hemlock," Seraphina greeted the ship''s captain, a grizzled man with a booming voice. "It''s good to see you again."


    "Lady Seraphina," Captain Hemlock replied with a respectful nod. "It''s an honor to have you aboard. And you must be the young mage I''ve heard so much about." He turned his attention to William, his eyes assessing.


    "William, at your service, Captain," William responded, bowing slightly.


    "Well then, let''s get this show on the road," Captain Hemlock declared, clapping William on the shoulder. "We''ve got a long voyage ahead of us." Sear?h the Nov§×l?ire.n(e)t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    The crew loaded the final supplies, securing barrels of fresh water, crates of provisions, and various magical implements. Seraphina supervised the loading of her personal belongings, which included an impressive array of scrolls, potions, and enchanted artifacts.


    "Prepared for anything, I see," William remarked, observing her meticulous arrangements.


    Seraphina winked. "One can never be too prepared, William. Especially when venturing into the unknown."


    With all preparations complete, the Sea Serpent set sail, its sails billowing in the morning breeze. William stood on the deck, watching as Aqualon receded into the distance. He felt a thrill of excitement mingled with a touch of trepidation. The vast expanse of the sea stretched before him, promising adventure and peril in equal measure.


    "Nervous?" Seraphina inquired, joining him at the railing.


    William shrugged, attempting to appear nonchalant. "A little. I''ve never been on a sea voyage before."


    Seraphina chuckled. "Don''t worry, William. You''re in good hands. Captain Hemlock and his crew are the best in Aqualon."


    She gestured towards the horizon. "Besides, think of the wonders that await us. Volcanic islands, hidden coves, and perhaps even a glimpse of the elusive mermaids."


    William''s spirits lifted. He gazed out at the endless blue, his heart filled with anticipation. He was ready to face whatever challenges lay ahead, with Seraphina by his side.


    The first few days of their journey were relatively uneventful. The Sea Serpent sailed smoothly across the calm waters, the sun shining brightly and the wind filling their sails. William spent his time learning the ropes from the seasoned sailors, practicing his swordsmanship, and studying the ancient texts he had borrowed from Orgnar.


    Seraphina proved to be a patient and knowledgeable teacher, guiding him through the intricacies of water magic and sharing her vast knowledge of the sea and its inhabitants. She taught him how to sense the currents, how to communicate with marine life, and how to harness the power of the ocean for both offense and defense.


    One evening, as the sun dipped below the horizon, painting the sky in a breathtaking array of colors, Seraphina approached William with a mischievous glint in her eyes.


    "Care for a little underwater exploration?" she asked, a playful smile curving her lips.


    William''s eyes widened with excitement. "Absolutely!"


    Seraphina led him to the ship''s lower deck, where a small, enchanted submersible awaited them. They climbed inside, the vessel sealing shut behind them. With a gentle hum, the submersible descended into the depths, the world above fading into a hazy blue.


    William gazed in wonder at the underwater realm, a kaleidoscope of vibrant colors and strange creatures. Schools of fish darted through coral reefs, luminescent jellyfish pulsed with ethereal light, and giant sea turtles glided gracefully through the water.


    Suddenly, Seraphina gripped his arm, her eyes wide with alarm. "Look!" she exclaimed, pointing towards a dark shape emerging from the shadows.

 Chapter 108 - 108: Island Treasure Map

    William felt a surge of fear. A creature approaching them underwater was indeed problematic; he was ill-equipped for underwater combat.


    Seraphina, however, calmly cast a water spell, creating a bubble around their heads, allowing them to breathe and communicate underwater.


    "Prepare for a fight," William declared, clenching his fists as the shadow loomed closer.


    Seraphina chuckled at his fearful expression.


    "What''s so funny?" he demanded.


    Then, the shadow resolved into a fish. It wasn''t the monstrous creature he had anticipated, nor did it pose any threat.


    "You knew all along, didn''t you?" William accused, recognizing the playful glint in her eyes.


    She nodded. "Indeed. Your fear was quite amusing."


    William disliked being tricked, but the voyage had been monotonous. The dive provided a welcome distraction.


    Seraphina''s expression turned serious. "But this is a good omen. That fish is called a Black Scale Lion, and it''s a favorite of mermaids. Their presence often indicates a mermaid habitat nearby."


    "Really?" William''s curiosity was piqued.


    "Indeed," she confirmed. "This seems like a good place to search for mermaids."


    Seraphina had sensed the Black Scale Lion, leading them to this specific location. Her mastery of water magic made her an invaluable asset on this quest. William suspected she was even more suited to the task than James. The king must have offered her a considerable sum to accompany him, given her skills. S§×ar?h the N?velFire(.)net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    ''This is a crucial mission, so he''s likely sparing no expense to ensure its success,'' William mused.


    They returned to the Sea Serpent, and Seraphina instructed Captain Hemlock to find a suitable anchorage.


    "Understood, my lady," Hemlock acknowledged.


    A small, uninhabited island nearby provided the perfect spot to anchor for a few days. William admired the island''s unique vegetation and pristine beach as they approached.


    "Mermaids prefer secluded locations where they won''t be hunted," Seraphina explained, "but they also need access to shipping routes. This island is ideal."


    Captain Hemlock and the crew expertly maneuvered the Sea Serpent, anchoring it near the island''s shore.


    William disembarked, savoring the feel of sand beneath his feet. He had missed the solidity of land after days at sea.


    While the crew established a beach camp, William ventured into the island''s interior, his sword at his side. He followed existing paths where possible, clearing new ones when necessary.


    Seraphina watched him disappear into the dense foliage. Though tempted to join him, she opted to assist the crew with the camp setup. Night was approaching, and they needed to prepare quickly.


    William discovered a cluster of coconut trees, effortlessly climbing one to retrieve a coconut. He savored the refreshing juice, draining it in seconds.


    However, his exploration proved disappointing. The island seemed to offer nothing but vegetation.


    "BORING!" he shouted in frustration, kicking a nearby rock.


    The rock sailed through the air, propelled by his considerable strength, revealing something beneath.


    "It looks like someone was digging here..." William murmured, noticing markings on the ground.


    He dug with his bare hands, unearthing a glass bottle containing a rolled-up note. Excitement surged through him. It reminded him of pirate stories he had enjoyed back on Earth.


    He retrieved the note and unfurled it, revealing a map.


    "Could this be a treasure map?" he wondered.


    William compared the island''s rock formations with those depicted on the map, but they didn''t match. It wasn''t a map of this island.


    Just as he was about to dismiss the map, his gaze fell upon a distant island on the horizon. With his enhanced vision, he spotted a rock formation that perfectly matched the one on the map.


    "That''s the island!" he exclaimed.


    The prospect of treasure hunting thrilled him. He returned to the beach camp, keeping the map a secret. He considered sharing it with Seraphina, but ultimately decided against it. He wanted the potential treasure for himself, and Seraphina''s presence would complicate matters. He would have to wait for the opportune moment to explore that island alone.


    "How was your exploration?" Seraphina inquired when she saw him approach. "Did you find anything interesting?"


    "Nothing at all, just vegetation and coconuts..." William feigned disappointment.


    "That was rather predictable," she chuckled. "We are in the middle of nowhere. Anyway, tomorrow we can begin searching the surrounding waters for signs of mermaids. For now, let''s rest."


    As night fell, the crew gathered around a crackling campfire, the flames casting dancing shadows on their faces. They shared stories of past adventures, their laughter echoing across the deserted beach. William, however, remained preoccupied with the treasure map, his mind buzzing with possibilities.


    Seraphina, noticing his distraction, offered him a steaming mug of spiced cider. "Something on your mind, William?" she inquired, her amethyst eyes twinkling with concern.


    William hesitated, debating whether to confide in her. He decided against it, not wanting to jeopardize his potential treasure. "Just thinking about the mission," he replied vaguely.


    Seraphina nodded understandingly. "It''s a daunting task, but I have faith in us. We''ll find the Mermaid''s Tear."


    They shared a companionable silence, sipping their drinks and gazing at the star-studded sky. The gentle lapping of waves against the shore provided a soothing backdrop to their thoughts.


    After a satisfying meal of grilled fish and roasted vegetables, the crew retired to their tents, exhaustion claiming them after a long day. William, however, feigned sleep, his mind racing with plans to explore the distant island.


    As the moon reached its zenith, casting an ethereal glow over the sleeping camp, William slipped out of his tent. He retrieved the map from his inventory, his heart pounding with anticipation. He activated his Swiftfoot spell, his movements becoming a blur as he raced towards the island''s interior.


    He reached the shore, the cool water lapping at his feet. He hesitated for a moment, considering the risks. The journey to the distant island would be long and arduous, and the waters were unknown, potentially harboring dangerous creatures. But the lure of treasure outweighed his fears.


    He plunged into the water, his Swiftfoot spell propelling him forward with incredible speed. He swam with powerful strokes, his body cutting through the water like a dolphin. The moonlit sea stretched before him, an endless expanse of mystery and possibility.


    After what seemed like an eternity, the distant island loomed into view, its silhouette stark against the horizon. William''s heart quickened with excitement. He reached the shore, his breath coming in ragged gasps. He collapsed onto the sand, exhaustion washing over him.


    He allowed himself a brief respite, then, with renewed determination, he ventured into the island''s depths, the treasure map guiding his steps. The island was shrouded in an eerie silence, broken only by the rustling of leaves and the occasional cry of a nocturnal bird. William followed the map''s markings, his heart pounding with anticipation.


    The path led him through dense thickets, across rocky terrain, and over treacherous ravines. He navigated the obstacles with agility, his enhanced senses guiding him through the darkness. After what seemed like hours of trekking, he reached a clearing bathed in moonlight.


    Three towering stone pillars stood in the center of the clearing, their surfaces etched with intricate carvings. William recognized them from the map. This was the location of the treasure.


    He examined the pillars closely, searching for clues. The carvings depicted scenes of mythical creatures and celestial events, their meaning obscure. William traced the lines with his fingers, attempting to decipher their secrets.


    Suddenly, the ground beneath him trembled, and the pillars began to glow with an eerie light. The carvings animated, their figures swirling and dancing in a mesmerizing display. William watched in awe, his mind reeling from the spectacle.


    As the light subsided, a circular opening appeared in the ground between the pillars, revealing a pool of shimmering water. William peered into the depths, his curiosity piqued. He sensed a powerful magical aura emanating from the water, beckoning him closer.


    He took a deep breath and plunged into the pool, the cool water enveloping him. He sank deeper and deeper, the light from above fading into a distant glimmer. Just as he began to worry about his dwindling breath, he emerged into a vast underwater cavern.


    Before him lay a magnificent city, its structures crafted from coral, pearls, and shimmering crystals. Schools of fish darted through the streets, their scales reflecting the city''s ethereal glow. And then he saw them ¨C mermaids and tritons, their forms graceful and fluid, their eyes filled with an ancient wisdom.


    William gasped in astonishment. He had stumbled upon an underwater civilization, a hidden world beyond his wildest imagination. The water around him felt strangely light, allowing him to breathe and move as if he were on land. He wandered through the city, marveling at its beauty and the serenity of its inhabitants.


    Suddenly, a group of triton guards appeared, their expressions stern and their tridents raised. They surrounded William, their voices echoing through the cavern.


    "Who are you? What are you doing in our domain?" one of the triton guards said.


    Despite asking that, the guards didn''t wait for an answer. They tossed a magical net on William, and arrested him, dragging him into their prison cells.

 Chapter 109 - 109: One of the Summoned Heroes

    Triton and mermaid eyes followed William with a mixture of curiosity and fear as he was hauled through the city. His presence, a human in their midst, was an anomaly, a disruption of their secluded existence. It had been ages since a human had set foot within their walls, and his sudden appearance sparked anxiety. Was he a scout for a hostile force? Did he intend to exploit their hidden city?


    William, ensnared by the magical net, was rendered powerless. Though his mana remained unsealed, his physical abilities were nullified. As a practitioner of body enhancement magic, the net was his perfect counter. He could only watch helplessly as they dragged him towards a forbidding stone building at the city''s edge, isolated and imposing. It was their prison.


    The triton guard shoved him into a cell and departed. Other cells held prisoners, all tritons or mermaids. William was the only human.


    Curiosity rippled through the inmates as they noticed William.


    "Well, well," a gruff voice called out. "A human in our city. How did you find us?" S§×ar?h the n?vel_Fire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    William was surprised they spoke his language. Were they once surface dwellers? He refused to answer their questions, assuming they were imprisoned for a reason. Sharing information with criminals seemed unwise.


    "It''s none of your business," William retorted coldly.


    "Of course it''s my business," the triton pressed. "Aren''t you curious about this place? Answer a few of my questions, and I''ll answer a few of yours."


    William recognized the manipulative tactic. Had the triton been anyone else, he might have considered the deal. However, given his current circumstances, William refused.


    "Nice try," William scoffed. "I''ll wait for their interrogation. I''ll learn everything I need then."


    "You think they''ll answer your questions and treat you well? You''re a human, and we despise humans!"


    William ignored him, sitting patiently in his cell. He didn''t attempt to escape. If the other prisoners hadn''t broken free, the bars were likely made of a special material. Besides, an escape attempt would only worsen his situation.


    Five hours passed. William was hungry, thirsty, and his body ached from the hard stone floor. When a guard finally arrived, it was a welcome sight.


    "Come with me," the guard instructed.


    The triton guard approached, magical net at the ready, but William raised his hands in a gesture of surrender. "You can trust me. I won''t run. I wouldn''t get far anyway."


    The guard hesitated, then lowered the net. They traversed the city, arriving at a grand structure on an elevated plateau. It resembled a castle, constructed from coral and stone, an impressive sight that left William awestruck.


    He quickly deduced that this society had a ruling class, likely a king and queen, judging by the grandeur of the building and its resemblance to a palace. The presence of numerous guards further reinforced this notion.


    As they entered, a guard addressed William''s escort. "Is this the human who arrived earlier?"


    "Indeed. Is the king prepared?"


    "Yes. Bring him in."


    A meeting with the king had been arranged. William was apprehensive. Would the king be hostile? The triton prisoner had mentioned their dislike for humans. Things could turn ugly.


    William observed the diverse forms of the palace inhabitants¡ªsome gracefully navigating the halls with shimmering tails, while others strode on human legs, just like himself. This apparent ability to shift between forms intrigued him.


    ''Perhaps they live amongst us undetected,'' he mused, considering the implications. If they could conceal their tails, they could seamlessly integrate into human society.


    The guard led him through the grand corridors, finally arriving at the imposing doors of the throne room. A hush fell over the area as the doors swung open, revealing a vast chamber fit for royalty. William stepped inside, his heart pounding with a mix of anticipation and apprehension.


    The throne room was empty except for the king himself, who sat upon an ornate throne carved from coral and pearls. It was clear the king desired a private audience.


    And what a king he was. Towering over William at least four meters in height, the triton king was a figure of immense power and authority. His physique was imposing, muscles rippling beneath his shimmering scales.


    He held a magnificent trident, its prongs glinting with an ethereal light. He dwarfed every other triton and mermaid William had seen in the city. William found himself wondering about the source of the king''s extraordinary stature. Was it a result of royal lineage, potent magic, or perhaps both?


    William bowed deeply, demonstrating the respect he felt the king deserved. "It''s an honor to meet you, your Majesty."


    The king nodded, a flicker of approval in his eyes. "I appreciate your manners," he rumbled, his voice deep and resonant. "But what brings you here? More importantly, how did you discover the entrance to our hidden city?"


    William, sensing honesty was the best policy, decided against concealing information. He explained his presence clearly, detailing his journey and his purpose.


    "The king of my kingdom suffers from an illness," William revealed. "One of the ingredients required for the cure is a Mermaid''s Tear. We found traces of mermaids in the nearby islands and anchored our ship to seek your aid." He paused, then continued, "However, I also discovered a map on the island that led me to the entrance of your city. I followed it alone, without my crew, and that''s how I ended up here."


    The triton king''s expression hardened. "I understand. However, the location of our city is a secret, so unfortunately, you cannot leave. In time, I may release you from your cell and allow you to earn your freedom through service."


    William''s heart sank. This was not the outcome he had hoped for. He needed to utilize every advantage to persuade the king to help him or at least let him go.


    "You can''t do this," William declared. "I am one of the summoned heroes. You would imprison me while the King of the Underworld roams free?"


    The triton king''s brow furrowed, and he rose from his throne. He towered over William, their size difference stark.


    "What did you say?" he boomed, his voice echoing through the hall.


    "Exactly as you heard," William affirmed. "That''s my secret, so now we''re even. What do you say?"


    The triton king laughed. "Are we? At least my claim is true. There''s no way you''re one of the summoned heroes."


    "I am," William insisted firmly.


    "Well then," the king countered, "what if my most esteemed mage uses her magic to verify your claim? Are you willing?"


    "And can I trust you?" William countered, suspicion coloring his tone. "How does this verification work? What if you declare me a fraud after a fabricated check and send me back to prison?"


    He was wary, unsure how anyone could possess the power to discern his true identity as a summoned hero.


    The king elucidated, a hint of amusement in his voice. "If you are truly one of the summoned heroes, which I highly doubt, but let''s assume you are, then you should know that all summoned heroes bear a unique mark linked to their powers. It''s one of the first things they learn about themselves. Your ignorance on this matter betrays your falsehood."


    William''s jaw dropped. This was news to him. Unlike the other summoned heroes, he hadn''t received any specialized training and was no longer in contact with them. He had been dismissed, deemed unnecessary due to the already abundant number of heroes.


    Consequently, he was unaware of many details regarding the other heroes, their training, their mission, and so on. The triton king''s knowledge on this subject surprised him.


    "And how do you know this?" William questioned, curiosity overriding his apprehension.


    "I have lived for far longer than you can fathom, young one," the king replied cryptically. "But enough with the questions. Are you willing to undergo this verification?" He leaned forward, his gaze piercing. "Consider this a favor. The proper course of action would be to return a liar like you to your cell."


    The king remained unconvinced by William''s claims, which was understandable. However, he was offering William a chance to prove himself. This presented both a potential opportunity and a significant risk. It could be his ticket to freedom or the confirmation of his deceit, potentially leading to further consequences.


    "Bring in your mage," William agreed, his voice steady despite the pounding of his heart.


    Before summoning his mage, the king proposed a wager. "Let''s make a bet. If you are truly a summoned hero, I''ll support you in any way I can. But if you''re not," his voice hardened, "you''ll spend the rest of your days in one of my cells, with no chance of freedom. You''ll work for us without reward, doing whatever we demand. Do we have an agreement?"


    The king expected William to hesitate, to weigh the risks of such a gamble. Instead, William responded without missing a beat, "Deal."


    It shocked the triton king, who called for his court mage to do the test. William had no idea what to expect of that.

 Chapter 110 - 110: New Ally?

    The mage that the triton king called was a woman. A mermaid to be precise. But she didn''t look like one. She was walking on two legs, and there was not a single feature in her appearance that would make William link her to a mermaid.


    If she was disguising herself, then it was flawless. "This is my court wizard, Meridia. She is quite powerful, and the mage that I trust the most."


    William shook his head. "And how does this test works? I mean, will it change your view of me? I''ve heard that your race dislikes humans."


    The king laughed, "and where did you hear that? We don''t, and we had a lot more human visitors in the past. Was someone in the cells that told you that? That person is a liar and a thief."


    "So if you don''t dislike humans, why would you trap me without the chance of letting me go?" William said.


    "Well, if you had reached this place by some other means, that I wouldn''t. But now you know one of the secret entrances, and this means you cannot leave because people can''t know about it."


    William smirked, "You mean I can leave, right? Because your mage will do this test and it will see that I am one of the heroes."


    "We will see, young man, we will see."


    Meridia stepped forward, her amethyst eyes, mirroring the king''s, fixed on William. "The verification process is simple," she explained, her voice calm and measured. "I will cast a spell to reveal your true nature. If you are indeed a summoned hero, a mark will manifest, signifying your status and the nature of your powers."


    William nodded, his apprehension growing. He had no idea what to expect. Meridia raised her hand, her palm glowing with a soft, ethereal light. She chanted in an ancient tongue, the words washing over William like a gentle wave. He felt a tingling sensation throughout his body, a warmth spreading through his veins.


    As Meridia concluded the incantation, a gasp escaped her lips. Her eyes widened in shock, and she stumbled backward, collapsing onto the polished floor.


    "What is it, Meridia?" the king boomed, his voice laced with concern.


    Meridia, still reeling from the revelation, stammered, "Y-Your Majesty... he... he is indeed a summoned hero." She pointed a trembling finger towards William''s forearm, where a mark had materialized ¨C a black dragon, its scales intricately detailed, its eyes glowing with an inner fire.


    The king''s eyes widened in disbelief. He approached William, his gaze fixed on the mark. "This... this is unprecedented," he murmured, his voice hushed with awe. "Not only is he a summoned hero, but he bears the mark of the Black Dragon, the strongest among them. No hero has been summoned with this mark in over ten thousand years."


    A wave of realization washed over the king. He straightened, his eyes filled with newfound respect. "Forgive my earlier skepticism, Hero William," he declared, his voice resonating with sincerity. "I had no idea... We are honored by your presence."


    He turned towards the guards. "Release him immediately. And prepare a feast in his honor."


    William, still processing the events, felt a surge of relief. He had narrowly escaped imprisonment, and his identity as a summoned hero had been confirmed, even celebrated.


    The king, eager to make amends, offered William a tour of the palace, showcasing its grandeur and the intricate workings of their underwater society. He introduced William to his queen, a graceful and intelligent mermaid with a warm smile, and to other members of the court, each expressing their admiration and respect.


    "We are indebted to you, Hero William," the queen declared, her voice gentle and melodic. "Your presence here is a blessing."


    The king, eager to fulfill his end of the wager, offered William not only his freedom but also the Mermaid''s Tear he sought.


    "It is an honor to assist a hero, especially one bearing the mark of the Black Dragon," the king proclaimed, presenting William with a shimmering pearl, its surface iridescent with the colors of the sea. "May it aid you in your noble quest."


    William accepted the Tear with gratitude, his heart filled with a newfound respect for the triton king and his people.


    "Is this the mermaid tear that I needed?" he asked.


    The king confirmed, "Yes, it is."


    "Incredible," William breathed, turning the pearl over in his palm, mesmerized by its iridescent glow. "Thank you, your Majesty. This is..." He paused, searching for the right words to express his gratitude.


    "A small token of our appreciation for a hero," the king finished, a warm smile gracing his features. "Now, come, let us celebrate."


    The feast was a grand affair, held in a vast hall adorned with shimmering coral and luminous pearls. Long tables overflowed with platters of exotic delicacies ¨C roasted sea serpent, grilled kelp cakes, and platters of glistening seaweed salad. Triton musicians played haunting melodies on conch shell instruments, and mermaid dancers twirled gracefully, their movements fluid and mesmerizing.


    William, seated beside the king and queen, felt a warmth spread through him. He had been welcomed into this hidden world, not as an intruder, but as an honored guest. He savored the delicious food, marveling at the unique flavors and textures. Sear?h the Novel?ire(.)ne*t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "This is incredible," he remarked to the queen, who sat beside him. "I''ve never tasted anything like it."


    The queen smiled. "We are proud of our culinary traditions," she replied. "Our chefs are skilled in utilizing the bounty of the sea."


    As the festivities continued, the king leaned closer to William, his voice dropping to a conspiratorial whisper. "Hero William," he began, "I understand the importance of discretion. Your identity as a summoned hero will remain a secret within these walls. Only the royal family and Meridia will know the truth."


    William nodded gratefully. "Thank you, your Majesty. I appreciate your understanding."


    The king raised his goblet. "To Hero William," he announced, his voice booming through the hall. "May his journey be filled with success and his name remembered for generations to come."


    The hall erupted in cheers, the tritons and mermaids raising their goblets in unison. William, basking in the warmth of their acceptance, felt a surge of hope. He had found an unexpected ally in this underwater kingdom, a powerful force that could aid him in his quest. He knew that with their support, and the Mermaid''s Tear secured, he was one step closer to fulfilling his mission and saving King Memphis.


    Once the festivities concluded, the king and William retreated to a private chamber for a more intimate conversation. The king presented William with an azure ring, pulsing with a palpable magical aura.


    "This is a unique artifact," the king explained. "We possess only three of its kind. It will allow you to open a portal to our city whenever you wish. You can also use it to return to the location where you first entered."


    William was astonished. He had never encountered such a powerful treasure.


    "We have remained hidden for far too long," the king confessed. "Perhaps this is an opportunity to re-establish communication with the humans and rekindle our friendship. Could you arrange a meeting between myself and King Memphis in the near future?"


    The triton king saw this as a chance to initiate contact with the human world. William was pleased; he had gained a valuable ally.


    "Certainly, your Majesty," William assured him. "I''ll arrange it."


    William didn''t know if the other heroes were getting powerful allies, but he knew he was, and that was only the start. He would reclaim his glory, and get his revenge.

 Chapter 111 - 111: Epic Ring, and Hamburger?

    Seraphina and the others were undoubtedly worried, given William''s sudden disappearance hours ago. After discussing future plans with the king, William decided to depart using the ring he had received.


    [Mermaid''s Tide (Epic)]


    [A unique ring belonging to the mermaid race. It allows the user to travel between the various entrances of the mermaid kingdom.]


    The Epic rank classification indicated it was one of the most powerful items available, and William was thrilled to possess it. He activated the ring, focusing on the entrance he had used to access the mermaid kingdom. A portal shimmered into existence, and he stepped through.


    He materialized on the island, but the entrance had deactivated, leaving only the stone pillars. It was already morning, and he soon heard the crew''s frantic calls. They had been searching for hours, diving underwater and scouring nearby islands.


    Seraphina led the search party, her water magic proving invaluable, enabling the crew to breathe underwater.


    "William! William!" their voices echoed across the water.


    Just as their hope dwindled, William appeared on a nearby island and shouted back, "I''m here!"


    Relief washed over them, especially Seraphina. She had been entrusted with William''s safety, and his disappearance had placed her in a precarious position.


    William prepared to swim back to the ship when Seraphina materialized beside him, using her magic to allow him to walk on water.


    "What happened?" she inquired as they approached the ship. S§×arch* The n??el Fire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "I found a mermaid and obtained the Tear!" he declared triumphantly.


    He showed her the shimmering pearl, and Seraphina gasped. "What? Truly? This is incredible! I anticipated at least a month''s search."


    The sight of the Mermaid''s Tear silenced Seraphina''s questions about William''s whereabouts and activities. This suited William perfectly, as he couldn''t divulge his encounter with the underwater kingdom. Establishing a relationship with the merfolk would require a formal meeting between the two kings.


    With William safely back on board and the crew celebrating his return, they set sail once more. Their next objective was the fire blossom flower, a rare specimen found only near volcanoes.


    "I''ll be in my quarters," William announced to Captain Hemlock and Seraphina, exhaustion finally catching up with him.


    He retreated to his cabin, eager for rest after a long and eventful night. He needed to sleep before his weary body gave way.


    The moment William''s head hit the pillow, he was asleep. Exhaustion had finally claimed him.


    He awoke hours later, his stomach growling. He climbed to the deck in search of food.


    "Look who''s finally awake," Captain Hemlock greeted him with a grin. "How was your rest?"


    "Excellent, and much needed. How is the voyage progressing?" William inquired.


    Hemlock''s expression turned serious. "So far, so good, but there are pirates in these waters. We''re proceeding cautiously and hoping for the best."


    "Are you concerned about pirates?" William asked.


    "Not particularly. With the mages we have on board, pirates stand little chance. However, they could still damage the ship, delay our journey, or even injure some of the crew. It wouldn''t be ideal," Hemlock explained.


    The king had anticipated potential problems, hence the powerful crew accompanying William. The antidote was his priority, and he spared no effort to obtain it.


    William fetched food from the galley and ate on deck while admiring the endless blue expanse. They were surrounded by water, no land in sight.


    "How long until the next major island?" William inquired.


    Hemlock, with his extensive nautical knowledge, replied, "About three days, assuming no unforeseen delays like storms. We''ll make a brief stop to replenish our supplies before continuing."


    The ship''s stores of food and water were still plentiful, but Captain Hemlock preferred caution. Resupplying at a large, inhabited island was wiser than risking a shortage.


    William understood and didn''t press the matter further. He found a quiet spot on deck to immerse himself in the books Orgnar had lent him ¨C the ones detailing the history of demons.


    He prioritized learning about demons and his own powers over studying new spells. Attempting to learn spells during the voyage would be impractical anyway, given the limited time.


    The books revealed fascinating insights into the demon race. Apparently, they were prominent seven to eight thousand years ago.


    Demons weren''t an entirely distinct race. They resembled humans but possessed a unique bloodline and their own kingdom. They were generally peaceful, focusing on magic and hunting, particularly skilled at hunting and taming powerful beasts. This explained the taming abilities of William''s demonic sword; ancient demons likely possessed similar powers.


    However, demons faced a significant challenge: low birth rates. They reproduced far less easily than humans or other races, resulting in a population even smaller than that of the elves, who also suffered from low fertility.


    Elves, however, were immortal, at least in terms of aging. Demons also had long lifespans, ranging from 600 to 1000 years, though some lived even longer.


    William felt enriched by the knowledge gleaned from the books, and he hadn''t even finished them yet. He was eager to uncover more secrets of the demon race.


    The remaining days of the journey passed swiftly and peacefully. Soon, they arrived at the island Captain Hemlock had mentioned.


    Hemlock anchored the ship near the port and instructed his crew. "You''re free for the day while I arrange our supplies. Tomorrow, I''ll need your help loading the ship."


    This granted everyone some free time, including William. He decided to explore the island alone, despite Seraphina''s offer to accompany him.


    His desire for solitude wasn''t a reflection on Seraphina; he simply craved some personal time. The constant company on board the ship had become a bit overwhelming. Seraphina, understanding his need for space, didn''t object.


    The island boasted a sizable, bustling city, a popular stop for merchant and other vessels navigating the area. Pirates, cleverly disguised, roamed the streets, but the city''s unique laws prevented their arrest simply for being pirates. It was a haven for all, though committing crimes within its boundaries still carried consequences.


    William strolled along the cobblestone streets, drawn to the lively music spilling from a nearby bar. He decided to indulge in a drink and enjoy the tunes.


    A man with a guitar sang with impressive skill, captivating the audience. William savored the moment, sipping an unfamiliar alcoholic beverage. It brought back memories of his college days, seeking solace in bars to escape the pressures of life. Though perhaps not the healthiest coping mechanism, it had brought him a sense of peace at the time.


    Several women approached William, drawn to his handsome features and fine attire. However, he politely declined their advances, his focus fixed on the mission.


    After a few drinks, he continued his exploration of the city. A particular establishment caught his eye, nearly bringing him to tears. It was a small restaurant with outdoor seating, and the food they served resembled hamburgers. They weren''t exactly like those from Earth, but the similarity was enough to stir a deep craving within him.


    He secured a table and eagerly awaited the waiter''s arrival, hoping the menu would offer the culinary comfort he sought.


    The waiter, a friendly young man with a cheerful grin, presented William with a menu handwritten on a weathered piece of parchment. William scanned the offerings, his eyes lighting up when he spotted the "Grizzly Burger."


    "I''ll take the Grizzly Burger," he declared, his stomach already growling in anticipation.


    "Excellent choice, sir," the waiter replied, scribbling the order onto a small pad. "And what would you like to drink?"


    William pondered for a moment, then decided on a local ale. He leaned back in his chair, enjoying the warm afternoon sun and the lively chatter from the nearby market.


    The burger arrived, its aroma making his mouth water. It was a hefty creation, a juicy patty nestled between two thick slices of crusty bread, topped with melted cheese, crisp lettuce, and a tangy sauce. William took a bite, savoring the explosion of flavors. It wasn''t exactly like the burgers back home, but it was a delicious and satisfying meal nonetheless.


    As he finished his meal, a commotion erupted from the nearby market. A group of rough-looking men, their faces obscured by scarves and their hands gripping weapons, barged through the crowd, shouting threats and demanding valuables.


    William watched with a mixture of curiosity and apprehension. He had heard tales of the city''s lax laws, but witnessing such brazen lawlessness firsthand was unsettling. He debated whether to intervene, but ultimately decided against it. He was a guest in this city, and involving himself in local disputes could jeopardize his mission.


    William, choosing to ignore the commotion, sought a tavern for the night. The scene in the market was unsettling, but he felt powerless to intervene.


    He selected a decent-looking tavern from the many available, secured a room, and went straight to bed.


    "I think I drank too much..." he mumbled, the effects of the alcohol catching up with him.


    The pleasant buzz had faded, leaving him feeling unwell. He lay down, attempting to sleep, but woke up several times throughout the night to vomit.


    The next morning, he awoke with a pounding headache and a churning stomach. He regretted his indulgence the night before. He needed to be sharp and focused for the journey ahead, and his current state was far from ideal.

 Chapter 112 - 112: Back to the Past

    The harsh morning sun assaulted William''s eyes as he emerged from the tavern, his head still pounding and his stomach churning from the previous night''s overindulgence. Thankfully, his mana-enhanced constitution allowed for faster recovery than ordinary people, so he wouldn''t suffer for long.


    He was frustrated by the lack of EXP gains. He needed to level up to unlock his class, but opportunities to gain EXP were scarce. With Seraphina and the experienced crew around, he wasn''t needed for fighting, denying him chances to gain experience.


    ''My Chrono Shift will be ready soon. Should I use it?'' he pondered as he navigated the city streets.


    His last trip to the past had been eventful, filled with both opportunities and challenges. The situation at the academy, with its secret passages, undead creatures, and Professor Lincoln''s strange behavior, was concerning. Was it wise to return, potentially facing another extended stay?


    ''At least I can gain EXP there... Perhaps it''s worth the risk...''


    He still had a few days to decide. For now, he had to help load supplies onto the Sea Serpent. Arriving at the harbor, he found the captain and crew already at work, carrying crates onto the ship.


    "What happened to you, William?" one of the sailors remarked. "You look awful!"


    William couldn''t deny his disheveled appearance. "I had a bit too much to drink last night," he confessed.


    "That explains why you look so rough and why you''re late," the sailor chuckled. "Come on, we need your help getting these crates onto the ship."


    Everyone worked together to load the supplies. While magic could have sped things up, using it within the city was forbidden.


    It took them roughly forty minutes to finish the task, and then they were ready to depart. Their destination: a volcanic island, the only place where the Fire Blossom Flower could be found.


    "How long until we get there?" William asked.


    The captain, steering the ship back on course, replied, "About fifteen days. The journey should be calm, but the island itself is dangerous. We''ll need to be prepared."


    "Fifteen days? That''s not as long as I expected," William remarked.


    They were nearing the end of their journey. Obtaining the flower would be challenging, but they were close. William''s acquisition of the Mermaid''s Tear had significantly expedited the mission.


    "Yes, we''re close," the captain agreed, "but this is the most perilous part of the journey. We must be extra vigilant."


    "How so?" William inquired.


    He anticipated tales of pirates and bandits, but the captain''s explanation was different.


    "Many ships vanish in these waters," the captain revealed, his voice grave. "Magical beasts are abundant here. I don''t mean to alarm you, but if we encounter a rare, powerful beast, we could all perish. There are stories of a Kraken with a level exceeding 200 lurking in this sea."


    "What? Are you serious?" William exclaimed, incredulous. "That''s insane!"


    "Indeed it is," the captain acknowledged. "But those are just stories. The likelihood of encountering such a creature is slim."


    Despite the captain''s reassurances, the image of a colossal Kraken lingered in William''s mind. He retreated to his cabin, seeking solace in his books to distract himself from the unsettling prospect.


    Three days passed, and the sea transformed. An endless mist descended, obscuring their vision. Captain Hemlock, however, seemed unfazed.


    "This is a well-known phenomenon in these waters. The mist never dissipates," he explained.


    The mist''s persistence suggested a magical origin. William joined the crew on deck, observing the eerie spectacle. Seraphina, her expression apprehensive, stood beside him.


    Suddenly, a notification appeared in William''s mind.


    [Chrono Shift is Up]


    The System alerted him to the ability''s availability. Previously, he might have hesitated, but the captain''s warnings about the dangerous waters had swayed him.


    Activating Chrono Shift would allow him to level up in Aethel''s past, increasing his chances of survival should they encounter any threats.


    William retreated to his cabin, a private space where he could activate his Chrono Shift ability undisturbed. He opened a portal to the past and stepped through, finding himself back in the familiar halls of the ancient Snowpeak Academy. He had taken the precaution of bringing a change of clothes, ensuring his appearance remained consistent.


    The journey to the dungeon was brief. A guard escorted him to the dimly lit cells. Xavier, confined to a cold, damp cell, glared at William with unconcealed rage.


    "I''ll wait outside," the guard announced. "Call if you need anything."


    With the guard gone, William faced Xavier alone. "You know I''d kill you without hesitation if I had the chance," Xavier seethed.


    William smirked. "Did you summon me here just for that? What a waste of time."


    "It''s not just that," Xavier insisted. "I''m willing to help you learn more about the secret order I wanted to join. In exchange, I want out of this cell!"


    The offer was tempting, but William doubted Xavier''s sincerity. He suspected a trap.


    "Why should I trust you?" William countered. "With you imprisoned here, it''s only a matter of time before we can extract your knowledge magically, assuming you even know anything valuable."


    William turned to leave, but Xavier stopped him. "I can give you some information upfront as a gesture of good faith."


    "What could you possibly tell me? I doubt you know anything important," William scoffed.


    "I know about an underground area beneath the academy," Xavier revealed. "You can verify this yourself, proving my trustworthiness."


    William froze. He had recently explored that underground area, and it raised many questions. How did Xavier know about it? According to Marcel, it was a secret, and no one had ever mentioned it before.


    "What did you say?" William asked, needing to hear it again.


    "There''s an underground area beneath the academy," Xavier repeated. "It once belonged to the secret order I wanted to join. I don''t know if it holds anything valuable, but it proves I have information worth sharing."


    This was crucial information! The underground area William and Marcel had explored was connected to the secret organization practicing dark arts.


    "How can I be sure you''re telling the truth?" William pressed. "What if you''re simply pretending it''s related to this order? It could be a meaningless coincidence."


    "There should be evidence linking the area to the order," Xavier insisted. "And you can expect to encounter flesh creatures down there. The order creates them."


    William had encountered a flesh golem. Xavier''s claims were becoming increasingly credible. William, however, concealed his prior exploration. "I''ll investigate to verify your claims. How do I access this underground area?"


    Xavier explained, revealing a different secret entrance than the one Marcel knew. Apparently, multiple secret passages led to the same area. This one was located in the abandoned guard tower at the back of the academy. The tower predated the academy but remained unused, perhaps deemed too old by Headmaster Grant.


    William found the invisible wall Xavier described. A staircase descended, leading to the same underground area he had visited before. He saw no reason to venture back down. The place was dangerous, and he wasn''t confident in his ability to survive another exploration alone.


    He returned to Xavier.


    "Well? Did you find it?" Xavier asked, surprise evident in his expression.


    "Are you surprised I survived the flesh creatures?" William smirked. "I''m more capable than you think. Now, can you tell me what language this is?"


    William presented the books he had found during his previous exploration with Marcel.


    The books, a source of lingering mystery, were now in Xavier''s hands. Though unable to decipher them, he offered a glimmer of hope.


    "These books utilize a coded language created by the order," Xavier explained. "The base language originates from a distant kingdom. If you can find someone who speaks it, or learn it yourself, deciphering the books might be possible."


    "What kingdom?" William pressed, eager for any lead. sea??h th§× N?vel(F)ire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Aethel''s past held kingdoms different from those William knew. His knowledge of ancient history was limited.


    "That''s the problem," Xavier admitted. "The kingdom no longer exists. It was conquered around 1200 years ago, and its language is practically lost. You could try searching the desert for more information."


    "Damn it!" William cursed, striking the stone wall in frustration.


    The information, though intriguing, was currently useless. He turned and left, ignoring Xavier''s pleas for reciprocation.


    Marcel intercepted him shortly after. "Well? What did you learn?"


    William, still harboring some distrust towards Marcel, nevertheless shared his newfound knowledge.


    "I see..." Marcel mused. "Venturing into the desert is impossible for us now, but perhaps in the future. At least we have a lead."


    "Before I forget," Marcel added, "the test for the island expedition is happening in a few days. It''s been moved up."


    This was the test to qualify for the journey to the island housing another Snowpeak Academy branch. William was determined to go.


    "What? Are you serious? Can we even pass it?" he asked, surprised.


    Marcel nodded. "I think so. Everyone''s had the same amount of preparation time, so we''re not at a disadvantage."


    William felt a surge of anxiety. Would he succeed?

 Chapter 113 - 113: Hunt and Storm

    The test determined who would journey to the other Snowpeak Academy branch and reside on the island for a time. Headmaster Grant had explained that they needed assistance with construction and teaching at the new location. William, initially unsure, now felt certain he wanted to go.


    The only thing keeping him at the current academy was the underground area, but the indecipherable language of the books hindered his progress. He decided it was better to risk a new experience than remain stagnant.


    The next few days flew by, and soon it was time for the test. William awoke with a mix of excitement and nerves. The other students shared his anticipation.


    Headmaster Grant summoned them to the gymnasium, a smaller version of the one William was accustomed to.


    "I''ve gathered you here for the upcoming test," he announced, his voice resonating through the space. "I seek talented individuals willing to relocate to another branch of our academy. It won''t be easy, so only the bravest should attempt this test!"


    William surveyed the room. Only fifteen students were present, including Marcel, who stood beside him, radiating enthusiasm. "We''ll pass this test! No more snow and cold ¨C we''re going to the beach!"


    Marcel clearly craved warmer weather. William was indifferent to the climate, but the prospect of a beach locale was appealing.


    "The test is simple," Grant explained. "Step forward and allow me to sense your aura. The strongest will be selected."


    The simplicity of the test surprised William, and he questioned the reasoning behind it. Grant had initially emphasized the need for builders and teachers, leading older students to believe their experience would be valued. However, the focus on aura strength suggested a different motive.


    ''Is there another reason why he wants the strongest to go?'' William pondered, suspicion creeping into his thoughts.


    Despite the potential for ulterior motives, William remained eager for the experience. It offered a chance to gain EXP and level up, something he had been unable to do recently. He was also curious about the academy branch''s absence in the present timeline. Could he influence the past and alter the future?


    The candidates approached Headmaster Grant one by one, undergoing the aura assessment. Grant selected several students, including William and Marcel.


    "You will depart tomorrow with one of our instructors," Grant announced. "Be prepared."


    William observed the other chosen students, mostly older and unfamiliar to him.


    After the test concluded, the students dispersed, each preparing for the journey in their own way.


    "This is exciting," Marcel exclaimed. "I can''t wait to get there."


    "Don''t you think it''s strange they only want the strongest?" William questioned. "What''s happening at that academy branch?"


    Marcel shrugged it off, unconcerned. William wondered if he was being overly cautious or if the others were naive to potential ulterior motives.


    William returned to his room and waited, passing the time with reading and magic practice.


    The next day, the students gathered at the academy gate, where Professor Lincoln awaited them. William felt uneasy about Lincoln''s presence. The professor was shrouded in mystery, his motives unclear, especially after William had spotted him lurking at night.


    Marcel shared his apprehension. "I wish someone else were accompanying us..." he murmured.


    However, they had no choice in the matter. Lincoln had brought a flying mount for the students to ride, but William had his own ¨C Asura, who had tamed a winged lizard.


    "William," Lincoln addressed him, "you can use your own mount. Marcel can accompany you, and I believe we''ll need one more student to join you as well."


    Lincoln''s mount couldn''t accommodate all eight students. William, Marcel, and one other would have to ride with Asura. Most preferred the perceived safety of traveling with the professor.


    Only one volunteered to join William: a timid girl with black hair and round glasses.


    "Can I go with you?" she asked softly.


    William saw no reason to refuse, especially with Marcel''s enthusiastic support. He suspected his friend had ulterior motives...


    With their arrangements settled, they departed. William possessed a map and a general sense of their destination, but he followed Lincoln for convenience. The aerial view was breathtaking, but William couldn''t shake a sense of foreboding. Something about Grant''s request felt off, but he would address that later.


    "How long will the journey take?" the timid girl inquired.


    William was about to answer when Marcel interjected, eager to impress her. "I believe it will take around ten days, if my estimations are correct."


    William played along, supporting his friend''s attempt to impress the girl. "You can trust Marcel," he affirmed. "He knows what he''s talking about."


    "Really?" the girl responded, her eyes shining with admiration. "That''s wonderful. It''s reassuring to have someone reliable."


    Marcel discreetly gave William a thumbs-up.


    Their journey was relatively peaceful. They encountered some beasts along the way, but Lincoln, with his formidable power, easily dispatched them. While this meant less work for William, it also meant fewer opportunities to gain EXP.


    William noticed they were heading towards a different sea than the one he had traversed with Hemlock and Seraphina. This time, they were venturing into an unfamiliar part of the kingdom, with unique vegetation and landscapes.


    The entire kingdom was indeed unfamiliar to William, its past vastly different from the present he knew. From his vantage point atop the flying lizard, he saw few signs of civilization. Occasional villages dotted the landscape, but wilderness dominated.


    Lincoln slowed his mount, flying alongside William. "Let''s stop for today," he advised. "I sense a powerful storm approaching. Flying would be unwise."


    William nodded in agreement. They searched for a suitable shelter, the advantage of their flying mounts allowing them to reach normally inaccessible locations. A cavern atop a mountain caught their attention, promising protection from the impending storm.


    William and Lincoln landed their mounts, and Lincoln cautiously entered the cave to ensure its safety. Finding it clear, they led the students inside.


    "Professor Lincoln, what about our tents?" one student inquired. "We didn''t bring any."


    Headmaster Grant had told them tents were unnecessary, but no one understood why until now. Lincoln demonstrated his resourcefulness. He conjured tiny houses, creating stone structures out of thin air. Then, he magically generated vegetation to create comfortable bedding.


    Within minutes, he had constructed five cozy shelters, complete with windows to alleviate any sense of claustrophobia. William was impressed. This was a valuable skill for frequent travelers.


    "Decide amongst yourselves who sleeps where," Lincoln instructed. "The houses are identical, so don''t overthink it. I''ll start a fire."


    William, Marcel, and the timid girl, Denise, ended up sharing a house. Although the space was cramped for three, Denise preferred their company to that of the other students.


    "I don''t trust them," she confessed. "Sharing a room with you is preferable. If that''s alright?"


    "Sure, no problem," William agreed. "I''ll help with the fire. You and Marcel can stay here and chat."


    William left the tiny house and found Lincoln preparing a fire.


    "Professor," William began, "may I hunt something for us to eat?"


    Lincoln looked surprised. "We still have supplies. Are you sure you want to go out with the storm approaching?"


    "It will be a while before the storm reaches us, and it''s better to hunt than deplete our supplies, right?" William reasoned. "Asura and I can easily catch something."


    Lincoln considered this, then said, "Fine. But wait here. I have something for you."


    He rummaged through his bags and produced a wooden bow and arrows. "It''s simple, but effective for hunting. I don''t know if you''re familiar with mana infusion, but it''s a useful skill to learn if you have the time."


    William accepted the bow gratefully and thanked the professor before departing with Asura. From the air, they surveyed the landscape for potential prey. Asura''s keen senses aided in the search. S§×arch* The ¦Çov§×lFire .net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    He soon spotted a deer drinking from a small pond. It was the perfect prey, large enough to feed everyone. William dismounted, believing a stealthy approach on foot would be more effective than arriving on the noisy lizard.


    He crept closer, then drew the bow and loosed an arrow. With his enhanced strength, the arrow flew with tremendous force. Though not infused with mana, it was enough to kill the deer instantly.


    William retrieved the deer, hoisting it onto his shoulders, and waited for Asura. Back at the cave, the other students doubted his hunting prowess.


    "That guy''s going to get himself killed by some random beast," one scoffed. "I still don''t understand why the professors and Headmaster Grant think so highly of him."


    "Right? He seems like an average student."


    Their surprise was palpable when William returned just ten minutes later, a deer carcass slung over his shoulder. Even experienced mages often took longer, hindered by their lack of hunting skills. William, however, had easily tracked, killed, and retrieved his prey.


    He then proceeded to butcher the deer in front of them, unfazed by the blood and organs, a sight that unsettled some of the more squeamish students.


    William and Lincoln collaborated to prepare the meal. Everything proceeded smoothly until the storm hit. It was far fiercer than Lincoln had anticipated, the cave shaking under the onslaught of rain and thunder.


    "Is this a normal storm?" William asked, sensing something amiss. "This feels different."


    Lincoln''s expression was grave. Something unusual was happening, something William couldn''t comprehend.

 Chapter 114 - 114: Construction Workers?

    The storm''s unnatural intensity frightened everyone, even Lincoln.


    "Everyone, go to the back of the cave," he instructed urgently. "This is not good."


    They obeyed, seeking safety in the cave''s depths. Lincoln cast a spell, creating a stone barrier to protect them.


    William remained near Lincoln, observing the professor''s worried expression. "What''s happening, Professor?" he asked.


    Lincoln, eyes fixed on the storm clouds, stammered, "L-Look! Just look!"


    He stared at the sky in awe. William followed his gaze and saw a magnificent creature soaring above them. It was a horse-like being with two wings, a horn, and crackling lightning surrounding its form. Its size was immense, like something out of a myth.


    "It''s a mythical creature," Lincoln whispered, his voice filled with wonder. "Few have ever witnessed such a sight... We are fortunate."


    "Then why are the students hiding?" William questioned.


    "Because it''s dangerous! We need to hide as well. If it finds us, we''re doomed."


    Lincoln and William retreated deeper into the cave, extinguishing the campfire. They joined the students, waiting anxiously for the creature to depart. The sound of its powerful wings echoed around them for hours until the storm subsided, and the creature vanished.


    Everyone breathed a sigh of relief. The students, learning of the mythical horse, were incredulous. Some expressed disappointment at missing the sight, but the creature was gone.


    As they soared over a dense forest, a flock of monstrous ravens, their wingspans exceeding ten feet and their eyes burning with malevolent intent, descended upon them, their beaks sharp as daggers and talons outstretched.


    Lincoln, ever vigilant, reacted swiftly. "Hold tight!" he instructed the students, his voice unwavering.


    He raised his staff, channeling his mana. "Terra Spikes!" he boomed, and massive earthen spikes erupted from the ground below, narrowly missing the students but impaling several ravens, sending feathers and dark blood raining down.


    The remaining creatures screeched in fury, their feathers ruffled. They swooped and dived, attempting to flank the group, but Lincoln remained unfazed. "Vine Snare!" he incanted, and thick, thorny vines snaked out from the forest canopy, ensnaring the ravens, pulling them from the sky.


    William and the students watched in awe as Lincoln effortlessly controlled the earth and plants, manipulating the battlefield to his advantage. They had witnessed his strength before, but this aerial display was breathtaking.


    With the raven threat neutralized, they continued their journey, their confidence in Lincoln''s protection reinforced. They encountered other airborne creatures along the way ¨C giant, venomous wasps with stingers the size of swords, monstrous bats with razor-sharp claws, and even a colossal wyvern, its leathery wings eclipsing the sun as it swooped down, its jaws agape, revealing rows of jagged teeth.


    Each encounter tested Lincoln''s skills, but he remained undeterred, his magic a force to be reckoned with. He summoned earthen platforms to elevate them above attacks, conjured thorny vines to ensnare their airborne foes, and commanded the very air to buffet and disrupt their enemies'' flight.


    William, observing Lincoln''s mastery, felt a pang of envy. He yearned to possess such power, to command the elements with such ease. He knew he had a long way to go, but witnessing Lincoln''s abilities fueled his determination to grow stronger.


    After several days of travel, they reached the coast, the vast expanse of the sea stretching before them. A bustling port city, nestled amidst a crescent-shaped bay, marked their destination.


    "This is Port Azure," Lincoln announced, guiding his mount towards the city. "We''ll secure passage to the island from here."


    The city was a hive of activity, its streets teeming with merchants, sailors, and adventurers. The air was thick with the scent of salt, fish, and exotic spices. William, someone who had traveled a lot both in the past and the present of Aethel, felt adjusted to the place.


    As for the other students, most of them didn''t have the same experiences as he did, and they were in complete awe, looking around them with curious eyes.


    They landed in a designated area for flying mounts, drawing glances from the locals. Lincoln led them through the city, navigating the labyrinthine streets with practiced ease. They reached the docks, where a variety of ships bobbed gently in the harbor.


    Lincoln approached a sturdy-looking vessel with crimson sails. "Captain Valerius," he greeted the ship''s captain, a weathered man with a stern expression. "We require passage to the island."


    Captain Valerius eyed the group with a discerning gaze. "The island is a dangerous place," he warned, his voice gruff. "Are you sure you''re prepared?"


    Lincoln nodded confidently. "We are. We have urgent business there."


    Captain Valerius, seemingly satisfied with Lincoln''s assurance, gestured towards the ship. "Then welcome aboard. We set sail at dawn."


    After some discussion with Captain Valerius, they secured space for their flying mounts aboard the ship. William, Marcel, and Denise huddled together, their expressions reflecting shared concern.


    "Did you hear the captain? He called the island dangerous. What''s going on at that Snowpeak branch?" William voiced their worries.


    Marcel, initially skeptical of William''s suspicions, had become increasingly concerned. "I don''t know," he admitted, "but we shouldn''t be in any real danger. Though I don''t trust Lincoln, Headmaster Grant is a good man. He wouldn''t send us into harm''s way."


    William agreed. Lincoln was an enigma, but Headmaster Grant, despite his stern demeanor, was ultimately kind.


    They waited for the departure, passing the time with idle chatter and nervous anticipation. Captain Valerius''s experienced crew knew the surrounding waters and the safest route to the island.


    "Couldn''t we fly there directly?" William asked Lincoln, curious about their travel plans.


    "We will, eventually," Lincoln explained. "This ship will take us to another island, from which we''ll continue by air. There''s a particularly treacherous stretch of sea where flying is unsafe due to powerful aerial creatures and sea monsters. Once we pass that point, we can fly the rest of the way."


    William''s apprehension grew as he realized the complexity of reaching the Snowpeak branch. However, he kept his doubts to himself. The ship was well-stocked, and Lincoln had handled all the arrangements. The students simply boarded and prepared for the four-day voyage.


    William spent most of his time reading and conversing with Marcel and Denise, who shared his cabin. The first two days were uneventful, but then disaster struck. Sea monsters attacked the ship.


    A massive shark with multiple eyes and a single wing leaped from the water, attempting to devour a sailor. Lincoln, ever vigilant, reacted instantly. He conjured mud on the deck, from which a massive, animated tree sprouted, intercepting the shark''s attack and trapping it in a wooden embrace.


    This allowed the crew to counterattack, ultimately slaying the monstrous shark. William, observing from the upper deck, was stunned. S~ea??h the N??elFir§×.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "Were those the creatures you warned us about?" he asked Lincoln.


    Lincoln nodded. "Yes, and those are the weaker ones. The real danger lies above."


    William followed Lincoln''s gaze and noticed something unsettling about one of the clouds. It seemed to writhe and shift.


    "Did that cloud just move?" William wondered aloud.


    "You''re not mistaken," Lincoln confirmed. "There are creatures here called Cloud Eaters. They are essentially living clouds that devour anything that flies through them. They are formidable opponents, and I''m not confident we could defeat a group of them. As for the students, well, you would be no match for them."


    The existence of such creatures astonished William. They were unlike anything he had encountered before, and he recognized the danger they posed to unsuspecting travelers.


    Over the next few days, they faced several more sea creatures. William assisted where he could, gaining two levels in the process. The EXP gains were welcome, but he remained wary of the Cloud Eaters.


    They eventually reached a small, sparsely populated island inhabited mainly by fishers and farmers.


    "We''ll recruit students for our academy from this island," Lincoln explained. "They have talented individuals who lack opportunities elsewhere. We''re providing them with a chance!"


    It seemed like a noble cause. However, according to Lincoln, recruitment hadn''t begun yet. William questioned this.


    "We still need to construct the initial buildings and clear the area of magical beasts," Lincoln clarified. "The project is in its early stages."


    "So, we''re essentially construction workers?" William asked, incredulous. "That doesn''t make sense! The other Snowpeak Academy is still under construction. Why are we building another one?"


    Lincoln shrugged. "I''m just following orders, kid. Headmaster Grant wants this academy built, and we''re here to do it. I''ll be staying to teach you magic, so you won''t miss out on instruction."


    William still felt misled. There were plenty of tutors at the main academy, but on this island, he would only have Lincoln, whom he didn''t trust. He tried to reframe it as an adventure, a chance to learn magic in a more practical setting.


    ''Classroom learning isn''t the only path to strength,'' he reassured himself.


    The promise of substantial rewards motivated the other students, outweighing their concerns. They spent a day on the fishing island, then prepared to fly to the Snowpeak branch location.

 Chapter 115 - 115: Arrival

    The next day arrived, the day they would finally reach the island where the academy branch awaited. Excitement lingered among the students, but it was tempered with a growing sense of unease. The reality of their situation was sinking in; they wouldn''t be enjoying a leisurely island retreat.


    William, Marcel, and Denise mounted his winged lizard, while the others accompanied Professor Lincoln. The journey was smooth and relatively short, lasting roughly twenty-four hours of continuous flight. As they approached, William surveyed the island. It was larger than he had anticipated, blanketed in dense vegetation, with only the beaches offering a clear view.


    The academy itself consisted of a few meager wooden cabins. William couldn''t believe they were expected to build an entire academy from scratch, let alone clear the overgrown island. He envisioned himself wielding a scythe under the scorching sun, a far cry from the scholarly pursuits he had envisioned. It didn''t seem promising at all.


    "Let''s rest before we begin," Lincoln instructed. "Stay near the beach. It''s the safest area, hence our cabins are located there."


    They landed on the beach. Asura''s mental voice immediately filled William''s mind with foreboding.


    "This island is teeming with magical beasts," Asura warned. "They expect you and the students to do the dangerous work. No wonder this academy branch doesn''t exist in your time. With only these students, they''ll all perish here."


    William didn''t reply, already sensing the tense atmosphere, the feeling of being watched from the shadows of the dense vegetation. It was unsettling.


    The students, exhausted after 24 hours of flight, were eager to rest in the wooden cabins. But first, William strolled along the beach, enjoying the warm sand, the fresh air, and the vast ocean view. The location was undeniably beautiful, a welcome change from the constant snow.


    Marcel joined him, his expression troubled. "I expected at least one decent building, but there are only cabins... Headmaster Grant deceived us."


    "You think so?" William said, "This adventure of ours won''t be easy, it seems."


    "Yeah, don''t need to tell me that. What are you going to do now?" Marcel asked.


    "Sleep, of course. I am feeling like shit. Tomorrow we can enjoy the beach for a while, if Professor Lincoln allows us."


    Marcel liked what he heard. The beach was really nice. It was like a symbol of hope, a place they could go and enjoy, forgetting about the situation with the magical beast infestation and the thought of having to build the academy from scratch.


    William said farewell to his friend and went to the cabin that he would be using from now on. When he got there, a commotion was happening in front of the cabin.


    It was Professor Lincoln and another student.


    "Why does William get the best cabin? His window even gets a view to the ocean!" the student complained, pointing at the window.


    William looked at it too, and he smiled. ''He''s right! The view must be incredible!''


    But when the student saw William standing there with a smile on his face, he got even more angry.


    "See? Look how happy he is," the student said.


    Professor Lincoln moved his head to look at William, and by that time, he didn''t have a smile on his face anymore. His face was serious as it could get.


    "What happened here?" William said, faking a surprised expression, "Are you alright, fellow student?"


    The student couldn''t hold his anger anymore. "You bastard. I don''t know why you are privileged when compared to us. Are you the son of one of the professors, or maybe the son of Headmaster Grant?"


    With the yelling of that student, everyone else was there, surrounding them. William knew that they would be inclined to be on that student''s side, so that was a moment he had to do something.


    It wouldn''t be a good idea to let the student say whatever he wanted without teaching him a lesson. William had to prove why he was getting the so-called privileges.


    So, basically, it was time to kick the student''s ass. He dashed toward the student and punched him in the gut. William''s movements were so fast that the student couldn''t respond to it.


    Then, William unsheathed his sword and placed it on the neck of that student. "This is why they favored me. While you are a weak bastard who can only yell and yap, I am actually training to get better."


    William then kicked the man again in the ribs. "A quick tip for you, and everyone watching this," he then looked around, staring at all the students, "stop complaining and go train. The mission we have here is important, and dangerous. If you keep this attitude, you will die here."


    After that, without waiting for any of their responses, William opened the door of his cabin and went inside. Professor Lincoln talked with the students. "Did you hear him? Go on."


    Everyone dispersed, including the student who got beat up.


    No one else disturbed William after what happened. When he was inside the cabin, William looked around to see what his new home looked like.


    The cabin itself was small. He already expected it to be, but the inside was comfy. He had a bed, a desk, a fireplace, and a big fur rug that was fluffy and warm.


    An empty bookshelf stood in the corner. William thought of placing his books there, but most of the books were not from that time. It wasn''t a good idea to put them there.


    Without the strength to keep himself awake for long, William hopped on the bed and slept like a rock.


    The weather was just perfect there. It was much better to sleep in that environment rather than outside in the cold. William slept for many hours ¡ª just like the other students ¡ª and he woke up in the late afternoon.


    His stomach growled. William got up from his bed and went outside to meet the others. Everyone looked at him differently after what had happened earlier.


    They didn''t want to question his position there. All of them were more concerned about themselves, which was great.


    Professor Lincoln was there too. He was the one who made a massive campfire to cook food for them. The students were sitting around the campfire, chatting and eating.


    William walked around and found a place to sit. He grabbed a piece of meat and ate. As he was eating, William looked around and realized Marcel was not there.


    Denise came to sit beside him, asking the same thing. "Where''s Marcel? I''ve heard he went to the forest for some reason, but he should be back by now. It''s getting dark."


    "Do you know why he went there in the first place?" William asked her, "and when?"


    "I think to shower and drink water? He heard from someone else that there''s a source of water in the forest. Like, water that we can actually drink, and went there to check."


    William had a bad feeling about that. He tried to calm Denise and said that he would be looking for Marcel.


    "Do you know what direction he went?" William asked her.


    Denise pointed at one of the few paths leading to the forest. William thanked her and left the camp.


    He didn''t warn anyone else about that. But of course, his winged lizard followed him wherever he went.


    The forest was quiet, dense, and dangerous. The sun was setting, meaning William had one hour at maximum to find Marcel. Would that be enough? sea??h th§× ¦ÇovelFire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    William ordered Asura to fly above the island and look for anything that might help them. With an aerial view, Asura could find the water source Denise talked about, or maybe even see Marcel from up there.


    It was worth a shot. William, on the other hand, kept moving by ground, going deeper into the forest.


    It didn''t take long for him to find a few footprints on the ground. He crouched next to it. "These must belong to Marcel¡­"


    William kept following the footprints. The deeper he went into the forest, the tenser he got.


    Time was running short, and he had to find Marcel before nighttime. Then, he saw it, the water source Denise talked about.


    It was a river that also had a waterfall, and there, he saw Marcel bathing.


    "Yo, bro," Marcel yelled when he saw William, "nice place, right?"


    William sighed in relief, moving next to the border of the water pond. He saw a few wooden casks that Marcel brought with him.


    "It''s nice that you are here," Marcel said with a smirk, "now you can help me bring back the casks with water."


    "You know Denise is worried about you, right? She said you are late or something, and it''s getting dark."


    "I know, I know. She is always worried about me."


    Marcel left the water and asked William for help to bring back the casks with water. They returned to the beach where everyone else was.


    Unknown to them, a person was standing behind one of the trees near the place Marcel had been showering. Its eyes were red and filled with malice.

 Chapter 116 - 116: Finding a Suitable Spot

    Denise stared at the path that William and Marcel had taken. When she finally saw them returning, she sighed in relief. "You''re back," she said, her voice tight with worry.


    Marcel sat beside her, offering a reassuring smile. "Hey, no need to worry. I was just getting some water."


    She wasn''t buying it. "Getting water? In the middle of a forest, on an almost deserted island swarming with magical beasts?"


    Marcel chuckled. "Okay, maybe it wasn''t the smartest idea, but I went during the day when it''s safer."


    Denise knew he wasn''t entirely wrong. Someone had to fetch water, and daytime was indeed the safest time. But the risk still gnawed at her.


    Meanwhile, William sat nearby, chatting with his friends and listening to the distant chatter of other students. It was only the first day of their training camp, so most hadn''t done much besides sleep and eat after their exhausting journey. But tomorrow, their tasks would begin.


    The gathering near the beach lasted until around 10 pm. By then, everyone was tired, including William. Though he still had some energy, he decided to turn in.


    ''No point feeling sluggish tomorrow,'' he thought as he headed towards his cabin.


    He sat on the bed inside his cabin and took out some of his magical tomes stored in his backpack and his inventory.


    The last books he had been reading were about the history of demons. He''d been hoping to learn more about his own powers, but now he wanted to focus on acquiring new spells, particularly those that enhanced his attributes. But first, William opted to continue learning "Icy Weapon," a spell that would grant his sword a boost in power by imbuing it with the ice element.


    William practiced for an hour. He''d tried this magic before, but his progress was slow. It wasn''t clicking.


    Asura, his demonic sword, spoke to him mentally. "I don''t think you are good with ice magic."


    "Why is that?" William asked.


    "Well, you have connections with the demon race. Demons are generally adept with the fire element, black fire, and some with thunder and black thunder, though that''s rarer. You should focus on those."


    Asura, an artifact containing the soul of an ancient demon, still retained some of his memories, though they were fragmented.


    "Are you sure? So I was wrong to get these ice spells?"


    "Yes, you were."


    "Damn it¡­"


    William felt getting those icy spells had been a waste of time. He wished he could go back and choose something else.


    ''Well, I''m already in the past, so...''


    Frustrated by his lack of progress with the icy spells, William went to bed, hoping the next day would be better.


    The first thing he heard the following morning was Professor Lincoln ringing a bell, summoning everyone.


    Despite their reluctance to wake up, the students dragged themselves out of bed and met with the professor outside. The sun had barely risen, yet they were already assembled.


    Professor Lincoln addressed them once everyone was present. "Get used to this. We''re rising early to get to work as soon as possible."


    The students exchanged glances, but no one spoke.


    "As for the task, well, the first thing we need to do is find a good location for the academy. It can''t be close to the beach. So, our first priority is finding a suitable spot."


    William raised his hand. Professor Lincoln nodded, allowing him to ask his question.


    "And after that? Will we be clearing the area of vegetation and any beasts?" William asked.


    "That''s correct. We need to make sure this island is safe enough to start building, but clearing it of all the beasts is impossible. Look at how big it is," Professor Lincoln said, gesturing towards the dense forest. "We should focus on finding a suitable spot and then clearing the area around it."


    The ideal location, the Professor explained, couldn''t be too close to the beach due to the risk of rising tides, but it also couldn''t be too far inland. It had to be somewhere in between. The students divided themselves into groups and began searching for a decent location.


    William, however, decided to speak with the Professor privately.


    "Wouldn''t it be more efficient to search for a spot using our flying mounts?" William asked.


    Lincoln nodded. "Indeed. Shall we use your mount? It might be more discreet."


    They agreed to use William''s winged lizard, as it was smaller than Professor Lincoln''s. A smaller flying mount would attract less attention from any beasts inhabiting the island or the surrounding area.


    Marcel and Denise decided to search on foot instead of joining them on the flying mount. William didn''t know their reason but didn''t question them; it was their choice, after all.


    William and Professor Lincoln mounted the winged lizard and soared over the island, scanning for promising locations for their academy.


    "Ideally, it should be near that river," Lincoln said, pointing towards a flowing waterway. "This is the only source of drinkable water. We could use magic, but that''s something for the future. We need to focus on the present."


    The students weren''t skilled enough to create drinkable water¡ªa challenging spell to master. Water conjured through magic typically contained mana, which could harm the drinker. Creating pure, mana-free water was a difficult feat.


    The winged lizard circled the island, providing a bird''s-eye view of the diverse terrain. Dense forests gave way to rolling hills, rocky outcrops, and hidden valleys. Lincoln pointed out various potential locations, each with its own advantages and disadvantages. Some were close to the river but lacked defensible positions. Others offered natural barriers but were too isolated.


    After a thorough aerial survey, they spotted a promising location. Nestled between a curve in the river and a steep cliff face, it offered both access to fresh water and natural protection. A dense forest bordered the area, providing resources and potential camouflage.


    "That looks promising," William commented, peering down at the clearing.


    Lincoln nodded in agreement. "Let''s land and take a closer look."


    They guided the winged lizard down, landing gently in the clearing. As they dismounted, William felt a prickle of unease. The silence was unsettling, broken only by the rustling of leaves and the distant calls of unseen creatures.


    "Stay alert," Lincoln cautioned, drawing his staff. "We don''t know what might be lurking nearby."


    They cautiously explored the clearing, examining the terrain and vegetation. The soil was fertile, suitable for cultivation, and the forest offered a variety of useful plants and trees. However, signs of wildlife were abundant ¨C tracks in the soft earth, disturbed foliage, and the lingering scent of predators.


    "This place has potential," Lincoln said, "but it will need to be secured."


    William nodded, his hand resting on the hilt of his sword. He could sense the presence of unseen eyes, watching their every move. He activated his mana sense, trying to pinpoint the sources of his unease. Faint auras flickered at the edge of his perception, revealing the presence of several creatures lurking in the shadows.


    Suddenly, a low growl echoed through the trees, followed by the snapping of twigs. A large, wolf-like creature emerged from the undergrowth, its eyes glowing with predatory intent. More shapes materialized from the shadows, encircling them.


    "Looks like we have company," Lincoln said, his voice calm but alert. "William, stay close."


    The wolf-like creature lunged, its jaws snapping, but William was ready. He met its aggression with a surge of mana, activating Enhanced Strength and Swiftfoot. His muscles coiled with power, and his movements became a blur as he sidestepped the creature''s attack and countered with a swift slash of his sword. The blade, imbued with his mana, sliced through the creature''s flank, drawing a howl of pain.


    More creatures emerged from the shadows ¨C a hulking crab with razor-sharp pincers, a serpentine creature with scales that shimmered like oil, and a bird-like monstrosity with razor-sharp talons. William felt a thrill of adrenaline course through him. This was a true test of his skills.


    He engaged the crab, its massive claws snapping with frightening speed. William danced back, narrowly avoiding the attack, then used Kinetic Burst to close the distance in a flash. He unleashed a flurry of blows, his sword striking the creature''s vulnerable joints with pinpoint accuracy. The crab screeched, its legs buckling beneath its weight.


    Meanwhile, Lincoln was a whirlwind of arcane energy. He summoned thick vines from the earth, ensnaring the serpentine creature and constricting its movements. Thorns erupted from the ground, impaling the bird-like creature as it swooped low, forcing it to screech and retreat.


    William, feeling a surge of confidence, charged towards the wolf-like creature, which had recovered from its initial wound. He weaved through its snapping jaws, his sword a blur of motion. He aimed for its legs, hamstringing it with a precise strike. The creature collapsed, howling in frustration.


    But the battle was far from over. The crab, its shell cracked but its spirit unbroken, lunged at William with renewed ferocity. One of its pincers caught him off guard, tearing through his armor and leaving a deep gash on his arm. William gritted his teeth, ignoring the pain. He channeled his mana into his sword, unleashing a powerful wave of energy that sent the crab flying backwards.


    Lincoln, sensing William''s predicament, unleashed a torrent of earth spikes, impaling the crab and ending its threat. He then turned his attention to the remaining creatures, his spells weaving a tapestry of destruction and control. Giant roots erupted from the ground, ensnaring the serpentine creature and crushing its bones. The bird-like creature, riddled with thorns, finally succumbed to its wounds, crashing to the ground with a sickening thud.


    The clearing fell silent. William, panting and bleeding, surveyed the scene. The ground was littered with the bodies of their attackers. He felt a pang of regret for the creatures they had slain but knew it had been a necessary fight.


    Lincoln approached, his expression grim. "Are you alright, William?" S~ea??h the Nov§×l?ire.n(e)t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    William nodded, wincing as he examined his wound. "It''s just a scratch. Nothing I can''t handle."


    Lincoln smiled. "You fought bravely, William. I''m impressed."


    William grinned back, feeling a surge of pride. "Thanks, Professor."

 Chapter 117 - 117: Finding Ruins, and New Task for William

    The wave of beasts had been dealt with, and the surrounding area fell silent once more. While William felt tired after the fight, Professor Lincoln strolled around the area, assessing its suitability.


    "This place seems ideal," he said, peering down the cliff. "Let''s just hope this thing doesn''t crumble when we build the academy."


    The only downside was the river''s distance. It wasn''t a major issue, though, as it was only about a five-minute walk away.


    Lincoln was already considering a solution. "I can use magic to divert the river closer."


    William nodded. With magic, almost anything was possible.


    After securing the spot ¨C for the time being ¨C they took flight once more to inform the other students. They weren''t expecting the students to have found a suitable location in such a short time, but when they spoke to one of the youths, they discovered a surprising find.


    It was the same student who had been envious of William''s privileged cabin. He called out to Professor Lincoln when he saw them flying near his location.


    "Professor! Professor!" he yelled, waving his arms frantically.


    William and Lincoln descended to see what the commotion was about. The student was clearly eager to show them something.


    "What is it?" Professor Lincoln asked, curiosity piqued.


    The student led them deeper into the forest, his excitement growing with each step. He then revealed an incredible sight: ancient stone buildings, partially hidden by overgrown vegetation. The structures were clearly old and dilapidated, with crumbling walls and collapsed roofs.


    Professor Lincoln was astonished. "This is impossible," he muttered. "This island was recently discovered. No one should have been living here before."


    William felt a mix of excitement and apprehension. He reached out and touched one of the weathered stone walls, and a strange sensation washed over him. It was like a faint echo, a whisper from the past.


    He frowned, closing his eyes and trying to decipher the feeling, but it remained elusive.


    Asura didn''t react, which only deepened the mystery. Why was he the only one sensing something?


    Professor Lincoln broke the silence. "I''ll mark this location for future exploration. For now, let''s focus on establishing our camp."


    They returned to the chosen location, picking up other students along the way and ferrying them to the clearing. Eventually, everyone was assembled, staring in awe at the scattered corpses of the magical beasts. The evidence of the fierce battle was undeniable.


    "Did the two of you kill all of these?" Ron, one of the students, asked, his eyes wide with disbelief.


    "Indeed we did," Lincoln replied with a hint of pride. "William is quite skilled in combat. Now, let''s discuss our next steps¡­ Gather around, everyone."


    Professor Lincoln outlined his plan. The first priority was to establish a temporary camp so they could rest and work near the construction site. He then demonstrated his mastery of magic by effortlessly transporting the cabins from the beach to their new location, much to the students'' amazement.


    With that settled, they had a place to sleep for the night. Now came the hard part.


    Professor Lincoln distributed tools to the students ¨C axes and scythes for clearing the vegetation.


    "We need to clear a sizable plot of land for the academy," Professor Lincoln explained, "and we can''t use magic, as there''s a risk of damaging the area."


    This task was far less appealing than fighting beasts. William dreaded the idea of cutting down the vegetation, but there was no avoiding it.


    At least his friends were there to support him¡ªand suffer alongside him. Marcel and Denise were responsible for cutting down the undergrowth with scythes, while William used an axe to fell the trees.


    With his enhanced strength, each swing of the axe bit deep into the wood, and the trees toppled quickly. The other students worked diligently as well, hacking away at the dense vegetation.


    The hours passed quickly, but as the afternoon drew to a close, Professor Lincoln called a halt.


    "If we make too much noise during the night, we''ll attract more beasts. Let''s rest for today," he said.


    When the students gathered at their cabins, a campfire awaited them, and Lincoln had already hunted game for their dinner. Everything was ready.


    All they had to do was relax and enjoy the meal. William did just that, savoring the moment with his friends.


    "How long do you think we''ll be stuck with this awful job?" Marcel asked, grimacing.


    William didn''t have good news. With a sigh, he said, "I don''t know, but that''s not the worst part. We''ll be the ones building the academy, remember? Clearing the vegetation might be the easiest job we get." sea??h th§× N?vel(F)ire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    It was the harsh truth none of them wanted to acknowledge. William was grateful they were done for the day, though. He had other things he wanted to focus on.


    He wanted to practice more spells and hunt more monsters to gain more experience.


    With that in mind, he went to speak with Professor Lincoln privately after dinner.


    "William," the Professor said when he saw William knocking on his door. "Is everything alright?"


    William nodded. "Yes, it is. May I come in?"


    "Sure," Lincoln replied, gesturing towards the empty chair.


    William stepped inside the cabin. It was identical to all the others, with a simple bed, a table, and a couple of chairs.


    He sat down, met Lincoln''s gaze, and said, "I came here to ask you something."


    Professor Lincoln took the opposite chair, placing both elbows on the wooden table and waiting for William to continue.


    "Could I... perhaps... be assigned the task of killing the beasts on the island? I''d prefer that kind of work," William said.


    It wasn''t that William disliked working with the other students, but he was eager to gain more experience and become stronger. The most efficient way to do that was by hunting monsters.


    "Why do you want this task?" Lincoln asked, studying William''s expression.


    William chose honesty. "I want to get stronger. To gain more experience, I need to kill beasts."


    The system was transparent and available to everyone. Lincoln nodded in understanding. "What level are you now?"


    William checked his status. "Level 22, sir."


    Professor Lincoln was surprised. "That''s quite high. The other students are between levels 10 and 15 at most. How did you gain so much experience? I don''t recall you killing many monsters or engaging in other activities that grant experience."


    He was referring to activities like potion crafting, enchanting, artifact creation, and studying, all of which had the potential to grant experience or bonuses.


    Faced with the question, William hesitated. He couldn''t reveal that he had gained experience in the present time of Aethel and had arrived in the past already stronger than his peers.


    "The place I lived before attending the academy was a cabin in the middle of the forest," William explained. "There were plenty of beasts there for me to fight and gain levels."


    "That explains your combat proficiency," Lincoln said, considering the information. "I''ll think about your request and let you know in the morning."


    William felt a surge of hope. "Thank you, Professor."


    As he turned to leave, Professor Lincoln stopped him. "There''s something else I''d like to discuss. Would you be willing to help me explore those ruins we found? Perhaps in the near future?"


    William was curious why Lincoln had chosen him, but he wouldn''t refuse. He felt a strange connection to the ruins and was eager to understand it.


    "Of course! It would be an honor," he replied.


    "Excellent. You may go now."


    William returned to his cabin. Inside, his friends were waiting, their expressions curious.


    "So? What did you talk about with the Professor?" Marcel asked, leaning forward expectantly.


    William saw no reason to lie. "I asked him about being assigned the task of killing beasts in the forest."


    "Why risk it?" Marcel asked, frowning. "It''s much safer to stay here with us, clear the area, and then build the academy."


    His logic was sound, but William had a different perspective. "If I stay in my comfort zone, I''ll never get stronger. Powerful mages are forged in combat, not construction."


    Their conversation continued for a while, and William noticed the thoughtful expressions on Marcel and Denise''s faces as they left his cabin. His words had clearly given them something to consider.


    William picked up some of his spell tomes¡ªthis time, the ones focused on body enhancement magic. He wasn''t going to waste any more time on "Icy Weapon."


    Asura, who was usually quiet, spoke up. "Don''t feel down. There''s a ''Fire Weapon'' spell you can learn, though I don''t know where you''ll find it. We are in the middle of nowhere."


    "Thanks for the reminder," William said, a flicker of excitement igniting within him.


    He spent a few hours studying, then went to bed. He woke the next morning eager to hear Lincoln''s decision.


    The news was good.


    "I believe you''re the most suitable student for this task," Lincoln said. "But you''ll start in the less dangerous parts of the forest and focus on the surrounding area. We need to secure the perimeter, all the way to the beach, where we''ll eventually build a port."


    "Understood," William replied, a grin spreading across his face. He was ready for the challenge.

 Chapter 118 - 118: EXP, EXP, EXP

    News of William''s new task spread like wildfire among the students. Some were relieved that the dangerous job had fallen to someone else, while others envied his opportunity.


    A few saw through his motives. "He''s just trying to level up and get even further ahead of us," one student grumbled. "What can we do about it?"


    They were still gossiping when Lincoln arrived with their tools, tossing axes and scythes towards them. "What you can do is clear this damned vegetation before I lose my patience," he said, his voice brooking no argument.


    The students nodded hastily. None of them dared to complain to Lincoln or disobey his orders. They grabbed their tools and got to work.


    William, meanwhile, had already left, following the path back towards the beach.


    Asura''s winged lizard form remained at the campsite. He was still with William, of course, in his sword form.


    "I need to rest for a while," Asura said, his voice carrying a hint of exhaustion. "Controlling that lizard is draining. Call me if you need anything."


    "Alright," William replied, understanding his companion''s need for recovery.


    William followed the familiar path, the only one on the island. But things weren''t as straightforward as before. The recent battle with the beasts ¨C his and Lincoln''s ¨C had agitated the island''s inhabitants. The balance had been disrupted, and venturing out in the open was no longer safe.


    Suddenly, a beast emerged from the forest, launching itself at William. This magical creature resembled a giant bug with four wings, two massive pincers, and rows of sharp teeth. A shiver ran down William''s spine at the sight.


    "I hate bugs!" he yelled, his voice filled with disgust.


    But William''s reflexes were sharp. He drew his demonic sword, Asura, and parried the incoming pincer attack. The clash of their weapons rang through the forest, and William stumbled back from the force of the impact.


    "Strong¡­" he muttered, assessing the creature''s power.


    The bug flew towards him again, but this time, it unleashed a different attack. It opened its maw and spewed a stream of green liquid.


    William tried to dodge, but the liquid was too fast. It struck his right shoulder.


    At first, nothing happened. William seized the opportunity, slashing at the creature with his sword.


    He wielded his demonic sword, Asura, which was far stronger than the standard steel sword he often used. He now had better control over it, preventing it from activating his demonic energy. It was essentially a normal sword crafted from superior materials, making it sharper and deadlier.


    The slash connected with the bug, carving a deep wound. Green liquid gushed from the injury, and the bug emitted a series of angry clicks and hisses.


    "Take that, bastard," William growled.


    The creature spewed another stream of green liquid, but this time, William dodged it with ease.


    He tightened his grip on Asura and delivered a final, decisive blow, ending the bug''s life.


    [+700 EXP]


    A smile spread across William''s face. He was thrilled to be gaining experience again. This was exactly what he had been hoping for.


    After dispatching the creature, William continued along the path. It wasn''t long before he felt an aching pain in his shoulder ¨C the same shoulder the bug had struck with its liquid.


    ''Am I poisoned?'' he wondered, concern creeping into his voice.


    Poison was the first thing that came to mind. He decided to stop and rest against a tree, then removed his shirt to examine the affected area. A wound caused by the liquid was visible, and the veins around it were an unsettling shade of green.


    William felt a wave of panic. He didn''t have an antidote. He would have to wait and see if his body could heal itself.


    Asura''s voice echoed in his mind. "Use your demonic energy to destroy the poison. It''s weak, so you should be fine."


    William followed Asura''s instructions, focusing his demonic energy. A dark aura enveloped his body, then concentrated around the poisoned wound.


    The black energy pulsed as if it were alive, attacking the poison. William felt a surge of pain and gritted his teeth, enduring it. After a minute of intense discomfort, the poison was gone.


    Relief washed over him. This ability was incredible. Getting poisoned in a remote location like this island would be a serious problem for most, but William no longer had to fear poisons.


    He was increasingly grateful for the power of his demonic energy, even if it sounded ominous or might cause others to see him as a monster. He didn''t care.


    After hours of walking, William arrived at the beach ¨C the place where he had first set foot on the island. It was deserted, but he knew monsters lurked in the shadows, waiting for an opportunity to strike.


    Before starting his task, he sat on the beach, enjoying a moment of respite to recover from the previous fight and the lingering effects of the poison. The sound of the waves crashing against the shore was therapeutic, and the vast expanse of the blue ocean was mesmerizing. No other islands or ships were visible, reminding him of the world''s immensity and his own insignificance.


    He glanced at his hand, where the triton king''s ring rested. He briefly considered using it to travel to the triton kingdom, even in this past era.


    ''The king I know is probably dead,'' he mused, ''and who knows if the kingdom even exists yet...''


    The urge to try was strong, but he resisted. It was too risky. He needed to become stronger first.


    He rose to his feet and began his mission. Choosing a section of the forest, he ventured into its depths.


    The moment he crossed the threshold, monsters attacked. The first was a gigantic gorilla with six arms, each wielding a wooden club.


    The creature swung from the trees, launching itself at William with surprising speed. William had no time to react.


    The club connected with his chest, sending him flying through the undergrowth. He heard the sickening crack of his ribs and knew he was in trouble.


    "Agggh, damn it!" he cursed, clutching his right side.


    Several ribs were broken, but he couldn''t afford to lie there and wallow in pain. He had to get up and fight or die.


    Mustering his remaining strength, William rose and activated his body enhancement techniques.


    With the boost to his strength, agility, and speed, he felt better equipped to face the gorilla, though his ribs still throbbed with pain.


    William dashed towards the gorilla, Asura poised to strike.


    The creature seemed surprised. It was used to felling its prey with a single blow, yet William was still standing¡ªand even advancing!


    It tried to attack again, but William ducked under the club and slashed at the back of the gorilla''s legs, targeting its ankles.


    The attack landed with devastating precision. Asura sliced through flesh and tendon as easily as a knife through butter, and blood gushed from the wound.


    William knew this would severely hamper the gorilla''s movement, and the creature seemed to realize it too. It tried to flee, but William wouldn''t allow it.


    He severed the other ankle, and the gorilla crashed to the ground. Looking into the creature''s eyes, now filled with fear and a desperate plea for mercy, William felt a pang of guilt. But this was the law of the jungle: the strong ruled. He swiftly ended the gorilla''s suffering with a clean strike to the neck.


    [+1300 EXP]


    [Level up]


    ''One more level, nice!''


    William was getting close to level 25, the threshold for acquiring his first class. He was curious about the process. Would the system grant him a random class? Would he have multiple options to choose from? Would he receive a class at all, or would he have to seek one out?


    He had many questions, but only time would provide answers. For now, he was focused on reaching level 25. After that, he would seek more information.


    With each level, his attributes increased, just like everyone else. But unlike others, William was one of the summoned heroes, so his stats grew at a much faster rate than average. It was only a matter of time before his power far surpassed those at a similar level.


    After defeating the gorilla, William didn''t stop. His ribs ached, but he had many more beasts to kill before returning to camp. Time was experience, and experience was his priority. S§×ar?h the N??eFire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    He faced mutated snakes, fish, and even creatures that seemed out of place on an island¡ªlike a fire-casting buffalo. It was one of the first monsters he encountered that could cast spells similar to those used by mages.


    When he returned to camp before sunset, he drew every eye. His hair was disheveled, his clothes were torn, and his body was covered in bruises. It was evident he had been through many battles. Once again, William had shocked them, and respect for him grew.


    He sat near the campfire, and one of the students brought him a meal.


    "Here, eat this, William," the student said.


    William gratefully accepted the food, then collapsed onto his bed, exhausted.

 Chapter 119 - 119: Not Alone?

    The following day, William woke up with aches all over his body. It was muscle strain from prolonged fighting, compounded by the lingering soreness of his wounds.


    "I feel like shit..." he groaned.


    He stumbled out of bed in the early morning hours, along with the other students. Professor Lincoln didn''t allow them to sleep in.


    Speaking of Professor Lincoln, he had announced that their grueling routine would last for one month, after which things would become easier.


    "We''ll work hard to get the initial construction done within the first month," Lincoln had explained. "After that, I''ll be teaching you for a few hours each day, so the construction will slow down."


    Although William wasn''t performing the same tasks as the others, he appreciated the updates. Not that he needed Professor Lincoln for that; Marcel and Denise were always eager to fill him in.


    "You look awful," Marcel commented during breakfast. "Are you sure you want to keep doing this task? You could at least ask for help."


    "For now, no," William said, taking a large bite of bread. "I can''t give up after just one day. It would ruin my reputation."


    Marcel rolled his eyes. "Reputation? We''re in the middle of nowhere."


    "Still, you saw how a few students were looking for a fight with me," William said, recalling the student who had been jealous of his cabin.


    "Now that you mention it..." Marcel conceded.


    Breakfast and dinner were William''s only chances to speak with his friends before heading out to hunt magical beasts.


    "How''s the construction going?" William asked. "And how are you holding up, Denise?"


    "We''ve cleared the vegetation, as you can see," Marcel replied, gesturing towards the cleared area. "And we''re starting to lay the foundation. It''s faster than you''d think because Professor Lincoln is helping. He can use magic to create building materials."


    William had almost forgotten about Lincoln''s magic. Perhaps that was why he had been chosen to oversee the construction of the academy on this island.


    Denise was also contributing to the construction, but she was focused on other aspects, such as how to divert the river closer to their location. It was a crucial element of their future settlement, and someone had to figure it out. Otherwise, things would become more complicated down the line.


    After breakfast and a brief chat with his friends, William left the settlement and headed towards the coast.


    The students watched him go, some with admiration. They considered him brave for venturing out alone to fight beasts and make the island safer.


    William, however, wasn''t motivated by altruism. He was fighting to gain strength, experience, and levels.


    Upon reaching the coast, he entered the forest, returning to the area he had begun clearing the previous day. More beasts attacked, some familiar, others completely new.


    He fought bravely, wielding Asura and enhancing his abilities with magic. But the fights were far from easy. Despite his magic, William faced several near-death experiences.


    One such incident occurred near the river Denise was trying to divert. William was battling a group of giant crabs when he strayed too close to the water''s edge. Suddenly, something grabbed him.


    It wasn''t a creature but a plant. Its leaves wrapped around William, dragging him into the river.


    The sensation of being pulled underwater was terrifying. William struggled, but the plant''s grip was too strong.


    He knew he would drown if he didn''t escape. In a desperate attempt, he reached for Asura and tried to swing it underwater, hoping to cut the leaves. But his arm wouldn''t cooperate. He managed to sever one leaf, but more grew in its place, rendering his efforts futile.


    Panic swelled in William''s chest as the murky water enveloped him. He thrashed against the constricting leaves, but the plant''s grip only tightened. His lungs burned, desperate for air. Just as his vision began to blur, a surge of adrenaline ignited within him. He remembered his demonic energy, the dark power that had purged the poison from his body.


    Asura, sensing his desperation, whispered, "Use it, William! Channel it into the plant!"


    William focused his remaining strength, summoning the demonic energy. It flowed through him, coursing into the leaves that bound him. The plant shuddered violently, its grip loosening as the dark energy disrupted its life force. William wrenched himself free, kicking upwards towards the surface. He broke through the water, gasping for air, his heart pounding.


    Rage surged through him. He wouldn''t let this monstrous plant get away with this. He channeled his demonic energy into Asura, the blade glowing with an ominous black light. With a furious roar, he plunged back into the water, slashing at the plant''s thick stem. The demonic energy tore through the plant''s defenses, causing it to writhe and recoil. William hacked relentlessly, fueled by adrenaline and a thirst for revenge. Finally, with a decisive blow, he severed the stem. The plant released a cloud of noxious spores as it withered and sank into the depths.


    William emerged from the river, soaked and exhausted but alive. He collapsed onto the riverbank, coughing and catching his breath. He had narrowly escaped death, and the experience left him shaken. He vowed to be more cautious near the water''s edge.


    Despite the close call, William''s determination to gain experience remained unshaken. He pressed on, venturing deeper into the forest. He encountered more creatures ¨C giant spiders that spun webs of steel, venomous snakes that slithered through the undergrowth, and packs of wolf-like beasts with glowing red eyes. Each battle was a test of his skills and endurance, pushing him to his limits.


    He faced each challenge head-on, his sword a blur of motion, his body enhanced by magic. He learned to anticipate his enemies'' movements, exploit their weaknesses, and conserve his energy. With each victory, his confidence grew, and his skills sharpened.


    [+1200 EXP]


    [+850 EXP]


    [+1500 EXP]


    [Level Up]


    As the sun began to set, William decided to return to the settlement. He was battered and bruised, but his spirit was high. He had survived another day, gained valuable experience, and grown stronger.


    He arrived at the camp just as the other students were gathering for dinner. The aroma of roasted meat filled the air, and a sense of camaraderie pervaded the group. William joined them, accepting a plate piled high with food. He ate ravenously, savoring the simple meal and the company of his fellow students. S~ea??h the N?vel?ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    As they ate, a hush fell over the group. Professor Lincoln, his brow furrowed, scanned the faces around him.


    "Where''s Ron?" he asked, his voice laced with concern.


    The students exchanged confused glances. No one had seen Ron since they returned from their tasks. A sense of unease settled over the camp.


    "He was with me earlier," one student offered, "but he said he was going to explore the area a bit more."


    "Alone?" Lincoln asked, his concern growing.


    The student nodded.


    A wave of anxiety swept through the group. Ron, a quiet and unassuming student, was known for his curiosity and tendency to wander off. But he had never been gone this long, especially not as night approached.


    "We need to find him," Lincoln declared, his voice firm.


    The students, their initial fatigue forgotten, sprang into action. Fear for their missing comrade fueled their movements as they dispersed into the growing darkness, their torches casting flickering shadows that danced among the trees.


    William joined the search party, his senses heightened. He ventured into the forest, his keen eyes scanning the undergrowth, his ears attuned to any sound that might betray Ron''s presence. The forest, usually teeming with life, seemed eerily silent, amplifying the growing dread.


    The search continued for hours, but there was no sign of Ron. As the night deepened, the dangers of the forest increased. The rustling of leaves could be the wind or a lurking predator. The snapping of twigs could be a small animal or a larger, more sinister creature. The students, exhausted and disheartened, began to return to the camp, their hopes dwindling with each passing moment.


    Professor Lincoln, his face etched with worry, made the difficult decision to call off the search for the night. "We''ll continue tomorrow," he announced, his voice heavy with disappointment. "It''s too dangerous to remain in the forest after dark."


    The students, their faces etched with worry and frustration, reluctantly agreed. They returned to the camp, their hearts heavy with the knowledge that Ron was still missing.


    The next morning, an air of tension hung over the camp. The students awoke with renewed determination to find their missing comrade, but their anxiety was palpable. Professor Lincoln, his face grim, summoned everyone to gather.


    "I have something to show you," he announced, his voice grave. He held up a piece of parchment, its edges slightly singed. "This letter appeared in my cabin this morning."


    A hush fell over the group as Lincoln read the letter aloud. It was a chilling message, stating that Ron had been taken and that if they didn''t leave the island immediately, others would suffer the same fate.


    Fear and confusion rippled through the students. Who would take Ron? Why? And what did they want? The questions hung heavy in the air, unanswered and ominous.

 Chapter 120 - 120: Trapped?

    Tension gripped the students. They had believed they were alone on the island, but clearly, they were not.


    "Can we see it?" one student asked, curiosity overriding their fear.


    Professor Lincoln passed the letter around, and each student read it, including William. Someone had taken Ron as a warning and planned to abduct more of them¡ªperhaps all of them. The island was not empty; it belonged to someone else.


    Even Lincoln, the most experienced and powerful among them, wore a grave expression, his gaze darting around as he considered their options.


    "What do we do now, Professor?" William asked, voicing the question hanging heavy in the air.


    "We find him," Lincoln declared, his voice firm despite the uncertainty in his eyes. "And we don''t let fear dictate our actions. This island is ours now."


    Lincoln''s resolve was clear. He would not surrender their claim to the island without a fight. It was to be the home of their magic academy, and he would not let anyone jeopardize that.


    William, though heartened by Lincoln''s determination to find Ron and uncover the truth, couldn''t help but feel a growing sense of dread. This branch of the Snowpeak Academy didn''t exist in his time, which meant something went terribly wrong.


    What if this mysterious enemy succeeded in killing everyone? The possibility was real, and the thought sent shivers down his spine. But William was here now, and he wouldn''t allow this person to harm any of the students.


    ''I''ll find out who''s behind this,'' he vowed silently, his grip tightening on Asura''s hilt.


    With the sun illuminating the island and the diminished threat of nocturnal beasts, the students united in their search for Ron. They dispersed individually, maximizing their search radius, and utilized every tool at their disposal to scour the island.


    William mounted his winged lizard and soared into the sky. The view was breathtaking, but his perception of the island had shifted. It was no longer the familiar, albeit dangerous, territory he had come to know. The presence of a human threat, someone capable of kidnapping a student, added a new layer of complexity and danger.


    From his vantage point, William addressed his companion. "Asura, can you use your powers to sense any disturbances? Perhaps traces of mana that might belong to this mysterious person who took Ron?"


    Asura''s mana perception was far superior to William''s, but the task was challenging.


    "We flew across the island before and I didn''t sense anything," Asura said, his voice laced with concern. "This person might be skilled at concealing their presence."


    They had indeed surveyed the island while searching for a suitable location for the academy. It was safe to assume this mysterious person had already been present then, yet neither of them had sensed anything. This indicated a considerable ability to mask their mana signature, suggesting he was both powerful and adept at concealment.


    "I understand," William replied, his thoughts focused. "Even if he can hide his mana traces, it will be difficult to conceal other signs, including any tracks Ron might have left."


    William scanned the landscape below, his eyes searching for any disruption in the natural order ¨C broken branches, disturbed foliage, or footprints. He focused on the areas where Ron had last been seen, hoping to find something, anything, that might lead them to him.


    As he circled the island, something caught his eye. In a secluded clearing on the far side of the island, a faint wisp of smoke curled upwards. It was subtle, almost invisible against the backdrop of the dense forest, but William''s sharp eyes didn''t miss it. He guided the winged lizard towards the source, his heart pounding with anticipation.


    Landing in the clearing, William dismounted and cautiously approached the area where he had seen the smoke. The remnants of a small campfire were evident ¨C a circle of charred earth and scattered ashes. It appeared to be a recently used campsite, but there was no sign of Ron or his captor.


    William examined the area meticulously, searching for any clues. He found a few footprints, too faint to discern any details, and some broken branches that could have been caused by anything. Frustration gnawed at him. He was so close, yet so far from finding Ron.


    He returned to the winged lizard, his mind racing. Where had Ron been taken? Who was this mysterious individual capable of eluding detection and leaving so few traces? The questions lingered, unanswered, fueling his determination to uncover the truth.


    With a sense of urgency, William urged the winged lizard back into the air, his gaze sweeping across the island once more. He needed to find something, anything, that would lead him to Ron. As he soared above the treetops, a familiar figure came into view. Professor Lincoln, mounted on his own winged lizard, was also searching the island from the air.


    "Professor!" William called out, guiding his mount closer. "Have you found anything?"


    Lincoln shook his head, his expression grim. "Nothing concrete. Just a few disturbed areas, but nothing that points to Ron''s whereabouts." He paused, his eyes narrowing as he surveyed the landscape. "This is more troubling than I initially thought. This individual is skilled at covering their tracks."


    Suddenly, a streak of dark energy shot through the air, aimed directly at their mounts. The winged lizards screeched in pain, their bodies engulfed in the dark energy. They plummeted towards the ground, their riders thrown from their backs.


    William, his heart pounding, braced for impact. He hit the water with a bone-jarring thud, the cold water shocking his senses. He struggled to the surface, gasping for air, his body aching from the fall. He spotted Lincoln nearby, also struggling to stay afloat.


    "Professor!" William shouted, swimming towards him. "Are you alright?"


    Lincoln coughed, sputtering water. "I''m... fine," he gasped, his voice strained. "Just a few bruises."


    They swam towards the shore, their movements hampered by their injuries. Reaching the beach, they collapsed onto the sand, exhausted and shaken. The loss of their mounts was a devastating blow. They were stranded, their only means of transportation to and from the island gone.


    A wave of despair washed over William. They were trapped, cut off from the outside world, with a kidnapper lurking among them. The situation seemed dire, the future uncertain. He looked at Lincoln, his face etched with worry.


    "What do we do now, Professor?" he asked, his voice barely a whisper.


    Lincoln, his gaze fixed on the horizon, remained silent for a moment, absorbing the gravity of their situation. Then, with a newfound resolve in his eyes, he declared, "We survive. We adapt. And we find Ron."


    They rose, their bodies weary but their spirits unbroken. The journey back to the settlement was arduous, their progress slowed by their injuries and the absence of their winged lizards. As they trudged through the dense undergrowth, a strange sensation washed over William. The forest around him seemed to shimmer and distort, the familiar sounds of nature replaced by an unsettling silence.


    He blinked, trying to clear his vision, but the distortion only intensified. The trees around him twisted into grotesque shapes, their branches reaching out like skeletal claws. The ground beneath his feet felt unstable, as if it might crumble at any moment. He turned to Lincoln, his voice filled with alarm.


    "Professor, something''s not right¡ª"


    But Lincoln was gone. William was alone, enveloped in an eerie silence that pressed in on him like a suffocating blanket. He felt a growing sense of dread, a primal fear that chilled him to the bone. He spun around, searching for any sign of Lincoln or a way out of this disorienting illusion.


    Suddenly, a sharp pain exploded in the back of his head. He stumbled forward, his vision blurring, his knees buckling beneath him. He collapsed onto the forest floor, consciousness fading into a dark abyss. sea??h th§× novel(F~)ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    William awoke to the cold, damp sensation of stone against his cheek. He groaned, his head throbbing, his body aching. He sat up, his eyes struggling to adjust to the dim light. He found himself in a small, stone cell, devoid of any furniture or windows. The only source of light came from a flickering torch mounted on the wall, casting long, dancing shadows that played tricks on his eyes.


    He was trapped. Kidnapped.


    Panic clawed at his throat, but he forced it down. He needed to stay calm, assess his situation, and find a way out. He examined the cell, searching for any weaknesses or hidden passages. The walls were solid, the stone cold and unforgiving. The iron bars of the door were thick and sturdy, leaving no room for escape.


    He slumped against the wall, his mind racing. Who had taken him? Why? Was Ron here too? And what did they want with them? The questions swirled in his head, unanswered and unsettling.


    Then, William heard footsteps coming to his direction. The footsteps were slow, as if the person wanted to make William scared. It worked.


    When the cell door opened, he couldn''t believe who he saw there.

 Chapter 121 - 121: A Summoned Hero on the Island!

    William couldn''t believe his eyes. The person standing before him was a stranger, yet there was something undeniably familiar about him. The man bore a mark on his forehead, a mark characteristic of the heroes summoned to this world.


    How could this be? William had used his SSS-ranked ability to travel years into the past. He''d thought the summoned heroes only existed in his present timeline.


    "I... I don''t believe it," William stammered, his voice barely above a whisper.


    The man frowned, his expression a mixture of confusion and annoyance. "What are you talking about? Are you losing your mind?"


    William was unsure if he could trust this man. Despite appearances suggesting he was one of the summoned heroes of this era, he could also be an imposter. William needed to learn more about him, discern his motives for being on the island, and understand why he had kidnapped both Ron and himself.


    "Did you kidnap Ron?" William asked, his gaze locked with the man''s. S§×arch* The N?velFire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Confronted so directly, the man replied, "No, I didn''t. I came to this island pursuing a dangerous fugitive. I couldn''t help but notice this deserted island is rather crowded. Perhaps you could explain what''s going on here?"


    That was an unexpected twist for William. He''d assumed this man was the one who had kidnapped Ron.


    ''Is he telling the truth?'' William wondered, unsure whether to believe the man''s seemingly convincing story. Despite his reservations, William decided to share what he knew.


    "We''re establishing a magic academy here," William explained. "This island was supposed to be deserted, but someone kidnapped one of our students, a young man named Ron. They even left a letter threatening to take more of us."


    The man''s fists clenched. "That''s the same person I''m after. This is typical of the fugitive I''m hunting. He''s involved with dark magic, a formidable foe."


    William had already suspected Ron''s kidnapper was a dark magic practitioner. He knew because a shadowy energy had attacked him and Professor Lincoln while they were flying on their mounts.


    "Tell me something," William began, pausing as he considered whether he should ask, "Are you one of the summoned heroes?"


    The question caught the man off guard. "How do you know about the summoned heroes?" he countered.


    "But everyone knows about the tattoos that heroes have, right?" William said. At least, that''s what he had learned in the present time of Aethel. However, it seemed things were different in the past.


    In Aethel''s past, information about the heroes was scarce, and people didn''t know about the tattoos. Therefore, the hero was very surprised and became aggressive with William.


    "How do you know that?" the hero growled, grabbing William by the neck. "That''s a secret that few people know!"


    At that moment, William had to make a choice. If he didn''t reveal that he was also a hero, this man could end him.


    "I know that because I''m a hero too!" William blurted out.


    The man burst into laughter. "Are you kidding me? There are only three heroes, and I know both of them. It''s impossible for you to be a hero."


    With no way out, William showed the summoned hero tattoo he had on his forearm.


    The man stared at the tattoo for a few seconds, then he released William and staggered back. "I-Impossible. How?"


    The man grasped William''s arm, his eyes fixed on the tattoo. A unique aura emanated from the marking, and as a hero himself, he knew William was telling the truth.


    "How is this possible?" he breathed, his voice filled with disbelief. "I was certain there were only three of us."


    William hesitated, reluctant to reveal too much information. "I was summoned a while ago," he said carefully. "This might sound like a strange question, but what world did you come from?"


    "Earth," the man replied. "Do you know it?"


    Astonishment washed over William. He and his friends had been summoned directly from Earth. He had assumed other heroes might originate from different, unknown planets, but apparently, this man was also from Earth.


    "Which year?" William pressed, his curiosity piqued.


    "1512," the man answered. "And you?"


    "2024."


    The kidnapping had taken a most unexpected turn, evolving into a surprising encounter. William was eager to learn more about this man, just as the man was curious about William.


    With a swift motion, the man shattered the shackles binding William''s wrists.


    "How did you end up here?" the man asked, his brow furrowed in thought. "I thought only a set number of heroes were summoned at the same time. By the way, I''m Ben."


    "William," he replied, returning the introduction. "To be honest, I have no idea how I got here. I appeared in a village far from here, completely disoriented."


    "That''s strange..." Ben mused. "Judging by your power level, I assume you were summoned recently?"


    Comparing William''s power to Ben''s was like comparing a candle to a bonfire. Ben was immensely powerful. Even Professor Lincoln, a formidable mage in his own right, had been helpless against Ben''s illusion magic and had no idea where William was being held.


    "Yes, quite recently," William confirmed. "And you? How long have you been here?"


    "About eight years now," Ben answered. "It was quite difficult at first, but things have gotten better. Well, not exactly better, considering the looming threat of the Underworld Lord, but I''m certainly better off than when I first arrived."


    This information was crucial for William. He knew that in Aethel''s present time, the heroes had been summoned to deal with the Underworld Lord, and it seemed that was the case in the past as well.


    ''Could this be a recurring problem?'' William wondered, pondering the possibility of the Underworld Lord being a cyclical threat. He couldn''t be sure, but it was certainly a disturbing thought.


    They talked for a while about the hero stuff, but eventually Ben started talking about the fugitive he was looking for on that island.


    "This fugitive I''m chasing," Ben continued, his expression hardening, "he''s a dangerous mage who''s been experimenting with forbidden magic. He calls himself Malkor, and he''s obsessed with gaining power, no matter the cost."


    Ben explained how Malkor had been a promising student at a renowned magic academy, but his thirst for forbidden knowledge led him down a dark path. He delved into the darkest corners of magic, experimenting with necromancy and demonic rituals, eventually becoming a rogue mage, a threat to the very fabric of Aethel.


    "He''s been terrorizing villages, kidnapping people for his twisted experiments," Ben said, his voice grim. "I''ve been tracking him for months, and this island seems to be his latest hideout."


    Ben led William through a hidden passage, revealing an underground base concealed beneath the island. It was a network of tunnels and chambers, illuminated by glowing crystals embedded in the walls.


    "I''ve been using this as a base while I search for Malkor," Ben explained. "It''s well-hidden and provides a safe haven from the island''s creatures."


    William was impressed by the ingenuity of the base. It was a testament to Ben''s resourcefulness and his determination to apprehend Malkor.


    "So, what''s your plan now?" William asked, curious about Ben''s next move.


    "I''ll continue my search for Malkor," Ben replied, his eyes filled with resolve. "And I need your help."


    William was taken aback. "My help? But I''m still relatively weak compared to you."


    Ben smiled. "Strength isn''t everything, William. You have a unique perspective, coming from another time. You might notice things I''ve overlooked. Besides," he added, "we need to find Ron."


    William nodded, his determination solidifying. He would help Ben apprehend Malkor and rescue Ron. It was the least he could do, both as a fellow hero and as a member of the academy.


    "I''m in," William declared, his voice firm. "What''s the first step?"


    "First and foremost, we need to keep my presence here a secret," Ben stated, his voice low and serious. "The fugitive doesn''t know I''ve tracked him here, and I want to keep it that way. I only resorted to ''kidnapping'' you because I was certain it would go unnoticed."


    Ultimately, William had to return to the encampment. Ben helped ensure the fugitive remained unaware of William''s presence throughout their journey back.


    "I''ll be in touch in the next few days to update you on any developments," Ben assured William, placing a hand on his shoulder. "And this might sound strange, but your friend is definitely alive. Malkor usually kidnaps people for rituals, and he waits for a specific moon phase. I believe your friend still has a few good days left, so we''ll find him. Don''t worry."


    This information eased William''s anxiety. He didn''t know Ron well, but the other students were close to him, and William would never abandon them. Knowing Ron was likely safe would bring comfort to those searching for him.


    "Understood," William replied, feeling a surge of hope. "Take care, Ben."


    With that, William left and returned to the encampment. Everyone was worried, and he encountered Lincoln along the way, who still seemed bewildered by the events.


    "William! You''re alive!" Professor Lincoln exclaimed, rushing towards him. "I''ve been searching for you for hours."


    William returned to the encampment with Lincoln, deciding it was the safest place to share what he had learned.

 Chapter 122 - 122: The Dark Mage is Here

    William knew he had to tell Lincoln what had happened, but he decided to omit Ben''s identity as a summoned hero. It wasn''t something he felt comfortable revealing, as it could also expose his own secret.


    Instead, he simply said he had encountered a man pursuing a fugitive and explained what he knew about Malkor¡ªthat he was a dark mage planning to perform a ritual with Ron.


    Professor Lincoln listened intently, his concern for Ron evident. However, he felt a glimmer of hope knowing they had someone else on their side.


    "And you trust this... Ben?" Lincoln inquired, a hint of skepticism in his voice.


    William nodded firmly. "Yes, I do. For now, we need to continue searching for Malkor, but Ben said he would try to contact us in a few days."


    "Alright..." Lincoln said, pondering the situation. "And William, let''s keep this between us for now, shall we? I think the other students might panic if we tell them about another unknown person and...ritual sacrifices."


    Indeed, it wasn''t ideal to share this information with the other students. William felt many of them lacked the mental fortitude to handle such news, at least not in their current state.


    "Agreed," William confirmed. "We''ll keep this to ourselves for now."


    After their conversation, they returned to the makeshift camp near the magic academy construction site. When the other students saw William, they were overjoyed, sighing in relief.


    "William! What in the world happened?" Marcel exclaimed, embracing his friend.


    "Lincoln and I were attacked," William explained, "and I ended up getting lost. But I''m back now!"


    No one pressed William or Lincoln for further details. They could see William was physically injured, lending credence to his story. Moreover, they were preoccupied with the search for Ron.


    William was relieved. It seemed none of the students were harboring suspicions or demanding a more detailed account of what had happened. Since they wanted to keep things secret, this was a welcome outcome.


    All the students, including Professor Lincoln, continued searching for Ron, while William retreated to his cabin to rest. He felt weak after the day''s events; falling from his flying mount and enduring a blow to the head had taken its toll. He needed time to recover.


    Asura, his demonic sword, spoke up, "Was that guy really one of the heroes? He certainly seemed like it, but I had no idea they summoned heroes here in the past too. Intriguing, isn''t it?"


    "Indeed," William agreed. "And it seems people aren''t that familiar with the heroes here. I wonder if the same person or group who summoned me also summoned him. Could it be the same order of mages that Elric was a part of?"


    The mere thought of Elric ignited a fury within William, causing him to clench his fists. Elric had banished him, treated him like dirt, and he would never forget it.


    "I don''t know," Asura replied, "but we can investigate in the future. I think searching for information about Elric''s order of mages might be easier here in the past than in the present. You might encounter less danger here."


    Asura''s suggestion made perfect sense, and William was determined to seek more information. However, that was a task for the future. At present, he had far more pressing matters to attend to.


    William remained in his cabin, resting and eating, but he couldn''t bear to stay idle for long. He yearned to rejoin the search and find Ron, and not just find him, but also put an end to the dark mage Malkor''s interference with their plans for the magic academy.


    Driven by this resolve, he emerged from his cabin, ready to seek out the others. But the moment he stepped outside, he froze. A figure cloaked in black stood staring at him from across the clearing, partially concealed by the shadows of a nearby tree.


    William blinked, unsure if his eyes were playing tricks on him. But the figure didn''t vanish.


    He initially thought it might be one of the students or even Professor Lincoln, but as the person approached, he realized it was a stranger.


    "Malkor?" he ventured, a hint of uncertainty in his voice.


    The man''s eyebrows shot up in surprise. He lowered his black hood, revealing the face of a middle-aged man with a long beard, tired eyes ringed with dark circles, and a scar across his left eye.


    "How do you know my name?" Malkor demanded, his voice laced with suspicion. "You shouldn''t..."


    According to Ben, he had followed Malkor to the island without the dark mage''s knowledge. Therefore, William shouldn''t know who he was.


    Thinking fast, William fabricated a plausible story. "I''ve heard of you before," he said, feigning familiarity. "You performed some gruesome rituals near the town where I lived."


    Judging by Malkor''s reaction, he bought the story.


    "Ah, I see," Malkor said with a smug grin. "You''ve heard of my art. Beautiful, isn''t it? I''m just waiting for the right moment to do the same with your friend... the one I recently acquired."


    He was referring to Ron. "Why are you here?" William asked, trying to maintain his composure. "I thought you were in hiding."


    Malkor let out a harsh laugh. "Hiding? Why would I hide? None of you stand a chance against me. That professor of yours... I doubt he could last five minutes in a serious fight."


    Malkor was indeed a powerful mage. Despite the widespread loathing for his dark practices, his strength was undeniable. William knew that if he tried to confront Malkor, he wouldn''t stand a chance.


    He discreetly checked the timer on his SSS-ranked skill. It still showed several days remained before he would be pulled back to the present. He couldn''t use that ability to escape this situation.


    "Professor Lincoln is quite skilled," William countered, attempting to sow doubt in Malkor''s mind. "I think you''d find him a formidable opponent, not the pushover you seem to believe. And don''t forget the other students; they would join the fight, too."


    Undeterred, Malkor continued his slow advance. William desperately sought a way to halt his approach or, at the very least, instill some fear in him, but his efforts proved futile. S§×ar?h the N??elFir§×.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Without his flying mount, escape seemed impossible. There was one option left, but William was reluctant to resort to it.


    "Trying to scare me, young one?" Malkor sneered, his lips curling into a cruel smile. "Some unforeseen circumstances arose, and I find myself needing another participant for my ritual. Luckily, I stumbled upon another student here in the encampment."


    The situation was growing increasingly dire. William backed away, but there was nowhere to run.


    Asura''s voice echoed in his mind. "I can help you unleash the full demonic power within you. There''s a chance you might die or suffer permanent damage, but it''s better than the 100% chance of death if you face this guy alone!"


    It was a tempting offer, and William didn''t dismiss it. If he could hold out for a while, perhaps even injure Malkor slightly until Lincoln returned to the camp, it might just work.


    But before he could make a decision, a figure appeared to his rescue. Ben descended from the sky, landing between William and Malkor.


    For the first time, fear flickered across Malkor''s face. "You?" he sputtered, his voice laced with disbelief. "How did you find me here?"


    "Did you really think you could hide forever?" Ben chuckled, a confident glint in his eyes. "It was only a matter of time before I found you."


    The two knew each other well, and Malkor was acutely aware of Ben''s superior power. His confident demeanor evaporated, replaced by a desperate urge to flee. He backpedaled, frantically searching for an escape route.


    But Ben wasn''t about to let Malkor escape. He had been on the island for a while, lying in wait, hoping for the right moment to find Malkor and either kill him or bring him back as a prisoner.


    This was the opportunity he had been waiting for. He hadn''t expected Malkor to leave his hideout so soon and seek another student to sacrifice in his macabre dark magic ritual.


    Malkor acted quickly, conjuring a smokescreen of dark energy¡ªthe same energy he had used to knock Lincoln and William from their flying mounts.


    Under its cover, Malkor fled into the forest. William, seeing Ben standing motionless, exclaimed, "Are you going to let him get away?"


    Ben chuckled. "Don''t worry. He''s already trapped in my illusion magic. He''ll be back shortly."


    And as if on cue, Malkor reappeared from the forest after about thirty seconds.


    "What the devil?" Malkor exclaimed in confusion. "I was running in the opposite direction!"


    Why was he back where he started? Malkor quickly realized he had fallen victim to one of Ben''s many mysterious magic spells.


    "These blasted illusions!" Malkor roared, hurling a ball of black fire towards William and Ben. "Why don''t you fight fairly?"


    The ball of black fire flew over toward them. William thought of running, but Ben acted first. He would soon show Malkor the reason he was one of the summoned heroes.

 Chapter 123 - 123: Its time to leave

    Ben''s power was truly awe-inspiring. He effortlessly blocked Malkor''s spell with a shimmering magic shield.


    "Damn it," Malkor cursed, his frustration evident.


    He made no further attempts to escape. The last time had been futile. He knew Ben''s illusions were formidable, and fleeing was likely not an option.


    Ben prepared to retaliate. His body underwent a startling transformation. His arms morphed into those of a fearsome beast, his height surged by at least six meters, and his frame bulged with muscle.


    He had become a creature, a behemoth resembling a giant tiger that walked on two legs.


    William gaped in astonishment. He had never imagined Ben possessed such an ability.


    Malkor, too, was taken aback. He braced himself to launch another black fire spell, but Ben was too fast.


    In the blink of an eye, Ben appeared before Malkor, slashing at him with his claws. The blow sliced deep into Malkor''s torso, sending him flying into a tree.


    Blood gushed from the wound. Malkor was grievously injured. At that moment, Lincoln arrived.


    Seeing the monstrous creature near William, Lincoln shouted, "William, look out!"


    "It''s alright, Lincoln," William assured him. "He''s a friend, a mage who''s helping us."


    "What?" Lincoln exclaimed in confusion.


    Ben transformed back into his human form and then used magic-inhibiting shackles to restrain Malkor, ensuring he couldn''t escape.


    "What was that transformation?" Lincoln asked, his curiosity piqued. "Are you one of those mages who can shapeshift into beasts?"


    Such magic was rare, practiced only by a select few known as druids who lived in a specific part of the kingdom.


    Lincoln assumed Ben was one of these druids. William had initially thought the same, but the truth was far more intriguing.


    "I didn''t actually transform into a beast," Ben explained. "It was merely another one of my illusions."


    "What?" William gasped, astounded. "But it seemed so real!"


    "Well, what can I say?" Ben remarked with a shrug. "I''m one of the most skilled illusionists in the kingdom. Now that Malkor is apprehended, I''ll return with him. He needs to be imprisoned as soon as possible."


    "And how do you plan to leave the island?" Lincoln inquired. "We arrived on flying mounts, but this villain destroyed them."


    "Ah, yes, I understand," Ben replied. "Well, I''ll simply fly on my own. Would you like me to arrange for some mounts to be sent here for you? I believe I can manage that."


    "That would be fantastic," Lincoln said, relieved.


    Before taking Malkor away, however, they needed to locate Ron. Ben skillfully extracted the information from Malkor''s mind using his mind control magic.


    These spells took time to cast, but with Malkor restrained and injured, they had all the time in the world.


    Once they knew where Ron was hidden, Ben led the way. They found him in a cave tucked away in a remote corner of the island. He was dirty and bruised but alive.


    Ron was overcome with relief when they rescued him, tears welling up in his eyes.


    "You''ll be alright, Ron," Lincoln comforted him. "Come with us back to the camp."


    He still couldn''t believe he was finally being rescued. Ron trembled the entire way back to the camp, only calming down once they arrived.


    There, he saw Malkor. Rage surged through Ron. Ben, noticing this, offered, "Want to punch him to vent some anger?"


    Of course, Ron accepted the offer. He strode towards Malkor, looked him in the eye, and delivered a powerful punch to his face. Not just one, but three solid blows. sea??h th§× n?velFire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Malkor''s mana was restricted by the shackles, leaving his body fragile. Ron''s punches broke his nose and one of his teeth.


    Malkor didn''t utter a word after receiving those punches to the face. He was utterly defeated, lacking the strength to retaliate. Besides, in his current situation, cursing Ron would only lead to more blows, and who would want that?


    Ben then bid them farewell, promising to arrange for flying mounts. "I believe I can secure at least one large flying mount for you all," he said. "Either a friend of mine will bring it, or I will personally deliver it. It should arrive within fifteen days."


    "Thank you, my friend," Lincoln replied, shaking Ben''s hand.


    Waiting fifteen days was hardly an inconvenience. They had ample supplies to sustain them, and there was still much to build.


    With that, Ben demonstrated one of the reasons he was a summoned hero. His power was truly remarkable.


    He conjured a mana carpet, shimmering with a purplish hue, and stepped onto it. Malkor lay bound on the same carpet, and the two of them soared into the sky.


    William and the others waved goodbye to Ben. He had undoubtedly saved them from the dark mage and helped rescue Ron.


    "Come, Ron," one of the students said. "I''ll prepare something for you to eat."


    Everyone worked together to help Ron, an act that strengthened the bonds between the students. They began to understand that on this island, if something went wrong, they only had each other to rely on.


    The best way to thrive was to work together, united by their common purpose. William had previously clashed with one particular student¡ªthe one who had insulted him and complained incessantly¡ªbut after this incident, the student ceased his disruptive behavior, and a sense of peace settled over the group.


    After two days at the camp, William resumed his mission to cull the island''s magical beasts. He had recovered physically and mentally, and a sense of calm had returned to the group, though the lingering fear of another attack remained.


    It was only after this period of relative peace that they truly realized the immediate danger had passed. They could finally relax without the constant dread of a dark mage lurking in the shadows.


    The magical beasts were now their sole concern, and William was determined to address the issue.


    He returned to the same hunting grounds as before. With his sword in hand, he faced a variety of creatures, from terrestrial and aquatic to those that soared through the air.


    William also grew more discerning, learning to avoid certain types of plants. He had once leaned against a tree to rest, only to discover it was a sentient, predatory species that attempted to ensnare him with its branches.


    Fortunately, the tree wasn''t powerful enough to hold him, and he managed to escape its grasp. But the experience served as a valuable lesson, teaching him to be more vigilant in the future.


    Despite facing numerous magical creatures and gaining experience, William couldn''t shake a growing sense of anxiety.


    He had finally reached level 25, the threshold that allowed him to acquire a class. But to do so, he needed to find a mentor.


    This was the source of his unease. Unlike the other heroes, who had access to the finest mentors capable of granting them special hero-exclusive classes, William was alone.


    How would he ever obtain a unique class?


    One day, while lost in contemplation on the beach, Asura''s voice echoed in his mind.


    "I believe I''ve recovered some memories now that you''ve grown stronger," Asura stated. "And I think there''s an island in this region where a demon civilization still exists."


    "What?" William exclaimed in surprise.


    Asura had previously mentioned that the best types of magic for William to learn were fire or dark fire¡ªhe had a natural affinity for them due to his demonic heritage¡ªbut in Aethel''s present time, the demon civilization had vanished.


    Perhaps it still existed somewhere in the world, but William didn''t know its location. However, in the past, it seemed things were different.


    "Are you sure?" William asked, his curiosity piqued.


    "Yes, I''m certain," Asura confirmed. "But you''ll have to abandon this construction project. They might even think you deserted the school and never allow you to return. Are you willing to take that risk?"


    The decision weighed heavily on William. He had hoped to leave without being expelled. Could he persuade Lincoln to let him go? Or perhaps speak to Headmaster Grant about it?


    Returning to the camp that day, William had a serious conversation with Lincoln.


    "I need to leave for a while," he began, "possibly even years. Do you think that would be grounds for expulsion?"


    Lincoln was taken aback. "Leave for years?" he echoed. "Where do you need to go?"


    Hesitation clouded the professor''s features.


    "There are some personal matters I need to attend to," William explained vaguely. "I''ve been trying to avoid them for as long as possible, but I can''t anymore."


    William braced himself for a harsh response, but Lincoln surprised him with his leniency. "Our school already has few students," he said, "and you''re one of our best. We can''t afford to lose you. I believe Grant will understand. But how will you leave? We still don''t have a flying mount."


    "I was thinking of using the mount to return to the nearest city and taking a boat from there," William explained. "That would be much faster for you. I don''t want to leave and steal your only means of transport."


    And so it was decided. A few days later, one of Ben''s friends arrived with an enormous flying mount¡ªa magnificent bird with six wings.


    The sheer size and power of the creature startled Lincoln.


    "My god," he breathed, "this beast is worth a fortune. It can fly so high that it can travel directly to the mainland without worrying about the perils of the ocean."


    William''s ears perked up at this information.


    ''Perhaps stealing this mount wouldn''t be such a bad idea after all,'' he mused, a mischievous glint in his eyes.

 Chapter 124 - 124: Another Hero

    The mount seemed like the perfect solution for William, who was already contemplating approaching Ben''s friend to see if he could borrow it. He didn''t want to steal it outright, as that would negatively impact his friends who were staying on the island. William wasn''t that kind of person.


    As soon as Ben''s friend landed the enormous bird on the beach, William went to speak with him.


    Up close, the bird was even larger than William had imagined, making him feel dwarfed by the majestic creature. It was truly a powerful flying mount.


    "You''re William, right?" the man said with a friendly smile. "I need to speak with you in private. Is that alright?"


    Lincoln and the other students were present to see the mount, and upon hearing the man''s request, they returned to the camp.


    Once William and the man were alone, he revealed, "I''m one of the summoned heroes, just like Ben. He told me about you."


    William hadn''t expected to encounter another hero here. "Really?" he said, surprised. "Well, it''s an honor to meet another one of us."


    "Likewise," the hero replied. "I''ve come to invite you to train with us. I believe you could progress much faster that way."


    They wanted William to join them, the heroes, but he knew it wasn''t a good idea. Things were likely the same in the past, meaning the heroes were affiliated with the order of mages that Elric belonged to.


    For some reason, William had a feeling he would suffer at their hands if he went, but it was still an opportunity to learn more about the heroes and Elric.


    "Could we perhaps consider that later?" William asked. "I have some things I need to do first. I believe it''s alright to wait a while, say a few years?"


    William wanted to find the island where the demon race lived and learn more from them. He needed to understand his powers better.


    The hero seemed to agree. "No problem, we have plenty of time. But try not to take longer than a decade. Remember, the threat of the demon lord is approaching."


    "Right, of course," William replied. "And one more thing, do you think you could give me this mount? Or at least lend it to me for a while? I need to travel the world, and I think it would be very useful."


    "Actually, I came here to give it to you," the hero said. "Your friends will receive another mount."


    "Excellent!" William exclaimed.


    In the end, he wouldn''t need to steal or beg for the mount, which was a relief. With this bird, he could travel the oceans with ease.


    The hero handed William a small whistle. "With this, you can control the bird," he explained. "It hunts for its own food, and it doesn''t require frequent feeding."


    He gave William a few more instructions before taking his leave. He, too, flew off, but unlike Ben, who used a mana carpet, this hero simply sprouted wings and soared into the sky.


    William returned to the camp to share the news. "Apparently, that flying mount is for me," he told Lincoln. "But he''ll be back soon with another one for you."


    Lincoln frowned, puzzled. He couldn''t understand why such a powerful man would gift such a valuable mount to William.


    What made William so special? Despite his questions, Lincoln knew William wouldn''t lie about it.


    "Alright, I understand," Lincoln conceded. "Well, at least we''ll have a way to leave the island when we need to. I think we''ll have to go buy supplies soon."


    Although the island provided water and creatures to hunt, they still needed other types of food. Lincoln wanted to start a farm, enabling them to stay on the island longer without relying on outside supplies.


    But everything in its own time. Lincoln still needed to organize the site before they could begin planting.


    William, however, had other plans. Though he enjoyed being with his friends and wanted to kill more monsters to gain experience, he knew he needed to venture out to become truly powerful.


    His goal was the demon island Asura had mentioned. During the night, William prepared to leave. But before he departed, he decided to speak with his friends, Marcel and Denise.


    "I''m leaving tonight," William announced.


    Marcel had invited him into his cabin, expecting a friendly chat with his friend, not this bombshell.


    "What?" he blurted out, stunned. "Is this a joke?"


    "No, it''s not," William replied, his voice firm. "There are places I need to go. It''s important. I haven''t told anyone else, just the two of you."


    "But it''s going to be dangerous. You know that," Marcel insisted, concern etched on his face.


    Despite his desire to keep his friend safe, Marcel could see that nothing would sway William''s decision. Accepting this, he offered his support and bid his friend farewell.


    "Will you come back?" he asked, a hint of sadness in his voice.


    "Yes, definitely," William assured him. "This is just a temporary adventure. In the meantime, please stay strong. I wish I could go on adventures with you both."


    Marcel and Denise embraced him, exchanging heartfelt goodbyes. Then, William slipped out of the cabin.


    He couldn''t linger. The longer he stayed, the greater the chance Lincoln would notice something was amiss.


    William''s goal was simple: reach his new mount and leave.


    Under the cover of darkness, he made his way to the beach where the bird awaited him.


    The path was relatively safe. William had spent several days clearing the area of magical creatures.


    The bird itself also contributed to the area''s safety. It was a powerful and intimidating beast, and no other magical creature on the island dared approach the beach.


    As William approached the bird, it became agitated, ready to attack at any moment. He quickly used the whistle given to him by the hero, calming the magnificent creature.


    He mounted the bird and soared into the night sky. Lincoln awoke to the sound, but it was too late. William was already gone.


    "Which direction is this island?" William asked Asura in his mind.


    "Southwest," Asura replied. "But it would be wise to return to the mainland and stock up on supplies first. Going straight there would be risky. It''s a long journey."


    Since William had left abruptly, he didn''t have many supplies with him. According to Asura, it was unlikely he would encounter any islands along the way.


    In that case, he would need to carry water and food. While fishing in the sea was possible, it was risky and time-consuming.


    Therefore, it was best to be prepared with provisions.


    William turned back and headed towards the nearest island. He lay down and took a nap, instructing Asura to wake him when they neared the island.


    A few hours passed, around four in total, and William reached the island. The bird was incredibly fast and flew at an impressive altitude.


    The cold at that height surprised William, and he decided to buy some new clothes in the city.


    He couldn''t land just anywhere with such an enormous bird. William chose a secluded area on the island with dense vegetation, a place where the inhabitants wouldn''t be alarmed by the sudden appearance of such a creature.


    In fact, William doubted anyone would even see the bird. He arrived under the cover of darkness, maintaining a low profile.


    William then made his way towards the city, where he had to wait a few hours for the shops to open.


    Once the shops opened, he began his shopping spree. William focused on purchasing barrels of water and food ¨C the essentials for his journey.


    Goods on the island were relatively inexpensive, and he had some savings from the school and Jinra. So, he easily acquired everything he needed.


    William also bought some fur-lined leather clothing. It was a bit more expensive since it wasn''t typical attire for the island''s hot climate.


    But William needed those clothes to withstand the frigid temperatures at the high altitudes the bird could reach.


    He managed to store most of his purchases in his inventory, which was a huge advantage. This allowed him to carry everything without cluttering the back of his mount.


    Securing items on the bird''s back would have been a challenge, so the inventory was a lifesaver.


    After completing his shopping, he returned to his mount, climbed aboard, and soared off into the vast expanse of the sky.


    His destination was set: the island Asura had revealed. According to the recovered memories, it was quite distant, located near another continent!


    "I''m almost certain no one has explored that continent yet," Asura commented. "Perhaps you''ll be the first to encounter people with a completely different culture."


    The prospect of exploring such a new and uncharted territory thrilled William, but it was a long way off, requiring many days of travel. sea??h th§× N??eFire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Suddenly, his time in the past came to an end. Everything around him froze for a fleeting moment, and a portal materialized before him, pulling him inexorably inward.


    William found himself back in the present, thrust once more into his quest to find the ingredients for the king''s antidote.

 Chapter 125 - 125: Looking for the next ingredient

    William was back in the present, aboard the ship heading towards the island where they would supposedly find one of the ingredients for the king''s antidote: the fire blossom flower.


    Of course, the journey was still quite long - about 12 to 13 days. It could take longer depending on the conditions they encountered. There was also the chance of encountering a powerful magical beast and everyone perishing on this journey.


    The likelihood of encountering a creature strong enough to take on all the sailors, the captain, and Seraphina was quite low, but it still existed.


    ''Before I go out, I should change my clothes again...'' William thought as he glanced at his attire.


    He needed to maintain a low profile, so he had to wear the same clothes he was wearing before, or people would notice.


    He changed, left his quarters, and made his way to the upper deck of the ship. There, he encountered the fog that Captain Hemlock had mentioned earlier.


    It was a never-ending fog, a defining characteristic of this part of the ocean. Not only was it difficult to navigate, but it was also a place teeming with powerful magical beasts.


    "How are things going?" William inquired.


    "So far, so good," Hemlock replied, "but we''ve just entered the fog bank, and I know things could get dicey at any moment."


    William looked around and saw that all the crew members were focused and prepared for battle. No one was slacking off or enjoying the oceanic scenery.


    ''I need to focus too,'' William thought.


    He had gained a few levels during his time in the past, which gave him a bit more confidence when facing any powerful magical beasts that might appear.


    Seraphina, who was also on the upper deck, approached William for a brief conversation.


    "You seem different from how you were earlier today," she observed. "Your aura feels stronger."


    It was obvious. William was indeed stronger.


    "Well, what can I say? I''m someone who thrives in adversity," he replied with a slight smirk.


    Seraphina nodded in agreement. "We are certainly going through a lot on this mission... But once we obtain this fire blossom flower, we can finally return."


    "Yes. That''s good, isn''t it?"


    "Yes, very."


    Their conversation was brief. Seraphina''s water magic was crucial. She could detect creatures in the water from a long distance, which was vital in their current foggy predicament.


    The first day in the fog-laden region passed without incident. It was eerily calm - too calm - and William spent most of his time resting and eating.


    But on the second day, William was jolted awake in the early morning hours by screams coming from the upper deck. He leaped out of bed, flung open his door, and rushed towards the commotion.


    He didn''t even bother closing his door. The situation seemed dire, and William didn''t want to waste a single second. His focus was on reaching the upper deck as quickly as possible.


    Bursting onto the deck, William was met with a shocking sight: Seraphina, covered in blood, was locked in a fierce battle with a magical beast that had boarded the ship!


    The creature was a bizarre species of shark that walked on two legs, wielded weapons, and could even speak.


    William was stunned. This was clearly a member of a more intelligent civilization, one that was perhaps unknown to humans.


    The captain fought alongside Seraphina. Despite her injuries, William could tell they were gaining the upper hand.


    The shark was in far worse shape. The fin on its back had been ripped off, and a deep gash marred its chest.


    "Even if you defeat me, you won''t win against my allies," the shark rasped, its voice filled with malice. "This area belongs to us, and we don''t want humans trespassing here."


    "But this is the only way to reach our destination," Hemlock insisted, trying to reason with the creature. "Are you certain we can''t find a peaceful resolution?"


    "No!" the shark spat. "There will be no truce."


    An idea sparked in William''s mind. He stepped closer to the shark, a risky move, and held out the ring he had received from the Triton King.


    "Hello, friend," he said, his voice calm and steady. "Do you recognize this ring?"


    It was a gamble. The mermaid and merman kingdoms could be either allies or enemies with these sharks.


    There was a chance William could make things worse by showing the ring.


    "I recognize that symbol!" the shark exclaimed, its eyes widening in surprise. "Are you a friend of theirs?"


    "Yes," William confirmed, holding the Triton King''s ring out for the shark to see more clearly.


    The shark fell silent for a few tense seconds, leaving William to wonder if he had just made a terrible mistake.


    Finally, the shark spoke, "I will inform the others that you are friends. And I will see if I can help you navigate this region as quickly as possible. It is very dangerous here."


    With that, the shark leaped back into the water and vanished from sight.


    Hemlock and Seraphina were bewildered.


    "What ring was that you showed him?" Seraphina asked, her curiosity piqued.


    "I''d rather keep that a secret," William replied, a hint of mystery in his voice.


    More and more secrets from William. Seraphina was starting to feel uneasy. She could tolerate him keeping some things private, as that was natural, but it seemed like William was nothing but secrets.


    Despite her growing apprehension, she didn''t press the matter and instead retreated to her quarters. "I need to recover," she said simply before departing.


    Hemlock, who had arrived later to the fight, was relatively unscathed.


    "Thanks for helping us, William," he said gratefully.


    "You''re welcome, Captain," William replied.


    William returned to his quarters and went back to sleep.


    The next morning, he was greeted by an unexpected sight. Inside the ship, he saw the same shark he had fought with the previous night, accompanied by another.


    Both were clad in armor and carried weapons, standing near the captain.


    The shark seemed surprised to see William. "So there you are," he said. "I told you we would come to help you navigate this region."


    "Thanks so much for the help. How long do you think it will take us to get out of here?" William asked.


    "I believe about three more days. But you''re in luck; the powerful magical beasts are hibernating this time of year. That''s one of the reasons we''re so active," the shark explained.


    Through their conversation, William learned that they were indeed a civilization similar to the mermaids and mermen he had met.


    However, their numbers were fewer, and they generally avoided contact with humans. They had never formed any alliances with humans.


    But they did have an alliance with the merfolk, so when they saw the ring William carried, they knew he was a close friend of the mermaid kingdom.


    Because of this, it was only natural for them to offer assistance. Helping William and the others wouldn''t cost them much and could potentially earn them favor with the merfolk, which might lead to benefits in the future.


    As the days passed, William noticed Seraphina growing more distant.


    ''She must be upset or angry about my secrets,'' he thought.


    It seemed the most likely explanation, but William couldn''t help it. He truly had to keep many things confidential, and she would have to understand, sooner or later.


    With the sharks'' guidance, William and his crew navigated the treacherous fog with surprising ease and speed.


    They encountered a few creatures along the way, but nothing too dangerous. It was all quite manageable.


    Hemlock was relieved when they finally emerged from the fog bank, knowing they had overcome one of the most perilous parts of the journey.


    "In the end, that Kraken you mentioned never showed up, Hemlock," William remarked, clapping the captain on the back.


    "Yeah, you''re right," Hemlock chuckled. "Maybe it''s just a legend after all. I mean, I''ve never seen the Kraken or met anyone who has."


    One of the sharks overheard their conversation and interjected, "The Kraken is real. Remember I told you the powerful creatures are hibernating? Well, that includes the Kraken." sea??h th§× N??elFir§×.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Hemlock''s laughter died in his throat, replaced by a nervous gulp. So, the chance of encountering the Kraken was real after all...


    The sharks bid them farewell as they left the fog, making sure to invite William to visit their kingdom when he had the chance.


    "I certainly will," William replied. "But how do I contact you?"


    "When you arrive in this region, we will know you are here," the shark assured him.


    "Understood."


    After their departure, William and the others were in the final leg of their journey.


    Now, only a few days remained before they would reach the volcanic island where the fire blossom flower was said to bloom.


    William was eager to find the last ingredient¡ªwhich was located on the high seas¡ªand finally be done with this quest.


    He was growing weary of islands and sea voyages, both in the present and the past.

 Chapter 126 - 126: William now has a disciple

    The days crawled by, each one feeling longer than the last. William''s eagerness to reach their destination made time seem to slow to a crawl.


    He passed the time by staying in his quarters, chatting with sailors on the upper deck, and gazing at the endless expanse of the ocean.


    The moment they reached their destination was unmistakable. The island they were to explore boasted an enormous volcano, visible from a great distance.


    The volcano''s sheer size was awe-inspiring, and William could see smoke billowing from its peak. Even from afar, he felt dwarfed by its natural grandeur.


    "Is it just me, or is there a village over there?" William wondered aloud, pointing towards a cluster of houses on the island. "How can they live so far out here?"


    He had assumed the island would be deserted, or perhaps inhabited by only a few hardy souls, but he was mistaken. There were numerous houses and a bustling community.


    Hemlock seemed to have anticipated this and offered an explanation. "We''re actually close to another continent," he revealed. "This island trades extensively with them. In fact, you could say they''re residents of that continent, not ours. From what I understand, most of them speak more than one language."


    William was surprised. The direction he had sailed in the past was different, so he had imagined this continent to be a separate one.


    Of course, it was possible it was the same continent, vast enough to stretch across different regions.


    The answer remained elusive without further exploration. Captain Hemlock skillfully docked the ship and went ashore to speak with the port authorities, ensuring they had a place to moor and wouldn''t encounter any trouble.


    This island didn''t receive many visitors from afar. It was more common to see ships from nearby islands or the larger continent, but a vessel arriving from as far as William''s was a rare occurrence.


    It took some time for Hemlock to explain their purpose and assure the authorities they wouldn''t cause any problems.


    Meanwhile, William took the opportunity to relax at a nearby restaurant and order a drink.


    "Give me your best drink," he requested.


    The waitress was taken aback by his unfamiliar accent and the language he spoke¡ªa secondary language for the islanders. She immediately recognized him as someone from a distant land.


    Intrigued by William''s unfamiliar demeanor, the waitress approached his table with a smile and a few questions after delivering his drink.


    "Are you from far away?" she inquired. "What brings you to our island?"


    Despite the girl''s seemingly harmless curiosity, William remained guarded. Sharing too much information with strangers could attract unwanted attention.


    "Yes, I come from afar," he replied vaguely. "But unfortunately, I can''t disclose the reasons for my presence here. Let''s just say it''s for tourism."


    A hint of disappointment flickered across the waitress''s face. "I understand," she sighed. "I wish I could leave this island more often and explore the world, but I only travel to the mainland a few times a year with my parents."


    Her response piqued William''s curiosity. "What''s the mainland like?" he asked. "If you don''t want to answer, that''s fine. I wouldn''t blame you, considering I haven''t been entirely forthcoming myself."


    "It''s alright," she assured him. "It''s a continent like any other, I suppose, though I haven''t seen any others myself. It has diverse biomes, but most of it is desert. The stories say it was transformed into a desert long ago due to a fight."


    "A fight?" William echoed, his brow furrowed in disbelief. "How could a fight transform an entire continent?"


    The idea seemed preposterous, but the waitress''s conviction made him reconsider. This wasn''t just a fantastical tale from a bygone era; it seemed to hold genuine historical significance.


    "Well, according to the legends," she explained, leaning in conspiratorially, "it was a battle between a powerful warrior and a fearsome beast. Some say he fought a giant, others a dragon, and some even claim it was against another man. The truth is shrouded in mystery."


    William, having witnessed firsthand the destructive potential of magic, found the idea of a single person altering an entire continent entirely plausible. Mages could indeed reach incredible heights of power.


    Eventually, the waitress excused herself. Though her parents owned the restaurant, she still had duties to attend to, and other customers awaited her service.


    William savored his drink and the solitude it afforded him. The concoction contained ingredients foreign to him, though he detected a hint of pineapple in its flavor.


    Captain Hemlock approached his table, a look of satisfaction on his face.


    "We''re all set," he announced. "The guards won''t bother us, and we have time to explore the island and retrieve the flower, though they say it''s dangerous to approach the volcano."


    William, already anticipating a challenging task, was unsurprised. "I see," he replied calmly. "Will we begin today or tomorrow?"


    "Tomorrow," Hemlock answered. "Come with me; we''re searching for a tavern together."


    "Let me just finish my drink," William said, gesturing to his nearly-empty glass.


    Finding a tavern proved to be a simple task. The island offered limited options, so they didn''t have much to choose from.


    The tavern they settled on had plenty of space available¡ªa consequence of its infrequent clientele¡ªallowing the entire crew to lodge comfortably under one roof.


    But it was still daytime, so no one was looking to sleep. The crew settled into the tavern to eat, drink, and mingle with the locals.


    William, however, felt restless. He wanted to explore, to see more of this unfamiliar island. He wandered through the village streets, and to his surprise, he encountered someone familiar.


    It was the waitress from the restaurant.


    "What are you doing here?" he asked, his curiosity piqued. "Didn''t you have a lot of customers to attend to?"


    William''s tone was genuinely inquisitive, not rude. He was simply surprised to see her outside of work.


    "My shift just ended," she explained with a smile. "My parents hired someone to help me a few years ago when I wanted more free time to study magic. Working full-time made it difficult to focus on my studies at the end of the day."


    "Study magic?" William echoed, intrigued.


    He couldn''t sense any mana emanating from her. How was she concealing it? Was she a powerful mage? Or was there something else at play?


    Asura''s voice materialized in William''s mind, offering an explanation. "She has an artifact on her wrist," Asura revealed. "I believe that''s what''s preventing you from sensing her mana."


    William''s gaze fell upon her wrist, where he noticed a delicate bracelet.


    ''How does she possess such a valuable item while living on this remote island?'' he wondered.


    "Yes, I''m studying magic," she confirmed, her eyes sparkling with determination. "It might be my ticket off this island. I want to earn enough money to allow my parents to retire comfortably so they no longer have to run the restaurant."


    "A noble cause," William acknowledged, "but you know that the life of a mage seeking fortune is not easy. You could die."


    The woman''s gaze fell to her feet. "I know," she admitted softly. "That''s one of the reasons my parents didn''t want me to start learning magic. But in the end, I convinced them."


    "How is your training going?" William inquired, his curiosity piqued. "What level are you now?"


    A blush crept onto her cheeks. "I''m only level nine," she confessed, embarrassed. "It''s hard to learn on this island. I don''t have any teachers."


    William was genuinely surprised. Reaching level nine without proper resources or guidance was impressive. Did she gain experience by slaying monsters or through dedicated study?


    "I see," he replied, offering a polite smile. "I wish you the best of luck in achieving your goals."


    He turned to leave, his thoughts already shifting back to his mission. He found the woman pleasant and admired her noble aspirations, but he wasn''t on the island to make friends or play the role of a charitable benefactor.


    Suddenly, she grasped his arm, her touch surprisingly firm. William turned back to face her, his expression guarded.


    "Please, hear me out," she pleaded, her eyes filled with a desperate hope. "Could you be my teacher? Can I go with you?"


    William was ready to refuse, to gently remind her that such sudden physical contact was inappropriate, but Asura''s voice boomed in his mind, laced with an uncharacteristic excitement.


    "Accept! Accept her as your disciple! Do it, kid!" Asura urged, his voice echoing through William''s thoughts.


    "Why should I?" William countered mentally. "She would be a burden." S§×ar?h the ¦ÇovelFire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Asura''s pleas alone wouldn''t sway William. Ultimately, William was the master, and Asura was merely an artifact.


    "She has a demonic bloodline!" Asura exclaimed, his voice filled with urgency. "Hell, she might be one of the few descendants of the demons you can find in the present time of Aethel!"


    The lady already expected William to refuse after seeing how coldly he looked at her, but to her surprise, William said, "I accept you as my disciple."


    Her eyes widened in disbelief, and a radiant smile lit up her face. "Really?" she gasped, her voice barely above a whisper. "Thank you! Thank you so much!"


    She bowed deeply, her gratitude overflowing. "I won''t disappoint you, Master!" she declared, her voice filled with newfound determination. "I''ll work hard and become a mage worthy of your guidance!"

 Chapter 127 - 127: Seeking Flower

    William gestured towards a nearby bench, and they both sat down. He knew some things about Lucy, but now that she was his disciple, he felt it was important to learn more.


    Lucy, eager to delve into the world of magic and grow stronger, spoke rapidly, her words tumbling over each other in her excitement. She was still in a state of disbelief, unable to contain her joy. Never had she imagined William would actually accept her request.


    William, too, hadn''t planned on taking on a disciple anytime soon. But Asura''s revelation about Lucy''s demonic bloodline had piqued his interest.


    "And how are you going to tell your parents?" William inquired, a hint of concern in his voice. "Aren''t they going to be upset if you leave?"


    Lucy''s smile widened. "They already know I''m planning to leave to learn more about magic," she explained, "so it won''t be that hard, I think. But you''ll have to meet them, you know, so they can see you''re a good person."


    "Really?" William replied, considering her words. "Well, then it must be today, as I''ll be embarking on a task tomorrow." He paused, gauging her reaction. "Should we go there now?"


    He knew that the following day, he and the crew would venture towards the volcano in search of the fire blossom flower. It was a dangerous mission, one that would likely take some time to complete.


    William felt it best to speak with Lucy''s parents beforehand, eliminating one less worry from his mind.


    Lucy didn''t hesitate. "Sure, why not?" she chirped, a cheerful grin spreading across her face. "Come with me!"


    They navigated the quaint village streets, heading towards the restaurant where William had first encountered Lucy and enjoyed that peculiar drink.


    The restaurant bustled with activity¡ªit was, after all, one of the few dining establishments on the island.


    But with Lucy leading the way, they bypassed the crowded main area and entered the back of the restaurant, finding her parents hard at work in the kitchen. Her father, the restaurant''s cook, stood over a steaming pot, while her mother assisted with various tasks.


    They looked up in surprise as Lucy entered with an unfamiliar man in tow.


    "Lucy, my dear," her father boomed, setting down his cooking utensils. "What''s going on?"


    William remained silent, allowing Lucy to explain the situation. It was the safest course of action, ensuring he didn''t inadvertently say anything that might jeopardize his chances.


    Lucy recounted her encounter with William, explaining that he was on a mission but would soon be leaving the island. She expressed her desire to accompany him and further her magical studies. S§×arch* The N?velFire(.)net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Initially, her parents were apprehensive. They didn''t know William. Who in their right mind would let their daughter go off with a complete stranger?


    "We''ll close the restaurant soon so we can talk properly and get to know this William," Lucy''s father declared, his tone firm but fair. "Is that acceptable to you?"


    "Yes, Dad," Lucy replied, glancing at William with a reassuring smile.


    William settled at one of the empty tables in the main dining area, patiently waiting for the restaurant to close. It didn''t take long; Lucy''s parents were clearly eager to have this conversation.


    Once the last customer had departed and the doors were closed, they gathered around a table, Lucy''s parents even bringing out a platter of freshly cooked food from the kitchen.


    "So, who are you, William?" her father began, his gaze fixed on the young mage. "And what are you doing here? You''ll have to be forthcoming with us, or I won''t allow our daughter to go with you. I need to know she''ll be safe."


    William, recognizing the need for transparency, shared some details with Lucy''s parents. He told them he was from a prestigious magic academy and was on a mission to obtain the fire blossom flower.


    He remained vague about the flower''s purpose, simply stating it was for a potion he intended to craft. Naturally, he omitted any mention of his unique abilities, such as his time-travel skill or his demonic energy, including Lucy''s demonic heritage. That would be revealing far too much.


    "You can speak with my captain after we complete the mission," William offered. "You can see the ship, meet the crew, and see where your daughter would be staying. But this is a temporary arrangement; we''re returning to the mainland once this task is done."


    William''s words seemed to ease Lucy''s father''s concerns. He was understandably worried about his daughter, but he also recognized how important this opportunity was for Lucy. She yearned to become a powerful mage, a dream that would never materialize if she remained on the island.


    "May I ask why you accepted her as your disciple?" her father inquired, his curiosity piqued.


    William smiled warmly. "She told me she wanted to become a powerful mage, earn money, and allow you two to retire comfortably so you wouldn''t have to work in the restaurant anymore," he explained. "I found that incredibly noble. If I still had my parents, I would do the same."


    William''s gaze drifted momentarily, the thought of his unknown origins surfacing. It was still a difficult reality to grapple with.


    Lucy''s parents were visibly touched by his words, tears welling up in their eyes. "Alright," her father said, his voice thick with emotion. "Take care of our daughter, you understand? And I''ll be inspecting the ship and crew. Come talk to me when you''re done."


    "Of course," William assured him. "But Lucy will be staying here for now. The task is dangerous, and I don''t want her to come with us."


    She didn''t complain about not going. In fact, Lucy wanted to play it safe now that she finally found someone to mentor her. She decided to stay in the restaurant to prepare her things for the journey ahead.


    William returned to the tavern after that, walking through the empty streets.


    Once there, he noticed how the tavern buzzed with the lively chatter of the crew, their voices mingling with the clinking of tankards and the boisterous laughter of locals. William found a quiet corner, nursing a drink and observing the scene unfold. He noticed Seraphina sitting with a few other crew members, but she remained unusually quiet, her gaze distant.


    He wondered if she was still upset about his evasiveness, about the secrets he kept hidden. Perhaps tomorrow, after they faced the dangers of the volcano together, he could find a moment to speak with her, to try and bridge the gap that had formed between them.


    But for now, he let his thoughts drift, contemplating the challenges that lay ahead and the unexpected turn his journey had taken with the addition of a new disciple. He couldn''t deny the flicker of excitement that sparked within him at the prospect of mentoring Lucy, of helping her unlock her potential and perhaps, uncovering the secrets of her demonic heritage.


    The tavern''s raucous atmosphere gradually faded as the night wore on, and William eventually retired to his room, seeking a restful night''s sleep before the daunting challenges of the following day.


    But sleep eluded him. He tossed and turned, his mind a whirlwind of thoughts and anxieties. The impending expedition to the volcano, the enigmatic Seraphina, and the surprising addition of Lucy as his disciple ¨C all these elements swirled in his mind, preventing him from finding peace.


    Dawn broke, casting a soft glow through the window, and William finally drifted into a restless slumber. When he awoke, the rest of the crew was already abuzz with activity, their preparations for the mission well underway.


    They had gathered the necessary supplies to sustain them for several days, and they had secured the services of a local guide who knew the safest routes through the treacherous volcanic terrain.


    William joined the group, his stomach churning with a mix of anticipation and apprehension. He knew the dangers they faced ¨C not just the molten lava and scorching heat, but also the formidable Fire Elementals that inhabited the area.


    These creatures, born of fire and possessing immense power, were not to be trifled with. William knew they would inevitably have to engage some of them in battle, but he hoped to minimize such encounters. Their guide, a grizzled veteran of the volcano''s slopes, assured them he would lead them along the safest path, avoiding as many Fire Elementals as possible.


    William strolled alongside Captain Hemlock, engaging him in conversation since Seraphina remained aloof.


    "How long do you think it will take us to obtain this flower?" William inquired, his gaze sweeping across the rugged volcanic landscape.


    The captain stroked his beard thoughtfully. "Well," he mused, "with a bit of luck, a few days. If not..." He shrugged, his expression turning grim. "It''s hard to say."


    There were many variables to consider in this mission. The flower itself was extremely rare. There were times when the volcano was abundant with blossoms, and other times when only a single flower bloomed.


    And searching for a single flower on that colossal volcano, while evading or battling Fire Elementals and enduring the scorching heat, was a herculean task indeed.

 Chapter 128 - 128: A Powerful Foe

    The guide proved invaluable. Though he possessed no magical abilities, his knowledge of the region was indispensable.


    He led them along the safest paths, expertly avoiding the Fire Elementals that commonly roamed the volcano''s slopes.


    But eventually, encounters became unavoidable. When the number of elementals was low, the guide continued with William and the others, confident in their ability to handle the threat.


    Seraphina, Hemlock, and the sailors dispatched the Fire Elementals with relative ease.


    The elementals were level 30 creatures, wielding fire magic such as Fireball, Magma Ball, and other formidable spells.


    William knew he was no match for these monsters. He might be able to defeat one or two, but any more than that would prove incredibly difficult.


    He was only level 25, after all, while these monsters were level 30 and considerably stronger than typical level 30 creatures.


    Eventually, the path became too perilous for the guide to accompany them further. The increasing number of Fire Elementals posed a significant threat to his safety.


    "I must return to the village," the guide announced, his voice laced with regret. "But here is a map that should assist you in your quest. Please, be careful."


    Hemlock accepted the map gratefully, thanking the guide for his service. Of course, the guide wasn''t there out of pure altruism; Hemlock had paid him a handsome sum of gold coins.


    "Now things start to get tricky," Hemlock declared, his brow furrowed as he studied the map. "According to this, the number of Fire Elementals from this point onward is incredibly high."


    They ventured closer and closer to the volcano''s base. William gazed ahead, the towering peak looming before them.


    The temperature steadily climbed, forcing William to shed some layers of clothing along the way. The other sailors followed suit, beads of sweat dripping from their brows.


    Seraphina, with her water magic, proved to be a vital asset. She conjured refreshing water for the group and unleashed powerful spells that inflicted significant damage on the Fire Elementals.


    She seemed to be the perfect mage for this mission.


    ''The king must have chosen her for this very reason,'' William mused.


    They pressed onward, Hemlock leading the way with the map in hand, carefully following the safest routes indicated by their guide. These paths boasted the fewest encounters with Fire Elementals, though the number was still substantial.


    After about five minutes of trekking, a group of Fire Elementals materialized out of thin air. Ten in total ¨C the largest group they had faced so far.


    The elementals unleashed their fire magic in unison. A barrage of fireballs hurtled towards William and the others, covering a wide area.


    Seraphina reacted swiftly, conjuring a water barrier to intercept the fiery onslaught.


    "Counterattack!" she commanded, her voice strained. "I need a moment to recover."


    Blocking that many fire spells simultaneously had taken a toll on her. Seraphina needed a few seconds to replenish her mana before she could cast another spell, especially an offensive one.


    The responsibility for the counterattack fell upon William, Hemlock, and the sailors.


    Hemlock, sword in hand, charged towards the elementals. With remarkable agility, he closed the distance and launched an assault.


    "Deep Tide Cut!" he roared.


    His sword shimmered with a blue aura, and as he struck an elemental, a wave of water surged from the blade, engulfing several elementals, not just the one he had initially targeted.


    ''Incredible!'' William thought, impressed by the captain''s skill.


    This type of magic was fascinating, and it suited William''s fighting style, which relied on close combat and physical enhancement spells.


    Of course, William wasn''t going to stand idly by. He also charged towards the elementals, this time wielding his demonic sword.


    He wasn''t channeling demonic energy, just using the sword itself. No one would suspect anything out of the ordinary, as the sword appeared to be nothing more than a well-crafted blade made of exceptional materials.


    Like Hemlock, William easily closed the distance and attacked. But his sword strikes were devoid of any magical enhancement, relying solely on the blade''s sharpness and William''s physical strength.


    Even without imbuing his sword with magic, William''s attack was devastating. He focused on the same Fire Elemental that Hemlock had initially struck, delivering the final blow.


    [1800 EXP]


    [Item drop, 1 Fire Essence]


    In addition to experience points, William also obtained an item from the fallen monster. It went straight into his inventory. He wasn''t sure what the item was for, but it was always a welcome bonus to receive loot after defeating monsters.


    Despite eliminating one of the elementals, nine remained. The other sailors, also skilled in combat, joined the fray.


    William did his best to inflict as much damage as possible to gain experience points, or at least a fraction of them. If he remained idle, he wouldn''t gain anything. S§×arch* The ¦ÇovelFire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    In the end, he earned a total of 4,000 experience points, which was quite a haul. Everyone was exhausted after the battle, but thankfully, no one was injured.


    Once Seraphina unleashed her water magic, the fight concluded swiftly.


    They pressed onward without respite. Time was of the essence, and they had a clear objective: reach a designated point where they could rest and establish camp.


    Hemlock''s map indicated a spot on the volcano where a small, heated lake had formed, perfect for bathing and respite. The plan was to clear the area of Fire Elementals and spend the night there before continuing their ascent. It was the most suitable location they could find, and with some preparation, they could secure the area for a safe overnight stay.


    Reaching that haven, however, would take several hours. They continued their trek, encountering more Fire Elementals along the way. Fortunately, these encounters were mostly with smaller groups ¨C unlike the previous skirmish with ten elementals ¨C making the battles more manageable.


    Everything was going surprisingly smoothly. William actively participated in the battles, gaining experience points and collecting items.


    The fights themselves were relatively easy, which made William suspicious. The ascent shouldn''t be this straightforward.


    After about two hours of trekking, they arrived at the location of the heated lake. It was a stark contrast to the rest of the volcano''s barren landscape. Lush vegetation surrounded the lake, with trees, grass, and other plants flourishing in the fertile soil. It was an unexpected oasis amidst the fiery terrain.


    "How can plants grow here?" William wondered aloud, marveling at the sight.


    "I have no idea," Hemlock admitted, equally perplexed.


    Despite their exhaustion, they were relieved to have reached their goal. This would be their campsite.


    They began setting up camp, pitching tents and gathering wood for a fire. But their respite was short-lived.


    A monstrous elemental emerged from the depths of the lake! This one was different ¨C a hybrid of fire and water.


    William could sense its immense power. He estimated it to be twice the level of the other elementals, meaning this foe was level 60!


    That creature would be difficult, if not impossible, to confront. Seraphina and Hemlock also sensed the formidable power radiating from their opponent.


    Their first instinct was to flee, but escape seemed impossible in their current predicament.


    "We''ll have to fight," Seraphina declared, her voice laced with determination. "If we work together, I believe we can defeat it."


    Despite her confident assertion, the others weren''t as optimistic.

 Chapter 129 - 129: Demonic Transformation, Bloodline Activation

    That creature was incredibly powerful; William was terrified to face it.


    "Do you think we can win?" William asked Asura.


    Asura could sense the power of their adversaries far better than William himself. So, it was a good idea to ask for his opinion, which was quite valuable in such situations.


    "I think you can win, but William, some of you might die in this battle. Actually, I think many will die..."


    That wasn''t a good sign. But there was nothing they could do. It was impossible to run from that creature, and running blindly could attract even more elementals.


    The best option was to fight. This time, Seraphina took command of the battle, as she was the highest-level person there. The first thing she did was summon a water elemental using her magic!


    The elemental she summoned had a different appearance from those they had encountered near the volcano. It was a unique type that mages could summon.


    It wasn''t an easy spell to cast, which once again reinforced the fact that Seraphina was a powerful mage.


    The other sailors were somewhat reassured after seeing that powerful elemental fighting alongside them. Seraphina summoned that creature precisely to try and boost the group''s morale.


    "Let''s attack carefully," she said. "And let''s try to flank it and attack from behind."


    All the sailors nodded in agreement, and then something surprising happened. The elemental spoke!


    "Attacking from behind won''t work," the elemental declared. "Be careful with that idiotic plan of yours."


    Everyone was taken aback. Elementals didn''t typically have the ability to speak or understand languages, but this one seemed far more intelligent than most.


    This made things much more complicated. One of the biggest advantages humans had in battles like this was their ability to use their intelligence and strategize during combat to defeat magical beasts.


    But an intelligent elemental that could understand everything they were saying was incredibly dangerous. If their chances of winning were already low, well, now they were even lower.


    "Don''t you think we can resolve this another way?" Seraphina attempted to negotiate, speaking to the elemental. "We''re just here looking for something, and then we''ll leave and never bother you again."


    The elemental laughed. "Do you really think that will work? Why should I let you go? I have the advantage here."


    Seraphina had no compelling arguments to sway the creature. In the end, the only option was to fight, and that''s what she did.


    "Water Cannon!" Seraphina shouted, creating the runes with her magic scepter and launching a powerful water spell.


    While she did this, the other sailors advanced towards the elemental. Some used bows to attack from afar, while others closed in for melee combat. Captain Hemlock was among those who charged forward.


    As before, he used one of his sword techniques to attack the elemental. His movements were graceful, precise, and swift. It was indeed a powerful attack.


    William was about to act as well, considering the best way to engage the creature.


    ''Should I use my enhancement spells now or wait a bit?'' he wondered.


    He would undoubtedly need his spells to participate in this fight, given the elemental''s high level. But was it wise to use them right away? The spells didn''t last forever. If they wore off mid-battle, he would be in trouble.


    But before he could make a decision, the elemental acted.


    The elemental, instead of defending, opted to absorb the full brunt of their attacks, leaving itself vulnerable but ready to unleash a devastating counterstrike!


    Seraphina''s magic, Hemlock''s sword technique, and the combined assault of the sailors struck the elemental, inflicting significant damage. The creature roared in pain, but it didn''t deter its retaliation.


    It unleashed an area-of-effect attack, targeting the sailors and Captain Hemlock at close range.


    "Magma Burst!" the elemental bellowed.


    Scalding magma erupted from its body, engulfing the sailors and the captain. The sailors, with their lower levels, bore the brunt of the attack. Their faces and bodies were horrifically burned and melted by the searing magma.


    "Agggr!" Their screams of agony echoed through the air.


    Their cries were abruptly cut short as they collapsed, lifeless, onto the ground. S§×arch* The ¦ÇovelFire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Hemlock was also caught in the blast but managed to partially evade it. The magma seared his left arm and shoulder, his flesh bubbling and melting.


    The pain was nearly unbearable, but Hemlock gritted his teeth, refusing to cry out. He remained focused on the battle, his resolve unwavering.


    "Captain!" William shouted in anguish.


    Witnessing the gruesome deaths of his crew was devastating, especially for Hemlock, who had sailed with them for years. His heart ached with grief and guilt.


    "Get back, William!" Hemlock roared, his voice strained. "We''ll buy you time to escape!"


    Seraphina, still reeling from the sight of the fallen sailors, echoed Hemlock''s command. "That''s right! We''ll hold it off. Flee, William, please!"


    Seraphina''s water elemental lunged at their foe, pummeling it with powerful blows. The elemental was still recovering from its Magma Burst, creating the perfect opportunity to attack.


    Seraphina also unleashed another spell, this time a massive wave of water that slammed into the elemental with tremendous force, sending it flying backward.


    Hemlock, though severely injured, pressed the attack, his sword flashing. His movements were slower and weaker than before, hampered by his burns, but his determination was unwavering.


    Of course, William wasn''t going to stand idly by and watch his companions die so he could escape. That wasn''t his style.


    "Enhanced Strength! Swiftfoot!"


    His body enhancement spells significantly boosted his strength, agility, and speed. He received 40 extra strength points, 35 agility points, and a 15% increase in movement speed!


    That was the limit of his spells'' power. William had mastered them completely. To improve further, he would need to seek higher-ranked abilities.


    "No!" Hemlock commanded. "I know what you''re thinking, but it''s futile! This creature is too powerful! We''ll die in vain while you escape!"


    William was fed up with the captain''s defeatist attitude. "No, Captain. You don''t know a damn thing! You don''t know me or what I''m capable of, and I won''t let you two die here today!"


    If William wanted to win this fight, he would have to use everything at his disposal. Asura already understood his intentions.


    "You''re going to use the Stage 1 Demonic Transformation and your special summoned hero ability?" he questioned.


    "Exactly," William confirmed.


    "You know you''ll have to finish the fight in a few minutes, or you''ll be screwed afterward."


    "Yes, I know."


    "And you''re going to try anyway?"


    "I am."


    Asura laughed, a hint of pride in his voice. "That''s the spirit! Let''s do this, damn it! I''ll help you channel all the demonic energy. The rest is up to you."


    This would be the first time William unleashed all his demonic energy at once. Asura helped him channel it, and after a few seconds, a dark energy began to emanate from William''s body.


    His hair whipped around as if caught in a fierce wind, and his eyes turned crimson. Black veins appeared across his body.


    [Stage 1 Demonic Transformation activated]


    [+80 to all attributes until the transformation ends]


    [+100% healing speed]


    [Special abilities unlocked]


    [Duration: 5 minutes]


    Multiple notifications appeared before William. He thought it was the end, but it was just the beginning.


    [Hero''s Limit (S-Rank): Temporarily enhances all attributes by 50% for 1 minute. Significant physical strain will follow.]


    He activated his other ability, further amplifying the attributes already boosted by the Demonic Transformation!


    With all those buffs active, something even stranger occurred.


    [Your body has reached a high power level]


    [Demonic Serpent Bloodline activated]


    [+20 to all attributes permanently]


    [Enhanced regeneration, able to recreate lost limbs over time]


    [Enhanced vision]


    [More abilities will be unlocked over time]


    William felt an incredible surge of power. His pupils changed shape, becoming serpentine.


    The elemental was terrified. So were Hemlock and Seraphina.

 Chapter 130 - 130: Close Fight

    William was unrecognizable. He barely looked human, his transformed appearance striking fear into Seraphina and Hemlock. They exchanged bewildered glances, wondering what had come over the young man.


    The elemental recoiled slightly, betraying its fear. Though its expressionless face revealed nothing, William recognized the telltale sign of retreat.


    "What is this?" the elemental sputtered, its voice laced with apprehension. "How did you do that?"


    It couldn''t comprehend how a frail human like William could suddenly possess such immense power. But the elemental wasn''t foolish; it knew this transformation must be temporary. Its strategy shifted to evasion, hoping to outlast William''s newfound strength.


    William, however, had no intention of prolonging the fight. With his demonic sword gripped tightly, he charged towards the elemental, his speed amplified to an astonishing degree. He covered nearly 200 meters in mere seconds.


    As he closed in, the system interface flickered to life, displaying information about the new abilities unlocked by his Demonic Transformation and the activation of his Serpent Bloodline.


    "Darkness Cut, First Form!" William roared, his voice resonating with power.


    The dark energy enveloping his body surged into his sword, and William''s movements became fluid and precise, guided by the demonic power coursing through him.


    He leaped into the air, twisting and turning with balletic grace. It was a dance of death, a mesmerizing display of deadly force.


    The dark energy surrounding the blade surged towards the elemental, striking first. The cut was deep, cleaving through its form, a swirling amalgamation of fire and water energies.


    But the attack didn''t end there. William''s sword followed through, inflicting even more damage. Though the elemental had no blood to spill, the devastating impact was evident.


    A gaping wound appeared on the elemental''s torso, revealing a glimpse of a pulsating stone nestled deep within. It was the elemental''s heart, its core, the source of its life force.


    Seraphina watched in stunned silence. She had always suspected William harbored secrets, but the sheer power he now displayed was beyond anything she could have imagined.


    "Who is he...?" she murmured, her voice barely above a whisper. "Or rather, what is he?"


    Hemlock, though equally astonished, remained focused on the battle. "Seraphina," he rasped, his voice strained with pain, "can you assist him? I can''t fight any longer. I''ll only hinder you."


    The captain''s condition was critical. His arm and shoulder were severely burned, the flesh almost melted. With such injuries, continuing the fight was impossible.


    Seraphina, in far better physical condition, was still capable of aiding William. "Of course!" she declared, her voice ringing with determination.


    Seraphina summoned a powerful water spell, channeling the might of the ocean itself! A tremendous surge of water erupted from the nearby lake, and she unleashed it upon the elemental.


    "You will perish here today!" Seraphina roared, her voice echoing across the volcanic landscape.


    The attack was devastating. The elemental''s form was shattered, its body dissolving into a torrent of water. But Seraphina knew it wasn''t over.


    "It will regenerate!" she warned. "We need to attack its core!"


    William heard her words and focused his assault on the elemental''s core. He could see it attempting to regenerate, but his relentless attacks were destroying it faster than it could recover.


    Victory seemed within reach, but William knew his time was running out.


    [Demonic Transformation ends in 1 minute]


    [Special ability ends in 30 seconds]


    He had only one minute to finish this fight!


    "Damn it!" William muttered under his breath.


    He had to intensify his attacks. The elemental was on the verge of defeat.


    [Demonic Transformation ends in 30 seconds]


    [Special ability ends in 10 seconds]


    Time was slipping away, but William was close to victory! He poured all his remaining strength into a single, decisive blow.


    "Darkness Cut, Second Form!"


    The attack was even more devastating than before. The elemental''s core shattered into countless fragments, and its form collapsed, defeated. sea??h th§× N?vel(F)ire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    William fell to his knees, gasping for air. The Demonic Transformation and his special ability had ended, leaving his body battered and exhausted.


    Seraphina rushed to his side. "Are you alright?"


    "Yes..." he wheezed, struggling to catch his breath.


    But then, the unthinkable happened. The elemental began to regenerate!


    "What?!" Seraphina exclaimed in disbelief.


    The elemental was almost fully recovered, its core fragments coalescing, ready to unleash another attack.


    "I will not be defeated!" it roared, launching a furious torrent of fire and water towards William and Seraphina.


    Seraphina tried to conjure a water barrier, but it was too late. The blast struck them head-on.


    William and Seraphina were thrown back, their bodies wracked with pain. The explosion also caught Hemlock, who lay unconscious on the ground.


    The elemental advanced on William, ready to deliver the final blow. But before it could strike, a figure materialized out of thin air, shielding William from the attack.


    It was Lucy!


    "I won''t let you hurt my master!" she cried, summoning a magic shield that deflected the elemental''s assault.


    The elemental was taken aback. "Who are you?" it demanded.


    "I''m William''s disciple!" she declared. "And I won''t allow you to harm him!"


    With surprising ferocity, Lucy engaged the elemental. Her movements were swift and precise, her magic potent.


    But despite her valiant efforts, Lucy was no match for the creature. A powerful water attack sent her crashing into a nearby rock.


    "Lucy!" William cried out, his heart filled with despair.


    The elemental loomed over Lucy, ready to finish her off. But before it could strike, William rose to his feet, his body swaying unsteadily.


    "I won''t let you do this!" he roared, his eyes blazing with fury.


    Despite his injuries, William lunged towards the elemental, ready to fight to the death.


    The elemental unleashed another torrent of water, striking Lucy and sending her hurtling towards William. She landed with a sickening thud, her blood splattering on the ground near him.


    The sight of Lucy''s blood, infused with the essence of her demonic lineage, triggered something within William. He felt a surge of power, his demonic energy reigniting.


    Driven by a primal instinct, he reached down and touched a drop of Lucy''s blood, absorbing it into his body. The demonic energy coursed through his veins, revitalizing him, granting him a temporary reprieve.


    With renewed strength, William unleashed a final, devastating attack. His sword shimmered with a dark aura, and he struck the elemental with the full force of his demonic power.


    The elemental''s core shattered completely, its form dissolving into nothingness. The battle was finally over.


    William collapsed once more, his body succumbing to exhaustion and his injuries. Seraphina rushed to his side, her face etched with worry.


    "William!" she cried, checking his pulse. "Are you alright?"


    He managed a weak smile. "I think so," he whispered.


    But as they surveyed the scene, their eyes fell upon Lucy, her form still and lifeless.


    "Lucy!" William cried out, his voice filled with anguish. He crawled towards her, his heart pounding with fear.


    He checked for a pulse, but it was faint, barely perceptible. Lucy was alive, but barely clinging to life.


    Panic surged through William. He had failed to protect her, his newfound disciple, the girl with the demonic bloodline who had bravely thrown herself into the fray.


    "We need to get her back to the village," Seraphina urged, her voice laced with urgency. "Perhaps there''s a healer who can¡ª"


    Her words were cut short by Asura''s voice, booming in William''s mind.


    "Place the sword on her!" he commanded, his tone brooking no argument. "It will connect with her, help her heal. Trust me!"


    William hesitated for a fleeting moment, doubt clouding his thoughts. But the desperation in Asura''s voice convinced him. He gently lifted Lucy''s limp form and placed the demonic sword, Asura, upon her chest.


    A soft, ethereal glow emanated from the sword, enveloping Lucy''s body. The faint pulse beneath William''s fingers grew stronger, steadier.


    Lucy''s eyelids fluttered open, and she looked up at William with a dazed expression.


    "Master...?" she whispered, her voice hoarse.


    Relief washed over William, so intense it almost brought him to tears. "Lucy!" he exclaimed, his voice choked with emotion. "You''re alive!"


    Lucy blinked, her gaze shifting to the sword resting on her chest. "Asura...?" she murmured, a flicker of recognition in her eyes.


    Asura chuckled, his voice resonating from the sword. "Seems like we have a connection, little one," he said, his tone gentler than usual. "A bond forged in blood and battle."


    Lucy, still weak but recovering quickly, managed a weak smile. "Thank you, Asura," she whispered.


    William gently retrieved the sword, his heart filled with gratitude for the demonic artifact that had saved his disciple''s life. He looked at Lucy, his gaze filled with newfound respect and affection.


    "You were incredible, Lucy," he said, his voice thick with emotion.


    Lucy blushed, her cheeks flushed with a mixture of embarrassment and pride. "I just did what any disciple would do for their master," she replied softly.


    As they helped Lucy to her feet, the gravity of their situation settled upon them once more. Hemlock lay unconscious, his injuries severe, and the rest of the crew... William couldn''t bear to think about the fallen sailors.

 Chapter 131 - 131: Drinking to Forget

    Everyone was completely battered after that fight. William was exhausted to the extreme from having used all those spells, and this was reflecting in his physical state. He could barely stand.


    Hemlock was passed out on the ground. Lucy and Seraphina were the people who were in the best condition.


    "What are we going to do now?" Lucy asked Seraphina, "the two of them can''t go on!"


    Seraphina also didn''t really know what to do. "I think we should go back to the village," she said, "if you managed to follow us here then the path must be clear. I think it''s the best thing we can do right now."


    William agreed with her. "Yes, you''re right. You still have the strength to fight so if any elemental shows up, we''ll be fine."


    With the objective decided in mind, they all did everything they could to get out of that place as quickly as possible. William walked over to the dead elemental, and picked up something that was on the ground.


    It was the elemental''s core. The System did not recognize the item and said that something had dropped, but William felt that it was a very important item.


    The elemental was special, and it was also level 60. After picking up the core and putting it inside his backpack, William left alongside Seraphina and Lucy.


    Lucy wouldn''t fight if anything appeared, so she was responsible for carrying Hemlock on her back. William really wanted to help, but he could barely walk. He was too tired.


    Lucy was struggling a bit to carry Hemlock, a large and heavy sailor. Seraphina helped a few times when she realized the surroundings were safe. She had to stay ready for combat, so Lucy had to manage.


    "I told you not to come," William said, a little frustrated, "your parents must be worried."


    She gave a laugh, "it''s a good thing I came, huh? If I hadn''t, you''d be dead."


    Deep down, William knew she was right. Although Lucy hadn''t been important in the fighting, she was the one who had given William that last drop of strength, especially when he had taken the drop of blood.


    That was still going through his memory. He had no idea that Lucy''s blood would be so precious as to give him so many benefits.


    Another thing that was worrying William was the fact that he would have to explain a lot to Seraphina, and to Hemlock too.


    Hemlock had still been unconscious for a large part of the fight, which meant that he hadn''t seen the same things that Seraphina had seen. Of course, William would have to explain a lot of things anyway.


    "Maybe you''re right," William said, "but even so. If your parents get too worried, they might decide not to let you come with me."


    When William said that, Lucy got a little worried, since her dream was exactly that: to go with him to learn magic.


    When William noticed Lucy''s worried face, he tried to comfort her. "They''ll let you go, I''m sure. But let''s try to avoid saying it was that dangerous. They don''t need to know you went as far as we did."


    Lucy looked down a little embarrassed, "thank you for helping me..."


    Seraphina, who was further ahead having to focus on the surroundings, said, "can you two lovebirds stop and hurry up? We have to get Hemlock to a doctor soon."


    William didn''t even reply to what Seraphina had said. He thought Lucy was a beautiful woman, but the two of them didn''t have anything going on. Seraphina was just making a joke.


    As for Lucy, well, she blushed, and her heart raced a little. No one noticed anything different because she was carrying Hemlock.


    The journey back to the village took a while. About halfway there was when Hemlock woke up. He was able to walk on his own, making the journey faster. Sear?h the nov§×lF~ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    The wounds on his body were serious, but he had a very high magical level, which meant he was much more resilient than a ''normal'' person and was also able to recover more quickly.


    But even with all that, they needed to take him to a doctor, and that''s exactly what they did as soon as they arrived in the village.


    The bad part about being in the middle of nowhere was that there were few doctors. In fact, there was only one person on that island who could help them.


    The doctor in question was an elderly gentleman who was quite surprised when he saw Hemlock''s condition. And worried too.


    "Lie down on the table please," the old man said, "and explain to me what happened."


    Seraphina then explained roughly what had happened, focusing more on the types of injuries that were on Hemlock''s body, as this would give the doctor more information to help him.


    William wasn''t very confident, as the doctor didn''t seem to be a mage, and the wounds were quite severe, which would take a while to heal ''normally'', but he was surprised when he saw that the gentleman had a collection of potions, which he had made himself!


    He gave him a potion to help with recovery and pain, and also crushed some herbs and made an ointment to put on the burn, and then bandaged it all up.


    "I think you''ll be able to make a full recovery, and at most you''ll be left with some scars on your arm, but I think a man like you will like that, won''t you?" the doctor said, smiling.


    Hemlock laughed, "Certainly. Scars are what inspire fear on the seas. Now I feel like I''m an even more badass captain."


    Seeing Hemlock recovered, William and Seraphina were calmer. The doctor noticed William''s state and said, "this young man, despite not having many visible injuries, seems to be barely able to stand. I''ll get something for you too."


    The doctor rummaged through his potions again and returned with one that had a purplish hue. "Take this, and rest for about two days. You''ll feel as good as new."


    William took the potion, thanked the man, and left. Hemlock was the one who paid for the treatment, as he had received a lot of money from the king to complete that mission.


    Lucy decided to return to her parents'' house to enjoy the last few days she would be on the island. She didn''t want to risk doing anything wrong that could cause her parents to change their minds.


    "Take care of yourself, Lucy," said William, "and don''t do anything foolish. Just wait."


    "I''ll try," she said, waving, "bye guys."


    When the three were alone ¨C Hemlock, Seraphina and William ¨C the events of the day replayed in their minds in flashes of memory. All those other sailors had died. People Hemlock knew very well.


    "I''m going to grab some drinks," Hemlock said, "want to come?"


    In unison, William and Seraphina replied, "definitely."


    They didn''t head for any of the restaurants that offered both food and drinks. The beverages in those places were generally more expensive, and not as strong. What they needed was that good old-fashioned bar, the kind that could offer the strongest concoctions in the region. Luckily, they found the place they were looking for.


    It was a small establishment on the corner of that little town. The number of people sitting at tables having drinks wasn''t what indicated the place was good. Actually, what showed the quality of that place were the drunks, some fallen on the ground, others sitting and talking loudly.


    In the time they spent looking at the door of the establishment ¨C about 30 seconds ¨C they already noticed a fight happening. Two drunkards came out swinging.


    "This is definitely the best place," William said.


    Hemlock agreed, "By far. Let''s go."


    They entered, grabbed a table, and started drinking.


    The variety of drinks in that place was impressive, and the other patrons even gave William and the others ideas for drinks.


    "Mix this here, with this here, and it''ll be AMAZING," an old man said.


    The things he was suggesting they mix were drinks that didn''t even have labels. William had no idea what they were made of, but he drank them anyway.


    The concoction was strong. He closed his eyes as he took it all in one gulp. "Man, this is really strong."


    Hemlock was sitting next to him having a few beers, and decided to try the mixture William had tested. "Make me a shot of that."


    William did, handed it over, and Hemlock drank it with gusto. He liked the drink and made the mixture several more times.


    They spent the night drinking, until they reached the level of staggering drunk.


    When they got to that point, Seraphina helped them get back to the tavern where they were sleeping, as she had drunk considerably less.


    "Come on, it''s time to go back," she said.


    But as soon as they left the bar, a group of 3 guards from that small town appeared.


    "Stop right there," one of the guards said, "you are under investigation. Come with us."

 Chapter 132 - 132: Another Problem

    "What do you mean? I don''t understand," Seraphina asked.


    "We''ll talk and explain more when we get to the cells. Please follow us," the guard said.


    If Seraphina wanted to, she could easily knock out those guards and escape from that place without any problems. But why do that? It was best to just see what they wanted, and if necessary, escape.


    She also took into account that Hemlock and William were not in the best condition, so it was best to avoid any kind of trouble.


    "Alright, we''ll follow you," she said.


    The guards led them to a small building that housed the cells. During the journey, several people saw the guards taking them as the town was very small.


    Everyone was wondering what had happened. Of course, rumors started circulating. Many people were saying that Hemlock and his crew were not sailors but pirates who were there to rob them.


    As soon as they arrived at that building, the guards put the three of them inside a cell. This cell was incredibly decent. It wasn''t dirty, and it even had a bed for each of them.


    Seraphina went in there thinking the worst, but that place was peaceful enough to spend the night.


    "I noticed your friends are a little intoxicated," the guard said, his gaze falling on William and Hemlock, "so I think it''s best to talk tomorrow when everyone is well. If you need anything, just say so."


    "Actually..." Seraphina said, a little awkwardly, "is there any way to get something to eat? We were going to eat at the tavern, but it didn''t happen..."


    "Of course, no problem."


    The guard left and returned after a while with a plate of food for each of them, and also a bottle of water. The treatment was nice.


    Hemlock was very drunk, so he wasn''t understanding much of what was going on. The only thing he was doing was following what Seraphina was saying.


    William was a little better, and he was reflecting on why the guards had called them to that cell. As much as he tried to think, he couldn''t understand.


    What had they done wrong?


    ''It seems I''ll have to wait to find out tomorrow,'' thought William.


    They ate and then went to bed. There was nothing to do inside the cell. It was best to just rest and see what the next day had in store for them.


    Hemlock slept like a rock, and it didn''t take him long to do so. The booze he had drunk had taken its toll, and he couldn''t hold his eyelids open for long. Sear?h the n??el Fire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    William''s thoughts kept him awake, but not for long. He was truly exhausted after the intense use of his spells and demonic transformation. A good night''s rest was exactly what he needed.


    "Good night, William, good night, Hemlock," Seraphina said, her voice echoing through the empty cell.


    "Good night," William replied.


    As for Hemlock, well, the sound of his snoring was all the answer Seraphina needed. She laughed at that ¡ª a laugh was what they were in desperate need of ¡ª and then tried to sleep too.


    On the following day, someone else came to talk with them. This person was a tall woman with some decent muscle ¡ª it was obvious that she worked out.


    She was the captain of the guards, and the strongest person on the entire island.


    "Well, how are you feeling?" she asked them.


    The guards had already given her some information about William and Hemlock, so the captain knew that the two had been drinking, and were also looking worse for wear physically.


    "We are doing fine," William said, glancing to the side and seeing Hemlock looking like shit, "I guess..."


    The captain smiled, "Good. We need to talk. This is serious, and I know you are wondering why you are here."


    No one said a word. They were waiting to hear what the captain of the guards had to say.


    "The guards said you were under investigation when he first got you, right? Well, the investigation is not actually about something you did but about your ship and crew."


    Hemlock was the first to say something after he heard that. "Ship and crew? What do you mean?"


    "First, you and your crew went to the volcano, but only you, the captain, returned, so we don''t know what happened to your crew yet."


    "They are all dead," Hemlock said, looking down at the ground.


    "I am sorry to hear that... Well, then that''s the answer to our first question. But what about your ship? Did you do anything with it without us knowing?" the captain asked.


    If a ship wanted to anchor or leave the port, they had to speak with someone responsible for it, which was usually a guard or someone who answered to the guards. That was their way of making sure things weren''t a mess, and that everyone was aware of their movements. Whenever a ship arrived at the island, they always did a search to see if the ship was a pirate vessel or not, or if the people arriving had the potential to be dangerous.


    Hemlock was surprised to hear the question. "What do you mean ''did something with the ship''? It''s in the port where we anchored it!"


    The captain of the guards shook her head. "You see, that''s the problem. Your ship was stolen, and we don''t know where it is now. I thought that you, as the captain, may have left without warning us, maybe during the night, but it seems that is not the case."


    Hemlock wanted to punch something. First, his crew got killed, and now his ship was stolen? Could things get any worse for him?


    "When was the last time you saw or were inside your ship?" the woman asked.


    Hemlock couldn''t focus, but he answered her as best he could. "We didn''t go inside since the day we got here. Look, aren''t you supposed to have someone in the port to take care of things? How did this happen?"


    "You''re right, but this person is also missing, so that''s another problem we have," she said.


    The captain of the guards looked truly concerned. "It''s not common for people to go missing here, is it?" William asked her.


    "It''s not," she said, "the most dangerous thing we have here is the volcano with the fire elementals, but no one goes there, and we have security checkpoints to make sure no one goes too far. But someone missing like this? In the middle of the city? That''s not common at all!"


    "What are you planning on doing?" William asked.


    "Maybe you can help me investigate what happened to your ship? I mean, if you can help me find out what happened to this missing person, it would be nice too, but I know the ship is your focus, right? After all, we don''t have decent ships here that can help you leave the island, so you are basically trapped here..."


    That was exactly what they feared. The ships on the island were decent enough to travel to other islands and all, but to return all the way to their continent? That required a proper ship with supplies and a crew, things that they didn''t have anymore.


    Things were looking grim for them.

 Chapter 133 - 133: Looking for Luke

    They were released from the cell and were now helping the captain of the guards with the investigation. Her name was Katia, and she was truly glad they were there to help her.


    "I have few guards under my command, and they are always busy making sure the rest of the city is safe, so I actually don''t have that many people to help me with this," Katia said.


    They all sat at a table to discuss their next steps and what they should do to find out more about the stolen ship and the missing person.


    "Should we split up?" Seraphina suggested. "And also, Hemlock is not in good condition to get himself into danger, so it would be best if he avoided helping us until he got better."


    Hemlock complained, but it was not a lie. He was indeed in bad condition and wouldn''t be able to help much if a fight broke out.


    "He can stay with me," Katia said. "We can work for information together, and I can protect him if anything happens."


    "Thank you," Seraphina said.


    "What can you tell me about the guy who''s missing? Who was he anyway?" William asked.


    For him, the key piece of information was the missing person.


    "He was responsible for taking care of the ships, including yours. So, either he was the one who stole it, or the person who stole it is the same one who kidnapped him. And this must have happened during the night, as no one has seen a thing," Katia explained.


    What was truly bothering William was the fact that someone stole the ship and no one saw a thing. More importantly, a ship as big as the one Hemlock had certainly drew attention, and it required a large crew to sail it.


    How did a single person steal it? If it wasn''t a single person but another crew, how did no one see it?


    With that assumption in mind, William was certain that if the person was alone, then it was a mage. Someone with access to magic could get the ship moving.


    In the end, William was tasked with finding more information about the missing person. He went alone.


    What he knew¡ªwhich he learned from Katia¡ªwas that the man was called Luke, and he lived alone on the island. He didn''t have any family, and only had a few friends.


    So, William decided to look for these friends Katia mentioned. They should be the only ones who knew something about him, or who would miss him after he got kidnapped.


    One of Luke''s friends lived in a small cabin outside the city. He was a fisherman who had a small boat and made his living through fishing, and sometimes acting as a guide to people who wanted to visit the nearby islands.


    William arrived at the small cabin and saw Luke''s friend fishing on his boat right in front of his house. The boat wasn''t that far from the shore.


    "Hey," William yelled.


    The man had his eyes half-closed because of the sun, and he focused on trying to see William who was on the land screaming for him.


    "Who are you?" the man yelled back.


    "I am here to speak with you about Luke. Can you come over?"


    When he heard the name Luke, the man frowned, not knowing what had happened to his friend. He returned to the land with his small wooden boat, carrying his fishing supplies as well as a bucket with some fish in it.


    "Did you know that Luke is missing? There''s a chance he got kidnapped," William said.


    "Kidnapped? What do you mean? What exactly happened?" the man asked.


    William talked about the missing ship and the missing person, Luke. He asked the man if he knew anything about his friend or when he had last seen him. Any information was crucial, and William hoped the man knew something that could help him.


    "I saw him two days ago¡­" the man said, "We were planning a trip to a nearby island¡­"


    That instantly raised a question in William''s mind. ''A nearby island?''


    If Luke and his friend wanted to go there, it would be best to have a ship. So, the chance of Luke being the one who stole Hemlock''s ship looked more and more real.


    "A trip?" William pressed, "Why? What''s on this island?"


    The man shifted uncomfortably, avoiding William''s gaze. "Just... just a fishing trip," he mumbled, clearly hiding something.


    William wasn''t convinced. "A fishing trip that requires stealing a ship?" He narrowed his eyes, "There''s something you''re not telling me."


    The man hesitated, clearly torn between loyalty to his friend and the weight of the situation. Finally, he sighed, "Alright, alright. There have been rumors... rumors of mermaids."


    Mermaids? William was taken aback. "Mermaids?"


    "Yes," the man said, "Legends say they inhabit the waters around that island. Luke was... obsessed. He was convinced they were real."


    William considered this new information. It was a long shot, but it could be a lead. "This island... can you take me there?"


    The man, relieved to have shared the burden, readily agreed. "Of course, I know the way."


    Before venturing to the island, William decided to return to Katia and Hemlock, to update them on his findings. He relayed the information about Luke''s possible motive and their planned destination. Katia, intrigued by the mermaid tale, agreed that it was worth investigating.


    However, when William returned to the fisherman''s cabin, he found it empty. The man, along with his small boat, was gone.


    He scoured the small cabin, his eyes scanning every corner, every shelf, every nook and cranny. He rifled through drawers, peered under the bed, and even checked the fireplace for hidden messages. But there was nothing. No maps, no notes, no indication of where the island might be.


    Why did the man run? Did he have something to do with the ship theft? Or was he just scared that William might do something to him? Frustration gnawed at William, but he refused to give up. He had to find that island, and he had to find Luke.


    Suddenly, the cabin door creaked open, and a figure stepped inside. William whirled around, his hand instinctively reaching for his sword. It was the fisherman.


    "You scared me!" William exclaimed, his voice laced with relief and annoyance. "Where were you? I thought you ran away."


    "Run away? Of course not," the man said, a hint of indignation in his voice. "I was just checking some other locations that I know Luke goes to sometimes, and I didn''t see him there."


    "Can you take me there too?" William asked, his eyes fixed on the man, searching for any sign of deception.


    "Sure," the man replied, his gaze steady.


    William wasn''t entirely convinced, but he decided to trust his gut. Even if the man was lying, William was confident that his heightened senses could pick up on any clues in these locations that Luke frequented. It was a chance he had to take. sea??h th§× nov§×lF~ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "Let''s get to the boat, then," William said, eager to start his exploration.


    They closed the cabin and went on the boat. The small boat cut through the calm waters, leaving a gentle wake behind. The fisherman, with a practiced hand, guided them towards their destination.


    "These islands are usually deserted," he explained, his voice carrying over the soft lapping of the waves. "Just a few fishermen like me venture out here sometimes." He pointed towards a cluster of rocky outcrops jutting out from the sea. "That''s one of them. Luke liked to go there, said it was peaceful."


    William observed the island with a keen eye. It was a barren, windswept place, with little vegetation and a rugged coastline. Not exactly a paradise, but William could see the appeal for someone seeking solitude. He focused his senses, trying to detect any trace of Luke''s presence, any lingering energy that might betray his recent visit.


    The boat gently bumped against the rocky shore, and William jumped out, eager to explore. He scoured the small island, his eyes scanning every rock, every crevice, every patch of sand. He searched for footprints, broken branches, any sign that Luke had been there.

 Chapter 134 - 134: The Real People Behind It

    William''s search of the initial island proved fruitless, a waste of precious time in his pursuit of Luke. Undeterred, he and Luke''s friend ventured towards the neighboring islands in their small boat. Luke had apparently frequented these islands, but even after a thorough search, they found no trace of him.


    On one of the smaller islands, they encountered another fisherman in a simple wooden boat, casting his line into the tranquil waters.


    "Here to fish as well?" the man greeted them with a friendly smile. "Didn''t know my favorite fishing spot had become so popular."


    William shook his head. "Perhaps another day," he replied. "Maybe we can fish together sometime."


    He hadn''t expected much from this encounter, but the fisherman''s next words caught his attention, offering a potential lead.


    "The best time to fish here is at night," the fisherman confided. "For some reason, the fish are plentiful then, and it''s peaceful too."


    "At night?" William pressed, intrigued.


    "Yes, precisely," the fisherman confirmed. "Strange, isn''t it?"


    "And were you fishing here last night? Or the night before? Did you happen to see a large ship passing by?" William asked, a hint of urgency in his voice.


    This could be a valuable lead in uncovering the whereabouts of Captain Hemlock''s ship. William couldn''t fathom how a vessel that size could navigate these waters undetected.


    The fisherman''s brow furrowed. "How do you know about this ship?" he asked, his curiosity piqued. "I did see one recently, but I thought I was the only one, and maybe I''m going a bit crazy..."


    "Crazy why?" William questioned. "And I know about the ship because it''s mine, and someone stole it."


    "What?" the fisherman exclaimed, his eyes widening in surprise. "Are you serious? Well, I don''t think you''ll believe me, but I could have sworn I saw some kind of fish-men walking on the deck, like they were the sailors, you know? But I must have been really tired," he admitted sheepishly.


    William, however, didn''t think the man was crazy. His mind raced with questions.


    ''Fish-men? Why? They seemed friendly when we encountered them...'' he pondered.


    Still unsure if it was the same ship, William pressed the fisherman for more details, describing specific features of his vessel.


    The fisherman, however, struggled to recall specifics, having only glimpsed the ship at night.


    "Did you see a symbol, like a seagull?" William asked, hoping to jog his memory.


    "Ah, yes, now I remember!" the fisherman exclaimed. "It did have that symbol. It must be your ship. And if you''re wondering, I saw it heading in that direction." He pointed towards a specific point on the horizon.


    This was a significant breakthrough for William. "Thank you so much for your help," he said gratefully. "I truly appreciate it."


    William and Luke''s friend returned to their small boat. "Let''s go back and tell the others," William declared, his determination renewed.


    "Understood," Luke''s friend replied, steering the boat back towards the main island.


    Upon reaching the harbor, William instructed Luke''s friend to wait for him while he hurried into town to find Hemlock, Katia, and Seraphina. He needed to share his findings with them immediately.


    He first located Hemlock, who was taking a less active role in the search due to his injuries.


    "What happened? You''re back already?" Hemlock asked, his brow creased with concern.


    He feared the worst, assuming William''s return meant something terrible had occurred. The recent string of misfortunes had made him pessimistic.


    "I''ve discovered some things," William announced, a glimmer of hope in his eyes. "Some good news. Let''s find Katia and Seraphina first."


    "Right, right," Hemlock agreed, pushing himself up. "I''ll help you look for them."


    Though burning with curiosity, Hemlock refrained from questioning William further. It was best to gather everyone first.


    "Do you know where they went?" William asked, eager to relay his findings.


    "They''re around town, searching for more information. Shouldn''t be hard to find them."


    Hemlock was right. William simply asked a few guards, quickly locating Katia and, shortly after, Seraphina. The two women were diligently trying to uncover more about Luke and his acquaintances.


    "What happened? Is everything alright?" Katia asked, her brow furrowed with concern as she saw William and Hemlock approaching.


    Like Hemlock, she also feared the worst. William reassured her and suggested they move to a more private location for their discussion. They chose Katia''s office, a secure space accessible only to her and trusted guards.


    William recounted his discoveries. "I went with Luke''s friend to some islands he used to visit, hoping to find some clues," he began. "But I didn''t find anything. No sign of Luke."


    Hemlock, Seraphina, and Katia exchanged disappointed glances but remained silent. William had promised good news, and he wouldn''t have summoned them just to deliver bad news.


    "But then I met a fisherman on this island," William continued. "This fisherman goes there to fish at night, and he saw our ship passing by!" He paused, correcting himself. "I mean, your ship, Captain Hemlock."


    "What? Really? And did he see Luke on board?" Hemlock asked, his interest piqued.


    Their initial theory was that Luke, the person responsible for the ships, was the one who stole it, as both he and the vessel had vanished. He quickly became their prime suspect.


    "He didn''t see Luke," William explained, "but he said he saw fish-men sailing the ship. I think they must be the same ones we encountered before."


    Hemlock slammed his fist on the table. "I knew we couldn''t trust them!" he exclaimed. "I still don''t understand why they let us go after you showed them your ring."


    He glanced at the ring on William''s finger, the one given to him by the Triton King of the merfolk.


    "I think they tricked us," William said, frustration evident in his voice. "But now I also know the direction the ship sailed. We can go check it out if we can get a better boat. The small one Luke''s friend has won''t be suitable for that journey."


    "I have a slightly better ship," Katia offered, "but it''s not as large or sturdy as yours. If their destination is too far, we might run into trouble."


    William''s smile widened. "Don''t worry," he reassured her. "Luke''s friend mentioned that Luke was planning to visit an island in this region, and it seems to be in the same direction the fish-men took the ship. It must be the same place, and from what I gather, it should only take us a day at most to get there."


    It was a calculated guess, but the coincidence was too strong to ignore. William firmly believed that the fish-men were headed to the same island Luke had intended to visit.


    In fact, William suspected that Luke might be working with those fish-men, though the motive behind such an alliance remained a mystery.


    "But I still don''t understand why those fish-men took the ship," Hemlock grumbled, frustration evident in his voice. "They don''t even need a ship to travel."


    William nodded in agreement. "I think they took it just to spite us, not because they need it," he mused. "As for why they''re doing this to us, well, I still have no idea." S§×ar?h the n??el Fire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Katia swiftly arranged for her ship, enlisting the help of several guards to load it with supplies for the impending voyage. Everyone worked with a sense of urgency, eager to utilize the remaining daylight for travel and catch up to Hemlock''s stolen vessel.


    "You''ll be in charge until I return," Katia instructed one of her most trusted guards, a seasoned veteran who had served her faithfully for years.


    The guard, though visibly nervous, beamed with pride at the responsibility bestowed upon him. "I''ll keep everything in order while you''re away, ma''am!" he declared, saluting with respect.


    With that, Katia and the others departed. Her ship, though smaller than Hemlock''s, was far superior to the tiny wooden boat belonging to Luke''s friend.


    Speaking of Luke''s friend, he accompanied them, serving as their guide to the island Luke had spoken of so fondly.


    As they sailed towards their destination, William pondered the curious connection between the fish-men and the merfolk. The fish-men had become amicable after William presented the ring bestowed upon him by the Triton King. Now, they were heading towards an island rumored to be frequented by mermaids.


    Were the fish-men not as friendly with the merfolk as they had initially appeared? What was their true agenda?


    William''s mind buzzed with unanswered questions, questions he hoped to resolve soon.


    He gazed at the horizon, lost in thought, when Hemlock joined him, leaning against the railing. "It''s strange sailing without my crew..." Hemlock sighed, his voice heavy with grief. "Damn it!" He pulled a flask of alcohol from his pocket and took a swig, the loss of his crew weighing heavily on his soul.


    As night fell, they were forced to stop and rest. It was then, under the cloak of darkness, that something unexpected occurred, something that jolted William from his sleep.

 Chapter 135 - 135: Fish and Pirates

    They were sailing far beyond their usual routes, venturing into the uncharted depths of the high seas. Few dared to traverse these remote and treacherous waters.


    William awoke with a start, a sense of foreboding gripping his heart. As one of the summoned heroes, he knew the world was in a precarious state. If it weren''t, they wouldn''t have been summoned in the first place.


    And in that moment, he witnessed the first ominous sign that something was amiss.


    On the horizon, a pulsating purple light flickered, and a gaping fissure tore open the fabric of reality just above the surface of the sea. William peered through the rift, his breath catching in his throat. It offered a glimpse into a nightmarish dimension, teeming with grotesque and terrifying creatures.


    ''What in the world was that?'' William thought, his heart pounding in his chest.


    Instinctively, his hand gripped the hilt of his sword. But after a few tense seconds, the fissure sealed shut, and no monstrous entities emerged from its depths.


    Despite the immediate danger passing, the ominous implications were clear. Something was amiss, something potentially catastrophic.


    "Do you know anything about that, Asura?" William asked, seeking the wisdom of his demonic companion.


    Asura''s voice echoed in his mind. "I have no idea," he admitted. "We should investigate this further when we return. It would also be wise to mark the approximate location of that fissure; we may need this information in the future."


    William agreed and tried to return to sleep, but the unsettling image of the dimensional rift lingered in his mind. Was this a harbinger of the world''s end?


    The following morning, they awoke at dawn and resumed their journey towards the island where they believed Hemlock''s ship might be.


    "There''s the island!" Luke''s friend exclaimed, pointing towards the horizon.


    They spotted the island around 11 a.m. and reached its shores not long after. Unlike the other islands they had recently explored¡ªincluding the volcanic one¡ªthis island was vast.


    But there was no sign of civilization, no indication that people had ever inhabited this land. It was a wild, untamed expanse.


    It wasn''t a place frequented by fishermen or merchant ships, hence the lack of any civilization. Furthermore, the tales of mermaids kept most people away, as they were perceived as dangerous creatures capable of enchanting and killing sailors. No one wanted to risk venturing into such perilous waters.


    William and his companions, however, were undeterred. Their determination to find Hemlock''s ship and uncover the truth outweighed any fear of mythical sirens.


    As they approached the island, their eyes fell upon Hemlock''s vessel, anchored near the shore.


    "How convenient," Hemlock remarked, a glimmer of hope returning to his eyes. "We can just reclaim the ship and be on our way."


    Indeed, it seemed almost too easy. But as they drew closer, anchoring Katia''s smaller ship alongside Hemlock''s, they encountered an unexpected obstacle.


    An invisible barrier shimmered around Hemlock''s ship, preventing them from boarding. The fish-men must have erected it for protection while they conducted their business on the island.


    "Can you break this barrier, Seraphina?" Hemlock asked, turning to the skilled mage.


    Hemlock favored brute force, while Seraphina possessed the magical finesse required to dismantle such enchantments.


    "I can try," Seraphina replied, studying the barrier with a discerning eye, "but it won''t be easy. It''s a barrier generated by a magical artifact, meaning its level of protection is far greater than that of a normal mage''s barrier. To be honest, I''m not sure if I can break through it."


    Seraphina''s honesty was appreciated. It was far better than her confidently claiming she could break through, only to fail later.


    Hemlock placed a reassuring hand on her shoulder. "I understand," he said. "Just do your best, and if you need any help, we''re all here to support you." sea??h th§× Novel?ire(.)ne*t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Seraphina nodded, grateful for their support, and began to analyze the magical barrier, searching for a weakness.


    Meanwhile, William felt restless confined to the ship. He wanted to explore the island, confirm the presence of the fish-men, and uncover their motives.


    "I want to take a look around the island," William announced. "Anyone want to come with me?"


    "That could be dangerous," Hemlock cautioned, his gaze lingering on William''s still-healing wounds. "You''re still recovering."


    "Actually, I''m feeling much better now," William assured him. "I can go without any problems."


    Among those present, Hemlock was indeed the most injured after the battle with the elemental. William had mostly recovered; his exhaustion stemmed from using his abilities, not from physical wounds.


    "I''ll go with you," Katia volunteered. "Hemlock can stay here to assist Seraphina, and Luke''s friend can stay as well. I don''t think he would be much help in a fight anyway."


    In the end, everyone agreed to the plan. William and Katia disembarked, their feet sinking into the soft sand of the beach.


    "This island is truly beautiful," Katia remarked, taking in the lush surroundings. "But all this untouched nature surely comes with its own dangers."


    William nodded in agreement. "Indeed," he said, his gaze sweeping across the dense foliage. "But will the fish-men be on the island itself, or underwater somewhere nearby? And is Luke here or not?"


    Those were the two burning questions that consumed their thoughts. The fish-men remained an enigma to William. He didn''t know if they primarily resided underwater like the merfolk or if their lifestyle differed.


    "The only way to find out is to search," Katia declared, her voice filled with determination. "It won''t hurt to take a look around the island. A large group of fish-men would surely leave some traces."


    And so, they ventured into the island''s depths, their eyes peeled for any sign of the fish-men. This island was wild and untamed, so any creature passing through would inevitably leave its mark.


    They walked along the beach, searching for a break in the dense vegetation that would allow them to penetrate the island''s interior. Neither of them relished the idea of hacking through thick undergrowth; it would be time-consuming and exhausting.


    Fortunately, they soon stumbled upon a discernible path, a discovery that immediately piqued their interest. "Perhaps the fish-men created this path," Katia suggested.


    "Indeed," William agreed. "If this island is as isolated as they say, this path must be recent. The vegetation would have reclaimed it quickly without the presence of intelligent beings."


    "Exactly... We need to be more cautious now," Katia agreed, her eyes scanning their surroundings.


    As they followed the path, William noticed that it wasn''t as freshly trodden as they had initially assumed. Based on the information they had, the fish-men who stole Hemlock''s ship had arrived only a day or two ago, yet the path seemed older.


    This suggested two possibilities: either other creatures had created the path, or the fish-men had visited this island before.


    "I keep wondering why they stole the ship in the first place," William mused aloud. "The fish-men don''t need a ship to travel."


    "Well, even though they can move through the water," Katia pointed out, "there are still powerful predators that could pose a threat. Traveling by ship might be safer. But they could also have stolen it just to spite you. Didn''t you mention encountering them before? Perhaps they hold a grudge?"


    William pondered Katia''s words. Could they be targeting him because of his connection to the merfolk? The possibility was certainly unsettling.


    They continued along the path until they stumbled upon a sight that made their hearts pound. There, in a small clearing, were the fish-men!


    Katia and William quickly ducked into the undergrowth, concealing themselves among the dense foliage. Fortunately, the fish-men''s senses were dulled when out of the water; their sight, hearing, and smell were not as keen on land. They remained oblivious to the presence of the two observers.


    Besides the fish-men, there were other individuals with them. One of them was Luke ¨C Katia whispered the confirmation to William.


    The others appeared to be pirates, judging by their attire, demeanor, and the imposing figure who seemed to be their captain. He even sported an eye patch, completing the stereotypical pirate look.


    "And what''s the plan?" the pirate captain boomed, his voice rough and gravelly. "Will the treasure be split evenly amongst us?"


    The fish-man who appeared to be their leader nodded. "Indeed," he confirmed. "From what we''ve gathered, this treasure will be more than enough for everyone here. But the most important prize are the mermaids. We want them alive."


    "If I may ask, why the interest in these mermaids?" the pirate captain pressed, his one good eye glinting with curiosity.


    The fish-man let out a chilling chuckle. "Let''s just say they''ll suffer before they die," he replied cryptically. "Now, let''s move."


    With that, the group moved towards a large rock face, where an opening led into a subterranean cavern. The pirates and fish-men disappeared into the darkness, Luke following closely behind.


    Katia and William remained hidden, observing the scene unfold.


    "Should we follow them?" William whispered, his hand instinctively reaching for his sword.


    "Let''s alert the others first," Katia decided, her voice a barely audible murmur.


    It was crucial to inform Seraphina and Hemlock of their whereabouts and their discovery, just in case something went wrong. But before they could retreat, a voice startled them from behind.


    "Going somewhere?" a gruff male voice inquired.

 Chapter 136 - 136: Exploring the Tomb Together

    When they turned around, they saw a man standing there. William was honestly expecting to see one of the fish-men, ready to attack him and Katia, but the man was human, and it was someone they had never seen before.


    "Who are you?" William asked, his hand reaching for his sword just in case. For the man to be able to sneak up on them like that meant he had decent skills. They had to be careful.


    "Relax," the man smiled. "I''m just a fisherman around these parts. But why are you here?"


    "A fisherman?" William didn''t believe the man. How could a mere fisherman survive on that island alone? In fact, it was already hard enough to get there in the first place. Now imagine enduring the wilderness *and* the newly arrived fish-men.


    "If you''re a fisherman, where''s your boat? Your fishing gear?" Katia asked, her gaze suspicious as it fell upon the man. Why on earth would he be in the middle of the forest if he were a fisherman? They usually stayed in their boats near the island, or even on the beach, but never this deep in the woods.


    "My boat is hidden," the man said. "You know, with these fish-men around, it''s better to keep it concealed. Just in case they try to steal it."


    "What do you know about the fish-men?" William asked.


    "Not much. Why? And what are you doing here?" the man asked.


    William knew the man was lying. The only doubt he still had was whether the man was dangerous or not. Was it worth the risk?


    "We''re walking through the forest. We love camping in unusual places," William responded.


    The fisherman then said, "How about we stop with the nonsense? Why were you watching the fish-men? What are you planning to do?"


    The man had seen William and Katia crouched behind the bush, watching the fish-men enter the cave. He wasn''t stupid enough to ignore what he''d seen.


    William also knew the man was just playing dumb.


    "We''re here looking for our boat that was stolen by the fish-men," William said. "But there''s a barrier around it, which means it''s impossible for us to get the boat and get out of here."


    Katia looked to the side, a little surprised that William had explained things that way, but she didn''t say anything. Her gaze returned to the mysterious man to ensure he wouldn''t try anything strange.


    "I could help break that barrier," the man said. "I have a lot of knowledge about these things. But in return, you would have to help me get the treasure they''re trying to retrieve. We can split it in half between the three of us. What do you think?"


    "And how can we trust you? We don''t even know who you are!" William said.


    "Well, that''s up to you, but I''m sure you won''t be able to break the barrier on your boat alone, even if you manage to catch the fish-men and demand answers. I''m your best bet," the man said, a smile plastered on his face.


    William paused to think before saying anything. In the end, if he wanted to remove that barrier from the boat, he would have to kill the fish-men and get the way to break the barrier from them.


    In other words, he would already have to go after them, so why not go with one more person who could end up helping him in the end? At least that''s how he thought.


    "If we agree, will you tell us everything you know?" William asked.


    "Of course," the man said.


    "Then all right. We''ll help you in exchange for you helping us later."


    "Perfect."


    The man then returned with them to the location where their ship was. They had to warn Hemlock and Seraphina about the things that had happened, and it was also safer to stay there and not in the middle of the forest where any danger could appear at any moment.


    As soon as he arrived at the ship, the man said, "I saw this ship and this barrier when I came to this island. How''s the progress on breaking the barrier?"


    Seraphina was surprised to see another person there. "I''ve made zero progress so far. And who the hell are you?"


    "Just a fisherman passing by the island," the man said.


    William rolled his eyes. "Don''t start with that crap."


    "Sorry, sorry¡­" the man said, scratching his head.


    Now that everyone was on the ship, it was time for the man to start talking about the things he knew regarding the fish-men and the treasure they were after.


    "Apparently, this treasure is something the fish-men have been seeking for a long time, but the point is not only to get the treasure for themselves, but to take it from the mermaids."


    "Take it from the mermaids?" William asked.


    The relationship between the mermaids and the fish-men was something he was trying to understand, and it seemed that this man knew more than he did.


    "Well, you know they came to this island because of the stories of the mermaids, right? The mermaids and the mermen are also after this treasure. Anyway, they came here to get the treasure, not giving the mermaids a chance, and at the same time they want to kill them. These two ''races'' have been at war for many years."


    This was something William wasn''t expecting to hear. Could this be why they had stolen their ship? Because of the connection William had with the mermaids and mermen?


    "Do you know what this treasure is?" William asked.


    "I don''t know for sure, but apparently it''s the tomb of a person who was buried with many valuable items. I think we''ll get a lot of good things if we work together," the man said, a slight smile stamped on his face.


    "Right, and who''s going after this treasure and the fish-men? You and Katia?" Hemlock asked.


    William had no idea what to expect when going after that treasure, and everyone leaving the boat defenseless wasn''t a good idea in his mind.


    Even if the ship had a barrier around it, what if the barrier suddenly disappeared? What if someone capable of removing the barrier showed up and stole their ship again?


    They couldn''t run the risk of leaving the ship with no one so that someone could come and take it.


    "I think I''ll go alone with him," William spoke. "We need people on the ship to ensure it stays here, and to protect those who are here too. I don''t think too many people going are a good idea." S§×arch* The Nov§×l?ire.n(e)t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    The others didn''t quite agree with this because they were worried about William, and they would also feel useless not being able to help.


    But after thinking for a while, what William was proposing made sense. Leaving the ship without any protection was a terrible idea.


    If they lost the ship again, well, how would they get off that island? It would be much more complicated.


    "All right, but be careful," Seraphina said.


    "I will. You guys be careful too."


    William and that man left together, heading towards the entrance of the cave where the fish-men had entered.


    "Take this," the man said, handing William some seaweed.


    "Seaweed? What''s this?"


    "We''re going to have to dive to get in. This seaweed will allow you to breathe underwater. Without it, it''s impossible to get in there."


    "Oh, I see."


    As soon as they arrived in front of the cave entrance, they ate the seaweed and went in.

 Chapter 137 - 137: A Friends Tomb?

    The entrance to the cave was quite narrow, and it wasn''t long before their feet were covered with water.


    "We''re going to have to dive in up ahead," the man said. "Luckily there are some plants that illuminate the place, so we won''t have any trouble finding the right spot."


    William had no idea how this man knew so much about that tomb and what it was like. He even knew he would have to dive, and who knows, maybe he even knew the right way.


    ''Has he been here before?'' William thought.


    Despite having that question in his mind, William said nothing. He just followed the man. The two of them dived in and swam inside that cave.


    The seaweed did indeed allow him to breathe underwater. William felt much more at ease because of that. If he didn''t have the seaweed to help him, surely the feeling of being underwater in that narrow cave would drive him crazy. It wasn''t something easy to endure.


    The man went ahead, and William just followed him. They had to swim for about 30 minutes, changing direction several times. But eventually, they got out of the water and arrived at a kind of stone structure.


    "I think the tomb starts here," the man said. "At least it seems to be because of these different stones."


    "And why did they create this tomb underwater? The access is crap," William said.


    "Well, I don''t know that. Maybe to protect the treasure? And another thing, from what I know, this person died a long time ago. What if this place wasn''t underwater before?" the man said.


    He had a point that made sense. The passage of time was capable of changing places, and William couldn''t be sure that place had always been that way.


    William, of all people, should know well what time was capable of causing. sea??h th§× Novel?ire(.)ne*t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    The two followed the stone structure, entering the tomb of the mysterious person who had died.


    The tomb was very large. William and the man walked slowly, trying their best to avoid stepping on traps or the like.


    "We''re lucky they''re going ahead," the man said. "This will make them step on the traps first, and explore the place for us. But we must be careful not to let them see us."


    Considering that the fish-men were having the greatest difficulty avoiding the traps and also exploring the place, William had to go slowly, otherwise they would meet quickly.


    They tried to focus on marks or the voices of the fish-men, as it would be easy to hear the voices in those corridors. It wasn''t long before they started to hear voices.


    "You said you knew how to get past all the traps. What the hell is this?" a gruff voice said.


    "Yes, I know, but this one takes time," a man replied.


    "We don''t have time! The mermaids are already ahead. We have to catch up with them!"


    William could discern that the gruff voice belonged to some fish-man, and the other voice to a human. Could it be Luke, one of the pirates, or someone else?


    "It seems they have someone who understands the traps of this place," William whispered. "In that case, they have an advantage compared to us."


    "Yes¡­ But if we follow them, we won''t have a problem."


    They continued walking until they reached a more open area with several different corridors. In the middle of this room, they saw a statue, and around the statue were the fish-men and the pirates!


    William couldn''t just walk straight ahead and go there in the middle. They would easily notice his presence. Although the fish-men had terrible senses out of the water, it wasn''t the same for the pirates who were there with them.


    So the best thing to do was to stay away, and make sure no one noticed their presence.


    The problem was that the room was open, meaning there weren''t many places to hide. Because of this, William and his partner decided to go back a little and wait.


    "Let''s wait for them to get past this trap or riddle, and then we''ll follow them," the man said.


    William agreed with him. That seemed like the most sensible thing to do.


    They waited for a good few minutes until they heard a noise coming from the room, and the celebration of everyone who was there.


    "Good, finally. Let''s continue."


    William waited a bit and then went to the room again, and there he noticed that the statue had moved, opening a staircase that led down.


    "They went that way," William pointed. "Let''s go."


    But before they could get there, the statue moved and returned to its initial position. In other words, the passage they were going to use was blocked again.


    William tried to run to the place, but he didn''t arrive in time. The statue returned to its initial position in less than a second.


    He tried to push the statue or even break it, but it was as if it were made of a different kind of material, and not stone. It seemed to be much more resistant, and no matter what William did, nothing happened.


    "It won''t be possible to break or force our way through this," the man said. "This statue has a strong aura of magic. They must have made a magical formation a long time ago, something that would transform this thing into something indestructible."


    The first thing William thought was that the man with him understood a lot about magical formations, and maybe he could somehow get past that riddle.


    "Do you think you can figure it out?" William asked. "I think between the two of us, you must be the person who has the most understanding about these things."


    "I can try¡­ But before that, let''s explore the place, maybe we can get some clues," the man said.


    Besides the statue in the middle of the room, there were other corridors that led to other places.


    If the fish-men and the pirates ignored these corridors and went straight for the passage under the statue, well, that meant they already knew a lot about that tomb.


    Maybe it was a waste of time to explore the other corridors, but they had to try. William and his partner chose a corridor and moved on.


    The corridor was different from the others that had nothing. That corridor had several paintings, and judging by the name written below the paintings, they were made by the same person.


    But that''s when William froze. The name written below the paintings was familiar to him.


    "Jinra¡­"


    The first name was Jinra, the same name as his master in the past, and the person who helped him.


    This wasn''t the first time he''d heard of the name Jinra in the present, and wondered if it was the same person he''d met in the past.


    "This Jinra, have you heard of him? Could it be the same guy famous for magical formations and his powerful enchantments?" William asked.


    The man seemed surprised to hear that. "So you know him? Yes, I believe it belongs to him."


    "So you knew who was buried here? Why did you lie?" William confronted the man.

 Chapter 138 - 138: Its Actually Him

    William still couldn''t be sure if it was the same Jinra he knew, but even so, he wanted to confront the man to find out why he was lying to him.


    If he hadn''t told him that, well, it was safe to say that there were other things he was hiding, and William didn''t like that at all.


    "Actually, I wasn''t sure if it was his," the man said. "I only became sure now after seeing the paintings. You know, without being here it''s impossible to know. Often people make things up, right?"


    The way the man spoke seemed to be true, but William couldn''t be sure.


    "Even so, you already had a hunch, so you should have told me," William said. "How do you expect me to trust you if you''re hiding things? Is there anything else I need to know?"


    The two were together on that quest to get the treasure. William wasn''t so fixated on the treasure itself. He wanted more of the man''s help to break the barrier around the ship.


    "Well, I don''t believe so," the man said. "Maybe there''s the fact that a famous creature might be hibernating here, and there''s the chance of us waking it up unintentionally¡­"


    "Famous creature?"


    "The Kraken."


    "You''re kidding¡­"


    William had heard the stories of the Kraken. It was a very high-level creature that usually hibernated and occasionally woke up and wreaked some havoc in the oceans, destroying several ships.


    "Well, but the chance of us waking up the creature is very low," the man said. "From what I know, it''s deep down. We''re not going that deep."


    As much as the man said that, William wasn''t comfortable knowing that the possibility was still there. What if the Kraken woke up after all? Their chances of dying were very high.


    "Let''s forget about that for now," William said. "The best thing is for us to look for a way to continue before they advance too far."


    As angry and apprehensive as William was, they had to keep going, as messing around there would only mean wasting time.


    The fish-men and the pirates were already advancing, and they had to do the same.


    William and his unknown partner split up to look for more places, both looking for any kind of clue that could help them continue moving forward.


    During the search, something caught William''s attention. In fact, what he saw made him a little emotional, and he had to hold back the tears.


    In the middle of the paintings, he saw one that was separate, as if it had greater importance. The painting in question was a painting of a small cabin, a barn, and on the grass near that cabin there was a man and a young man. It looked like the two were training.


    William knew very well what that painting represented. He had been someone important in Jinra''s life to have that painting.


    ''That old man taught me a lot¡­ But why am I sad? I can always go to the past and see him!'' William thought, wiping the tears with his shirt sleeve.


    But that painting made him think about something else: how his presence in the past was already altering some things in the future. Wouldn''t he have to be careful with his appearance?


    What if he saw some painting from the past showing his face? Wouldn''t people start asking who he was?


    The chance existed, but William felt that he didn''t need to worry about that yet, but the wisest thing to do was to plan ahead and not wait to do things at the last minute when everything was already going downhill.


    As important as that painting was, it wasn''t a clue to opening the statue''s secret passage. They still needed to search more.


    William searched for a long time, but found nothing that was useful. The other corridors only led to places with items from Jinra''s life that had some importance, such as the paintings and some items from his home.


    No valuable artifacts were there, obviously. The artifacts would certainly be inside the tomb''s location where the treasure was.


    Now, after being sure that it was the same Jinra that William knew, he wanted to get the treasure for himself. Yes, for himself. He didn''t even want to share it with the man who was helping him.


    Jinra''s things couldn''t end up in the hands of strangers. William would not allow that. Jinra''s memory and honor were at stake.


    Thoughtful about how to get past that part of the tomb, William went again to the statue that he had to move.


    ''The fish-men opened this somehow¡­ How can I do it?''


    It was clear that they had more information about the tomb than the man who was with William. They already knew a lot about the traps, the items that could be inside, and of course, how to get past most of the puzzles.


    As for William, completely lost. He touched the statue, and sent his mana to it, trying to feel something. It was at that moment that a voice appeared in his mind.


    "If you are hearing this, it means that you are William, my disciple and also someone I welcomed as a son¡­ This tomb has some secrets, and I will reveal them to you now, listen carefully¡­"


    The voice was a little different from Jinra''s normal voice, which was to be expected considering he was much older when he made that message.


    William listened carefully, remembering all the details Jinra wanted to convey to him. Jinra told about the entire layout of the tomb, and explained how William could take shortcuts and go through various parts to get to the treasure as quickly as possible.


    That information was precious. With that, William would be able to reach the treasure before everyone else, and more importantly, he was confident that he would be able to get there alone, shaking off the man who was with him.


    But was that a good idea? He needed the man''s help to remove the barrier from the ship, but at the same time, he wanted to ensure that no one touched Jinra''s treasure.


    ''I''ll take a chance¡­ I believe there will be something useful in the things Jinra left behind, maybe I can destroy the barrier alone!'' William thought.


    After the message ended, the statue moved to the side, opening the passage. The man was nearby and saw William open the passage. S~ea??h the N?velFire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "How did you do that?" he asked, looking suspiciously at William.


    William obviously wasn''t going to tell him what he knew, "I think I''m lucky. Come on, before the passage closes."


    The man was very suspicious of William, as it was simply too unlikely that he could open the passage by luck, but he said nothing and went ahead with him.


    The two went down a spiral staircase, and went deeper into Jinra''s tomb. Now that William knew everything about the tomb, he was no longer afraid or anxious.


    He already knew almost all the passages and also the creatures they might encounter along the way.


    After going down the stairs, they met again in a kind of corridor. But this time the corridor only had one path. There were no other doors or adjacent corridors that would lead to other places.


    They moved on. William already knew what was coming: Jinra had built a small village down there.


    From what William knew, this village was where Jinra had lived. There was his cabin and also the barn where William slept many nights.


    Of course, the village wasn''t there when William was there with him. It was something that was built a few years later. The most amazing thing was that the village was built very close to Willow Creek, but in totally different times.


    The man who was with William, however, was very surprised when he saw that village.


    "Wow!" he said, his mouth half open. "This place is incredible. How did he build something like this down here? Look, the sky looks real!"


    Indeed, that place was incredible. Jinra used his vast knowledge of magical formations and enchantments to create a place that looked a lot like the ''real'' world.


    The starry sky was present, the vegetation, the forest, and even the river that passed near Jinra''s house. Everything was very real, almost as if they had been transported there after passing through the door of the last corridor they were in.


    "Where should we start?" the man asked. "There are several houses here."


    William already knew where to go, but he also knew that he would need to shake off the man who was with him, and he knew exactly what to do.


    "I think we can start with the smaller houses," he said. "The fish-men and the pirates certainly went to the main house, the biggest one, and we don''t want to meet them yet, right?"


    The man, despite being suspicious of William, agreed with that. It made sense to him.


    And indeed, the fish-men and the pirates went straight to the cabin where Jinra lived, as it was the main point of that village. William knew that the way to continue to his treasure was in that cabin, but he also knew that there were other ways, and some shortcuts that he could take.


    William would not let Jinra''s treasure fall into the hands of the catfish and pirates!

 Chapter 139 - 139: Web of Problems

    They went to another wooden house that was in the corner of the village.


    "How do these houses stay standing to this day?" asked William.


    "Probably with the use of magical formations. It''s amazing how much can be preserved using magic."


    Jinra had created a false sky with stars, the moon, and even the sun during the day, all underground. Being able to keep a wooden house preserved for years was quite easy for him.


    They entered the house, the sound of their footsteps making the wooden floor creak. It was dark inside the house. The only lighting belonged to a few candles that were burning with magic, lasting for years and years.


    The interior of the house was like any house in a village of the time: simple but tidy furniture.


    "Let''s look and look for anything useful here," said the man who was with William.


    Until that moment, neither of them had asked each other''s name. They were there for a common goal, and there was no reason to know too much about each other''s lives.


    William knew exactly what he was looking for in that house: the secret passage inside the wooden closet.


    But despite knowing, he couldn''t just ignore everything and go straight to this closet. That would make things suspicious, and the man with him was already quite suspicious of him for managing to get past that statue.


    William was looking at other parts of the house, just like his partner was doing.


    "I don''t think we''ll find anything here," the man said.


    "Keep looking, and let''s look calmly."


    Little by little, William moved around the house and arrived where the closet was. He opened the closet, and there was nothing inside. It was completely empty.


    "See? I told you there was nothing," the man said again.


    William then touched the back of the closet, and feigned a surprised face. "Are you sure there''s nothing? Touch this here."


    The man moved to William''s side and touched the back of the closet. That''s when he felt with his hand that there was something on the other side.


    "I think this is a secret passage," he said. "Good job!"


    The way he reacted, it seems that William didn''t act so suspiciously, which was good. The two worked together to remove the false panel from the wall, taking the utmost care not to trigger any kind of trap.


    William knew very well that there were no traps there, but he couldn''t say that, obviously. After removing the panel, they saw a tunnel leading further down.


    "Should we go this way?" the man asked. "You said that you believe the right way is through the main house."


    "Yes, but a secret passage here must mean something, right? I think it''s worth exploring," William said.


    In the end, the man agreed and the two followed the tunnel.


    The tunnel was narrow, and the two of them barely fit inside. They had to walk in single file as side by side didn''t work.


    "I''m a little nervous in here," the man said.


    William then said, "I should be the nervous one. I''m the one going in front."


    "That''s true, that''s true..."


    When the two realized that one would have to go in front in the tunnel, William decided to volunteer, and of course the man accepted. The person who was going in front was much more likely to step on a trap.


    And that''s exactly what William wanted! He went to that place to trick the man, and step on a trap that would take him to another place, that is, he would be separated from that man!


    William wanted to get to the treasure first than everyone else, and more importantly, he wanted the treasure just for himself. And for that, he needed to do some things and act smart.


    Anyway, they continued to follow the narrow tunnel, until they finally reached another part. It was a small room that had only a pedestal in the middle, and it looked very suspicious.


    "Let me go first to see if the room is safe," William said. "Can I?"


    The man agreed. "Yes, but be careful."


    William walked to the middle of the room. Besides the pedestal, there was also a door, which would lead to another place. He touched the pedestal, and the door opened.


    His partner who was inside the tunnel looked at that and was excited. "Easy, right? We managed to open the door to continue."


    But it was at that moment that the floor beneath William disappeared out of nowhere, and he fell. After that the floor returned, and the door was still open.


    The man stood there not understanding anything. He was completely confused...


    *


    William tumbled into the abyss. Darkness swallowed him whole, leaving him blind and disoriented. The only sensations were the rush of wind against his face and the sickening speed of his descent.


    Anyone else would have been paralyzed by terror, certain that a gruesome death awaited them at the bottom. But William knew better. Jinra''s message had warned him about this trap. Though years had passed and things might have changed, William held onto the belief that the trap remained the same.


    He landed with a soft thud, as if the ground were a bed of feathers. No pain, no injury, just a gentle stop to his plummet. He found himself in a deep fissure, water lapping at his feet. Plants clung to the damp walls, and insects skittered across the uneven floor. Time had clearly altered this place.


    ''This is a little different than I expected, but alright...'' William thought, a flicker of unease in his mind.


    He pressed on, senses heightened, every nerve alert. Jinra''s message had promised safety, but years had twisted the tomb. The possibility of dangerous magical creatures lurking in the shadows couldn''t be ignored. William would be ready.


    With each step, the sound of his boots splashing through the shallow water echoed through the fissure. It was a lonely, rhythmic sound, like walking through a rainy Friday night, heading to the market with only an umbrella for company.


    But he wasn''t going to the supermarket. He was going to where his old master''s treasure was. As much as William wanted some normalcy in his life, things would never be normal again.


    After a while walking in that fissure, William noticed some strange things down there. Well, not at the bottom of the fissure where he was, but on the walls of the fissure above his head.


    He looked up, his eyes already more adjusted to the darkness, amplified by the strange lineage he received from that snake, and that''s when he saw something disturbing.


    On the walls of the fissure, from up there, creatures were coming towards him. They were huge spiders, climbing the walls and going down.


    William''s fall had alerted some creatures that lived in that place. Everyone was going to him.


    A sense of urgency washed over William. He needed to get out of there as quickly as possible, or he would suffer the consequences.


    There was only one path in that fissure, which was to go straight, and that''s what he did. But this time he ran as fast as he could. He had to get out of that place.


    His heart raced, as did his steps. William tried his best not to look up, as that would affect his running, but he did it unconsciously.


    ''Damn, they''re getting close...'' he thought, fear creeping into his mind.


    The fear of not reaching safety in time gnawed at William. His breath came in ragged gasps, his muscles screamed for rest, but the relentless scuttling of the spiders spurred him onward.


    Then, through the dim light, he saw it ¨C a stone door, choked with moss and the grime of ages. Salvation.


    A surge of adrenaline propelled him forward. It was as if the very sight of that door ignited a hidden fire within him, pushing him beyond his limits. But the spiders were fast too, their monstrous forms growing ever closer.


    Just as William reached the door, one of the spiders lunged. Unsure of its strength, and unwilling to risk a confrontation, William poured every ounce of power into his legs and leaped.


    His body slammed against the ancient door, the force of the impact shattering the weakened seals. He tumbled through, landing hard on the cold stone floor of a corridor. This was more like it ¨C the familiar confines of the tomb, not the terrifying openness of the fissure.


    ''I made it...'' he thought, relief flooding through him.


    The spiders battered against the stone door, their enraged screeches echoing through the corridor. But the ancient magic held firm, the portal sealed shut. How long it would last, William didn''t know, but escaping the fissure was a victory in itself. S§×ar?h the N?vel(F)ire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    He scrambled to his feet, eager to press on towards the treasure. But then, voices drifted down the passage ¨C the gruff voices of the fish-men and the rough accents of the pirates.


    ''They''re close! Coming this way!''


    Panic flared in William''s chest. Trapped in a narrow corridor, with enemies approaching from behind, there was nowhere to run, nowhere to hide. He had no choice but to push forward, hoping against hope that he could outrun them, outsmart them, and somehow disappear into the labyrinthine depths of the tomb.

 Chapter 140 - 140: Last Part

    William pressed onward, the echoing shouts of his pursuers spurring him forward. He couldn''t risk a confrontation, not here, not now. He needed time, space, and a plan.


    As he navigated the twisting passages, Jinra''s words echoed in his mind.


    ''If I keep going, I should reach the labyrinth...''


    The final obstacle. A sprawling maze designed to confound and disorient any who dared seek Jinra''s treasure. Even with the cryptic clues from the message, William had no clear path, no map to guide him through the intricate network of corridors.


    Jinra had offered hints, whispers of what to expect, how to orient himself within the labyrinth. It was something, better than nothing, but still...


    Suddenly, figures appeared ahead, rounding a corner with surprising speed. The fish-men and pirates! They were closer than he thought.


    "Halt!" a pirate roared, his voice ragged and threatening.


    William''s heart pounded. He''d only just entered the labyrinth, still trying to decipher its secrets, but there was no time for deliberation. He chose a path at random and sprinted, plunging deeper into the maze.


    The pursuers skidded to a halt at the entrance, confronted by three diverging paths.


    "Who the hell was that?" one of them hissed, his voice laced with suspicion. "Could it be some illusion, a trick of the magical formations?"


    "Maybe," another pirate grunted. "Or it could be someone else who found this place. What do we do? Follow him, or try another path?"


    The man navigating the traps stepped forward, his brow furrowed. "This labyrinth... there''s no information about it, no maps, no clues. We''ll have to rely on our instincts, our wits."


    The leader of the fish-men, a hulking shark-man with a fearsome visage, loomed over the others. "So you know nothing of this part? Could that person we saw have some knowledge we don''t?"


    "Unlikely," the pirate shook his head. "Information about the other parts of the tomb, yes, that''s possible to find. I know, because I did. But this labyrinth... nothing. The only way he could know something is if he were a relative of Jinra, and we all know his kin died before him. So we''re safe."


    "I see..." the shark-man rumbled, his eyes fixed on the path William had taken.


    William, oblivious to the conversation at the labyrinth''s entrance, focused solely on escape. The maze stretched before him, its corridors wider than those he''d traversed before, dotted with eerie, moss-covered statues.


    Unlike the meticulously preserved sections of the tomb, this area seemed to have succumbed to the ravages of time. The pervasive dampness and creeping moss reminded him of the fissure, raising a chilling possibility.


    ''Is this place infested with creatures too?'' he wondered, anxiety tightening its grip.


    His hand instinctively rested on the hilt of Asura, his demonic sword, a silent promise of protection. He proceeded with caution, his eyes scanning the walls for any sign of the markings Jinra had mentioned.


    After twenty minutes of navigating the labyrinth''s twists and turns, he found nothing. Doubt gnawed at him, but he clung to the belief that Jinra wouldn''t mislead him. It was just a matter of time, he told himself, before the first marking revealed itself.


    But before the first marking appeared, something else caught William''s eye. The labyrinth had offered no diverging paths, yet William had changed direction several times as the corridor twisted and turned. It was during one of these turns that he spotted it. In the distance, lurking at the edge of the corridor where it bent out of sight, stood a creature.


    It was grotesque, its form defying description. But what truly chilled William was its smile - a wide, predatory grin that revealed rows of needle-sharp teeth. And its eyes... they were fixated on William, watching his every move with an unnerving intensity.


    A wave of dread washed over him.


    ''What the hell is that?'' he thought, his mind reeling.


    He''d never encountered anything like it. Fear gnawed at him, but he had to press on. There was no other path, no escape from this unsettling encounter.


    As William approached, the creature vanished. But its disappearance only amplified his unease.


    ''Is it waiting for me around the corner?''


    The thought haunted him. He gripped Asura tighter, the familiar weight of the demonic sword a comfort in this unsettling place. With his senses on high alert, he rounded the corner, ready to face whatever awaited him.


    But there was nothing. The corridor was empty.


    "I have no idea what that was," Asura''s voice echoed in his mind, a hint of unease in its tone. "I can''t sense any mana from it. We should be careful."


    "Don''t need to tell me that," William muttered, his grip on Asura unwavering. "That thing was bizarre..."


    After rounding the corner and encountering nothing but unsettling emptiness, William continued his cautious trek through the labyrinth. Five minutes passed, each step filled with anticipation, until finally, he spotted it ¨C the first symbol Jinra had described.


    A black triangle, stark against the pale stone wall. According to Jinra''s message, this meant he should take the next right turn.


    Moments later, he reached an intersection with three possible paths. Trusting his master''s guidance, William turned right.


    ''These clues are a lifesaver,'' he thought, a surge of confidence replacing the lingering fear. ''Getting out of here will be a piece of cake.''


    But navigating the maze wasn''t the only challenge. As he pressed onward, a familiar, chilling sight emerged from the shadows. S§×ar?h the N?vel(F)ire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "A giant spider!" William exclaimed, his hand instinctively reaching for Asura.


    One of the monstrous arachnids from the fissure, its multiple eyes glinting menacingly in the dim light, had found him. With a low hiss, it scuttled towards William, its intent clear.


    But this time, the spider was alone. It wasn''t like the fissure, where William had fled in terror from that army of arachnids. Now, with Asura in hand, fear gave way to determination. He charged.


    His body, fully recovered from the battle with the elemental, moved with renewed vigor. In fact, he felt faster than ever. Perhaps it was the recent level ups, each one boosting his attributes significantly ¨C a perk of being one of the summoned heroes.


    The spider lunged, its fangs dripping venom, aiming for William''s arm. But with a practiced twist of his body, he evaded the attack. Then, gripping Asura tightly, he unleashed a precise strike, aiming for the spider''s hind legs.


    The movement was a blur, the air itself seeming to warp around the blade as it sliced through the air. With a sickening crunch, the spider''s leg was severed, spewing a geyser of green blood that splattered across the corridor floor and stained William''s clothes.


    The blow, though devastating, wasn''t enough to kill the spider. It writhed on the ground, its remaining legs scrabbling for purchase, green ichor oozing from the stump where its limb had been.


    William pressed his advantage, raising Asura for another strike. But the spider wasn''t finished. With a flick of its abdomen, it unleashed a volley of webbing. The sticky strands flew too fast for William to react, encasing him in a silken cocoon. The pressure was immense, immobilizing him completely.


    He struggled, but the webbing held firm. The spider, its fangs dripping venom, turned towards its helpless prey and advanced.

 Chapter 141 - 141: Jinras Lost Pet?

    Panic clawed at William, the sticky strands holding him fast. He strained against the webbing, his muscles burning, but it was no use. Trapped, helpless, with the venomous spider closing in...


    His mind raced, desperately searching for a solution. What magic could he use? What weapon could save him?


    Enhanced Strength! He channeled the spell, feeling the familiar surge of power coursing through his veins. With a renewed burst of strength, he ripped through the webbing, freeing himself just as the spider lunged.


    Asura flashed, severing one of the spider''s fangs in a shower of green sparks. But the creature retaliated, spewing a stream of venom that struck William squarely in the face.


    "Disgusting beast!" he roared, fury lending strength to his arm as he plunged Asura deep into the spider''s head.


    [+1700 EXP]


    The spider shuddered, its legs twitching, then lay still. William, though revolted by the venom coating his face, felt a surge of relief. He was uninjured, the venom hadn''t entered his bloodstream.


    But Asura''s voice shattered his complacency. "That venom... it will seep through your skin. These spiders are dangerous."


    "What?" William''s blood ran cold.


    He watched in horror as the venom began to disappear, absorbed into his skin as if it were a sponge. It was a slow, insidious process, and there was nothing he could do to stop it. The poison entered his bloodstream. S~ea??h the Nov§×l?ire.n(e)t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Fear gripped him. He had no idea how potent the venom was, and there was certainly no antidote to be found in this ancient tomb. His only option was to press on, to reach the treasure, and hope that the poison wasn''t lethal.


    With renewed urgency, he continued through the labyrinth, his eyes darting from the symbols on the walls to the shadows that seemed to writhe with unseen dangers. He was racing against time, against the poison coursing through his veins, and against the unknown creature that still lurked somewhere in the depths of the maze.


    William hadn''t seen that mysterious creature for a while, but it appeared again. It was in one of the corners, just like before, watching him with that ghastly grin. Asura still couldn''t sense any mana emanating from the creature, but William knew it was magical.


    He had no idea if it was a powerful monster or not, but he needed to move forward. William decided to dash towards the creature.


    "Swiftfoot!"


    Utilizing one of his spells, William enhanced his agility and speed. He started sprinting towards the creature.


    The creature seemed taken aback by William suddenly charging at it. William was almost upon it when it began to retreat, turning the corner of the corridor and disappearing from his sight.


    It only took William a few seconds to reach the same corner, certain he would see the creature there. It was impossible for it to have reached the end of the corridor so quickly.


    However, when he turned, he saw nothing. There was no creature in the hallway. It was as if the monster had teleported away.


    "How is this possible? This makes no sense at all!" William murmured.


    He couldn''t believe that creature could teleport. Teleportation was an extremely rare ability, achievable only by the most powerful creatures or mages. A creature like that certainly wouldn''t be in such a potent realm, or William would have been dead by now.


    While he pondered what could have happened, he looked down and saw an unusual type of rat scurrying along the corridor, slipping into the corners.


    The rat wasn''t normal. It had different fur, and its tail was distinct as well, not to mention it was emanating mana from its body - meaning it was a magical creature.


    William watched the rat for a few seconds and could swear it glanced back several times, as if it were looking at him.


    ''Could it be...''


    He thought of something and decided to pursue the rat. The rat noticed his movements and started running too, trying to find some hole to squeeze into and disappear.


    But there was no hole for it to hide in. The corridor walls were made of stone and were still in decent condition. Nothing was broken for the rat to hide behind.


    William grabbed the rat with his hand. He wasn''t afraid of getting hurt by catching it; it seemed harmless. Well, at least he hoped it was.


    Holding the rat, William looked at the small creature, wondering if this could be the bizarre creature he had seen. It didn''t make much sense, but he had that feeling. Then, something very strange happened. The rat spoke!


    "Let go of me, you bastard," the rat said, "I didn''t let you grab me like this."


    William was utterly surprised. According to the information he had, magical beasts capable of speech were rare. This ability was reserved for only the most powerful, legendary creatures, or rare beasts like this rat.


    "How can you talk? What is this?" William asked, looking into the rat''s eyes.


    "How can I talk? That''s the easiest thing. I wonder how the other creatures around here don''t know how. Bunch of idiots," the rat replied.


    "Start explaining, or I won''t let you go."


    William felt a bit bad about threatening and holding the defenseless rat like that, but he needed answers. And after seeing that the rat could speak, he became even more interested in the creature''s origin.


    The rat said nothing at first, trying to squirm and escape William''s grip, but after realizing it was futile, it spoke again.


    "I was Jinra''s pet," the rat said, "but he died a long time ago, and I''ve been hibernating here in a magical formation he created for me. For some reason, I woke up a few days ago."


    That didn''t seem like a coincidence. Could the rat have woken up because it knew someone would come to its master''s tomb?


    William was very surprised to learn that this small creature once belonged to Jinra.


    "So you know me?" William asked, "My name is William. I was your master''s disciple a long time ago when I used my magic to travel to the past."


    "What? What kind of crazy talk is that?" the rat said.


    But after a few seconds, he added, "Wait. William? You''re that William he even left a message about at the tomb''s entrance? How are you here now? You were my master''s!"


    The rat couldn''t understand. As a magical beast, this rat could live for a very long time. It was something special about its species. Plus, it had been frozen for many years, centuries, if not millennia.


    He knew William from the stories his master had told, but that was a long time in the past.


    "As I said, I can travel through time. Actually, I''m from this era, and I met your master when I traveled back in time."


    "So does that mean you can go back in time and see him? Can I go with you?" the rat asked.


    It was a tough decision. What would happen if the rat met Jinra before its time? Was it possible for the rat to encounter itself in the past?


    William had to be careful not to start mixing things up and cause problems that couldn''t be undone.

 Chapter 142 - 142: Youre Alive?

    "Can we talk about this later? And another thing, you can''t tell anyone about this."


    "Sure, sure, I get it. No one would believe this madness anyway¡­ Anyway, so can we say that you are my new master? Can we do the blood pact right here?" the rat said.


    He completely changed his attitude after learning that William was someone who knew his old master personally and had a certain connection to him.


    "Blood pact? How does it work?" William asked.


    "Well, I give you a contract and we sign it with our blood. It''s actually quite simple," the rat explained to William.


    "First make the contract and let me see it."


    The little magical beast used his mana to create a contract in a matter of seconds. The contract was a single sheet with several things written on it.


    It was as if they were rules that both should follow. William read carefully, and from what he saw things seemed reasonable. The part that gave him the most confidence that it was a good deal was the one that said he could terminate the contract at any time.


    The rat still added something else to the contract clause: he couldn''t tell anyone about William''s ability to go back in time.


    William seemed satisfied after reading the contract. "I liked what I saw. We can do it, yes. But tell me, was that bizarre creature watching me?"


    "Ah, yes, yes. That was just an illusion of mine. I was trying to scare you into going away from my master''s tomb."


    Now things were falling into place. That''s why William could never find that strange creature, nor feel its mana. It was just magic that that little talking rat was doing.


    This showed that this little creature had some talents and would certainly be useful for some things.


    ''Jinra wouldn''t have him as a pet if he wasn''t useful, right...'' William reflected.


    The two signed the contract using blood, and after it was complete, a mark appeared on William''s arm, like a tattoo. That indicated that he had a contracted magical beast.


    The little rat jumped and landed on William''s shoulder. "Want help getting to where my master''s treasure is?" he said.


    William smiled. "You can be sure of that."


    With Jinra''s clues and Stuart''s guidance, William was more than confident in reaching the treasure. They pressed on, the echoes of movement from other corridors reminding them that they weren''t alone.


    "Are there other people here?" Stuart squeaked, his tiny nose twitching.


    "Yes," William confirmed. "Fish-men and pirates. And apparently, some mermaids are involved too."


    "What? How did so many people suddenly find this place? It''s strange..."


    "Now that you mention it..." William paused, a frown creasing his brow.


    Indeed, it was odd. Jinra''s tomb had remained hidden for centuries, and now, out of the blue, it was swarming with treasure seekers. He''d been so focused on his own quest that he hadn''t stopped to consider the peculiarity of the situation.


    "We need to hurry then," Stuart urged. "All paths at the beginning of the labyrinth eventually lead to the treasure. If these other people have figured out how to navigate it, well..."


    The urgency in Stuart''s voice spurred William onward. He quickened his pace, relying on the symbols and Stuart''s guidance to navigate the maze. They made rapid progress, but maintaining that speed was impossible. Danger lurked around every corner.


    "This place is crawling with magical beasts," Stuart warned. "Some of them are quite powerful. But lucky for you, you have me!" S§×ar?h the n??el Fire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    William didn''t understand the significance of Stuart''s words until they encountered their first beast. Before the creature even noticed them, Stuart sensed its mana, giving them ample warning.


    But that wasn''t the best part. With a flick of his tiny paw, Stuart cast a camouflage spell on William, blending him seamlessly with the labyrinth walls. It wasn''t invisibility, but it was close enough.


    The beast, oblivious to their presence, wandered off into the maze. With Stuart''s camouflage, William could bypass the labyrinth''s guardians undetected. This was a game-changer. Some of the creatures were weak, yes, but others radiated power that would require a lengthy battle to overcome. Time was of the essence, and every second counted.


    With renewed determination, William and Stuart pressed onward, their progress swift and silent. The labyrinth''s dangers were nullified, the path to Jinra''s treasure lay open.


    William felt a surge of triumph. Everything was going according to plan. He was rapidly approaching the treasure chamber, and no one had interfered. A few magical beasts had crossed their path, but Stuart''s camouflage had rendered them harmless.


    As he rounded another corner, however, he came face to face with someone he hadn''t expected. It wasn''t the pirates or the fish-men, but the man who had accompanied him from the start.


    "You''re alive?" the man exclaimed, his eyes wide with surprise.


    The last time he''d seen William, he was plummeting into a trap. He''d assumed William was dead.


    "Oh, it''s you," William said, his voice flat. "You made it this far."


    The man wasn''t a fool. He quickly realized that William had orchestrated the whole thing. "You knew that trap wouldn''t kill you. That''s why you wanted to go to that cabin first. But how did you know about the trap? Have you been here before?"


    It was a logical assumption. The man couldn''t possibly fathom the truth ¨C that Jinra himself had sent William a message.


    "I''ve never been here before," William said, his voice carefully neutral. "But you seem to know this place quite well to get here so quickly. What do you know?"


    The man''s lips curled into a sly smile. "Indeed, I know a few things. Let''s just say someone hired me to retrieve the treasure. I''ve been exploring this place for quite some time."


    This was turning into a real mess. First the pirates and fish-men, and now this guy too? William had hoped to ditch the man and claim Jinra''s treasure for himself, but fate, it seemed, had other plans.


    The air crackled with tension. A fight was inevitable, and William wasn''t sure he could win this one. Just as he was steeling himself for the confrontation, Stuart''s whisper broke through his thoughts.


    "More people are coming," the rat warned. "Back away slowly, and I''ll camouflage you. They''ll only see this guy and attack him."


    It was a brilliant plan. William just needed to keep the man occupied while subtly creating some distance.


    "Now that we''re so close to the treasure," he said, forcing a friendly smile, "we should work together to get it, right? There''s no need to fight. We''re practically there."


    "And how do you know we''re close?" the man countered, suspicion flashing in his eyes. "What do you know about this place that you''re not telling me?"


    William shrugged, feigning nonchalance. "I don''t know anything. It was just a figure of speech. We have to believe we''re close, right? Otherwise, we''ll go crazy."


    The man scoffed, his eyes narrowing. "Don''t play coy with me. You''ve been one step ahead this whole time. You knew about that trap, you knew about the symbols... What aren''t you telling me?"


    William felt a bead of sweat trickle down his temple. He needed to buy some time. "Look, I don''t know how I knew about the trap, alright? It was a lucky guess. As for the symbols," he gestured vaguely down the corridor, "I just happened to notice them. Maybe they''re just decorative."


    "Decorative?" The man''s voice dripped with disbelief. "In a tomb filled with traps and magical beasts? I don''t think so." He took a step closer, his hand instinctively hovering near the dagger at his belt. "I think it''s time you started telling me the truth. Or things might get unpleasant."


    William''s hand tightened around Asura''s hilt. He could feel the familiar thrum of the demonic blade, eager for battle. But fighting this man now, with more people approaching, would be suicide.


    Just then, Stuart''s voice whispered in his ear, "They''re almost here. Back away slowly, and I''ll cast the camouflage."


    William nodded, his mind racing. He needed to keep the man distracted for just a few more seconds.


    "Look," he said, his voice dropping to a conspiratorial whisper, "I know you don''t trust me. And frankly, I don''t blame you. But we both want the same thing. Let''s work together, get the treasure, and then we can go our separate ways. What do you say?"


    The man hesitated, suspicion still clouding his eyes. But greed, it seemed, was a powerful motivator.


    "Alright," he said slowly. "But if you try anything funny..."


    "I won''t," William assured him, backing away another step. "I give you my word."


    As the man took a tentative step forward, William felt Stuart''s magic wash over him. The world shimmered, the colors of the labyrinth blurring, and then he was one with the wall, invisible to the naked eye.


    The man, oblivious to William''s disappearance, continued his advance. Just as he reached the spot where William had been standing, a group of figures emerged from the shadows. The pirates and the fish-men.


    "There he is!" one of the pirates shouted, pointing at the man.


    The man froze, his eyes widening in alarm. He turned to run, but it was too late. The pirates and fish-men swarmed him, their weapons drawn.


    William watched from his hidden vantage point, a grim satisfaction settling in his chest. Stuart''s plan had worked perfectly. Now, with his pursuers occupied, he could continue his quest for Jinra''s treasure, alone.

 Chapter 143 - 143: Getting Closer

    William seized the opportunity, slipping away unnoticed while the others were distracted. With Stuart''s camouflage, he melted into the shadows, moving like a ghost through the labyrinth.


    The man, realizing William''s disappearance, tried to redirect the attention. "There''s someone else here!" he yelled, pointing towards William''s last known location. "We''ll all lose the treasure!"


    The pirates and fish-men turned, their eyes scanning the corridor, but saw nothing.


    "Stop lying," one of them snarled, his face contorted with rage. "You''re just trying to escape! Now tell us everything you know about this place!"


    William knew it was only a matter of time before they saw through the man''s ruse and used his knowledge to reach the treasure. He couldn''t afford to linger.


    Once out of sight, William dropped the camouflage and broke into a run, Stuart perched on his shoulder, guiding him through the maze.


    "We''re almost there," Stuart squeaked, his voice a mix of excitement and apprehension. "I think we''ll be able to claim it all for ourselves. But you do know that most of the treasure is locked away, right?"


    "What?" William skidded to a halt, confusion clouding his features. "What do you mean?"


    "Jinra intended the treasure for you," Stuart explained, "assuming you''re the same William he always spoke of. The treasure is stored within a magical artifact, a spatial bag that holds far more than it appears. Parts of the treasure will be unlocked as you level up."


    William''s heart sank. He''d been hoping for the entire treasure, imagining the wonders it held.


    "Why would he do that?" he asked, frustration creeping into his voice.


    "Because some of the items are too powerful," Stuart explained. "If you''re not strong enough to handle them, they could kill you. He wanted to make sure whoever claimed his treasure would benefit from it, not meet an untimely end."


    William grudgingly admitted that it made sense. Jinra had been a legendary figure in the world of magic, his power immense. The items he possessed were likely far beyond William''s current capabilities. Locking away the treasure was an act of caution, a testament to Jinra''s wisdom and kindness.


    With renewed determination, they pressed on, navigating the labyrinth''s twists and turns. Stuart''s camouflage kept them safe from the lurking beasts, and soon, they stood before a grand double door of stone, adorned with intricate gold carvings. It was remarkably well-preserved, even more so than the rest of the tomb.


    "This door is heavily protected by magical formations," Stuart said, his voice hushed with awe. "Beyond this lies the final path to Jinra''s treasure."


    "And what does that mean, practically speaking?" William asked, his brow furrowed.


    "It means it''s very difficult to get past this without knowing how," Stuart replied, a mischievous glint in his beady eyes.


    "Damn it," William muttered, frustration building. He''d pushed himself, relying on Stuart''s camouflage and Jinra''s clues to navigate the labyrinth quickly, only to be stopped at the final hurdle.


    Stuart let out a high-pitched chuckle. "I love seeing that defeated look on your face. It''s true, the door is tough to crack, but Jinra left an easier way in for you. He wanted to make sure you were the one who claimed his treasure."


    "What? Really?" A wave of warmth washed over William. Jinra had truly thought of him when creating this tomb. Not only had he left the message, but he''d also ensured William could access the final chamber.


    ''Did he think of me as a son?'' The thought brought a lump to William''s throat.


    He approached the door, placing his hand on its cool surface. As if recognizing him, the symbols etched into the stone began to glow, and the heavy doors swung open.


    "You were right," William said, a smile tugging at his lips. "He really did make it easy for me."


    Just then, a shout echoed from down the corridor. "I told you there was someone else! There he is!"


    William whirled around to see the pirates, the fish-men, and the treacherous man charging towards him.


    "Damn, they''re fast," he cursed.


    "Quick, get inside!" Stuart urged. "The door will lock once you''re through!"


    Without hesitation, William dashed into the chamber, slamming the heavy doors shut behind him. "I don''t know how long this will hold them," he said, catching his breath, "but it should buy us some time."


    He turned, expecting to find himself in the treasure chamber. Instead, he stood in a vast, dimly lit room. And within that room, he saw them ¨C the mermaids.


    The fish-men had mentioned mermaids seeking the treasure. William hadn''t been sure whether to believe them, but now, seeing these creatures with his own eyes, he had no doubt.


    But something was off about these mermaids. They lacked the beauty of the mermaids he''d encountered before. Their eyes burned crimson, their teeth were sharp and jagged, and their skin was as pale as death. One look was enough to tell that something was amiss.


    Were there different types of mermaids? William''s knowledge of these creatures was limited, leaving him with more questions than answers.


    "Who are you?" one of the mermaids hissed, her voice sharp and suspicious.


    "Just a guy," William replied, his hand instinctively resting on Asura''s hilt. "Who are you? And what are you doing here?"


    "We don''t need to explain ourselves to you," another mermaid snapped. "How did you get in here?"


    It had taken them considerable time and effort to bypass the magically sealed door. They couldn''t understand how a human had appeared so quickly.


    "You know there are a bunch of fish-men and pirates on the other side of that door, right?" William informed them, a hint of amusement in his voice. "They''re eager to get their hands on the treasure, and they''ll be just as happy to kill you."


    "Lies!" one of the mermaids shrieked. "You''re lying!"


    They grew increasingly agitated, their voices rising in pitch. But just then, the sounds of pounding and splintering wood echoed from beyond the door. The pirates and fish-men were trying to break through.


    "Told you," William said, a smirk playing on his lips.


    The mermaids exchanged panicked glances. They were trapped between a rock and a hard place. Either they accepted William''s help and secured the treasure before the door gave way, or they fought him and risked losing everything.


    "That might be our best option," one of the mermaids agreed, her gaze flickering towards the door, which was now shuddering under the repeated blows from the other side. "Better to share it with you than let those brutes have it all."


    William nodded, feigning agreement. He''d already assessed their strength, with Stuart''s whispered confirmations of their power levels. In a direct confrontation, he was confident he could defeat them. A wicked plan began to form in his mind.


    "Alright," he said, his voice carefully neutral. "It''s settled then. We''ll work together." S§×arch* The Novel?ire(.)ne*t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    The mermaids, relieved to have secured an ally, explained the final challenge. To reach the treasure, they needed to solve a literary riddle. The room was lined with ancient books, and within their pages lay the clues to unlock the treasure chamber.


    Each clue was accompanied by a cryptic riddle written by Jinra himself. The difficulty lay in the fact that the books were from Jinra''s time, their titles and contents unknown to anyone who might stumble upon the tomb.


    But William had an advantage. He recognized some of the books from his time in Jinra''s cabin. And Stuart, his knowledgeable companion, already knew the answers.


    "I know all the answers," the rat whispered into William''s ear, his voice too low for the mermaids to hear. "Pretend to figure out the first two clues to make them more eager, and then... well, you''ll have to eliminate them and solve the last one yourself."


    The plan was risky, but William was confident he could pull it off. He adopted an air of studious concentration, flipping through the ancient tomes, mirroring the mermaids'' actions.


    "I think I found the first answer!" he announced, a triumphant grin spreading across his face.


    William shared his answer, and as the words echoed through the chamber, one of the three symbols on the inner door shimmered to life. They had cleared the first hurdle.


    "Amazing! You did it!" one of the mermaids exclaimed, her voice laced with excitement. "Just two more to go!"


    William resumed his act, feigning intense concentration as he scanned the ancient texts. Meanwhile, on the other side of the door, the pirates and fish-men had abandoned their brute force approach and were now collaborating, pooling their knowledge to decipher the magical seals.


    Stuart estimated they had roughly two hours before the door gave way. The man who had accompanied William posed the biggest threat, his knowledge of the tomb surpassing that of the others. But two hours was ample time for William to execute his plan.


    After a while, he announced he''d found the second answer. As he spoke the words aloud, the second symbol on the door lit up. The mermaids were practically vibrating with anticipation, their eyes glued to the books, desperate for the final clue.


    This was precisely the state of frenzy William had hoped to induce. Their focus was solely on the riddle, their guard down. It was the perfect opportunity to strike.


    With a predatory gleam in his eyes, William subtly adjusted his grip on Asura. The demonic blade thrummed with anticipation, sensing the impending violence. He would make his move soon, ending this charade and claiming Jinra''s treasure for himself.

 Chapter 144 - 144: Sadness and Anger

    Now was the time to strike. William channeled his enhanced strength and agility, his movements fluid and silent. Asura hummed in his hand, infused with demonic energy, its blade glowing with a malevolent light.


    The mermaids sensed something amiss, but it was too late. William lunged, his attack a blur of motion. The demonic blade sliced through the air, cleaving one of the mermaids in two.


    "What are you doing?" the surviving mermaid shrieked, her eyes wide with terror. "I thought we were working together!"


    The mermaids had planned to betray William once they reached the treasure, confident in their ability to overpower him. But now, witnessing his brutal display of power, fear gripped their hearts.


    "Did you really think I''d share the treasure with you?" William sneered, a cruel smile twisting his lips. "Don''t be ridiculous."


    "But we have a better chance of finding the last answer together!" she pleaded, desperation edging into her voice. "There''s no need to kill me. What if you can''t find the answer, and the pirates and fish-men break through? You''ll be killed too!"


    Her logic was sound, but William had no need for her assistance. "Nice try," he said, his voice cold and merciless. "But I already know the answers. I knew them all along."


    "W-what?" Disbelief and fear mingled in her eyes. "How? Who are you?"


    William ignored her questions, his focus solely on ending this encounter. He lunged again, Asura flashing through the air. The mermaid''s head rolled across the floor, her lifeless eyes staring blankly at the ceiling.


    With both mermaids eliminated, William turned towards the final door.


    "Let''s get this over with," Stuart urged, his voice uncharacteristically serious. "I have a feeling they''ll be breaking through any minute."


    William nodded, stepping towards the imposing door. He recited the final answer, the words echoing through the chamber. The last symbol ignited, and the door swung open, revealing a small, dimly lit room. In the center, a stone tomb lay bathed in an ethereal glow.


    Jinra''s final resting place.


    William approached the tomb with reverence, gently pushing aside the heavy stone lid. There he lay, his body perfectly preserved, as if time had stood still. He looked exactly as William remembered him, only with a few more wrinkles and a long, flowing white beard.


    Stuart hopped off William''s shoulder and onto the edge of the tomb, his tiny eyes filled with sorrow. He had spent countless years with Jinra, and the loss clearly weighed heavily on him.


    "Master," he whispered, his voice thick with emotion. "I found William... I think he''s the only one I should follow now... I''ll take care of your adopted son, I promise."


    William''s vision blurred with tears. Even though he knew Jinra was still alive in the past, seeing his lifeless body here, in this ancient tomb, was a poignant reminder of the inevitable passage of time. He knelt beside the tomb, paying his respects to the man who had shaped his life.


    Then, with a heavy heart, he turned his attention to the treasure. It was time to claim Jinra''s legacy.


    The treasure was a small pouch clutched in Jinra''s skeletal hand. It was made of plain brown fabric, tied with a simple cord, but the symbol emblazoned on its surface hinted at its magical nature.


    "That''s the spatial bag I mentioned," Stuart confirmed, his voice hushed with awe. "All the treasures are inside. You''ll be able to access them as you level up."


    William snatched the pouch, but before he could examine it, the heavy doors to the chamber burst open. The pirates and fish-men poured into the room, their eyes wild with greed.


    "There''s the bastard who stole the treasure!" one of the fish-men roared, pointing a gnarled finger at William. "Get him!" S§×ar?h the N??eFire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    William cursed under his breath. His face had been spotted, and now they were all after him. But escape was his priority.


    "This way!" Stuart squeaked, pointing towards a seemingly ordinary section of wall.


    William followed, his heart pounding. As he approached, the wall shimmered, revealing a hidden passage. He plunged through, the stone closing seamlessly behind him.


    "Don''t stop running!" Stuart urged, his voice barely audible over the thundering footsteps of their pursuers.


    William sprinted down the narrow corridor, his enhanced agility propelling him forward. The passage sloped upwards, leading towards the surface, towards freedom. But the pirates and fish-men were hot on his heels, their enraged shouts echoing through the tunnel.


    Suddenly, the walls around them began to tremble violently.


    "This isn''t good," Stuart said, his voice tight with fear.


    "What is it?" William gasped, his lungs burning.


    "The Kraken has awakened!" Stuart cried. "We need to get out of here, now!"


    The name struck fear into William''s heart. The Kraken, a legendary beast of immense power, was awoken. Escape was no longer just about the treasure; it was about survival.


    He pushed himself harder, his speed increasing. Glancing back, he saw that he was gaining ground on his pursuers. "Looks like I''m faster than them," he said, a glimmer of hope flickering in his eyes. "We might actually make it."


    William didn''t know how long he ran, but he didn''t stop for a single second. He glanced back occasionally to confirm that the distance between him and his pursuers was increasing ¨C and it was. Relief washed over him as he saw the light at the end of the tunnel, the exit that would lead him out of the tomb. The treasure was in his hands, and all he needed to do was escape.


    But when he finally emerged from the tomb, there was no time for celebration. He had to get out of there, and fast. His body was exhausted, however, and his speed had diminished greatly. Running through the dense forest was different from sprinting through the smooth corridors of the tomb. He had to dodge obstacles, weave between trees, and leap over fallen branches, making his escape even more challenging.


    As he ran towards the hidden cove where he''d left the ship, the ground trembled beneath his feet. The entire island seemed to shake, as if something massive was stirring beneath its surface. William knew it was the Kraken, the mythical beast that had been awakened.


    Fear lent him a burst of adrenaline, pushing him onward. He thought of Seraphina and Hemlock, his friends who were counting on him. He had to survive, had to see them again.


    But what awaited him was a sight that tore at his heart. Where the ship should have been bobbing gently in the cove, only the tip of the mast protruded from the water. The ship had sunk.


    Hemlock and Seraphina lay sprawled on the shore, their bodies battered and broken. A faint flicker of life remained in their eyes, but it was fading fast.


    William rushed to their side, kneeling beside them. "Hold on," he pleaded, his voice choked with emotion. "You''ll be alright. I''ll take care of you..."


    Seraphina''s gaze locked with his, a faint smile gracing her lips. With a trembling hand, she reached out and placed the mermaid''s tear ¨C the first ingredient they had gathered for the king''s antidote ¨C into his palm. Tears streamed down her face as her smile widened, a final act of defiance against the cruel hand of fate. Then, her eyes fluttered closed, her body still.


    William turned to Hemlock, but it was too late. His friend had already breathed his last.


    "It seems the Kraken sank the ship and killed them," Stuart said, his voice somber. "It must have gone now, as the island has stopped shaking."


    A primal scream tore from William''s throat, a raw expression of grief and rage he''d never experienced before. The Kraken had taken his friends, had destroyed his hope. Staring out at the vast expanse of blue, he vowed revenge.


    "You will die, you monstrous beast!" he swore, his voice shaking with fury.


    Despite the overwhelming emotions threatening to consume him, William knew he had to escape before the pirates and fish-men caught up. But with no ship and no allies, his situation was dire.


    "Is there anything in Jinra''s treasure that can help me?" he asked Stuart, desperation clinging to his words.


    "There might be something," Stuart replied, rummaging through the spatial bag. "Ah, here it is! An item that grants aquatic attributes. It should allow you to swim away from here."


    William''s eyes widened with hope. He opened the bag, his consciousness momentarily transported to a vast chamber filled with countless treasures. Some were tantalizingly close, while others shimmered behind impenetrable barriers, inaccessible for now.


    He quickly located the item Stuart had mentioned ¨C a small, luminescent seaweed.


    "This will transform you into a fish-man for about two days," Stuart explained. "It should be enough time to escape."


    William didn''t hesitate. He popped the seaweed into his mouth, savoring the strange, salty taste. A tingling sensation spread through his body as he felt his form shifting. Gills sprouted on his neck, his feet morphed into fins, and his skin took on a slightly scaled texture. He wasn''t a true fish-man, but the transformation was enough.


    With a deep breath, he plunged into the ocean, the cool water a welcome relief against his overheated skin. He kicked off, his new fins propelling him through the water with surprising speed. The island shrunk behind him as he swam, the shouts of his pursuers fading into the distance.


    Freedom. For now, at least.

 Chapter 145 - 145: A New Continent

    Apprehension gnawed at William as he plunged into the depths. Despite the magical seaweed''s effects, the ocean held unknown dangers. Powerful beasts could lurk beneath the waves, unseen predators ready to strike. The Kraken''s presence loomed large in his mind, but thankfully, the monstrous creature was long gone, its immense speed carrying it far from the island. sea??h th§× n?velFire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Stuart, ever resourceful, conjured a bubble of air around himself, clinging to William''s back as they sped through the water. "Where to now?" William asked, his voice heavy with grief.


    "There''s another continent nearby," Stuart squeaked. "That''s the closest safe haven. Returning to your own continent would take far too long, and it''s too risky."


    He was right. William had ventured far from home, and without a ship or crew, the journey back would be perilous. He needed a place to recover, to regroup, to plan his next move. James and the others would be worried, but he had no choice. Everything had spiraled out of control.


    "How long will this seaweed''s effect last?" William asked, concern creeping into his voice.


    "A few days, I believe," Stuart replied. "But you can activate and deactivate the transformation as needed."


    A few days wouldn''t be enough to reach the other continent. According to Stuart''s calculations, it would take at least thirty. William would need another mode of transport.


    ''I''ll figure that out when I need to,'' he thought, pushing the worry aside.


    Days turned into weeks. William swam tirelessly, only stopping to snatch the occasional fish from the teeming waters. The transformation had unexpected benefits ¨C he didn''t need to sleep, and he could consume raw fish without any ill effects. It was a far cry from his usual diet, but survival was paramount.


    As the effects of the seaweed began to wane, William knew he needed a new plan. Then, on the horizon, he spotted a small fishing boat. It was impossible to know if they were heading towards the continent, but it was a chance he had to take. He observed the crew, noting their lack of strength. He felt no threat from them.


    The boat was stationary, the fishermen casting their nets into the deep. William deactivated his transformation, allowing his body to bob to the surface, feigning the helplessness of a shipwrecked sailor.


    "Look!" one of the fishermen shouted, pointing towards William. "There''s someone in the water!"


    The fishermen, startled by the sight of a man adrift in the open sea, quickly hauled in their nets and set about rescuing William. They carefully maneuvered the boat closer, their weathered faces etched with concern.


    "He seems unconscious, but he hasn''t drowned," one of them observed, relief evident in his voice. "Let''s get him aboard and wait for him to wake up."


    With practiced ease, they hoisted William onto the deck, their strong arms gently carrying him to a small cabin below. He was laid on a bunk, left to rest and recover. William, however, was feigning unconsciousness, listening intently to their conversation. Stuart remained hidden, wisely avoiding any unnecessary attention.


    After a while, William "awoke," feigning disorientation and confusion. The fishermen crowded around, eager to hear his tale.


    "My ship... it sank," William stammered, his voice weak and raspy. "My crew... they''re all gone. Some might have survived, but I got separated from them. I must have fainted..."


    "Gods above!" the fishermen exclaimed, their faces etched with pity.


    "What sank your ship?" one of them asked, his brow furrowed with concern.


    "A powerful magical beast," William replied, his voice laced with fear. "These waters are treacherous..."


    He noticed, with a surge of relief, that he understood their language, despite it being completely foreign to him.


    ''Perhaps it''s a benefit of being a summoned hero,'' he mused. ''It would make sense, considering I''m supposed to be a global figure.''


    The summoned heroes possessed unique abilities, and it seemed multilingualism was one of them. This unexpected gift would prove invaluable in navigating this new land.


    With renewed confidence, William continued his fabricated tale, weaving a story of misfortune and survival, hoping to gain the fishermen''s trust and secure passage to the mainland.


    The fishermen, their faces pale after hearing about the monstrous creature that had sunk William''s ship, readily agreed to return to the mainland.


    "I think we''ve caught enough for now," the leader declared, his gaze sweeping over the ice-laden tanks filled to the brim with their frozen catch. "We''ve been out here for days, and it''s not worth risking our lives for a few extra fish."


    These fishermen, all hailing from the same coastal village, operated as a tight-knit collective, sharing the bounty of their expeditions.


    "Aye, you''re right," another fisherman chimed in. "No need to tempt fate. We can always return in a few months."


    William, sensing their eagerness to depart, seized the opportunity. "If you don''t mind my asking," he began tentatively, "where are you headed? And would you have room for one more passenger?"


    The fishermen exchanged smiles, their initial apprehension replaced with sympathy for the shipwrecked stranger. "We''re returning to the mainland," the leader replied. "And of course you can join us! Our accommodations are humble, mind you, but you''re welcome aboard."


    "Thank you," William said, gratitude filling his voice. "I''m in your debt."


    He spent the next few days recuperating on the fishing boat, sharing meals and stories with his rescuers. He learned their names ¨C Bran, the grizzled leader with a heart of gold; Kael, the young, eager apprentice; and Torin, the gruff, seasoned fisherman with a repertoire of salty tales.


    He discovered they were from a small coastal village called Saltwind, nestled amidst the cliffs and coves of the mainland. They spoke of their families, their lives, and the challenges of earning a living from the unforgiving sea. William, in turn, shared a carefully edited version of his own story, omitting any mention of magic, time travel, or demonic swords.


    He spoke of a merchant vessel lost to a storm, a crew scattered and a captain struggling to survive. The fishermen, captivated by his tale, offered words of comfort and encouragement. William found himself enjoying their company, their simple honesty a refreshing change from the deceit and danger he''d become accustomed to.


    Finally, after what felt like an eternity at sea, the rugged coastline of the mainland emerged from the horizon. A cheer erupted from the fishermen as they pointed towards a cluster of houses nestled amidst the cliffs.


    "Saltwind!" Bran announced, a broad smile splitting his weathered face. "Welcome home, lad."


    William''s heart swelled with a mixture of anticipation and trepidation. He was stepping into a new world, a world far removed from the dangers and complexities of his own. He was a stranger in a strange land, but for the first time since embarking on this perilous quest, he felt a glimmer of hope.


    As the fishing boat sailed into the sheltered harbor, William took a deep breath, savoring the salty air and the cries of gulls circling overhead.


    Saltwind bustled with activity as the fishermen returned. Children shrieked with delight, running towards their fathers with outstretched arms. Wives, their faces etched with relief, embraced their husbands, whispering words of welcome and gratitude.


    Amidst the joyous reunions, William stood out like a sore thumb. His pale skin, unfamiliar clothes, and the lingering air of exhaustion marked him as an outsider. Saltwind was a tight-knit community, where everyone knew everyone else. A stranger did not go unnoticed.


    "Who''s that?" a curious villager asked, her eyes fixed on William.


    A ripple of whispers spread through the crowd as Bran, the leader of the fishermen, recounted William''s tale of shipwreck and survival. But amidst the expressions of sympathy, a note of caution arose.


    A gruff, older man with a thick beard and a scar bisecting his cheek pushed his way through the throng. This was Madoc, the village warrior, their protector, their sheriff ¨C the strongest and most respected man in Saltwind.


    "Bran," Madoc said, his voice deep and gravelly, "perhaps we should have a word with this stranger."


    Bran nodded, understanding the need for caution. He led William and Madoc towards a small, stone building at the edge of the village square ¨C the makeshift headquarters of Saltwind''s sole guardian.


    Inside, the room was sparsely furnished, with a rough-hewn table, a couple of chairs, and a rack displaying an assortment of weapons. Madoc gestured for William to sit, his eyes assessing the young man with a mixture of curiosity and suspicion.


    "Tell me your story, lad," Madoc instructed, his voice firm but fair. "And tell it true."


    William, ever the actor, launched into his well-rehearsed tale of misfortune and survival, omitting any details that might raise suspicion. He spoke of a merchant vessel lost to a storm, a crew scattered and a captain left to the mercy of the sea. He described the harrowing days adrift, the fear and despair, and the eventual rescue by the fishermen.


    Madoc listened intently, his keen eyes studying William''s every move, every flicker of emotion. He asked questions, probing for inconsistencies, searching for any hint of deception. William, however, remained calm and composed, his answers carefully crafted to deflect suspicion.


    As the interrogation drew to a close, Madoc leaned back in his chair, stroking his beard thoughtfully. "Well, lad," he finally said, "your story seems plausible enough. But I must confess, something about you doesn''t quite add up."


    William''s heart skipped a beat. Had he seen through the facade?


    "I can''t put my finger on it," Madoc continued, "but there''s a certain... aura about you. A strength that doesn''t seem to fit with the tale of a shipwrecked merchant."


    William forced a chuckle, hoping to mask his growing unease. "Perhaps it''s the resilience of a survivor, sir," he replied, hoping his words sounded convincing.


    Madoc''s eyes narrowed slightly. "Perhaps," he said, his voice laced with suspicion. "But I''ll be keeping an eye on you, lad. Just to be sure."

 Chapter 146 - 146: Many Places to Explore

    After that interrogation, William returned to the streets of that small village. One of the fishermen, Bran, went to talk to him.


    "Is there anything we can help you with? Do you know the region?" Bran asked.


    He couldn''t even imagine what William had been through being on the high seas like that. Bran just wanted to give William a helping hand.


    "Actually, I lived on an island, and I don''t know this region very well¡­ To be honest, I don''t know anything," William answered.


    His story of how he ended up there was already basically a lie, so he wanted to avoid telling too many lies and ending up being discovered.


    ''I can''t say I came from another continent¡­ That will have to do.'' He thought.


    Bran didn''t seem to find anything strange about what William had said.


    "I understand," Bran said, placing his hand on William''s shoulder, "but don''t worry. I can help you. Come."


    Bran led the way to his house, where his wife and young son were waiting. They found it strange that Bran brought a stranger to their home, but after they realized who it was, they were no longer worried.


    Actually, Bran''s son was very curious. "I heard that you survived on the high seas for days, and won against several magical beasts? Is it true?"


    William looked at Bran, and saw him smiling. "Yes, little one. I had to fight for days, and when I needed help, your father showed up. He is a great man."


    Bran''s wife was making fried fish for them. William took the opportunity to eat something with them and chat. Bran was willing to tell William all the things he needed to know.


    "Saltwind is quite small and is on the edge of the continent, as you can see," Bran said, "but the central part is very developed, however it is not easy to walk there."


    "And why is that?" William asked.


    He had no idea what this new continent he was exploring was like. In his mind, it was supposed to be similar to what he was used to.


    Considering that he arrived by the beach, and saw a green forest around him, that''s what he thought, but things weren''t exactly like that.


    "Well, it''s a big desert. It is not easy to walk there," Bran said.


    "A desert? Quite different from what I''m seeing around here," William said.


    "The central part of the continent is more desert-like, and the rest of the continent is similar to what you see around here."


    William wasn''t expecting to find a desert continent. Asura, in his mind, told him, "This continent must be where the demonic race lived. From what I know, many battles took place here and the vegetation ended up being compromised."


    "Seriously?"


    That might be a good sign. Although the demonic race at that time was practically extinct, William might have a chance to find someone or some information about them.


    Who knows, even find some magic? He wanted to learn fire and black fire magic, since both were elements that he would certainly have a very high affinity for.


    "And is it very dangerous to travel across the continent, Bran? I mean, if I want to explore other regions? At the moment I don''t know where to go. I just wanted to start making some money and travel around¡­" William asked.


    Bran was a fisherman who spent most of his time either in Saltwind or at sea, but he had a lot of information. During his travels, he ended up talking to many people, so he was someone who knew the continent.


    "Look, it''s a bit dangerous, yes," Bran said, "magical beasts are everywhere when you''re outside the protected cities. But with caution and traveling with help, you can go to various places. Now, about making money, well, it depends on what you know how to do."


    "Is there any job where I can gain levels by hunting monsters and money at the same time?" William asked.


    Bran was a little surprised to hear that. "It makes sense that you survived so long in the middle of the ocean. Of course you are strong¡­ Well, there is. There are many people hiring warriors to clear regions infested with magical beasts. You can join the army too, a personal guard, open a shop to sell the bodies of the beasts you hunted¡­ anyway, many possibilities."


    William had many possibilities. He knew that he wasn''t a super strong person, but he already considered himself minimally decent. What he wanted most at that moment was to increase his strength, get money, and with that leave the continent and return from where he came.


    He needed to warn the king about what had happened. William knew that he couldn''t stay on that continent for long, but would he be able to find a means of transportation to leave there in time?


    "I understand. Well, thank you very much for all the tips," William thanked Bran.


    "You can sleep here tonight, and continue your journey tomorrow. Or you can even stay longer if you want."


    Bran was indeed a very generous person, but William didn''t plan on staying there long.


    Were the pirates and mermen still after him? If so, it wasn''t a good idea to stay there in that village full of innocents, as that could bring trouble for them.


    Therefore, he just wanted to rest and leave that place as quickly as possible, and that''s exactly what he did. William spent the night at Bran''s house, eating various good things they prepared for him.


    The time he spent there was very well spent, but the next morning, it was time for William to leave that place and continue his journey.


    The village was quite simple so they didn''t have any kind of mount to offer William, like horses. He would have to walk.


    Bran at least gave him a map. It wasn''t a complete map, but it had at least the nearest towns.


    "In these towns you will be able to find better maps," Bran said, "be careful, friend."


    William said goodbye to Bran and his family, thanking them for all their help, and then set off on the only road near that village.


    "So, where are we going now?" asked Stuart. Sear?h the Nov§×l?ire.n(e)t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    The little mouse had been hiding in William''s pocket all this time, only coming out when no one was around.


    "I have no idea," said William, "maybe one of these nearby towns to find a better map, I just don''t know how I''m going to pay for one. They probably use a different kind of currency here."


    "But in a bigger city you can certainly find some work to earn some money," Stuart reminded him, "especially someone with your strength, and with my intelligence."


    "Oh, stop it," William said, rolling his eyes, "you meant with my strength and my intelligence, right?"


    "Idiot."


    Traveling without any means of transportation was quite tedious, time-consuming and tiring. Because of this, William was already quite sure that it would take a long time to reach the nearest town.


    For hours and hours the only thing he saw was the stones of the road and the dense vegetation around him. The sound of some unknown creatures was also heard by him from time to time, but nothing came and tried to attack him.


    However, he also didn''t see any type of construction, like a tavern or a house in the middle of nowhere. There came a time, near the end of the day, when he had to stop.


    "We''re going to have to stop here," William told Stuart, "I still need to get food for us, and if it gets too late at night it will be difficult."


    "Right, makes sense. I can help you with my magic to make fire, and also track prey for us. But where are we going to sleep?"


    "On the ground."


    "Mercy¡­"


    William went into the forest and looked for a better place to sleep. He knew very well that sleeping near the road was not a good idea. You never know when someone with bad intentions would pass by the road at night.


    But without a tent or anything like that, it was hard to find a good place to sleep. There was no cave nearby, which meant William would have to sleep in the open.


    "I can camouflage us during the night," Stuart said, "so we can sleep without fear."


    "Seriously?"


    Stuart was proving to be a very useful magical pet, and William was beginning to understand why someone as strong as Jinra had that little mouse as a pet.


    He didn''t seem to be strong in direct combat¡ªin fact he seemed to be quite weak¡ªbut he was very useful, and for William that was enough.


    "Let''s go after something to eat first," said William.


    William and his pet rat then began to track down some creature that could be hunted that night. They didn''t want something too big, but rather something ideal for everyone to eat and have nothing left over.

 Chapter 147 - 147: Night Surprise

    It was very easy to hunt with Stuart''s help. He could sense any creature with ease. It was better than Asura, who could also already sense mana from afar.


    With that, William hunted about 5 small rabbits. He believed that it would be more than enough to feed him, and of course, Stuart.


    "You eat meat too? How different," he said, "you''re a strange rat."


    "Kid, I''m a magical rat. Stop calling me a rat like I''m a common rat," Stuart complained.


    William just laughed at him. After hunting the rabbits, they returned to the place they would use as a base to spend the night.


    "Let''s take this opportunity to collect things to make the fire," William said, "can you light the fire with your magic?"


    "Yes, I can."


    Stuart was very useful indeed. They walked through the forest and picked up wood, stones and also vegetation that would serve as fuel to make the fire.


    With everything in hand, they returned to the place where they would spend the night, and began to make the fire, which took a few minutes. With Stuart''s help, it was easy to light the fire without any problems, which made everything much easier.


    The part that took a little longer was removing the skin and inedible parts of the rabbits. William had to do this alone, since Stuart had no way to help anyway.


    He threw the remains away from the camp ¡ª afraid it might attract creatures ¡ª and then cooked the rabbits in the fire.


    The smell was delicious. Much of that was precisely because William was quite hungry. Hunger ended up being the best seasoning in situations like that.


    They tasted the rabbits around the campfire, and incredibly, Stuart ate an entire rabbit!


    It was simply frightening to see that harmless little rat eat a rabbit that was bigger than him.


    "I need energy to keep my magic powerful," Stuart said, "and meat is tastier so I prefer to eat."


    William shook his head, "relax, I didn''t even say anything."


    "For now¡­"


    After eating, they kept the fire burning to ward off any animals that might appear during the night, and also to warm their bodies.


    Stuart used his magic to camouflage William, that is, it was impossible to find him there. William was calm about this because he already knew very well how good Stuart''s camouflage magic was.


    ''I don''t think any beast will be able to find us,'' he thought.


    William lay down in a hidden and soft corner ¡ª the vegetation turned the place into a makeshift bed ¡ª and then he slept.


    During the night, however, something happened. It was around 3 am when William woke up to the sound of voices.


    When he looked around him, he saw 3 people around the fire he had made the other night. These 3 people didn''t seem to be bandits or anything, but adventurers who saw the fire there and decided to use it.


    "How strange to have a fire like this in the middle of nowhere but with no one here," one of them said.


    "On the other hand, I feel that there is someone here!" a blonde woman replied.


    William didn''t know whether to talk to them, or to stay there. Would they be scared if he appeared out of nowhere?


    Before acting, William listened to what they were saying, and also felt their power level. It was nothing special. The blonde woman who had spoken was quite strong, but William was still confident that he would win if he used all his strength.


    In the end, he heard something that made him sure that maybe it would be a good idea to talk to that group of adventurers.


    The reason for this was that they talked about the carriage they were using, which would certainly be much better than having to travel around on foot.


    ''Would they let me go with them? At least for a while...'' thought William. S~ea??h the Nov§×l?ire.n(e)t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    The possibility of getting a ride was something that excited him, so he decided to show himself. His body slowly materialized, and the 3 adventurers jumped in fright when they saw him.


    "Calm down, relax," William said, "I woke up with you 3 talking near my fire¡­"


    The 3 adventurers gradually recovered from the scare, and then one of them spoke, "We''re sorry. We''ll get out of here and leave. We didn''t know you were here."


    "Don''t go. You can use it. I promise I''m not a forest maniac... I can even help you with camouflage to get a good night''s sleep."


    William had no idea if they would accept or not. What kept them there was the cold of the night. It was simply impossible to stay away from a fire.


    "Well, we''ll stay here then¡­" a man with short hair said.


    After the 3 had calmed down a bit, William took the opportunity to talk to them and try to find out more about each one.


    He wasn''t so interested in knowing each person''s personal life ¡ª that didn''t matter much to him. What he really wanted to know was where they were going, and what their goal was.


    Knowing this, he could find a way to try to be useful and get a ride in their caravan.


    "I''m Louise, this is my brother Alfred, and my friend Karla. We are going towards the central region of the continent," Louise said, and then added with a smile, "my brother got a place in the army! Well, actually he''s going to try, but it''s almost certain that he will."


    That was great for William. He was also heading to the central part of the continent - the dreaded desert - so he could get a ride with them.


    Of course, before that, he introduced himself.


    "My story is a little strange," he said, "I lived on an island, and during one of my boat adventures I ended up shipwrecked. I was found by some fishermen who took me to Saltwind."


    "Saltwind, I''ve heard of that village," Karla said.


    "Yes, it''s not too far from here. Anyway, it''s my first time on dry land here on the continent, and I''m heading towards the central part too, as it''s the best place to find ways to make some money. I''m out of money, out of a ship and out of a crew. And honestly, maybe I''d rather build a life here, and not be stuck on the oceans again."


    William told the whole story ¡ª which was partly true ¡ª and tried to sound as truthful as possible. From the look of the adventurers, they seemed to have believed the things he said.


    "We can give you a ride," Louise said, "it''s better to travel as a team than alone. There are dangerous parts on these roads, and we can protect you!"


    "That would be great! I''m not very good at combat. But I have this magical friend of mine here who is very useful," William said.


    Stuart came out of his pocket, and the two girls loved him.


    "How cute! What''s his name?" Karla asked.


    Stuart then said, "Stuart."


    Everyone was silent when they heard that. It was very rare for a magical beast to speak. William was afraid that they would suspect him of having a beast like that, but the reaction was actually the opposite.


    Louise picked up Stuart and gave him a hug, "so cute! He talks!"


    William could only notice how Louise was squeezing Stuart to her chest.


    ''Lucky bastard rat...'' he thought.


    They talked for a bit, but everyone there wanted to rest. During the journey, it was common for one of them to act as a lookout while two slept, meaning there was always one person who was much more tired.


    However, with William and Stuart, things changed! Stuart used his camouflage magic on all of them, and with that, they could sleep peacefully.


    The 3 adventurers passed out. They slept for a long time, waking up only around noon. It was the first time in a long time that they had a good night''s sleep.


    William, on the other hand, woke up earlier and rekindled the fire, ensuring it would keep burning through the morning. He also hunted down another creature for them to eat.


    Not just meat. He also picked several fruits. Most he had never seen in his life, and was hoping the 3 adventurers could tell him if they were poisonous or not.


    Louise was the first to wake up. When she realized how late it was, she was startled.


    "My god, we slept for a long time!" she said.


    William laughed, "actually, you were the one who slept the least. Your brother and your friend are still snoring over there."


    "And good morning. Want something to eat?" William asked.


    "Yes, please."


    "Do you know which of these are edible?"


    Louise saw several scattered fruits that William had collected in the morning. Luckily for them, they were all edible, and quite good actually.


    "You picked all this up in the morning? You''re skilled," Louise praised him.


    William pointed to a creature that was dead, "not only that, but I hunted these animals too."


    She was genuinely impressed by William''s skills, and was wondering who he really was.

 Chapter 148 - 148: Last City before the Desert

    Alfred and Karla were also surprised when they woke up and saw all those things ready for them to eat. In fact, they even thought it was too much.


    "All this for breakfast? I''m not used to eating so well," said Alfred.


    Despite having said that, he took the opportunity to eat a lot, taking the fruits and also the meat that William had prepared on the fire.


    William had already eaten before they woke up - he and Louise - so he just waited for them, and of course, chatted.


    "It seems like it''s been a while since you''ve slept well," he said.


    Alfred, in good spirits, said, "you bet. First time in days that the 3 of us have managed to sleep at the same time. Keeping watch sucks." S§×arch* The N?vel(F)ire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Taking turns meant that one of them would always have to face the day sleepy, until it was time to stop again to sleep. But with William''s help, the 3 of them were able to rest, and because of that, they already trusted William much more.


    "What about your carriage? Isn''t there a danger of someone finding it and stealing it?" William asked.


    "I don''t think there''s a problem," said Alfred, "we hid it very well. But we couldn''t get here with it."


    After William said that, they started to worry a little and reflect on the matter. Could someone have stolen their carriage?


    Because of that thought, they decided to return to where the carriage was as quickly as possible, just to be sure. William wasn''t against it, as he wanted to continue his journey, but this time, sitting in the carriage.


    They put out the fire and went together to where they had hidden their carriage. It wasn''t very far from there.


    "We used the vegetation to hide it," Alfred said, "the creatures pulling the carriage are somewhere else."


    William had no idea what kind of creatures Alfred was talking about. He was already getting used to seeing carriages being pulled by other creatures, not horses.


    And he was right. The creature pulling the carriage was a kind of huge dog, with a brown coat that appeared to be the color of sand.


    Alfred had tied them up in a more secluded spot that seemed safe. Both creatures were fine.


    William was impressed by the size of those dogs. They were bigger than wolves, much bigger. They were formidable magical beasts.


    "These kinds of creatures are common around here," Alfred explained, "they are very strong, they hardly get tired, and they are the best for walking in the desert. I think there is no better land mount than them. I mean, there must be, but it''s a lot more expensive, right?"


    William was very happy to have found those three. In addition to being willing to travel with him - and give him a ride in the carriage - they still knew a lot of things, things he didn''t know about that continent.


    In other words, it was a great opportunity to learn from them, and not be completely lost during the trip.


    Alfred went to the dogs and started to untie them. "Can you help me here?" Alfred asked.


    Now that another man was there, Alfred wanted to take some of the heavy lifting off his sister Louise, and Karla too. William saw no problem in helping, especially considering that he was a guest there.


    The two worked together to remove those desert dogs and take them to the carriage. There, they tied them in front of the carriage, leaving everything ready to continue the journey.


    Louise was the one who decided to give a tour of the carriage, which was actually quite simple. It was only one compartment, but the space was enough for them. With William''s presence, the space became a little smaller, but nothing that would hinder it that much.


    William looked around, puzzled. "And where are your supplies?" he asked.


    Alfred pulled back a cloth that was hiding several crates. "We don''t have much," he said, "but it should last for a few days."


    He explained that supplies weren''t a problem. They were currently traveling through an area with few taverns or places to replenish their stores, but that would change in the coming days.


    They were the ones who knew the surrounding area, so William trusted them.


    "I''ll go," Alfred said, climbing into the driver''s seat of the carriage.


    Someone had to control the desert dogs, but it was much better to be up there guiding them than walking, as William had been doing before. He could finally rest his legs and talk to the others while Alfred drove.


    "What''s our first destination?" he asked.


    Louise was the one who answered. She seemed to be in charge, at least from William''s perspective.


    She grabbed a map ¨C which was far more detailed than William''s ¨C and showed him the locations they would visit first.


    "We''ll stop here first," Louise explained, pointing at a spot on the map with her finger. "It''s a good place to get supplies and also enjoy some lakes and beautiful views. After that, it''s all desert, and it will be harder going, so we want to enjoy ourselves first."


    William nodded. "Can I see the map?"


    "Of course."


    He took the map and studied it, eager to learn more about their destinations. It was just as the fisherman in Saltwind Village had told him: the main part of the continent was a desert. The rest, well, it had more forests the farther one went from the central region. But out of all the details, something else caught William''s attention.


    "What''s this area right here?" he asked, pointing at the northern part of the map.


    The area he was pointing to was darkened on the map, the name "Ancient Lost Valley" scrawled across it in faded ink.


    "Oh, that..." Louise trailed off, her voice a little shaky. "That''s one of the most dangerous places on the continent. Some say demons lived there, but I think that''s just stories to scare people away."


    William, of course, was immediately intrigued. It seemed that what Asura had said was true: demons had indeed lived on this continent. He already felt the pull of the Ancient Lost Valley, a desire to explore its depths despite the rumored dangers. He was starting to think that the risk was worth it.


    "Maybe later," he thought to himself. He had just arrived; there was much to see and do before venturing into such a perilous region.


    And what a region it was! The next few days were a blur of green. They traveled through dense forests, the sunlight filtering through the leaves like shimmering gold. The air was alive with the sounds of birdsong and the rustling of leaves. Sparkling streams crisscrossed their path, and the scent of wildflowers filled the air. It was all so different from the dry, rocky terrain he was used to.


    They followed a winding road, occasionally catching glimpses of clearings where deer grazed peacefully. Even the desert dogs seemed to enjoy the change of scenery, their hooves thudding softly on the damp earth.


    In the evenings, they camped beneath the stars, the crackling fire providing warmth and a sense of security. They shared stories and laughter, their voices blending with the nocturnal symphony of the forest. William learned about their lives ¨C Alfred, the gruff one, had a passion for carving intricate figures from wood, while Louise, with her sharp wit, secretly dreamed of becoming a scholar.


    He felt a growing connection with these people. They were becoming friends, bound by their shared journey and experiences.


    Finally, they emerged from the forest into a sun-drenched valley. Nestled amidst rolling hills and shimmering lakes, the city of Whisperwind beckoned. Excitement bubbled up inside William as they approached. The city walls, built from pale stone and draped with ivy, shimmered in the sunlight.


    Whisperwind was a haven of tranquility. Cobbled streets wound through colorful houses with flower-filled window boxes. The air was filled with the gentle murmur of conversation and the laughter of children playing in the squares. Fountains splashed in courtyards, and the scent of baking bread wafted from open doorways.


    They found a charming inn with climbing roses adorning its facade. After settling in and seeing to the desert dogs, they gathered in the cozy common room, eager to enjoy a hot meal and the company of others.


    "This city is packed with people," William commented, taking a sip of his tea.


    "Of course it is," Louise replied. "There are some beautiful lakes around here, so people come to relax. And it''s also the last city before the desert starts."


    Whisperwind was their final stop before venturing into the arid expanse. They planned to enjoy their time there for a few days, relaxing and restocking their supplies before continuing their journey.


    As they chatted and ate in the tavern, William noticed someone staring at him intently. The person wasn''t even trying to hide it, making William feel a bit uncomfortable.

 Chapter 149 - 149: Tempting Offer

    William ignored the intrusive stare and enjoyed the evening with his new friends. They ate, drank, and finally retired for the night to their rooms on the second floor of the tavern.


    "Are we really going into the desert?" Stuart complained. "I don''t like the idea of being in the desert."


    "I don''t like the idea either," William admitted, "but we must go if we want to earn money. Plus, I want to go to that northern region of the continent."


    Stuart was confused. "You mean the most dangerous region that Louise said demons used to live in? Why do you want to go there?"


    The little rat didn''t know about William''s demonic powers yet. William pondered whether he should tell him or not, and decided to be truthful. They had a contract, and lying didn''t seem like a good way to start their partnership.


    "I have some sort of demonic bloodline," William revealed. "That''s why I want to go there."


    Stuart''s jaw dropped. "Demonic bloodline?! You''re kidding, right?" He scurried closer to William, his tiny nose twitching. "What kind? Can you, like, summon flames? Or maybe control shadows? Do you have horns? Wait, can I see your teeth?" He practically vibrated with excitement, his questions tumbling over each other.


    William chuckled at the barrage, finding Stuart''s enthusiasm endearing. "Whoa, slow down, Stuart. I don''t have all the answers myself. To be honest, I don''t know much about it at all. That''s actually why I want to go to that region ¨C to learn more about my heritage."


    Stuart, though still bursting with curiosity, seemed to accept this. He settled down, his eyes gleaming with a mix of awe and excitement. "Wow, this is incredible! A real-life demon! I mean, not a real demon, but you know what I mean..." He trailed off, muttering to himself about the potential for amazing stories.


    With a smile, William finally bid his companions goodnight and drifted off to sleep, his dreams filled with visions of the mysterious Ancient Lost Valley and the secrets it might hold.


    The next morning, William and Louise set out to explore Whisperwind, the city waking around them with the sounds of vendors setting up their stalls and children chasing pigeons through the cobbled streets. Their first stop was a clothing shop, a quaint little place tucked away on a side street. Inside, bolts of fabric in a rainbow of colors lined the walls, and the air was thick with the scent of fresh linen and dyes.


    Louise, with her keen eye for fashion and practicality, guided William through the racks, helping him choose clothes suitable for the upcoming desert journey. They settled on loose-fitting trousers made from a lightweight, breathable linen in a pale sand color, along with several long-sleeved shirts in shades of ochre and terracotta.


    These would protect him from the harsh sun while allowing air to circulate. He also acquired a wide-brimmed hat woven from dried reeds, its underside lined with a dark cloth to reduce glare. Finally, he chose a sturdy pair of leather boots with thick soles to insulate his feet from the scorching sand.


    Leaving the shop, they ventured into the bustling market square, a vibrant tapestry of sights, sounds, and smells. Stalls overflowed with exotic fruits in vibrant hues, fragrant spices piled high in woven baskets, and handcrafted goods of every imaginable kind. William marveled at the intricate silver jewelry, the beautifully painted pottery, and the colorful textiles woven with intricate patterns.


    Louise, who had visited Whisperwind several times before, led him through the maze of stalls, pointing out the best places to find durable travel gear. They replenished their supplies with sturdy waterskins made from tanned hide, sacks of dried fruits and nuts, and coils of rope. William also purchased a finely crafted knife with a bone handle, a tool that could prove useful in a variety of situations.


    As lunchtime approached, their stomachs rumbling, they made their way to a charming restaurant tucked away in a quiet corner of the city. The aroma of roasted meats and freshly baked bread wafted from the open windows, promising a delicious meal. They found Alfred and Karla already seated at a table by the window, engrossed in conversation.


    "Ah, there you are!" Alfred greeted them, a rare smile gracing his weathered face. "Karla and I have been gathering some information about the desert."


    Karla, who had been studying a map spread out on the table, looked up. "We''ve learned that the safest route is to follow the old trade roads, even though it''s a bit longer. Apparently, there are hidden oases along the way where we can replenish our water supply."


    "We also talked to a few merchants who recommended hiring a desert guide," Alfred added. "They say it''s worth the expense to have someone who knows the terrain and can navigate the dangers."


    "That''s a good idea," Louise agreed. "A guide could also help us avoid sandstorms and other hazards. Do you have any leads on finding one?"


    "Actually, yes," Karla replied, pulling a crumpled piece of parchment from her pocket. "The innkeeper mentioned a man named Kadir who''s supposed to be one of the best guides in the region. He''s often found at the Golden Oasis tavern, just outside the city gates."


    "Kadir, you say?" Louise pondered, tapping a finger on her chin. "Hmm, I''ve heard that name before. But is he trustworthy? We don''t want to end up with a guide who leads us astray or, worse, tries to rob us."


    Karla nodded in agreement. "That''s a valid concern. According to the innkeeper, Kadir has a solid reputation. He''s known for his knowledge of the desert, his tracking skills, and his honesty. Apparently, he''s guided many caravans safely across the sands."


    Alfred, ever the pragmatist, interjected, "But what about the cost? These experienced guides usually come with a hefty price tag."


    Karla sighed. "That''s true. The innkeeper warned us that Kadir''s fees are quite high. We may end up spending more than we anticipated."


    A shadow fell over their table, interrupting their conversation. They looked up to see a tall, imposing man with an air of wealth and authority standing before them. He was dressed in fine silks, adorned with glittering jewels, and a meticulously groomed beard framed his stern face. His attire, though luxurious, had a distinctly desert flair, with flowing robes and a turban adorned with a shimmering emerald.


    "Excuse me," the man began, his voice deep and resonant, "I couldn''t help but overhear your conversation. I am Lord Jabari, and I am in need of assistance. I seek individuals with¡­ certain skills¡­ to undertake a task for me. It is a matter of some urgency, and I am willing to pay handsomely for your services."


    Intrigued, and with their need for funds fresh in their minds, the group exchanged glances. William, sensing an opportunity, spoke up. "We are indeed skilled travelers, Lord Jabari. Perhaps you could tell us more about this task?"


    Lord Jabari''s eyes swept over them, assessing their potential. "It is a delicate matter," he explained, lowering his voice. "I require a group to venture into the desert and retrieve a valuable artifact that was stolen from me. It is being held by a band of dangerous outlaws who are hiding in a remote oasis. The journey will be perilous, but the reward will be substantial."


    He paused, letting his words sink in. "I understand that you are planning to hire a guide named Kadir. I know him well. He is indeed skilled, but as you mentioned, his fees are exorbitant. If you agree to undertake this task for me, I will cover the cost of hiring Kadir as your guide, in addition to a generous reward upon successful completion of the mission."


    The offer was tempting, especially considering their financial constraints. William, ever drawn to adventure and intrigued by the prospect of retrieving a stolen artifact, leaned forward. "Tell us more, Lord Jabari. What kind of artifact are we talking about?"


    Lord Jabari leaned closer, his voice barely a whisper. "The artifact is an ancient relic, passed down through my family for generations. Its loss is a grave matter, not only for its monetary value but also for its historical and¡­ spiritual significance. I cannot divulge its true nature just yet, but suffice it to say it is of great importance to me." Sear?h the ¦ÇovelFire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    He paused, his gaze fixed on William. "I sense a certain¡­ aura about you, young man. A strength that goes beyond the physical. I believe you possess the qualities necessary to succeed in this endeavor."


    William felt a surge of unease. He didn''t want to draw attention to himself, especially not to his combat abilities. He needed to maintain a low profile, at least for now.


    "You are mistaken, Lord Jabari," William replied, forcing a casual shrug. "I am just a simple traveler, seeking my fortune in these lands."


    Lord Jabari raised an eyebrow, a flicker of doubt in his eyes. "Are you sure, young man? I have a keen sense for these things. I rarely misjudge a person''s potential."


    William held his ground. "I appreciate your confidence, Lord Jabari, but I assure you, I am nothing special." He hoped his companions wouldn''t contradict him. He had been careful to conceal his true strength from them, and he wanted to keep it that way, at least for the time being.


    Lord Jabari studied him for a moment, then gave a slight nod. "Very well. Perhaps I was mistaken. Nevertheless, I still believe you and your companions are capable of completing this task for me."


    He continued, "I will provide you with a map to the outlaws'' hideout and a letter of introduction to Kadir. Meet me at the Golden Oasis tavern tomorrow at dawn, and we will finalize the details."

 Chapter 150 - 150: Reaching the Desert

    After Lord Jabari departed, the group huddled together, their conversation hushed and intense.


    "Do we trust this man?" Alfred asked, his brow furrowed with suspicion. "I don''t know if it will be a good idea or not¡­"


    Despite the tempting offer, one must always be wary of easy money. Lord Jabari was not only willing to pay a lot for their services, but he would also secure them a letter to Kadir, a renowned and expensive guide they had been hoping to hire.


    Karla and Louise were also deep in thought. Karla, ever resourceful, had a suggestion. "If this Lord Jabari has money, then he is certainly known around here. We can try to get some information about him before going to bed. It won''t hurt, right?"


    "I think she has a point," William agreed. "We can ask around about this Jabari guy. Certainly, people know about him here, or about this artifact that he lost."


    A consensus seemed to form around the table. The only one who remained silent was Louise. She was constantly staring at William, a thoughtful expression on her face. Louise knew, with a growing certainty, that William was hiding something, especially after witnessing Lord Jabari''s peculiar praise.


    "Let''s start with the obvious," William suggested, nodding towards the barkeep who was polishing glasses with a practiced hand. "Barkeeps always have their ears to the ground. He might know something about Lord Jabari."


    They approached the bar, and Karla, with her disarming smile, struck up a conversation. "Good sir," she began, "we were just discussing Lord Jabari, a most impressive gentleman. We were wondering if you could tell us anything about him."


    The barkeep, a stout man with a bushy mustache and a twinkle in his eye, leaned in conspiratorially. "Ah, Lord Jabari," he said, his voice a low rumble. "A wealthy and powerful man, that one. Owns a lot of land around these parts, and he''s got his fingers in many pies. But he''s fair, most folks would say. And generous, too. If he''s offering you work, you''ll be well compensated."


    "That''s good to hear," Alfred said, "but what about his character? Is he trustworthy?"


    The barkeep stroked his mustache thoughtfully. "As trustworthy as any lord, I suppose. He''s got a reputation for being a man of his word. But he''s also known to be¡­ demanding. If you take on a job for him, you''d best be sure you can deliver."


    They thanked the barkeep and moved on, venturing out into the bustling streets of Whisperwind. They questioned merchants, innkeepers, and even a few street performers, gathering snippets of information about Lord Jabari. The overall picture that emerged was of a man who was indeed wealthy and influential, with a reputation for fairness and generosity, but also for a certain ruthlessness in his dealings. No one mentioned anything about a stolen artifact, however.


    They returned to the inn, their heads buzzing with information. They gathered in their room, sharing what they had learned and debating the merits of accepting Lord Jabari''s offer.


    "It seems he''s not a bad sort," Karla summarized. "A bit stern, perhaps, and definitely powerful, but not inherently evil or anything."


    "But what about this artifact?" Louise mused. "Why all the secrecy? It must be something truly valuable, or dangerous, for him to be so tight-lipped about it."


    William, who had been unusually quiet throughout the discussion, finally spoke up. "I say we take the job," he declared. "It''s an opportunity to earn some much-needed coin, and it sounds like an adventure. What do you say?"


    His companions, sensing his eagerness, readily agreed. They would meet Lord Jabari at dawn and embark on this new and potentially perilous quest.


    Exhausted from their information-gathering expedition, the group decided to turn in for the night. Sleep came easily, filled with dreams of desert adventures and mysterious artifacts.


    The next morning, they rose before dawn, a sense of anticipation hanging thick in the air. After a quick breakfast of bread and fruit, they gathered their belongings and set out for the Golden Oasis Tavern, located just outside the city gates.


    The tavern was a low-slung building made of sun-baked mud bricks, its walls adorned with faded murals depicting scenes of desert life. A cluster of sturdy, exotic-looking camels were tethered outside, their saddles and packs laden with supplies. Lord Jabari was waiting for them, his expression stern but expectant. Beside him stood several figures clad in desert garb, their faces weathered and tanned from years spent under the scorching sun.


    "Ah, you have arrived," Lord Jabari greeted them, his voice a low rumble. "I see you are eager to begin. Excellent. Allow me to introduce you to your guides." He gestured towards the figures beside him. "These men are among the most experienced desert travelers in the region. They will ensure your safe passage across the sands."


    William noticed that the camels were unlike any he had seen before. They were larger and more muscular than ordinary camels, and their eyes seemed to shimmer with an unnatural light. He sensed a faint magical aura emanating from them.


    Lord Jabari, as if reading his thoughts, explained, "These are no ordinary camels. They are specially bred and trained for desert travel. They can withstand the harshest conditions and navigate the most treacherous terrain. With these magnificent creatures, you will reach your destination swiftly and safely."


    He then presented them with a rolled-up parchment. "This map," he said, "will guide you to the outlaws'' hideout. It is a remote oasis, well hidden and heavily guarded. Be warned, these outlaws are ruthless and dangerous. Do not underestimate them."


    Finally, Lord Jabari revealed the true nature of the stolen artifact. "The object you are to retrieve," he said, his voice dropping to a conspiratorial whisper, "is an ancient book. A book of immense power and knowledge. It must not fall into the wrong hands."


    "An ancient book?" William frowned, curiosity piqued. "What kind of book? What sort of knowledge does it hold?" He couldn''t help but press for more information. An ancient book of power sounded intriguing, and perhaps a little dangerous.


    Lord Jabari''s demeanor shifted. A flicker of annoyance crossed his face, and his voice took on a sharper edge. "That is not your concern," he stated firmly. "Your task is to retrieve the book, not to question its contents. Focus on your mission, and leave the rest to me."


    William, sensing the lord''s displeasure, backed down. He exchanged a quick glance with Louise, who gave him a subtle nod of agreement. It seemed Lord Jabari was not one to be trifled with. They would have to be content with the information he had provided, for now.


    With a final farewell and a stern reminder of the importance of their mission, Lord Jabari stepped aside. The group approached their waiting camels, their guides standing ready to assist. William, feeling a mix of excitement and apprehension, reached out to stroke the velvety nose of the camel he had been assigned. Its eyes, a deep amber color, seemed to hold an ancient wisdom.


    "This one''s called Raj," the lead guide said, noticing William''s interest. "He''s strong and sure-footed. He''ll take good care of you."


    William smiled, feeling a sense of connection with the majestic creature. He swung himself onto the saddle, surprised by the camel''s height and the unexpected sway as he settled into place. He looked out across the landscape, a mix of anticipation and curiosity stirring within him.


    The guides, with practiced ease, mounted their own camels and gathered the reins. With a series of guttural commands and gentle nudges, the camels lurched forward, their padded feet carrying them away from the bustling city. The journey had begun.


    As they left Whisperwind behind, William realized that the desert was not as close as he had imagined. They had several days of travel ahead of them before they even reached the edge of the vast sandy expanse. The landscape gradually shifted from lush greenery to rolling hills and dry grasslands. The air grew warmer, and the sun beat down with increasing intensity.


    He glanced at his companions. Louise, ever observant, seemed lost in thought, her gaze fixed on the horizon. Alfred, stoic as ever, focused on the journey ahead, his hands steady on the reins. Karla, however, seemed to be enjoying the adventure, her face alight with excitement as she peppered one of the guides with questions about the desert.


    "How much farther to the desert?" William asked the lead guide, whose name, he had learned, was Omar. sea??h th§× n??el Fire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Omar, a weathered man with eyes that seemed to hold the wisdom of the sands, pointed towards the horizon. "See that line of shimmering light in the distance? That is the beginning of the Great Sand Sea. We will reach it by nightfall."


    A ripple of excitement passed through the group. The desert, with all its mystery and allure, was finally within reach.


    As the sun began its descent, they approached the edge of the sandy expanse.


    Omar, with a practiced eye, chose a sheltered spot between two towering dunes where they would make camp for the night. The camels were tethered and relieved of their burdens, their saddles and packs carefully laid aside. The guides, with practiced efficiency, unloaded supplies and began setting up camp. Tents were erected, providing much-needed shade from the setting sun, and a fire was kindled, its flames casting a warm glow against the encroaching darkness.

 Chapter 151 - 151: Left Behind

    Seated around the crackling campfire, William''s gaze lingered on Omar, the most seasoned of their guides and the one who seemed to know more about the bandit hideout than anyone else. The firelight cast flickering shadows on Omar''s weathered face as he leaned back, his expression unreadable.


    "Just how dangerous is it going to be to retrieve that artifact from the bandit hideout?" William asked, his voice steady but laced with an edge of unease.


    His companions froze mid-bite and lowered their drinks, their attention snapping to Omar. This wasn''t just another casual conversation around the fire¡ªit was a matter of life and death. The success of their mission, and perhaps their survival, hinged on the information Omar was about to share.


    Omar took a long, deliberate swig of his beer before answering, his eyes narrowing as if weighing his words. "Dangerous enough to make you rethink your life choices, boy. You''re looking at 30 to 40 bandits, maybe more. And their leader? He''s not the type you want to cross without a solid plan. Brute force won''t cut it this time."


    The unspoken warning hung heavy in the air: charging in through the front gate would be suicide. William clenched his jaw, trying to push down the rising knot of anxiety in his chest. Overthinking wouldn''t help¡ªnot yet, at least. He needed to see the hideout for himself, to study its layout, count the bandits, and figure out their patrol patterns. Only then could he start piecing together a plan that didn''t end with all of them dead.


    The night had been mentally draining for William. No matter how hard he tried to push thoughts of the bandits out of his mind, they kept creeping back in, relentless and unwelcome.


    The desert night was cold, and after everyone had retreated to their tents, Louise appeared. She stood in front of William''s tent, her silhouette framed by the faint glow of the dying campfire.


    "Can we talk for a moment?"


    Of all his companions, William knew Louise was the most suspicious of him. Yet, turning her away would only make him seem even more suspicious.


    "Of course, come in," William said, his voice calm but guarded.


    Louise ducked slightly and stepped into the leather tent that William and the others were using. She sat down beside him on the ground, her movements deliberate but uneasy.


    William remained silent, his eyes fixed on her. She was the one who had come to talk, after all, not the other way around.


    "Don''t you think this mission is too risky?" she asked, her voice low but urgent. "I know we need the money, and having the best guide to cross the desert is important, but there are other ways to earn money. And we could always hire a cheaper guide."


    Her words had merit, but unlike the others, William needed the money. He was stranded in an unfamiliar continent, and he had to find a way to leave. Sure, he had a few goals before he could go¡ªlike exploring that place where demons were said to have lived long ago¡ªbut again, for that, he needed money.


    "I do believe it''s risky, but that''s exactly why we''re here, right?" William said, his tone calm but firm.


    Louise, however, saw things differently. "Look, I''m going to be honest with you. Thank you for everything you''ve done for us, and we agreed to give you a ride to the central part of the desert, but this is too much. Remember, you''re not the one leading this group. You''re someone we found on the road and decided to help after you helped us."


    William knew exactly where this conversation was heading. He wasn''t angry about it¡ªshe was speaking the truth, after all. He didn''t have the authority to make decisions or dictate what the group should do.


    "I understand¡­" William said quietly.


    "Come back with us? It''ll be impossible for you to get the artifact alone," she insisted. "We can find other ways to earn money."


    Despite her suspicions that William might be more powerful than he let on, she had no proof. And according to William himself, he wasn''t particularly strong in combat.


    "I''m sorry, Louise, but I really need this money," William said. "I think it might be time for us to part ways."


    Louise was taken aback. She had been certain William would agree to return with them. Risking his life for money didn''t seem worth it.


    "I see¡­ Well, at least I came to warn you and try to convince you. I guess this will help me sleep a little better if something happens."


    She then moved closer and hugged William. "Take care, okay? Maybe we''ll meet again in the desert capital."


    "I will. You all take care too. This desert is dangerous."


    After that, Louise left. Stuart, William''s small magical rat, peeked out from his pocket and said, "Now that we''re alone, the reward money is all ours. Maybe this is for the best. Besides, this way they won''t be putting themselves in too much danger."


    "You have a point," William said, "but we can''t forget that they were decent in combat too. That means taking on that bandit hideout alone will be even harder."


    Stuart tried to reassure him. "Let''s think about that when we get there. Besides, I''m here to help you, so you''re not alone, my dear friend."


    "Thank you¡­"


    After a while, William lay down on his makeshift bed inside the tent and finally managed to fall asleep. By morning, he received the news that some of the guides who had been with them had returned, taking his former companions with them.


    Omar was still there. "Looks like your friends thought better of it and left. Are you still planning to stay?" S~ea??h the N?vel?ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    He couldn''t believe that a young man like William was willing to risk his life to complete a mission proposed by some lord¡ªall for money.


    "I''m staying," William replied firmly.


    "Alright. Let''s get moving, then."


    Everyone who remained worked together to pack up the tents, put out the campfire, and prepare for the journey.


    Before leaving the site, they ate a quick meal and double-checked that everything was in order. Now, they had truly entered the desert.


    The situation had just gotten more complicated.


    The speed at which they were traveling had drastically decreased, not because of the terrain, but because they were navigating the treacherous sands of the desert.


    However, it wasn''t the sand itself that slowed them down. They were riding camels, but these were no ordinary beasts¡ªthey were magical creatures, perfectly suited for traversing such harsh environments. The real problem was the desert''s inhabitants: dangerous, unpredictable creatures that lurked beneath the surface or roamed the dunes.


    Omar and the others accompanying William were seasoned guides, tasked with ensuring a safe passage through the desert. They knew the land like the back of their hands, moving with an ease that left William in awe. He tried to understand their methods, knowing such knowledge could benefit him greatly, but they guarded their secrets closely.


    It was clear they were using some form of magic to navigate. Omar could read the desert like an open book, spotting tracks and signs invisible to the untrained eye. He effortlessly identified the safest paths, while William often saw nothing but endless sand.


    "We''ll head east for a while longer before returning to the main route," Omar announced, his voice calm and authoritative.


    With the guidance of these skilled navigators, William eventually arrived at a small, notorious town. This settlement was infamous for being a haven for criminals and outlaws.


    "The bandits'' hideout is near this town. We''ll leave you here," Omar said, his tone firm and final.


    William''s face twisted in confusion. "Wait, you''re not staying to help me get back? How am I supposed to return on my own?"


    Omar shrugged, unmoved. "Our lord only ordered us to bring you here. The return journey is your responsibility. I''m just following orders. Sorry, kid. You might find other guides in this town, but be careful¡ªmost of them are bandits."


    With that, Omar and his companions turned and left, leaving William standing alone at the edge of the town. He felt a pang of betrayal. The lord who had sent him on this mission had conveniently omitted the part about being stranded in the middle of nowhere. But William knew better than to take his frustration out on Omar and his men. They were just following orders.


    "Calm down, we''ll figure this out," Stuart, his ever-reliable companion, chimed in. "I''ve been observing Omar closely. I think I''ve picked up on some of the magic he was using to navigate the desert."


    "Really?" William asked, hope flickering in his voice.


    Stuart had proven himself invaluable time and time again, his mastery of support magic often saving them from dire situations. His words brought a sense of relief to William, who took a deep breath and steadied himself.


    Before entering the town, William donned a long brown cloak with a hood, concealing anything that might draw attention. His demonic sword, Asura, was hidden beneath the cloak, its ornate sheath replaced with a plain, unremarkable one. He couldn''t afford to stand out in a place like this.


    The town had no guards at its entrance, and it was clear that anyone could come and go as they pleased. The moment William stepped inside, he was met with the sight of shady characters lurking in every corner. The air was thick with tension, and the atmosphere was unmistakably hostile.


    ''This place is going to be trouble¡­'' William thought, his hand instinctively brushing against the hilt of his concealed sword. He would need to tread carefully if he wanted to survive long enough to find a way back.

 Chapter 152 - 152: Finding Information about the Bandits

    William stepped into the city, the oppressive weight of its darkness settling upon him like a shroud. Night had fallen, but the streets still teemed with a disconcerting number of figures, their faces obscured by deep hoods, just like his own. He felt a prickle of unease as several pairs of eyes flickered towards him from beneath those concealing shadows, marking him as an outsider, a potential target.


    With each step on the uneven cobblestones, a chilling sensation crept down his spine¡ªthe feeling of being watched, hunted. Perhaps it was just his paranoia, a natural consequence of venturing into this den of thieves and cutthroats. But William adhered to a strict philosophy: expect the worst, prepare for the worst. He wouldn''t allow himself to be caught off guard. sea??h th§× N?velFire(.)net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    The ramshackle buildings lining the streets, haphazardly stacked upon each other, spoke of a city born not from careful planning but from desperation and lawlessness. This was no civilized kingdom outpost; this was a haven built by bandits, for bandits.


    "Where to first?" William muttered under his breath, scanning the dimly lit alleys and shadowy doorways. No place seemed safe, and his instincts proved correct.


    A figure materialized from the gloom, a glint of steel flashing in their hand as they pressed a dagger against his back. "Hand over everything valuable," the voice hissed, rough and demanding.


    William could sense the meager trickle of magical power emanating from his assailant. This was no formidable foe. With a swift, fluid motion, he spun around, seizing the attacker''s wrist in an iron grip, rendering them immobile.


    Surprise flickered across the would-be thief''s face, quickly replaced by a nervous attempt at a placating smile. "Whoa there, friend," they stammered, "Just messing with you, haha!"


    Who would be foolish enough to believe such a blatant lie?


    While being accosted at knifepoint wasn''t ideal, William saw an opportunity. He fixed the bandit with an icy stare. "I think we need to have a little chat."


    Disarming the man, William dragged him into a nearby alley, its darkness swallowing them whole. The lack of security in this city, while disconcerting, was proving rather convenient.


    "You''re going to tell me everything I need to know," William''s voice cut through the silence, sharp and cold, "and I''ll know if you''re lying."


    Even in this precarious situation, the bandit''s bravado remained. "And why would I do that? Death is inevitable in my line of work. You can''t threaten me with what''s already a certainty."


    A chilling smile played on William''s lips. "Death? No, my friend. You''re far from dying by my hand. But that doesn''t mean you won''t suffer."


    The bandit scoffed, mistaking William''s words for empty threats. Surely, this young man wouldn''t have the stomach for true cruelty. He was wrong.


    William retrieved the fallen dagger and began to systematically carve into the bandit''s flesh. Each cut was precise, agonizing, yet carefully calculated to avoid any vital areas. The man''s screams echoed through the alley, pleas for help that went unanswered.


    Passersby glanced into the alley, their eyes widening at the gruesome scene, but none dared to intervene. In this city, minding your own business was the key to survival.


    After what felt like an eternity of pain, the bandit finally broke. "I''ll tell you anything! Just make it stop!"


    "Not so tough now, are you?" William said, retrieving a cloth and tossing it to the man.


    "Now, let''s start with a simple question. Anything I should be particularly worried about in this city?"


    This city was a viper''s nest of rogues and scoundrels. While most were weak compared to William, there were bound to be powerful figures lurking in the shadows. He needed to tread carefully.


    "There are some strong individuals here, but if you keep your head down, you should be fine. The hostility is usually reserved for the weak. If you project strength, you''ll be left alone, maybe even find some opportunities."


    "Good. And what do you know about the bandit hideout nearby? Northeast of here, I believe."


    The hideout was William''s ultimate objective, the place where he would face a gauntlet of bandits and retrieve the artifact his lord desired.


    "You mean the Desert Serpents'' lair? Bad idea, friend. Their leader is formidable, and most of their members are no slouches either," the bandit warned.


    William had anticipated as much, but confirmation was always valuable.


    "And how do you know this? Is information about this gang so readily available?"


    The bandit, sensing William''s interest in the Desert Serpents, gave him a wary look. "I might know someone who used to be part of that gang. They might have some useful information, for a price. But I can''t guarantee anything."


    "That''s enough for me."


    Leaving the whimpering bandit in the alley, William made his way to another, less secluded alleyway. He knocked on the wooden door of a small shop, its sign creaking ominously in the night wind.


    Despite his repeated knocks, there was no answer. The shop was closed. William had hoped to find the former Serpent member tonight, but it seemed fate had other plans.


    He needed a place to rest. There were several taverns scattered throughout the city, and William chose one that seemed relatively calm, situated in a more well-lit area.


    But even this tavern was far from peaceful. The stench of ale and sweat hung heavy in the air, punctuated by the raucous shouts of patrons arguing, brawling, and engaging in other, more carnal activities. The sounds of women''s moans echoed through the dimly lit space.


    ''Are all the taverns like this?'' William wondered, grimacing.


    Though tempted to check out other establishments, he had a sinking feeling they would be no better, perhaps even worse.


    Approaching the barkeep, he inquired about a room for the night.


    "Got one in the back," the gruff man replied, "Five copper coins."


    William had money, but the currency used in this kingdom was different. Though made of similar materials, the symbols stamped on the coins were foreign.


    "I don''t have any local currency, but I have this dagger. Lifted it off some fool a while back. Interested?" William offered.


    The barkeep, who was also the tavern owner, snatched the dagger and appraised it with a practiced eye.


    "I can give you 120 silver for it," he declared. "Worth closer to 170, but I need to make a profit, you understand."


    "Quite a profit you''re making," William noted dryly.


    The barkeep hesitated, then said, "140. Take it or leave it."


    "Deal."


    William deposited the pouch of coins into his inventory as he entered his room. It was spartan, but thankfully clean, which was a small victory in this city.


    "Well, at least we have some spending money now," Stuart''s voice chirped from William''s pocket. "But the real payoff comes when we complete this mission."


    "Definitely. Hey, can you keep an eye out or use some magic to make this place a bit more secure? I have a bad feeling about this tavern."


    "What place in this city doesn''t give you a bad feeling?" Stuart chuckled. "But yeah, I can do that."


    Stuart cast a camouflage spell, concealing William from prying eyes. They moved the bed to the other side of the room and, with another spell, rendered it invisible. Then, Stuart conjured an illusionary bed to replace it.


    The night passed without incident, and William, reassured by Stuart''s precautions, managed to get some rest. In the morning, he headed straight for the shop owned by the former member of the Desert Serpents.


    A sign hung on the door, indicating it was open. William entered, the bell above the door jingling merrily.


    But despite announcing his presence, the shop seemed deserted. Shelves overflowed with a bizarre assortment of goods, from trinkets and baubles to an impressive collection of weaponry.


    ''This guy must be fencing stolen goods,'' William surmised.


    After a few moments, a figure emerged from the back room. It wasn''t who William expected.


    He had braced himself for a hardened brute, a man etched with scars and an intimidating aura. Instead, he found himself facing a woman of striking beauty, her smile both alluring and disarming.


    "How can I help you?" she purred, her voice like velvet.


    Uncertainty flickered in William''s mind. Was this the former Serpent he sought, or merely an employee? He chose his words carefully.


    "An acquaintance suggested I pay you a visit," William began, "He mentioned someone here used to be part of the Desert Serpents."


    The woman''s smile vanished, replaced by a guarded expression. "That part of my life is over. I have nothing to say about it. If that''s all you came for, you can leave."


    William, unsure how to navigate this unexpected encounter, decided to probe further. "First, tell me," he asked, "do you regret leaving the gang?"


    The woman''s eyes hardened, a flicker of anger igniting within their depths. "Regret? Never! They''re a pack of ruthless bastards. I''m glad to be free of them. And honestly," her voice dropped to a venomous whisper, "if I had the chance, I''d go back and kill every last one of them for what they did to me."


    A spark of opportunity ignited in William''s mind. This woman''s resentment towards the Desert Serpents was a powerful tool, one he could potentially use to his advantage.

 Chapter 153 - 153: Its Almost Time

    "And what do you think about helping me with this? You''d get the chance to do what you want," William asked.


    The woman was slightly taken aback. "I might have the desire to do it, but that doesn''t mean I have the ability. It''s madness to go to that place."


    And indeed, it was. Storming a hideout full of powerful bandits wasn''t a sensible thing to do. Of course, William needed to go, and he was determined to convince her.


    "If we work together, we stand a real chance," William said. "What do you think?"


    She noticed the desperation in his voice. This woman wasn''t stupid. In fact, having been part of a gang, she was sharp and perceptive.


    "What do you want with them? Start talking, or I won''t even consider helping you."


    The woman moved to the shop''s door and flipped the sign. It now read Closed.


    "Sit here," she said, pointing to a small wooden table at the back of the shop.


    The table was simple¡ªround, made of wood, with only two chairs around it. The area was cluttered, clearly part of the woman''s living quarters.


    ''Must be her office or something,'' William thought.


    The place wasn''t much to look at, but William kept his thoughts to himself.


    "I don''t know what you''re talking about," he said. "Why would I be hiding anything from you? I just need your help to infiltrate that place, that''s all."


    "Cut the crap, kid. I know you want something. Do you really think anyone in their right mind would storm that place for nothing? Try again."


    "Alright, alright. But will you really help me?" William pressed. "Because it seems impossible to get into that place."


    Her tone was pessimistic, and William was starting to believe his mission was both stupid and impossible.


    "It''s doable. You''re after some treasure they have, right? Those bastards have a huge collection of rare items. Easy to get when you''ve been robbing the entire desert," she said.


    Deep down, William felt uneasy sharing this much with her, fearing betrayal, but he took the risk.


    "Actually, I''m after a book," he admitted. "I believe it''s quite old, maybe with a worn leather cover?"


    When the woman heard this, she shook her head and stood up. "No way."


    William frowned. "What do you mean?"


    "The gang leader has a book exactly like that. He carries it everywhere."


    That made the mission even harder. William had hoped to sneak into the bandits'' hideout and steal what he needed. After all, this woman had been part of the gang, so she surely knew the layout and secret passages that could help them. But if the book was always with the leader, well, that screwed everything up. A confrontation with the gang leader was almost inevitable, and from what William had heard, the leader was incredibly powerful.


    "Do you know what that book is?"


    "Wait a minute," she said, laughing. "You don''t even know what you''re trying to steal? What kind of thief are you?"


    "I''m not a thief. I''m just following orders."


    "Ah, I see. Well, that book is strange. Ever since the leader started reading it, he''s become even more ruthless and powerful. It''s like he''s lost, consumed by the pursuit of power. It was around the time he started reading it that I left the gang."


    William sat in silence, deep in thought. He didn''t know the nature of the book or what it contained, but the fact that it had altered the leader''s personality was intriguing.


    "Do you think we can get that book?" William asked.


    "Honestly, if we just try to storm the place head-on, no. Impossible. But maybe we can lure them out, leaving only the leader and a few key members behind."


    The idea of drawing most of the bandits away from the hideout was interesting, but how would they pull it off? William had no idea what could lure the bandits out.


    However, the woman, whose name was Lyfenea, knew exactly how to do it. In fact, it was surprisingly simple.


    Having been part of the gang for years, she knew a lot about them, including who owed them money or was at odds with them.


    "There''s a group that''s practically their sworn enemies, and I know where they''re hiding. I can drop some hints to the bandits, making them leave the hideout."


    "That sounds promising. Do you need help with anything?" William asked.


    "Yes, first we need to create the evidence. Come with me."


    The two worked together to feed information to the bandits without revealing their identities. They visited places frequented by associates of the Serpent Desert Gang and began spreading rumors.


    William and Lyfenea sat at a table in one of the bars, talking loudly. "Did you know the Silver Dagger Gang is hiding in an underground base in the White Dunes region?"


    "Really? What are they doing there?" William asked.


    "I think they''re running from the Serpent Desert Gang..."


    They repeated this conversation in several bars before returning to Lyfenea''s shop. William wasn''t sure if it would work.


    "Do you really think this will work? All we did was spread some rumors."


    "Of course it will," Lyfenea said confidently. "You have no idea how fast rumors like these spread. But we''ll need to prepare for the raid on the bandits'' hideout."


    Time was of the essence. They couldn''t afford to waste any, as they needed to be ready to strike. Lyfenea decided to call in a few people she knew and trusted to join them. S§×ar?h the N?vel?ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    She brought in two more individuals. William wasn''t sure how he felt about it¡ªhe didn''t trust these people¡ªbut he couldn''t deny that having more hands on deck would make the mission easier.


    With their help, they could handle the remaining bandits in the hideout more effectively. For William, all that mattered was the artifact¡ªthe book the leader carried. The rest didn''t concern him much. He''d be satisfied just getting the monetary reward the Lord promised him for the book.


    ''Even if I have to split the other valuables with them, I''ll still walk away with something. So, it''s worth it...'' he thought.


    "These two are my friends, and you can trust them. The four of us will raid the gang''s hideout and split whatever we find. Of course, the book is yours. What do you think?" Lyfenea said.


    "No problem. But can I trust them? It''s already hard enough trusting you," William replied, being as blunt and direct as possible.


    The two people Lyfenea had called were both women. One of them spoke up, "I understand your concern, but you can trust us. We have no reason to betray you. All we want is the treasure. Of course, Lyfenea has her own vendetta, but that''s her business."


    Lyfenea''s friends were only in it for the chance to get their hands on valuable items. Unlike Lyfenea, who seemed to have a deeper grudge against the Serpent Desert Gang.


    "Alright then, let''s prepare to camp near the hideout so we can keep an eye on their movements," Lyfenea said.


    They worked together to gather the necessary supplies. Lyfenea already had most of what they needed in her shop¡ªtents and even camels for traversing the desert.


    The only things they needed to buy were food and water for a few days, but that wasn''t a problem. It was a small investment considering the potential rewards if the mission succeeded.


    Once everything was ready, they decided to leave the city. It was late afternoon when they set out.


    They didn''t have four camels, so it was two people per camel. William rode behind Lyfenea, holding onto her waist.


    The group drew some attention as they left the city, but nothing too serious. They headed straight for the gang''s hideout.


    William had a map that showed exactly where it was, and he pulled it out during the journey to take a look. Lyfenea smiled at him, "You can put that map away. I know exactly where it is."


    And indeed, she did. In fact, she knew better routes to get there, and by nightfall, they had a clear view of the gang''s camp.


    They were on higher ground, overlooking the bandit camp from above. It was a perfect vantage point to scout the entire base.


    "There are a lot of bandits down there," William remarked.


    "Don''t worry," Lyfenea replied, "soon enough, many of them will leave, and that''s when we''ll make our move."


    They camped for the night on the higher ground, careful not to let the smoke from their fire alert the bandits to their presence. The hideout remained quiet, with no suspicious movements. They set up their tents and slept there.


    However, the next morning, strange movements began to stir within the Serpent Desert Gang''s base. A large group of bandits emerged, all looking as if they were heading to war.


    William smiled. He knew the plan had worked. Now, all they had to do was infiltrate the hideout and take on the gang leader!

 Chapter 154 - 154: This wasnt in our Agreement

    "Let''s wait and infiltrate at night," Lyfenea said.


    The gang the Serpent Desert was targeting was located far away, meaning they had roughly three to four days before the bandits returned. Of course, no one wanted to wait around for days, but waiting until nightfall wasn''t a problem. The darkness would be their ally during the infiltration.


    Everyone was on board with the plan, including William. He wasn''t in a hurry. For him, it was better to take things slow and succeed than to rush and risk failure.


    They spent the day observing the hideout, taking breaks to eat and tend to their needs.


    "The hideout seems quiet," William remarked. "How many do you think are still inside?"


    "Probably around ten," Lyfenea said. "At least, that''s how it used to be. There were nine sub-leaders and the gang leader himself. Maybe it''s changed¡ªmore or fewer people. It''s hard to say for sure."


    It was difficult for Lyfenea to know the exact situation since she had left the gang a long time ago. However, one thing seemed unchanged: the layout of the hideout.


    During the hours they spent waiting, Lyfenea took the opportunity to sketch the hideout''s layout, pointing out the most important areas¡ªor at least the ones she remembered.


    The general layout of the gang''s base wasn''t too different, but the information Lyfenea had about secret passages was crucial.


    William, listening to all this, grew curious about her former role in the gang.


    ''How does she know about these secret passages? Did all members know, or was she in a high position?'' he wondered.


    Even though they were about to start the operation, it didn''t mean William trusted these people. He kept his guard up, ready for any suspicious moves.


    "And where do you think the leader will be?" William asked.


    Lyfenea was honest with him. "He''ll probably notice us quickly. We''ll need to use our time hidden to take out the sub-leaders first. There''s no way to enter without him noticing."


    William smiled. "I think I have something that might help us."


    *


    When night fell, they made their way down the small sand dune they had been camping on, heading straight for the bandits'' hideout.


    The entrance was unguarded. None of the sub-leaders were willing to act as mere guards at the hideout''s entrance. They were all inside.


    However, even though it seemed like security had lessened, that wasn''t the case. The sub-leaders were far stronger than the average bandits and were prepared for any invasion.


    Unfortunately for them, William''s infiltration was something they didn''t expect. With the help of his magical rat, Stuart, all four of them were camouflaged, and no one noticed their presence¡ªnot even the leader.


    And with Lyfenea''s knowledge of the secret passages, they would be able to enter the hideout without alerting anyone. At least, that''s what they hoped.


    "Let''s go this way," Lyfenea said. "There''s a passage at the back."


    They circled the base. The main building was surrounded by a small wall. The only apparent entrance was the front gate, but that wasn''t the case.


    Lyfenea knew of some secret entrances at the back and sides of the base. These passages were typically used as escape routes during an invasion.


    But in this case, those escape routes would become their entry points. Lyfenea led the way, stopping in front of a specific part of the wall.


    "This looks normal," William said.


    That part of the wall looked exactly like the rest. There was nothing unusual about it, and he didn''t sense any mana coming from it either.


    But it wasn''t normal. Lyfenea pulled up her sleeve, revealing a serpent tattoo. All gang members had this tattoo.


    In her case, she was a former member, but the tattoo was still there. She pressed her tattooed arm against the wall, and the section glowed, revealing a hidden tunnel.


    "This tunnel leads straight to the main building, so we''ll need to be careful. The bandits will be inside," Lyfenea warned.


    Everyone nodded and followed her in. Stuart''s magic was still camouflaging them, so no one had noticed their presence.


    "That magical pet of yours is really useful," one of Lyfenea''s friends said. "Where''d you get it?"


    William felt they were prying too much, and he even noticed a hint of envy¡ªor rather, greed¡ªin their eyes. He simply smiled and said, "I can''t reveal that, sorry."


    They didn''t press further and continued through the dark tunnel. After a few minutes, they emerged from behind a cabinet in one of the rooms of the main building.


    The room was filled with books.


    "Didn''t expect to find this here," William said.


    Lyfenea looked slightly offended. "Are you saying bandits can''t read? We can, you know."


    Her tone wasn''t hostile, so William took it as a joke.


    "Let''s try to avoid talking now. The camouflage doesn''t cancel out sound completely, so we need to be silent," William reminded them.


    As incredible as Stuart''s magic was, it still had its limitations.


    They moved through the building, communicating only through hand signals. Lyfenea led the way since she knew the layout best, but the others had studied the map she provided, so they had a general idea of where to go.


    Their destination was the treasure room, where all the stolen items were stored.


    Getting there wasn''t a problem, considering the place was mostly empty. They didn''t encounter anyone along the way. The real issue was getting inside. It was impossible to enter without a key.


    The vault had powerful magical protections. No one there could break through, even with all the time in the world.


    They looked around to ensure no one was nearby before speaking.


    "And where are we supposed to get a key?" William asked.


    "From one of the sub-leaders or the leader himself. But it''s better to focus on the sub-leaders¡ªthey''re weaker," Lyfenea said. sea??h th§× N??eFire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    William was starting to think Lyfenea and the other two were trying to avoid confronting the leader and wanted to break into the vault quietly.


    While that seemed like a good idea¡ªand it was¡ªit wasn''t what William wanted. He needed to face the gang leader because the artifact he was after, that ancient and mysterious book, was with the leader!


    In other words, confronting him was inevitable.


    "You know we have to face the leader, right?" William said. "The book is with him."


    Lyfenea smiled. "Our agreement was to help each other get in here and split the treasures, with you getting the book. The agreement didn''t say anything about us helping you fight."


    At that moment, William realized trusting these women had been a mistake. They were already twisting the agreement to suit their own interests.


    And the worst part was, William couldn''t do anything about it. They were strong in combat, around level 30 based on their mana fluctuations. If William tried, he might win, but what was the point?


    Fighting them would only tire him out and alert the other bandits in the hideout. In the end, he had been deceived...


    In the end, William decided to focus on helping them get the key. There wasn''t much else he could do.


    They searched together for one of the sub-leaders and soon began to locate them. In total, there were five sub-leaders and the leader himself, making six people.


    The leader''s location was still a mystery, but they found the sub-leaders. All of them were drinking beer and playing card games near a pool in the recreational area.


    The sub-leaders'' power was a bit weaker than William had imagined. However, the problem was that they were all together in the same place.


    They faced a dilemma: wait for one of them to leave or take them all on at once.


    In the end, they chose to wait and see what would happen.


    "Peaceful here without everyone around, huh?" one of the sub-leaders said. "Makes me want to ask the boss for some time off."


    "Look, if you cry enough, maybe you''ll get it. Especially since things are relatively calm with no conflicts," another replied.


    "You think so? I''ll try when he gets back... But hey, guys, I''m tired. I''m calling it a night."


    "Old man," one of them teased.


    Everyone laughed. The sub-leader who left was indeed older than the others, and his energy wasn''t what it used to be. He needed to rest after hours of drinking.


    This was the perfect opportunity they had been waiting for. They followed the man, thinking he would head to the dormitory, but instead, he left the main building and went to the back.


    There, he decided to relieve himself in a corner, on the ground. A bit strange, considering they had bathrooms. Maybe the guy just liked feeling the night breeze on his skin...


    Anyway, this was their chance. William thought about acting, but Lyfenea moved first. She pulled out a dagger hidden on her back and approached the man like a snake ready to strike.


    Her footsteps made no sound!


    ''She''s a skilled assassin,'' William thought.


    Lyfenea opened a vial containing a strange liquid and coated the tip of her dagger with it. Then, she crept up behind the man and stabbed him.


    "What the hell!" the man shouted.


    He reacted quickly, but when he tried to use his mana, he couldn''t. It was as if it was blocked.


    Lyfenea smiled. "This poison is very useful."


    Her two friends also drew their daggers and moved in. Their movements were equally agile, and they finished him off with little effort and almost no noise.


    William felt a bit tense being there. In the end, these three women were assassins, and he was working with them without fully realizing it...

 Chapter 155 - 155: Inside the Treasure Room

    With the keys in hand, they could now access the vault where all the treasures were stored. Well, almost all¡ªsince the book William wanted wasn''t there.


    Before leaving, they dragged the bandit''s body and hid it in a corner outside the main building. It seemed like a good spot, somewhere no one would find it.


    Not that it mattered much in the end. If William wanted the artifact he had come for, he would have to confront the gang leader directly. Staying hidden no longer made much sense.


    They returned to the vault using the same route they had taken earlier. Stuart camouflaged them again, ensuring they could reach the vault without drawing unnecessary attention. sea??h th§× novel(F~)ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    The other sub-leaders were still drinking and chatting in the recreational area. The leader remained missing, and no one had any idea where he was.


    When they reached the vault door, Lyfenea used the key to open it. The large door creaked as it swung open, but the noise wasn''t enough to alert anyone.


    What they feared was triggering some kind of trap, but nothing happened. They exchanged glances, excited to finally be inside the vault. William, however, was the only one not thrilled about the situation.


    They stepped inside and found themselves in a massive room with no windows or dividing walls. The space was open, filled with all kinds of treasures.


    Most of the items were stolen, but there were also things the bandits had acquired during their expeditions. They explored places that might hold valuable items.


    But the majority of the loot was still the result of theft¡ªfrom caravans and other gangs.


    After entering and closing the vault door, William and the others felt more comfortable speaking, as no one would notice they were there.


    "Check this place out," Lyfenea said, picking up a few items as she walked around. "There''s so much stuff here."


    The three assassins were in awe. William tried to share their excitement, thinking that, at worst, he could still sell some of the treasures for a good amount of money.


    "Let''s start grabbing the valuables," one of the women said. "We need to focus on the most valuable items. We can''t take everything."


    They had brought sacks to carry the treasures. Unlike William, who had an inventory system like something out of an online game.


    He still couldn''t figure out why he had this inventory while others didn''t.


    Anyway, they began searching for the best items in the vault and storing them as best they could.


    However, after about five minutes inside, a voice echoed through the vault, sending chills down their spines.


    "Seems I have some intruders here."


    William quickly turned toward the voice and saw the person who had spoken. It was the leader of the Serpent Desert Gang.


    At least, it seemed to be. He had a much more imposing aura than any of the sub-leaders they had encountered, which was why William assumed he was the leader.


    When Lyfenea saw the man, she said, "Long time no see, little brother."


    William was surprised, but the pieces quickly fell into place. How did Lyfenea know about all those secret passages? How had she left the gang without facing retaliation?


    It was difficult¡ªalmost impossible¡ªto leave a gang like that, especially if you held a high position. The life of crime wasn''t easy.


    But being the sister of the gang''s leader? Well, that explained how Lyfenea had left that life without much trouble.


    "Mind telling me what the hell you''re doing?" the leader said. "I was lenient enough to let you leave without causing problems, and now you come to rob me? You know that even as my sister, you''ll face the consequences for this."


    Lyfenea laughed. "I know you won''t kill me. What''s a few more or fewer treasures? You should be helping me!"


    "You''re the one who wanted out of the gang because you were done with violence! I even helped you open that dump you call a shop. What the hell, sis. And who are these people you brought here?"


    William listened to their conversation, and he wasn''t feeling good about it. It seemed like they were arguing but still cared for each other. If that was the case, William might end up being the enemy here.


    "They came with me to help me rob you," Lyfenea replied. "What do you think? Can you take on all of us?"


    The leader laughed, a dark, menacing laugh. He then pulled out an ancient book from his pocket, holding it in his hand. "You can be sure I''ll win easily. I''m far more powerful than before. You don''t stand a chance."


    When he took out the book, William felt something strange, though he couldn''t quite describe it.


    The leader turned his gaze to them. "I know these women. They''re your pathetic assassin friends. But who''s this guy? Are you dating, little sis?"


    "We''re not dating," William said. "Do you really think I''d date an assassin who was part of a gang? If I''d known she was your sister, I wouldn''t have come to this dump."


    "This dump?!" the leader shouted. "Don''t talk about the place I worked so hard to build."


    William found it hilarious. "Worked so hard to build? That''s a strong way to put it. You''re a bandit, man. You''ve never worked a day in your life."


    The tension was rising quickly, and Lyfenea wasn''t sure what to do. Should she stand against her brother or try to talk her way out of this situation more peacefully?


    When the leader grew angry and let more of his aura surge, William could feel just how powerful he was. His guess was somewhere around level 50, which was incredibly strong.


    ''Do I even stand a chance against him?'' William thought.


    Despite being at a lower level, William''s attributes were impressive, given that he was one of the summoned heroes. Additionally, some of his skills were high-ranked, at least a few of them.


    In other words, he felt he had a chance to win if he went all out¡ªbut that was assuming the leader didn''t have more tricks up his sleeve.


    "Both of you, relax," Lyfenea said. "You''re acting like children."


    How could William relax in a situation like this?


    "Tell me now, little sis. Are you going to fight me, or are you going to leave those treasures behind?" the leader asked.


    Lyfenea didn''t hesitate. "Sorry, but I hate your entire gang. I hope they all burn. You''re the least terrible of them, but you still deserve to lose some treasures."


    She was willing to stand up to her brother, and that was good for William. He might have some help during the fight.


    The leader wasn''t pleased with her response. He placed his hand on the book and began whispering strange words. It sounded like another language.


    Then, shadows emerged from the ground, wrapping around the legs of the two assassins who had come with William and Lyfenea. After that, the leader used the book to cast another spell, sending a horizontal shadow slash that cut the two assassins in half!


    Everything happened too fast. William hadn''t been caught by the first spell, but the shadow slash was heading straight for him. He had to dodge.


    Luckily, William managed to dodge, remaining completely unharmed, which caught the leader''s attention.


    "Nice moves," the leader said. "But do you think you could''ve escaped if I''d trapped your legs too?"


    "We''ll find out soon enough," William replied.


    Lyfenea watched the scene unfold before her eyes, unable to believe her friends had been killed so quickly. One moment they were there, and the next, they were gone.


    "Why did you do that, you bastard?" she screamed. "They didn''t deserve to die."


    "And why not? They invaded my home, my vault, and tried to rob me. Their fate would''ve been the same if you weren''t my sister."


    The leader had already planned to either imprison Lyfenea or force her back into the gang. He didn''t want to hurt her, but he couldn''t let her off easy after she tried to rob him like this.


    William seemed to be the one at the biggest disadvantage now. Without the two assassinas, he had essentially become the primary target.


    "Even so, they didn''t deserve that!" Lyfenea screamed.


    With her dagger in hand, she charged toward the gang leader. With every step, black flowers materialized in the air, and her movements seemed to grow faster.


    Her footsteps made no sound, and it was as if her body had become invisible, blending into the surroundings.


    Yet, despite her extraordinary movements, the gang leader remained completely calm.


    Lyfenea managed to circle around and attack him from behind without him noticing, but something very strange happened. The energy emanating from the book moved on its own, transforming into a magical shield that blocked Lyfenea''s attack.


    It was as if the energy had a will of its own, and the gang leader didn''t even need to lift a finger to activate it.


    "Nice try, but now you''re going to suffer. And you''re next, you bastard," the leader said, glaring at William.

 Chapter 156 - 156: Unexpected Friendship

    The gang leader made his first move against Lyfenea. He wanted to make her suffer, but he obviously wouldn''t kill her or cause any permanent damage.


    He wanted to teach her a lesson and force her to rejoin the gang¡ªor at least imprison her.


    The relationship between the two was strange. Despite being family, they didn''t get along well. It was painfully obvious.


    William wasn''t sure what to do. Should he jump into their fight right away or wait for the right moment to strike?


    ''I think I have to attack now,'' he thought. ''In the end, he''ll come for me after dealing with her, so there''s no escaping this.''


    This was his best chance, especially considering all the other sub-leaders were outside. William wanted to face the leader alone. It wouldn''t be easy as it was, let alone with the others helping him.


    He drew his demonic sword, Asura, which had been hidden. The black blade had an unusual glow that caught the gang leader''s attention. He looked at William''s sword with a different expression.


    William noticed the look but didn''t let it stop him. With the sword in hand, he activated his body-enhancement skills.


    "Swiftfoot, Enhanced Strength!"


    As much as he wanted to learn new skills, these were the ones he had at his disposal for now. His strength increased by about 30 points, and his agility and movement speed also received a boost.


    With his natural attributes already higher than those of "normal people," William felt incredibly powerful. He channeled strength into his legs and charged toward the gang leader, who was busy using his magic against Lyfenea.


    William''s movements were swift, and in less than three seconds, he was in front of the leader, who was caught off guard. Everything happened so fast that it was impossible for him to react.


    Well, impossible if he had to react. Once again, the energy around his body moved on its own, blocking the attack as if it had a mind of its own. The impact of William''s sword hitting the magical shield forced him to stumble back, losing his balance.


    The leader seized the moment, creating a shadowy hammer and slamming it into William''s ribs! The attack landed, sending William flying into one of the pillars in the room.


    The blow hurt, breaking a few ribs. At that moment, William realized just how strong the gang leader was and that defeating him wouldn''t be easy.


    Lyfenea tried once more to attack her brother with her dagger, but just like William''s attack, hers had no effect. No matter what she tried, it was impossible to land a hit.


    The gang leader pinned Lyfenea to one of the pillars in the room, just as he had done with the other two assassins.


    "I told you you didn''t stand a chance, but for now, you''ll stay there," he said. "I''ll deal with this one first."


    He turned to William, locking eyes with him. "Mind telling me what kind of sword that is?"


    "I don''t understand," William replied. "It''s just a normal sword. Why the interest?" sea??h th§× Novel?ire(.)ne*t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    The gang leader narrowed his eyes. "I think we should talk privately. What do you say?"


    He made a gesture with his hands, and Lyfenea''s head was encased in shadows, rendering her unable to see or hear what was happening.


    "Now she won''t know what we''re talking about," the leader said. "I''ll be direct with you. I know that sword of yours has demonic origins."


    That caught William off guard. How did the gang leader know that?


    "I think you''re mistaken," William said. "It''s just a normal sword."


    "Cut the crap. This book I have is also a demonic artifact, so I know what I''m talking about."


    The situation had completely changed. William had no idea the artifact he was after¡ªthe one he was trying to retrieve for the lord¡ªwas demonic. How was that possible?


    It was too much of a coincidence.


    "And why are we still talking?" William asked. "If you''re interested in this sword, fight me to the death."


    The gang leader had already demonstrated surprising strength in combat, and William wasn''t as confident he could win, even using everything in his arsenal. He was already looking for a way out, but it seemed impossible.


    The leader laughed. "I think we can work together, my friend. How about it? If you help me, I can guarantee you a copy of this book. It contains demonic magic¡ªat least some of it. This is Volume 1."


    William wasn''t sure what to do but decided to ask more about the help the leader needed and whether it would benefit him. "What do you want?"


    "I''ll be brief. This book is Volume 1, and I want the other volumes. But that''s not all¡ªI want to infuse myself with demonic lineage. I believe it''s possible because I have an affinity for elements similar to those of demons, but I''m not part of their lineage."


    "There''s a part of our continent where demons once lived, and there are places we can access with your lineage to find these things¡ªbooks, artifacts, and more information about your lineage. How about you help me? Together, we can go there and split whatever we find."


    The offer was somewhat intriguing, but there was one problem: William was essentially being forced into this. In this situation, he knew it would be very difficult to defeat the gang leader, meaning he was being coerced into working with him.


    If he refused, he would certainly lose the fight, become a prisoner, and be tortured until he agreed to help. The situation wasn''t easy.


    "And how can I guarantee you''ll hold up your end of the deal? I also want more information about demons, and these books would be important to me too," William said.


    "How about I give you a copy of this book and we make a blood contract? If I don''t hold up my end, I die. Fair enough?" the leader said. "I don''t consider myself a bandit anymore, and I''ve wanted to leave this gang for a long time. Your appearance here was exactly what I needed to move forward with my plan."


    The gang leader wanted to search for more information about demons, and he knew what to do. However, without someone with demonic lineage, it was impossible to enter those places. He was thrilled after meeting William.


    Now, William felt he might have a chance to pursue the knowledge he was so eager to obtain.


    "If you''re serious about this, then we can talk. But how exactly do you plan to infuse demonic lineage into your body?" William asked.


    "Apparently, there''s something in the place we''re going to access that can grant me demonic lineage. From what I''ve researched, it was left behind to ensure the lineage never completely died out."


    Asura, his demonic sword, spoke in William''s mind. "He''s telling the truth. That place really exists. I know this because I have some memories about it. And here''s an interesting piece of information: the demons left these kinds of places in multiple parts of the world, not just on this continent."


    William felt more confident that the leader was telling the truth. "We can talk. But can you leave Lyfenea out of this and let her return to her shop? And what do you plan to do with the gang?"


    "Honestly, I don''t care about this gang anymore. I''m going to disband it and leave. How about we meet in the city in three days? Before that, I''ll give you a copy of the book for you to use."


    "That works."


    The leader then dispelled the magic restraining Lyfenea. She fell to her knees and looked at her brother, who now seemed to be on friendly terms with William.


    "What the hell happened?" she asked.


    "Nothing that concerns you. You can leave, and if you want, take some treasures with you. I don''t mind. This friend of yours and I will be leaving in a few days."


    "Come with me, please," the leader said to William.


    The two went to another room. It was the leader''s personal office, and no one else was allowed inside.


    "I''m going to perform the magic to clone this artifact," he said. "It won''t be made of the same ancient material, but it''ll be the same in essence. You can compare the two afterward."


    The leader performed a very unusual spell. It required preparation, including drawing several symbols on the ground and gathering specific ingredients. Not only that, but it also demanded a significant amount of power¡ªand William''s power as well.


    "One of the reasons this book is special is precisely because of the demonic energy it contains. So, we''ll use a bit of your power to give the copy its essence," he explained.


    The two worked together for about half an hour. In the end, they placed the original book in the center of the symbols, and together, they chanted incantations in a language William recognized: the language of demons.

 Chapter 157 - 157: New Spell, Passive, and Current Attributes

    [Tome of Sahrovar Volume 1 Acquired]


    When the ritual to create the book was complete, the System even sent a notification. This meant the artifact was truly special and that the ritual had been a success. William was thrilled.


    Not only that, but he noticed the copy was indeed identical to the original tome the gang leader possessed. Even the energy emanating from the book was the same. The only difference was that the original looked ancient, while William''s copy was brand new.


    "Looks like the ritual was a success," the leader said. "This is a difficult ritual to perform, but it''s used frequently. Most libraries do this to ensure that valuable books never go out of circulation and that people have access to knowledge."


    "You seem pretty intelligent for someone who runs a gang of bandits," William commented.


    The leader laughed. "I didn''t have a choice about getting involved in crime. My parents were in this life, and they dragged me into it. But after I acquired this book, I learned a lot, and now I can leave this life behind. And before you ask, our gang never killed civilians. We only stole and killed rival gang members when absolutely necessary."


    William wasn''t sure if he felt better hearing that or if it didn''t change his opinion. But there was no escaping the fact that the two of them would now be working together, and perhaps trying to understand each other was the best course of action.


    "My name is Kier," the leader said.


    "William. I hope we can work together without any betrayal," William replied.


    "Don''t worry. I''ll prepare the contract and show it to you before we leave, so you can read everything and feel confident you''re not being cheated. But I''ll need about three days to get everything ready. You can head back to the city if you want¡ªI''ll need to go there anyway. Stay at the Honeycomb Tavern."


    Kier had to go to the city to gather supplies and mounts for the journey to their destination, which was VERY far away.


    "Alright. I''ll wait for you there."


    William left the bandits'' hideout. Lyfenea was with him. In the end, her brother, Kier, had given her a few artifacts to sell for some money and let her go without any retaliation.


    Despite their complicated relationship, the two loved each other, and deep down, Lyfenea had always wanted to pull her brother out of the world of crime. She was happy that he had finally left it behind!


    But she was still incredibly curious about what her brother and William were planning. During the journey back to the city, she kept asking repeatedly about what the two had discussed.


    William, of course, wasn''t stupid. He didn''t say a word about it and did everything he could to avoid the subject.


    "You know we can''t talk about it. If we could, we would''ve told you already, right?" William said.


    "But can''t you give me a hint? Just one?"


    "No."


    Lyfenea was clearly frustrated, but she didn''t say or do anything extreme. Her only weapon against William was her relentless questioning, but even that didn''t last the entire trip. She eventually stopped asking.


    "How do you feel about your friends who died?" William asked her.


    It took her a few seconds to formulate a concrete answer, and it wasn''t what William expected. "We weren''t really friends¡ªmore like business partners. What happened to them was sad, but it doesn''t affect me deeply."


    "I see."


    The journey back to the city took a while. Perhaps Lyfenea''s constant talking made the trip feel longer and more tedious. William was relieved when they finally returned to the city.


    The two parted ways, and William headed to the tavern Kier had mentioned. It was one of the best taverns in the city, and while it was a bit more expensive to stay there, it wasn''t a problem for William.


    ''I''ll only be here for a few days, so I have enough money...'' he thought.


    And so, three days passed. William spent his time resting, eating, and, of course, reading his new book, which contained several spells and abilities that were perfect for him!


    All the spells in the book were related to the fire and dark fire elements, which, according to Asura, were the ideal elements for William due to his demonic lineage.


    And, well, Asura was right. After William tried to learn the first spell¡ªa simple black fireball¡ªhe received a notification from the System.


    [Black Flame Mastery (Rank S): Your demonic blood grants you +25% learning rate for dark fire element spells, +25% power for dark fire element spells, and -10% mana cost for dark fire element spells.]


    He had gained an incredible passive ability! One that would undoubtedly help him a lot. Not to mention, in just three days, he had managed to learn his first spell!


    [Black Fireball (Rank A): Allows the user to launch a Black fireball. Damage, size, and speed depend on the user''s mastery.]


    [Mana Cost: 30]


    By the end of it, William''s current stats were impressive!


    Name: William Velmont


    Level: 27


    Class: None


    Attributes:


    Strength: 88


    Agility: 102


    Stamina: 74


    Intelligence: 470


    Mana: 280


    Demonic Energy: 120


    His Intelligence attribute was the highest because he was a mage, meaning he gained more of this attribute with each level. Additionally, his Magic Mind passive, an extremely powerful and difficult-to-learn ability, gave him a significant boost.


    His demonic energy wasn''t as high. William still wasn''t sure how to increase it significantly, but it was gradually growing, which he took as a good sign.


    William felt like he was finally growing stronger. The only thing he was missing was a class, which he could have obtained upon reaching level 25. However, he was far from any magic academy and had no one to help him with the process.


    ''No need to rush...''


    Level 25 was the minimum requirement to obtain a class, but it was common for people to acquire theirs later. William was eager to get his class but wasn''t worried about the delay.


    Finally, on the third day, Kier showed up. William met him at the Honeycomb Tavern where he was staying, and to his surprise, Kier came more than prepared.


    "I''ve got two flying mounts waiting outside," Kier said.


    "I thought we''d be traveling through the desert on the ground," William replied.


    Kier laughed. "Of course not. Flying mounts are expensive but incredibly useful, especially in our case. You know our destination is far, and traveling by land would take forever."


    "Yeah, I know."


    "Let''s grab some supplies before we leave," Kier said. "I''ve got this artifact that can store a lot of things."


    William was impressed by the artifact! It was similar to the one that held Jinra''s treasure. He knew such artifacts were extremely rare and expensive, so how did Kier have one?


    "Before you ask, I didn''t steal this. I acquired it during one of my recent explorations," Kier explained. sea??h th§× N??elFir§×.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "I didn''t say anything."


    The two bought food and water. The tents they''d need for occasional camping were things Kier already had, so there was no need to purchase more.


    After gathering everything, they left the city and headed to the mounts waiting for them outside.


    They were two beautiful birds with red feathers. Their size was impressive.


    "These are firebirds," Kier said. "Some legends say they''re descendants of the phoenix, but I don''t know if that''s true. I''ve never seen a phoenix to ask."


    Kier explained that the birds could withstand extreme heat, making them ideal for traveling over the desert. They could also produce heat, which would be immensely helpful when they reached their destination, as it was a very cold place.


    ''Seems like he already had everything prepared for the trip,'' William thought.


    It was too much of a coincidence for Kier to have the perfect mounts ready so quickly. It was obvious he had been planning this journey for a while, just waiting for the right travel companion¡ªespecially one with demonic lineage.


    "Ah, I almost forgot. Here," Kier said, handing the blood contract to William.


    It wasn''t very long¡ªjust a single page¡ªbut William read it carefully to avoid any pitfalls.


    According to the contract, neither of them could betray the other during the journey, and they would share all the knowledge they acquired. In other words, if they found any books, they would make copies, just as they had done with the previous one.


    Overall, it seemed like a fair contract. The best part was that the contract would only dissolve after they left the area, and a significant distance was required. William felt confident that Kier wouldn''t try anything immediately after they left, as it would be impossible while the contract was still in effect.


    Stuart, William''s magical rat, also reviewed the contract and confirmed everything was in order before the two signed it and set off on their journey. They mounted the firebirds and flew toward the forbidden area of the continent¡ªthe place demons had once called home long ago.

 Chapter 158 - 158: Ambush

    Even while flying, traveling across the desert was no easy feat. The wind hitting William''s face was scorching hot, and the view from above wasn''t particularly beautiful. All he could see was sand, sand, and more sand.


    From time to time, they spotted groups of people traveling through the desert. Most of them were riding camels or desert hounds¡ªboth magical creatures.


    There were also oases, places where they could stop to rest before continuing their journey. William and Kier took advantage of these oases whenever they could.


    They made sure to bathe every time they stopped at one. The oases usually had a central water area where people could wash up.


    "To think we still have so much ground to cover," Kier said. "That place is really far."


    The two had been traveling for about three days, and it would take a while longer to reach their destination. But at least they''d only be in the desert for another seven to ten days, which was a relief.


    "Yeah, really. The good thing is that the journey is pretty safe," William replied. "Since we''re flying, there''s no danger, and we can always stop at one of these places."


    Kier looked proud when he heard that. "And who made that possible? Yours truly, with my mounts. You should thank me."


    William rolled his eyes. "Please. I could''ve gotten something like this if I wanted to."


    The two laughed. During their time traveling together, they had talked a lot and grown somewhat closer¡ªsomething William hadn''t expected.


    Before speaking with Kier, William had believed he was just a bloodthirsty thief, but that wasn''t the case. Kier rarely killed people¡ªWilliam believed he had killed more than Kier¡ªand he had only entered the world of crime because his parents were in it and forced him into it.


    "I''m really glad my sister left the life of crime, and now I''m finally leaving too. I feel freer, you know? I can go anywhere without having to constantly hide to avoid getting caught," Kier said.


    "But you know exploring that place won''t be easy, right?" William reminded him. "I''m new here, but from what I''ve heard, that area is forbidden because it''s so dangerous. Do we really stand a chance of coming out alive?"


    This was something William had been wondering for a while. Was it really worth trying to obtain all the demonic knowledge in that cursed valley? Were there no easier places for him to start?


    Despite his incredible progress, William knew his level of strength was still relatively low, and he had a lot of room for improvement¡ªespecially compared to the other heroes who were receiving training from the best instructors and using top-tier equipment.


    "I think we can do it," Kier said. "We''ll proceed cautiously and scout the area thoroughly before doing anything reckless. From what I know, there''s a village nearby that attracts adventurers who want to explore that area. Maybe we can gather some useful information there before blindly charging in."


    "Seems like you''ve done a lot of research on this, huh?" William said.


    Kier laughed. "Of course. I''m not an idiot."


    The two spent the night at the oasis. The only thing they had to worry about was their mounts. The fear was that someone might try to steal them, but the birds Kier had brought always made noise around strangers, so nothing happened.


    Before the sun rose, the two were already back in the air, heading toward their destination. After a few more days, they finally left the desert behind.


    The scenery changed completely. Gone was the endless expanse of sand, replaced by lush green forests, towering mountains, valleys, rivers, and lakes. It was breathtaking.


    William was amazed by the stark contrast in landscapes. How could the same continent be so different? What had happened in the middle of the continent to create that desert?


    That story about it being the result of a battle doesn''t seem so far-fetched after all... he thought.


    "Now that we''re out of the desert, we need to be more careful," Kier said.


    "Why''s that?"


    "In the desert, most enemies were ground-based, but here there are plenty of flying beasts. So we need to be more cautious."


    Flying on a bird like this was great for speed, but it also meant drawing a lot more attention¡ªso there were both benefits and drawbacks.


    The two continued for a few hours after leaving the desert and made a stop on one of the mountains. Camping at the top was ideal since there weren''t many magical beasts around.


    In other words, it was much safer to camp there than near the road. Besides the beasts, they also had to worry about ill-intentioned people, who were common throughout the continent.


    William sat by the campfire, reading his new book. Kier was impressed by how quickly William was improving.


    "You''ve already mastered one spell and are moving on to the second. It took me much longer to get that good. Impressive," he said.


    "It''s nothing special," William replied. "But what about those shadow spells you were using? Are they in this book too?"


    "Yes, they are. The book is divided by elements, so you''ll find fire, dark fire, and shadow spells. From what I understand, these are the main elements demons used. Out of those, I''m best with shadow magic," Kier explained.


    He didn''t have a demonic lineage like William, so he didn''t have the talent for all the elements demons used. William believed Kier only had a natural affinity for shadow magic, which was why he excelled in it.


    "I see. And do you really think we''ll find those books? You said yourself that many adventurers go there. Isn''t there a chance someone already took them?" William asked.


    Kier nodded. "Yes, that''s true. But as I said, to access those books, you need someone with a demonic lineage, and I doubt anyone with that lineage has gone there. We have a good chance of finding them."


    Despite Kier''s optimism, William wasn''t feeling as confident. If those books had been there for years or even centuries, was it really possible that no one with a demonic lineage had shown up? That thought made William uneasy.


    But he had no choice but to go on this journey, so it was better to take the risk and see if they could find something useful. The worst that could happen was wasting some time.


    After eating the provisions they had brought and chatting for a while, they each retired to their tents. During the night, William received a notification from the System informing him that his temporal magic had recharged and he could use it at any time.


    ''Should I go back to the past?'' he wondered.


    In the end, he decided to postpone using it. His focus was on the mission, and they were getting close to their destination, so it was better to stay on track.


    The next day, they continued their journey. However, things didn''t go as planned. S~ea??h the novel(F~)ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    As Kier had mentioned earlier, flying beasts were common in the region, and they needed to be careful. But what they didn''t expect was to encounter other people riding those flying beasts.


    It was a group of mages. Kier recognized them and was visibly alarmed. "Those are slave traders! They''re strong and dangerous!"


    William didn''t like what he heard, and he liked what happened next even less. Kier moved closer to him and used a dagger to draw his blood, cutting his arm! The blood floated into a small glass vial.


    "What are you doing?" William demanded.


    "I''m taking your blood to access the place where the books are. Unfortunately, I''ll have to leave you here! No way we can take on these guys, and as much as I like you, I''d rather you get sold as a slave than me!"


    After saying this, Kier used a teleportation spell and vanished from sight. William was furious.


    Before he could do anything, the slave traders closed in and used a combined spell to create a magical barrier around him, trapping William. He wouldn''t be able to escape.


    Asura quickly spoke in his mind, "Put your blood on me. It''ll allow you to retain your consciousness within the sword as well."


    William didn''t understand why he should do that, but he decided to follow Asura''s advice. His blood was quickly absorbed by the sword, and the slave traders didn''t notice a thing.


    "Well, well, what do we have here? A young man with a sword that looks like it''s worth a fortune. Seems like it''s our lucky day," one of the mages said.


    They were all laughing and looking at William as if he was their prey. Things were not looking good for him.


    He even tried to use his spell to travel to the past, but it didn''t work. It was like the barrier they put around him was locking him in place.


    ''Damn it,'' he thought, ''I am fucked now, again!''


    Things were always hard for William. One of the mages got closer to him and placed something on his body. It was a seal restraining some of his abilities.


    "Now give me everything you have, and come with us," one of them said with a chilling smile.

 Chapter 159 - 159: Sold

    William didn''t know what to do in that situation. Luckily, most of his important items could be stored in his inventory, including the spatial bag he had taken from Jinra''s tomb.


    The only thing that remained outside was the Asura sword¡ªwhich, for some reason, couldn''t be stored in the inventory.


    Stuart was also unprotected, but that soon changed. He managed to enter Jinra''s spatial bag and stay safe inside, which was quite impressive.


    However, William still had to hand over his Asura sword to the slave traders.


    "This is going to fetch a good price," one of them said, laughing maniacally. "Not to mention, we''ll sell this guy too. He looks unusual¡ªI think he''ll be worth even more."


    They quickly noticed that William looked different from the other people in the region, which made sense since he was from another world and continent.


    For them, this was a great thing and one of the reasons they were so excited to see him.


    "What about the guy who was with him? Should we go after him?" one of them asked.


    "No way! He seemed really strong and already teleported far away. Let''s focus on this one," another replied.


    They removed the magical barrier surrounding William, but he still couldn''t do anything! The seal they had placed on his body restricted his mana usage, similar to what had been done to James, leaving him powerless!


    Of course, his body was still resilient and capable of facing some magical beasts without using magic, but taking on those slave traders without his full strength was impossible.


    William was shackled, and his mount was confiscated for sale as well. He was taken on one of the slave traders'' mounts¡ªa giant bat-like creature.


    ''What the hell! How am I going to get out of this?'' he thought.


    He could no longer communicate with Asura. Somehow, they had cut off their mental link. William suspected it was because of the seal on his body, but he wasn''t sure.


    They flew through the region, heading toward what seemed to be the slave traders'' base. It was a small fortress hidden deep in the forest, isolated from the rest of the world.


    "Get down!" one of them ordered William as they landed. He pushed William off the mount, causing him to fall face-first onto the ground.


    One of the slave traders shoved William into a room where he saw something shocking. There were several people locked in cells, all with the same seal as him! And they weren''t just humans¡ªthere were other races too!


    They stripped William of his clothes, giving him old, tattered ones, and threw him into a cell with four other people. The cell was filthy, with feces and urine in some corners.


    The other people in the cell were dirty, but William could tell they were beautiful¡ªjust mistreated by the slave traders.


    One of them was a woman with silver hair. She approached William to talk. "Hi, did you manage to alert anyone while you were being brought here? Is someone coming to rescue us?"


    To her, William represented hope¡ªa chance that something might happen to get them out of this terrible situation.


    With a heavy heart, William replied, "I don''t think anyone''s coming to save us."


    The woman began to cry. William thought about comforting her and offering some words of encouragement, but he decided to stay reserved and keep to himself.


    He looked around and noticed that none of the slave traders were watching him, so he took the opportunity to pull out the blood contract he had signed with Kier.


    That''s when he noticed the contract was blank! Kier had tricked him! Not only him but also Stuart, who had a high level of magical perception. This only showed how skilled Kier was, and William had been foolish to trust him.


    "Damn it!" William shouted, punching the dirty floor of the cell.


    Immediately, one of the slave traders appeared and beat him, landing several punches to his face and ribs.


    "Shut up! You''re not allowed to scream here!"


    With that seal, William felt weak, but there was nothing he could do. The best course of action was to accept his situation and not resist the slave traders, as it could lead to worse consequences¡ªmaybe even death.


    William spent two days in that cell with the others. During that time, they spoke little, but it was enough for William to understand their fate.


    Soon, they would be taken out of the cells and brought to an auction where wealthy individuals would come to see and buy the slaves they wanted. William was "lucky" to only spend two days in the cell before being taken out.


    ''If I had to stay in this hellhole any longer, I''d lose my mind,'' he thought.


    However, leaving the cell didn''t mean things would get better. One of the slave traders opened the door and said, "You lot, come with me."


    William and the others were among the slaves chosen for the auction. Some remained in the cells¡ªthey weren''t as in demand or frequently sold.


    This time, they traveled by land, locked in a cage being pulled by a carriage. It was far from comfortable, and there was barely enough space for everyone.


    "They''re taking us to the auction," one of the prisoners said. "I hope a not-so-cruel noble buys me..."


    The prisoners were all anxious because they didn''t know what their fate would be. William felt the same way.


    ''Even if a less cruel noble buys me, I''ll still have to obey, and they probably won''t remove this seal...''


    The situation was far from easy. William''s mind kept drifting to Kier. Would he be able to enter the place where the demonic books were kept with just his blood?


    Had Kier planned to betray William from the very beginning, only needing his blood all along?


    There were so many unanswered questions, and the only thing William could do was endure the cell and use the bucket when necessary...


    A full week passed before they reached their destination. The destination was a mansion located outside the city. It was where nobles from the region and beyond would gather to see and buy the slaves on offer.


    Holding such an auction inside the city was illegal due to certain laws, but buying slaves wasn''t prohibited. So, all they had to do was hold the event outside the city.


    William and the other prisoners were taken inside the mansion¡ªwhich was completely empty¡ªand given baths and better clothes by the servants.


    The idea was to improve their appearance to fetch higher prices at the auction. To achieve this, they even cut the prisoners'' hair and shaved their beards. William had grown a fairly long beard over the past 20 days.


    In the end, their appearance changed drastically before they were put up for sale. The auction began, and several prisoners were sold.


    The price varied depending on the prisoner. The silver-haired woman was beautiful, and her hair color was rare, so she was sold for an exorbitant price.


    William wasn''t much different. He was valued for other reasons.


    "A strong, healthy young man capable of performing various manual tasks without issue. Starting bid: 5,000 gold coins!" S~ea??h the N?vel(F)ire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    The prices were outrageous, but these people had money to spare. Several bids were made, and in the end, William was bought by the same noble who had purchased the silver-haired woman.


    Because of this, the noble could no longer participate in the auction, as he had to leave the good opportunities for others. It was one of the auction''s rules, and everyone had agreed to it beforehand.


    The noble in question was a young-looking man with long hair and pale, almost corpse-like skin.


    "Come with me. Let''s leave. There''s no reason to stay here," the noble said.


    William and the silver-haired woman followed him¡ªboth still shackled and sealed.


    Outside the mansion, they saw the noble''s carriage. It wasn''t an ordinary carriage¡ªit could fly! It was the first time William had seen something like that.


    This only showed how wealthy the man was.


    "Get in and stay quiet," the noble said.


    They sat in the carriage and flew away.


    The view from above was stunning, but it didn''t change the fact that they had been sold to a nobleman, and their fate was uncertain.


    At least during the journey, the nobleman allowed them to sleep and provided them with food and drinks, ensuring their well-being.


    Would this continue, or was he simply being kind during the trip?And what a trip it was!


    William spent days in that carriage, and at one point, he decided to talk to the nobleman to find out where they were going.


    "Do you know the forbidden region of the continent? Well, my family''s house is in a region near there, a place full of snow. So, it''s not that close, it takes about a week with a flying mount," the nobleman said.


    William couldn''t hide his joy.


    ''At least I''ll be closer to the region I wanted to go to... Maybe I can escape and go there!'' he thought.

 Chapter 160 - 160: Arriving at Black Pine Manor

    Days passed until they finally arrived at the noble''s home. The place was located on top of a mountain, and everything around it was covered in snow. It was exactly as the noble had described.


    William felt like he was back at the Snowpeak Mountain magic academy. Not because of the structure itself¡ªthey were very different¡ªbut because of the snow. It made him think of his old companions and how much simpler life had been back then.


    ''I need to focus on the present and stop dwelling on the past!'' he thought.


    "This is my family''s mansion," the noble said as they stepped out of the carriage. "We are the Black Pine family, and this is Black Pine Manor."


    The noble''s family had lived in the region for a very, very long time. The forest surrounding the mansion was filled with black trees, which was why the family had changed their name over the years.


    William found the place quite beautiful. It reminded him of the resorts he used to see online back on Earth. But the size itself didn''t impress him much, as he had seen many grand things in his life.


    The woman with him, however, seemed more impressed by the place.


    ''She probably hasn''t traveled much in her life,'' William thought.


    The noble who had bought them was named Jonas, and he wasn''t the current head of the family. That was his father. Jonas would take over when his father was no longer able to lead, but that would still take a few years.


    However, even without being in charge, he was already learning a lot from his father and was seen as more important since everyone knew he would eventually take over. This extended to the other families living nearby. Everyone wanted to please Jonas, as it could mean receiving "blessings" when he became the leader.


    "Come with me. I''ll show you where you''ll be staying," Jonas said.


    William was already expecting the worst. They entered through the main gate, where a guard greeted them with a smile and kind words¡ªwell, he greeted Jonas. The guard simply looked at William and the woman without saying a word.


    They passed through the mansion''s garden. The garden had seen better days. Due to the snow, most of the flowers were dead, and only a few managed to survive. This didn''t last all year. During spring and summer, it was common to see more flowers in the area.


    Jonas led them inside the mansion, where William saw the other staff members working there, as well as other members of Jonas''s family. Just like with the guard, no one spoke to them¡ªonly to Jonas.


    "Master," one of the maids said, "we''ve been eagerly awaiting your return."


    "I''m back now," Jonas said with a smile.


    All the people working at the mansion for the Black Pine family seemed to like them a lot. William could tell. However, William and the beautiful woman with him weren''t there to be employees. No. They were there because they had been bought as slaves!


    This meant they wouldn''t receive the same treatment as the others. But, surprisingly, things were better than William had expected. Jonas took them to their rooms. Each had their own room, and although small, the rooms were tidy and clean.


    After what William had endured in the slave traders'' cell, he had expected something similar, but that wasn''t the case. Things were a bit better.


    "You can stay in your rooms today to rest, but tomorrow the work begins," Jonas said before leaving.


    The woman with William was named Wendy. "This seems too good to be true," she said. "I have a feeling the work we''ll start tomorrow is going to be terrible."


    "I think it''s going to suck too, but we can''t be too negative," William replied. "Let''s hope this noble Jonas is a good person."


    Wendy didn''t seem convinced, as she went to her room without saying another word, her face still somewhat sad. William didn''t believe his own words either. He always expected the worst.


    William also went to his room. Inside, there was a bed, a fireplace, and a small table with a chair. The room was so small that everything seemed cramped. It was even hard to walk around without bumping into something.


    The fireplace wasn''t there because Jonas wanted to give luxuries to his new slaves. It was necessary¡ªotherwise, William would freeze to death, and Jonas wouldn''t want to waste his money.


    William lay down on his bed, staring at the ceiling and thinking about life.


    ''What am I going to do now?'' he wondered.


    He didn''t know what would happen to him the next day, and that thought was somewhat terrifying. For him, training so hard in life to become a mage, only to be unable to use mana because of the seal placed on him, was simply awful.


    William eventually fell asleep after tossing and turning for a while. The warmth of the blankets in the freezing cold was impossible to resist.


    He woke up in the middle of the night to someone knocking on his door. It was one of Jonas''s maids, bringing him new clothes.


    "These clothes are warmer for you," she said, then added with a look of disdain, "I don''t know why Master Jonas is treating slaves so well. It''s like he''s treating you better than the staff."


    She then threw the clothes onto William''s bed. "And there''s food for you in the kitchen. Go get it, or you''ll sleep on an empty stomach."


    Everything happened so fast that William barely had time to process it. In the end, he tried to forget the hatred the maid had shown him.


    He changed into the new clothes, which were lined with animal fur to ensure he wouldn''t freeze. After that, William headed to the kitchen to get something to eat before going back to sleep.


    The problem was that the mansion was enormous, and he had no idea where the kitchen was. Before leaving, he knocked on Wendy''s door, which was next to his. When she answered, William noticed she was also wearing new clothes, likely given to her just like him.


    "Did they call you to the kitchen too?" Wendy asked. "From what I understood, there''s something for us to eat there."


    "Yeah, that''s right. Want to come with me to find the kitchen? I have no idea where it is."


    "Of course!" S§×ar?h the NovelFire.net* website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Wendy seemed a bit more cheerful than the last time William had spoken to her¡ªa few hours earlier¡ªand that was a good sign. Maybe the new clothes and food had won her over.


    The two walked together through the mansion''s wide corridors, admiring the paintings, sculptures, and flowers that adorned the place. The walls were made of excellent materials.


    They encountered some of the staff, but when they asked about the kitchen, no one answered them. They didn''t even say hello. It was as if William and Wendy didn''t exist.


    This made them feel sad, but neither of them confronted the staff. They searched for the kitchen on their own and eventually found it.


    The kitchen was quite large, with multiple ovens, pots for making soup, and a well-stocked pantry. Many people lived in the mansion, so they needed a lot of food daily to keep everyone well-fed.


    One of the cooks saw William and Wendy and said, "Here''s your food."


    She handed them two bowls of soup. The soup wasn''t watery¡ªit was hearty, filled with vegetables and meat. It was better than William had expected.


    The two sat at one of the wooden tables in the kitchen and ate their dinner.


    "Why does it feel like they hate us?" Wendy asked.


    William looked around and noticed some hostile glances, but when he confronted those people, they turned away, unable to meet his gaze.


    "I have no idea, but I feel like we''ll find out soon. Maybe it''s just because they don''t like slaves."


    After eating, they placed their bowls in the sink and left. No one forced them to clean up, so they didn''t. If the kitchen staff had treated them well, William might have considered helping, but after all that hostility? No way.


    Wendy went straight to her room after eating, while William wanted to find a bathroom and took the opportunity to explore the mansion. It was nighttime, which meant most of the staff and Jonas''s family were asleep.


    It was the perfect time to walk around the mansion and try to learn more about its layout. William wandered through the now darker corridors. The silence was deafening, and the only people he saw moving around were the guards.


    "What are you doing walking around so late at night? You know that''s forbidden," a guard said.


    "I''m just looking for the bathroom. None of the staff would tell me where it is."


    William had already found the bathroom¡ªhe was just using it as an excuse.


    "Come with me," the guard said, "I''ll show you where it is."

 Chapter 161 - 161: Tough Job and Asura is Back

    The guard showed William where the bathroom was. He still tried to explore more of the mansion to understand why Jonas had bought him and Wendy, but he couldn''t figure anything out, which was a shame.


    In the end, he went to the bathroom, used it, and returned to his room.


    On the way back, the mansion felt even emptier, and the only sound William could hear was the wind hitting the windows. S~ea??h the N?vel(F)ire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    One of the windows opened as he was heading back to his room, letting in a freezing gust of wind that sent shivers down his spine.


    "Chilly," William muttered.


    He walked over to close the window. There were no staff around, and William felt it wasn''t a good idea to leave it open.


    The last thing he wanted was trouble, and this could certainly lead to some.


    As he started closing the window, William looked outside and saw something curious. The window faced the back of the mansion¡ªa part he hadn''t seen yet¡ªand there, he noticed some lights on.


    William could see clearly thanks to his enhanced vision¡ªa gift from the strange snake''s lineage.


    ''What the hell is going on over there?'' he wondered.


    The light was coming from a small shack. It was strange to see someone out there so late at night, especially considering everything was covered in snow.


    ''Is that where some of the guards sleep?''


    Several possibilities ran through William''s mind as he tried to make sense of what he was seeing, but in the end, he couldn''t find an answer.


    The only way to find out more would be to leave the mansion and go out there, and he didn''t want to do that. At least, not now. William closed the window, returned to his room, and went to sleep.


    The next morning, William woke up to knocking on his door. He expected to see one of the maids¡ªmaybe even the same one who had treated him poorly¡ªbut it was none other than Jonas!


    "Get up and eat something in the kitchen. After that, meet me outside," Jonas said, then left.


    In that brief conversation, William could already tell that Jonas wasn''t treating him as kindly as he had during the journey to the mansion.


    ''He was just trying to make us feel comfortable¡­ We''re slaves, after all¡­''


    William did as Jonas instructed. Wendy also went to eat, but unlike him, she was called to go somewhere else.


    "Any idea what we''ll have to do?" William asked.


    "No clue. But it''s definitely going to be exhausting, and maybe even dangerous," Wendy replied.


    William nodded in agreement. "We''ll definitely be doing the things they don''t want to do."


    After eating bread, fruit, and eggs, William left the kitchen and went to meet Jonas outside.


    Jonas was waiting in front of the mansion, but that wasn''t their destination.


    "Come with me," Jonas said.


    They walked around the mansion¡ªand this made William curious about the lights he had seen the night before.


    William pointed to the shack he had noticed. "What''s that cabin over there?"


    "Nothing you need to know about, and don''t even think about going there, or you''ll face the consequences," Jonas said sharply. "Our destination is over here."


    The place they went to had another shack¡ªmuch smaller¡ªfilled with tools.


    And near this shack, on a dirt path, was the entrance to a mine. Jonas handed William a pickaxe and a sack to carry the mined materials.


    "Your job is simple: mine mana stones. You''ll do this all morning, take a break for lunch, and then continue until early evening," Jonas said.


    It was utterly inhumane. However, William couldn''t even complain. Unfortunately, his fate was no longer in his hands.


    Jonas left. William, with the pickaxe in hand, entered the mine.


    Inside, he found other people! There were three men there, all dirty and thin. They were also slaves working in the mines.


    Wendy wasn''t there, and William already knew why: the grueling labor of mining was simply too exhausting!


    He could tell just by looking at the men present. They were all malnourished, filthy, and had empty looks in their eyes.


    However, there was something they all had in common: they all had the same seal on their bodies as William.


    In other words, these slaves weren''t ordinary people¡ªthey were mages! They could be as strong as William, or maybe even stronger?


    This gave him a glimmer of hope.


    ''Can I get them to work with me to remove the seals?'' William thought.


    "Hey, guys," William said.


    None of the three men responded. It was as if they hadn''t even heard him. William tried again, and one of the men finally replied.


    "Listen, kid, I feel bad for you ending up here so young, but since you''re here, you need to learn how things work. Less talking, more working. Otherwise, one of the guards will show up and beat you."


    After that, no one spoke to each other. They were all mining mana stones, and they made it clear that William should do the same before something happened to him.


    William went deeper into the mine, away from the others. He just wanted to be alone.


    The walls, ceiling, and sometimes even the floor of the mine were filled with veins of blue stones¡ªthe mana stones.


    This mine had A LOT of mana stones.


    ''It must have been discovered recently, and now Jonas and his family want to claim all the wealth¡­''


    William believed it had been discovered recently because of the sheer amount of mana stones. If it were an older mine, it would have been nearly depleted by now.


    But that didn''t make much sense either. The mine was located right behind Jonas''s mansion. How could he or his family have taken so long to find it?


    Everything was very strange, but William could only focus on mining and stop thinking about these things. With the pickaxe in hand and the sack by his side, he began to mine.


    The good thing was that even though he was inside a mine¡ªwhere it was supposed to be quite hot¡ªthe temperature was actually bearable.


    William also felt that his much stronger body compared to normal mages gave him an advantage down there.


    His mana was blocked, but his physical strength was still intact, which meant he didn''t tire as easily while mining.


    In fact, he noticed that his strength made it easier to extract the mana stones. And on the very first day, he already came up with a plan.


    ''If I mine too much and bring back a lot of mana stones, they''ll expect more from me. So, it''s better to match the others'' output¡­'' he thought.


    Since it was his first day, he didn''t have a clear idea of how much he should bring. He mined for about two hours, filled his sack with a good amount of mana stones, and then sat down to rest.


    Thanks to his System inventory, he was able to pull out the book he had been studying and started reading. However, since his mana was blocked, practicing magic wasn''t very useful, so he put the book away.


    When it was time for lunch, William passed by the other men and checked how many stones they had collected to get an idea of how much he should work.


    From what he could tell, the amount was similar, but those men had started mining a bit earlier. This meant William would have to slow down his pace.


    ''This means I''ll have a lot of free time down here, but for what?''


    That was still a mystery to him. He and the other miners went to the kitchen to grab something to eat.


    There, William ran into Wendy again. She already looked tired, but nothing too extreme.


    "What kind of work are you doing?" William asked.


    "I''m responsible for cleaning the outside of the mansion and working in the greenhouse where they grow food and some medicinal herbs. What about you?" Wendy replied.


    That work sounded like a dream compared to what William had to do.


    "I''m stuck mining mana stones like crazy in the mine behind the mansion¡­" William said.


    Wendy felt a little sorry for him. She placed a hand on his shoulder, gave him a smile, but didn''t say anything.


    Unfortunately, she had no way to help him.


    William ate his lunch as quickly as possible, thinking he could use the time to explore the mansion a bit before heading back to the mine. But, unfortunately, that didn''t work out.


    "Done eating? Back to work," Jonas said as he passed by.


    Next time, William knew it would be better to take as long as possible to finish his meal¡­


    He returned to the mines once again, and started mining again. This time, he went a little slower, and finished his job hours before his shift ended.


    But what could he do with his free time? Well, there was something. Asura''s voice ringed inside his mind, which was odd considering the sword was far gone!


    "Can you hear me?"

 Chapter 162 - 162: Becoming a Sword

    William was very surprised to hear Asura''s voice again. He knew the same slave traders who had captured him had also taken his sword and surely sold it to someone.


    "How are we talking like this? I thought the seal had cut off our connection," William said mentally.


    "Yes, it did, and that''s why I asked you to put your blood on the sword. Now you can talk to me."


    "That''s great, but where the hell are you? I''m stuck at the end of the world here, working in a mine, mining mana stones¡­"


    As much as talking to Asura was a great thing, William still had no idea if it would help him in any way.


    Maybe it would help with the loneliness and give him someone to talk to, but what he needed was a way to escape, not just chat.


    "Really? What a situation¡­ Well, I''m far away too. I ended up being sold to a wealthy merchant who lives in a village. Can you believe it?"


    "Wow¡­"


    "Yeah, anyway, I have a way to help you. How about you take control of the sword? Do you have any free time there?"


    William did have some free time since he could mine the stones pretty quickly.


    "Yeah, I have some free time. But I''m not sure what you''re trying to do."


    Asura then explained. "Since I''m far from you, our connection is weak, and I''m almost forced to hibernate again. So, you''ll become the sword, not me. I want you to take over the sword''s consciousness during your free time!"


    "That way, you can talk to the person who bought me and try to influence them. If you can transfer your demonic energy to the user, well, then maybe you can get help to get out of there."


    The whole situation was quite complex, and William wasn''t sure if he could pull off what Asura was proposing.


    Wouldn''t it be easier to spend his energy trying to escape in another way?


    William was afraid of being unable to remove the seal¡ªhe knew it was difficult because James had also received a seal¡ªand there was a chance he''d be stuck there as a slave for a long time, or maybe even forever!


    So, in reality, trying this crazy plan Asura suggested seemed interesting.


    "Alright, let''s do it. But how do I do it?"


    "I''ll share some of my memories with you, and you''ll take over. You''ll understand."


    At that moment, many images flooded William''s mind. It was as if he had lived those moments himself.


    The memories Asura shared were mostly related to some spells and rituals he could perform when taking over the sword''s consciousness.


    All of this would be used to gradually influence the sword''s wielder and, in the end, get them to come to William and rescue him.


    It seemed like a slow process, but an interesting one. After receiving all that information, William had to sit at the back of the mine and process everything.


    After that, he did something he never imagined he could do. His consciousness shifted to the sword, and he began to see things as if he were Asura!


    The vision wasn''t great, but he could hear everything clearly and sense mana much more easily than he could with his original body.


    The most impressive part was that his real body still retained some consciousness¡ªenough for him to perform basic tasks like mining mana stones and maybe even sleep!


    ''Where am I¡­?'' he thought.


    William was in a dark room, locked away. He noticed other things around him. They were other types of weapons.


    And then, the door to the room opened, and two people walked in. One was an older man, and the other was a young woman.


    "What do you have to show me, Dad?" she asked.


    The man seemed very excited. He was smiling broadly.


    He walked over to where William was¡ªor rather, where his sword form was. S~ea??h the N??eFire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    The man picked him up, removed the cloth covering him, and said, "I bought this impressive sword for you. It was a bit pricey, but it''ll be great for you."


    The young woman took the sword in her hands, and at that moment, William felt a strange sensation. It was odd for him to have someone holding his body, especially this beautiful woman with delicate hands.


    He wasn''t sure how he felt about it, but he stayed calm.


    "I love it! I really needed one, especially since I''m going to the battle academy in a few days. Thank you so much, Dad!"


    She gave her father a tight hug. William found the whole encounter very touching and beautiful.


    He didn''t do anything at first. As soon as the woman picked up William, he felt he could already send her mental messages.


    However, that would only scare her, and it wouldn''t be worth it. He needed to slowly build a bond with her before starting to influence her. At least, that''s how he planned to act.


    After all, time seemed to be the most precious thing he had at the moment, as he was completely trapped in the Black Pine family''s mansion¡­


    For hours, he simply watched the woman swing him back and forth, practicing on a wooden training dummy.


    The strangest part was not feeling any pain even when hitting the dummy¡ªwhich made sense since he was a sword¡ªand also feeling his body being swung around.


    William already knew the woman''s name was Victoria, and that she would soon leave the village to train in magic and close combat at a battle academy in a larger city.


    This battle academy seemed more focused on battle mages¡ªthe type William was.


    On this first day, William didn''t try to talk to her. After a while, he fully returned his consciousness to his body since he needed to bring back the mana stones.


    With the sack of mana stones in hand, he left the mine and found one of the guards outside. This guard was responsible for collecting the mana stones from all the slaves.


    The other men handed over their mana stones and left. William did the same.


    The amount of mana stones was similar.


    ''At least now I know how much I need to work daily,'' William thought.


    It was already getting dark when he finally left the mines. He and the other miners went to the kitchen to eat something.


    "You seem to have handled your first day well," one of them said.


    This miner seemed younger, and he didn''t have the same empty, defeated look as the other two.


    "Yeah, but it''s the first day, right? Of course, it''s easier to handle. How long have you been here?" William asked.


    "About a year," the man said. "Those two have been here for several years, I think. I''ve kind of accepted that I''ll never leave this place."


    "They''ve been mining for that long? The mine still seems so full."


    "Mining started a year ago. We all came together. But from what I know, they did other things before. Now, if you ask me what, I have no idea."


    William thought about asking his name, but the man stopped him. "Don''t say your old name. None of us have names anymore, unless Master Jonas gives you one. If you say your name here and they hear it, well, you''ll get beaten."


    That caught William off guard! He remembered he had shared his name with Wendy¡ªshe had done the same¡ªbut luckily, no one had heard or simply forgot to report it to Jonas.


    "Really? I didn''t know¡­ Thanks for letting me know."


    "No problem. You can call me 03, okay? It''s because I was the third to come. And you can be 04."


    "This naming system seems simple enough."


    The two ate and chatted a bit, but after that, it was time to return to their rooms. William also found out that they only had free time to do other things three days a week!


    "We can do some other things at night three days a week, but on the other days, we have to stay in our rooms," 03 said, then leaned closer to William and whispered, "I''m pretty sure they do this so we don''t even have time to think of an escape plan."


    What 03 said made sense, and William agreed.


    They each went to their own room. When William arrived, he noticed that Wendy was already inside because of the lights, but when he went to knock on the door to talk to her, one of the guards who was standing nearby stopped him.


    "You can''t talk to her today. Go to your room and keep quiet."


    The treatment was terrible again, and William felt like trash. In fact, he didn''t expect anything else since he had been bought as a slave...


    He went to his room and spent the rest of the night looking out the window and reflecting on his next steps.


    ''I need to get the fucking out of here....''


    That thought grew inside his head with the passing days. Would he find a way out of that situation?


    William was staring at the window when he noticed something peculiar. A few people were walking on the courtyard, moving toward the back part of the mansion. It was the same area where he saw that cabin with the lights on.

 Chapter 163 - 163: Using Her

    Just like the last time, something was happening in that small cabin that Jonas didn''t want William to know about.


    ''What''s going on there? I have to find out!''


    William was growing curious, and as much as he wanted to go check it out, he didn''t.


    The mansion''s hallways were still being watched¡ªespecially the rooms where the slaves were¡ªso going there was almost impossible.


    What he could do was jump out the window and venture over, but he decided to wait.


    In the end, William went to his bed, lay down, and tried to rest.


    The next morning, things happened the same way. He ate something in the morning and headed to the mine to work.


    However, two things changed. The first was that Wendy wasn''t there to have breakfast with them, which was strange.


    The second was that William was starting to socialize more with the other miners, especially 03, who was closer to William.


    As soon as they entered the mine, 03 said, "What do you think about trying to come up with a plan to escape? Do you have any idea how we can remove this seal that''s blocking our mana?"


    "No idea, but we can definitely think of something. There has to be a way out of here," William replied.


    The other two slaves weren''t too keen on the plan. "Do you really think we can escape? It''s impossible! They paid a lot to buy us, and they''ll never give us a chance to leave. Accepting that sooner will be better for you."


    William wasn''t surprised when he heard that. Just by looking at their faces, he could tell they had lost hope of escaping. However, all William needed to do was give them hope.


    If they realized there was a chance to escape, well, then they''d want to try and work together to find a way out of that place.


    "03, do you know anything about that cabin in the back? I noticed some lights there at night," William asked.


    "Ah, yeah, I''ve noticed it too. I''ve always been curious about it, but I''ve never been able to go check it out, and now I''ve kind of forgotten about it. You''ll forget about it too soon enough," 03 said, patting William on the back. "Let''s get to work, 04. We''ve got a lot of mana stones to collect."


    Each of them went to a different part of the mine. William went to the back, just like he had the day before, and started working.


    He collected the stones while his mind was also focused on the demonic sword.


    Victoria was sleeping. Her father was too. It was still early in the morning.


    William observed the surroundings using his enhanced senses and noticed that the house was quite large, but only two people lived there¡ªVictoria and her father.


    And as much as he wanted to explore the place, it was impossible since he couldn''t move.


    ''I think it''s time to start exerting my influence¡­'' he thought.


    He decided to take advantage of Victoria''s sleep to begin influencing her. Although it was risky to act so quickly, William felt it was better to act now rather than waste time.


    Using his demonic energy¡ªwhich wasn''t completely sealed since the seal only affected his mana¡ªWilliam managed to enter Victoria''s mind while she was sleeping!


    He entered her dreams! In the dream, William appeared in his "normal" form, but he wore ancient clothing, and at his waist was his Asura sword and a small bamboo flask containing alcohol.


    In her dream, Victoria was at the battle academy she was about to attend, and everyone there was impressed with her power!


    The students praised her and treated her well, and the teachers constantly said she was the best student they had ever had.


    ''It seems like everyone wants power to feel this way, huh? I guess there''s nothing wrong with that,'' William thought.


    He walked around the school, and it didn''t take long for Victoria to notice his presence. When she saw the sword at his waist, she said, "Oh my god, am I now dreaming about a handsome warrior who uses my sword?"


    She thought this was just part of her dream¡ªnormal for dreams¡ªbut it wasn''t quite like that.


    William approached her and said, "What an interesting dream you''re having. Is this what you''re looking for at the battle academy? Flattery and a handsome prince?"


    Victoria knew she was dreaming, and what William said was strange to her.


    "Is my mind playing tricks on me now? I know you''re just a product of my imagination," she said.


    "Am I? Or maybe your father bought a sword that contains a piece of my soul, gave it to you, and now I''ve come to talk to you in your dreams. Ever thought of that?" William replied.


    Victoria looked at him with a startled expression. "I''d never think of something like that, but it must just be part of my dream."


    Despite William''s influence, she was the one controlling the dream as she saw fit, so with just a thought, William was expelled from her dream.


    But when Victoria finally woke up and went to the living room where the sword was, she looked at it and began to reflect.


    "Was that real?"


    She picked up the sword and started examining it, noticing that it did indeed look ancient and had a different aura.


    At that moment, her father also woke up. "Good morning, my beautiful daughter. Already thinking about training? Please eat something first."


    Victoria placed the sword back on its stand. "I''ll train later. What are we having for breakfast?"


    "Whatever you want," her father said with a smile.


    The two prepared breakfast together. William felt a bit envious of Victoria. She still had her family with her. As for him? Well, he had lost his family and was now in a completely different world.


    Around 9 a.m., she took the sword and went to train. William thought she would train with the dummies in her backyard, but Victoria left and ventured into the forest.


    She went to a small stream near her home. There, she placed the sword on a rock, knelt in front of it, and said, "Was what happened in my dream true? Are you an ancient artifact with a soul?"


    William was surprised!


    ''Most people would be scared, but she''s willing to find out more. Is it because she''s thirsty for power?''


    This seemed like the perfect moment to try talking to her. Things were happening faster than William had expected.


    He concentrated and then sent her a mental message. It was extremely difficult to do.


    The two didn''t have a strong connection, and Victoria didn''t have any demonic lineage to easily use his energy.


    In other words, it was simply very hard to send a message. He had to think of something simple to say, something that could help in some way.


    "Yes, what happened in the dream was real. However, I can''t speak often or at length, but know that I''m here to help you and make you stronger."


    Victoria took a few steps back and almost fell into the stream. "I can''t believe it, the sword really talks! What do I do? What do I do?"


    This was the first time something like this had happened to her. And from what she knew, artifacts that could do something like this were incredibly rare and powerful.


    "Did I finally hit the jackpot? I think this will help me a lot at the battle academy!"


    This made her even more excited to practice. She decided to practice on some dead logs nearby.


    William once again took the opportunity to demonstrate a bit of the power he could channel through the sword. He used the black flames that enveloped the sword as she struck the log!


    This greatly increased the power of the attack, and the log burned to ashes in seconds.


    "The sword even has special attacks!" S§×arch* The nov§×lF~ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Victoria was thrilled and wanted to tell her father about it, but William spoke to her again.


    "This has to be kept a secret," he said. "Many people might want to use me, and I only accept those I find worthy. Your father can''t know."


    She and her father had always been very close, and Victoria began to feel bad about keeping secrets, but she could already imagine that telling him might not be a good idea.


    There was a chance her father would think the sword was dangerous and worth much more than he had paid, meaning he might want to take it and sell it.


    He was a merchant who thought a lot about money, so that was something he might do.


    Victoria didn''t want that. She wanted to use her new magical sword to become important at the battle academy she was about to attend.


    "Alright, I''ll keep it a secret. What else can you do to make me stronger?" she asked.


    William didn''t respond because he couldn''t send mental messages frequently, but he was already thinking of ways to use Victoria to his advantage and, perhaps, save his real body.

 Chapter 164 - 164: Preparation

    Victoria waited for a response, and although she didn''t get one, she was thrilled to know that the sword her father had brought wasn''t ordinary.


    She had worked hard to secure a spot at the battle academy and knew her talent wasn''t the most impressive. Having a powerful weapon might be exactly what she needed to become a key figure at the academy.


    "I''ll keep it a secret, just like the sword said, and I''ll surprise my father and everyone at the academy!" Victoria declared.


    Soon after, she returned to her training. William was observing everything she was doing, but from time to time, he had to shift his focus back to his main body.


    The reason was the slave 03, who had come to the back of the cave to talk to him. William noticed him approaching before he arrived and returned to avoid looking suspicious.


    "So this is where you''ve been mining," 03 said. "Are you antisocial or something?"


    William smiled. "Yeah, a little. What brings you here, my friend?"


    It was the first time 03 had come to talk to William like this. They usually only chatted during lunch or breakfast, never during mining hours.


    In fact, it was 03 who had warned William to be careful about talking too much, as getting caught would lead to penalties.


    "Well, I came to convince you of a risky proposal. Can we sit and talk?" 03 said.


    William frowned but agreed. Both sat on the dirt floor and began to whisper.


    "Tomorrow is our day off," 03 said. "Our shift will end earlier, and we''ll have some free time. But more importantly, Jonas is hosting a special dinner with the other noble families in the region."


    Still not understanding where this was going, William asked, "And what are you thinking?"


    "This will be our best chance to explore the mansion! I''m thinking of checking out that cabin you mentioned."


    William stroked his chin and began to reflect. Indeed, a dinner of that scale was the perfect opportunity to explore.


    The guards would be more focused there, and everyone would be busy with conversations and wine. This would certainly give William the chance to investigate.


    "And why not escape from here?" William questioned.


    03 shook his head. "There''s no way. They''ll have guards stationed at every exit. The best we can do is to explore this shed and hope to find something useful."


    William decided to go along with it. Standing still and hoping for a miracle wasn''t going to get them anywhere. The mine''s oppressive darkness seemed to close in around him, the faint glow of mana stones offering little comfort. His heart raced as he weighed the risks. Exploring the mysterious place behind the mansion was tempting, but the thought of Jonas''s cold, calculating gaze sent a shiver down his spine.


    "Alright, let''s do it," William said, his voice low. "But how do we get there without being seen?"


    03 hesitated, his brow furrowed. "We''ll use the darkness as cover. They''ll be too busy with dinner to notice us."


    William''s jaw tightened. "And the guards? Jonas isn''t stupid. He''s not going to let us roam around unsupervised."


    "We''ll handle them," 03 said, his tone firm. "Trust me. This will work."


    William nodded, though doubt gnawed at him. As 03 returned to the other slaves, William''s thoughts churned. The plan was risky, but what other choice did they have?


    Just then, a soft rustle came from his spatial bag. Out popped Stuart, his fur shimmering faintly with residual mana. The magical rat scurried onto William''s shoulder, his beady eyes gleaming with intelligence.


    "I''ve been listening," Stuart whispered. "That place behind the mansion¡­ it reeks of strange mana. We need to check it out."


    "Stuart!" William''s face lit up with relief. "You''re back!"


    "For now," Stuart said, his voice urgent. "I can''t stay out long. They''ll sense my mana, and that''ll draw attention. I''ll hide for now and come back tomorrow night."


    Before William could protest, Stuart vanished back into the bag.


    Alone again, William returned to his mining duties, but this time he chose not to bring his consciousness to his sword, Asura.


    He needed to stay focused, to think about this plan and whether it would succeed. He was incredibly anxious, as this could mean discovering something useful, or facing punishment...


    William was lost in thought throughout his shift, and although he saw 03 during meals, they didn''t discuss the matter. The reason was obvious: there were too many ears in the mansion, especially in the kitchen where the cooks loved to gossip, and seemed to dislike William and the others.


    Once again, when William returned to his room at night, Wendy was gone. He was starting to get worried, unsure of her whereabouts.


    The same guard as always stood there in front of the two rooms, acting as a kind of watchman. William approached him and inquired about Wendy in the most respectful way possible.


    "Excuse me, sir. Could you tell me where the young woman who sleeps in the room next door is? I haven''t seen her for two days."


    The guard initially considered responding rudely, but perhaps due to William''s polite demeanor, he decided to be more friendly. In truth, the guards weren''t inherently gruff; they were simply following orders from the noble family who employed them. However, it was nighttime, and no one from the noble family was around.


    "Listen, young man, I know she was working in the plantations and I''ve seen her there a few times, but she''s no longer sleeping in that room. I have no idea where she is. Now, go to your room before someone shows up and reprimands you."


    William quietly thanked the guard and returned to his room, even more pensive. Where could Wendy be?


    She seemed to have enjoyed her first day of work¡ªor at least it seemed that way when she spoke with William¡ªbut now she had vanished. What on earth was going on?


    ''If only I could go to the plantations during the day to talk to her... Could I manage that tomorrow?'' William wondered.


    He knew that for three days of the week it was possible to wander around the mansion at night, but according to 03, tomorrow''s shift in the mines would be shorter due to the dinner. In other words, he might be able to walk around the area in the afternoon and look for Wendy! The thought made William eagerly anticipate the arrival of dawn.


    With his body and mind exhausted, William laid his head on his bed''s pillow and drifted off, sleeping like a log.


    The next day, he woke up feeling energized and went straight to breakfast, where he found Jonas, who came to speak with him and the other miners.


    "Today you''ll only be mining in the morning," Jonas said, "and after that, you''ll take a bath and make yourselves presentable. I don''t want the other nobles to see you and think I don''t take care of my employees. Understood?"


    With that, he left. 03 glanced at William and gave him a smile, but said nothing. After breakfast, they all returned to the mines and began extracting mana stones.


    03 approached William again, leaving his work area at the beginning of the mine and going to the back where William usually stayed.


    "I told you we''d have more time today. It''s the perfect opportunity for us to find out something. Are you ready?" 03 asked.


    William had already accepted that he would have to go with him and take a chance. "Absolutely. In the afternoon, I want to go to where the plantations are. Do you know where they are?"


    03 frowned, "And why do you want to go there?"


    "Remember the woman who came here with me? She was working on the plantation and ended up disappearing, and now I want to find out what happened."


    "Yes, I remember. I can show you where it is."


    "Thanks, buddy."


    After that, the two parted ways and continued working. The hours passed slowly¡ªperhaps because William was anxious¡ªand when lunch finally ended, he was free!


    "Free for one day, what a pitiful situation," 03 remarked.


    The other two slaves who worked with them decided to leave and didn''t want to be part of their plan. In fact, they didn''t even know about the plan.


    "I''m going to take a shower and then you can show me where these plantations are," William said.


    "Sure thing."


    William went to the public bathroom¡ªthe only one he was allowed to use¡ªand took a cold shower. The shower was simply awful because it was already very cold, and he still had to shower with cold water. Luckily, his body was very resilient and he survived it just fine. sea??h th§× Nov§×l?ire.n(e)t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    After that, it was time to meet up with 03 and go look for Wendy.


    ''What exactly happened to her?'' William wondered as he left the mansion.


    He met with 03 on the back part of the mansion, and the two left, going toward the forest.

 Chapter 165 - 165: Seeing Wendy Again

    The snow on the ground was deep. William''s feet sank with every step.


    "Are you sure the plantation is around here?" he asked, looking around in complete confusion.


    It was the first time he had been to that part of the mansion. Since the day he arrived, he had only stayed in the mansion or inside the mines.


    03 nodded. "Yes, I''m sure. I came to take care of the plantation once, so I know where it is. We''ll see some greenhouses soon."


    And indeed, it didn''t take long for them to find the greenhouses. They had followed a small path through the forest until they reached an open area with the greenhouses.


    William quickly glanced around and saw about ten large greenhouses and three cabins.


    "Are those cabins for the workers? Maybe the woman who came with me is sleeping there?" William asked.


    03 was always the playful type. He nudged William with his elbow and smiled. "Are you in love? Don''t worry, your damsel is definitely there."


    "That''s not it," William said, pushing him back.


    The two laughed at the situation¡ªsomething rare in that mansion¡ªand then headed toward the greenhouses.


    William did think Wendy was a beautiful woman, but he wasn''t thinking about relationships. What he wanted was to find out what had happened to her.


    Despite only being there for a few days, he had already noticed that Jonas and the rest of his family weren''t careful with their employees, let alone their slaves.


    Not to mention the strange lights at the back of the mansion at night.


    ''I feel like they''re hiding something¡­'' William thought.


    As they approached the greenhouses and cabins, one of the greenhouse doors opened, and out came Wendy!


    Wendy saw William approaching, and a smile appeared on her face. She couldn''t contain her happiness at seeing him.


    She ran to him and gave him a hug. 03 didn''t say anything, just watched how things would unfold.


    "I was worried about you," William said, placing his hands on Wendy''s shoulders. "You disappeared out of nowhere, and I tried to ask about you, but no one said anything."


    Wendy looked sad after hearing that. "Yes, I know. For some reason, they decided I should sleep here, and they won''t let me go back to the mansion anymore. It''s a bit uncomfortable, but at least it''s quieter here."


    "Do you want to see my place?" she asked.


    "Of course."


    They followed Wendy to one of the cabins. On the way, she explained that other women were working with her, and each had their own cabin.


    Once inside, William noticed the interior. It was simple but cozy. Most importantly, there was a good bed with warm blankets and a fireplace. This made him less worried about Wendy.


    But the reason she had to stay there so suddenly was still strange. Even though it was closer to where she worked, the mansion wasn''t far either. Why did they want to keep her away like that?


    "Overall, my job is fun but exhausting. There are a lot of plants to take care of here, from food to magical plants," she said.


    William and 03 exchanged glances. "And our job sucks. Imagine being stuck in a hot mine collecting mana stones all day."


    "Wow," Wendy said. "I can''t even imagine the suffering. But why are you here today? I thought it was forbidden to leave the mansion?"


    "There''s a noble dinner tonight, and everyone''s focused on that," William explained.


    "Really?"


    Wendy seemed very surprised when she heard that. It was as if she had no idea what was happening in the mansion, which was strange because it was right there.


    It was as if she was trapped in her own little world, unable to see what was happening outside.


    "You didn''t know?" William asked, surprised. "I thought everyone knew about it."


    "No, I didn''t. I don''t know anything about what''s going on there. The only person I see is a guard who brings me meals, and we don''t talk much."


    "Is that really true?"


    William hadn''t imagined they would keep Wendy so isolated from everything happening. It didn''t make much sense.


    There seemed to be another reason behind it, and William wanted to find out, but Wendy didn''t know anything at the moment.


    "That''s all I know," she said, "but thank you for visiting. It means a lot to me."


    At that moment, there was a knock on Wendy''s cabin door.


    She got up and went to answer it. She had no choice.


    On the other side of the door was a guard in heavy armor, with a sharp sword at his waist. "I noticed you have visitors," the guard said.


    William and 03 had just arrived, and yet a guard already knew they were there. They were constantly being watched, and this was a reminder that their mission to explore the mansion at night without being seen was quite risky.


    "Yes, I do. Is there a problem? I heard there''s a dinner tonight, and they''re off today," Wendy said.


    The guard smiled. "Yes, there''s indeed a dinner tonight, but they can''t be here. You two," the guard pointed at both of them, "can come with me?"


    Without any choice, William and 03 said goodbye to Wendy and left, following the guard. William was glad he at least found her and saw she was okay. That took away the bad thoughts that had been running through his mind¡­


    ''And why was the guard so polite with her? That''s rare with us. Everything is so strange¡­'' William thought.


    The guard stayed with them until they returned to the mansion''s entrance, where he warned them, "Don''t go there again. Next time, there will be consequences. And behave today so Lord Jonas doesn''t get embarrassed."


    Jonas had let the slaves roam free during the day not because he was kind but because he wanted them out of the way, not interfering with the dinner.


    William and 03 knew this well. After the guard left, 03 said, "So now what? Wait until night?"


    Their plan would only happen at night. Trying to go in before that was too risky.


    "I guess so. Can you meet me in my room?" William said.


    "Yeah, no problem. I''ll find something to do in the meantime. If I find anything useful, I''ll let you know later."


    Each went their separate way during the day. William was also unsure what to do. During free times like this, he loved practicing magic and getting stronger, but that was impossible with the seal on his body.


    Speaking of the seal, I think there''s a library here¡­ Maybe there''s something there?


    William entered the mansion and looked for the library. As soon as he entered, he encountered two guards at the door who wouldn''t let him in.


    "No employees or slaves are allowed in the library," one of the guards said. "Access is restricted to specific individuals. Go away."


    William left, a bit annoyed, even though he had expected something like this. However, he found where the library was and memorized the route from his room. S§×arch* The N??elFir§×.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    ''I''ll check it out when I get the chance¡­''


    In the end, he just wandered around the mansion, trying to find anything useful inside. There were several rooms he couldn''t enter, and each time, William mentally marked the room to return to in the near future.


    Another thing that happened was him overhearing a conversation without being noticed. The conversation was between Jonas¡ªWilliam recognized his voice¡ªand another man William had never seen before. He was an older man.


    "And how''s the procedure going? Do you think it''ll work this time?" the older man asked.


    "Yes, it will, believe me. I think in three months, everything will be ready."


    "Great."


    At that moment, William noticed they were starting to move, so he left the area to avoid being seen and went straight to his room, where he spent the rest of the hours until nightfall.


    That scene and the things the two had said stayed in his mind for the rest of the day. He wanted to understand what he had heard, but no matter how hard he tried, nothing came to mind.


    When night fell, the mansion became very quiet. Well, the part where William and the employees stayed.


    The nobles who had come to visit Jonas stayed in the other part of the mansion, the area where guests slept, dined, and relaxed.


    The slaves and employees slept in the back part of the mansion, in a place where the nobles wouldn''t go.


    03 came to William''s door around 8 p.m.


    "This is the perfect moment," he whispered. "It''s really empty."


    William gestured for him to come into his room. After that, he closed the door.


    "How are the guards? Did you see anything before coming here?" William asked.


    "There are guards all over the mansion''s perimeter. Like I said, they don''t want anyone escaping. But that gives us a chance to explore other places inside," 03 said.


    "Great," William said. "Let''s start with the cabin with the strange lights."


    He went to the window of his room and opened it.


    "Shall we?"

 Chapter 166 - 166: Exploring the Shed

    03 stared at William for a few seconds, his mind buzzing with disbelief. "Through the window? Are you serious?"


    William shrugged. "Why not? It''s not like leaving through the front door will make us less likely to be seen."


    They could use one of the many back doors¡ªmost of the guards were absent¡ªbut William was still wary of the other workers under Jonas''s command. What if a cleaner, gardener, or even a cook spotted them and alerted Jonas? After all, none of them had any reason to side with the slaves. It wasn''t worth the risk.


    "Trust me, alright?" William said, a hint of determination in his voice. "Besides, I''ve got something that might give us an edge."


    As soon as the words left his mouth, Stuart emerged from the spatial bag, silent as a shadow. When 03 saw the rat, he stumbled back, confusion written all over his face.


    "What''s that? A rat?" he exclaimed, his voice rising slightly.


    William quickly stepped closer, raising a hand to calm him. "Keep it down. This is Stuart, my magical pet. He''s going to help us navigate this place without getting caught. He can make us invisible¡ªor close to it, at least." S§×ar?h the ¦ÇovelFire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    If they were going to work together, there was no point in keeping secrets. When 03 heard this, his eyes lit up with excitement.


    "Really? With our mana sealed, this might be our best shot. They''d never expect us to turn invisible!"


    That was the whole point. Jonas wasn''t overly concerned about them precisely because of the seal on their bodies. Without mana, they couldn''t fight the guards or use spells to escape. But Stuart changed everything.


    "Exactly. I told you to trust me," William said, a small smirk playing on his lips. "Now let''s move. This is our best chance."


    William went first, climbing through the window and landing lightly on the roof. Their rooms were on the third floor, a level reserved for Jonas''s workers. 03 followed, his movements cautious but steady. The darkness provided some cover, but they both knew it wouldn''t last long.


    Once they reached the courtyard, the guards would spot them instantly. But before they took another step, it was time to put Stuart''s abilities to use.


    The rat leaped onto William''s shoulder and spoke in a hushed tone. "I can camouflage both of you for about ten minutes. After that, I''ll need to recharge before I can do it again."


    William quickly relayed the information to 03. "He can''t use his magic for too long, or they''ll sense it. That''s why we need to move fast."


    03, still visibly shocked by the talking rat, nodded without question. "Got it. Let''s go. The cabin isn''t far. We can make it in time."


    Stuart activated his camouflaging magic¡ªthe same spell he had used before. In an instant, their bodies vanished, blending seamlessly into the surroundings. Now invisible, talking was out of the question. Communication would have to be through gestures alone.


    With silent precision, they descended from the rooftop, their movements swift and deliberate. Even with their mana sealed, their enhanced physical abilities made the climb down effortless. Once their feet touched the courtyard, they paused, scanning the area for any signs of danger.


    A few seconds later, two guards strolled past, their conversation casual and carefree. They were chatting about women and their desire to visit a tavern for some entertainment. Thankfully, they didn''t notice the invisible intruders. William and 03 exchanged a quick glance, relief flashing in their eyes, before moving toward the mysterious cabin at the back of the mansion.


    This was the place where William had seen strange lights flickering at night. Tonight, however, it was shrouded in darkness. William guessed the absence of activity was due to the dinner event. But there was still one obstacle: a single guard stationed at the cabin''s entrance.


    It was just one guard¡ªbetter than two¡ªbut his presence was enough to complicate their plans. William frowned. On previous nights, there had been no guards here. Why now?


    ''They must know security is lighter tonight and are taking extra precautions,'' William thought, his mind racing.


    Stuart poked William with a tiny paw, drawing his attention. The rat nodded, his beady eyes glinting with determination. Though they couldn''t speak, William understood. It was time to act.


    As they approached the guard¡ªa tall, muscular man lounging in a chair by the door¡ªStuart worked his magic. A faint, sweet scent wafted through the air, invisible but potent. The guard inhaled, his eyelids growing heavy. Within moments, he slumped forward, fast asleep.


    Stuart didn''t stop there. With a flick of his paw, he camouflaged the guard''s body, ensuring no one would notice him. The area remained eerily quiet, with no other guards in sight.


    ''Stuart is incredible!'' William thought, a surge of admiration for his tiny companion.


    Now that the guard was no longer an issue, all that remained was to enter the mysterious cabin. But before stepping inside, they took a moment to scan the area. No guards were in sight¡ªjust the eerie stillness of the night. Satisfied, they moved quickly, slipping through the door and into the cabin.


    William''s curiosity had been building for weeks. The strange lights he''d seen at night suggested this place held secrets. What was inside? Why did people come here? His first assumption had been a tool shed, but Jonas had already shown them the actual tool shed in another building. This was something else entirely.


    The interior was pitch black, so dark that 03 couldn''t see a thing. But William''s vision, enhanced by the serpent blood, cut through the darkness like a blade. To him, the room was as clear as day.


    What he saw took his breath away.


    The cabin wasn''t a storage space or a simple shed¡ªit was a library. But these weren''t ordinary books. The titles on the spines spoke of forbidden knowledge: rituals, dark magic, deity summoning, even eternal life. These were just the subjects William could make out at a glance. The rest of the books promised even darker secrets.


    "I can''t see anything," 03 whispered, his voice tinged with frustration.


    Stuart had stopped using his camouflage magic. It wasn''t necessary anymore; they were hidden inside the cabin, shielded by the darkness. But that same darkness was now a problem for 03.


    "We can''t risk turning on any lights," William said, his voice low. "If we do, they''ll see it from the mansion just as easily as I saw the lights from there. We''ll have to work in the dark."


    For William, the darkness wasn''t an issue, but 03 needed time for his vision to adjust. While 03 blinked and squinted, trying to make out shapes in the gloom, William took the opportunity to explore on his own.


    His enhanced vision led him to a table cluttered with scattered notes. He picked up one of the papers, his eyes scanning the contents. What he read sent a chill down his spine.


    It was a ritual¡ªa detailed, step-by-step guide to rejuvenation and curing all diseases. The instructions were precise, almost clinical, but the implications were anything but ordinary. At the bottom of the page, two names were scrawled in elegant handwriting.


    One name sent a jolt of recognition through him: Wendy, the Silver-Haired Lady. The other name was unfamiliar, but the surname was one he knew all too well.


    ''Vince Black Pine¡­ and Wendy¡­''


    What exactly was going on?

 Chapter 167 - 167: Revelations about the Shed

    William read the ritual carefully. Despite its detailed instructions, the final steps were missing. All he had were the effects¡ªrejuvenation and curing all diseases¡ªand the two names at the end.


    ''Is Wendy working with them?'' William wondered. ''No, it didn''t seem like she was¡­''


    Still, the possibility lingered. William had been lied to before, and he wasn''t about to rule it out. But Wendy had been sold as a slave, just like him. They''d arrived together, and he couldn''t imagine her collaborating with their captors. The thought didn''t sit right with him.


    03 appeared beside him, his eyes finally adjusting to the darkness. "You can see in the dark, can''t you? There''s no way a normal person could read anything here without light."


    "Yeah," William said, holding up the note. "Look, Wendy''s name is here, along with someone called Vince Black Pine."


    "Vince?" 03''s eyes widened. "That''s Jonas''s grandfather."


    "What?" William blinked, surprised. He''d guessed Vince was part of the family because of the surname, but he hadn''t realized it was Jonas''s grandfather.


    "Yeah," 03 explained. "He''s a powerful mage, really old, but some disease got to him. From what I''ve heard around here, he''s got maybe three years left at most."


    03 had been working there far longer than William, so he knew more about the inner workings of the Black Pine family.


    William gestured to the note. "This ritual claims to rejuvenate someone and cure all diseases."


    "No way," 03 said, shaking his head. "That''s impossible. Mages haven''t figured out how to do something like that yet. This has to be fake."


    Before William could respond, Stuart''s voice cut through the tension. "The guard will wake up in about five minutes. You need to explore the rest of this place¡ªfast."


    Stuart''s magic wouldn''t last forever, so they had to move quickly. William, the only one who could see clearly in the dark, took the lead. His enhanced vision swept the room, landing on a small wooden door. It looked ordinary, but William knew better than to assume anything in this place was normal.


    He pushed the door open, and what he saw made his blood run cold.


    The room was a nightmare. Rows of glass flasks lined the tables, each one filled with body parts and organs floating in murky liquid. It was a grotesque display, like something out of a mad scientist''s lab.


    ''What the hell is going on here?'' William thought, his stomach churning.


    The sight was enough to make him want to turn back, but time was running out. He stepped inside, scanning the room for anything useful. The flasks were horrifying, but there was nothing else of note. Whatever secrets this place held, they weren''t immediately obvious.


    William quickly retreated, rejoining 03, who was waiting by the door.


    "See everything?" 03 asked.


    "For now, yeah. Let''s go," William said, his voice tight.


    They retraced their steps, with Stuart''s magic cloaking them once more. In less than five minutes, they were back in William''s room, the window securely closed behind them.


    "That was close," 03 muttered, wiping sweat from his brow. "What did you see back there?"


    "You won''t believe it," William said, his tone grim.


    Before sharing, William cracked open his door to check the hallway. Paranoia was a habit he couldn''t afford to break. The corridor was empty¡ªgood. He shut the door quietly and turned to 03.


    "It was¡­ a lab," William began, struggling to find the right words. "But not like any lab I''ve ever seen. There were flasks everywhere, filled with body parts and organs. It was like something out of a nightmare."


    "What?" 03''s voice was a mix of disbelief and horror. "I never would''ve guessed that was inside that shed. What are they doing in there at night? And where the hell are those organs coming from?"


    03 fell silent, his brow furrowed in deep thought. William could see the gears turning in his friend''s mind, so he stayed quiet, giving him time to process.


    After a moment, 03 spoke again, his voice low and grim. "We might be in deeper trouble than we thought. Now that you mention it, I remember a few workers who went missing a few months ago. When I asked about them, Jonas said they''d just quit and left. But now¡­ I don''t think that''s what happened."


    William sat on the edge of his bed, the weight of 03''s words sinking in. The possibility that the missing workers were now floating in those flasks was horrifying¡ªand if that was true, staying here was more dangerous than they''d realized.


    "What do you think about sneaking into the library tonight?" William suggested, his voice steady despite the unease churning in his gut. "I want to see if there''s anything about the seals on our bodies. If we can break them, we might stand a chance." S§×arch* The n??el Fire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    03 nodded, his expression resolute. "That''s a good idea. And tonight''s the best time to try it. Let''s do it."


    After finalizing their plan, the two were about to leave the room when they were stopped by a guard stationed in the hallway.


    "What are you two doing out this late? You need to return to your rooms," the guard said sternly.


    William recognized him immediately¡ªit was the same guard who had been watching over him since the beginning. The one who had shared information about Wendy.


    William stepped closer, his tone calm and persuasive. "We''re just stretching our legs. As far as I know, we''re allowed to do that today, right? Look, if we leave, you can take a break or enjoy the festivities tonight. What do you say?"


    The guard hesitated, then sighed, his expression softening. "Fine. But don''t do anything stupid, and be back before midnight."


    "Thank you," William said with a nod.


    Once they were a safe distance away, 03 glanced at William, impressed. "That was smooth. How did you know it would work?"


    "I didn''t," William admitted. "But what other choice did we have? Let''s be careful from here on out. I don''t think we''ll be able to talk our way past the other guards."


    William led the way, retracing the path he''d taken earlier. When they reached the library, they were relieved to find no guards in sight. However, the door was still locked.


    As William approached, Stuart''s voice piped up from his shoulder. "There''s a magical formation here. I can crack it, but it''ll take about five minutes. Just wait."


    Once again, Stuart was proving invaluable. 03 couldn''t help but grin. "If you know any other rats like Stuart, let me know. I''d love to have one too."


    While Stuart worked on the formation, William and 03 hid in a shadowy corner, doing their best to stay out of sight. The minutes dragged on, each one feeling like an eternity as they waited for Stuart to finish.


    Time seemed to crawl as William and 03 waited for Stuart to disable the magical formation. When the rat finally succeeded, they slipped inside the library, but Stuart''s next words brought a wave of unease.


    "There''s a problem," Stuart said, his voice tense. "This type of magical formation records every time someone new disables it. They''ll know someone broke in tomorrow."


    "What do you mean?" William asked, his stomach sinking.


    "I can reactivate it, but the record will still be there. They''ll know someone was here," Stuart explained.


    "Damn it¡­" William muttered, running a hand through his hair.


    Despite the bad news, there was nothing they could do about it now. Their priority was finding information about the seals on their bodies. The search began in earnest, their movements quick and deliberate as they scanned the shelves for anything useful.

 Chapter 168 - 168: Jonas is Looking for the Culprit

    Unlike the library they had found inside the shed, the one inside the mansion contained ''normal books.'' There were no traces of dark magic or rituals that would send shivers down anyone''s spine.


    William and 03 worked together, browsing through the books for anything related to the seal on their bodies. It was a powerful seal, and neither of them knew how to destroy it.


    03 grew increasingly frustrated. He searched and searched but found nothing. What he really wanted to do was punch something¡ªhe even clenched his fist in preparation¡ªbut he restrained himself, knowing that making noise at that moment would be foolish.


    "I can''t believe we went through all of this just to find nothing," he said. "Now they''ll know someone was here."


    He was starting to give up. William, on the other hand, refused to surrender. Stuart was right there with him, helping search for information about the seal.


    At one point, they even heard noises coming from the hallway, which filled them with fear and panic. But no one entered, and nothing bad happened to them.


    "I found something," Stuart said.


    William and 03 quickly moved to where Stuart was, and they both read the same pages he had been examining.


    "This is the same seal you two have¡ªat least, it looks the same. But we have a problem," Stuart said.


    "What is it?"


    "To break it, you''ll need the blood of the person who placed the seal on you," Stuart explained.


    That was certainly a problem. Now William understood why Jonas had been so confident about the seal and unafraid that someone might find a way to break it.


    How could they obtain the blood of the person who placed the seal if they couldn''t even leave the place or use magic? It seemed impossible.


    03 realized this too, and his anger turned to sadness. "We''re going to be slaves forever¡­ This is heartbreaking."


    He sat on the ground, knees drawn up, hugging them tightly. The sight of 03 like that broke William''s heart. 03 had been a good friend and someone who didn''t deserve to be in this situation.


    "Who placed the seal on you?" William asked.


    "Someone from a gang¡ªfamous slave traders who roam around capturing people," 03 replied.


    "Those are the same ones who placed it on me too! Hey, we can find them. I have someone on the outside who might help us," William said.


    When 03 heard this, it was as if life returned to his face. He no longer looked devastated, and even a hint of a smile appeared.


    "Are you serious? Don''t play with me like this," he said.


    "Of course I am. Why would I lie to you? But I don''t know how long it will take to get out of here. It might take a year¡­"


    William was hoping that his influence on Victoria might lead her to grow stronger, and perhaps she could find a way to obtain the blood.


    Even with such a long timeframe, 03 wasn''t discouraged. His eyes still burned with hope. "That''s not a problem. Even if it takes five years, it''ll still be worth it! What do you think about talking to the others about this?"


    03 was referring to the other slaves working in the mines with them. Both had lost hope of ever leaving that place, but now they might have a chance to reignite that hope.


    William, however, remained cautious. "Let''s first see if they''re really trustworthy. We can''t let anyone ruin our plan."


    "Right, right. I''ll do my best to talk to them without revealing too much," 03 said.


    "Good."


    After obtaining what they needed, they left the library. Stuart reactivated the magical formation, but they couldn''t completely hide their traces.


    "Will they know it was us?" 03 asked.


    "They won''t know who it was, but they''ll know someone broke the barrier. We should avoid talking about this and return safely to our rooms," William whispered back.


    It took them much longer to return to their rooms. They couldn''t risk being seen, as that would certainly raise suspicions.


    William couldn''t stop thinking about the guard he had spoken to before leaving. The guard knew they had left. sea??h th§× NovelFire.net* website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    ''Will he say something to Jonas? What should I do?''


    03 had a different room, so they eventually parted ways. When William returned to his room, the guard was no longer standing in the hallway. He had accepted William''s request and gone to rest¡ªor perhaps to drink and join the party.


    That night was difficult for William. He tossed and turned in bed, thinking about what would happen the next day and about the guard.


    The next morning, someone knocked on William''s door. Unlike previous times, the knocking was much harder, as if the person was in a hurry.


    William answered, and it was Jonas. "I''m calling everyone for a meeting. Go to the courtyard, now."


    After dressing, William left his room. In the courtyard, he saw a large crowd.


    It wasn''t just the slaves like William and 03, but all the workers under Jonas'' command.


    The only person missing was Wendy, and William wondered why.


    Jonas stood in front of his employees and spoke in a harsh tone. "I''ve called all of you here today due to a security breach that occurred last night. Someone broke into the library."


    Everyone exchanged glances, looking surprised. William tried to appear equally shocked.


    "I know some of you are learning magic in secret, and that might be the reason you wanted to access the library to obtain books on the subject. For that reason, every single one of you is a suspect in this matter."


    William sighed in relief. He had been afraid that Jonas would immediately link the slaves to the incident, but apparently, other workers had also caused trouble in the past and present.


    "We''re going to interrogate all of you today, so your shifts are suspended," Jonas said.


    The situation wasn''t looking good. William wasn''t the first to be questioned, so he used the time to walk around.


    He searched for the guard who had seen him the previous night. It wasn''t hard to find him. The guard was hiding behind a tree, enjoying the gentle morning breeze.


    It was as if he had been expecting someone to approach him.


    William leaned against the tree and whispered, "I need to talk to you."


    The guard didn''t even look at him. "I know you''re the one who broke into the library."


    His tone was resolute. William instantly realized he wouldn''t be able to convince the guard otherwise, and with the evidence the guard had, his fate seemed sealed.


    "Don''t get me wrong¡ªI won''t tell anyone it was you," the guard said. "I think we can work together from now on. What do you say?"


    William couldn''t comprehend why the guard would want to collaborate with him. Surely, if the guard handed William over to Jonas, he would receive a hefty reward.


    "What do you have in mind? I just can''t understand how a guard like you can work with someone like me."


    The guard smiled. "I know you''re strong. The only problem is the seal on your body. And tell me, what makes you think I came here to work for Jonas willingly? Can''t I have my own motives?"


    "I see¡­ Well, let''s work together, then."


    "The first thing we should do is establish our story."


    They talked for a while, hidden behind the tree. They needed a convincing story about what had happened the previous night, and that wasn''t difficult to fabricate.


    The only thing worrying William was the fact that the guard had seen him leave shortly before the library was breached. But now that they were working together, that was no longer a problem.


    When it was time for William to tell his story, he knew exactly what to say.


    When the guard was questioned, his account aligned perfectly with William''s story.


    "Yes, I saw him leaving and accompanied him to the bathroom. After that, he returned to his room. I didn''t see anything else."


    Jonas trusted his guard. "Well, so it wasn''t the slaves¡­ Who could have done it?"


    There were just too many people working for Jonas, and it was getting hard for him to find the culprit.


    What made things worse for him was the information that came next.


    "Sir, there are no stolen books. Everything is at the exact same place."


    One of the things that might help Jonas find the culprit was something like a book in its possession, but now, he wouldn''t have that luxury. He was lost.


    William was both happy that no one had found him, and worried at the same time. The guard knew his secret.


    Would he ask for things? Would he try to manipulate him? Only time would tell what intentions the guard had.


    ''For now I should focus on using my sword to help Victoria...''


    She was the only one capable of helping William escape.


    During the afternoon of that same day, William stayed inside his room and used the sword to communicate with Victoria, who was close to leaving her village.

 Chapter 169 - 169: Leaving the Mansion

    When William used his powers to send his consciousness to the sword, he found himself inside a carriage.


    The carriage wasn''t particularly luxurious, and there were several other people inside. He counted six individuals in total, all wearing cloaks and hoods.


    Victoria was among them. She, too, was hiding her identity and wasn''t speaking to anyone.


    Over the past few days, Victoria had grown closer to the sword, and William felt their connection strengthening. He decided to try speaking to her mentally, and to his surprise, it worked.


    "Where exactly are we?" he asked.


    When Victoria heard the voice in her head, she nearly panicked. William understood the feeling well¡ªhe had felt the same way when Asura first spoke to him.


    Victoria responded through her thoughts, as if talking to herself. She wasn''t sure if it would work, but she tried anyway.


    "This is the carriage taking me¡ªor rather, us¡ªto the battle academy. How are you talking to me like this?" she asked.


    "Like this? You mean mentally? It''s pretty easy for me. I couldn''t do it before because our connection wasn''t strong enough," William explained.


    Their connection had indeed grown, but what truly enabled him to communicate with her was the abilities Asura had shared with him before leaving. There were many things he could do now, and he couldn''t wait to test them out.


    "I''m so nervous. I can''t mess this up," Victoria said.


    Victoria had the option to become a merchant like her father¡ªsomething she didn''t want¡ªor use her talent in magic to become strong.


    She was the type of person who couldn''t stand staying in one place for years. She loved the idea of traveling, meeting new people, and helping others. That''s why she had decided to pursue a spot at the battle academy. S§×ar?h the n?velFire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    With her slightly above-average talent and her father''s connections, she had secured a place at one of the kingdom''s best battle academies.


    However, she would likely be one of the weakest students there. The academy attracted the most talented individuals in the kingdom, and with her current abilities, she would be at the lower end of the spectrum.


    William saw this as an opportunity to earn her trust and get her to work for him. His goal was for Victoria to grow strong enough to free him.


    "Don''t worry about it. I''ll help you get stronger. You just need to trust me, alright?" he said.


    "I will, absolutely. But tell me more about yourself. Who are you, exactly?"


    "Asura¡ªthat''s my name. I was a powerful mage ages ago, and now all that remains is a fragment of my soul in this sword."


    There was no way for Victoria to verify information about Asura or anything related to demons, so William wasn''t worried about revealing this.


    They talked extensively during the journey. William learned more about Victoria and, more importantly, about the place they were heading to.


    "I won''t need to take an entrance test, and classes start in two weeks. But it''ll take us a week to get there," Victoria explained.


    "What types of magic can you use?" William asked.


    "Lightning, and I know how to use a sword," she replied.


    That wasn''t what William had expected. Lightning was a rare element, known for its strength if the user could control it well.


    Would Victoria have the talent to become one of the best lightning mages? Only time would tell.


    If William had been able to choose an element for her, he would have picked fire. His own talent in wielding fire and black fire had grown tremendously recently, and he felt he could have helped her more with that.


    But with lightning, it was a different story.


    "That''s a pretty rare element," William said. "My abilities were related to fire, so I can''t help you much with learning lightning spells, but I can assist you with general techniques."


    "No problem," Victoria said. "I know you''ll be a great ally."


    William didn''t keep talking to her nonstop. He had to return to his original body. Things weren''t looking good in the mansion.


    Jonas had sent guards to watch over everyone¡ªincluding William and the other slaves¡ªmaking it much harder to move around without being noticed.


    The guard who wanted to work with William was also one of those assigned to watch him. He took the opportunity to speak with William privately.


    "I need you to find out more about a staff member who went missing a few months ago," the guard said. "Can you do that?"


    Puzzled, William replied, "But aren''t you the one with more resources? I don''t see how I can do this."


    "Oh, you can. Don''t you know? You and the other slaves are going on a trip, and I need you to interrogate someone for me."


    "A trip? Why would Jonas bring us? It doesn''t make sense," William said.


    Jonas had many people working for him, and it seemed illogical for him to bring slaves instead of his more trusted workers.


    The guard explained, "Jonas isn''t concerned about you and the other slaves regarding the library incident. He doesn''t think it was one of you. So, he''s bringing you along. Plus, he needs strong people for manual labor."


    Jonas didn''t trust most of his workers to leave the mansion¡ªonly a select few. William and the other slaves were among those he believed hadn''t invaded the library.


    "And who do you want me to interrogate?" William asked.


    "A guard. I''ll point him out to you. Don''t worry."


    "A guard? Really?"


    Interrogating a guard wouldn''t be easy. Guards were stronger compared to the other workers under Jonas'' command, and if William were caught, it would cause serious problems.


    But what choice did he have? The guard, whom William now knew as Travis, had helped him avoid getting caught, and now William owed him.


    "Yes. I need you to interrogate him about Simone. He and Simone were involved, so he might know what happened to her," Travis said.


    "Who is she, anyway? If we''re going to work together, I need to know."


    Travis hesitated before answering. "She''s my sister, and she went missing. That''s why I came here. I need to find out what happened, but I can''t just roam around asking questions. Jonas is always watching the guards. But you can help me, and in return, I''ll help you."


    William knew he had to comply to settle the debt between them. Reluctantly, he agreed.


    "But how do you want me to proceed? Just ask him normally, or will I have to torture him for answers? Probably the latter, or you''d already know what happened."


    "Exactly," Travis said. "I need you to get the answers by force. But you''ll probably have to kill him or make it look like he died. There''s no way he won''t report this to Jonas if he survives."


    That was a pretty challenging task for William. With the seal still on his body, he wasn''t at his full strength, making it difficult to confront one of the guards.


    However, it wasn''t impossible.


    "Alright, I''ll do my best. When is this trip?" William asked.


    "Tomorrow. So, be prepared. I''ll talk to you again tonight," Travis replied.


    After their conversation, the guard left. Later that day, Jonas called William and the other slaves for a meeting, and it was precisely about the trip Travis had mentioned.


    Jonas didn''t share many details, but the slaves were thrilled at the chance to leave the mansion.


    Deep down, they saw it as an opportunity to attempt an escape, but William knew Jonas wouldn''t let that happen.


    ''He definitely has contingency plans to stop us,'' William thought.


    True to his word, Travis returned to speak with William that night. As one of the guards assigned to watch the corridor where William slept, Travis had easy access.


    He knocked softly on the door, careful not to draw attention. William had been expecting him and opened the door quietly.


    "So, what do you need?" William whispered.


    Travis handed something to William¡ªa dagger.


    "You''ll need a weapon to protect yourself and to get the answers we need," Travis said.


    "But Jonas will search us before we leave. There''s no way he''ll let me go with a dagger," William countered.


    Travis smiled. "See for yourself. Hold the dagger and lightly tap it five times."


    William frowned, confused, but he did as Travis instructed, tapping the dagger five times with his fingers. To his surprise, the dagger disappeared.


    "It makes the dagger invisible," Travis explained. "Tap it again, and it will reappear. Or, if you do nothing, it will become visible again after thirty minutes."


    After explaining, Travis left. The dagger he had given William was an impressive weapon.


    It didn''t require mana to turn invisible, which made William even more curious.


    ''How does this even work?'' he wondered.


    There was no time to dwell on the mechanics of the dagger, but it was something he planned to investigate in the future.


    William went to bed and woke up early the next morning. Jonas gathered the people he trusted for the journey, including William and the other slaves.


    They left the mansion with four carriages, and William was surprised to find himself allowed to ride in one!


    "Before we leave, I''ll check all of you," Jonas announced. "You know, to make sure no one is bringing anything dangerous for the trip. 04, you''re first."


    William stepped forward, the invisible dagger safely hidden. He had no intention of getting caught.

 Chapter 170 - 170: Jonas Wants to Bet, and Finally a Chance

    The stealth capabilities of the dagger surprised William. Since it left no trace of mana, Jonas couldn''t sense it. William easily boarded the carriage, the dagger hidden securely behind his back.


    03 and the other slaves were unaware of the dagger or the mission Travis had assigned to William. William had no intention of telling them¡ªthis was a matter between him and Travis, and he didn''t want anyone interfering.


    Once everyone was inside the carriages, they set off.


    Unlike the flying carriages they had used before, these were ordinary ones, pulled by large, white-furred wolves capable of enduring the harsh cold weather.


    "Do you know where we''re going?" 03 asked William.


    William gazed out the window at the tall trees and the snow falling from the sky. "No idea," he replied, "but I doubt it''s too far. Otherwise, we''d be using a different mode of transportation."


    One of Jonas'' employees was also in the carriage with them¡ªa gardener. Unlike most of Jonas'' staff, this man wasn''t arrogant when speaking to William. In fact, he was quite friendly.


    "I believe we''re visiting a noble family not far from here," the gardener said. "One of the families that attended the dinner recently. Apparently, Jonas is lending a hand with some work in exchange for something."


    Essentially, Jonas was using the slaves to perform heavy labor for the noble family in return for some benefit. This didn''t surprise William at all. What did surprise him was how long it had taken for something like this to happen.


    "I see," William said. "Thank you for the information."


    "It was nothing."


    Their exchange was brief, but William already viewed the gardener in a positive light¡ªat least for the time being.


    William continued to look out the window, taking in the beautiful scenery. The sound of birds brought a sense of peace to his heart, and the scent of nature rejuvenated his soul. He savored every moment of the journey, knowing it might be a while before he left the mansion again.


    Two days passed. During this time, William spotted the guard he needed to interrogate. He saw him when they stopped to camp for the night.


    The guard was in another carriage and didn''t leave the campsite, so William didn''t get a chance to approach him.


    ''How should I handle this¡­''


    The mission Travis had given him was proving more difficult than he''d anticipated. He would have to kill the guard¡ªotherwise, Jonas would find out. And killing someone without using magic was a significant challenge.


    More days passed, and William still hadn''t found an opportunity. They eventually arrived at a mansion belonging to the noble family that had hired Jonas'' services.


    This mansion was smaller than Jonas'', and the number of workers there was also limited. That was one of the reasons they had sought Jonas'' help.


    "Jonas! Welcome, welcome!" an old, chubby man greeted them at the front gate. "I see you''ve brought the strong men for the heavy work. Wonderful!"


    03, standing beside William, muttered under his breath, "Heavy work again. When do we get a vacation?"


    Deep down, they all knew a vacation was out of the question. Such luxuries weren''t meant for slaves like them.


    Jonas and the chubby noble exchanged pleasantries¡ªthe usual insincere compliments between people who secretly disliked each other. William listened carefully, trying to understand the reason for their visit.


    When he finally learned the purpose, it wasn''t what he had expected. Apparently, the noble wanted help building a new structure on his estate¡ªa place where he could host fights for other nobles to bet on, like a coliseum.


    After speaking with the noble, Jonas addressed William and the other slaves. "You won''t just be helping him build this place. You''ll also be the first fighters to participate. I''ll be betting heavily on you, so I need you to win."


    William couldn''t believe it. He had expected to do some heavy lifting and then return, but now he was being told he would participate in fights¡ªand Jonas would be betting on them? S§×ar?h the ¦Çov§×lFire .net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "The construction work will start tomorrow. For now, we''ll rest," Jonas announced.


    He led everyone into the mansion, where the chubby noble had prepared rooms for them.


    To William''s surprise, the accommodations were decent, and the treatment he received was completely different from what he was used to.


    The manor''s staff treated him well, providing food and tending to his needs. Even 03, who was accustomed to being treated poorly, was taken aback.


    "Why are they being so nice?" 03 asked.


    "Probably because Jonas asked for it," William speculated. "He wants to bet on us in the fights, so he needs us to be in good condition to win. I think he''ll keep treating us well as long as we keep winning."


    It was just a guess, but to William, it made the most sense.


    For the rest of the day, they rested and ate well. The guard William needed to interrogate was sleeping in one of the rooms nearby, but he rarely left and was never alone or in a secluded place.


    As a result, William still hadn''t found an opportunity to act.


    The next day, William left the dagger hidden under his bed and met Jonas outside.


    "This is where we''ll be working¡ªor rather, where you''ll be working. I''ll just be here to make sure you''re doing your job," Jonas said.


    The new building was to be constructed next to the manor. It was designed as a large structure with seating for wealthy spectators to enjoy drinks and watch the fights. The chubby noble presented the project to William and the others.


    "We have professionals who will handle most of the construction, as I assume you lack the expertise. But I need you to help carry the heavy materials and ensure this project moves quickly. Understood?" the chubby noble said.


    Everyone nodded in agreement, largely because Jonas was glaring at them with a look that clearly said, You''d better agree, or there will be consequences.


    The heavy work the chubby noble had mentioned? It was truly heavy.


    William and the other slaves were tasked with carrying massive logs, stones, and other materials that ordinary people would never attempt to move without assistance.


    The chubby noble and Jonas watched everything unfold. "You said your slaves were strong, but I wasn''t expecting this. And they''re not even using mana?" the chubby noble remarked.


    "Indeed. Impressive, right? I''m quite pleased with my purchase," Jonas replied.


    "Can you show me where you buy them someday?"


    "Of course."


    William could hear them talking about the slaves as if they were mere assets to be bought at an auction. And, unfortunately, it wasn''t far from the truth.


    He spent the entire day doing backbreaking labor. The only silver linings were the breaks the chubby noble allowed and the decent food provided.


    It wasn''t just the slaves who were working. The other workers who had come with them were also contributing, though their tasks weren''t as physically demanding as William''s.


    This kind of work wasn''t for everyone. Some had the strength to handle it; others didn''t.


    03 was in a foul mood. "We were already doing heavy, boring work in the mines, and now we have to do this, which is even harder? Damn it."


    "At least we''re out in the open, breathing fresh air, and it''s not too hot," William pointed out.


    "Yeah, there''s that. But still, this sucks."


    Jonas noticed the two talking and called out, "Is something wrong?"


    "No, sir," they replied in unison.


    "Good."


    They both rolled their eyes and returned to their grueling work.


    A week passed. During that time, they spent most of their days laboring to complete the project as quickly as possible, and their efforts were paying off.


    The construction was halfway done, with just one more week to go.


    Finally, William found an opportunity to interrogate the guard.


    The opportunity William had been waiting for finally arrived¡ªthe guard was alone for the first time. The guard had left the mansion and ventured into the forest.


    William seized the chance to follow him. He slipped out of the mansion, clutching the dagger Travis had given him.


    The guard had gone into the forest to do something unusual: he was drinking a strange potion.


    ''Is he using drugs or something?'' William wondered.


    The liquid in the flask looked odd, and the guard''s behavior seemed altered after drinking it. William could only assume it was some kind of drug, especially since the man was consuming it in the middle of the forest, away from prying eyes.


    ''This is my chance to act.''


    William knew he might never get another opportunity like this, so he had to make the most of it. With the dagger in hand, he crept toward the guard.


    His movements were silent, and the guard didn''t notice his presence. Thanks to the seal on his body, William had no mana for the guard to sense¡ªa rare advantage that worked in his favor this time.


    In one swift motion, William grabbed the guard from behind and pressed the dagger to his neck.


    The blade was sharp, and when William applied a bit of pressure, it left a small cut on the guard''s neck.


    "Who are you?" the guard demanded, his voice tense.

 Chapter 171 - 171: Ally, and Return

    The guard could have used his magic, but it would take time to cast, and he wouldn''t survive if William decided to slit his throat.


    For that reason, the guard stayed still, trying to process the situation.


    "I need to ask you a few things. Are you willing to answer in exchange for your life?" William said.


    Shaking, the guard replied, "Of course. I''ll tell you anything you want to know."


    "Good. Let''s start with Simone. What happened to her?"


    When William mentioned Simone, the guard fell silent, as if he couldn''t believe what he was hearing.


    "Simone? I don''t know who she is," the guard said.


    "Bullshit!" William pressed the dagger harder against the man''s throat. "You and Simone were involved, weren''t you? So tell me, what happened to her? Where is she?"


    No one knew about Simone and the guard''s relationship¡ªexcept Travis. So, when the guard heard William''s words, he was both shocked and terrified.


    "H-How do you know this?" he stammered.


    "I''m the one asking questions here. Now, are you going to answer or not?"


    "Fine, fine. I knew her, and we were involved. But one day, she just disappeared. Jonas said she quit her job, but I don''t think that''s true," the guard admitted.


    This was information William already knew. Travis had believed the guard might know more about Simone''s disappearance¡ªor perhaps even be complicit in it.


    "This is useless," William said. "I need more than that." S~ea??h the nov§×lF~ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "I still think she''s inside the mansion!"


    The guard had kept this theory to himself because he lacked proof. But now, confronted by William, he had no choice but to share everything.


    "Why do you think that?" William asked.


    "I watched the exits the day she supposedly quit and left the mansion. She never left. I''m certain of it. And it''s not just her¡ªothers who supposedly quit also never left the mansion."


    The guard William was interrogating was responsible for monitoring the exits, so he saw everyone who came and went.


    Simone had visited him the day she "quit," and he had stayed up all day waiting to see her leave. But she never did.


    This had haunted him for a long time, and it was the first time he had shared his suspicions with anyone.


    William believed him. It made sense. "I''m actually trying to find out what happened to Simone and the others who went missing. Are you willing to work with me?"


    "Absolutely!"


    The guard was visibly excited. For the first time, he had someone to help him find the person he loved. The interrogation had gone in a completely different direction than William had expected.


    In the end, he had gained a new ally in his quest for answers about the mansion''s dark secrets.


    When the guard turned around, he saw William''s face and recognized him.


    "So, you''re one of the slaves. I mean, sorry¡ªone of the people who were sold to Jonas¡­"


    Unlike many of Jonas'' employees, the guard wasn''t entirely insensitive.


    "That''s right," William said. "So, are we good?"


    "Yes, we are. I''ve been asking around, trying to find out more about Simone, but no one would talk to me. It was always the same story. I even searched for places she might be but found nothing."


    When the guard said this, William recalled the room he had discovered in the shed¡ªthe one filled with flasks containing organs.


    Could Simone already be dead? The possibility was there, but William didn''t want to mention it to the guard¡ªor to Travis, her brother.


    He needed to be certain first.


    "I''m working with someone else on this," William said, "but for now, let''s keep that between us."


    "No problem," the guard said. "I''m Agnar."


    "William. Or 04, when we''re inside the mansion. You know, I don''t have my name anymore."


    Agnar''s expression softened with pity, but he didn''t say a word.


    "And what the hell were you drinking?" William asked.


    When he had seen Agnar heading into the woods, he''d noticed the strange flask in his hand containing an unknown liquid.


    "This? It helps me sleep. My mind hasn''t been in a good place lately," Agnar admitted.


    Simone had been the love of his life, but she had vanished without a trace. Agnar''s mental state had deteriorated, and the only reason he was still at the mansion was to find her.


    William realized that Travis and Agnar shared the same goal. Perhaps they could truly work together and make progress. That would be a good outcome.


    After their conversation, they returned to the mansion and went to their respective rooms. William felt a sense of excitement¡ªthings were finally starting to fall into place for him.


    Another week passed, and the project was finally completed. The structure was impressive: a large space with a central ring, surrounded by benches and chairs for the wealthy to sit, watch, and enjoy the fights.


    It wasn''t as massive as a coliseum or the mansion itself, but it was solidly built. William and the others had worked tirelessly to complete it in just two weeks.


    Once the project was finished, Jonas approached William.


    "We''re going to return to the mansion and come back here in a few weeks. They need time to prepare and invite the nobles, among other things."


    "So, I''m really going to fight?" William asked.


    "Yes, you are. You seem to have the strongest body, and all the fighters will have their mana blocked, just like you. So, you might be my best bet."


    Not just William, but 03 would also be fighting! However, the other slaves weren''t included.


    Jonas explained the reasoning: William and 03 had strong bodies, while 01 and 02 did not. Additionally, he needed someone to continue working in the mines, so he couldn''t afford to let all of them participate in the fights.


    On the way back to the mansion, Jonas treated William well¡ªjust as he had when they first met.


    Back then, Jonas had been kind to avoid scaring William away. But now? He saw William as a valuable asset for making a profit.


    In fact, during the trip back, Jonas informed William that he wouldn''t have to work in the mines anymore.


    "You''ll get proper meals, rest, and physical training," Jonas said. "I need you strong so you can bring in money for us."


    The improved treatment was a welcome change, but it came with a cost: William would still have to fight, risking injury or even death.


    So, while there were benefits, there were also significant downsides.


    03 was in the same carriage as William.


    "So, we''re going to fight now and stop working in the mines? This might be more exciting than digging for mana stones, but it''s also more dangerous," 03 remarked.


    "Yes, you''re right," William agreed.


    They didn''t know what to expect, and only time would reveal the answers they sought.


    When they arrived back at Black Pine Manor, Travis immediately sought out William. His expression darkened when he saw Agnar.


    The first thought that crossed his mind was that William had failed the mission.


    "Why is he still alive?" Travis demanded, grabbing William by the collar.


    William gripped Travis''s wrist firmly and said, "Relax. It''s even better than we expected."


    Hearing William''s calm tone, Travis loosened his grip and let go. "I''m sorry for that."


    "It''s okay. Now, can I explain?"


    "Sure."


    "The guard''s name is Agnar, and he was indeed involved with Simone. They were quite close, and he''s also looking for her. He told me some interesting things¡­"


    William explained Agnar''s belief that Simone never left the mansion and might still be there. He also shared Agnar''s reasoning behind this theory.


    Travis was visibly surprised by the information, and it gave him a glimmer of hope.


    "So, we have another ally now," Travis said. "Good, good. But did you tell him about me?"


    "I mentioned I was working with someone else, but I didn''t reveal it was you¡ªnot yet. Let''s first see if he''s truly trustworthy," William replied.


    "Good thinking," Travis agreed.


    William was gradually gaining more allies: Travis, Agnar, and 03. There was also Victoria, who had Asura with her and would soon become another ally.


    Things were looking promising for him. During this time, William hadn''t spoken with Victoria much, as she was still traveling to the academy. But when she finally arrived, it was time for William to reconnect with her.


    While resting in his room, William controlled Asura and initiated a conversation with Victoria.


    "So, we''re finally here," he said.


    They had reached the battle academy after a long journey, and Victoria was thrilled.


    "Yes, we are. What do you think of it?" she asked.


    "It''s impressive¡ªbig and well-protected. I can see why this is considered one of the best academies available."


    Now, it was time to help Victoria grow stronger and turn her into a valuable ally for William. Things were looking good for him. The only questions that remained in his mind were: would Victoria live up to it and get powerful with his help? And would he be alright when fighting for Jonas?

 Chapter 172 - 172: Victorias First Day, and Hand-to-Hand Training

    The battle academy was located in a secluded area, far from any cities.


    It followed the same principle as Snowpeak Academy: they didn''t want civilians nearby due to the risks associated with magical practice.


    Mages were powerful individuals capable of causing significant destruction, especially when experiments went wrong¡ªsomething common among beginners.


    Even with protective barriers in place, having a city nearby wasn''t worth the risk. Additionally, the quiet environment was better for studying and concentration.


    William could see and sense the surroundings through Asura, and the sight of students milling about the academy''s courtyard filled him with nostalgia.


    The arrival of new students reminded him of his own first day at Snowpeak Academy.


    ''Will James be alright? What about the king? I need to return¡­''


    Being far away didn''t mean his problems had disappeared. James still had a seal on his body, and the king was relying on William to bring back the antidote before it was too late.


    William believed James might have already found a way to break the seal, but the king''s time was running out.


    Meanwhile, Victoria was understandably overwhelmed as a new student. She wandered around the academy like a lost fly until a staff member approached her.


    "You''re one of the new students, right? Come with me; I''ll explain a few things," the staff member said. S§×arch* The N??elFir§×.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Victoria followed and listened carefully. William, through Asura, also paid attention.


    Most of the information was basic: the location of her dormitory, the start date of classes (in three days), and the layout of the academy, including classrooms, the library, and the gym.


    The staff member also emphasized the rules, which were the most critical part of the orientation.


    Breaking the rules would result in punishments, and severe violations could lead to expulsion.


    Victoria didn''t want that. She had worked hard to earn her spot, so she listened intently.


    Once the staff member left, Victoria spoke to William¡ªor rather, Asura, as she called him.


    "What do you think of the rules, Asura? I''m afraid I might not remember all of them."


    "I wasn''t really listening. Let''s go see your dorm instead."


    "¡­"


    The dormitories for new students were impressive. The building was massive, constructed entirely of stone, and adorned with sculptures, flowers, and other decorations.


    It was a pleasant and comfortable place to live.


    Victoria''s room was on the fourth floor. As she climbed the staircase, other students glanced at her curiously. They could tell she was new.


    "Why are they looking at me like that?" Victoria asked.


    "Because you''re new. These are all talented or wealthy individuals. They''re just curious about you."


    Victoria''s time at the academy wouldn''t be easy. She wasn''t the most talented or the wealthiest, so William would need to give her an edge to help her stand out.


    Her room was spacious and well-furnished. The first thing she did was jump onto the bed.


    "Ahh, this is so comfortable," she sighed.


    She placed William¡ªAsura¡ªon the bed as well, unsheathing him.


    "I really hope we can get stronger here. Are you sure you can help me?"


    "Of course I can. But that doesn''t mean you won''t have to study, practice, and work hard."


    "I know that. I''m not stupid."


    William had access to numerous rituals and spells from Asura''s memories, which he could use to help Victoria.


    But she would still need to put in the effort to grow stronger. William was determined to do everything he could to assist her.


    ''She needs to get stronger to free me¡­''


    "We still have three days before classes start. Are you planning to train or just rest?" William asked.


    "I think I''ll just rest," Victoria replied.


    "I see. Well, I''ll rest too. I need to gather energy to start helping you when classes begin."


    "No problem. See you later, Asura."


    "See ya."


    William wasn''t actually gathering energy. He was preoccupied with his real body, still trapped in the mansion.


    The next morning, Agnar approached William with some intriguing information.


    "Look, I''m certain Simone didn''t leave the mansion. I didn''t even see her go near that shed behind the mansion. I went there myself and saw some¡­ strange things."


    "You went there?" William was surprised. He hadn''t expected Agnar to explore that area. Given what was stored there, William assumed Jonas wouldn''t want his employees poking around.


    "Of course I did. But I don''t think those organs belong to Simone. At least, I hope not¡­ Anyway, I strongly believe there are secret areas in this mansion. Have you noticed we almost never see anyone besides Jonas? Where''s his family? Did you know he has about 20 family members?"


    "Really?"


    Now that Agnar mentioned it, William realized how odd it was. The only people he ever saw were Jonas and the old man he occasionally spoke to.


    But where were the others? It was strange, especially since Jonas wasn''t even the head of the family, yet he was the only one who appeared in public.


    "Do you have any clues about where to look?" William asked.


    Agnar had been working for Jonas longer than Travis and had been searching for clues about Simone since her disappearance.


    If anyone had leads, it was him.


    "Maybe," Agnar said. "I have a theory, but it''s hard to investigate. It''s a well-protected part of the mansion."


    "Of course it is¡­"


    "But we might have a chance¡­ I''ll talk to you later, alright?"


    "Okay."


    The rest of William''s day was a stark contrast to his previous routine. He enjoyed a hearty breakfast with far more food than he was used to.


    He also ate at a proper dining table instead of in the kitchen. Jonas was there, speaking to him and 03, who was also eating with them.


    "Like I said, you two will receive better treatment from now on, including training. But this will only continue if you win your fights. Understand?"


    "We understand," William and 03 replied.


    It was all about money now. Jonas was counting on William and 03 to win the fights and bring him a hefty profit.


    William didn''t have the option to refuse. He would have to fight, so why not aim to win? The improved treatment was a significant upgrade, and he no longer had to spend his entire day mining mana stones.


    Additionally, William saw this as an opportunity to get closer to Jonas. While finding Simone was a secondary objective, his primary goal was to gain Jonas''s trust.


    Doing so would increase his chances of escaping the mansion and ending his life as a slave.


    "After you two finish eating, head to the gym and train with our best guard. It''s just hand-to-hand combat training since you can''t use magic in the fights. Nothing too fancy," Jonas said before leaving them to their meal.


    "What are you up to?" 03 asked William once Jonas was gone.


    "What do you mean?" William replied, looking puzzled.


    "I know you''re up to something with those guards. Are you including me in this or not?"


    03 was observant and always paid attention to his surroundings. He had noticed William speaking with Travis and Agnar multiple times but had kept quiet, waiting for William to approach him.


    When William didn''t, 03 decided to confront him directly.


    "I''ll fill you in later. It''s not a good idea to talk about it here," William said.


    03 smiled, relieved that his friend was willing to include him.


    "No problem."


    They dropped the subject and finished their meal. Afterward, they headed to the gym, where they met their combat instructor¡ªnone other than Travis.


    This was unexpected, and William suspected Travis had convinced Jonas to assign him as their trainer.


    "Really?" 03 said, glancing at Travis and then back at William. "This is the guard I''ve seen you talking to¡­"


    Travis visibly tensed, but William quickly intervened.


    "Relax, 03 is someone I trust. He''s been working with me since before you came along. No problem, right?"


    Travis hesitated. Trusting Agnar had already been a stretch, and now adding another person to the mix made him uneasy.


    "No problem, but this is a combat training session. We shouldn''t discuss this now. Let''s get started."


    The training lasted about three hours. For William, it was relatively easy.


    While there were a few techniques he wasn''t familiar with, he was a quick learner when it came to combat. His body was also far stronger than average, thanks to his status as a summoned hero and the demonic energy enhancing his physical abilities.


    By the end of the session, Travis was impressed.


    "You''re incredibly strong, even without mana. How did they even capture you?"


    "A group of slave traders. They placed a seal on me before I could react. I don''t have many spells to escape," William explained.


    "That''s unfortunate. Anyway, I have other guard duties to attend to. We''ll talk later."


    With the training over, William and 03 were free for the rest of the day. Their only tasks were to eat and rest¡ªa far cry from the grueling labor of mining mana stones.


    As they left the gym, they passed by the other two slaves who had been left behind to continue working in the mines. The envy in their eyes was unmistakable.


    "They''re jealous of us," William remarked.


    "You think? Now it''ll be even harder to get them to help us," 03 replied.


    It would indeed be more challenging, but William wasn''t counting on their help anyway.


    That night, 03 came to William''s room, where Agnar was already waiting. Agnar had some interesting information to share.

 Chapter 173 - 173: Prohibited Area

    03 came to William''s room to speak with him, as promised, to learn more about what was going on and why William had been talking with the guards.


    Agnar, on the other hand, was there because he had something important to discuss. When he saw 03, he was slightly surprised.


    "Why is he here?"


    Travis already knew about 03 wanting to help, but Agnar didn''t. William quickly explained, hoping Agnar would trust his judgment.


    "I''m okay with it, but let''s keep it this way. I don''t want more people involved, alright?"


    William nodded.


    "No problem. Now, what did you want to tell me?"


    They all sat on the bed¡ªsince William didn''t have a proper desk¡ªand spoke in hushed whispers in the cold night.


    "Remember when I said there''s a part of the mansion that''s hard to explore? Well, I just got the chance to be a guard there. They only assign the most trusted guards to that area, and now I have the opportunity."


    The area Agnar referred to was one that even most employees couldn''t access. Because of this, Agnar believed it might be where Simone was being held. It was just a theory, but it had some basis.


    "So, you''ll be one of the guards watching that area, and you''ll help me get in to explore it?" William asked.


    "Yes, exactly. What do you think? Are you up for it?"


    William was confident. Even without magic, he had Stuart to help him. Stuart was an expert in camouflage and stealth. If anyone could infiltrate that area undetected, it was William.


    "Of course. When are we doing it?"


    "Tomorrow night. Be prepared, and please, don''t mess this up."


    Agnar stood up and left, leaving 03 and William alone. Now, William had to explain everything to 03.


    He shared details about Travis, Simone, and Agnar, how they were connected, and why he had started helping them in the first place.


    "So, Travis knew we were the ones who broke into the library? Well, at least now you have some allies. Maybe they can help us escape if we help them find Simone?"


    William wasn''t sure they would, but he didn''t want to crush 03''s hope.


    "Yes, maybe. Anyway, keep this a secret, alright? Don''t tell anyone, not even the other miners."


    "Absolutely. It''s not like they want to talk to us anymore now that we''re Jonas''s official fighters."


    "Yeah, there''s that."


    They had considered asking the other miners for help, but the miners had grown resentful after being passed over for the fighter roles.


    William and 03 were now receiving better treatment, which had caused tension. In any case, that option was off the table.


    "So, is there anything else you want to share, or is that it?"


    03 wanted to make sure he was fully informed. He believed that the only way to escape was by working together, and that required complete transparency.


    When he asked, the first thing that came to William''s mind was his deal with Victoria and how he was using his powers to secure external help.


    But that wasn''t something he could share with anyone.


    "That''s all of it," William said. "Let''s just hope everything goes well tomorrow and that we find something useful."


    "Are you going alone?"


    "I think so, yes. It''ll be hard for Stuart to keep all of us camouflaged."


    03 already understood and wasn''t upset about it.


    "Yes, you should go alone. Anyway, I''ll head back to my room before anyone notices I''m here and starts asking questions."


    "Alright. Take care."


    "You too."


    Once 03 left, William was alone in his room. He felt a growing sense of anxiety about the next day.


    Deep down, he knew it would be incredibly difficult to navigate that part of the mansion without getting caught.


    Even with Stuart''s help and Agnar opening the way, it would still be a challenge. Jonas wasn''t stupid, and if his family or the missing workers were there, the security would undoubtedly be top-notch.


    ''Let''s just hope for the best¡­''


    The following day followed the same routine as the previous one: William ate a hearty meal, trained with Travis, and spent a significant portion of his day resting.


    This was now the structure of his days as one of Jonas''s fighters.


    The only difference was that he took the time to check on Victoria to see how she was doing. With a few days still left before her classes began, she spent most of her time in her room, reading books and trying to make friends.


    William communicated with her mentally¡ªacting as Asura¡ªa few times during the day, just to check in and ensure she felt his presence.


    This was the best way to build her trust and solidify their connection.


    However, as night fell, William''s focus shifted entirely to the task at hand: exploring the restricted part of the mansion where even employees weren''t allowed. S§×ar?h the Nov§×l?ire.n(e)t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Not even most guards could enter that area¡ªonly a select few, handpicked by Jonas. Agnar had recently been chosen as one of those guards.


    William wasn''t sure how Jonas made his selections, but he suspected it had to do with seniority and a clean record.


    Agnar had only started breaking the rules after Simone disappeared, but no one had discovered his secret investigations, so it hadn''t affected his promotion.


    When night came, William left his room and moved through the mansion as quietly as possible.


    Travis was stationed in the corridor outside William''s room. When he saw William, he simply nodded and remained silent.


    Everything had been arranged. The trio¡ªWilliam, Travis, and Agnar¡ªwere working together to make this happen.


    William had Stuart hidden in one of his pockets, ready to assist him.


    "Are you confident we can get through that area? They might have other defensive measures in place¡­ They could sense if you''re using mana," Stuart warned.


    William was already aware of the risks. It wasn''t going to be easy.


    "It''s not like we have much of a choice, right?"


    William was in this situation because Travis knew he had been the one to break into the library. If Jonas found out, it would mean certain death.


    "I get that¡­ I''ll do my best to keep you alive," Stuart said.


    "Thanks."


    They moved through the mansion, the moonlight streaming through the hallway windows. The sound of the wind echoed through the silent corridors.


    As they approached the restricted area, the atmosphere grew even quieter.


    William couldn''t shake the feeling that someone was watching him. It was an unsettling sensation.


    Eventually, they reached the "control" area¡ªthe checkpoint where guards stood to ensure no one entered the prohibited part of the mansion.


    This time, the guard stationed there was Agnar. He saw William approaching but remained silent.


    When William got close enough to stand beside him, Agnar whispered, "I saw a few guards patrolling inside, so be careful once you pass me. Good luck."


    William nodded back, but he didn''t say a word. He was really nervous about what was about to happen, and what would he see going into that place.


    After he passed by Agnar, Stuart used his magic to camouflage him. He didn''t want to make any mistakes. What if there was someone already there, watching them?


    So, only after getting invisible did William finally calm down.


    ''It''s finally time to find out what the fuck happened to that Simone lady...''

 Chapter 174 - 174: Finding...Corpses?

    The place was quieter than usual. While other parts of the mansion still had a few staff members¡ªeven during the night¡ªthis particular area was completely deserted.


    Well, except for the guards. It didn''t take long for William to spot one sitting in a chair right in the middle of the hallway.


    This guard didn''t seem particularly alert. In fact, he looked rather relaxed, with a glass of some kind of drink on the table beside him.


    It was clear he didn''t expect anyone to make it this far into the mansion. In other words, he wasn''t exactly focused on his guard duties anymore.


    But there was a way to get here. William was living proof of that.


    With Stuart''s help, William slipped past the guard unnoticed and began exploring the area.


    At first, all he found was a straight hallway with a few locked doors. The corridor itself was similar to the others in the mansion¡ªwell-decorated and lined with large windows. S§×ar?h the ¦Çov§×lFire .net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    There was nothing particularly special about the hallway. However, William soon reached another part of the mansion that felt... different.


    At the end of the corridor, he saw a set of double doors. Unlike the other doors he had tried earlier, these were made of stone and weren''t locked.


    There were no guards nearby, and according to Stuart, there didn''t seem to be any magical protections either. It was all very strange.


    "Let''s take a look. It can''t hurt," Stuart suggested.


    William agreed, though he didn''t have much of a choice. He slowly pushed one of the doors open, peeking through the crack to make sure no one was waiting on the other side to ambush him.


    No one was there. The room was pitch black, with no source of light whatsoever. The atmosphere was eerie, and William felt a chill run down his spine as he stepped inside.


    Just beyond the door was a staircase leading deeper down, into what seemed to be an underground area.


    William was convinced he would find Simone¡ªor perhaps even the other missing workers¡ªdown there!


    Why? Well, the place looked like a dungeon, a prison where Jonas and his family might keep people locked away.


    Anyone in William''s position would have thought the same. But what he found down there wasn''t what he expected.


    Instead, he encountered another hallway, this one adorned with gothic artwork¡ªstatues of gargoyles, bats, shadowy creatures that looked like demons, and morbid paintings on the walls.


    Once again, William saw several doors, but this time they were open. He considered entering, but Stuart stopped him.


    "I sense energy on the other side. I think there are people sleeping in there, and if you open the door, they might wake up."


    William was taken aback.


    "People on the other side? Like prisoners?"


    "I don''t think so. I think these people actually live here... for some reason."


    He pressed on, hoping to find more useful information. Eventually, he came across a door that was slightly ajar.


    This was his chance. William peeked through the gap and saw that the room was empty.


    Stuart quickly confirmed it, so they wouldn''t waste any time.


    "Whoever lives here must be somewhere else. Let''s take a look while we can."


    William stepped inside, doing his best to stay quiet. His movements were slow and deliberate, and he watched where he stepped to avoid making any mistakes.


    The room, though clearly a bedroom, was... strange.


    Everything was made of stone¡ªthe walls, the ceiling, the furniture. The strangest part was the bed, which looked more like a stone altar. It didn''t seem comfortable at all.


    William searched for something that could help him make sense of what he was seeing¡ªa note, perhaps, or anything that might reveal the identity of the person who lived there. But there was nothing.


    And that was what made it so odd. It was as if the person who slept here didn''t actually live here. It was more like they only came to lie down on that stone altar and then got up again.


    How was that possible? Why would anyone sleep in such a dark, uncomfortable place?


    This only reinforced William''s belief that the people staying here were prisoners Jonas was keeping. It didn''t make sense for it to be anything else.


    Stuart snapped William out of his thoughts.


    "Hide in the corner and stay quiet. Someone''s coming, and we don''t have time to leave!"


    Stuart had dispelled the invisibility spell as soon as they entered the room. He couldn''t maintain it indefinitely without risking detection, so he had taken the opportunity to rest.


    William quickly looked for a place to hide. He found an empty barrel in the corner of the room and ducked behind it.


    With the barrel concealing him and Stuart''s camouflage ability, he was confident no one would find him there.


    There were many things William imagined he might see when someone entered that room.


    Perhaps one of the guards? A servant? One of the prisoners forced to stay in those horrible rooms?


    His mind even conjured up the image of a creature coming to capture and kill him on the spot. There were so many possibilities, yet none of them turned out to be true.


    In reality, what William saw was far from anything he could have imagined. It was Jonas.


    Jonas was carrying a body in his arms. The body was remarkably well-preserved, save for two peculiar details: the grayish hue of its skin and its emaciated frame.


    He walked over to the altar and gently laid the body down.


    "Rest well, little sister. We''re getting closer to saving the family."


    William covered his mouth in shock¡ªpartly to stifle his gasp and partly to hold his breath.


    Jonas stayed there for a while, tenderly stroking his sister''s face and whispering kind words. After a moment, he left the room.


    It took William some time to muster the courage to come out from behind the barrel. He was in complete shock.


    Stuart was equally stunned. The little mouse crawled out of William''s pocket and said, "This is beyond bizarre. That person isn''t dead. It''s as if they''re in a state of magical preservation. I think Jonas is trying to bring them back to life... somehow."


    William couldn''t stop thinking about what 03 had told him regarding Jonas''s family.


    The family was supposed to be large, yet he had never seen many of them. It was as if a part of them had simply vanished, and no one had questioned why.


    Well, what if they were dead, and Jonas was doing everything in his power to bring them back to life?


    After what William had just witnessed, the idea didn''t seem so far-fetched anymore.


    "What should we do?"


    William wanted Stuart''s opinion. After all, Stuart was a magical creature who had lived for many years and was incredibly intelligent.


    "For now, let''s try to explore a bit more and then head back. I think we might find something else around here. But we shouldn''t attempt anything risky just yet. Your mana is still sealed, which means we can''t fight anyone if it comes to that."


    William nodded in agreement. Before leaving the room, he decided to approach the altar to take a closer look at the strange body lying there.

 Chapter 175 - 175: Fight Club

    William walked over to the altar to examine the body. When he stopped and observed it closely, he realized just how bizarre it truly was.


    It seemed as though Jonas''s sister was both alive and dead at the same time. It was as if something was keeping her in this suspended state.


    The strangest part was that her heart wasn''t beating, and there was no blood in her body, yet she was alive and breathing!


    William could have sworn she was looking at him, unable to speak or move. The thought was deeply unsettling.


    It got even worse when Stuart said something to him.


    "I think she can see everything around her but just can''t move or interact. Crazy, right?"


    When Stuart said that, William looked at her again, and her lifeless eyes were fixed directly on him.


    "She''s probably wondering who I am and what the hell I''m doing here¡­ Well, let''s get out of here."


    There was nothing more he could do there except stare at that strange corpse, so William decided to leave.


    Before completely exiting the room, he cracked the door open slightly to make sure no one was around.


    Jonas wasn''t there¡ªat least, William didn''t see him. There were no guards either.


    "This must be a family secret, so I doubt there are any guards around here," Stuart said. "I think only Jonas and his family come down here."


    William believed Stuart''s words. They made a lot of sense. Despite seeing a few guards earlier, they seemed to be there more to prevent anyone from reaching this far into the mansion.


    Inside, he had only seen those bodies and Jonas. Now that Jonas was gone, the place was empty.


    This was the perfect opportunity to explore further and see if he could find anything else.


    As much as William didn''t want to enter the other rooms in the hallway, he did so anyway.


    He had already imagined they would be rooms with bodies similar to the one he had seen earlier, and indeed, that''s exactly what he found.


    William opened each door and saw different bodies, all preserved in the same eerie state. All of them were unable to move or do anything.


    By now, William was certain these were all members of Jonas''s family. What could have happened to them?


    He was deeply curious. Finally, there was one last room at the end of the hallway. When William opened it, he found something different.


    It wasn''t a room like the others but a strange chamber with an altar¡ªalso made of stone¡ªand several chairs in front of it.


    It resembled the layout of a church, but the altar was bizarre, with a statue of some deity behind it.


    The deity looked like a creature made of various mismatched parts. The strangest thing was that the statue emanated a peculiar aura¡ªsomething similar to mana but not quite the same.


    "What are they doing here?" William murmured.


    Stuart seemed uneasy. The little mouse, with his vast knowledge, understood a bit of what was going on.


    "This is an altar to some deity. They''re trying to use divine power to accomplish something," Stuart said.


    "Probably to resurrect everyone here. Or maybe the deity is the one who did this to them in the first place?" William speculated.


    "That''s a valid theory, but we can''t be sure yet. Let''s get out of here before they notice our presence. Unfortunately, we didn''t find Simone¡­"


    They searched every corner but found nothing more. Was there a chance of a secret passage somewhere?


    Perhaps. William didn''t rule out the idea. But what if there wasn''t one? Where were Simone and the other missing workers?


    Had they really left the mansion, or had Agnar been wrong all along?


    In any case, as much as William wanted to stay and search longer, it wasn''t a good idea to linger.


    Jonas could return at any moment, or someone might notice William''s absence from his room, which would cause problems.


    William made his way back, passing the guards without issue¡ªthanks to Stuart''s camouflage.


    On the way, he glanced again at the locked doors he had seen earlier.


    ''There''s a chance Simone could be in one of those rooms¡­ How do I get the key? Maybe in Jonas''s office?'' he thought.


    That seemed like the best lead. As he passed Agnar, he signaled to him, but they didn''t speak. S~ea??h the N??eFire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Agnar didn''t seem angry about it. He knew it wasn''t the right time to talk. William returned to his room without any issues.


    There, he decided to rest. The things he had seen were still fresh in his mind, and he couldn''t shake them off.


    The next day, breaking news arrived. Apparently, the fighting club that Jonas''s noble friend had started was ready, and the first event would take place in a few days.


    This meant it was time for William and 03 to leave the mansion and head to the fighting arena.


    William had known this moment would come, but he had expected it to take a bit longer. At least, that''s what Jonas had told him.


    "They managed to organize everything faster than expected, and the nobles are eager for some fights to liven up this harsh winter. We''ll have to go today," Jonas said.


    "Do we know who we''ll be fighting?" William asked.


    Despite feeling confident in his abilities¡ªWilliam firmly believed his body was his greatest weapon¡ªhe still wanted to know more about his opponents.


    It would be good to have some idea, as it would give him some peace of mind. However, there was no way to know yet.


    "No fighter knows, especially since it''s the first event. But from what I''ve heard from Travis about your training, I''m sure you''ll win. There''s no way the other nobles have found fighters as good as you right off the bat," Jonas said.


    "Good to know."


    They prepared everything, and this time, they used Jonas''s flying carriage.


    Only William, 03, Jonas, and one guard traveled in the carriage. The group was small since the focus was solely on participating in the fights.


    On the way, William discussed strategies with Jonas.


    "Honestly, there''s no strategy. It''s a fistfight until one of the fighters gives up, and I want you to win because I''ve placed my bets on you."


    Jonas kept emphasizing this. He repeatedly mentioned how much he had bet on them and how confident he was in their victory.


    William even considered losing on purpose just to anger Jonas¡ªafter all, the bastard had bought him as a slave¡ªbut what good would that do?


    It would only give William a momentary sense of satisfaction. Afterward, he would suffer at Jonas''s hands, as Jonas would likely take out his anger on them.


    In any case, the journey was much faster than they had anticipated. Jonas''s carriage was incredibly swift, and within a few hours, they arrived at the noble''s estate where the fights were being held.


    The atmosphere was far livelier than the last time they had been there. Many people had come from outside to watch and support the fights, and of course, to pit their own fighters against one another.


    As soon as they arrived, all eyes turned to Jonas''s carriage.


    It was well-known that Jonas was the wealthiest noble among them, and they recognized him immediately by his flying carriage¡ªadorned with gold.


    When they stepped out of the carriage, the portly noble who owned the mansion came to greet them.


    "Jonas, it''s wonderful to see you. You''re early!" he said.


    Jonas smiled. "Yes, I am. I''m always impressed by how fast this carriage is."


    "Indeed, indeed. Come, I''ve prepared something for you to eat," the portly noble said, then added, "and for your fighters as well."


    They were led to a dining room filled with an array of different foods. William could feel the gaze of the other nobles on him.


    Everyone seemed intensely curious about William. Not just the nobles, but the other fighters were also exchanging glances.


    This already set the tone for the excitement surrounding the fights that would take place in a few hours.


    One of the nobles in the dining room approached Jonas. By his side was his fighter¡ªa towering, muscular man who looked like a mountain.


    He glanced at Jonas and said, "Is this the fighter you brought? Mine seems far superior."


    The tall fighter stood in front of William, making him appear incredibly small in comparison.


    Jonas felt a bit intimidated, but before he could say anything, William spoke up.


    "Anyone with even a basic understanding of combat knows your fighter is a piece of trash. Does he want to fight me? I''ll be happy to kill him today."


    Even Jonas was surprised when he heard that. It wasn''t every day someone spoke with such boldness and confidence.


    The tall fighter grew furious and was about to throw a punch at William when his master stopped him.


    "We''re not going to fight here and cause a scene in our friend''s home. We''ll settle this in the ring later."


    With that, he walked away, and the fighter followed him.

 Chapter 176 - 176: First Fight

    After they left, Jonas spoke to William.


    "You surprised me, talking like that. If you bring that same fire into the ring, I''m confident we''ll come out victorious."


    It wasn''t just Jonas who was surprised. The other nobles and their fighters were now paying closer attention to William.


    03 thought he knew William¡ªor at least, he believed he did¡ªbut even he was taken aback.


    "I didn''t know you had such a thirst for blood. Are you some kind of assassin or something?" 03 asked.


    William reflected on that. He didn''t consider himself an assassin, but he had indeed killed many people¡ªand monsters too.


    Had he already lost the innocence he thought he still had?


    "I''m not," William said with an awkward smile. "I just wanted to show dominance. You know how it is¡ªthe fight starts before you even step into the ring."


    03 nodded in agreement. He liked what he heard.


    "Well said, my friend, well said. Alright, let''s get ready. I don''t know if it''ll be you, me, or both of us fighting today, but let''s hope everything goes well¡­"


    "It will. Don''t worry."


    They spent some time there. The nobles were socializing among themselves, discussing their territories, businesses, and, of course, the fights.


    Everyone was excited about the matches. But the fighters themselves didn''t share the same enthusiasm.


    William could see that none of the fighters wanted to be there. It was obvious. They were all likely slaves, just like him, forced to fight and endure pain for the amusement of the nobles, with no other choice.


    One of the fighters approached William. He was a young man, thin, and looked more like a scholar than a fighter. He stood out among the others, who seemed more like thugs or bandits.


    "Hey, how''s it going?" the young man said.


    William gave him a cold look.


    "Why are you talking to me? It doesn''t make much sense, considering we might end up as opponents. What do you want?"


    The young man tried to appear friendly, sitting down next to William and offering a smile.


    "Relax, friend. I just came to talk, I swear. I''m not like that other fighter who tried to intimidate you. You know, you and I are in the same boat here."


    He wasn''t wrong about that.


    "But what''s the point of talking? It''s not like it''s going to benefit us," William replied.


    "Not right now, but I hope we can work together in the future. You know, I feel like we have more in common than you think."


    For some reason, the young man was trying to sound mysterious, as if he held some knowledge William wasn''t aware of.


    "We''ll see. I''ll remember your face."


    After saying that, William stood up and walked away to be alone. He didn''t want to risk staying close to other fighters.


    In a situation like this, he could easily imagine a scenario where the young man''s master¡ªthe noble¡ªwould do anything to win, even sabotage the other fighters.


    What if William was poisoned? Or fell under some magical illusion? Or worse? It didn''t make sense to take such a risk for no reason.


    As the hours passed, the friendly atmosphere among the nobles began to fade.


    Each of them had a fighter, and they were also placing bets, which meant there was a growing rivalry between them.


    None of them wanted to lose. It would mean not only losing their honor but also their money.


    Jonas was feeling the same way.


    They all made their way to the arena that had been specially built for the fights. There, the nobles sat in the elevated areas with benches and tables, enjoying a privileged view of the ring while sipping drinks and snacking.


    Meanwhile, fighters like William and 03 were taken to the area reserved for the combatants. It was a lower area, on the same level as the ring, which was sunken into the ground.


    There, all the fighters waited to be called for their matches. From what William understood after speaking with one of the organizers, the matchups were random.


    Each fighter would only have one match per day. So, William would only fight once that night.


    But the next day, he would have another fight. Of course, he wasn''t thinking about the next day''s match. William was focused on winning his first fight.


    While waiting downstairs with the other fighters, William tried to assess which of them might be strong.


    But that was nearly impossible for him. Without the ability to use mana¡ªand the other fighters couldn''t either¡ªhe had no way of gauging their strength.


    Here, physical strength was what mattered, and it wasn''t wise to judge based on appearance alone.


    William, for example, was muscular and well-defined, but he wasn''t a giant like that other fighter who had approached him earlier.


    However, William was quite strong. So even the men who looked lean could have incredibly powerful bodies.


    03 stood beside William.


    "From what I''ve seen, there''s a chance we might end up fighting each other. If that happens, I think I''ll just forfeit," 03 said.


    "Forfeit?"


    "Yeah. I''m not confident about beating you, and Jonas won''t be mad because I already talked to him about it. He can''t bet on our match anyway."


    "I see."


    After about 20 minutes of waiting downstairs, one of the organizers came to call two of the fighters for a match.


    He pointed at each of them.


    "You, and you. Come with me."


    The two fighters who were called were strangers to William. He hadn''t interacted with either of them before.


    Before the organizer left, William asked him a question. He really needed to know the answer.


    "Can we watch the fights?"


    "Not for now, but we might consider changing that rule in the future."


    With that, the organizer left with the two fighters, who made their way to the ring.


    William wanted to watch not for entertainment but to see how the other fighters performed.


    What if he ended up facing one of them in the future? It would be good to know their strengths, to prepare and have an idea of what to expect.


    Perhaps that was exactly why they weren''t allowed to watch the fights. In any case, the only thing William could do was sit there and wait for his turn.


    03 seemed a bit anxious about the fights. William tried to calm him down.


    The first match between the two fighters lasted about 10 minutes. After that, they called other fighters, and this time, it was William''s turn.


    Before entering the ring, he had to remove his shirt and shoes, leaving him only in his pants. This gave the fights a more rustic, barbaric feel.


    William''s opponent was a middle-aged man covered in scars. Just by looking at the two of them, it was obvious who most people would bet on.


    "This is too easy," one of the nobles said. "Let''s bet on the guy with all the scars."


    Many of the nobles, sipping their wine as they watched the fights, thought the same way. But some were a bit hesitant.


    "Appearances can be deceiving. Is it really a good idea to bet on the scarred guy? Not to mention, if everyone bets on the same person, the payout will be terrible."


    Because of this reasoning, some decided to bet their money on William, hoping for a better payout.


    Jonas, on the other hand, placed an enormous bet on William¡ªmore than he had initially planned.


    The guard accompanying Jonas asked, "You''re betting all of that?"


    Jonas, with a smile, replied, "That fighter going against my slave is much weaker. This is the perfect opportunity to make a fortune."


    He didn''t want to miss this chance. The betting went on for about two minutes before the fight officially began.


    The event organizer explained the rules: no weapons were allowed, and if one fighter surrendered, the other had to stop.


    William already knew all this, so he didn''t pay much attention.


    "Begin the fight!"


    The two fighters stared each other down for a brief moment.


    "You wanna give up now, little fairy? You don''t look like much of a fighter," William''s opponent taunted.


    "Oh really? How do you think they''ll feel after you lose to me in less than 30 seconds?" William shot back.


    "What?"


    William''s opponent couldn''t believe what he was hearing. He started laughing, thinking William had lost his mind.


    Well, that wasn''t the case. William sprinted toward the fighter, his speed extraordinary.


    In less than three seconds, he had crossed the entire ring and appeared right in front of his opponent. Then, he clenched his fist and delivered a punch straight to the man''s stomach. S~ea??h the N?velFire(.)net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    The punch was so powerful that the sound of ribs cracking echoed through the arena, and all the nobles were left in shock.


    "I-I surrender!" the fighter gasped.


    Jonas couldn''t contain the smile on his face. He bet a lot of money, and now that William won, his anxiety was long gone.


    "I told you he would win!" Jonas said to the guard, "this guy will make me rich."

 Chapter 177 - 177: Running out of Time

    The shock was evident on the faces of all the nobles who witnessed William''s powerful punch. They couldn''t tell if William was just that strong or if his opponent was simply too weak.


    "That scarred guy is a joke," one of the nobles said. "He looks dangerous but isn''t. Where are the real fighters?"


    Many of them were furious for losing money by betting on the man with scars who had lost the fight after just one punch from William.


    Among them, Jonas was the most excited. After being declared the winner, William joined Jonas to watch the rest of the fights.


    There was no reason for him to stay downstairs with the other fighters since he wouldn''t be fighting again¡ªat least not that day.


    "You were incredible," Jonas said, giving William a slap on the shoulder. "I knew you were good, but that was something else."


    William, despite disliking Jonas for everything he had done¡ªand especially after seeing those strange bodies in the mansion¡ªdecided to play along and be as polite as possible.


    "It was nothing. I''m glad you made some money betting on me."


    Jonas laughed heartily.


    "Oh, I made a lot. A lot of money. If you keep this up, we might even talk about you buying your freedom. But let''s discuss that when we get back. For now, we''ve got more fights to enjoy."


    After saying that, he pointed to the chair next to him and said, "Sit down. And grab yourself some wine."


    William did as Jonas asked. He sipped the wine slowly, taking small gulps as he watched the fights.


    "Am I really allowed to stay here? I thought fighters weren''t supposed to watch the matches," William asked, his curiosity getting the better of him.


    "Normally, you wouldn''t be," Jonas admitted. "But the organizer already said you''re way stronger than the others, so you won''t be fighting anymore. They''re actually thinking of sending you to the bigger tournaments in the capital."


    The situation had completely changed, and William wasn''t sure how to feel about it.


    He wanted to stay close to Black Pine Manor, as Jonas''s mansion was near the forbidden area of the continent¡ªthe place where demons had lived long ago.


    Kier had tricked him and was heading to that area. In fact, he might already be there. William needed to find a way to escape as soon as possible.


    "But when are these tournaments happening?" William asked.


    Jonas said something interesting¡ªsomething that might actually be useful.


    "There are a few going on now, but we''ll only head out in about two months. I''ve got some important matters to attend to at the mansion and can''t be away for too long."


    The first thing that came to William''s mind were the mummified bodies of Jonas''s family that he had seen in the mansion''s underground area.


    ''Is he talking about that?'' William wondered.


    "I see. But what about back at the mansion? Will I have to go back to mining, or¡­?"


    William had been receiving better treatment precisely because he had become one of the fighters. Jonas saw him as an opportunity to make more money, so he wanted to keep William in good condition.


    But now that William wouldn''t be fighting for two months, what would he have to do?


    "No, of course not. In fact, I''m thinking of putting you to work on other tasks. Maybe as a guard for a while? Or helping to deal with some beasts that have been appearing near the mansion? I think it''s a good way to put your strength to use."


    Now that was interesting. William would continue to receive better treatment, and he might even have the chance to get closer to Jonas, which could help him escape in the future.


    In any case, they watched the fights, and when it was 03''s turn to fight, William''s interest grew a bit.


    03 wasn''t as good as William, obviously, but he wasn''t bad either. After a bloody fight with both sides taking hits, 03 managed to come out victorious. Sear?h the N??eFire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    By the end of the match, his nose was bleeding, and his right eye was swollen, but he was okay. Jonas was happy again because he had bet on 03.


    "I made another good chunk of money! But he''ll need some time to recover, and I''m not sure if it''s worth taking him to the tournament in the capital in two months¡­"


    For the tournament, they would need the best fighters, and 03 wasn''t exactly top-tier in hand-to-hand combat.


    William thought he wouldn''t be interested in watching the remaining fights after 03''s match, but the final fight of the night surprised him.


    One of the fighters was the young man who had spoken those strange words to him earlier in the waiting area.


    This young man was simply powerful. The speed at which he rushed toward his opponent was even faster than William''s, and a single punch from him sent the other fighter flying across the ring.


    Everything happened so quickly, and within seconds, he had won the match.


    After his victory, as the organizer raised his hand in celebration, the young man lifted his head and looked directly at William.


    ''Who is this guy?'' William wondered.


    The strength that young man had displayed wasn''t normal, and the cryptic words he had spoken to William were still echoing in his mind.


    However, as much as William wanted to learn more, he didn''t get the chance to talk to the young man after the fights ended. Jonas was eager to head home, so they all boarded the flying carriage and left.


    Inside the carriage, William tried to pry more information out of Jonas about the young fighter.


    "Do you know who he is? He seemed really strong."


    "No idea. All I know is that his master lives near the forbidden zone¡­ I don''t know how he manages to stay there. From the stories I''ve heard, it''s a dangerous place."


    "Forbidden zone?"


    "Yeah, a pretty famous one not too far from my mansion. They say humans with extraordinary powers once lived there, but that was a long time ago."


    It didn''t take a genius to figure out that Jonas was referring to the demons who had once inhabited that area.


    When William realized this, he immediately thought back to what the young man had said¡ªthat they were the same.


    ''What exactly did he mean by that? It''s too much of a coincidence that he lives near there¡­''


    William tried to dig deeper, but Jonas didn''t know much more than that. Besides, everyone was tired and ready to sleep.


    After a few hours, they arrived at the mansion, and each went to their respective rooms.


    "While you''re fresh as a daisy, I''m all banged up¡­ At least the fights are over for now," 03 said.


    "Will you have to go back to the mines?"


    "Probably, but not for another three days. What about you?"


    "From what I understand, no. Jonas said he has other tasks for me."


    03 was a little sad that his friend wouldn''t be with him during the grueling work, but he was still happy that William wouldn''t have to endure the heat and exhaustion of mining mana stones for hours on end.


    "I see. Well, see you tomorrow."


    "See you."


    William went to his room, lay down on the bed, and stared at the ceiling. Stuart was by his side.


    "We can''t afford to wait too long to get out of here. If you go to the capital for those tournaments, I''m sure you''ll have to stay there for a while. That means we have to escape within a month at most!"


    "I know that, but I''m not sure what to do¡­ Should I try to speed things up with Victoria?"


    He had already discussed this with Stuart, so he had a rough idea of the escape plan.


    "I think so. It''s risky, but it''s the best option. Otherwise, we''ll be stuck here forever. Think about it¡ªshe still has to travel to get the blood and then come here to rescue us. We don''t have much time."


    "What if I try to escape even with the seal?"


    This was an idea that had crossed William''s mind after Jonas agreed to assign him other tasks. It would make it easier for him to flee.


    "I''m pretty sure that seal also acts as a tracker. So, you wouldn''t be able to escape for long¡­"


    "Damn it¡­"


    The next day, William woke up earlier than usual with the intention of starting a conversation with Victoria and trying to help her grow stronger.


    The classes had just begun, and Victoria was already feeling left behind compared to the other students. She was in a vulnerable state, susceptible to outside ideas¡ªlike William''s.


    "What do you think about performing a ritual to give you a bit more power? I think it could be good for you," William suggested.


    "A ritual? That sounds a bit¡­ dark."


    Victoria was in the library, reading some books early in the morning. Asura was perched on the table.


    "Well, you know that most powerful mages have to make some sacrifices to grow stronger. It''s a normal part of the process. But don''t worry, we''re not going to kill anyone."


    "I''ll trust you, Asura. What do you have in mind?"


    William was about to take a risk and perform the rituals Asura had taught him before going into hibernation. He needed to make Victoria stronger, no matter the cost.

 Chapter 178 - 178: Trying to Invade the Dungeon

    There were various rituals that Asura had taught William. Most of them worked by transferring demonic energy from William''s body¡ªand what Asura had stored in the sword¡ªto the user, in this case, Victoria.


    But for it to work, a kind of sacrifice was necessary. The idea was to take the life force of creatures, absorb it, and use it as a conduit for the demonic energy.


    This way, William could use the life force of the slain creature for himself, maintaining his strength.


    If he simply passed his demonic energy or the energy from the sword to Victoria, it would eventually run out.


    Not to mention, he would feel weaker. However, by using the life force of slain creatures and the magical symbols of the ritual, it was possible to mitigate this negative effect.


    And it could go even further. There was another ritual that could send demonic energy to William if Victoria performed a sacrifice for him.


    At first, this could be done with other types of creatures, like magical beasts, but eventually, human sacrifice would be the most effective.


    Perhaps this was one of the reasons the demonic race had been hated and had disappeared. William found this somewhat hypocritical. Many other mages and civilizations did worse things for their deities and yet continued to thrive.


    In any case, after William explained the procedure to Victoria, she was a bit apprehensive.


    "Is this really a good idea? We''ll have to sacrifice a magical beast? Look, it usually starts like this, and before you know it, I''m doing it with other humans¡­"


    William was surprised that she immediately saw where things could lead in the future. Not that it was hard to figure out.


    But Asura had told him something else: if she performed the rituals, William would eventually gain more influence over her.


    It would be like having a follower.


    ''The idea of having a cult doesn''t seem so bad¡­ From what I understand, with these rituals, I can have them perform sacrifices that will send more power to me¡­''


    The idea seemed great for increasing his power and, who knows, maybe even reviving the demonic race. Of course, those were things for the future. Right now, he was more concerned with escaping the mansion.


    "Don''t worry, we''ll only sacrifice magical beasts. And like I said, many mages do worse things for power. Remember, if you want to become strong, you''ll have to do things others aren''t willing to do."


    That phrase stuck in Victoria''s mind. She decided to trust William and go along with the idea of the ritual.


    "Alright, we can do this. But where are we going to find a magical beast to kill? It''s not like I can just leave the academy right now."


    "You can''t?"


    William wasn''t aware that this was the case at the battle academy. Typically, magic schools like this didn''t allow students to leave whenever they wanted. They lived there, with free shelter and food.


    "I can''t¡­"


    "But surely they must have some kind of dungeon or something here that has beasts. They have combat classes against beasts, right?"


    An academy like this would have the resources to teach its students in the best way possible. Having a few magical beasts, both weak and strong, was quite common.


    Victoria confirmed this when William brought it up. It was as if a lightbulb had gone off in her head.


    "That''s true, I had almost forgotten about that. But it''s not that easy to get in there."


    "I think we can figure it out. What''s the best time? At night?"


    "Yes, at night."


    Now that William didn''t have many commitments at Jonas''s mansion¡ªhe was ''recovering'' from the fight¡ªhe was able to spend the entire day talking with Victoria.


    He took the opportunity to study the layout of the battle academy, the guards'' routines, and where the dungeon was located. That''s where the magical beasts were kept. S§×arch* The n??el Fire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    The security inside the academy wasn''t as tight as one might expect. They focused more on securing the entrance, and once inside, things were a bit more relaxed.


    Even so, they were confident that no one would try anything. All the students were selected after rigorous tests, interviews, and, of course, a significant financial investment.


    Despite this, there were still guards inside the battle academy, and the entrance to the dungeon was locked. Victoria didn''t know how to open it.


    The lock was magically sealed. William didn''t know how to pick it either, but he knew someone who could¡ªStuart!


    With his consciousness split between his real body and the sword, he consulted Stuart, explaining everything about the lock. Stuart gave him some practical tips on how to break it.


    When night fell, and Victoria was in her dormitory, it was time to sneak out and head to the dungeon entrance.


    Students weren''t allowed to leave the academy grounds, but they were free to move around inside. Because of this, it was relatively easy for Victoria to slip out and blend in with other students who were strolling through the gardens or visiting the on-campus restaurants.


    However, as they approached the entrance to the dungeon, the number of students dwindled. The reason was that the dungeon entrance was located inside the academy''s main building.


    The only place students could visit at that late hour was the library.


    As they passed by, they saw a few students studying. Most of them were the less talented ones, trying to catch up with the rest of the class by putting in extra hours.


    When they finally reached the dungeon entrance, they found a guard standing there. This was unexpected.


    "I swear there wasn''t a guard here the other nights I passed by. I don''t know why there''s one here now," Victoria mentally communicated to William.


    The situation had just become less favorable.


    "Is there anything we can do? Do you know anyone who could distract the guard?" William asked.


    Victoria seemed to be deep in thought about something. She then mentally communicated to William.


    "There''s a boy who seems interested in me, but I''ve never really paid him any attention. I could ask him for a favor. What do you think?"


    It wasn''t the best plan, as it would mean that the boy would know Victoria had done something wrong, but it was the best they had at the moment.


    Without getting the guard away from the door, it would be impossible to do anything, and it seemed the guard would stay there until late at night. He probably wouldn''t leave until the main building of the academy closed completely, and by then, it would be impossible to even get inside.


    "Alright, let''s do it."


    Victoria went to find the boy she had mentioned. Surprisingly, he was also walking around the garden. Was it a coincidence, or had he seen Victoria leave her room and decided to go out as well?


    He was a young man sitting alone on one of the benches. Victoria sat down next to him, which made the boy visibly surprised.


    "V-Victoria. What are you doing here at this hour?"


    He was stuttering. William found the scene amusing.


    "I know I shouldn''t just show up out of nowhere and ask this, but could you do me a favor? I really need your help."


    The boy didn''t hesitate.


    "Of course! Anything you need!"


    William was laughing hard on the inside.


    ''Ah, love is so funny¡­''


    Victoria explained what she wanted: she needed him to cause some kind of commotion in the library to attract the guards.


    The library was near the dungeon entrance, and there were no guards stationed there, so the guard at the dungeon door would have to be the one to respond.


    When the young man heard this, he hesitated.


    "Is this a good idea? I think it might cause trouble for me later," he said.


    He was considering backing out. William mentally communicated with Victoria, suggesting an idea.


    "Tell him you''ll agree to go out to dinner with him sometime. He''ll definitely say yes on the spot."


    "But then I''d have to go to dinner with him, and I don''t want to."


    "You can''t handle one dinner in exchange for getting stronger?"


    William managed to convince her.


    "How about we go out to dinner next week? If you do this favor for me, I''ll think about it," Victoria said.


    The young man responded in less than a second.


    "What kind of mess do you want me to make in the library?"


    It was surprisingly easy to convince him with that offer. Victoria waited in one of the hallways near the dungeon entrance.


    Neo, the young man, started causing a commotion in the library. It didn''t take long for the guard stationed at the dungeon entrance to head over and check what was going on.


    This was the perfect opportunity for them to enter the dungeon. Victoria rushed to the entrance and stopped in front of the locked door.


    "How do I open this now?"


    William had learned from Stuart how to unlock the seal, and he began explaining the process to Victoria.


    The only problem was that he didn''t have access to mana to assist her, so Victoria had to do it all on her own.


    She tried to follow the rune creation William had taught her, but it wasn''t working. The magic to break the lock kept failing.


    "Relax and focus. It''s not that hard to do," William said.


    He was trying to stay calm, but they were running out of time. The guard could return at any moment.

 Chapter 179 - 179: Victoria is Intoxicated

    Despite her attempts to produce the magical seals, Victoria wasn''t succeeding. She was still a novice mage, and the magic Stuart had taught her wasn''t the easiest to perform.


    "I don''t think I can do this," she kept saying to herself, and that self-doubt was preventing her from completing the task.


    William had already tried to calm her down and get her to focus, but it didn''t work. Because of this, he decided to be a bit harsher with his words.


    "If you don''t do this, you''ll keep being one of the worst students here, and in the end, you''ll become a joke to everyone. Not to mention, you''ll never make your father proud."


    William''s words were harsh. Victoria felt a surge of anger upon hearing this from someone she had started to trust.


    She focused entirely on trying to unlock the dungeon door, and to her surprise, she succeeded on the first try! William''s harsh words had worked.


    They slipped inside the dungeon before the guard could return and closed the door behind them to ensure no one would notice they had entered.


    Once inside, Victoria confronted him.


    "Were you serious when you said that?"


    William laughed.


    "Of course not, but I realized it''s a great way to get you to focus. You work better when you''re angry, it seems."


    "Now that you mention it, it was during a fit of anger that I discovered my talent for magic¡­ Anyway, what now? What do we do?"


    Now that they were finally inside the dungeon, where would they go first? Neither of them knew the layout.


    The place was dimly lit, with only torches on the walls providing light. The entire area was made of stone¡ªa common feature for dungeons¡ªand it was eerily quiet.


    "Let''s move carefully. We don''t know if there are other guards inside."


    Victoria nodded and followed, moving slowly.


    There wasn''t much to see, just a straight path ahead. It was a simple corridor. At the end of the corridor was another wooden door with an iron latch. Luckily, it was open.


    And the door didn''t have any magical protection, which was strange.


    "Either they''re overly confident in the protection of the other door, or someone opened this and forgot to close it," William warned her.


    A place where magical beasts were kept needed to be heavily fortified, especially inside a magic academy! What if the beasts escaped and attacked the students?


    Of course, they wouldn''t keep extremely powerful beasts here, but it was always good to take precautions. Given that line of thinking, it was odd that the door wasn''t more reinforced.


    Victoria opened the door, pulling it slowly and peeking through the crack. She wanted to see if there were any guards inside.


    Her eyes scanned the area, and she didn''t see anyone. But what she did see were cells, each containing different types of creatures. Each cell was heavily reinforced, made of sturdy materials, and protected by powerful magic. S§×ar?h the N??eFire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Now it made sense why the outer door wasn''t as heavily protected. The beasts couldn''t escape their cells. The magic used for protection was incredibly strong.


    William gave Victoria the next instructions, as she seemed a bit lost, unsure of what to do.


    "Let''s look for a weak beast that you can easily defeat."


    This wasn''t too hard to do. Victoria walked along the cells, observing the creatures and sensing their magical power.


    There were creatures of various power levels. The academy used these creatures for student training.


    Victoria recognized one of the creatures.


    "This one here, I faced it in my first class. It''s a very weak creature."


    William observed the creature she mentioned but ultimately decided to choose another one. Victoria questioned his decision.


    "They''ll notice if a creature goes missing or dies. We won''t be able to hide the body. It''s better to face a slightly stronger creature so they''ll think another student killed it, not a novice like you."


    They had to think not only about killing the creature and performing the ritual but also about not getting caught. William was considering all of this, but it seemed Victoria hadn''t fully grasped it.


    "But what if I can''t defeat it?"


    "We''ll pick one that''s a bit stronger. I''ll help you with my power. It''ll be fine."


    The two continued searching for a suitable beast until they found a desert fox with red eyes and spines along its back.


    This fox was common in the desert and was quite unique. It could burrow into the sand to hunt smaller, weaker magical creatures that hid there.


    "This one could work."


    Victoria looked at the small fox, and despite its intimidating appearance, she felt a bit hesitant.


    "I think it''s kind of cute. Do we really have to kill it?"


    "Yes."


    She had no choice. The first thing she did was figure out how to open the cell¡ªsince she couldn''t break the magical protection.


    Of course, they had a way around it. The guards and even some professors wouldn''t be able to break the protection either. It was incredibly powerful, created by a remarkable mage.


    However, they didn''t need to break the barrier. All they needed was to use the master key hanging on the wall near the cells. The key could open any of the cells.


    Victoria was about to grab the key when William stopped her.


    "Cover your hand with something¡ªa cloth, a piece of your cloak. They might be able to track your touch."


    William didn''t know if they could track something like fingerprints, something common in his old world, but why take the risk? Given how versatile magic was, he wouldn''t be surprised if they could.


    After covering her hand with her cloak, Victoria took the key and approached the cell. She inserted the key into the lock and opened the cell.


    It was time for the fight. Victoria drew Asura from its sheath. William then activated the power through the sword. A dark, burning energy surrounded the blade.


    This power was something Victoria had seen before during her first training session with Asura, but this time it was stronger. William was using a significant amount of power to ensure Victoria would win the fight.


    With the sword empowered by demonic energy, Victoria felt much more confident facing the fox. She charged at the creature, gripping the sword firmly in her hands.


    The fox hadn''t fully realized it had been freed yet, and that was crucial for Victoria to land a surprise attack.


    If it had been an attack using only Victoria''s power, the beast wouldn''t have taken much damage, but the attack with Asura was incredibly powerful. The strike cut through the fox''s fur and skin, burning it in the process.


    The beast roared in pain and could no longer move after that first attack. This allowed Victoria to deliver the final blow without much trouble, finishing off the magical beast.


    "Such a powerful attack! I didn''t know you could use this much power."


    Victoria was even more excited than before.


    "There''s a lot more where that came from. You''ll soon be the strongest one here. Now, take the beast''s body, and let''s find a secluded spot down here."


    Victoria also pulled a glass vial from her pocket. William had asked her to bring it.


    "What do I do with this vial again?"


    "Fill it with the beast''s blood."


    "¡­"


    She picked up the beast''s body and searched for a spot in the dungeon where they could perform the ritual.


    William had decided to do it down there because if they tried it in Victoria''s room or anywhere else in the school, the risk of being seen was too high.


    So, the dungeon, which was completely empty, was the best place to carry out the ritual.


    They continued exploring the dungeon until they found a room that seemed to belong to someone. It had a desk, several handwritten papers, and even a bed.


    "Does the dungeon caretaker live here? I wouldn''t be able to stand staying here¡­" Victoria said.


    "I don''t think he can either, since he''s probably somewhere else. Anyway, let''s do it here. Put the beast on the table."


    There was a table in the middle of the room, likely where the caretaker conducted experiments or something similar. They placed the fox on it and began drawing the symbols.


    The symbols were difficult to create. So, William used the same technique Asura had used to transfer information to him and decided to pass it on to Victoria!


    Of course, he only shared the information about the ritual and the symbols, not how the ritual worked. He wanted to keep that part a secret.


    The blood collected from the fox was used to draw the symbols. They were symbols from the time of the demons, meaning they were symbols no one used anymore.


    And since everything was done with blood, the whole thing looked quite macabre. It was rather sinister. Victoria wasn''t too fond of what she was doing.


    "Are you sure this ritual is safe? Seriously, this feels wrong¡­"


    "Trust me. Now, repeat the words after me."


    Once everything was ready, Victoria placed Asura on the table near the dead fox and began chanting words in a language she didn''t recognize.


    She didn''t even know how she was speaking it¡ªit was because William had passed the information to her as well.


    With each word, she could feel power flowing into her body. It was intoxicating, a sensation of lightness and strength.


    This began to intoxicate Victoria, and she started smiling as she repeated the words aloud.


    At that moment, William knew he had won Victoria over. He knew she would now do whatever he needed, and this would guarantee his escape from Jonas''s mansion.

 Chapter 180 - 180: Trapped Inside the School

    As the ritual progressed, the dead fox underwent a complete transformation. The blood from its body evaporated, and so did its flesh. In the end, all that remained were its bones.


    As for Victoria, she too had changed by the end of the ritual. The demonic energy had entered her body, and she was stronger than before.


    William was somewhat impressed by how much stronger she had become with just the first ritual. However, not everything was perfect. He knew he couldn''t continue doing this without addressing a serious issue.


    ''She doesn''t have the demonic lineage, so she''s like Kier in that regard¡­ I need to find a way to give her that lineage, or the demonic energy will eventually drive her insane.''


    As serious as it sounded, this was a problem for the future. His immediate goal was to use Victoria to rescue him. That was the most urgent priority.


    "What do you think, Victoria?" William asked.


    Victoria was smiling as she clenched her fists. "From what I can tell, my attributes increased by about 15 points each. This is amazing!"


    "15? That''s a lot, but it''ll decrease over time."


    "It doesn''t matter! With your help, I''ll become one of the top students here. What''s the next ritual?"


    She was genuinely excited to continue with the rituals, and of course, William had to calm her down.


    "Let''s get out of here first. There''s no point in trying to clean this up¡ªremoving the blood will be impossible. We need to avoid being seen on the way out."


    "Right."


    After hearing that, Victoria seemed to snap back to reality. She needed to return to her room without being seen, or she''d have a huge problem on her hands.


    She retraced her steps, leaving the cell key exactly where she had found it on the wall.


    A good amount of time had passed since they first entered, so when they reached the dungeon door, the guard was no longer there.


    The school''s hallways¡ªwhich had been lit earlier¡ªwere now completely dark. There were no students anywhere. The nearby library was empty and silent.


    "Do you think we could take a look in the library? Maybe there''s a secret section full of books," Victoria suggested.


    Of course, the library would have a section like that. Every library William knew of had something like it, but it wasn''t a good idea to go there now.


    The library would definitely have some kind of security, and even if it didn''t, the forbidden section would. The risk of getting caught was too high.


    "Let''s save that for another time. Focus on getting back to your room without being seen. One thing at a time, Victoria."


    William was trying to reason with her the only way he could¡ªby talking.


    Luckily, Victoria wasn''t stubborn. After hearing that, she simply stayed quiet and did her best to return to her room.


    She walked through the empty school, and as she reached the main entrance, she saw two guards standing in front of the door.


    Mentally, she said to William, "There''s no way we''re getting past those two. What should we do?"


    "Look for another exit. There should be one at the back."


    It was the only thing they could do. Victoria circled around and went to the back of the school. There, she found another exit, just as William had said, but there were still guards there.


    One guard was standing near the door, and from the look of it, he was wide awake and focused on his job¡ªmeaning it wouldn''t be easy to get past him.


    In fact, it would be impossible. The situation wasn''t looking good for them. S§×arch* The ¦Çov§×lFire .net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "Damn it, damn it. We''re going to get stuck here and expelled! Or worse, we might even go to jail!"


    Victoria was starting to panic¡ªwhich was expected. She had worked her entire life to get into that school, and now there was a chance she''d be expelled. It was eating away at her.


    "Relax, we''re fine. The good news is there are no guards inside the school, so we can figure out a way to get out."


    Even as he said this, William wasn''t entirely confident. Victoria searched every corner of the school. She checked all the exits and even looked out the windows.


    She thought about jumping out a window a few times, but outside, around the main building, guards were patrolling. It would be very difficult not to be seen.


    If William could still use Stuart''s magic to camouflage her, everything would be fine, but that was impossible for him now. They''d have to find another way.


    "Maybe there''s a secret exit inside that leads outside," William said. "Are there any other buildings besides this main one?"


    "There are the dormitories, and now that you mention it, I''ve heard some students talk about a passage like that, but no one knows where it is or if it''s even real."


    "A passage? Tell me more."


    "Well, from what they say, many years ago, a student at this school found an underground passage that connected this main building to the dormitory. He used it to sneak into the library and ended up becoming the top student. They only found out about it after he graduated."


    "What are the chances the school has already found and sealed that passage?"


    "There''s a chance."


    "Better than nothing. Let''s look for it."


    Victoria set out to search for the secret passage, but it was incredibly difficult, if not impossible. How on earth were they supposed to find something like that?


    The main building of the school was enormous, and the passage could be anywhere. As they walked through the hallways, they heard strange noises.


    William was already thinking the worst¡ªlike a guard, a teacher, or even some shady individuals meeting at night to plot against the school.


    That''s what he often saw everywhere he went. The nature of humanity was present in every corner.


    But what they found wasn''t that. In fact, it was something unexpected, something that caused immense embarrassment for both Victoria and William.


    She followed the source of the noise and found two older students. They were kissing, and the young man already had a wandering hand, exploring the young woman''s body.


    "They''re meeting here at night because men and women aren''t allowed in the same dormitory¡­ Oh my God, I want to unsee this," Victoria said.


    William, on the other hand, was excited about the situation.


    "This is good, very good."


    Victoria was confused. "Wait, don''t tell me you were some kind of perverted mage? Is this part of your soul in the sword also perverted? Look, if you need to look at other women, know that I''m here, and I''m quite beautiful¡­"


    A wave of confusion washed over William''s mind after hearing that. Victoria had misunderstood.


    "No, that''s not it. I mean, yes, you are beautiful, but I''m not a pervert. Look, think about it. If they''re here, they found a way in and know how to get out. So, we can follow them!"


    "That''s true!"


    Victoria simply agreed and tried to forget that she had said what she did. The two waited for a while¡ªof course, they weren''t watching¡ªbut the young couple seemed like they were going to stay there for a long time.


    In the end, William suggested that Victoria make some noise nearby to scare them off. It was a simple but effective idea.


    And it worked.


    "What was that?" the young man said.


    "It might be someone. Let''s get out of here."


    No one wanted to stay there and face the consequences. The two quickly put their clothes back on and left. Victoria followed them.


    They went to another room. This room was filled with weapons and armor. It was where the school stored the equipment students used.


    Victoria was very surprised, and so was William. Could the secret passage they used to enter the school really be in this room?


    It didn''t make sense because this was a room many people visited daily, so if there were a passage there, someone would have noticed.


    The couple entered the room and went straight to one of the corners. They approached the wall, and the young man began tapping specific stones.


    This alone was very strange. Victoria watched closely which stones he was tapping¡ªWilliam also paid attention to memorize them.


    After about 15 seconds, the floor on the other side of the room moved on its own! There, they saw a small trapdoor with a ladder leading down to a tunnel.


    A few seconds after the couple entered, the floor closed again. Victoria decided to wait a bit before opening the passage herself.


    "How on earth do they know about this passage? It doesn''t make any sense."


    She was baffled. Opening the passage required something very specific, and it didn''t make sense for that couple to know about it.


    "I don''t know either. Let''s try to do the same."


    Victoria went to the wall after waiting for 5 minutes and tapped the same stones. She forgot some parts of the sequence, but luckily William helped her, pointing out the missing stones.


    Just like with the couple, the floor opened again. They quickly went to the trapdoor and entered, descending an old wooden ladder.


    "This is a tunnel. Let''s hope the exit is this way," Victoria said.


    They moved forward, not knowing what they would find in that tunnel.

 Chapter 181 - 181: One Dead, One Missing

    The tunnel was ancient, filled with cobwebs everywhere, and extremely dark.


    Victoria was a bit scared to go in. What gave her courage was the fact that the couple of students had entered first, meaning it should be safe.


    "Is this the passage from the stories? The one I told you about?"


    William believed it could be, but how did that couple know about it?


    "I think so. Do you know who those two are?"


    "No, I''ve never seen them before. But they seem to be older students. We can find out more when we get out of here."


    "Yeah."


    William really wanted to know how those students knew about that place.


    In any case, Victoria moved forward, following the only direction the passage led. Eventually, she saw some very old doors along the corridor.


    The doors were made of stone and were locked. It was impossible to open them. They had no idea what was behind those doors but continued moving forward.


    Eventually, they found the exit. It was a ladder leading to a trapdoor, similar to the one they had found in the other room.


    This ladder led to the back of the dormitory, behind a tree and a rock. The floor moved in the same way as it had in the other room when they passed through, and then it closed. S§×ar?h the Novel?ire(.)ne*t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "We''re behind the dormitory! That''s great. Let''s get back quickly."


    Victoria headed toward the dormitory, her attention heightened. She kept looking around to see if there were any guards or other people nearby.


    Luckily, the dormitory didn''t have many guards, and there was a back door for her to use. And that''s where the couple was.


    The two were very surprised to see Victoria there.


    "Who are you? What the hell are you doing here?" the guy said.


    Victoria whispered back, "I''m just heading back to my room, just like you two. How about we pretend we never saw each other here?"


    The best thing to do in that situation was to pretend nothing had happened. The couple couldn''t report Victoria to the school administration without getting themselves in trouble, so there was no reason to.


    Besides, they didn''t even know each other. There was no animosity between them.


    "Yeah, agreed."


    They didn''t exchange another word. Victoria returned to her room and lay down on the bed. She placed Asura on the bed as well.


    "Today was intense, my God. But in the end, everything worked out. Not only did the ritual succeed, but we also found a secret passage. Pretty cool, huh?"


    After saying that, Victoria started changing into her pajamas. It was at that moment that she felt a bit embarrassed and said, "Can you see me? Is it a problem if I change here?"


    William wasn''t sure what to say to her. Asura didn''t feel these things¡ªat least William believed it didn''t¡ªbut now he was the one controlling the sword using his consciousness.


    "Yes, I can see, but my feelings aren''t exactly what you imagine. I''m just a fragment of a soul trapped in an object."


    In the end, Victoria decided to change right there. William felt a bit awkward watching her undress, revealing the beautiful curves of her body.


    Her long red hair covered her chest, and her bright eyes shone in the moonlight. William had to admit it¡ªshe was beautiful.


    After changing into her pajamas, Victoria sat by the window of her room, looking outside.


    "When can we do another ritual? I feel like this will make me really strong."


    "Soon. But first, you need to know that you can''t keep doing rituals nonstop. We''ll have to leave the school and go somewhere else soon, or you''ll be consumed by the power."


    "Leave the school? Do you mean leave for a few days or leave for good? You know I can''t leave yet."


    "Yes, leave for a while¡­ I won''t force you, but if you want to pursue power, you might have to do that. Remember, there are many schools that will accept you. And you don''t even need to study at a school if you have my teachings."


    William wasn''t sure if it was a good idea to tell her about this issue ahead of time, but he felt that after the first ritual, Victoria had been won over. She wanted power.


    After she fell asleep, William returned his consciousness to his body. He was still in Jonas''s mansion, spending his time eating and training a bit with Travis.


    He and 03 hadn''t been talking much since 03 had to return to the mines. However, something strange happened, something that made him have to talk to 03 again.


    During the early hours of that same night, one of the workers disappeared, and another was found dead in the middle of the mansion''s courtyard with his wrists slit. The worker was hanging from the mansion''s water fountain.


    This shocked all the workers, and Jonas had to work hard to calm everyone down the next morning.


    "One of our guards is missing, but we''ll find him. You don''t need to worry about anything," Jonas said.


    Jonas''s words didn''t help much. All the workers were still nervous.


    Even the guards were nervous. Previously, the workers who had disappeared were the weaker ones.


    But a guard? That meant this could happen to any of them. Because of this, it didn''t take long for some guards to resign.


    Jonas had flexible contracts with them¡ªone of the only ways to get people to work in that extreme cold¡ªso they were able to quit without issues and leave.


    With the number of guards drastically reduced, Jonas had to appoint William and 03 as new guards! He took advantage of the fact that the two had already participated in the fights¡ªand earned some of his trust¡ªand now they became guards.


    "You''ll get uniforms and will have night patrols in a few days. The head of the guards will give you the necessary information. I hope you don''t disappoint me," Jonas said.


    William, pretending to like Jonas, said, "We won''t, don''t worry. You can count on us."


    As they walked around the courtyard in their new uniforms, 03 said, "This is really strange. Do you think Jonas kidnapped that guard and killed the other worker?"


    It was the first thing that came to mind, considering Jonas had probably kidnapped other workers, but William believed that wasn''t the case.


    Jonas''s expression was one of shock, fear, apprehension, and confusion.


    "I don''t think so. I think there''s something else going on here¡­"


    William looked toward the forest surrounding the mansion. He wasn''t entirely sure Jonas was innocent, but it seemed likely.


    What the hell was happening? William had so many problems that he didn''t know what to do.


    And just like that, a week passed since William and 03 became guards. Nothing major happened. William could patrol while part of his consciousness remained in the sword, talking to Victoria.


    After the ritual they performed, the news spread throughout the school, and they were looking for the person responsible. According to them, the culprit had performed a macabre, sinister, and demonic ritual.


    Because of these labels, Victoria became interested in learning more about demons, and the teachers even discussed them in class.


    William had no idea the school would recognize the ritual, the symbols, and associate them with demons.


    As for Victoria, she was a bit apprehensive. She decided to confront William.


    "Asura, tell me, and please be honest. Were you¡ªor are you¡ªa demon?"


    William thought this question would come later, but it seemed he would have to explain himself to her now.

 Chapter 182 - 182: Not Many Options

    William remained silent for a moment, then said, "Yes, I am. But you know the stories about us aren''t entirely true. And many mages have done far worse than we ever have."


    Victoria was stunned, at a loss for words. Over the past weeks, she had grown closer to William than she ever expected. The artifact she had discovered felt like it was about to change her life forever.


    "And why didn''t you tell me sooner? Why keep it a secret?" she asked, her voice tinged with hurt.


    "Would you have stayed with me if I had?" William replied, his tone softening. "I needed to show you first that I''m not the monster they say I am. Otherwise, you would have cast me aside without a second thought."


    A heavy silence fell between them. Finally, Victoria sighed. "Alright, I''ll trust you again. But you mentioned we''d have to leave the school. Where would we go?"


    "To the forbidden zone on this continent," William said, his voice steady. "The place where the demons once lived."


    Victoria''s eyes widened. "What? That forbidden zone where no one who enters ever returns? Why would we go there?"


    William hesitated, then began to explain. "Remember when I told you that continuing the rituals would come with a price? To undo that¡ªand to make you even stronger¡ªyou''ll need the demonic lineage. And that''s where we''ll find it."


    "A lineage?" Victoria''s voice was barely a whisper, but her eyes sparkled with a mix of curiosity and excitement. The promise of greater power was intoxicating, and for a moment, it seemed to eclipse everything else.


    William smiled faintly. He had chosen the right person. With Victoria by his side, his plan just might work.


    After William explained everything, things began to move quickly. He also revealed the other mission she would need to undertake.


    "Wait, let me make sure I understand this," Victoria said, her brow furrowed. "I have to rescue a demon who''s imprisoned and being used as a slave? And this demon will help me obtain the lineage?"


    "Exactly," William replied, his voice calm but firm.


    What Victoria didn''t know was that the demon William spoke of was himself¡ªhis true form. He was speaking to her through the sword, and she had no way of realizing the truth.


    "If that''s the case, I''ll need to become even stronger," she said, her voice tinged with determination. "So, does that mean we''ll be performing more rituals?"


    "Yes," William answered without hesitation. "We will."


    William was eager to accelerate their plans. He knew it was time to move beyond small sacrifices, like the fox, and take greater risks. The rituals would grow darker, the stakes higher. But for Victoria to achieve what he needed, there was no other way.


    William carefully planted the idea in Victoria''s mind, his voice low and persuasive. "If you truly want to grow stronger quickly, the most effective way would be to perform the ritual with a mage. We could target bandits¡ªpeople who deserve it. That might make it easier for you. What do you think?"


    Victoria hesitated, her expression conflicted. "I¡­ I don''t know."


    This was already far beyond anything she was accustomed to. Sacrificing the fox had been difficult enough, but a person? The thought made her stomach churn.


    Yet, the old Victoria¡ªthe one who had never been touched by demonic energy¡ªwould have found this idea unthinkable. But the energy was already working its way into her mind, warping her sense of morality. And William''s influence was undeniable.


    Victoria didn''t respond that day. She spent hours lost in thought, unable to focus on her classes or anything else. Her mind raced with questions: Is this the right thing to do? Can I really go through with this? By the next day, after a sleepless night, she finally gave William her answer.


    "I''m in," she said, her voice steady but resolute. "Do we have to leave the school right away? If I''m going to leave eventually, it''s better to do it now¡ªbefore I get too attached to this place."


    Despite the years of effort she had poured into earning her spot at the prestigious magic school, Victoria was willing to walk away. She was placing an immense amount of trust in William, believing he could make her stronger than the school ever could.


    William, however, felt the weight of her trust pressing down on him. He had grown fond of Victoria and didn''t want to let her down. He wanted to help her become powerful, to make her father proud, and to give her the strength to explore the world on her own terms.


    "Yes, it would be best to leave soon," William said, his tone apologetic. "I''m sorry it''s come to this. I know how hard you worked to get here."


    To his surprise, Victoria seemed less upset than he had expected. "It''s fine," she said with a shrug. "Strength will open doors for me anywhere. And you promised to teach me things the school never could. I''m willing to take that bet. Staying here would only keep me average at best."


    Once her decision was made, Victoria went to speak with the school administration. They were shocked when she announced her intention to leave, but their response brought bad news.


    "I''m afraid no one is permitted to leave the school until we identify the individual responsible for that macabre ritual," the administrator said sternly. "You''ll have to remain here for the time being."


    William had nearly forgotten about that complication. Of course they wouldn''t let anyone leave¡ªnot while the investigation was ongoing. He felt a pang of frustration at his own oversight.


    "We''ll have to wait," Victoria said once they were alone. "But they''ll never find the culprit¡­ because it was us. What do we do now?"


    William paused, considering their options. "We have two choices," he replied mentally. "Either we find a way to pin the blame on someone else, or we escape. Which do you prefer?"


    "If we escape, they''ll probably come after us, won''t they?" Victoria asked. "They''ll assume I''m the one who performed the ritual."


    "Exactly," William said. "But it might be our only option. Even if we fabricate evidence to frame someone else, they have ways to detect forgeries. The investigation could drag on indefinitely, and we''d be stuck here for who knows how long." S§×arch* The ¦ÇovelFire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    With no other options, they had to decide whether to risk an escape.


    "But how are we going to get out?" Victoria asked, her voice low. "The exits are all being watched."


    "What about that tunnel we found?" William suggested. "There were other doors down there¡ªmaybe one of them leads to an exit."


    It was their only lead. As night fell, Victoria made her way to the room where the weapons and armor were stored. Her heart pounded as she slipped inside, only to run into the same couple she had seen before. They recognized her immediately and exchanged puzzled glances.


    "Can we help you?" the man asked, his tone polite but wary. "Are you looking for something in the storage room?"


    The couple had seen her the other night, but they had no idea she knew about the secret passage. Victoria''s mind raced.


    "What now? What do I do?" she asked William silently.


    "We''ll have to confront them," William replied, his mental voice calm but firm. "We don''t have time to waste."


    Since the ritual, security at the school had tightened. Guards were clearing the main building earlier than usual, and patrols were more frequent. Victoria knew she had to act quickly.


    Taking a deep breath, she decided to take the risk. "I know about the secret passage in this room," she said, her voice steady but quiet.


    The room fell silent. The couple froze, their eyes narrowing as they studied her intently. The air grew heavy with tension.

 Chapter 183 - 183: Exploring the Tunnels

    "I don''t know what you''re talking about," the young man said.


    He wasn''t going to confirm anything until he was sure Victoria actually knew about the secret passage. That would be foolish.


    Victoria, however, was much more specific to show them she knew what she was talking about.


    "So you''re telling me there''s no passage that''s unlocked by touching the stones on the wall, leading to an underground tunnel? The one you had to use because you were sneaking around kissing in the school?"


    After being so specific, Victoria was sure they would start talking and stop pretending.


    "So it was you who made that noise that night? We thought it was a guard or one of the teachers. Damn it."


    The young man seemed very frustrated, but the girl with him calmed him down. She whispered in his ear, "She knows about us, and if she tells anyone, we''ll be in trouble. Let''s try to keep her as a friend so nothing goes wrong."


    The last thing she wanted was to make Victoria angry and end up being reported to the teachers. That would mean expulsion for both of them.


    "Alright, alright," the young man said, scratching his head, "and what are you doing here at this hour?"


    Victoria didn''t want to say she was planning to escape or anything like that. That would be extreme.


    "I explored the passage you use and noticed there are some other locked doors. I wanted to check them out."


    She wasn''t lying. The only thing she left out was that she was hoping one of the doors led outside the school.


    The couple was surprised. The man smiled, "So you want to explore the locked doors? That would be great if you had the key, like this one I have here."


    He then pulled an old key from his pocket. Victoria was surprised. Did the young man really have the key to those doors?


    It was hard to know without testing the key, but if that was the case, Victoria would have to get the key from him somehow.


    "My girlfriend and I want to explore that place too. How about we go together? It might be safer that way. I''m sure you''ll keep this a secret, or all three of us will be expelled."


    The opportunity was too good, and Victoria didn''t want to miss it.


    "Sure, why not? Who knows, we might find something useful or interesting. Are you going now?" S§×ar?h the N??elFir§×.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "Yes, we are. We don''t want to waste time, and don''t bother with introductions¡ªI don''t even want to know your name. It''s better if we keep our identities a secret."


    Victoria didn''t mind that. Unlike them, she was about to leave the school¡ªif she found an exit¡ªso it didn''t matter much whether she knew their names or not.


    What she really wanted was to get out of that place to do the things William had asked, as it would make her stronger.


    Once everyone was decided on going on this adventure, the couple went first, opening the passage by touching the stones in the correct order.


    The trio descended the stairs and soon found themselves in the tunnel they had been in not long ago. That couple had clearly used the tunnel many times before.


    "And why haven''t you explored the other doors, considering you have the keys?" Victoria asked.


    "Ah, we''ve always been busy, you know, with lots of things to do," the man said.


    But his girlfriend was more honest.


    "That''s a lie. We were scared, especially him. Now that we''ve mustered some courage, and with you joining us, it gave us the push we needed."


    "Stop, don''t go blabbing about that."


    The man was embarrassed. William found the whole scene hilarious. He wished he could say something to tease the guy, but it was impossible since he was just a sword at the moment.


    Anyway, they walked a bit through the dark, spiderweb-filled tunnel, with small insects and rats scurrying around their feet.


    When the first door appeared, the young man with the key used it, and sure enough, the door opened.


    Until that moment, Victoria wasn''t sure if he was telling the truth, but it seemed he was, which was great. The couple went in first, and Victoria followed closely behind.


    The first room was bizarre enough. It looked like a laboratory with strange things inside. There were symbols, pieces of creatures in tubes, and even organs.


    Victoria and the other two had no idea what it was, but William had a good idea. It looked a lot like the things he had seen in Jonas''s mansion!


    Even the symbols were similar, and he noticed a statue of some deity that was basically the same as the one he had seen in Jonas''s mansion!


    He was wondering many things.


    ''Is it the same deity? If so, this cult he''s part of has spread to many parts of the continent¡­''


    They didn''t stay in that laboratory for long for a very good reason: it didn''t seem abandoned.


    It was as if someone was using the place frequently, which left the couple terrified.


    They started thinking about all the times they had gone down there to use the tunnel and passed by that door.


    Had whoever was using the laboratory already seen them? Had they just been lucky that nothing had happened? Would that luck hold forever?


    They were already thinking about leaving after seeing that.


    "I''m getting out of here," the man said. "It''s not worth staying here and risking running into some lunatic. You should do the same."


    His girlfriend agreed. They were about to leave when Victoria asked for the key.


    "At least give me the key so I can explore the rest. I''ll return it to you later."


    The young man tossed the key to Victoria. She caught it before it hit the ground. He wasn''t in the mood to argue with her about it. In his mind, it was better to just hand it over and be done with it.


    With the key in hand, Victoria could now explore on her own.


    "What do you think that was?" she asked.


    William wanted to tell her but decided to keep it a secret for now.


    "No idea, but they weren''t wrong when they said the place wasn''t abandoned. Let''s be careful from now on."


    The tension had increased considerably. Before, Victoria was sure she would be alone in those tunnels, but it seemed that wasn''t the case.


    She held Asura in her hands, ready to fight at any moment. She moved forward, heading toward the next locked door since the first one only led to the laboratory.


    It didn''t take long for her to find another door. She opened it the same way as before. The key worked again. It was a master key.


    After opening it, she saw another corridor leading forward and upward. This gave her hope that it might lead to an exit.


    She continued walking, slowly and quietly to avoid drawing attention from anyone who might be there.


    Along the way, she didn''t see any more doors. It was just a corridor that went forward and slightly upward.


    Victoria was apprehensive, unsure of what to expect.


    "If someone shows up here, there''s nowhere to hide. This just goes straight," she said.


    The sense of danger was overwhelming. The worst part was knowing there were no places to hide if the worst happened.


    And it wasn''t just her feeling that way. William needed nothing to happen to her. He needed her to get stronger to rescue him.


    If someone killed her and took Asura, his plan would be ruined. That was the last thing he wanted.


    After a long time, they began to see a light. Victoria felt a bit excited.


    Considering the entire place was dark, maybe that light meant it was the exit to the outside world, and that''s what she wanted.


    The last few minutes until she reached the light were tense. Victoria''s heart was pounding.


    She couldn''t see the end of the tunnel. It was as if the light was blinding her, preventing her from seeing beyond.


    As soon as she passed through the light, Victoria was shocked. What she found was an open space with a very high ceiling.


    Several wooden benches, and in the middle, an altar. But the worst part wasn''t the place itself¡ªthat was the least of it.


    The worst part was the fact that there were people there! These people were dressed in black cloaks, and all of them were looking at the person speaking at the altar.


    They had arrived at a church¡ªa macabre church.


    As soon as Victoria appeared, all eyes turned to her. She didn''t know what to do.


    "Should I flee? What should I do?"


    She asked William for advice, but even him didn''t know. What exactly was the place they were seeing? It was really, really macabre.


    The person speaking on the altar stared at Victoria, and then said something she would never forget.

 Chapter 184 - 184: Miracle

    The man on the altar turned to her, his lips curling into a warm smile. "Welcome, welcome. Are you one of our new followers?"


    His words seemed to shift the atmosphere in the room. The cloaked figures, who had initially stared at her with suspicion, now regarded her with a strange, unsettling friendliness. Some even gestured for her to join them, waving their hands and softly chanting, "Come, come."


    Victoria''s instincts screamed at her to run. This place felt wrong¡ªdangerous. But the sudden shift in the crowd''s demeanor left her frozen. Desperation clawed at her chest, and she turned to the one person¡ªor rather, the one sword¡ªshe trusted for guidance.


    "What should I do, Asura?" she whispered mentally. "Run? Or stay?"


    While Victoria focused on the people, William was scanning the room. He noticed something she hadn''t: a potential exit at the back of the altar. It was partially hidden, but it looked like a way out.


    More importantly, he realized that not all these people could be from the school. If they blended in, they might be able to slip away unnoticed.


    "There''s a way out behind the altar," William said quickly. "But running now would only make them chase us. Play along. Pretend to be one of them. We''ll leave when they do."


    It was the best plan he could come up with in the moment. Running was too risky¡ªhe could feel it. These people wouldn''t let her go so easily.


    Victoria swallowed her fear and forced a smile, turning back to the man on the altar. "Yes, but¡­ I''m a bit lost here."


    The priest''s smile widened, his expression almost fatherly. "Don''t worry, my child. Take one of the cloaks and join us. We''ll take care of you."


    Victoria''s eyes darted to the corner of the room, where a stack of black cloaks lay folded.


    She grabbed one and draped it over herself, the fabric heavy and strangely cold. She hesitated for a moment before choosing a seat next to an elderly woman. Sitting alone would make her stand out, and that was the last thing she wanted.


    As she sat down, the old woman leaned in and whispered, "You''re so young, yet you already understand the truth. It warms my heart to see the new generation embracing the path."


    Victoria nodded awkwardly, her mind racing. She had no idea what the woman was talking about. It was clear this was a cult, but who¡ªor what¡ªthey worshipped was beyond her.


    William, however, recognized the signs immediately. The symbols, the altar, the talk of a "god of flesh"¡ªit was all too familiar. This was the same dark faith Jonas had been involved in. The realization sent a chill through him, even as a sword.


    ''People see the demon race as evil,'' William thought, ''and here I am, manipulating Victoria. Am I any better than them who are part of this cult? Could this god of flesh be misinterpreted?'' S~ea??h the NovelFire.net* website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    The priest''s voice boomed through the chamber, pulling William from his thoughts. "The God of Flesh is pleased! Today, we welcome another soul into our fold. Our community grows, and I can feel His gaze upon us. A miracle is coming¡ªI can sense it."


    The crowd erupted into murmurs of excitement, their voices rising in a fervent chant. Victoria kept her head down, her heart pounding. She didn''t belong here, and every second felt like an eternity. But for now, she had to play the part.


    Victoria didn''t dare speak to the cultists directly. Instead, she communicated with William through her thoughts, her mind racing with questions.


    "What miracle are they talking about? This whole thing feels¡­ wrong."


    "It does," William replied, his mental voice calm but cautious. "But we need to keep pretending. Just stay quiet and watch. We''ll figure this out."


    "Yeah¡­" Victoria''s unease was palpable, but she had no choice but to play along.


    The priest continued his sermon, speaking in grandiose terms about their faith and the power of their god. He listened to the testimonies of his followers, their voices filled with reverence and awe. But soon, the moment everyone had been waiting for arrived.


    "Its energy is here!" the priest declared, his voice booming with excitement. "We can make a miracle happen today. You¡ªcome forward."


    He pointed toward Victoria''s direction, and for a heart-stopping moment, she thought he was choosing her. Panic surged through her, and she nearly bolted from her seat. But then she realized the priest was pointing to the elderly woman beside her¡ªLady Olsen.


    The old woman rose from the bench, her face glowing with joy. It was as if she had been waiting for this moment her entire life.


    "Today," the priest announced, his tone shifting to something more solemn, "one of our oldest and most devoted followers, Lady Olsen, will receive a miracle. As many of you know, she has struggled with illness and the frailty of age. But today, all of that will be undone! Today, she will be reborn!"


    William''s attention sharpened. He was fascinated¡ªand deeply disturbed¡ªby what was unfolding. This cult, their rituals, their so-called miracles¡­ it was all connected to something far darker than he had anticipated.


    Lady Olsen stepped up to the altar, kneeling before the grotesque statue of the God of Flesh. The priest raised his hands, urging the congregation to do the same.


    "Join me in prayer!" he commanded, his voice echoing through the chamber. "Chant with me, and let the energy of our god flow through this sacred space!"


    The room filled with a low, rhythmic chant in a language neither Victoria nor William could understand. Even with the system''s assistance, William found the words incomprehensible¡ªa guttural, otherworldly tongue that sent shivers down his spine.


    At first, nothing happened. William began to wonder if this was all an elaborate charade. But then, he felt it¡ªa strange, oppressive energy descending upon the room. It wasn''t mana. It was something darker, more primal, and far more unsettling.


    Victoria felt it too, though not as keenly as William. The energy grew stronger with each passing moment, filling the chamber with an almost tangible weight. The cultists'' chanting grew louder, more fervent, their voices blending into a cacophony of devotion.


    Suddenly, the statue of the God of Flesh began to glow with a faint, crimson light. The energy coalesced into a thin, red stream that flowed into Lady Olsen''s body. She collapsed to the ground, her form trembling as the energy consumed her.


    Victoria instinctively moved to help, but William stopped her. "Wait. Don''t draw attention to yourself. Let''s see what happens."


    Minutes passed, the tension in the room unbearable. Then, slowly, Lady Olsen stirred. She rose to her feet, her movements fluid and strong¡ªnothing like the frail, elderly woman who had knelt before the altar. When she turned to face the congregation, gasps of awe and disbelief filled the room.


    Lady Olsen was no longer old. She looked as though she had been restored to her youth, her skin smooth, her posture upright, and her eyes bright with vitality. The crowd erupted into cheers and applause, their faith in their god reaffirmed.


    The priest raised his hands, silencing the room. "Today, our god has shown his power! Lady Olsen has been healed, her youth restored! This is the miracle we have been blessed with. And tomorrow, it could be any one of you!"


    The cultists erupted into celebration, hugging one another and praising their god. Victoria sat frozen, her mind reeling. William, too, was at a loss for words.


    ''Is this how Jonas plans to resurrect his family?'' William wondered, his thoughts racing. ''How does this even work? What kind of power are we dealing with here?''


    The cult''s meeting came to an end, and the atmosphere shifted from reverence to celebration. The followers rejoiced, marveling at the miracle they had just witnessed. Lady Olsen, now youthful and radiant, was surrounded by well-wishers, her transformation a testament to their god''s power.


    Priest Malakai addressed the congregation once more. "Our next gathering will be in one month''s time. Until then, keep the faith alive in your hearts."


    A murmur of disappointment rippled through the crowd. One of the followers spoke up. "Why so long, Father Malakai? We hunger for more of His blessings."


    Malakai smiled warmly, though there was a glint of something sharper in his eyes. "Our faith stretches far and wide, my children. I must attend to matters at another branch of our community. The God of Flesh''s work is never done."


    William''s attention sharpened at those words. ''Branches scattered across the continent?'' he thought. ''This cult is far more organized than I realized.''


    The followers seemed satisfied with his explanation, their faith unwavering. Soon, they began to disperse, filing out through the exit William had spotted earlier. Victoria moved to join them, eager to leave the eerie church behind, but Malakai intercepted her.


    "A moment, my child," he said, his tone friendly but probing. "How did you come to know of our faith? Who invited you?"


    Victoria''s heart skipped a beat. The priest''s smile didn''t reach his eyes, and she could sense the suspicion beneath his calm demeanor. She turned to William in a panic.


    "What do I do, Asura? He wants a name, and I don''t have one! If I mess this up, they''ll know I''m an intruder!"


    William hesitated for only a second before taking a gamble. "Say the Black Pine family invited you."


    It was a risky move, but it was their only shot.


    Victoria forced a smile and met Malakai''s gaze. "The Black Pine family invited me."


    For a moment, the priest''s expression faltered, surprise flickering across his face. Then he smiled, broader this time, and patted her on the shoulder. "The Black Pine family, you say? They are esteemed members of our community. This is excellent news. I look forward to seeing you next month."


    Victoria nodded, her relief hidden behind a mask of calm. She quickly made her way to the exit, blending in with the other departing cultists. Once she was outside and a safe distance away, she let out a breath she hadn''t realized she was holding.


    "Who the hell is the Black Pine family?"

 Chapter 185 - 185: Pieces are Coming Together

    William knew he couldn''t keep hiding the truth from Victoria any longer. It was time to share what he knew.


    "Remember when I told you about the demon trapped in a noble''s mansion?" he began.


    "That mansion belongs to the Black Pine family. The demon contacted me and described some strange things he''d seen there¡ªthings that sounded a lot like what we just witnessed with this cult. I put two and two together and took a gamble."


    Victoria nodded, her trust in William unwavering. Everything that had happened so far had proven that he was someone she could rely on. S~ea??h the NovelFire.net* website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "I see," she said. "That makes sense. But if what you''re saying is true, then this cult is spread all over the continent? Who are they? How have I never heard of them before?"


    "I don''t know," William admitted. "That''s what worries me."


    The same question gnawed at him. This cult was far more extensive and organized than he had imagined. What if they had been operating in the shadows for years, growing their influence without anyone noticing?


    William''s mind raced with questions. Who was this deity they worshipped? He had seen it with his own eyes¡ªthe cult had restored Lady Olsen''s youth. How was that even possible? Was their god granting its followers eternal life?


    ''If they can live indefinitely,'' William thought, ''it''s no wonder the cult has grown so powerful.''


    There was so much he wanted to uncover, but his immediate priority was rescuing the demon. To do that, Victoria needed to find the slave traders.


    "We need the blood of someone," William explained. "This person is the one who placed the seal on our demon friend."


    "Is this person strong?" Victoria asked.


    The slave trader was indeed powerful. William wasn''t sure Victoria could defeat them on her own, but she had one advantage: money. Her father, a wealthy merchant from their village, had funded her education at the battle academy. That, combined with her natural talent, had secured her spot.


    "Yes, they''re strong," William said. "But you still have some money, right? We can hire someone to help you."


    Victoria frowned. She hated the idea of spending her hard-earned savings, especially after leaving the academy because of William. Now he wanted her to use her own money too?


    "You''d better teach me some good stuff and make me strong," she warned, half-joking, "or I''ll punch you in the face."


    William laughed. "How are you going to punch me if I''m a sword?"


    "I''ll¡­ I''ll find a way, damn it," Victoria retorted, laughing despite herself.


    Becoming a student at the prestigious battle academy had never been her dream. Her true goal was to grow strong and explore the world. If William could help her achieve that, she was willing to follow his lead¡ªfor now.


    They continued their journey. The hidden church wasn''t far from the academy, and by morning, the school would realize Victoria was gone.


    Would they come after her? Possibly, but William doubted they''d spare many resources to track her down¡ªunless they found evidence linking her to the ritual.


    "Where should we go first?" Victoria asked. "I have no idea where these slave traders are."


    "Do you know of a city nearby? Somewhere they won''t think to look for you?"


    "I think so," Victoria said.


    Between the two of them, Victoria had a better understanding of the continent''s geography. William had to trust her judgment on this.


    "Look for a city in the direction of the danger zone I told you about," William reminded her.


    Victoria nodded and made her way through the forest until she reached the main road. It was the safest route, though the darkness made navigation tricky. Thankfully, the road signs guided her, and she soon figured out where to go.


    She walked for hours through the night, passing a few farmhouses along the way. The road was eerily quiet, with only one merchant carriage speeding past. It didn''t stop, leaving Victoria no choice but to keep walking.


    By the time the sun rose, its rays warming her pale face, Victoria was exhausted. She had pushed through the night, determined to reach the city as quickly as possible. There, she could buy a mount or hire a carriage¡ªanything to avoid walking another mile.


    The city wasn''t particularly large, but it was bustling with activity. Fortunately, it lay just outside the desert, so the climate was bearable¡ªhot, but not unbearable. Still, William knew that if they wanted to reach their destination quickly, they''d have to cross the desert eventually. That was a problem for later, though.


    "I need to rest," Victoria said, her mental voice heavy with exhaustion. "Unlike you, I actually need sleep."


    William didn''t argue. He still had about a month before his time ran out, and pushing Victoria too hard would only backfire. "That''s fine. Get some rest. After you''ve recovered, we''ll look for a flying mount and someone to hire. Though, I suspect we''ll need to go to a bigger city to find someone strong enough to help us."


    Victoria nodded weakly. She was so tired she could barely think straight. Pulling her black cloak tighter around her, she entered the city and began searching for a tavern.


    Despite having enough money to afford the most luxurious inns in the city, Victoria opted for something more modest. She wanted to save her funds for the journey ahead and, more importantly, avoid drawing attention to herself. A flashy stay at a high-end inn would only make her stand out.


    She avoided the seediest taverns¡ªthose were havens for bandits and troublemakers¡ªand settled on a middle-of-the-road establishment. It wasn''t glamorous, but it would do.


    The tavern was a rickety wooden building, its ground floor packed with rowdy patrons drinking and shouting over one another. The air was thick with the smell of ale and sweat, and the only available water was cold and tasted faintly of iron. Still, it was cheap, and the bed in her rented room was surprisingly decent. For Victoria, that was enough.


    She collapsed onto the bed, her body aching from hours of walking. The noise from downstairs was muffled but still audible, though it didn''t stop her from drifting off almost immediately.


    If she woke up now, it would be in the middle of the night¡ªa time when finding a place to buy a mount or hire help would be nearly impossible. Better to sleep through the night and start fresh in the morning.


    *


    Meanwhile, in his main body, William was carrying out his duties as a guard at the Black Pine mansion. Most days were uneventful, but tonight, something caught his attention.


    Lights flickered in the secluded cabin at the far end of the estate¡ªthe same cabin where he had discovered those strange, unsettling artifacts.


    William''s curiosity burned, but he knew better than to investigate recklessly. He continued his patrol, keeping a safe distance from the cabin.


    As he passed by, however, the door suddenly swung open. Standing there was none other than Jonas himself.


    Jonas spotted William and called out, "04, there you are. I was hoping to speak with you. Walk with me for a moment, will you?"


    "Of course," William replied, his tone neutral.


    Refusing wasn''t an option. Jonas was his master, the one who controlled the seal that suppressed his mana and bound him to this place.


    The two began walking through the mansion grounds, the night air cool and still. Jonas''s voice broke the silence.


    "A friend of mine will be visiting in a few days. He''s traveling from a distant city, and I plan to meet him on the road and bring him here in my carriage. I''d like you to accompany me for added protection. What do you say?"


    William''s mind raced, but he kept his expression calm. "May I ask who this friend is?"


    "Of course," Jonas said with a faint smile. "He''s a priest¡ªan old family friend."


    William''s suspicions were confirmed. It had to be Father Malakai. The pieces were falling into place, and William couldn''t help but wonder what this meeting would mean for him¡ªand for Victoria.

 Chapter 186 - 186: Expensive Mount

    William continued his conversation with Jonas, carefully probing for more information. He learned that it would take approximately fifteen days for Jonas''s priest friend to arrive at the designated meeting point.


    That gave William a narrow window to help Victoria obtain the blood of the person who had placed the seal on his body. Would fifteen days be enough? He wasn''t sure, but he had no choice but to try.


    If Jonas and Father Malakai¡ªassuming it was indeed him¡ªmet and discussed Victoria, the truth about her being an impostor would come to light. Once that happened, the cult might target her, complicating William''s mission even further.


    There was another, more drastic option: eliminate Father Malakai before he could meet Jonas.


    But William quickly dismissed the idea. He had felt the priest''s power during the cult meeting, and it was formidable. Even with Victoria''s money, which could hire skilled mercenaries, they stood no chance against someone of his caliber.


    ''He''s likely one of the cult''s leaders,'' William thought. ''No wonder he''s so strong. Taking him on directly would be suicide.''


    The only viable option was to move quickly and hope Victoria could secure the blood in time.


    "When are we leaving to meet your friend?" William asked Jonas, keeping his tone casual.


    "Not for a few days," Jonas replied. "My carriage is enchanted to fly, so we can reach the meeting point quickly. However, my friend has some¡­ obligations to attend to first. Otherwise, we''d fetch him sooner."


    "I see," William said, nodding. "Keep me informed, then."


    "Of course," Jonas said with a faint smile.


    It was strange for William to have such a cordial conversation with Jonas. After the battles William had fought on his behalf, Jonas seemed to genuinely respect him¡ªor at least value his usefulness. Still, William couldn''t afford to let his guard down.


    *


    The next morning, Victoria left the tavern early, determined to make the most of the daylight.


    The city was bustling with activity, its streets lined with merchants hawking goods and services. After some searching, she found a vendor selling mounts¡ªboth land and flying varieties.


    The flying mounts were exorbitantly expensive. Even with Victoria''s considerable funds, purchasing one would drain most of her savings, leaving little to hire a skilled mercenary. S§×ar?h the N?velFire(.)net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "If we buy this mount, we won''t have enough money left to hire someone strong," Victoria communicated to William. "But a land mount will take too long. What do we do?"


    William knew time was against them. With only fifteen days to spare, a land mount was out of the question. They needed a flying mount¡ªpreferably the fastest one available.


    "What if we steal it?" William suggested.


    "I thought about that," Victoria replied. "But they usually have a magic whistle to control the mount. They''ll only give it to us after we pay."


    "But we can take it for a test ride, right? The only problem is, they''ll call it back with the whistle if we go too far."


    "Exactly," Victoria said.


    William''s mind raced. He wasn''t entirely sure his plan would work, but they were running out of options. It was worth a shot.


    "Good morning," Victoria greeted the vendor, her tone polite but firm. "What''s the fastest flying mount you have?"


    Read latest stories on My Virtual Library Empire


    The vendor, who had been dozing in his chair, jolted awake. Customers were rare, especially those interested in flying mounts, which were far more expensive. The prospect of a sale brought a wide grin to his face.


    "We have several types," he said eagerly, "but I have one in particular that I think you''ll love. Come with me."


    He led her to the back of the shop, where an open area housed the mounts. The creatures were well cared for¡ªclean, healthy, and clearly pampered. Guards patrolled the area, while caretakers tended to the beasts, feeding them and ensuring their well-being.


    "This one arrived recently," the vendor said, pointing to a magnificent creature. "It''s the most expensive mount we have¡ªa distant relative of dragons!"


    The creature resembled a dragon, though it was smaller and lacked the overwhelming aura of its legendary kin. Still, it was an impressive beast, with shimmering scales and sharp, intelligent eyes.


    "What is it, exactly?" Victoria asked, feigning curiosity.


    "Well, everyone calls it a dragon, even though it''s not," the vendor admitted with a chuckle. "It sounds more impressive, don''t you think? But don''t let that fool you¡ªit''s fast, resilient, strong in combat, and highly intelligent. The price, however, is¡­ substantial."


    William listened intently, his interest piqued. A creature with dragon lineage? That was rare and valuable. But when the vendor named the price, both Victoria and William nearly choked.


    "The price today is 500,000 gold coins."


    Victoria managed to keep her composure, though the number was staggering. She had expected a high price, but this was beyond outrageous. Still, she couldn''t let the vendor see her shock. She needed to appear as though she could afford it¡ªor at least convince him she could.


    "Is it really worth that much?" Victoria asked, her tone skeptical. "My father would be furious if I spent his money on a bad investment."


    William mentally applauded her quick thinking. Playing the role of a wealthy noble''s daughter was a smart move. The vendor, already sizing her up, seemed to buy it.


    "Miss, I assure you, your father will be thrilled with this purchase," the vendor said, his voice dripping with persuasion. "In fact, I can offer you a discount¡ª450,000 gold coins. What do you think?"


    Victoria placed a hand on her chin, pretending to consider the offer. "450,000 is still a significant amount. With that kind of money, my father could open another mana stone mine. He thinks thirty mines are too few, you see."


    The vendor''s eyes widened, and he nearly choked on his own saliva. Mana stone mines were incredibly lucrative¡ªand expensive to maintain. If this young woman''s family owned thirty of them, she was far wealthier than he had imagined.


    "Think of it this way, miss," the vendor said, recovering quickly. "Your father could use this dragon to travel swiftly between his mines. It''s an investment in efficiency¡ªnot to mention the added protection it would provide for you."


    Victoria pretended to weigh his words carefully before nodding. "Alright, I''ll consider it. But first, I''d like to take it for a test flight. As I said, this money is my father''s, and I don''t want to make a mistake."


    The vendor hesitated for only a moment before agreeing. After all, he had the magic whistle to control the mount. A test flight was a reasonable request.


    "Of course, of course," he said, handing her the reins. "You can take it for a spin. I''ll give you about ten minutes."


    Victoria climbed onto the dragon''s back, her heart racing. As they soared into the sky, she communicated with William. "Okay, we''re up here. What''s the plan?"


    It was time for William to put his scheme into action.

 Chapter 187 - 187: A Mount, and Famous City

    "Stab the dragon, and hold on tight," William instructed.


    "What? What are you talking about?" Victoria asked, her voice tinged with confusion and apprehension.


    "I can use my demonic energy to dominate its mind," William explained. "It''s not a guaranteed success, but it''s our best shot."


    That was his plan. Just as Asura could dominate beasts, William intended to do the same. Since he was essentially Asura at that moment, he believed it was possible. The only obstacle was the dragon''s strength. According to the vendor, the creature was powerful, which could make domination difficult.


    Victoria''s hands trembled as she gripped Asura tightly, her knuckles white from the force. She took a deep breath, steeling herself, and did as William instructed.


    "Don''t aim for any vital points, and it doesn''t need to be deep," William added. He didn''t want Victoria to harm the creature too severely, as that could jeopardize their escape.


    With a swift motion, Victoria drove the sword into the dragon''s back. Blood gushed from the wound, and the creature let out a deafening roar, thrashing violently in an attempt to throw her off. Victoria clung to the dragon''s scales, her muscles straining as she fought to stay on.


    Below, the vendor watched in confusion. "Why is the dragon acting like this? What''s going on?"


    Now it was William''s turn. He focused, channeling his demonic energy through the sword and into the dragon''s body. The energy spread like a web, intertwining with the creature''s vital essence. To his surprise, the dragon responded¡ªnot with resistance, but with words.


    "Creature, what are you trying to do?" the dragon''s voice echoed in William''s mind.


    The communication was mental, just like William''s connection with Victoria. The dragon couldn''t speak aloud, but its thoughts were clear.


    William ignored the question, focusing instead on dominating the creature. His energy surged, taking control of the dragon''s wings first. The thrashing stopped, and the creature stabilized in the air. It was a promising start.


    But then, the dragon''s own vital energy surged, clashing with William''s demonic energy and overpowering it. William''s control slipped, and frustration bubbled within him.


    "Are you trying to dominate me?" the dragon asked again. "We can talk about this. I have a proposal."


    William hesitated. He hadn''t expected the dragon to negotiate. "What is it?" he finally replied.


    "You use your energy to free me from that blasted whistle, and once we''re out of here, I''ll remove your energy from my body. But I''ll help you with whatever you need. A win for both of us. Or¡­" The dragon''s tone turned threatening. "I could always breathe fire on your little friend."


    William weighed his options. The dragon was clearly powerful, and brute force wasn''t working. Cooperation might be their only way out.


    "Fine," William agreed. "But if you betray us, I''ll make sure you regret it."


    "Fair enough," the dragon replied.


    This time, when William channeled his demonic energy, the dragon didn''t resist. The energy spread quickly, taking full control of the creature''s body. William directed the dragon to fly away from the city, putting as much distance as possible between them and the vendor.


    Below, the vendor blew the magic whistle furiously, but nothing happened. The dragon was no longer bound by its control. It was now under William''s command¡ªor so it seemed.


    Victoria let out a breath she hadn''t realized she was holding. "It worked! You did it!"


    "More or less," William replied. "I''ll explain later."


    The dragon soared through the sky, its speed breathtaking. The wind whipped through Victoria''s hair as she marveled at the landscape below. The forest stretched out like a lush green carpet, rivers glistened like ribbons of silver, and waterfalls cascaded with breathtaking beauty. For the first time, Victoria allowed herself to enjoy the flight, her earlier anxiety melting away.


    From their vantage point, they could see the city they had left behind, as well as distant villages and the sprawling desert beyond. They were covering vast distances in mere moments. sea??h th§× N??elFir§×.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Then, the dragon spoke again, its voice deep and resonant. "Well, where are we going?"


    William hesitated. He wasn''t entirely sure the dragon would keep its word, but for now, it seemed cooperative. "We''re looking for some slave traders. Think you can handle them in a fight?"


    "Probably," the dragon replied. "They only captured me because they brought a mage from another continent."


    "Good," William said. "Head toward the desert. We''re going to the forbidden zone on this continent."


    "The Black Zone?" the dragon said, its tone thoughtful. "I lived there for a while. It''s a harsh place, but nothing I can''t handle."


    William was surprised. The dragon''s knowledge of the forbidden zone could be useful, but he reminded himself that their alliance was temporary. Once the dragon fulfilled its end of the bargain, it would likely leave. Still, for now, they had a powerful ally¡ªand that was enough.


    Victoria noticed something unusual as they flew. The dragon was moving smoothly, its wings beating with a natural rhythm, and there was no trace of the dark, demonic energy that had briefly taken control of its body. It was as if the creature had regained its autonomy.


    "Is the dragon free?" Victoria asked, her voice tinged with curiosity and a hint of concern.


    "Yes, it is," William replied. "But don''t worry¡ªit''s agreed to help us for now. It even said it''s capable of taking on the slave traders for us."


    "Really? That''s great!" Victoria exclaimed, her relief evident. For the first time in days, she felt a glimmer of hope. With the dragon''s strength on their side, their mission seemed a little less impossible.


    Things were finally looking up for them. However, William knew that the next step would be one of the most challenging: finding the slave traders. To do that, they needed information, and the best place to gather it was a large, well-known city¡ªa hub of trade, gossip, and secrets.


    Find your next adventure on My Virtual Library Empire


    Days passed as they flew across the continent. To be precise, three days went by, during which they covered an astonishing distance. The dragon''s speed was breathtaking, far surpassing even Jonas''s enchanted flying carriage. It was a testament to the creature''s power and stamina, and William couldn''t help but feel a sense of awe.


    The city they decided to head to was located in the desert, but it was unlike any other desert city Victoria had ever seen. In fact, it was one of the most famous tourist destinations on the continent.


    The reason for its fame was simple: despite being surrounded by endless sand dunes, the city itself was a lush oasis, teeming with greenery, towering mountains, and crystal-clear rivers. It was as if a piece of the continent''s most fertile land had been magically transplanted into the heart of the desert.


    As they approached, Victoria couldn''t help but marvel at the sight. "They say powerful mages founded this city centuries ago," she explained to William, her voice filled with wonder. "They used their magic to transform the desert into this paradise. And the incredible thing is, it''s stayed this way ever since. Can you imagine having that kind of power? To create forests, rivers, and mountains that last for centuries?"


    William was silent for a moment, considering her words. That level of power was astonishing. It spoke of a mastery over magic that few could ever hope to achieve. For Victoria, it was a dream¡ªa goal to strive for. For William, it was a reminder of just how vast and unpredictable the world of magic could be.


    The city''s beauty wasn''t just for show, though. It attracted visitors from all over the continent¡ªnobles, merchants, adventurers, and scholars. With so many influential people gathered in one place, the city had become a hub of information. If there was any place to learn about the slave traders'' whereabouts, it was here.


    They landed just outside the city''s entrance, dismounting the dragon with care. Flying directly over the city wasn''t permitted¡ªa rule enforced strictly by the guards to maintain order and security.


    As Victoria approached the gates, the guards immediately took notice of her. Her striking appearance, combined with the imposing presence of the dragon, made her stand out like a noble or a high-ranking adventurer.


    One of the guards, a tall man with a polished helmet and a courteous demeanor, stepped forward. "Miss," he said, bowing slightly, "there''s a secondary gate reserved for distinguished guests. Please, follow me."


    Victoria was taken aback but didn''t argue. She followed the guard, bypassing the long line of travelers and merchants waiting at the main gate. The difference in treatment was staggering.


    Just moments ago, she had been just another traveler, but now, thanks to her appearance and the dragon, she was being treated like royalty. It was a stark reminder of how much perception could shape reality.


    As they walked toward the secondary gate, the guard glanced back at the dragon. "Will your mount be entering the city as well, miss? We have excellent stables for magical creatures."


    Victoria shook her head. "No, he''ll stay outside. He prefers the open air."


    The guard nodded, seemingly satisfied with her answer. Meanwhile, the dragon communicated with William mentally. "I''ll stay in the forest nearby. We can still communicate from a distance, so it won''t be a problem. I''ve had enough of being locked up in stables."


    William understood. The dragon had spent who knows how long confined and controlled by others. Now that it was free, it had no intention of returning to captivity. "No problem," William replied. "Stay close, though. We might need you soon."


    With that settled, Victoria entered the city alone. The bustling streets were a stark contrast to the quiet serenity of the forest. Merchants called out to passersby, hawking their wares¡ªexotic spices, shimmering fabrics, and intricate trinkets. The air was filled with the scent of freshly baked bread and the sound of lively chatter. It was a vibrant, chaotic place, teeming with life and opportunity.


    Victoria''s focus, however, remained sharp. She wasn''t here to sightsee or shop. Her goal was clear: find information about the slave traders. She knew that in a city like this, information was a commodity, and she was willing to pay for it if necessary. But first, she needed to figure out where to start.

 Chapter 188 - 188: Slave Auction

    The best places to gather information were taverns. People loved to gossip over a pint of beer, and often, they ended up revealing more than they intended. Bartenders, always in the loop about the latest rumors, were invaluable sources of information. Victoria knew this and decided to start her search there.


    She visited several taverns, each time offering a sum of money in exchange for information. Most bartenders accepted the coins eagerly, but the information they provided was disappointingly vague. It was as if no one knew the recent whereabouts of the slave traders¡ªthe very ones who had captured William.


    Despite the lack of progress, William remained calm. He still had several days before Jonas left the mansion to meet Father Malakai. There was time, but not much of it.


    "Now what?" Victoria asked mentally, frustration creeping into her voice. "None of the taverns have any useful information. I''m starting to think this is a waste of time and money."


    She hadn''t visited every tavern in the city¡ªthere were far too many¡ªbut she had covered the majority, from the simplest, dirt-cheap establishments to the mid-range and even the most expensive ones. She had hoped that by covering all social classes, she might stumble upon a lead. But so far, nothing.


    "What if you buy a slave?" William suggested.


    "What? Hmm¡­ that doesn''t sound like a bad plan."


    If Victoria pretended to be in the market for a slave, she could potentially meet the slave traders or at least the nobles who frequented such transactions. It was a risky move, but it might be their best shot.


    The plan had potential, but there was one problem: Victoria''s current attire. While her clothes were decent, they weren''t nearly impressive enough to convince anyone she was a wealthy noble looking to purchase slaves. She needed something more elegant, something that screamed wealth and status.


    The city, being a popular tourist destination, was home to countless clothing stores, ranging from cheap, hole-in-the-wall shops to luxurious boutiques. Naturally, Victoria headed to one of the most expensive stores.


    The moment she stepped inside, an attendant greeted her with a warm smile. "Welcome! What can I assist you with today?"


    "I''m looking for a new outfit," Victoria replied, her tone casual but confident. "Something elegant for formal occasions. Traveling through the desert in these rags was¡­ less than ideal."


    The attendant nodded sympathetically. It wasn''t uncommon for wealthy travelers to arrive in less-than-perfect attire after a grueling journey through the desert. "Of course, miss. Please, come with me and take a look."


    What followed was an agonizingly long process of Victoria trying on dress after dress, scrutinizing every detail¡ªthe fabric, the fit, the color. William, trapped in the form of a sword, could only watch in silent exasperation.


    ''How do women take so long to pick an outfit?'' he thought, his patience wearing thin. ''I''ve traveled between worlds, and this is still the same everywhere¡­''


    After what felt like an eternity¡ªan hour and a half, to be precise¡ªVictoria finally settled on a stunning black gown. It was elegant, sophisticated, and, of course, expensive. But since it was her money, William didn''t complain. It wasn''t coming out of his pocket, after all.


    With her new outfit, Victoria looked every bit the part of a wealthy noblewoman. Now, it was time to put the plan into action. Instead of visiting taverns, she headed to places frequented by the city''s elite¡ªupscale restaurants, exclusive lounges, and other haunts where nobles gathered.


    She found herself in a fancy restaurant located in the upper part of the city. The atmosphere was refined, the air thick with the scent of expensive perfumes and the murmur of polite conversation. Everyone there was impeccably dressed, their demeanor radiating power and privilege. It was clear that this was a place for the wealthy and influential.


    Victoria sat alone at a table, ordering a glass of wine and a light meal. As she sipped her drink, she discreetly observed the nobles around her, trying to figure out how to approach one of them without drawing suspicion.


    "This is so hard," she muttered mentally, her nerves starting to get the better of her. sea??h th§× Novel?ire(.)ne*t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    William, however, remained unfazed. "Just sit there and relax. Sooner or later, some single noble will show up."


    "Come on, that''s not going to happen," Victoria replied, skeptical.


    But, as it turned out, William was right. As Victoria sipped her wine, a young nobleman approached her table.


    He was handsome, with sharp features and an air of confidence. He stopped in front of her, smiled charmingly, and said, "What is a beautiful lady like you doing alone on such a lovely evening?"


    Victoria resisted the urge to roll her eyes. It was the classic line, the kind she had heard in stories and plays. Still, she played along, extending her hand gracefully. "Just enjoying some wine and waiting for a gentleman to show up for a conversation."


    The nobleman took her hand and kissed it¡ªa common greeting among the aristocracy. "How may I assist you, miss?" he asked, his tone smooth and practiced.


    Experience new tales on My Virtual Library Empire


    Victoria took a deep breath. This was it.


    "I''m looking to buy some slaves," she said, keeping her voice low but confident. "It''s the first time my parents have sent me this far to do something like this. Do you know if there are any auctions happening?"


    It felt incredibly strange¡ªand deeply unsettling¡ªto discuss buying slaves so casually, as if it were a normal, everyday transaction. Victoria had to remind herself that this was part of the act, a necessary step to uncover the information they needed. Still, the discomfort lingered, a heavy weight in her chest.


    The nobleman, however, seemed unfazed by her question. If anything, he was momentarily caught off guard but quickly recovered, leaning back in his seat with a thoughtful expression. "Yes, I believe there''s an auction in two days," he said, his tone casual. "I can show you where it''s being held, if you''d like."


    He then leaned in closer, lowering his voice to a conspiratorial whisper. "And from what I''ve heard, the slaves this time will be delivered by those famous slave traders from the region. Whenever they bring slaves, they''re always the best¡ªrare and powerful individuals, like skilled mages or warriors. It''s quite the event."


    William''s excitement was palpable, even through their mental connection. "That''s exactly what we needed to know," he said. "Those are the traders who captured the demon. This is our chance."


    Victoria, however, felt a mix of relief and dread. While the information was invaluable, waiting another two days would delay their plans. Time was already tight, and every day counted. Still, there was no other option. They had to play along.


    The price for that information, unfortunately, was paid by Victoria in the form of enduring the nobleman''s company for the rest of the evening.


    It was a tedious affair, but luckily, nobles in this city seemed to value decorum above all else. The man wasn''t pushy or overly forward¡ªno attempts at a first kiss or inappropriate advances. Instead, he spent the night talking, regaling Victoria with stories of his travels, his family''s estate, and the latest gossip circulating among the elite.


    Victoria played her part well, nodding politely and interjecting with the occasional question or comment to keep the conversation flowing. It was exhausting, but she managed. By the end of the night, the nobleman even insisted on paying for her dinner, which she accepted with a gracious smile.


    As they parted ways, the nobleman gave her a charming smile. "In two days, we can meet here again. The auction will take place at night. I''ll ensure you have the best seat in the house."


    "Understood," Victoria replied, her tone polite but distant. "Thank you very much for your help."


    The nobleman bowed slightly before taking his leave, leaving Victoria alone at the table. She let out a quiet sigh, her shoulders relaxing as the weight of the act lifted. "That was¡­ something," she said mentally to William.


    "You handled it well," William replied. "And now we have a lead. Two days isn''t ideal, but it''s better than nothing."


    Victoria nodded to herself, her resolve hardening. They were closer than ever to finding the slave traders, and she wasn''t about to let this opportunity slip away. As she left the restaurant and stepped into the cool night air, she couldn''t help but feel a flicker of hope. The plan was working¡ªnow they just had to see it through.


    She stayed two days in one of the best taverns in the city. Differently from before, now she had to keep her status because the noble that talked to her could be watching her moves!


    It was better to be safe. During the night, she went into the same restaurant, and there she met the noble, who was more than happy to see her.


    "It''s so nice to see you again, and you look as gorgeous as ever. So, are you up for a dinner before going into the auction? It starts in three hours."


    "That would be lovely."

 Chapter 189 - 189: First Part of the Plan

    Enduring the dinner with the nobleman was no easy task for Victoria. The man seemed determined to fill every moment with stories about his life¡ªhis family''s sprawling estate, his latest hunting expedition, and even his opinions on the city''s political climate.


    Victoria, however, couldn''t have cared less. Her mind was focused on the bigger prize: the slave auction and the information it could provide. That focus gave her the strength to smile politely, nod at the right moments, and even laugh softly at his jokes, no matter how dull they were.


    The worst part was the timing. The auction wouldn''t start for another three hours, which meant she had to endure the nobleman''s company for what felt like an eternity. Every minute dragged on, but Victoria kept her composure, reminding herself why she was doing this. She had to play the part of the interested, wealthy noblewoman, no matter how exhausting it was.


    Finally, after what seemed like an endless stream of anecdotes, the nobleman glanced at the ornate clock on the restaurant wall and stood up. "It''s time," he said, his tone shifting to something more serious. "The auction will take place in a mansion outside the city. Follow me."


    Victoria felt a wave of relief wash over her. The waiting was over. She stood gracefully, smoothing out her elegant black gown, and followed the nobleman out of the restaurant. As they made their way through the city streets, William''s voice echoed in her mind.


    "I expected as much," he said. "Slave auctions rarely happen inside the city, especially not in places with high security. Not that the rich can''t buy off the guards, but it''s safer to keep these things discreet."


    Victoria nodded subtly, acknowledging his words. She didn''t dare respond aloud, not with the nobleman walking beside her. Instead, she focused on the task ahead. As they approached the city gates, William reached out to the dragon through their mental connection.


    "Can you stay in the surrounding area but keep a low profile?" he asked. "We need to find the right moment to strike the slave traders, and we''ll need your help when the time comes."


    The dragon''s response was immediate, its voice carrying a hint of amusement. "No problem. I''ll stay close but out of sight. Just let me know when you need me."


    William couldn''t help but notice the change in the dragon''s tone. It sounded more cheerful, almost lively. He guessed it was the freedom¡ªthe chance to roam and stretch its wings without being confined to a stable or controlled by a whistle. Being locked up had clearly taken a toll on the creature''s mood, and now that it was free, its spirits had lifted.


    As they left the city behind and ventured into the surrounding countryside, Victoria''s nerves began to tighten. The mansion came into view, its imposing silhouette lit by torches and lanterns. It was a grand structure, but there was something ominous about it, especially knowing what was about to take place inside.


    The nobleman led her through the gates, nodding to the guards stationed there. They didn''t question his presence or Victoria''s, which only confirmed William''s earlier observation: the rich could buy their way into anything.


    Victoria took a deep breath, steeling herself for what was to come. The auction was about to begin, and with it, their chance to confront the slave traders.


    William felt a wave of unease wash over him as he observed the scene unfolding before him. It was all too familiar¡ªthe slaves lined up in the courtyard, their arms cuffed and bodies marked with the same kind of seal that had once bound him. The nobles milled about, laughing and chatting as if they were browsing goods at a market rather than human beings. The sight made William''s stomach churn, a bitter reminder of the time he had spent trapped in a cage, sold to Jonas like a piece of property.


    Victoria, however, remained composed, her expression calm and unreadable as she navigated the crowd. The nobleman who had accompanied her leaned in, his voice low and polite. "Are you looking for anyone in particular?" he asked. "There are some excellent choices today. A few mages, a couple of skilled fighters¡ªquite the selection."


    Victoria shook her head lightly, her tone casual but firm. "I''m not sure yet. Can I just take a look around?"


    "Of course," the nobleman replied with a gracious smile. "Take your time. I''ll be nearby if you need anything."


    With that, Victoria was left to her own devices, blending into the crowd of nobles as she moved through the courtyard. She struck up conversations with a few of them, her questions carefully crafted to avoid raising suspicion.


    "Excuse me," she said to a young noblewoman, her tone polite and curious. "I''ve heard the famous slave traders are coming today. Do you know when they''ll arrive?"


    The woman smiled, clearly pleased to share what she knew. "Soon, I think. But from what I''ve heard, not all of them will be here today. Just a few, so the number of slaves they''re bringing is smaller than usual."


    William''s spirits lifted slightly at the news. Fewer slave traders meant fewer obstacles to deal with. It would make their task easier¡ªor at least, less complicated.


    With nothing else to do for the moment, Victoria found a quiet spot to sit, her eyes fixed on the entrance where the slave traders were expected to arrive. The courtyard was alive with activity, the air thick with the hum of conversation and the occasional burst of laughter. But Victoria remained focused, her mind sharp and alert.


    Then, it happened.


    "That''s them!" William''s voice echoed urgently in her mind. "The slave traders¡ªthey''re here."


    Victoria''s gaze snapped to the entrance, her heart pounding as a group of figures stepped into the courtyard. Among them, William instantly recognized one man¡ªthe very same man who had placed the seal on his body. The sight sent a surge of anger and determination through him.


    "That''s him," William said, his voice tight with emotion. "The one who sealed the demon. He''s here."


    Victoria''s grip on the edge of her seat tightened, her mind racing. This was the moment they had been waiting for. The plan was in motion, and there was no turning back now.


    The slave traders arrived with a new group of slaves, just as they had done when they brought William. The nobles buzzed with excitement, eager to see the latest offerings. The traders were a famous group, known for their ability to capture rare and powerful individuals, and the nobles were quick to swarm them with questions.


    "Do you have any corporal mages? I need one for my estate," one noble asked, his voice tinged with impatience. sea??h th§× n??el Fire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "Yes, we do," one of the slave traders replied smoothly. "But let us first arrange them for display. You''ll have your pick soon enough."


    The nobles, though eager, backed off when the traders gave them a stern look. The traders needed space to organize the slaves, and the crowd reluctantly obliged, giving them room to move. William, however, wasn''t focused on the slaves or the nobles. His attention was locked on one man in particular¡ªthe slave trader who had placed the seal on his body. That was the man they needed.


    "That''s the one," William said, his voice sharp in Victoria''s mind. "Do you see him? The guy with the long hair, standing near the back."


    Victoria''s eyes scanned the group until they landed on the man William described. He was tall, with dark, shoulder-length hair and a cold, calculating expression. She nodded subtly, her heart racing. "I see him. But how are we going to do this? Are we trying to kill him, or¡­?"


    "No," William replied quickly. "We just need his blood. A direct fight would be too risky¡ªyou''re not strong enough to take him on. We''ll use the dragon to create a distraction, then strike when he''s not looking."


    Victoria''s hand instinctively went to her pocket, where she carried an empty flask. She had brought it specifically for this purpose. "I have the flask," she confirmed. "Ready when you are."


    William reached out to the dragon through their mental connection. "It''s time. Come in and stir up some chaos. But wait until the nobles are inside the mansion. We don''t want unnecessary casualties."


    The dragon''s response was immediate. "Understood. I''ll be there shortly."


    Victoria waited, her nerves on edge, as the nobles gradually moved inside the mansion to inspect the slaves. The courtyard grew quieter, with only the slave traders remaining outside, preparing the last of the captives for display. One of the traders approached Victoria, his tone polite but firm.


    "Lady, the auction is about to begin. Can you come inside?"


    Victoria didn''t respond immediately. Instead, she pointed toward the sky, her expression calm but deliberate. The trader frowned, confused, but followed her gesture. His eyes widened as he saw the dragon descending from the clouds, its massive wings casting a shadow over the courtyard.


    Before anyone could react, the dragon unleashed a torrent of fire, aiming not at the people but at the ground, creating a wall of flames that sent the slave traders scrambling. The traders drew their weapons, shouting orders as they prepared to defend themselves. But their numbers were few, and the dragon was a formidable opponent.


    Victoria kept her eyes on the long-haired trader, waiting for the perfect moment. When he turned his back to her, his attention fully focused on the dragon, she knew it was time. Moving swiftly and silently, she closed the distance between them, Asura gleaming in her hand.


    With a quick, precise strike, she slashed at his back, the blade cutting through his clothes and drawing blood. The man cried out in pain, whirling around to face her, but Victoria was already filling the flask with the blood from his wound.


    "What are you doing?" the trader roared, his voice a mix of anger and disbelief. He hadn''t expected an attack from one of the nobles¡ªespecially not a young woman.


    Victoria didn''t answer. She secured the flask in her pocket and bolted toward the dragon, which had landed nearby. The traders were too preoccupied with the dragon to stop her. She leaped onto the creature''s back, gripping its scales tightly as it took off into the sky.


    The wind rushed past her as they soared away from the mansion, the chaos of the courtyard growing smaller and smaller below. Victoria let out a breath she hadn''t realized she was holding, her heart still pounding from the adrenaline.


    "We did it," she said mentally to William, her voice trembling with relief. "We got the blood."


    "Yes," William replied, his tone filled with satisfaction. "Now we can move on to the next step."

 Chapter 190 - 190: Escape on the Horizon

    Victoria clung tightly to the dragon''s back as they soared through the night sky, the wind whipping through her hair. She glanced down at the ground far below, her heart still racing from the chaos they had left behind. The mansion was now just a speck in the distance, its lights flickering like tiny stars.


    "Are you sure they aren''t going to follow us?" she asked, her voice tinged with worry.


    William''s response was calm and confident. "Of course they''ll try, but we''ll be fine. They''re nowhere near as fast as the dragon. By the time they even get their mounts ready, we''ll be long gone."


    He was right. The dragon''s speed was unmatched, and by the time the slave traders untied their own flying mounts and took to the skies, Victoria and the dragon were already miles away. The traders had no idea which direction she had gone, and the vast expanse of the night made it impossible to track her.


    Back at the mansion, the long-haired slave trader cursed under his breath, clutching the wound on his back. "Fuck," he muttered, his voice filled with frustration and unease.


    One of his companions approached, trying to reassure him. "Relax, it''s probably nothing too serious. They took your blood, so what? It''s not like they can do much with it."


    The long-haired trader glared at him. "Nothing too serious? Do you have any idea what they could do with my blood? They could perform rituals, curses¡ªwho knows what might happen to me!"


    His companion hesitated, then nodded. "Alright, fair point. But if you''re worried about rituals, we can take precautions. There are defensive measures we can use to protect you."


    The long-haired trader took a deep breath, forcing himself to calm down. In his panic, he hadn''t considered that. "Right, of course. Let''s do it as fast as we can. I don''t want to take any chances."


    Meanwhile, Victoria continued to glance over her shoulder, her nerves still on edge. She half-expected to see pursuers closing in, but the sky behind them remained empty. The dragon''s speed and the cover of night had given them the perfect escape.


    "We got the blood," she said mentally to William, her voice a mix of relief and exhaustion. "Now what?"


    "Now we wait," William replied. "The demon I told you about will have to leave the mansion soon. That''s when we''ll deliver the blood to him."


    William knew it would be impossible to sneak into the mansion. The place was heavily guarded, with layers of protective spells and security measures. But if his real body could leave the mansion, even briefly, it would create the perfect opportunity to deliver the flask of blood.


    He already knew the city where Jonas would stop on his way to meet Father Malakai. It was a well-known trading hub, and Jonas often used it as a resting point during his travels. William instructed Victoria to head there and wait.


    "Stay close to the city," he said. "We''ll need to be ready when the time comes. It shouldn''t be more than a few days."


    Victoria nodded, her grip on the dragon''s scales tightening as they adjusted their course. The city wasn''t far, and with the dragon''s speed, they would reach it by morning. For now, all they could do was wait and prepare for the next step of their plan.


    William''s consciousness returned to his real body for a while. He needed to stay focused on the situation at the mansion, especially with Jonas''s departure looming. As much as he wanted to remain connected to Victoria and the dragon, he couldn''t afford to neglect his duties as a guard. Ignoring his chores would only raise suspicion, and that was the last thing he needed.


    His tasks were mundane¡ªpatrolling the grounds, checking the perimeter, and occasionally assisting with minor repairs. It was boring work, but compared to the grueling labor in the mines, it was almost relaxing. Still, William''s mind was far from at ease. There were two things keeping him from simply fleeing the moment he got the blood: 03, his only friend inside the mansion, and Wendy, the young woman who got sold as slave with him.


    It wasn''t just loyalty to them that made him hesitate. William didn''t know them well enough to consider staying solely for their sake. What truly concerned him was Jonas''s sinister activities¡ªthe corpses hidden beneath the mansion, the cult dedicated to the God of Flesh, and the dark rituals that seemed to be unfolding. If Jonas was willing to go to such lengths to resurrect his family, what would stop him from sacrificing 03 or Wendy in the process? The thought sent a chill down William''s spine.


    He knew the best way to help them wasn''t by staying trapped and powerless. He needed to regain his mana, grow stronger, and return with the power to confront Jonas directly. There was no middle ground.


    One night, William managed to pull 03 aside for a private conversation. He didn''t want Travis or Agnar¡ªthe two guards tasked with finding Simone¡ªto overhear. The three of them were allies of convenience, but William didn''t fully trust them. They had their own agenda, and he couldn''t risk them interfering with his plans.


    "I''ll be fleeing soon," William whispered, his voice low but urgent. "I''ve got the blood from the person who placed the seal on me. It''s only a matter of time before I can break free and escape."


    03''s eyes widened in shock. "What? Really?" he asked, his voice barely above a whisper. He couldn''t fathom how William had managed to get the blood while being trapped in the mansion.


    William nodded. "Yes. And although I''ll be leaving, I''m not abandoning you. There are things you need to know¡ªthings that could save your life."


    He proceeded to explain everything he had discovered about Jonas''s secret activities. He told 03 about the cult, the God of Flesh, and the corpses of Jonas''s family hidden beneath the mansion. He shared his theory that Jonas was attempting to resurrect his loved ones, though he admitted it was mostly speculation.


    "And now Jonas is going to meet with this Father Malakai guy," 03 said, piecing it together. "That''s when you''ll make your escape, right? But if he''s meeting with someone like that, it can''t be good." S§×arch* The ¦ÇovelFire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "Probably not," William agreed. "I need you to be careful while I''m gone. If you can, try to warn Wendy about all of this. My plan is to get strong enough to come back here in one or two months and free all of you."


    03 frowned, skepticism written all over his face. "Get strong enough in one or two months? William, that''s¡­ that''s impossible. No one gains that kind of power that quickly."


    William placed his hands on 03''s shoulders, his gaze intense. "Trust me on this, alright? I''ll find a way. But I need you to hang tight until then. Can you do that?"


    03 hesitated, then nodded. "I¡­ I can."


    "Good," William said, his tone softening. "And don''t share this with Travis or Agnar. They''re only here to look for Simone. I don''t trust them."


    03 wasn''t stupid. He understood the stakes. "I know," he said quietly. "I''ll keep it to myself."


    William gave him a final nod before slipping back into the shadows. He had done what he could to prepare 03 and, indirectly, Wendy. Now, all that was left was to wait for the right moment to make his move.


    Victoria didn''t stay in the city itself. Instead, she and the dragon took refuge on a nearby mountain, its rugged terrain providing the perfect cover. From there, they could keep an eye on the city without drawing attention. The mountain''s dense forests and rocky outcrops offered plenty of hiding spots, and the dragon''s presence would go unnoticed as long as it stayed out of sight.


    The days passed slowly, each one filled with tension and anticipation. Victoria spent her time preparing for what was to come, sharpening her skills and going over the plan with William whenever he reached out through the sword. Their conversations were brief but crucial, as William was primarily focused on his real body and the events unfolding at the mansion.


    One night, as the moon hung high in the sky, William''s consciousness was abruptly pulled back to his real body by a series of sharp knocks on his door. He opened it to find Jonas standing there, his expression calm but commanding.


    "We''re leaving in thirty minutes," Jonas said, his tone leaving no room for argument. "Be ready."


    William nodded, closing the door behind him. He didn''t have much to pack¡ªjust the clothes on his back and a few essentials. After changing into something more suitable for travel, he made his way outside to where Jonas''s flying carriage waited. The sleek, enchanted vehicle gleamed under the moonlight, its intricate runes glowing faintly.


    Jonas was already seated inside, his posture relaxed but his eyes sharp. William climbed in beside him, his heart pounding. This was it¡ªthe moment he had been waiting for. As the carriage lifted into the air, William glanced back at the mansion one last time. He didn''t know when¡ªor if¡ªhe would return, but he was determined to make this escape count.

 Chapter 191 - 191: Its Finally Time

    The view from the carriage window was breathtaking, just as it had been every other time William had traveled in it. The world below was a serene tapestry of snow-covered landscapes, winding rivers, and dense forests, all bathed in the soft glow of the moonlight. The quietness of the night added to the beauty, creating a sense of peace that felt almost surreal given the tension William was feeling.


    He stared out the window, his mind racing even as he tried to appear calm. The moonlight illuminated the scenery, casting long shadows and highlighting the icy sparkle of the snow. It was a stark contrast to the dark, oppressive atmosphere of the mansion he had left behind.


    "Beautiful, isn''t it?" Jonas said, breaking the silence. He was also looking out the window, his expression unreadable.


    "Yes, it is," William replied, his tone neutral. He didn''t want to engage in conversation, but he knew he had to. Staying silent would only make him seem suspicious.


    Jonas leaned back in his seat, his gaze still fixed on the landscape below. "We''re going to meet a man named Father Malakai," he said casually, as if discussing the weather. "He''s part of a¡­ unique group. A cult, you could say. What do you think about joining it? If you''re truly committed, we might even consider removing that seal on your body."


    William''s heart skipped a beat. This was the last thing he had expected. Why would Jonas invite him, a slave, to join the cult? It didn''t make sense. William was just a tool to Jonas, someone bought to perform menial tasks and guard duties. Why would he offer him a place in something as significant as the cult of flesh?


    ''Should I consider this, or is it a trap?'' William thought, his mind racing.


    Joining the cult could provide an easier way to dismantle it from within. He would have direct access to their secrets, their plans, and their weaknesses. But at the same time, he couldn''t afford to lose focus. Kier had already gone to the forbidden zone, and William needed to get there as soon as possible. The secrets of the demons were at stake, and he couldn''t afford to waste time playing double agent in a cult.


    He hesitated, choosing his words carefully. "I don''t know¡­ Let''s first meet this Father Malakai, and then we can discuss it further."


    Jonas smiled, seemingly satisfied with the answer. "Of course. I understand. It''s a big decision, after all."


    William nodded, his expression calm but his mind working furiously. He couldn''t afford to tip Jonas off, but he also couldn''t let himself be drawn into the cult''s web.


    The journey to the city took the entire night, but given the speed of Jonas''s flying carriage, it felt remarkably fast. The enchanted vehicle glided smoothly through the air, its runes glowing faintly as it cut through the cold night. William couldn''t help but compare its speed to that of the dragon he and Victoria had commandeered. While the dragon was faster, the carriage was still impressive, a testament to Jonas''s wealth and influence.


    By the time they arrived, the first light of dawn was breaking over the horizon. The city was already coming to life, its streets bustling with early risers and merchants setting up their stalls. S§×arch* The ¦ÇovelFire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    The guards at the city gates instantly recognized Jonas and greeted him with a level of respect reserved for the elite. They even assigned a special group of guards to oversee his carriage, ensuring its safety and maintenance.


    William observed the scene quietly, noting how easily Jonas commanded attention and deference. It was no surprise¡ªonly the wealthiest and most influential individuals could afford a flying carriage like Jonas''s. The guards'' behavior only reinforced the nobleman''s status as a figure of importance.


    As soon as they arrived, William seized the opportunity to reach out to Victoria through their mental connection. She had been hiding on a mountain nearby, close enough to monitor the city but far enough to avoid detection. The dragon was with her, its massive form concealed among the trees and rocks.


    "The demon and the noble from the Black Pine family have arrived," William communicated, his mental voice calm but urgent. "Let''s wait for the best opportunity to act."


    Victoria, unaware that the "demon" William referred to was actually his real body, responded with curiosity. "Really? How did they get here so fast?"


    "A flying carriage," William explained. "Jonas''s is nearly as fast as the dragon. They traveled through the night."


    Victoria was silent for a moment, processing the information. "Alright. We''ll stay hidden and wait for your signal. Just let us know when it''s time to move."


    Jonas led the way through the city''s bustling streets, his confident stride making it clear he was familiar with the area.


    William followed closely, his eyes scanning the surroundings. The city was alive with activity, its streets lined with merchants hawking their wares and shops displaying an array of goods. The air was filled with the sounds of haggling, laughter, and the occasional clatter of carts rolling over cobblestones.


    "This city is known for its trading," Jonas explained as they walked, his tone casual but proud. "I come here often to buy and sell goods. It''s one of the best places on the continent for commerce."


    William didn''t need the explanation to understand. The sheer volume of people and the variety of goods on display spoke for themselves. From exotic spices and fabrics to intricate tools and weapons, the city was a hub of trade and opportunity. Despite the early hour, the energy was palpable.


    As they moved deeper into the city, William decided to probe further. "And are we going to see this Father Malakai today?" he asked, keeping his tone neutral.


    Jonas shook his head. "No, not today. Tomorrow. I hope you like him. It would mean a lot to me if you decided to join the cult."


    William''s curiosity¡ªand suspicion¡ªgrew. He couldn''t understand why Jonas was so eager to include him in something as significant as the cult. "Why are you considering letting me join?" he asked carefully. "Aren''t I just a slave?"


    Jonas paused, turning to look at William with an expression that was both thoughtful and calculating. "Well, not anymore," he said. "I''ve seen your talents in combat, and I believe you have potential. More than that, I feel I can trust you. There''s no reason for me to keep you as a slave. But I do hope we can become¡­ friends."


    The word hung in the air, loaded with implications. William studied Jonas''s face, trying to gauge his sincerity. Was this a genuine offer, or was it another layer of manipulation? Either way, William knew he had to tread carefully.


    "I appreciate that," William said, choosing his words with care. "But joining a cult is a big decision. I''d like to meet Father Malakai first and understand more about what it entails."


    Of course, William had no intention of joining the cult. His priority was to escape, find Kier, and uncover the secrets of the forbidden zone as quickly as possible. Every moment spent with Jonas was a moment wasted, but he had to play along until the right opportunity presented itself.


    Their next stop was a tavern that looked more like a luxurious hotel than a place for casual dining. Its grand facade stood out even in the upscale part of the city, far removed from the chaotic trading center. The building was adorned with intricate carvings, polished marble columns, and large windows that reflected the morning sunlight. It was clear that only the wealthiest could afford to stay there.


    "This is where we''ll be staying today," Jonas said, gesturing to the imposing structure. "It''s nice, isn''t it?"


    William nodded, his expression neutral. "Yes, it is."


    The area around the tavern was heavily guarded, with patrolling sentinels keeping a watchful eye for any intruders. When they spotted Jonas, however, their stern expressions softened into polite smiles. They didn''t stop him or ask questions¡ªeither they recognized him or simply assumed he was someone important based on his fine attire and confident demeanor.


    Jonas approached the front desk, where a well-dressed woman greeted him with a warm smile. After a brief conversation, he secured a room for the two of them. It was a single room but spacious, with two separate beds¡ªa common arrangement for wealthy travelers and their guards. The room itself was lavishly decorated, with plush carpets, ornate furniture, and a large window offering a view of the city.


    Once inside, Jonas set his belongings down and stretched. "I''m going to take a shower," he said, heading toward the bathroom. "You''re free to roam the city if you''d like. Just don''t wander too far."


    He tossed a small purse filled with coins to William, who caught it with a surprised expression. "Take this and buy something for yourself," Jonas added. "But please, don''t lose it."


    William weighed the purse in his hand, feeling the jingle of coins inside. "Are you really giving me money?" he asked, his tone a mix of curiosity and gratitude. "Well, thank you."


    Jonas waved a hand dismissively. "No problem. Just make sure you''re back here in a few hours. I''ll need you later."


    William nodded, slipping the purse into his pocket. As soon as Jonas disappeared into the bathroom, William seized the opportunity. He stepped out of the room, closing the door quietly behind him, and made his way out of the tavern. The moment he was outside, he reached out to Victoria through their mental connection.


    "I think we have a chance to flee," he said, his mental voice urgent but controlled. "Prepare yourself. The demon will be leaving the city soon."


    Victoria, who had been waiting on the mountain with the dragon, responded immediately. "Alright. I''ll try to get closer to the city with the dragon. Just give me the signal when it''s time."


    William took a deep breath, his heart pounding with a mix of excitement and anxiety. This was it¡ªthe moment he had been waiting for. He just had to make sure everything went according to plan.

 Chapter 192 - 192: The Seal is Broken

    The moment William had been waiting for finally arrived. He walked through the bustling streets of the city, weaving through the haphazard crowd. The vendors shouted their wares, but he kept his head down, careful to avoid their gazes. The guards patrolled the streets, their eyes scanning the crowd, but William was a shadow in the midst of the chaos.


    He moved like a ghost, unseen, unnoticed¡ªa figure in the crowd, blending in effortlessly as if the city itself had forgotten him. Every step he took was lighter than the last, as if he were walking on air. He couldn''t help but feel the rush of freedom in his veins, like a pirate spotting land after years lost at sea.


    He had long dreamed of this moment. This was the day he''d finally escape. The day he would leave everything behind. As his feet carried him closer to the city gates, he couldn''t stop the surge of relief that washed over him.


    ''I can''t believe I''m finally leaving,'' he thought, his heart pounding in his chest.


    Despite the excitement, a nagging voice in the back of his mind warned him to be cautious. It was a persistent thought¡ªan echo of the past. His mind kept looping back to Jonas, the cruel master who had kept him enslaved for so long. At any moment, he expected to hear Jonas''s voice, cold and mocking, pulling him back into the darkness: "Do you really think a slave like you will ever be free?"


    But with every step that took him farther away from the city, further from the place he had once called home, that voice grew fainter.


    Jonas wasn''t there. Jonas wasn''t following him.


    And that realization¡ªslow and steady¡ªbrought a strange calm over William. Jonas had trusted him too much. That was his mistake. The chains that had bound him for so long were now nothing but memories, fading with every footfall that took him further from his old life.


    Soon enough, he saw her¡ªthe woman who had come to rescue him. Victoria. She was waiting for him by the edge of the forest, a silhouette against the dimming sky. Her mount, the mighty dragon, was a sight to behold. Its scales shimmered in the fading light, its wings twitching with anticipation.


    William''s heart skipped a beat. He ran toward her, his feet pounding against the earth with urgency. He didn''t know why, but seeing her¡ªstanding there, waiting for him¡ªmade him feel like the weight of the world was being lifted off his shoulders.


    When he reached her, he forced himself to mask his surprise. He had to act as though he hadn''t been waiting for this moment his entire life. He looked at her with an expression of awe, a playful smile tugging at the corners of his lips.


    "So, you''re the one who came to rescue me? You''re even more beautiful than I imagined," he said, his voice steady despite the pounding in his chest.


    Victoria met his gaze and blushed slightly, her cheeks tinged with pink. William noticed the change in her demeanor, and for a brief moment, he allowed himself to appreciate the beauty that had been hidden behind her stoic exterior. She was as determined and fierce as she was elegant.


    "Yes, it''s me¡­ Thank you, I guess. Anyway, we should leave quickly. We can''t waste any time," she replied, her voice steady but with an edge of urgency.


    But just as they were about to mount the dragon and ride off into the night, a troubling realization set in. William''s body¡ªa body that had carried him through the darkest of days¡ªwas still marked by the seal that Jonas had placed on him. The seal was more than just a symbol; it was a tracker, an unbreakable link between William and his former master. As long as it remained, they would be hunted.


    "We can''t leave yet," William said, his expression darkening. "The seal on my body¡ªit''s connected to Jonas. He''ll know exactly where I am unless we destroy it first."


    From the folds of William''s cloak, a small figure emerged, a creature no bigger than the palm of his hand. It was Stuart, a rat with an odd gleam in his eyes, his fur ruffled from his journey. He scurried forward and climbed up William''s arm with ease, stopping at the crook of his elbow.


    "Give me the blood," Stuart said, his voice soft but urgent. "With it, I can remove the seal."


    Victoria didn''t flinch. She had encountered strange magic before, but the sight of a rat speaking wasn''t the strangest thing she had seen. Without a word, she grabbed the vial of blood. It contained the blood of the slave trader who placed the seal on William''s body.


    The rat grasped the vial with surprising dexterity and eyed it carefully. "This will do. But we need to be quick. If Jonas realizes what''s happening, we''ll have more than just the seal to worry about."


    The process of breaking the seal was, in theory, straightforward. The most difficult part had already been accomplished: obtaining the blood of the slave trader who had placed the seal on William in the first place. With the flask of blood now in their possession, the rest was a matter of execution. Stuart, the magic pet rat, was the key to making it happen.


    Stuart scurried onto William''s shoulder, his tiny paws gripping firmly as he prepared to work his magic. The rat''s eyes glowed faintly as he focused, his small body radiating a surprising amount of power. Using his magic, Stuart carefully placed a drop of the blood above the seal on William''s body. The blood shimmered faintly, reacting to the latent energy of the seal.


    Then, Stuart began to murmur in a strange, ancient language. The words were low and guttural, unlike anything William had ever heard. As Stuart chanted, glowing runes began to form in the air around them, hovering like fragments of light. Each rune was intricate, its lines and curves pulsing with energy. The sight was mesmerizing, but William knew better than to let his guard down. He could feel the tension building in the air, the magic growing stronger with every passing moment.


    The runes completed their formation, floating in a perfect circle around William. Then, with a sudden burst of energy, they shot toward the seal on his body. The impact was immediate and excruciating.


    William''s body convulsed as a sharp, searing pain spread through him. It felt as though his very soul was being torn apart and stitched back together. He clenched his teeth, trying to stifle the scream that threatened to escape, but the pain was too much. A cry of agony echoed through the forest, startling birds from their perches and sending small creatures scurrying for cover.


    Victoria, watching from a distance, felt her heart clench with worry. She wanted to rush to William''s side, to help him in any way she could, but she knew better. Intervening now could disrupt the delicate process and make things worse. All she could do was wait and hope that everything would turn out alright.


    The pain lasted for what felt like an eternity, but in reality, it was only a few moments. Gradually, the searing agony began to subside, replaced by a strange, tingling sensation. William gasped for breath, his body trembling as the last remnants of the seal dissolved. The runes faded, their light dimming until they vanished entirely.


    Stuart, exhausted from the effort, slumped on William''s shoulder. "It''s done," the rat said weakly, his voice barely above a whisper. "The seal is broken."


    William took a deep, shuddering breath, his body still trembling from the ordeal. But despite the lingering pain, he felt¡­ free. The oppressive weight of the seal was gone, and with it, the restrictions on his magic. He could feel his power surging within him, unrestrained and ready to be used.


    Victoria approached cautiously, her eyes filled with concern. "Are you alright?" she asked, her voice soft but urgent.


    William nodded, though his movements were still shaky. "I''m fine," he said, his voice hoarse. "The seal is gone. We can move forward now."


    Victoria let out a breath she hadn''t realized she was holding. "Good. Let''s get out of here before anyone notices."


    They wasted no time. As soon as William regained his strength, they hopped onto the dragon''s back, the massive creature spreading its wings and lifting them into the sky with a powerful gust of wind. Stuart, exhausted from the effort of breaking the seal, retreated into William''s pocket, curling up to rest. The rat had done his part, and now it was time for the others to take the lead.


    As the dragon soared through the air, William felt a surge of energy unlike anything he had experienced in a long time. Mana flowed freely through his body once again, unbound and unrestrained. It was a sensation he had almost forgotten¡ªpure, unadulterated power. He clenched his fists, reveling in the feeling, but his joy was tempered by one glaring absence: his sword, Asura, was still in Victoria''s possession.


    It was a problem that had been weighing on his mind. Asura wasn''t just a weapon; it was an extension of himself, a part of his soul. But taking it back from Victoria would risk betraying her trust, and William wasn''t willing to do that. She had risked so much to help him, and he owed her more than a sudden act of deception. S§×arch* The n?velFire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    To his relief, Asura chose that moment to awaken, its voice echoing in his mind. "You can still talk to her, acting as if you were the sword," Asura suggested. "And we can find another sword for her in the forbidden zone. In fact, we could even craft one ourselves and place a fragment of your soul in it. That way, she''ll have a weapon of her own."


    William raised an eyebrow, amused by Asura''s abruptness. "Hello to you too, Asura. You just show up and start giving advice without even saying hi?"


    Asura''s tone was dry but playful. "Hi, William. It''s been a while. And just so you know, even though I was asleep, I could still see and hear everything. So, no need to catch me up. But seriously, we need to speed things up. If we don''t hurry, that Kier guy is going to get all the secrets for himself."


    William sighed, his amusement fading as the urgency of their situation settled back in. "You''re right. Time isn''t on our side."

 Chapter 193 - 193: Forbidden Zone (1)

    "How are you feeling?" Victoria asked, her voice soft but curious. She was eager to learn more about the demon she was supposed to rescue¡ªa demon she already knew quite well, though she didn''t realize it. After all, she had been talking to William through the sword for weeks without knowing his true identity.


    William clenched his fists, feeling the familiar surge of mana coursing through his body. "Pretty good," he said, a hint of relief in his voice. "I can finally use mana again."


    Despite the relief, there was a lingering frustration. During the time he had been trapped in the mansion, unable to access his mana, he hadn''t leveled up once. For someone as driven as William, it felt like wasted time¡ªtime that could have been spent growing stronger and preparing for the challenges ahead.


    Victoria glanced at him, her expression a mix of admiration and curiosity. "You''re stronger than I thought," she said. Then, hesitating for a moment, she added, "Could you¡­ maybe teach me some things?"


    William smiled faintly. "Of course," he said. "But not right now. First, you need to get a demonic lineage. Once you have that, you''ll be able to learn all the techniques I can use."


    Victoria''s eyes lit up at the prospect, and William noticed a small smile forming on her face as she looked ahead. She was clearly excited about the idea of gaining new powers and learning advanced techniques. And why wouldn''t she be? She had left everything behind¡ªher school, her life¡ªto help William, even if she didn''t fully understand the extent of his plans.


    William felt a pang of guilt. He knew he was using her to some degree, but he was determined to make sure she didn''t leave empty-handed. ''The least I can do is give her a bloodline and teach her some things,'' he thought. ''She deserves that much.''


    Their destination was clear: the forbidden zone, the place where Kier had gone and where the demons had once thrived long ago. It was a place of mystery and danger, but also of immense opportunity. With the dragon''s incredible speed, they were making good progress, though it would still take a few days to reach their goal.


    During the journey, Victoria was full of questions. She wanted to know everything about demonic powers, the forbidden zone, and what they might encounter there. William didn''t mind answering her questions. In fact, he enjoyed the conversations. It gave him a chance to reflect on his own knowledge and prepare her for what lay ahead.


    But as they traveled, something unexpected happened. Three days into their journey, William received a notification from the system that left him uneasy.


    [Your SSS Portal skill has changed due to unknown reasons.]


    [There''s a high chance you will transport to another time, and not the one you were used to.]


    [There''s also a chance you''ll transport to another world, but that has a lower chance.]


    William frowned, his mind racing. Why had his SSS-rank portal skill changed? What did it mean? Would he now be transported to a different time period¡ªor even another world entirely? The implications were staggering.


    Despite his curiosity, William knew he couldn''t afford to test the skill right now. His priority was finding Kier and securing the secrets of the forbidden zone. But the notification also reminded him of another pressing concern: James and the king. They were counting on him to return with the ingredients for the antidote, and he had no idea how much time they had left.


    ''It''s been a long time,'' he thought, his stomach tightening with worry. ''I don''t know if the king will last that long¡­''


    The weight of his responsibilities pressed down on him, but William pushed the thoughts aside. For now, all he could do was focus on the task at hand. The forbidden zone awaited, and with it, the answers¡ªand challenges¡ªthey so desperately needed.


    A few more days passed, and by the time they reached the outskirts of the forbidden zone, nine days had gone by since they began their journey. The dragon, with its incredible speed and endurance, had carried them far, but now it was time to part ways. The creature landed a safe distance from the forbidden zone, its massive wings stirring up dust and leaves as it touched down.


    Flying directly over the forbidden zone was too risky. The area was shrouded in mystery and danger, and even the dragon seemed wary of it. As Victoria and William dismounted, the dragon turned its head toward William, its eyes glowing faintly as it communicated mentally.


    "I know it was you talking through the sword," the dragon said, its voice deep and resonant. "Don''t do anything bad to Victoria. She''s kind, and she deserves better than being used. One day, we might see each other again."


    William nodded, a mix of respect and gratitude in his expression. "Thank you for everything. You''ve done more than enough. Go, be free."


    The dragon let out a low rumble, almost like a purr, before spreading its wings and taking to the sky. It soared upward, its majestic form quickly becoming a speck in the distance. William watched it go, feeling a pang of loss. The dragon had been an invaluable ally, and its speed and strength had made their journey possible.


    Victoria stood beside him, her expression a mix of awe and sadness as she watched the dragon disappear into the horizon. "Will we be okay without it?" she asked, her voice tinged with uncertainty.


    William turned to her, his tone reassuring. "I think so, yes. We managed to escape from Jonas and the slave traders. The dragon helped us when we needed it most, but we''re safe now. We''ll be fine."


    Victoria nodded, though her eyes still lingered on the sky where the dragon had vanished. She trusted William, but the loss of their powerful ally was hard to ignore.


    The two of them turned their attention to their surroundings. They were deep in a forest, but it wasn''t like any forest Victoria had ever seen. The air was heavy with silence, devoid of the usual sounds of birds chirping or small animals rustling in the underbrush. It was unnerving, as if the very life had been drained from the area. S~ea??h the ¦Çov§×lFire .net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "Where should we go now?" Victoria asked, her voice barely above a whisper, as if afraid to break the eerie quiet.


    William scanned the area, his sharp eyes taking in every detail. "Let''s look for the road," he said. "If I remember correctly, there should be a few villages near the border of the forbidden zone. We can rest there and gather information before heading deeper."


    They walked for a few minutes, the silence of the forest pressing heavily on them. The dragon had landed close enough to the road to make their journey manageable, and soon they found themselves on a narrow, dirt path that cut through the trees. The road was overgrown in places, as if nature itself was trying to reclaim it, but it was still recognizable.


    As they followed the road, William kept his senses sharp, his eyes scanning the surroundings for any signs of danger. Roads were usually safe, with little risk of attacks from beasts or bandits, but this was no ordinary place. The forbidden zone was notorious for its dangers, and William knew better than to let his guard down.


    Victoria walked beside him, her hand resting on the hilt of Asura. The eerie quiet of the forest made her uneasy, and she couldn''t shake the feeling that they were being watched. "Do you think we''ll run into trouble?" she asked, her voice low.


    "It''s possible," William replied, his tone cautious. "But we''ll deal with it if it happens. Just stay alert."


    After a while, the road led them to a small village. The houses were modest, built from wood and stone, with thatched roofs and small gardens. There weren''t many of them¡ªperhaps a dozen at most¡ªbut it was a welcome sight after the oppressive silence of the forest. A small stream ran through the village, its clear water turning a wooden water mill that creaked softly as it turned.


    "We finally found life in this place," Victoria said, her voice tinged with relief.


    But as they stepped into the village, they immediately drew attention. The villagers stopped what they were doing, their eyes narrowing as they stared at the newcomers. It wasn''t every day that strangers arrived in their isolated community, and their expressions ranged from curiosity to suspicion.


    Soon, a middle-aged man approached them. He was taller than most of the villagers, with a muscular build and a face marked by a few scars. His aura was strong, and he carried himself with the confidence of someone who had seen his share of battles. His hand rested on the hilt of a sword at his side, and his gaze was sharp as he addressed them.


    "Who are you," he demanded, his voice firm but not hostile, "and what are you doing here?"


    William stepped forward, his posture calm but respectful. "We''re travelers," he said. "We''re passing through on our way to the forbidden zone. We mean no harm."


    The man''s eyes narrowed slightly, as if weighing William''s words. "The forbidden zone, huh?" he said, his tone skeptical. "Not many people go there willingly. What''s your business?"


    William hesitated for a moment, choosing his words carefully. "We''re looking for someone," he said. "A man named Kier. He passed through here not long ago."


    "Kier?" the man said, "could you describe him to me?"


    He shared details about Kier''s appearance, and to his surprise, the man knew him!


    "He came here 20 days ago."

 Chapter 194 - 194: Forbidden Zone (2) - A Hero is Here

    "Twenty days ago?" William asked, his brow furrowing slightly. He knew Kier had arrived at the forbidden zone a while back, so the timeline wasn''t surprising. What caught him off guard was the fact that Kier had stopped in this village to gather information. It seemed out of character for someone as driven and secretive as Kier.


    "Yes, correct," the warrior replied, his tone matter-of-fact. "At least, I believe it was the same man. If not, they''re twins." He shrugged, as if the distinction didn''t matter much. "Anyway, he wanted to know more about the region, but there wasn''t much I could tell him. Despite living close to it, it''s not like we go there every day. It''s called the forbidden zone for a reason."


    William nodded, his expression thoughtful. "And what can you tell me about it?" he pressed. He wanted as much information as possible before venturing into the dangerous area. Every detail could mean the difference between life and death.


    The warrior crossed his arms, his gaze distant as he recalled what he knew. "The usual dangers," he began. "Plenty of beasts, some stranger than others. There are plants that''ll poison you if you so much as touch them. A random fog rolls in from time to time, thick enough to make you lose your way. And then there are the stories¡­" He paused, his voice lowering slightly. "Some people say there are skeletons that walk around at night, and even a lich lurking somewhere in the depths."


    William''s eyes widened slightly. That was a lot to take in. He had expected the forbidden zone to be dangerous, but the sheer variety of threats was staggering. Beasts, poison, fog, undead, and a lich? It sounded like a nightmare.


    "And what about the people who go there?" William asked, his tone cautious. "Does anyone ever return?"


    The warrior hesitated, his expression grim. "Some do," he admitted. "But most don''t. The ones who come back are either incredibly powerful or didn''t venture too far into the zone. The deeper you go, the less likely you are to make it out alive."


    William absorbed the information, his mind racing. The forbidden zone''s reputation was clearly well-earned, but he also knew how stories could be exaggerated. People often made things sound worse than they were, especially when it came to places shrouded in mystery and fear. Still, he couldn''t afford to underestimate the dangers.


    "Thank you," William said, his voice sincere. "This is helpful."


    The warrior nodded, his expression softening slightly. "Just be careful," he said. "That place doesn''t forgive mistakes."


    William turned to Victoria, who had been listening quietly.


    "So, what do you think?" William asked Victoria, his tone serious but curious. He wanted to gauge her thoughts before they made any decisions.


    Victoria didn''t hesitate. "I think this place is really dangerous, and we''re stupid for even considering going there," she said bluntly. Then, with a small smirk, she added, "But only by being stupid can we become more powerful. Let''s go explore this place."


    Her determination was clear. She wanted power, and she was willing to take risks to get it. William couldn''t help but admire her resolve, even if it bordered on recklessness. S§×arch* The n??el Fire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    The warrior who had been explaining the dangers of the forbidden zone overheard their conversation and chimed in. "If you''re serious about going, I''d suggest resting for a day first. There''s a small bar in the village with a couple of rooms for travelers. And, interestingly enough, there''s another person staying there who''s also planning to explore the forbidden zone. Maybe you can team up. It''ll increase your chances of coming back alive."


    William thanked the man again for the information, though he wasn''t entirely sold on the idea of teaming up with a stranger. The last time he had brought someone into his plans¡ªKier¡ªit had ended in betrayal. That memory lingered in the back of his mind, a constant reminder of the risks of trusting others.


    Still, the idea of resting and gathering more information was appealing. The journey had been long, and they could use a break before facing the dangers ahead. Plus, meeting this other adventurer might provide some useful insights, even if they didn''t end up working together.


    "Let''s check it out," William said to Victoria. "We could use a drink and a place to rest, at least."


    Victoria nodded, and the two of them made their way to the small tavern the warrior had mentioned. It was a modest building, its wooden walls weathered by time, but it had a warm, inviting atmosphere. The smell of roasted meat and ale wafted through the air as they stepped inside.


    William scanned the room, his eyes quickly landing on a familiar figure sitting at a corner table. His breath caught in his throat, and for a moment, he couldn''t believe what he was seeing.


    It was Sarah.


    Sarah, one of the students from his class who had been summoned to this world as a hero. She was supposed to be on another continent, training with Master Elric and the other summoned heroes. What was she doing here, of all places?


    Before he could process the situation, Sarah turned around, her eyes locking onto his. Her expression shifted from curiosity to shock as she recognized him.


    "William?" she said, her voice a mix of disbelief and confusion. "What are you doing here?"


    William stood frozen, his mind racing. This was the last thing he had expected. Seeing Sarah here, in this remote village on the edge of the forbidden zone, was beyond surprising. It was downright surreal.


    Victoria glanced between them, her brow furrowing. "You know her?" she asked, her tone cautious.


    William finally found his voice. "Yeah," he said, "she''s¡­ an old friend."


    Sarah stood up, her chair scraping against the wooden floor. "William, what''s going on? Why are you here?" she asked, her voice rising slightly.


    William took a deep breath, trying to steady himself. This was going to be a long conversation.


    "Can we speak alone for a second, Victoria?" William asked, his voice low but firm.


    Victoria blinked, caught off guard by the request. She hadn''t expected this, but she didn''t want to cause any tension between them. After all, they were partners in this mission, and she trusted William¡ªat least, as much as she could trust someone she barely knew.


    "Sure," she said, her tone casual. "I''ll go grab a drink."


    She walked away, leaving William and Sarah alone at the table. William felt a knot of unease tighten in his stomach. This was the first time he had seen Sarah since being expelled and humiliated by Master Elric. Back on Earth, they had been classmates, and Sarah had always been kind to him. But a lot had changed since then. He had changed. And he wasn''t sure if Sarah had, too.


    Sarah studied him for a moment, her expression a mix of curiosity and concern. "What are you doing here, exactly?" she asked, her voice gentle but probing. "You know this is another continent, right?"


    William nodded, his gaze steady. "Yes, I know. But I have my reasons for being here. What about you? Why are you here? Shouldn''t you be training with Master Elric and the others?"


    Sarah sighed, leaning back in her chair. "Master Elric sent me here on a mission," she explained. "It''s¡­ a bit strange, honestly. He wants me to find out more about the demons that once lived in this area. He thinks it might help us understand the Demon Lord better."


    William''s heart skipped a beat. Of course she was here for the demons. Why else would anyone venture into the forbidden zone? But this complicated things. Could he trust her with the truth about his demonic bloodline? Sarah had always been kind, but that didn''t mean she would react well to discovering he was part demon. And if she told Master Elric¡­ well, that would be disastrous.


    "And why are you here?" Sarah asked, her tone shifting slightly. "Don''t tell me you''re also looking into the demons."


    William''s mind raced. He needed a convincing answer, and fast. "Sort of," he said, choosing his words carefully. "There''s a guy who betrayed me. He has knowledge about the demons, and he came here to this continent. I''m tracking him down."


    It wasn''t a lie¡ªhe was looking for Kier¡ªbut it wasn''t the whole truth, either. Still, it was enough to satisfy Sarah for now.


    She tilted her head, considering his words. "Maybe we can work together, then," she suggested. "I want to learn more about the demons, and you want to catch this guy. There''s no reason for us to be enemies here. Besides," she added with a small smile, "I promise I won''t tell Master Elric or the other heroes that I saw you here."


    William hesitated, his mind weighing the pros and cons. On one hand, teaming up with Sarah could be risky. She was still loyal to Master Elric, and if she discovered his secret, it could put him in danger. On the other hand, having an ally with her skills and knowledge could be invaluable in the forbidden zone. And her promise to keep his presence a secret was reassuring.


    "Alright," he said finally, his tone cautious but open. "We''ll work together. But we need to be clear about one thing: this mission is dangerous. The forbidden zone isn''t a place for hesitation or mistakes. If we''re going to do this, we need to trust each other."


    Sarah nodded, her expression serious. "I understand. And for what it''s worth, I do trust you, William. I always have."

 Chapter 195 - 195: Forbidden Zone (3) - Fighting Through

    Sarah had changed a lot since the last time William had seen her. It wasn''t her appearance¡ªher face was still the same, warm and familiar¡ªbut her aura. She radiated a strength and confidence that hadn''t been there before. It was clear that her training with Master Elric had paid off. She carried herself with the poise of someone who had faced challenges and come out stronger.


    Unlike William, who relied on his sword, enhancing magic, and his newfound demonic powers¡ªthough he couldn''t use those around Sarah¡ªSarah had a different approach to combat. Strapped to her back was a sleek, intricately designed magical bow.


    She was a Magic Archer, a rare and highly skilled class that combined precision with powerful magical attacks. William couldn''t help but feel a pang of envy.


    He had always focused on close-range combat, but seeing Sarah''s bow made him realize the value of having a long-range option. It was something he''d need to consider learning in the future.


    "Is it hard to use the bow?" William asked, his tone casual but curious. "It looks¡­ impressive."


    Sarah laughed, a light, melodic sound that brought back memories of their time on Earth. "I''m sorry," she said, still smiling. "It''s just so nice to talk to someone I actually know. It''s been a while since I''ve had that." She paused, then answered his question. "It''s not too hard to use, at least for me. I can teach you someday, if you''re interested."


    William nodded, though he wasn''t sure if he''d ever get the chance. His demonic abilities made it difficult to blend in, and he couldn''t risk revealing too much to Sarah. Still, the offer was tempting.


    Victoria, who had been quietly observing their interaction, felt a strange unease settle over her. She couldn''t quite put her finger on why, but seeing William so comfortable and familiar with Sarah bothered her. She told herself it was just because she didn''t know Sarah well, but deep down, she knew there was more to it. She pushed the feeling aside, focusing instead on the task at hand.


    That night, they decided to stay at the tavern, each taking a separate room. William made a point to speak with both Sarah and Victoria in private, for different reasons.


    With Sarah, he emphasized the importance of keeping their identities as summoned heroes a secret. "Not everyone here is friendly," he explained. "If people find out who we are, it could put us in danger."


    Sarah nodded, understanding the need for caution. "Don''t worry," she said. "I won''t say anything."


    With Victoria, the conversation was more delicate. William needed to ensure she didn''t reveal his demonic nature or the true purpose of their mission. "Sarah doesn''t know about my¡­ abilities," he said carefully. "And it''s better if it stays that way. For now, at least."


    Victoria raised an eyebrow but didn''t argue. "Alright," she said. "I''ll keep it to myself."


    As William lay in his room that night, he couldn''t help but feel a twinge of guilt. He had asked Sarah to trust him, to work together, yet he was keeping so much from her. But he reminded himself that she was likely doing the same. Master Elric had sent her on a mission, and William doubted she was sharing all the details with him. Trust was a two-way street, after all.


    The rooms in the tavern were simple, not particularly clean, and clearly not designed for frequent visitors. But after days of traveling, William wasn''t picky. A bed was all he needed, and he fell asleep almost as soon as his head hit the pillow.


    The next morning, they gathered outside the tavern, ready to depart. The village was quiet, the early morning light casting long shadows across the dirt road. The forbidden zone loomed ahead, its dark, foreboding presence a stark contrast to the relative safety of the village.


    William took a deep breath, his resolve hardening. "Let''s move," he said, his voice steady. "We''ve got a long way to go."


    Together, the three of them set off toward the deeper parts of the forbidden zone, each carrying their own secrets and motivations. The road ahead was uncertain, but one thing was clear: they would need to rely on each other if they hoped to survive.


    They followed a narrow, muddy road that wound its way deeper into the woods. The further they went, the more the atmosphere changed. The cheerful sounds of the village¡ªthe chatter of villagers, the clinking of tools, the occasional bark of a dog¡ªfaded into silence. The air grew colder, and a chilling breeze swept through the trees, carrying with it an eerie stillness.


    "Winter makes it even harder to walk around here," Sarah commented, her breath visible in the cold air. She adjusted the strap of her magical bow as she spoke. "The snow is a pain to trudge through, but at least some of the beasts are hibernating. Makes things a little easier."


    The way she spoke made it sound like she had experience in this area, which caught William''s attention. He glanced at her, his expression curious. "This isn''t your first time here, is it?" he asked. Sear?h the NovelFire.net* website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Sarah hesitated, her steps faltering for a moment. "It is my first time," she said quickly, though her tone lacked conviction. "Why would I come here before?"


    William raised an eyebrow but didn''t press further. He could tell she wasn''t being entirely truthful, but now wasn''t the time to push. Instead, he nodded, pretending to believe her. "I see. But yeah, you''re right about the snow."


    Victoria, walking a few steps behind them, chimed in. "Where are all the beasts everyone keeps talking about?" she asked, her tone a mix of curiosity and skepticism. "Everyone says this place is practically a death sentence, but I don''t see the reason. It''s just¡­ quiet."


    As if on cue, Victoria''s words seemed to summon trouble. From the shadows of the forest, a group of skeletons emerged. These weren''t the frail, disjointed skeletons one might expect. They were clad in rusted plate armor, their bony hands gripping weapons¡ªswords, axes, and shields. Their hollow eye sockets glowed with a faint, menacing light, and they moved with an unnatural coordination.


    William cursed under his breath. Without his sword¡ªVictoria was still carrying Asura¡ªhe was left with only his fists. He clenched his hands, preparing for a fight, but Sarah was already in action.


    She nocked an arrow to her bowstring, her movements fluid and precise. As she drew the arrow back, her fingers traced glowing runes along its shaft. The arrow began to emit a bright blue light, pulsing with concentrated mana. Without hesitation, she released it.


    The arrow shot forward with incredible speed, piercing through the first skeleton with a loud crack. But it didn''t stop there. The arrow continued its trajectory, obliterating four more skeletons in its path. Bones and fragments of armor scattered in all directions, one piece nearly hitting William in the head. He ducked just in time, his heart racing.


    "Incredible," Victoria murmured, her eyes wide with awe.


    William was equally impressed. Sarah''s attack had been swift, precise, and devastatingly powerful. The fact that she could unleash such force from a distance was both impressive and intimidating. It made him wonder¡ªif it came down to it, could he win against her in a fight?


    The remaining skeletons, undeterred by the destruction of their comrades, continued to advance. William shook off his thoughts and focused on the immediate threat. "Stay sharp," he said, his voice firm. "There''s more coming."


    This time, it was William who took the initiative. Without hesitation, he dashed toward the group of skeletons advancing on them. His movements were swift and precise, his body fueled by the mana now flowing freely through him once again. He didn''t need to rely on magic for this fight¡ªhis enhanced physical strength was more than enough.


    One of the skeletons, wielding a rusted scimitar, swung its weapon in a wide arc aimed at William''s neck. He ducked effortlessly, the blade whistling harmlessly over his head. In the same motion, he drove his fist into the skeleton''s torso. The impact was devastating; the skeleton''s ribcage shattered, its bones scattering across the ground.


    But William wasn''t done. Six more skeletons surrounded him, their weapons raised and ready to strike. Yet, despite their numbers, they were no match for his speed and reflexes. Their attacks were slow and clumsy, and William dodged them with ease, his movements almost fluid.


    As the fight progressed, it became clear that William was only getting faster. His body, which had been dormant for so long, was quickly adjusting to the rhythm of combat. Each punch, each kick, was delivered with precision and power, dismantling the skeletons with brutal efficiency. Bones crunched and armor clattered to the ground as William tore through the undead foes.


    Victoria watched from a distance, her grip on Asura loosening as she realized she didn''t need to intervene. William had everything under control. Sarah, too, stood back, her bow lowered. Her initial attack had been impressive, but William''s display of raw strength and skill was on another level.


    When the last skeleton fell, its bones scattering across the muddy road, William straightened up, his breathing steady despite the exertion. He turned back to the others, his expression calm but satisfied.


    "That was impressive," Sarah said, her tone a mix of admiration and curiosity. "And you weren''t even using spells. How do you have such a strong body?"


    William hesitated for a moment, his mind racing for a plausible explanation. The truth¡ªhis demonic bloodline¡ªwas something he couldn''t reveal. Instead, he smiled and shrugged. "Lots of strength training," he said casually. "I followed the regimen of that bald man¡­"


    Sarah burst out laughing, immediately recognizing the reference. "I see," she said, still chuckling. "Be careful, or you''ll end up bald too."


    William grinned, relieved that she had taken the explanation at face value. "I''ll keep that in mind."


    Victoria, who had been silent during the exchange, finally spoke up. "Let''s keep moving," she said, her tone practical. "Before more skeletons show up."

 Chapter 196 - 196: Forbidden Zone (4) - Undead, and Demonic Sight

    "Why are skeletons here?" William asked, his brow furrowed in confusion. "This isn''t the kind of place you''d expect to find them."


    Skeletons were typically found in dungeons, crypts, or tombs¡ªplaces steeped in death and decay. Finding them in the middle of a forest was unusual, and it left William puzzled. The forbidden zone was full of mysteries, but this one seemed particularly out of place.


    Sarah, however, had an answer. She had done extensive research before coming here, and she was eager to share what she knew. "There are quite a few high-grade skeletons in this area," she explained, her tone matter-of-fact. "Some of them are incredibly powerful, like liches. In fact, they''re among the strongest creatures here."


    William''s eyes widened slightly. "Really?" he asked, his curiosity piqued. "I knew there were liches in the forbidden zone, but I didn''t realize it was this¡­ organized."


    Sarah nodded. "This area used to belong to demons," she continued. "After they disappeared, beasts took over. But now, the undead rule this place. Some people are even considering giving the area to them officially, allowing them to form their own kingdom."


    William blinked, processing the information. "An undead kingdom?" he repeated, his tone a mix of disbelief and fascination. "That''s¡­ something."


    Victoria, who had been listening quietly, chimed in. "Imagine how that would be," she said, her voice tinged with both curiosity and unease. "A kingdom ruled by skeletons and liches. It sounds like something out of a nightmare."


    "Right?" Sarah agreed, her tone light but her expression serious. "It''s not exactly a comforting thought."


    As they continued walking, the landscape around them grew increasingly grim. The trees were dead and gnarled, their twisted branches reaching out like skeletal fingers. The ground was littered with fallen leaves and patches of frost, and a strange, eerie fog hung in the air, obscuring their view of the path ahead.


    The atmosphere was heavy with an unnatural stillness, broken only by the occasional caw of crows perched in the dead trees.


    It was the first time they had heard the sound of any animals since entering the forbidden zone, and the crows'' harsh cries only added to the sense of foreboding. Their black feathers glistened in the dim light, and their beady eyes seemed to follow the group as they passed.


    William couldn''t help but feel a chill run down his spine. The forbidden zone was living up to its name, and he knew they were only scratching the surface of its dangers.


    "And why exactly are you searching for someone here? What did they do to you?" Sarah asked, her sharp gaze locked onto William.


    He had been expecting this. It was only a matter of time before she started asking questions¡ªquestions he couldn''t answer truthfully.


    William hesitated, carefully choosing his words. He couldn''t just tell her the truth. That he was a demon. That Kier, the man who had flown away, was desperate to obtain a demon bloodline of his own. That they had planned to work together to uncover the dark secrets of their kind.


    No, that would never work. Even if Sarah didn''t immediately turn against him, such knowledge could bring far more trouble than he could handle.


    Instead, he took a breath and gave her something close to the truth. A believable lie.


    "I''m on a mission for a noble," he said, keeping his voice steady. "I was sent to retrieve an item, and the man I''m chasing stole it. He took everything valuable he had and fled here. If I don''t find him soon, the noble won''t be happy."


    It was just enough truth to sound convincing. Sarah studied him for a moment, as if trying to judge whether he was hiding something.


    Then, to his relief, she nodded. "I see. Makes sense."


    "You''ve been doing missions too, right?" he asked, steering the conversation away from himself.


    "Yeah," Sarah said, adjusting the strap of her satchel. "It''s a good way to make money. Might as well use strength to earn something, right?"


    William let out a small chuckle. "It is indeed."


    But inside, he was sighing in relief. At least for now, she believed him.


    The two continued through the dense forest, their boots crunching softly against fallen leaves and twigs. The air was thick with the scent of damp earth, and the occasional rustle in the distance kept them on edge. The deeper they went, the darker it became, as the towering trees blocked out the sun.


    Then, after what felt like hours of searching, they stumbled upon something interesting.


    "Look at this," Sarah said, pointing to a clearing ahead.


    William followed her gaze and saw it¡ªa firepit, its stones still arranged in a neat circle. The ashes inside were cold, long abandoned, but unmistakable. Someone had camped here.


    Excitement surged in William''s chest. "This could belong to the man I''m after," he said, stepping closer to examine it.


    Sarah, however, remained skeptical. She crossed her arms, tilting her head slightly. "Maybe," she admitted. "But there are plenty of people who explore this place. And don''t forget, some beasts are smart enough to make campfires too."


    She knelt down, running her fingers over the charred remains. "Still," she added, glancing up at him, "there''s a good chance this is your guy. Let''s explore a bit more before jumping to conclusions. sea??h th§× NovelFire.net* website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    The chance that the campfire belonged to Kier was there, but the traces were old. Too old.


    According to what the villager had said, Kier had passed through this area twenty days ago. There was no way he had been traveling this slowly. A mage as strong as him wouldn''t need to linger¡ªespecially not in a dangerous place like this.


    William clenched his jaw. If Kier had already moved far ahead, catching up to him was going to be a challenge.


    Still, they had no choice but to keep moving forward, staying alert to avoid getting caught off guard by any roaming skeletons or other creatures lurking in the shadows.


    Then, a sharp, piercing screech tore through the air.


    William''s head snapped up just in time to see a massive skeletal bird soaring above them. Its hollow eye sockets burned with an eerie blue light, its bones rattling with each wingbeat. But what truly sent a chill down his spine was the figure riding on its back¡ªa skeleton draped in tattered purple robes, gripping a twisted scepter.


    A lich.


    Sarah''s breath hitched. "Where should we hide? Most of the trees here are dead¡ªthere''s no foliage for cover!"


    Victoria looked equally panicked, her eyes darting around in search of shelter. William knew they had only seconds before the lich noticed them. If that happened, they were dead.


    Or rather, they would have been¡ªif not for Stuart.


    The small magical rat poked his head out of William''s pocket, his whiskers twitching with urgency. "Lean against the tree and stay still. I''ll handle the rest."


    Without hesitation, the trio pressed their backs against the lifeless trunks. Stuart scurried onto William''s shoulder, his tiny paws glowing faintly as he worked his magic.


    Almost instantly, their appearances began to shift, blending seamlessly with the decayed surroundings. Not just their bodies¡ªtheir very presence faded, their auras dissolving into the air. To the naked eye, they were no longer there.


    Or at least, that was the hope.


    The lich hovered above them, its empty gaze sweeping the ground as if searching for something. For a tense moment, it lingered. The skeletal bird let out another bone-chilling screech, circling once before finally soaring off into the distance.


    Only when the creature was completely out of sight did William let out the breath he''d been holding.


    "That was close," Sarah muttered, rubbing her arms. "If it wasn''t for your magical rat, we''d be in serious trouble."


    Stuart puffed up proudly. "Right? I am the best." With that, he scurried back into William''s pocket, clearly satisfied with himself.


    But William''s mind was still on the lich. "Was it looking for us?" he wondered aloud.


    There was no way to be sure.


    Sarah shook her head. "I don''t know, but we should be extra careful. A lich like that is way out of our league."


    No one disagreed.


    The place was crawling with undead. No matter where they turned, there was always something¡ªskeletal remains twitching back to life, eerie moans echoing in the distance, or the unsettling glow of hollow eye sockets watching from the shadows.


    And as if things weren''t bad enough, the lich returned.


    William wasn''t sure if it was the same one or a different one, but that hardly mattered. Either way, it made their journey exponentially harder. With the constant threat looming above, they had to slow down, moving carefully to avoid drawing attention.


    It was suffocating.


    Then, finally, they found something unexpected.


    A fissure in the earth.


    The crack in the terrain stretched deep, revealing a hidden world below. Unlike the decayed wasteland around them, the bottom of the crevice was¡­ alive. Lush vegetation thrived in the depths, untouched by the corruption above. And even more astonishing, there were structures built into the walls¡ªhouses, carved directly into the rock. The craftsmanship was intricate, precise. Whoever had lived there had done so with skill and purpose.


    Sarah was the first to speak. "I think this belonged to the demons. These buildings¡ªthey match descriptions I''ve read before."


    William barely heard her.


    A sharp, searing pain erupted in his skull, a sensation so overwhelming that his knees buckled beneath him. He barely registered the sensation of the cold ground against his hands as he collapsed. His vision blurred, his breath came in ragged gasps.


    Something about this place¡­


    It was calling to him.


    And it hurt like hell.

 Chapter 197 - 197: Forbidden Zone (5) - Broken Ribs and a Light

    William couldn''t hear anything. His entire world had been consumed by pain¡ªoverwhelming, all-encompassing pain.


    Even Asura tried to reach him mentally, but it was useless. It wasn''t that William wasn''t listening¡ªno, something was blocking the connection entirely. A barrier had formed in his mind, shutting him off from everyone.


    "What''s happening to him?" Sarah asked, crouching beside William and gripping his shoulders.


    She turned to Victoria, hoping for an answer. After all, Victoria had been traveling with William for longer. Maybe she knew what was going on.


    But Victoria''s face was just as confused as hers.


    "I have no idea," she admitted, her voice tense. "What should we do?"


    Sarah''s grip on William tightened. "Let''s hold him steady so he doesn''t hurt himself."


    She knew screaming his name or shaking him wouldn''t wake him. Whatever this was, it had to run its course.


    Outwardly, she remained composed, but deep down, her mind raced.


    "Why did this happen the moment we got closer to this place?"


    As one of the summoned heroes, Sarah wasn''t na?ve. There was a connection here¡ªshe was sure of it. But at this point, all she had were guesses.


    "Come to me¡­ Come to me¡­"


    A voice echoed in William''s mind, cutting through the pain like a whisper in the dark. It was distant yet insistent, drawing him in. But who was calling him? And why?


    The agony continued, unbearable and relentless¡ªuntil suddenly, it stopped.


    William''s body tensed as his senses returned. He opened his eyes, blinking against the light, the world around him slowly coming back into focus. The weight of the moment still lingered in his chest, heavy and unsettling.


    Sarah''s face hovered above him, concerned.


    "Are you alright?" she asked, then, unable to hold back her curiosity, added, "What the hell was that?"


    "I-I don''t know," William muttered, pushing himself up. His body still ached from the lingering remnants of the pain. "The pain just... hit me, and I couldn''t hear anything you were saying. All I could do was scream and endure it."


    His mind, though hazy, couldn''t shake the voice¡ªCome to me... Come to me... What did it mean? Who had called him?


    Victoria''s eyes locked onto him, concern furrowing her brow. "Are you sure you''re okay?" She leaned in, checking him over. "We need to be certain. This place is dangerous, and we can''t protect you all the time."


    "I''m fine," William said, his voice steadier than he felt. He noticed Sarah''s gaze, sharp and filled with suspicion. But she didn''t press him, which he appreciated. He wasn''t in the mood for questions he couldn''t answer.


    Then, another screech tore through the air¡ªthe lich. They weren''t usually afraid of it. Stuart had camouflaged them enough times, and it worked. But this time, something felt different.


    Stuart emerged from William''s pocket, his fur bristling with unease. "There''s a strange barrier here," he said, his voice tense. "I can''t use my magic. You''ll need to hide, as I can''t camouflage any of you."


    The little rat scurried back into William''s pocket, leaving the group frozen in sudden panic.


    "We can''t hide, there are no trees here!" Sarah said, her voice tight with anxiety.


    William''s mind raced. They needed a plan, and fast. "How strong is your body?" he asked Victoria, his eyes sharp.


    "Decent, but not as strong as yours," she replied, brows furrowing. "Why?" S~ea??h the n?velFire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "Hold tight, then," William said without hesitation.


    In a single motion, he grabbed Victoria with one arm, Sarah with the other, and launched himself into the air. The ground dropped away beneath them as he twisted mid-fall, positioning the two girls above him to cushion their descent. He braced himself, using his body like a bed to absorb the impact.


    The fissure was deeper than he''d expected, and the wind howled as they fell. His muscles strained, his blood pounding in his ears. His feet hit the ground with a sickening crack. He heard the snap of his ribs, but his body took the brunt of the damage, and the two girls¡ªthankfully¡ªlanded unharmed.


    "Are you okay?" Sarah gasped, looking at William, worry flashing in her eyes.


    William coughed, a sharp pain shooting through his chest. "I''m fine," he managed to say, though his body protested the lie. "Let''s keep moving."


    Despite saying he was fine, William knew his body was far from it. The sharp pain in his ribs gnawed at him, but he trusted in his accelerated healing ability. He could feel his bones slowly knitting back together, but it would take time.


    Asura''s voice echoed in his mind, filled with concern. "That was crazy. And what was that pain you felt? I tried to reach you, but it didn''t work."


    William gritted his teeth. "I don''t know. A voice... It kept saying, ''come to me, come to me.'' It''s got to be linked to my demonic bloodline somehow."


    "Certainly. You need to be careful in this place, William."


    "I will," he replied, his voice steadier than he felt.


    The mental conversation was brief, a fleeting moment of connection before William shut it out. He needed to focus. Survival was the priority, especially in the thick, oppressive air of the fissure.


    The good news was that the lich had flown overhead on its skeletal bird, but it hadn''t spotted them. The dense vegetation below them provided a much-needed cover, unlike the barren, lifeless trees that had surrounded them above ground. The rich greenery here felt like a sanctuary¡ªat least for the moment.


    Sarah, still looking around, broke the silence. "Why don''t the skeletons come down here? This place looks perfect for setting up a base, especially since they seem intent on turning this whole area into their kingdom."


    William glanced around, his senses still alert, though his body still hurt. The thick underbrush offered protection, but there was something unsettling about the stillness. It almost felt like they were being watched. He couldn''t shake the feeling that the fissure, with its strange mix of life and decay, was far more than just a refuge from the lich.


    "Maybe they haven''t noticed it yet," William said, scanning their surroundings. "Or maybe there''s something here that keeps them away. Either way, it''s safer for now."


    There was no doubt in William''s mind that the skeletons must have seen the massive fissure, but he knew there had to be something within it keeping them away. The question was, what was it? And why hadn''t they ventured deeper?


    They pressed on, making their way through the dark, winding fissure. Victoria kept her eyes darting from one shadowed corner to the next, constantly on guard for any sign of movement from the thick, overgrown vegetation. The atmosphere was suffocatingly tense.


    "I don''t like this place," Victoria muttered, her voice laced with unease.


    None of them did. But it was far better than facing the Lich above. It wasn''t just the Lich that posed a danger, but the other creatures that lurked in the area. If they fought it, an army of skeletons would surely descend upon them, attracted by the noise. For now, it was safer to risk whatever dangers the fissure held.


    As they continued, the sight of houses carved into the walls of the fissure piqued their curiosity. There was something deeply strange about it. Those structures looked ancient, yet remarkably well-preserved, defying time itself. The silence around them only deepened the sense of mystery.


    Then, just as they passed an overgrown path, a flicker of light caught Sarah''s attention. It came from one of the houses. How could that be? It was nearly impossible that anyone could have survived in this forsaken place. Sarah had done her research on the forbidden zone¡ªthere were no known inhabitants, no signs of life in the fissure. Yet here they were, seeing a light where there should have been only darkness.


    "Should we check it out?" Sarah whispered, her voice barely audible over the sound of their footsteps.


    William''s eyes narrowed, his curiosity piqued. "Hell yeah," he replied, his tone steady, though his mind raced. What could it be?


    They approached the stone staircase leading up to the house, the steps weathered but still sturdy, showing signs of having been well-crafted centuries ago. A few steps had crumbled, and moss clung to the sides of the stairs, making the climb slippery, but it was still passable.


    With careful, deliberate steps, they reached the door of the house. It was made of stone as well, but much to their surprise, it wasn''t locked. William pushed it open cautiously, his senses alert to any sound.


    Inside, they were met with the sight of a man sitting near a glowing hearth, his long brown hair and beard framing his face. He appeared as though he had been there for a while, and he wasn''t alone. A few others sat around him, looking equally weary, and in total, there were four of them. The flickering light that had caught their attention came from the fire within.


    The moment the man saw William, his eyes widened in alarm. He quickly grabbed a magical scepter from the table, pointing it in their direction with practiced precision. "Don''t move, or I''ll attack," he warned, his voice firm, but not without fear.


    William raised both hands in a placating gesture. "Don''t be afraid. We''re just travelers exploring this area. It should be empty, but we''re not here to cause any harm. Who are you?"


    As his gaze shifted from the scepter to the man''s attire, William noted the robes¡ªdistinctly magical in nature. His suspicions were confirmed. The professor''s clothes were from a magic academy.


    The man relaxed slightly, his grip on the scepter loosening. "Thank God you''re not enemies," he said with a sigh of relief. "My name is Asir. I''m a professor at a magic academy. I came here with some senior students on an excursion, and we got lost." He looked down at the others with him, who were equally exhausted, their faces gaunt from days of worry and searching. "No one''s died... yet. But some of my students are still missing. I''ve been trying to find them for days."


    William exchanged glances with Sarah and Victoria. There was a lot more to this situation than they had anticipated. The man''s story made sense, but it also raised more questions.


    "Why did you come here in the first place?" William asked, pressing for more details.


    "As part of an academic excursion," Asir explained, running a hand through his hair in frustration. "We were hoping to learn more about the magic that permeates this place. It''s unlike anything we''ve studied before. But once we entered, we became disoriented. It''s as if the very air here twists your perception."


    Things were not looking good.

 Chapter 198 - 198: Forbidden Zone (6) - The Voice, Again

    William found it hard to believe that a magic academy would allow its students to embark on such a dangerous expedition. It didn''t make sense. What kind of institution would risk their students'' lives like this?


    "You''re saying the other students are down here in this fissure too?" William asked, his brows furrowed. "Or are they somewhere else?"


    Asir nodded grimly. "Yes, they should be. But like I said, once we descended, a strange fog appeared, and we got separated. It comes and goes, and the only way to stay safe is to lock ourselves inside these houses."


    William exchanged glances with Victoria and Sarah. A fog that appeared at random, disorienting people and forcing them into hiding? That wasn''t natural.


    Sarah''s expression darkened as she processed the new information. She had spent countless hours studying everything written about the forbidden zone, yet she had never come across any mention of this fog.


    "I didn''t know something like this existed," she muttered, her voice laced with confusion. "That''s... strange."


    William glanced at her, knowing how meticulous she was in her research. If she hadn''t heard of it, that meant either this phenomenon was new¡ªor someone had intentionally kept it a secret.


    The implications were unsettling.


    Asir continued, "People vanish because of that fog. That''s why we''ve been hiding here. You three are lucky it wasn''t here when you arrived. If it had been¡­" He trailed off, shaking his head. "You might not be standing here right now."


    William felt a chill run down his spine. They had unknowingly walked into something far more dangerous than they had anticipated.


    His mind raced. Is the fog related to demonic powers? He had no proof, but something about this place, about the way the skeletons avoided it, about the eerie stillness¡ªit all pointed to something much darker lurking within the fissure.


    "So what do we do now? Stay here or keep moving?" William asked, glancing at the group.


    It was clear that Asir and the other students were in no condition to go outside. Their hollow expressions and tense postures spoke volumes¡ªthey had been shaken by the fog and the disappearance of their fellow students.


    "I''ll go with you," Asir said, stepping forward. "But the rest will stay here. I can''t risk losing more of them."


    William nodded, respecting the professor''s sense of responsibility. Guilt weighed on Asir''s shoulders, even though none of this was his fault. His decision to come with them was a brave one.


    "Alright," William agreed. "Let''s keep moving. We need to find out more about this place." He turned to Asir. "Do you know if the fog gives any warning signs before it appears?"


    Asir shook his head. "No, but based on my calculations, it appears every three days. That means we have one day before it returns."


    That was valuable information¡ªpossibly the most important thing they had learned so far. William made sure to commit it to memory.


    With that, they left the house and descended the stone staircase once more, venturing deeper into the fissure. As they moved through the narrow path, William reached out to Asura mentally.


    "Asura, do you know anything about this fog? Could it be demonic in nature?"


    "It''s possible," Asura responded, his voice unusually cautious. "But I have no knowledge of it. You should proceed carefully."


    William tensed. If even Asura had no idea what they were dealing with, that meant they were truly walking blind.


    The fissure seemed almost... ordinary. There were no monsters lurking in the shadows, no signs of battle or destruction. Just water trickling through the cracks, small animals scurrying in the underbrush, and the eerie silence of abandoned stone houses.


    "I think there''s something at the end of the fissure," Asir said suddenly. "I glimpsed something before, but I''m not sure what it was."


    During his time trapped here, Asir had noticed what appeared to be an entrance at the far end of the fissure. But between the relentless fog and the chaos of missing students, he hadn''t had the chance to investigate.


    With that lead in mind, they pressed on.


    Still, something was deeply unsettling. No magical creatures had made this place their home. No skeletons wandered in from the outside. It was as if the fissure itself repelled them.


    "Why?" William thought, unease creeping into his mind. "Why does nothing come here?"


    A part of him wished he could turn back and leave this place behind. But something kept pulling him forward¡ªsomething beyond mere curiosity.


    The voice.


    The one he had heard the moment he approached the fissure.


    "Come to me¡­ come to me¡­"


    The words still echoed in his mind, urging him onward.


    And he needed to know why.


    "That''s the place I mentioned," Asir said, his voice quiet as he pointed toward the end of the fissure.


    At the far end, an entrance to a cave loomed, casting an ominous shadow. It was dark, foreboding, and the air around it seemed to vibrate with something unnatural. A warning sign flashed in William''s mind¡ªdanger was close.


    "Are we really going in there?" Victoria asked, her tone filled with unease.


    "We don''t have much choice," Sarah replied with certainty. "The missing students are almost certainly inside, and there''s nowhere else in this fissure to explore. Let''s go."


    Her voice was calm, almost detached. As one of the summoned heroes, Sarah carried with her a quiet sense of pride¡ªshe was powerful, brave, and felt she could face anything. Whatever lay inside the cave, she was ready.


    William didn''t hesitate. He stepped forward into the cave, and the others followed. The air grew cooler, thicker, as if the cave itself was breathing.


    What they saw inside matched their expectations¡ªrough stone walls and a vast emptiness. But one thing stood out immediately: a large pile of bones, scattered haphazardly across the floor. The bones belonged to both creatures and humans, mixed together in a grotesque heap.


    This wasn''t the work of a lich, William noted. There was no organized arrangement, no signs of the bones being recently disturbed for reanimation. These were the remains of the victims, whoever they had been, likely claimed by whatever dwelled in the cave.


    When Asir saw the pile, his face paled. His worst fear seemed to materialize before his eyes.


    What if my students are already dead? The thought haunted him, a grim weight settling in his chest. He swallowed hard, trying to suppress the dread that threatened to overtake him.


    But they had to press on.


    The sight of the pile of bones struck each of them to the core. Deep down, none of them wanted to take another step into the cave, but they all pressed forward. There was no turning back now¡ªfear would only make things worse, and they all knew it. sea??h th§× novel(F~)ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    With every step they took, the sound of cracking bones echoed through the cave, amplifying their unease. Each footfall seemed to disturb the silence that had settled around them, their presence an intrusion into something far older, far darker than they had anticipated.


    Then, as if summoned by the very air around them, a voice rang inside William''s mind. It was chilling, mocking, familiar. "You finally arrived, chosen one. Why did it take you so long?"


    The voice. The same one that had whispered to him before, during the sharp pain he had felt when he first approached the fissure. What was it? The question gnawed at him, but he had no answers.


    He tried to reach out mentally, as he had done with Asura, but the connection was different this time. No response. The link was closed off, as though the voice itself was too far beyond his reach to communicate with.


    A chill ran down his spine, and for a moment, he almost wished he could hear Asura''s voice again¡ªanything to drown out the malevolent whispers creeping into his thoughts.


    But he couldn''t. The voice wasn''t Asura, and it wasn''t something that could be ignored.


    William''s heart raced, but he did his best to remain calm. He didn''t dare share this with anyone¡ªespecially not Sarah. If she knew that he was hearing voices, that he was somehow connected to whatever dark force resided here, it could ruin everything. The last thing he needed was for her to see him as weak or tainted by something beyond his control.


    He clenched his fists, his resolve hardening. Whatever was happening inside his mind, whatever force was watching him, he couldn''t let it distract him now. Not when there were lives at stake.


    They had to keep moving. They had no choice but to face whatever lay ahead. But in the back of his mind, the voice lingered, the words echoing like a taunt.


    Why did it take you so long?


    After walking for around 10 minutes, they saw something sinister. It was a creature, laying down on the end of the cave. Next to it was a stone structure that looked like a magical portal. The creature opened its eyes the moment William and the others approached.

 Chapter 199 - 199: Forbidden Zone (7) - A New Horizon

    The creature that awaited them was grotesque. It wasn''t made of flesh and bone like ordinary beings but of a black, writhing goo. From its back sprouted wriggling tentacles, and at the center of its mass, there was a disturbingly human-like figure with hollow eyes and a gaping mouth.


    William felt an eerie chill run down his spine as he locked eyes with it. For a moment, he could swear the creature was staring directly into his soul.


    "What... what is that thing?" Victoria stammered, her voice trembling with fear as she instinctively stepped back.


    Professor Asir, already overwhelmed by the horrors of the fissure, slowly retreated toward the exit. Fear gripped him, and the memories of the lost students weighed heavily on his heart.


    Yet, Sarah and William stood their ground, their eyes fixed on the creature. Unlike the others, they felt a strange pull toward the monstrosity.


    "What do we do now?" Sarah asked, her voice steady despite the tension. She pointed toward the shimmering portal behind the creature. "That portal... it might lead to the missing students."


    William''s heart pounded. The creature was blocking their only way forward. Running wasn''t an option.


    "Asura," William called out mentally, "What the hell is this thing?"


    "I don''t know," Asura replied, her tone laced with unease. "But I can sense an ancient energy radiating from it. Be careful."


    And it was at that moment that the grotesque creature tried to communicate with William once more. But this time, he was able to respond.


    "We finally meet, chosen one. What do you think of our home? It was once one of the greatest places in the world, and now it''s ruined and overrun with the undead..."


    The creature was referring to the Forbidden Zone, which had once been the domain of demons but was now controlled by the Liches and other skeletal beings who sought to establish their own kingdom.


    "What are you?" William asked mentally.


    "I am like you," the creature replied, "but I was forced to use too much power and ended up becoming this... monstrosity. I have only a fragment of my sanity left, and I can only hold on to it when I encounter other demons."


    William had heard it before¡ªthat he was the chosen one and that his demonic blood was purer than others. But what did that truly mean?


    "Where are the students who came here?" William inquired.


    "Unfortunately, I devoured them... I swear I didn''t want to, but I am no longer human. I had to do it to protect the portal."


    The portal! The creature was undoubtedly referring to the strange portal that stood just a few steps away. William''s eyes had already been drawn to it several times. He was desperate to know where it led.


    William had already noticed that the creature answered all his questions without hesitation, so he decided to ask everything he wanted to know.


    "What is this portal? Where does it lead?"


    "This portal leads to where our people, the demons, now reside. It''s an island far out in the ocean. You should go there. They''re facing some serious trouble..."


    "What!?"


    This was something William hadn''t expected. According to the information he had, the demon race had been nearly wiped out, with only a few descendants scattered across the world.


    That was one of the reasons he was trying to use his SSS skill to find the demons in the past when they were still alive.


    But it seemed everything he knew was wrong. The demons were actually still alive!


    "Do you think they''ll accept me there?" William asked.


    The creature let out a dark chuckle. "Of course. They even accepted a guy named Kier who came here without a demonic bloodline but with one of our ancient books. I believe by now they''ve already granted him a demonic lineage."


    "Kier was here?"


    "You know him?"


    "Yes, that bastard left me to die."


    "Well, you two can settle that inside."


    "William, are you alright?" Sarah asked.


    Her voice was firm but laced with concern. She had noticed how William had frozen in place, his eyes locked onto the grotesque creature before them. Of course, she had no way of knowing that he was deep in conversation with it.


    "I''m fine," William finally said, shaking off the trance. "But I don''t know if we can win against this thing."


    The creature exuded power. It wasn''t just a mindless monster; it was an entity with purpose. Its very existence was tied to protecting the portal behind it, and no guardian of such a thing would be weak. The sheer malice radiating from its twisted form sent chills through even the bravest of them.


    William turned his thoughts back to the creature.


    "Can you fight against us? Make it look like you trapped me here¡ªVictoria too¡ªbut force Sarah to leave?"


    The creature''s many eyes seemed to glow with a sickly light as it considered his words. "That woman¡­ she is different. Are you certain you want her to know this place exists? If she escapes, she could bring forces that threaten everything. I may have to destroy the portal if it comes to that."


    William clenched his fists. He was trapped in a dilemma. Sarah was strong¡ªshe would never back down from a fight unless forced to. And she was a good person, someone who had treated him with respect. The thought of killing her didn''t sit well with him.


    But the portal¡­ it was his only chance to reach the demons. His only chance to truly understand who he was.


    "Let her live," William decided. "I''ll go through the portal with Victoria. I want to give her a demonic bloodline too."


    The creature let out a deep, guttural chuckle. "Interesting¡­ Very well. Then let''s make this look real."


    The fight ended far quicker than William had expected. The creature''s tentacles lashed out toward Sarah with blinding speed, giving her no time to react. Before she could even raise her weapon or take a step back, they had already wrapped around her, locking her in place.


    At the same time, another set of tentacles shot toward William. He tried to dodge, but it was useless¡ªthe creature was too fast, too precise. The slimy appendages coiled around his arms and torso, immobilizing him completely.


    It was all part of the act. The creature wanted to make the struggle look real, as if they actually had a chance.


    "I¡ªI can''t move," Sarah stammered, her voice edged with frustration.


    William struggled against the tightening grip, but it was no use. "Me neither," he muttered


    The creature''s remaining tentacles shot out with terrifying speed, wrapping around Victoria and William before they could react. Its grip was ironclad, pulling them closer to its grotesque, pulsating body. The air was thick with the stench of decay, and the creature''s voice echoed through the cave, hoarse and chilling.


    "I''ll devour them," it hissed, its tone dripping with malice, "and you will watch." S§×arch* The N?vel(F)ire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Sarah''s eyes widened in horror as the creature began to secrete a thick, black goo from its body. The substance spread rapidly, engulfing William and Victoria until they were completely submerged. To Sarah, it looked as though they had been consumed, their forms disappearing into the inky darkness.


    "Noooo!" Sarah screamed, her voice raw with desperation. She struggled against the creature''s grip, but it was no use. The tentacles held her firmly, forcing her to witness the horrifying scene.


    The creature''s voice was cold and mocking as it addressed her. "I''ll let you live," it said, "so that you can leave with this sight in mind."


    With a sudden, brutal motion, the creature squeezed Sarah, the pressure overwhelming her. Her vision blurred, and the last thing she saw was the black goo swallowing William and Victoria whole. Then, everything went dark.


    The creature tossed Sarah''s unconscious body toward the cave''s exit, where Asir, the professor, was waiting. He caught her with surprising agility, his expression grim. Without a word, he turned and ran, carrying Sarah away from the cave and into the safety of the forest. He didn''t look back, his only focus on getting her to safety.


    Back in the cave, the creature retracted the black goo, revealing William and Victoria unharmed. The substance dissolved into the air, leaving no trace of its presence.


    "How was the act?" the creature asked, its voice now calm and almost¡­ playful.


    William gave it a thumbs-up, a smirk tugging at the corner of his lips. "Pretty good," he said. "You had me convinced for a second."


    Victoria, however, was completely bewildered. She stared at the creature, then at William, her mind struggling to process what had just happened. "What the fuck is going on?" she demanded, her voice rising. "Are you¡­ friends with this thing?"


    William chuckled, though there was a hint of guilt in his expression. "It''s a long story," he said. "But yeah, we''re¡­ acquainted."


    "Well, then explain it to me," Victoria demanded.


    William then shared everything he talked mentally with the creature, and Victoria simply loved the idea of exploring a different place.


    "Let''s go through the portal, then. I want to go there!" she said.

 Chapter 200 - 200: The Demon Island

    Victoria''s excitement was palpable, her eyes gleaming with anticipation. The prospect of obtaining a demonic bloodline was clearly a dream come true for her, and the fact that they were about to step into the heart of the demonic realm only heightened her enthusiasm. She practically bounced on her feet, her energy contrasting sharply with William''s more cautious demeanor.


    "Are we going to be safe there?" William asked the grotesque creature, his tone serious. He wasn''t just thinking about himself¡ªVictoria''s safety was equally important.


    The creature''s form shifted slightly, its grotesque features softening as it considered the question. "Certainly," it replied, its voice now smoother and more reassuring. "But you should be careful. With your royal bloodline, you might find yourself caught in some¡­ intrigues. Especially considering the demonic kingdom isn''t doing well lately."


    William''s eyes widened in surprise. "Royal bloodline?" he repeated. "I thought my bloodline was just purer or something. What do you mean by royal?" S§×ar?h the Novel?ire(.)ne*t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    The creature chuckled, a sound that was oddly warm despite its unsettling appearance. "It is purer," it explained, "but it''s also royal. You carry the blood of the demon kings of old. That''s why you''re so important¡ªand why you need to be cautious."


    William blinked, processing the information. The idea of having royal demonic blood was both thrilling and overwhelming. He had always known he was different, but this was on another level entirely.


    Victoria, meanwhile, looked even more excited. "Royal bloodline?" she said, her voice tinged with awe. "That''s incredible! Does that mean you''re, like, a prince or something?"


    William shook his head, still trying to wrap his mind around it. "I don''t know," he admitted. "This is all new to me."


    The creature''s form began to waver, its grotesque features flickering as if it were struggling to maintain its shape. "If you want to go, then go," it said, its voice strained. "I can''t hold my sanity for much longer."


    Before stepping through the portal, William turned to the creature, his expression earnest. "Please," he said, "don''t kill Sarah, Asir, or the other students in the fissure. They''re not our enemies."


    The creature nodded, its form flickering again. "I will even try to get them out of this place for you," it promised. "I won''t forgive myself if I let down the future demon king."


    William''s stomach churned at the mention of being a "future demon king," but he pushed the thought aside. There would be time to process all of this later. For now, he simply nodded. "Thank you."


    As he and Victoria approached the portal, William hesitated, one last question on his mind. "Can we communicate with them?" he asked, glancing back at the creature. "If we''re going to the demonic realm, I need to know we''ll be able to understand each other¡ªespecially Victoria."


    The creature''s voice was faint now, its form barely holding together. "Yes," it said. "When you go through the portal, you''ll gain access to their language. Magic can do wonders."


    William nodded, relieved. "Good."


    With that, he and Victoria stepped through the portal. The experience was unlike anything either of them had ever felt. It was as if the world around them dissolved into a swirling vortex of colors and sounds, their bodies weightless yet pulled in every direction at once. Time seemed to stretch and warp, seconds feeling like hours, and then¡ª


    They emerged on the other side, their feet landing on solid ground.


    When William and Victoria stepped through the portal, they had braced themselves for something extraordinary¡ªsomething otherworldly. They expected a red sky, bizarre creatures, or a landscape that defied imagination. But what they found was¡­ surprisingly normal.


    The first thing they noticed was the sky. Through a small window in the black stone building they had appeared in, they could see a clear blue sky, much like the one they were used to. The air was fresh, and the atmosphere was calm, almost peaceful. It was a far cry from the ominous, foreboding realm they had imagined.


    Victoria blinked, looking around in confusion. "Where are we?" she asked, her voice tinged with both curiosity and disbelief.


    William, equally puzzled, scanned their surroundings. The room they were in was made of smooth, black stone, its walls carved with intricate patterns that seemed to pulse faintly with a dark energy. It was clear they were in a structure of some importance, but where exactly?


    "I don''t know," William admitted, his tone cautious. "But a portal like that must have some kind of protection. If strangers come through, someone will probably show up soon to investigate."


    As if on cue, the sound of heavy footsteps echoed through the hallway outside. Within moments, a group of soldiers burst into the room, their movements swift and coordinated. They were clad in sleek, black plate armor, their weapons gleaming in the dim light. Some carried swords, others axes, and a few even wore gauntlets that crackled with faint magical energy.


    The soldiers formed a semi-circle around William and Victoria, their weapons raised and ready. The tension in the room was palpable, but before things could escalate further, a figure stepped forward.


    It was their captain, a striking woman with long, flowing black hair and a pale, almost ethereal complexion. Her eyes, a deep shade of red, glowed faintly in the dim light, giving her an air of both beauty and danger. She had been anxious when the alarm sounded, fearing an invasion, but her expression softened slightly when she saw only two people standing before her.


    "Who are you?" she demanded, her voice sharp but controlled. "How did you find the portal?"


    William raised his arms in a gesture of both surrender and sincerity, his voice steady as he spoke. "We found the portal through the area you once lived in a long time ago. A creature with tentacles¡ªsome kind of guardian¡ªspoke to us and allowed us to pass."


    The captain''s eyes narrowed, her skepticism etched deeply into her expression. She crossed her arms, her tone sharp and probing. "And why would the guardian let you through? Just recently, they permitted a man to pass because he carried an ancient book that once belonged to us. What about you? What makes you so special?"


    Without hesitation, William reached into his coat and produced a weathered, leather-bound book. He held it up for the captain to see, its pages faintly glowing with an otherworldly light. "I have a copy of the same book you mentioned," he said, his voice calm but firm. "But that''s not all. I also carry a demonic bloodline. That''s why the guardian allowed me to pass." He gestured to the woman standing beside him, her presence quiet but resolute. "And this is Victoria. She seeks a bloodline of her own, and I''ve promised to help her."


    Victoria''s eyes flickered with gratitude as William spoke on her behalf. She had been silent until now, but his unwavering support gave her a sense of reassurance. She nodded slightly, her determination clear.


    The captain''s expression shifted from skepticism to outright disbelief, her voice rising in both volume and intensity. "What? If you''re lying about this, you''ll die horribly. Do you understand the gravity of what you''re claiming?"


    Her demeanor had changed entirely. Gone was the cool, composed leader; in her place was someone visibly anxious, almost unnerved. The demonic bloodline was a rarity, especially outside the confines of their secluded island. For William to claim possession of such a bloodline¡ªand a pure one at that¡ªwas no small matter. It was a statement that demanded proof.


    But William was prepared. He had no intention of hiding the truth. Sooner or later, they would discover it anyway. "I do have a demonic bloodline," he repeated, his tone unwavering. "You''re free to conduct whatever tests you need to verify it. But I have one condition: you must promise that both I and my student will be treated well. And you must give her a fair chance to obtain a bloodline of her own."


    The captain''s eyes bore into his, searching for any hint of deception. After a long, tense moment, she finally relented, her shoulders relaxing slightly. "Fine," she said, her voice clipped but conceding. She turned to the soldiers surrounding them and barked an order. "Stand down. Sheathe your weapons."


    The soldiers obeyed immediately, their blades disappearing into their scabbards as they stepped back, creating a clear path. The captain gestured for William and Victoria to follow her. "Come with me," she said, her tone now more measured but still carrying an edge of authority.


    As they followed her, Victoria leaned slightly closer to William, her voice barely above a whisper. "Thank you," she murmured, her gratitude evident.

 Chapter 201 - 201: Bombshell

    The captain introduced herself as Jhen Ka Nor. "I''m just one of many captains," she said, gesturing vaguely toward the horizon. "The demon army is huge, and it takes more than one leader to keep everything running."


    As William and Victoria walked with her, they quickly realized how different everything was from what they had imagined. The demons weren''t the dark, monstrous creatures described in the ancient texts. Instead, they looked almost entirely human, with only a faint magical aura setting them apart. The city itself was alive with activity, filled with ordinary people going about their daily lives.


    Victoria looked around in surprise. Kids were playing in the streets, their laughter filling the air. Farmers worked in the fields, and merchants called out to customers, trying to sell their goods. It was just like any human city she had ever seen. "This¡­ this is so normal," she said quietly, almost to herself.


    Jhen glanced at her, a small smile on her face. "Surprised?" she asked. "The stories your people tell about us are¡­ well, let''s just say they''re not entirely accurate. We''re not so different from you."


    As they moved through the city, Jhen explained more about their destination. "The portal you came through leads straight into the dungeon under the guards'' barracks," she said. "It''s a smart setup. If any intruders come through, we have all the soldiers we need to handle them right away. Plus, it''s far enough from the main part of the city to keep everyone else safe."


    The barracks were located at the edge of the city, away from the busy center. Jhen mentioned there were several barracks across the island, but this one was specifically for guarding the portal. It was a place of defense and vigilance, showing just how important the portal was to them.


    William, always practical, couldn''t help but ask the obvious question. "If the portal is such a risk, why not just destroy it? Wouldn''t that solve the problem?"


    Jhen paused, her expression turning serious. She looked at William, as if deciding how much to tell him. "We''re on an island," she said finally. "A remote one, far from any other land. We don''t have ships or any way to leave. The portal¡­ it''s our only connection to the outside world. Destroying it would mean cutting ourselves off completely. For now, we keep it. It''s a risk, yes, but it''s also our only hope of one day finding a way off this island."


    Her words hung in the air, heavy with meaning. William nodded slowly, understanding the difficult balance they had to maintain. Victoria, meanwhile, felt a pang of sympathy for these people¡ªso similar to her own, yet trapped in a situation she could hardly imagine.


    As they reached the barracks, Jhen turned to them, her tone firm. "We''ll run the tests soon," she said. "But remember, you''re here because I allowed it. Don''t make me regret it."


    William met her gaze, his resolve clear. "We won''t," he promised.


    As they continued talking, William learned more about the island and its people. The island was not only incredibly remote, but it was also surrounded by treacherous oceans and strange, unexplainable phenomena that made leaving nearly impossible. No matter how hard they tried, the island was their only sanctuary, their only home.


    Jhen explained that the island was vast, with many cities spread across its land. It wasn''t just a small piece of land but a massive territory with a thriving population. However, despite its size and resources, the island was facing a serious crisis.


    "We''re having problems with the current king," Jhen admitted, her voice lowering as if she were sharing a dangerous secret. "The king doesn''t have the royal bloodline, and it''s causing unrest among the people. They''re angry, and it''s creating tension across the island."


    William frowned, curious. "Why doesn''t the king have the royal bloodline? Isn''t that, like, a requirement or something?"


    Jhen didn''t answer immediately. Instead, she stopped walking and gestured toward a heavily guarded building. "We''re here," she said, her tone shifting to something more formal.


    They entered the building, and inside, William saw a large black crystal glowing faintly in the center of the room. The crystal was surrounded by intricate carvings and symbols, and the air around it felt charged with energy.


    "This is where we test the strength of a bloodline," Jhen explained. "Among us, there are those who are stronger and those who are weaker. The bloodline determines a lot¡ªlike how powerful someone is in combat or what role they can take on in society."


    William nodded. It made sense. In a world where magic and bloodlines dictated strength, it was natural that people would be sorted into roles based on their abilities. If someone wanted to join the army, for example, they''d need a strong bloodline. There was no room for the weak in such positions.


    "Walk forward and touch the crystal," Jhen instructed, her eyes narrowing slightly. "I''ll be watching to see if you actually have a demonic bloodline¡ªand if it''s decent."


    William hesitated for a moment, already knowing what was about to happen. He wasn''t just carrying a demonic bloodline; he had a royal one. The thought crossed his mind: ''Will I have to become a king here? This sounds like way too much work¡­''


    But there was no way around it. He couldn''t hide his bloodline, and the test would reveal everything. Taking a deep breath, he stepped forward and placed his hand on the crystal. S~ea??h the nov§×lF~ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    The moment his skin touched the smooth surface, the crystal erupted in a bright red light. The glow was intense, almost blinding, and it filled the room with a deep, pulsating energy. But that wasn''t all. Strange runes began to appear around the crystal, glowing with the same red light. These weren''t ordinary markings¡ªthey were ancient symbols that only appeared under very specific circumstances.


    Jhen''s eyes widened in shock, and she took a step back, her hand flying to her mouth. "A-A royal bloodline!" she stammered, her voice trembling with disbelief. "This¡­ this can''t be¡­"


    The room fell silent except for the hum of the crystal. William stood there, his hand still on the crystal, the red light casting long shadows across the room. He could feel the weight of Jhen''s gaze on him, a mix of awe and uncertainty.


    "Well," William said, breaking the silence with a dry tone, "this just got a lot more complicated."


    Jhen stared at him, her mind clearly racing. "You¡­ you have the royal bloodline. Do you realize what this means? The people¡­ they''ve been waiting for someone like you. The current king¡­ this changes everything."


    William sighed, already feeling the weight of responsibility settling on his shoulders. "Yeah, I figured it might."


    "Did you already know about this?" Jhen asked, her voice low and probing. She had noticed that William didn''t seem nearly as shocked as he should have been upon discovering he had a royal bloodline. His calm demeanor was suspicious, to say the least.


    "I did, yes," William admitted, his tone matter-of-fact. "The guardian who watches over the portal told me about it."


    Jhen''s eyes narrowed slightly, but instead of reacting with alarm or immediately sharing the news with others, she did something unexpected. She stepped closer to William, her voice dropping to a whisper. "We must keep this a secret for now. Do you understand? This information cannot get out."


    William raised an eyebrow, surprised by her reaction. He had assumed she would announce his royal bloodline to everyone, but it seemed she had other plans. For someone who wasn''t exactly thrilled about the idea of becoming a king, William was more than happy to go along with her suggestion. "Fine by me," he said with a shrug. "I''m not exactly looking for a crown right now."


    Jhen glanced around, relieved that the black crystal used to measure bloodlines was housed inside a secure building. The guards were stationed outside, unable to see what had just transpired. The fewer people who knew about William''s royal bloodline, the better¡ªat least for now.


    "We need to talk more in private," Jhen said, her voice still hushed. "But first, let me handle the situation with the others. I''ll tell everyone that you''re a friend of the man who came through the portal with the book. That should explain your presence without raising too many questions. We''ll keep the truth about your bloodline hidden for the time being."


    William nodded in agreement. "Sounds like a plan."


    Jhen quickly ushered William and Victoria out of the building, leading them through the city streets to her own home. It was a modest but well-kept house, located in a quieter part of the city. She handed them the keys and gestured for them to go inside. "Stay here for now, and don''t leave," she instructed. "There''s food and everything else you might need. I''ll be back as soon as I can."


    With that, Jhen turned and left, her mind clearly racing with everything she had to do. Not only did she have to deal with the administrative tasks that came with someone arriving through the portal, but she also had to figure out how to handle the bombshell that was William''s royal bloodline. The situation was delicate, and one wrong move could upset the already fragile balance of the island.

 Chapter 202 - 202: Demonic Training, Start

    William and Victoria stood there, unsure of what to do. Everything had unfolded so quickly.


    "Why do you think she''s trying to hide your bloodline?" Victoria asked.


    "I don''t know," William replied, sitting on the couch. "It''s still a secret why the current king doesn''t have the royal bloodline. Only time will provide us with the answers we need."


    The entire situation on the demon island was a complete mystery to William. There were many things he still needed to learn, but at that moment, all he could do was stay inside Jhen''s house and wait.


    While William relaxed on the couch, Victoria decided to search the place. She opened every drawer and examined every note, trying to uncover more about Jhen or the situation in the demon kingdom.


    "Did you find anything?" William asked.


    "No, not at all. Damn it," Victoria cursed.


    As she opened a box, she discovered some food¡ªfruits, to be exact. It wasn''t exactly what she had hoped for, but it was better than nothing.


    She sat down next to William on the couch. "Since when do you have a royal bloodline? Is that why this sword artifact led me to you?"


    Victoria had worked hard to find William and rescue him, and now she believed that his royal lineage was the reason for it. However, that wasn''t the case; William had only just discovered that he had a royal bloodline.


    "No, not at all. I''m just as surprised as you are."


    "I see..."


    They remained in Jhen''s house all day, not stepping outside even once. Jhen insisted that they stay inside to avoid drawing attention to themselves.


    Later that night, she returned after handling several matters.


    "Finally, it''s over," she said as she opened the door. "Now everyone thinks you are a friend of that Kier guy who arrived recently. No one will suspect you have a royal bloodline."


    Jhen placed her black armor and sword on the table.


    "And why are you hiding this?" William asked.


    He wanted to understand what was going on in her mind, and now that they were alone in her house, it was the perfect opportunity to learn more. William didn''t want to waste it.


    Jhen sighed as she closed all the curtains and quickly checked to ensure that no one was eavesdropping on their conversation.


    She began to explain, "An influential noble family has made a power move and stripped the royal lineage of its claim to the throne. They managed to frame the royal family and secured the support of several powerful individuals within the kingdom. Now, they are in charge, and the royal family is missing."


    "So that''s what''s happening," William said. "You want to hide my bloodline to protect me. They would definitely want to kill me if they found out."


    "Exactly," Jhen replied. "Although they are in power, the general population dislikes them and wishes for the royal family to return. With you here, we might have a chance to restore things to how they were in the future. But for now, this has to remain a secret. You''ll need significant power to challenge them."


    William was hesitant to oppose them at that moment; all he truly desired was to grow stronger.


    Now, in the demon kingdom, he had the means to uncover more about his bloodline and unlock his true powers. That was his ultimate goal.


    "I can help you become stronger," Jhen said. "I can assist with your training and provide you with manuals about your lineage. However, to achieve true power, you''ll need to explore the royal palace."


    "Can''t we just go there now?" William asked.


    "It''s buried deep underground now, and the noble family I mentioned controls everything around it. No one can enter easily."


    It was comforting to have someone to rely on who could help William.


    Victoria was listening attentively. "And don''t forget about my bloodline. You promised," she reminded him.


    Jhen nodded in response. "I know. Relax. We will arrange it."


    William felt exhausted. "Are we staying here for the night, then?" he asked.


    "You''ll be living here for now, at least. Tomorrow, I''ll show you around and maybe start your training," Jhen replied.


    Jhen also wanted to rest. She had spent the day handling many things that were outside her usual responsibilities, and it had been tiring and stressful for her.


    William and Victoria slept on the couch.


    The following morning, Jhen woke them up with breakfast: toast and eggs.


    "I was thinking," Jhen said as they ate, "we might have to leave."


    "What do you mean?" William asked, puzzled. Just the other night, Jhen had told them she wanted them to stay for a while, and now she was saying they needed to leave.


    "It''s not safe in this city," she explained. "The current king has many eyes and ears here. I might have to request that the army relocate us for a while, and you can come with me."


    "Won''t that raise suspicion? I mean, you just met them, and then suddenly you want to leave?" William asked.


    "You have a valid point, but it''s better for them to be suspicious of me from a distance rather than staying here," Jhen replied.


    She wasn''t seeking their opinions; she had already made up her mind and was simply informing them about the possibility of needing to leave the city.


    Honestly, William wasn''t angry about it. In fact, he was eager to explore the rest of the demon island, eager to meet new people while growing stronger.


    So, perhaps this would be beneficial for him. Regardless, Jhen left again, asking them to stay put. She went to speak with her superior about the potential move.


    It didn''t take long for her to return. The reason was that they had already decided to relocate Jhen to another, more dangerous region that was facing some issues.


    In the past, she had always refused such assignments. However, when she spoke with her superior this time, he agreed quickly and allowed her to go. S§×arch* The NovelFire.net* website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    She packed up as soon as she got home. William and Victoria didn''t own many belongings, so it wasn''t a big deal for them.


    "I have a carriage waiting for us," she said. "But keep in mind, we''re heading to a dangerous area. There are issues with beasts, bandits, and some shady things going on there. No one wants to go to that place."


    William, who had been through a lot in his life, simply nodded. "Don''t worry. I''ve faced some tough situations, so this is nothing for me. But will we have access to books there? You know, manuals with spells and things for us to train with?"


    "Yes, of course," Jhen replied. "I''m also going to perform a ritual to grant Victoria a bloodline. It''s not like we''re heading to the end of the world. There are cities in that region, so there''s no need to worry."


    Victoria wasn''t entirely pleased with that plan since it meant she would have to wait to receive her bloodline. As they were traveling, it could take a while to reach their destination, meaning she would remain without a bloodline for some time.


    She was eager for it. She had endured a lot to help William. She left the magic academy she had worked hard to get into solely for the promise of getting stronger, a promise that William was willing to keep.


    Victoria kept her thoughts to herself, not voicing them aloud.


    Jhen packed up in just one hour. It was still morning when they left the city. Waiting outside was a carriage adorned with the army''s symbol, pulled by powerful horses imbued with magic.


    This was clearly not a typical carriage. William wasn''t surprised, as he had seen flying carriages before, so one pulled by sturdy magical horses didn''t impress him much.


    "How long until we get there?" William asked.


    He pictured the island as a small place, not much larger than the areas he was accustomed to. However, when Jhen revealed the duration of their journey, he was taken aback.


    "One month, I think. If only we had some flying mounts to get there faster, but that''s not something they provide to a captain like me..."


    A whole month. That felt like a long time. Jhen noticed the concern on William''s face and took out a few books.


    "We''re going to practice during the journey, which is why it takes us so long. I have a few books for you to read. These contain many demon techniques that could be suitable for your royal bloodline."


    William felt a wave of excitement upon hearing that. He eagerly grabbed one of the books, titled "Basic Demonic Manual of Fire."


    Though it had "basic" in the title, it was anything but simple. It contained a variety of fire spells that William was eager to learn as quickly as possible.


    Victoria stood by, watching them. She felt a pang of disappointment, as she lacked the bloodline to practice any of those techniques.


    *


    In a distant land, Sarah emerged from the forbidden zone and made her way back to the village she had visited with William.


    Once there, she used her magic to communicate with Master Elric.


    "Master Elric, I''ve found the portal to the demon kingdom!" Sarah said, a smile spreading across her face.

 Chapter 203 - 203: Training During the Journey, and Meeting a Friend

    Jhen believed it would be better for William to start with that book.


    "The book you have in your hands, the same one that Kier has, is more advanced. It''s better to start with the fundamentals to ensure your future isn''t compromised," she said.


    Learning magic was a step-by-step process, and people needed to progress through each stage before moving on to the next. William understood that this was the best approach, especially when learning a new type of spell, like he was doing.


    The Basic Demonic Manual of Fire was the first volume in a series of books that included the foundational meditation techniques, basic fire spells, and essential body training. Unlike ordinary mages, demons focused on improving their physical bodies as well.


    In fact, many mages, who were supposed to have weaker bodies, actually possessed physiques even stronger than those of body-enhancing mages from other continents. This showcased the unique power of demon mages.


    The demon mages specialized in body-enhancing magic, which gave them tremendously powerful bodies.


    Eager to begin his training, William checked his status after months without a way to train or earn experience points.


    Name: William Velmont


    Level: 27


    Class: None


    Attributes:


    Strength: 88 S~ea??h the Novel?ire(.)ne*t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Agility: 102


    Stamina: 74


    Intelligence: 470


    Mana: 250


    Demonic Energy: 30


    Active Bonuses: +40% Learning Speed


    William still did not have a class, which he hoped to gain in the demon kingdom.


    "How long will it take for me to master this first volume?" he asked.


    Jhen provided some encouraging news. "With your pure bloodline, I suspect you''ll finish this in about a week, maybe. However, the process will become more challenging after the first volume."


    A week meant he could make significant progress. Jhen''s optimism stemmed from William''s royal heritage. While he might take longer, her confidence in his training was reassuring.


    So he began. The first spell he learned was a meditation technique called the Meditation of the Blackest Sun.


    "This meditation technique is the first that many demons learn, but it''s also the most effective if you can master it. Most people can''t master it and thus use other techniques," Jhen explained. "However, every member of the royal family has learned this one. It''s the best of the best if you can learn it properly."


    William was inspired by this information. He was determined to master that technique. If it was the best according to Jhen, and he aspired to be the best, then pursuing this technique was no question in his mind


    The process of learning the meditation technique was straightforward, just as Jhen had said: easy to learn, but hard to master.


    When William finally learned the technique and used it for the first time, he immediately felt the difference and understood why it was a valuable spell to acquire. He formed the runes that floated around his body and assumed a meditative position inside the carriage, leaving the window open so that sunlight could pour in and warm him.


    This was the core aspect of the technique. With every breath, William could feel the power of the sun entering his body and strengthening him. The runes played an important role in this process; they converted sunlight into demonic essence. It surprised William to realize just how effective this spell was.


    "Even the basic spells are incredibly beneficial for me," he thought. "There''s no way a person with a demon bloodline can become strong without the right abilities."


    It took him only two hours to master the meditation technique, and now he had a genuine method for increasing his demonic essence.


    "The demonic essence is essential, as we use it to cast any spell," Jhen explained. "We use the meditation technique to convert other types of energy into it, such as the sunlight you are using or the mana found in the atmosphere."


    The demon race, despite its power, had this additional step to utilize their spells. While normal mages could draw directly from their mana, demons had to convert energy first, and it took them longer to replenish it.


    William felt grateful to have Jhen by his side, as her extensive knowledge made the learning process easier. Meanwhile, Victoria was also listening intently, knowing that the information would simplify her life once she eventually awakened her own bloodline¡ªwhich she hoped would happen soon.


    [+1 Demonic Energy]


    The notification made William smile. The demonic essence¡ªreferred to as Demonic Energy by the system¡ªwas increasing with his use of the meditation technique.


    Days passed quickly. During this time, Jhen led the way toward the location designated by her superiors. They paused occasionally to rest and sleep properly. Eating was also essential. In the afternoons, William meditated, as that was when the sun was at its strongest.


    In the mornings and evenings, he practiced other spells. He managed to learn a few Black Fire spells, which would undoubtedly be quite powerful. He finished Volume 1 in just one week, just as Jhen had predicted. However, she was shocked; she hadn''t expected him to finish so quickly, even with his royal bloodline. Jhen couldn''t comprehend how he could learn the spells so rapidly.


    "This guy might become our strongest king in the near future¡­" she thought.


    After two weeks of traveling, they finally reached a larger city, which was significantly bigger than the small villages and random houses they had encountered on their journey. Although it was a larger city, it was still smaller than the first city William visited, and the population was lower as well. Unlike the previous town, where vendors filled the streets and a lively atmosphere prevailed, this town resembled a ghost town.


    "I have a friend here," Jhen said as they stopped the carriage at the stables. "She might have a few flying mounts for us, which will speed up our journey."


    William was so focused on his training that he wasn''t particularly concerned about reaching their destination as quickly as possible. His only motivation was the king back on the continent and Professor James, but he felt so far away now on this remote island that he had lost hope.


    "I don''t think I''ll return anytime soon," he thought.


    Something else was bothering him: he could not use his SSS portal skill inside the demon kingdom. Why was that? Additionally, he had seen a notification previously indicating that something had changed in his skill, which made him anxious.


    Essentially, he was trapped on that island in the present, unable to access the past. He tried not to dwell on it too much.


    "Is this friend of yours someone we can trust?" William asked. "You''re not planning to reveal my bloodline to her, right?"


    "Yes and no. Your bloodline is a secret we''re keeping from everyone, and just because she''s my friend doesn''t mean I''m going to tell her. This is bigger than our friendship."


    Jhen was keeping her word, and William appreciated that.


    After arriving in town and stopping their carriage at the stables, Jhen went to look for her friend. This friend was also part of the military but operated more like a spy than someone fighting on the front lines.


    As they walked through the city, the silence and the cold night made it feel like a ghost town. There was even a thick fog in the air, and the few people they encountered on the streets were wrapped in long cloaks and robes, hurrying along as if they were eager to leave the streets behind.


    The desolate atmosphere was due to what Jhen had mentioned: bandits, beasts, and shady activities occurring in the area. They were getting closer to where Jhen would be stationed, and the towns were no longer lively as they used to.


    The house where Jhen''s friend lived was quite remote, located on the edge of town, and didn''t stand out. It was an ordinary stone house, with no decorations near the door. One might not even realize there was a house there at all. Jhen knocked a few times.


    It took a while for her friend to answer, as anyone would feel nervous about someone knocking on their door in the middle of the night. Eventually, her friend did open the door. The woman standing there was a tall blonde with tanned skin and a beautiful figure. She had a unique charm about her.


    "Jhen," she said, gesturing for her friend to come inside, "come in! It''s been so long since I''ve seen you."


    Jhen stepped inside, followed by William and Victoria, and they closed the door behind them.


    The interior of the house was luxurious, featuring a marble floor, stylish furniture, a fireplace, and more. It was strikingly different from the ordinary exterior that didn''t look grand at all.


    "Your house looks amazing," Jhen said, "and you look great too."


    They hugged, and William and Victoria settled onto the couch, enjoying the warmth of the fireplace. Meanwhile, Jhen and her friend Teresa caught up on gossip, knowing they would have to wait a while before the conversation turned back to their group.

 Chapter 204 - 204: Its Finally Time to Fucking Level UP

    William and Victoria waited for 30 minutes before Jhen and Teresa stopped talking.


    "So, why did you ask to reallocate to this region? I thought you said you would never come here," Teresa asked.


    Jhen and Teresa had worked together in the same region before. While Teresa changed regions to work elsewhere, Jhen did not. Now, Jhen had suddenly shown up, piquing Teresa''s curiosity. S§×arch* The n??el Fire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "There are a few reasons," Jhen replied, "but I want to keep it a secret for now. Can you help us get some flying mounts?"


    Teresa glanced at William and Victoria. "I can help you, no problem. But who are these people?"


    "They came from the outside world through the portal," Jhen explained. "Another guy came in recently, someone named Kier."


    "I''ve heard of him. Why is everyone suddenly finding the portal? Why is the guardian letting them through?"


    It was uncommon for someone to come through the portal, yet now three people had arrived in less than 20 days, raising curiosity among many.


    Jhen shared that Kier and William had an ancient book that once belonged to demons, which was why they were granted entrance. Victoria, being William''s disciple, was given passage as well.


    After Jhen''s explanation, Teresa stopped asking questions. "You can sleep here tonight. I''ll have to go get the flying mounts for you, and that will take some time," she stated.


    They were already expecting to spend the night there. It was better that way; they wanted to rest before continuing their journey, and Teresa needed time to acquire the flying mounts.


    None of them had a bad time sleeping that night. Teresa''s house was luxurious, and the fireplace made their night cozy. She had several rooms available, so they didn''t need to share.


    The following day, they woke up to a breakfast already waiting for them. Teresa had risen early to prepare the meal and to search for the mounts.


    She spoke with a few contacts in the region and managed to secure one mount for them. "It''s big enough to fit all of you," Teresa said. "I tried to get more than one, but flying mounts are difficult to find here."


    This was one of the aspects of the demonic kingdom that differed from the other parts of the world William had visited.


    He found it strange; Asura had the power to tame beasts, so he assumed other demons had similar abilities. Apparently, that was not the case.


    "Maybe I can make some money by selling beasts," he thought. A man was always looking for a way to earn more money, it seemed.


    After finishing breakfast, they left town and headed toward the nearby forest.


    "My contact lives in the wilderness," Teresa explained.


    The entire situation made it seem like acquiring flying mounts was illegal. William wanted to ask Jhen if that was the case but refrained from doing so.


    It took them about 20 minutes to reach the house Teresa mentioned. The place looked like a farm but had high security with tall walls, guards patrolling, and even magical formations.


    "This looks like a fortress," William remarked.


    Teresa nodded. "It is. My contact has a lot of money and sells many items. A well-known merchant needs high security, especially in this region."


    The guards recognized Teresa when she arrived, which made sense since she had communicated with her contact beforehand. They opened the gate, and Teresa led the way toward the mansion where she would meet him.


    The owner of the mansion was a tall man in his thirties, clean-shaven with slicked-back hair. "Welcome," he said with a smile. "Come with me. I don''t have much time, so we need to get this done quickly." He didn''t introduce himself and didn''t say much more, which didn''t bother William. All he wanted was to leave that place as soon as possible.


    At the back of the mansion, there was another building filled with various beasts, only a few of which were flying types. "Here, this is for you," the man said, presenting them with the cheapest mount available.


    The flying mount was a massive bird with bluish feathers and four wings. William was impressed by its beauty. While it didn''t compare to the majestic dragon they had ridden previously, it was certainly better than traveling by carriage.


    The best part was that Teresa was the one paying for the mount¡ªWilliam had no idea how Jhen managed to arrange it for free. Perhaps Teresa owed Jhen a favor; that was the only explanation he could think of.


    After acquiring the mount, they left the mansion. Teresa bid them farewell just as they exited the perimeter. "Take care, and come back when you can so we can talk more," she said. They hugged, and William waited for them to mount the flying bird.


    "The only problem is the supplies," Jhen noted. "We only have our backpacks and tents. We''ll have to find food constantly." While the bird was faster, it couldn''t carry supplies like a carriage could; still, the increased travel speed made up for it. With this arrangement, they would reach their destination in about three to four days¡ªmuch quicker than before.


    A few days later, they arrived at their destination. During the journey, William finally got a better view of the island thanks to the flying mount.


    The island was enormous; it was so large that it was impossible to see the ocean from where they were. There were many villages and cities, and traveling through it, it hardly felt like they were on an island at all.


    However, the region they reached was quite different. The number of towns was noticeably lower, and the area was perpetually shrouded in fog, making it an undesirable place to live. Most of the residents only stayed there because they lacked the resources to relocate.


    Jhen would be staying in a remote village rather than one of the larger towns in the region, and the reason for this was straightforward: a strange cave near the village.


    The demon kingdom had numerous caves that descended deep into the earth, resembling a labyrinth filled with monsters. The village needed assistance from the demon army specifically because of one of those caves.


    Beasts emerged from the cave, destroying villages and killing people, which prompted the army to intervene. This situation had been ongoing for the past twenty years. At present, the beasts were only found in the deeper levels of the cave, as the army had conquered the earlier levels.


    William was excited when he heard about this. Jhen mentioned that these caves had turned into leveling spots because, for some reason, the beasts inside were endless. According to her, the deeper levels resembled an entirely different realm, and it was common for adventurers to live down there.


    "This is known as a haven for leveling up," she explained. "It''s perfect for you if you''re training and want to get stronger, but it''s also dangerous."


    What William really wanted was to level up. It had been so long since he had done that, and the cave presented itself as the best opportunity for him.


    Once they arrived in the village, a few soldiers welcomed them. Jhen was now their superior, and they treated her with respect.


    The soldiers guided them to a larger house near the village. William could tell just by looking at it that the army had built this house, as it differed from the simpler structures in the rest of the village. The villagers didn''t complain about it being better; they were happy that the army was there to protect them from the monsters, so they felt no envy.


    "This is the place you''ll be staying, Captain Jhen," one of the guards said, saluting her. "And who are these people?"


    He was referring to William and Victoria. "They are friends of mine, hired to help us here. You should treat them with respect as well; consider them your captains too."


    "Understood," the guard replied.


    William appreciated the respectful treatment he received, but what he really wanted was to explore the mysterious cave Jhen had mentioned. So, after settling in, Jhen decided to show him the place.


    They walked for about ten minutes before reaching the entrance of the cave. A guard outpost was stationed there to ensure the beasts remained inside.


    "The first ten floors are all clear," Jhen said, "so we can explore without any problems."


    Once they entered, William felt a strange and unique aura about the cave. It reminded him of an MMORPG scenario where players climb down a labyrinth to earn items, gain experience points, and discover fantastic locations.


    "How does a place like this exist? It feels as if a higher being placed it here¡­" William thought.


    The cave didn''t appear natural at all; instead, it resembled a labyrinth made entirely of stone, as if someone had constructed it. William noticed guards patrolling and spotted a few areas with supplies and beds.


    "They really do live down here," he remarked.


    Jhen chuckled, "You thought I was joking? They prefer to stay here to gain as much experience as possible."


    William was really excited. It was finally time to level up!

 Chapter 205 - 205: A Way to Catch Up

    "Do you think I can stay here?" William asked.


    His main goal was to remain in the cave, level up, explore its deeper parts, defeat monsters, and earn experience points (EXP). However, Jhen believed he should wait a while before venturing further.


    "You should first master a few more spells," she advised, leaning forward to whisper to him. "I don''t want my future king to lose his life inside this dungeon."


    She was concerned for him because of his royal bloodline. William was the hope for the people of the demon kingdom, and Jhen would never forgive herself if something happened to him.


    William understood her feelings. "Alright, no problem."


    They headed back to the house where they were staying. Along the way, a few villagers came to greet them.


    "Thank you for protecting us," the villagers said.


    With every additional soldier from the army that arrived, the villagers felt safer. The dungeon had brought much death, so having the army to protect the area meant a lot to them.


    William noted the villagers who had come to speak with them. Despite not being powerful¡ªmost were farmers, fishers, and the like¡ªit was evident that their bodies were much stronger than those of the farmers and fishers from the human kingdom. This was due to the demonic bloodline running through their veins.


    Victoria was sitting on a wooden chair in front of the house, waiting for their return. When she saw William, she smiled.


    "You two are finally back," she said.


    William chuckled. "That''s because Jhen wouldn''t let me explore; otherwise, I would have been gone for days."


    "Really? Remember, you still need to help me train," Victoria said.


    "I know, I know. But first, you need to awaken your bloodline. Speaking of which, how will we do that, Jhen?"


    Victoria deserved the bloodline after everything she had done to help William.


    Jhen answered without hesitation. "It''s a ritual requiring a few ingredients, the most important of which is your blood. I can gather everything in about three days."


    Three days wasn''t a long time to wait, especially considering Victoria had been patient for much longer. She nodded. "I can wait that long."


    Before they knew it, three days had passed. William had completed another volume of basic demonic training and was now proficient in numerous fire and black fire spells. His mastery of meditation had improved as well, leading to a rise in his Demonic Energy by around 30 points¡ªessentially double what he had before!


    Things were looking great for him. His physical attributes had also increased, indicating that the demonic energy was transforming his body in ways he could not fully comprehend.


    However, there was still one important thing he wanted, and Jhen knew how he could obtain it.


    "Jhen, do you know where I can get a class?" William asked as he and Jhen sat in front of the fireplace one night.


    Up until that point, he did not have a class. While he could have chosen a standard class, he wanted something truly suited for him.


    Jhen had important information for him. "Remember I told you about the royal palace that''s now underground and how a noble family has taken control of it? If we can get there, there''s a special room where you can access something that grants you your class. I don''t know the details, but that''s how the royal family always did it, and they have the strongest demon classes." S§×ar?h the n?velFire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    That was good news for William. He knew that the bloodline he possessed¡ªthough he still didn''t fully understand why¡ªwas a significant part of his identity. William was one of the summoned heroes, yet from the very beginning, he felt a deep connection to the demon kingdom, to the point where Asura recognized him as its master. For him, ignoring his roots and the potential reasons for being sent to this world was not ideal.


    "But it won''t be easy to get to that palace, I assume," he said.


    "You''re right. You''ll need extensive training and to level up significantly. So, prepare yourself because it won''t be easy. Tomorrow, you''ll explore the dungeon and work on leveling up."


    Before William ventured into the dungeon, they performed a ritual to grant Victoria a demon bloodline. The process required specific ingredients that could only be found on the demon island, as well as William''s blood. While any blood could work, the purer, the better. For a moment, Victoria hoped she would inherit a royal bloodline too, but that was not the case.


    "The bloodline will be based on your aptitude, which is still unknown. It won''t be a royal bloodline. The only way for you to obtain a royal bloodline is through marriage and an intimate relationship with William."


    Victoria blushed at that remark.


    Jhen was the one leading the ritual, preparing the symbols, the ingredients, and the blood that would be directly injected into Victoria''s veins. The process itself was swift; in less than ten minutes, Victoria had her new bloodline. It wasn''t painful!


    Well, she had sort of acquired her new bloodline.


    "The blood will slowly adjust to your body, so you can expect to see the first signs of the bloodline in a few days. I think you''ll be able to start practicing the new spells you can learn within a week," Jhen explained.


    One of the main benefits of having this bloodline was access to unique meditation techniques, as well as exclusive demonic spells related to fire and black fire.


    "Thank you very much," Victoria said, hugging Jhen.


    Receiving the bloodline meant a lot to her.


    As for William, he had another mission. While Jhen was focused on ensuring the safety of the villagers due to the recent appearance of bandits in the region, and Victoria patiently awaited her bloodline''s fate, William needed to venture into the dungeon alone to explore and level up.


    Jhen insisted that this was for the best. "Only in difficult times can you grow stronger, so you won''t have anyone accompanying you. I trust that a royal member of the demons can handle that place."


    Before he left, William asked Victoria if she could lend him the sword. Technically, the sword was originally his; he had simply allowed her to use it, but she didn''t know that.


    "Of course you can have it," she replied. "I wouldn''t sleep well if you went to such a dangerous place without a weapon to protect yourself."


    After retrieving Asura, William left the house they had been staying in and headed toward the dungeon.


    Asura was happy to be with him again. "It''s nice to be with you again, master," Asura said mentally to William.


    "I know. Don''t worry, I''ll find another weapon for Victoria soon."


    The duo arrived at the dungeon shortly after. The guards stationed at the entrance saw William and greeted him.


    "Sir William," they said. "What brings you here today?"


    Jhen, their captain, had instructed them to treat William well, and they were following her orders precisely.


    "I''m heading into the dungeon," he replied. "This is the perfect place to level up, right? Keep up the good work, you two."


    The guards thanked him as he entered the dungeon and began his descent, going deeper and deeper. On his way down, he noticed not only soldiers from the army but also adventurers eager to enter and level up.


    These adventurers had to pay a fee, and a portion of the loot they collected from monsters inside the dungeon was claimed by the army. Despite this, they still considered it worthwhile.


    The opportunity was simply too good to pass up. According to Jhen, the number of monsters below was incredibly high, and for some reason, they kept reappearing. It reminded William of the respawn mechanics he had seen in many different games.


    Additionally, the monsters grew stronger the deeper one ventured into the dungeon, making it an efficient place to level up. Anyone could remain within a level range where they felt comfortable without risking their life unnecessarily.


    William, however, needed to go much deeper. The army had secured the upper levels, but eventually, he reached an area where it was no longer safe to travel. At the entrance to this dangerous section, army guards stood watch, warning anyone who approached.


    They didn''t recognize William. These guards lived and operated in the depths of the dungeon, and to them, he was just another adventurer.


    "Be careful now, adventurer," they warned. "Beyond this point, it''s no longer safe. If you die in there, that''s not our problem."


    William thanked their warnings, and moved forward. The moment he stepped inside, he felt how the atmosphere was different. It didn''t have the warming feeling of before.


    There were no guards inside, no places to rest and eat something, nothing. It was just a realm packed with monsters.


    Some might see that place as unwelcoming, a place to stay far away and avoid it, but William? It was an opportunity to grow stronger. He wanted to be the strongest summoned hero. He would prove all of them wrong.


    The encounter with Sarah, his old classmate, made him realize how far behind he was from them. They had the best resources and teachers. William had to find ways to catch up.

 Chapter 206 - 206: An Army of Monsters

    William expected to find a maze of stone corridors when he ventured down into the dungeon, but that was not what awaited him.


    He believed one reason the demon army hadn''t explored the rest of the dungeon was that they either didn''t want to or didn''t have the time. However, the real answer to that mystery lay in what he discovered down there: a portal.


    Another portal. Flashbacks of his passage through the portal to the demon kingdom flooded his mind.


    "A portal? Here?" he murmured.


    The dungeon was far more complex than he had anticipated. Near the portal, he noticed someone resting.


    It was a young man with two daggers at his waist and a massive backpack by his side. He glanced at William but said nothing.


    "Hey," William said, "Is everything alright?"


    "Just resting before going in again. Why?" the young man replied. S§×arch* The n??el Fire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    William sat beside him, eager to learn more about the dungeon. Apparently, Jhen hadn''t shared everything, or perhaps she simply didn''t want to.


    "What is this portal?" William asked. "I thought this place was just a maze with monsters."


    The young man laughed. "It is, but only on the other floors. I think this is the tenth floor, and from here on, there are portals, each leading to a different place."


    "Really?"


    William''s curiosity about the dungeon deepened. How had it appeared? Who created the portals? Why were there so many monsters respawning?


    His first thought was that a higher being must have created it. It didn''t seem natural at all. Did deities or even gods exist?


    "At least, that''s what I think," the young man continued. "The tenth floor is the only one I''ve explored. I haven''t gone to the eleventh floor yet, but I assume it will be similar."


    Then the young man added something crucial, "If you plan on going there, be careful. There are lots of adventurers, and they will kill you for the spoils. It''s packed with people. You know, the portals are all connected."


    "Wait, what? Do you mean the other dungeons scattered around the kingdom?"


    "Yes. The first nine levels are unique to each dungeon, but apparently, the portals are not only here; they exist in all dungeons, and everyone goes to the same level."


    The young man had spoken with other adventurers on the tenth floor, and that''s how he knew they came from different dungeons rather than the same one they were using.


    A web of portals, all interconnected, leading to a place filled with respawning monsters¡ªit sounded like something straight out of a video game.


    "Thank you for pointing that out to me," William said. "If it hadn''t been for you, I would have entered blindly."


    "It was nothing," the young man replied. "Are you planning to go in now? Maybe we can explore it together. It''s pretty dangerous to go alone, and I feel like my luck might run out eventually¡­"


    William was not opposed to the idea. Though he had just met the guy, he seemed decent enough, and there was little reason not to go with him. It would be much better to be with someone who knew the area.


    "Sure, let''s go," William said.


    However, William was always cautious around someone he had just met. The chances of being backstabbed in a place like that were high, and he didn''t want to take the risk.


    The young man took a moment to rest before going inside. William noticed he had a few cuts on his torso¡ªprobably from fights with the monsters lurking in the dungeon. It took the man around 30 minutes to recover. Since neither of them was in a hurry, William didn''t mind waiting.


    "I''m better now. Shall we go?" the young man said.


    William let the man move first. The sensation of going through the portal reminded him of his trips to the demon kingdom and was similar to experiencing his SSS skill. He was accustomed to it, so he didn''t feel any sickness after passing through. The young man seemed fine as well.


    When William looked around to see where they were, he realized the entire landscape was¡­ unusual. The plains had orange grass, and the sky was also orange. The trees were orange too. William spotted a river in the distance and thought, ''The river must be orange too¡­'' but to his surprise, it wasn''t. The water looked just like the water he was familiar with.


    "This place is so strange," William remarked.


    "And you haven''t even seen the stranger things one can find here. Come with me; I know a place for us to start," the man said.


    The man introduced himself as Matthew. He had been to that dungeon five times up to that point and was much more knowledgeable compared to William, though he wasn''t particularly strong.


    After a quick assessment, William realized he was stronger, which gave him the confidence to trust that he wouldn''t be backstabbed.


    "Where are we going, exactly?" William asked.


    "You''ll see¡­" Matthew replied, adding an air of mystery.


    They continued through the plains, and eventually, William noticed something incredible. The plain had a hill at its end, and when they climbed to the top, William beheld a vast area teeming with monsters.


    It was the first time he had seen so many monsters in one place. He even noticed other adventurers there, battling against the creatures. Some were fighting solo, while others formed parties.


    "This is incredible! How can there be so many monsters here?"


    Looking up at the hill, William beheld what appeared to be an army of creatures. He hadn''t expected it to be so packed with monsters. While he anticipated encountering a few, he never imagined there would be this many. It was far beyond what he had expected.


    "Right? Let''s go; we can''t waste any time here." Matthew led the way as they descended the hill. Before they reached the bottom, monsters were already approaching them.


    The first pack of monsters they encountered consisted of goblins, some of which were different colors. William was familiar with these creatures and wasn''t surprised to see them. However, there was one unique goblin¡ªan orange one¡ªthat caught his attention.


    William wanted to level up, so he didn''t wait for Matthew to make a move. With Asura in hand, he dashed toward the goblins and attacked them with his sword. Since he began using his demonic meditation, he felt stronger. His movements were faster, and his attacks had more power behind them.


    Matthew watched William''s impressive moves and couldn''t help but praise him. "That''s incredible! Anyway, let''s form a party, right? We can share the experience points (EXP)."


    William frowned at that suggestion. *What is this?* he thought. He understood that the system in this world was similar to a game, with levels and attributes that everyone possessed. But forming a party? That wasn''t possible in the real world!


    Yet, in this strange dungeon, forming a party felt as natural as in a game. The idea of a higher being orchestrating this situation crossed his mind, and he briefly wondered if he was trapped inside a game without realizing it.


    "No way that''s possible. I''m definitely in another world," he reassured himself.


    Matthew requested the party, and a notification appeared in front of William. He accepted it. Now he could see Matthew''s name above his head, which would make it easier for them to find each other amid the swarm of creatures and other adventurers.


    "Now all the beasts I kill will give you half the EXP, and if you kill, I''ll get half the EXP too." William understood how a party in a game worked, so he didn''t need further explanation.


    With shared EXP, it was best to focus on different monsters to maximize their kills and level up faster. William went to one side while Matthew went to another, making sure they didn''t stray too far. It was important to stay close in case another adventurer showed up to attack them.


    The adventurers were their main concern. Each floor had a different difficulty level, so the monsters on the tenth floor wouldn''t pose a threat to William. However, strong adventurers could enter that floor and use their power to prey on the weaker ones¡ªa common occurrence in this world.


    While fighting the goblins¡ªwhich didn''t require much of William''s attention¡ªhe kept glancing at Matthew from a distance to gauge his strength.


    Matthew was impressively fast; he wielded daggers and used spells related to stealth and poison. He wasn''t exactly the most reassuring person to have around, but the silver lining was that the goblins didn''t seem to pose a threat to him either. Their killing speed was quite rapid, and notifications for experience points and item drops appeared in front of them multiple times.


    In fact, the pace of the fights was so quick that William leveled up once in just thirty minutes of battling the monsters! When he saw the level-up notification¡ªa sight he hadn''t seen in a long time¡ªhe couldn''t help but smile.


    "It feels good..." he muttered.

 Chapter 207 - 207: Moving to the Next Floor

    The longer William stayed in that place, the more he began to see it as a game. The world itself felt like that because of the system they were part of, but the dungeon they were in had some unique features not commonly found in the outside world.


    Matthew and the others there didn''t know about the games William used to play on Earth. To them, the system was a natural part of existence, something that had always been there. William, however, understood that this was not the case. He couldn''t reveal to anyone that he had come from another world¡ªessentially, that he was one of the summoned heroes¡ªso he chose to remain silent and continued to level up in the dungeon.


    After hours of battling goblins, William had leveled up twice, while Matthew gained four levels. Matthew had entered the tenth floor of the dungeon at a lower level, which explained why he was earning experience faster than William.


    They decided to take a short break near a tree.


    "We''re killing monsters so quickly," Matthew remarked. "It''s so much better being in a party. Alone, it''s just pure hell."


    "When do you plan on heading to the next floor?" William inquired.


    The tenth floor of the dungeon posed little challenge for William. Despite the impressive number of monsters present, he wasn''t earning much experience because the monsters were too weak. He wanted to press on and explore the rest of the dungeon as quickly as possible; that was the only way he could continue to level up at a decent rate.


    Matthew had already explored the tenth floor multiple times, so he also had the thought of moving forward in mind. After leveling up four times, he felt more confident about it.


    "We should start making our way to the exit," he suggested. "Let''s continue tomorrow. It''s not wise to go out during the night."


    The dungeon operated on its own cycle of day and night, following a 24-hour pattern. However, night in the dungeon didn''t correspond to night on the demon island. After spending several hours fighting monsters, it was almost night time inside the dungeon. Staying outside without shelter was unwise¡ªnot because of the monsters, as William could handle them easily, but because of other adventurers.


    "Do you know a place where we can find shelter?" William asked.


    "I do, yes. Follow me."


    They stood up and headed toward the location Matthew had in mind. Along the way, they spotted several adventurers. Some were far away, only a brief glance could be seen, while others were much closer, requiring William to pay more attention.


    Goblin attacks continued throughout their journey to the shelter. The respawn rate was relentless, making goblins a continuous threat.


    After an hour of walking, they arrived at an abandoned village. It was unusual for it to be so devoid of monsters, especially since the rest of the floor was teeming with them.


    "There are multiple villages like this one scattered throughout this floor," Matthew explained. "This one is good for one reason. Come here."


    As they walked through the abandoned village, William noticed lights coming from inside the houses.


    "Other adventurers are already here," he thought to himself.


    These adventurers didn''t even notice William and Matthew''s arrival. They were holed up inside the houses, trying to avoid drawing attention from the nearby creatures.


    Matthew stopped in front of an old well that the village once had, but it seemed to hold some secrets.


    "There''s a hidden place down there," Matthew said. "I found it by accident when I fell in."


    "Isn''t that a funny way to find a base?" William said, smirking.


    "Don''t laugh, okay? I''ll go first," Matthew replied.


    With that, Matthew jumped into the well. For someone like him¡ªwho had a powerful body¡ªjumping from high places was not dangerous. A well like this would never hurt them, especially William.


    The well wasn''t very deep, and once Matthew''s feet touched the bottom, he spotted a small corridor leading to an underground area furnished with a bed and some other furniture.


    "This does look like the kind of place you would live in," William commented.


    Matthew wasn''t sure if that was a compliment, so he simply said, "Yep, this is my home. The only problem is that there''s only one bed."


    "I can sleep on the ground, no problem."


    William was not one to complain about that. He sat down, leaning his back against the wall.


    "How far is the exit to the eleventh floor?" he asked.


    "A few hours, no more than that. But if I remember correctly, there''s sometimes a special creature blocking the portal. We might have to face it, or we might not, depending on whether someone else has dealt with it before we get there."


    The first thought that crossed William''s mind was that they were facing a boss monster. The entire situation felt just like a video game.


    "It can''t be too strong, I assume."


    If the boss creature was present before they reached the eleventh floor, it had to be weaker than the creatures on that floor. At least, that was the logic William believed based on everything he had experienced so far.


    "Yes, I think we can win the fight, but the issue is with the other adventurers who might be there. It''s common for them to attack other adventurers during battles in order to steal their loot," Matthew explained.


    "What a shock..."


    William was not surprised by this information. People loved to prey on others.


    They hadn''t eaten anything all day, and all they had left was some goblin meat. Matthew considered it safe to eat, but it tasted awful. With no other options and their laziness keeping them from venturing outside their base to find food, they cooked the goblin meat to make it slightly more palatable. Matthew wasn''t exaggerating when he said it tasted horrible. It was genuinely bad.


    William almost gagged when he took a bite but managed to endure it with sheer willpower. At one point, Stuart, a magical rat, emerged from William''s pocket to sample the meat and declared it tasty.


    Matthew, surprised, exclaimed, "You have a talking magical rat? I didn''t know that!"


    "There are a lot of things you don''t know about me, but maybe one day you will," William replied.


    Getting up, he added, "I''ll go outside to pee. Be right back."


    After leaving the room where they were staying, William looked up and jumped. With his strength, it was easy for him to climb out of the well.


    Once he was outside, the first thing he did was look around to see if there were any creatures or adventurers nearby. There was no one in sight. The adventurers were hiding in their houses, not even peeking through the windows.


    William walked toward the nearby forest and found a bush to relieve himself. It didn''t feel good to urinate in a place so close to so many creatures. For a moment, his mind conjured a terrifying thought¡ªwhat if a creature appeared and attacked him while he was vulnerable?


    Feeling anxious, he quickly tucked himself back into his pants after that disturbing thought. "I don''t want to risk it¡­" he whispered to himself.


    Before returning to the well where Matthew was, William spoke with Stuart, taking advantage of the moment they were alone. S~ea??h the n??el Fire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "Can you make sure nothing happens to me while I''m sleeping?" he asked. "I don''t completely trust that guy."


    Stuart, a magical creature capable of going many hours without sleep, replied, "Of course I can. You don''t even need to ask. I''ll make sure to wake you up and protect you if he tries anything."


    William just wanted to be safe, so he headed to the well after his conversation with Stuart.


    "Everything good up there?" Matthew asked when he saw William.


    "Yes, no problem at all," William replied with a smile.


    Matthew had found a rug in that room and decided to give it to William.


    "It''s better than sleeping on the ground, I think," Matthew said.


    "Thank you," William replied.


    William placed the rug in the corner and laid down to sleep, placing his trust in Stuart. However, it was hard for him to relax. With a stranger so close by¡ªsomeone armed with daggers and possessing poison magic¡ªit was understandably difficult to sleep. It took quite some time for William to finally drift off.


    Fortunately, nothing happened during the night. He woke up early the next morning, getting ready to continue their journey. Matthew was still asleep when William woke up, so he kicked him lightly a few times.


    "Get up, Matthew. We cannot waste time," he urged.


    After some groans, Matthew finally got up. Their mission now was to move toward the portal leading to the eleventh floor and confront the boss creature. William couldn''t wait to leave that place.


    "I just can''t stand looking at any more goblins¡­ Hurry up, Matthew," he said, eager to get moving.


    It took them three hours to get to the portal.

 Chapter 208 - 208: A Group of Fighters

    In front of the portal was a massive goblin. It didn''t look like a goblin anymore, but more like an orc or something.


    The creature had a massive club, two heads, and was fat as fuck. William and Matthew ducked behind a tree, seeing the beast from afar.


    "That''s the creature protecting the gate that I talked to you about," Matthew said, "it''s not that strong, so we can go there and kill it."


    Matthew was anxious to finish everything and move to the next floor. He had been on the same floor for quite a while, so he wanted to leave.


    He got up, but William grabbed him by the arm. "Wait," he whispered, "there are others here, waiting for dumb people to fight the boss."


    William heard from Matthew that some adventurers liked to wait near the portal to steal and even kill the people fighting against the boss.


    So, with that information in mind, he paid attention the moment they got there just to be certain the area was safe. It was not.


    "Really? I can''t sense anyone," Matthew said, frowning.


    The aura reading William had was far superior, especially with Asura with him.


    "But they are here," he said, "at least 5 of them. I think they are all from the same group."


    "So what should we do now?"


    Matthew was not so experienced in situations like that one. William decided to stay put and wait.


    "They didn''t realize we are here, at least I think so. For now, let''s wait."


    Fighting against the boss creature was not a difficult thing, but getting attacked by the other 5 adventurers during the fight, well, would make things bad for both of them. Sear?h the N?velFire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    The best approach was to wait for someone to fight against the boss, and then use the chance to go to the next floor.


    Apparently, while the boss creature was alive, the portal behind it was locked, meaning no one could enter the next floor. But after it got killed, then anyone could go through.


    William and Matthew waited for 1 hour. The group of adventurers was still in the same location. Then, another group showed up.


    It was a trio, and they went straight to the boss, ignoring everything else. Perhaps they knew people were stalking them and just didn''t care, or they didn''t sense them.


    The fight started.


    William, for the first time, saw people from the demon kingdom fighting. They had powers similar to his! Black energy was around their bodies, increasing the power of their bodies.


    That was not the demonic transformation William had, but they were using the demon energy all the same.


    One of the people from the group was a muscular man with a pair of gauntlets. He jumped toward the boss creature, and punched it in the face!


    The punch had tremendous force behind it. The boss goblin fell to the ground after just one punch.


    Even William was surprised by that power. After the boss fell on the ground, the others from the group ¡ª who were also muscular men ¡ª all worked together to punch the goblin with everything they had.


    The boss goblin died in less than thirty seconds. The group of five people who had been waiting didn''t even have the time to try something before the trio went through the portal, going to the next floor.


    "This is our chance, let''s go," William said.


    He ran toward the portal. Matthew followed him. William was slightly faster, but Matthew was also going fast.


    "Look, there are two others here!" someone yelled from behind the trees.


    They hadn''t sensed William and Matthew before, only after seeing them running toward the portal did they realize they were there. But that was too late.


    William and Matthew passed through the portal, arriving at the next floor.


    The environment around them changed completely once again. This time, they were in a city packed with people.


    "This is not what I was expecting," Matthew said.


    The city had people living in it, and a massive wall around it for protection. There were shops, people selling stuff, churches, and even a castle at the top of it.


    "Where are we, exactly? Is this a city in the demon kingdom?"


    Matthew had been living there for a longer period, so he certainly knew more things about the place than William.


    "Not that I know of," he said, "this doesn''t look like the type of constructions we have in the demon kingdom."


    The people in the city didn''t look like the typical citizens of the demon kingdom too, and the guards of that city weren''t using the dark plate armor that the demon army used.


    So, because of all of that, they were certain that place was somewhere else. But how? Are they still underground?


    "To make all of this someone has to be quite powerful," thought William.


    Matthew pointed at the trio who had just entered the portal, "That''s the muscular men who killed the boss. Maybe they know more about this place? I mean, they looked quite powerful."


    Judging by the strength they showed and how easily they defeated the boss, it was clear that they probably had explored deeper floors of that dungeon.


    It was either that or they were just really before and decided to go there.


    William and Matthew hastened their steps to get to them. The trio was moving through the city like they knew the place.


    When they got close enough, William could feel the aura of those men. They were really powerful.


    Also, their appearances were fierce. All of them were tall, muscular, and had some scars on their bodies too.


    They were shirtless, making the citizens of that city stare at them from time to time. Some even avoided crossing paths with them because of their appearance.


    William shouted, "Hey, can we talk?"


    He was expecting to get ignored or even start a fight, but the trio turned around to face them, and with a friendly smile, one of them said, "You two are the ones waiting behind the tree, right? I can sense you are not the type to ambush others, so you were just waiting for the right time to go through the portal."


    The man was spot on. William was surprised by how smart he was.


    "Indeed. We stopped there after sensing five others waiting to ambush us, and you came and provided us a way to come here. Me and my friend here want to know more about this place. Is it your first time here?" William asked.


    "Not my first time," the man said. "Do you mind coming with us to the tavern? There''s a good one nearby."


    William saw no reason to refuse the offer; a tavern was exactly the kind of place to grab a drink and chat. He wanted to gather more information about the area.


    "Sure, why not?" he replied.


    The muscular man slapped him on the back. "That''s my guy. Follow me."


    As they walked to the tavern, they conversed to get to know each other better. It turned out the trio consisted of one professor and two of his students. The professor had been the first to strike the goblin boss. He was a master in martial arts and had brought his students to the dungeon to learn and grow stronger.


    William felt certain he didn''t stand a chance against the professor; the aura surrounding him was so intense it made it hard to breathe. However, the good news was that the professor seemed friendly and almost retracted his aura when he noticed that William and Matthew were uncomfortable.


    The tavern he mentioned was bustling with a constant flow of people going in and out, some of whom collapsed right after exiting.


    "The drinks work wonders," William remarked.


    "Oh, they certainly do," the martial arts professor agreed.


    After entering, the trio chose a table, with William and Matthew simply following along. Soon, someone arrived with drinks specifically selected for them; the staff was already familiar with the trio''s preferences.


    "We always come here when we get the chance, so they know us well," the professor remarked. "Now, what do you want to know?"


    William''s first question was, "Where are we? I didn''t expect the dungeon to lead us to a place like this. I thought the areas were just filled with monsters."


    The martial arts professor placed a hand over William''s mouth. "First of all, don''t mention anything about coming here through a portal or something like that. People in this place don''t take kindly to it."


    "Why not?" William asked.


    "There''s a story about someone who came through one of those portals and ended up destroying many cities. Because of that, they are wary of people who arrive from portals."


    "But didn''t they see us appear in the middle of the street?"


    "No. There''s a special mechanism that makes us invisible right after we arrive, so somehow, they don''t realize we''ve suddenly appeared. I can''t explain how it works, but it does."


    The more William learned about this place, the more curious he became.

 Chapter 209 - 209: Leveling up a few times

    "But what about the people here? Where exactly are we? Underground? Somewhere else? What do you know?" William asked.


    "That we don''t know," the martial arts professor replied. "We tried to learn more, but they don''t answer us. It''s as if they are avoiding our questions."


    William found this really strange. He had talked with them for a while, but they didn''t have any new information to share, so he left with Matthew.


    The trio was busy. After having some drinks, they wanted to go outside to fight the monsters, but William had reservations about joining them.


    "Are you sure it''s not a good idea to go with them?" Matthew asked as they walked through the streets.


    "No," William replied firmly. "The man is really strong; it''s not safe for us to be out there. I don''t want to risk it."


    If the martial arts professor were weaker, William wouldn''t mind being around someone he didn''t know, but a powerful man like that? No way he would take that chance.


    It also didn''t make sense to stay with such a strong individual who could always help him if things went wrong. That wasn''t the right way to train.


    Experience points (EXP) and levels were just one part of the journey to getting stronger. William also needed more experience in combat and to face real dangers that would push his strength forward.


    When they reached the city''s gate, the guards came to speak with him.


    "It''s dangerous outside. Do you understand the risks of going out there?" one guard asked.


    "We know," William replied, acknowledging the threat posed by the numerous monsters outside.


    The guards opened the gate, allowing William and Matthew to pass. Once they were outside, the guards quickly closed the gate to prevent the monsters from entering the city.


    Once outside, William saw several guards battling the monsters that had gotten too close to the wall.


    Above the tall walls surrounding the city, long-range mages and archers were attacking from above, supporting the guards engaged in close combat with the creatures.


    The first thing they noticed was the variety of monsters. Unlike the previous floor, which had only goblins, the eleventh floor was populated by beast-like creatures.


    They reminded William of werewolves or something similar. All of these creatures had red eyes and were incredibly fierce. S§×ar?h the nov§×lF~ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "We should move to the wilderness," William said.


    The moment they stepped out of the area under the guard''s command, the monsters started attacking them.


    William welded Asura tightly. A werewolf came jumping on him, but he quickly moved to the side, only receiving a scratch on his right arm.


    Then, he used the chance to attack the werewolf while it was in the air! That gave him a clean hit on its belly, cutting it open.


    The werewolf fell to the ground, roaring in pain. William jumped on it and pierced his sword in the beast''s throat.


    It was dead. But that didn''t mean they were safe. Another beast came running toward them! It was another type of beastial creature, a werebear!


    Similar to the werewolf in strength, it tried to attack William using its claws.


    This time, Matthew came to help him. He tossed his dagger on the creature, and the venom on the dagger''s blade stopped the movement of the werebear for a second.


    That gave William precious time to attack with his sword once again.


    But this time, he utilized his demon energy to enchant the sword, giving it a unique black aura to it.


    The demon''s energy increased the power of the sword by a lot. When the blade hit the werebear, it easily cut through its fur, and more importantly, it had a fire effect to it, burning the werebear!


    [+1300 EXP]


    [+ Werebear Fur (Poor quality)]


    William received the same amount of experience points (EXP) from both the werebear and the werewolf, but he obtained the werebear fur while the werewolf did not drop anything for him.


    Matthew also gained EXP, but item drops were exclusive to the party member who dealt the highest damage.


    "Are you alright?" Matthew asked.


    William''s right arm was bleeding from a scratch he received from the werewolf, but it didn''t appear to be serious.


    "I''m fine. Let''s move."


    More and more beasts began to attack them in the forest, primarily consisting of werewolves and werebears¡ªnothing different from the two types they had already encountered.


    As time passed and night fell, the number of beasts increased significantly, making it difficult for William and Matthew to fend them off!


    [Level Up]


    [Level Up]


    [Level Up]


    After several hours of battling the werebeasts, William leveled up three times while Matthew leveled up five times. However, they bore the cost of their victories; scratches and bites covered their bodies, leaving them bloody, dirty, and exhausted.


    "We need shelter," William said.


    "I agree," Matthew replied, clearly feeling worse for wear. "It looks like the monsters are multiplying during the night, so we can''t stay in this forest much longer."


    William had the option to stay longer if he wanted. His demonic transformation would grant him tremendous strength, and his bloodline from the giant snake offered him healing capabilities.


    He could fight indefinitely if he wished, but he didn''t want to reveal too much of his power to Matthew. He needed to pretend as if he were suffering just as much as his companion.


    They had no idea if they would find any shelter in the forest, but they did! It turned out to be a fortress¡ªa castle with sturdy stone walls. Anyone inside seemed to be safe from the monsters.


    William approached the gate and shouted, "Is anyone there? Please, help us!"


    He called for a few minutes, keeping a watchful eye for any approaching beasts.


    A man eventually appeared to greet him, peering through a small hole in the gate. "Who are you? What do you want?" he asked.


    "We are adventurers in need of shelter for the night," William replied.


    "Adventurers? So, you''re not from here? Come in, come in!" the man said as he opened the gate, allowing William and Matthew to enter.


    William initially thought the place belonged to the citizens of the city, but it turns out it was actually a hub for adventurers! Inside, they saw others just like themselves¡ªpeople exploring the dungeon in search of experience points and items.


    "You two look rough," the man remarked. "There''s a shower area, and someone here can help with your wounds."


    Matthew looked around, amazed by the lively atmosphere. The place felt like a community.


    "How long have you been here?" he asked.


    "A few weeks," the man replied. "We discovered this abandoned place and decided to make it our home. However, this isn''t our final destination. We plan to explore the next floor in the near future."


    "This fortress is spacious, and there are plenty of free rooms for you to use. Just choose any that you like," the man said. "The shower facilities are in that building over there. I don''t want to know your names. We don''t use names here."


    After explaining these basic details to William and Matthew, the man simply left.


    "Why aren''t they worried about us? I mean, we are strangers here, right?" Matthew asked.


    William also found it odd. "They didn''t even want to know our names or anything about us."


    Despite the strangeness of the place, William felt it was better to be there than outside. He decided to take a shower and made his way to the building the man had mentioned. It was also made of stone, but much smaller.


    Inside, the building had only a few bathtubs, and without hot water, it could have been a problem. However, with William''s fire magic, heating it up was not an issue. He also helped Matthew with this.


    Of course, they didn''t shower together. William went first while Matthew waited for him to finish. While Matthew was in the shower, William explored the insides of the main building.


    He encountered a few others there, who greeted him warmly and welcomed him into their community without asking any personal questions. The place was dimly lit and had been abandoned before they transformed it into their home, so it wasn''t in the best condition. There were a few torches scattered around, and William noticed several holes in the walls and roof, but nothing that seemed to pose a significant risk.


    The most important aspect of the place was its safety against the beasts, and it appeared to be secure. There were no werewolves or werebears lurking inside.


    William climbed a few floors and discovered an empty room on the top floor. Since that floor had very few occupants, Matthew could also secure a room for himself there. After identifying two vacant rooms close to each other, he went back down to meet Matthew.


    "I need to check in with the doctor," William said. "Let''s go."


    They had both sustained injuries during the day due to the fights, but by that point, William was fully healed.


    "I don''t need to go," he added. "I wasn''t that badly hurt."


    Matthew clearly recalled all the scratches and bites William had endured, but he didn''t argue.


    "Alright. I''ll go there alone. Which room are we choosing?" Matthew asked.


    "On the top floor. There are two rooms at the end of the hallway that are free. I''ll be there," William replied.


    "Okay."


    William returned to his room, anxious for the next day. For some reason, he felt like the people living inside that fortress were somewhat strange...

 Chapter 210 - 210: Fighting Non-Stop

    Matthew came to William''s room to speak with him. When he opened the door, he saw William standing near a small window.


    "What are you doing?" Matthew asked.


    "Just staring through the window, looking down to see what the others are up to," William replied.


    Some of the people living in the fortress were already asleep, while others were walking around and doing chores inside. Matthew walked in, closed the door, and sat on the edge of William''s bed.


    "Are you worried they might try something?" he asked.


    "There''s always a chance," William said. "But we''re leaving first thing in the morning, so I don''t think we need to worry too much."


    Their plan was to gain levels inside the dungeon, so they weren''t considering staying in the fortress for long.


    "This floor is way harder than the last one," Matthew noted, "but I think it''s getting easier as we progress."


    "We''re leveling up much faster here. I believe it won''t take long for this place to feel easy to us, maybe just a few days or weeks," William added.


    That was just a guess, but given the speed of their progress, William believed it wouldn''t take that long. Moreover, his attributes were increasing at a much higher rate with each level due to his status as one of the summoned heroes, making his advancement much faster compared to others.


    After their conversation, Matthew returned to his own room, which was right beside William''s, and tried to rest despite a lingering sense of insecurity about staying in the fortress.


    Later that night, William woke up to strange noises coming from the hallway. He picked up his sword, Asura, and moved toward his door. The hallway was very dark; the torches that had been lit were no longer burning, but William could see clearly in the dark.


    At the end of the hallway, next to the staircase that led to the lower floors of the fortress, he noticed someone. William recognized the face¡ªit belonged to one of the people he had seen in the fortress when he was staring out the window.


    However, the man had reddish eyes that seemed to change color from amber to red and back again. He was leaning against the wall, hitting his body, clearly in pain as he clenched his hands and grabbed at his hair.


    When the man noticed William, he hurried down the staircase and left, leaving William to wonder what had just happened.


    Matthew also opened the door to his room, but his vision wasn''t very clear in the darkness.


    "Did you hear that?" Matthew asked.


    William gestured for him to step inside his room. After he entered and closed the door, William explained what he had seen. They were working together, so there was no reason to keep secrets.


    "It did seem like he was turning into a creature, at least based on what you described," Matthew said.


    "Yes..."


    The strange sounds ceased after the man noticed William. He retreated to his room and attempted to sleep again, but it proved far more difficult after what he had witnessed.


    The following morning, William and Matthew departed the fortress at dawn. They were eager to leave.


    The man who had granted them entry was present, and he remarked, "Leaving so early? I had anticipated a longer stay. It''s unwise to depart while feeling unwell."


    He was undoubtedly referring to Matthew, whose wounds were still healing. William, however, felt fine.


    "Thank you for your hospitality," William said, bowing to the man. "We may cross paths again in the future."


    William opened the gate and, pulling Matthew along, exited quickly. He feared the man might try to detain them, and thus offered no further words, simply leaving.


    The man closed the gate immediately after they left, wary of the beasts outside.


    William and Matthew moved away from the fortress, venturing deeper into the forest instead of returning to the city.


    It wasn''t long before they were attacked by more beasts: werewolves and werebears.


    These creatures didn''t seem to be growing stronger as they advanced; their familiar strength posed no threat.


    William began to utilize his magic more extensively.


    "Black Fire Ball!" he shouted.


    Demonic energy surged in his left hand, amplified by the black runes that hovered above it.


    A black flame materialized in his hands, growing larger with each passing second. By the spell''s completion, the fireball was substantial.


    He hurled it at a group of approaching werewolves, striking four of them.


    The sheer power of the fireball incinerated them, reducing them to charcoal. They were instantly killed.


    With a single black fire spell, William eliminated all four, earning a significant amount of EXP.


    Matthew, also from the demon kingdom and capable of casting black fire spells, was visibly shocked.


    "Your talent for fire magic is remarkable," he said. "I''ve never seen anyone cast such a potent basic spell. The power behind it was¡­ overwhelming." Sear?h the novel(F~)ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    That was one of the key points Jhen emphasized during his training: mastering the basic spells.


    They were labeled as "basic" simply because they were easier to learn and were the first spells accessible to anyone.


    However, that didn''t imply the spells were weak. With a higher mastery, William understood he could unleash tremendous force, surpassing even some higher-graded spells.


    Of course, his royal demonic bloodline played a significant role in his rapid learning and mastery. His affinity for fire had grown immensely over time, and it could now be considered his primary element, alongside his body-enhancing magic.


    "I''ll start using more spells now," he said. "You should do the same. The more we kill, the faster we grow stronger. Also, we need to find shelter for the night. There''s no way I''m returning to that fortress."


    Matthew nodded and followed William''s advice. He began utilizing more of his poison and stealth magic, which significantly increased their efficiency in eliminating the werebeasts that attacked them.


    This came at the cost of their mana¡ªand demon essence¡ªbut with judicious use, they could manage it.


    When they noticed their reserves were running low, they would switch to "normal" combat, abstaining from spells until their mana recovered.


    Just like the day, the hours flew by. They were unaware of the advancing evening until they noticed the changing hues around them.


    "The sun is setting," Matthew said. "Let''s focus on finding shelter now."


    The only shelter they found before nightfall was a small cave, barely large enough for them.


    They crouched and entered a narrow tunnel leading to a slightly larger, though still cramped, space.


    The only way to remain inside was to crouch, and the single entrance made it feel rather vulnerable.


    "Are you sure this is a good place?" William asked.


    "It''s not like we have a choice, is it?" Matthew replied.


    "Wait here."


    William exited the tiny cave. Once outside, he searched for a rock suitable for blocking the entrance.


    Fortunately, he quickly found a rock of the right size and, with his strength, easily carried it, sealing the opening.


    He returned to Matthew.


    "I can''t see a thing in here," Matthew complained.


    William was unperturbed.


    "As if there''s anything to see. Let''s endure this until tomorrow..."


    Venturing out at night was ill-advised. The number of monsters increased significantly, and the likelihood of encountering stronger creatures was high.


    For the moment, William was unwilling to take the risk, and neither was Matthew.


    If the previous night had been unpleasant, this one was far worse. The confined space was extremely uncomfortable, and they were forced to sleep on the ground.


    And that wasn''t the worst of it. Being in the heart of the forest, the sounds of the beasts outside were deafening.


    There was even a moment during the night when William felt the ground tremble, as if a large creature were passing nearby.


    The sensation was unnerving, but fortunately, no creature discovered their hiding place.


    When they emerged from the hole in the morning, both were aching all over. William knew he would recover quickly, but Matthew was deteriorating. He needed additional time to heal in a more secure location.


    William noticed something unusual. Next to the cave where they had slept was a massive footprint. The track clearly belonged to a beast, judging by its shape.


    But it was significantly larger than the werewolves and werebears they had encountered.


    "This must be from the creature that walked near us and made the ground shake," William said.


    "Indeed."


    Throughout the morning, they faced more beasts, and William observed how exhausted Matthew was. He couldn''t continue.


    Fighting monsters nonstop all day was too draining. William knew they had to find a place for Matthew to rest.


    So, that became their priority. They left the forest and found a road, which they followed.


    After hours of travel, they finally saw a city! It resembled the first one they had seen but was much smaller and located by the ocean.


    The guards saw them approaching and were surprised. It was rare to see people walking outside; only the strong could survive the monsters.


    "Who are you?" the guard asked.


    "Just travelers seeking a place to rest for a few days. May we enter? Please, my friend here is in poor condition."


    The guard glanced to the side, noting Matthew''s weakened state. He couldn''t turn them away.


    "Fine, go in. But don''t cause any trouble."


    They opened the gate for them.


    The city was much smaller, less than half the size of the previous one! It had a harbor with a few ships and many people fishing.


    "Let''s find a place to rest, eat, and recover," William said. "You look like you''re about to collapse."


    "Finally..." Matthew sighed.

 Chapter 211 - 211: A Few Days of Rest

    The residents of the city didn''t give William and Matthew strange looks. They glanced at them upon arrival, out of curiosity, but that was all.


    It was clear they were unconcerned about adventurers passing through. In fact, they welcomed them! More powerful adventurers meant greater safety for the city.


    They searched for a tavern or similar establishment, as Matthew desperately needed rest. However, they found none.


    The only available option was a restaurant with a few spare rooms on the second floor. It wasn''t a proper tavern.


    Upon entering, they observed a handful of people eating¡ªless than five in total. The restaurant wasn''t thriving.


    Perhaps they had arrived at an off-peak time, or perhaps the place simply didn''t attract many customers. The town was quite small, and tourists were infrequent.


    When the restaurant''s proprietor saw William and Matthew, he immediately recognized them as outsiders.


    It might have been their unfamiliar faces¡ªeveryone knew each other in such a small town¡ªor their attire, which seemed out of place.


    Regardless, he smiled broadly, seeing an opportunity to earn some money.


    "Hello, adventurers," he greeted them. "What brings you here? Are you here for lunch? Or perhaps one of our rooms upstairs?"


    The owner was shrewd. William and Matthew approached the counter, with William taking the lead.


    He was direct.


    "Look, we don''t have money to pay for food or a room," William said. "But we need them, so what can we do?"


    The local currency was different from that of the demon kingdom, making payment impossible.


    Previously, when he''d gone to the tavern with the adventurer trio, they had covered his drinks. But now, they were both penniless.


    The restaurant owner initially considered refusing them and showing them the door, but he sensed William''s powerful aura.


    He decided to hold his tongue and seek an alternative solution. The guards were no match for William, who could easily take over the city if he wished.


    "Well, that''s a problem," the owner said, then chuckled. "But every problem has a solution, right? How about you two work for the restaurant? We''ve had a few nightly brawls, and your presence might help keep things under control."


    The proposal was better than William had expected. They needed to stay for a few days until Matthew recovered fully. William liked the idea of having a task to occupy his mind. It might be beneficial.


    "Fine, we agree."


    "Excellent, excellent."


    The restaurant owner led them to the kitchen in the back, providing them with new clothes for work.


    Matthew enjoyed cooking, so he took on kitchen duties.


    "I don''t want to move around too much, like breaking up fights or anything, so you can handle that," Matthew said.


    The owner had mentioned that brawls were common at night, likely due to drinking. Matthew wanted to fully recover and avoid strenuous activity or getting hit.


    William didn''t mind. His tasks were to clean tables and keep an eye out for fights.


    Before their shift began, the owner treated them to a free meal. It was a good one.


    They had fried fish, rice, vegetables, and juice. William devoured it quickly.


    "So good," he said.


    Their shift started half an hour after lunch. The afternoon and early evening were uneventful. William cleaned a few tables, listened to conversations, chatted with the other staff, and that was it.


    However, as night fell, men began arriving for drinks. They filled the tables and spoke loudly about various topics.


    Their primary subject was sea adventures. Almost all of them were fishermen.


    "So, you''re saying you found a strange island? What was there?"


    "I don''t know," one fisherman replied. "I''m not foolish enough to explore an unknown place alone, but something told me there was treasure waiting to be found!"


    One of the things William enjoyed about his "new job" was the eavesdropping. He was already intrigued by the prospect of exploring the island.


    That was, of course, assuming the fisherman was telling the truth, which was questionable. Fishermen, it seemed, were prone to embellishing their tales.


    As the night wore on and the drinks flowed, the atmosphere became increasingly volatile.


    However, whenever someone started to get rowdy, William intervened.


    On one occasion, a man stood up and challenged another at a nearby table, accusing him of having an affair with his wife.


    William stepped between them and said, "Fights are prohibited in this restaurant. If you persist, I''ll have to stop you."


    A drunk man, however, rarely recognized William''s true power. The fisherman yelled, "Shut the hell up, or I''ll beat you too!"


    He clenched his fist and attempted to punch William. William easily caught the man''s hand and applied a fraction of his strength. The man screamed in pain.


    Then, he released the hand. "Don''t try that again."


    William turned to face the other man, who had lost his earlier bravado after witnessing William''s power.


    But as William turned, the man who had tried to punch him seized the opportunity. He grabbed a nearby wooden chair and struck William with it!


    The chair shattered upon impact with William''s head, but he remained unharmed. His body was simply too resilient for a mere chair to damage.


    He turned back and said, "Unfortunately, I''ll have to punch you now."


    William delivered a powerful punch to the man''s gut. The blow was strong enough to make the man vomit and collapse, unable to rise. And that was William restraining his strength. Had he unleashed his full power, a simple fisherman might have died.


    No one else attempted anything after witnessing that display. There were no guards previously in the restaurant, and now that William was there, word quickly spread throughout the town.


    The restaurant owner was delighted with what he saw.


    "Even after you finish working, I think they''ll stop fighting in here. Maybe I should invest in hiring someone strong..."


    William and Matthew finished their shift around 11 pm. It had been a tiring day, but the restaurant owner was kind enough to grant them three free days in the rented rooms upstairs.


    They went upstairs to their rooms. There were a total of six rooms, but only one was occupied. The rest were empty.


    In the upstairs hallway, Matthew had a smile on his face.


    "I think he''s scared of you, so now one day of our work equals three days of rest with free food," Matthew said.


    He was referring to the restaurant owner. William agreed. They each went to their respective rooms to rest for the night.


    The rooms were simple yet cozy. Matthew, who desperately needed rest, savored every moment. S§×ar?h the Nov§×l?ire.n(e)t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    The next day was another rest day. William felt completely recovered, unlike Matthew, who still needed time to heal his wounds.


    Consequently, they decided to do something different. They both purchased some fishing equipment¡ªthe restaurant owner provided the funds¡ªand went to the ocean to fish!


    "Did you notice there''s no wall along the water?" William pointed out. "I think the monsters on this floor can''t traverse water or something."


    "That makes sense," Matthew replied. "If there were monsters in the water, the fishermen would have been killed. They don''t seem strong enough to fight any kind of monster."


    "That''s exactly what I thought," William said. "Also, I heard about an island. It might be where the portal to the next level is."


    During their time in the dungeon, William had discovered another crucial piece of information: there was more than one portal to the next level.


    "It could be, but I doubt it," Matthew replied. "The portal is usually swarming with monsters and guarded by a boss creature. If our guess about the water is correct, there''s no way the monsters reached the island."


    "So you think it''s something else? Do you think it would be a good idea to go there and check it out?" William asked.


    If the island wasn''t the location of a portal, could it contain something interesting, or was it just an empty piece of land?


    William suspected it held something of significance. The entire dungeon seemed to be designed by someone who understood game mechanics¡ªthe games he had played on Earth.


    Would they create an island without a purpose? William didn''t think so.


    However, they decided to postpone exploration until Matthew fully recovered from his injuries. He still had lingering wounds.


    They found a peaceful spot to fish with their newly purchased equipment.


    With two chairs set up near the water, William and Matthew sat and fished for a while. They even brought food and drinks, enhancing their fishing trip.


    A few days passed.


    Matthew fully recovered after several days of eating, sleeping, and relaxing with activities like fishing.


    But now, they had to resume their journey. The break was enjoyable, but they couldn''t stay indefinitely.


    During their downtime, they discussed the island exploration idea and decided to pursue it.


    So, early in the morning, they boarded a fishing boat with other fishermen.


    The fishermen knew both of them, so they knew how strong William was. That was one of the reasons they allowed them to go with them.

 Chapter 212 - 212: People from Earth?

    The fishermen''s boat was simple but adequate for navigating the waters. William rested his elbows on the boat''s rail, gazing at the ocean, the sun, and enjoying the breeze.


    He had sailed so frequently that it had become second nature. Yet, he couldn''t help but think of his old professor James, Gorn, and the king awaiting his return with the antidote.


    Returning seemed increasingly improbable. Would he even find a way back? Or, more importantly, was it worth returning? What if the king had already died? So many months had passed that William was uncertain if the king had survived.


    "Lost in thought, huh?" Matthew said, leaning beside William.


    "You have no idea."


    They stood in silence, savoring the moment. Eventually, the fishermen stopped the boat.


    "This is one of our fishing spots," the ship''s captain announced. "You can fish with us or not; I don''t mind. We''ll stop near the island you mentioned in a couple of days."


    While everyone prepared their fishing gear for the day, William spoke with the captain to gain some insights.


    "Hey, captain," he said, "are there no monsters in the water? I''ve always wondered."


    "No, there aren''t," the captain replied. "At least, we''ve never seen any. Why? Are you new here?"


    William remembered the trio''s advice: avoid revealing that you arrived through a random portal.


    "In this region, yes. I came from the central part, where there''s no ocean," William said.


    "Oh, really?"


    The captain was impressed that William had managed to leave the central part of the region and reach their location. Only the strong could survive the wilderness against so many beasts.


    In fact, even the strong often couldn''t. The constant energy drain was the most challenging aspect. Survival required a high Stamina attribute.


    William''s stamina was decent, but his rapid recovery was what truly distinguished him.


    "Captain, do you think there''s anything interesting on that island they mentioned? Have you seen it?" William asked.


    "You mean the island some fishermen tell stories about? Yes, I have seen it," the captain said.


    William had expected the man to dismiss it as just an ordinary island, but that wasn''t the case.


    "I could have sworn I saw people there, wearing clothes different from what we usually wear. They weren''t fishermen, and I don''t know who they were. If you''re truly going there, be careful, young man," the captain said.


    That was the captain''s final word before he began fishing. They were all focused on their work. William remained silent, only whispering to Matthew when necessary.


    Fishing was their livelihood. William didn''t want to interfere with their work.


    "He said there were people there?" Matthew whispered, frowning.


    "At least when he saw the island, yes. But others have seen it and didn''t mention seeing people. The possibility is there, so we must be very cautious," William replied.


    William then grabbed a bucket and his fishing rod and said, "If we''re here, let''s enjoy it."


    Two days passed. During this time, the fishermen made several stops, both during the day and night, to fish at specific spots known for their abundance of fish.


    William and Matthew also fished. They were doing it for fun and relaxation, while the fishermen were working to provide for their families.


    On the night of the second day, they approached the island. The ship halted.


    The captain wasn''t afraid to be there. He spoke privately with William and Matthew.


    "We''ll be here for one more day. You can go to the island now and return tomorrow night for a ride back. If not, you''ll have to wait for our return," the captain explained.


    He didn''t want to linger near the island. Not out of fear, but because they needed to return to their families with their catch.


    They couldn''t afford to stay as long as they wished. Also, the weather was unpredictable, making it unwise to risk staying at sea.


    William understood. He only wanted to investigate the island, but he doubted one day would be sufficient, especially if the people the captain mentioned were present.


    "If we stay for more than one day, how long until you return?" William asked.


    "Two weeks, I think. But you can also try your luck and sail with the small boat, though I don''t recommend it. If the weather changes..."


    "We get it," William said. "Thank you for everything."


    The captain prepared a small wooden boat for them to use to reach the island. They would have to row, which wasn''t ideal, but the island was close, which was a plus.


    Visibility was poor. The moonlight wasn''t bright enough to illuminate the area, and the island was completely dark, making it even more challenging.


    Matthew couldn''t see anything, but William could. He was the one giving directions.


    "There''s a small beach there," he said. "We can stop there."


    They stopped the boat, pulling it onto the sand to prevent it from drifting back into the water.


    "So, what do we do now?" Matthew asked.


    The island wasn''t particularly large, but exploring it thoroughly would still take time.


    "Let''s use the cover of darkness to explore some of it. If there are people here, the night will be to our advantage," William said.


    Before leaving the small beach, they dragged the boat into a nearby bush, concealing it with vegetation. Because the island was relatively uninhabited, the vegetation was dense, allowing them to hide it easily.


    Afterward, they left the beach, heading towards the island''s center. The area was quiet but still teeming with life. They spotted a few birds and other small animals on the ground.


    "There are animals here," William said. "In other areas, we only saw beasts. I think this place is safe from them."


    The other parts of the dungeon floor¡ªthe mainland¡ªlacked any animals. The only inhabitants were beasts, killing everything in sight.


    William had only seen animals inside the city, where they raised livestock like cattle, chickens, and pigs, and cultivated crops. Outside the city? Only magical beasts.


    The beasts survived because the place wasn''t natural. They didn''t need to eat. If they died, more beasts would spawn after a while.


    But the island they were on? It was a secluded place without beasts, which allowed animals to thrive.


    "Do you think we''ll encounter anyone here?" Matthew asked.


    He was anxious since he had heard the captain''s account of seeing people. It made the island seem more dangerous.


    William had no idea. He wished he could reassure Matthew that they wouldn''t encounter anyone, but he wasn''t certain.


    Here''s a revised version with improved flow and clarity:


    They didn''t find anyone, but they found something else: a house in the island''s center.


    William was shocked. He stopped walking when he saw the house. The reason was simple: it was no ordinary house.


    Just by looking at it, he knew it was a house from Earth! It had the same architectural style and materials. Not only that, but he even spotted a heliport for a helicopter!


    "What the actual fuck?" he thought.


    How could something like that be there? He was in another world, a fantasy world, and now he was inside a dungeon, a completely different realm he was still trying to understand.


    It made no sense for something like that to exist there. But for the first time, William saw something truly intriguing.


    The other summoned heroes who had come with him¡ªhis former classmates¡ªwere also from Earth, but they had adapted to the new world and had no remnants of their old lives. Hell, they certainly didn''t have a helicopter.


    "What happened? Are you alright?" Matthew asked, noticing William''s worried expression.


    For a moment, he thought William had sensed someone inside.


    "Yeah, yeah," William said. "Let''s explore this house."


    As they approached the house, Matthew also noticed its unusual appearance. It resembled modern houses from Earth.


    Unlike William, however, Matthew had no knowledge of Earth, so it simply seemed different to him.


    "This is such a unique house," he said. "I''ve never seen anything like it. Could it belong to a different race? Perhaps elves?"


    William was fairly certain elves didn''t reside in modern houses, but he agreed with Matthew. "Could be."


    The front door was a towering structure, nearly 10 meters tall. William could only imagine the house belonging to wealthy tech entrepreneurs from Earth.


    His shock intensified when he saw the interior. There was an oven, a microwave, a TV, a shower, and even a laptop.


    William was incredulous.


    "Does this place have electricity and perhaps the internet?" he wondered.


    It was a far-fetched idea, but given what he was seeing, it didn''t seem entirely impossible.


    But who had built this place? And how? William was eager to explore everything.


    "What is this? Do you know?" Matthew asked, pointing at the laptop on the table.


    Before William could respond, he saw two people descending from the house''s second floor. He hadn''t realized they were there.


    It was a couple, a man and a woman, both wearing pajamas common on Earth. When they saw William and Matthew, they looked surprised.


    "More adventurers," the woman said. "They''re coming here often. I think we might have to tighten security."


    "Agreed," the man said. "The dungeon is for them to level up, yet they''re trying to relax in our home... Do you want to erase their memories, or should I?"


    "You do it. I''ll find a movie for us to watch."


    S~ea??h the N??eFire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.

 Chapter 213 - 213: Memory Wipe?

    The man walked toward William and Matthew and waved his hand. With a single wave, Matthew collapsed to the ground.


    "Done, he won''t remember a thing," the man said. "Now it''s your turn."


    William knew he was no match for the man. Just by looking at him, he could tell the man was on an entirely different level.


    In fact, William strongly suspected the man was one of the creators of the dungeon, if not the sole creator. They were even living in a modern house on one of the floors.


    The man repeated the gesture on William. He also fell to the ground. It was as if a force was pinning him down, rendering him immobile.


    William felt a sharp pain in his head, but his memories remained intact. The man couldn''t erase them!


    Matthew was unconscious, so William feigned unconsciousness as well.


    The man snapped his fingers. William and Matthew vanished and reappeared on the beach. But it wasn''t the island''s beach; it was the beach near the city they had visited earlier!


    William stood up, hoisted Matthew onto his shoulders, and headed toward the city. Staying on the beach outside the city would quickly attract monsters.


    The guard at the gate was surprised to see them. He knew they had left with the fishermen, yet the fishermen hadn''t returned.


    "How are you here? I thought you left," the guard said.


    "We did," William replied. "But we were teleported back here. May we come in?"


    The guard quickly opened the gate and closed it behind them. He asked if Matthew was alright. William nodded and continued on.


    He went straight to the restaurant where he had worked and stayed for the past few days. The owner had become a friend.


    Upon seeing Matthew unconscious, the owner looked worried.


    "What happened?"


    "It''s a long story, but he''ll be fine. I just need to put him on a bed." Sear?h the n?vel_Fire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "Sure, sure. Go upstairs."


    William placed Matthew on the bed in his room and waited. Matthew didn''t appear injured, but William knew parts of his memory were gone.


    Which parts had the man erased? Was it everything, or just some things?


    William then heard Asura''s voice in his head.


    "He couldn''t erase your memories, it seems, but he took your rat, Stuart. You didn''t even notice."


    "What?"


    William looked for Stuart, but he was gone. The man had taken the rat.


    A wave of sadness washed over William. He and Stuart had become good friends, but now someone had taken him. He didn''t know what to do.


    "You can''t get him back," Asura said. "That person has god-like powers."


    "Really?"


    He could sense the man''s power, but god-like powers? Who were they? William had many questions, and now, without his dear friend, things had become much worse.


    William waited for Matthew to wake up. Matthew looked confused, his last memory being of them inside the restaurant! He had no recollection of the island.


    "What island?" Matthew said. "I''ve never heard of it."


    The memory wipe had erased everything about the island. William debated whether to tell Matthew the truth.


    In the end, he decided against it. What purpose would it serve? Matthew couldn''t do anything against those people, nor could William.


    So, he fabricated a story about Matthew passing out and needing more rest. Matthew accepted it.


    "I don''t want to slow you down. You can continue to the next floor if you want. I''ll stay here for a while."


    The time for them to part ways had finally arrived. William was conflicted. Matthew was a good person and had been a great help.


    William stayed that night at the restaurant. He planned to leave the following morning, before the fishermen returned and potentially mentioned the island, prompting Matthew to ask questions.


    William left the city at dawn. The lingering sadness weighed heavily on him.


    He wanted to return to the island, find Stuart, and learn more about those people, but he knew it was too dangerous. They would realize the memory wipe had failed and might take more drastic measures, even killing him.


    It was too risky. All William could do was hope Stuart would survive.


    "He''s a cool rat, so maybe they''ll keep him as a pet..." he thought.


    William''s next objective was to find the portal to the next floor. He had no information about its location, so he wandered aimlessly.


    It couldn''t be near the central city where he had first arrived, nor was it near the port city. It had to be somewhere else.


    William hoped to encounter adventurers who might know the portal''s location, but they were scarce.


    The population on that dungeon floor was low. There were those in the fortress, but William was reluctant to return and speak with them.


    His previous visit had been unsettling. They were strange, and after seeing the man with red eyes at night, William didn''t want to risk returning.


    Therefore, he had to search elsewhere.


    The werewolves and werebears continued to attack William. But he was significantly stronger now. With his black fire spells, like the fireball or the black magma floor, he dispatched them easily.


    Once, six beasts attacked him simultaneously! Even for William, this was a challenge. He emerged from the combat with a few scratches and bite marks, but nothing serious.


    William saw only forest, nothing more. But he knew a portal had to be somewhere.


    He spent the entire morning and early afternoon relentlessly fighting monsters while searching for the portal. But late in the afternoon, he found something.


    It wasn''t a portal, but a group of adventurers camping in the middle of the forest.


    A group of three adventurers: all girls. One wore plate armor and wielded a two-handed weapon, while the other two wore robes and carried magical staves.


    William cautiously approached them. When they noticed him, they immediately drew their weapons, preparing to attack. But when they saw he was alone, they relaxed slightly.


    It would have been much worse if he had companions.


    "Hello," William said. "Can you help me?"


    The girl in plate armor stepped forward. "What do you want?"


    She sounded stern, but William didn''t take it personally.


    "I''m looking for the portal to the next dungeon floor. Do you know where it is?" William asked.


    The girls exchanged glances. "We''re also looking for it. Hold on a second."


    They held a quick, hushed conference. William could hear their whispers due to his heightened senses.


    "Do you see how he''s not injured, even traveling alone? I think he''s strong and doesn''t seem evil at all. Maybe we can let him join us."


    "Are you sure? I mean, we''re three, and he''s just one, so we''ll be safe if anything happens."


    "I think it''s a good idea, especially considering the rumors of other evil adventurers in this area. One more person in our group will help a lot."


    William paid attention to their mention of evil adventurers causing trouble.


    "This means the portal is nearby, I think," William thought. "They love to attack people while they fight the boss guarding the portal..."


    It was a hunch, but William believed the portal wasn''t far.


    He waited for about three minutes before the girl in plate armor stepped forward to address him.


    "We''ll allow you to join us in searching for the portal, as it''s vital for us to find a safe floor. So, please, sit with us."


    William sat with them by the campfire.


    "A safe floor? What do you mean?" he asked.


    The girls were surprised. "You don''t know? The next floor isn''t packed with monsters. It''s like a city hub for adventurers. There, you''ll have access to a portal to exit the dungeon if you want, and return to the hub at any time. That''s why getting to that floor is harder."


    William had no idea such a place existed. It sounded too good to be true.


    "That''s awesome! I was thinking of leaving the dungeon for a while, and if we find this next floor, I can do that."


    "We all want to leave for a while too, which is why we''re actively searching for this portal. We want to return to our families for a bit."


    "What region do you all live in?" William asked.


    He assumed the girls were also from the demon kingdom. Jhen had mentioned that there were multiple dungeons across the demon island, so they could be from anywhere.


    But that wasn''t the case. The girls seemed reluctant to answer the question.


    Eventually, one of them said, "We''re from a faraway kingdom. I don''t think you''re from the same place, considering your... attire."


    William could tell they were hesitant to share much information, so he didn''t press them. They had been kind enough to include him in their group, so pushing them was unwise.


    "I see. So, do you have any idea where the portal might be?"


    "We do, yes. Let''s move," the girl in plate armor said.


    They got up and left the camp.

 Chapter 214 - 214: Spotting a New Group

    The monsters appeared shortly after they left the campsite. William was puzzled as to why the monsters hadn''t attacked the girls while they were camped.


    The answer lay in a spell one of the girls possessed. She could conceal her aura and the scent of herself and her companions, rendering them undetectable to the beasts.


    Only by visually spotting them would the beasts know of their presence, but as the beasts often relied on scent to track adventurers, this spell ensured their safety at the campsite.


    William was curious to learn more about the girls, such as their names and their reasons for being in the dungeon. He didn''t manage to get their names, but he did learn their motivations, which were similar to everyone else''s.


    "We just want to become more powerful to protect the ones we love," the girl in robes said. "Isn''t that what everyone wants when they come here?"


    She made a valid point. William himself was there to become stronger. Of course, after encountering those people who seemed to be from Earth, William had another objective: to learn more about them and the dungeon itself.


    One of the best ways to gain insight into the dungeon was to explore it and ascend its floors. Information about the place would gradually come to William if he did that. At least, he hoped that was the case.


    During the battles against the beasts, William was impressed by the girls'' display of skill. It wasn''t that one of them was exceptionally powerful and could handle the monsters single-handedly. Instead, their teamwork was remarkably effective.


    William strongly suspected that the girls had known each other for a long time. They had fought many battles together to achieve such a high level of coordination. It was either that or they were naturally gifted at working as a team.


    He didn''t even have to participate much in the fights if he didn''t want to, but he chose to. The more he helped, the more they would warm up to him. Standing idly by would create a poor impression.


    William felt that building trust with this group was important, given that they seemed to be more knowledgeable than he was about the current floor and the next one.


    Also, they were actively looking for the portal, so they were likely to find it faster than he would alone. William wanted to be included when they found it. He also reasoned, that if they knew about the safe hub on the next floor, then they were likely to be experienced adventurers.


    Because of the party system implemented within the dungeon, William didn''t need to inflict significant damage on the monsters to receive EXP. Therefore, he carefully avoided revealing his full power to the girls.


    As always, William exercised caution. By now, this carefulness had become a core aspect of his personality. He didn''t want to take unnecessary risks, even though he knew he could defeat all the girls simultaneously.


    Eventually, they encountered more than just monsters. They found a road, and on the road, a group of adventurers. There were ten people in total, making it a much larger group.


    "They must be the ones robbing people near the portal," the girl in plate armor said. "This is a good opportunity. If we can follow them without being noticed, we can find the portal''s location." sea??h th§× novel(F~)ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    The three girls and William followed the group of ten at a distance, making sure to stay out of sight. The girl who was able to hide their scent and aura was invaluable at this moment. William was impressed by her skills. He had never seen anyone with such an ability before. He wondered if it was a skill that she had learned, or if it was a natural ability.


    The group of ten adventurers moved quickly, and it was hard for the girls and William to keep up with them. However, they were able to follow them for a few hours. Eventually, the group of ten stopped at a clearing.


    "This must be where they are camping," the girl in plate armor whispered.


    They stopped to camp for the night. William whispered back, "If they''ve stopped here, the portal isn''t close, or they''d be there already. What do we do now? We can''t stay here, or the beasts will find us."


    The situation was tricky. For the group to camp there, they must have something to conceal them, similar to the girl''s ability.


    It was a rare ability, a difficult spell to learn, but potions and artifacts could achieve the same effect. So, that group had something else that could hide them.


    None of the girls knew what to do. The girl in plate armor, who seemed to be the leader, said, "We can''t stay here, but we can''t go far, or we might lose them. So, someone has to stay and watch them."


    It was a valid point. What if the group decided to leave during the night? The chance was low, but it existed, especially if they realized they were being followed.


    But in that group, William was the outsider. If anyone had to stay, it was him. He knew it the moment he heard the leader''s idea.


    "Fine, I''ll stay," he said. "But where are you going? I need to know in case I have to find you, and you need to come here REALLY early."


    "We saw a cave not far from here. We''ll stay there, and don''t worry, we''ll be here early."


    William had to trust the girls, whom he had just met. He was okay with it because the situation didn''t seem dangerous. All he had to do was stay awake in case the group tried to leave during the night.


    They said goodbye, leaving William leaning against a tree, hidden by the vegetation. He had a clear view of the camp, but the chances of a monster showing up were high.


    If he still had Stuart with him, the beasts wouldn''t be a problem. He could just let the rat camouflage him and stay safe. But now his friend was gone, so he had to deal with it alone.


    At first, nothing happened. It seemed the group was simply camping. They were cooking food over the campfire, drinking, talking loudly, and laughing.


    Despite all this, no beasts came to attack them. The smell of food and the noise didn''t attract anything.


    Not to mention, no creatures were going after William either.


    "Is this area safe for some reason, or does their camouflage extend so far that I''m also hidden?" William wondered.


    Those were the only possibilities he could think of.


    Hours passed, and the night progressed uneventfully. But the adventurers didn''t go to sleep early. They stayed up late.


    William felt something was off. He looked at the camp and realized their numbers had decreased. Only six people remained.


    "When did four of them leave?" William thought.


    He had been watching the camp for hours. How did they leave without him noticing?


    Then a shiver ran down his spine. He knew something was wrong. William quickly turned around, spotting four people behind him. They were the adventurers who had recently left the camp.


    "Move, and go to the camp," one of them said, "or we will attack you."


    The adventurers had all sorts of weapons aimed at William: a bow, swords, and a person capable of casting powerful long-range spells.


    William could try to run, but it would be difficult in that situation. He complied and moved toward the camp.


    The rest of the adventurers didn''t seem surprised to see him. They already knew someone was watching them.


    "We knew you were there from the start," a man with a scar on his face said. "What do you think of our play? Did we act well?"


    William smiled. "That was a pretty good act, but why? I meant no harm. I was just using the camouflage of your camp to rest."


    The man laughed. "Do you think we''re dumb? If that were the case, you wouldn''t be watching us like that. What do you really want? Are you with those girls who came earlier?"


    They already knew about the girls! Apparently, their camouflage wasn''t that great. In fact, it wasn''t the camouflage that was bad, but that group of adventurers had someone who could scout incredibly well. It was hard to hide from them.


    "I just want to know where the portal to the next floor is," William said. "I know we can find ways to work together, right? There''s no need for a fight."


    The man, who was apparently the leader, agreed. "You''re right. But first, give us everything you have, all your items and money, and then bow to us and pledge your life. Then we might talk."


    William frowned. There was no way in the world he would do something like that. The man was crazy to even suggest it.


    He preferred to fight and risk his life than comply.


    "Are you being serious?" William asked.


    "Of course, I am. We''re not clowns."


    "But you''ll be corpses if you continue with this nonsense," William said. "Do you really think I''d be watching you if I wasn''t confident in killing all of you? As a matter of fact, it''s been a while since I last killed someone."


    A lust for blood surged within William. He wanted to kill those men.

 Chapter 215 - 215: Killing Some

    The group of adventurers burst into laughter. They simply couldn''t imagine a world where a single man could defeat all ten of them.


    "Are you all right?" the leader asked, his voice tinged with concern. "You might be mentally ill or something..."


    William already knew they wouldn''t believe him. Who would? But the best way to convince them was to show them.


    He wanted to demonstrate his power¡ªand end their lives¡ªlike specks of dust swept away by the wind.


    The very first thing William did was activate his Demonic Transformation: Stage One.


    [+200 to all attributes]


    [+50% damage to all demonic spells]


    [+120% healing speed]


    Now that he had been absorbing far more demonic energy, his transformation had evolved. The sheer number of attributes he gained was astonishing, altering him completely.


    But his powers weren''t the only thing that had changed¡ªhis appearance had as well.


    His eyes were now completely black, and a dark energy surrounded his body, like a black, living goo writhing around him. The veins on his face and body had turned black, bulging ominously, giving him a disturbingly eerie look.


    "What the fuck is that?!" one of the adventurers yelled.


    No one had ever seen anything like it. William didn''t even reach for his sword¡ªhe didn''t need to. He could handle them without it.


    The black goo twisted and morphed into the shape of a claw around his hand, and in an instant, he dashed toward them. His first targets were the ones closest to him¡ªthe group that had found him by the tree.


    One of the men attempted to block him with a two-handed sword, but it was futile. William was simply too fast. Too strong. S~ea??h the NovelFire.net* website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    His claw tore through the man''s arm, sending it flying to the side.


    "Agghhh¡ª"


    A scream of agony¡ªcut short when William severed his head in one swift motion. But he didn''t stop. There were more. And he was coming for them too.


    With an extra 200 points to all attributes, his agility had reached terrifying heights.


    The adventurers couldn''t keep up with him.


    When the leader realized things were going south, he shouted, "Someone immobilize him! Use your control spells!"


    William heard the command and instantly changed targets. He dashed toward the man holding a staff¡ªhe looked like the type who would have a crowd-control spell.


    "No!"


    The man begged as he saw William closing in at terrifying speed, but it didn''t matter. William''s claw sliced through him, cutting him clean in half.


    He killed two more after that. In mere seconds, he had taken down four of the ten adventurers.


    The leader, despite his pride, surrendered. He commanded the remaining members to kneel before William and beg for their lives.


    "We give up! We''ll do anything you want¡ªjust please, don''t kill us," the leader pleaded.


    William stared at them, listening to the fear in their voices, seeing it in their eyes. They sounded sincere.


    So, he deactivated his demonic transformation.


    "Good. Now, do you have a place for me to stay the night?"


    "Of course! You can have my tent," the leader said hurriedly. "It''s the best one here."


    They were already treating William as their new leader¡ªwhich, in a way, he was.


    Before heading to his tent, he gathered everyone near the campfire. There were questions he needed answers to.


    "Do you know where the portal is?" he asked.


    The remaining adventurers exchanged nervous glances before turning to their leader¡ªtheir former leader¡ªwaiting for him to respond.


    "We do," he admitted. "That''s where we usually go to ambush people fighting the creature guarding the portal."


    Everything was much better now that William had taken control of the group. It was easier to ask them questions directly rather than having to spy on them or follow them.


    "I want to go there," William said. "Me and a group of girls. We just want to reach the next floor, which, from what I''ve heard, is a hub where adventurers can rest. Is that true?"


    It wasn''t that he doubted what the girls had told him¡ªhe just wanted to be sure. And since these men were terrified of him, they were willing to tell him everything he wanted to know.


    "It''s a hub. The place is basically a city with places to eat, sleep, and train. You can also travel freely to any floor you''ve already cleared. The next hub is five floors up, and from what people say, a hub appears every five levels."


    William was intrigued. He wanted to learn more about the dungeon and the people who had created it.


    "I see. Can we reach it tomorrow, or is it far?"


    "We can."


    "Good."


    He ordered them to make something for him to eat¡ªwatching them carefully to make sure nothing suspicious happened¡ªthen went to his tent.


    With his current power, he could sense their movements. If anyone tried to leave or make a move against him, he would know.


    He expected them to try something. No one would just accept a situation like this without resistance. But they didn''t.


    After what they had witnessed¡ªafter seeing William cut their comrades in half¡ªthey weren''t willing to take that risk.


    The following morning, William ordered the adventurers to get rid of the bodies. He didn''t want the girls to arrive and see the aftermath¡ªthat might make them look at him differently.


    He explained this to the old leader, who agreed without hesitation. Together, the group worked to dispose of the corpses.


    When the girls arrived, they expected to find William hiding behind the trees and bushes, watching the adventurers from a distance.


    But instead, they saw him standing among them, as if he were part of the group.


    At first, they thought he had been captured, but he wasn''t tied up or restrained in any way.


    "Is he alright in there?" the girl in plate armor asked, uncertainty in her voice.


    "It does seem like he''s alright," the other girl said.


    William was casually chatting with the adventurers, and when the girls saw that, they knew he was fine.


    They moved toward the camp. When William noticed them, he called out, "Hey, I''m here."


    The girl in plate armor still felt uneasy. What if this was all an act? What if the adventurers were just waiting for them to get close before launching an attack?


    It was only after speaking with William that the girls finally relaxed, realizing everything was truly fine.


    "I decided to come here and talk to them," William explained. "They''re willing to help us get to the portal. They aren''t as bad as the rumors say. Maybe those stories aren''t even true."


    The former leader nodded eagerly. "Yeah. People spread a lot of false rumors around here. Sure, we''ve stolen a few times, but we never killed anyone. And we''re trying to stop stealing, too."


    "I see," the girl in plate armor said. "So, when are we leaving?"


    "Now," William replied.


    Before departing, they gathered everything from the camp. Someone had to carry the backpacks, tent kits, and tools¡ªnaturally, the adventurers took care of that. William had no intention of carrying anything himself.


    "The portal isn''t far from here," William said as they walked along the road, "but I found out some interesting things."


    He explained about the other hubs and how they appeared every five levels. The girls looked surprised, but William could tell their reactions were fake.


    He wasn''t stupid.


    "So, they already knew about that," he thought.


    They had this information yet never mentioned it to him, which meant they were likely hiding even more.


    One of the best parts of traveling with the adventurers was that no beasts attacked them. The former leader explained why.


    "We have an artifact that hides our scent and aura, so the only beasts we have to face are the ones that actually see us. Of course, we can always turn it off if we need to level up," he said.


    It was a powerful artifact. For a moment, William considered taking it for himself¡ªstealing it from the man¡ªbut he didn''t. They had been useful, at least after he killed a few of them, and because of that, he decided to let it be.


    After three hours of walking, they finally reached the portal. The sun was still low in the sky.


    Standing near the portal was a massive creature. It resembled the werewolves they had encountered throughout the floor, but this one was different. It was enormous in every way¡ªtaller, heavier, more imposing. And it had three heads.


    The beast looked like some kind of Cerberus.


    William could feel the raw power radiating from it. This wasn''t a weak opponent.


    "Have you ever fought this thing before?" he asked the former leader.


    "No, never," the man admitted. "This creature is ridiculously strong. Most of the time, we only enter the hub when a powerful adventurer comes by and takes it down. Honestly, that''s what most people on this floor do."


    It seemed that the guardian creatures protecting the portal to each hub¡ªwhether this one or the ones appearing every five levels¡ªwere significantly stronger than typical bosses.


    William''s blood pumped with excitement. He was eager to fight it.

 Chapter 216 - 216: Fighting the Three Headed Wolf

    While William was eager to fight the creature, the girls looked uneasy.


    "I don''t know if we can win against that thing," one of them said. "Maybe we should wait for someone stronger to come along."


    The adventurers under William''s command shared the same concern. None of them wanted to take the risk.


    William, however, was the only one excited for the battle.


    "But I want to fight it," he said. "You can stay here and keep watch¡ªmake sure no one else tries to ambush me."


    His group wasn''t the only one lurking in the area, preying on adventurers. If he engaged the boss, there was a high chance another group might show up to take advantage of the situation.


    But with his team guarding his back, he could focus entirely on the fight ahead.


    "Are you sure you want to try it?" the girl in plate armor asked. "This is no ordinary monster."


    The girls doubted William had the strength to face such a beast. But the adventurers who''d seen him fight the night before? They trusted him completely.


    "I think you can defeat it," the ex-leader said. "In fact, I believe it might be an easy fight for you¡ªif you use your powers."


    The girls exchanged confused glances. What exactly was he implying? S§×arch* The N??eFire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    William understood perfectly. The ex-leader was suggesting that William would have to unleash some of his powers to defeat the Cerberus.


    The adventurers had already witnessed his demonic transformation¡ªonly the girls had not.


    "I probably won''t see them again," William thought. "And it''s not like they can do anything with the knowledge of my power¡­"


    In the end, William decided to go for it and try his luck. If he succeeded in killing the boss creature, he''d not only earn a lot of EXP but maybe even some valuable items too!


    William walked toward the creature, and everyone else stayed behind, keeping a careful watch over him. The Cerberus stood inside a ruined stone church, blocking the portal. When William stepped forward, the beast roared, but it didn''t move. It had the same behavior as those bosses in video games that don''t leave their designated area.


    "I need to provoke it to start the fight," William thought. "Just like in a game."


    William braced himself as the Cerberus charged. Despite its massive size, the creature moved with terrifying speed, closing the distance in an instant. A massive claw lashed out, aiming straight for his throat.


    Reacting on instinct, William raised his sword just in time to block the strike¡ªbut the sheer force behind the blow sent him flying! His back slammed into the cold stone wall of the ruined church.


    "Damn it," he muttered under his breath.


    The impact stung, but he''d taken worse. More importantly, he had learned something¡ªthis beast was far stronger than any enemy he''d faced before.


    Still, he wanted to see if he could win without using his full demonic transformation. That would be a challenge, but maybe¡ªjust maybe¡ªit was possible.


    He pushed himself to his feet and quickly started casting. Dark energy swirled around his left hand, growing denser until a massive black fireball hovered above it.


    From a distance, the girl in plate armor''s eyes widened. "What is that? The energy coming from it is insane!"


    Even from far away, the group could feel the sheer intensity of the magic. William had perfected this attack¡ªit was one of his most powerful.


    With a sharp motion, he hurled the fireball toward the Cerberus. The black flames shot through the air like a meteor, but the beast wasn''t foolish enough to take the hit head-on. It leaped to the side with surprising agility.


    Still, the fireball managed to graze its right arm, and the moment it did, the beast let out a deafening roar. The dark flames seared its flesh, leaving a charred wound. The damage was minor, but it was something.


    William used the brief moment to activate his body-enhancing spells. His magic surged through his veins:


    Swiftfoot¡ªAgility +50, movement speed increased by 30%.


    Enhanced Strength¡ªRaw power increased, Strength +70.


    These buffs wouldn''t last forever, and they drained a huge chunk of his mana. His mana pool had never been his strongest attribute¡ªactually, it was his weakest.


    Ever since his demonic powers had awakened, he noticed his mana was slowly being replaced. It was vanishing, gradually being converted into something else¡ªdemonic essence.


    Unlike mana, demonic essence was a more potent, refined energy, but it came with a cost: he couldn''t use both at the same time.


    It was as if his very existence was shifting. He wasn''t just learning to use demonic powers¡ªhe was becoming something different.


    And now, as he faced the monstrous three-headed Cerberus, he wondered¡­


    Would his human side be enough to win this fight?


    The Cerberus roared again, but this time, it was different. Energy appeared in three different locations¡ªa reddish type of mana.


    Then, from the areas with this mana, werewolves emerged! The Cerberus had just summoned minions to help him in the fight.


    Not only that, but those werewolves were clearly stronger than the ones William had faced throughout the floor.


    The fight was not looking good for him, but he didn''t panic. The first werewolf came running toward him while the other two circled around him.


    William dashed forward. Letting the werewolves trap him in a circle was not a good idea. He wanted to push forward and kill at least one of them.


    With Asura in hand, he quickly got close to the werewolf. Dark energy surrounded the sword, and when it struck the werewolf''s chest, it burned him¡ªsimilar to his fireball!


    A massive cut opened in the werewolf''s chest. The creature stopped moving and collapsed, almost lifeless.


    "Incredible!" the girls said.


    The adventurers weren''t that surprised, having already witnessed William''s power the other night.


    When William looked up at the Cerberus, he saw the creature''s mouth inflating as it gathered a massive amount of energy.


    It was preparing an attack¡ªa powerful one at that. A magma fireball came flying toward him.


    It was fast, but that wasn''t even the worst part. The worst part was its size¡ªit was big enough to engulf the entire church.


    William had nowhere to hide or run. He looked up, spotting a stone pillar he could jump to. Summoning all the strength in his legs, he leaped!


    He felt the heat and saw the fireball passing beneath him, but in the end, it didn''t hit him.


    It was close. When William saw the destruction caused by the attack¡ªburning everything it touched¡ªhe was relieved that it hadn''t hit him.


    The girls and adventurers watching the fight had been terrified for a moment, but they sighed in relief after seeing how swiftly William had avoided the attack.


    While the battle raged on, something else occurred. Another group of people arrived. But unlike those who tried to steal or kill others during boss fights, they had a different goal¡ªthey just wanted to reach the portal.


    "Someone is finally fighting the Cerberus," a man said. "I was starting to worry we might never reach the hub."


    "Who are you?" the girl in plate armor asked, her hand resting on the hilt of her sword.


    She had promised to protect William while he fought the Cerberus. The adventurers under William''s command also placed their hands on their weapons, ready to defend him.


    The man noticed their tension and raised his hands. "Calm down. I''m just here to use the portal, nothing more. I''m not one of those bastards who steal from people."


    The ex-leader of the bandits felt guilty hearing that, but he remained silent.


    "We''ll keep an eye on you and your group," the girl in plate armor said.


    The man had arrived with two others. They didn''t seem evil, but one could never be too careful.


    "No problem," the man said. "I''ll stay here and watch with you."


    William could see the crowd forming to watch his fight. He didn''t like it.


    "I just want to fight in peace, and now this has turned into a damn show¡­ It''s reminding me of when I had to fight for that bastard noble," he thought.


    The Cerberus didn''t attack again. From his vantage point on the stone pillar, William noticed that the beast looked more exhausted than usual.


    "That attack drained him!" he realized.


    That magma fireball had been incredibly powerful, but it wasn''t something the Cerberus could use repeatedly. It had been one of its strongest moves.


    William couldn''t waste this opportunity. He jumped from the stone pillar and attacked the Cerberus with everything he had.


    Demonic energy surged around Asura, making the sword appear even larger. It transformed into a massive black blade, nearly five meters in length!


    Despite its enormous size, the sword felt light in his hands. William swung it with full force, aiming at one of the Cerberus''s heads.


    The blade cleaved through cleanly, severing the head with ease and cutting even deeper into the beast''s body. The demonic energy burned through the creature''s flesh, just as it had with the weaker werewolves.


    Speaking of them, two werewolves still remained. But William wasn''t concerned. Without hesitation, he leaped back and struck them down in quick succession. Neither could withstand a single blow from his sword.


    The Cerberus, on the other hand, got angry after losing one of his heads. His eyes were red and bloodthirst, and William knew the real fight was just beginning.

 Chapter 217 - 217: End of the Fight

    The creature, after losing one of its heads, did not weaken¡ªinstead, it grew stronger. Its anger transformed into raw power, and William could sense the shift in its aura.


    "It''s stronger now," he thought, tightening his grip on his sword.


    Before he could react, the Cerberus lunged toward him. Mid-charge, it unleashed another ability. Its claws ignited with molten fire, turning them into even deadlier weapons.


    But that wasn''t all. Its saliva now dripped with a potent venom, capable of inflicting severe damage if it managed to sink its fangs into him.


    "Should we help him?" the girl in plate armor asked.


    She had been observing the battle, and like William, she sensed the shift in the Cerberus''s aura the moment it roared after losing its head. The other adventurers noticed it too.


    "Let him handle it," the former leader said. "He insisted on fighting alone¡ªwe should respect that."


    While the women hadn''t witnessed William''s full strength, the ex-leader had. The memory of that night¡ªwhen William had cut down several of his comrades¡ªstill sent shivers down his spine.


    Deep down, he knew that if William fought at his full potential, the Cerberus stood no chance.


    William was aware of this as well. Yet, he refused to rely on his transformation¡ªnot out of secrecy (he no longer cared about hiding his abilities), but because he didn''t want to grow dependent on it.


    Constant reliance on that power would make him weaker in the long run. What he truly sought was to refine his control over his black fire spells and sharpen his other combat skills.


    When the imposing Cerberus charged with its fire-clad claws, William met it head-on. With Asura in hand, he slashed against the beast''s attack.


    A relentless exchange of blows followed. They clashed multiple times within seconds, dashing around the abandoned stone church.


    Neither could land a solid hit. William''s sword met the Cerberus''s claws in rapid succession, turning the fight into a battle of endurance.


    Who would tire first? Who would make the first mistake?


    At first, William felt confident. His stamina held up well against the monster''s relentless assault. In fact, he sensed that he had more endurance than the Cerberus. If the battle continued at this pace, he would eventually win.


    Or so he thought.


    His body-enhancing spells abruptly wore off. They didn''t last forever, and the fight had been going on for a while.


    But that wasn''t the only problem.


    The Cerberus was growing stronger as the fight dragged on, as if it were entering a battle trance.


    Then it happened.


    William got hit.


    The fiery claws tore across his chest, shredding his clothes and leaving a deep, searing wound. His skin melted under the attack, exposing burned flesh beneath.


    The pain was excruciating. Even with his formidable body, the damage was severe. If it had been a more fragile mage, the wound could have been fatal.


    "He got hit," one of the girls gasped.


    Everyone watching tensed up. They were all rooting for William to win.


    Even the newly arrived adventurers, the ones who needed the portal open, hoped for his victory. Their entry into the hub depended on it.


    "What should I do now?" William thought, staring at his injury.


    If things continued as they were, the battle wouldn''t end in his favor. For a brief moment, he considered using his demonic transformation.


    But then something unexpected happened.


    The System notified him of a sudden activation of his strange snake bloodline, unlocking its full potential due to the critical damage he had sustained.


    [Vital attack received, bloodline activated]


    [Increased healing speed +400%]


    A surge of healing power coursed through him. The pain dulled instantly. His wound began closing at an astonishing speed, visibly regenerating before his eyes. Even his stamina was rapidly replenishing.


    He had no idea how long this boost would last, but he intended to make full use of it.


    "It''s time for a suicidal attack!" he thought.


    Gripping Asura tightly, William charged at the Cerberus. He abandoned all attempts at defense. His sole focus was dealing damage.


    When the Cerberus slashed at his left arm, he didn''t evade. He let the claws tear into him, but in return, he delivered a devastating slash.


    Asura''s cut burned through the beast''s flesh, inflicting immense pain.


    The last time he struck, a single slash had decapitated one of the monster''s heads. His attacks carried overwhelming force.


    "What''s he doing?" the adventurers murmured in shock.


    Every time the Cerberus landed a hit, William retaliated with equal or greater ferocity.


    At first, the onlookers thought he had gone mad. But soon, they realized the brilliance of his strategy.


    William''s wounds healed faster than the Cerberus''s.


    Blow after blow, the creature bled more profusely. It grew visibly weaker. Meanwhile, William remained standing, his body seemingly untouched by the battle.


    It was as if he hadn''t even been fighting.


    When the Cerberus realized this¡ªand it was no fool¡ªits fiery rage began to wane. The desperate will to fight was replaced with an undeniable truth.


    It had lost.


    William, seeing the chance to win appear before his eyes, attacked with even more ferocity than before and eventually killed the Cerberus.


    [+3 levels]


    [Drops: Cerberus Head, Cerberus Claws, Magma Tome]


    Not only did he gain three levels, but he also obtained a few items, which seemed incredibly valuable.


    He collapsed to the ground after killing the creature, finally resting after such a long fight. His bloodline began to wear off, and now, instead of feeling refreshed, he was overwhelmed with exhaustion.


    Everyone who had been watching the fight ran toward William to check on him. The adventurers who were there just to use the portal simply thanked him after seeing he was all right and then passed through it.


    As for the girls, they stayed behind, waiting for him to recover. The adventurers under his command did the same, afraid that he might do something to them.


    Only after ten minutes did he recover enough to stand up. He thanked everyone for their support.


    "Thank you for watching my back," he said. "We can enter the hub together now."


    "The people in this hub will get scared when they see you," the girl in plate armor said. "You look like shit."


    William''s clothes were torn apart, and he was covered in blood. It was as if his skin had turned red!


    Although his wounds had healed, the blood remained, making him look terrifying.


    "I hope there''s a good shower there¡ªand a place to buy some clothes too," William said.


    They stepped through the portal together. The same old feeling of traveling through portals¡ªnothing new to William.


    But what they saw on the other side? That was new.


    An entire city, but unlike other cities, there were no ordinary citizens. The only people there were adventurers!


    They came from all sorts of floors. Some were from much higher floors than William, yet they still stayed in this hub to rest. S§×arch* The n??el Fire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    There were shops, places to eat, events organized by adventurers, and much more.


    What was truly fascinating, however, was how safe the city was. It had a wall, yet no gate¡ªno one could leave.


    As for the guards? They were stronger than anything William had ever seen. They simply stood there, moving only if someone tried to start a fight or kill inside the hub.


    "This is incredible," he said. "I didn''t think there would be so many people in this place."


    The number of adventurers walking through the hub was surprisingly high, making William wonder if they were all from Demon Island.


    At first, he had believed they were, based on what Jhen had said. But the girls he had met didn''t look like the typical citizens of Demon Island. And now, seeing such a diverse crowd, William was starting to think there was more to this place than he had initially assumed.


    But for now, it was just a guess.


    "This is our first time here too," one of the girls said. "I thought it would be much smaller."


    Everyone was eager to explore, and it was time for them to part ways. William and the girls had worked together to find the portal, but now, each of them had their own path to follow.


    As for the adventurers William had encountered¡ªthe ones from the group he had killed a few of¡ªthey still wanted to work for him.


    Apparently, the fear he had instilled in them was so overwhelming that they were too afraid to leave, even after he told them they were free to do whatever they wanted.


    "We want to work for you," the ex-leader said. "This is our first time in the hub, but we''re pretty good at gathering information. We can find out anything you need to know, master."


    William was pleased. "Now that I think about it, you could be really useful in this place. Alright, go and gather as much information as you can. In the meantime, I''ll be cleaning myself up and getting some new clothes."

 Chapter 218 - 218: New Information about the King

    The shops in the city were also run by adventurers. William realized this after speaking with the owner of a clothing store.


    "It''s a good way to earn some cash without risking our lives every day," the shop owner said. "You know, people get their clothes ripped apart quite often inside the dungeon."


    It was a smart business niche. William noticed that the shop owner was quite open to conversation about various topics, so he decided to ask a few more questions.


    What he really wanted to know was whether all the adventurers in the dungeon were from Demon Island.


    They were not.


    The shop owner, to William''s surprise, was from the same kingdom he had been in¡ªthe one where Professor James resided and where the king was gravely ill.


    "The place I come from is the Black Flame Kingdom," the shop owner said with a sigh. "But things aren''t looking great."


    William was shocked to hear that. He needed to know more.


    "Is the king still alive? I know he''s ill," William asked.


    The shop owner looked at him in surprise. "How do you know that? Not many people are aware of the kingdom''s situation. I only know because I hold a high position in the army."


    "I was tasked with gathering the ingredients for the antidote to cure the king," William explained. "But¡­ things happened, and now I''m on a different continent."


    He deliberately avoided mentioning Demon Island. That place carried a heavy stigma¡ªmost people believed demons were long extinct and wanted nothing to do with them.


    "Really? They sent a group to find you a few months ago," the man said. "I can return and tell them you''re alive!"


    William was relieved to have a way to let people know he was still alive. But what did that change? There was no way they could find the entrance to Demon Island.


    "Can I go back with you or not?" William asked.


    "No, unfortunately, you can''t¡­ You can only return through the same portal you used to enter. The only way back would be for you to return to the Black Flame Kingdom and use the same portal I did," the man explained.


    "Damn it," William muttered.


    "So where exactly are you? I can try to give them some directions," the man offered.


    William couldn''t give them an exact location, but maybe a general area would be enough. If they got close, all he could do was leave Demon Island and find them.


    So, he described his whereabouts, mentioning the continent with the desert at its center and how he was far to the north, near a remote area.


    When the man asked why he had gone so far north instead of staying in the central region to earn enough for a ship and crew¡ªone of his original plans¡ªWilliam explained that he had been captured and sold as a slave, which had complicated things.


    The man sympathized, giving him a reassuring pat on the back and offering a few kind words.


    "I''ll pass all of that on to the people in charge. And¡­ who else did you say?"


    "James. Professor James. He was staying in the palace with the king."


    "Alright, I''ll let him know too. Look, you don''t have to pay for the clothes, and if you ever need anything, you can always find me here at the shop or at the Honeymoon Tavern," the man said.


    The man seemed like a decent person who genuinely wanted to help. In fact, he had gotten quite excited upon learning that William was also from the Black Flame Kingdom.


    "And how bad is the king?" William asked.


    At that question, the man''s expression darkened. "Really bad. And that''s not the only problem. The Sartana Kingdom is winning the war, and apparently, a neighboring kingdom summoned heroes or something a while ago."


    The Sartana Kingdom had been at war with the Black Flame Kingdom since the time William first arrived, but back then, neither side had the upper hand. That had apparently changed.


    The summoned heroes were also a concern. According to the shopkeeper, the kingdom that summoned them wasn''t planning to use their power to fight against the dark forces threatening the world. Instead, they intended to use them to conquer other kingdoms.


    It was the first time someone had thought of using the summoned heroes that way. William pictured Master Elric in his mind and found himself unsurprised¡ªhe had always suspected the man''s intentions weren''t entirely noble.


    Things were not looking good for the Black Flame Kingdom, and the fact that William couldn''t do anything to help only made it worse.


    His thoughts drifted to Gorn and his family, likely suffering because of the war. And what about all the other small villages that had no way to defend themselves against the enemy?


    After getting his new clothes¡ªfur ones, since that was the shop''s specialty¡ªand taking a much-needed shower in the store''s bathroom, William stepped out feeling somewhat refreshed. Sear?h the N?velFire(.)net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    The shop owner locked up behind him. "I''ll go tell them everything we talked about as soon as I can. Tomorrow, I''ll be back, so stay in the hub if you can."


    The man left, and shortly after, William met up with his thugs. They had some news.


    "Apparently, there''s a building we need to visit to get our enchanted rings," one of them said. "They allow us to use the other gates in this place, so we can travel between floors we''ve already cleared."


    With the ring, William would be able to move freely between the floors he had passed through¡ªincluding back to the Demon Island, since that was the portal he had originally used.


    However, even with the ring, it was impossible for him to leave through other portals, like the one the shop owner would use to return to the Black Flame Kingdom.


    The dungeon''s mechanics were baffling. William still remembered the people on the island¡ªthe ones who looked eerily similar to humans from Earth. Could they have been the ones who built this entire place?


    What was he missing? Deep down, he knew it would take a long, long time to uncover the truth.


    For now, all he wanted to do was find the tavern the shop owner had mentioned and wait for him to return the next day¡­


    The Honeymoon Tavern was well-known in the hub, and its prices weren''t exactly cheap.


    The good news? The dungeon had its own currency¡ªcoins that dropped from the monsters adventurers killed inside!


    William hadn''t known that. The system never notified him about earning coins, but when he checked his inventory, they were there.


    Relief washed over him. He had killed a lot of monsters during his time in the dungeon, and slaying the Cerberus had rewarded him with plenty more. He had more than enough to last for a long time.


    "With such an easy way to earn coins, why do people even bother setting up shops here?" he wondered.


    Adventurers set up shops mainly to pass the time and earn currency from others in exchange for their services. It was a way to make money while resting in the city¡ªafter all, no one could fight endlessly.


    William booked a room for a few days. As soon as he entered the tavern, all eyes turned to him. It wasn''t every day that a new face appeared in the hub, so the adventurers were naturally curious about his identity.


    No one approached him, though. Ignoring the stares, William headed straight upstairs to his room.


    The accommodations were surprisingly luxurious¡ªa king-sized bed, a plush fur rug beside it, a spacious desk, and even a private bathroom.


    It was far better than most of the taverns William had stayed in, further proving just how well-built the entire hub was.


    After resting in his room for a few hours, he headed out to grab something to eat and explore the rest of the hub.


    One particular building caught his attention¡ªa massive castle situated in the upper part of the hub. Given that most establishments were run by adventurers, William couldn''t help but wonder who had the power and influence to own a fortress like that.


    As he approached, he quickly realized that the castle was heavily fortified. A towering wall surrounded it, blocking any view of what lay inside. Powerful-looking guards stood watch, preventing anyone from getting too close.


    "This is a prohibited area," one of the guards said in a robotic tone. "You can''t enter."


    "Who lives here?" William asked.


    The guard scoffed. "The ruler of the hub, who else? Now get lost."


    William couldn''t stop thinking about that response.


    "The ruler of the hub¡­ Could it be them?"


    Memories of the strange people he had seen on that island flashed through his mind.


    William couldn''t think of anyone else who could be the rulers of the hub. Were they inside that castle, watching everything from above, laughing at the clueless adventurers who had no idea what was really going on?


    A chill ran down his spine. He took a step back, knowing there was no point in challenging the guards. Their power was on an entirely different level. Even if every adventurer in the hub joined forces against a single one of them, they would still be utterly crushed.


    With no other option, William turned away, feeling frustrated. He returned to his room, pushing aside his swirling thoughts. There was nothing he could do now.


    Tomorrow, he would meet with the shop owner again. Maybe then, he''d have a better idea of how to move forward.

 Chapter 219 - 219: Leaving the Dungeon, for a while

    The next day, William waited for the shop owner to return. He stood by the Honeymoon Tavern, the place where the man had told him to find him, and also waited near his shop. Nothing.


    William even asked people around to see if anyone knew about him, or if it was common for him to be late or away for a few days.


    "He usually comes back every day," an adventurer said. "You should just wait for him, yeah."


    The way the adventurer said it made it sound like William was just being impatient, wanting the shop owner to return on his terms. But hours passed, and the man never showed up.


    The entire day passed. Nothing.


    The next day, William waited again. Still, nothing.


    Three more days went by. William spent his time in the Honeymoon Tavern, using the money he had to sleep comfortably, eat well, and even buy a few small things. Waiting there wasn''t exactly troublesome, at least not in a material sense.


    But the shop owner never returned.


    William already knew something had happened to him. Either the man had been telling the truth and something bad had befallen him, or he wasn''t who he claimed to be, and now William might be in trouble.


    Either way, it was time for him to leave the hub. To leave the dungeon.


    He made his way to the building the thugs had mentioned before.


    The place had a strange atmosphere. The kind that made it clear that not all transactions here were entirely honest. The moment William stepped inside, he was greeted by a rough-looking man with a calculating stare.


    After paying a fee to this man, he received a ring¡ªone that allowed him to travel through the dungeon floors he had already explored. A useful tool.


    Before leaving, William decided to ask about something else.


    "Hey, I have a few items that I need to identify," he said. "Can you do it, or is there someone in this hub who can?"


    He was referring to the items dropped from the Cerberus. He had tried using them or even checking their properties, but the System had refused, saying they required identification. And for that, one needed a specific class.


    With so many shops around, William had been confident there would be someone here who could do it.


    "Sorry, mate," the man replied. "We had someone before, but they left. Probably living in another hub now. You know, it''s rare to find someone who can actually identify items."


    William frowned slightly. That wasn''t the answer he wanted to hear.


    "If you really want those items checked, your best bet is to keep exploring the dungeon and find that guy yourself," the man continued. "Chances of someone else showing up here with that ability? Close to zero. So if you''re thinking about waiting, I wouldn''t recommend it."


    William sighed. It wasn''t ideal, but at least he had an answer.


    "Thanks," he said, before turning to leave.


    With the ring now in his possession, he activated it.


    A system pop-up appeared before his eyes. A glowing menu, showing a list of every floor he had been to, along with the option to return to the entrance. However, there was a restriction¡ªhe could only return to the entrance he had originally used.


    He selected it.


    A portal materialized before him, swirling with energy.


    William stepped through.


    A second later, he was back at the dungeon''s entrance.


    The usual guards were there. When they saw how William had returned, their eyes widened in shock.


    It wasn''t every day that someone reached the first hub, obtained a teleportation ring, and then made their way back alone.


    "You did it, William," one of the guards said. "Jhen wasn''t joking when she said you were a badass!"


    Jhen had made sure all the guards respected him. She had been telling them for days now that he was strong and not someone to be underestimated.


    William smiled. It felt good to be welcomed back like this.


    "She''s just being nice," he said, shaking his head. "I''m not that great."


    Then, as he walked past them, he made a small gesture with his hand.


    "Thanks for your service."


    The guards exchanged glances, clearly pleased. It wasn''t often that people acknowledged their work. Most adventurers barely looked at them, treating them as background decorations rather than actual people.


    "Have a good night, William," one of them said.


    "You too! And make sure to rest well and eat something good when you''re off duty."


    William then set off toward the village where Jhen and Victoria were staying.


    The path wasn''t far, and despite the late hour, the area was relatively safe. The occasional torch lit the way, casting flickering shadows across the ground.


    Most villagers were already asleep, preparing for another day of work. But a few were still awake.


    And when they saw William?


    Their eyes widened. Some even froze in place.


    They knew he had gone into the dungeon. And since he hadn''t returned for days, many had assumed the worst. Most people simply had no idea how powerful he actually was.


    When he reached the house where Jhen and Victoria were staying, the door swung open before he could even knock.


    Victoria stood there. And the moment she saw him, she moved.


    She hugged him.


    "Finally, you''re back," she murmured, holding him tight. "You can''t just disappear for that long and not send us news."


    "I couldn''t return before reaching the first hub," William said. "That''s why it took so long."


    Jhen, who stood beside Victoria, smirked. "I told her that, but she missed you too much to listen."


    Victoria immediately turned red. She let go of him and quickly found an excuse to leave.


    "I¡ªI''ll shower."


    It was an obvious excuse.


    Jhen, chuckling, went to prepare tea.


    They sat near the fireplace, sipping their drinks, the warmth of the flames a welcome contrast to the cold night air.


    "How''s the situation around here?" William asked.


    "Problematic," Jhen admitted, taking another sip. "The beasts are coming from another direction now, and the bandits are more active. But for now, no one has tried to take over our village."


    William frowned. "Monsters from another direction?"


    "Yes. I think there might be another dungeon entrance we don''t know about. But honestly? I have no idea."


    She paused before adding, "I thought this region would be worse, but we''re managing. What about you? How was the dungeon?"


    William told her everything.


    The battles, the things he saw, and especially the shop owner''s disappearance.


    At this point, everyone already knew he was an outsider, so there was no harm in mentioning that he came from the Black Flame Kingdom.


    And when Jhen heard about the king¡ªthe one who was ill and dying¡ªher expression darkened.


    "We might have to act faster than we thought," she said. "If the nobles take full control, things will get even worse."


    At first, she had wanted William to rule that place. But deep down, she knew he wouldn''t.


    William wasn''t the type to sit on a throne.


    But he was willing to tear the current rulers down. And according to Jhen, the real royal family was still alive¡ªlocked away somewhere on the island.


    "We need to get you strong enough to fight them," Jhen said. "And we need allies."


    She would handle the latter.


    All William had to do was level up. Kill monsters. Get stronger.


    A simple plan.


    Victoria returned from her shower. "What did I miss?"


    William smiled. "I missed the part where you got your bloodline. How''s it going?"


    Victoria grinned. "Awesome. Jhen''s already teaching me black fire magic. And how to make my body stronger with my bloodline."


    Her excitement was evident.


    And William?


    He was glad to be back.


    But although William was back, he knew it wouldn''t last long.


    No matter how comfortable the village felt¡ªhow warm the fireplace was, how good it felt to have a real bed, how much he enjoyed the quiet nights under the stars¡ªhe couldn''t stay. He had to return to the dungeon. Keep leveling up. Get stronger.


    Still, for now, a short break wouldn''t hurt.


    He decided to stay for a few days, helping Victoria with her training and assisting Jhen with her duties.


    The villagers welcomed his presence with open arms. To them, he wasn''t just another adventurer passing through. He was someone who actually helped¡ªa rare thing in these times.


    During the days that followed, William found himself doing things he hadn''t done in a long time. Simple things.


    He helped harvest the crops, feeling the roughness of the soil beneath his fingers as he worked alongside the farmers. He took care of the cattle, guiding them across the fields as the morning mist still clung to the air. He even fished¡ªstanding by the river with an old villager who claimed to have once been a great warrior, now retired, content with the stillness of life.


    And, of course, he fought.


    Whenever a beast got too close to the village, William was the first to stand in its way. Whenever a villager went missing in the woods, he was the one leading the search.


    But more than anything, he was here for Victoria.


    She had been training relentlessly, pushing herself every day, and she was getting better. But not enough.


    They dueled often.


    William didn''t need to go all out to win. In fact, he barely used 20% of his strength¡ªand even then, it was enough to overwhelm her.


    But she never got discouraged.


    If anything, she was excited.


    "You''re so strong," Victoria said one afternoon, wiping sweat from her brow as they sat on the grass, drinking water after a long sparring session. "I don''t think Jhen even knows how strong you are."


    She was right. William had never truly shown Jhen what he was capable of.


    "Thanks," he said, taking a sip of water. "And you''re getting better too."


    Victoria grinned, her eyes full of determination.


    "What do you say about coming down into the dungeon with me in the near future?" William continued. "I can guide you from the first floor."


    Victoria blinked, clearly surprised. Then she smiled, a spark of excitement flashing across her face.


    "That would be nice!" she said. "But¡­ give me more time to get at least decent. I don''t want to make a fool of myself down there."


    William chuckled.


    "No problem." S~ea??h the N?vel(F)ire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    The days passed quickly.


    Before he knew it, it was time for him to return to the dungeon.

 Chapter 220 - 220: Please, Guide Us

    William returned to the dungeon using his ring. But for it to work, he had to be close to one of the dungeon entrances. So, teleportation didn''t work when he was too far.


    That would have been great since he could enter the dungeon from anywhere, but it didn''t work like that.


    "It would be too OP," he thought.


    He made his way back to the dungeon, greeting the villagers and guards he met along the way. They were sad to see him leave again.


    During the days he spent there, everyone got to know him better, and they really liked that he was always willing to help.


    Once he reached the portal to the next floor, he activated his ring. Another portal appeared in front of him, and as he stepped through, he was back at the hub.


    The hub looked the same as the last time he was there. There were a few new faces around, but nothing that caught his attention.


    Before doing anything else, William decided to ask around again to see if the shop owner had returned. He went to the shop¡ªit was still closed. He went to the Honeymoon Tavern, asking around about him, but no one had seen him.


    William was certain something had happened to the man. That was the only explanation for his disappearance.


    It was bad. He wanted to know more about the king and Professor James, or at the very least, know that the man had talked to them about him. But now, he had no idea how things stood.


    Had the man shared everything William told him, or had something happened before he could even say a word?


    Feeling frustrated with the situation, William moved on to the next floor of the dungeon.


    To proceed, adventurers had to go through a specific gate in the hub. There, next to the massive gate, the guards would ask if they were sure they wanted to continue.


    "If you go in, remember¡ªthe next hub is five levels away," a guard said. "You can always come back here, but you''ll have to clear the floor first to use the ring. And remember, you need to be near the portal to do it."


    That basically meant that if William wanted to return to the hub again, he had to complete at least one level and be close to the portal.


    He nodded and stepped through the gate.


    When the gate opened, William saw what was on the other side. It was pitch black, and the only thing shining was the portal.


    The portal was close to where the gate stood. A guard warned him, "Go through the portal. You don''t want to step out into the dark."


    William didn''t need the guard to tell him that. Just looking at that darkness was enough to know stepping into it was a bad idea.


    "Gotcha," he said.


    As he passed through the portal, the familiar sensation hit him. Nothing new there. But then, everything changed.


    He was now in the middle of a dense jungle.


    Towering trees stretched high above, their thick canopies blocking most of the sunlight. The air was heavy, humid, and difficult to breathe. The vegetation was so dense it restricted movement, vines and leaves pressing in from all sides.


    William felt trapped, like the jungle itself was suffocating him.


    There were no signs of people or civilization. The guard hadn''t mentioned it, but the portal didn''t place adventurers in the same location. Everyone was sent to a random spot on the dungeon floor. The only way to land together was by stepping through as part of a party.


    That wasn''t William''s case. He was alone, deep in the jungle.


    He began moving forward, using his sword to cut through the thick vegetation when necessary.


    "Maybe I can climb a tree and get a better look from up there?" he thought.


    Anyone would have thought of that. William climbed the tree with ease. With his current attributes, scaling something like this was nothing.


    But once he reached the top and looked ahead, he was shocked. The only thing in sight was an endless jungle, stretching as far as the eye could see. Sear?h the novel(F~)ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    That was the first thing his gaze fell upon. But when he looked up¡ªwell, that''s when he saw something really interesting.


    Floating islands.


    Dozens of them, scattered across the sky. Some looked like untouched wilderness, covered in thick vegetation. Others had cities and various structures built upon them.


    Of course, from this distance, it was impossible to make out exactly what those places held.


    "Is this part of the level? Or did someone build all of this?" he wondered.


    His mind went back to the strange island he had seen before, the one with a modern Earth-style house and familiar objects that shouldn''t have existed in this world.


    Could it be the same thing?


    Could those islands be home to the people who had created the dungeon?


    William had no answers. And right now, he had no way of reaching those islands either.


    He kept scanning the horizon, searching for anything else. Eventually, his eyes landed on something promising¡ªstructures built among the trees. Treehouses.


    That was something. Maybe those were the settlements of this level.


    Without wasting time, he moved. Staying above ground seemed like the best option, so he jumped from treetop to treetop, using the branches as his path forward.


    It was working well¡ªuntil he spotted something.


    A flock of flying creatures, approaching fast.


    And they weren''t weak. Their aura alone told him they were powerful. There were a lot of them.


    Not wanting to take unnecessary risks, William dropped back down to the forest floor. Moving slower but staying hidden was better than exposing himself up there.


    That didn''t mean he was safe.


    The real danger wasn''t in the sky¡ªit was on the ground.


    It didn''t take long before the jungle itself attacked him.


    Vines shot toward him, trying to ensnare him. Strange plants released toxic spores into the air, attempting to poison him. The entire forest was alive, and it wanted him dead.


    William was glad he had his sword with him. Its sharp edge easily sliced through the vines and cut down the moving plants before they could reach him.


    But that wasn''t his only advantage.


    His black fire magic was especially effective against these creatures, making his life a lot easier. Every attack dealt far more damage than normal.


    The only downside?


    If he missed his target, his fireball would ignite the wrong spot¡ªand before he knew it, an entire section of the jungle would go up in flames.


    Whenever that happened, William ran.


    And hoped the jungle would somehow survive on its own.


    "This place is magical, so there''s no way my fire keeps spreading forever and burns the entire forest down, right?" he reassured himself.


    Yeah¡­ he wasn''t sticking around to find out.


    The good news? Every monster he killed brought him closer to leveling up. His EXP bar was climbing fast, and he was already approaching level 40. That was pretty high.


    But what he really wanted was his class. And that¡­ that was proving to be a lot harder to get.


    After countless hours of hacking through the jungle, fighting off creatures, and enduring the mosquitoes, William finally reached the place where he had seen the treehouses.


    He had expected to find a lively settlement¡ªprobably a village full of dungeon-born people who had never even heard of the outside world.


    Instead, what he found was adventurers.


    And they were struggling to survive.


    The group had banded together to build a camp beneath the treehouses, using whatever resources they could to hold their ground. They were doing their best to grind levels and push forward, but it was clear just how hard it was.


    William had only managed so well because of his own strength¡ªand because his magic just happened to counter the creatures here. Not everyone had that luxury.


    When the adventurers saw a new face, they immediately stopped what they were doing and turned toward him.


    They weren''t throwing a welcome party.


    They just wanted to know who he was¡ªand what the hell he was doing there.


    It wasn''t every day that a new face showed up.


    Like in all settlements, there was someone in charge.


    The leader here was a young man with a wooden staff strapped to his back. He looked suspicious¡ªhis eyes constantly scanning the forest around them, as if expecting danger at any moment.


    "Are you here alone? How did you survive the jungle?" the leader asked.


    No one believed a single person could make it through that place alive.


    William understood their doubt, but he gave them a simple answer.


    "Well, I have a special fire magic, so the plants didn''t stand a chance against me¡­"


    That was when he noticed the shift in their expressions.


    They were looking at him differently now.


    Like he was their savior.


    Even the leader, the one who had been so cautious, suddenly bowed to him.


    "You are now the leader of this settlement. Please, guide us¡­"


    They weren''t just impressed¡ªthey were desperate.


    And apparently, William was the person they had been waiting for.

 Chapter 221 - 221: Are the Floating Islands Real?

    William didn''t know what to do. He just stood there, staring at the desperate faces of those adventurers.


    "Why? Why are you so desperate?" he asked.


    He needed to understand more about this settlement, which, at first glance, seemed pretty basic.


    The young man who had been their leader explained, "It''s hard for us to move through the jungle, and the portal is even harder to find¡­ We''re kind of stuck in this place. We''ve been here for around three months."


    William gaped. Three months? That was a long time to be trapped in a place like this. Now he understood why they were so desperate for someone to lead them¡ªwhy they looked so relieved to see a new face. They didn''t just want guidance; they needed someone who could help them move forward.


    In the end, they all had the same goal. So, William went along with it and became their leader.


    "First, tell me everything about this settlement," he said. "The people in it, the number of houses, how food and water are handled, protection¡ªeverything."


    If he was going to do anything, he needed to know exactly what he was working with.


    The ex-leader didn''t just explain it¡ªhe showed William. He took him through the settlement, introducing him to each of the treehouses, asking the people to introduce themselves, and even showing off the small farms they had managed to build.


    "You even have farms?" William asked, surprised.


    "Yeah," the ex-leader said proudly. "Our only problem is getting out of here, but building all this? We''re decent."


    William spoke with all the other adventurers living in the settlement. In total, there were around ten people.


    Most of them had a similar level of strength, with a few having a slight advantage, but nothing too significant. As always, William liked to compare his strength to those around him.


    He gathered everyone in the settlement for a meeting. This was the best way he could think of to get more information about the area. After all, some people might not have shared everything they knew before.


    "So, what do you know about the area?" William asked, looking at the gathered adventurers.


    They began sharing what they had seen¡ªdeadly beasts, poisonous plants, strange noises at night, and flying creatures that were best avoided.


    But there were also other interesting details, like human footprints in the jungle. None of them claimed responsibility for those, which meant there might be other adventurers passing through.


    "How far have you gone to look for the portal?" William asked.


    That was the key question. Only by finding the portal could they reach the next floor¡ªand have the chance to return to the hub if they wanted.


    "We haven''t found a single clue about it," the ex-leader said. "The jungle is just too big."


    Then, William asked something else. He wanted to know about the floating islands he had seen when he arrived, but as soon as he brought them up, most of the adventurers gave him strange looks.


    "Floating islands?" one of them said. "I mean, we recently climbed the trees to get a better view, and there were no floating islands¡­ Maybe you hallucinated? That''s pretty common because of the high amount of poisonous plants."


    William was certain he hadn''t hallucinated, but he didn''t push the matter and simply nodded.


    "It could be¡­ Well, I need to rest tonight, but tomorrow, we can start searching for the gate," he said.


    Everyone seemed excited about it. They prepared a meal for William, using food from their farms and the meat from the beasts they hunted. He savored every bite.


    There weren''t many treehouses to choose from, so in the end, he had to share one with someone else. His roommate was a shy girl with black hair who had barely spoken during the meeting.


    Now that they were alone, William tried talking to her. She was more willing to speak in private¡ªshe just disliked talking in front of big crowds.


    "Have you been here for long as well?" William asked, staring through the window of his treehouse. The view up there was decent enough.


    The girl nodded. "Yes, two months. I really want to move to the next floor."


    She was different from the others. Most of them wanted to pass this floor just to return to the hub, rest, and maybe leave the dungeon for a while.


    But she wanted to keep moving forward. She wanted to reach the next floor. William liked that attitude. Only with that kind of mindset could someone grow strong.


    "Don''t worry, we''ll find the portal," William said.


    They remained quiet for a while. Then, the girl broke the silence. She whispered to William as if she were afraid someone else might be listening.


    "I don''t think you were hallucinating," she said. "I''ve seen the floating islands too. Before you came, I was the only one who saw them! I never told anyone."


    William''s curiosity sparked instantly. Why were they the only two who could see the islands? What did they have in common?


    "Really?"


    "Yeah. I wish I could go there to see for myself, but it''s impossible, right?" she said.


    With a smile, William replied, "It''s not entirely impossible. Wanna go there with me?"


    The girl couldn''t believe what she had just heard. At first, she thought William was joking¡ªafter all, reaching the floating islands was no easy feat.


    But when she saw how serious he was, she realized he meant it.


    William had a plan, and he was eager to try it.


    There were no actual beds for them to sleep in. The adventurers had used the forest to build something more comfortable than plain wood, but it was far from ideal.


    William didn''t mind. He slept like a rock, and the following day, he set out with the other adventurers to search for the portal¡ªor at least explore more of the area.


    They decided to split into teams to cover more ground.


    "We need to go far if we want to find something, alright?" William said. "But don''t take unnecessary risks. If things get bad, just return to the camp and wait for help. We''re all in the same boat here, so we''ll look out for each other."


    Everyone nodded and headed off. William did too, and with him was the shy girl from the night before. Her name was Rena.


    "Why are we looking for the portal now?" Rena asked. "Didn''t you say something about exploring the floating islands yesterday? I want to go there!"


    While finding the portal was important to everyone, the idea of exploring floating islands¡ªespecially ones that only the two of them could see¡ªwas way more exciting.


    "Relax," William said. "We have time. And my plan needs time. Come on." S§×arch* The novel(F~)ire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Rena had no choice but to accept that and follow William deeper into the jungle. Once they were far from the camp, he finally shared his plan. He hadn''t wanted to discuss it near the settlement in case anyone overheard.


    "We need to find a decent flying beast," he said. "I can tame it, and with it, we can fly toward the islands. It''ll be dangerous because of the other flying creatures, but I believe both of us are willing to risk it, right?"


    "You can tame a flying beast? That''s a really cool ability to have!" Rena said, surprised.


    The way she looked at William changed. He felt a slight discomfort¡ªit was like the gaze of a student looking at their professor, full of admiration.


    They kept moving through the jungle, dealing with the poisonous plants. Rena had been in the jungle far longer than William, so she knew which plants to avoid. It was much better to have someone with that kind of knowledge. William''s only concern was dealing with any beasts that might attack them.


    Rena wasn''t weak, either. She was more of a support-type mage, using CC and buffs, but that was exactly the kind of mage William liked to have around. It felt great when the buffs hit him, and he could feel his power increase.


    But if they stayed on the ground, they''d never find the flying beasts they were after. Both of them knew that.


    First, though, William needed to get far enough from the others. If they saw him climbing a tree or heard the fight with the flying beast, it could cause problems. He wasn''t willing to risk it.


    Once they got far enough, William said, "Let''s climb."


    He went first, but it didn''t take long for him to notice that Rena was struggling. She was really, really slow, and he was starting to worry she might slip and fall.


    With a sigh, he climbed back down and grabbed her.


    Rena didn''t know how to feel about being carried around by a handsome guy like William. Her mind raced, but she kept quiet. William didn''t say a word either.


    Effortlessly, he climbed the tree again with her in his arms. Once they reached the top, all they had to do was wait for a flying beast to come.


    Rena''s voice was shaky when she finally spoke. "Y-You can put me down now."


    Only then did William realize he was still holding her.


    "Oh, sorry..."

 Chapter 222 - 222: A Phone?

    William placed Rena down.


    "Now what?" she asked. "How are we doing this?"


    She had heard him talk about taming a flying beast, but she had no idea how he would actually do it.


    "Now we wait for one to come to us, and then I''ll tame it," William said. "Do you know if we should pick a certain type of flying beast, or does it not matter?"


    The last thing he wanted was to tame a creature too weak to reach the floating islands. Speaking of which, they were still there¡ªvisible to both him and Rena, which remained an unsolved mystery.


    They didn''t have to wait long. The flying beasts were always circling above, and two people standing on top of a tree easily caught their attention.


    What flew toward them was¡­ unique.


    It was a massive snake with four green wings and two horns. William had never seen anything like it before.


    The serpent lunged, fangs bared, but William dodged with ease. Then, it was his turn to act.


    Channeling his demonic energy, he sent it toward the creature. As soon as it made contact, the flying snake collapsed onto the tree, writhing. Now came the hard part¡ªbreaking its mind.


    William entered the creature''s consciousness, forcing it to submit. Smart creatures were always harder to control, and this one resisted. But as he delved deeper into its mind, something strange happened.


    For a brief moment, he saw images¡ªpeople in a laboratory, running experiments on creatures.


    What was that?


    The vision disappeared before he could make sense of it, but he had no time to dwell on it. The flying snake couldn''t withstand his power. Its will shattered, and just like that, it became his.


    Rena, who had been watching in awe, finally spoke. "You can really tame it¡­ I wasn''t expecting that. But, um¡­ maybe you could tame a better one? I really don''t like snakes¡­"


    William had no issue with this one. Maybe it was because of his snake bloodline, but since awakening it, he''d grown fond of them.


    "Let''s go," he said. "Before more creatures show up."


    They climbed onto the flying snake and took off toward the floating islands.


    There were dozens of them, scattered high above the jungle. And yet, no one else in the settlement could see them. Why?


    William asked Rena if she had any theories.


    "I have no idea," she admitted. "I know a few of the others from outside the dungeon. One of them is even from my village, but she doesn''t see the islands either."


    That only deepened the mystery. What did he and Rena have in common? Could she have a demonic bloodline like him? No, that didn''t seem right.


    Still, he asked her about it. She shook her head. "I''m from another continent. One you''ve probably never heard of."


    While they flew, William scanned the jungle below, hoping to catch sight of the portal to the next level. Exploring the islands was exciting, but that wasn''t their main goal.


    Unfortunately, he saw nothing.


    What he did see, however, was a flock of mutated birds speeding toward them.


    His sharp senses allowed him to gauge their speed, and he quickly realized something¡ªthe flying snake was faster.


    A smirk crossed his lips.


    They''d never catch him.


    As they approached the first floating island, William braced himself, half-expecting some kind of barrier to prevent their entry. But nothing stopped them. They passed through the air effortlessly, as if the island had always been within reach.


    The first thing that caught their eyes was the dense forest covering a large portion of the island. From below, the landmass had seemed much smaller, but now that they were here, it stretched out far wider than William had anticipated.


    He hesitated for a moment, considering their next move. Should they land and explore on foot, or stay airborne to get a better view? In the end, he chose the latter. They needed to understand the island''s layout before diving in blindly.


    As the flying snake soared higher, the landscape unfolded beneath them¡ªrolling hills, scattered cliffs, and then, at the very center of the island, something unexpected.


    A city.


    Not a village or ruins, but a massive, well-planned city. Towering stone buildings rose in perfect alignment, their architecture both intricate and grand. It was unlike anything William had ever seen.


    What unsettled him the most, however, was the silence.


    The city was pristine. No collapsed structures, no overgrown streets, no signs of decay. It wasn''t abandoned ruins reclaimed by time¡ªit was simply¡­ empty.


    No people. No movement.


    It was as if the entire population had vanished overnight.


    "What''s this place?" Rena asked, gripping William''s shoulder. Her voice carried both awe and unease.


    William let out a small laugh, though he couldn''t shake the eerie feeling settling in his chest. "Well, I never expected to find floating islands in the first place, so a city on top of one isn''t that surprising."


    But deep down, he knew something was wrong.


    A city like this didn''t just appear overnight. It required planning, labor, and resources¡ªfar beyond what a small group of people could accomplish. If this were anywhere else, William might have assumed it belonged to a long-lost civilization, one that had mysteriously vanished.


    But inside this dungeon, a place that functioned like a game? That theory didn''t sit right with him.


    His thoughts drifted back to the images he had seen while taming the flying snake¡ªthe people in the lab, the experiments. Could they be connected to this city? Were they from Earth, or was it all just a coincidence?


    Could they also be connected to the people he saw inside that mansion? The ones that tried to wipe his memory?


    There was only one way to find out.


    Dismounting from the flying snake¡ªwho continued to slither through the air beside them¡ªWilliam and Rena stepped into the city and began their search. They started with the houses.


    At first, it felt like they were making progress, but after exploring five different homes, William realized something unsettling.


    Every single house was the same.


    Same layout. Same furniture. Same positioning of every object inside. It was as if someone had designed a single home and then lazily copied and pasted it across the entire city.


    The realization sent a chill down his spine.


    "This place doesn''t feel real," Rena muttered, her voice barely above a whisper.


    William nodded. "It''s like¡­ a template. Like something you''d find in a simulation."


    With nothing valuable inside the houses, they moved toward one of the larger buildings near the city center. It stood at least ten stories tall, towering over the surrounding structures.


    But before they could step inside, Rena suddenly stopped.


    "William, look," she said, pointing toward a stone water fountain in the plaza.


    His gaze followed her finger, and for the first time in a long while, William felt true shock.


    Lying on the ground, just beside the fountain, was something that had no business being in a place like this.


    A cellphone.


    Rena tilted her head. "What is this?"


    She had never seen anything like it before, but William had. And there was no mistaking it¡ªit wasn''t some ancient artifact or magical relic. It was a modern phone.


    His hands moved on their own as he picked it up. The screen was black, the battery completely drained, but the design was unmistakable. It was sleek, recent, not much different from the ones back on Earth.


    His grip tightened around it.


    "What the hell is going on here?" he thought.


    "I have no idea what this is," William said, "but let''s keep it. It might prove useful in the future."


    He slipped the phone into his pocket. It looked intact¡ªno cracks, no visible damage¡ªso maybe there was a chance he could get the battery to work. Could he recharge it using mana or something?


    Of course, now wasn''t the time to test that theory. He simply kept the phone and continued searching.


    After finding it, though, his curiosity about the city¡ªand the dungeon as a whole¡ªonly deepened. The more he explored, the stranger everything seemed.


    The massive building they planned to explore was just as furnished as the houses had been. Inside, they found shops, a library, and other facilities, all eerily well-preserved.


    But despite the phone, nothing else in the city looked remotely modern. It was exactly what he would expect from a fantasy setting¡ªstone buildings, wooden furniture, and architecture straight out of an old storybook.


    "Maybe we should move to another island?" William asked. "I don''t think we''ll find anything interesting here."


    "That''s a good idea," Rena said, then hesitated before adding, "I really don''t feel good here."


    They were about to leave the building when a scream echoed from outside.


    A chill ran down their spines. S§×arch* The N??elFir§×.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    It wasn''t the scream of a human. It wasn''t friendly. It was something else¡ªsomething unnatural.


    "We need to hide," William said.


    Without wasting a second, he grabbed Rena''s arm and moved, looking for a place inside that building to hide before whatever that was outside reached them.

 Chapter 223 - 223: One More Island, and Group Chat

    The creature could be anything. William didn''t want to take the risk and just stay out in the open.


    There was a chance it was something weak¡ªsomething he and Rena could handle¡ªbut it could just as easily be something far too powerful. It didn''t make sense to take that chance.


    The two of them started climbing the floors of the building they were in. Since the creature was coming from outside, it would have to climb too. That meant staying on the top floor would give them an advantage.


    Rena was clearly scared. The screams continued again and again, growing louder each time, as if the creature was getting closer.


    The winged snake William had tamed followed them easily, keeping up with their pace without any trouble.


    "What do you think that is?" Rena asked.


    "I''ve got no idea," William replied, "but I have a plan."


    He didn''t stop for even a second to hide. William kept going, carrying Rena as they ascended all the way to the rooftop.


    Once they made it to the top, they climbed onto the flying serpent and took off, soaring far away from the city.


    They looked back to see what kind of creature had been chasing them¡ªand what they saw was more than a little disturbing.


    The thing letting out those screams was tall and unnaturally thin, wearing a tattered dark cloth. Its face was fully visible¡ªand it looked like a mummy.


    It was definitely some kind of undead. Maybe a wraith, or something even stranger. William had no interest in sticking around to find out what it could do.


    "That was way too close," Rena said, letting out a shaky breath. "I thought we were done for."


    And then more screams erupted from the city. William glanced down¡ªand what he saw made his stomach drop. Dozens of those same creatures.


    The city wasn''t abandoned after all. It was infested.


    "Oh my god¡­" Rena muttered.


    If they had stayed even a bit longer, they would''ve been overwhelmed. William was glad he''d decided to use his mount and get out before it was too late.


    Still, they didn''t leave empty-handed. That phone they found¡ªit meant something. William was genuinely excited about the idea of getting it to work again.


    With nothing left to see on that floating island¡ªand no intention of returning to that city¡ªthe only thing left to do was fly to another island and keep exploring.


    There were several floating islands in that place. William flew around for a while and spotted another one that had a city. At first, he thought about not going there.


    What if that city was also infested with those same creatures? But as they flew closer, William noticed something¡ªthere were actually people there!


    The structure of the city was almost identical to the other one. Same style, same materials used in the buildings. But the difference was¡­ there were people.


    Well, not exactly normal people. These ones had wings on their backs.


    "What kind of winged race is that?" Rena asked.


    She was curious, but also shocked¡ªand a little scared. William had no idea whether those people would be friendly or not. The only way to find out was by going there.


    They went down to the island, and it didn''t take long for a group of winged warriors to come meet them. These warriors wore silver plate armor.


    "Who are you? What are you doing here?" one of them asked.


    William was glad they spoke the same language. "We are adventurers who saw the floating islands and decided to take a look."


    He didn''t want to lie to them, as that would give the wrong first impression. So William told the truth.


    The winged warrior was shocked. "You two can see the floating islands? It''s supposed to be invisible¡­"


    It was clear the man was confused as to how William and Rena could see the floating islands. William was also wondering why only he and Rena could see them while the other adventurers couldn''t.


    "Come with us," the guard said, "but don''t worry, we won''t lock you up or anything."


    William nodded. They went down to the ground. William and Rena dismounted the flying snake and walked along with them.


    "Do you know what happened to the other city?" William asked them. "We were on another floating island and there were some strange creatures there."


    The winged warrior stopped when William said that. He was visibly shaken by the question.


    "Our people once lived in that city, but things got out of control¡­ It''s not a safe place anymore," the winged warrior said. sea??h th§× n?vel_Fire.¦Çet website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    It made sense why the two cities were pretty much the same, structurally speaking.


    William and Rena followed the guards into the city, and once they entered, the people there looked at them with curious gazes.


    Everyone had wings on their backs¡ªthat was the norm there. William and Rena didn''t have any. It was the first time in a long while that someone from the human race was in their city.


    So, they were curious to know who William and Rena were. The guard led them to the guards'' barracks.


    There, the guard spoke with them in private.


    "If you plan on staying in this city, you''ll have to follow some rules," the guard said. "First of all, no messing around. We expect you to respect the citizens."


    William and Rena listened carefully to what the guards had to say. They didn''t want to get kicked out of that place.


    The general rules followed the same things other cities did, so William wasn''t that surprised by it. The rules were things he wouldn''t do in the first place, even if the guard hadn''t said anything.


    After the explanation was over, William asked a few questions.


    "Do you know where the portal is?" he asked.


    He wasn''t expecting the guard to know what he was talking about, but the man knew it!


    "You mean the portal to the next floor of the dungeon? Yes, I do. Why? Are you planning on going there?" the guard asked.


    That was strange. William had seen how the citizens of the dungeon didn''t know they were inside a different place, a different realm. But the winged guard in front of them did.


    "So you know this is a type of dungeon?" William asked.


    "We do," the guard said. "But we can''t leave this floor. This is our world, and we only hear tales about other areas of the dungeon."


    The citizens of that floor couldn''t travel through the dungeon floors like William and the other adventurers could.


    William guessed that the people who created the dungeon didn''t want their creations to leave the area.


    "And can you show us where the portal is? Not today, but soon?" William asked.


    The other adventurers were down there looking for the portal to the next level, so if he could get the guard to show where it was, well, that would make things a lot easier.


    But the guard couldn''t. "I''m sorry, I can''t leave this city. But I can give you the general direction of it. Will that be enough?"


    William was okay with it. It was better to at least have the direction than have nothing at all and keep looking for the portal like headless chickens.


    "Sure. Thank you for this," William said.


    The guard then shared where the portal was, and what things William should be looking for while searching for the gate¡ªlike points of interest, so he could orient himself in the middle of the jungle.


    Rena also listened in, just in case William forgot something. After that, they left the barracks and moved into the city.


    Once again, the citizens kept looking at them, shocked to see humans there. Some even talked to William and Rena as they passed by.


    There were a few things for sale in the city, but nothing that really interested William. That changed when he explored one of the libraries in that city.


    The library had a lot of books with different types of spells¡ªspells he had never seen in the human world.


    And to make things even better, they accepted the money William got from killing monsters.


    So, he could actually buy some of the books in that library if he wanted to. That was just marvelous for him. Even Rena was excited about it.


    "There are some interesting things in this library. Like, there''s even a book here that promises to teach a spell to grow wings!" she said.


    That was indeed pretty interesting. William and Rena moved through the library, looking for books to buy. For them, that was the best thing they could ask for.


    Spells and powerful items were things all adventurers loved. William bought the spell that promised to give him wings¡ªit looked useful¡ªand he also looked for some spells that could enhance his body.


    The winged people were pretty good in combat. They were fierce warriors, so they had a lot of those spells in their arsenal.


    Eventually, Rena and William parted ways while looking for books inside the library. The place was just too big, so each of them moved to a different section.


    William decided to pull the modern phone from his pocket. He was just too curious and anxious to make that thing work. He moved to a dark corner of the library and tried to energize the modern phone with his mana.


    He wanted to try using his mana as some type of energy to make the phone work.


    It worked.


    The phone turned on. William saw a few apps on the screen, and something really interesting: it was a group chat. The people in the group chat also had other phones.


    They were even exchanging messages at the time William opened the group chat.


    "Is this a group chat of the people who created this dungeon? People from Earth?" he thought.

 Chapter 224 - 224: Smile, Advance, Kill

    The group chat had people talking about random stuff from their lives and how they were doing.


    William read some of the messages. He changed a few settings on the phone, just to make sure the others in the group chat couldn''t see that he was reading their messages.


    He found out some interesting things about those people. Some of them were in the dungeon, but most of them were not. They were outside, scattered across continents and kingdoms, working together to take over the world.


    Yep, that was their plan. And the most curious thing? All those people were from Earth.


    But William knew that the only people who could be summoned were heroes.


    So how were all those people there? Was someone else summoning them somehow? That was really curious, intriguing¡ªand at the same time¡ªtroublesome.


    Imagine an army of people from Earth who received special abilities, similar to the summoned heroes? That would be devastating.


    But their number wasn''t that high. William checked the group chat and saw that in total there were around thirty people.


    He couldn''t see any of their information through the phone¡ªnot their names, not their photos. The only thing he could access were the messages, which didn''t even stay for long.


    They had it set up to auto-delete messages after a few days, so William couldn''t read everything they''d been talking about in the recent past.


    "This is probably to make sure no one finds a phone like I did and reads everything," he thought. "So basically someone lost their phone in this dungeon¡­ and I was the one who found it."


    When he saw Rena coming closer, William quickly hid the phone in his pocket again.


    "Did you find anything interesting?" Rena asked.


    William smiled. "Not yet. You?"


    "I think so."


    They explored the library for a while longer before paying for the books and leaving. Although they wished they could stay longer in that city, they had to go.


    William needed to talk to the other adventurers who were down in the jungle, searching for the portal. Now that he knew the right direction to look, of course he had to warn them.


    Also, the city didn''t have that much to do. It was just a normal city with winged people. William had to keep moving.


    Finding that phone and the location of the portal was already more than enough. There was no need to stick around and waste more time.


    So, William and Rena decided to leave the city. The guards didn''t stop them.


    They mounted the flying serpent and went back down to the jungle. Once they landed, William commanded the serpent to hide somewhere. He didn''t want the other adventurers to know he had something like that.


    It was already getting dark, so they decided to return to camp.


    The other adventurers were already back at the camp. They had been waiting for William and Rena to return. Well, more like waiting for William¡ªhe was the one in charge now.


    He gathered everyone and shared a few things with them. Of course, he didn''t mention the floating islands. S§×ar?h the n?velFire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "We found another adventurer," William said. "He gave us directions to the portal. He could be lying, but it didn''t seem like he was, so we should go there tomorrow."


    William wasn''t sure if they''d believe him, but at first, they did. Actually, they seemed pretty excited about it.


    "Really? This is the first time we''ve seen someone else in this area. So you must have gone farther than we usually do," one of them said.


    "Exactly," William replied, nodding. "Tomorrow, we can all leave together and head there. Let''s prepare our things. It''s going to take us some time to reach the portal."


    According to what the winged guard said, the portal would take them around two days to reach, and the further they went, the more dangerous it would get.So, they all had to prepare and accept that they might not return to their camp anymore. At least not for a while.


    They gathered supplies like food and water. The only problem would be where to sleep, as no one had any type of tent, but William didn''t care about that.


    William stayed in his tree house, reading some of the new books he had recently bought on the floating island. The first one he wanted to learn was the one called Celestial Wings.


    The name itself was pretty dope, and the thought of having wings whenever he wanted sounded pretty damn useful.


    Any type of flight spell was difficult to learn. In fact, learning how to fly was something that most mages wanted at one point in their lives, but it wasn''t easy. The number of flight spells was just too low.


    That was one of the reasons flying mounts were so sought after and expensive. Everyone wanted them.


    Anyway, there was no way William would master the spell in one day. He just read the introduction of the spell and then went to sleep for the night.


    On the following morning, everyone gathered in the center of the camp, and then they left. William and Rena were the ones leading the way, since they were the ones who had talked with the winged guard about the portal''s location.


    They had to go through the dense jungle. Being alone out there was tough, but now, with a large group of powerful adventurers, the creatures didn''t stand a chance.


    The number of attacks even dropped, mostly because of how many of them there were. The creatures were smart. There was no way they''d rush into a group that big just to try their luck.


    They were all in the same party, so the EXP was shared between everyone. During this time, William barely had to fight anything, yet he was still getting EXP. That was simply amazing for him.


    The journey was pretty chill. William followed the directions and spotted the landmarks the winged guard had mentioned.


    "I think there''s a clearing not far from here," William said. "The place has less vegetation and a water source. Not only that, but apparently, some people built houses there."


    "Really?"


    The adventurers were more and more surprised by how much William knew about the jungle after just one chat with a ''random adventurer.''


    But no one questioned him. When they reached the clearing and saw the houses and the stream, it was clear he''d been telling the truth all along.


    It was only a matter of time before they found the portal. There weren''t many houses, so they had to share, but no one minded. It was just for the night.


    The next day, they continued their journey. That was supposed to be the day they''d reach the portal.


    Now that William had seen all the reference points the winged guard talked about, he was feeling more confident. Before, there had been a small part of him worried the guard had lied¡ªbut not anymore.


    The attacks from beasts were easy to deal with, but then they saw something William had been dreading¡ªother adventurers.


    It would''ve been na?ve to think their group was the only one on this dungeon floor. Before William showed up, they had stayed in the same area for ages, so of course they hadn''t come across other groups. But now that they were finally on the move, heading toward the portal, things were different.


    The new group of adventurers had set up camp just beyond the edge of the jungle.


    The dense forest ended abruptly, revealing a stretch of beautiful plains dotted with scattered trees and winding rivers. In the distance, mountains rose along the horizon, painting a picture that would''ve been breathtaking¡ªif not for the tension hanging in the air.


    "That group doesn''t look friendly," one of the adventurers muttered. "Should we circle around and avoid them?"


    It wasn''t a bad idea, but this was open land. To circle around without being seen would mean wasting a lot of time¡ªmore than they could afford.


    After a brief discussion, they decided to keep going forward.


    When the enemy group saw them approaching, they stopped everything. No movement, no words¡ªjust eyes locked on them.


    Their gazes were full of malice. William didn''t need to guess what they were planning. He already knew.


    And he wasn''t the only one.


    "Prepare for a fight," he whispered. "We might have to kill them all."


    The adventurers they encountered didn''t say a single word. No introductions, no warnings. They just unsheathed their weapons and advanced¡ªsilent, coordinated, hungry for blood.


    William wasn''t afraid.In fact, a part of him welcomed it.


    He drew Asura with a smooth motion, the dark blade gleaming ominously in the daylight. A low hum of power radiated from it, like the sword itself was eager for the fight.


    He stepped forward ahead of the others, a faint smile curling on his lips¡ªone that didn''t reach his eyes. It was cold. Dangerous.


    The enemy group faltered for a moment. They hadn''t expected that. Maybe they thought this would be easy¡ªambush a group of adventurers and claim their loot. They didn''t expect a man to walk toward them alone, smiling, sword in hand, as if he were greeting old friends he planned to bury.


    That hesitation, even if brief, would cost them.

 Chapter 225 - 225: Good Evening, Jailer

    One man of the bandit looking group spoke out, saying, "maybe we should talk."


    He only said that after he saw William advancing toward them with no fear in his eyes. They were apprehensive that they just might have poked a wasps'' nest.


    William didn''t stop for a single second. He did the contrary. His speed increased as he got closer to his first victim.


    With Asura in hands, his sword had a dark energy around it, which would make any of his slashes deadly.


    "Wait!" the man yelled again.


    It didn''t work, again. William cut the first of them in half. Blood spurted everywhere. William''s clothes now had a new color to them: red.


    Only after killing one of them and showing his power that William stopped and decided to talk with them. For him, that was the best approach to get them scared, and willing to do whatever he wanted.


    "So let''s talk," William said, a curling smile forming in his lips, "what do you have to offer me?"


    William didn''t want friends or more people to work under him. So, what could those men offer him? He already knew where the portal was, so it was not like they would have something so different to offer him.


    The man talked with a shimmering voice, "w-we know where the portal is, like exactly, and we also know how to kill the creature protecting the portal."


    That was decent, but William could tell the man had more to share. So, he pushed forward.


    "That''s not good enough," William said.


    He then stepped forward again. The man yelled.


    "Calm down, relax. I have a few more interesting things for you," the man said, "we explored the next dungeon floor so we know a lot about it. I can share it with you if you want."


    William stopped and looked directly into the man''s eyes. "Now that''s what I am talking about," he said.


    The first thing William asked them to do was place their weapons on the ground and toss it to him. He didn''t want any type of sneaky attacks coming up.


    The man who was the one talking to William was okay with it. He ordered everyone to do what William asked.


    In the meantime, Rena and the others from William''s group came forward, standing beside him. They looked at him differently.


    It was not that they were scared of him or anything. Being ruthless like that was a common thing among mages, especially the stronger ones. It was only by being like that that one would thrive and keep growing stronger.


    They were looking at him differently more like due to his power. All of them knew he was strong. They felt it. But that was the first time they were actually seeing him in a fight.


    Anyway, after all the bandits placed their weapons down, the man started to share the things that he knew about the next dungeon floor.


    That was valuable information. William was glad to learn that from him.


    "The next floor is¡­ strange," the man said, "it''s not the usual place with countless beasts and so on. The beasts are not the problem, but the citizens in that place. You''ll start off in a random city, village, or house with a random identity, and you''ll have to discover what your goals are and complete them."


    William frowned. That sounded like some role play shit or something. He would have to become the character in that dungeon floor and do the things that the character would.


    "Really?" William asked, "it does sound like you are just making up this shit."


    The man shook his head, "No, no, no. It is the truth, I can promise you that. Look, if you want to skip this whole goal part thing, I heard where the portal might be, but I never went there to be certain of it."


    William let the man speak, listening to everything he had to share about the next floor, and also about the boss creature guarding the floor they were in.


    After getting all the info he wanted, he left, leaving that group of bandits to take care of the body of their fallen comrade.


    Only after they were far away did someone from William''s group say something.


    "That was¡­ intense. But I''m glad you got the info we needed." S§×ar?h the N?velFire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    The rest of the group was thinking of returning to the hub and leaving the dungeon for a while to rest, but that didn''t mean they would never return to the dungeon in the future. And when they did, they would know what to expect on the next floor.


    They continued their journey toward the portal. During their journey there, other groups tried to attack them, just like the last one did. Obviously, William taught them a lesson, killing a few of them and so on.


    There was even one group in specific that didn''t stop trying even after William killed two of them, so he had to kill all of them. That was the only group that got wiped out by him. The rest just got scared and fled.


    Eventually, they reached the portal. There, they saw the creature protecting it. It was a massive nest with gigantic wasps.


    But none of them were scared of it. That''s because they didn''t even need to fight against the boss creature.


    The portal was right behind it, and all they had to do was circle around and pass through the portal without making any significant noise. If they made any noise, the wasps would wake up and attack them.


    "We should go one by one," William said. "If we go all together, the chances of someone screwing up is huge."


    "I agree on that."


    Everyone agreed. So, one by one, they circled around the nest and passed through the portal. William and Rena were the last ones, as they weren''t in a hurry to move to the next floor like the rest of them were.


    "You go," William said to Rena. "I''ll be the last one."


    Rena moved, silently circling the nest. She looked at William before passing through the gate.


    Then, it was time for William to go. He started moving, but then he felt another aura near him. He frowned.


    When he looked around, he saw that first group of bandits he spoke with. The one who gave him all the information about the boss and the next floor.


    The man looked at William with a smirk and yelled, "AAAAAAAAAAAAAH!"


    The yell was to wake up the wasps'' nest. Countless wasps left the nest, and the first thing they saw was William standing there. So, obviously, they saw him as their primary enemy.


    "Fuck¡­" William cursed.


    He didn''t expect that first group to follow them and get their payback at that crucial moment. But he didn''t have time to cry about it. There was no running away. He had to fight against the wasps.


    The first wasp tried to sting him, but William moved to the side, avoiding the attack.


    Then, he started running. He ran in the direction of that group of bandits that came to betray him.


    They weren''t expecting it! William quickly arrived where they were.


    "No! Why did you come here? They''ll attack us now! Run, guys!" the man yelled.


    He tried to run with his comrades, but it didn''t work. The wasps were just too fast, and they were already seeing them as enemies as well.


    William then activated his body enhancing spells. More precisely, the ones that gave him agility and movement speed. Then, he dashed toward the portal while the wasps were busy with the bandits.


    The portal was not locked. That was because the wasps weren''t a boss that people had to kill to go to the next floor. It was an optional boss.


    So, even if someone was fighting it, it was possible to go through the portal and move to the next floor.


    William could hear the screams of those bandits as he passed through the portal. He didn''t care about their fate, especially after they tried to kill him.


    When William reached the next floor, he didn''t see anyone from the group. Rena and the others went to random places on the dungeon floor, just like it happened on the previous one.


    The majority of the group used their rings to return to the hub and then left the dungeon. Only Rena stayed. Well, William did too.


    When he looked around, he saw that he was inside a type of dungeon. There were people in the cells there. The people weren''t just in the cells but locked in the walls with chains. They were clearly criminals or something.


    Someone came to speak with William.


    "Good evening, jailer," a guard with plate armor said. "You can rest now. I''ll take over your shift."


    With that quick talking, William already got some information about his identity on that dungeon floor. He nodded to the man.


    "Thank you. Have a good shift, my friend."


    He tapped the man on the shoulder after passing by him.


    William went upstairs, and he was not expecting to see a massive castle when he left that dungeon.


    The castle had many people working there, but most of them were already sleeping. William was in trouble because he had no idea where his room was.


    "The first objective is for me to find my room, wonderful!" William thought.

 Chapter 226 - 226: Jailer Brand

    The name William now had was Brand. He was the jailer responsible for taking care of the prisoners in a castle ruled by a powerful family.


    He discovered that just by listening to conversations and talking to a few of the staff members.


    William spoke with one of the staff members responsible for cleaning the rooms to find out where his room was. For that, he had to ask questions without sounding too suspicious. It was not an easy thing to do.


    As he walked through the castle, William studied the layout and tried to understand what his mission was. The place was really luxurious, with many people working there, and most of them looked happy.


    But he could also see that something else was going on. The first strange thing was the high number of people locked in the dungeons. It wasn''t a normal amount¡ªthere were just too many.


    The guards also looked more concerned compared to the staff members working in the castle. So, William guessed there was more going on.


    To be sure, he spoke with one of the guards who lived next to his room. The guard wasn''t on duty, so he was resting there. William found him as the two were heading to their rooms.


    "Things aren''t easy, right?" William said.


    He was trying to get the man to give him more information¡ªand it worked.


    "Right? Now that we''re conquering the nearby lands, there''s just too much to handle¡­ I''m dreaming of a vacation someday," the guard said.


    William nodded. "Me too, man. But at least we''re winning."


    "For now. We''re in deep shit now that the kingdom is retaliating," the guard said. "Anyway, I''ll go to bed, man. See you tomorrow."


    The guard was clearly tired and didn''t want to keep talking.


    "No problem."


    William was happy he''d at least gotten some answers, and apparently, things weren''t so peaceful anymore. Whoever ruled that castle was conquering nearby lands, and things had been working well for them¡ªbut according to what the guard said, a kingdom was retaliating.


    It was the neighboring kingdom. William knew that because he''d heard some of the staff mention the border.


    "So this castle is near the border¡­ and we''re at war," William guessed.


    The first day had gone pretty well for him. He discovered a few things.


    William went to his room and decided to just meditate and read something. He wasn''t tired enough to sleep yet, so he had to wait a few hours until fatigue set in.


    At one point during the night, as he was reading his newly acquired spell tomes and glancing out his window, he saw a group of guards show up.


    The guards came carrying a cage packed with prisoners. They were war prisoners, and they would be placed in the dungeon¡ªWilliam''s domain.


    On the following day, William officially started his first day at work as a jailer. His job wasn''t just to watch the prisoners and make sure they didn''t escape, but to torture them and get answers.


    One of the people in charge of the castle came to talk to him that morning.


    "Brand, we captured some soldiers and we need you to find out where their fort is. Do everything you can to get the answers for us, understood?" the man ordered.


    William nodded. "Consider it done."


    The man looked pleased with the answer and said farewell.


    William went downstairs to the dungeon again, and it was even more packed than the night before. Some of the new prisoners yelled when they saw him.


    "Fuck you, jailer!" they shouted.


    The new prisoners looked energetic and ready to mouth off at William, but the ones who were already there and knew him? Those sat in the corners of their cells, silent.


    They had suffered by his hands¡ªthey knew he wasn''t someone to mess with.


    William had many new prisoners to choose from, so he just picked one at random.


    The process was simple: take one from the cell and bring him to another room where he''d torture him and get the answers he needed.


    All the prisoners were cuffed and had their mana sealed, so they couldn''t cast spells or try anything funny. They were hopeless.


    The room William brought them to was where the torture tools were kept¡ªor rather, where Brand kept his tools. William was just there assuming the role.


    "There''s nothing you can do to me that''ll make me break," the prisoner said. "I''ll never give you the answers you need."


    William knew it wouldn''t be easy to get answers. It might be impossible, actually. People like that were trained to endure pain and die before revealing anything.


    But what the man didn''t know was that William wasn''t planning on using normal torture methods. If he kept doing the same things over and over, the results wouldn''t change.


    If he really wanted answers¡ªreal answers¡ªhe had to use a different method. He had to mess with the man''s mind.


    William was capable of accessing the minds of other creatures using his Beast Taming abilities, and it worked on people too. He wouldn''t tame them, obviously, but he could still access their minds and torture them. He could dig out what they knew.


    Asura was there to help with that.


    "I can help you access this man''s mind¡ªand make him suffer a pain he''s never felt before," Asura said to William mentally. "Do you want to do it now?"


    "Let''s do it," William replied.


    William placed both hands on the man''s head and closed his eyes. The dungeon room faded from focus as Asura''s presence surged forward, guiding him through the spell to enter the man''s mind.


    The prisoner began to writhe and resist, gritting his teeth. "What are you¡ªwhat are you doing?!"


    But it was already too late.


    With Asura''s help, William pierced through his mental defenses. What he found inside was a chaotic swirl of pain, memories, and fear. There were images of war, of comrades dying, of secret meetings¡ªvaluable information waiting to be plucked.


    Inside the man''s mind, William conjured an illusion: a battlefield strewn with corpses, many of them familiar to the prisoner. Asura enhanced the scene, making the pain sharp and real.


    "You left them to die," William''s voice echoed through the illusion. S~ea??h the N?vel(F)ire.n§×t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "Stop it! It''s not real!" the prisoner screamed, collapsing to his knees.


    "But it feels real, doesn''t it?" William whispered.


    Then, amidst the mental torment, a clear image emerged: a hidden pass behind a cliff, leading directly to the enemy''s stronghold. A perfect spot for an ambush. William memorized every detail.


    That was enough.


    He pulled out of the man''s mind. The prisoner slumped over, barely conscious¡ªbroken, but alive.


    William stepped back, rubbing his temples. Using that spell always came with a price, but it was nothing he couldn''t handle.


    Asura''s voice echoed within him. "He won''t even remember telling you. He''ll think he just cracked from the pressure. Not bad, right?"


    "Very efficient," William replied, already scribbling the details on a nearby scroll.


    He locked the chamber and walked out, past the silent rows of prisoners. This time, no one dared say a word.


    By afternoon, William handed the scroll to the officer who had given him the task.


    "That was fast," the man said, surprised.


    "I have my ways."


    The officer smiled. "This could be just what we need to turn the tide. Keep it up, Brand. You''re doing excellent work for the family."


    William gave a curt nod and turned away.


    As he walked back toward his quarters, his thoughts were racing.


    "This family... this war... There''s more going on here than territory or revenge. I need to find out who''s really pulling the strings."


    The whole situation didn''t make sense. Why was that family suddenly trying to expand their territories¡ªeven going as far as provoking a nearby kingdom to do it?


    It was just too risky if all they wanted was land. They could always get money and buy land from someone else, not just take it.


    Anyway, on the following day, the man in charge came to speak with William again. But this time, he didn''t want William to extract information from the prisoners.


    "Brand, I need you to go with the soldiers to conquer that fort," he said. "We might need you there. You know, you have useful talents for information extraction."


    William couldn''t refuse a direct order from that man, and it wasn''t like he was planning to refuse in the first place. It was a good chance for him to spend more time with the soldiers.


    "Really? That would be an honor for me," William said, giving the man a gentle bow. "When are we leaving?"


    "Now," the man said. "They''re already waiting for you at the gate."


    He hadn''t expected it to be so soon, but he didn''t say a word. William left and met with the soldiers at the castle gate.


    They already had a carriage waiting for him. Apparently, his position as jailer was well-respected, and the treatment he received was much better than most who worked in the castle. William even had a carriage, so he could travel without having to worry about anything.


    "Soldiers, let''s move," the captain of the soldiers yelled, "we have a fort to conquer!"

 Chapter 227 - 227: Not a Good Plan for William

    William sat in the carriage, watching the sunny weather outside through the window. There were several people with him inside. One of them was the captain responsible for the soldiers on the mission. They were going to assault the fortress, and the captain was there to command everyone and craft the entire plan to take over the stronghold.


    "Brand," he said, "with the information you got, taking over this fortress will be easy."


    William had discovered where the fort was¡ªit was hidden so the soldiers hadn''t known its location before¡ªbut that wasn''t all. He had also uncovered the layout of the place and even an underground passage they could use to enter! That information was a game changer and the reason why William received such great treatment. He was one of the most important people there.


    "It will be easier, but not easy," William replied.


    It was never easy to succeed at a hard task like that one. William wanted to be sure that the captain, along with all the other soldiers, wouldn''t mess up. He needed them to be careful. After all, one of his goals was to actually conquer that fortress. William still wanted to know more about the objectives and the whole role play aspect of that dungeon floor.


    "You''re right," the captain apologized. "We cannot afford to lose that many soldiers. Our situation is¡­ dire."


    Seeing the chance to ask more questions, William leaned in. He had talked with one of the soldiers before, but a captain knew much more than a regular soldier, and since the two were on good terms, the timing was perfect.


    "And do you think the kingdom will send us help? Or are we on our own in this?" William asked.


    The captain sighed. "I don''t think they will send anyone. Our master tried to speak with the higher-ups in the kingdom, but they don''t want to help us. They say it''s just too risky."


    "Too risky?"


    "Yes. They don''t want to start a war with the neighboring kingdom. Right now, it''s just us against them," the captain said.


    William couldn''t understand why a single noble was trying to conquer more land through fighting¡ªand even going as far as invading a nearby kingdom.


    Why was that noble family risking so much? William also felt bad for the soldiers, the captain, and all the people who worked for that family. They were bound by contracts and needed the payment as well. It wasn''t like they could just leave and not be part of the fight.


    "I see."


    They didn''t talk more about it during the journey to the fortress. William didn''t want to make them suspicious of him. It was still strange to be himself, yet to play someone else at the same time. That dungeon floor was really complex.


    The first part of the journey followed "normal" roads, but they were now in another kingdom¡ªone that didn''t see them as friends.


    Because of that, the soldiers all changed clothes to appear less suspicious. They weren''t wearing their plate armor anymore.


    The carriage now looked like one belonging to a merchant. William didn''t need to change much, since he didn''t look like a soldier.


    That wasn''t the only change. They weren''t taking the main roads anymore, but secondary ones, avoiding medium or big towns altogether.


    In fact, they didn''t want to get close to any town. It wasn''t worth the risk.


    Their goal was to follow secondary paths and reach the fortress without drawing attention¡ªor getting into a fight with that kingdom''s army.


    They could win a fight. That much was likely, actually. But the problem was that word would spread quickly, and people would start hunting them down.


    If a large portion of the kingdom''s army decided to come after them, well, they would be doomed.


    William also didn''t know if he should show his combat prowess. To them, he was a jailer named Brand¡ªand surely someone like that wasn''t supposed to be strong in a fight.


    *


    Three days passed. They tried to avoid stopping too often to rest. The soldiers were really tired because of that, but it was something they had to endure to reach the fort as fast as possible.


    They decided to stop in an area that was close enough to the fortress for observation, but still far enough not to be discovered. After that nearly non-stop journey, everyone needed at least a full day to recover.


    The captain actually wanted more than just a day. He wanted to scout the area around the fortress himself and formulate a plan based on what he saw.


    Although the prisoner had shared a lot of useful information¡ªthings William was confident were true¡ªthe captain still wanted to confirm everything with his own eyes.


    No one opposed that. In fact, William went with him. He wasn''t that tired, having spent most of the trip inside the carriage, where he could sleep or nap whenever he wanted.


    The real problem was the soldiers on horseback. They couldn''t rest properly during the journey, so they were far more exhausted than he was.


    The fortress was hidden deep in the forest, at the top of a mountain. The noble who ruled the castle¡ªand who now commanded William and the captain¡ªhad been searching for that stronghold for months.


    William still didn''t understand why. The man was obsessed with that fortress for some reason.


    "Look at how many people are there," the captain whispered to William as they watched the fortress from a distance, "there are at least 300 soldiers in that place, and we only have 100."


    That number didn''t come from a guess. William had gotten it from the prisoner. And now, seeing how many soldiers were patrolling the fortress walls and standing near the gate, the captain was certain the intel was accurate.


    "And how do you feel about the fight?" William asked the captain, staring directly at him. "Do you think we can win and take over this fortress? They have three soldiers for every one of ours."


    The difference in numbers was significant. William wouldn''t usually be concerned about that, but he wasn''t sure whether he would take part in the battle¡ªor how much of a role he could even play. And even if he did, his unique powers would likely raise too many questions.


    That meant the outcome of the battle would mostly rely on the soldiers who came with them. And that worried him.


    The captain, on the other hand, seemed confident in their chances. He smiled back at William.


    "Relax, Brand. We have a plan. It involves some bombs and those underground passages you uncovered for us."


    "I hope so¡­"


    *


    They returned to the camp after observing the fortress for a while. The captain then explained his plan in detail to William¡ªand it was actually a solid strategy.


    The bombs were crafted by alchemists. Not only could they explode with great force, but they would also spread fire through the entire fortress.


    It was a powerful weapon, no doubt¡ªbut using it wouldn''t be easy. The captain couldn''t simply storm the fortress and throw the bombs around. That approach would never work, especially since the enemy had mages prepared to defend against such attacks.


    Instead, they planned to use the underground passages William had discovered. The idea was to sneak into the fortress during the night and plant the bombs in key locations¡ªlots of them.


    And who would be getting into the fortress to do that? Well, it was William.


    The mission fell to him. Apparently, since he was the weakest in combat, the captain decided he was the perfect person for the job. S~ea??h the n?velFire.net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    "Look, Brand, we really need you to do this. If you succeed, the fortress is ours," the captain said. "I know you''ll succeed."


    William didn''t like it. He''d be going inside the fortress alone, carrying bombs, hoping the plan would work. It felt wrong.


    "Are they trying to put me in a bad spot or something?" he thought.


    The captain didn''t even assign any soldiers to go with him. According to him, bringing others along would only increase the risk of being heard, and with their limited numbers, they needed every soldier ready for the main assault.


    And the plan itself wasn''t what William had expected. He thought his job would be to enter through the underground passage, place the bombs, and leave. But that wasn''t it.


    What the captain wanted was for William to also create a distraction at the front gate.


    "First, you''ll enter alone through the passage, place the bombs, and return. Then, we''ll go through the passage. While we''re moving in, you''ll draw their attention at the front gate," the captain explained. "We''ll retrieve the bombs you placed and use them from the inside. That''s the plan."


    William frowned. "So why do I have to go inside alone? Can''t I just draw their attention at the main gate, and then you go in with the bombs?"


    The captain shook his head. "No, that won''t work. We need someone to go in first and make sure the area''s clear. I can''t send all the soldiers in blind."


    William was basically bait.


    "Wonderful."


    He wanted to refuse, but he didn''t really have a choice. Still, he wasn''t planning to risk his life blindly for this.


    "If things don''t work out, I''ll just leave or kill everyone. Screw this mission¡ªand screw this jailer identity too," he thought.

 Chapter 228 - 228: Familiar Face

    They spent the night in camp and only acted the following day, in the evening. Sear?h the N?velFire(.)net website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    The first part of the plan was William''s. Deep down, he didn''t want to do it. It was risky, and there were no direct benefits for him. What would it even change if they succeeded in taking over the fortress? Why was he working for these people at all?


    The only reason was the roleplay aspect of that dungeon floor¡ªbut even then, he wasn''t sure if he should just follow the script or try to act differently. Could he achieve different results by doing so?


    Anyway, when night fell, William grabbed a sack filled with bombs¡ªbasically flasks packed with explosive material. The alchemists had crafted them.


    Then, he made his way to the fortress''s underground tunnels. The entrance was well-hidden by thick vegetation, so unless someone actively chopped through the greenery, it would be nearly impossible to find.


    The prisoner had known about the tunnel because he used to clean it from time to time. The entrance, after all, was like a sewer¡­


    William frowned the moment they cleared the vegetation and he saw the disgusting liquid flowing through it. He felt like punching the captain in the face for making him go into that literal hellhole.


    "I have to walk through this shit just for some dumb mission? Whatever," he muttered as he approached the opening and stepped inside.


    He was alone. The captain wanted him to go first¡ªbasically as bait¡ªto check if the sewers were safe. There could be traps down there, or maybe even guards, considering it was a direct route into the fortress.


    But apparently, no one wanted to be down in that cesspit. William saw no one, and not a single trap.


    "They don''t even want to come down here to place traps. That''s how bad this place is," he thought.


    He tried to avoid the thick, disgusting black liquid as he walked, but it was almost impossible. And there was one thing he absolutely couldn''t avoid: the smell.


    The stench reminded him of the worst public bathroom he''d ever used¡ªonly ten times worse. It was like a concentrated essence of every dump the fortress''s mages had ever taken.


    The only thing that brought comfort to William''s heart was know that all the other soldiers would have to go through the same shit hole, especially the captain.


    *


    Eventually, William found the exit. It was a stone staircase leading upward, blocked by an iron gate. Thankfully, it wasn''t hard to get through. All he had to do was grip it and move it aside¡ªit wasn''t even locked.


    Basically, once he went upstairs, he''d be right in the middle of the fortress. Surrounded by mages. Many of them would be sleeping, which made things slightly better¡ªbut not by much.


    He scanned the area and eventually found a safe spot to stash the bombs. It was tucked behind a cluster of stone pillars, well out of sight. He was confident no one would think to look there.


    After that, he made his way back through the foul tunnels and returned to camp, where he reported everything to the captain and the soldiers.


    "There''s just shit in there. No traps, no guards," William said, brushing off the smell as best he could. "I left the bombs behind some stone pillars near the staircase. You won''t miss it."


    The captain didn''t look too impressed at first. He stayed quiet for a few seconds, then finally cracked a smile. "That''s wonderful. Soldiers, let''s move! Brand, you''ll have to get their attention at the front gate."


    William nodded without a word. He wandered around the camp until he found another sack filled with explosive flasks. Then, he headed out toward the front gate of the fortress.


    He waited until all the soldiers had gone through the sewer tunnel. The captain had asked him to wait twenty minutes so they could reach the staircase and get everything in position before he caused a scene.


    So William did just that. He sat behind a tree, looking up at the fortress from a distance. It really was a beautiful sight, nestled on top of the mountain like that.


    "The view from up there must be amazing," he thought.


    William stared at the fortress for a while, and with his keen senses, he could see the guards patrolling the walls, standing at the top of the watch towers and¡­


    "Rena?"


    He couldn''t believe it. William blinked a few times, rubbing his eyes just to be sure he was not hallucinating. It was Rena. No doubt of that.


    She was inside the fortress, acting as one of the guards in the watch towers. That was not a good thing.


    At that moment, there were 100 soldiers invading that fortress, and they would try to kill everyone inside. William didn''t care about the rest of the people there¡ªhe was not even certain they were actually real and not made-up people of the dungeon, like the monsters that respawned¡ªbut Rena? He didn''t want her to perish.


    She was a nice person.


    William''s mind was working at full speed, trying to think of a solution to that. He decided to proceed with the plan.


    The plan was for him to draw their attention in the front gate, and Rena was standing in one of the watch towers near the gate! So, she would see him.


    "I first need her to see that I am here, and then I''ll try to rescue her from the fortress," he thought.


    William moved, carrying the sack with the explosives. The guards saw him approaching the front gate before he got close enough to use the explosives.


    But when he was close enough, well, William attacked. He tossed the flasks toward the gate and the guards near it, as well as the walls of the fortress.


    The explosions were loud and powerful! William was not expecting that much power from those tiny flasks.


    "Attack! We are under attack!" the guards yelled.


    They used a horn to make a noise to wake up everyone. Soon, the front gate was packed with mages that were looking at William with killing intent.


    William was still far from the range of their attacks, and he also had the vegetation as his cover.


    The guards from the fortress didn''t move. They knew that their advantage was to stay in the fortress.


    "He must be trying to draw us out," one of the guards in the fortress said, "there''s no way we are going out there."


    They were certain that the forest close to where William was was packed with others, waiting for them to leave the fortress. For that reason, none of them left.


    As for Rena, she saw William there, and she couldn''t believe it! But she couldn''t just leave.


    Then, it happened. The captain and the soldiers that went through the sewers emerged, and attacked the unprepared soldiers of the fortress from behind.

 Chapter 229 - 229: Wanted

    The mages in the fortress were surprised with the attack. Never were they expecting someone to attack them from inside!


    At first, they firmly believed that William was just trying to lure them out of the fortress. But the surprise attack? They never saw it coming.


    William had to move. He could see the sparks of the spells that were being thrown inside the fortress.


    "Retaliate!" one of the mages said. "Attack them with everything we have!"


    The fight really broke out. William placed the explosive sack to the side and moved at a rapid pace toward the fortress.


    It was the perfect timing because they were all concerned with the soldiers who came through the sewers. Only a few mages were watching the front gate, afraid that more soldiers would come from there, but when they saw there was no one, they relaxed.


    As for William, he ran toward the fortress'' walls and climbed it. With his current physique power, it was really easy to do it. There was no barrier as well, so that made it even easier.


    Rena was still on the watch tower. She decided to stay there and throw a few long-range spells. If she left the watch tower to go downstairs where everyone was fighting, then the chance of her getting hit and dying was really high.


    William not only climbed the fortress walls but he also climbed the watch tower.


    When he jumped on top of the watch tower, Rena was surprised. "Damn, it''s you," she said. "I was afraid they had reached me somehow."


    William didn''t want to lose time. "Come with me. We have to move."


    But as they were about to move, a few soldiers came through the watch tower stairs.


    They were soldiers from the group that was with William. When they saw him there, they were shocked.


    "Jailer Brand? How are you here?" one of them said.


    For them, William was supposed to be outside causing a commotion at the front gate, and not inside the fortress.


    Despite having all of those questions in their minds, the soldiers focused on what they should do, and that was to eliminate Rena.


    "We will talk about it later," one of them said. "Let''s kill her and go downstairs."


    William couldn''t let them do that. The soldiers moved toward Rena with their magical swords in hand. William did the same toward them, but he was faster.


    With Asura in his hands, William dashed through the soldiers like a skilled dancer, and his sword cut the throat of all soldiers in a matter of seconds.


    They weren''t that strong, but the real reason for it to be so easy was the fact that they were not expecting William to do that!


    In the end, four soldiers laid dead on the ground. Rena was not surprised by William''s display of skill. She already knew he was someone powerful.


    "So you are a jailer? I am a guard in this fortress! What are you doing here anyway?" she asked him.


    "No time to explain," William said. "Let''s leave this place."


    Rena nodded.


    Between the two, William was the one with the strongest body, so he would be the one going down the fortress the same way he climbed it.


    Just like during that time to climb the tree, William had Rena in his arms as he jumped down the fortress walls. He didn''t want to stay there to find out why they were taking over the fortress.


    "What do we do now?" she asked him, concern clear in her voice.


    She was also role-playing that character, and she believed that completing her goals was the right thing to do in that scenario. William was also like that at first, but he was not in the mood to keep playing as a weak jailer. S§×arch* The Novel?ire(.)ne*t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    He sighed. "Honestly, I don''t know, but we are certainly going to become wanted people. You and I are fleeing from the battle from different sides."


    That was inevitable. They would have to run away and keep their identities hidden. Or find the portal to the next floor, which was really hard to find, apparently.


    Anyway, William and Rena left that fortress, not looking back at all. Both of them felt bad for the lives of the soldiers who would perish in that fight, but what kept them sane was the fact they might not even be real people.


    Could they even respawn? William didn''t see a human respawning at that point, but things could change in the future.


    What they wanted to know now was where would they go.


    "We cannot go to the kingdom I come from, and you cannot go to the kingdom you come from, so where do we even go?" he asked Rena.


    He didn''t know much information about the other kingdoms that might be near them. Gladly, Rena did!


    "We have a prisoner from another kingdom in the fortress," she said. "He''s from another kingdom not that far from here. I think we can reach it in like, 3 days if we go really fast or if you tame a beast like you did last time."


    "A prisoner?"


    "Yes. The fortress is also a type of prison apparently. Some of the most dangerous people in the region are there."


    That was a pretty good information to have. William started to ponder that perhaps they were trying to take over the fortress just to get a prisoner from there. Who knows.


    But he was not staying there to find out. He and Rena left the area, moving far away from the fortress.


    "It will take a while until people from this kingdom know that I am a fugitive, so we might have enough time to leave," Rena said.


    The news didn''t travel that fast in that world. They didn''t have Internet or something like that. So, it would take at least a few days until a big portion of the kingdom knew that she was a fugitive, and that was more than enough time for them!


    William wanted to tame a beast to make their journey fast, but he didn''t see any. It was another thing that puzzled him. Where were the beasts in that dungeon floor?


    Usually, the dungeon floors were packed with beasts, but that one was different for some reason.


    Still, according to what he overheard from the soldiers, there were beasts, only in a small percentage. So, he still had the chance of finding one!


    *


    They kept running away for 2 days straight. The kingdom that Rena talked about was slightly farther than they expected it.


    She was hoping that they managed to get a horse or tame a beast to go faster, but they didn''t find any beast!


    As for the horse, well, the news traveled faster than they expected it¡­ Portraits of Rena''s face were spread across the kingdom after just one day she fled the fight.


    "How did they do this so fast?" Rena wondered.


    William could only think of one thing. "They might have a mage capable of teletransporting, or a device to do it. That should explain the fast time."


    Due to how difficult it was to teletransport, William didn''t even think of that before, but now it seemed that was the case.


    That turned their lives into a living hell. They couldn''t enter in the cities without everyone recognizing Rena!


    They couldn''t go to the kingdom where William came from because now he would certainly be a wanted man there as well!


    The only thing left for them was to try to be as stealth as possible and avoid entering in the big cities. That made the journey much more slower to them.


    Not only that, but they faced another problem, and that was the travelers on the road. Even if they avoided all the cities and villages, they would still find people in the road that would recognize them!


    "We really need to get a flying beast tamed," Rena said, "maybe we should focus in just finding it without caring about our journey?"


    William agreed with her. It would make things much easier. So, they stopped moving toward the kingdom, and rather moved to the thick forests, looking for beasts to tame.


    What they wanted was a flying beast, and for that, it was better to look for them near the mountains. The good part was that the kingdom they were in had a lot of mountains!


    They climbed the mountains. It was cold on top of them, but nothing that they couldn''t endure.


    William and Rena looked inside each cave they found on those mountains, and they didn''t see a single flying beast.


    It was starting to worry them. Could that dungeon floor have that few beasts? Never did William think that he wanted a dungeon floor packed with beasts again.


    "When we need them, they don''t show up, how bad¡­" he muttered.


    But eventually, in one of the caves they were exploring, they found a flying beast. Or rather, a big chance of having one there.


    The first sign was the bones in the cave''s entrance. It was clear that something lived in there.


    They really hoped it was a flying one that could make their journey much easier.


    Pushing the fear away, they moved into the depths of the cave.

 Chapter 230 - 230: So Fast?

    They went down into the depths of the cave, keeping their steps slow and quiet. Rena was terrified to be there.


    What would they find? Until that moment, they hadn''t come across a single beast on that floor of the dungeon, so they were both anxious to find out what was waiting for them at the end of the cave.


    Along the way, they could see piles of bones scattered around. William noticed that none of those bones belonged to people. They were beast bones.


    That was strange to him. How could there be so many beast bones there when they hadn''t encountered a single one so far?


    In the end, they reached the back of the cave¡­ and found nothing. It was completely empty. The only thing there were more bones.


    "And now?" Rena said, her tone clearly frustrated. "We came all the way here for nothing."


    William had no idea. "But if there are bones here, then something lives or used to live here. And more importantly, it means we might actually find beasts in this region. Maybe we should leave and keep exploring around here."


    That was the only idea going through William''s mind. Rena agreed.


    They left the cave but decided to stay nearby. The idea was to wait and see if some creature would return to the cave.


    If it was a flying creature, then maybe it had gone out hunting and would come back later. That made sense, but William also noticed there were no tracks inside the cave.


    Only bones. Which meant the creatures had been dead for a while. There were no signs indicating they had been killed there recently. sea??h th§× Nov§×l?ire.n(e)t website on Google to access chapters of novels early and in the highest quality.


    Still, it wouldn''t hurt to wait a bit just to be sure. He''d feel better knowing there was nothing than risking missing out on a good chance to get a flying beast.


    Hours passed. It got dark where they were, and even then, no flying beast appeared.


    That was a little sad. William tried to stay positive the best he could.


    "At least we have a place to sleep and won''t have to spend the night out in this cold," he said.


    Rena sighed, then smiled. "You''re right. Damn, our situation is really not easy. I''m starting to feel jealous of the others who went back to the hub or left the dungeon."


    She was referring to the people who had been in that camp on the previous dungeon floor.


    "Same here. But at least we''re making some progress in the dungeon. I just want to reach the next hub before leaving this place," William replied.


    That was his plan ¡ª to push through five more dungeon floors until he reached the next resting hub, and only then leave the dungeon. He still had things to take care of outside, after all.


    But to make that happen, there were still plenty of floors left to complete. So he couldn''t just sit around doing nothing. Time was precious.


    They worked together to build a fire inside the cave. Even though it shielded them from the cold wind and the rain outside, it was still pretty chilly inside. A fire was more than necessary.


    In the end, making a simple fire together wasn''t difficult at all. The only bad part was having a fire but nothing to cook on it. And in that moment, neither of them had the energy to go out and look for something.


    So, in the end, the two of them just lay down and rested there, watching the raindrops fall outside.


    It was still dark when William woke up. Thanks to his heightened senses, he could hear things that Rena couldn''t. And right then, in the middle of the night, he heard voices.


    That was not good at all. He woke Rena and pulled her toward a darker corner of the cave. Before that, he quickly put out the fire.


    Luckily, there was a big rock that served as a decent hiding spot for both of them. Not perfect, but better than nothing.


    And then they were hit with a huge surprise when they saw who was talking near the entrance of the cave.


    "Soldiers!" William thought.


    He recognized the armor they were wearing. It was the same one Rena used back when she was stationed at the fortress ¡ª the standard armor of that kingdom''s soldiers.


    How were they already here? It had only been a few days since William and Rena escaped the battle at the fortress, and yet somehow they had already managed to find them. That was insanely fast.


    The soldiers stepped into the cave and spotted the fire remains.


    "Someone stayed here," one of the soldiers said, crouching down. "I think they left during the night."


    "You think they knew we were tracking them? Unlikely, but you never know," another soldier replied.


    William hadn''t even realized they were being followed. That could only mean one thing: either someone really skilled was leading the investigation¡­ or they had a way to track them from a distance.


    "There''s no way they''ve been following us up close without me noticing," William thought. "And considering how small their group is, this must be a special team assigned to track fugitives."


    That was bad news. A team like that would be way more skilled than normal soldiers ¡ª and probably strong too, since fugitives were usually powerful as well.


    William stayed completely still behind the rock, praying they wouldn''t be found by that group. But deep down, he knew it was only a matter of time. There was no real way to hide from them in that place.


    "I don''t think they realized we were tracking them," one of the soldiers said. "Must''ve been a coincidence they didn''t stay here. I could''ve sworn they would spend the night in this cave."


    With that sentence alone, William already knew things were starting to take a turn for the worse. The soldiers would soon begin to wonder if William and Rena had really left the cave. And once they started looking around¡­ well, they''d find them.


    William was ready to fight at any moment. That would be the only way out of that situation.


    Or maybe not.


    Luck really was on their side this time.


    Another soldier came running from outside the cave. He had stayed behind to keep watch at the entrance.


    "Guys," he shouted, "there''s a flying beast coming! I''m not in the mood to fight that thing, so let''s get out of here."


    The soldiers didn''t exactly seem scared of the flying beast. They were strong ¡ª strong enough to win in a fight, no doubt. But was it worth it?


    Fighting a beast would waste time and might get someone seriously injured¡­ or worse, killed. And their main priority right now was tracking William and Rena.


    So, the soldiers chose to leave the cave.


    But what about William and Rena?


    They couldn''t just leave right then. And by the time it was finally safe to move, the magical beast had already entered the cave.


    And of course, the magical beast found the two of them hiding behind that rock. They moved away from behind the rock. William already had Asura in his hands. It was time for a fight.